Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
19_0123_Renovation of Olin Hall for CBE-Phase 1_ConformedProject Manual_Vol 2_IFC
19_0123_Renovation of Olin Hall for CBE-Phase 1_ConformedProject Manual_Vol 1_IFC.pdf CORNELL UNIVERSITY Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PROJECT MANUAL Volume 1 CONFORMED SET 23 January 2019 Owner Cornell University (CU) Ithaca, NY 14850 Architect Payette Associates Architects, P.C. (PAI) 290 Congress Street, Fifth Floor,Boston, MA 02210-1005 MEP/FP Engineer R. G. Vanderweil Engineers, LLP (RGV) 274 Summer Street, Boston, MA 02210 Structural Engineer Simpson Gumpertz & Heger (SGH) 41 Seyon Street, Building #1, Suite 500, Waltham, MA 02453 Civil Engineer T. G. Miller, P.C. (TGM) 203 N. Aurora Street, Ithaca, NY 14850 Code Consultant Hastings Consulting Inc. (HCI) 142 Hanlon Road, Holliston, MA 01746 Lighting Consultant Available Light (AL) 10 Derby Square #3, Salem MA 01970 Abatement Specialist Delta 860 Hooper Road, Endwell, NY 13760 Cost Consultant Dharam 745 Atlantic Ave., Floor 8, Boston, MA 02111 Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110 - 1 ADDENDUM NO. 02 07 January 2019 DOCUMENT 000110 – TABLE OF CONTENTS Section number Section title Current issue date Author VOLUME 1 DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 000001 PROJECT TITLE PAGE 30NOV18 PAI 000110 TABLE OF CONTENTS 07JAN19 18DEC18 PAI 003126 EXISTING HAZARDOUS MATERIAL INFORMATION 19JUL18 Delta 007200 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT Issued separately DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 010000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 30NOV18 CU 013300A SAMPLE DIGITAL DATA LETTER AGREEMENT 30NOV18 PAI 014533A STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS 30NOV18 SGH 019113 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 30NOV18 HEA DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS 024119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 30NOV18 PAI 028213 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 30NOV18 Delta DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 30NOV18 SGH DIVISION 05 – METALS 051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 30NOV18 SGH 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS 30NOV18 PAI 055119 METAL GRATING STAIRS 30NOV18 PAI 055313 BAR GRATINGS 30NOV18 PAI Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110 - 2 ADDENDUM NO. 02 07 January 2019 Section number Section title Current issue date Author DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 061053 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 30NOV18 PAI 064023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 30NOV18 PAI DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 071326 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 30NOV18 PAI 072119 FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION 30NOV18 PAI 078100 APPLIED FIREPROOFING 30NOV18 PAI 078413 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 30NOV18 PAI 078443 JOINT FIRESTOPPING 30NOV18 PAI 079200 JOINT SEALANTS 30NOV18 PAI 079219 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS 30NOV18 PAI DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS 080671 DOOR HARDWARE SETS 07JAN19 18DEC18 AA 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 30NOV18 PAI 081216 ALUMINUM FRAMES 30NOV18 PAI 081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 30NOV18 PAI 083113 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 30NOV18 PAI 084229.23 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 18DEC18 PAI 084216 ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 18DEC18 PAI 087100 DOOR HARDWARE 30NOV18 AA 088000 GLAZING 07JAN19 18DEC18 PAI 088813 FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING 18DEC18 PAI 089119 FIXED LOUVERS 30NOV18 PAI DIVISION 09 – FINISHES 092116.23 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 30NOV18 PAI 092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 30NOV18 PAI 092900 GYPSUM BOARD 30NOV18 PAI 093013 CERAMIC TILING 07JAN19 30NOV18 PAI 095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 30NOV18 PAI Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110 - 3 ADDENDUM NO. 02 07 January 2019 Section number Section title Current issue date Author 095427 WOOD GRILLE CEILINGS 30NOV18 PAI 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 30NOV18 PAI 096519 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 30NOV18 PAI 096723 RESINOUS FLOORING 30NOV18 PAI 096813 TILE CARPETING 30NOV18 PAI 098433 SOUND-ABSORBING WALL UNITS 30NOV18 PAI 098436 SOUND-ABSORBING CEILING UNITS 30NOV18 PAI 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING 30NOV18 PAI 099600 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 30NOV18 PAI DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 101100 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 30NOV18 PAI 102600 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 30NOV18 PAI 102800 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 30NOV18 PAI 104413 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 30NOV18 PAI 104416 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 30NOV18 PAI DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT 115300 LABORATORY EQUIPMENT 30NOV18 PAI 115313 LABORATORY FUME HOODS 30NOV18 PAI DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS 122213.13 LIGHT-BLOCKING DRAPERIES 30NOV18 PAI 123553 LABORATORY CASEWORK 30NOV18 PAI VOLUME 2 DIVISION 20 – BUILDING SERVICES 200000 COMMON MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 30NOV18 RGV DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION 210500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 30NOV18 RGV 210553 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 30NOV18 RGV Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110 - 4 ADDENDUM NO. 02 07 January 2019 Section number Section title Current issue date Author 210800 COMMISSIONING OF FIRE SUPPRESSION 30NOV18 RGV 211300 WATER-BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 30NOV18 RGV 211300A HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS 30NOV18 RGV DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 220500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 30NOV18 RGV 220513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 30NOV18 RGV 220514 COMMON CONTROL PANEL REQUIREMENTS 30NOV18 RGV 220516 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 30NOV18 RGV 220517 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 30NOV18 RGV 220518 ESCUTCHEIONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 30NOV18 RGV 220519 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 30NOV18 RGV 220529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 30NOV18 RGV 220533 HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING 30NOV18 RGV 220548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING 30NOV18 RGV 220553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 30NOV18 RGV 220719 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 30NOV18 RGV 220800 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING 30NOV18 HEA 221110 COMMON PLUMBING PIPING 30NOV18 RGV 221119 WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 30NOV18 RGV 221123 WATER PUMPS 30NOV18 RGV 221319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 30NOV18 RGV 221329 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS 07JAN19 30NOV18 RGV 223000 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS 30NOV18 RGV 224200 COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES 30NOV18 RGV 224500 EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES 30NOV18 RGV 225000 GAS MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEM 30NOV18 RGV 226113 PIPING FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 30NOV18 RGV 226115 LABORATORY GAS MANIFOLDS 30NOV18 RGV 226119 COMPRESSED-AIR EQUPMENT FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 30NOV18 RGV 226219 VACUUM EQUIPMENT FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 30NOV18 RGV 226500 NITROGEN GENERATION SYSTEM 30NOV18 RGV 226701 PURIFIED WATER PIPING – THERMOPLASTICS 30NOV18 RGV Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110 - 5 ADDENDUM NO. 02 07 January 2019 Section number Section title Current issue date Author 226722 ASTM TYPE II WATER SYSTEMS FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 07JAN19 30NOV18 RGV DIVISION 23 – HVAC 230500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 30NOV18 RGV 230513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 30NOV18 RGV 230519 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAAC PIPING 30NOV18 RGV 230523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 30NOV18 RGV 230529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 30NOV18 RGV 230548 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC 30NOV18 RGV 230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING, DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT 30NOV18 RGV 230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 30NOV18 RGV 230700 HVAC INSULATION 30NOV18 RGV 230800 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 30NOV18 HEA 230900 INISTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 30NOV18 RGV 232113 HYDRONIC PIPING 30NOV18 RGV 232116 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES 30NOV18 RGV 232123 HYDRONIC PUMPS 30NOV18 RGV 232213 STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING 30NOV18 RGV 232216 STEAM AND CONDENSATE SPECIALTIES 30NOV18 RGV 232500 HVAC WATER TREATMENT 30NOV18 RGV 233113 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM - METAL DUCTS 30NOV18 RGV 233416 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 30NOV18 RGV 233600 AIR TERMINAL UNITS 30NOV18 RGV 234100 PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION 30NOV18 RGV 235100 HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC 30NOV18 RGV 237314 CUSTOM CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 30NOV18 RGV 238216 AIR COILS 30NOV18 RGV 238219 FAN COIL UNITS 30NOV18 RGV DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 260500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 30NOV18 RGV 260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 30NOV18 RGV 260519.13 UNDERCARPET ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 30NOV18 RGV Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110 - 6 ADDENDUM NO. 02 07 January 2019 Section number Section title Current issue date Author 260523 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 30NOV18 RGV 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 30NOV18 RGV 260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 30NOV18 RGV 260533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 30NOV18 RGV 260548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 30NOV18 RGV 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 30NOV18 RGV 260573 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM STUDIES 30NOV18 RGV 260800 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL 30NOV18 HEA 260923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 30NOV18 RGV 260943 NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS 30NOV18 RGV 262200 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 30NOV18 RGV 262416 PANELBOARDS 30NOV18 RGV 262726 WIRING DEVICES 30NOV18 RGV 262813 FUSES 30NOV18 RGV 262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 30NOV18 RGV 262923 VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 30NOV18 RGV 265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING 30NOV18 RGV 265100A LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE 30NOV18 AL 265100B LIGHTING CONTROLS MATRIX 30NOV18 AL 265100C LIGHTING FIXTURE CUT SHEETS 30NOV18 AL DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS 271000 STRUCTURED CABLING 30NOV18 RGV DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28100 ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEMS 30NOV18 RGV 281500 ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 30NOV18 AA 283105 FIRE ALARM CABLES AND PATHWAYS 30NOV18 RGV 283111 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYTEM 30NOV18 RGV DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK 310000 EARTHWORK 30NOV18 TGM Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110 - 7 ADDENDUM NO. 02 07 January 2019 Section number Section title Current issue date Author DIVISION 32 – SITE IMPROVEMENTS 329100 PLANTING SOIL 30NOV18 TGM DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES 334000 STORM SEWERAGE 30NOV18 TGM LEGEND Symbol Author Role CU Cornell University OWNER AA Assa Abloy HARDWARE CONSULTANT AL Available Light LIGHTING CONSULTANT Delta Delta HAZARDOUS MATERIALS CONSULTANT Dharam Dharam COST CONSULTANT HCI Hastings Consulting, Inc. CODE CONSULTANT HEA Horizon Engineering Associates, LLP OWNER’S MEP COMMISSIONING PROVIDER PAI Payette Associates Architects. P.C. ARCHITECT RGV R. G. Vanderweil MEP/FP ENGINEERING SGH Simpson, Gumpertz & Heger STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING TGM T. G. Miller, P. C. CIVIL ENGINEERING END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 EXISTING HAZARDOUS MATERIAL INFORMATION 003126 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 DOCUMENT 003126 - EXISTING HAZARDOUS MATERIAL INFORMATION 1.1 EXISTING HAZARDOUS MATERIAL INFORMATION A. This Document with its referenced attachments is part of the Procurement and Contracting Requirements for Project. They provide Owner's information for Bidders' convenience and are intended to supplement rather than serve in lieu of Bidders' own investigations. They are made available for Bidders' convenience and information, but are not a warranty of existing conditions. This Document and its attachments are not part of the Contract Documents. B. An existing asbestos report for Project, prepared by Delta Engineers, Architects, & Land Surveyors, for field work performed between 27 June and 29 June 2018 (83 pages), is available for viewing as appended to this Document. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 024119 "Selective Structure Demolition" for notification requirements if materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered. 2. Section 028213 “Asbestos Abatement” for abatement of asbestos-containing materials. END OF DOCUMENT 003126 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SAMPLE DIGITAL DATA LETTER AGREEMENT 13300 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 AGREEMENT made as of the ___ day of ___ in the year ____ (“Agreement”). BETWEEN the Party transmitting Digital Data ("Architect"): Payette Associates Inc. 290 Congress St. Fifth Floor Boston, MA 02210-1005 and the Party receiving the Digital Data ("Recipient"): « » « » « » « » for the following Project (“Project”): « » TABLE OF ARTICLES A. GENERAL PROVISIONS B. TRANSMISSION AND USE OF DIGITAL DATA C. DIGITAL DATA PROTOCOLS A. GENERAL PROVISIONS 1. The accompanying data files, or data files to be provided hereafter, consist of data, information, communications, drawings, texts, models (including, but not limited to, Building Information Models or “BIM”), or a combination of any of them, created, used, or stored for the Project in digital form, hereinafter collectively identified as “Digital Data.” 2. This Agreement supplements the Owner-Architect Agreement between [Owner] and Payette Associates Inc., dated [Month Day, Year], and is effective for the duration of the Digital Data’s usage or possession by any Recipient. 3. In transmitting these documents to Recipient, Architect expressly acknowledges and reaffirms the terms and conditions related to the transfer and use of documents (including electronic files) that are found in [Article of OA Agreement related to Data] of the Owner-Architect Agreement. Where a provision in this Agreement conflicts with a provision in the Owner-Architect Agreement to which this Agreement is a supplement, the provision specifically relating to Digital Data in this Agreement shall prevail. 4. Nothing contained in this Agreement, or the Digital Data created, transmitted, or used pursuant to, or in accordance with, this Agreement shall create a contractual relationship with, or rights, entitlements, or claims in favor of, any third party against either Recipient or Architect. 5. Any individual or entity to whom any portion of the Digital Data is furnished, either in whole or in part, shall execute the last page of this Agreement as an Additional Recipient, shall be deemed a Recipient under the terms of this Agreement and shall be obligated to fulfill those duties obligations and commitments of a Recipient hereunder. Each Recipient that disseminates any portion of the Digital Data shall be responsible to ensure that any individual or entity to whom such information is disseminated executes this Agreement as an Additional Recipient. B. TRANSMISSION AND USE OF DIGITAL DATA 1. Recipient acknowledges and agrees that the Digital Data prepared or furnished by Architect, Architect’s consultants, or others, under the terms of this Agreement: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SAMPLE DIGITAL DATA LETTER AGREEMENT 13300 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 a) is being provided as a courtesy to Recipient for reference purposes only and is an incomplete work that does not constitute a final design end product, and all Recipients agree to defend, release, and hold harmless Architect and Architect’s consultants from and against any claims, liabilities, losses, damages, and costs, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees, to the extent arising from, relating to, or in connection with the alleged inadequacy or incompleteness of the Digital Data, or the utilization of the Digital Data by Recipients or any individuals or entities to whom the Digital Data is provided, distributed, or otherwise shared; b) is being furnished or prepared by Architect and/or Architect’s consultants or others without any representations or guarantees that such Digital Data will be suitable for Recipient’s intended use; c) has been prepared, formatted, or transmitted with software purchased from and developed by third parties (not party to this Agreement), and that the computer settings associated with such software, which can vary from computer to computer, may affect the appearance and output on Recipient’s and other users’ computers; and d) may not be free of computer viruses, despite the efforts to detect, control or remove same. 2. Recipient agrees to keep the Digital Data provided hereunder strictly confidential and not to disclose it to any other person without the express written permission of Architect and, where applicable, Architect’s consultants, except when disclosing such Digital Data to (1) Recipient’s employees, (2) those who need to know its content in order to perform services or construction solely and exclusively for the Project, or (3) Recipient’s consultants and contractors whose contracts shall include similar restrictions on the use of the Digital Data. 3. Recipient shall be permitted to provide a copy of the Digital Data furnished by Architect and Architect’s consultants, under the terms of this Agreement, to the Contractor and/or Construction Manager for use with respect to the Project, provided Recipient enters into a written agreement with the Contractor and/or Construction Manager that contains provisions that are consistent with the provisions of this Agreement. 4. Those to whom the Digital Data is provided shall agree to limit their use of the Digital Data as provided below, and as indicated in Section C: a) Recipient: shall be entitled to use the Digital Data in accordance with the terms of this Agreement. b) Individuals or firms performing professional services in connection with this Project, as consultants or subconsultants to Recipient: solely for the preparation of design documentation and calculations related to the Project, including the production of "hard copy" reproductions of the Digital Data in the form of prints or plots for the limited purposes related to this Project, overlaying the documents with information related to furnishings and equipment, overlaying the documents with "soft data" for facilities management such as personnel assignments, and using these documents for other purposes expressly defined in a separate, written agreement, signed by Recipient and any Additional Recipient of the Digital Data. c) Individuals or firms performing services in connection with the Project, as contractors or subcontractors: solely for activities necessary for the construction of the Project in accordance with the requirements of any applicable Contract Documents, including the production of "hard copy" reproductions of the Digital Data in the form of prints or plots for the limited purposes related to this Project, overlaying the documents with information related to furnishings and equipment, and overlaying the documents with "soft data" for facilities management such as personnel assignments. 5. Architect’s authorization for any Recipient’s use of Digital Data shall terminate if Recipient fails to comply with the terms of this Agreement or the Recipient has completed its obligations related to the Project. 6. This Digital Data has been prepared by Architect or Architect’s consultants for this specific Project and are for use solely with respect to this Project. Authorization of the use of the Digital Data is limited exclusively to the terms set forth within this Agreement and the Owner-Architect Agreement. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SAMPLE DIGITAL DATA LETTER AGREEMENT 13300 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 7. Architect and Architect’s consultants and all Recipients hereby mutually waive all direct, indirect, special, incidental, contingent, or consequential damages resulting from any defect in the electronic media or any information in the Digital Data provided in accordance with, or pursuant to, this Agreement, including damages from loss of data, downtime, goodwill, damage to or replacement of equipment or property, costs of recovering, reprogramming or reproducing any programs or data or information in conjunction with the issuance or use of the Digital Data. 8. Recipient is responsible for any non-compliance with this Agreement by any member of its organization, including its employees, and by Additional Recipient. If Recipient or Additional Recipient, and the employees thereof, breaches or threatens to breach the obligations herein, Architect and Architect’s consultants will have the right, in addition to such other remedies which may be available to it, to injunctive relief enjoining such acts or attempts, it being agreed that damages are not adequate remedy. 9. Under no circumstances shall delivery of Digital Data for use by Recipients be deemed a sale by Architect and Architect’s consultants, and neither Architect nor Architect’s consultants make any warranties, either express or implied, of merchantability or of fitness for any particular purpose. 10. The Digital Data provided hereunder is not to be used for construction of the Project. Construction is to be undertaken pursuant to Issued-for-Construction, hard-copy drawings, specifications, and other applicable Contract Documents. The Digital Data is being provided to the Recipients as a limited tool for the sole purpose of facilitating their coordination of services and other components of the Project, as they deem appropriate, in the exercise of their sole and exclusive judgment. C. DIGITAL DATA PROTOCOLS 1. The Project Participants shall comply with the Digital Data Formats, Transmission Methods, and Authorized Uses set forth in the Digital Data Protocol Table below when transmitting or using Digital Data on the Project: Digital Data Digital Data Format Transmission Method Authorized Uses Drawings & Specifications .pdf EM, DMS R Building Information Model .rvt, .3dm EM, DMS M CAD files .dwg, .3dm EM, DMS M Images .jpg, .png, .tif EM, DMS R 2. Digital Data Protocol Table Definitions and Notes: a) Digital Data Format: Digital Data Format Definition .rvt Revit 2018 .dwg AutoCad 2018 .3dm Rhinoceros 5 b) Transmission Method: Abbreviation Definition CD Delivered via Compact Disk EM Via e-mail DMS Centralized Electronic Document Management System c) Authorized Uses of Digital Data (each level includes preceding level’s permissions): Abbreviation Definition Level 1: S Store and view Level 2: R Reproduce and distribute Level 3: I Integrate (incorporate additional digital data without modifying data received) Level 4: M Modify as required to fulfill obligations for the Project Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SAMPLE DIGITAL DATA LETTER AGREEMENT 13300 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 AGREED TO BY: Payette Associates Inc. (Signature) (Name and title) Date: Recipient (Signature) (Name and title) Date: Additional Recipient (Signature) (Name and title) Date: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS Page -1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Statement of Special Inspections Project: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 Location: Cornell University, Ithaca, New York Owner: Cornell University Design Professional in Responsible Charge: Pedro J. Sifre, P.E. This Statement of Special Inspections is submitted as a condition for permit issuance in accordance with the Special Inspection and Structural Testing requirements of the 2015 New York State Building Code. It includes a schedule of Special Inspection services applicable to this project as well as the name of the Special Inspection Coordinator and the identity of other approved agencies to be retained for conducting these inspections and tests. This Statement of Special Inspections encompasses the following disciplines: Structural Mechanical/Electrical/Plumbing Architectural Other: The Special Inspection Coordinator shall keep records of all inspections and shall furnish inspection reports to the Building Official and the Registered Design Professional in Responsible Charge. Discovered discrepancies shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Contractor for correction. If such discrepancies are not corrected, the discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Building Official and the Registered Design Professional in Responsible Charge. The Special Inspection program does not relieve the Contractor of his or her responsibilities for quality assurance. Interim reports shall be submitted to the Building Official and the Registered Design Professional in Responsible Charge. A Final Report of Special Inspections documenting completion of all required Special Inspections, testing, and correction of any discrepancies noted in the inspections shall be submitted by the Special Inspection Coordinator prior to issuance of a Certificate of Use and Occupancy. Job site safety and means and methods of construction are solely the responsibility of the Contractor. Interim reports shall be submitted monthly. Prepared by the Structural Engineer of Record: Pedro J. Sifre, P.E. Design Professional’s Seal (type or print name) Signature Date Owner’s Authorization: Building Official’s Acceptance: Signature Date Signature Date Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS Page -2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Schedule of Inspection and Testing Agencies This Schedule of Special Inspections includes the following building systems: Soils and Foundations Spray Fire Resistant Material Cast-in-Place Concrete Mechanical & Electrical System Anchorage Structural Steel Special Inspection Agencies Firm Address, Telephone 1. Special Inspection Coordinator To be determined 2. Inspector To be determined 3. Inspector To be determined 4. Testing Agency To be determined 5. Testing Agency To be determined 6. Testing Agency To be determined Note: The inspectors and testing agencies shall be engaged by the Owner or the Owner’s Agent in accordance with Section 1705.1 of the 2015 New York State Building Code. Any conflict of interest must be disclosed to the Building Official prior to commencing work. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS Page -3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Quality Assurance Plan Quality Assurance for Seismic Resistance Seismic Design Category B Quality Assurance Plan Required (Y/N) N Description of seismic force resisting system and designated seismic system: Reinforced masonry shear walls Braced frames and cantilevered columns Quality Assurance for Wind Resistance Basic Wind Speed (3 second gust) 120mph Wind Exposure Category B Quality Assurance Plan Required (Y/N) N Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS Page -4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Qualifications of Inspectors and Testing Technicians The qualifications of all personnel performing Special Inspection and testing activities shall be per 2015 New York State Building Code Section 1705.1 and are subject to the approval of the Building Official. The credentials of all Inspectors and testing technicians shall be provided as required by the Building Official. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS Page -5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Soils and Foundations – 2015 New York State Building Code, Section 1705.6 – Not applicable. Cast-in-Place Concrete – 2015 New York State Building Code, Section 1705.3 Item Inspection Frequency Scope 1. Formwork Geometry Periodic Inspect formwork for shape, location, dimensions, and finishes of the concrete member being formed and for conformance to the Contract Documents and ACI 301 Section 2 and ACI 318 Sections 6.1, 6.3, and 6.4. 2. Mix Design Continuous Review concrete batch tickets and verify compliance with approved mix design. Verify that water added at the site does not exceed that allowed by the mix design and as indicated on the batch ticket. 3. Material Certification Periodic Periodic Review in-plant all materials, manufacturer’s certifications, and mill reports for conformance to Contract Documents. Maintain records of all material certificates and mill reports of all concrete mix constituent materials and steel reinforcement 4. Reinforcement Installation Periodic Periodic Inspect placement of all reinforcement for compliance with ACI 318 Sections 3.5, 7.3, 7.4, 7.5, 7.6, and 7.7 and ACI 301 Section 3.3. Inspect size, spacing, cover, positioning, and grade of reinforcing steel for compliance with the Contract Documents. Verify that bars are adequately tied and supported on chairs or bolsters. Inspect bar laps and mechanical splices. Verify that reinforcing bars are free of form oil or other deleterious materials. Inspect inserts and accessories. 5. Welding of Reinforcing Periodic Visually inspect all reinforcing steel welds. Verify weldability of reinforcing steel. Inspect preheating of steel when required. Verify that the reinforcing steel is ASTM A706 material. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS Page -6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Item Inspection Frequency Scope 6. Batching Plant At startup “ “ “ “ Review plant quality control procedures for material storage and handling to ensure compliance with ACI 301 Sections 4.1.3, 7.1, and 7.2. Review that plant procedures for establishing mix design strength to ensure compliance with ACI 301 Sections 4.1 and 4.2 and with ACI 318 Sections 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, and 5.8. Inspect plant to ensure compliance of mix constituents with the requirements of ACI 318 Chapter 3 and ACI 301 Sections 4.2 and 7.2. Inspect that mixing and ready-mix equipment and vehicles comply with ACI 318 Sections 5.7 and 5.8 and with ASTM C 94. Maintain records of all ready-mix truck contents and dispatch times. 7. Concrete Placement Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Inspect placement of concrete. Verify that concrete conveyance and depositing avoids segregation or contamination. Verify that concrete is properly consolidated. Prior to allowing ready-mix trucks to deposit concrete, review batchplant ticket to verify concrete mix compliance with project specifications, temperature, batching time, slump and air test, and number of mixing drum revolutions. Reject concrete that has been mixed for more than 90 min. or 300 drum revolutions. Maintain records correlating concrete batching information with location of placement in the finished work. Inspect all concrete placements for compliance with ACI 318 Section 5.9 and 5.10; and ACI 301 Sections 5 and 7.3. Inspect for conformance to all approved hot- and cold-weather concrete placement procedures. 8. Sampling and Testing of Concrete Continuous Continuous Collect and test concrete samples per ACI 318 Section 5.6 (minimum of four cylinders for each 150 cu yd of concrete or 5,000 sq ft of slab or wall area placed), but not fewer than four cylinders for each day’s pour. Measure slump (ASTM C143), temperature (ASTM C1064), weight, (ASTM C138), and air content (ASTM C173) for all concrete sampled for strength. For pumped concrete, measure at point of deposit. 9. Curing and Protection Periodic Inspect all placements for conformance to Contract Documents, ACI 318 Sections 5.11, 5.12, and 5.13 and to approved curing and protection procedures. 10. In Situ Concrete Strength Periodic Verify in situ concrete strength prior to removal of shores and forms from beams and structural slabs in accordance with ACI 318 Section 6.2. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS Page -7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Item Inspection Frequency Scope 11. Laboratory Evaluation of Concrete Strength Continuous Test for conformance to specifications in accordance with ACI 318. As a minimum, perform compression tests on one cylinder at seven days and two cylinders at twenty-eight days. 12. Post-Installed Anchors and Adhesive Dowels Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Verify that existing reinforcing steel is not cut when drilling holes for dowels or anchors. Inspect holes prior to installation of adhesive to verify that holes are free of dust and prepared in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and have the embedment depth indicated on the Contract Documents. Verify that adhesive material is in accordance with the Contract Documents. Verify that the material is stored, mixed, and injected in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Verify that the dowel or anchor materials, lengths, diameters, embedments, and finishes are in accordance with the Contract Documents. Structural Steel – 2015 New York State Building Code Section 1705.2 Item Inspection Frequency Scope 1. Fabricator Certification/ Quality Control Procedures For AISC Certified Fabricator – shop inspections below are not required. At Startup At Startup At Startup Review shop fabrication and quality control procedures and AISC Certification records. Confirm that approved submittals are in the plant and are being used for fabrication. Review welders’ certifications. File welder certifications and any other quality assurance documentation as required by building department. 2. Material Certification Periodic Periodic Periodic Review certified mill test reports and identification markings on wide-flange shapes, high-strength bolts, nuts and welding electrodes for compliance with the Contract Documents. Inspect certificates of weld filler material and shear stud connectors for compliance with the Contract Documents. Inspect surface finish of steel members for conformance with SSPC standards, approved shop drawings, and Contract Documents. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS Page -8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. Bolting Periodic Periodic Continuous Continuous Periodic Inspect shop and field bolting procedures per RCSC Specification and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Verify size and grade of fasteners and storage procedures for compliance with Contract Documents. For pre-tensioned bolts only: Conduct pre-installation verification of fastener assemblies and installation procedures per BCSC specification for high strength bolts. Inspect daily wrench calibration procedures. Field test bolts at discretion of inspector or SER by testing selected bolts to failure with tension calibrator. Inspect installation and tightening of high-strength bolts. Verify that splines have separated from tension control bolts. Verify proper tightening sequence. Bolt installation in slip-critical connections. Bearing type connections: Inspect 50% of joints for quantity and type of bolt, and for proper snugging of plies. 4. Welding Continuous Continuous Continuous Periodic Visual and Ultrasonic testing of all partial- and complete- penetration welds. Visual - multi-pass fillet welds Visual - single-pass fillet welds > 5/16” Visual - single-pass fillet welds ≤ 5/16” 6. Structural Details Periodic Inspect steel frame for compliance with structural drawings, including member sizes, grade of steel, beam camber (at shop, where applicable), member configuration and connection details. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS Page -9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Spray-Applied Fire Resistant Material – 2015 New York State Building Code Edition Section 1705.14 Item Testing Frequency Scope 1. Material Specifications At Startup Review material specifications of fireproofing and comply with requirements specified in addition to those listed below. 2. Laboratory Tested Fire Resistance Design At Startup Review UL fire resistive design for each rated beam, column, or assembly. 3. Schedule of Thickness At Startup Review approved thickness schedule. 4. Surface Preparation Periodic Inspect surface preparation of steel prior to application of fireproofing. 5. Application Periodic Inspect application of fireproofing. 6. Curing and Ambient Condition Periodic Verify ambient air temperature and ventilation is suitable for application and curing of fireproofing. 7. Thickness As Noted As Noted Test thickness of fireproofing (ASTM E605). Perform a set of not less than four thickness measurements for every 1,000 SF of floor and roof assemblies. Test thickness of fireproofing (ASTM E605) on not less than 25% of rated beams and columns. 8. Density Periodic Test the density of fireproofing material (ASTM E605). Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS Page -10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 9. Bond Strength Periodic Test the cohesive/adhesive bond strength of fireproofing ASTM E736). Perform not less than one test for each 10,000 SF or fraction of floor, roof, and wall assemblies in each story. Perform not less than one test for structural framing members for each 10,000 SF or fraction of floor area in each story. 10. Mastic and Intumescent Fire-Resistant Coatings. Periodic Inspect mastic and intumescent fire-resistant coatings applied to structural elements and decks in accordance with AWCI 12-B. Fire-resistant Penetrations and Joints – 2015 New York State Building Code Section 1705.17 Item Testing Frequency Scope 1. Material Specifications At Startup Review material specifications of Fire-resistant penetrations and joints and comply with requirements specified in addition to those listed below. 2. Laboratory Tested Fire Resistance Design At Startup Review UL fire resistive design for each assembly. 3. Installation Continuous Inspect installation in accordance with ASTM E 2174 and ASTM E 2393, for Penetration Firestops and Fire-resistant Joint Systems respectively. Mechanical and Electrical Components – 2015 New York State Building Code Edition Section 1707.12.6 Item Inspection Frequency Scope 1. Electrical Equipment Periodic Inspect anchorage of electrical equipment for emergency or standby power systems. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS Page -11 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Item Inspection Frequency Scope 2. Piping System Periodic Where applicable, inspect installation of flammable, combustible, or highly toxic contents and their associated mechanical units. 3. HVAC Ductwork Periodic Where applicable, inspect installation of HVAC ductwork that will contain hazardous materials. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS Page -12 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 References 1. ACI 301-05 – Standard Specifications for Structural Concrete. 2. ACI 318-05 – Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 3. AISC 360-05 – Specification for Structural Steel Buildings. 4. ASTM A6-04a – Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling, and Bars for Structural Use. 5. ASTM A568-03 – Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold Rolled, General Requirements For. 6. ASTM A706-04a – Specification for Low-alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement 7. ASTM C31-03a – Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 8. ASTM C94-04 – Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. 9. ASTM C109-02 – Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2 in. or 50 mm Cube Specimens). 10. ASTM C138-10b – Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete. 11. ASTM C143-10a – Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. 12. ASTM C172-04 – Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. 13. ASTM C173-10b – Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method. 14. ASTM C231-10 – Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. 15. ASTM C1090-10 – Test Method for Measuring Changes in Height of Cylindrical Specimens from Hydraulic Cement Grout. 16. ASTM D422-63(2002) – Test Method for Particle-size Analysis of Soils 17. ASTM D1140-00 – Standard Test Methods for Amount of Material in Soils Finer than No. 200 (75x03BC;m) Sieve 18. ASTM D1557-02 – Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort 19. ASTM D2922-01 – Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) 20. ASTM E605-00 – Test Method for Thickness and Density of Sprayed Fire-resistive Material (SFRM) 21. ASTM E736-00 – Test Method for Cohesion/Adhesion of Sprayed Fire-resistive Materials Applied to Structural Members 22. AWS D1.1-2004 – Structural Welding Code – Steel. 23. 2015 New York State Building Code 24. RCSC-2009, Specification for Structural Joints Using High Strength Bolts. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS01 91 13-1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 019113 - GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This section includes general administrative and procedural requirements for the commissioning process to supplement other Division 01 commissioning process activity Sections and other Sections in Divisions 22, 23, and 26 that specify testing of components, systems and assemblies. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section “Facilities Exterior Enclosure Commissioning” for commissioning process activities for building exterior enclosure, roof, and foundation systems, assemblies, equipment, and components. 2. Division 22 Section "Commissioning of Plumbing" for commissioning process activities for plumbing systems, assemblies, equipment, and components. 3. Division 23 Section "Commissioning of HVAC" for commissioning process activities for HVAC&R systems, assemblies, equipment, and components. 4. Division 26 Section "Commissioning of Electrical Systems" for commissioning process activities for electrical systems, assemblies, equipment, and components. 1.3 DESCRIPTION A. Commissioning is a systematic process of confirming that all building systems perform interactively according to the Owner’s Program Requirements and the Basis of Design and continuing through construction, acceptance and the warranty period with actual verification of performance. B. Commissioning during design is intended to achieve the following specific objectives: 1. Verify the Owner’s Program Requirements and Basis of Design are clearly documented and they meet the Owner’s goals and objectives. 2. Provide Design Review during AE design efforts. 3. Verify commissioning for the construction phase is adequately reflected in the bid documents. C. Commissioning during the construction phase of this project is intended to achieve the following specific objectives: 1. Provide direction for the commissioning process during construction, particularly providing resolution to issues and providing details not developed during design (ex. scheduling, participation of various parties, lines of reporting and approvals, coordination, etc.) 2. Verify that applicable equipment and systems are installed properly and receive adequate operational checkout by installing contractors. 3. Verify and document proper performance of equipment and systems. 4. Verify that O&M documentation left on site is complete. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS01 91 13-2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 5. Verify that the Owner’s operating personnel are adequately trained. D. The Commissioning process does not take away from or reduce the responsibility of the system designers to design a workable system nor the installing contractors to provide a finished and fully functioning product. E. The CxA directs and coordinates the commissioning activities and reports to the Owner. All members in the construction process work together to fulfill their contracted responsibilities and meet the objectives of the Owner’s Project Requirement’s as detailed in the Contract Documents. F. The CxA works with the CM/GC according to established protocols to schedule the commissioning activities. The CxA will provide sufficient notice to the CM/GC and Owner for scheduling commissioning activities. Meanwhile, the CxA will integrate these activities into the master construction schedule. All parties will address scheduling problems and make necessary notifications in a timely manner in order to expedite the commissioning process. G. The following narrative provides a brief overview of the commissioning tasks during construction and the general order in which they occur. 1. Commissioning during construction begins with a Commissioning Kick-Off Meeting – Construction Team conducted by the CxA where the commissioning process is reviewed with the commissioning team members. 2. Additional meetings will be required throughout construction, scheduled by the CxA with necessary parties attending, to plan, scope, coordinate, schedule future activities and resolve problems. 3. Equipment documentation is submitted to the CxA through the submittal process, including detailed start-up procedures. 4. In general, the checkout and performance verification proceeds from simple to complex; from component level to equipment to systems and intersystem levels with Prefunctional checklists being completed before functional testing begins. 5. The contractors, under their own direction, document and perform startup and initial checkout. The CxA documents that startup was completed according to the approved plans, when contracted. This may include the CxA witnessing start-up of selected equipment, if contracted. 6. The CxA verifies installation integrity thru the use of checklists. 7. The CxA develops specific equipment and system functional performance test procedures. The contractors review the procedures. 8. The procedures are executed by the contractors, under the direction of, and documented by the CxA. 9. Items of non-compliance in material, installation or setup are corrected at the contractor's expense and the system retested. 10. The CxA reviews the O&M documentation for completeness. 11. Commissioning is completed before Substantial Completion, whenever possible. 12. The CxA reviews and pre-approves the training plan provided by the contractors. 13. The contractors coordinate and provide training via qualified instructors. 14. Training occurs. 15. The Owner verifies that training has occurred and provides a written statement that training has occurred. 16. Deferred testing is conducted, as specified or required. 1.4 DEFINITIONS Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS01 91 13-3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 A. Acceptance: A formal action, to declare that some aspect of the project meets defined requirements, thus permitting subsequent activities to proceed. B. Acceptance Phase: Phase of commissioning after start-up and initial checkout when functional performance tests, O&M documentation review and training occurs. C. Architect/Engineer (AE): the prime Consultant (Architect) and Subconsultants who comprise the design team, generally the HVAC Mechanical Designer/Engineer, the Electrical Designer/Engineer and various other Subconsultants. D. Approval: Acceptance that a piece of equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning in the tested modes according to the contract documents. E. Basis of Design (BOD): A document that records concepts, calculations, decisions and product selections used to meet the Owner’s Project Requirements and to satisfy applicable regulatory requirements, standards and guidelines. The document includes both narrative descriptions and lists of individual items that support the design process. Also known as the Design Criteria. F. Checklists: Verification checklists that are developed and used during all phases of the commissioning process to verify that the Owner’s Project Requirements are being achieved. This includes checklists for general verification, plus testing, training, and other specific requirements. G. Commissioning Authority (CxA): An entity identified by the Owner who plans, schedules and coordinates the commissioning team to implement the Commissioning Process. The Owner has engaged Horizon Engineering Associates, LLP as the CxA under a separate contract. H. Commissioning Plan: A document that outlines the organization, schedule, allocation of resources, and documentation requirements of the commissioning process. I. Commissioning Process: A quality-focused process for enhancing the delivery of a project and includes verifying and documenting that the facility and its systems and assemblies are planned, designed, installed, tested, operated and maintained to meet the Owner’s Project Requirements. J. Commissioning Process Progress Report: A written document that details activities completed as part of the commissioning process and significant findings from those activities that is continuously updated during the course of a project. K. Commissioning Report: A document recording the results of the commissioning process, including the record documents, performance of the commissioned systems and documents all sign-offs. L. Commissioning Specifications: The contract document that details the objective, scope and implementation of the construction and acceptance phases of the commissioning process as developed in the Commissioning Plan. M. Commissioning Team: A team comprised of the CxA, Owner, AE, Construction Manager/General Contractor, Contractors, maintenance and operations personnel, and occupants. Individuals, each having the authority to act on behalf of the entity he or she represents, explicitly organized to implement the commissioning process through coordinated action. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS01 91 13-4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 N. Contract Documents: The documents binding on parties involved in the construction of this project (drawings, specifications, change orders, amendments, contracts, Cx Plan, etc.) O. Contractor: the CM or subcontractors authorized representatives. P. Construction Manager (CM): the prime contractor for this project. Generally refers to all the CM’s subcontractors as well. Also referred to as the Contractor, in some contexts. Q. Data Logging: The monitoring and recording of flow, current, status, pressure, etc. of equipment using ‘stand-alone’ data recorders separate from the control system or the trending capacities of control systems. R. Deferred Performance Tests (DPTs): Performance tests that are performed, at the discretion of the CxA, after substantial completion, due to partial occupancy, equipment, seasonal requirements, design, or other site conditions that disallow the test from being performed. S. Deficiency: A condition in the installation or function of a component, piece of equipment or system that is not in compliance with the Contract Documents (that is, does not perform properly or is not complying with the Owner’s Project Requirements). T. Equipment Manufacturer: The multiple companies that will manufacturer equipment and products for the commissioned systems and who will participate as required in the commissioning activities. U. Factory Testing: Testing of equipment on-site or at the factory, by factory personnel, with or without Owner’s representative present. V. Functional Performance Test: The testing of the dynamic function and operation of equipment and systems using manual (direct observation) or monitoring methods. Functional testing is the dynamic testing of systems (rather than just components) under full operation. Systems are tested under various modes, such as during low cooling or heating loads, high loads, component failures, unoccupied, varying outside air temperatures, etc. The systems are run through all the control system’s sequence of operation and components are verified to be responding as the sequences state. The commissioning authority develops the functional test procedures in a sequential written form, coordinates, oversees and documents the actual testing, which is usually performed by the installing contractor or vendor. W. General Contractor: The prime contractor for this project. Generally refers to all the GC’s subcontractors as well. Also referred to as the Contractor, in some contexts. X. HVAC&R: Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning, and Refrigeration. Y. Issues Log: A formal and ongoing record of problems or concerns – and their resolution – that have been raised by members of the commissioning team during the course of the commissioning process. Z. Manual Test: Using hand-held instruments, immediate control system readouts or direct observation to verify performance (contrasted to analyzing monitored data taken over time to make the ‘observation’). AA. Monitoring: The recording of parameters (flow, current, status, pressure, etc.) of equipment operation using data loggers or the trending capabilities of control systems. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS01 91 13-5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 BB. Non-Compliance: See Deficiency. CC. Non-Conformance: See Deficiency. DD. Owner’s Project Requirements (OPR): A written document that details functional requirements of the Project and the expectations of how the Project will be used and operated. This includes project and design goals, measurable performance criteria, budgets, schedules, success criteria, and supporting information. (Also formerly known as the Design Intent Document.) EE. Owner’s Representative or Project Manager (Owner): The contracting and managing authority for the Owner who oversees the design and/or construction of the project. FF. Over-written Value: Writing over a sensor value in the control system to see the response of a system. GG. Phased Commissioning: Commissioning that is completed in phases (by floors, for example) due to the size of a project or other scheduling issues, in order to minimize the total construction time. HH. Re-Commissioning Management Manual: A single manual that contains information required for recommissioning the projects’ building systems. II. Sampling: Functionally testing only a fraction of the total number of identical or near identical pieces of equipment. JJ. Seasonal Performance Test: Performance tests that are deferred until the system(s) will experience conditions closer to their design conditions based on weather conditions. KK. Simulated Condition: Condition that is created for the purpose of testing the response of a system (eg. Raising/lowering the set-point of a thermostat to see the response in a VAV box). LL. Simulated Signal: Disconnecting a sensor and using a signal generator to simulate a sensor value for the purpose of testing a full range of conditions. MM. Startup: The initial starting or activating of dynamic equipment, including completing construction checklists. NN. Systems Manual: A systems focused composite document that includes the operation manual, maintenance manual, and additional information of use to the Owner during the occupancy and operations phase. OO. Systems, Subsystems, and Equipment: Where these terms are used together or separately, they shall mean “as-built” systems, subsystems, and equipment. PP. Test Procedures: The step-by-step process which must be executed to fulfill the test requirements. The test procedures are developed by the CxA. QQ. Test Requirements: Requirements specifying what modes and functions, etc. shall be tested. The test requirements are not the detailed test procedures. The test requirements are specified in the Contract Documents. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS01 91 13-6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 RR. Training Plan: A written document that details the expectations, schedule, budget and deliverables of commissioning process activities related to training of project operating and maintenance personnel, users, and occupants. SS. Trending: Monitoring over a period of time. TT. Verification: The process by which specific documents, components, equipment, assemblies, systems, and interfaces among systems are confirmed to comply with the criteria described in the Owner’s Project Requirements. UU. Warranty Period: Warranty period for the entire project, including equipment components. Warranty begins at Substantial Completion and extends typically for at least one year, unless specifically noted otherwise in the Contract Documents. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. The CxA will review and approve submittals related to the commissioned equipment for conformance to the Contract Documents as it relates to the commissioning process, to the functional performance of the equipment and adequacy for developing test procedures. This review is intended primarily to aid in the development of functional testing procedures and only secondarily to verify compliance with equipment specifications. The CxA will notify the Contractor, Owner or AE as requested, of items missing or areas that are not in conformance with Contract Documents and which require resubmission. B. The CxA will review the submittals once. The CxA will receive a copy of the final approved submittals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test Equipment Calibration Requirements: Contractors will comply with test manufacturer’s calibration procedures and intervals. Recalibrate test instruments immediately after instruments have been repaired resulting from being dropped or damaged. Affix calibration tags to test instruments. Furnish calibration records to CxAupon request. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Commissioning Kick-Off Meeting – Construction Team: Contractors will attend a meeting of the Commissioning Team, chaired by the CxA, to review the scope of commissioning process activities and the Commissioning Plan with discussions on milestones, activities, and assignments of responsibilities. The flow and type of documents and the amount of submittal data given to the CxA will be determined. Meeting minutes will then be distributed to all parties by the CxA. B. Commissioning Meetings: Contractors will attend coordination meetings with the Commissioning Team, chaired by the CxA, to review progress on the Commissioning Plan, construction deficiencies, scheduling conflicts, and to discuss strategies and processes for upcoming commissioning process activities. C. Miscellaneous Construction Meetings: The CxA attends selected planning and job-site meetings in order to remain informed on construction progress and to update parties involved in the commissioning process. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS01 91 13-7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. Pre-testing Meetings: Contractors will attend pretest meetings with the Commissioning Team, chaired by the CxA, to review startup reports, pre-test inspection results, testing procedures, testing personnel and instrumentation requirements, and manufacturers’ authorized service representative services for each system, subsystem, equipment, and component to be tested. E. Testing: Contractors will coordinate with testing personnel and agencies for timing and access for CxA to witness test. F. Manufacturers’ Inspection and Startup Services: Contractors will coordinate services of manufacturers’ inspection and startup services. G. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing: Contractors will coordinate with plan and schedule for testing, adjusting and balancing for timing and access for CxA to witness process. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT A. All standard testing equipment required to perform startup, initial checkout and functional performance testing shall be provided by the Contractor for the equipment being tested. For example, the mechanical contractor of Division 23 shall ultimately be responsible for all standard testing equipment for the HVAC system and controls system in Division 23, except for equipment specific to and used by TAB in their commissioning responsibilities. A sufficient quantity of two-way radios shall be provided by each subcontractor. B. Special equipment, tools and instruments (specific to a piece of equipment and only available from the vendor) required for testing shall be included in the base bid price to the Owner and left on site, except for stand-alone data logging equipment that may be used by the CxA. C. Proprietary test equipment and software required by any equipment manufacturer for programming and/or start-up, whether specified or not, shall be provided by the manufacturer of the equipment. Manufacturer shall provide the test equipment, demonstrate its use, and assist in the commissioning process as needed. Proprietary test equipment (and software) shall become the property of the Owner upon completion of the commissioning process. D. Data logging equipment and software required to test equipment will be provided by the CxA, but shall not become the property of the Owner. E. All testing equipment shall be of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and/or measure system performance with the tolerances specified in the Specifications. If not otherwise noted, the following minimum requirements apply: Temperature sensors and digital thermometers shall have a certified calibration within the past year to an accuracy of 0.5°F and a resolution of + or - 0.1°F. Pressure sensors shall have an accuracy of + or - 2.0% of the value range being measured (not full range of meter) and have been calibrated within the last year. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS01 91 13-8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 A. Submittals: See Section 1.5 – SUBMITTALS for requirements. B. Checklists 1. The CxA will prepare Pre-Functional Checklists for all commissioned components, equipment, and systems. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Contractor will provide a copy of O&M literature within 45 days of each submittal acceptance for use during the commissioning process for all commissioned equipment and systems. The CxA will review the O&M literature once for conformance to project requirements. The CxA will receive a copy of the final approved O&M literature once corrections have been made by the Contractor. D. Demonstration and Training: Contractor will provide demonstration and training as required by the specifications. A complete training plan and schedule must be submitted by the Contractor to the CxA four weeks (4) prior to any training. A training agenda for each training session must be submitted to the CxA one (1) week prior the training session. 3.2 OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Provide the OPR documentation to the CxA and Contractors for use in developing the Commissioning Plan; testing plans and checklists. B. Provide the Basis of Design documents, prepared by the architect and approved by the Owner, for use in developing the Commissioning Plan; testing plans and checklists. C. Assign operation and maintenance personnel and schedule them to participate in Commissioning Team activities including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Commissioning meetings. 2. Construction phase coordination meetings. 3. Piping and ductwork testing and flushing verification meetings. 4. Procedures meeting for testing, adjusting and balancing. 5. Testing and demonstration of systems, subsystems and equipment. 6. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems and equipment. 7. Final review and acceptance meetings D. Provide utility services required for the commissioning process. E. Facilitate the coordination of the commissioning work between the CxA, the Contractor and the Architect and Engineers to ensure that the commissioning activities are incorporated into the master schedule. F. Review and approve the commissioning plan. G. Coordinate any seasonal or deferred testing. H. Ensure that any seasonal, deferred testing and/or deficiency issues are addressed. 3.3 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL’S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Attend the Commissioning Kick-Off Meeting – Design Team, Commissioning Kick-Off Meeting – Construction Team and selected team meetings. B. Perform submittal review, construction observation, as-built drawing preparation, other items as contracted. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS01 91 13-9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Provide the Basis of Design Document. The designers shall assist (along with the contractors) in clarifying the operation and control of commissioned equipment in areas where the specifications, control drawings or equipment documentation is not sufficient for writing detailed testing procedures. D. Participate in the resolution of system deficiencies identified during the commissioning, according to the contract documents. E. Construction Record documents and specifications. F. Insure that the CxA’s submittals comments are incorporated into the Design Professional’s submittal comments prior to sending to CM or GC for distribution. G. Facility operating procedures for normal, abnormal, and emergency modes of operation. H. Participate in resolution of design non-conformance and design deficiencies identified during the warranty-period commissioning process. I. Provide a written description and rational for all energy and water saving features and strategies with operating instructions and caveats about their function and maintenance relative to energy use. J. Provide written guidelines for establishing and tracking benchmarks for whole building energy use and equipment efficiencies of cooling, heating and service hot water equipment. K. Provide a written list of diagnostic tools, with use descriptions, to assist facility staff. 3.4 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Contractor shall assign representatives with expertise and authority to act on its behalf and shall schedule them to participate in and perform commissioning process activities including, but not limited to, the following brief overview: 1. Facilitate the coordination of commissioning and incorporate commissioning activities into the overall project. 2. Provide copies of all applicable submittals as required in Division 01 including all changes thereto. 3. Provide detailed startup procedures. 4. Evaluate performance deficiencies identified in test reports and, in collaboration with entity responsible for system and equipment installation, perform corrective actions. 5. Cooperate with the CxA for resolution of issues recorded in the Issues Log. 6. Attend commissioning team meetings held on a scheduled basis. 7. Furnish a copy of all construction documents, addenda, change orders and approved submittals and shop drawings related to commissioned equipment to the CxA. Furnish a copy of the O&M literature to the CxA forty five (45) days after final equipment submittals. 8. In each purchase order or subcontract written, include requirements for submittal data, O&M literature, commissioning tasks and training. 9. Integrate and coordinate commissioning process activities with construction schedule. 10. Review and accept construction checklists provided by the CxA. 11. Review and accept commissioning process test procedures provided by the CxA. 12. Complete commissioning process test procedures. 13. Submit training plan for approval, coordinate training and provide qualified instructors for training of Owner personnel. 14. Assist the CxA as necessary in the seasonal testing, deferred testing an deficiency resolution. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS01 91 13-10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 15. Ensure that subcontractors correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to submittals, O&M manuals and red-lined drawings for applicable issues identified in any seasonal testing. 16. Provide written as-built controls drawings and sequences of operation for all equipment. 17. Provide a written list of time of day schedules and a schedule frequency to review them for relevance and efficiency. 18. Provide written recommendations for recalibration frequency of sensors and actuators by type and use. 19. Provide a written list of all user adjustable set-points and reset schedules with a brief discussion of the purpose of each and the range of reasonable adjustments with energy implications 20. Provide a written schedule frequency to review the various set-points and reset schedules to ensure they are current relevant and efficient values. 21. Provide a written list of diagnostic tools with use descriptions to assist facility staff. 3.5 EQUIPMENT SUPPLIERS RESPONSIBILITIES A. Roles and Responsibilities 1. Provide all requested submittal data, including detailed start-up procedures and specific responsibilities of the Owner, to keep warranties in force. 2. Assist in equipment testing per agreements with subcontractors. 3. Provide information requested by CxA regarding equipment sequence of operation and testing procedures. 3.6 COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY RESPONSIBILITIES A. Roles and Responsibilities 1. The CxA is not responsible for the design concept, the design criteria, compliance with codes, design or general construction scheduling, cost estimating or construction management. 2. The CxA may assist with problem solving and non-conformance items or deficiencies, but the CxA is not the Design Engineer / Engineer of Record, and the commissioning process does not preclude the design engineer / Engineer of Record of responsibilities for system evaluations, adequacy of systems to meet the OPR, capacities of systems, quality control checks, or any of the other elements and recommended final acceptance of systems to the Owner. 3. The primary role of the CxA is to coordinate and direct the commissioning activities in a logical, sequential and efficient manner using consistent protocols and forms, centralized documentation, clear and regular communications and consultants with all necessary parties, frequently updated timelines and schedules and technical expertise. B. Commissioning Plan 1. The CxA shall develop a Commissioning Plan at the start of the project. The Commissioning Plan shall outline the organization, schedule, allocation of resources, and documentation requirements of the Commissioning Process. 2. The Commissioning Plan shall be a “living document” in which information is added to or modified by the Commissioning Team during the course of the Project. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS01 91 13-11 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. At the end of the Project, the CxA shall provide the Owner with the Final Commissioning Plan for the Owner’s use. C. Document Review 1. Review the Owner’s Project Requirements and Basis of Design developed by the design professionals. 2. Perform a focused review of the drawings and specification during the Design Development and near the end of the Construction Document Phase. 3. Develop full commissioning specifications for all systems and equipment to be commissioned. The commissioning specifications will be subject to approval of the design team and included in the final construction specifications. 4. Review submittals applicable to systems being commissioned for compliance for commissioning needs, concurrent with the AE’s reviews. D. Cx Team Meetings 1. Commissioning during construction will begin with a ‘Commissioning Kick-Off Meeting – for Construction Team’ conducted by the CxA where the commissioning process is reviewed with all of the commissioning team members. 2. Additional meetings will be required throughout construction, and will be scheduled by the CxA on a weekly basis with necessary parties of the commissioning team attending, in order to plan, scope, coordinate, and schedule future activities and resolve problems. E. Coordination and Scheduling 1. Coordinate and direct commissioning activities in a logical, sequential and efficient manner using consistent protocols and forms, centralized documentation, clear and regular communications, and consultations with all necessary parties. 2. Coordinate commissioning work with the CM/GC to ensure that commissioning activities are being scheduled into the master project schedule. F. Commissioning Progress 1. Perform site visits, as necessary, to observe component and system installations. 2. Attend selected planning and jobsite meetings to obtain information on construction progress. 3. Review construction meeting minutes for revisions/substitutions relating to the commissioning process. G. Pipe Testing, Flushing and Cleaning 1. Review and approve the pipe testing, flushing and cleaning plan submitted by the Contractor. 2. Witness all or part of the pipe testing, flushing and cleaning and be sufficiently confident that proper procedures are being followed. 3. Document via the online Commissioning Issues Log any deficiencies in the procedures or results. H. Pre-Functional Checks 1. Verify proper installation of components, equipment, systems and assemblies. Sampling procedures may NOT be employed on systems and equipment. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS01 91 13-12 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 I. Equipment and System Startup and Verification 1. Review and approve component, equipment, system and assembly startup plan developed and submitted by the Contractor. 2. Approve system startup by reviewing startup reports, if contracted; and by selected site observation. 3. Review the Testing, Adjusting and Balancing execution plan for the project, which shall be submitted by the TAB subcontractor. 4. Verify and document the accuracy of the air and water systems balancing by spot testing the air and water reported field values with TAB subcontractors and by reviewing completed reports. J. Functional Performance Testing 1. With assistance from the Contractor, write Functional Performance Testing procedures for all components, equipment or systems to be commissioned. 2. With the assistance of the Contractors, coordinate Functional Performance Testing. Witness and approve Functional Performance Testing performed by the Contractors. 3. With the assistance of the Contractors, coordinate retesting as necessary until satisfactory performance is achieved. 4. Witness seasonal or deferred Functional Performance Testing as necessary. K. Issue/Deficiency Logs 1. The CxA shall prepare a formal, ongoing, online record of deficiencies, problems and concerns – and their resolution – raised by members of the Commissioning Team during the Commissioning Process. 2. Issues will be recorded on an online Commissioning Issues Log for the AE, CM/GC and Contractors to resolve to the satisfaction of the Owner. Issues will be added by the CxA. Team members are required to post their own responses to issues pertaining to their work. Team members are required to respond to issues added to the list within five (5) working days of being added by the CxA. 3. Issues will be revisited one (1) time to verify that the proper corrections have been made. The Owner reserves the right to deduct from the Contractors’ contract costs associated with additional revisits required for outstanding issues. 4. When issues are resolved, they will be closed on the Issues Log by the CxA. L. Operation and Maintenance Data 1. The CxA shall review of the documentation submitted by the Contractor as required by the Specifications for completeness and accuracy. This commissioning review supplements, but does not replace, the Architect/Engineer’s review. 2. Review equipment warranties to ensure that the Owner’s responsibilities are clearly defined. M. Training 1. The CM/GC and Contractors will provide all documentation and qualified training personnel for training. 2. The CxA will verify through the Contractor’s plan and schedule, training agendas, and select observations that proper training procedures were followed on all commissioned systems. 3. See appropriate section below pertaining to training. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS01 91 13-13 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 N. Systems Manual Requirements 1. Index of Systems Manual with notation as to content storage location if not in actual manual. 2. Executive Summary 3. A list of recommended operational record keeping procedures at the facility level, including sample forms, trend logs, or others, and a rationale for each. 4. Maintenance procedures, schedules and recommendations. 5. Ongoing Optimization 6. Other Attachments O. Post Occupancy Review 1. The CxA will return to the site within the 12-month warranty period to address the following: review current building operations with facility staff and address outstanding issues related to the Owner’s Project Requirements; Interview facility staff and identify problems or concerns with operating the building; Identify problems covered under warranty or under the original construction contract. 2. The CxA will make suggestions for improvements in the content of the O&M Manuals. Any required changes shall be made by the contractor responsible for that section. 3. The CxA shall assist facility staff in developing reports, documents and requests for services to remedy outstanding problems. P. Commissioning Final Report 1. The CxA shall provide a final report following the completion of all Functional Performance Testing. The report is to outline compliance and non-compliance to the construction documents, as well as identify concerns relative to future performance 3.7 GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. Prefunctional checklists are important to ensure that the equipment and systems are installed and operational. They ensure that functional performance testing (in-depth system checkout) may proceed without unnecessary delays. Each piece of equipment receives full Prefunctional checkout. The Prefunctional testing for a given system must be successfully completed prior to formal functional performance testing of equipment or subsystems of the given system. The Commissioning Authority shall complete the Pre-Functional checks in the field, with assistance from the installing Contractors (where necessary). B. The installing contractors, under the direction of the CxA, shall perform Functional Performance Testing of systems and sub-system performance after Pre-Functional checks have been completed and all outstanding issues resolved. C. The installing contractor will perform tests specified in Division 1 commissioning process activity Sections and other sections specifying testing procedures according to approved testing procedures. 1. Verify and test performance using actual conditions whenever possible. 2. Simulate conditions by imposing an artificial load when it is not practical to test under actual conditions. Set and document simulated conditions and methods of simulation. After test, return settings to normal operating conditions. 3. Alter set points when simulating conditions is not practical. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS01 91 13-14 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. The CxA shall witness and document the results of all functional performance tests using the specific procedural forms developed for that purpose. Prior to testing, these forms are provided to the Contractors for review and comment. E. Deficiencies/Non-Conformance 1. The CxA will record the results of the functional test on the test form. All deficiencies or non-conformance items shall be noted and reported to the Owner and Contractors on a standardized form. 2. Corrections of minor deficiencies identified may be made during the tests at the discretion of the CxA. 3. Every effort will be made to expedite the testing process and minimize unnecessary delays, while not compromising the integrity of the procedures. 4. As tests progress and a deficiency is identified, the CxA discusses the issue with the executing contractor. 5. When there is no dispute on the deficiency and the contractor accepts responsibility to correct it, the CxA documents the deficiency and the contractor’s response and intentions or corrections. The CxA and contractor then proceed to another test or sequence. Once the contractor corrects the deficiency, the test is rescheduled and repeated in the anticipation of correct operation or function. If a deficiency is identified, the cost of retesting will be as per section 3.7. 6. When there is a dispute about a deficiency, regarding whether it is a deficiency or who is responsible, the CxA documents the deficiency and the contractor’s response. The deficiency is then forwarded to parties assumed to be responsible for the deficiency. Resolutions are made at the lowest management level possible. Other parties are brought into the discussion as needed. Final interpretive authority is with the AE. Final acceptance authority is with the Owner and CxA. The CxA will then document the resolution process. Once the interpretation and resolution have been decided, the appropriate party corrects the deficiency. The CxA then reschedules the test as stated in the section above. Costs of retesting are as stated below in the applicable section. F. Cost of Retesting 1. The cost for the contractor to retest a Prefunctional or functional test, if they are responsible for the deficiency, shall be theirs. If they are not responsible, any cost recovery for retesting costs shall be negotiated with the CM/GC. 2. For a deficiency identified, not related to any Prefunctional checklist or start-up fault, the following shall apply: The CxA will direct the retesting of the equipment once at no “charge” to the CM/GC for their time. However, the CxA’s and owner’s time for a second retest will be charged to the CM/GC, who may choose to recover costs from the responsible contractor or subcontractor. Before retesting occurs, the CM/GC will inspect the deficiency and respond to the CA that the issue has been addressed. 3. The time for the CxA and owner to direct any retesting required because a specific Prefunctional checklist or start-up test item, reported to have been successfully completed, but determined during functional testing to be faulty, will be back charged to the CM/GC, who may choose to recover costs from the party responsible for misinformation or deficiency. 4. The contractor shall respond in writing to the CxA and owner at least as often as commissioning meetings are being scheduled concerning the status of each apparent outstanding discrepancy identified during commissioning. Discussion shall cover explanations of any disagreements and proposals for their resolution. 5. Any required retesting by any contractor shall not be considered a justified reason for a claim of delay or for a time extension by the CM/GC, contractors or subcontractors. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS01 91 13-15 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 G. Failure due to Manufacturer Defect 1. If 10% or three, whichever is greater, of identical pieces (size alone does not constitute a difference) of equipment fail to perform to the Contract Documents (mechanically or substantively) due to manufacturing defect, not allowing it to meet its submitted performance spec, all identical units may be considered unacceptable by the CM/GC, CxA or Owner. In such case, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with the following. 2. Within one week of notification from the CM/GC or Owner, the Contractor or manufacturer’s representative shall examine all other identical units making a record of the findings. The findings shall be provided to the CM/GC or Owner within two weeks of the original notice. 3. Within two weeks of the original notification, the Contractor or manufacturer shall provide a signed and dated, written explanation of the problem, cause of failures, etc. and all proposed solutions which shall include full equipment submittals. The proposed solutions shall not significantly exceed the specification requirements of the original installation. 4. The CM/GC, CxA or Owner will determine whether a replacement of all identical units or a repair is acceptable. 5. Two examples of the proposed solution will be installed by the Contractor and the Contractor will be allowed to test the installations for up to one week, upon which the CxA or owner will decide whether to accept the solution. 6. Upon acceptance, the Contractor and/or manufacturer shall replace or repair all identical items, at their expense and extend the warranty accordingly, if the original equipment warranty had begun. The replacement/repair work shall proceed with reasonable speed beginning within one week from when parts can be obtained. H. Approval 1. The CxA notes each satisfactorily demonstrated function on the test form. Formal approval of the functional test is made later after review by the CxA. The CxA recommends acceptance of each test to the Owner using a standard form. I. Deferred Testing 1. Unforeseen Deferred Testing – If any check or test cannot be completed due to the building structure, required occupancy condition or other deficiency, execution of checklists and functional testing may be delayed upon approval of the Owner. These tests will be conducted in the same manner as the seasonal tests, as soon as possible. Services of necessary parties will be negotiated. 2. Seasonal Testing - During the warranty period, seasonal testing (tests delayed until weather conditions are closer to the system’s design) shall be completed as part of this contract. The CxA shall coordinate this activity. Tests will be executed, documented and deficiencies corrected by the appropriate contractors, with facilities staff and the CxA witnessing. Any final adjustments to the O&M manuals and record documents due to seasonal testing will be made by the contractor. 3.8 SYSTEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED A. Refer to individual sections listed in Section 1.2 – SUMMARY for specific systems to be commissioned. 3.9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS01 91 13-16 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 A. The specific content and format requirements for the standard O&M manuals are detailed in Division 01. Special requirements for the controls contractor and TAB contractor are found in Division 23. B. AE Contribution – The AE will include in the beginning of the O&M manuals a separate section describing the systems including the Basis of Design prepared by the AE. They will also provide Simplified professionally drawn single line system diagrams on 8 ½” x 11” or 11” x 17” sheets. These shall include (ex. chillers/hot water system(s), condenser water system, supply air systems, exhaust systems, etc.). These shall show major pieces of equipment such as (ex. pumps, chillers, heat exchangers, control valves, expansion tanks, coils, service valves, etc.). C. CxA Review and Approval - Prior to substantial completion, the CxA shall review the O&M manuals, documentation and record documents for systems that were commissioned to verify compliance with the Specifications. The CxA will communicate deficiencies in the manuals to the CM/GC, Owner or AE, as requested. Upon a successful review of the corrections, the CxA recommends approval and acceptance of these sections of the O&M manuals to the CM/GC, Owner or AE. The CxA also reviews each equipment warranty and verifies that all requirements to keep the warranty valid are clearly stated. This work does not supersede the AE’s review of the O&M manuals according to the AE’s contract. 3.10 TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL A. The CM/GC and contractors shall be responsible for training coordination, scheduling and ultimately for ensuring that training is completed. B. The CxA shall oversee the training of Owner’s personnel for commissioned equipment and systems. 1. The CxA shall interview the Owner’s staff to determine the special needs and areas where training will be most valuable. The Owner and CxA shall decide how rigorous the training should be for each piece of commissioned equipment. The CxA shall communicate the results to the CM/GC and contractors. Who will in turn communicate to the subcontractors and vendors who also have training responsibilities. 2. In addition to these general requirements, the specific training requirements of Owner personnel by contractors, subcontractors and vendors is specified in the individual sections listed in Section 1.2 – SUMMARY. 3. Each Sub and vendor responsible for training will submit a written training plan to the CM/GC and/or contractors for review and approval prior to training. The CM/GC and/or contractors will submit one comprehensive training plan to the CxA and Owner. 4. The plan will be reviewed by the CxA and Owner. Comments pertaining to its deficiencies will be forwarded to the CM/GC and Contractors. The training plan will be rewritten until approved by the CxA and Owner The final approved training plan will cover the following elements: a. Equipment (included in training) b. Intended audience c. Location of training d. Objectives e. Subjects covered (description, duration of discussion, special methods, etc.) f. Duration of training on each subject g. Qualified instructor for each subject i. Instructor qualifications j. Methods (classroom lecture, video, site walk-through, actual operational demonstrations, written handouts, etc.) Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS01 91 13-17 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 5. For the primary HVAC equipment, the Controls Subcontractor shall provide a discussion of the control of the equipment during the mechanical or electrical training conducted by each subcontractor or vendor. 6. Training documentation shall include the following items: a. Copy of the training plan, including schedule, syllabus, and agenda. b. Copy of the Owner’s Program Requirements. c. Copy of the Basis of Design. d. Compiled operations manuals. e. Compiled maintenance manuals. f. Completed manufacturer training manuals. g. Red-lined drawings. i. Other pertinent documents. 7. The CxA develops criteria for determining that the training was satisfactorily completed, including attending some of the training, etc. The CxA recommends approval of the training to the Owner using a standard form. The owner signs the approval form/letter template. 8. At one of the training sessions, the CxA presents a presentation discussing the use of the blank functional test forms for re-commissioning equipment 9. Video taping of the training sessions in DVD format will be provided by the CM/GC, with tapes cataloged by the CM/GC and added to the O&M manuals, if required by Division 1 specifications. 10. The mechanical design engineer shall at the first training session present the overall system design concept and the design concept of each equipment section. This presentation shall be one to two hours in length and include a review of mechanical systems using the simplified system schematics (one-line drawings). 3.11 REPORTING A. The CxA will provide regular reports to the Owner, on a pre-determined frequency in accordance with the project schedule. The CxA will regularly communicate with all members of the commissioning team, keeping them apprised of commissioning progress and scheduling changes through, memos, progress reports, etc. B. The CxA will keep all documentation and log all commissioning-related issues that require current or future attention including deficiencies. An agreed-upon form will track the status of documentation and testing for each piece of equipment and system. 3.12 COMMISSIONING DOCUMENTATION A. The CxA oversees and maintains the development of commissioning documentation. The commissioning documentation shall be kept in three ring binders, and organized by system and sub-system when practical. All pages shall be numbered, and a table of contents page(s) shall be provided. The commissioning documentation shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Plan for delivery and review of submittals, systems manuals, and other documents and reports. 2. Identification of installed systems, assemblies, equipment, and components including design changes that occurred during the construction phase. 3. Process and schedule for completing construction checklists and manufacturer's prestart and startup checklists for systems, assemblies, equipment, and components to be verified and tested. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS01 91 13-18 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 4. Certificate of completion certifying that installation, prestart checks, and startup procedures have been completed. 5. Certificate of readiness certifying that systems, subsystems, equipment, and associated controls are ready for testing. 6. Test and inspection reports and certificates. 7. Corrective action documents. 8. Verification of testing, adjusting, and balancing reports. 9. Approved final test and balance report for the building being commissioned. 10. All accepted shop drawings of systems equipment. Shop drawings shall be full size sheets folded as required to fit in binders. 11. All pre-functional performance test checklists, signed by personnel performing and/or witnessing test, organized by system and sub-system. 12. All verification and functional performance test checklists/results, signed by personnel performing and/or witnessing test, organized by system and subsystem. This information may be used for calibrating the original energy simulation model. The revised model will be used to create the baseline for energy use in the building. END OF SECTION 019113 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 011400 "Work Restrictions" for restrictions on use of the premises, Owneroccupancy requirements. 2. Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation" for preconstruction photographs taken before selective demolition operations. 3. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary construction, security and protection facilities, and environmental-protection measures for selective demolition operations. 4. Section 017329 "Cutting and Patching" for cutting and patching procedures. 5. Section 017400 "Construction Waste Management" for disposal, recycling, and salvage of demolished materials, waste management plan, and waste management coordinator. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to additional definitions as specified in Section 017400 "Construction Waste Management" and other sections. B. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. C. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, store, and recover for subsequent sale, donation, or reuse in another facility. If approved by the Owner or where indicated to remain property of Owner, deliver to Owner ready for reuse. D. Remove and Reinstall: Carefully detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated. 1. “Salvage and Reuse” and “Salvage and Reinstall” shall have the same meaning as “Remove and Reinstall”. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 E. Existing to Remain: Maintain in-place existing items that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or indicated to remain Owner's property, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor and shall be removed from Project site. 1. Owner reserves the right to identify additional items or materials to be salvaged and turned over as Owner’s property. B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner. 1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. 1.6 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre-demolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. 5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection. 6. Review dust and airborne contaminants control. 7. Review construction noise and vibration control. 8. Review construction waste management plan and procedures. 9. Review items to be salvaged and returned to Owner, if applicable. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For demolition firm. B. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control and, for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. 1. Indicate locations of proposed dust- and noise-control temporary partitions and means of egress, including for building occupants affected by selective demolition operations. 2. Indicate means of protection for items to remain and items in path of waste removal from building. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted. 2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, re-routing, and continuation of utility services. 4. Use of elevator and stairs, if applicable and if permitted by Owner. 5. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work. D. Inventory: Submit a list of items to be removed and salvaged and deliver to Owner prior to start of demolition. 1. Identify items indicated to be removed and salvaged, and turned over to Owner. a. Owner reserves the right to identify additional items to be removed and salvaged and turned over to Owner, or for donation to local non-profit companies. 2. Identify items indicated to be removed and salvaged, and re-installed as part of the Work. 3. Identify items not indicated to be removed and salvaged, but that are suitable for re-sale or donation. 4. Coordinate inventory list with requirements of construction waste management plan. E. Pre-demolition Photographs: Comply with Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation." Submit before Work begins. F. Warranties: Documentation indicating that existing warranties are still in effect after completion of selective demolition. 1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project. B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: Comply with Section 014000 "Quality Requirements." 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of existing building(s) and site campus immediately adjacent to selective demolition areas. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. 1. Comply with requirements specified in Section 011000 "Summary." B. Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be selectively demolished. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items: a. Furniture, loose equipment, and other items that are not part of built-in construction. C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. D. Hazardous Materials: Present in buildings and structures to be selectively demolished. 1. Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. a. Refer to Section 028213 “Asbestos Abatement” for hazardous material requirements. b. Hazardous material reports are available from Owner upon request. 1) Refer to Document 003126 "Existing Hazardous Material Information". 2) Unless indicated otherwise in the ‘Agreement’, reports are not part of the Contract Documents. 2. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 3. Owner will provide material safety data sheets for suspected hazardous materials that are known to be present in buildings and structures to be selectively demolished because of building operations or processes performed there. E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 2. Maintain mechanical, electrical, plumbing, and other services in-service during selective demolition operations. G. Maintain access to existing walkways, egress routes, corridors, and adjacent occupied or used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct walkways, egress routes, corridors, or occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials and using approved contractors so as not to void existing warranties. Notify warrantor before proceeding. Existing warranties include the following: 1. Roofing assembly. B. Notify warrantor on completion of selective demolition, and obtain documentation verifying that existing system has been inspected and warranty remains in effect. Submit documentation at Project closeout. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities, services, and systems have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. B. Request record information from Owner. Review record documents of existing construction and other existing condition and hazardous material information provided by or available from Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents. C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. D. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. E. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. F. Perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations. 1. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. G. Steel Tendons: Locate tensioned steel tendons and include recommendations for de-tensioning. H. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings and preconstruction photographs. 1. Comply with requirements specified in Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation." 2. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. Take photographs of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations. 3. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements, materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.2 PREPARATION A. Participate in construction waste management training and review waste management plan. B. Dangerous Materials: Drain, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of chemicals, gases, explosives, acids, flammables, or other dangerous materials before proceeding with selective demolition operations. C. Refrigerant: Before starting demolition, remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Comply with requirements specified in Section 01740 "Construction Waste Management." 3.3 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. 1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Section 011400 "Work Restrictions." B. Existing Services and Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Arrange to shut off systems and services with Owner. Inform Owner of activities in writing and obtain approval prior to shutting off utilities. Owner may elect to directly arrange shut off for certain services and systems. 2. If services and systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with selective demolition, provide temporary services and systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services and systems to other occupied parts of building(s) and site campus. 3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material and leave in place. c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material and leave in place. 4. Refer to Division 21, 22, 23, 26, 27, and 28 Sections for additional requirements for shutting off, disconnecting, removing, and sealing or capping utilities and services. Do Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 not start selective demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing have been completed and verified in writing. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, noise control, vibration control, heating, and cooling specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 5. Maintain fire watch during and after flame-cutting operations. 6. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 7. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 8. Remove structural framing members and other materials and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 9. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 10. Dispose of, recycle, or salvage demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." 11. Return elements of construction and surfaces that are to remain to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." C. Reuse, Recycling, and Salvage of Building Elements: Project has been designed to result in targeted minimum end-of-Project rates for salvage or recycling of total non-hazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Do not demolish building elements beyond what is indicated on Drawings without Architect's or Owner’s approval. Use all reasonable means to divert demolition waste from landfills and incinerators. 1. Comply with requirements in Section 017400 "Construction Waste Management." D. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Carefully remove and salvage items indicated on the Drawings, items identified by Owner, and items identified in waste management plan. 2. Clean salvaged items. 3. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 4. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner, or until sale or re-use. 5. Transport items for Owner to Owner's storage area(s) designated by Owner. 6. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. E. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Carefully remove and reinstall items indicated. 2. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 3. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 4. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 5. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. 6. Restore finishes of reinstalled items to match finishes existing prior to removal. F. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.6 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Concrete: Use one of the following methods: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Demolish in small sections. Using power-driven saw, cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) at junctures with construction to remain. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated. 2. Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, and then remove concrete between saw cuts. B. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, and then remove masonry between saw cuts. 1. Existing Brick and Stone: Carefully remove masonry units to minimize damage. Salvage, stack, crate, and store sound brick and stone units until time of delivery to Owner. a. Subject to approval of Owner, deliver surplus sound brick and stone to Owner’s approved storage facility designated by Owner. C. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, and then break up and remove. D. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings." Do not use methods requiring solvent-based adhesive strippers. E. Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than what can be covered in one day by new roofing and so that building interior remains watertight and weather-tight. See Section 017329 "Cutting and Patching" for requirements for patching existing roofing. 1. Comply with existing roofing manufacturer’s warranty requirements. F. Air-Conditioning Equipment: Remove equipment without releasing refrigerants. 3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolition waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 017400 "Construction Waste Management." B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.8 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION 024119 SPECIFICATION SECTION 028213 Asbestos Abatement at Cornell University’s Olin Hall for the Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 Prepared for: Cornell University Infrastructure, Properties and Planning Humphreys Service Building Ithaca, NY 14853 Prepared by: 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Phone: 607-231-6600 Fax: 607-231-6640 Delta Project No. 2018.209.001 PAI Project No. 20758.00 Stephen Prislupsky, Director of Environmental Services NYS DOL Certified Asbestos Project Designer Certificate No. 90-10891 Issued for Construction Dated: 30 November 2018 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 028213-2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Section 028213 – ASBESTOS ABATEMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. This asbestos abatement Project will consist of the removal and disposal of non-asbestos materials, asbestos containing materials and asbestos contaminated materials present within the Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering Phase 1 Project renovation areas. B. Reference Drawings AR1.00 and AR1.04 for asbestos abatement notes, locations, quantities, and details. Reference specification section 01 35 29 – “General Health and Safety Requirements” for the Full Building Asbestos Survey Report. C. Asbestos containing materials to be removed shall include floor tile with non-ACM mastic and various asbestos containing roofing materials. 1. Asbestos Containing Floor Tile (VAT) with Non-Asbestos Mastic: This work shall include the removal and disposal of asbestos containing floor tile (VAT) with Non-ACM mastic in Rooms B77, B00UK and B00UJ as delineated on Drawing AR1.00. VAT abatement operations shall be performed within a single negative pressure enclosure having an attached airlock system as per the requirements of 12 NYCRR Part 56-11.1 for In-Plant Operations. The total quantity of VAT to be removed from the rooms referenced above is approximately 1,090 square feet. 2. Asbestos Containing Roofing Materials: This work shall include the removal and disposal of asbestos containing roofing materials within the locations/limits as shown on Drawing AR1.04. All affected roofing materials are assumed to be asbestos containing materials. Roofing abatement operations shall be performed within exterior regulated abatement work areas as per the requirements of 12 NYCRR Part 56-11.1 for In-Plant Operations. The quantity of asbestos containing roofing to be removed shall be as necessary for all new roof-top HVAC / electrical / plumbing penetrations and for the installation of new roof-top items / equipment including mechanical units, stacks/vents, ductwork, dunnage, platforms, stair systems and associated support components. D. The Contractor shall be aware of all conditions of the Project and is responsible for verifying quantities and locations of all Work to be performed. Failure to do so shall not relieve the Contractor of its obligation to furnish all labor and materials necessary to perform the Work. E. All Work shall be performed in strict accordance with the Project Documents and all governing codes, rules, and regulations. Where conflicts occur between the Project Documents and applicable codes, rules, and regulations, the more stringent shall apply. 1.3 SPECIAL JOB CONDITIONS A. The Contractor may submit for a Site-Specific Variance to accomplish the Project. Variance petition shall be submitted to the Owners Representative for review and approval prior to submission to the New York State Department of Labor (NYS DOL). Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 028213-3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Work shifts and working hours shall be as necessary to complete the project in the required time frame and shall be submitted to the Owner’s Representative for review/approval. The Contractor shall coordinate and schedule all Work with the facility, the Owner and the Owner’s representative. C. Contractor is to provide add / deduct unit rates for the following: 1. ACM Floor Tile with non-asbestos Mastic Removal, per square foot 2. ACM Roofing, per square foot 3. Exterior Foundation Wall ACM Water-Proofing Membrane/Tar Removal, per SF* * - This Unit Price is being included to address the removal of ACM Water-Proofing Membrane/Tar that may be present on the exterior foundation walls below grade. If this material is encountered during construction activities and determined to be AsbestosContaining, it shall be removed as per 12 NYCRR Part 56-11.6 based on the Unit Price requested above. The unit price shall not include excavation as this will be performed as a part of the base bid/base scope. D. Contractor to submit man power and work schedule with bid. E. Owner will provide a tie-in location for electric and water source. The contractor will be responsible for providing GFCI electrical panel(s) and connecting to the building system as necessary for project power. F. Any air sampling necessary to meet OSHA requirements will be the responsibility of the Asbestos Contractor. G. Waste Dumpster locations shall be approved by the Facility Representative. All dumpsters receiving RACM Waste shall be enclosed and lockable (i.e. no open-to dumpsters). 1.4 PERMITS AND COMPLIANCE A. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility and liability for compliance with all applicable Federal, State, and local laws, rules, and regulations pertaining to Work practices, protection of Workers, authorized visitors to the site, persons, and property adjacent to the Work. B. Perform asbestos related Work in accordance with New York State Industrial Code Rule 56 (herein referred to as Code Rule 56), 40 CFR 61, 29 CFR 1926, and as specified herein. Where more stringent requirements are specified, adhere to the more stringent requirements. C. The Contractor must maintain current licenses pursuant to New York State Department of Labor and Department of Environmental Conservation for all Work related to this Project, including the removal, handling, transport, and disposal of asbestos containing materials. D. The Contractor must have and submit proof upon request that any persons employed by the Contractor to engage in or supervise Work on any asbestos Project have a valid NYS asbestos handling certificate pursuant to Code Rule 56. E. Failure to adhere to the Project Documents shall constitute a breach of the Contract and the Owner shall have the right to and may terminate the Contract provided, however, the failure of the Owner to so terminate shall not relieve the Contractor from future compliance. F. The contractor shall be responsible for any waste water permits required to perform his work under this contract. Any cost associated with waste water permits shall be included in his Bid. G. The contractor shall be responsible for any Local City and/or State building permits required to perform his work. Any cost associated with building permits shall be included in his Bid. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 028213-4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Reference the Front–end and Division 01 Documents for eBuilder Submittal procedures and requirements. B. Pre-Work Submittals: Within 7 days prior to the pre-construction conference, the Contractor shall submit the documents listed below for review and approval prior to the commencement of asbestos abatement activities: 1. Contractor license issued by New York State Department of Labor. 2. Progress Schedule: a. Show the complete sequence of abatement activities and the sequencing of Work for each floor. b. Show the dates for the beginning and completion of each major element of Work for each Work Area. 3. Project Notifications: As required by Federal and State regulatory agencies together with proof of transmittal (i.e. certified mail return receipt). 4. Building Occupant Notification: As required by regulatory agencies. 5. Abatement Work Plan: Provide plans that clearly indicate the following: a. All Work Areas/containments numbered sequentially. b. Proposed locations and types of all decontamination enclosures. c. Location of water and electrical connections to building services. d. Waste transport routes through the building to the waste storage container. 6. Disposal Site/Landfill Permit from applicable regulatory agency. 7. NYS Department of Environmental Conservation Waste Transporter Permit. B. On-Site Submittals: Refer to Part 3.01.D for all submittals, documentation, and postings required to be maintained on-site during abatement activities. C. Project Close-out Submittals: Within 15 days of project completion, the Contractor shall submit an electronic pdf format copy of the documents listed below for review and approval prior to the Contractor’s final payment. 1. OSHA compliance air monitoring records conducted during the Work. 2. Daily progress log, including the entry/exit log. 3. A list of all Workers used in the performance of the Project, including name, NYS DOL certification number and type of certification (i.e. supervisor, asbestos handler, etc.). D. Fully executed/signed Originals of all waste disposal manifests shall be submitted as per applicable State and Federal Regulations and time frame requirements. E. The contractor shall also be responsible for completing and submitting the Owner’s “Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan” form included in the front-end Bid Documents. This form shall be submitted and approved by the Cornell Project Manager prior to the Owner issuing any payment for the project. 1.6 PRE-BID MEETING A. Bidders shall attend a pre-bid meeting. Bidding Contractors will be notified in advance of the meeting. B. Contractors shall familiarize themselves with the Contract Documents prior to attending the conference. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 028213-5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.7 APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS A. The Contractor shall comply with the following codes and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: B. Federal Regulations: 1. 29 CFR 1910.1001, "Asbestos" (OSHA) 2. 29 CFR 1910.1200, "Hazard Communication" (OSHA) 3. 29 CFR 1910.134, "Respiratory Protection" (OSHA) 4. 29 CFR 1910.145, "Specification for Accident Prevention Signs and Tags" (OSHA) 5. 29 CFR 1926, "Construction Industry" (OSHA) 6. 29 CFR 1926.1101, "Asbestos, Tremolite, Anthophyllite, and Actinolite" (OSHA) 7. 29 CFR 1926.500 "Guardrails, Handrails and Covers" (OSHA) 8. 40 CFR 61, Subpart A, "General Provisions" (EPA) 9. 40 CFR 61, Subpart M, "National Emission Standard for Asbestos" (EPA) 10. 49 CFR 171-172, Transportation Standards (DOT) C. New York State Regulations: 1. 12 NYCRR, Part 56, "Asbestos", Industrial Code Rule 56 (DOL). 2. 6 NYCRR, Parts 360, 364, Disposal and Transportation (DEC) 3. 10 NYCRR, Part 73, "Asbestos Safety Program Requirements" (DOH) D. Standards and Guidance Documents: 1. American National Standard Institute (ANSI) Z88.2-80, Practices for Respiratory Protection 2. ANSI Z9.2-79, Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Systems 3. EPA 560/585-024, Guidance for Controlling Asbestos Containing Materials in Buildings (Purple Book) 4. EPA 530-SW-85-007, Asbestos Waste Management Guidance 5. ASTM Standard E1368 “Standard Practice for Visual Inspection of Asbestos Abatement Projects.” 1.8 NOTICES A. Where applicable, the Contractor shall provide notification of intent to commence asbestos abatement activities as indicated below. 1. At least ten (10) Working days prior to beginning abatement activities, send written notification to: U.S. Environmental Protection Agency National Emissions Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAPS) Coordinator 26 Federal Plaza New York, NY 10007. 2. At least ten (10) days prior to beginning abatement activities send written notification to: New York State Department of Labor Division of Safety and Health, Asbestos Control Program. State Office Campus Building 12 - Room 454 Albany, NY 12240 B. The Contractor is required to send EPA notification to regulatory agencies via mail or package delivery service that will provide proof of delivery and receipt. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 028213-6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. The Contractor shall post and/or provide Building Occupant Notification at least 10 days prior to beginning abatement activities as required by Code Rule 56. 1.9 PROJECT MONITORING AND AIR SAMPLING A. The Owner shall engage the services of an Environmental Consultant (the Consultant) who shall provide Project Monitoring and Air Sampling for the project. B. The Contractor is required to ensure cooperation of its personnel with the Consultant for the air sampling and Project monitoring functions described in this section. The Contractor shall comply with all direction given by the Consultant during the course of the Project. C. The Consultant shall provide the following administrative services: 1. Review and approve or disapprove all onsite submittals as required by section 3.01. D. The Consultant shall staff the Project with a trained and certified person(s). This individual shall be designated as the Asbestos Project Monitor (APM). 1. The APM shall be on-site at all times the Contractor is on-site for large-project work areas. The Contractor shall not be permitted to conduct any Work unless the APM is onsite (except for inspection of barriers and negative air system during non-working days). 2. The APM shall have the authority to direct the actions of the Contractor verbally and in writing to ensure compliance with the Project documents and all regulations. The APM shall have the authority to Stop Work when gross Work practice deficiencies or unsafe practices are observed, or when ambient fiber concentrations outside the removal area exceed .01 f/cc or background level. a. Such Stop Work order shall be effective immediately and remain in effect until corrective measures have been taken and the situation has been corrected. b. Standby time required to resolve the situation shall be at the Contractor's expense. 3. The APM shall provide the following services: a. Inspection of the Contractor's Work, practices, and procedures, including temporary protection requirements, for compliance with all regulations and Project specifications. b. Provide abatement Project air sampling as required by applicable regulations and the Owner’s requirements. Sampling will include background, work area preparation, asbestos handling, and final cleaning and clearance air sampling. c. Verify daily that all Workers used in the performance of the Project are certified by the appropriate regulatory agency. d. Monitor the progress of the Contractor's Work and report any deviations from the schedule to the Owner’s Representative. e. Monitor, verify, and document all waste load-out operations. f. Verify that the Contractor is performing personal air monitoring daily, and that results are being returned and posted at the site as required. g. The APM shall maintain a log on site that documents all project related and Consultant and Contractor actions, activities, and occurrences. 4. The following minimum inspections shall be conducted by the APM. Additional inspections shall be conducted as required by Project conditions. Progression from one phase of Work to the next by the Contractor is only permitted with the written approval of the APM. a. Pre-Construction Inspection: The purpose of this inspection is to verify the existing conditions of the Work Areas and to document these conditions. b. Pre-Abatement Inspection: The purpose of this inspection is to verify the integrity of each containment system prior to disturbance of any asbestos containing Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 028213-7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 material. This inspection shall take place only after the Work Area is fully prepped for removal. c. Work In-Progress Inspections: The purpose of this inspection is to monitor the Work practices and procedures employed on the Project and to monitor the continued integrity of the containment system. Inspections within the removal areas shall be conducted by the APM during all preparation, removal, and cleaning activities at least twice every Work shift. Additional inspections shall be conducted as warranted. d. Visual Clearance Inspection: The purpose of this inspection is to verify that: all materials in the scope of work have been properly removed; no visible asbestos debris/residue remains; no pools of liquid or condensation remains; and all required cleanings are complete. This inspection shall be conducted before final air clearance testing. e. Post-Clearance Inspection: The purpose of this inspection is to ensure the complete removal of ACM, including debris, from the Work Area after satisfactory final clearance sampling and removal of all isolation and critical barriers and equipment from the Work Area. E. The Consultant shall provide abatement Project air sampling and analysis as required by applicable regulations (New York State and/or AHERA). Sampling will include background, work area preparation, asbestos handling, and final cleaning and clearance air sampling. 1. Unless otherwise directed by the Owner, the Consultant shall have samples analyzed by Phase Contrast Microscopy (PCM). If TEM clearance is required by the Owner, AHERA protocols/methodology shall be followed. 2. Samples shall be collected as required by applicable regulations (New York State and/or AHERA) and these specifications. If Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) clearance air sampling is utilized by the owner, the clearance criteria and sampling protocols must be in compliance with AHERA. If PCM air sample analysis results exceed the satisfactory clearance criteria, then TEM analysis of the entire set of clearance air samples may be used, provided that a standard NIOSH/ELAP accepted laboratory analysis method is utilized that shall report each air sample result in fibers per cubic centimeter. 3. If the air sampling during any phase of the abatement project reveals airborne fiber levels at or above .01 fibers/cc or the established background level, whichever is greater, outside the regulated Work Area, Work shall stop immediately and corrective measures required by Code Rule 56 shall be initiated. Notify all employers and occupants in adjacent areas. The Contractor shall bear the burden of any and all costs incurred by this delay. 4. The Environmental Consultant shall submit copies of all elevated air sampling results collected during abatement and all final air clearance results to the Commissioner of Labor. 1.10 CONTRACTOR AIR SAMPLING A. In addition to the requirements of OSHA 1926.1101, the Contractor shall be required to perform personal air monitoring every Work shift in each Work Area during which abatement activities occur in order to determine that appropriate respiratory protection is being worn and utilized. B. The Contractor shall conduct air sampling that is representative of both the 8-hour time weighted average and 30-minute short-term exposures to indicate compliance with the permissible exposure and excursion limits. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 028213-8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. The Contractor's laboratory analysis of air samples shall be conducted by an NYS DOH ELAP approved laboratory, subject to approval of the Owner’s Representative. D. Results of personnel air sample analyses shall be available, verbally, within twenty-four (24) hours of sampling and shall be posted upon receipt. Written laboratory reports shall be delivered and posted at the Work site within five (5) days. Failure to comply with these requirements may result in all work being stopped until compliance is achieved. 1.11 PROJECT SUPERVISOR A. The Contractor shall designate a full-time Project Supervisor who shall meet the following qualifications: 1. The Project Supervisor shall hold New York State certification as an Asbestos Supervisor. 2. The Project Supervisor shall meet the requirements of a "Competent Person" as defined by OSHA 1926.1101 and shall have a minimum of one year experience as a supervisor. 3. The Project Supervisor must be able to read and write English fluently, as well as communicate in the primary language of the Workers. B. If the Project Supervisor is not on-site at any time whatsoever, all Work shall be stopped. The Project Supervisor shall remain on-site until the Project is complete. The Project Supervisor cannot be removed from the Project without the written consent of the Owner. The Project Supervisor shall be removed from the Project if so requested by the Owner. C. The Project Supervisor shall maintain the bound Daily Project Log that also includes the entry/exit logs as required by New York State Department of Labor and section 2.03 of the specifications and the Waste Disposal Log required by section 4.04 of the specifications. D. The Project Supervisor shall be responsible for the performance of the Work and shall represent the Contractor in all respects at the Project site. The Supervisor shall be the primary point of contact for the Asbestos Project Monitor. 1.12 MEDICAL REQUIREMENTS A. Before exposure to airborne asbestos fibers, provide Workers with a comprehensive medical examination as required by 29 CFR 1910.1001, and 29 CFR 1926.1101. 1. This examination is not required if adequate records show the employee has been examined as required by 29 CFR 1910.1001, and 29 CFR 1926.1101 within the past year. 2. The same medical examination shall be given on an annual basis to employees engaged in an occupation involving asbestos fibers and within thirty (30) calendar days before or after the termination of employment in such occupations. 3. Medical Examination records shall be maintained on site for each employee. 1.13 TRAINING A. As required by applicable regulations, prior to assignment to asbestos Work instruct each employee with regard to the hazards of asbestos, safety and health precautions, and the use and requirements of protective clothing and equipment. B. Establish a respirator program as required by ANSI Z88.2 and 29 CFR 1910.134, and 29 CFR 1926.1101. Provide respirator training and fit testing. C. An onsite "tool box talk" is mandatory for all Contractor field personnel before the asbestos removal can begin. This talk will review Cornell University practices and procedures pertaining to asbestos control. Workers not complying with these specifications or Cornell University practices and procedures will be asked to leave the job. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 028213-9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.14 RESPIRATORY PROTECTION A. Select respirators from those approved by the Mine Safety and Health Administration (MSHA), and the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), Department of Health and Human Services. B. Respirators shall be individually fit-tested to personnel under the direction of an Industrial Hygienist on a yearly basis. Fit-tested respirators shall be permanently marked to identify the individual fitted, and use shall be limited to that individual. Fit-test records shall be maintained on site for each employee. C. Where fiber levels permit, and in compliance with regulatory requirements, Powered Air Purifying Respirators (PAPR) are the minimum allowable respiratory protection permitted to be utilized during gross removal operations of OSHA Class I or OSHA Class II friable ACM. D. No respirators shall be issued to personnel without such personnel participating in a respirator training program. E. High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) respirator filters shall be approved by NIOSH and shall conform to the OSHA requirements in 29 CFR 1910.134 and 29 CFR 1926.1101. F. A storage area for respirators shall be provided by the Contractor in the clean room side of the personnel decontamination enclosure where they will be kept in a clean environment. G. The Contractor shall provide and make available a sufficient quantity of respirator filters so that filter changes can be made as necessary during the work day. Filters will be removed and discarded during the decontamination process. Filters cannot be reused. Filters must be changed if breathing becomes difficult. H. Filters used with negative pressure air purifying respirators shall not be used any longer than one eight (8) hour work day. I. Any authorized visitor, Worker, or supervisor found in the Work Area not wearing the required respiratory protection shall be removed from the Project site and not be permitted to return. J. The Contractor shall have at least two (2) Powered Air Purifying Respirators stored on site designated for authorized visitors use. Appropriate respirator filters for authorized visitors shall be made available by the Contractor. 1.15 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver all materials to the job site in original packages with containers bearing manufacturer's name and label. B. Store all materials at the job site in a suitable and designated area. 1. Store materials subject to deterioration or damage away from wet or damp surfaces and under cover. 2. Protect materials from unintended contamination and theft. 3. Storage areas shall be kept clean and organized. C. Remove damaged or deteriorated materials from the job site. Materials contaminated with asbestos shall be disposed of as asbestos debris as herein specified. 1.16 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Temporary shutdown of HVAC and lock out of electric power to abatement work areas shall be the responsibility of the contractor and shall be coordinated with the owner. If electrical Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 028213-10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 circuits, machinery and other electrical systems in or passing through a given regulated abatement work area must stay in operation, the contractor shall isolate/seal the live electric as per the requirements of 12 NYCRR Part 56 Subpart 56-7.7. B. The Owner will provide a tie-in location to building power for the Contractor’s GFCI electric panel for project power. All temporary power to the work areas shall be brought in from outside the work area through a ground-fault circuit interrupter at the source. The contractor will be responsible for all temporary power (including the power required by the owner's representative for air sampling equipment). All operations associated with electrical service work (i.e. lockout, temporary power hook-up, etc.) shall be performed by a licensed electrician. C. Provide temporary lighting with "weatherproof" fixtures for all Work Areas including decontamination chambers. 1. The entire Work Area shall be kept illuminated at all times. 2. Provide lighting as required by the Environmental Consultant for the purposes of performing required inspections. D. All temporary devices and wiring used in the Work Area shall be capable of decontamination procedures including HEPA vacuuming and wet-wiping. E. Utilize domestic water service, if available, from Owner's existing system. Provide hot water heaters with sufficient capacity to meet Project demands. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING A. Provide personnel utilized during the Project with disposable protective whole body clothing, head coverings, gloves and foot coverings. Provide disposable plastic or rubber gloves to protect hands. Cloth gloves may be worn inside the plastic or rubber for comfort, but shall not be used alone. Make sleeves secure at the wrists and make foot coverings secure at the ankles by the use of tape, or provide disposable coverings with elastic wrists or tops. B. Provide sufficient quantities of protective clothing to assure a minimum of four (4) complete disposable outfits per day for each individual performing abatement Work. C. Eye protection and hard hats shall be provided and made available for all personnel entering any Work Area. D. Authorized visitors shall be provided with suitable protective clothing, headgear, eye protection, and footwear whenever they enter the Work Area. 2.2 SIGNS AND LABELS A. Provide warning signs and barrier tapes at all approaches to asbestos Work Areas. Locate signs at such distance that personnel may read the sign and take the necessary protective steps required before entering the area. 1. Provide danger signs in vertical format conforming to 29 CFR 1926.1101, minimum 20" x 14" displaying the following legend. DANGER ASBESTOS CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY RESPIRATORS AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING ARE REQUIRED IN THIS AREA Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 028213-11 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Provide 3" wide yellow barrier tape printed with black lettered, "DANGER ASBESTOS REMOVAL". Locate barrier tape across all corridors, entrances and access routes to asbestos Work Area. Install tape 3' to 4' AFF. B. Provide asbestos danger labels affixed to all asbestos materials, scrap, waste, debris and other products contaminated with asbestos. 1. Provide asbestos danger labels of sufficient size to be clearly legible, displaying the following legend: DANGER CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS AVOID CREATING DUST CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD 2. Provide the following asbestos labels, of sufficient size to be clearly legible, for display on waste containers (bags or drums) which will be used to transport asbestos contaminated material in accordance with United States Department of Transportation 49 CFR Parts 171 and 172: RQ HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE SOLID, NOS ORM-E, NA 9188 ASBESTOS 3. Generator identification information shall be affixed to each waste container indicating the following printed in indelible ink: Generator Name Facility Name Facility Address 2.3 DAILY PROJECT LOG A. Provide a Daily Project Log. The log shall contain on title page the Project name, name, address and phone number of Owner; name, address and phone number of Owner’s Representative; name, address and phone number of Environmental Consultant; name, address and phone number of Abatement Contractor; emergency numbers including, but not limited to local Fire/Rescue department and all other New York State Department of Labor requirements. B. All entries into the log shall be made in non-washable, permanent ink and such pen shall be strung to or otherwise attached to the log to prevent removal from the log-in area. Under no circumstances shall pencil entries be permitted. C. All persons entering and exiting the Work Area shall sign the log and include name, social security number, and time. D. The Project Supervisor shall document all Work performed daily and note all inspections required by Code Rule 56, i.e. testing and inspection of barriers and enclosures. 2.4 SCAFFOLDING AND LADDERS A. Provide all scaffolding and/or staging as necessary to accomplish the Work of this Contract. Scaffolding may be of suspension type or standing type such as metal tube and coupler, tubular welded frame, pole or outrigger type or cantilever type. The type, erection and use of all scaffolding and ladders shall comply with all applicable OSHA construction industry standards. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 028213-12 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Provide scaffolding and ladders as required by the Environmental Consultant for the purposes of performing required inspections. 2.4 SURFACTANT (AMENDED WATER) A. Wet all asbestos-containing materials prior to removal with surfactant mixed and applied in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Approved Manufacturer: 1. International Protective Coatings Corp.: Serpiflex Shield 2. American Coatings Corp.: EPA 55 Asbestos Removal Agent 3. Certified Technologies: CerTane 2075 Penetrating Surfactant 2.6 ENCAPSULANT A. Encapsulant shall be tinted or pigmented so that application when dry is readily discernible. 2.7 DISPOSAL BAGS, DRUMS, AND CONTAINERS A. Provide 6 mil polyethylene disposal bags printed with asbestos caution labels. Bags shall also be imprinted with U.S. Department of Transportation required markings. B. Provide 30 or 55 gallon capacity fiber, plastic, or metal drums capable of being sealed air and water tight if asbestos waste has the potential to damage or puncture disposal bags. Affix asbestos caution labels on lids and at one-third points around drum circumference to assure ready identification. C. Containers and bags must be labeled in accordance with 40 CFR Part 61 NESHAPS and Code Rule 56. When the bags/containers are moved to the lockable hardtop dumpster from the waste decontamination system washroom, the bags must also be appropriately labeled with the date they are moved on the bag/container in waterproof markings. D. Labeled ACM waste containers or bags shall not be used for non-ACM waste or trash. Any material placed in labeled containers or bags, whether turned inside out or not shall be handled and disposed of as ACM waste. 2.8 HEPA VACUUM EQUIPMENT A. All dry vacuuming performed under this contract shall be performed with High Efficiency Particulate Absolute (HEPA) filter equipped industrial vacuums conforming to ANSI Z9.2. B. Provide tools and specialized equipment including scraping nozzles with integral vacuum hoods connected to a HEPA vacuum with flexible hose. 2.9 POWER TOOLS A. Any power tools used to drill, cut into, or otherwise disturb asbestos material shall be manufacturer equipped with HEPA filtered local exhaust ventilation. 2.10 POLYETHYLENE SHEETING A. All polyethylene (plastic) sheeting used on the Project (including but not limited to sheeting used for critical and isolation barriers, fixed objects, walls, floors, ceilings, waste container) shall be at least 6 mil fire retardant sheeting. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 028213-13 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Decontamination enclosure systems shall utilize at least 6 mil opaque fire retardant plastic sheeting. At least 2 layers of 6 mil reinforced fire retardant plastic sheeting shall be used for the flooring. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Should visible emissions or water leaks be observed outside the Work Area, immediately stop Work and institute emergency procedures per Code Rule 56. Should there be elevated fiber levels outside the Work Area, immediately stop Work, institute emergency procedures per Code Rule 56, and notify all employers and occupants in adjacent areas. All costs incurred in decontaminating such non-Work Areas and the contents thereof shall be borne by the Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Medical approval, fit test reports, and NYS DOL certificates shall be on site prior to admittance of any Contractor’s employees to the asbestos Work Area. C. The following submittals, documentation, and postings shall be maintained on-site by the Contractor during abatement activities at a location approved by the Abatement Project Monitor: 1. Contractor license issued by New York State Department of Labor. 2. Certification, Worker Training, Medical Surveillance: a. New York State Asbestos Handler certification cards for each person employed in the removal, handling, or disturbance of asbestos. b. Evidence that Workers have received proper training required by the regulations and the medical examinations required by OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101. c. Documentation that Workers have been fit tested specifically for respirators used on the Project. 3. Daily OSHA personal air monitoring results. 4. NYS Department of Health ELAP certification for the laboratory that will be analyzing the OSHA personnel air samples. 5. NYS Department of Environmental Conservation Waste Transporter Permit. 6. Project documents (specifications and drawings.) 7. Notifications and variances (site specific and applicable.) Ensure that the most up-todate notifications and variances are on-site. 8. Applicable regulations. 9. Material Safety Data Sheets of supplies/chemicals used on the Project. 10. Approved Abatement Work Plan. 11. List of emergency telephone numbers. 12. Magnahelic manometer semi-annual calibration certification. 13. Daily Project Log. D. The following documentation shall be maintained on-site by the Abatement Project Monitor during abatement activities: 1. Contractor license issued by New York State Department of Labor. 2. Air Sample Log. 3. Air sample results. 4. Project Monitor Daily Log 5. Asbestos Survey Report. 6. A copy of ASTM Standard E1368 “Standard Practice for Visual Inspection of Asbestos Abatement Projects.” E. The Work Area must be vacated by building occupants prior to decontamination enclosure construction and Work Area preparation. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 028213-14 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 F. All demolition necessary to access asbestos containing materials for removal must be conducted within negative pressure enclosures by licensed asbestos handlers. Demolition debris may be disposed of as construction and demolition debris provided the Abatement Project Monitor determines that it is not contaminated with asbestos and there has been no disturbance of ACM within the enclosure. If the demolition debris is determined to be contaminated or ACM has been disturbed, it must be disposed of as asbestos waste. 3.2 WORK AREA ENTRY AND EXIT PROCEDURES A. Access to and from the asbestos Work Area is permitted only through the personnel decontamination enclosure or airlock system (for remote decontamination units and In-Plant Operations Projects) unless otherwise stipulated in a Site-Specific Variance. B. Workers shall sign the entry/exit log upon every entry and exit. C. The following procedures shall be followed when entering the Work Area: 1. Before entering the Work Area, Workers shall proceed to the clean room, remove all street clothes, and don protective clothing, equipment, and respirators. 2. Workers shall proceed from the clean room through the shower room and the equipment room and into the Work Area. D. The following procedures shall be followed when exiting the Work Area: 1. Before leaving the Work Area, gross asbestos contamination will be removed by brushing, wet cleaning and/or HEPA vacuuming. 2. In the equipment room, Workers shall remove disposable clothing, but not respirators, and shall place clothing in plastic disposal bags for disposal as contaminated debris prior to entering the shower room. 3. Workers shall shower thoroughly while wearing respirators, then wash respirator with soap and water prior to removal. 4. Upon exiting the shower, Workers shall don new disposable clothing if the Work shift is to continue or street clothes to exit area. Under no circumstances shall Workers enter public non-Work Areas in disposable protective clothing. E. If remote decontamination enclosures are permitted by Code Rule 56 or a Site-Specific Variance, workers shall wear two disposable suits for all phases of Work. Workers exiting the work area shall HEPA vacuum the outer suit, enter the airlock, remove the outer suit and then place it back into the Work Area. A clean second suit shall be donned before exiting the airlock and proceeding to the decontamination enclosure or another work area via the designated pathway required by Code Rule 56. 3.3 NEGATIVE AIR PRESSURE FILTRATION SYSTEM A. For Minor Project negative pressure tent work areas, a HEP-vacuum shall be utilized for negative air as per 12 NYCRR Part 56-11.3 B. For small-project and large-project work areas, provide a portable asbestos filtration system that develops a minimum pressure differential of negative 0.02 in. of water column within all full enclosure areas relative to adjacent unsealed areas and that provides a minimum of 4 air changes per hour in the Work Area during abatement and 6 air changes for non-friable flooring and/or mastic removal. C. Such filtration systems must be made operational after critical and isolation barriers are installed but before wall, floor, and ceilings are plasticized and shall be operated 24 hours per day during the entire Project until the final cleanup is completed and satisfactory results of the final air samples are received from the laboratory. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 028213-15 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. The system shall include a series of pre-filters and filters to provide High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) filtration of particles down to 0.3 microns at 100% efficiency and below 0.3 microns at 99.9% efficiency. Provide sufficient replacement filters to replace pre-filters every 2 hours, secondary pre-filters every 24 hours, and primary HEPA filters every 600 hours of operation. E. A minimum of one additional filtration unit of at least the same capacity as the primary unit(s) shall be installed and fully functional to be used during primary unit (s) filter changing and in case of primary failure. F. At no time will the unit exhaust indoors, within 15 feet of a receptor, including but not limited to windows and doors, or adversely affect the air intake of the building. Exhaust ducting shall not exceed 25’ in length unless the conditions of AV-A-2 are utilized. Provide construction fencing at ground level exhaust termination locations per Code Rule 56. G. Upon electric power failure or shut-down of any filtration unit, all abatement activities shall stop immediately and only resume after power is restored and all filtration units are fully operating. For shut-downs longer than one hour, all openings into the Work Area, including the decontamination enclosures, shall be sealed. H. The Contractor shall provide a manometer to verify negative air pressure. Manometers shall be read twice daily and recorded within the Daily Project Log. I. There shall be at least a 4-hour settling period after the Work Area is fully prepared and the negative filtration units have been started to ensure integrity of the barriers. J. Once installed and operational, the Contractor’s Supervisor shall conduct daily inspections of the Work Area to insure the airtight integrity of the enclosure and operation of the negative air system. Findings shall be recorded within the Daily Project Log. Inspections shall also be conducted on days when no abatement activities are in progress per Code Rule 56 (i.e. weekends). 3.4 REMOVAL OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS A. Asbestos-containing materials shall be removed in accordance with the Contract Documents and the approved Asbestos Work Plan. Only one type of ACM shall be abated at a time within a Work Area. Where there are multiple types of ACM requiring abatement, Code Rule 56 procedures for sequential abatement shall be followed. B. Sufficiently wet asbestos materials with a low pressure, airless fine spray of surfactant to ensure full penetration prior to material removal. Re-wet material that does not display evidence of saturation. C. One Worker shall continuously apply amended water while ACM is being removed. D. Perform cutting, drilling, abrading, or any penetration or disturbance of asbestos containing material in a manner to minimize the dispersal of asbestos fibers into the air. Use equipment and methods specifically designed to limit generation of airborne asbestos particles. All power operated tools used shall be provided with HEPA equipped filtered local exhaust ventilation. E. Upon removal of ACM from the substrate, the newly exposed surfaces shall be HEPA vacuumed and/or wet cleaned. Surfaces must be thoroughly cleaned using necessary methods and any required solvents to completely remove any adhesive, mastic, etc. F. All removed material shall be placed into 6 mil plastic disposal bags or other suitable container upon detachment from the substrate. Cleanup of accumulations of loose debris or waste shall be performed whenever there is enough accumulation to fill a single bag or container and minimally at the end of each workshift. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 028213-16 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 G. Large components shall be wrapped in two layers of 6 mil polyethylene sheeting. Sharp components likely to tear disposal bags shall be placed in fiber drums or boxes and then wrapped with sheeting. H. Power or pressure washers are not permitted for asbestos removal or clean-up procedures unless approved in a Site-Specific Variance. I. All open ends of pipe and duct insulation not scheduled for removal shall be encapsulated using lag cloth. J. All construction and demolition debris determined by the Environmental Consultant to be contaminated with asbestos shall be handled and disposed of as asbestos waste. K. The use of metal shovels, metal dust pans, etc. are not permitted inside the work area. 3.5 EQUIPMENT AND WASTE CONTAINER DECONTAMINATION AND REMOVAL PROCEDURES A. External surfaces of contaminated containers and equipment shall be cleaned by wet cleaning and/or HEPA vacuuming in the Work Area before moving such items into the waste decontamination enclosure system airlock by persons assigned to this duty. The persons in the Work Area shall not enter the airlock. No gross removal operations are permitted when waste transfer is in progress. B. The containers and equipment shall be removed from the airlock by persons stationed in the washroom during waste removal operations. The external surfaces of containers and equipment shall be cleaned a second time by wet cleaning. C. The cleaned containers of asbestos material and equipment are to be dried of any excessive pooled or beaded liquid, placed in uncontaminated 6 mil plastic bags or sheeting, as the item's physical characteristics demand, and sealed airtight. D. The clean recontainerized items shall be moved into the airlock that leads to the holding area. Workers in the washroom shall not enter this airlock. E. Containers and equipment shall be moved from the airlock and into the holding area by persons dressed in clean personal protective equipment, who have entered from the holding area. F. The cleaned containers of asbestos material and equipment shall be placed in water tight carts with doors or tops that shall be closed and secured. These carts shall be held in the holding area pending removal. The carts shall be wet cleaned and/or HEPA vacuumed at least once each day. G. The exit from the decontamination enclosure system shall be secured to prevent unauthorized entry. H. Where the waste removal enclosure is part of the personnel decontamination enclosure, waste removal shall not occur during shift changes or when otherwise occupied. Precautions shall be taken to prevent short circuiting and cycling of air outward through the shower and clean room. 3.6 NON-FRIABLE FLOORING AND/OR MASTIC REMOVALS A. Except as modified by this section, removal of all non-friable organically bound (NOB) Asbestos Containing Floor Tile (VAT) shall conform to all provisions of this specification. B. Unless Site Specific Variances have been otherwise obtained, removals shall be conducted in accordance with the provisions of 12 NYCRR Part 56-11.1 for In-Plant Operations. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 028213-17 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Abatement work shall be performed within a negative pressure enclosure established via the installation of critical barriers and establishing negative air. D. Non-certified Workers are not allowed in the Work Area until the Work Area is cleared by the Asbestos Project Monitor. E. An attached airlock system shall be utilized for each work area for access/egress. F. The removal of the VAT may require the use of scrapers, power tools, or other methods/ procedures to ensure complete removal. The contractor shall be responsible for damage to all surfaces/components to remain that is caused by his work. G. Waste material shall be placed in properly labeled 6 mil plastic bags or other appropriate containers. The outside of the bags or containers shall be wet wiped and/or HEPA vacuumed before being passed into the airlock for double- bagging. The bags or containers shall then be transported to the waste storage container. All transportation of waste bags and containers outside the Work Area shall be in watertight carts. H. Dumpsters used for waste storage shall be lined with two layers of six mil polyethylene. Opentop dumpsters shall be secured/closed a minimum plywood cover and polyethylene flaps that are sealed at the end of each work shift. I. Personal protective equipment, including respirators, shall be utilized and worn during all removal operations until the Work Area is cleared by the Asbestos Project Monitor. J. Following completion of gross abatement and after all accumulations of asbestos waste materials have been containerized, the following decontamination procedures shall be followed: 1. All surfaces in the active Work Area shall be HEPA vacuumed and then wet cleaned. 2. The Asbestos Project Monitor shall conduct a visual inspection of the Work Area for cleanliness. 3. Upon satisfactory visual inspection results, final clearance air sampling shall be performed. 4. Upon receipt of satisfactory final clearance air sampling results, the isolation and critical barriers shall be removed. Following this, the decontamination enclosures shall be removed. K. OSHA compliance air monitoring is required per section 1.10. 3.7 REMOVALS OF EXTERIOR NON-FRIABLE ASBESTOS CONTAINING ROOFING MATERIALS (ACRM’S) AND EXTERIOR FOUNDATION WALL WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE/TAR A. Except as modified by this section, removal of exterior non-friable ACM roofing and foundation wall waterproofing membrane/tar (if present) shall conform to all provisions of this specification. B. Unless Site Specific Variances have been otherwise obtained, removals shall be conducted in accordance with the provisions of Code Rule 56 Subpart 56-11.1 for In-Plant Operations. C. The immediate area where roofing/wall coating is being removed shall be considered the active regulated work areas. The asbestos project regulated abatement work area shall extend twenty-five (25') feet from the perimeter of the immediate work area and shall have signage in accordance with Section 56-7.4. An airlock shall be required at the entrance to the regulated abatement work area to serve as a changing area, if the workers shall have to pass through enclosed publicly occupied space, such as from a roof through an interior stairway, to access the decontamination units. D. Non-certified Workers are not allowed in the Work Area until the Work Area is cleared by the Asbestos Project Monitor. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 028213-18 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 E. All roof-top/building openings (including but not limited to operable windows, doors, hatches, vents, ducts, and grilles) within 25 feet of the active work area shall be sealed with two layers of six mil polyethylene. G. The removal of the ACM may require the use of scrapers, solvents, mastic removal chemicals, or other methods/procedures to ensure complete removal. H. The Contractor is required to provide temporary protection of the building (i.e. roof, window openings, construction joints, etc.) at the end of each Work shift so as to maintain the building in a watertight condition. I. Dumpsters used for waste storage shall be lined with two layers of six mil polyethylene. The top shall be closed with polyethylene flaps that are sealed at the end of each work shift. J. Personal protective equipment, including respirators, shall be utilized and worn during all removal operations until the Work Area is cleared by the Asbestos Project Monitor. K. The Owner may, at his discretion, choose to conduct air sampling. If air samples collected during abatement indicate any airborne asbestos fiber concentration(s) at or above 0.01 f/cc, Work shall be stopped immediately and Work methods shall be altered to reduce the airborne asbestos fiber concentration(s). L. Following completion of gross abatement and after all accumulations of asbestos waste materials have been containerized, the following decontamination procedures shall be followed: 1. All surfaces in the Work Area shall be HEPA vacuumed and then wet cleaned. 2. The Asbestos Project Monitor shall conduct a visual inspection of the Work Area for cleanliness. 3. Upon satisfactory visual inspection results, the isolation and critical barriers shall be removed. 3.8 RESTORATION OF FIRESTOPPING AND FINISHES A. Finishes damaged by asbestos abatement activities including, but not limited to, plaster/paint damage due to duct tape and spray adhesives, and floor tile lifted due to wet or humid conditions, shall be restored prior to final payment. 1. Finishes unable to be restored shall be replaced under this Contract. 2. All foam and expandable foam products and materials used to seal Work Area openings shall be completely removed upon completion of abatement activities. B. All penetrations (including, but not limited to, pipes, ducts, etc.) through fire rated construction shall be firestopped using materials and systems tested in accordance with ASTM E814 on Projects where reinsulation is part of the required work. PART 4 DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS WASTE 4.1 TRANSPORTATION AND DISPOSAL SITE A. The Contractor's Hauler and Disposal Site shall be approved by the Owner’s Representative. B. The Contractor shall give twenty-four (24) hour notification prior to removing any waste from the site. Waste shall be removed from the site only during normal working hours unless otherwise specified. No waste may be taken from the site unless the Contractor and Environmental Consultant are present and the Environmental Consultant authorizes the release of the waste as described herein. C. All waste generated as part of the asbestos project shall be removed from the site within ten (10) calendar days after successful completion of all asbestos abatement work. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 028213-19 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. Upon arrival at the Project Site, the Hauler must possess and present to the Environmental Consultant a valid New York State Department of Environmental Conservation Part 364 Asbestos Hauler's Permit. The Environmental Consultant may verify the authenticity of the hauler's permit with the proper authority. E. The Hauler, with the Contractor and the Environmental Consultant, shall inspect all material in the transport container prior to taking possession and signing the Asbestos Waste Manifests. F. Unless specifically approved by the Owner, the Contractor shall not permit any off-site transfers of the waste or allow the waste to be transported or combined with any other off-site asbestos material. The Hauler must travel directly to the disposal site as identified on the notifications with no unauthorized stops. 4.2 WASTE STORAGE CONTAINERS A. All waste containers shall be fully enclosed and lockable (i.e. enclosed dumpster, trailer, etc.). No open containers will be permitted on-site (i.e. open dumpster with canvas cover, etc.) unless specifically permitted by a Site-Specific Variance. B. The Environmental Consultant shall verify that the waste storage container and/or truck tags (license plates) match that listed on the New York State Department of Environmental Conservation Part 364 permit. Any container not listed on the permit shall be removed from the site immediately. C. The container shall be plasticized and sealed with two (2) layers of 6 mil polyethylene. Once on site, it shall be kept locked at all times, except during load out. The waste container shall not be used for storage of equipment or contractor supplies. D. While on-site, the container shall be labeled with EPA Danger signage: DANGER CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS AVOID CREATING DUST CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD E. The New York State Department of Environmental Conservation Asbestos Hauler's Permit number shall be stenciled on both sides and back of the container. F. The container is not permitted to be loaded unless it is properly plasticized, has the appropriate danger signage affixed, and has the permit number appropriately stenciled on the container. 4.3 ASBESTOS WASTE MANIFESTS A. The proposed asbestos waste manifest shall be submitted to the Owner’s Representative prior to the start of the project for review and approval. B. The Manifest shall be completed by the Contractor and verified by the Environmental Consultant that all the information and amounts are accurate and the proper signatures are in place. C. The Manifests shall have the appropriate signatures prior to any waste being removed from the site. D. Copies of the completed Manifest shall be retained by the Environmental Consultant and the Contractor and shall remain on site for inspection. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 028213-20 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 E. Upon arrival at the Disposal Site, the Manifest shall be signed by the Disposal Facility operator to certify receipt of ACM covered by the manifest. The Disposal Facility operator shall return the original Manifest to the Contractor. F. The Contractor shall forward copies of the Manifest to the Owner’s Representative within 14 days of the waste container being removed from the site. Failure to do so may result in payment being withheld from the Contractor. G. Originals of all waste disposal manifests shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Owner’s Representative with the final close-out documentation. END OF SECTION 028213 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following. 1. Footings. 2. Foundation walls. 3. Slab-on-grade. 4. Grouting post base plates. 5. Installing embedded steel anchorages provided by others for the attachment of structural steel. 6. Housekeeping pads and curbs for equipment. 7. Grout for wall opening infills. 8. Grouting of damaged or removed concrete and concrete encasement of existing steel framing. 9. All other items of concrete and related work shown on the Drawings, specified herein, or needed to make the work of this Section complete. 10. Field verification of existing conditions. 1.2 GENERAL CONCRETE REQUIREMENT A. It is the intent of this Specification to secure, and the responsibility of the Contractor to provide, concrete of homogeneous structure that, when hardened, will have the required strength, appearance, and durability. To this end, the requirements hereinafter specified must be met. B. Except for that specifically excluded below, furnish and combine materials for all the work indicated on the Drawings or herein specified to be of plain or reinforced concrete, its installation with forms and reinforcement, its curing and finishing. Shop drawings, tools, ways, apparatus, and equipment necessary for concrete production, installation, and finish are included. 1.3 SCOPE OF WORK A. The following are excluded from the work specified in this Section. 1. Furnishing of certain metal inserts and other embedded items, installed under this Section, but supplied by other trades, including but not limited to stone masonry anchors. 2. Inserts and pipe sleeves for mechanical trades to be furnished and installed by mechanical contractors. B. Notify all other trades responsible for installing inserts, sleeves, etc., when ready for such installation and for final checking immediately before concrete is placed. Cooperate with such trades to obtain proper installation. 1.4 RELATED WORK Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 A. Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other Specification Sections that relate directly to work of this Section include, but are not limited to, the following. 1. Division 1 Section Submittal Procedures. 2. Division 4 Section Concrete Unit Masonry 3. Division 5 Section Structural Steel. 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The following documents are a part of this Specification except as modified in this Section, including references contained in each document. Comply with all applicable Sections of the documents and the reference standards unless specifically modified herein. 1. 2015 New York State Building Code. 2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): a. AASHTO T260 – Methods of Sampling and Testing for Total Chloride Ion in Concrete and Concrete Raw Materials 3. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. ACI 117 – Standard Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials b. ACI 211.1 – Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal Weight Concrete c. ACI 214 – Recommendation for Evaluation of Compression Test Results of Field Concrete d. ACI 301 – Standard Specification for Structural Concrete e. ACI 304 – Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing and Placing Concrete f. ACI 305 – Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting g. ACI 306 – Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting h. ACI 306.1 – Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting i. ACI 308 – Recommended Practice for Curing Concrete j. ACI 309 – Recommended Practice for Consolidation of Concrete k. ACI 311 – Recommended Practice for Concrete Inspection l. ACI 315 – Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures m. ACI 318 – Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete n. ACI 347 – Guide to Formwork for Concrete o. ACI 515 – A Guide to the Use of Waterproofing, Dampproofing, Protective, and Decorative Barrier Systems for Concrete p. ACI 613 – Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions for Concrete q. ACI Concrete Craftsman Series 4. ASTM International (ASTM): a. ASTM C31 – Standard Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. b. ASTM C33 – Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. c. ASTM C39 – Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. d. ASTM C94 – Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. e. ASTM C143 – Standard Method of Test for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete. f. ASTM C150 – Standard Specification for Portland Cement. g. ASTM C173 – Standard Method of Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 h. ASTM C192 – Method of Making and Curing Concrete Compression and Flexure Test Specimens in the Laboratory. i. ASTM C231 – Method of Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. j. ASTM C260 – Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. k. ASTM C309 – Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane – Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. l. ASTM C494 – Standard Specifications for Chemical Admixtures of Concrete. m. ASTM C595 – Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cement. n. ASTM D1751 – Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction o. ASTM D1752 – Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction p. ASTM E329 – Standard Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction 5. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute: a. Manual of Standard Practice 6. National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (NRMCA): a. NRMCA Check List for Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities 1.6 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Concrete and steel materials shall meet the following requirements: 1. Construction Waste Management: Steel reinforcement material shall be recycled. 2. Construction Waste Management: Concrete waste shall be recycled, or ground and used as fill (must be weighed and documented). Comply with Section 017419 “Construction Waste Management and Disposal”. 3. Recycled Content, (postconsumer + one-half preconsumer): Must contain minimum of 85% postconsumer recycled content for steel and a minimum of 6% preconsumer recycled content for concrete. 4. Regional Materials, Extracted, Processed & Manufactured Regionally: All aggregate, water, and sand material must be extracted/processed/manufactured within 500 mi of the project site. The weight percent of regionally extracted material in concrete must be provided. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform all work in strict accordance with all applicable laws and regulations of the building code and with all other authorities having jurisdiction. All such requirements shall take precedence over the requirements of the Specifications, except that where the requirements of the Specifications are more exacting or stringent. B. Concrete Mix Design: The Contractor shall employ an independent testing laboratory, acceptable to the Owner, to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes or, when acceptable to the Engineer, provide copies of recently made material tests and mix designs. 1. If, at any time during construction, the concrete resulting from the approved mix design deviates from Specification requirements, the Contractor shall have his laboratory modify the design, subject to approval, until the specified concrete is obtained. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting, as directed by Engineer, at anytime during progress of work. Allow free access to material stockpiles and facilities. All tests, including retesting of rejected materials and installed work, shall be done at Contractor’s expense. D. The Contractor is responsible for correction of concrete work which does not conform to the specified requirements, including strength, mix proportions, air-void system, tolerances, and finishes. Correct deficient concrete as directed by the Engineer. E. The Architect may reject concrete which exhibits the following defects. 1. Spalling: Concrete spalling due to shale, alkali reactivity, rusting steel too close to the surface, carbonation, improper removal of formwork, expansion of cast-in-steel during the welding process, or other reasons. 2. Cracking and Crazing: Concrete cracking and crazing due to lack of control joints or high water/cement ratio above 0.50. 3. Air Holes: Air holes resulting from improper vibration and excessive heights of individual layers of pours between vibration. Air holes due to spreading of concrete with vibrators rather than moving buckets or hoses. 4. Honeycombing: Concrete honeycombing, including loss of fines from leaking formwork or other causes. 5. Carbonation: Carbonated concrete resulting from heating equipment in an enclosed space. 6. Debris in Concrete: Concrete that includes debris, whether caused by insufficient cleaning of formwork or lack of cleanout and access doors at base of formwork. 1.8 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in compliance with Division 1 Section Submittal Procedures. B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and pre-consumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. 2. Product Certificates for Credit MR 5: For products and materials required to comply with requirements for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material. a. Include statement indicating location of manufacturer and distance to Project for each regionally manufactured material. C. Submit the following action submittals for review and approval. 1. Concrete Mix Design for Each Type of Concrete: The Contractor shall warrant by the submission of the design mixes that such mixes are totally representative of the concrete that he intends to supply to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Submit new design mixes for review and approval when any change in materials is required or needed. Include the following information for each concrete mix design. a. Method used to determine the proposed mix design (per ACI 301 Article 3.9). b. Compressive strength at seven and twenty-eight days. Submit strength test records, mix design materials, conditions, and proportions for concrete used for Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 record of tests, standard deviation calculation, and determination of required average compressive strength. c. Gradation of fine and coarse aggregates. Testing data confirming proposed coarse aggregate meets ASTM C33 class designation. Include ASTM test results for aggregates subject to freeze-thaw environment. d. Proportions of all ingredients, including all admixtures to be added either at the time of batching or at the jobsite. e. Water-cement ratio. f. Slump testing in accordance with ASTM C143. g. Air content of freshly mixed concrete by the pressure method (ASTM C231) or the volumetric method (ASTM C173). h. Air content tests on hardened concrete mix designs tested in accordance with ASTM C457. i. Unit weight of concrete – ASTM C138. j. Mill test reports of fly ash chemical and physical analysis and certification of compliance with ASTM C618, Class C or F. k. Manufacturer’s Spec Data Sheets for each concrete admixture, including brand name, manufacturer, and dosage rate range. 2. Shop Drawings: The Contract Drawings show locations and dimensions for the concrete work and locations of reinforcement. Provide reinforcement shop drawings showing details of the work. a. Precheck the shop drawings prior to submission to the Architect for conformity of details to the Contract Documents and as coordinated with other work. The signature of a representative of the General Contractor indicating that the drawings have been prechecked will be required. The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for the conformity of dimensions and details of the shop drawings to the Contract Documents. b. After receipt of the shop drawings by the Architect, they will be reviewed and necessary corrections will be marked on reproducible drawings that will then be returned. Corrections shall then be made on the drawings and resubmitted. This procedure will be continued until the drawings are released for construction. c. Keep at least one copy of each approved shop drawing in the field office and do not keep drawings not bearing evidence of release for construction by the Architect on the job. d. Include on the reinforcement shop drawings, setting plans and drawings or schedules showing details of fabrication of reinforcement and identifying the material for installation. Shop drawings shall conform to ACI 315. Show on the drawings main reinforcing, temperature reinforcement, and all accessories required. Complete setting drawings will show and identify by mark or otherwise all the bars to be incorporated in the work. 3. Product Data and Construction Procedures: a. Form release agent. b. Curing paper. c. Nonshrink grout. d. Wet weather protection procedures in accordance with ACI 301. e. Winter weather procedures in accordance with ACI 306. f. Hot weather procedures in accordance with ACI 305. D. Submit the following reports or certifications. 1. Schedule of concrete placement. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Cement-mill test reports. 3. Mill test reports for reinforcement. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protect concrete from damage and reduced strength or performance due to weather extremes during mixing, placing, and curing. Unless adequate protection is provided, do not place concrete during rain, sleet, or snow. B. Unless special precautions are taken to protect concrete, do not work when temperatures are below 40°F or when temperatures are expected to fall below 40°F within 72 hrs after placing concrete. During cold weather, follow approved winter weather procedures. C. Maintain concrete temperature at placement at less than 85°F. Cool the mix in a manner acceptable to the Engineer if the concrete temperature is higher. During hot weather, follow approved hot weather procedures. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I or Type II. B. Aggregate: ASTM C33. C. Admixtures: 1. Use water-reducing admixture conforming to ASTM C494 in all concrete. 2. Air-Entraining Agent: ASTM C260. 3. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 4. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class F. 5. Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag (GGBFS): ASTM C989, Grade 120. D. Reinforcing Steel and Accessories: 1. Bars: a. ASTM A615, Grade 60, except Grade 40 for slab dowels with multiple bends. Legible mill marks shall show manufacturer, size, and grade of steel of each bar. b. Sustainability Requirements: 1) Recycled Content of Steel Products: Reinforcing steel materials must meet the requirements of LEED Credit MR 4.1 “Recycled Content.” Provide reinforcing bars with an average recycled postconsumer recycled content of at least 60%. 2) Steel materials shall be fabricated regionally (within a radius of 500 mi) and must be composed of materials manufactured and recovered within a 500 mi radius of the project. If regionally extracted and manufactured material is provided to the project, provide the extraction and manufacture location on LEED MCDS form in accordance with LEED Credit MR 5.1. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Welded Wire Fabric/Reinforcing Bar Mats: a. Acceptable as substitutes for slab reinforcement indicated ASTM A496/ASTM A184 respectively; flat sheets only. b. Sustainability Requirements: 1) Recycled Content of Steel Products: Reinforcing steel materials must meet the requirements of LEED Credit MR 4.1 “Recycled Content.” Provide reinforcing bars with an average recycled post-consumer recycled content of at least 60%. 2) Steel materials shall be fabricated regionally (within a radius of 500 mi) and must be composed of materials manufactured and recovered within a 500 mi radius of the project. If regionally extracted and manufactured material is provided to the project, provide the extraction and manufacture location on LEED MCDS form in accordance with LEED Credit MR 5.1. 3. Supports, Chairs, Bolsters, and Spacers: Conform to Chapter 3 of CRSI MSP-1. Use Class C, plastic-protected supports for concrete exposed to view or to be painted. For slabs-on-grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs. 4. Tie Wire: 18 ga black annealed, ASTM A82. 5. Adhesive Rebar Dowels: a. Epcon Ceramic 6 Epoxy Rebar Anchor by ITW Ramset/Red Head. b. Hilti HY-200 System. E. Conform to the following requirements for other materials that are to be incorporated into the work or used in the production of the work or where a substitute is requested and approved by the Architect. 1. Form Release Agent: “Nox-Crete,” as manufactured by the Nox-Crete Company of Omaha, Nebraska, or approved equal. 2. Curing Paper: Opaque waterproof paper for curing flat surfaces conforming to ASTM C171. 3. Nonshrink Grout: 8,000 psi minimum twenty-eight-day compressive strength at fluid consistency, “Masterflow 928 Grout” by Master Builders, “Five Star” by U.S. Grout Corp., or approved equal. F. Forms and Accessories: 1. Construct forms in accordance with ACI 301. 2. Provide 1/2 in. chamfer strips for all vertical and horizontal edges of pads and curbs. G. Sustainability Requirements: 1. A minimum of 50% of new wood-based formwork for concrete shall be from stock certified in accordance with the Forest Stewardship Council’s principles and criteria. 2. Source concrete materials regionally (within a radius of 500 mi) composed of materials extracted, harvested, or recovered within a 500 mi radius of the project. 3. Adhesives and sealants applied on site must meet the requirements of LEED Credit MR 4.1 “Low-Emitting Materials, Adhesives, and Sealants.” 4. Concrete materials must meet the requirements of LEED Credit MR 4.1 “Recycled Content.” Ranges of fly ash and slag substitutions are shown in the concrete mix proportions. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.2 ADMIXTURES A. General Admixture Requirements: 1. The concrete supplier and Contractor shall use manufacturer’s product identified in this Section or submit alternate manufacturer product for approval by the Architect. 2. All admixtures used in the concrete shall be produced by a single manufacturer. 3. The concrete supplier and Contractor shall certify compatibility of all ingredients in each mix design. Use admixtures in strict accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 4. The concrete supplier and Contractor shall account for admixture volume in the concrete mix proportions in accordance with admixture manufacturer’s recommendations. 5. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing more than 0.1% chloride ions. B. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures. Do not add air-entraining admixtures to interior flatwork. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of following, or approved equivalent: 1. Air-Tite, Cormix Construction Chemicals. 2. Air-Mix or Perma-Air, Euclid Chemical Co. 3. Darex AEA or Daravair, W.R. Grace & Co. 4. MB-VR or Micro-Air, Master Builders, Inc. 5. Sealtight AEA, W.R. Meadows, Inc. 6. Sika AER, Sika Corp. C. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of following, or approved equivalent: 1. Chemtard, ChemMasters Corp. 2. PSI N, Cormix Construction Chemicals. 3. Eucon WR-75, Euclid Chemical Co. 4. WRDA, W.R. Grace & Co. 5. Pozzolith Normal or Polyheed, Master Builders, Inc. 6. Metco W.R., Metalcrete Industries. 7. Prokrete-N, Prokrete Industries. 8. Plastocrete 161, Sika Corp. D. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494, Type D. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of following, or approved equivalent: 1. PSI-R Plus, Cormix Construction Chemicals. 2. Eucon Retarder 75, Euclid Chemical Co. 3. Daratard-17, W.R. Grace & Co. 4. Pozzolith R, Master Builders, Inc. 5. Protard, Prokrete Industries. 6. Plastiment, Sika Corporation. E. Water-Reducing, Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494, Type E. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of following, or approved equivalent: 1. Q-Set, Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co. 2. Lubricon NCA, Cormix Construction Chemicals. 3. Accelguard 80, Euclid Chemical Co. 4. Daraset, W.R. Grace & Co. 5. Pozzutec 20, Master Builders, Inc. 6. Accel-Set, Metalcrete Industries. F. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type F or Type G. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of following, or approved equivalent: 1. Super P, Anti-Hydro Co., Inc. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Cormix 200, Cormix Construction Chemicals. 3. Eucon 37, Euclid Chemical Co. 4. WRDA 19 or Daracem, W.R. Grace & Co. 5. Rheobuild or Polyheed, Master Builders, Inc. 6. Superslump, Metalcrete Industries. 7. PSPL, Prokrete Industries. 8. Sikament 300, Sika Corp. G. Non-Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated non-setaccelerating anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of following, or approved equivalent: 1. Axim Concrete Technologies; Catexol CN-CI. 2. Grace Construction Products, W.R. Grace & Co.; DCI-S. 3. Master Builders, Inc.; Rheocrete 222+. 4. Sika Corporation; FerroGard-901. 2.3 WATERSTOPS A. Self-Expanding Butyl Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, butyl rubber with sodium bentonite or other hydrophilic polymers, for adhesive bonding to concrete, 3/4 by 1 in. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of following, or approved equivalent: 1. CETCO; Volclay Waterstop-RX-101. 2. Concrete Sealants Inc.; Conseal CS-231. 3. Sika Greenstreak; Swellstop. 4. Henry Company, Sealants Division; Hydro-Flex. 5. JP Specialties, Inc.; Earthshield Type 20. 6. Tremco; Superstop. 7. Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing; Mirastop. 2.4 CURING MATERIALS A. For Flatwork: Any of the following. 1. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M-182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz/sq yd when dry. 2. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. 3. Curing Paper: ASTM C 171, opaque. B. Water: Potable. C. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating. Do not use curing compounds on any concrete flatwork. Volatile organic compound (VOC) content shall be limited to no more than 205 g/l. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of following, or approved equivalent: 1. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; AH Curing Compound #2 DR WB. 2. Burke by Edoco; Aqua Resin Cure. 3. ChemMasters; Safe-Cure Clear. 4. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc., a Dayton Superior Company; W.B. Resin Cure. 5. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day Chem Rez Cure (J-11-W). Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 6. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Kurez DR VOX. 7. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Thinfilm 420. 8. Lambert Corporation; Aqua Kure-Clear. 9. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M Cure R. 10. Meadows, W.R., Inc.; 1100 Clear. 11. Nox-Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation; Resin Cure E. 12. Symons Corporation, a Dayton Superior Company; Resi-Chem Clear Cure. 13. Tamms Industries, Inc.; Horncure WB 30. 14. Unitex; Hydro Cure 309. 15. US Mix Products Company; US Spec Maxcure Resin Clear. 16. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Enviocure 100. 2.5 CONCRETE MIX PROPORTIONS A. Normal-Weight Concrete Mix for Interior Equipment Pads, Curbs, and Infills: Proportion normalweight concrete mixture as follows. 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4,000 psi at twenty-eight days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45. 3. Fly Ash Content: Fly ash shall constitute a minimum of 10% of the total weight of cementitious materials. 4. Slump Limit: 8 in. for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 in. before adding waterreducing, high-range water-reducing, or plasticizing admixture, ± 1 inch. 5. Air Content: As mixed at point of delivery for 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate size; entrainment for pumping and workability allowed subject to finishing techniques that prevent delamination of steel troweled surfaces B. Foundation Walls and Footings: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows. 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 5,000 psi at twenty-eight days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45. 3. Fly Ash Content: Fly ash shall constitute a minimum of 10% of the total weight of cementitious materials. 4. Slump Limit: 8 in. for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 in. before adding waterreducing, high-range water-reducing, or plasticizing admixture, ± 1 inch. 5. Air Content: 6%, ± 1.5% at point of delivery for 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate size. 6. Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: 3 gal/cu yd. C. Exterior Slabs-on-grade: Proportion normal-weight-concrete mixture as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 5,000 psi at twenty-eight days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious-Materials Ratio: 0.40. 3. Fly Ash Content: Fly ash shall constitute a minimum of 10% of the total weight of cementitious materials. 4. Slump Limit: 8 in. for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 in. before adding waterreducing, high-range water-reducing, or plasticizing admixture, ± 1 inch. 5. Air Content: 6%, ± 1.5% at point of delivery for 3/4 in. nominal maximum aggregate size. 6. Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: 3gal/cu yd. D. The specified twenty-eight-day design strength is a minimum standard. The watercementitious-materials ratio shall not exceed the specified value, including any water added to Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-11 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 meet specified slump in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C94. Weight of fly ash shall be included with the weight of cement to determine the water-cementitious materials ratio. E. Proportion all concrete in accordance with ACI 301. F. Determination of concrete slump for each placing condition shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and the Concrete Mix Designer, subject to compliance with the materials and admixtures as specified herein. 1. Concrete slump before the addition of the admixture should be 1-1/2 to 3 in. and not more than 7 in. after addition of the superplasticizer. 2. The consistency shall be uniformly maintained within the allowable range of slump for the job materials. The consistency shall be determined by the AASHTO Method T-119. This range of slump is to be maintained for all concrete, including pumped concrete. G. Contractor may request mix design adjustments when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant. Adjustments shall be made at no additional cost to Owner and as accepted by Engineer. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by Engineer before using adjusted mix designs in work. H. Use of Admixtures: 1. Use water-reducing admixtures or high-range water-reducing admixtures (superplasticizer) in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions. 2. Use non-chloride-accelerating admixtures in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50°F in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions. 3. Use air-entraining admixture in concrete indicated to be air entrained. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer’s prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having the specified total air content. 2.6 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI’s “Manual of Standard Practice.” 2.7 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C94M and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90°F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 11/2 hrs to 75 min.; when air temperature is above 90°F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 min. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION OF FORMS A. Construct formwork so that concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-12 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows. 1. Class C, 1/2 in. typical or, 2. Class B, 1/4 in. on walls exposed to view. C. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like for easy removal. 1. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material. E. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. F. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. G. Form openings, chases, offsets, recess, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. H. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Coordinate the installation of all inserts required by other trades. Such inserts normally are to be in place prior to the placing of reinforcing steel. B. Place all anchor bolts, adjustable anchor slots, etc., furnished under other Sections. C. Do not allow embedded pipe, other than electrical conduit, in any structural concrete. D. Provide sleeves or holes for pipes passing through. 3.3 MIXING AND PLACING CONCRETE A. Use ready-mixed concrete throughout. B. Place no concrete until all inserts, sleeves, and other work to be built into the concrete have been inspected and approved by all trades concerned. 3.4 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. General: Formwork for footings and foundation walls of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50°F for 24 hrs after placing concrete, if concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations are maintained. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-13 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent each time a form is reused. C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. 3.5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI’s “Manual of Standard Practice” for placing reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces or toward vapor barrier. 3.6 JOINTS A. Construction Joints: 1. Comply with ACI 301, Para. 5.3.2.6, and as follows. a. When construction joints are required or permitted, obtain bond by roughening the surface of the concrete in a manner which will expose the aggregate uniformly and will not leave laitance, loosened particles of aggregate, or damaged concrete at the surface. Dampen the cleaned surface with water and slush with a coating of 1:1-1/2 cement-sand grout. Place new concrete before grout has attained its initial set. Clean horizontal construction joints and pour the cement-sand mortar over joints in walls to a depth of 1 in. before depositing concrete. 3.7 FLOOR FINISHES A. Conform to and measure tolerance of finish in accordance with ACI 302. 1. Equipment Pads: a. Floor finish tolerance per ACI 117, Section 4.5.7 – Flat classification (3/16 in. per 10 ft) B. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route or as indicated for slopes to drains. Coordinate required final finish with the Architect before application. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-14 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Acceptance/Rejection: a. Make all measurements within 72 hrs of placement before removal of any forms, including edge forms. Set sectional boundaries at construction joints. b. Provide remedial measures locally if individual slab section measures less than either of specified flatness or levelness numbers. c. Provide remedial measures for entire slab installation if combination of all local results measures less than either of the specified flatness or levelness numbers. d. Remedial Measures for Rejected Slabs: Correct rejected slab areas by grinding, planning, surface repair with underlayment compound or repair topping, retopping, or removal and replacement of entire rejected slab areas, as directed by the Architect, until achieving a slab finish within specified tolerances. 3.8 SUBGRADE AND SUBBASE PREPARATION A. Soil Formed and Soils Supported Slabs-on-Grade: 1. Subgrade Preparation: Provide 12 in. compacted crushed stone as layer of subgrade below concrete surface. Proof roll to obtain firm, even surface, following recommendations in the geotechnical report. Remove and replace uncompactable materials. Fill and consolidate soft areas as directed by Geotechnical Consultant. Compact to obtain even subgrade at 95% of maximum dry density. 2. Subbase: Spread and compact per the recommendations in the geotechnical report; recompact as directed in the field by Geotechnical Consultant. 3. Set waterproofing directly under the underside of slab to be poured at all interior slabs. B. Footings: Proof roll and compact per the recommendations in the geotechnical report. If required by the Geotechnical Consultant in the field, prepare base with lean concrete mix or granular material for stabilizing the surface. C. Do not pour any slabs-on-grade or footings without the approval of the base by the Geotechnical Consultant in the field. 3.9 CURING A. Cure newly placed concrete in accordance with ACI 301, Section 5.3.6. Do not use curing compounds. B. Cure slabs with curing paper for seven days. Moisten surface if surface is not moist at the time of placement of curing paper. C. Remove all form ties and patch holes flush with a sand-cement mortar. 3.10 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Cure concrete according to ACI 308R-01. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306R-88 for coldweather protection and ACI 305R-99 for hot-weather protection during curing. B. Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-15 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Initial Curing: When concrete bleed rate, concrete temperature, ambient temperature, relative humidity, wind speed, and solar heating create a risk of premature drying, conduct initial curing using evaporation retarder or fogging during concrete placement and finishing. 2. Intermediate Curing: When concrete finishing is completed before final set of the concrete and when final curing methods might damage the concrete either mechanically or by raising the water/cement ratio of the near-surface region, conduct intermediate curing using evaporation retarder or fogging. 3. Final Curing: Begin final curing immediately after finishing is complete and after the concrete has reached final set and will not be damaged by final curing operations. Conduct final curing using moisture curing or moisture retaining cover. 4. Final Curing for Flatwork: Absorptive cover, moisture-retaining cover, or curing Paper for a minimum of seven days. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period. D. Cure concrete by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder according to manufacturer’s written instructions. 2. Fogging: Continuously fog mist above the concrete surface to elevate the relative humidity of the air above the concrete surface. 3. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12 in. lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 4. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 in., and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings. b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments. c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with a moisture-retaining cover. Do not use curing compounds on floors. 5. Curing Compound: Except for flatwork, apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. a. After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with finishes to be applied to concrete surfaces. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-16 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.11 REPAIRING AND FINISHING OF SURFACES A. It is the intention of this Specification to require forms, mixture of concrete, and workmanship so that concrete surfaces, when exposed, will require no patching. Any concrete which is not formed as shown on the Drawings or for any reason is out of alignment or level, or shows a defective surface, shall be removed from the job at the Contractor’s expense, unless the Architect grants permission to repair the defective area. Permission to patch any such area shall not be considered a waiver of the Architect’s right to require a complete removal of defective work if the repair does not, in his opinion, satisfactorily restore the quality of the concrete. The Architect shall be the sole judge of acceptability. B. Patch tie holes on all wall surfaces and edges exposed to view. 3.12 GROUTING A. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and level plates or base and bearing plates so that no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces, protect grout, and allow grout to cure. Comply with manufacturer’s written installation instructions for shrink-resistant grout. B. Grout demolished concrete for lintels, damaged concrete edges. Keep grout moist for a minimum of seven days. C. Grout removed concrete encasement of existing steel framing. Restore non-shrink grout cover flush with existing concrete cover. Keep grout moist for a minimum of seven days. 3.13 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing and Inspecting: The Owner will engage an independent special inspector and a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Inspections: Specific tasks to be performed by the Special Inspector and Testing Agency are described in a statement of special inspections prepared by the Structural Engineer of Record. END OF SECTION 033000 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200-1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 051200 – STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The Work includes labor, materials, equipment, and services required for completion of Work under this Section as shown on drawings and as specified here. This Section includes the following: 1. Structural steel. 2. Connections to existing base building structure. 3. Hot dip galvanized steel grating. 4. Hot-dip galvanizing of steel material. 5. Alterations and reinforcement of existing steel framing. 6. Field verification of existing conditions. 7. Shop priming of steel material. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for Independent Testing Agency procedures and administrative requirements. 2. Division 01 Section “Sustainable Design Requirements” for requirements and procedures for compliance with LEED prerequisites and credits. 3. Division 05 Section “Metal Fabrications” for other metal items not defined as structural steel. 4. Division 09 “Painting and Coating” for priming and paint requirements of structural steel not otherwise required to be shop or factory primed or painted. C. The Contractor has sole responsibility for site safety. The Fabricator and Erector shall review the Contract Documents and if the structure, as shown on those documents, is in conflict with the requirements of any safety regulations, the Fabricator shall notify the Architect before commencing production of shop drawings. If the Fabricator and/or Erector fail to notify the Architect, as stated above, they shall become responsible for all costs for correcting such conflicts with the requirements of any and all safety regulations. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC’s “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges,” that support design loads. B. Special Inspector and Testing Agency: Personnel performing Owner-provided testing and inspections as specified and as required by the 2015 Building Code of New York State (BCNYS) 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. The detailing of all structural steel members – and the designing, proportioning, and detailing of connections to resist moments, shears, and direct forces given on the drawings or inferable therefrom – is part of this Contract. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200-2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Construction: FR (fully restrained) and simple connections, as indicated on the drawings. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide Submittals in compliance with the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 “Submittal Procedures.” B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Expansion anchors 2. Adhesive anchors 3. Welding electrodes 4. Galvanizing repair paint C. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and pre-consumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. 2. Product Certificates for Credit MR 5: For products and materials required to comply with requirements for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material. a. Include statement indicating location of manufacturer and distance to Project for each regionally manufactured material. D. Shop Drawing: Show fabrication of structural steel components. 1. Before submitting shop drawings to the Architect, check the shop drawings for conformity of details to the Contract Documents and as coordinated with other work. Include signature of Construction Manager’s representative indicating that the drawings have been checked. The Contractor is wholly responsible for the conformity of dimensions and details of the shop drawings to the Contract Documents. 2. Submit job standard connection details and calculations for review and approval prior to submitting detail drawings. Submit connection information in tabular form with the following: a. Weld sizes and lengths b. Sizes and material of connecting elements c. Number, size, and type of bolt d. Material and minimum thickness of supporting member part e. Material and minimum thickness of supported member part 3. Submit erection plans prior to submitting detail drawings. 4. Include the following on detail drawings: a. Details and dimensions of all pieces b. Steel material designation c. Details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data d. Identification marks cross-referenced to erection plans e. Reviewing Engineer’s shop drawing review stamp 5. Prepare details avoiding interference of steel connections, gussets, and bracing elements with architectural details, shaft openings, and wall openings. 6. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. 7. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200-3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 8. Approval of the shop drawings is for size and arrangement of principal and auxiliary members and strength of connections. Approval does not relieve the Contractor’s responsibility for dimensions, fabrications, and correct fitting of structural members. 9. Resubmitted Drawings: a. Clearly and individually identify changes in resubmitted shop drawings whether the change results from a review comment or not. b. Date and identify each shop drawing issue. c. Identify each shop drawing by the same drawing number throughout the duration of the project. E. Forces imposed on base building structure by temporary attachments for bracing of cranes, hoists, or any other equipment imposing loads on the structure during construction. Provide drawings and calculations of temporary bracing stamped and signed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of New York. F. Welder qualification certificates. G. Qualification Data: For Erector, Fabricator, and Fabricator’s quality control agency if separate from Fabricator. H. Mill Test Reports: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the following products comply with requirements: 1. Structural steel, including chemical and physical properties 2. Bolts, nuts, and washers, including mechanical properties and chemical analysis 3. Tension-control, high-strength bolt-nut-washer assemblies 4. Shop primers I. Source quality-control test reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category Certified Building Fabricator B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category ACSE. C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 1. Welders and welding operators performing work on bottom-flange, demand-critical welds shall pass the supplemental welder qualification testing, as required by AWS D1.8. FCAW-S and FCAW-G shall be considered separate processes for welding personnel qualification. D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC 303. 2. AISC 341 and AISC 341s1. 3. AISC 360. 4. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200-4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 E. Galvanizing Applicators: Company specializing in hot-dip galvanizing after fabrications and following the procedures of the Quality Assurance Manual of the American Galvanizers Association. Submit an original and two copies for the coating applicator’s notarized Certificate of Compliance that the hot-dip-galvanized coating meets or exceeds the specified requirements of ASTM A123 or A153, as applicable. F. Fabrication and Erection Errors: Notify Engineer of fabrication or erection errors requiring field work. Before performing corrective work, submit description of field work for review and approval. G. The Owner will employ a Special Inspector to oversee and administer, and an independent Testing Agency(s) to perform, a Program of Structural Tests and Inspections for compliance with Chapter 17 of the 2015 International Building Code. The Structural Engineer of Record (SER) shall prepare a statement of structural tests and inspections, specifying the tests and inspections to be performed throughout the construction of this project. Submission and approval of this statement must be complete prior to beginning construction. 1. The Special Inspector will organize and direct the test and inspection program. All inspection and test reports shall be submitted to the Contractor, Construction Manager (CM), the Owner’s Representative, and the SER. The Contractor shall be responsible for understanding the test and inspection program and notifying the Testing Agency and the Special Inspector when work is ready for tests and/or inspections. The Contractor will provide access to the Testing Agency, Special Inspector, and the SER. Inspections and tests of the Structural Tests and Inspection Program will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for supervision, testing, and inspection for quality control of the work. 2. The Owner’s Representative will provide testing and inspection reports to the local building official when requested by the local building official. Upon completion of the construction, the independent Special Inspector will make a final report on the satisfactory completion of the Program for Structural Tests and Inspection to the building official and to the Owner’s Representative. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact. 1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Smithsonian’s testing and inspecting agency observes repackaging and seals containers. 2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200-5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.7 COORDINATION A. Furnish anchorage items to for attachment to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation. 1.8 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCES A. Hold one conference at least thirty days before the start of shop drawings and one at least thirty days before start of erection. B. Pre-shop-drawing conference: 1. Agenda to cover, but not be limited to, the following: a. Procedures for review of submissions b. Detailing procedures and preferences c. Connection details d. Welding procedures e. Submission procedures f. RFI procedures g. Fabrication procedures and preferences h. Specification and design drawing requirements 2. Pre-shop-drawing conference attendees include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Construction Manager b. Fabricator’s representative c. Architect d. Structural Engineer of Record e. Owner’s representative C. Pre-erection conference: 1. Agenda to cover, but not be limited to, the following: a. Condition of existing structure b. Welding procedures and welder qualifications c. Bolting procedures d. Methods, equipment, and sequencing of erection e. Inspection f. Corrective measures in field 2. Pre-erection conference attendees include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Construction Manager b. Fabricator’s representative c. Architect d. Structural Engineer of Record e. Inspection and Testing Agency f. Owner’s representative D. Construction Manager to record, type, and distribute minutes of meeting to all attendees. E. Notify attendees at least ten days before the scheduled date of the conference. 1.9 ENGINEERING AND SHOP DRAWINGS A. Verify all existing site conditions by field measurements and elevations. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200-6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Design miscellaneous details not specifically shown and submit for approval. C. Refer to Architectural Details for miscellaneous items, tolerances, and provisions to be made for the attachment of other materials. Refer to structural drawings and mechanical shop drawings for coping and openings required to clear mechanical lines. Refer to approved mechanical shop drawings for exact location and size of supports required for mechanical equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS A. W-Shapes: ASTM A992 or ASTM A913, and Grade 50. B. WT-Shapes: ASTM A992 or ASTM A913, and Grade 50. C. Channels, Angles: ASTM A36. D. Plate: ASTM A36, or ASTM A572, Grade 50 as indicated. E. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A1085, or ASTM A500 Grade B, structural tubing. F. Other Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. 2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A563 heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F436 hardened carbon-steel washers. 1. Finish: a. Plain unless joining components indicated as galvanized. b. Galvanized Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A153, Class C. B. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A490, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A563 heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F436 hardened carbon-steel washers, plain. C. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F1852, Type 1, heavy-hex or round-head steel structural bolts with splined ends; ASTM A563 heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F436 hardened carbon-steel washers. 1. Finish: a. Plain unless joining components indicated as galvanized. b. Galvanized Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A153, Class C. D. Expansion Anchors: 1. Available Products: a. Hilti Kwik Bolt TZ. 2. Finishes: a. Type 316 stainless steel anchor body, nut, washer, and expansion sleeve. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200-7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 E. Adhesive Anchors: 1. Available Products: a. Hilti HY 200 System. b. Epcon Ceramic 6 System. c. Simpson Set-XP System. 2. Rods: Type 316 stainless steel. 3. Nuts and Washers: Match rod material. 2.3 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN CRITERIA A. Construction Waste Management: Structural steel waste material shall be source separated and recycled. B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Structural steel materials must meet the requirements of (Recycled Content). Provide structural steel products with an average recycled post-consumer recycled content of at least 85%. C. Regional Materials: Fabricate steel materials regionally (within a radius of 500 mi) and must be composed of materials gathered and recycled within a 500 mi radius of the project. 2.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Primers and finishes applied onsite (not shop applied) must meet the requirements of the following: 1. Low-Emitting Materials, Paints and Coatings: Must meet the applicable VOC limits. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC’s “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges” and AISC’s “Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings.” 1. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A6/A6M and maintain markings until structural steel has been erected. 2. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 3. Complete structural steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shoppriming operations. 4. Arrange all members and connections to be shop welded and field bolted to the greatest extent possible. B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1. 2. Grind to smooth metal all thermally cut copes, weld access holes, and web penetrations on ASTM A6, Group 3, 4, and 5 sections. C. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads. D. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare steel surfaces according to: 1. SSPC-SP 2, “Hand Tool Cleaning,” unless otherwise noted. 2. SSPC-SP 3, “Power Tool Cleaning,” for primed surfaces. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200-8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, “Commercial Blast Cleaning” for galvanized surfaces and for surfaces finish coated in the field. E. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for passage of other work through steel framing members. 1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning. 2. Base-Plate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work. 2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC’s “Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts” for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tight, pretensioned, or slip critical as indicated. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Where indicated, remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC’s “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges” for mill material. 2.7 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 09 Section “Painting and Coating” B. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. Surfaces to receive spray-on fireproofing. 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces to be high-strength-bolted with slip-critical connections. 4. Galvanized surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. Typical Members: Prepare per SSPC-SP3 “Power Tool Cleaning” and prime with primer compatible with intermediate and top coats as specified in Division 9 Section “Painting and Coating”. D. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer’s written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2. Apply two coats of shop paint to inaccessible surfaces after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from the first. E. Prime Paint VOC Limits: Per Division 01 Section “Safety Requirements and Coordination”. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200-9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 F. Refer to Division 9 Section “Painting and Coating” for field-applied finish coats for compatibility between primers and paints. 2.8 GALVANIZING A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A123. 1. Coat all items specified as galvanized on Structural Drawings and structural steel by the hot-dip process in molten zinc, producing a continuous coating of uniform thickness weighing not less than 2 oz per square foot of surface. 2. Galvanize bolts for connections of galvanized structural shapes and plates. Galvanize separate bolts, nuts, and other fasteners after fabrication, conforming to ASTM A153. 3. Galvanize components after fabrication. 4. Fill vent holes with zinc solder and grind smooth after galvanizing. 5. At welded joints, seal weld all seams not otherwise welded. B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ZRC Cold Galvanizing Compound by ZRC Products Company. 2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Fabricator to supervise all shop work per his quality control program. The Contractor’s quality control personnel to supervise all fabrication work. 1. Scrutiny of the quality control and quality control procedures will be performed by the Testing Agency. The Fabricator and erector shall cooperate with the Testing Agency. 2. Fabricator to coordinate with the Testing Agency the sharing of results of quality control tests and schedule for repairing defects. 3. Before shipping the completed work, consult with the Testing Agency to agree on interpretations of acceptance criteria. B. Fabricator’s work includes facilitating inspections by the Testing Agency. Furnish upon request, at no cost, the following: 1. A complete set of approved erection drawings and shop drawings. 2. Cutting lists, order lists, material bills, and shipping list. 3. Full and ample means and assistance for testing materials and workmanship, and proper facilities for inspection of the work in the shop. 2.10 SOURCE QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Provide Testing Agency and Engineer of Record with access to places where structuralsteel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections. 2. Inspections and tests by the Testing Agency and Engineer of Record do not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for supervision and quality control of the Work. B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. Do not ship Work that does not comply with the Contract Documents, unless field work correction Work is approved by Engineer of Record. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200-10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC’s “Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts.” D. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at Testing Agency’s option: 1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E164. 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E94. E. In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded shear connectors will be tested and inspected according to requirements in AWS D1.1 for stud welding and as follows: 1. Bend tests will be performed if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360° flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. 2. Tests will be conducted on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify elevations of concrete -bearing surfaces and locations of through bolts, and other embedments – with steel erector present – for compliance with requirements. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations, to elevations indicated, and according to AISC’s “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges” and “Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings.” 1. The limitations specified in the Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges are applicable. B. Base Plates: Clean concrete-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface of base plates. 1. Set base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200-11 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate before packing with grout. 4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and base or bearing plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Installation of grout is specified under Division 3 Section “Cast in Place Concrete”. C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel and architecturally exposed structural steel within AISC’s “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.” D. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service. E. Splice members only where indicated. F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection without prior approval by Engineer of specific application. Finish thermally cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1. G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts with Engineer’s approval of specific application. 3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC’s “Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts” for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: As indicated on the drawings. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with AISC’s “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges” and “Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings” for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC’s “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges” for mill material. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections. B. Inspections: Specific tasks to be performed by the special inspector and testing agency are described in a statement of special inspections prepared by the Structural Engineer of Record. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200-12 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC’s “Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts.” 1. Contractor to provide a calibrated Skidmore Wilhelm tensioning device installed at a convenient column for calibrating wrenches. Keep device on site until all bolting operations are completed and approved. D. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1. 1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested according to AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at Testing Agency’s option: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E709, performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E94. E. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents at Contractor’s expense. 3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A780 and manufacturer’s written instructions. B. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists and accessories, bearing plates, and abutting structural steel. 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning. 2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces. C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Division 9 painting sections. 3.7 CLEANING A. Remove and dispose of the following away from the site: erection bolts, erection attachments, temporary lifting lugs, safety barrier supports, and any other auxiliary or temporary steel components that interfere with other work. END OF SECTION 051200 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel framing and supports for all-glass storefronts. 2. Steel framing and supports for laboratory equipment. 3. Slotted-channel framing ceiling assemblies. 4. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 5. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 6. Decorative custom metal trim and reveals 7. Perforated aluminum panels for rooftop equipment screen. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for structural steel including dunnage. 2. Section 055119 "Metal Grating Stairs." 3. Section 055313 "Bar Gratings." 4. Division 23 for ladders and gratings included with packaged HVAC units. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Exterior Metal Fabrications: Definition of “Exterior” shall include exterior areas, areas exterior to plane of weather-resistive-barriers, vapor barriers, or air barriers, and areas within or at perimeter of unconditioned and semi-conditioned areas. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. C. Coordinate locations and installation of metal fabrications located within ceiling zones with mechanical, electrical, plumbing, fire protection, and other services located within ceiling zones. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. Coordinate metal fabrications providing support with the items being supported. 1. Coordinate metal fabrications providing support with Owner-Furnished items requiring support. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Paint products. 2. Grout. 3. Slotted-channel framing. 4. Perforated aluminum panels for rooftop equipment screen. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal fabrications indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Submit delegated-design submittal with Shop Drawings. 2. Include delegated-design calculations and delegated-design services certification. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. B. Mill Certificates: Signed by stainless-steel manufacturers, certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. C. Welding certificates. D. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. E. Research/Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES or another code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: As specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements". B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." 3. AWS D1.6/D1.6M, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel." C. Ceiling Assembly Mockups: Build mockup of slotted channel framing ceiling assembly to verify selections made under Sample submittals and fabrication in accordance with performance Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 requirements, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup of typical ceiling area as shown on Drawings. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, floor levels, slabs, decks, structural steel framing, services, and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design steel framing and supports, and other items requiring support. B. Structural Performance of Supports: Overhead supports and other supports shall withstand loads of the items supported and effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in SEI/ASCE 7. 1. Design supports for laboratory equipment to support weight of the equipment and withstand effects of loads and stresses inherent in use and operation of the indicated laboratory equipment. 2. Design supports for all-glass storefronts to support weight of the storefronts and withstand effects of loads and stresses inherent in use and operation of the indicated allglass storefronts and associated doors. 3. Design slotted-channel framing ceiling assemblies to support weight of the assemblies and Owner-Furnished items hung from the assemblies, and to withstand effects of loads and stresses inherent in use and operation of the indicated assemblies. 4. Design supports for mechanical and electrical equipment and services to support weight of the equipment and withstand effects of loads and stresses inherent in use and operation of the indicated equipment and services. 5. Design supports for other items requiring support to support weight of the items and withstand effects of loads and stresses inherent in use and operation of the indicated items. C. Seismic Loads: Refer to Section 011000 "Summary" for additional structural design criteria. 1. Seismic Component Importance Factor: 1.0 unless indicated otherwise. D. Interior Partition Lateral Pressure: The minimum design lateral load shall be 5 psf (240 Pa) except where greater loads are required by code for partitions. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. 2.2 METALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304. D. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304. E. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M (cold-formed) or ASTM A 513 (mechanical) steel tubing. F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated or required to meet specified performance requirements. G. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4. 1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches (41 by 41 mm) unless otherwise indicated or required to meet specified performance requirements. 2. Material: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653/A 653M, commercial steel, Type B or structural steel, Grade 33 (Grade 230), with G90 (Z275) coating; 0.108-inch (2.8-mm) minimum nominal thickness. 3. Material: Cold-rolled steel, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B or structural steel, Grade 33 (Grade 230); 0.0966-inch (2.5-mm) minimum thickness; coated with specified primer or rust-inhibitive, baked-on, acrylic enamel. H. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated. I. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 6061-T6 unless otherwise indicated. J. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T6 unless otherwise indicated. K. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6. L. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F. 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. 2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel. 3. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening dissimilar metals. B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers. C. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M); with hex nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M); and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 1 (A1). D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers. 1. Hot-dip-galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized. E. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. F. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329. G. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 (A1) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M). H. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches (41 by 22 mm) by length indicated with anchor straps or studs not less than 3 inches (75 mm) long at not more than 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee-head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Low-Emitting Materials: Comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099123 Interior Painting." D. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat. E. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc-coated metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated. F. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25. G. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. H. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M. I. Non-shrink, Non-metallic Grout: Factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive, non-gaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. J. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normalweight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa). 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. J. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches (3.2 by 38 mm), with a minimum 6-inch (150mm) embedment and 2-inch (50-mm) hook, not less than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends and corners of units and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. K. Galvanize metal fabrications at exterior locations, locations (in part or whole) exterior to air and vapor barrier, and where indicated. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, tubes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles as necessary for compliance with specified performance requirements and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained or supported by framing and supports. 1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated and where suitable for compliance with specified performance requirements. 2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed. C. Fabricate supports for laboratory equipment from steel shapes, tubes, plates, bars and other steel shapes of sizes necessary for compliance with specified performance requirements and recommendations of equipment manufacturer. Include attached bearing plates, anchors, braces, kickers, and other required components. D. Fabricate supports for all-glass storefronts from steel shapes, tubes, plates, bars, and other steel shapes of sizes necessary for compliance with specified performance requirements and recommendations of all-glass storefront manufacturer. Include attached bearing plates, anchors, braces, kickers, and other required components. E. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous framing and supports. F. Shop-prime interior miscellaneous framing and supports with indicated primer. 2.7 SLOTTED-CHANNEL FRAMING CEILING ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide indicated products from one of the following: 1. Cooper B-Line, a division of Eaton. 2. Flex-Strut Inc. 3. Power-Strut, a division of Atkore International, Inc. 4. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 5. Unistrut, a division of Atkore International, Inc. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 6. Wesanco, Inc., a ZSI-Foster company. B. Basis-of-Design Products: Unistrut, a division of Atkore International, Inc.; Unistrut. C. Material: Steel, shop-primed. D. Square Framing: 1. Basis of Design Product: Unistrut P1000. 2. Profile Size: 1 5/8 inch (41 mm). E. Rectangular Framing: 1. Basis of Design Product: Unistrut P1001. 2. Profile Size: 1 5/8 inch (41 mm) by 3-1/4 inch (83 mm). F. Trolley Assemblies: 1. Basis of Design Product: Unistrut Trolley. 2. Configurations: As indicated on Drawings. G. Accessories: Provide compatible framing shapes, fittings, supports, plates, angles, clips, anchors, hardware, brackets, clamps, nuts, fasteners, end caps, trim, and other system components as required for complete assemblies. H. Fabricate assemblies from slotted-channel framing of shapes, sizes, profiles, and configurations as indicated on Drawings, and as necessary for compliance with specified performance requirements and to receive equipment or adjacent construction retained or supported by framing. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. Connect adjoining members together using fastened connections. 1. Fabricate support system components in maximum lengths possible, in configurations as indicated on Drawings, and to allow for secure installation. 2. Cut framing neatly and without jagged edges, projections, or other irregularities. I. Shop-prime interior slotted-channel framing ceiling assemblies with manufacturer’s primer suitable for field painting light colors. 2.8 ROOFTOP EQUIPMENT SCREEN A. Description: Ribbed, perforated aluminum panels supported on steel posts B. Steel Posts: As indicated on Drawings and in accordance with Section 051200 “Structural Steel Framing.” C. Perforated Metal: Aluminum sheet, ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M) with round perforations, factory-finished. 1. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following or equivalent product from acceptable manufacturer: a. Centria Architectural Systems; EcoScreen Econolap Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Material: Aluminum Type 3003-H14, 0.040 inch (1 mm) thick. 3. Perforations: 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) diameter holes 9/16 inch (14.3 mm) o.c. in staggered rows 4. Fabrication: Perforated-Metal Panels: Perforated-metal panels, factory-formed with ribs perpendicular to rows of perforations. Orient perforated metal with ribs vertical and pattern horizontal unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. a. Rib Depth: ¾ inch (19 mm) b. Rib Spacing: 2-2/3 inch (68 mm) 5. Finish: Powder-coated in color selected by Architect. 2.9 METAL TRIM AND REVEALS A. Fabricate metal trim and reveals from extruded aluminum of profiles, and to sizes and shapes indicated on Drawings. Miter members at corners. Unless indicated otherwise, drill for mounting screws 6 inches (150 mm) from ends of channels and not more than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. Locate mounting screws at same heights for all items. Provide for concealed fasteners unless indicated otherwise. 1. Metal trim and frames for pin-up panels. 2. Metal trim and reveals at wall-mounted or ceiling-mounted panels. 3. Metal trim and reveals at visual display boards, panels, and surfaces. 4. Metal marker tray at visual display boards, panels, and surfaces. 5. Metal trim and reveals at woodwork items. 6. Other items as indicated on Drawings. 2.10 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete. 2.11 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface. 2.12 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. B. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker. C. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm). Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.13 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products. 1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. B. Preparation for Shop Priming Galvanized Items: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean steel surfaces of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic phosphate process, xylene, etching cleaner, or other cleaner recommended by coating manufacturer. Comply with SSPC-SP 1. Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below: 1. SSPC-SP 16, "Brush-Off Blast Cleaning of Coated and Uncoated Galvanized Steel, Stainless Steels, and Non-Ferrous Metals." 2. ASTM A 780/A 780M, clean shop welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing. 3. ASTM D 6386, sweep blasting to achieve a uniform anchor profile (1.0-2.0 mils). C. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated. 1. Items Indicated to Receive Finish Paint: Shop prime with primer specified or compatible with topcoats listed in Section 099123 "Interior Painting". 2. Items Not Indicated to Receive Finish Paint Topcoats: Shop-prime with universal shop primer. D. Preparation of Non-Galvanized Items for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below: 1. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." E. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 11 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors. E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following: 1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint. 2. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer. 3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. B. Anchor supports securely to, and rigidly braced from, building structure. C. Grout base plates of bearing framing members after framing is installed, plumbed, and leveled. 1. Use non-shrink non-metallic grout. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 12 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 END OF SECTION 055000 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 METAL GRATING STAIRS 055119 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 055119 - METAL GRATING STAIRS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Industrial Class stairs with steel-grating treads. 2. Steel railings attached to metal stairs. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written instructions to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs and railings. 1. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. 2. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. C. Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so they do not encroach on required stair width and are within fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For metal grating stairs and the following: 1. Gratings. 2. Shop primer products. 3. Grout. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment to other work. 2. Indicate sizes of metal sections, thickness of metals, profiles, holes, and field joints. 3. Include plan at each level. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For stairs and railings, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 METAL GRATING STAIRS 055119 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer's experience with providing delegated-design engineering services of the kind indicated, including documentation that engineer is licensed in the jurisdiction in which Project is located. B. Welding certificates. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. 1. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. 2. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 3. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. a. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design stairs and railings, including attachment to building construction. B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft. (4.79 kN/sq. m). 2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf (1.33 kN) applied on an area of 4 sq. in. (2580 sq. mm). 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to loads specified above. 5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360. C. Structural Performance of Railings: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 METAL GRATING STAIRS 055119 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. (0.093 sq. m). b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 3. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. a. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. D. Seismic Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. Component Importance Factor: 1.0. 2.2 METALS A. Metal Surfaces: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M. C. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A786/A786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A36/A36M or ASTM A283/A283M, Grade C or D. D. Steel Bars for Grating Treads: ASTM A36/A36M or steel strip, ASTM A1011/A1011M or ASTM A1018/A1018M. E. Steel Wire Rod for Grating Crossbars: ASTM A510/A510M. F. Steel Tubing for Railings: ASTM A500/A500M (cold formed) or ASTM A513/A513M. 1. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated. G. Steel Pipe for Railings: ASTM A53/A53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads. H. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated. I. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A48/A48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A47/A47M, unless otherwise indicated. J. Cast-Abrasive Nosings: Cast iron, with an integral abrasive, as-cast finish consisting of aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or a combination of both. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 METAL GRATING STAIRS 055119 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Provide hot-dip galvanized fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 1. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 2. Provide stainless steel fasteners for fastening dissimilar materials. B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. C. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A563 (ASTM A563M); and, where indicated, flat washers. D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A563 (ASTM A563M); and, where indicated, flat washers. 1. Provide mechanically deposited or hot-dip, zinc-coated anchor bolts for exterior stairs. E. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E488/E488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 (A1) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F593, and nuts, ASTM F594. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. C. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout; recommended by manufacturer for exterior use; noncorrosive and nonstaining; mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, railings, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure. 1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated. 2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. B. Assemble stairs and railings in shop to greatest extent possible. 1. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. 2. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 METAL GRATING STAIRS 055119 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. 1. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. 2. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. D. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. E. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. F. Weld connections to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Finish # 3 - Partially dressed weld with spatter removed. G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. 1. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts unless otherwise indicated. 2. Locate joints where least conspicuous. 3. Fabricate joints that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. 4. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate internally. 2.6 FABRICATION OF STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS A. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for Industrial Class, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Stair Framing: 1. Fabricate stringers of steel plates or channels. a. Stringer Size: As required to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. b. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel stringers. c. Finish: Galvanized. 2. Construct platforms and tread supports of steel plate or channel headers and miscellaneous framing members as required to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. a. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel framing. b. Finish: Galvanized. 3. Weld or bolt stringers to headers; weld or bolt framing members to stringers and headers. C. Metal Bar-Grating Stairs: Form treads and platforms to configurations shown from metal bar grating; fabricate to comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual." Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 METAL GRATING STAIRS 055119 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Fabricate treads and platforms from welded steel grating with openings in gratings no more than 1 inch (25 mm) in least dimension. a. Surface: Serrated. b. Finish: Galvanized. D. Risers: Open. E. Toe Plates: Provide toe plates around openings and at edge of open-sided floors and platforms, and at open ends and open back edges of treads. 1. Material and Finish: Steel plate to match finish of other steel items. 2. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated. 2.7 FABRICATION OF STAIR RAILINGS A. Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of member, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads. 1. Rails and Posts: 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) square top and bottom rails and 1-1/2-inch- (38mm-) square posts. 2. Intermediate Rails Infill: 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) square intermediate rails spaced less than 12 inches (305 mm) clear. B. Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. 1. Fabricate connections that are exposed to weather in a manner that excludes water. a. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate internally. 2. Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. 3. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 4. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 5. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 6. Remove flux immediately. 7. Finish welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Finish #3 - Partially dressed weld with spatter removed as shown in NAAMM AMP 521. C. Form changes in direction of railings by bending. D. For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required. 1. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. E. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. F. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding unless otherwise indicated. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 METAL GRATING STAIRS 055119 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 G. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other work. 1. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting to concrete or masonry work. 2. For galvanized railings, provide galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous-metal components. 2.8 FINISHES A. Finish metal stairs after assembly. B. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A153/A153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A123/A123M for other steel and iron products. 1. Do not quench or apply post-galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. 2. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify elevations of floors, bearing surfaces and locations of bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements. 1. For wall-mounted railings, verify locations of concealed reinforcement within gypsum board and plaster assemblies. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLING METAL STAIRS A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal stairs to in-place construction. 1. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors. B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. C. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete unless otherwise indicated. 1. Grouted Baseplates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 METAL GRATING STAIRS 055119 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 a. Clean bottom surface of baseplates. b. Set steel-stair baseplates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. c. After stairs have been positioned and aligned, tighten anchor bolts. d. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. e. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 1) Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. 2) Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkageresistant grouts. D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. 1. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. 2. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. 3. Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General" Article. 3.3 INSTALLING RAILINGS A. Adjust railing systems before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints with tight, hairline joints. 1. Space posts at spacing indicated or, if not indicated, as required by design loads. 2. Plumb posts in each direction, within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m). 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of stairs for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (6 mm in 3.5 m). 4. Secure posts and rail ends to building construction as follows: a. Anchor posts to steel by welding or bolting to steel supporting members. b. Anchor handrail ends to concrete and masonry with steel round flanges welded to rail ends and anchored with post-installed anchors and bolts. 3.4 REPAIR A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780/A780M. END OF SECTION 055119 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 BAR GRATINGS 055313 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 055313 - BAR GRATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes metal bar gratings and metal frames and supports for gratings. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for structural-steel framing system components. 2. Section 055119 "Metal Grating Stairs" for grating treads and landings of steel-framed stairs. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written instructions to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for gratings, grating frames, and supports. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Clips and anchorage devices for gratings. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For gratings, including [manufacturers' published load tables] [analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation]. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 BAR GRATINGS 055313 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with gratings by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Alabama Metal Industries Company; a Gibraltar Industries company. 2. All American Grating. 3. BarnettBates Corporation. 4. Borden Metal Products (Canada) Limited. 5. Fisher & Ludlow; a NUCOR Company. 6. Grating Pacific, Inc. 7. Grupo Metelmex, S.A. de C.V. 8. Harsco Industrial IKG, a division of Harsco Corporation. 9. MLP Steel Company; Laurel Steel Products Division. 10. Neenah Foundry Company. 11. Ohio Gratings, Inc. 12. ROSS TECHNOLOGY CORP. 13. Seidelhuber Metal Products; Brodhead Steel. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design gratings. B. Structural Performance: Gratings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Walkways and Elevated Platforms Other Than Exits: Uniform load of 60 lbf/sq. ft. (2.87 kN/sq. m). 2. Limit deflection to L/240 or 1/8 inch (3.2 mm), whichever is less. C. Seismic Performance: Gratings shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. Component Importance Factor: 1.0. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 BAR GRATINGS 055313 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.3 METAL BAR GRATINGS A. Metal Bar Grating Standards: Comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual." B. Welded Steel Grating: 1. Bearing Bar Spacing: 1-3/16 inches (30 mm) o.c. 2. Bearing Bar Depth: 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) or greater, as required to comply with structural performance requirements. 3. Bearing Bar Thickness: 1/4 inch (6 mm) or greater, as required to comply with structural performance requirements. 4. Crossbar Spacing: 4 inches (102 mm) o.c. 5. Traffic Surface: Serrated. 6. Steel Finish: Hot-dip galvanized with a coating weight of not less than 1.8 oz./sq. ft. (550 g/sq. m) of coated surface. 2.4 FERROUS METALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M. B. Steel Bars for Bar Gratings: ASTM A36/A36M or steel strip, ASTM A1011/A1011M or ASTM A1018/A1018M. C. Wire Rod for Bar Grating Crossbars: ASTM A510 (ASTM A510M). D. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, structural quality, Grade 33 (Grade 230), with G90 (Z275) coating. 2.5 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941 (ASTM F1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. B. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E488/E488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 (A1) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F593 (ASTM F738M), and nuts, ASTM F594 (ASTM F836M). 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187/D1187M. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 BAR GRATINGS 055313 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.7 FABRICATION A. Shop Assembly: Fabricate grating sections in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Cut, drill, and punch material cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated, but not less than that needed to support indicated loads. D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. E. Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations and the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. F. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space the anchoring devices to secure gratings, frames, and supports rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. 1. Fabricate toeplates to fit grating units and weld to units in shop unless otherwise indicated. 2. Fabricate toeplates for attaching in the field. 3. Toeplate Height: 4 inches (100 mm) unless otherwise indicated. G. Removable Grating Sections: Fabricate with banding bars attached by welding to entire perimeter of each section. Include anchors and fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by manufacturer for attaching to supports. 1. Provide no fewer than four saddle clips for each grating section containing rectangular bearing bars 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) or less in thickness and spaced 15/16 inch (24 mm) or more o.c., with each clip designed and fabricated to fit over two bearing bars. 2. Provide no fewer than four weld lugs for each grating section containing rectangular bearing bars 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) or less in thickness and spaced less than 15/16 inch (24 mm) o.c., with each lug shop welded to three or more bearing bars. Interrupt intermediate bearing bars as necessary for fasteners securing grating to supports. 3. Furnish threaded bolts with nuts and washers for securing grating to supports. 4. Furnish self-drilling fasteners with washers for securing grating to supports. 5. Furnish galvanized malleable-iron flange clamp with galvanized bolt for securing grating to supports. Furnish as a system designed to be installed from above grating by one person. H. Fabricate cutouts in grating sections for penetrations indicated. Arrange cutouts to permit grating removal without disturbing items penetrating gratings. 1. Edge-band openings in grating that interrupt four or more bearing bars with bars of same size and material as bearing bars. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 BAR GRATINGS 055313 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 I. Do not notch bearing bars at supports to maintain elevation. 2.8 GRATING FRAMES AND SUPPORTS A. Fabricate from metal shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive gratings. Miter and weld connections for perimeter angle frames. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware and similar items. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from same basic metal as gratings. 2. Equip units indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry with integrally welded anchors. Unless otherwise indicated, space anchors 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. and provide minimum anchor units in the form of steel straps 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) wide by 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick by 8 inches (200 mm) long. B. Galvanize steel frames and supports in the following locations: 1. Exterior. 2.9 STEEL FINISHES A. Finish gratings, frames, and supports after assembly. B. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A153/A153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A123/A123M for other steel and iron products. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing gratings to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors. B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing gratings. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete or masonry. D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. 1. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. E. Attach toeplates to gratings by welding at locations indicated. F. Field Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations and the following: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 BAR GRATINGS 055313 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 3.2 INSTALLING METAL BAR GRATINGS A. General: Install gratings to comply with recommendations of referenced metal bar grating standards that apply to grating types and bar sizes indicated, including installation clearances and standard anchoring details. B. Attach removable units to supporting members with type and size of clips and fasteners indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by grating manufacturer for type of installation conditions shown. C. Attach nonremovable units to supporting members by welding where both materials are same; otherwise, fasten by bolting as indicated above. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780/A780M. END OF SECTION 055313 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wood blocking and nailers. 2. Plywood backing panels. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Boards or Strips: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) size in least dimension. B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) or greater size but less than 5 inches nominal (114 mm actual) size in least dimension. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. 3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D5664. 4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: 1. Preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. Power-driven fasteners. 4. Post-installed anchors. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fireretardant-trea ted material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness or less, 19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2[ for interior construction not in contact with ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with ground]. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, materials shall comply with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with firetest-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flamespread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Treatment shall not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fireretardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. 3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated. C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dry plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency. E. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Concealed blocking. 2. Plywood backing panels. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. B. Concealed Boards: 15 percent maximum moisture content of any of the following species and grades: 1. Mixed southern pine or southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB. 2. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north), Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 3. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir, Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. D. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. E. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling. 2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1,, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal thickness. 1. Use grade Exterior A-C for plywood panels exposed at electrical, telephone, and data closets. 2. Use grade Exposure 1 C-D Plugged for plywood used for concealed blocking. 2.6 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A153/A153M. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F1667. A. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. 1. ASTM C 954 for screws for fastening to metal framing from 0.034 to 0.112 inch (0.86 to 2.84 mm) thick. B. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70. C. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC01 or ICC-ES AC193 as appropriate for the substrate. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F593 and ASTM F594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F738M and ASTM F836M, Grade A1 or A4). Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. B. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate nailers, blocking,and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. C. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant-trea ted plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view. D. Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole. E. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated. F. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. G. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows: 1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces. 2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness. 3. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) and to solidly fill space below partitions. 4. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more than 20 feet (6 m) o.c. H. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. I. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 J. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. K. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 2. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener. L. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated. 3.2 WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. B. Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, miscellaneous rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. END OF SECTION 061053 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 064023 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Interior standing and running trim. 2. Flush wood paneling. 3. Wood cabinets. 4. Solid-surfacing-material countertops and window stools. 5. Wood panel with coat hooks 6. Shop finishing of interior woodwork. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 2. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for supplementary metal blocking required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 3. Division 22 “Plumbing” for plumbing fittings. 4. Division 26 and 27 Sections for light fixtures, and electrical and low-voltage items installed in woodwork. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including cabinet hardware and accessories and finishing materials and processes. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fittings and other items installed in architectural woodwork. 3. Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and identification numbers indicating the flitch and sequence within the flitch for each leaf. C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Shop-applied transparent finishes. 2. Solid-surfacing materials. D. Samples for Verification: 1. Lumber with or for transparent finish, not less than 5 inches (125 mm) wide by 12 inches (300 mm) long, for each species and cut, finished on 1 side and 1 edge. 2. Veneer leaves representative of and selected from flitches to be used for transparentfinished woodwork. 3. Veneer-faced panel products with or for transparent finish, 12 by 24 inches (300 by 600 mm), for each species and cut. Include at least one face-veneer seam and finish as specified. 4. Solid-surfacing materials, 6 inches (150 mm) square. 5. Corner pieces as follows: a. Cabinet-front frame joints between stiles and rails, as well as exposed end pieces, 18 inches (450 mm) high by 18 inches (450 mm) wide by 6 inches (150 mm) deep. b. Miter joints for standing trim. 6. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For fabricator. B. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer. C. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful inservice performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. C. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. Provide labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with such selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard. D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. E. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, utility roughing-in and wet work is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system (or permanent HVAC system if use if permitted by Owner) is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, utility roughing-in and wet work is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system (or permanent HVAC system if use if permitted by Owner) is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period. C. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by coordination or field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. D. Existing Conditions: Verify and coordinate existing conditions with installation of architectural woodwork. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: 1. WD-1: Select white maple, quarter sawn or sliced. C. Wood Products: Comply with the following: 1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. 2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. 3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. 4. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay. 5. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde. D. Solid-Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ISSFA-2. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Avonite, Inc. b. E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company. c. Formica Corporation. d. LG Chemical, Ltd. e. Samsung; Cheil Industries Inc. f. Swan Corporation (The). g. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc. 2. Type: Standard type, unless Special Purpose type is indicated. 3. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets. B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 135 degrees of opening, self-closing. C. Back-Mounted Pulls: Barrel pulls. 1. Product, Doors: Hafele No. 117.05.600. a. Length: 5-3/4 inches (146 mm). b. Cylindrical handle diameter: 9/16 inch (14 mm). c. Finish: Satin stainless steel finish. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Product, Drawers: Hafele No. 117.05.650. a. Length: 20-7/8 inches (530 mm). b. Cylindrical handle diameter: 9/16 inch (14 mm). c. Finish: Satin stainless steel finish. D. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141. E. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal. F. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091. 1. Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted; full-overtravelexte nsion type; zinc-plated steel ball-bearing slides. 2. Box Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for drawers not more than 6 inches (150 mm) high and 24 inches (600 mm) wide. 3. File Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-200; for drawers more than 6 inches (150 mm) high or 24 inches (600 mm) wide. 4. Trash Bin Slides: Grade 1HD-200; for trash bins not more than 20 inches (500 mm) high and 16 inches (400 mm) wide. G. Coat Hooks: BHMA A156.16 L33113, one-piece, single-prong units. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Peter Pepper Products; Model 2057XL. 2. Size: 3/4-inch (19-mm) W by 3-1/4-inch (83-mm) H by 3-1/2 inch (89-mm) D. 3. Material and Finish: Cast aluminum, natural anodized. H. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. Provide one of the following unless indicated otherwise. 1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base. 2. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630. I. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. D. Adhesives, General: Adhesives shall not contain urea formaldehyde. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 E. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives: Installation adhesives shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L. 2. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. 3. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Premium-grade interior woodwork complying with referenced quality standard. B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas. C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch (19 mm) Thick or Less: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). 2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch (19 mm) Thick: 1/8 inch (3 mm). 3. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). D. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete. 2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment. E. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. F. Install glass to comply with applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and in GANA's "Glazing Manual." For glass in wood frames, secure glass with removable stops. 2.5 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Grade: Premium. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Wood Species and Cut: WD-1. 2.6 FLUSH WOOD PANELING A. Grade: Premium. B. Wood Species and Cut: WD-1. 1. Lumber Trim and Edges: At fabricator's option, trim and edges indicated as solid wood (except moldings) may be either lumber or veneered construction compatible with grain and color of veneered panels. C. Matching of Adjacent Veneer Leaves: Slip match. D. Veneer Matching within Panel Face: Balance match. E. Panel-Matching Method: Match panels within each separate area by the following method: 1. Sequence-matched, uniform-size sets. F. Vertical Panel-Matching Method: Continuous match; veneer leaves of upper panels are continuations of veneer leaves of lower panels. G. Exposed Panel Edges: Inset solid-wood or wood-veneer matching faces. 2.7 WOOD CABINETS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Grade: Premium. B. Construction Type: Type A, Frameless. C. Cabinet and Door and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay. D. Wood for Exposed Surfaces: WD-1 1. Grain Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels. 2. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Slip match. 3. Vertical Matching of Veneer Leaves: End match. 4. Veneer Matching within Panel Face: Balance match. E. Semi-exposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Same species and cut indicated for exposed surfaces. 2. Drawer Subfronts, Sides and Backs: Baltic birch plywood, hardwood plywood or solidhardwood lumber, same species indicated for exposed surfaces. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood. F. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body. 1. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical fasteners or glued dovetail joints. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.8 SOLID-SURFACING-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS AND WINDOW STOOLS A. Grade: Premium. B. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style: 1. Front: Straight, slightly eased at top, 1-inch- (13-mm-) thick at edges. 2. Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at top corner, 4 inches (100 mm) high. 3. Endsplash: Matching backsplash. C. Countertops: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick, solid surface material with front edge and sink cut-out edges built up with same material. D. Backsplashes and Endsplashes: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick, solid surface material. E. Window Stools: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick, solid surface material. F. Fabrication: Fabricate tops in one piece, adhesively joined with no visible exposed seams, with shop-applied edges, trim, backsplashes, and sidesplashes, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid-surface-material manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 1. Where recommended by manufacturer, install under-mount sink bowls in countertops in the shop. 2. Fabricate to sizes and shapes indicated on Drawings. 3. Fabricate each one-piece countertop section in largest size feasible, limiting size only as necessary for shipment and installation. 4. Complete fabrication, including assembly, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. a. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment. b. Unless indicated otherwise, fabricate countertop sections with tongue-and-groove edges for joints where sections are in the same finish surface plane, and will be field-installed without conspicuous joints. 5. Fabricate with concealed mounting hardware as recommended by manufacturer. 6. Unless indicated otherwise, form joints between components using manufacturer's standard joint adhesive for hard-seamed joints; without conspicuous joints. 7. Provide factory cutouts for fixtures and trim as indicated on drawings. 8. Cut and finish component edges with clean, sharp returns. Rout radii and contours to template. Repair or reject defective and inaccurate work. 9. Allowable Tolerances: Comply with the following: a. Variation in Component Size: Plus or minus 1/8-inch (3-mm). b. Location of Openings: Plus or minus 1/8-inch (3-mm) from location indicated. 2.9 SHOP FINISHING A. Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. General: Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation. C. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work. 1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end-grain surfaces. D. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: System - 5, conversion varnish. 3. Staining: Match approved sample for color. 4. Wash Coat for Closed-Grain Woods: Apply wash-coat sealer to woodwork made from closed-grain wood before staining and finishing. 5. Sheen: Satin, 31-45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved. B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. F. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 pieces less than 96 inches (2400 mm) long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members. 1. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same as wood base if finished. 2. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). G. Paneling: Anchor paneling to supporting substrate with concealed panel-hanger clips. Do not use face fastening, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install flush paneling with no more than 1/16 inch in 96-inch (1.5 mm in 2400-mm) vertical cup or bow and 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) horizontal variation from a true plane. H. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish. 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch (25-mm) penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips, No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish or toggle bolts through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish. I. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. Pre-drill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer 1. Align adjacent solid-surfacing-materi al countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations using joint adhesive in color to match countertop, form inconspicuous, non-porous hard-seamed joints to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface a. Install solid surfacing components with manufacturer’s standard tongue-andgroove edges for joints between components in the same finish surface plane. 2. Seal edges of cutouts in plywood perimeter sub-tops by saturating with varnish. 3. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 4. For backsplashes and endsplashes not applied in shop, secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and to walls with adhesive. 5. Caulk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." 6. Where not shop-fabricated, install under-mount sinks in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and as required to comply with Division 22 Plumbing. 7. Install sealants at perimeter of countertops, where meeting dissimilar construction. 8. Remove adhesives, sealants and other stains. Remove and replace stained components. J. Coat Hooks: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 11 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Fasten coat hooks to wood panels and mount on walls using concealed mounting where indicated on Drawings. K. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 064023 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 071326 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 071326 - SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Modified bituminous sheet waterproofing. 2. Blindside sheet waterproofing. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review waterproofing requirements including surface preparation, substrate condition and pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special details and sheet flashings, installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, and protection and repairs. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing. 2. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing and details of substrate joints and cracks, expansion joints, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins with adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Field quality-control reports. C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 071326 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by waterproofing manufacturer. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate. 1. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog, or mist. B. Maintain adequate ventilation during preparation and application of waterproofing materials. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish replacement waterproofing material for waterproofing that does not comply with requirements or that fails to remain watertight within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations for Waterproofing System: Obtain waterproofing materials and molded-sheet drainage panels from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING A. Modified Bituminous Sheet: Minimum 60-mil (1.5-mm) nominal thickness, self-adhering sheet consisting of 56 mils (1.4 mm) of rubberized asphalt laminated on one side to a 4-mil- (0.10mm-) thick, polyethylene-film reinforcement, and with release liner on adhesive side; formulated for application with primer or surface conditioner that complies with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. GCP Applied Technologies Inc.; Bituthene 4000. 2. Physical Properties: a. Tensile Strength, Membrane: 250 psi (1.7 MPa) minimum; ASTM D412, Die C, modified. b. Ultimate Elongation: 300 percent minimum; ASTM D412, Die C, modified. c. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 20 deg F (minus 29 deg C); ASTM D1970/D1970M. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 071326 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 d. Crack Cycling: Unaffected after 100 cycles of 1/8-inch (3-mm) movement; ASTM C836/C836M. e. Puncture Resistance: 40 lbf (180 N) minimum; ASTM E154/E154M. f. Water Absorption: 0.2 percent weight-gain maximum after 48-hour immersion at 70 deg F (21 deg C); ASTM D570. g. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.05 perm (2.9 ng/Pa x s x sq. m) maximum; ASTM E96/E96M, Water Method. h. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 200 feet (60 m) minimum; ASTM D5385. 3. Sheet Strips: Self-adhering, rubberized-asphalt strips of same material and thickness as sheet waterproofing. 2.3 BLINDSIDE SHEET WATERPROOFING A. Blindside Sheet Waterproofing for Horizontal Applications: Uniform, flexible, multilayeredcomposite sheet membrane that forms a permanent bond with fresh concrete placed against it; complete with accessories and preformed shapes for an unbroken waterproofing assembly; with the following physical properties: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. GCP Applied Technologies Inc.; Preprufe 300R-Plus. 2. Physical Properties: a. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 20 deg F (minus 29 deg C); ASTM D1970/D1970M. b. Peel Adhesion to Concrete: 5 lbf/in. (875 N/m) minimum; ASTM D903, modified. c. Lap Adhesion: 5 lbf/in. (875 N/m) minimum; ASTM D1876, modified. d. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 230 feet (70 m); ASTM D5385, modified. e. Puncture Resistance: 200 lbf (890 N) minimum; ASTM E154/E154M. f. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.1 perm (6 ng/Pa x s x sq. m) maximum; ASTM E96/E96M, Water Method. g. Ultimate Elongation: 335 percent minimum; ASTM D412, modified. B. Mastic, Adhesives, and Detail Tape: Liquid mastic and adhesives, and adhesive tapes recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with sheet waterproofing. 1. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Primer: Liquid primer recommended for substrate by sheet-waterproofing material manufacturer. C. Surface Conditioner: Liquid, waterborne surface conditioner recommended for substrate by sheet-waterproofing material manufacturer. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 071326 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. Liquid Membrane: Elastomeric, two-component liquid, cold fluid applied, of trowel grade or low viscosity. E. Substrate Patching Membrane: Low-viscosity, two-component, modified asphalt coating. F. Metal Termination Bars: Aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch (25 by 3 mm), predrilled at 9-inch (229-mm) centers. G. Protection Course: ASTM D6506, semirigid sheets of fiberglass or mineral-reinforced-asphaltic core, pressure laminated between two asphalt-saturated fibrous liners and as follows: 1. Thickness: Nominal 1/4 inch (6 mm). 2.5 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS A. Nonwoven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel with Polymeric Film: Composite subsurface drainage panel acceptable to waterproofing manufacturer and consisting of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet drainage core; with a nonwoven, needlepunched geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 70 (0.21-mm) sieve laminated to one side of the core and a polymeric film bonded to the other side; and with a vertical flow rate through the core of 9 to 21 gpm per ft. (112 to 261 L/min. per m). 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. GCP Applied Technologies Inc.; Hydroduct 220. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of waterproofing. 1. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer. 2. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and within the moisture limits recommended in writing by manufacturer. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D4263. 3. Verify that compacted subgrade is dry, smooth, sound, and ready to receive waterproofing sheet. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application. B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 071326 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete. D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids. E. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrates. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D4258. 1. Install sheet strips of width according to manufacturer's written instructions and center over treated construction and contraction joints and cracks exceeding a width of 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). F. Bridge and cover isolation joints, expansion joints, and discontinuous deck-to-wall and deck-todeck joints with overlapping sheet strips of widths according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Invert and loosely lay first sheet strip over center of joint. Firmly adhere second sheet strip to first and overlap to substrate. G. Corners: Prepare, prime, and treat inside and outside corners according to ASTM D6135. 1. Install membrane strips centered over vertical inside corners. Install 3/4-inch (19-mm) fillets of liquid membrane on horizontal inside corners and as follows: a. At footing-to-wall intersections, extend liquid membrane in each direction from corner or install membrane strip centered over corner. b. At plaza-deck-to-wall intersections, extend liquid membrane or sheet strips onto deck waterproofing and to finished height of sheet flashing. H. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofing and at drains and protrusions according to ASTM D6135. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING A. Install modified bituminous sheets according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions and per recommendations in ASTM D6135. B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by sheet waterproofing in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. C. Apply and firmly adhere sheets over area to receive waterproofing. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform 2-1/2-inch- (64-mm-) minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams, and stagger end laps to ensure watertight installation. 1. When ambient and substrate temperatures range between 25 and 40 deg F (minus 4 and plus 5 deg C), install self-adhering, modified bituminous sheets produced for lowtemperature application. Do not use low-temperature sheets if ambient or substrate temperature is higher than 60 deg F (16 deg C). D. Apply continuous sheets over already-installed sheet strips, bridging substrate cracks, construction, and contraction joints. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 071326 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 E. Seal edges of sheet-waterproofing terminations with mastic. F. Install sheet-waterproofing and auxiliary materials to tie into adjacent waterproofing. G. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with requirements. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofing extending 6 inches (150 mm) beyond repaired areas in all directions. H. Immediately install protection course with butted joints over waterproofing membrane. 1. Molded-sheet drainage panels may be used in place of a separate protection course to vertical applications when approved by waterproofing manufacturer and installed immediately. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF BLINDSIDE SHEET WATERPROOFING A. Install blindside sheet waterproofing according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels over substrate. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to maintain continuity. C. Horizontal Applications: Install sheet with face against substrate. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by membrane manufacturer. Overlap and seal seams, and stagger and tape end laps to ensure watertight installation. D. Corners: Seal lapped terminations and cut edges of sheet waterproofing at inside and outside corners with detail tape. E. Seal penetrations through sheet waterproofing to provide watertight seal with detail tape patches or wraps and a liquid-membrane troweling. F. Install sheet-waterproofing and auxiliary materials to produce a continuous watertight tie into adjacent waterproofing. G. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with requirements. Tape perimeter of damaged or nonconforming area extending 6 inches (150 mm) beyond repaired areas in all directions. Apply a patch of sheet waterproofing and firmly secure with detail tape. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL A. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from wall or deck substrate, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesive or another method that does not penetrate waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels during subsequent construction. 1. For vertical applications, install protection course before installing drainage panels. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 071326 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage asite representative qualified by waterproofing membrane manufacturer to inspect substrate conditions, surface preparation, membrane application, flashings, protection, and drainage components; and to furnish daily reports to Architect. B. Waterproofing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.7 PROTECTION, REPAIR, AND CLEANING A. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane. B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. C. Protect installed insulation drainage panels from damage due to UV light, harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. D. Correct deficiencies in or remove waterproofing that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings. E. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended in writing by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION 071326 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION 072119 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 072119 - FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This section includes the following: 1. Spray polyurethane foam insulation (SPF-I) assembly located in the non-accessible part of the wall, that serves the following functions: a. Thermal insulation b. Air barrier. c. Water vapor management. 2. SPF-I assembly includes materials and installation as required to bridge and seal the following air leakage pathways and gaps: a. Openings around and penetrations of window frames, store front, curtain wall. b. All other air leakage pathways in the building envelope. 3. Materials to act as flashings and counterflashings. B. Related Work: 1. Section 079200 “Joint Sealants”: Joint sealant materials and installation. 1.2 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing spray polyurethane foam insulation, field test its adhesion to Project substrates as follows: 1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below: a. Each kind of substrate indicated in quality assurance/quality control plan. b. Prepare substrate as specified and recommended by manufacturer to confirm appropriateness of preparation method. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when tests will be conducted. 4. Arrange for tests to take place with spray polyurethane foam insulation manufacturer's technical representative present. a. Bond Strength: Test for cohesive and adhesive strength according to ASTM D4541 or ASTM D 1623. b. Verify adhesion to each prepared substrate separately. 5. Report whether spray polyurethane foam insulation failed to adhere to substrates or tore cohesively. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION 072119 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 a. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of substrate. b. For substrates on which spray polyurethane foam insulation fails adhesively, revise substrate preparation method and retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained. 6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: a. Spray polyurethane foam insulation not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. b. Do not use substrate preparation methods that fail to achieve satisfactory adhesion during testing. c. For substrates for which a satisfactory preparation method cannot be found, submit suggestions for revised details to prevent contact between spray polyurethane foam insulation and those substrates, for review by Architect. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals in accordance with Division 01, Section “Submittal Procedures”. 1. At bid submission, provide evidence to the Architect of licensing and certification under the Air Barrier Association of America’s (ABAA’s) Quality Assurance Program. B. Product Data: For each type of material, including manufacturer's printed instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, temperature and other limitations of installation conditions, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties. 1. Include manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of insulation/air barrier and details of all typical conditions, intersections with other envelope systems and materials, membrane flashings and counter-flashings, and details showing how gaps in the construction will be bridged, how inside and outside corners are negotiated and how miscellaneous penetrations such as conduits, pipes electric boxes and the like are sealed. D. Samples: Submit two samples, 12 by 12 inch (300 by 300 mm) minimum size, of each insulation/air barrier material required for Project. E. Informational Submittals: 1. Copy of Quality Assurance and Quality Control Plan. 2. Test Reports: Provide evidence of testing by an accredited laboratory confirming material has been tested and conforms to the following: a. Requirements of ASTM E2178, Standard for Air Barrier Materials. b. Air permeance testing of primary air barrier material (ASTM E 2178-01) c. Submit test results of assembly in accordance with ABAA test protocol. d. Evidence that product has been part of assembly tested in accordance with NFPA 285. 3. Certification: Provide certification by insulation/air barrier manufacturer that products supplied comply with the following: a. Local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION 072119 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 b. Compatibility by insulation/air barrier manufacturer, listing all materials on the project that it connects to or that come in contact with it. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Assurance and Quality Control Plan for SPF-I: Prepare a plan that complies with recommendations of the approved manufacturer of spray polyurethane foam insulation, to address the following issues: 1. Assignment of responsibility for quality assurance and quality control of spray polyurethane foam insulation to a qualified member of the Construction Manager’s permanent site staff. 2. Inventory of substrates to which spray polyurethane foam insulation will be applied or come in contact with the following information for each substrate: a. Statement of physical and chemical compatibility b. Preparation procedures 3. Scheduling of construction activities to comply with quality assurance and quality controls requirements of this Section. Include the following: a. Scheduled site visits from manufacturer’s representative b. AABA inspections c. Mock-up construction and testing. d. Field testing of installed Work. 4. Coordination of the Work of this Section with the Work of other trades required for the exterior wall assembly. 5. Periodic updates that address changing conditions due to Project phasing and unforeseeable circumstances. B. Manufacturer On-Site Representation: Manufacturer shall visit site at commencement of installation and periodically as required to obtain assurance that recommended procedures are being followed. C. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform Work of this Section who has specialized in installing spray polyurethane foam similar to that required for this Project; and who has been properly trained and is approved, authorized, or licensed by the spray polyurethane foam system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product. In addition, the installer shall comply with the following requirements of the Air Barrier Association of America: 1. The insulation/air barrier contractor shall be, during the bidding period as well as for the duration of the installation, officially recognized as a Licensed Contractor by the Air Barrier Association of America (ABAA). The contractor shall carry liability insurance and bonding. 2. Each worker who is installing insulation/air barrier must be either a Certified Applicator or an installer who is registered with ABAA 3. Each Lead Certified Applicator can supervise a maximum of five registered installers. The Certified Applicator shall be thoroughly trained by the approved manufacturer of the spray polyurethane foam insulation, and experienced in the installation of insulation/air barrier of the types being applied. Lead Certified Applicators shall perform or directly supervise all insulation/air barrier work on the project. 4. Insulation/air barrier installers shall be trained and certified by ABAA/NECA (National Energy Conservation Association) and PSDI (Professional Skills Development Institute Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION 072119 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 for energy conservation) in accordance with the training requirements outlined in the ULC S705.2-02 Installation Standard. Installers shall have their photo-identification certification cards in their possession and available on the project site, for inspection upon request. D. Source Limitations: Obtain components including spray polyurethane foam insulation and transition strips for insulation and air barrier assembly from same manufacturer as spray polyurethane foam insulation or approved by manufacturer of spray polyurethane foam insulation. E. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. F. Fire Response Characteristics for Exterior Wall Assembly: Provide products identical to those in an exterior wall assembly that has passed testing by a qualified testing agency, according to NFPA 285. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. G. Provide products which comply with all state and local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). H. Preconstruction Meeting: Convene prior to commencing Work of this section, in accordance with Division 01, Section “Project Meetings”. Agenda shall include: 1. Meet with Owner, Architect, testing and inspecting agency representative, roofing Installer, spray polyurethane foam insulation manufacturer's representative, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects the Work of this Section. 2. Review of Quality Assurance and Quality Control Plan. 3. Review methods and procedures related to installation of spray polyurethane foam insulation, including manufacturer's written instructions. a. Confirm that scaffolding available for use by installers is configured to permit even, continuous application of spray polyurethane foam insulation. 4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 5. Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements. I. Field-Constructed Mock-Ups: Prior to installation of SPF-I, prepared mock-up to verify details under shop drawing submittals and to demonstrate tie-ins with adjoining construction, and other termination conditions, as well as qualities of materials and execution: 1. Apply insulation/air barrier in field-constructed mock-ups of exterior wall assemblies specified in Division 01, Section “Mock-Ups”. 2. Construct typical exterior wall panel, 8 feet long by 8 feet wide, incorporating back-up wall, partial cladding, window and doorframe and sill, insulation, flashing, building corner condition, junction with roof system, foundation wall and typical penetrations and gaps; illustrating materials interface and seals. All transition membranes and seals shall be installed per the manufacturer’s system requirements. J. Test mock-up for air and water infiltration to conform with Division 01, Section “Quality Requirements”, in accordance with ASTM E 783 and ASTM E1105. K. Cooperate and coordinate with the Owner's inspection and testing agency. Do not cover any installed air and vapor barrier unless it has been inspected, tested and approved. L. Protect people and materials from over-spray and contact with chemicals and gases. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION 072119 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken, labeled with manufacturer's name, product, date of manufacture, expiration date, and directions for storage. B. Store materials in their original undamaged packages in a clean, dry, protected location and within temperature range required by insulation/air barrier manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. C. Avoid spillage. Immediately notify Owner and Architect if spillage occurs and start clean up procedures. D. Clean spills and leave area as it was prior to spill. E. Provide other protection as required by the manufacturer. 1. Replace materials damaged during handling or storage. 2. Remove damaged materials from the premises immediately. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Apply insulation/air barrier within range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by insulation/air barrier manufacturer. Do not apply insulation/air barrier to a damp or wet substrate, unless the manufacturer specifically permits that for the product. 1. Do not apply insulation/air barrier in snow, rain, fog, or mist. 2. Do not apply insulation/air barrier when the temperature of either the substrate surfaces or surrounding air temperature is less than 5 above the dewpoint temperature. Comply with stricter temperature requirements if recommended by the manufacturer. 3. Do not apply material after the expiry date printed on the label of each container. The product has a shelf life of 6 months from the date of manufacture. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Material Warranty: Provide the manufacturer’s three year insulation/air barrier material warranty. B. System Warranty: Provide the manufacturer’s three year system warranty, including the primary insulation/air barrier and installed accessory sealant and membrane materials which fail to achieve air tight and watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Spray Polyurethane Foam Performance, General: 1. Provide system that will perform the following functions: a. Continuous insulation b. Continuous air barrier system Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION 072119 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 c. Liquid water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior any incidental condensation or water penetration. 2. System shall accommodate movements of building materials by providing expansion and control joints as required, with accessory air seal materials at such locations, changes in substrate and perimeter conditions. 3. Comply with recommendations of the Spray Polyurethane Foam Association, including their published guidelines B. Material Compatibility: Provide air barrier materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by manufacturers of spray foam and accessory materials, based on testing and field experience. C. Moisture Control and Air Barrier Performance 1. Moisture Control: Envelope systems that maintain the moisture content of all building materials that comprise the assembly, below the equilibrium moisture content the materials would achieve when exposed to relative humidity of 80 percent RH. For calculation purposes use Chapter 22 in 1997 ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook, “Mathematical Models”. Assume interior air temperature and humidity specified in 1303.3. 2. Air Barrier: The air barrier shall control air leakage into and out of the conditioned space and have the following characteristics: a. Continuity: Continuous air barrier assembly, with all joints made air-tight. b. Air Permeance of each Air Barrier Component: No greater than 0.004 cubic feet per minute per square foot under a pressure differential of 0.3 in. water (1.57 psf) (0.02 L/s.m2 @ 75 Pa.) when tested in accordance. c. Structural Performance of Air Barrier Assembly: Capable of withstanding positive and negative combined design wind, fan and stack pressures on the envelope without damage or displacement, and shall transfer the load to the structure. It shall not displace adjacent materials under full load”. “The air barrier shall be joined in an airtight and flexible manner to the air barrier material of adjacent systems, allowing for the relative movement of systems due to thermal and moisture variations and creep. Connection shall be made between: 1) Foundation and walls. 2) Walls and windows or doors. 3) Different wall systems. 4) Wall and roof. 5) Wall and roof over unconditioned space. 6) Walls, floor and roof across construction, control and expansion joints. 7) Walls, floors and roof to utility, pipe and duct penetrations. “ 3. Air Barrier Penetrations: Seal penetrations of the air barrier and paths of air infiltration or exfiltration, as required for air-tight assembly that meets performance requirements for air barrier assembly. D. Provide a tested system in accordance with the Air Barrier Association of America’s (ABAA’s) testing protocol, to provide tested system air leakage results not to exceed: 1. Air Barrier Assembly Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.01 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (0.05 L/s x sq. m of surface area at 75 Pa); ASTM E 283 and ASTM E 783. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION 072119 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.2 SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAM INSULATION (SPF-I) A. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following. 1. BASF Corporation; Walltite 2. Demilec USA LLC; Heatlok Soy 200 Plus. 3. Johns Manville; Corbond III 4. NCFI Polyurethanes, a division of Barnhardt Manufacturing Co.; Insulstar Spay Foam System 11-016. B. Spray Polyurethane Foam: Spray-applied rigid polyurethane foam developed for use as air barrier and insulation. 1. Spray polyurethane foam insulation, when tested, shall meet the requirements of ULC S705.1-01 Standard for Thermal Insulation-Spray Applied Rigid Polyurethane Foam, Medium Density, Material- Specification. 2. A copy of an Evaluation Report (such as the CCMC Evaluation Report) or copies of the test reports from an accredited testing laboratory, for each physical property, indicating that the product meets the requirements of ULC S705.1-01 shall be made available upon request. A copy of either the evaluation report or the test reports shall be on file at the ABAA office. 3. Material containers shall be labeled with the Evaluation Report number of the evaluation agency. C. Physical Properties Provide spray polyurethane foam insulation that meets the following requirements after installation: 1. Closed Cell Content: Minimum 90 percent. 2. Thermal Resistivity: Minimum R-6 per inch. 3. Density: Minimum 1.9 pounds per cubic foot. 4. Compressive Strength: Minimum 22 psi (152 kPa). 5. Tensile Strength: Minimum 49 psi (337 kPa). 6. Water Absorption: Maximum 2.5 percent, when tested according to ASTM D2842. 7. Air Barrier Material Permeance for 1-inch (51-mm) thickness, when tested according to ASTM E2178: a. Not to exceed 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (0.2 L/s x sq. m of surface area at 75 Pa); 8. Moisture vapor Transmission, ASTM E96: Minimum 1.39 Perm-inch, resulting in the following permeances: a. 1-inch thickness: 1.39 Perm b. 2-inch thickness 0.70 Perm 9. Dimensional Stability: Maximum 8 percent change when subjected for 28 days to 158°F (70°C) temperature at 90 percent RH, in accordance with ASTM D2126. 10. Surface Burning Characteristics for 2-inch (51-mm) thickness: a. Class: 1 b. Flame Spread Index: Less than 25. c. Smoke development: Less than 500 when tested under ASTM E84. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION 072119 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Provide auxiliary materials recommended by insulation/air barrier manufacturer for intended use, and compatible with the insulation/air barrier, including but not limited to the following: B. Air and Vapor Barrier Transition Strip: Smooth surfaced SBS modified bitumen membrane, nominal 40 mil thickness, width as required.. 1. Primer: Water based liquid primer for concrete, masonry, gypsum sheathing, wood, metal, and painted substrates. 2. Product: Bakor, Inc., “Blueskin SA” with “Blueskin Primer” or equivalent products as recommended by approved insulation manufacturer. C. Air Barrier Sealants: As specified in Division 07, Section “Joint Sealants”. Include substrate cleaner and primer as required, and comply with ASTM C920 and ASTM C920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses 1. Product: As recommended by approved insulation manufacturer. D. Fabricated Edge Stop: Extruded thermoplastic polymerangle fabricated for application to the perimeter of opening, as indicated on Drawings and recommended by approved manufacturer of spray polyurethane foam insulation. 1. Dimensions: 2-inch (51 mm) by 2-inch (51-mm) 2. Thickness: 60 mil (1.5 mm). 3. Product: Exo-Tec Manufacturing, Inc., “Jam-Ex”. E. Extruded Silicone Flashing: Low modulus silicone sheet; provide manufacturer's standard system consisting of precured, low-modulus, 40 durometer silicone extrusion, in sizes to fit widths indicated, combined with a neutral-curing low modulus silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates. Pecora Sil-Span, Dow 1-2-3 or equal. F. Accessory materials as required for complete air/vapor barrier installation. 2.4 EQUIPMENT A. The equipment used to spray the polyurethane foam material shall be in accordance with ULC S705.2-02 and the polyurethane foam and equipment manufacturers’ recommendations for specific type of application. 1. Equipment shall be calibrated to mix components in precise quantities as required for proper curing. 2. Equipment shall include failsafe provisions to prevent operation in case of depletion of one or both components. B. Record equipment settings on the Daily Work Record, as required by the ULC S705.2-02 Installation standard. C. Each proportioner unit shall supply only one spray gun. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION 072119 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions under which insulation/air barrier systems will be applied, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements. Verify that surfaces and conditions are suitable prior to commencing work of this section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Do not proceed with installation until after minimum concrete curing period recommended by insulation/air barrier manufacturer. 2. Ensure that the following conditions have been met: a. Surfaces are sound, dry, even, and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar or other contaminants b. Concrete surfaces are cured and dry, smooth without large voids, spalled areas or sharp protrusions. c. Masonry joints are flush and completely filled with mortar, and all excess mortar sitting on masonry ties has been removed. 3. Verify substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D4263. 4. Notify Architect in writing of anticipated problems using insulation/air barrier over substrate. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions, to provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate 1. Comply with recommendations listed in the quality assurance and quality control plan. 2. Remove oil and grease from metal. 3. Permit cleaning compounds applied to substrate to dry completely. B. Prime masonry, concrete substrates with conditioning primer when installing modified asphalt membrane transition membranes. C. Prime wood, metal, and painted substrates with primer recommended by membrane manufacturer. D. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through insulation/air barrier and at protrusions according to insulation/air barrier manufacturer's written instructions and approved tested system in accordance with ABAA air barrier testing protocol. 1. Verify that surfaces and conditions are suitable to accept work as outlined in this section. 2. Prior to commencement of work report in writing to the architect any defects in surfaces or conditions that may adversely affect the performance of products installed under this section. 3. Commencement of work outlined in this section shall be deemed as acceptance of existing work and conditions. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION 072119 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 4. Examine joints before sealing to ensure configurations, surfaces and widths are suitable for spray polyurethane foam. Report in writing all defects stating the locations of joints deemed unacceptable for the application of the spray polyurethane foam. E. Surface Preparation 1. Surfaces to receive foam insulation shall be clean, dry and properly fastened to ensure adhesion of the polyurethane foam to the substrate. 2. Ensure that all work by other trades that may penetrate through the air barrier system is in place and complete. 3. Ensure that surface preparation and any primers required conform to the manufacturer’s instructions. 4. Prepare surfaces by brushing, scrubbing. Scraping, or grinding to remove loose mortar, dust, oil, grease, oxidation, mill scale and other contaminants which will affect adhesion and integrity of the spray polyurethane foam. Wipe down metal surfaces to remove release agents or other non-compatible coatings, using clean sponges or rags soaked in a solvent compatible with the spray polyurethane foam. Ensure surfaces are dry before proceeding. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Protection: 1. Mask and cover adjacent areas to protect from over spray. 2. Ensure any required foam stop or back up material are in place to prevent over spray and achieve complete seal. 3. Seal off existing ventilation equipment. Install temporary ducting and fans to ensure exhaust fumes. Provide for make-up air. 4. Erect barriers, isolate area and post warning signs to advise non-protected personnel to avoid the spray area. B. Install transition membranes to all applicable surfaces and ensure proper adhesion of the transition membranes to the substrate, capable of having spray polyurethane foam insulation. C. Install fabricated edge stops at perimeters of openings. 3.4 APPLICATION A. General: Spray-application of polyurethane foam shall be installed in accordance with the following: 1. ULC S705.2-02 2. ASTM D 5469 3. Spray Polyurethane Foam Association, “Spray Polyurethane Foam for Residential Building Envelope Insulation and Air Seal”. 4. Spray polyurethane foam manufacturer’s written instructions. B. Start application of spray polyurethane foam in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel. C. Apply only when surfaces and environmental conditions are within limits prescribed by the material manufacturer and the ULC S705.2 Installation standard. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION 072119 - 11 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. Apply in consecutive passes as recommended by manufacturer to thickness as indicated on drawings. 1. Picture-Framing: For first pass, apply spray polyurethane foam insulation to perimeter of openings and at other perimeter conditions. 2. Remaining passes shall cover large areas in even, continuous application. 3. Each pass shall be not less than ½ inch and not greater than 2 inches thick. 4. Prior to application of subsequent pass, permit each pass to cure for a minimum of 30 minutes or longer as recommended by manufacturer for project conditions. E. Do not install spray polyurethane foam within 3 inches of heat emitting devices such as light fixtures and chimneys. F. Provide finished surface of foam insulation that is free of voids and embedded foreign objects. G. Complete connections to other components or repair any gaps, holes or other damage using material which conforms to ULC S710.1 Polyurethane Sealant Foam – One Component – Material or ULC S711.1 Polyurethane Sealant Foam – Two Components – Material and shall be installed in accordance with ULC S710.2 Polyurethane Sealant Foam – One component – Installation or ULC S711.2 Polyurethane Sealant Foam – Two Component – Installation, whichever is appropriate. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove masking materials and over spray from adjacent areas immediately after foam surface has hardened. Ensure cleaning methods do not damage work performed by other sections. B. Trim, as required, any excess thickness that would interfere with the application of cladding/covering system by other trades. C. Clean and restore surfaces soiled or damaged by work of the section. Consult with section of work soiled before cleaning to ensure methods used will not damage the work. D. Do not permit adjacent work to be damaged by work of this section. Damage to work of this section caused by other sections shall be repaired by this section at the expense of the subcontractor causing the damage. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site Tests 1. The Licensed Installer shall conduct daily visual inspection, adhesion/cohesion testing and density measurements as outlined by the ULC S705.2-02 Installation standard. 2. The Licensed Installer shall complete the Daily Work Record and record all information required including the results of the testing. The Daily Work Record shall be kept on site for routine inspection. Copies of the Daily Work Record shall be forwarded to the owner or owner’s representative upon request. Copies of the Daily Work Record or monthly summaries shall be sent to the ABAA office on a monthly basis as required by the Quality Assurance Program. 3. Transition membranes shall be pull tested in accordance with the ABAA Quality Assurance Program requirements before installing the spray polyurethane air barrier material. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION 072119 - 12 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 4. The costs incurred for daily testing and inspection by the Licensed Installer and the completion of the Daily Work Record shall be borne by the Licensed Contractor. B. Inspection 1. Arrange for site inspections by manufacturer and ABAA. The cost of inspections shall be included in the bid provided by the Licensed Contractor. 2. The ABAA site-inspections shall verify conformance with the manufacturer’s instructions, the standard ULC S705.2-02 Installation standard, the ABAA Quality Assurance Program, and this section of the project specification. 3. Inspections and testing shall be carried out at 5%, 50% and 95% of completion. A written inspection report shall be forwarded to the architect, the owner’s representative, the Contractor and the ABAA-licensed installer within 3 working days of the inspection and test being performed. In the case of any deficiencies, the ABAA-licensed inspector may verbally advise the licensed installer at the time of the inspection. 4. If the inspection reveals any defects, the Licensed Contractor shall immediately rectify all such defects at his cost. C. Tolerances 1. Maximum variation from indicated thickness: a. Minus (-) 1/2 inch; b. Plus (+) 1/2 inch. D. Protection 1. Protect the spray polyurethane foam from ultraviolet radiation when installed on the exterior of a building. 2. Cover the spray polyurethane foam with a thermal barrier when installed on the interior of the building. END OF SECTION 072119 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 078100 - APPLIED FIREPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes sprayed fire-resistive materials (SFRM) for patching existing fireproofing. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 012200 “Unit Prices” for unit prices affecting the Work of this Section. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Sequence and coordinate application of SFRM with other related work specified in other Sections to comply with the following requirements: 1. Coordinate steel substrate requirements with fabricator of structural steel members to receive fire-resistive materials. Confirm compatible shop primers will be provided where required and that shop primers will not be provided where they will interfere with bond or are otherwise not permitted for tested fire-resistive assembly. a. Coordinate existing steel substrate requirements. Confirm required auxiliary materials, surface preparation, and other treatment requirements for existing steel paints and coatings where they will interfere with bond or are otherwise not permitted for tested fire-resistive assembly. 2. Provide temporary enclosure as required to confine spraying operations and protect the environment, other portions of the work, and adjacent occupied areas. 3. Avoid unnecessary exposure of fire-resistive material to abrasion and other damage likely to occur during construction operations subsequent to its application. 4. For metal roof decks without concrete topping, do not apply fire-resistive material to metal roof deck substrates until roofing and rooftop mechanical equipment has been completed; prohibit roof traffic during application and drying of fire-resistive material. 5. Do not begin applying fire-resistive material until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items penetrating fire protection are in place. 6. Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying fireresistive material until application of fire protection is completed. 7. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fire-resistive material has been applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to defective applications. B. Coordinate application of fireproofing with other construction to minimize need to cut or remove fireproofing. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect fireproofing and patch damaged or removed areas. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review products, design ratings, restrained and unrestrained conditions, densities, thicknesses, bond strengths, and other performance requirements. 1.5 DEFINITIONS A. SFRM: Sprayed fire-resistive material. B. Concealed: Fire-resistive materials applied to surfaces that are concealed from view behind other construction when the Work is completed. C. Exposed: Fire-resistive materials applied to surfaces that are exposed to view when the Work is completed, or that are in elevator shafts and machine rooms, or that are in mechanical rooms, or that are in air-handling plenums. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Framing plans, schedules, or both, indicating the following: 1. Locations and types of surface preparations required before applying fireproofing. 2. Locations and extent of fireproofing for each construction and fire-resistance rating. 3. Applicable fire-resistance design designations of a qualified testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Minimum fireproofing thicknesses needed to achieve required fire-resistance rating of each structural component and assembly. 5. Treatment of fireproofing after application. 6. Indicate steel items on structural framing plans that are not required to receive any fireproofing. 7. Subject to acceptance by authority having jurisdiction, where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular fireproofing condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by fireproofing manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Certificates: For each type of fireproofing. C. Evaluation Reports: For fireproofing, from ICC-ES. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by fireproofing manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install manufacturer's products according to specified requirements. B. Mockups: Build mockups to set quality standards for materials and execution and for preconstruction testing. 1. Build mockup of each type of fireproofing and different substrate. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.9 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on field mockups of fireproofing. 1. Provide test specimens and assemblies representative of proposed materials and construction. B. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test for compliance with requirements for specified performance and test methods. 1. Bond Strength: Test for cohesive and adhesive strength according to ASTM E 736. Provide bond strength indicated in referenced fire-resistance design, but not less than minimum specified in Part 2. 2. Density: Test for density according to ASTM E 605. Provide density indicated in referenced fire-resistance design, but not less than minimum specified in Part 2. 3. Verify that manufacturer, through its own laboratory testing or field experience, attests that primers or coatings are compatible with fireproofing. 4. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 5. For materials failing tests, obtain applied-fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures including the use of specially formulated bonding agents or primers. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to Project site in original, unopened packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, shelf life if applicable, and fire-resistance ratings applicable to Project. B. Use materials with limited shelf life within period indicated. Remove from Project site and discard materials whose shelf life has expired. C. Store materials inside, under cover, and aboveground; keep dry until ready for use. Remove from Project site and discard wet or deteriorated materials. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply fireproofing when ambient or substrate temperature does not meet requirements of manufacturer. B. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of fireproofing, providing complete air exchanges according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use natural means or, if they are inadequate, forced-air circulation until fireproofing dries thoroughly. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Assemblies: Provide fireproofing, including auxiliary materials, according to requirements of each fire-resistance design and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Source Limitations: Obtain fireproofing from single source. C. Fire-Resistance Design: Indicated on Drawings, tested according to ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Steel members are to be considered restrained unless specifically noted otherwise. D. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction and the following VOC limits when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Non-flat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L. 3. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L. 4. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L. E. Asbestos: Provide products containing no detectable asbestos. 2.2 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS A. SFRM: Manufacturer's standard, factory-mixed, lightweight, dry formulation, complying with indicated fire-resistance design, and mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar before conveyance and application. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Carboline Company; RPM International; AD Southwest Fireproofing Type 5GP. b. Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn; Grace Construction Products; Monokote MK-6 Series. c. Isolatek International, Inc; Cafco 300 or Cafco 300 SB. 2. Application Type: Wet-mix. a. Dry-mix formulations conveyed in a dry state are not acceptable. 3. Binder Type: Portland cement or gypsum. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 4. Bond Strength: Minimum 150-lbf/sq. ft. (7.18-kPa) cohesive and adhesive strength based on field testing according to ASTM E 736. 5. Density: Not less than 15 lb/cu. ft. (240 kg/cu. m) and as specified in the approved fireresistance design, according to ASTM E 605. 6. Thickness: As required for fire-resistance design indicated, measured according to requirements of fire-resistance design or ASTM E 605, whichever is thicker, but not less than 0.375 inch (9 mm). 7. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. 8. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. Flame-Spread Index: 10 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 10 or less. 9. Compressive Strength: Minimum 10 lbf/sq. in. (68.9 kPa) according to ASTM E 761. 10. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion according to ASTM E 937. 11. Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination according to ASTM E 759. 12. Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, or delamination according to ASTM E 760. 13. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.025 g/sq. ft. (0.270 g/sq. m) in 24 hours according to ASTM E 859. 14. Fungal Resistance: Treat products with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation to result in no growth on specimens per ASTM G 21 or rating of 10 according to ASTM D 3274 when tested according to ASTM D 3273. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that are compatible with fireproofing and substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance designs indicated. B. Substrate Primers: Primers approved by fireproofing manufacturer and complying with one or both of the following requirements: 1. Primer and substrate are identical to those tested in required fire-resistance design by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Primer's bond strength in required fire-resistance design complies with specified bond strength for fireproofing and with requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listings of another qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on a series of bond tests according to ASTM E 736. C. Bonding Agent: Product approved by fireproofing manufacturer and complying with requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listings of another qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Metal Lath: Expanded metal lath fabricated from material of weight, configuration, and finish required, according to fire-resistance designs indicated and fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations. Include clips, lathing accessories, corner beads, and other anchorage devices required to attach lath to substrates and to receive fireproofing. E. Reinforcing Fabric: Glass- or carbon-fiber fabric of type, weight, and form required to comply with fire-resistance designs indicated; approved and provided by fireproofing manufacturer. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 F. Reinforcing Mesh: Metallic mesh reinforcement of type, weight, and form required to comply with fire-resistance design indicated; approved and provided by fireproofing manufacturer. Include pins and attachment. G. Sealer: Transparent-drying, water-dispersible, tinted protective coating recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer for each fire-resistance design. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of the Work and according to each fire-resistance design. Verify compliance with the following: 1. Substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants, or other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fireproofing with substrates under conditions of normal use or fire exposure. 2. Objects penetrating fireproofing, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and similar items, are securely attached to substrates. 3. Substrates receiving fireproofing are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, or other suspended construction that will interfere with fireproofing application. 4. Substrates comply with requirements in the Section where the substrate and related materials and construction are specified. B. Verify that concrete work on steel deck has been completed before beginning fireproofing work. C. Verify that roof construction, installation of roof-top HVAC equipment, and other related work is complete before beginning fireproofing work. D. Conduct tests according to fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations to verify that substrates are free of substances capable of interfering with bond. E. Verify that primers have not been installed on substrates where primer will interfere with bond. 1. Verify existing steel substrates with existing primers, paints, and coatings. F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Cover and protect other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fireproofing materials during application. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fireproofing, including but not limited to, dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants. C. Prime substrates where included in fire-resistance design and where recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer unless compatible shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory condition to receive fireproofing. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. For applications visible on completion of Project, repair substrates to remove surface imperfections that could affect uniformity of texture and thickness in finished surface of fireproofing. Remove minor projections and fill voids that would telegraph through fire-resistive products after application. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Construct fireproofing assemblies that are identical to fire-resistance design indicated and products as specified, tested, and substantiated by test reports; with respect to rate of application, accelerator use, for thickness, primers, sealers, topcoats, finishing, water overspray, and other materials and procedures affecting fireproofing work. B. Comply with fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials, application procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and apply fireproofing; as applicable to particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. C. Coordinate application of fireproofing with other construction to minimize need to cut or remove fireproofing. 1. Do not begin applying fireproofing until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items penetrating fireproofing are in place. 2. Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying fireproofing until application of fireproofing is completed. D. Metal Decks: 1. Do not apply fireproofing to underside of metal deck substrates until concrete topping, if any, has been completed. 2. Do not apply fireproofing to underside of metal roof deck until roofing has been completed; prohibit roof traffic during application and drying of fireproofing. E. Install auxiliary materials as required, as detailed, and according to fire-resistance design and fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations for conditions of exposure and intended use. For auxiliary materials, use attachment and anchorage devices of type recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer. F. Install metal lath and reinforcing fabric, as required, to comply with fire-resistance ratings and fire-resistive material manufacturer's written recommendations for conditions of exposure and intended use. Securely attach lath and fabric to substrate in position required for support and reinforcement of fire-resistive material. Use anchorage devices of type recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer. Attach accessories where indicated or required for secure attachment of lath and fabric to substrate. 1. Install metal lath and reinforcing fabric at existing steel members with existing paints and coatings, and where necessary for fireproofing to comply with bond requirements. G. Coat substrates with bonding agent before applying fire-resistive material where required to achieve fire-resistance rating or where recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer for material and application indicated. H. Spray-apply fireproofing to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 I. Extend fireproofing in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected. J. Install body of fireproofing in a single course unless otherwise recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer. K. For applications over encapsulant materials, including lockdown (post-removal) encapsulants, apply fireproofing that differs in color from that of encapsulant over which it is applied. L. Where sealers are used, apply products that are tinted to differentiate them from fireproofing over which they are applied. Apply sealers at the following locations: 1. Air-handling plenums. 2. Above suspended ceilings where space is used as return-air plenum. 3. Where SFRM is applied on exterior side of air and vapor barrier. 4. Where SFRM is applied in unconditioned space. 5. Where recommended by manufacturer. M. Provide a uniform finish complying with description indicated for each type of fireproofing material and matching finish approved for required mockups. N. Cure fireproofing according to fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations. O. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fireproofing has been applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to deficient applications. P. Finishes: Where indicated, apply fireproofing to produce the following finishes: 1. Manufacturer's Standard Finishes: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for each finish selected. 2. Spray-Textured Finish: Finish left as spray applied with no further treatment. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. Testing and inspecting will be performed as required by the 2010 Building Code of New York State, 1704.10. 2. Testing and inspecting agency will prepare test and inspection reports, interpret tests, and state in each report whether tested work complies with or deviates from requirements. B. Perform the tests and inspections of completed Work in successive stages. Do not proceed with application of fireproofing for the next area until test results for previously completed applications of fireproofing show compliance with requirements. Tested values must equal or exceed values as specified and as indicated and required for approved fire-resistance design. C. Fireproofing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 1. Remove and replace fireproofing that does not pass tests and inspections, and retest. 2. Apply additional fireproofing, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results indicate insufficient thickness, and retest. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.5 CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND REPAIRING A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling. B. Protect fireproofing, according to advice of manufacturer and Installer, from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes, so fireproofing will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. C. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect fireproofing and repair damaged areas and fireproofing removed due to work of other trades. D. Repair fireproofing damaged by other work before concealing it with other construction. E. Repair fireproofing by reapplying it using same method as original installation or using manufacturer's recommended trowel-applied product. END OF SECTION 078100 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls. 2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies. 3. Penetrations in smoke barriers. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 078443 "Joint Firestopping" for joints in or between fire-resistance-rated construction and in smoke barriers. 2. Division 21 Sections specifying fire-suppression piping penetrations. 3. Division 22 and 23 Sections specifying duct and piping penetrations. 4. Division 26, 27, and 28 Sections specifying cable and conduit penetrations. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. 1. Types of penetrating items. 2. Types of constructions penetrated, including fire-resistance ratings and, where applicable, thicknesses of construction penetrated. 3. Penetration firestopping systems for each location identified by firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. 4. Engineering Judgments: Subject to acceptance by authority having jurisdiction, where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For each penetration firestopping system, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. C. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that penetration firestopping systems have been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements." 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver penetration firestopping system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life if applicable, qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials for penetration firestopping systems to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping is installed according to specified requirements. B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping. C. Notify Owner's testing agency at least seven days in advance of penetration firestopping installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations. 1. Confirm Owner’s requirements for Owner-retained agency inspections with Owner. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. Do not cover up penetration firestopping installations that will become concealed behind other construction until each installation has been examined by Owner's testing agency and building inspector, if required by authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: 1. Penetration firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Penetration Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Penetration firestopping products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. Classification markings on penetration firestopping correspond to designations listed by the following: 1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 3M Fire Protection Products. 2. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. 3. Hilti, Inc. 4. Nelson Firestop; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation. 5. NUCO Inc. 6. RectorSeal. 7. Specified Technologies Inc. 8. Tremco, Inc. B. Source Limitations: Obtain penetration firestopping systems, for each kind of penetration and construction condition indicated, through one source from a single manufacturer. 2.3 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fireresistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any. B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa). Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa). 1. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 2. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall. D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per UL 1479. 1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. (0.025 cu. m/s per sq. m) of penetration opening at 0.30-inch wg (74.7 Pa) at both ambient and elevated temperatures. E. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. F. VOC Content: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. G. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping indicated. 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following: a. Slag-wool-fiber or rock-wool-fiber insulation. b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. c. Fire-rated form board. d. Fillers for sealants. 2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. 5. Steel sleeves. 2.4 FILL MATERIALS A. General: Provide penetration firestopping systems containing the types of fill materials that comply with VOC requirements and are indicated in the ‘Penetration Firestopping Schedule’ at the end of Part 3 by referencing the types of materials described in this Article. Fill materials are those referred to in directories of referenced testing and inspecting agencies as "fill," "void," or "cavity" materials. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during exposure to moisture. C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant. D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet. E. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds. F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side. G. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar. H. Pathway Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled frames formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit multiple penetrants, and designed to allow for adding or removing penetrants without the need to remove or reinstall firestopping materials. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Specified Technologies Inc.; EZ-PATH Series 44+. I. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect pillows/bags from being easily removed. J. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. K. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below: 1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces, and non-sag formulation for openings in vertical, sloped, and other surfaces requiring a non-slumping gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestopping limits use of non-sag grade for these opening conditions. 2.5 MIXING A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping. 2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestopping. C. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. On both sides of each firestopping system installation, attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of firestopping edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name. B. Identification of Fire-Rated and Smoke-Rated Walls: Provide stenciling that permanently identifies fire walls, fire barriers, fire partitions, smoke barriers, smoke partitions, and other walls required to have protected openings or penetrations. 1. Comply with requirements of applicable building code and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Locate stenciling on accessible and visible portions of walls above ceilings. a. Where there are no ceilings, locate height of stenciling at highest accessible and visible portion of walls. 3. Install stenciling at intervals not exceeding 30 feet (9144 mm) on center measured horizontally along wall or partition, and within 15 feet (4572 mm) of end of wall or partition. 4. Minimum Lettering Height: 3 inches (76 mm). 5. Text Wording: Include the words "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER – PROTECT ALL OPENINGS" or other wording acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 6. Sign Option: Subject to approval of authorities having jurisdiction, permanently attached pre-manufactured signs or labels may be used in lieu of stenciling. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect penetration firestopping upon completion to verify required firestopping is installed in compliance with requirements. B. Owner may engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections according to ASTM E 2174. 1. Confirm Owner’s requirements for Owner-retained agency inspections with Owner. C. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements. D. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. E. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and immediately install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements. 3.7 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ. B. Firestopping with No Penetrating Items: 1. Available UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- C-BJ- F-A- W-J- W-L- 0001-0999. 2. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating, including but not limited to, one or more of the following: a. Latex sealant. b. Silicone sealant. c. Intumescent putty. d. Mortar. C. Firestopping for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing: 1. Available UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- C-BJ- C-BK- F-A- F-B- F-C- W-J- W-K- W-L- 1001-1999. 2. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating, including but not limited to, one or more of the following: a. Latex sealant. b. Silicone sealant. c. Intumescent putty. d. Mortar. D. Firestopping for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing: 1. Available UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- C-BJ- F-A- F-B- F-C- W-J- W-L- 2001-2999. 2. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating, including but not limited to, one or more of the following: a. Latex sealant. b. Silicone sealant. c. Intumescent putty. d. Intumescent wrap strips. e. Firestop device. E. Firestopping for Electrical Cables: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Available UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- C-BJ- F-A- F-B- F-C- W-J- W-L- 3001-3999. 2. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating, including but not limited to, one or more of the following: a. Latex sealant. b. Silicone sealant. c. Intumescent putty. d. Silicone foam. e. Pillows/bags. F. Firestopping for Cable Trays with Electric Cables: 1. Available UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- C-BJ- F-A- F-B- F-C- W-J- W-K- W-L- 40014999. 2. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating, including but not limited to, one or more of the following: a. Latex sealant. b. Intumescent putty. c. Silicone foam. d. Pillows/bags. e. Mortar. G. Firestopping for Insulated Pipes: 1. Available UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- C-BJ- F-A- F-C- W-J- W-L- 5001-5999. 2. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating, including but not limited to, one or more of the following: a. Latex sealant. b. Intumescent putty. c. Silicone foam. d. Intumescent wrap strips. H. Firestopping for Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants: 1. Available UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- F-A- W-L- 6001-6999. 2. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating, including but not limited to, one or more of the following: a. Latex sealant. b. Intumescent putty. c. Mortar. I. Firestopping for Miscellaneous Mechanical Penetrants: 1. Available UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- F-C- W-J- W-L- 7001-7999. 2. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating, including but not limited to, one or more of the following: a. Latex sealant. b. Mortar. J. Firestopping for Groupings of Penetrants: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Available UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- C-BJ- F-A- F-C- W-J- W-L- 8001-8999. 2. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating, including but not limited to, one or more of the following: a. Latex sealant. b. Mortar. c. Intumescent wrap strips. d. Firestop device. e. Intumescent composite sheet. K. Firestopping for Groupings of Penetrants, Cable Tray Each Side of Wall: 1. Available UL-Classified Systems: C-L-W-L-8001-8999. 2. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating, provide the following: a. Pathway firestop device. END OF SECTION 078413 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 JOINT FIRESTOPPING 078443 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 078443 - JOINT FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Joints in or between fire-resistance-rated constructions. 2. Joints in smoke barriers. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers. 2. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for firestop tracks for metal-framed partition heads. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Product Schedule: For each joint firestopping system. Include location, illustration of firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing agency. 1. Engineering Judgments: Subject to acceptance by authority having jurisdiction, where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing agency's illustration for a particular joint firestopping system condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by joint firestopping system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For each joint firestopping system, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 JOINT FIRESTOPPING 078443 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that joint firestopping systems have been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with UL's "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements." 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver joint firestopping system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project and with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials for joint firestopping systems to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install joint firestopping systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by joint firestopping system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Install and cure joint firestopping systems per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilation or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that joint firestopping systems can be installed according to specified firestopping system design. B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate joint firestopping systems. C. Notify Owner's testing agency at least seven days in advance of joint firestopping installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations. 1. Confirm Owner’s requirements for Owner-retained agency inspections with Owner. D. Do not cover up joint firestopping system installations that will become concealed behind other construction until each installation has been examined by Owner's testing agency and building inspector, if required by authorities having jurisdiction. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 JOINT FIRESTOPPING 078443 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: 1. Perform joint firestopping system tests by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Joint Firestopping Systems" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Joint firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a qualified testing agency. 1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." 2.2 JOINT FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS A. Joint Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assemblies in or between which joint firestopping systems are installed. Joint firestopping systems shall accommodate building movements without impairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases. B. Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Provide joint firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. 3M Fire Protection Products. b. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. c. Blazeframe Industries. d. Hilti, Inc. e. Nelson Firestop; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation. f. NUCO Inc. g. RectorSeal. h. Specified Technologies, Inc. i. Tremco, Inc. 2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the wall, floor, or roof in or between which it is installed. C. Joints in Smoke Barriers: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with ratings determined per UL 2079 based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.30-inch wg (74.7 Pa). 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. 3M Fire Protection Products. b. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. c. Blazeframe Industries. d. Hilti, Inc. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 JOINT FIRESTOPPING 078443 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 e. Nelson Firestop; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation. f. NUCO Inc. g. RectorSeal. h. Specified Technologies, Inc. i. Tremco, Inc. 2. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/ft. (0.00775 cu. m/s x m) of joint at both ambient and elevated temperatures. D. VOC Content: Fire-resistive joint system sealants shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. E. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming materials, that are needed to install elastomeric fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only components specified by joint firestopping system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for conditions indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Before installing fire-resistive joint systems, clean joints immediately to comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of elastomeric fill materials or compromise fire-resistive rating. 2. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with elastomeric fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. B. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by joint firestopping system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent fill materials of fire-resistive joint system from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 JOINT FIRESTOPPING 078443 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing fire-resistive joint system's seal with substrates. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support elastomeric fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing elastomeric fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of fire-resistive joint system. C. Install elastomeric fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Elastomeric fill voids and cavities formed by joints and forming materials as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply elastomeric fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints. 3. For elastomeric fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Joint Identification: Identify joint firestopping systems with legible metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of joint edge so labels are visible to anyone seeking to remove or joint firestopping system. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words "Warning - Joint Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect fire-resistive joint systems upon completion to verify required fire-resistive joint systems are installed in compliance with requirements. B. Inspecting Agency: Owner may engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections according to ASTM E 2393. 1. Confirm Owner’s requirements for Owner-retained agency inspections with Owner. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 JOINT FIRESTOPPING 078443 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Where deficiencies are found or joint firestopping systems are damaged or removed due to testing, repair or replace joint firestopping systems so they comply with requirements. D. Additional inspecting by Owner’s inspecting agency, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. E. Proceed with enclosing joint firestopping systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean off excess elastomeric fill materials adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by joint firestopping system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which joints occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure joint firestopping systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fireresistive joint systems complying with specified requirements. 3.7 JOINT FIRESTOPPING SYSTEM SCHEDULE A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHBN. B. Wall-to-Wall, Joint Firestopping Systems: 1. UL-Classified Systems: WW-D or S- 0000-0999, 1000-1999, 2000-2999, 3000-3999, or 4000-4999. 2. Assembly Rating: Match wall ratings. 3. Nominal Joint Width: As indicated. 4. Movement Capabilities: Class II – 12.5 percent compression or extension. 5. L-Rating at Ambient: Less than 5 cfm/lin. ft. 6. L-Rating at 400 deg F (204 deg C): Less than 5 cfm/lin. ft. C. Head-of-Wall, Fire-Resistive Joint Firestopping Systems: 1. UL-Classified Systems: HW-D- 0000-0999, 1000-1999, 2000-2999, 3000-3999, or 40004999. 2. Assembly Rating: Match wall rating. 3. Nominal Joint Width: As indicated. 4. Movement Capabilities: Class II - 15 percent compression or extension. 5. L-Rating at Ambient: Less than 5 cfm/lin. ft. 6. L-Rating at 400 deg F (204 deg C): Less than 5 cfm/lin. ft. D. Bottom-of-Wall, Joint Firestopping Systems: 1. UL-Classified Systems: BW-D or S- 0000-0999, 1000-1999, 2000-2999, 3000-3999, or 4000-4999. 2. Assembly Rating: Match wall rating. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 JOINT FIRESTOPPING 078443 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. Nominal Joint Width: As indicated. 4. Movement Capabilities: Class II - 15 percent compression or extension. 5. L-Rating at Ambient: Less than 5 cfm/lin. ft. 6. L-Rating at 400 deg F (204 deg C): Less than 5 cfm/lin. ft. END OF SECTION 078443 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Urethane joint sealants. 3. Mildew-resistant joint sealants. 4. Latex joint sealants. 5. Epoxy joint fillers. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" and Section 078446 "Joint Firestopping" for sealing joints in fire-resistance-rated construction. 2. Section 079219 "Acoustical Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in sound-rated construction. 3. Section 088000 "Glazing" for glazing sealants. 4. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for acoustical sealing of perimeter joints. 5. Section 095113 "Acoustical Panel Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at perimeters with acoustical sealant. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Compatible: Material will not adversely affect adjacent materials, is chemically compatible with adjacent materials, and achieves adhesive compatibility with adjacent materials. 1. Chemical Compatibility: Material will not breakdown, deteriorate, degrade, or prematurely fail when coming in contact with another material. Material will not cause chemical breakdown, deterioration, degradation, discoloration, staining, or premature failure of another material. 2. Adhesive Compatibility: Material will develop bond strength or provide a suitable surface for another material to develop bond strength complying with requirements when coming in contact with another material. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate joint sealants with substrates and adjacent materials to ensure compatibility of sealants with substrates and adjacent materials. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide joints formed between two 6-inch- (150-mm-) long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. D. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color. E. Joint-Sealant Color Schedule: Include separate schedule and diagram(s) indicating color of sealants at each sealant location. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and testing agency. B. Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer. C. Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute (SWRI) Validation Certificate: For each sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program. D. Product Test Reports: For each kind of joint sealant, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. E. Preconstruction Laboratory Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following: 1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation are needed for adhesion. F. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in "Preconstruction Testing" Article. G. Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: For each sealant application tested. H. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved or licensed by manufacturer. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency. 1. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated. 2. Test according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920 for adhesion and cohesion under cyclic movement, adhesion-in-peel, and indentation hardness. 1.8 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Laboratory Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. 1. Adhesion Testing: Use ASTM C 794 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. 2. Compatibility Testing: Use ASTM C 1087 to determine sealant compatibility when in contact with glazing, gaskets, and other materials. 3. Submit manufacturer's recommended number of pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, joint-sealant backings, and miscellaneous materials. 4. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 5. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures, including use of specially formulated primers. 6. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit data that are based on previous testing, not older than 48 months, of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted. B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows: 1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Conduct field tests for each kind of sealant and joint substrate. 3. If required for manufacturer’s warranty, arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical representative present. a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Tail Procedure, or Flap Procedure in ASTM C 1521. 1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side. 4. Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained. 5. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by jointsealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (5 deg C). 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL A. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer. B. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. C. Performance: Provide joint sealants that establish and maintain water-tight, air-tight, and waterresistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates and adjacent materials. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Architectural sealants shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. 2. Sealants and sealant primers for nonporous substrates shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. 3. Sealants and sealant primers for nonporous substrates shall have a VOC content of 775 g/L or less. E. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A. Silicone: Neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50 or Class 100/50, Use NT. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc; SCS2000 SilPruf, SCS2700 SilPruf LM. b. Sika Corporation U.S.; Sikasil WS-295 or Sikasil WS-295 FPS. c. Sika Corporation U.S.; Sikasil WS-290 or Sikasil WS-290 FPS. 2.3 NON-STAINING SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A. Non-staining Joint Sealants: No staining of substrates when tested according to ASTM C 1248. B. Silicone, Non-staining: Neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50 or Class 100/50, Use NT. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 756 SMS, 790, or 795. b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc; SilPruf NB. c. Pecora Corporation; 890 NST-FTS, 864NST-FTS, or 895NST-FTS. d. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1, Spectrem 2, or Spectrem 3. 2.4 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS A. Urethane, S, NS, 25, T, NT: Single-component, non-sag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, traffic- and non-traffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses T and NT. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. BASF Corporation-Construction Systems; MasterSeal CR 195 (Pre-2014: Sonolastic Ultra). Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 b. Pacific Polymers International, Inc.; Elasto-Thane 230 Type II. c. Sika Corporation; Sikaflex-1a. d. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 116. 2.5 MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS A. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with fungicide to prevent mold and mildew growth. B. Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 786-M White. b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc; SCS1700 Sanitary. c. May National Associates, Inc., a subsidiary of Sika Corporation U.S.; Bondaflex Sil 100 WF. d. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200. C. Silicone, Mildew-Resistant, Neutral-Curing: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Pecora Corporation; 898NST. 2.6 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC, Building Systems; Sonolac. b. May National Associates, Inc., a subsidiary of Sika Corporation U.S.; Bondaflex Sil-A 700. c. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. d. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); 950A or PowerHouse. e. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834. 2.7 EPOXY JOINT FILLER A. Epoxy Joint Filler: ASTM C 881/C 881M, Type I, Grade 3. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Pecora Corporation; Dynapoxy EP-1200. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 b. Euclid Chemical Company; EUCO #452-P Epoxy System. c. BASF-Sonneborn; Epolith-G. 2. Contractor shall verify compatibility with applicable substrates, resinous flooring systems, and high-performance coating systems. 2.8 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Non-staining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), Type O (open-cell material), Type B (bi-cellular material with a surface skin), or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Non-staining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, joint substrates, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Cleaners used in the work shall be the same as those used during testing. 2. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 3. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. 4. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 5. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Metal. b. Glass. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of jointsealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. Replace damaged backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application, and replace them with dry materials. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 4. Do not install sealant backings of improper size for size of joint. 5. Do not install multiple sealant backings to adequately fill joint size. a. Change size of backing along length of joint where joint sizes vary along length of joint. D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 4. Exercise care to ensure against "Three Surface Adhesion" of sealants. 5. Use gun nozzles to push sealants into joints. Do not drag sealants into joints. F. Tooling of Non-sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Do not wet sealants before tooling. Use dry tooling methods only. 4. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated. 5. Provide flush joint profile where indicated according to Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193. 6. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and where indicated according to Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193. a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints. 7. Match existing joint profiles where sealants are used in same plane as, with same types of materials, or in adjacent areas to existing sealants to remain. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows: a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate. b. Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length thereafter but not less than 1 test per each floor. c. Perform additional tests if required by sealant manufacturer. 2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Tail Procedure, or Flap Procedure in ASTM C 1521, as appropriate for type of joint-sealant application indicated. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side. 3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following: a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. b. Whether sealants are of proper joint geometry. c. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements. d. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion complies with sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria. 4. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant material, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions. 5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant. B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. 3.7 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces JS-1. 1. Joint Locations: a. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and pre-finished frames. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 11 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 b. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Silicone or non-staining silicone. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. B. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces JS-2. 1. Joint Locations: a. Control and expansion joints in resinous flooring. b. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, traffic grade. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces not subject to significant movement JS-3. 1. Joint Locations: a. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and field-painted frames. b. Perimeter joints between exposed structural steel and other surfaces. c. Perimeter joints between exposed metal fabrications and other surfaces. d. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. D. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces JS-4. 1. Joint Locations: a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. b. Joints between fixed countertops and casework and adjoining walls and floors. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, mildew resistant, acid-curing or neutral-curing. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. E. Joint-Sealant Application: Concealed bedding sealant for penetrations in resinous flooring and below floor thresholds and plates at resinous flooring JS-5. 1. Joint Sealant: Epoxy joint filler. END OF SECTION 079200 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS 079219 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 079219 - ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes acoustical joint sealants. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealants for non-acoustical applications. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Compatible: Material will not adversely affect adjacent materials, is chemically compatible with adjacent materials, and achieves adhesive compatibility with adjacent materials. 1. Chemical Compatibility: Material will not breakdown, deteriorate, degrade, or prematurely fail when coming in contact with another material. Material will not cause chemical breakdown, deterioration, degradation, discoloration, staining, or premature failure of another material. 2. Adhesive Compatibility: Material will develop bond strength or provide a suitable surface for another material to develop bond strength complying with requirements when coming in contact with another material. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate joint sealants with substrates and adjacent materials to ensure compatibility of sealants with substrates and adjacent materials. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each acoustical joint sealant. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of acoustical joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 13-mm- (1/2-inch-) wide joints formed between two 150-mm- (6inch-) long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS 079219 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. Acoustical-Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color. E. Joint-Sealant Color Schedule: Include separate schedule and diagram(s) indicating color of sealants at each sealant location. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each kind of acoustical joint sealant, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. B. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide acoustical joint-sealant products that effectively reduce airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction, as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the following: 1. Acoustical sealants and sealant primers shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard non-sag, paintable, non-staining, gunnable, latex acoustical sealant complying with ASTM C 834. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR or AIS-919 Gun Grade. b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by acoustical-joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS 079219 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Masking Tape: Non-staining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive acoustical joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing acoustical joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by acoustical-joint-sealant manufacturer. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A. Comply with acoustical joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. STC-Rated Assemblies: At sound-rated or acoustical assemblies, where assemblies include sound attenuation insulation, and elsewhere as indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical joint sealant. Install acoustical joint sealants at both faces of partitions, at perimeters, at openings, at perimeter of outlets and devices, and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919, ASTM C 1193, and manufacturer's written recommendations for closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions to dissimilar construction and to underside of floor structural members, slabs, and decks. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS 079219 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of acoustical joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect acoustical joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated acoustical joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. END OF SECTION 079219 Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 DOOR HARDWARE SETS 080671-1 ADDENDUM NO. 02 07 January 2019 SECTION 080671 – DOOR HARDWARE SETS PART 1 - GENERAL A. Refer to PART 1 in each of the specification sections listed in 3.1.C below. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. Refer to “PART 3 – EXECUTION” for required specification sections. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DOOR HARDWARE SETS A. The door hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper application and functionality. B. The supplier is responsible for handing and sizing all products and providing the correct option for the appropriate door type and material where more than one is presented in the hardware sets. Quantities listed are for each pair of doors, or for each single door. C. Products listed in the Door Hardware Sets must meet the requirements described in the specification sections noted. 1. Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware. 2. Section 28 15 00 – Access Control Hardware Devices. D. Manufacturer’s Abbreviations: 1. MK - McKinney 2. PE - Pemko 3. RO - Rockwood 4. SA - Sargent 5. RF - Rixson 6. SU - Securitron Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 DOOR HARDWARE SETS 080671-2 ADDENDUM NO. 02 07 January 2019 Hardware Sets Set: 1.0 Doors: 260A, 260B, 269A, 269B, 362A, 367A Description: SELP10 IWP Fail Secure Single 3 Hinge TA2714 US26D MK 087100 1 Access Control Mort Lock 70 IDP M1-82271-24V-BIPS LNJ US26D SA 281500 ⚡ 1 Cylinder complete/ permanent core as req'd US26D BE 087100 1 Conc Overhead Stop 2-X36 630 RF 087100 1 Door Closer 351 O/ P10 EN SA 087100 1 Acoustic Seal Set PEMKOSTCSET-1E x size required BL PE 087100 1 ElectroLynx Harness - Frame QC-C1500 MK 087100 ⚡ 1 ElectroLynx Harness - Door QC-CXXX (Size as required) MK 087100 ⚡ 3 Electric Power Transfer EL-CEPT SU 087100 ⚡ 1 Wiring Diagram WD-SYSPK SA 281500 1 Power Supply AQD6 SU 281500 ⚡ Notes: Free egress from inside at all times. Cylinder in device is if the card access fails. When you present a valid prox card to the reader the outside lever will unlock and the lever can be dropped and the door pulled or pushed open. Outside lever can be locked and unlocked by the card access system. Door position is monitored thru the latch bolt. Request to exit is in the inside lever. Set: 2.0 Doors: 276A, 367B Description: Fail Secure pair - occupied space 6 Hinge TA2714 US26D MK 087100 1 Flush Bolt 2845/ 2945 US26D RO 087100 1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US26D RO 087100 1 Access Control Mort Lock 70 IDP M1-82271-24V-BIPS LNJ US26D SA 281500 ⚡ 1 Cylinder complete/ permanent core as req'd US26D BE 087100 1 Coordinator 2696 with req'd brackets Black RO 087100 2 Door Closer 351 O/ P10 EN SA 087100 2 Wall Stop 406 US32D RO 087100 2 Electromagnetic Holder 998 689 RF 087400 ⚡ 1 Acoustic Seal Set PEMKOSTCSET-1E x size required BL PE 087100 1 ElectroLynx Harness - Frame QC-C1500 MK 087100 ⚡ 1 ElectroLynx Harness - Door QC-CXXX (Size as required) MK 087100 ⚡ 1 Electric Power Transfer EL-CEPT SU 087100 ⚡ 1 Wiring Diagram WD-SYSPK SA 281500 1 Power Supply AQD6 SU 281500 ⚡ Notes: Free egress from inside at all times. Cylinder in device is if the card access fails. When you present a valid prox card to the reader the outside lever will unlock and the lever can be dropped and the door pulled or pushed open. Outside lever can be locked and unlocked by the card access system. Door position is monitored thru the latch bolt. Request to exit is in the inside lever. Set: 3.0 Doors: 100A Description: Push-pull hardware on double-acting doors, as specified in Section 084126 “All-Glass Entrances and Storefronts.” Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 DOOR HARDWARE SETS 080671-3 ADDENDUM NO. 02 07 January 2019 Set: 4.0 Doors: 200UAA, 200UBA, 300UAA, 300UBA Description: Storeroom pair - unoccupied space 6 Hinge TA714 FT US26D MK 087100 1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US26D RO 087100 2 Flush Bolt 555 US26D RO 087100 1 Storeroom Lock 70 8204 LNJ US26D SA 087100 1 Cylinder complete/ permanent core as req'd US26D BE 087100 2 Conc Overhead Stop 2-X36 630 RF 087100 2 Door Closer 351 O/ P10 EN SA 087100 2 Silencer 608 RO 087100 Set: 5.0 Doors: Not Used Description: Classroom with closer 3 Hinge TA714 FT US26D MK 087100 1 Classroom Lock 70 8237 LNJ US26D SA 087100 1 Cylinder complete/ permanent core as req'd US26D BE 087100 1 Conc Overhead Stop 2-X36 630 RF 087100 1 Door Closer 351 O/ P10 EN SA 087100 1 Gasketing S773BL PE 087100 Set: 6.0 Doors: 200JAA, 300JAA Description: Storeroom with closer 3 Hinge TA714 FT US26D MK 087100 1 Storeroom Lock 70 8204 LNJ US26D SA 087100 1 Cylinder complete/ permanent core as req'd US26D BE 087100 1 Conc Overhead Stop 2-X36 630 RF 087100 1 Door Closer 351 O/ P10 EN SA 087100 1 Gasketing S773BL PE 087100 Set: 7.0 Doors: 200TCA Description: Single privacy with closer 3 Hinge TA714 FT US26D MK 087100 1 Privacy Lock 49 8266 LNJ US26D SA 087100 1 Door Closer 351 O/ P10 EN SA 087100 1 Wall Stop RM867 US15 RO 087100 1 Gasketing S773BL PE 087100 Set: 8.0 Doors: 360A Description: Classroom without closer 3 Hinge TA714 FT US26D MK 087100 1 Classroom Lock 70 8237 LNJ US26D SA 087100 1 Cylinder complete/ permanent core as req'd US26D BE 087100 1 Wall Stop RM867 US15 RO 087100 3 Silencer 608 RO 087100 Set: 9.0 Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 DOOR HARDWARE SETS 080671-4 ADDENDUM NO. 02 07 January 2019 Doors: 158BA Description: Private office 3 Hinge TA714 FT US26D MK 087100 1 Office Lock 70 8205 LNJ US26D SA 087100 1 Cylinder complete/ permanent core as req'd US26D BE 087100 1 Wall Stop RM867 US15 RO 087100 3 Silencer 608 RO 087100 1 Coat Hook RM802 US32D RO 087100 Set: 10.0 Doors: 170A Description: Passage set without closer 3 Hinge TA714 FT US26D MK 087100 1 Passage Latch 8215 LNJ US26D SA 087100 1 Wall Stop RM867 US15 RO 087100 3 Silencer 608 RO 087100 Set: 11.0 Doors: 276AA, 276BA, 276CA, 276DA, 276EA276DB, 367AA, 367BA, 367FA Description: Sliding door manufacturer’s integral sliding door hardware, as specified in Section 084229.23 “Sliding Automatic Entrances.” Set: 12.0 Description: Misc. Tools 1 Crimp Tool QC-R003 MK 281500 ⚡ 1 Test Unit WT2 SA 281500 ⚡ 1 Repair Kit QC-R001 MK 281500 ⚡ 1 Extractor Tool QC-R002 MK 281500 ⚡ END OF SECTION 080671 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes hollow-metal work. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow-metal doors. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMMHMMA 803 or SDI A250.8. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. B. Coordinate reinforcing needed for hollow metal doors and frames with door hardware, automatic door operators, security devices, power, signal, fire alarm, control systems and other related portions of the Work. C. Coordinate electrical requirements for hollow metal doors and frames with door hardware, automatic door operators, security devices, power, signal, fire alarm, control systems and other related portions of the Work. D. Coordinate dimensions and tolerances of hollow metal frames with other types of doors scheduled to be hung on hollow metal frames. E. Coordinate primer requirements with finish coat requirements as specified under Division 09 painting and high-performance coating sections. F. Coordinate frame throat dimensions with partition depths and existing wall depths. 1. Verify partition depths where new partitions align with existing wall depths and where furring or furred partitions are used at existing walls. 2. Where frames are shown for flush alignment of frame face with finish wall face, coordinate overall frame depth with depth of partition and facings. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.5 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door type. 2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems. C. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each type of hollow-metal door and frame assembly, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. B. Oversize Construction Certification: For assemblies required to be fire rated and exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. C. Store hollow-metal work vertically in stacks of five units maximum and under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch- (102-mm-) high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm) space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Before fabrication, verify and coordinate actual dimensions of openings and partition depths by field measurements and coordination with other portions of the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 2. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 3. Deansteel Manufacturing Company, Inc. 4. Door Components, Inc. 5. Mesker Door Inc. 6. MPI Group, LLC (The). 7. Pioneer Industries. 8. Republic Doors and Frames. 9. Security Metal Products Corp. 10. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. B. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal work from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 1. Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. B. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9. C. FM Global Listing: Provide fire-rated doors and frames approved, listed, and labeled by FM Global. FM Global labels shall be attached at the factory. 2.3 HOLLOW METAL WORK, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: Provide hollow-metal work complying with indicated SDI standards. B. Quality Standard, Contractor’s Option: Provide hollow-metal work complying with either the indicated SDI or NAAMM-HMMA standards. For selected standard, provide hollow-metal work complying with same standard for entire project. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the standard and additional requirements beyond those of the standard. Comply with such selections and requirements in addition to the standard. 2.4 INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES A. Construct interior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified. B. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2. 1. Locations: Interior hollow metal doors and frames unless indicated otherwise. 2. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4. 3. Doors: a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm). c. Face: Uncoated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0 mm). d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush. e. Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core at manufacturer's discretion. 4. Frames: a. Materials: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 1) Minimum thickness of 0.067 inch (1.7 mm) at fire-rated doors and door frame openings greater than 48 inches (1219 mm). b. Construction: Full profile welded. 5. Exposed Finish: Prime. C. Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 3. 1. Locations: a. Interior hollow metal doors and frames at loading dock. b. Interior hollow metal doors and frames at vivarium. c. Interior hollow metal doors and frames at mechanical and electrical rooms. d. Interior hollow metal doors and frames at cross-corridor doors. e. Interior hollow metal doors and frames at exit stairway enclosures. 2. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4. 3. Doors: a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm). c. Face, Typical Locations: Uncoated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm). Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 d. Face at Vivarium: Metallic-coated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm), with minimum A40 (Z120) coating. e. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush. f. Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core at manufacturer's discretion. 4. Frames: a. Materials at Typical Locations: Uncoated, steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 1) Minimum thickness of 0.067 inch (1.7 mm) at fire-rated doors and door openings greater than 48 inches (1219 mm). b. Materials at Vivarium: Metallic-coated, steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm), with minimum A40 (Z120) coating, unless otherwise indicated. 1) Minimum thickness of 0.067 inch (1.7 mm) at fire-rated doors and door openings greater than 48 inches (1219 mm). c. Construction: Full profile welded. 5. Exposed Finish: Prime. 2.5 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches (51 mm) wide by 10 inches (254 mm) long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch (4.5 mm) thick. 2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick. 3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors. 4. Post-installed Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location. B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0 mm), and as follows: 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less than 2-inch (51-mm) height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface. 2.6 MATERIALS A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. F. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated. G. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm), as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. H. Epoxy Grout: Non-shrink 100 percent solids, pre-measured, pre-packaged material containing thermosetting epoxy resins, expansive additives and inert fillers, maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm), as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. I. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smokedeveloped indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. J. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing". K. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B. Hollow-Metal Doors: 1. Steel-Stiffened Door Cores: Provide minimum thickness 0.026 inch (0.66 mm), steel vertical stiffeners of same material as face sheets extending full-door height, with vertical webs spaced not more than 6 inches (152 mm) apart. Spot weld to face sheets no more than 5 inches (127 mm) o.c. Fill spaces between stiffeners with glass- or mineral-fiber insulation. 2. Fire Door Cores: As required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated. 3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Bevel edges 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3.2 mm in 51 mm). Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 4. Vertical Edges for Double-Acting Doors: Round vertical edges with radius as standard with manufacturer. 5. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same material as face sheets. 6. Bottom Edge Closures: Close bottom edges of doors with end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. 7. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch (19 mm) beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted or as required to comply with published listing of qualified testing agency. C. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. 2. Welded Frames: Weld frame elements continuously. Grind, fill, dress, and make welds smooth, flush, and invisible. 3. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 4. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. 5. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs. 6. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows, except provide additional anchors if required for fire-ratings: a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches (406 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c., to match coursing, and as follows: 1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches (2286 to 3048 mm) high. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 120 inches (3048 mm) high. b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as follows: 1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 mm) high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 96 inches (2438 mm) high. c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each frame. d. Post-installed Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches (152 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches (660 mm) o.c. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 7. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped or gasketed frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers. 8. Double Door Frame Mullion: Provide removable center frame mullion between each door leaf of double doors. Removal mechanism shall be lockable. D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates. 1. Locate hardware as indicated on Drawings and in Section 087100 "Door Hardware", or if not indicated, according to indicated SDI standards. 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware, using reinforcement plates from same material as doors and frames. 3. Unless indicated for more stringent requirements, comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware. a. Provide door and frame reinforcement in minimum thickness of 0.167 inch (4.2 mm) for pivot hinges. b. Provide door and frame reinforcement in minimum thickness of 0.123 inch (3.1 mm) for mortise hinges. c. Provide door reinforcement in minimum thickness of 0.067 inch (1.7 mm) for closers, flush-bolts, automatic door operators and hold-open arms. 1) Reinforcement for surface applied closers shall occur on both sides. d. Provide frame reinforcement in minimum thickness of 0.093 inch (2.3 mm) for closers, flush-bolts, automatic door operators and hold-open arms. e. Provide door and frame reinforcement in minimum thickness of 0.067 inch (1.7 mm) for exit devices. 4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 26, 27 and 28 Sections. F. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. 1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollowmetal work. 2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. 3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. 4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work. 5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation types indicated. 2.8 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Clean, pre-treat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. a. Field-applied touch-up primers that are inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with VOC limits as specified under Section 099123 “Interior Painting” and Section 099600 “High-Performance Coatings”. 2.9 ACCESSORIES A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors. B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation. C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 as required by standards specified. 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 a. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. c. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. f. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with post-installed expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of post-installed expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames, unless indicated otherwise. a. Solidly fill space between frames and metal studs with epoxy grout at partitions located in vivarium. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout. 5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with mineral-fiber insulation. 6. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with post-installed expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 7. In-Place Metal Partitions: Secure slip-on drywall frames in place according to manufacturer's written instructions. 8. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor. C. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors: a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) to 1/4 inch (6.3 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 11 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Minimum 5/8 inch (15.8 mm), maximum 3/4 inch (19 mm). e. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). 2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. 3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors and gaskets according to NFPA 105. D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with hollowmetal manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches (230 mm) o.c. and not more than 2 inches (51 mm) o.c. from each corner. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation. C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. END OF SECTION 081113 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ALUMINUM FRAMES 081216 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 081216 - ALUMINUM FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes interior aluminum frames for doors and glazing installed in gypsum board partitions. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 081416 "Flush Wood Doors" for wood doors installed in interior aluminum frames. 2. Section 084229.23 "Sliding Automatic Entrances" for aluminum frames at sliding aluminum doors. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 2. Locations of reinforcements and preparations for hardware. 3. Details of each different wall-opening condition. 4. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 5. Details of accessories. 6. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 7. Details of conduits and preparations for power, signal, and control systems. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied finishes. 1. Include similar Samples of seals, gaskets, and accessories involving color selection. D. Samples for Verification: For interior aluminum frames, prepared on Samples of size indicated below: 1. Framing Member: 12 inches (300 mm) long. 2. Corner Fabrication: 12-by-12-inch- (300-by-300-mm-) long, full-size window corner, including full-size sections of extrusions with factory-applied finish. E. Schedule: For interior aluminum frames. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule and glazing. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ALUMINUM FRAMES 081216 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For interior aluminum frames to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain interior aluminum frames from single source from single manufacturer. B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockup of typical door frame and glazed wall area as shown on Drawings. 2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. C. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver interior aluminum frames palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic. Store interior aluminum frames under cover at Project site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Advanced Architectural Frames. 2. RACO Interior Products, Inc.; division of Universal Molding Products. 3. Western Integrated Materials, Inc. 4. Wilson Partitions. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Aluminum Framing: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5 or alloy and temper required to suit structural and finish requirements, not less than 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick. B. Door Frames: Extruded aluminum, reinforced for hinges, strikes, and closers. C. Glazing Frames: Extruded aluminum, for glazing thickness indicated. D. Trim: Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick, with removable snap-in casing trim, glazing stops, and door stops without exposed fasteners. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ALUMINUM FRAMES 081216 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic, stainless-steel or other noncorrosive metal fasteners compatible with frames, stops, panels, reinforcement plates, hardware, anchors, and other items being fastened. B. Sound Seals: Manufacturer's standard continuous mohair, wool pile, or vinyl seals. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. C. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard extruded or molded plastic, to accommodate glazing thickness indicated. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. D. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing." E. Hardware: Comply with requirements in Section 087100 "Door Hardware." 2.4 FABRICATION A. Provide concealed corner reinforcements and alignment clips for accurately fitted hairline joints at butted or mitered connections. B. Factory prepare interior aluminum frames to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcements, mortising, drilling, and tapping, according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware." C. Fabricate frames for glazing with removable stops to allow glazing replacement without dismantling frame. 1. Locate removable stops on the inside (room-side or secure-side) of spaces. D. Fabricate components to allow secure installation without exposed fasteners. 2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Color Anodic Finish (AL-1): AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A32/A34, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker. 1. Color: Black. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ALUMINUM FRAMES 081216 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish (AL-2): AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry-film thickness of 1.0 mils (0.025 mm). Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls, floors, and ceilings, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that wall thickness does not exceed standard tolerances allowed by throat size indicated. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install interior aluminum frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Cut frame members neatly and without jagged edges, projections, or other irregularities. C. Set frames accurately in position and plumbed, aligned, and securely anchored to substrates. D. Install vertical frame components in one piece. E. Install horizontal frame components in the longest possible lengths; components up to 96 inches (2450 mm) long shall be one piece. Where required to be in more than one piece, coordinate splice locations with vertical frame locations, and locate splice centered on width of vertical frame face. 1. Fasten to partition framing at maximum 48-inch (1220-mm) centers, using sheet metal screws or other fasteners approved by frame manufacturer. 2. Use concealed installation clips to produce tightly fitted and aligned splices and connections. 3. Secure clips to extruded main-frame components and not to snap-in or trim members. 4. Do not leave screws or other fasteners exposed to view when installation is complete. F. Installation Tolerances: 1. Squareness: ±1/16 inch (1.5 mm), measured on a line 90 degrees from one jamb, at upper corner of frame at other jamb. 2. Alignment: ±1/16 inch (1.5 mm), measured on jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. 3. Twist: ±1/16 inch (1.5 mm), measured at face corners of jambs on parallel line. 4. Plumbness: ±1/16 inch (1.5 mm), measured at jambs at floor. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ALUMINUM FRAMES 081216 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean exposed frame surfaces promptly after installation, using cleaning methods recommended by frame manufacturer and according to AAMA 609 & 610. B. Touch up marred frame surfaces so touchup is not visible from a distance of 48 inches (1220 mm). Remove and replace frames with damaged finish that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. END OF SECTION 081216 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces for transparent finish. 2. Factory finishing flush wood doors for transparent finish. 3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. 4. Factory glazing flush wood doors. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for door hardware. 2. Section 088000 "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate doors with frames, glazing, door hardware, security devices, power, signal, fire alarm, and other related portions of the Work. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following: 1. Dimensions and locations of blocking. 2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 3. Dimensions and locations of cutouts. 4. Undercuts. 5. Requirements for veneer matching. 6. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 7. Coordination with frames and hardware. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-finished doors. 1. Include range samples showing range of stain and topcoat finishes. D. Samples for Verification: 1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each material and finish. 2. Frames for light openings, 6 inches (150 mm) long, for each material, type, and finish required. E. Schedule: Provide a schedule of wood doors prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final frame and door hardware schedules. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer’s Certificates: Certificate from manufacturer indicating flush wood doors comply with requirements. B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body and is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. B. Vendor Qualifications: A vendor that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting. C. Mark each door on bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weather-tight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during remainder of construction period. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42-by-84-inch (1067by-2134-mm) section. b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch (0.25 mm in a 76.2-mm) span. 2. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2. Eggers Industries. 3. Marshfield Door Systems; a division of Masonite International Corp. 4. VT Industries, Inc. B. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer. 2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards." 1. Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to quality standard. B. Certified Wood: Flush wood doors shall be certified as "FSC Pure" or "FSC Mixed Credit" according to FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship," and to FSC STD-40-004, "FSC Standard for Chain of Custody Certification." C. Low-Emitting Materials: Fabricate doors with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain added urea formaldehyde. D. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty. E. Cores, General: 1. Provide doors with particleboard cores, unless indicated otherwise. a. Structural-composite-lumber cores for the following: 1) Where required for indicated stile width of doors with glazing. F. Particleboard-Core Doors: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2, made with binder containing no ureaformaldehyde. a. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware and as required to comply with specified performance grade. G. Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors: 1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10. a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: Minimum 700 lbf (3100 N). b. Screw Withdrawal, Vertical Edge: Minimum 550 lbf (2440 N). 2.3 VENEER-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Interior Solid-Core Doors for Transparent Finish (SCW-TF): 1. Grade: Premium, with Grade AA faces. 2. Species: Select white maple. 3. Cut: Quarter-sliced. 4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Slip match. 5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match. 6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by mullions. 7. Room Match: Match door faces within each separate room or area of building. Corridordoor faces do not need to match where they are separated by 10 feet (3 m) or more. 8. Exposed Vertical Edges: Applied wood-veneer edges of same species as faces and covering edges of faces - edge Type B. 9. Core: As indicated. 10. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is abrasive planed before veneering. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press. 11. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: As indicated. 2.4 LIGHT FRAMES A. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard wood beads unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces. 2. Profile: Flush rectangular beads, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA156.115-W, and hardware templates. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. C. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. a. Fill and finish fastener holes to match wood bead finish. 2. Glazing: Factory-install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing." 2.6 FACTORY FINISHING A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing. 1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. B. Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish. C. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" System 9, UV curable, acrylated epoxy, polyester, or urethane or System 11, catalyzed polyurethane. 3. Wash Coat for Closed-Grain Woods: Apply wash-coat sealer to woodwork made from closed-grain wood before staining and finishing. 4. Sheen: Satin, 31-45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors. 1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware." B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Re-hang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION 081416 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 23 for heating and air-conditioning duct access doors. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Verification: Determine specific locations, types, and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to concealed plumbing, mechanical, electrical, services, or other concealed work, and indicate in the schedule and coordination drawings. Refer to Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for coordination drawing requirements. B. Primers: Confirm primer requirements and coordinate with finish coat requirements as specified under Division 09 painting sections. C. Latches and Locks: Verify latch, lock, and keying requirements with Owner. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, fire ratings, materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Product Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame schedule, including types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Indicate locations and types of access doors and frames and indicate coordination with adjacent work and items requiring access. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Comply with requirements specified under Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to access door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics according to the following test method and that are listed and labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. NFPA 252 or UL 10B for fire-rated access door assemblies. 2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Acudor Products, Inc. 2. Alfab, Inc. 3. Babcock-Davis. 4. Cendrex Inc. 5. Elmdor/Stoneman Manufacturing Co.; Div. of Acorn Engineering Co. 6. J. L. Industries, Inc.; Div. of Activar Construction Products Group. 7. Karp Associates, Inc. 8. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 9. Maxam Metal Products Limited. 10. Metropolitan Door Industries Corp. 11. MIFAB, Inc. 12. Milcor; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc. 13. Nystrom, Inc. 14. Williams Bros. Corporation of America (The). B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door and frame from single source from single manufacturer. C. Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges: 1. Description: Face of door flush with frame; with concealed flange for gypsum board installation and concealed hinge. 2. Locations: Wall. 3. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.060 inch (1.52 mm), 16 gage, factory primed. 4. Frame Material: Same material and thickness as door. 5. Latch and Lock: Cam latch, screwdriver operated, with interior release. D. Fire-Rated, Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges: 1. Description: Door face flush with frame, with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal; with concealed flange for gypsum board installation, self-closing door, and concealed hinge. 2. Locations: Wall. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction. 4. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.036 inch (0.91 mm), 20 gage, factory primed. 5. Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door. 6. Latch and Lock: Cam latch, screwdriver operated, with interior release. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent. B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A 879/A 879M, with cold-rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed. D. Frame Anchors: Same type as door face. E. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation. B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to types of supports indicated. 1. Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal or wood framing. D. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed. 2.5 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Steel and Finishes: 1. Factory Prime: Apply manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames. B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports. C. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation. B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. END OF SECTION 083113 Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 084229.23 - 1 ADDENDUM NO. 01 18 December 2018 SECTION 084229.23 - SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes interior, sliding, power-operated automatic entrances. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. AAADM: American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers. B. Activation Device: A control that, when actuated, sends an electrical signal to the door operator to open the door. C. Safety Device: A control that, to avoid injury, prevents a door from opening or closing. D. For automatic door terminology, refer to BHMA A156.10 for definitions of terms. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing automatic entrances. B. Coordinate hardware with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish. Coordinate hardware for automatic entrances with hardware required for rest of Project. C. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of automatic entrances with connections to power supplies. 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 084229.23 - 2 ADDENDUM NO. 01 18 December 2018 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for automatic entrances. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: For automatic entrances. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware mounting heights, and attachment details. 2. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 4. Indicate locations of activation and safety devices. 5. Include hardware schedule and indicate hardware types, functions, quantities, and locations. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes. 1. Include Samples of hardware and accessories involving color or finish selection. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer, and Certified Inspector. B. Product Certificates: For each type of automatic entrance. Include emergency-exit features of automatic entrances serving as a required means of egress. C. Field quality-control reports. D. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties. 1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For automatic entrances, safety devices, and control systems to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer with company certificate issued by AAADM indicating that manufacturer has a Certified Inspector on staff. B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. C. Certified Inspector Qualifications: Certified by AAADM. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 084229.23 - 3 ADDENDUM NO. 01 18 December 2018 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of automatic entrances that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Faulty operation of operators, controls, and hardware. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE ASSEMBLIES A. Source Limitations: Obtain sliding automatic entrances from single source from single manufacturer. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Power-Operated Door Standard: BHMA A156.10. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Automatic entrances shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. Component Importance Factor is 1.0. B. Opening Force: 1. Power-Operated Doors: Not more than 50 lbf (222 N) required to manually set door in motion if power fails, and not more than 15 lbf (67 N) required to open door to minimum required width. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 084229.23 - 4 ADDENDUM NO. 01 18 December 2018 2. Breakaway Device for Power-Operated Doors: Not more than 50 lbf (222 N) required for a breakaway door or panel to open. C. Entrapment-Prevention Force: 1. Power-Operated Sliding Doors: Not more than 30 lbf (133 N) required to prevent stopped door from closing. D. Accessibility Standards: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities" and ICC A117.1 as modified by Building Code of State of New York. 2.3 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard automatic entrances including doors, sidelites, transoms, framing, headers, carrier assemblies, roller tracks, door operators, controls, and accessories required for a complete installation. B. Sliding Automatic Entrance: 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Stanley Access Technologies; Dura-Glide 2000 Series 2. Configurations: Single-sliding door with one sliding leaf, transom, and sidelite. a. ASD-1: Single-sliding door with one sliding leaf and sidelite. a.1) Traffic Pattern: Two-way. b.2) Emergency Breakaway Capability: Sliding leaf and sidelite. 3) Door and Sidelite Panels: Aluminum-frame glazed with fully tempered, clear glass. c.4) Mounting: Between jambs. b. ASD-2: Single-sliding door with one sliding leaf and sidelite. 1) Traffic Pattern: Two-way. 2) Emergency Breakaway Capability: Sliding leaf. 3) Door and Sidelite Panels: Aluminum-frame glazed with metal panel 4) Mounting: Between jambs. c. ASD-3: Single-sliding door with one sliding leaf. 1) Traffic Pattern: Two-way. 2) Emergency Breakaway Capability: Sliding leaf. 3) Door Panel: Aluminum-frame glazed with metal panel. 4) Mounting: Surface-mounted. 3. Operator Features: a. Power opening and closing. b. Drive System: Chain or belt. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 084229.23 - 5 ADDENDUM NO. 01 18 December 2018 c. Adjustable opening and closing speeds. d. Adjustable hold-open time between zero and 30 seconds. e. Obstruction recycle. f. On-off/hold-open switch to control electric power to operator, key operated. g. Energy-conservation switch that reduces door-opening width. 4. Sliding-Door Carrier Assemblies and Overhead Roller Tracks: Carrier assembly that allows vertical adjustment; consisting of nylon- or delrin-covered, ball-bearing-center steel wheels operating on a continuous roller track, or ball-bearing-center steel wheels operating on a nylon- or delrin-covered, continuous roller track. Support doors from carrier assembly by cantilever and pivot assembly. a. Rollers: Minimum of two ball-bearing roller wheels and two anti-rise rollers for each active leaf. 5. Sliding-Door Threshold: Threshold members and bottom-guide-track system with stainless-steel, ball-bearing-center roller wheels. Provide the following configuration: a. Across Door Opening: No threshold. b. At Sidelites: Surface-mounted guide-track system. 6. Controls: Activation and safety devices according to BHMA standards. a. Activation Device: Push-button switch on each side of door to activate door operator. b. Safety Device: Two photoelectric beams mounted in sidelite jambs on each side of door to detect pedestrians in presence zone and to prevent door from closing. c. Opening-Width Control: Two-position switch that in the normal position allows sliding doors to travel to full opening width and in the alternate position reduces opening to a selected partial opening width. 7. Finish: Finish framing, door(s), sidelite(s), and header with baked-enamel or powder-coat finish. 2.4 ENTRANCE COMPONENTS A. Framing Members: Extruded aluminum, minimum 0.125 inch (3.2 mm) thick and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Nominal Size: 1-3/4 by 4-1/2 inches (45 by 115 mm). B. Stile and Rail Doors: 1-3/4-inch- (45-mm-) thick, glazed doors with minimum 0.125-inch- (3.2mm-) thick, extruded-aluminum tubular stile and rail members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are welded, or incorporate concealed tie-rods that span full length of top and bottom rails. 1. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. 2. Stile Design: Narrow stile, no greater than 2 inch (51 mm) nominal width. 3. Rail Design: 4 inch (102-mm) nominal height. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 084229.23 - 6 ADDENDUM NO. 01 18 December 2018 C. Sidelite(s) and Transom: 1-3/4-inch- (45-mm-) deep sidelite(s) and transom with minimum 0.125-inch- (3.2-mm-) thick, extruded-aluminum tubular stile and rail members matching door design. 1. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Same materials and design as for stile and rail door. D. Headers: Fabricated from minimum 0.125-inch- (3.2-mm-) thick extruded aluminum and extending full width of automatic entrance units to conceal door operators and controls. Provide hinged or removable access panels for service and adjustment of door operators and controls. Secure panels to prevent unauthorized access. 1. Mounting: Concealed, with both sides of header flush with framing. 2. Capacity: Capable of supporting doors up to 175 lb (79 kg) per leaf over spans up to 14 feet (4.3 m) without intermediate supports. E. Brackets and Reinforcements: High-strength aluminum with non-staining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. F. Signage: Affixed to both sides of each door as required by cited BHMA standard. 1. Application Process: Decals. 2. Provide sign materials with instructions for field application after glazing is installed. 2.5 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). 2. Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). B. Steel Reinforcement: Reinforcement with corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00 applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Use surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. C. Glazing: As specified in Section 088000 "Glazing." D. Metal Panels: Factory-laminated panels for glazing into door and sidelite frames. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Mapes Panels, LLC.; Mapes Non-Insulated Glazing Panels 2. Exterior and Interior Skins: Aluminum sheet metal with powder-coat finish in color to match framing. 3. Core: High density hardboard. D.E. Sealants and Joint Fillers: As specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." E.F. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Premixed, non-metallic, non-corrosive, non-staining grout; complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M; of consistency suitable for application. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 084229.23 - 7 ADDENDUM NO. 01 18 December 2018 F.G. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. G.H. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements, except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil (0.76-mm) thickness per coat. H.I. Fasteners and Accessories: Corrosion-resistant, non-staining, non-bleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 2.6 DOOR OPERATORS AND CONTROLS A. General: Provide operators and controls, which include activation and safety devices, according to BHMA standards, for condition of exposure, and for long-term, maintenance-free operation under normal traffic load for type of occupancy indicated. B. Door Operators: Provide door operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size, weight, and movement. 1. Door Operator Performance: Door operators shall open and close doors and maintain them in fully closed position when subjected to Project's design wind loads. 2. Electromechanical Operators: Concealed, self-contained, overhead unit powered by fractional-horsepower, permanent-magnet dc motor; with closing speed controlled mechanically by gear train and dynamically by braking action of electric motor; with solidstate microprocessor controller; UL 325; and with manual operation with power off. C. Photoelectric Beams: Pulsed infrared, sender-receiver assembly for recessed mounting. Beams shall not be active when doors are fully closed. D. Push-Button Switch: Momentary-contact door-control switch with one red-button actuator; enclosed in nominal 2-by-4-inch (50-by-100-mm) junction box. 1. Provide faceplate engraved with "Press to Open" letters and international symbol of accessibility in contrasting color. 2. Mounting: Recess mounted in door frame. 3. Face-Plate Material: Stainless steel as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. E. Key Switch: Recess-mounted, door-control switch with key-controlled actuator; enclosed in 2by-4-inch (50-by-100-mm) junction box. Provide faceplate engraved with letters indicating switch functions. 1. Face-Plate Material: Stainless steel as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Functions: Two-way automatic, hold open, one-way exit, off, full open, and partial open. 3. Mounting: Recess mounted, flush in wall. 2.7 HARDWARE A. General: Provide units in sizes and types recommended by automatic entrance and hardware manufacturers for entrances and uses indicated. Finish exposed parts to match door finish unless otherwise indicated. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 084229.23 - 8 ADDENDUM NO. 01 18 December 2018 B. Breakaway Device for Power-Operated Doors: Device that allows door to swing out in direction of egress to full 90 degrees from any operating position. Maximum force to open door shall be as stipulated in "Performance Requirements" Article. Interrupt powered operation of door operator while in breakaway mode. C. Weather StrippingGaskets: Replaceable components as recommended by manufacturer to achieve light-tight installation where indicated on Drawings. 1. Sliding Type: AAMA 701, made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with nylonfabric or aluminum-strip backing. 2. Sweeps: Nylon brush sweep mounted to underside of door bottom. 2.8 FABRICATION A. General: Factory-fabricate automatic entrance components to designs, sizes, and thicknesses indicated and to comply with indicated standards. 1. Form aluminum shapes before finishing. 2. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. 3. Use concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use countersunk Phillips flat-head machine screws, finished to match framing. a. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, or vibration, use self-locking devices. b. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 4. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. B. Framing: Provide automatic entrances as prefabricated assemblies. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work before shipment to Project site. 1. Fabricate tubular and channel frame assemblies with welded or mechanical joints. Provide sub-frames and reinforcement as required for a complete system to support required loads. 2. Perform fabrication operations in manner that prevents damage to exposed finish surfaces. 3. Form profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 4. Provide components with concealed fasteners and anchor and connection devices. 5. Fabricate components with accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 6. Provide anchorage and alignment brackets for concealed support of assembly from building structure. C. Doors: Factory fabricated and assembled in profiles indicated. Reinforce as required to support imposed loads and for installing hardware. D. Door Operators: Factory fabricated and installed in headers, including adjusting and testing. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 084229.23 - 9 ADDENDUM NO. 01 18 December 2018 E. Glazing: Fabricate framing with minimum glazing edge clearances for thickness and type of glazing or metal panel indicated, according to GANA's "Glazing Manual." F. Hardware: Factory-install hardware to greatest extent possible; remove only as required for final finishing operation and for delivery to and installation at Project site. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed hardware before applying finishes. 1. Provide sliding-type weather stripping, mortised into door, at perimeter of doors and breakaway sidelites. G. Controls: 1. General: Factory-install activation and safety devices in doors and headers as required by BHMA A156.10 for type of door and direction of travel. 2. Install photoelectric beams in vertical jambs of sidelites, with dimension above finished floor as follows: a. Top Beam: 48 inches (1219 mm). b. Bottom Beam: 24 inches (610 mm). 2.9 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Apply organic finishes to formed metal after fabrication unless otherwise indicated. D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.10 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm). Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. a. Color: Custom color as selected by Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, header support, and other conditions affecting performance of automatic entrances. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 084229.23 - 10 ADDENDUM NO. 01 18 December 2018 B. Examine roughing-in for electrical systems to verify actual locations of power connections before automatic entrance installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install automatic entrances according to manufacturer's written instructions and cited BHMA standard for direction of pedestrian travel, including signage, controls, wiring, and connection to the building's power supply. 1. Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure non-movement joints. Seal joints watertight. 2. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 3. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or bituminous paint. B. Entrances: Install automatic entrances plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades without warp or rack of framing members and doors. Anchor securely in place. 1. Install surface-mounted hardware using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. 2. Set headers, carrier assemblies, tracks, operating brackets, and guides level and true to location with anchorage for permanent support. C. Door Operators: Connect door operators to electrical power distribution system. Comply with Division 26 Sections. D. Controls: Install and adjust activation and safety devices according to manufacturer's written instructions and cited BHMA standard for direction of pedestrian travel. Connect control wiring according to Division 26 Sections. E. Glazing: Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing." F. Sealants: Comply with requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants". 1. Set bottom-guide-track system in full sealant bed. 2. Seal perimeter of framing members with sealant. G. Signage: Apply signage on both sides of each door and breakaway sidelite as required by cited BHMA standard for direction of pedestrian travel. H. Wiring within Automatic Entrance Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's written limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Certified Inspector: Engage a Certified Inspector to test and inspect components, assemblies, and installations, including connections. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 084229.23 - 11 ADDENDUM NO. 01 18 December 2018 B. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Test and inspect each automatic entrance, using AAADM inspection forms, to determine compliance of installed systems with applicable BHMA standards. C. Automatic entrances will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust hardware, moving parts, door operators, and controls to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer; comply with requirements of applicable BHMA standards. B. Readjust door operators and controls after repeated operation of completed installation equivalent to three days' use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles). C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean glass and metal surfaces promptly after installation. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances. Repair damaged finish to match original finish. 1. Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" for cleaning and maintaining glass. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain automatic entrances. END OF SECTION 084229.23 Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 0843126 - 1 ADDENDUM NO. 01 18 December 2018 SECTION 0841326 - ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior all-glass storefronts. 2. Interior swinging all-glass entrances and sidelites. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for overhead-steel support for all-glass systems. 2. Section 081216 "Aluminum Frames" for aluminum frames that incorporate glass. 3. Section 088000 "Glazing" for glass requirements. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate materials used at interface with other portions of the Work to ensure compatibility of materials. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for all-glass system. B. Shop Drawings: For all-glass entrances and storefronts. 1. Include plans, elevations, and sections. 2. Include details of fittings and glazing. 3. Door hardware locations, mounting heights, and installation requirements. 3.4. Indicate coordination with adjacent portions of the Work. 4.5. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include shop drawings signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 0843126 - 2 ADDENDUM NO. 01 18 December 2018 C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Metal Finishes: 6-inch- (150-mm-) long sections of fittings, accessory fittings, and other items. 2. Glass: 6 inches (150 mm) square, showing exposed-edge finish. D. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors sidelights, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Delegated-Design Submittal: For systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. Prepare calculations proving performance and compliance with specified loads. For members subject to thermal movement, prepare thermal calculations to indicate the amount of anticipated movement when subjected to the maximum temperature design range. Include copies of shop drawings or sketches indicating the location and configuration for each assembly, support, member, connection, anchor, etc.; labeling the magnitude and direction for each load that is imposed onto the primary building structure. 1. Detail fabrication and assembly of all-glass systems. 2. Certificate of Compliance: 3. Submit a signed letter by the professional engineer certifying that the system is designed to comply with the specified design requirements and has been tested in accordance with referenced testing standard(s). a. When actual testing data on glazing system is not available, provide certification that alternative compliance or analysis methodology, as referenced in ASCE 7, has been satisfactorily performed and can demonstrate glazing system compliance with specified design performance requirements. b. Submit certification letter with Shop Drawings and calculations. 4. Structural Analysis and Calculations: a. Submit complete design, structural analysis, calculations, testing and other data demonstrating that the work of this Section will conform to accepted engineering practice, and conform to the design requirements indicated. b. The submittal shall be certified, stamped and signed by a registered Professional Engineer responsible for the information contained in the submittal. B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. C. Product Test Reports: For all-glass systems, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For all-glass systems to include in maintenance manuals. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 0843126 - 3 ADDENDUM NO. 01 18 December 2018 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. 1. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for all-glass systems, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated for this Project. B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A licensed Professional Engineer registered in the State of project location and with demonstrated experience in the design of similar all-glass storefront systems. C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. In-Place Composite Mockup: In advance of scheduled dates for installation, build mockup of typical hallway all-glass system as shown on Drawings. Include the following with composite mockup: a. All-glass storefront. b. Partitions at each side of glazed openings, with finished gypsum board and scheduled paint finishes. c. Resilient flooring on each side of glazed openings, with scheduled floor color finish transitions, and including indicated base types at indicated locations. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify and coordinate actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with all-glass systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of all-glass systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including excessive deflection. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 0843126 - 4 ADDENDUM NO. 01 18 December 2018 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design all-glass storefronts and entrances. B. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of all-glass storefronts and entrances representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. C. Structural Performance: All-glass systems shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to SEI/ASCE 7-05. 1. Lateral Loads: 5 psf (240 Pa). 2. Seismic Performance: All-glass entrances and storefronts shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. a. Component Importance Factor is 1.0. 3. Deflection Limits: Deflection normal to glazing plane is limited to 1/175 of clear span or 3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is smaller. 4. Coordinate transferred load requirements with partitions and walls. Partitions and walls with glazing strips interrupting the floor-to-ceiling run of the studs shall be designed with tracks acting as headers transferring loads to the continuous vertical support elements. The minimum design load shall be 5 psf except where greater loads are required by code for partitions. D. Deflection of Glass: As specified in Section 088000 "Glazing." 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Alpha Door & Rail, Inc. 2. Avanti Systems, Inc. 3. Blumcraft of Pittsburgh; a division of C.R. Laurence Co, Inc. 4. C.R. Laurence Co., Inc. 5. Doralco Architectural Metals. 6. Oldcastle Building Envelope. 7. Trulite Glass & Aluminum Solutions, LLC. 8. Virginia Glass Products Corporation. B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following or equivalent from acceptable manufacturer: 1. All-Glass Entrance System: Blumcraft of Pittsburgh; C.R. Laurence Co, Inc.; Series 150 . Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 0843126 - 5 ADDENDUM NO. 01 18 December 2018 2.3 METAL COMPONENTS A. Fitting Configuration: 1. All-Glass Storefronts: Recessed glazing channel at top and surface glazing channel at bottom. 2. Manual-Swinging, All-Glass Entrance Doors and Sidelights: Continuous rail fitting at top and bottom. B. Channel Fittings: 1. Material: Aluminum. 2. Height: a. Top Channel: 2-1/8 inches (54 mm). b. Bottom Channel: 1 inch (25 mm). 3. Profile: Flat. 4. End Caps: Manufacturer's standard precision-fit end caps for channel fittings. C. Rail Fittings: 1. Material: Aluminum. 2. Height: a. Top Rail: 3-3/8 inches (86 mm) b. Bottom Rail: 3-3/8 inches (86 mm). 3. Profile: Square. 4. End Caps: Manufacturer's standard precision-fit end caps for rail fittings. C.D. Other Fittings: 1. Material: Aluminum. 2. Shapes: As indicated on Drawings. D.E. Anchors and Fastenings: Concealed. E.F. Materials: 1. Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), with strength and durability characteristics of not less than Alloy 6063-T5. 2.4 GLASS A. Glass: Refer to Section 088000 "Glazing". 2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Heavy-duty entrance door hardware units in sizes, quantities, and types recommended by manufacturer for all-glass entrance systems indicated. For exposed parts, match metal and finish of patch fittings and rail fittings. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 0843126 - 6 ADDENDUM NO. 01 18 December 2018 B. Overhead Concealed Closers and Bottom Pivots: Center hung; BHMA A156.4, Grade 1; including cases, arms, walking beam pivots, plates, and accessories required for complete installation. 1. Swing: Double-acting. a. Positive Dead Stop: Coordinated with hold-open angle if any, or at angle selected. 2. Hold Open: Automatic, at angle selected. 3. Opening-Force Requirements: a. Egress Doors: Not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch and not more than 30 lbf (133 N) to set the door in motion and not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to open the door to its minimum required width. b. Accessible Interior Swinging Doors: Not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N) to fully open door. C. Push-Pull Set: Cylindrical stainless steel tubing on each side of each door leaf, mounted through glass. 1. Both Sides: Horizontal push bar with radius returns. 2.52.6 BUTT-GLAZING SEALANTS A. Single-Component, Non-sag, Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Uses NT, G, and A. 1. Color: Clear. B. Sealants shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. 2.62.7 FABRICATION A. Provide holes and cutouts in glass to receive fittings and accessory fittings before tempering glass. Do not cut, drill, or make other alterations to glass after tempering. 1. Fully temper glass using horizontal (roller-hearth) process, and fabricate so that when glass is installed, roll-wave distortion is parallel with bottom edge of lite. B. Factory-assemble components and factory install fittings to greatest extent possible. 2.72.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 0843126 - 7 ADDENDUM NO. 01 18 December 2018 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install all-glass systems and associated components according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Do not install damaged components. 2. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 3. Rigidly secure nonmoving joints. 4. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion, electrolytic deterioration, and impediments to movement of joints. 5. Weld components in concealed locations to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Protect glazing surfaces from welding. B. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer, applying sealant or tape, or installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C. Set units level, plumb, and true to line, with uniform joints. D. Maintain uniform clearances between adjacent components. E. Install butt-joint sealants according to manufacturer's instructions and as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" to produce air-tight installation. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust all-glass entrance doors and hardware to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points and weather stripping. 1. For all-glass entrance doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide a three-second closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open position to 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch measured to the leading door edge. A.B. Remove excess sealant and glazing compounds and dirt from surfaces. END OF SECTION 0843126 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 087100 – DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following: 1. Swinging doors. 2. Sliding doors. 3. Other doors to the extent indicated. B. Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Mechanical door hardware. 2. Electromechanical door hardware. 3. Automatic operators. 4. Cylinders specified for doors in other sections. C. Related Sections: 1. Division 08 Section “Door Hardware Schedule”. 2. Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”. 3. Division 08 Section “Flush Wood Doors”. 4. Division 08 Section “Automatic Door Operators”. 5. Division 28 Section “Access Control Hardware”. D. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. ICC/IBC - International Building Code. 3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 4. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. 5. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. 6. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. 7. UL/ULC and CSA C22.2 – Standards for Automatic Door Operators Used on Fire and Smoke Barrier Doors and Systems of Doors. 8. State Building Codes, Local Amendments. E. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards: 1. ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156 Series Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and finishes. B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." 2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission. 3. Content: Include the following information: a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. b. Manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Warranty information for each product. 4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule. C. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified access control hardware indicating the following: 1. Wiring Diagrams: Upon receipt of approved schedules, submit detailed system wiring diagrams for power, signaling, monitoring, communication, and control of the access control system electrified hardware. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Include the following: a. Elevation diagram of each unique access controlled opening showing location and interconnection of major system components with respect to their placement in the respective door openings. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 b. Complete (risers, point-to-point) access control system block wiring diagrams. c. Wiring instructions for each electronic component scheduled herein. 2. Electrical Coordination: Coordinate with related sections the voltages and wiring details required at electrically controlled and operated hardware openings. D. Keying Schedule: After a keying meeting with the owner has taken place prepare a separate keying schedule detailing final instructions. Submit the keying schedule in electronic format. Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and special instructions. Owner must approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of permanent cylinders/cores. E. Informational Submittals: 1. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance with cycle testing requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency. F. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Submittals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance. B. Installer Qualifications: A minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard and electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. C. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware distributors with a minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and electromechanical hardware installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Supplier recognized as a factory direct distributor by the manufacturers of the primary materials with a warehousing facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on staff a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner concerning both standard and electromechanical door hardware and keying. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware specified in this section from a single source unless otherwise indicated. 1. Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's product line by a secondary or third party source will not be accepted. 2. Provide electromechanical door hardware from the same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 E. Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating compliance with the referenced standards. F. Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying schedule document: 1. Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required. 2. Plans for existing and future key system expansion. 3. Requirements for key control storage and software. 4. Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software. 5. Address and requirements for delivery of keys. G. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s), Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving, handling, and installing door hardware. 1. Prior to installation of door hardware, conduct a project specific training meeting to instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of their respective products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware (including electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Training will include the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as required. 2. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections, and other preparatory work performed by other trades. 3. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening. 4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials. 5. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures H. At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedule. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or accessories at Project site without prior authorization. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference". 1.6 COORDINATION A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements. B. Door Hardware and Electrical Connections: Coordinate the layout and installation of scheduled electrified door hardware and related access control equipment with required connections to source power junction boxes, low voltage power supplies, detection and monitoring hardware, and fire and detection alarm systems. C. Door and Frame Preparation: Doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring, signaling and access control system hardware without additional in-field modifications. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of the hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation. C. Standard Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated. D. Special Warranty Periods: 1. Ten years for mortise locks and latches. 2. Five years for exit hardware. 3. Twenty five years for manual surface door closer bodies. 4. Five years for motorized electric latch retraction exit devices. 5. Two years for electromechanical door hardware. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door Hardware Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under. B. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: 1. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule. C. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01, Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and their designated consultants. 2.2 HANGING DEVICES A. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles and other options as specified in the Door Hardware Sets. 1. Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity: a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches. b. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. c. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches. d. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches. 2. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for door thickness and clearances required: a. Widths up to 3’0”: 4-1/2” standard weight. b. Sizes over 3’0” or high frequency: 5” heavy weight. 3. Hinge Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: a. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight. b. Interior Doors: steel, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate non-ferrous. 4. Hinge Options: Comply with the following: a. Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the all out-swinging lockable doors. 5. Manufacturers: a. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK). B. Continuous Geared Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.26 Grade 1-600 certified continuous geared hinge. with minimum 0.120-inch thick extruded 6060 T6 aluminum alloy hinge leaves and a minimum overall width of 4 inches. Hinges are non-handed, reversible and fabricated to Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 template screw locations. Factory trim hinges to suit door height and prepare for electrical cutouts. 1. Manufacturers: a. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK). b. Pemko Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (PE). 2.3 POWER TRANSFER DEVICES A. Concealed Quick Connect Electric Power Transfers: Provide concealed wiring pathway housing mortised into the door and frame for low voltage electrified door hardware. Furnish with Molex™ standardized plug connectors and sufficient number of concealed wires (up to 12) to accommodate the electrified functions specified in the Door Hardware Sets. Connectors plug directly to through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Wire nut connections are not acceptable. 1. Manufacturers: a. Pemko Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (PE) – ELCEPT Series. b. Securitron (SU) - EL-CEPT Series. B. Electric Door Wire Harnesses: Provide electric/data transfer wiring harnesses with standardized plug connectors to accommodate up to twelve (12) wires. Connectors plug directly to throughdoor wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Provide sufficient number and type of concealed wires to accommodate electric function of specified hardware. Provide a connector for through-door electronic locking devices and from hinge to junction box above the opening. Wire nut connections are not acceptable. Determine the length required for each electrified hardware component for the door type, size and construction, minimum of two per electrified opening. 1. Provide one each of the following tools as part of the base bid contract: a. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK) - Electrical Connecting Kit: QC-R001. b. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK) - Connector Hand Tool: QC-R003. 2. Manufacturers: a. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK) – QC-C Series. 2.4 DOOR OPERATING TRIM A. Door Push Plates and Pulls: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified door pushes and pulls of type and design specified in the Hardware Sets. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. 1. Push/Pull Plates: Minimum .050 inch thick, size as indicated in hardware sets, with beveled edges, secured with exposed screws unless otherwise indicated. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Door Pull and Push Bar Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door unless otherwise indicated. 3. Offset Pull Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door and offset of 90 degrees unless otherwise indicated. 4. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as indicated in Hardware Sets. 5. Manufacturers: a. Rockwood Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (RO). 2.5 CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing secured master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of keyed cylinder and keys from the same source manufacturer as locksets and exit devices, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Manufacturers: a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA). b. No Substitution. C. Cylinders: Original manufacturer cylinders complying with the following: 1. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware application. 2. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim ring. 3. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks. 4. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be flush and be free spinning with matching finishes. 5. Keyway: Match Facility Restricted Keyway. D. Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed. 1. Conduct specified "Keying Conference" to define and document keying system instructions and requirements. 2. Furnish factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control number as directed by Owner. 3. Existing System: Key locks to Owner's existing system. E. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys: 1. Change Keys per Cylinder: Three (3). 2. Master Keys (per Master Key Level/Group): Five (5). 3. Construction Keys (where required): Ten (10). F. Construction Keying: Provide construction master keyed cylinders. G. Key Registration List (Bitting List): Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative in the proper format for importing into key control software. 2. Provide transcript list in writing or electronic file as directed by the Owner. H. Key Control Cabinet: Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, and tags with self-locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet. Key control cabinet shall have expansion capacity of 150% of the number of locks required for the project. 1. Manufacturers: a. Lund Equipment (LU). b. MMF Industries (MM). c. Telkee (TK). I. Key Control Software: Provide one network version of "Key Wizard" branded key management software package that includes one year of technical support and upgrades to software at no charge. Provide factory key system formatted for importing into “Key Wizard” software. 2.6 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES A. Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1 certified. Locksets are to be manufactured with a corrosion resistant steel case and be field-reversible for handing without disassembly of the lock body. 1. Manufacturers: a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – 8200 Series. b. No Substitution. 2.7 LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows: 1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum framing. 4. Double-lipped strikes: For locks at double acting doors. Furnish with retractable stop for rescue hardware applications. B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13. 2. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2. 3. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.36. 4. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.8 CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES A. General Requirements: All exit devices specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. At doors not requiring a fire rating, provide devices complying with NFPA 101 and listed and labeled for "Panic Hardware" according to UL305. Provide proper fasteners as required by manufacturer including sex nuts and bolts at openings specified in the Hardware Sets. 2. Where exit devices are required on fire rated doors, provide devices complying with NFPA 80 and with UL labeling indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". Provide devices with the proper fasteners for installation as tested and listed by UL. Consult manufacturer’s catalog and template book for specific requirements. 3. Except on fire rated doors, provide exit devices with hex key dogging device to hold the pushbar and latch in a retracted position. Provide optional keyed cylinder dogging on devices where specified in Hardware Sets. 4. Devices must fit flat against the door face with no gap that permits unauthorized dogging of the push bar. The addition of filler strips is required in any case where the door light extends behind the device as in a full glass configuration. 5. Electromechanical Options: Subject to same compliance standards and requirements as mechanical exit devices, electrified devices to be of type and design as specified in hardware sets. Include any specific controllers when conventional power supplies are not sufficient to provide the proper inrush current. 6. Motorized Electric Latch Retraction: Devices with an electric latch retraction feature must use motors which have a maximum current draw of 600mA. Solenoid driven latch retraction is not acceptable. 7. Lever Operating Trim: Where exit devices require lever trim, furnish manufacturer's heavy duty escutcheon trim with threaded studs for thru-bolts. a. Lock Trim Design: As indicated in Hardware Sets, provide finishes and designs to match that of the specified locksets. b. Where function of exit device requires a cylinder, provide a cylinder (Rim or Mortise) as specified in Hardware Sets. 8. Vertical Rod Exit Devices: Where surface or concealed vertical rod exit devices are used at interior openings, provide as less bottom rod (LBR) unless otherwise indicated. Provide dust proof strikes where thermal pins are required to project into the floor. 9. Narrow Stile Applications: At doors constructed with narrow stiles, or as specified in Hardware Sets, provide devices designed for maximum 2” wide stiles. 10. Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar. 11. Extended cycle test: Devices to have been cycle tested in ordinance with ANSI/BHMA 156.3 requirements to 50 million cycles. 12. Rail Sizing: Provide exit device rails factory sized for proper door width application. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 11 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 13. Through Bolt Installation: For exit devices and trim as indicated in Door Hardware Sets. B. Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 certified panic and fire exit hardware devices furnished in the functions specified in the Hardware Sets. Exit device latch to be stainless steel, pullman type, with deadlock feature. 1. Manufacturers: a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 80 Series. b. No Substitution. 2.9 DOOR CLOSERS A. All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with the same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size. Closers to be non-handed with full sized covers including installation and adjusting information on inside of cover. 2. Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C for Positive Pressure Fire Test and be U.L. listed for use of fire rated doors. 3. Cycle Testing: Provide closers which have surpassed 15 million cycles in a test witnessed and verified by UL. 4. Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped, provide units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1. 5. Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in Hardware Sets. 6. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install closers on door for optimum aesthetics. 7. Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates as required for proper installation. Provide through-bolt and security type fasteners as specified in the hardware sets. B. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 surface mounted, heavy duty door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body construction, with adjustable backcheck and separate non-critical valves for closing sweep and latch speed control. Provide non-handed units standard. 1. Manufacturers: a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 351 Series. b. No Substitution. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 12 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Unitrol): Unitrol arms to have door stop mechanism to absorb dead stop shock on arm and top hinge. Hold-open arms to have a spring loaded mechanism in addition to shock absorber assembly. Arms to be provided with rigid steel main arm and secondary arm lengths proportional to the door width. 1. Manufacturers: a. Norton Door Controls (NO) - Unitrol Series. 2.10 ELECTROHYDRAULIC DOOR OPERATORS A. General: Provide low energy operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size, weight, and movement; for condition of exposure; and for compliance with UL 325. Coordinate operator mechanisms with door operation, hinges, and activation devices. 1. Fire-Rated Doors: Provide door operators for fire-rated door assemblies that comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated door components and are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency. B. Standard: Certified ANSI/BHMA A156.19. C. Performance Requirements: 1. Opening Force if Power Fails: Not more than 15 lbf required to release a latch if provided, not more than 30 lbf required to manually set door in motion, and not more than 15 lbf required to fully open door. 2. Entrapment Protection: Not more than 15 lbf required to prevent stopped door from closing or opening. D. Configuration: Surface mounted or in-ground as required. Door operators to control single swinging and pair of swinging doors. E. Operation: Power opening and spring closing operation capable of meeting ANSI A117.1 accessibility guideline. Provide time delay for door to remain open before initiating closing cycle as required by ANSI/BHMA A156.19. When not in automatic mode, door operator to function as manual door closer with fully adjustable opening and closing forces, with or without electrical power. F. Features: Operator units to have full feature adjustments for door opening and closing force and speed, backcheck, motor assist acceleration from 0 to 30 seconds, time delay, vestibule interface delay, obstruction recycle, and hold open time from 0 up to 30 seconds. G. Provide outputs and relays on board the operator to allow for coordination of exit device latch retraction, electric strikes, magnetic locks, card readers, safety and motion sensors and specified auxiliary contacts. H. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard, fabricated from aluminum with nonferrous shims for aligning system components. I. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 13 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Norton Door Controls (NO) - 6000 Series. 2.11 ARCHITECTURAL TRIM A. Door Protective Trim 1. General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. 2. Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more than 2" less than door width (LDW) on stop side of single doors and 1” LDW on stop side of pairs of doors, and not more than 1" less than door width on pull side. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets. 3. Where plates are applied to fire rated doors with the top of the plate more than 16” above the bottom of the door, provide plates complying with NFPA 80. Consult manufacturer’s catalog and template book for specific requirements for size and applications. 4. Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified protection plates (kick, armor, or mop), fabricated from the following: a. Stainless Steel: 300 grade, 050-inch thick. 5. Options and fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as specified in the Hardware Sets. Provide countersunk screw holes. 6. Manufacturers: a. Rockwood Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (RO). 2.12 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS A. General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. B. Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified door stops and wall bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated, unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide overhead type stops and holders. 1. Manufacturers: a. Rockwood Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (RO). C. Overhead Door Stops and Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.6, Grade 1 certified overhead stops and holders to be surface or concealed types as indicated in Hardware Sets. Track, slide, arm and jamb bracket to be constructed of extruded bronze and shock absorber spring of heavy tempered steel. Provide non-handed design with mounting brackets as required for proper operation and function. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 14 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Manufacturers: a. Rixson Door Controls (RF). b. Rockwood Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (RO). c. Sargent Manufacturing (SA). 2.13 ARCHITECTURAL SEALS A. General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated. B. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784. 1. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings. C. Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL-10C. 1. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and NPFA 252, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. D. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency, for sound ratings indicated. E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. F. Manufacturers: 1. Pemko Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (PE). 2.14 ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES A. Networked Contactless Smart Card Readers: Contactless smart cards reader to securely read access control data from 13.56 MHz contactless smart cards. The contactless smart card reader is designed for use in access control applications by providing: 1. Secure access control data exchange between the smart card and the reader utilizing key diversification and mutual authentication routines. 2. Contactless smart card reader to be designed for low current operation to enable migration from most legacy proximity applications without the need to replace existing access control panels and/or power supplies. Operating voltage: 5-16 VDC. Current requirements: 55 mA Avg, 116 mA Peak at 12 VDC. 3. Universal compatibility with most access control systems and backwards compatibility with legacy 125 KHz proximity access control formats. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 15 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 4. Product construction suitable for both indoor and outdoor applications. 5. Customizable behavior for indicator lights and audible tones. 6. Manufacturers (13.56 MHz iClass): a. HID Global (HD) - R10/R40 Series. B. Door Position Switches: Door position magnetic reed contact switches specifically designed for use in commercial door applications. On recessed models the contact and magnetic housing snap-lock into a 1" diameter hole. Surface mounted models include wide gap distance design complete with armored flex cabling. Provide SPDT, N/O switches with optional Rare Earth Magnet installation on steel doors with flush top channels. 1. Manufacturers: a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – 3280 Series. b. Securitron (SU) - DPS Series. C. Switching Power Supplies: Provide UL listed or recognized filtered and regulated power supplies. Provide single, dual, or multi-voltage units as shown in the hardware sets. Units must be expandable up to sixteen Class 2 power limited outputs and have thermal shutdown protection with auto-restart. Units must include the capability to incorporate a battery backup option with integral battery charging capability in addition to operating the DC load in event of line voltage failure. Provide the least number of units, at the appropriate amperage level, sufficient to exceed the required total draw for the specified electrified hardware and access control equipment. 1. Manufacturers: a. Securitron (SU) - AQ Series. 2.15 FABRICATION A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended. 2.16 FINISHES A. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes indicated by certain manufacturers for their products. B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 16 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series. B. Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115-W series. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications. 1. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation and adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices; locking devices; closing devices; and seals. B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations: 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." 3. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1 "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." 4. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware is located. C. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 17 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 E. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Inspection: Supplier will perform a final inspection of installed door hardware and state in report whether work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the latest possible time frame. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of owner occupancy. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and electromechanical door hardware. 3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SETS A. The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper application and functionality. B. The supplier is responsible for handing and sizing all products and providing the correct option for the appropriate door type and material where more than one is presented in the hardware sets. Quantities listed are for each pair of doors, or for each single door. C. Refer to Section 080671, Door Hardware Sets, for hardware sets. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 18 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 END OF SECTION 087100 Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GLAZING 088000 - 1 ADDENDUM NO. 02 07 January 2019 SECTION 088000 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Glass and glazing. 2. Glazing sealants and accessories. 3. Custom back-painted decorative glass and mounting frame. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 088813 "Fire-Resistant Glazing" for fire-rated glass. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Compatible: Material will not adversely affect adjacent materials, is chemically compatible with adjacent materials, and where required for bond, achieves adhesive compatibility with adjacent materials. 1. Chemical Compatibility: Material will not breakdown, deteriorate, degrade, or prematurely fail when coming in contact with another material. Material will not cause chemical breakdown, deterioration, degradation, staining, or premature failure of another material. 2. Adhesive Compatibility: Material will develop bond strength or provide a suitable surface for another material to develop bond strength complying with requirements when coming in contact with another material. B. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications. C. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036. D. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use and not due to glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass that are contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating. E. Spontaneous Disintegration of Fully Tempered Glass: Developed from normal use due to nickel sulfide inclusions and not resulting from impact or practices for maintaining and cleaning heat treated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GLAZING 088000 - 2 ADDENDUM NO. 02 07 January 2019 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Sealants. 2. Gaskets. C. Glass Samples for Verification: For each type of the following products; 12 inches (300 mm) square. 1. Laminated glass. 2. Back-painted decorative glass. D. Glazing Accessory Samples for Verification: For gaskets, sealants, and spacers, in 12-inch (300-mm) lengths. E. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glazing indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. Submit calculations proving performance and compliance with specified loads. For members subject to thermal movement, prepare thermal calculations to indicate the amount of anticipated movement when subjected to the maximum temperature design range. Include copies of shop drawings or sketches indicating the location and configuration for each assembly, support, member, connection, anchor, etc.; labeling the magnitude and direction for each load that is imposed onto the framing structure. B. Qualification Data: For installers. C. Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer. D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for coated glass, glazing sealants, and glazing gaskets. 1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations within previous 36-month period. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GLAZING 088000 - 3 ADDENDUM NO. 02 07 January 2019 E. Preconstruction Adhesion And Compatibility Test Reports: 1. From glazing sealant manufacturer indicating glazing sealants were tested for adhesion to glass and glazing channel substrates and for compatibility with glass and other glazing materials. F. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program as Level 2 (Senior Glaziers) or Level 3 (Master Glaziers). B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A licensed Professional Engineer registered in the State of project location and with demonstrated experience in the design of similar glazing systems. C. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program. D. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated. E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Install glazing in mockups specified in other sections to match glazing systems required for Project, including glazing methods. 2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.9 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glazing material type, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants. 1. Provide project-specific preconstruction testing for exterior glazing. Testing will not be required for interior glazing if data are submitted based on previous testing of current sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted. 2. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint-preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass, tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates. 3. Test no fewer than eight Samples of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. 4. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 5. For materials failing tests, submit sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures including the use of specially formulated primers. Re-test samples until satisfactory results are obtained for each sample. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GLAZING 088000 - 4 ADDENDUM NO. 02 07 January 2019 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. Glass shall be delivered to the site bearing the manufacturer's label, complete with glazing instructions where applicable. 1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). 1.12 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Laminated Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Fully Tempered Glass: Manufacturer's standard form made out to Owner and signed by fully tempered glass manufacturer agreeing to replace fully tempered glass units that spontaneously disintegrate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Back-Painted Decorative Glass Assembly: Manufacturer agrees to replace back-painted glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of back-painted glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain laminated glass units from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GLAZING 088000 - 5 ADDENDUM NO. 02 07 January 2019 B. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design glazing, including comprehensive engineering analysis according to most stringent of ASTM E 1300, ASCE-7, referenced ‘Glazing Publications’, other referenced standards, and specified design criteria. C. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated determined according to the ASCE-7 and ASTM E 1300. 1. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: For vertical glass surfaces, design glass for a probability of breakage not greater than 0.008. D. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated or where applicable codes require safety glazing for indicated glass locations, provide glazing that complies with safety glazing regulations. 1. Comply with CPSC 16 CFR 1201, Category II. E. Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick, unless indicated otherwise. F. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. 2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and "Glazing Manual." B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GLAZING 088000 - 6 ADDENDUM NO. 02 07 January 2019 C. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated. D. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heatstrengthened float glass, or Kind FT fully-tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-strengthened float glass or Kind FT fully-tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass. E. Laminated Glass: Laminated glass units shall be free from delamination, edge separation, visual discoloration, and other defects. 2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated. B. Ultraclear Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I, complying with other requirements specified and with visible light transmission not less than 91 percent. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Ultrawhite by Guardian Industries Corp or one of the following comparable products: a. AFG Industries, Inc.; Krystal Klear. b. Pilkington North America; Optiwhite. c. PPG Industries, Inc.; Starphire. C. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process to eliminate tong marks with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. a. Maximum peak to valley roller-wave of 0.006-inch (0.16-mm) in the central area and 0.008-inch (0.20-mm) within 10 1/2-inches (267-mm) of the leading and trailing edge. b. Maximum bow and warp of 1/32-inch (0.79-mm) per lineal foot. c. If, due to glass unit size limitations, roller distortion cannot be parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, consult with Architect for determination of orientation of units in-place, which may include, at Architect’s sole discretion, a change to vertical alignment for entire portions of facades, as necessary to eliminate a checker-board visual effect. 2. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. 3. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated glass). 4. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed float glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. a. Heat strengthened glass shall be fabricated with the low end of allowable compressive strength for heat strengthened glass to ensure against tempered Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GLAZING 088000 - 7 ADDENDUM NO. 02 07 January 2019 glass breakage pattern. Glass manufacturer shall provide quality control program and testing records to establish compliance with criteria. 5. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass in place of annealed or Kind HS (heatstrengthened) float glass, where safety glazing is indicated or required for compliance with applicable codes, or where required for strength in compliance with specified performance requirements.. a. Comply with 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials. 2.5 LAMINATED GLASS A. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, and complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials, and with other requirements specified. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation. 1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to comply with requirements. 3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated. 4. Edge Treatment: Sealed, finished edges to protect edges of laminated glass that will come into contact with silicone sealant or other deleterious materials. 2.6 CUSTOM BACK-PAINTED DECORATIVE GLASS A. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. CARVART; glassWALLCLAD with Flush Frame B. Back-Painted Glass: Fully tempered, ultraclear glass with opaque custom graphics printed on back surface of glass. 1. Minimum Thickness: ¼ inch (6 mm) or thicker as recommended by glass fabricator and installer. 2. Glass Surface Treatment: As selected by Architect from glass manufacturer’s full range. 3. Edge Treatment: Smooth polished edge with eased corners. 4. Color and Pattern: Factory-applied, digitally printed, multicolor opaque graphics in custom design as furnished by Architect C. Mounting Hardware and Trim: Manufacturer’s extruded aluminum perimeter trim supported on concealed zee-shaped brackets, engineered for mounting to back surface of glass at perimeter, with narrow frame profile. 1. Aluminum Finish: Clear anodized 2.62.7 GLAZING GASKETS A. Where glazing gaskets come in contact with polyisobutylene or silicone sealants, use silicone gaskets. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GLAZING 088000 - 8 ADDENDUM NO. 02 07 January 2019 B. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following: 1. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864. Do not use EPDM gaskets where adjacent materials are not compatible with EPDM. 2. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115, compatible with hermetic seals. C. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned EPDM or silicone gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. 1. Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing. 2.72.8 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: 1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products and other framing assemblies, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. Field-applied sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, shall have a VOC content of not more than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: Gray as selected by Architect. B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 795. b. Momentive Performance Materials - Silicones; SilPruf SCS2000. c. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 2. 2.82.9 GLAZING TAPES A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; non-staining and non-migrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 2. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GLAZING 088000 - 9 ADDENDUM NO. 02 07 January 2019 B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant. 2.92.10 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material, 100 percent silicone, with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric silicone blocks or continuous silicone extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric silicone material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. 2.102.11 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces. C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners. D. Fabrication of Back-Painted Decorative Glass Units: Adhere perimeter mounting profile to back surface of glass in factory, using manufacturer’s mounting adhesive compatible with backpainted surface and surface of aluminum profile. 2.112.12 MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES A. Glass Type MG-1: Clear fully tempered float glass. 1. Thickness: 6.0 mm. B. Glass Type MG-2: Clear fully tempered float glass. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GLAZING 088000 - 10 ADDENDUM NO. 02 07 January 2019 1. Thickness: 9.0 mm. C. Glass Type MG-3: Clear fully tempered float glass. 1. Thickness: 12.0 mm minimum, but not less than thickness required to comply with requirements. a. Exposed Edges: Machine ground and flat polished. b. Butt Edges: Flat ground. 2.122.13 LAMINATED GLASS SCHEDULE A. Glass Type LG-1: Clear laminated glass with two plies of tempered float glass, for all-glass entrances and storefront. 1. Minimum Overall Nominal Thickness: 13.5 mm. 2. Minimum Thickness of Outer Glass Ply: 6 mm. 3. Minimum Thickness of Inner Glass Ply: 6 mm. 4. Interlayer Thickness: 0.060 inch (1.52 mm). 5. Interlayer Color: Clear. 2.14 BACK-PAINTED DECORATIVE GLASS SCHEDULE A. Glass Type DG-1: Clear glass back-painted with custom graphics and mounting trim. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GLAZING 088000 - 11 ADDENDUM NO. 02 07 January 2019 C. Examine glazing units immediately prior to installation of each glass unit. 1. Do not install and reject glazing units that exhibit breakage, edge damage, improper sizing, scratching, abrasions, chipping, or other damage or defects. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing. E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm). 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. J. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified. K. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GLAZING 088000 - 12 ADDENDUM NO. 02 07 January 2019 L. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 3.4 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. 1. On exterior and interior of glass units, use weather-strip and gasket materials that have been fabricated into units with molded or vulcanized corners wherever possible. Where lineal gasket material must be used, miter cut and bond units at corners with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weather-tight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressureglazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weather-tight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.5 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF CUSTOM BACK-PAINTED DECORATIVE GLASS A. Fasten zee-shaped brackets to wall using screws into concealed blocking or toggle bolts as recommended by manufacturer of glass assembly. B. Mount decorative glass panels on brackets. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GLAZING 088000 - 13 ADDENDUM NO. 02 07 January 2019 3.63.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION 088000 Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING 088813 - 1 ADDENDUM NO. 01 18 December 2018 SECTION 088813 - FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fire-resistance-rated glazing. 2. Fire-resistance-rated door frame and door systems. 3. Fire-resistance-rated borrowed-lite frame systems. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For fire-resistance-rated frame and door systems. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING 088813 - 2 ADDENDUM NO. 01 18 December 2018 B.C. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product; 12 inches (300 mm) square. C.D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. E. Door, Frame, and Hardware Schedule: List door and frame types and sizes for each size opening and location. Include door hardware and other components of fire-resistance-rated frame and door systems that are specified in this Section, coordinated with the Work of Section 087100 “Door Hardware”. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glazing indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. Submit calculations proving performance and compliance with specified loads. For members subject to thermal movement, prepare thermal calculations to indicate the amount of anticipated movement when subjected to the maximum temperature design range. Include copies of shop drawings or sketches indicating the location and configuration for each assembly, support, member, connection, anchor, etc.; labeling the magnitude and direction for each load that is imposed onto the framing structure. B. Qualification Data: For installers. C. Product Certificates: For each type of glass and glazing product, from manufacturer. D. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program as Level 2 (Senior Glaziers) or Level 3 (Master Glaziers). 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. 1. Store glazing materials off ground, under cover, protected from weather and construction activities. 2. Do not expose glass to temperatures outside range recommended by manufacturer. 3. Store sheets of glass vertically. Do not lean. B. Glass shall be delivered to the site bearing the manufacturer's label, complete with glazing instructions where applicable. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING 088813 - 3 ADDENDUM NO. 01 18 December 2018 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install fire-resistant glazing until spaces are enclosed and weather-tight and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Verify and coordinate actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with fire-resistant glazing systems by field measurements and coordination before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Fire-Resistance-Rated Frames and Doors: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of fire-resistance-rated frames and doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type. B. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Delegated Design: Design glass, including comprehensive engineering analysis according to ASTM E 1300 and ASCE 7, by a qualified professional engineer, using the following design criteria: 1. Seismic Loads: Comply with ASCE 7-05. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING 088813 - 4 ADDENDUM NO. 01 18 December 2018 2. Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical, design glass to resist design pressure based on glass type factors for short-duration load. 3. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: For vertical glass surfaces, design glass for a probability of breakage not greater than 0.008. 4. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center-of-glass deflection at design pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side length or 1 inch (25 mm), whichever is less. 5. Safety Glazing: Provide glass types that comply with safety glazing regulations. 2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated. B. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organization below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and "Glazing Manual." C. Safety Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark glazing with certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, glass thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. 2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated. B. Ultraclear Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear), with visible light transmission not less than 91 percent. C. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated, Quality-Q3. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. D. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation. 1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer unless fire-resistance rating is based on another product. 2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness as needed to comply with requirements. 3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED GLAZING A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Glazing: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-resistance ratings indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 119 or UL 263. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING 088813 - 5 ADDENDUM NO. 01 18 December 2018 B. Fire-Resistance-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-resistance-rated glazing with certification label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, test standard, that the glazing is approved for use in walls, and the fire-resistance rating in minutes. C. Laminated Glass with Intumescent Interlayers (FG-1): Laminated glass made from multiple plies of uncoated, ultra-clear float glass; with intumescent interlayers; and complying with 16 CFR 1201, Category II. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. AGC Glass Company North America, Inc.; Pyrobel. b. Pilkington North America Inc.; Pyrostop. c.a. Technical Glass Products; Pyrostop. d. Vetrotech Saint-Gobain; SGG Contraflam with SSG Diamant. 2. Fire-Rating: As indicated on Drawings. 2.6 FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED FRAME AND DOOR SYSTEMS A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Frames: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-resistance ratings indicated, based on testing according to radiant heat requirements of ASTM E 119. Temperature on the non-fire side of glazing and framing at conclusion of fire test exposure shall be less than 250°F (139°C) above ambient room temperature according to ASTM E 119, NFPA 251, and UL 263. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Technical Glass Products; Fireframes Aluminum Series. 2. Description: Fire-rated extruded aluminum framing with concealed steel sub-frames. 3. Fire-Rating: 45 minutes. 4. Frame Construction: Welded. 5. Caps: Profiles as indicated on Drawings. 6. Finish: Powder-coated Black Finish. B. Fire-Resistance-Rated Doors: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Technical Glass Products; Fireframes Designer Series. 2. Description: Fire-rated steel stile and rail doors. 3. Fire-Rating: 45 minutes. 4. Door Construction: 1-15/16 inch (49.2-mm) overall thickness, welded steel construction. 5. Door Design: Wide stile. a. Vertical Stiles and Top Rail: 5-inch (88.9-mm) nominal width. b. Accessible Doors: Bottom rail smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 12 inches (305 mm) above floor or ground plane. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING 088813 - 6 ADDENDUM NO. 01 18 December 2018 6. Glazing Stops: Square. a. Provide non-removable glazing stops on outside of door. 7. Finish: Powder-coated. 2.7 DOOR HARDWARE A. Door Hardware: Provide the following hardware components as required for fire-resistancerated frame and door systems: 1. Hinges, factory-welded to door and frame; type and locations as recommended by manufacturer of fire-resistance-rated frame and door system.. 2. Perimeter gasketing with double-overlapping smoke seal. 3. Remainder of Door Hardware: As specified in Section 087100 “Door Hardware” and consistent with recommendations from manufacturer of fire-resistance-rated frame and door system. 2.62.8 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Provide glazing gaskets, glazing sealants, glazing tapes, setting blocks, spacers, edge blocks, and other glazing accessories that are compatible with glazing products and each other and are approved by testing agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products with which products are used for applications and fire-protection ratings indicated. B. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Rated Glazing Products: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated. 1. Sealants shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. 2. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. C. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; non-staining and non-migrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 2. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. D. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING 088813 - 7 ADDENDUM NO. 01 18 December 2018 2.72.9 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. C. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fireprotection rating indicated. 2.10 FRAMING ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, or vibration. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match framing system. B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per coat. 2.82.11 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. 2.12 FINISHES A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm). Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. 1. Color and Gloss: Custom color as selected by Architect. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING 088813 - 8 ADDENDUM NO. 01 18 December 2018 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners, and for compliance with minimum required face and edge clearances. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. B. Examine glazing units to locate fire side and protected side. Label or mark units as needed so that fire side and protected side are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible marks in the completed work. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Use methods approved by testing agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products. B. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing. E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm). 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING 088813 - 9 ADDENDUM NO. 01 18 December 2018 H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. I. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face fire side or protected side as specified. J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 3.4 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed. F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop, so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING 088813 - 10 ADDENDUM NO. 01 18 December 2018 D. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial washaway from glass. 3.7 FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED FRAME AND DOOR SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Rigidly secure non-movement joints. 4. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. B. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose or installing nonconductive spacers. 2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades. D. Frames: Install frames of size and profile indicated. 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. Install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. c. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. d. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. E. Doors: Install doors accurately in frames, to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 1. Install doors according to NFPA 80. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING 088813 - 11 ADDENDUM NO. 01 18 December 2018 2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted door hardware according to manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. 3.8 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating door hardware to function smoothly as recommended by manufacturer. 1. For doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide a 3-second closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open position to 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading door edge. 3.73.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Immediately after installation, remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains. 1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period. D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION 088813 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 FIXED LOUVERS 089119 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 089119 - FIXED LOUVERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fixed extruded-aluminum louvers. 2. Blank-off panels for louvers 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to this Section unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. B. Horizontal Louver: Louver with horizontal blades (i.e., the axis of the blades are horizontal). 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals. B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing. 1. Show weep paths, gaskets, flashings, sealants, and other means of preventing water intrusion. 2. Show mullion profiles and locations. C. Samples: For each type of metal finish required. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For louvers indicated to comply with structural and seismic performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed according to AMCA 500-L by a qualified testing agency or by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 FIXED LOUVERS 089119 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 testing agency, for each type of louver and showing compliance with performance requirements specified. B. Windborne-debris-impact-resistance test reports. C. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain fixed louvers from single source from a single manufacturer where indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color finish. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design louvers, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using structural and seismic performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver-blade rattle or flutter, or Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 FIXED LOUVERS 089119 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures shall be considered to act normal to the face of the building. 1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on pressures as indicated on Drawings. C. Seismic Performance: As indicated on drawings. 1. Component Importance Factor: 1.0. D. Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements specified, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for length and width according to AMCA 500-L. E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. F. SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures. 2.3 FIXED EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS A. Horizontal Nondrainable-Blade Louver: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Construction Specialties, Inc.; Model 1302 Thinline Louver. 2. Louver Depth: 1-3/8 inches (34.9 mm). 3. Blade Profile: Plain blade without center baffle. 4. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) for blades and frames. 5. Mullion Type: Fully recessed aluminum tube support. 6. Louver Performance Ratings: a. Free Area: Not less than 9.29 sq. ft. (0.863 sq. m) for 48-inch- (1220-mm-) wide by 48-inch- (1220-mm-) high louver. b. Air Performance: Not more than 0.06-inch wg (14.9-Pa) static pressure drop at 700-fpm (3.6-m/s) free-area intake velocity. 7. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal. 2.4 LOUVER SCREENS A. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver. 1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face. 2. Screening Type: Insect screening. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 FIXED LOUVERS 089119 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Secure screen frames to louver frames with machine screws with heads finished to match louver, spaced a maximum of 6 inches (150 mm) from each corner and at 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. C. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated. 1. Metal: Same type and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached. Reinforce extruded-aluminum screen frames at corners with clips. 2. Finish: Mill finish unless otherwise indicated. 3. Type: Rewirable frames with a driven spline or insert. D. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers: 1. Insect Screening: Aluminum, 18-by-16 (1.4-by-1.6-mm) mesh, 0.012-inch (0.30-mm) wire. 2.5 BLANK-OFF PANELS A. Insulated Blank-Off Panels: Laminated panels consisting of an insulating core surfaced on back and front with metal sheets and attached to back of louver. 1. Thickness: 2 inches (50 mm). 2. Metal Facing Sheets: Aluminum sheet, not less than 0.032-inch (0.81-mm) nominal thickness. 3. Insulating Core: Rigid, glass-fiber-board insulation or extruded-polystyrene foam. 4. Edge Treatment: Trim perimeter edges of blank-off panels with louver manufacturer's standard channel frames, with corners mitered and with same finish as panels. 5. Seal perimeter joints between panel faces and louver frames with gaskets or sealant. 6. Panel Finish: Same type of finish applied to louvers, but black color. 1. Attach blank-off panels with clips or sheet metal screws in a configuration that provides a continuous surface for attachment of flashing and sealants. 2.6 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6. B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M), Alloy 3003 or 5005, with temper as required for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish. C. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions. 1. Use Phillips flat-head screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 2. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners. 3. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers. D. Postinstalled Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors, fabricated from stainless-steel components, with allowable load or strength design capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing according to ASTM E488/E488M conducted by a qualified testing agency. E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187/D1187M. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 FIXED LOUVERS 089119 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.7 FABRICATION A. Factory assemble louvers to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head and sill, to produce uniform appearance. C. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints. 1. Frame Type: Channel unless otherwise indicated. D. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly. E. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated, but not more than is recommended by manufacturer, or 72 inches (1830 mm) o.c., whichever is less. 1. Fully Recessed Mullions: Where indicated, provide extruded aluminum tubular mullions fully recessed behind louver blades. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate with close-fitting blade splices designed to permit expansion and contraction. F. Provide subsills made of same material as louvers for recessed louvers. G. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from view unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary. 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish louvers after assembly. B. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. C. High-Performance Organic Finish: Three-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 FIXED LOUVERS 089119 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Locate and place louvers level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work. B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection. C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured. D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated. E. Protect unpainted galvanized- and nonferrous-metal surfaces that are in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint or by separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets or nonmetallic flashing. F. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation progresses, where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during louver installation. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean exposed louver surfaces that are not protected by temporary covering, to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate during construction period. B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry. C. Restore louvers damaged during installation and construction, so no evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units. 1. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 FIXED LOUVERS 089119 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 END OF SECTION 089119 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 092116.23 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 092116.23 - GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Gypsum board shaft wall assemblies. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 078446 "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for head-of-wall assemblies that incorporate gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies. 2. Section 092900 “Gypsum Board” for gypsum board in shaft-wall assemblies. 3. Section 099123 “Interior Painting” for identification of fire-rated walls. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each component of gypsum board shaft wall assembly. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: For shaft wall assemblies and firestop tracks, from ICC-ES or another code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, and bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported off floor, slab, or ground and on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 092116.23 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. C. Partition Deflection Limit: L/240 unless indicated otherwise. D. Partition Lateral Pressure: 5 psf (240 Pa) unless indicated otherwise. 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES A. Fire-Resistance Rating: As indicated on Drawings. B. STC Rating: As indicated on Drawings. C. Studs: Manufacturer's standard profile for repetitive members, corner and end members, and fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated. 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.836 mm), unless indicated otherwise. a. Minimum base-metal thickness of 0.043 inch (1.09 mm) at following locations: 1) Where partition heights exceed limiting heights indicated on Drawings. D. Runner Tracks: Manufacturer's standard J-profile track with manufacturer's standard long-leg length, but at least 2 inches (51 mm) long and matching studs in depth. E. Firestop Tracks: Provide firestop track at head of shaft wall on each floor level. F. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch (1.087 mm). 2. Minimum Width: 6 inches (152 mm). G. Room-Side Finish: As indicated. H. Shaft-Side Finish: Scheduled gypsum shaftliner board unless indicated otherwise. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 092116.23 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 I. Insulation: Sound attenuation blankets. 2.3 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Asbestos: Provide products containing no asbestos. 2.4 PANEL PRODUCTS A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. B. Contractor Option: Provide one of the following types of panels for shaftliner boards. C. Gypsum Shaftliner Board, Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M; manufacturer's proprietary fire-resistive liner panels with moisture- and mold-resistant core and surfaces. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following : a. CertainTeed Corp.; ProRoc Moisture and Mold Resistant Shaftliner with M2Tech. b. Continental Building Products, Inc.; Mold Defense Type X Shaftliner. c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand Fire-Shield Shaftliner XP. d. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Mold Tough Gypsum Liner Panel. 2. Thickness: 1 inch (25.4 mm). 3. Long Edges: Double bevel. 4. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. D. Glass-Mat Gypsum Shaftliner Board, Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M and ASTM C 1658/C 1658M; manufacturer's proprietary fire-resistive liner panels with moisture- and mold-resistant core and glass-mat faced surfaces. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corp.; GlasRoc Shaftliner Type X. b. Continental Building Products, Inc.; Weather Defense Platinum Type X Shaftliner. c. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC, Subsidiary of Georgia Pacific; Dens-Glass Shaftliner. d. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand e2XP Extended Exposure Shaftliner. e. Temple-Inland; division of Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; Fire-Resistant GreenGlass Shaftliner. f. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Glass-Mat Liner Panel. 2. Thickness: 1 inch (25.4 mm). 3. Long Edges: Double bevel. 4. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. E. Gypsum Board: As specified in Section 092900 "Gypsum Board." F. Tile Backing Panels: As specified in Section 092900 "Gypsum Board." Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 092116.23 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.5 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING A. Recycled Content of Steel: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. B. Steel Framing Members: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated. 1. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated. C. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. a. Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems LLC; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track. b. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak System attached to studs with Fire Trak Posi Klip. c. Grace Construction Products; FlameSafe FlowTrak System. d. Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System. e. Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD or VertiTrack VTD Series. f. Telling Industries; True-Action Slotted Track. 2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Trim Accessories: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints of material and shapes as specified in Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" that comply with gypsum board shaft wall assembly manufacturer's written recommendations for application indicated. C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated. D. Track Fasteners: Power-driven fasteners of size and material required to withstand loading conditions imposed on shaft wall assemblies without exceeding allowable design stress of track, fasteners, or structural substrates in which anchors are embedded. 1. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified testing agency. 2. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency. E. Sound Attenuation Blankets: As specified in Section 092900 "Gypsum Board." F. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Section 079219 "Acoustical Joint Sealants." 1. Provide sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 092116.23 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board shaft wall assemblies attach or abut, with Installer present, including hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing. Examine for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels and sound-attenuation blankets before installation. Reject panels and soundattenuation blankets that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials: Coordinate with gypsum board shaft wall assemblies so both elements of Work remain complete and undamaged. Patch or replace sprayed fire-resistive materials removed or damaged during installation of shaft wall assemblies to comply with requirements specified in Section 078100 "Applied Fireproofing." 1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runner tracks to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. B. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove only to extent necessary for installation of gypsum board shaft wall assemblies and without reducing the fire-resistive material thickness below that which is required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install gypsum board shaft wall assemblies to comply with requirements of fireresistance-rated assemblies indicated, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and ASTM C 754 other than stud-spacing requirements. 1. Refer to Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for applying and finishing panels. B. Do not bridge building expansion joints with shaft wall assemblies; frame both sides of expansion joints with furring and other support. C. Install supplementary framing in gypsum board shaft wall assemblies around openings and as required for blocking, bracing, and support of gravity and pullout loads of fixtures, equipment, casework, services, heavy trim, furnishings, wall-mounted door stops, and similar items that cannot be supported directly by shaft wall assembly framing. 1. Reinforcing: Where handrails or other wall-mounted items directly attach to gypsum board shaft wall assemblies, provide flat strap and backing plate, accurately positioned and secured behind at least one layer of face panel. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 092116.23 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. Penetrations: At penetrations in shaft wall, maintain fire-resistance rating of shaft wall assembly by installing supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration and fire protection behind boxes containing wiring devices, and similar items. E. Isolate perimeter of gypsum panels from building structure to prevent cracking of panels, while maintaining continuity of fire-rated construction. F. Firestop Tracks: Where indicated or required for fire-resistance-rated assembly, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated. G. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 while maintaining fire-resistance rating of gypsum board shaft wall assemblies. Locate control joints as indicated in Section 092900 "Gypsum Board". H. Acoustical Sealants: Seal gypsum board shaft walls with acoustical sealant at perimeter of each assembly where it abuts other work and at joints and penetrations within each assembly. Install acoustical sealant to withstand dislocation by air-pressure differential between shaft and external spaces; maintain an airtight and smoke-tight seal; and comply with ASTM C 919 requirements or with manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent. I. Cant Panels: At projections into shaft exceeding 4 inches (102 mm), install 5/8-inch- (16-mm-) thick gypsum board cants covering tops of projections. 1. Slope cant panels at least 75 degrees from horizontal. Set base edge of panels in adhesive and secure top edges to shaft walls at 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. with screws fastened to shaft wall framing. 2. Where steel framing is required to support gypsum board cants, install framing at 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. and extend studs from the projection to shaft wall framing. J. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 092116.23 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. 2. Suspension systems for interior ceilings and soffits. 3. Grid suspension systems for gypsum board ceilings. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 078446 "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for head-of-wall joint systems installed with non-load-bearing steel framing. 2. Section 092116.23 "Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies" for non-load-bearing metal shaft-wall framing. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. For high-performance-thickness-equivalent (EQ) studs and runners, provide documentation indicating products meet or exceed sectional properties of standard steel studs and runners of specified thicknesses. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: For studs and runners and firestop tracks, from ICC-ES or another code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions and depths of existing walls where new partitions abut or align with existing walls. Use metal framing of appropriate depths required to obtain indicated wall face alignments and dimensional relationships. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate partition depths and furring depths with services concealed within walls. Use metal framing of appropriate depths required to conceal conduit, piping, boxes, and other services within walls. B. Coordinate head-of-wall tracks with head-of-wall fire-resistive joint systems specified in Section 078446 "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate nonload-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. C. Partition Deflection Limit: L/240 unless indicated otherwise. D. Partition Lateral Pressure: 5 psf (240 Pa) unless indicated otherwise. E. Seismic Performance: Ceilings shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions. 1. Refer to indicated seismic criteria. 2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. B. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated. C. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645 and ASTM C 955. 1. Contractor Option: Provide standard steel studs and runners, or high-performancethick ness-equivalent (EQ) studs and runners. a. Provide standard steel studs or runners where EQ studs or runners are not available in thickness equivalent to specified thickness for standard steel studs and runners. 2. Standard Steel Studs and Runners: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 a. Studs Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.836 mm), unless indicated otherwise with greater thickness. 1) Use 0.0428 inch (1.087 mm) studs and runners at the following locations: a) Partition heights exceeding limiting heights indicated on Drawings. b) Partitions with tile backing panels. 2) Use 0.0428 inch (1.087 mm) for studs at jambs at the following locations: a) Double doors. b) All-glass storefront. c) Sliding automatic entrances. b. Runners Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.836 mm), unless indicated otherwise with greater thickness. 1) Use 0.0428 inch (1.087 mm) runners at the following locations: a) Partition heights exceeding limiting heights indicated on Drawings. b) Partitions with tile backing panels. c. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 3. High Performance Thickness Equivalent (EQ) Steel Studs and Runners: a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As required to meet or exceed section properties of standard steel studs and runners of specified minimum base metal thickness. b. Minimum Yield Strength: As required to meet or exceed section properties of standard steel studs and runners of specified minimum base metal thickness. c. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. D. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following: 1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- (51-mm-) deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for runners, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches (305 mm) of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing. 2. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch- (51-mm-) deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for runners and fastened to studs, and outer runner or steel channel sized to friction fit inside runner. 3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for runners and in width to accommodate depth of studs. a. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems LLC; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track. 2) Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System. 3) Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD or VertiTrack VTD Series. 4) Telling Industries; True-Action Slotted Track. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 E. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems LLC; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track. b. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak System attached to studs with Fire Trak Posi Klip. c. Grace Construction Products; FlameSafe FlowTrak System. d. Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System. e. Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD or VertiTrack VTD Series. f. Telling Industries; True-Action Slotted Track. F. Moment Resisting Clip: Steel sheet connection angles for moment-resisting connection of steel studs to structure. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Steel Network Inc. (The); StiffClip CL. 2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.1180 inch (2.997 mm). 3. Depth: Matching studs. G. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch (1.087 mm). 2. Minimum Width: 6 inches (152 mm). H. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges. 1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38 by 38 mm), 0.0677-inch- (1.720-mm-) thick, galvanized steel. I. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.836 mm). 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings or if not indicated provide 7/8 inch (22.2 mm). 2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire. B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: 1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an independent testing agency. a. Type: Post-installed, expansion anchor. C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch (4.12 mm) in diameter. D. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch (25 by 5 mm) by length indicated. E. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.053 inch (1.34 mm) and minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges. 1. Depth: 2-1/2 inches (64 mm). F. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges, 3/4 inch (19 mm) deep. 2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.836 mm). b. Depth: 3-5/8 inches (92 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22 mm) deep. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.836 mm). G. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; 640/660 Drywall Grid System. c. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System. 2. At Contractor’s option, use manufacturer’s standard wall-to-wall system for spans of 72inches- (1829-mm-) or less. 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holdingpower, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following: 1. Multi-Polymer Plastic Bearing Strip Shims. a. Available Product: Brock White Company LLC; Korolath. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. PTFE Thermoplastic Polymer Teflon Strips. 3. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated. 4. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit steel stud size. 5. Fiber-Reinforced Polymer Sheet. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials: 1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. 2. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary for installation of non-load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness of fire-resistive materials below that required for fire-resistance ratings indicated. Protect adjacent fireresistive materials from damage. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with more stringent requirements where indicated. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing and blocking as required to support attached items, including but not limited to, facing materials, fixtures, casework, specialty items, equipment, services, heavy trim, grab bars, shelving, cabinets, visual display surfaces, accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. 1. Where Owner-Furnished products (OFCI or OFOI) are indicated, install framing and blocking required for support of Owner-Furnished products. 2. Where existing partitions do not have required existing framing and blocking, install new framing and blocking. If required for concealment of blocking, remove finishes and replace in accordance with Section 017329 "Cutting, Patching, and Repairing." C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated with closer spacing. 2. Multilayer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated with closer spacing. 3. Space studs closer where required for compliance with limiting heights for partition assemblies. B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry or concrete walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. Offset framing above ceiling and around ducts that occur parallel to and interrupting fullheight partitions above ceiling, install metal framing kickers or bracing at interrupted full-height metal framing. 1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install minimum two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated for installation of more than two studs. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch (13-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. c. Extend jamb studs and attach to underside of overhead structure. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. a. Firestop Track: Where indicated or required for fire-resistance-rated partitions, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated. 5. Moment Resisting Clip, Bulkheads: Where indicated, attach moment resisting clip to underside of top track and studs. Install at the following locations where there are no suspended ceilings on either side of bulkhead or full-height partition: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 a. Where indicated on Drawings. b. At bulkheads that run continuous and un-braced for a minimum of 10 feet (3 m). 6. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. E. Direct Furring: 1. Screw to wood framing or blocking. 2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 3.5 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and other indicated assembly components. 1. Hangers: 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c. 2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c. 3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches (406 mm) o.c, unless otherwise indicated with closer spacing. B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, counter-splaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards and a deflection limit as follows: 1) L/240 unless indicated otherwise. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms. 7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports. E. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support and as required for compliance with indicated seismic criteria and applicable building code. F. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. G. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. END OF SECTION 092216 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Tile backing panels. 3. Sound attenuation blankets. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 078446 "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for head-of-wall assemblies that incorporate gypsum board. 2. Section 092116.23 "Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies" for metal shaft-wall framing, gypsum shaft liners, and other components of shaft-wall assemblies. 3. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing systems that support gypsum board panels. 4. Section 099123 “Interior Painting” for primers applied to gypsum board surfaces and identification of fire-rated walls. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For the following products: 1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- (300-mm-) long length for each trim accessory indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. In-Place Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. (9.2 sq. m) in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Install mockups for the following: a. Level 5 gypsum board finish. 2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, and bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported off floor, ground, or slab, and on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate joint treatment requirements for tile backing panels with tile installation methods specified under Section 093000 “Tiling”. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Asbestos: Provide products containing no asbestos. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.3 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Recycled Content of Gypsum Panel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content not less than 35 percent. B. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 2.4 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. CertainTeed Corp. 2. Continental Building Products, Inc. 3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 4. National Gypsum Company. 5. Temple-Inland; division of Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 6. USG Corporation. B. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold-resistant core and treated-paper surfaces. 1. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. 2.5 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or ASTM C 1325, with manufacturer's standard edges, and in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. C-Cure; C-Cure Board 990. b. CertainTeed Corp.; FiberCement BackerBoard. c. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. d. FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board. e. James Hardie Building Products, Inc.; Hardiebacker 500. f. National Gypsum Company, Permabase Cement Board. g. USG Corporation; DUROCK or DUROCK NextGen Cement Board. 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) or 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). a. Use 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) thickness or supplement with shim board materials where required for face alignment with other board surfaces. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.6 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. 1) Locations: Non-wall outside corners. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated. 1. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Fry Reglet Corporation or comparable products from one of the following: a. Gordon, Inc. b. Pittcon Industries. 2. Drywall Reveal Molding: Fry Reglet Corp Number DRM-625-375. a. Reveal Width: 3/8 inch (9.5 mm). 3. Drywall Molding End Closures: Fry Reglet Corp Number DMEC-XXXX. a. Match depth of partition. 4. Drywall Molding Corner Trim: Fry Reglet Corporation Number DMCT-1250. a. Exposed Corner: 1 1/4 inch (32 mm). 5. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5. 6. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified. 2.7 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: Paper or fiberglass mesh. 2. Tile Backing Panels: Fiberglass mesh as recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. Use mold-resistant formulation recommended by manufacturer for applications at mold-resistant panels. 1. Pre-filling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping compound or high-build interior coating product designed for application by airless sprayer and to be used instead of skim coat to produce Level 5 finish. D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer. 2.8 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. 2. Thickness: 3 1/2 inch (89 mm) minimum, unless available stud depth requires insulation of less thickness. 3. Recycled Content of Blankets: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 5 percent. 4. Low-Emitting Materials: Blankets shall contain no added formaldehyde, including urea formaldehyde, phenol formaldehyde, and urea-extended phenol formaldehyde. D. Acoustical Joint Sealant: As specified in Section 079219 "Acoustical Joint Sealants." 1. Provide sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). E. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels and sound attenuation blankets before installation. Reject panels and sound attenuation blankets that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place. C. Locate edge and end joints over supports. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. D. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. E. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces, except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant. F. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. G. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. H. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above exposed-construction in areas without ceilings. I. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. J. Where sound attenuation blankets are indicated for sound attenuation within partitions, install blanket insulation full-height within studs to underside of structure above. Install insulation in thicknesses indicated on Drawings, or where not indicated install in minimum thickness of 3-1/2 inches (89-mm-). Install insulation to fill voids around penetrations, devices, and other obstructions. 3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type X: Vertical and horizontal surfaces unless otherwise indicated. B. Single-Layer Application: 1. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. 2. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. C. Multilayer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches (400 mm) minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fireresistance-rated assembly. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. 3. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. 3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at following locations: 1. Locations indicated to receive wall tile. B. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces. 3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840, maintain fire-resistance rating of fire-rated assemblies. Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings, and if not indicated on Drawings install in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect and to comply with the following: 1. Partitions and Furring: a. Install control joints in partitions and wall furring runs exceeding 30 feet (9.1 m). b. Space control joints not more than 30 feet (9.1 m) o.c. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 c. Install control joints in furred assemblies where control joints occur in base exterior wall. d. Install control joints in partitions and wall furring runs that span multiple stories on one side of partition and span one story on opposite side of partition. Locate horizontal control joint at same location as deflection joint where stud framing is attached to floor structure. e. Install control joints at bulkheads that are framed with moment-resisting clips. Install above wall openings on each side where bulkheads meet wall jambs. C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners of ceiling soffits and fascias. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges unless otherwise indicated. 3. L-Bead: Use where indicated. D. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings, and in the following locations. 1. Drywall Reveal Moldings: Use for full-height or full-length of paint color transitions and other reveal conditions as indicated on Drawings. 2. Drywall Molding End Closures: Use for full-height at wall ends. 3. Drywall Molding Corner Trim: Use for full-height at wall outside corners. 3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Pre-fill open joints and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840 and requirements for fire-resistance-rated assemblies: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. 3. Level 5: Where indicated on Drawings and at following locations: a. Corridors. b. Hallways. c. Conference rooms. d. Student space. e. Admin/copy. 4. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting." E. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 092900 Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 093013 – CERAMIC TILING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ceramic and glass Ttile. 2. Stone thresholds. 3. Crack isolation membrane. 4. Metal edge strips. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile surfaces. 2. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for tile backing panels. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified. B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in "American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile." C. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated. D. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate joint treatment requirements for tile backing panels. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Static Coefficient of Friction and Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028 and ANSI A137.1: 1. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6 SCOF and 0.42 DCOF. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces. 1. Show transition details between floor tile and wall tile. 2. Show transition details between floor tile and other types of flooring. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of tile and grout indicated. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection. D. Samples for Verification: 1. Assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. Make samples at least 12 inches (300 mm) square, but not fewer than 4 tiles. Use grout of type and in color or colors approved for completed Work. 2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required. 3. Stone thresholds in 6-inch (150-mm) lengths. 4. Metal edge strips in 6-inch (150-mm) lengths. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. B. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and Installer. C. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer. D. Material Test Reports: For each tile-setting and -grouting product. 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 2 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 2 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, and color indicated. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type from one source or producer. 1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area. B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from one manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer. C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section from a single manufacturer for each product: 1. Stone thresholds. 2. Crack isolation membrane. 3. Metal edge strips. D. Accessibility Standards: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities" and ICC A117.1 as modified by Building Code of State of New York. E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. In-Place Mockups: a. Build mockup of typical floor tile installation. b. Build mockup of typical wall tile installation. 2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. F. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review requirements in ANSI A108.01 for substrates and for preparation by other trades. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages. B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided. D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.11 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. 1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements unless otherwise indicated. B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified. C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. D. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 TILE PRODUCTS A. Wall Tile: Glazed wall tile. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, product by one of the following: a. American Olean; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc. b. Daltile; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc. c. Florida Tile Industries, Inc. d. Lone Star Ceramics Company. e. Grupo Porcelanite. f. United States Ceramic Tile Company. 2. Module Size: 4-1/4 by 4-1/4 inches (108 by 108 mm). a. Verify and match module of existing wall tile scheduled to remain. 3. Thickness: 5/16 inch (8 mm). 4. Face: Plain with modified square edges or cushion edges. a. Verify and match face and edges of existing wall tile scheduled to remain. 5. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range, as required to match existing wall tile. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 6. Basis-of-Design Tile Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range, as required to match existing wall tile. a. WT-1: Field color. b. WT-2: Accent color. 7. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 8. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: a. Base for Thin-Set Mortar Installations (BT-1): Straight, module size 4-1/4 by 4-1/4 inches (108 by 108 mm). b. Wainscot Cap for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module size 41/4 by 4-1/4 inches (108 by 108 mm). c. External Corners for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, same size as adjoining flat tile. d. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners. For coved base and cap use angle pieces designed to fit with stretcher shapes. e. Verify and match trim types and modules of existing tile trim scheduled to remain. B. Wall Tile: Glass wall tile. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Crossville, Inc.; Groove Glass Design Solutions, GG31 Samba 2. Composition: Glass tile, back-painted with opaque coating in color indicated. 3. Module Size: 2 by 16 inches (48 by 398 mm) and 4 by 16 inches (98 by 398 mm). 4. Thickness: ¼ inch (6 mm) 5. Face: Plain with modified square edges or cushion edges. 6. Color: As indicated by manufacturer’s designation. 7. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B.C. Floor Tile and Base: Large-format unglazed patterned wall tile. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, product by one of the following: a. American Olean; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc. b. Daltile; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc. c. Florida Tile Industries, Inc. d. Lone Star Ceramics Company. e. Grupo Porcelanite. f. United States Ceramic Tile Company. 1. Composition: Porcelain. 2. Module Size: 11-3/4 by 23-9/16 inches (298 by 598 mm). 3. Thickness: 3/8 inch (9.5 mm). 4. Face: Pattern of design indicated, with square edges. 5. Finish: Unpolished. 6. Basis-of-Design Tile Color and Pattern: P686 “Crème Linen”. 7. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 8. Trim Units: None. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.3 THRESHOLDS A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes. 1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) above adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of threshold to 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) or less above adjacent floor surface. 2. Comply with accessibility requirements. B. Granite Thresholds: ASTM C 615, with honed finish. 1. Description: Uniform, fine-grained, gray stone without veining. 2.4 COMBINATION WATERPROOFING AND CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.10 and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Waterproof membrane shall also comply with ANSI A118.12 for high performance as a crack isolation membrane as recommended by the manufacturer for the indicated application. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer. B. Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Membrane: System consisting of liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer and continuous fabric reinforcement. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Mapelastic 400 by MAPEI Corporation or comparable product from one of the following: a. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. b. Bostik, Inc. c. Custom Building Products. d. Laticrete International, Inc. 2.5 SETTING MATERIALS A. Modified Dry-Set Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Ultraflex1 by MAPEI Corporation or comparable product by one of the following: a. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. b. Bostik, Inc. c. Custom Building Products. d. Laticrete International, Inc. 2. ISO 13007 Classification: C2E. 3. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for non-sagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4. B. Improved Modified Dry-Set Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.15. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kerabond/Keralastic System by MAPEI Corporation or comparable product by one of the following: a. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. b. Bostik, Inc. c. Custom Building Products. d. Laticrete International, Inc. 2. ISO 13007 Classification: C2ES2P2. 3. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for non-sagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.15. C. Medium-Bed, Improved Modified Dry-Set Cement Mortar: Comply with requirements in ANSI A118.15. Provide product that is approved by manufacturer for application thickness of up to 5/8 inch (16 mm). 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kerabond T/Keralastic System by MAPEI Corporation or comparable product by one of the following: a. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. b. Bostik, Inc. c. Custom Building Products. d. Laticrete International, Inc. 2. ISO 13007 Classification: C2ES2P2. 2.6 GROUT MATERIALS A. High-Performance Cement Grout: ANSI A118.7. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide UltraColor Plus by MAPEI Corporation or comparable product by one of the following: a. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. b. Bostik, Inc. c. Custom Building Products. d. Laticrete International, Inc. 2. ISO 13007 Classification: CG2WAF. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated. B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic, designed specifically for flooring and wall applications; aluminum. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following or comparable products from another manufacturer. a. Base Cap and Wall Tile Cap: Schluter Systems L. P., Schluter-QUADEC. b. Reveal: Schluter Systems L. P., Schluter-DECO-SG. 2. Finish: Satin anodized. C. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers. 2.8 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions. B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions. C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. 2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically scarified. b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or grinding. 3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed. 4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.2 PREPARATION A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer. B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot (1:50) toward drains. C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. 3.3 COMBINATION WATERPROOFING AND CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE APPLICATION A. Install fluid-applied membrane to comply with ANSI A108.12 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely to substrate. B. Allow waterproofing to cure and verify by testing that it is watertight before installing tile or setting materials over it. 3.4 TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used. 1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage: a. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles. B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges. E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work. 2. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same size, align joints. 3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated. 4. Where wall tile is installed is same room or space as existing wall tile, align module and tile joints with existing module and tile joints. F. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with joint widths as recommended by tile manufacturer. 1. Match existing joint widths where tile is indicated to match existing tile. G. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. 1. Where new tile is installed in same space as existing tile, align top of tile wainscots with top of existing tile wainscots indicated to remain. H. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated and where required by referenced TCNA standards. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them. I. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not extend waterproofing or crack isolation membrane under thresholds set in latexportland cement mortar. Fill joints between such thresholds and adjoining tile set on waterproofing or crack isolation membrane with elastomeric sealant. J. Metal Edge Strips: Install at the following locations and where indicated: 1. Base Cap: Where there is no wall tile above tile base. 2. Wall Tile Cap: Where wall tile is exposed at top, and where not using bullnose wall tile cap. 3. Reveal: Between coved base and wall tile. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning. Cornell University: Olin Hall Renovation for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 11 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed. D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings. 3.6 INTERIOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor: 1. Tile Installation F122A-F125: Medium-bed mortar on full-coverage crack-isolation membrane; TCNA F122A-F125-Full. a. Tile Type: Large-format porcelain tile b. Crack Isolation Membrane: Fabric-reinforced, fluid-applied membrane. c. Thin-Set Mortar: Medium-bed, improved modified dry-set cement mortar. d. Grout: High-performance cement grout. B. Interior Wall Installations, Metal Studs or Furring: 1. Tile Installation W244: Thin-set mortar on cementitious backer units or fiber cement underlayment; TCNA W244C or TCNA W244F. a. Tile Types: Glazed ceramic wall tile or glass wall tile. b. Thin-Set Mortar: Modified dry-set cement mortar. c. Grout: High-performance cement grout. C. Interior Wall Installations, Large Format Tile, Metal Studs or Furring: 1. Tile Installation W244: Thin-set mortar on cementitious backer units or fiber cement underlayment; TCNA W244C or TCNA W244F. a. Tile Types: Large-format porcelain tile. b. Thin-Set Mortar: Improved modified dry-set cement mortar. c. Grout: High-performance cement grout. END OF SECTION 093013 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches (150 mm) in size. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied color finishes. D. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch- (150-mm-) square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 2. Exposed Suspension-System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 6-inch- (150-mm-) long Samples of each type, finish, and color. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Suspended ceiling components. 2. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached. 3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical panels. 4. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following: a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels. 5. Perimeter moldings. B. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. C. Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling suspension system and anchor and fastener type, from ICC-ES. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 3. Hold-Down Clips: Equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup of typical ceiling area as shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide named product or products by one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. CertainTeed Corporation. 3. United States Gypsum Company. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL A. Source Limitations: 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer. 2. Suspension System: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension system from single source from single manufacturer. C. Glass-Fiber-Based Panels: Made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. D. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches (400 mm) away from test surface according to ASTM E 795. E. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations, provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size. 2.4 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING TYPE APC-1, APC-2 A. Basis of Design Products: Drawings and specifications are based on the following products: 1. APC-1: Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Ultima 9/16” Beveled Tegular, Item No. 1912 2. APC-2: Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Ultima 9/16” Beveled Tegular, Item No. 1912 with Metalworks Tegular Panels in TechZone Assembly B. Classification: Provide panels compl ying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as follows: 1. Type and Form: Type IV, mineral base with membrane-faced overlay; Form 2, water felted; with vinyl overlay on face. 2. Pattern: E (lightly textured). C. Description: 1. Color: White. 2. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm). 3. Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm). 4. Edge/Joint Detail: Reveal sized to fit flange of exposed suspension-system members as indicated. D. Performance Characteristics: 1. LR: Not less than 0.90. 2. NRC: Not less than 0.70. 3. CAC: Not less than 35. E. Installation Accessories: 1. Accessories for APC-1: a. Narrow-face grid with slotted, box-shaped profile. b. Sheet metal panels c. Stepped edge molding. d. Transition molding. 2. Accessories for APC-2: a. Narrow-face grid with slotted, box-shaped profile. b. Sheet metal panels c. Stepped edge molding. d. Transition molding. e. Non-perforated metal panel and edge cap. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.5 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING TYPE APC-3 A. Basis of Design Products: Drawings and specifications are based on the following products: 1. APC-3: Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Ceramaguard, Item No. 607 B. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as follows: 1. Type and Form: Type XX, other types; described as high-density, ceramic- and mineralbase panels with scrubbable finish, resistant to heat, moisture, and corrosive fumes. 2. Pattern: CE (perforated, small holes and lightly textured) C. Description: 1. Color: White. 2. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm). 3. Thickness: 5/8 inch (16 mm). 4. Edge/Joint Detail: Square. D. Performance Characteristics: 1. LR: Not less than 0.82. 2. NRC: 0.55. 3. CAC: Not less than 38. E. Installation Accessories: 1. Standard-face, aluminum grid with gaskets 2. Hold-down clips. 3. Aluminum angle edge molding 4. Transition molding. 2.6 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M. 1. High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635/C 635M requirements for "Coating Classification for Severe Environment Performance" where high-humidity finishes are indicated. B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. 1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. a. Type: Postinstalled expansion anchors. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 b. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition. 2. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. C. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.135-inch- (3.5-mm-) diameter wire. D. Hanger Rods and Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint. E. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch (22 mm) wide; formed with 0.04-inch- (1mm-) thick, galvanized-steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16-inch- (8-mm-) diameter bolts. F. Seismic Stabilizer Bars: Manufacturer's standard perimeter stabilizers designed to accommodate seismic forces. G. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate seismic forces. H. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure acoustical panels in place. I. Hold-Down Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard hold-down clips spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. on all cross tees. J. Clean-Room Gasket System: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard system, including manufacturer's standard gasket and related adhesives, tapes, seals, and retention clips, designed to seal out foreign material from and maintain positive pressure in clean room. 2.7 STEEL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 4. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation. B. Narrow-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 (Z90) coating designation; with prefinished 9/16-inch- (15-mm-) wide metal caps on flanges. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Basis of Design Product: Drawings and specifications are based on the following product. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following or equivalent product from acceptable manufacturer: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Suprafine 2. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system. 3. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type. 4. Face Design: Flat, flush. 5. Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet. 6. Cap Finish: Painted white. 2.8 ALUMINUM SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 4. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation. B. Standard-Face Extruded Aluminum Suspension System: Main and cross runners formed from extruded aluminum to produce structural members with 15/16-inch- (24-mm-) wide flanges. 1. Basis of Design Product: Drawings and specifications are based on the following product. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following or equivalent product from acceptable manufacturer: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; 15/16” Co-Extruded Clean Room Aluminum Grid System 2. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system. 3. Face Design: Flat, flush. 4. Face Finish: Painted white. 5. Gasket System: Clean-room type. 2.9 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS, TRIM AND ACCESSORY PANELS A. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners. 1. Basis of Design Products: Drawings and specifications are based on the following products: a. Stepped Edge Molding: Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Shadow Molding, Item #7874 b. Transition Molding: Armstrong World Industries, Inc.’ Acoustical to Drywall Transition Molding, Item #7906 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners unless otherwise indicated. 3. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member. 4. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly. B. Sheet-Metal Ceiling Panels: Manufacturer's sheet metal panels in sizes indicated on Drawings; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners. 2.10 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant. 2. Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. B. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete. 7. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. 8. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 9. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 10. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends of each member. 11. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors. D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m). Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. E. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension-system runners and moldings. 2. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. 3. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system members with box-shaped flanges, install panels with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension-system surfaces and panel faces flush with bottom face of runners. 4. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer. 5. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated; space as recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated. 6. Install clean-room gasket system in areas indicated, sealing each panel and fixture as recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 095113 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 WOOD GRILLE CEILINGS 095427 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 095427 - WOOD GRILLE CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Interior wood grille ceiling system. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature for wood ceiling materials and accessories. Submit written data on fire performance characteristics. B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned shop drawings showing ceiling layout. Show locations, markings, quantities, materials, sizes and shapes and indicate methods of connecting, anchoring, fastening, bracing and attaching to other portions of work. Include the following: 1. Ceiling suspension members. 2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. 3. Method of attaching grilles. 4. Ceiling mounted or penetrating items including light fixtures; air supplies and returns; speakers; sprinkler heads; column penetrations, and other junctures with adjoining construction. C. Samples for Verification: Submit in the form of typical portions of specified wood ceiling panels in same thickness and material indicated for final unit of work, including straight edge detail with an attached suspension system and perimeter trim member in the specified finish. 1. Minimum 12 by 12-inch (300 by 300-mm) size samples that indicate joinery and method of internal fastening. 2. Minimum 12-inch (300-mm) lengths of each suspension system member. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Suspended ceiling components above wood grille ceilings. 2. Structural members to which suspension devices will be attached. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 WOOD GRILLE CEILINGS 095427 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. Items penetrating or adjacent to wood grille ceilings including, but not limited to, the following: a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Alarms. e. Sprinklers. f. Cameras. g. Snorkel exhausts. h. Ceiling service panels. i. Other ceiling mounted devices. 4. Show access requirements for items covered by or adjacent to wood grille ceilings. B. Product Test Reports: Submit certified test reports evidencing compliance with requirements for seismic and fire performance characteristics. C. Evaluation Reports: For each ceiling suspension system and anchor and fastener type, from ICC-ES or another code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage a firm specializing in wood ceiling installation with not less than 3 years’ experience in installation of ceilings similar to that required for this Project. B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide ceiling components that are identical to those tested for the following fire performance characteristics, according to test method indicated, by UL or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: a. Flame Spread: Not more than 200. b. Smoke Developed: Not more than 450. c. Test Method: ASTM E84. C. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of wood ceiling units and suspension system components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system components, and partition systems. D. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original unopened protective packaging with labels intact and legible, identifying brand name and contents. B. Store materials in original packaging in dry area and in a manner that prevents damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. C. Before installing wood ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and stabilized moisture content. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 WOOD GRILLE CEILINGS 095427 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. Carefully handle wood ceiling units to avoid splitting, chipping edges, or other damage. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install wood ceilings until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period. 1. Maintain relative humidity level of 30 to 55 percent in areas where wood ceiling units are being installed, 24 hours prior, during, and 24 hours after installation. 2. Maintain uniform temperature of 60 to 70 deg F (16 to 21 deg C) prior to and during installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Certified Wood: Wood members shall be certified as "FSC Pure" or "FSC Mixed Credit" according to FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship," and FSC STD-40-004, "FSC Standard for Chain of Custody Certification." 2.2 WOOD GRILLE CEILING SYSTEM A. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. 9 Wood, Inc.; Cross Piece Grille 1100 Series (Custom Variation). 2. Architectural Components Group, Inc.; Grille Backer Series 1 (Custom Variation). 3. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Woodworks Grille (Custom Variation). 4. Rulon International; Panel Grille PG-4-10-40W (Custom Variation). B. Style: Grille. 1. Assembly Style: a. Interior Grilles: Backer. 2. Attachment Type: a. Interior Grilles: Wood backer clips, panels removable for downward access. 3. Slat Material: Solid hardwood. 4. Slat Species: Maple, poplar, or other light-colored closed-grain hardwood suitable for specified opaque finish. 5. Slat Width: 5/8-inch (16-mm). 6. Slat Depth (Height): 2-1/2 inch (63.5-mm). 7. Grille Width: 12 inches (305-mm). 8. Slat Members per Grille: 4. 9. Slat Nominal Length, Maximum: 10 feet (3-m). 10. Slat Edge Profile: Square. 11. Slat Finish: Opaque paint finish. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 WOOD GRILLE CEILINGS 095427 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 a. Color: White color as selected by Architect. 12. Backer Material: Any closed-grain hardwood suitable for opaque finish. 13. Backer Configuration: Notched. a. Provide custom-angle and custom-notched backers to accommodate angled grille layout as indicated on Drawings. 14. Backer Finish: Black. 15. Backer Clip Color: Black. 16. Reveals: Open, exposed construction above ceiling visible between slats. 2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. B. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M. C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. 1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. a. Type: Post-installed expansion anchors. b. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition. D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, unless indicated otherwise. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.135-inch- (3.5-mm-) diameter wire. E. Hanger Rods and Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint. 1. Color: Black. F. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch (22 mm) wide; formed with 0.04-inch- (1-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16-inch- (8-mm-) diameter bolts. 1. Color: Black. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 WOOD GRILLE CEILINGS 095427 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; pre-painted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than indicated coating designation; with prefinished 15/16-inch- (24-mm-) wide metal caps on flanges. 1. Coating Designation (Interior Ceilings): G30 (Z90). 2. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system. 3. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type. 4. Face Design: Flat, flush. 5. Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet. 6. Dowel Clips: Manufacturer’s standard. 7. Color: Black. a. Black color for all surfaces of suspension system including caps, runners, clips, and other suspension system components and accessories. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Condition of Surfaces: Examine surfaces to receive suspended wood ceilings for unevenness, irregularities, and dampness that could affect quality and execution of work. B. Prior to execution of work, report discrepancies that preclude installation in pattern shown. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for preset inserts, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose installation is specified in other Sections. B. Refer to Drawings for ceiling layouts. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install wood ceiling system to comply with installation standard referenced below, and manufacturer's installation instructions. 1. Standard for Installation of Ceiling Suspension System: Comply with ASTM C636 and seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." B. Arrange wood ceiling units and orient directionally patterned units in a manner shown on reflected ceiling plans. C. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structural members as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 WOOD GRILLE CEILINGS 095427 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, counter-splaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacing required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards. 3. Secure angle hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both structure to which hangers are attached and type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 4. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends of each member. 5. Attach cold-rolled ceiling channels to angle hangers with appropriate hanger clips. D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. E. Install wood ceiling panels in coordination with suspension system. Scribe and cut panels to fit accurately at borders and at penetrations. 1. Interior Grilles: Secure panels to suspension system with clips furnished by panel manufacturer. F. Install wood ceiling panels so that exposed surfaces are flush and level, with joints straight and true. 1. Allow gap between slat ends of each wood ceiling panel. Maintain consistent gap width as recommended by panel manufacturer. Locate gaps as indicated on Drawings. G. Tolerances: 1. Deflection: Suspension system components, hangers and fastening devices supporting light fixtures, ceiling grilles, and wood ceiling panels, maximum 1/360th of the span. a. Test Method: ASTM C635. 2. Allowable tolerance of finished ceiling system: Level to within 1/8-inch in 12 ft. 3.4 CLEANUP A. Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean wood ceilings. B. Comply with ceiling manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor scratches or abrasions on exposed surfaces. C. Remove and replace any work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 095427 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient base. 2. Resilient molding accessories. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet (3 linear m) for every 500 linear feet (150 linear m) or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. B. Accessibility Standards: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities" and ICC A117.1 as modified by Building Code of State of New York. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. In-Place Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Include mockups of resilient base and resilient molding accessories where specified to be included with flooring mockups in other specification sections. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 72 hours after installation. B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C). C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RESILIENT BASE A. Resilient Base: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allstate Rubber Corp.; Stoler Industries. b. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. c. Burke Flooring Products; a Division of Burke Industries, Inc. d. Estrie Products International; American Biltrite (Canada) Ltd. e. Flexco, Inc. f. Johnsonite; a Tarkett Company. g. Mondo America, Inc. h. Musson Rubber Co. i. Nora Rubber Flooring; Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc. j. PRF USA, Inc. k. Roppe Corporation, USA. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 l. VPI Corporation. B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861. 1. Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset) or Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic). 2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous). 3. Style: Cove (base with toe), unless indicated otherwise. a. Straight (flat or toeless) at carpet. C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm). D. Height: 4 inches (102 mm). E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. F. Outside Corners: Preformed. G. Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed. H. Finish: Matte. I. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 2.2 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORIES A. Resilient Molding Accessory: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Burke Flooring Products; a Division of Burke Industries, Inc. c. Flexco, Inc. d. Johnsonite; a Tarkett Company. e. R.C.A. Rubber Company (The). f. Roppe Corporation, USA. g. VPI Corporation. B. Description: Carpet edge, reducer strips for resilient floor flooring, transition strips. C. Material: Rubber. D. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated provide manufacturer’s standard profiles suitable for applicable transitions and terminations, compliant with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. E. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. C. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. 3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces. H. Job-Formed Corners: 1. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. 3.4 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of carpet and resilient floor covering that would otherwise be exposed. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. END OF SECTION 096513 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Vinyl composition floor tile. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 096513 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient base, reducer strips, and other accessories installed with resilient floor coverings. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of floor tile indicated. C. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 MATERIALS MAINTENANCE SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Floor Tile: Furnish 1 box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, but not less than 1 box, of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation indicated. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. B. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). Store floor tiles on flat surfaces. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 85 deg F (29 deg C), in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C). C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation. D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation. E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE (VCT) A. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Imperial Texture Standard Excelon by Armstrong World Industries, Inc. or comparable products from one of the following: 1. AB ColorPlus, American Biltrite (Canada) Ltd. 2. Congoleum Corporation. 3. Mannington Mills, Inc. 4. Tarkett, Inc. B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066, Class 2, through-pattern tile. C. Wearing Surface: Smooth. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm). E. Size: 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm). F. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range. 1. Verify and match existing colors. 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Adhesives shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): a. VCT Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L. C. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours. b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement. C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. D. Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. 3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile. B. Unless indicated otherwise on Drawings, lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. 1. Lay tiles square with room axis unless another orientation is indicated on the Drawings. C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 1. Lay tiles with grain direction pattern to match existing grain direction pattern. D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, equipment, cabinets, pipes, outlets, thresholds, sills, and door frames. 1. Extend flooring below built-in items that are moveable or that allow for a flexible layout. 2. Extend flooring below built-in items where indicated on Drawings. E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to below center of doors where forming transition with other flooring materials or colors. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 G. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect floor tile products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. 1. Do not allow rolling loads over flooring with metal wheels, plastic wheels, or in wheel shapes and hardness that are not within manufacturer’s recommendations. D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying liquid floor polish. 1. Apply two coat(s). E. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 096519 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 RESINOUS FLOORING 096723 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 096723 - RESINOUS FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes resinous flooring systems. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealants installed at resinous flooring system joints. 2. Section 099600 "High Performance Coatings” for high-performance wall coatings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions of Painting Terms: ASTM D 16, unless otherwise specified. B. Dry Film Thickness (DFT): Thickness of a system coat in fully cured state measured in mils (1/1000 inch). 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate compatibility of concrete curing compounds, admixtures, and other treatments for compatibility with flooring materials. B. Coordinate resinous flooring systems with high performance wall coatings. 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review methods and procedures related to flooring installation including, but not limited to, the following: a. Delivery, storage, and handling procedures. b. Ambient conditions and ventilation procedures. c. Substrate preparation procedures. d. Installation. e. Coordination requirements for other portions of the Work, including but not limited to the following: 1) Concrete Slabs: Review curing methods, surface finishing, flatness, levelness, moisture and vapor control, and other requirements. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 RESINOUS FLOORING 096723 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2) Moisture and Vapor Control Materials: Review material compatibility, testing, protection, and other requirements. 3) Underlayment Materials: Review surface finishing, flatness, levelness, material compatibility, and other requirements. 4) High Performance Coatings: Review transition details, compatibility, sequencing, mockups, and other requirements. 1.6 SEQUENCING A. Where installed in same rooms or areas, coordinate sequencing of installation of resinous flooring with installation of high performance coatings. 1. Coordinate sequencing of base installation with high performance wall coating installation where walls are indicated to receive high performance coating. Unless recommended otherwise by resinous flooring manufacturer, install high performance coatings at walls prior to installing resinous integral cove base and resinous flooring. 1.7 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include manufacturer's technical data, application instructions, and recommendations for each resinous flooring component required. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed finish required. 1. Color samples to indicate manufacturer’s full range of colors. 2. Texture samples to indicate manufacturer’s full range of available textures. C. Samples for Verification: For each resinous flooring system required, 6 inches (150 mm) square, applied to a rigid backing by Installer for this Project. D. Product Schedule: For each resinous flooring type. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1. Indicate products for each coat, component, and accessory. 2. Indicate number of coats for each product. 3. Indicate application techniques and application thicknesses. 1.8 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified requirements. B. Material Certificates: For each resinous flooring component, from manufacturer. C. Material Test Reports: For each resinous flooring system, by a qualified testing agency. D. Material Receipts: For each material component to verify quantity of purchased materials. 1. Include installer’s certification for amount of material installed for each component. 2. Include installer’s certification for amount of material not installed and retained as installer’s property. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 RESINOUS FLOORING 096723 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. Include installer’s certification for amount of material not installed and returned to manufacturer or material supplier. E. Field quality-control reports. 1.9 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For resinous flooring to include in maintenance manuals. 1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer. 1. Engage an installer who is certified in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer as qualified to apply resinous flooring systems indicated. B. Single Source Installer Responsibility: Use single Installer for resinous flooring and high performance wall coatings located in same rooms or areas. C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Flooring and Base Mockups: Apply full-thickness mockups of each resinous flooring type, color and texture on slab area. Each mockup shall be applied on 96-inch- (2400mm-) square floor area selected by Architect. a. Include 96-inch (2400-mm) length of integral cove base with inside and outside corner. b. If directed by Owner or Architect, install initial mockups on slab area indicated to receive carpeting floor finish. 1) Remove initial mockup material in sufficient time prior to carpet or other final finish flooring installation. Extent of removal shall be as required for a suitable substrate for specified flooring material. 2. Flooring and Base Room Mockups: Apply full-thickness mockups of each resinous flooring type, color and texture in typical room, minimum mock-up area of 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m). a. Include integral cove base. b. Include details of interface of resinous flooring system with door frames and other adjacent construction. 3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for Architect's review of mockups. 4. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 5. Subject to compliance with requirements and unless indicated otherwise, approved final mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 RESINOUS FLOORING 096723 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage and mixing with other components. 1.12 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ambient temperature, moisture, ventilation, and other conditions affecting resinous flooring application. B. Lighting: Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate permanent lighting conditions during resinous flooring application. C. Close spaces to traffic during resinous flooring application and for not less than 24 hours after application unless manufacturer recommends a longer period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Provide products from one of the following:: 1. Crossfield Products Corp; Dex-O-Tex. 2. DUDICK Inc. 3. Stonhard, Inc. 4. Tnemec Company, Inc. B. Source Limitations: Obtain primary resinous flooring materials, including primers, resins, hardening agents, grouting coats, and topcoats, from single source from single manufacturer. Obtain secondary materials, including patching and fill material, joint sealant, and repair materials, of type and from manufacturer recommended in writing by manufacturer of primary materials. 2.2 RESINOUS FLOORING RES-1 A. Basis-of-Design Product: Stonhard; Stonshield URT. B. Resinous Flooring System: Abrasion-, impact-, and chemical-resistant, aggregate-filled, and resin-based monolithic floor surfacing designed to produce a seamless floor and integral cove base. C. System Characteristics: 1. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Wearing Surface: Textured for slip resistance. 3. Overall System Thickness: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). D. Primer: Type recommended by resinous flooring manufacturer for substrate and resinous flooring system indicated. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 RESINOUS FLOORING 096723 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 E. Patching and Fill Material: Resinous product of or approved by resinous flooring manufacturer and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. F. Body Coats: 1. Resin: Urethane. 2. Formulation Description: High solids. 3. Type: Pigmented. 4. Application Method: Troweled or screeded. 5. Number of Coats: One. 6. Aggregates: Colored quartz (ceramic-coated silica). G. Topcoats: Sealing or finish coats. 1. Resin: Urethane. 2. Formulation Description: High solids. 3. Type: Clear. 4. Number of Coats: One. 5. Finish: Gloss. 6. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 W/sq. cm or greater according to NFPA 253. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Type recommended by manufacturer for substrate and body coats indicated. 1. Body coat material may be used where acceptable to manufacturer, and where selfpriming. 2. Where resinous flooring system is installed over existing resinous flooring, use primer and accessories recommended by manufacturer. B. Patching and Fill Material: Resinous product of or approved by resinous flooring manufacturer and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. C. Metal Edge Strips and Cap Strips: Angle, L-shape, or quarter-round, height to match system thickness, metallic, designed specifically for resinous flooring applications; white-zinc alloy, nickel silver or stainless-steel, ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed-edge material. 1. Use angle or L-shape for cap strips where integral base vertical leg is flush with wall coating surfaces. 2. Use quarter-round for cap strips where integral base vertical leg is not flush with wall coating surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resinous flooring. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 RESINOUS FLOORING 096723 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Prepare and clean substrates according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions for substrate indicated. Provide clean, dry substrate for resinous flooring application. B. Concrete Substrates: Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants incompatible with resinous flooring. 1. Roughen concrete substrates as follows: a. Shot-blast surfaces with an apparatus that abrades the concrete surface, contains the dispensed shot within the apparatus, and re-circulates the shot by vacuum pickup. 2. Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Verify that concrete substrates are dry and moisture-vapor emissions are within acceptable levels according to manufacturer's written instructions. Perform each of the following tests: a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869, once for every 1000 sq. ft. (92.9 sq. m) of surface area to receive flooring. Proceed with application of resinous flooring only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) of slab area in 24 hours. b. Plastic Sheet Test: ASTM D 4263, once for every 500 sq. ft (46.5 sq. m) of surface area to receive flooring. Proceed with application only after testing indicates absence of moisture in substrates. c. Relative Humidity Test: Use in situ probes, ASTM F 2170, once for every 1000 sq. ft. (92.9 sq. m) of surface area to receive flooring. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement. 4. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Verify that concrete substrates have pH within acceptable range. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with application only after substrates pass testing. C. Existing Resinous Flooring Substrates: Verify that existing resinous flooring substrates are sound and acceptable to manufacturer for application of scheduled resinous flooring systems. Perform bond-adhesion tests on existing resinous flooring substrates as recommended by manufacturer. Provide sound existing resinous flooring surfaces free of dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants incompatible with resinous flooring. 1. Remove damaged and deteriorated resinous flooring according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Shot-blast existing sound resinous flooring surfaces in accordance with resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Verify that existing resinous flooring substrates are dry and moisture-vapor emissions are within acceptable levels according to manufacturer's written instructions. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with application only after substrates pass testing. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 RESINOUS FLOORING 096723 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 4. Verify that existing resinous flooring substrates have pH within acceptable range. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with application only after substrates pass testing. D. Patching and Filling: Use patching and fill material to fill holes and depressions in substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use patching and fill material to fill substrates or slope substrates for smooth transitions where resinous flooring is applied over both concrete slab substrates and existing resinous flooring substrates. E. Control Joint Treatment: Treat control joints and other nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from reflecting through resinous flooring according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Install metal edge strips at terminations of resinous flooring and where meeting other types of flooring. 1. Unless indicated otherwise on Drawings, locate metal edge strips centered below center of doors. G. Resinous Materials: Mix components and prepare materials according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use thinning compounds and other accessory components where recommended by manufacturer. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply components of resinous flooring system according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a uniform, monolithic wearing surface of thickness indicated. 1. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum adhesion of resinous flooring system to substrate, and optimum inter-coat adhesion. 2. Cure resinous flooring components according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes. 3. Expansion and Isolation Joint Treatment: At substrate expansion and isolation joints, comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions. a. Use resinous flooring manufacturer’s recommended materials and joint treatment methods that will produce joints that are not visible at top surface of flooring system. B. Primer: Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. 1. Re-prime areas with patching and fill material where recommended by manufacturer. C. Resinous Flooring Systems: Apply resinous flooring systems to floor areas including slab and deck surfaces, equipment pads, curbs, pits, depressions, and other floor surfaces for fullcoverage application to each room or space. 1. Apply resinous flooring underneath fixed and moveable base cabinets and fixed and moveable equipment. 2. Apply resinous flooring inside equipment service areas. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 RESINOUS FLOORING 096723 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. Integral Cove Base: Apply cove base mix to wall surfaces, curbs, and other vertical surfaces before applying flooring. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions and details, including those for taping, mixing, priming, troweling, sanding, and top-coating of cove base. Round internal and external corners. 1. Integral Cove Base: 4 inches (100 mm) high. a. Where meeting existing base, verify and match existing base height. 2. Apply cove base in number of lifts, coats, or applications required for finish surface of base horizontal leg to be flush with finish surface of flooring. 3. Apply cove base to wall surfaces, curbs, and other vertical surfaces for full coverage application to each room or space. a. Apply cove base to wall surfaces behind fixed and moveable base cabinets and fixed and moveable equipment. b. Apply cove base to exposed sides and toe-kicks of fixed base cabinets and fixed equipment. 1) Where required for bond of cove base material, attach thin material recommended by manufacturer to form suitable substrate for cove base. 2) Where resinous flooring extends underneath fixed base cabinets and fixed equipment, saw-cut resinous flooring and form keyway for cove bottom to be flush with finish surface of flooring. Do not form raised horizontal leg for base installed after flooring. c. Round top edge of base to form bull-nose profile. d. Install metal cap strip at top of base and apply cove base vertical leg to form flush transition with finish surface of wall coating. e. Apply tapered cove base vertical leg to form flush transition with finish surface of wall coating. f. Where meeting existing base, verify and match profile and alignment of existing base. E. Self-Leveling Body Coats: Apply self-leveling slurry body coats in thickness indicated for flooring system. 1. Aggregates: Broadcast aggregates at rate recommended by manufacturer and, after resin is cured, remove excess aggregates to provide surface texture indicated. F. Troweled or Screeded Body Coats: Apply troweled or screeded body coats in thickness indicated for flooring system. Hand or power trowel and grout to fill voids. When body coats are cured, remove trowel marks and roughness using method recommended by manufacturer. G. Grout Coat: Apply grout coat, of type recommended by resinous flooring manufacturer, to fill voids in surface of final body coat. H. Topcoats: Apply topcoats in number indicated for flooring system and at spreading rates recommended in writing by manufacturer and to produce wearing surface indicated. I. Emergency Shower Targets: Install contrasting color coat at locations of emergency showers. Center target flooring area below centerline of overhead emergency showers. Apply in number of coats and at spreading rates recommended in writing by manufacturer, but not less than required to hide underlying topcoat color. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 RESINOUS FLOORING 096723 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Target Size: Comply with ANSI Z 358.1, minimum width of 32 inches (813 mm), depth extending minimum 48 inches (1219 mm) from the eyewash, but not less than minimum 16 inches (406 mm) from centerline of the overhead shower. Verify required size with the Owner. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Material Sampling: Owner may, at any time and any number of times during resinous flooring application, require material samples for testing for compliance with requirements. 1. Owner will engage an independent testing agency to take samples of materials being used. Material samples will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. 2. Testing agency will test samples for compliance with requirements, using applicable referenced testing procedures or, if not referenced, using testing procedures listed in manufacturer's product data. 3. If test results show applied materials do not comply with specified requirements, pay for testing, remove non-complying materials, prepare surfaces coated with unacceptable materials, and reapply flooring materials to comply with requirements. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect resinous flooring from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer. END OF SECTION 096723 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 TILE CARPETING 096813 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 096813 - TILE CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes modular, tufted carpet tile. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for removing existing floor coverings. 2. Section 096513 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet tile. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. 2. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate. B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and pre-consumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. 2. Product Certificates for Credit MR 5: For products and materials required to comply with requirements for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material. a. Include statement indicating location of manufacturer and distance to Project for each regionally manufactured material. 3. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.3: a. For carpet tile, documentation indicating compliance with testing and product requirements of CRI's "Green Label Plus" program. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 TILE CARPETING 096813 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 b. For installation adhesive, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. C. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet tiles. 2. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot. 3. Type of subfloor. 4. Type of installation. 5. Pattern of installation. 6. Pattern type, location, and direction. 7. Pile direction. 8. Type, color, and location of insets and borders. 9. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 10. Transition details to other flooring materials. D. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. 2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples. E. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For carpet tile, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 2 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. (8.3 sq. m). Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 TILE CARPETING 096813 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association at the Commercial II certification level. B. Fire-Test-Response Ratings: Where indicated, provide carpet tile identical to those of assemblies tested for fire response according to NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Installation Mockups: Build mockups for carpeting including base and accessories. a. Size: Minimum 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) for each type, color and pattern. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with CRI 104. 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed and weather-tight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent edge raveling, snags, runs, dimensional stability, excess static discharge, loss of tuft bind strength, loss of face fiber, and delamination. 3. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 TILE CARPETING 096813 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET TILE CPT-1 A. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. Mannington Commercial, a division of Mannington Mills, Inc.; Modular Carpet. B. Style: Elemental Solids II. C. Color: Grey (12022). D. Carpet Tile Construction: 1. Fiber Content: 100 percent nylon 6, 6. 2. Fiber Type: Invista Antron Lumena. 3. Dye Method: Solution. 4. Pile Characteristic: Graphic loop pile. 5. Pile Thickness: 0.104 inches (2.5 mm). 6. Stitches: 9 per inch (3.5 per cm). 7. Gage: 1/10. 8. Surface Pile Weight: 14 oz. sq. yd. E. Backing 1. Primary Backing: Woven synthetic. 2. Secondary Backing: Infinity Modular, reinforced composite closed cell polymer. F. Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm). G. Applied Treatment: 1. Applied Soil-Resistance Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material. H. Performance Characteristics: As follows: 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 2. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 3.5 kV according to AATCC 134. 3. Emissions: Provide carpet tile that complies with testing and product requirements of CRI's "Green Label Plus" program. 2.2 CARPET TILE CPT-2 A. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. Mannington Commercial, a division of Mannington Mills, Inc.; Modular Carpet. B. Style: Offline. C. Color: Wired (12202). D. Carpet Tile Construction: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 TILE CARPETING 096813 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Fiber Content: 100 percent nylon 6, 6. 2. Fiber Type: Invista Antron Lumena. 3. Dye Method: Solution. 4. Pile Characteristic: Tip-sheared patterned loop pile. 5. Pile Thickness: 0.121 inches (3.1 mm). 6. Stitches: 9.66 per inch (3.8 per cm). 7. Gage: 5/64. 8. Surface Pile Weight: 22 oz. sq. yd. E. Backing 1. Primary Backing: Woven synthetic. 2. Secondary Backing: Infinity Modular, reinforced composite closed cell polymer. F. Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm). G. Applied Treatment: 1. Applied Soil-Resistance Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material. H. Performance Characteristics: As follows: 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 2. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 3.5 kV according to AATCC 134. 3. Emissions: Provide carpet tile that complies with testing and product requirements of CRI's "Green Label Plus" program. 2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, non-staining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 TILE CARPETING 096813 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet tile. 3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. C. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area. D. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. E. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, non-staining marking device. G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. 1. Installation Pattern (CPT-1): Lay tile carpeting with vertical ashlar pattern. 2. Installation Pattern (CPT-2): Lay tile carpeting with vertical ashlar pattern. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 TILE CARPETING 096813 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element. B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor Installations." C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. END OF SECTION 096813 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SOUND-ABSORBING WALL UNITS 098433 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 098433 - SOUND-ABSORBING WALL UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes shop-fabricated, fabric-wrapped panel units tested for acoustical performance, including: 1. Sound-absorbing, fabric-wrapped wall panels. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient. B. SAA: Sound Absorption Average. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of fabric facing, panel edge, core material, and mounting indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For sound-absorbing wall units. Include mounting devices and details; details at panel head, base, joints, and corners; and details at ceiling, floor base, and wall intersections. Indicate panel edge and core materials. 1. Include elevations showing panel sizes and direction of fabric weave and pattern matching. 2. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting devices and details. 3. Include details at panel head, base, joints, and corners; and details at ceiling, floor base, and wall intersections. Indicate panel edge profile and core materials. 4. Include details at cutouts and penetrations for other work. 5. Include direction of perforation pattern and pattern matching. C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. For each type of fabric facing from sound-absorbing wall unit manufacturer's full range. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SOUND-ABSORBING WALL UNITS 098433 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. Samples for Verification: For the following products, prepared on Samples of size indicated below: 1. Fabric: Full-width by approximately 36-inch- (900-mm-) long Sample, but not smaller than required to show complete pattern repeat, from dye lot to be used for the Work, and with specified treatments applied. Mark top and face of fabric. 2. Panel Edge: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Sample(s) showing each edge profile, corner, and finish. 3. Core Material: 12-inch- (300-mm-) square Sample at corner. 4. Mounting Devices: Full-size Samples. 5. Assembled Panels: Approximately 36 by 36 inches (900 by 900 mm), including joints and mounting methods. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Elevations and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Electrical outlets, switches, and thermostats. 2. Items penetrating or covered by sound-absorbing wall units including the following: a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Alarms. e. Sprinklers. f. Access panels. 3. Show operation of hinged and sliding components covered by or adjacent to soundabsorbing wall units. B. Product Certificates: For each type of sound-absorbing wall unit, from manufacturer. C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For sound-absorbing wall units to include in maintenance manuals. Include fabric manufacturers' written cleaning and stain-removal recommendations. 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials from same production run that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fabric: For each fabric, color, and pattern installed, provide length equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 10 yards (9 m). 2. Mounting Devices: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than five devices, including unopened adhesives. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SOUND-ABSORBING WALL UNITS 098433 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of sound-absorbing wall units from single source from single manufacturer. B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials, fabrication, and installation. 1. Build mockup of typical wall area as directed by Architect. Include intersection of wall and ceiling, corners, and perimeters. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with fabric and sound-absorbing wall unit manufacturers' written instructions for minimum and maximum temperature and humidity requirements for shipment, storage, and handling. B. Deliver materials and units in unopened bundles and store in a temperature-controlled dry place with adequate air circulation. 1.11 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install sound-absorbing wall units until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work at and above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Lighting: Do not install sound-absorbing wall units until a permanent level of lighting is provided on surfaces to receive the units. C. Air-Quality Limitations: Protect sound-absorbing wall units from exposure to airborne odors, such as tobacco smoke, and install units under conditions free from odor contamination of ambient air. D. Field Measurements: Verify locations of sound-absorbing wall units and actual dimensions of openings and penetrations by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Units shall comply with "Surface-Burning Characteristics" or "Fire Growth Contribution" Subparagraph below, or both, as determined by testing identical Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SOUND-ABSORBING WALL UNITS 098433 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 products by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84 or UL 723; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 2. Fire Growth Contribution: Comply with acceptance criteria of local code and authorities having jurisdiction when tested according to NFPA 265 Method B Protocol or NFPA 286. 2.2 FABRIC-WRAPPED, TACKABLE SOUND-ABSORBING WALL UNITS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries. 2. Conwed Designscape; an Owens Corning company. 3. Decoustics Limited; a CertainTeed Ceilings company. B. Sound-Absorbing Wall Panel: Manufacturer's standard panel construction consisting of facing material laminated to front face, edges, and back edge border of core. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following or equivalent product from acceptable manufacturer: a. Decoustics Limited; a CertainTeed Ceilings company, High Impact Resistant/Tackable H.I.R. #1. 2. Mounting: Back mounted with manufacturer's standard metal clips or bar hangers, secured to substrate. 3. Core: Manufacturer's standard medium-density glass-fiber board. a. Core-Face Layer: Manufacturer's standard high-density board impact-resistant, acoustically transparent, copolymer sheet. 4. Edge Profile: Square. 5. Edge Construction: Manufacturer's standard chemically hardened core with no frame. 6. Panel Joints: Butt joints with no reveal. 7. Facing Material: Woven fabric. 8. Acoustical Performance: Provide panels in thicknesses as required to achieve the following sound absorbance when tested according to ASTM C 423, for F5 mounting according to ASTM E 795: a. Typical locations, unless otherwise indicated: NRC 0.90. b. Where nominal 2-inch thickness is indicated: NRC 1.00. 9. Panel Width: As determined by width of selected fabric, allowing a minimum of 1 inch (25.4 mm) overlap to back of panel. 10. Panel Height: As indicated on Drawings. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SOUND-ABSORBING WALL UNITS 098433 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.3 MATERIALS A. Core Materials: 1. Glass-Fiber Board: ASTM C 612, Type standard with manufacturer; nominal density of 6 to 7 lb/cu. ft. (96 to 112 kg/cu. m), unfaced, and dimensionally stable, molded rigid board; and with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively. 2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: Panels complying with ANSI A208.2, grade to suit performance requirements and manufactured with no added urea formaldehyde. a. Fire-retardant panels made from softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fireretardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flamespread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 200 or less per ASTM E 84 or UL 723. 3. Wood and Plywood: Manufacturer's standard plywood or clear, vertical grain, straight, kiln-dried hardwood. a. Fire-retardant treated by pressure process with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84 or UL 723, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1) Treated material shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201/D 3201M at 92 percent relative humidity. 2) Kiln-dry material after treatment to 19 percent or less for lumber and 15 percent or less for plywood. B. Facing Material: ASTM D6207 dimensionally stable woven fabric suitable for application to panels and as follows: 1. FWP: Xorel a. Color and Pattern: White fabric as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range. C. Mounting Devices: Concealed on back of unit, recommended by manufacturer to support weight of unit, and as follows: 1. Splines: Manufacturer's standard concealed metal or plastic splines that engage the kerfed edges of the unit, with other moldings and trim for interior corners, exterior corners, and exposed edges, with factory-applied finish on exposed items. 2. Adhesives: As recommended by sound-absorbing wall unit manufacturer and with a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 3. Metal Clips or Bar Hangers: Manufacturer's standard two-part metal "Z" clips, with one part of each clip mechanically attached to back of unit and the other part to substrate, designed to permit unit removal. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SOUND-ABSORBING WALL UNITS 098433 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Use manufacturer's standard construction except as otherwise indicated; with facing material applied to face, edges, and back border of dimensionally stable core; and with rigid edges to reinforce panel perimeter against warpage and damage. B. Fabric-Wrapped Panels 1. Glass-Fiber Board Cores: Chemically harden core edges and areas of core where mounting devices are attached. 2. Core-Face Layer for: Evenly stretched over core face and edges and securely attached to core; free from puckers, ripples, wrinkles, or sags. 3. Facing Material: Apply fabric facing fully covering visible surfaces of unit; with material stretched straight, on the grain, tight, square, and free from puckers, ripples, wrinkles, sags, blisters, seams, adhesive, or other visible distortions or foreign matter. a. Square Corners: Tailor corners. b. Fabrics with Directional or Repeating Patterns or Directional Weave: Mark fabric top and attach fabric in same direction so pattern or weave matches in adjacent units. C. Dimensional Tolerances of Finished Units: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) for the following: 1. Thickness. 2. Edge straightness. 3. Overall length and width. 4. Squareness from corner to corner. 5. Chords, radii, and diameters. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine fabric, fabricated units, substrates, areas, and conditions, for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of soundabsorbing wall units. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install sound-absorbing wall units in locations indicated with vertical surfaces and edges plumb, top edges level and in alignment with other units, faces flush, and scribed to fit adjoining work accurately at borders and at penetrations. B. Comply with sound-absorbing wall unit manufacturer's written instructions for installation of units using type of mounting devices indicated. Mount units securely to supporting substrate. C. Align and level fabric pattern and grain among adjacent units. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SOUND-ABSORBING WALL UNITS 098433 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plumb and Level: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). B. Variation of Panel Joints from Hairline: Not more than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) wide. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clip loose threads; remove pills and extraneous materials. B. Clean panels on completion of installation to remove dust and other foreign materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 098433 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SOUND-ABSORBING CEILING UNITS 098436 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 098436 - SOUND-ABSORBING CEILING UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes shop-fabricated, acoustical panel units tested for acoustical performance, including the following: 1. Sound-absorbing ceiling panels. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 092216 “Non-Structural Metal Framing” for metal furring channels. 2. Section 095113 “ Acoustical Panel Ceilings” for manufactured lay-in ceiling assemblies. 3. Section 098443 "Sound-Absorbing Wall Units" for wall-mounted, fabric-wrapped acoustical panels. 4. Section 099123 “Interior Painting” for field painting of ceiling units. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient. B. SAA: Sound Absorption Average. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include panel edge, core material, and mounting indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For unit assembly and installation. 1. Include reflected ceiling plans, elevations, sections, and mounting devices and details. 2. Include details at joints and corners; and details at ceiling intersections and intersections with walls. Indicate panel edge profile and core materials. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SOUND-ABSORBING CEILING UNITS 098436 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Samples for Verification: For the following products: 1. Panel Edge: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Sample(s) showing each edge profile, corner, and finish. 2. Mounting Devices: Full-size Samples. 3. Assembled Panels: Approximately 36 by 36 inches (900 by 900 mm), including joints and mounting methods. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Electrical outlets. 2. Suspended ceiling components above ceiling units. 3. Structural members to which suspension devices will be attached. 4. Items penetrating or covered by units including the following: a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Alarms. e. Sprinklers. f. Access panels. 5. Show operation of hinged and sliding components covered by or adjacent to units. B. Product Certificates: For each type of unit. C. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each type of unit to include in maintenance manuals. 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Mounting Devices: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than five devices. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials, fabrication, and installation. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SOUND-ABSORBING CEILING UNITS 098436 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Build mockup of typical ceiling area 96 inches (2400 mm) wide by full width of ceiling. Include intersection of wall and ceiling, corners, and perimeters. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials and units in unopened bundles and store in a temperature-controlled dry place with adequate air circulation. 1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install units until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wetwork in spaces is complete and dry, work at and above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Air-Quality Limitations: Protect units from exposure to airborne odors, such as tobacco smoke, and install units under conditions free from odor contamination of ambient air. C. Field Measurements: Verify unit locations and actual dimensions of openings and penetrations by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate them on Shop Drawings. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace units and components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Acoustical performance. b. Warping of core. 2. Warranty Period: 30 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain ceiling units specified in this Section from single source from single manufacturer. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SOUND-ABSORBING CEILING UNITS 098436 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Units shall comply with "Surface-Burning Characteristics" or "Fire Growth Contribution" Subparagraph below, or both, as determined by testing identical products by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E84 or UL 723; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less. 2. Fire Growth Contribution: Comply with acceptance criteria of local code and authorities having jurisdiction when tested according to NFPA 286. 2.3 SOUND-ABSORBING CEILING UNITS A. Sound-Absorbing Ceiling Panel: Manufacturer's standard panel construction consisting of mineral-fiber board directly attached to furring channels. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Panels: Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; InvisAcoustics Basics, Item No. 1212FP. b. Fasteners: Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; All-in-One Self Stop Fasteners, Item No. 1212FP. 2. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels according to ASTM E1264 and designated by type, form, pattern, acoustical rating, and light reflectance unless otherwise indicated. a. Type and Form: Type IV, mineral base with membrane-faced overlay; Form 2, water felted; with fiberglass-fabric overlay on face. b. Pattern: E (lightly textured). 3. Panel Shape: Flat. 4. Mounting: Fastened to concealed steel furring channels with manufacturers fasteners with exposed heads finished to match panels. 5. Core: Manufacturer's standard cementitious-fiber board. 6. Surface Finish: Factory-applied scrim prepared for field painting. 7. Edge Profile: Square. 8. Corner Detail in Elevation: Square with continuous edge profile indicated. 9. Acoustical Performance: Sound absorption NRC of 0.75 according to ASTM C423. 10. Nominal Overall Panel Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). 11. Panel Size: 24 inches (610 mm) by 48 inches (1220 mm). 2.4 FABRICATION A. Standard Construction: Use manufacturer's standard construction unless otherwise indicated. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 SOUND-ABSORBING CEILING UNITS 098436 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Measure each area and establish layout of panels and joints of uniform size with balanced borders at opposite edges within a given area unless otherwise indicated. C. Dimensional Tolerances of Finished Units: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) for the following: 1. Thickness. 2. Edge straightness. 3. Overall length and width. 4. Squareness from corner to corner. 5. Chords, radii, and diameters. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine fabricated units, substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting unit performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install units in locations indicated. Unless otherwise indicated, install units with edges in alignment with walls and other units, faces flush, and scribed to fit adjoining work accurately at borders and at penetrations. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installation of units using type of mounting devices indicated. Mount units securely to supporting substrate. 3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Alignment with Surfaces: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) in 48 inches (1200 mm), noncumulative. B. Variation from Level or Slope: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) C. Variation of Joint Width: Not more than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) wide from hairline in 48 inches (1200 mm), noncumulative. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clip loose threads; remove pills and extraneous materials. B. Clean panels on completion of installation to remove dust and other foreign materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 098436 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 05 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section. 2. Division 08 Sections for factory priming doors and frames with primers specified in this Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gloss Level 1: Flat; not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. B. Gloss Level 2: Low-sheen, not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. C. Gloss Level 3: Eggshell; 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. D. Gloss Level 4: Satin; 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. E. Gloss Level 5: Semi-gloss; 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. F. Gloss Level 6: Gloss, 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. G. Gloss Level 7: High gloss; more than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate primer requirements for shop-applied and factory-applied primers provided under other specification sections. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted. a. Include manufacturer’s certification for products that are not listed by MPI. Indicate products meet or exceed requirements for applicable paint category. Comply with requirements for ‘Comparable Products’ as specified in Section 016000 "Product Requirements." 3. VOC content. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint: 2 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3. a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m). b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C). 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C). B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. California Paints. 3. Dunn-Edwards Corporation. 4. Glidden Professional, a division of PPG Industries. 5. Kelly-Moore Paint Company Inc. 6. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 7. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, comparable products that are not listed by MPI are acceptable. B. Material Compatibility: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L. 3. Dry-Fog Coatings: 400 g/L. 4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L. 5. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L. 6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L. 7. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L. 8. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L. 9. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L. 10. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L. D. Colors: 1. P1 (Field, Typical, White): As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 2. P2 (Accent, Dark Gray): As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 3. P3 (Accent, Yellow): As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 4. P4 (Accent, Ceilings, Black): As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 5. Existing: Match existing paint colors. 2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS A. Primer Sealer, Latex, Interior: MPI #50. B. Primer Sealer, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC: MPI #149. C. Primer, Latex, for Interior Wood: MPI #39. D. Primer, Bonding, Water Based: MPI #17. E. Primer, Bonding, Solvent Based: MPI #69. 2.4 METAL PRIMERS A. Primer, Rust-Inhibitive, Water Based: MPI #107. B. Primer, Galvanized, Water Based: MPI #134. C. Primer, Alkyd, Quick Dry, for Metal: MPI #76. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.5 WATER-BASED PAINTS A. Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, Flat (Gloss Level 1): MPI #143. B. Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 2): MPI #144. C. Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 3): MPI #145. D. Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #147. 2.6 DRY FOG/FALL COATINGS A. Dry Fall, Latex, Flat: MPI #118. B. Dry Fall, Water Based, for Galvanized Steel, Flat (Gloss Level 1): MPI #133. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3. Wood: 15 percent. 4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth. D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. E. Verify Owner has no restrictions on use of spray application for painting in occupied areas or adjacent to occupied areas. 1. Spray application will be acceptable in majority of application areas. 2. Owner reserves the right to restrict use of spray application in certain limited areas including areas directly adjacent to occupied areas with sensitive occupancies. 3. Owner reserves the right to require spray application in certain limited areas to be performed during certain work hours that may require work to be performed during nonbusiness hours. 4. Owner reserves the right to restrict use of spray application for any application areas that are not enclosed with dust-proof temporary partitions or enclosures in accordance with Owner’s requirements. F. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" and “MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual” applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and re-prime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. 2. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceed that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following: 1. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." G. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces. H. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. I. Wood Substrates: 1. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 2. Apply primer to surfaces that do not have a factory-applied primer. a. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 3. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 J. Cotton or Canvas Insulation Covering Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated, Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. 1. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, grilles, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection. B. At finished spaces with exposed ceilings (no suspended ceilings or with suspended ceilings that do not extend wall-to-wall) or with cloud ceilings, paint underside of structure, fireproofing, MEP/FP items, and other exposed items at ceiling other than pre-finished items. C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Prefinished items include, but are not limited to, the following factory-finished components: a. Acoustical ceiling panels. b. Sound-absorbing ceiling units. c. Pre-finished laboratory casework. d. Laboratory equipment. e. Finish Hardware. f. Pre-finished fire-rated doors and frames. g. Pre-finished metal items. h. Pre-finished mechanical and electrical equipment. i. Light fixtures. j. Existing pre-finished items. 2. Concealed surfaces include surfaces in the following generally inaccessible spaces: a. Furred areas. b. Ceiling plenums concealed from view or above solid suspended ceilings that extend wall-to-wall. c. Pipe spaces. d. Duct shafts. e. Elevator shafts. 3. Finished metal surfaces include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. c. Chromium plate. d. Factory pre-finished metal surfaces. 4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. c. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts. 5. Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. D. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual" and “MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual.” 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. 6. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers. E. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. F. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. G. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. H. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: 1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms: a. Equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. 2. Paint the following work where exposed or above cloud ceilings in occupied spaces: a. Equipment, including panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. h. Items, other than pre-finished items, at exposed ceiling construction. i. Items, other than pre-finished items, above cloud ceilings. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 j. Items at exposed masonry and concrete construction (where not required to be concealed), where indicated on Drawings. k. Other items as indicated on Drawings. 3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts and plenums, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces. Paint with a flat, non-specular black paint where visible through registers or grilles. 4. Where required for application of paint, remove existing items scheduled to be re-painted. Remove and re-paint the following: a. Items indicated on Drawings. b. Other existing items within rooms and spaces scheduled to be re-painted, where required for proper preparation and application of paint systems, or where required for compliance with paint manufacturer’s written instructions. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces: 1. Water-Based Concrete Floor Sealer System: a. First Coat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors, matching topcoat. b. Topcoat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors, MPI #99. B. Steel Substrates: 1. Water-Based Dry-Fall System for overhead framing, service distribution lines and deck where exposed to view. a. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section where substrate is specified, or Primer, alkyd, quick dry, for metal, MPI #76 where not otherwise specified. b. Topcoat: Dry-fall, latex, flat, MPI #118. 2. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, rust-inhibitive, water based MPI #107. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #143. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #147. e. Gloss: 1) Use Gloss Level 5 for vertical surfaces. 2) Use Gloss Level 1 for overhead supports and where items at exposed ceiling construction are indicated for painting. C. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: 1. Water-Based Dry-Fall System for overhead framing, service distribution lines and deck where exposed to view. a. Prime Coat: Dry-fall, water based, for galvanized steel, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #133. b. Topcoat: Dry-fall, water based, for galvanized steel, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #133. 2. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #143. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #147. e. Gloss: 1) Use Gloss Level 5 for vertical surfaces. 2) Use Gloss Level 1 for overhead supports and where items at exposed ceiling construction are indicated for painting. D. Wood Substrates: Including equipment backing panels. 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood, MPI #39. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #144. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #145. e. Gloss: 1) Use Gloss Level 2 or 3. Match gloss level used for walls and use same gloss level throughout the Work. E. Fiberglass and Plastic Substrates: 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: a. Provide primer as recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. 1) Prime Coat: Primer, bonding, water based, MPI #17. 2) Prime Coat: Primer, bonding, solvent based, MPI #69. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 11 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #143. F. Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, MPI #149. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #143. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #144. e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #145. f. Gloss: 1) Use Gloss Level 2 or 3 for vertical surfaces. Use same gloss level throughout the Work. 2) Use Gloss Level 1 for horizontal ceiling and soffit surfaces. G. Mineral Fiber Sound-Absorbing Ceiling Units 1. Water-Based Dry-Fall System for overhead sound-absorbing ceiling units specified in Section 098436 “Sound-Absorbing Ceiling Units”. a. Prime Coat: Dry-fall, water based latex paint, flat (Gloss Level 1), as recommended by manufacturer of sound-absorbing ceiling units. b. Topcoat: Dry-fall, water based latex paint, flat (Gloss Level 1), as recommended by manufacturer of sound-absorbing ceiling units. H. Cotton or Canvas and ASJ Insulation-Covering Substrates: Including pipe and duct coverings. 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #143. I. Existing Painted Substrates: 1. Comply with recommendations in "MPI Manual", “MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual”, and recommendations of paint manufacturer. a. Prime Coat. b. Intermediate Coat. c. Topcoat: END OF SECTION 099123 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 099600 - HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and application of high-performance coating systems. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 081113 “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames” for shop priming of hollow metal doors and frames. 2. Section 096723 “Resinous Flooring” for resinous flooring. 3. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for general interior field painting. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate shop surface preparation requirements for items being furnished with shop primers. B. Coordinate requirements for compatibility of primers for items being furnished with shop primers. C. Coordinate joint treatment requirements for coating systems at gypsum board substrates. 1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review methods and procedures related to coating installation including, but not limited to, the following: a. Delivery, storage, and handling procedures. b. Ambient conditions and ventilation procedures. c. Surface preparation procedures. d. Installation. e. Coordination requirements for other portions of the Work. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Samples for Verification: For each type of coating system and in each color and gloss of topcoat indicated. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. VOC content. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C). 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C). B. Do not apply coatings when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide listed basisof-design products by Tnemec Company, Inc or comparable products by one of the following: 1. Crossfield Products Corp.; Dex-O-Tex. 2. DUDICK Inc. 3. Dur-A-Flex, Inc. 4. Key Resin Company. 5. Sherwin-Williams Company; General Polymers. 6. Stonhard, Inc. 2.2 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Provide materials for use within each coating system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. Provide products of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system. B. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for interior coatings applied at project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Non-flat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L. 3. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L. 4. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L. 5. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L. 6. Pre-Treatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L. 7. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L. 8. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L. 9. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L. C. Colors: As selected by Architect from full range of industry paint colors or as indicated in color schedule. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: a. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. B. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth. 1. Verify gypsum board substrates have joints prepared as required to receive high performance coating systems. C. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations applicable to substrates indicated. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and re-prime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce coating systems indicated. D. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated. 2. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Coat back sides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 4. Do not apply coatings over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of the same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines and color breaks. E. Apply coatings to produce a smooth and pinhole free finish. F. Where two different paint colors are indicated at each side of a wall and door frames are painted same color as walls, locate paint color change transition at inside corner of door frame stop on door side of stop. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when coatings are being applied: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample coating material being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with specified requirements including dry film thickness. 3. Contractor shall touch up and restore coated surfaces damaged by testing. 4. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials being used do not comply with specified requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying coating materials from Project site, pay for testing, and re-coat surfaces coated with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously coated surfaces if, on re-coating with complying materials, the two coatings are incompatible. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces. 3.6 INTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING (HPC) SCHEDULE A. Ferrous and Non-Ferrous Metal Substrates: 1. Water-Based Polyurethane Coating System (HPC): a. Prime Coat: Tnemec Series 27WB Typoxy at 2.5 mils DFT. b. Intermediate Coat: Tnemec Series 1081 Endura-Shield at 2.5 mils DFT. c. Topcoat: Tnemec Series 1081 Endura-Shield at 2.5 mils DFT, semi-gloss finish. B. Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Water-Based Polyurethane Coating System (HPC) for Walls and Ceilings: a. Prime Coat: Tnemec Series 201 Epoxoprime, 4.0-6.0 mils DFT. b. Intermediate Coat: Tnemec Series 280 Tneme-Glaze, 6.0-8.0 mils DFT. c. Topcoat: .Tnemec Series 1081 Endurashield, 3.0-4.0 mils DFT. END OF SECTION 099600 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 101100 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 101100 - VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Porcelain steel markerboards. 2. Glass markerboards. 3. Homogeneous tackable surface tackboards. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for custom metal trim at visual display units. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Visual Display Board Assembly: Visual display surface that is factory fabricated into composite panel form, either with or without a perimeter frame; includes markerboards. B. Visual Display Surface: Surfaces that are used to convey information visually, including surfaces of markerboards, and surfacing materials that are not fabricated into composite panel form but are applied directly to walls. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate visual display units with custom metal trim and other adjacent work. B. Where required for alignment or relationship of surface faces, verify and coordinate actual thickness of substrate core material or backing for visual display surfaces. 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 101100 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for visual display surfaces. 1. Indicate coordination with electrical panels, architectural woodwork, and other adjacent portions of the work. B. Shop Drawings: For visual display surfaces. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Show locations of display surface joints. 2. Include mounting details. 3. Include sections of typical trim members. 4. Indicate surface alignment requirements. 5. Indicate coordination with electrical panels, architectural woodwork, and other adjacent portions of the work. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of visual display unit indicated, for units with factoryapplied color finishes, and as follows: 1. Porcelain Enamel Steel for Markerboard: Not less than 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm), mounted on substrate indicated for final Work. 2. Glass Markerboard: Not less than 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) 3. Homogeneous Tackable Surface for Tackboard: Not less than 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm), mounted on substrate indicated for final Work. Include one panel for each type, color, and texture required. D. Product Schedule: For visual display units. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for surface-burning characteristics. B. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For visual display surfaces to include in maintenance manuals. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate appearance and aesthetic effects and set quality standards for installation. 1. Build in-place mockup of one of each type of visual display unit as shown on Drawings. Include hardware and accessories. 2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 101100 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver factory-built visual display surfaces completely assembled in one piece without joints, where possible. If dimensions exceed maximum manufactured panel size, provide two or more pieces of equal length as acceptable to Architect. When overall dimensions require delivery in separate units, pre-fit components at the factory, disassemble for delivery, and make final joints at the site. B. Store visual display surfaces vertically with packing materials between each unit. 1.11 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install visual display surfaces until spaces are enclosed and weather-tight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with visual display surfaces by field measurements before fabrication. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheets: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace porcelain-enamel face sheets that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Surfaces lose original writing and erasing qualities. b. Surfaces become slick or shiny. c. Surfaces exhibit crazing, cracking, or flaking. 2. Warranty Period: 50 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: 75 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheet: Manufacturer's standard steel sheet with porcelain-enamel coating fused to steel; uncoated thickness indicated. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 101100 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc. b. PolyVision Corporation; a Steelcase company. 2. Gloss Finish: Gloss as indicated; dry-erase markers wipe clean with dry cloth or standard eraser. 3. Magnetic Capability: Accepts magnetic accessories. B. Homogeneous Tackable Surface Sheet: Seamless, homogeneous, self-sealing sheet consisting of granulated cork, linseed oil, resin binders, and dry pigments that are mixed and calendared onto fabric backing; with washable vinyl finish and integral color throughout with surface-burning characteristics indicated. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Forbo Flooring Systems; Bulletin Board. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range. C. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4, tempered. D. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-1, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. E. Plywood: DOC PS 1. F. Clear Tempered Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1, Quality Q3, with exposed edges seamed before tempering. G. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063. 2.3 MARKERBOARD ASSEMBLIES A. Porcelain-Enamel Markerboards: Balanced, high-pressure, factory-laminated markerboard assembly of three-ply construction consisting of backing sheet, core material, and 0.021-inch- (0.53-mm-) thick, porcelain-enamel face sheet with low-gloss finish. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Best-Rite Manufacturing. b. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc. c. Egan Visual Inc. d. Ghent Manufacturing, Inc. e. Marsh Industries, Inc.; Visual Products Group. f. PolyVision Corporation; a Steelcase company. 2. Particleboard Core: 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick; with 0.015-inch- (0.38-mm-) thick, aluminum sheet backing. 3. Laminating Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard, moisture-resistant thermoplastic type. 4. Color: White, low-gloss. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 101100 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 5. Corners: Square. 6. Width: As indicated on Drawings. 7. Height: As indicated on Drawings. 8. Mounting: a. Wall-mounted markerboards. 9. Mounting Height: As indicated on Drawings. 10. Field-Applied Markerboard Trim (Markerboards): Custom aluminum trim as specified in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications." B. Glass Markerboards: Fabricated of 6-mm tempered glass with steel backing for use with magnets. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Clarus Glassboards, LLC.; Glassboard Float. 2. Edge Treatment: Smooth polished edge with eased corners. 3. Frame: Aluminum trim in profile indicated. 4. Surface: Glossy. 5. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.. 6. Mounting: Concealed, Z-shaped brackets. 7. Marker Tray: Aluminum, attached with magnet. 2.4 TACKBOARD ASSEMBLIES A. Visual Display Board Assembly: Factory—fabricated tackboard assembly consisting of homogeneous tackable sheet factory-laminated to core material. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. A-1 Visual Systems. b. Bangor Cork Company, Inc. c. Best-Rite Manufacturing; a brand division of Moore Co., Inc. d. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc. e. Marsh Industries, Inc.; Visual Products Group. 2. Facing: 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick homogeneous tackable sheet. 3. Core: 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick hardboard. 4. Corners: Square. 5. Width: As indicated on Drawings. 6. Height: As indicated on Drawings. 7. Mounting Method: Direct to wall. 8. Joints: Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length. Fabricate with minimum number of joints, as indicated on approved Shop Drawings. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 101100 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.5 FABRICATION A. Visual Display Boards, General: Factory-assemble visual display boards unless otherwise indicated. 1. Where factory-applied trim is indicated, trim shall be assembled and attached to visual display boards at manufacturer's factory before shipment. 2. Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length. Fabricate with minimum number of joints, as indicated on approved Shop Drawings. 3. Provide manufacturer's standard vertical-joint concealed spline system between abutting sections of markerboards. 4. Where size of visual display boards or other conditions require support in addition to normal trim, provide structural supports or modify trim as indicated or as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard structural support accessories to suit conditions indicated. B. Porcelain-Enamel Markerboards: Laminate porcelain-enamel face sheet and backing sheet to core material under heat and pressure with manufacturer's standard flexible, waterproof adhesive. Coordinate factory-assembled units with trim and accessories indicated. Join parts with a neat, precision fit. C. Glass Markerboards: Laminate glass to steel backing sheet under heat and pressure with manufacturer's standard flexible, waterproof adhesive. Coordinate factory-assembled units with trim and accessories indicated. Join parts with a neat, precision fit. D. Homogeneous Tackable Surface Tackboards: Laminate homogeneous tackable sheet to core material under heat and pressure with manufacturer's standard flexible, waterproof adhesive. Coordinate factory-assembled units with trim and accessories indicated. Join parts with a neat, precision fit. 2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker. B. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603, except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm). Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 101100 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, surface conditions of wall, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine walls and partitions for proper preparation and backing for visual display surfaces. C. Examine electrical panels for proper access and operation where located behind visual display surfaces. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair the performance of and affect the smooth, finished surfaces of visual display boards, including dirt, mold, and mildew. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings. Keep perimeter lines straight, level, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF FACTORY-FABRICATED VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS AND ASSEMBLIES A. Markerboards and Tackboards: Attach concealed clips, hangers, and grounds to wall surfaces and to visual display boards with fasteners at not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. Secure both top and bottom of boards to walls. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean visual display surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach one cleaning label to visual display surface in each room. B. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. C. Cover and protect visual display surfaces after installation and cleaning. END OF SECTION 101100 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 102600 - WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Corner guards and end-wall guards. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for metal protective trim units, according to BHMA A156.6, used for armor, kick, mop, and push plates. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For each type of wall and door protection showing locations and extent. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: For each type of exposed plastic material. B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each type of wall and door protection product to include in maintenance manuals. 1. Include recommended methods and frequency of maintenance for maintaining best condition of plastic covers under anticipated traffic and use conditions. Include precautions against using cleaning materials and methods that may be detrimental to finishes and performance. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store wall and door protection in original undamaged packages and containers inside wellventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity. 1. Maintain room temperature within storage area at not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) during the period plastic materials are stored. 2. Keep plastic materials out of direct sunlight. 3. Store plastic wall- and door-protection components for a minimum of 72 hours, or until plastic material attains a minimum room temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C). a. Store corner-guard covers in a vertical position. b. Store wall-guard covers in a horizontal position. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Construction Specialties, Inc. 2. InPro Corporation (IPC). 3. Korogard Wall Protection Systems; a division of RJF International Corporation. B. Source Limitations: Obtain wall- and door-protection products from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 CORNER GUARDS A. Surface-Mounted, Metal Corner Guards: Fabricated as one piece from formed or extruded metal with formed edges; with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition. 1. Basis of Design Product: a. Construction Specialties, Inc.; Model CO-8 Corner Guard 2. Material: Stainless-steel sheet, Type 304. a. Thickness: Minimum 0.125 inch (3.0 mm). b. Finish: Directional satin, No. 4. 3. Wing Size: Nominal 3-1/2 by 3-1/2 inches (90 by 90 mm). 4. Corner Radius: 1/8 inch (3 mm). 5. Mounting: Adhesive. B. Surface-Mounted, Metal End Wall Guards: Match metal corner guards.. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.3 MATERIALS A. Plastic Materials: Chemical- and stain-resistant, high-impact-resistant plastic with integral color throughout; extruded and sheet material as required, thickness as indicated. B. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel, or other noncorrosive metal screws, bolts, and other fasteners compatible with items being fastened. Use security-type fasteners where exposed to view. C. Adhesive: As recommended by protection product manufacturer. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate wall and door protection according to requirements indicated for design, performance, dimensions, and member sizes, including thicknesses of components. B. Factory Assembly: Assemble components in factory to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handling. C. Quality: Fabricate components with uniformly tight seams and joints and with exposed edges rolled. Provide surfaces free of wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven coloration, and other imperfections. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints. 2.5 FINISHES A. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine walls to which wall and door protection will be attached for blocking, grounds, and other solid backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment of support fasteners. 1. For wall and door protection attached with adhesive, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.2 PREPARATION A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing wall and door protection. B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Installation Quality: Install wall and door protection according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work. B. Mounting Heights: Install wall and door protection in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings. C. Accessories: Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, trim, joint moldings, and other accessories required for a complete installation. 1. Provide anchoring devices and suitable locations to withstand imposed loads. 2. Where splices occur in horizontal runs of more than 20 feet (6.1 m), splice aluminum retainers and plastic covers at different locations along the run, but no closer than 12 inches (305 mm) apart. 3. Adjust end caps as required to ensure tight seams. 3.4 CLEANING A. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a standard ammonia-based household cleaning agent. B. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 102600 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Washroom accessories. 2. Underlavatory guards. 3. Installation of Owner-Furnished, Contractor-Installed washroom accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 064023 “Interior Architectural Woodwork” for metal coat hooks. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit for each Contractor furnished equipment item. 1. Request submittals from Owner for Owner furnished equipment items. As required for compliance with construction schedule, allow sufficient time for review and coordination of submittals prior to Contractor installation. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following: 1. Construction details and dimensions. 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. 3. Material and finish descriptions. 4. Features that will be included for Project. 5. Manufacturer's warranty. C. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. 1. Identify locations using room designations indicated. 2. Identify products using designations indicated. 3. Include Owner-furnished accessories on schedule. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Accessibility Standards: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities" and ICC A117.1 as modified by Building Code of State of New York. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work. C. Coordinate provision of blocking and other supports installed in walls and partitions. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch (0.8-mm) minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated. B. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. C. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamperand-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed. D. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide basis-of-design product indicated or comparable product by one of the following: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 4. Bradley Corporation. 5. GAMCO Commercial Restroom Accessories; a division of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 2.3 WASHROOM ACCESSORIES A. Grab Bar (TA-4): 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-6806.99 Series. 2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) thick. a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish (satin) on ends and slip-resistant texture in grip area. 4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 5. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings but in no case less than required for compliance with accessibility standards. B. Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit (TA-5): 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-254. 2. Mounting: Surface mounted. 3. Door or Cover: Self-closing, disposal-opening cover and hinged face panel with tumbler lockset. 4. Receptacle: Removable. 5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). C. Sanitary Napkin Vendor (TA-6): 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-3706 25. 2. Type: Sanitary napkin and tampon. 3. Mounting: Recessed. 4. Capacity: 20 sanitary napkins and 30 tampons. 5. Operation: Single coin (25 cents), field-convertible. 6. Exposed Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 7. Lockset: Tumbler type with separate lock and key for coin box. D. Mirror Unit (TA-7): 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-290 1836. 2. Frame: One-piece, stainless-steel angle frame, 0.05 inch (1.2 mm) thick. a. Corners: Welded and ground smooth. 3. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method indicated below. a. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring a special tool to remove. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 4. Size: 18 inch wide by 36 inch high. E. Waste Receptacle: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-277. 2. Mounting: Surface mounted. 3. Minimum Capacity: 12.75 gal. (48.3 L). 4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 5. Liner: Reusable vinyl liner. 6. Lockset: Tumbler type for waste-receptacle. F. Owner-Furnished/Contractor-Installed (OFCI) Washroom and Laboratory Accessories: 1. Toilet tissue dispensers: As furnished by Owner or Owner’s Vendor. 2. Paper towel dispensers: As furnished by Owner or Owner’s Vendor. 3. Soap dispensers: As furnished by Owner or Owner’s Vendor. 2.4 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc. 2. Truebro by IPS Corporation. B. Underlavatory Guards: 1. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that prevent direct contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without removing coverings. 2. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates. B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested according to ASTM F 446. C. Underlavatory Guards: Install where drain piping is exposed below sinks. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations. END OF SECTION 102800 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 104413 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 104413 - FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fire-protection cabinets for the following: a. Portable fire extinguishers. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 104416 "Fire Extinguishers." 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire-protection cabinets with wall depths. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Show door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. Include roughing-in dimensions and details showing recessed-, semi-recessed-, or surface-mounting method and relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction. B. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required. C. Product Schedule: For fire-protection cabinets. Coordinate final fire-protection cabinet schedule with fire-extinguisher schedule to ensure proper fit and function. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For fire-protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 104413 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.1 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET (FEC) A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher. 1. Manufacturers:: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following: a. J. L. Industries, a Division of Activar Construction Products Group, Inc. b. Larsens Manufacturing Company. c. Potter Roemer LLC. 2. Basis of Design Product: Drawings and specifications are based on the following product. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following or equivalent product from acceptable manufacturer: a. J. L. Industries, a Division of Activar Construction Products Group, Inc.; Ambassador Series, Model 1015. B. Cabinet Construction: Non-rated. C. Cabinet Material: Cold-rolled steel sheet. D. Recessed Cabinet: 1. Exposed Flat Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). E. Door Material: Steel sheet. F. Cabinet Trim Material: Same material and finish as door. G. Door Style: Solid opaque panel. H. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. 1. Provide projecting door pull and friction latch. 2. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to open 180 degrees. I. Accessories: 1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire-protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish. 2. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling sharply on door handle. 3. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated. a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire-protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER." Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 104413 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1) Location: Applied to cabinet door. 2) Application Process: Silk-screened or engraved. 3) Lettering Color: Black. 4) Orientation: Vertical. J. Materials: 1. Cold-Rolled Steel: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. a. Finish: Baked enamel or powder-coat finish, in custom color as selected by Architect. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. 1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 2. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. 3. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks. 4. Install door locks at factory. B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles. 1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick. 2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. 2.3 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's AMP 500, "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products," for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish fire-protection cabinets after assembly. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.4 STEEL FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning" or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling". After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over it. B. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pre-treating, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 104413 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 topcoat. Comply with AAMA 2603 and coating manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed cabinets will be installed. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare recesses for recessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire-protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights indicated below: 1. Fire-Protection Cabinets: 54 inches (1372 mm) above finished floor to top of cabinet. B. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 1. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square and plumb. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire-protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. C. On completion of fire-protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire-protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factoryfinished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fireprotection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers. E. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 104413 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 104413 "Fire Protection Cabinets." 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire-protection cabinets to ensure fit and function. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher. B. Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coordinate final fire-extinguisher schedule with fireprotection cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers. 2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FM Global. 2.2 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Amerex Corporation. b. Potter Roemer LLC. 2. Valves: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B, and bar coding for documenting fire-extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging. B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C or 4-A:80-B:C, 4.5-kg (10-lb) nominal capacity, with mono-ammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled container. 2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or black baked-enamel finish. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Amerex Corporation. b. Potter Roemer LLC. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect. 1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface. a. Orientation: Vertical. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire extinguishers in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches (1372 mm) above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher. B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated. C. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets (FEC): Unless indicated otherwise, install fire extinguishers within cabinets at finished areas and where indicated. 1. Fire Extinguishers on Mounting Brackets (FE): Where indicated, install fire extinguishers on mounting brackets in unfinished areas. END OF SECTION 104416 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY EQUIPMENT 115300 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 115300 - LABORATORY EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following: 1. New laboratory equipment Contractor Furnished/Contractor Installed (CFCI) in the Contract, including: a. Sterilizers (autoclaves). b. Under-counter glassware washers. c. Ice machines. d. Snorkel exhausts. e. Gas cylinder restraints 2. New and existing laboratory equipment Owner Furnished/Contractor Installed (OFCI), installed under this Contract, including, but not limited to the following: a. Refer to Equipment Schedule. 3. New and existing laboratory equipment Owner Furnished/Owner Installed (OFOI), not in this contract, including, but not limited to the following: a. Refer to Equipment Schedule. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 011100 “Summary of the Work” for requirements for Owner furnished items of equipment. 2. Section 061053 “Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry” for wood blocking and nailers. 3. Section 092216 “Non-Structural Metal Framing” for metal blocking. 4. Section 115313 Section “Laboratory Fume Hoods” for fume hoods and fume hood base cabinets. 5. Section 123550 “Laboratory Casework” for casework and shelving. 6. Division 22 “Plumbing” for water, waste and gas piping and connections, including mounting of fixtures or equipment. 7. Division 23 “HVAC” for steam piping and ductwork, including connections. 8. Division 26 “Electrical” for electrical wiring and connections, mounting of fixtures and devices. 9. Division 27 “Communications” for communications wiring and connections. 10. Division 28 “Electronic Safety and Security” for security and alarm system wiring and connections. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY EQUIPMENT 115300 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Equipment, including attachments to other work, shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7-05. 1. Refer to Section 018123 “Design Performance Requirements” for seismic criteria. 2. Component Importance Factor is 1.0 unless indicated otherwise. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit for each Contractor furnished equipment item. 1. Request submittals from Owner for Owner furnished equipment items. As required for compliance with construction schedule, allow sufficient time for review and coordination of submittals prior to Contractor installation. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, catalog sheets, brochures, diagrams, performance charts, installation instructions, and other descriptive literature. 1. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent materials, products or models. Delete information not applicable to the Project. 2. Indicate dimensions and required clearances. C. Shop Drawings: Identify materials, gages, and finishes. Indicate dimensions and fabrication and installation details, including methods of attachment to adjoining work. Indicate location and types of required utility connections. Indicate location and types of required concealed anchorages. 1. Include wiring diagrams. 2. Indicate coordination with adjacent portions of the Work. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Source Quality Control Reports. B. Field Quality Control Reports. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operating and Maintenance Data: Prepare and submit data for incorporating into the Project Maintenance Manuals in accordance with Section 017823 “Operating and Maintenance Data”, including: 1. Maintenance and operating instructions for each item of equipment, including parts lists. 2. Indicate capability of servicing equipment by local factory authorized service agencies listing: a. Firm name. b. Firm address. c. Firm telephone number. B. Warranties. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY EQUIPMENT 115300 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Equipment manufacturers specified in this Section shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in the manufacture of laboratory equipment of types required. 1.8 DELIVERY AND HANDLING A. New Contractor Furnished/Contractor Installed Equipment (CFCI): 1. Deliver equipment in manufacturer's original unopened containers or packaging with identifying labels intact and legible, clearly identifying product, scheduled to arrive at time of installation sequence requirements. 2. Containers or packaging showing indication of damage that may affect condition of contents will not be accepted. 3. Store equipment in original packaging, under cover, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in a manner that prevents damage from water or construction activities. 4. Handle equipment in a manner that prevents physical damage to products or finishes. B. New and Existing Owner Furnished/Contractor Installed Equipment (OFCI): 1. The Owner will furnish OFCI equipment to the Contractor at the job site. Conform to requirements specified in Section 011100 “Summary of the Work”. 2. If applicable, Owner will arrange for and deliver Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples to Contractor. 3. Contractor shall review Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples and return them to Owner and Architect noting discrepancies, coordination and installation requirements, or anticipated problems in use of product. 4. Owner will furnish Contractor the earliest and latest possible delivery dates for Ownerfurnished products. Using Owner-furnished earliest and latest possible delivery dates, Contractor shall designate delivery dates of Owner-furnished items in Contractor's Construction Schedule. Contractor shall notify Owner if delivery dates do not conform to Contractor's Construction Schedule. 5. Unless indicated otherwise, Owner will arrange and pay for delivery of Owner-furnished items according to Contractor's Construction Schedule. 6. After delivery, Owner will inspect delivered items for damage. Contractor shall be present for and assist in Owner's inspection. 7. If Owner-furnished items are damaged, defective, or missing, Owner will arrange for replacement. 8. Contractor is responsible for receiving, unloading, and handling OFCI items at the job site. 9. If applicable, Owner will arrange for manufacturer's field services. Contractor shall notify Owner if scheduled service dates are required for conformance with Contractor's Construction Schedule. 10. Contractor is responsible for protecting Owner-furnished items from damage during storage and handling, including damage from exposure to the elements. 11. If Owner-furnished items are damaged as a result of Contractor's operations, Contractor shall repair or replace them. 12. Contractor shall install and otherwise incorporate OFCI items into the Work. 13. Contractor shall provide support systems to receive Owner's equipment and make plumbing, mechanical, electrical, and other service connections. a. Provide metal fabrications, metal framing, blocking, reinforcements, and other required support systems. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY EQUIPMENT 115300 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. New and Existing Owner Furnished/Owner Installed Equipment (OFOI): 1. The Owner will furnish and install equipment at the job site. Conform to requirements specified in Section 011100 “Summary of the Work”. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify and coordinate required dimensions for equipment by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Coordinate and verify dimensions for equipment furnished by the Owner. B. Verify physical characteristics, dimensions, service requirements, and other pertinent criteria for equipment indicated for installation. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate and verify services being provided under other Sections are as required for equipment. 1. Coordinate and verify requirements for services for equipment furnished by the Owner. B. Coordinate and verify requirements for supports and blocking being provided under other Sections are as required for equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT A. Refer to Drawings to coordinate the locations of the listed items of equipment with the Equipment Schedule. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and building utility services to receive laboratory equipment. Verify dimensions and locations of services. B. Verify built-in anchorages and reinforcements required for installation of equipment are properly installed and located. C. Examine walls to which equipment will be attached for blocking, supports, and other solid backing, verify they have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment of equipment. D. Notify Architect, in writing, of deviations or unacceptable conditions. Do not proceed with installation of equipment until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY EQUIPMENT 115300 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Engage qualified craftsmen with experience installing laboratory equipment. B. Set equipment items plumb, square, true to line and level. Securely anchor each item. C. Install, connect and test each item of equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings. Eliminate crevices, cracks and spaces in areas that would be difficult to clean or keep free of rodents, insects or other pests; seal such cracks, crevices and spaces with approved metal trim fillers or elastomeric sealant. D. Where connections are made between dissimilar metals, provide dielectric fittings to prevent electrolytic corrosion. E. Scribe to walls, use proper type anchoring devices for materials and intended usage. F. Sequence installations to ensure utility service connections are affected in an orderly and expeditious manner. 3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. After completion of installation, repair, or remove and replace defective work or materials. B. Clean visible surfaces, including interior surfaces of components, removing dust, dirt, refuse, and debris. Use manufacturer recommended or approved cleaning methods and materials. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect materials, surfaces, and equipment, from damage. 3.5 CONTRACTOR FURNISHED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT (CFCI) A. The following listed equipment items represent the primary components required under this Section. Certain minor items including but not limited to, scribes, fillers, trim, and accessories may be required to complete the Work of this Section. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to supply such items, although they may not be specifically listed. B. SMALL STERILIZER (AUTOCLAVE) (ST-S) 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Amsco Lab 250 Small Sterilizer 20” x 20” x 38” Gravity Model LG-250 by Steris Corporation or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Getinge USA. b. Primus, Inc. 2. General Description: Steam-operated sterilizer. a. Chamber Size: 20 by 20 by 38 inches (508 by 508 by 965 mm). b. Pressure Vessel: Vessel shall bear the stamp of compliance of the ASME code and the UL label of approval. Steam jacketed chambers shall be designed for Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY EQUIPMENT 115300 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 internal pressure of 50 psig. Insulate jacket exterior with 1 inch (25 mm) thick onepiece insulation sleeve. c. Door and Frame: Construct frame of Type 316L stainless steel and weld to vessel. Provide a vertical sliding Type 316L stainless steel door with a vacuum seal gasket groove on chamber frame. d. Controls: Conveniently locate so not, to be exposed to heat, vapor and condensate resulting from the sterilization process. 3. Door Configuration: Manual single-door, vertical-sliding. 4. Wall Openings: None, cabinet enclosed, free-standing. 5. Steam Source: Integral electric steam generator, stainless steel. 6. Processing Cycles: Sterilizer factory programmed with the following cycles: a. Gravity cycle. b. Liquid cycle. 7. Microcomputer Monitor and Control System: Features as follows: a. Cycle values and operating features may be adjusted and visually verified prior to cycle operation. Cycle parameters are retained in control memory for repeated use. Changes to cycle values must be validated by user. b. Once a cycle is started, cycles and cycle values cannot be changed until the cycle is complete. If chamber temperature drops below the set point during the exposure phase, the timer can be set to stop and automatically reset or resume once normal operating temperature is reached. c. Operator interface control panels with touch screen and impact printers on OE operating end. d. Cycle configuration is performed by accessing the change values menu on the touch screen. Change values used to adjust cycle values, time display and printout units, access codes, audible signal adjustments, print format, temperature display and printout units, and pressure/vacuum display and printout units. e. Completion of cycle is indicated visually and with adjustable audible signals. f. Flash memory system to store all cycle memory. If power failure occurs during a cycle, proper cycle completion will occur upon power restoration. Operator shall have capability to manually abort cycle. 8. Safety features: a. Control lockout switch. b. Security access codes. c. Pressure relief devices. d. Chamber float switch. 9. Options for each sterilizer: a. Pure steam piping to chamber. 10. Accessories for each sterilizer: a. Loading rack and two shelves. 11. Operating requirements: a. Cold water: 1-inch NPT, 30 to 50 psig dynamic. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY EQUIPMENT 115300 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 b. RO/DI water: 1/2-inch NPT, 20 to 50 psig dynamic, minimum specific resistivity of 1.0 megaohm/cm. c. Drain: 1 1/2-inch ODT. d. Generator Drain: 1/2-inch ODT. e. Electrical (Controls): 120V, 1-phase, 50/60 Hz, 9.5A. f. Electrical (Generator): 480V, 3-phase, 50/60 Hz, 37A. 12. Warranty: Two years from date of Project Substantial Completion. Fifteen years for pressure vessel. C. UNDERCOUNTER GLASSWARE WASHERS (GW-U) 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Steris Reliance 100 LS Undercounter with Window Laboratory Glassware Washer or comparable product from one of the following: a. Labconco. b. Lancer. c. Miele, Inc. 2. General Description: Fully automatic and programmable laboratory glassware washer designed to wash laboratory glassware, plastic, and metal goods used in research. 3. Electrical Configuration: 115V, 60 Hz, 16A, 1-Phase. 4. Door Configuration: Single. a. Door with tempered glass viewing window and interior light. 5. Mounting: Undercounter. 6. Quality Standard: Manufactured under ISO 9001 accreditation. 7. Exterior Dimensions: 24.1 inches (612 mm) wide by 34.1 to 36.1 inches (866 to 917 mm) high by 27.4 inches (696 mm) deep. 8. Interior (Chamber Load Capacity) Dimensions: 22.6 inches (574 mm) wide by 19 inches (483 mm) high by 21.3 inches (541 mm) deep. 9. Forced-air drying system. 10. Non-vented drying system. 11. Lower spindle rack. 12. Options: Provide the following: a. Liquid detergent dispenser. 13. Accessories: Verify and coordinate accessories with Owner. Provide the following: a. Upper standard rack. 14. Manufacturer’s Commissioning: Provide services of manufacturer’s designated representative to verify equipment installation is complete and units are in proper operating condition. 15. Demonstration and Training: Train Owner’s personnel in operation of equipment. 16. Warranty: Glass washers shall be guaranteed to be free under normal use, service and testing, from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 1 year from date of acceptance. D. ICE MACHINES (ICE) Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY EQUIPMENT 115300 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Model F330BAH by Hoshizaki America, Inc. or comparable product from one of the following: a. Follett Corporation. b. Ice-O-Matic. c. Manitowoc Ice, Inc. d. Scotsman. 2. Product Description. a. Unit shall be compact, 24 inches wide x 26 inches deep by 39 inches high, freestanding ice machine with 80 pound capacity self-contained insulated storage bin. Unit shall produce minimum 320 pounds of ice per day (24 hours) at an ambient room air temperature of 70F and a water inlet temperature of 50F. b. Construction: Rotocast grey plastic or stainless steel with 6 inch legs and slide away front access door. 3. Construction: Stainless steel. 4. Condenser: Air-cooled. 5. Ice size/shape: Flake. 6. Front access and front-in and front-out airflow. No clearance required on sides and rear. 7. Warranty: a. Parts and Labor: Two years. b. Parts on Compressor: Five years. E. SNORKEL EXHAUST (SE) 1. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide MOVEX ME No. MET-1300-75-PP Ceiling Mounted Extraction Arm with No. MEK-350-75-PP Hood with No. MTI-2000 Ceiling Bracket by Movex Inc. or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Airflow Systems, Inc. b. Alsident System A/S. c. Enviroflex International, Inc. d. Nederman USA. e. Plymovent Corporation. 2. Product Description: Adjustable chemical resistant fume extraction arm. 3. Construction: a. Tubes: Polypropylene. b. Joints and Flanges: Polypropylene. c. Threaded Stay and Springs: Type 316L stainless steel. d. Gas Springs: Type 316L stainless steel. e. O-rings: Polyethylene. f. Hood: Polypropylene. g. Ceiling Bracket: Anodized aluminum or powder coated steel. 4. Mounting: Ceiling mount. 5. Number of Joints: Three. 6. Number of External Gas Springs: None. 7. Total arm reach: 49 inch (1245 mm). 8. Arm tube diameter: 3 inch (75 mm). Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY EQUIPMENT 115300 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 9. Hood diameter: 14 inch (356 mm). F. GAS CYLINDER RESTRAINT FOR ONE CYLINDER 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. USA Safety; 1 Cylinder – Wall Mount – Gas Cylinder Bracket, Model #GB100FS with #GB105FS. 2. Wall-Mounted Steel Bracket: Wall-mounted steel bracket with flexible strap and buckle, designed to restrain one cylinder of diameter between 4 inches (102 mm) and 12 inches (306 mm). a. Overall Dimensions: 8 inches (203 mm) wide; 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) deep; 4-1/4 inches (108 mm) high. b. Material: 11 gauge, hot-rolled steel c. Finish: Factory-applied polyester powder coating. d. Edge Protection: Steel-reinforced vinyl trim. 3. Flexible Strap: One polypropylene strap with steel cinch buckle per cylinder. 4. Include secondary chain and hook assembly. 5. Manifold: Not required. G. GAS CYLINDER RESTRAINT FOR TWO CYLINDERS 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. USA Safety; 2 Cylinder – Wall Mount – Gas Cylinder Bracket, Model #GB200FS with #GB105FS. 2. Wall-Mounted Steel Bracket: Wall-mounted steel bracket with flexible strap and buckle, designed to restrain one cylinder of diameter between 4 inches (102 mm) and 12 inches (306 mm). a. Overall Dimensions: 24 inches (610 mm) wide; 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) deep; 4-1/4 inches (108 mm) high. b. Material: 11 gauge, hot-rolled steel c. Finish: Factory-applied polyester powder coating. d. Edge Protection: Steel-reinforced vinyl trim. 3. Flexible Strap: One polypropylene strap with steel cinch buckle per cylinder. 4. Include secondary chain and hook assembly for each cylinder. 5. Manifold: Not required. END OF SECTION 115300 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY FUME HOODS 115313 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 115313 - LABORATORY FUME HOODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Bench-top laboratory fume hoods. 2. Freestanding laboratory fume hoods with adjustable-height work surface 3. Fume hood base cabinets. 4. Fume hood base stands. 5. Work tops within fume hoods. 6. Laboratory cup sinks in fume hoods. 7. Water, laboratory gas, and electrical service fittings in fume hoods. 8. Piping and wiring within fume hoods for service fittings, light fixtures, fan switches, and other electrical devices included with fume hoods. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring fume hoods. 2. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for reinforcements in metal-framed partitions for anchoring fume hoods. 3. Section 096513 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient base applied to fume hood base cabinets. 4. Section 123553 "Laboratory Casework" for laboratory casework. 5. Division 22 and 26 Sections for connecting service utilities at top of fume hoods. Piping and wiring within fume hoods are specified in this Section. 6. Division 23 Sections for fume hood duct connections, including ducts and exhaust fans, and building automation system. 7. Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for field quality-control testing of HVAC systems connected to fume hoods. Field testing of fume hoods is specified in this Section. 8. Section 230923 "Building Automation Control Systems" for VAV controls for fume hood exhaust. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY FUME HOODS 115313 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of framing and reinforcements for lateral support of fume hoods. B. Coordinate installation of fume hoods with laboratory casework and other laboratory equipment. C. Coordinate installation of fume hoods with fume hood exhaust ducts, building automation system (BAS), HVAC systems, plumbing and electrical work, and other services connected to fume hoods. 1. Coordinate routing of plumbing piping to top side of hood as required for indicated side for mounting hood service fittings. D. Coordinate fume hood metal color finish provided under this section with color finish provided for laboratory casework metal components. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For laboratory fume hoods. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Indicate details for anchoring fume hoods to permanent building construction including locations of blocking and other supports. Include calculations demonstrating that anchorages comply with seismic performance requirements. 3. Indicate locations and types of service fittings together with associated service supply connection required. 4. Indicate duct connections, electrical connections, and locations of access panels. 5. Indicate cabinet types and sizes of cabinets. 6. Indicate locations of cabinet hardware and keying of locks. 7. Include roughing-in information for mechanical, plumbing, and electrical connections. 8. Show adjacent walls, doors, windows, other building components, laboratory casework, and other laboratory equipment. Indicate clearances from above items. 9. Include layout of fume hoods in relation to lighting fixtures, HVAC registers and grilles, and other ceiling mounted devices. 10. Include coordinated dimensions for laboratory equipment specified in other Sections. 11. Include clearance and access requirements for electrical and controls components. 12. Include fume hood control system wiring diagram indicating factory and field wiring requirements. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For fume hood and cabinet exterior finishes. D. Samples for Verification: For fume hood exterior and cabinet exterior finishes, interior lining, and work top material, in manufacturer's standard sizes. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Delegated-Design Submittal: For fume hoods indicated to comply with seismic performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY FUME HOODS 115313 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Product Test Reports: Showing compliance with specified performance requirements for asmanufactured containment and static pressure loss based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency. C. Source quality-control reports. D. Field quality-control reports. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish complete touchup kit for each type and color of fume hood finish provided. Include fillers, primers, paints, and other materials necessary to perform permanent repairs to damaged fume hood finish. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect finished surfaces during handling and installation with protective covering of polyethylene film or another suitable material. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install fume hoods until building is enclosed, wet work and utility roughing-in are complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support fume hoods by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Mott Manufacturing Ltd. or comparable products by one of the following: 1. Bedcolab Ltd. 2. Lab Crafters, Inc. 3. Mott Manufacturing, Ltd. 4. Waldner, Inc. B. Products: 1. Bench-Top High-Performance Low-Flow Fume Hoods with Steel Exterior: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Bedcolab Ltd.; Vanguard Low Velocity. b. Lab Crafters, Inc.; Air Sentinel-Restricted Bypass. c. Mott Manufacturing, Ltd.; RFV2 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY FUME HOODS 115313 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 d. Waldner, Inc.; Secuflow Low Ceiling (without integral VAV valves). 2. Free-standing Fume Hoods with Adjustable-Height Work Surface: Subject to compliance with requirements, the following or equivalent product from approved manufacturer of laboratory fume hoods: a. Mott Manufacturing, Ltd.; Optima – Vertical Sash with Adjustable Work Surface. C. Source Limitations: Obtain laboratory fume hoods from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Containment: Provide fume hoods that comply with the following when tested according to ASHRAE 110 as modified below: 1. As-Manufactured (AM) Rating: AM 0.05 (0.05 ppm). 2. As-Installed (AI) Rating: AI 0.05 (0.05 ppm). 3. Average Face Velocity: a. Performance Face Velocity: Fume hoods shall be tested at maximum 60 fpm (0.31 m/s) plus or minus 10 percent with sashes fully open for product testing and source quality control testing. b. Design (Operating) Face Velocity: Fume hoods shall be tested at 80 fpm (0.41 m/s) plus or minus 10 percent with sashes at operating height for field quality control testing. Fume hood operating face velocity shall be set at 80 fpm (0.41 m/s) with sashes at operating height. Verify field testing and operating face velocity with Owner’s Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S) authority. 4. Face-Velocity Variation: Not more than 15 percent of average-face-velocity across the face opening with sashes fully open. 5. Release Rate: 4.0 L/min. 6. Test Setup Modifications: Conduct tests with a minimum of three and a maximum of five people in the test room and with two 1-gal. (3.8-L) round paint cans, one 12-by-12-by-12inch (300-by-300-by-300-mm) cardboard box, and three 6-by-6-by-12-inch (150-by-150by-300-mm) cardboard boxes in the fume hood during the test. Position items from 6 to 10 inches (150 to 250 mm) behind the sash, randomly distributed, and supported off the work surface by 2-by-2-inch (50-by-50-mm) blocks. 7. Walk-by Test: At the conclusion of containment test, execute three rapid walk-bys at 30second intervals, 12 inches (300 mm) behind the mannequin. Test-gas concentration during each walk-by shall not exceed 0.1 ppm and shall return to specified containment value within 15 seconds. B. Static-Pressure Loss: Not more than 1/4-inch wg (62 Pa) at 60 fpm (0.31 m/s) face velocity when measured at four locations 90 degrees apart around the exhaust duct and at least three duct diameters downstream from duct collar. C. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design fume hoods for seismic performance. D. Seismic Performance: Fume hoods and cabinets, including attachments to other work, shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7. 1. Refer to Section 018123 “Design Performance Requirements" for seismic criteria. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY FUME HOODS 115313 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Component Importance Factor is 1.5. E. Accessibility Standards: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities" and ICC A117.1 as modified by Building Code of State of New York. 2.3 FUME HOODS A. Product Standards: Comply with SEFA 1, "Laboratory Fume Hoods - Recommended Practices." Provide fume hoods UL listed and labeled for compliance with UL 1805. B. High-Performance Low-Flow Fume Hoods: Provide high-performance low-flow fume hoods. Provide fume hoods with ventilation system that complies with indicated performance requirements. Manufacturer’s fume hood ventilation system shall maintain sufficient exhaust air volume through hood to adequately dilute hazardous fumes regardless of sash position. Provide fume hood ventilation so that face velocity does not increase beyond two times the design velocity when sash is below 9 inch (229 mm) sash height. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: Cold-rolled, commercial steel (CS) sheet, complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M; matte finish; suitable for exposed applications. B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness. C. Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Polyester: Polyester laminate with a chemical-resistant gel coat on the exposed face, and having a flame-spread index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84. D. Epoxy: Factory molded, modified epoxy-resin formulation with smooth, non-specular finish. 1. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Greenstone by The Durcon Company or comparable products from the following: a. Epoxyn Products. 2. Physical Properties: a. Flexural Strength: Not less than 10,000 psi (70 MPa). b. Modulus of Elasticity: Not less than 2,000,000 psi (1400 MPa). c. Hardness (Rockwell M): Not less than 100. d. Water Absorption (24 Hours): Not more than 0.02 percent. e. Heat Distortion Point: Not less than 260 deg F (127 deg C). f. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less per ASTM E 84. 3. Chemical Resistance: Epoxy-resin material has the following ratings when tested with indicated reagents according to NEMA LD 3, Test Procedure 3.4.5: a. No Effect: Acetic acid (98 percent), acetone, ammonium hydroxide (28 percent), benzene, carbon tetrachloride, dimethyl formamide, ethyl acetate, ethyl alcohol, Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY FUME HOODS 115313 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 ethyl ether, methyl alcohol, nitric acid (70 percent), phenol, sulfuric acid (60 percent), and toluene. b. Slight Effect: Chromic acid (60 percent) and sodium hydroxide (50 percent). 4. Minimum Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 10 percent. 5. Basis-of-Design Color: Greenstone Gray. E. Acid Storage-Cabinet Lining: 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick, polyethylene or polypropylene. F. Polypropylene: Unreinforced polypropylene complying with ASTM D 4101, Group 01, Class 1, Grade 2. G. Glass: Clear, laminated tempered glass complying with ASTM C 1172, Kind LT, Condition A, Type I, Class I, Quality-Q3; with two lites not less than 3.0 mm thick and with clear, polyvinyl butyral interlayer. 1. Safety Glass: Provide products complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials. 2. Permanently mark safety glass with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. H. Fasteners: Provide stainless-steel fasteners where exposed to fumes. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Assemble fume hoods in factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble fume hoods only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Fume hoods shall be capable of being partly disassembled as necessary to permit movement through a 40-by-94-inch (1016-by2388-mm) door opening. B. Steel Exterior: Fabricate from steel sheet, not less than 0.0478 inch (1.2 mm) thick, with component parts screwed together to allow removal of end panels, front fascia, and airfoil and to allow access to plumbing lines and service fittings. Apply chemical-resistant finish to interior and exterior surfaces of component parts before assembly. C. Ends: Fabricate with double-wall end panels without projecting corner posts or other obstructions to interfere with smooth, even airflow. Close area between double walls at front of fume hood and as needed to house sash counterbalance weights, utility lines, and remotecontrol valves. D. Splay top and sides of face opening to provide an aerodynamic shape to ensure smooth, even flow of air into fume hood. E. Interior Lining: Provide one of the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Glass-fiber-reinforced polyester, not less than 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) thick. 2. Epoxy, not less than 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) thick. 3. Glass-fiber-reinforced epoxy, not less than 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) thick. 4. Polypropylene, not less than 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) thick. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY FUME HOODS 115313 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 F. Lining Assembly: Unless otherwise indicated, assemble with stainless-steel fasteners or epoxy adhesive, concealed where possible. Seal joints by filling with chemical-resistant sealant during assembly. 1. Fasten lining components to a rigid frame assembly fabricated from steel and to which exterior panels are attached. 2. Punch fume hood lining side panels to receive service fittings and remote controls. Provide removable plug buttons for holes not used for indicated fittings. G. Rear Baffle: Unless otherwise indicated, provide baffle, of same material as fume hood lining, at rear of hood with openings at top and bottom for airflow through hood. Secure baffle to cleats at rear of hood with stainless-steel screws. Fabricate baffle for easy removal for cleaning behind baffle. 1. Provide preset baffles unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide adjustable baffles with remote-control adjustment from outside front of fume hood where indicated. 3. Provide epoxy-coated, stainless-steel screen at bottom baffle opening to prevent paper from being drawn into the exhaust plenum behind baffles. H. Exhaust Plenum: Full width of fume hood and with adequate volume to provide uniform airflow from hood, of same material as hood lining, and with duct stub for exhaust connection. 1. Duct-Stub Material: Type 316 stainless steel. I. Bypass: Provide bypass openings in fume hoods. J. Sashes: Provide operable sashes of type indicated. 1. Fabricate from 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) nominal thickness steel sheet, with chemicalresistant finish. Form into four-sided frame with bottom corners welded and finished smooth. Make top member removable for glazing replacement. Set glazing in chemicalresistant, U-shaped gaskets. 2. Glaze with laminated tempered safety glass. 3. Counterbalance vertical-sliding sash with sash weight and drive system to hold sash in place regardless of position. Provide ball-bearing sheaves, plastic glides in stainlesssteel guides, and stainless-steel lift handles. Provide rubber bumpers at top and bottom of each sash unit. a. Drive System Type: One of the following: 1) Stainless-steel or hardened-carbon-steel chain and sprocket. 2) Serrated belt with integral stainless-steel cables. b. Provide self-lowering sash mechanism to automatically lower the sash to indicated operating height. K. Airfoil: Unless otherwise indicated, provide airfoil at bottom of fume hood face opening with 1inch (25-mm) space between airfoil and work top. Sash closes on top of airfoil or in front of airfoil, leaving 1-inch (25-mm) opening for air intake. Airfoil directs airflow across work top to remove heavier-than-air gases and to prevent reverse airflow. 1. Fabricate airfoil from stainless steel or painted steel to match hood exterior. 2. Fabricate airfoil for flush alignment with top of work top surface. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY FUME HOODS 115313 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. Do not provide safety bar below air foil. L. Light Fixtures: Provide vapor-proof, two-tube, rapid-start, fluorescent light fixtures, of longest practicable length; complete with tubes at each fume hood. Shield tubes from hood interior with 1/4-inch- (6.35-mm-) thick laminated glass or 3-mm-thick tempered glass, sealed into hood with chemical-resistant rubber gaskets. Provide units with fluorescent tubes easily replaceable from outside of fume hood. 1. Provide fluorescent tubes with color temperature of 3500 K and minimum color-rendering index of 85. M. Filler Strips: Provide as needed to close spaces between fume hoods or fume hood base cabinets and adjacent building construction. Fabricate from same material and with same finish as fume hoods or fume hood base cabinets, as applicable. N. Ceiling Fascia Extensions: Provide fascia panels matching fume hood exterior to enclose space above fume hoods at front and sides of fume hoods and extending from tops of fume hoods to ceiling. 1. Provide ceiling fascia extensions for each fume hood, unless indicated otherwise. 2. Provide ceiling fascia extensions in configurations required to conform to ceiling construction at height transitions and other transitions in ceiling construction. O. Provide pre-wired and pre-piped fume hoods. Comply with requirements in Divisions 22 and 26 Sections for installing water and laboratory gas service fittings, piping, electrical devices, and wiring. Install according to Shop Drawings. Securely anchor fittings, piping, and conduit to fume hoods unless otherwise indicated. 1. Electrical Connection Point: The fume hood shall have a single point electrical connection via a junction box mounted on top of the hood. The lighting and receptacles shall be prewired by the manufacturer to the junction box via two individual circuits. One circuit shall be for the lights and the second circuit for the receptacles. 2.6 FUME HOOD BASE CABINETS, BASE STANDS, WORK TOPS, SINKS AND SERVICE FITTINGS A. Flammable Liquid Storage Cabinets: Flammable storage cabinets shall conform to the construction, details and dimensions as set forth in NFPA 30 “Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code”, and shall be FM-Approved. 1. Minimum Metal Thickness: Bottoms, tops, sides, fixed backs, and doors minimum 0.048inch (1.21 mm) thick. 2. Construction: Double walled with a 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) air space, all welded construction. 3. Doors: Self-closing with fusible link. Auto-latch and door synchronizer incorporated as an integral function of the cabinet. Provide doors with a three-point locking arrangement. 4. Spill Containment Pan: Cabinet floor with 2 inch (51 mm) deep liquid-tight spill containment pan. 5. Markings: Each storage cabinet shall be marked “FLAMMABLES – KEEP FIRE AWAY” in letters not less than 2 inches (51 mm) height and in color contrasting with the background. 6. Cabinet width: as indicated. 7. Locations: As indicated. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY FUME HOODS 115313 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 a. Provide mobile base cabinets at accessible fume hoods. b. Provide fixed base cabinets at non-accessible fume hoods. B. Chemical (Acid) Storage Base Cabinets: 1. Minimum Metal Thickness: Back panels, doors, and shelves: 0.036 inch (0.91 mm). For shelves more than 36 inches (900 mm) long, use 0.048-inch (1.21 mm) thick metal or provide suitable reinforcement. 2. Acid Storage-Cabinet Lining: 1/4-inch (6 mm) thick, polyethylene or polypropylene. 3. Markings: Each storage cabinet shall be marked “ACID” in letters not less than 2 inches (51 mm) height and in color contrasting with the background. 4. Cabinet: Width: as indicated. 5. Locations: As indicated. a. Provide mobile base cabinets at accessible fume hoods. b. Provide fixed base cabinets at non-accessible fume hoods. 6. Cabinet Vents: Provide cabinets with rigid polyolefin or flexible reinforced PVC vent pipes for venting to behind baffle at rear of fume hood. C. Work Tops: 1. Work Tops, General: Provide units with smooth surfaces free of defects. Make exposed edges and corners straight and uniformly beveled. Where acid storage cabinets are indicated beneath fume hoods, provide holes in work tops as need to accommodate cabinet vents. 2. Resin Work Tops: Provide front overhang of 1 inch (25 mm), with continuous drip groove on underside 1/2 inch (13 mm) from edge. a. Work Top Material: Solid epoxy composition. b. Work Top Configuration: Raised (marine) edge, 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) thick at raised edge, with beveled or rounded edge and corners. 3. Cup Sinks: Epoxy, 3-by-6-inch (75-by-150-mm) oval. a. Provide with polypropylene strainers and integral tailpieces. D. Adjustable-Height Work Surface: Work surface supported by electro-hydraulic mechanism with electric motor for adjustment of work surface height from 30 inches (762 mm) to 36 inches (914 mm). E. Service Fittings: Comply with requirements in Section 123553 "Laboratory Casework." 1. Plumbing Fittings: Provide service fittings with exposed surfaces, including fittings, escutcheons, and trim, of finish complying with requirements in SEFA 7 for corrosionresistant finishes. a. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by WaterSaver Faucet Company or comparable products from the following: 1) Chicago Faucet Company (The); a Geberit company. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY FUME HOODS 115313 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 b. Laboratory Gases: Flange-type fitting(s) with angled outlet, remote-control needle valves, and bonnet handle. 1) Basis-of-Design: WaterSaver Faucet Company, Colortech CT740N-R with CT022WSA. c. Water Faucets: Remote-control, rigid, gooseneck faucets with vacuum breaker, removable serrated outlet, and bonnet handle. 1) Basis-of-Design: WaterSaver Faucet Company, Colortech CT740W-9VB with CT071VB-WSA. d. Provide front-loaded plumbing fittings. e. Provide fittings for types of services as indicated in ‘Fume Hood Schedule’. f. Unless indicated otherwise, provide fittings for mounting on right side of fume hoods. g. For fittings inside the hood, provide color-coded powder-coat or baked-on coating finish. h. For control handles outside the hood, provide escutcheons with satin chrome with clear epoxy finish, with color-coded handles. 2. Electrical Outlets: Duplex GFCI receptacles. 2.7 CHEMICAL-RESISTANT FINISH A. General: Prepare, treat, and finish welded assemblies after welding. Prepare, treat, and finish components that are to be assembled with mechanical fasteners before assembling. Prepare, treat, and finish concealed surfaces same as exposed surfaces. B. Preparation: Clean steel surfaces, other than stainless steel, of mill scale, rust, oil, and other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over it. C. Chemical-Resistant Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pre-treating, apply fume hood manufacturer's standard two-coat, chemical-resistant, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm). 1. Chemical and Physical Resistance of Finish System: Finish complies with acceptance levels of cabinet surface finish tests in SEFA 8. Acceptance level for chemical spot test shall be no more than four Level 3 conditions. 2. Colors for Fume Hood Finish: Color to match casework metal as specified in Section 123553 "Laboratory Casework." 2.8 ACCESSORIES A. Airflow Indicator: Provide each fume hood with airflow indicator of the following type(s): 1. Indicator Type: Thermal anemometer that measures fume hood face velocity and displays data as digital readout. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY FUME HOODS 115313 - 11 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 a. Airflow indicator shall be capable of digital communication with building automation system (BAS). B. Airflow Alarm: Provide fume hoods with audible and visual alarm that activates when airflow sensor reading is outside of preset range. 1. Provide with thermal-anemometer airflow sensor. 2. Provide with reset and test switches. 3. Provide with switch that silences audible alarm and automatically resets when airflow returns to within preset range. C. Sash Alarm: Provide fume hoods with audible and visual alarm that activates when sash is opened beyond preset position. 1. Provide with silence and test switches. D. Sash Stops: Provide fume hoods with sash stops to limit hood opening to specified sash operating height. Sash stops can be manually released to open sash fully for cleaning fume hood and for placing large apparatus within fume hood. 1. Sash Operating Height: 18 inches (457 mm). E. Bypass Blank-off Panel: Provide fume hoods with blank-off panel on bypass designed for use with sash stops and sash position sensors to reduce exhaust air volume and provide design face velocity with sash at operating height position. F. Sash Position Sensor: Provide sensor for airflow setback through connection to building automation system (BAS) VAV control. Sash position sensor shall be located in bypass to indicate the sash position. G. Warning Signs: Provide a warning sign mounted on the fixed vertical sash of the fume hoods stating “Fume Hood may not provide containment when sash is opened beyond 18 inch height”. 2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Demonstrate fume hood performance before shipment by testing fume hoods according to ASHRAE 110. Provide testing facility, instruments, equipment, and materials needed for tests. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of fume hoods. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY FUME HOODS 115313 - 12 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fume hoods according to manufacturer's written instructions. Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims, and securely anchor to building and adjacent laboratory casework. Securely attach access panels, but provide for easy removal and secure reattachment. Where fume hoods abut other finished work, apply filler strips and scribe for accurate fit, with fasteners concealed where practical. B. Comply with requirements in Section 123553 "Laboratory Casework" for installing fume hood base cabinets and work tops. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field test installed fume hoods according to ASHRAE 110 as modified in "Performance Requirements" Article to verify compliance with performance requirements. 1. Field test all fume hoods. 2. Adjust fume hoods, hood exhaust fans, and building's HVAC system, or replace hoods and make other corrections until tested hoods perform as specified. 3. After making corrections, retest fume hoods that failed to perform as specified. B. Commissioning: Refer to Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements." 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust moving parts for smooth, near silent, accurate sash operation with one hand. Adjust sashes for uniform contact of rubber bumpers. Verify that counterbalances operate without interference. B. Clean finished surfaces, including both sides of glass; touch up as required; and remove or refinish damaged or soiled areas to match original factory finish, as approved by Architect. 3.5 FUME HOOD SCHEDULE A. Bench Top Fume Hood: 1. Length: 72 inches (1829 mm) unless otherwise indicated. a. Provide 48-inch (1219 mm) width where indicated on Drawings. 2. Depth: Approximately 32 inches (813 mm). 3. Exterior: Steel with chemical-resistant finish. 4. Ventilation Type: High-performance, with VAV control. 5. Sash Configuration: a. Operation: Vertical-sliding, single-hung sash. b. Opening Height: 24 to 30 inches (610 to 762 mm). 6. Work Top: Epoxy. 7. Base Cabinets: a. One metal flammable liquid storage base cabinet. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY FUME HOODS 115313 - 13 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 b. One metal chemical (acid) storage base cabinet, vented to fume hood exhaust. 8. Cup Sinks: Epoxy, 3-by-6-inch (75-by-150-mm) oval where indicated. 9. Service Fittings: a. Water, where cup sink is indicated: Remote-control, rigid, gooseneck, singleservice faucet(s) with vacuum breaker and removable serrated outlet. b. Laboratory Gases: Flange-type fittings with angled outlet and remote-control needle valve. 1) One vacuum (VAC). 2) One compressed air (CA). 3) One nitrogen (N2). c. Electrical: One duplex receptacle at both end(s) of hood, mounted on exterior front face of end pilaster. 1) Provide GFCI receptacles. B. Accessible Fume Hood: ADA-compliant, same as 6-foot hood except for the following: 1. Provide free-standing fume hood with adjustable-height work surface. 2. Base Cabinets: a. One mobile metal flammable liquid storage base cabinet. b. One mobile metal chemical (acid) storage base cabinet, vented to fume hood exhaust. END OF SECTION 115313 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 CURTAINS AND DRAPES 122213.13 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 122213.13 – LIGHT-BLOCKING DRAPERIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes light-blocking draperies and drapery tracks. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Tracks: Include maximum weights of draperies that can be supported. 2. Fabrics. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Tracks: Show installation and anchorage details and locations of controls. 2. Draperies: Show sizes, locations, and details of fabrication and installation. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified 1. Tracks: 12-inch (305-mm) length. 2. Draperies: 12 inches (305 mm) by 12 inches (305 mm) 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product certificate for each fabric with integral flame retardant. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTAL A. Maintenance data. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements before drapery fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For inherently flame-resistant fabrics, provide products that pass NFPA 701 as determined by testing of exact flame-resistant fabric intended for use for this Project by a testing and inspecting agency that is a FDNY Certificate of Fitness Holder (C15) and otherwise acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 CURTAINS AND DRAPES 122213.13 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Light-Blocking Characteristics: Laser rated at 50 W/cm2 for 100 seconds. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. Kentek Products; Flex-Guard Laser Safety Curtains 2.3 DRAPERY TRACKS A. Manually Operated Track: 1. Construction: Steel sheet formed for mounting at interval of not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c., and bendable to radii indicated. a. Support Capability: Weight of drapery indicated mounted on track length indicated. b. Finish: Manufacturer's standard black coating. 2. Mounting Brackets: Aluminum, of type suitable for fastening track to surface indicated and designed to support weight of track assembly and drapery plus force applied to operate track. a. Mounting Surface: As indicated on Drawings. b. Size: Adjustable. 3. Installation Fasteners: Sized to support track assembly and drapery, and fabricated from metal compatible with track, brackets, and supporting construction. Provide two fasteners to fasten each bracket to supporting construction. 4. Operation: Baton. a. Draw: Two way, center opening with overlap. b. Operating Hardware Location: On stack side. 5. Carriers: Nylon rollers with hooks. a. Master Carriers: Overlap. 6. End Stops: Manufacturer's standard with track end cap. 7. Accessories: As required for complete, light-blocking installation. B. Interlock: Manufacturer’s system to automatically shut down laser when curtain panels are opened or moved away from another panel. Include power supply, switches, wires, magnets, and other components necessary for complete system 2.4 DRAPERIES A. Drapery: : 1. Grommets for Roll Pleats: Fullness and spacing as recommended by manufacturer to meet performance requirements specified. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 CURTAINS AND DRAPES 122213.13 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Drapery Fabric: Inherently flame-resistant, chemical-resistant flexible fabric that does not rely on surface-applied treatment for specified properties. a. Color: Black. b. Thickness: 0.044 inch (1.1 mm). c. Textile Treatments: None. Provide textile with inherent properties that do not rely on surface treatments. 3. Lining Fabric: a. Lining Type: Blackout. b. Color: Black. 4. Hem Weights: As recommended by manufacturer to achieve performance required. 5. Side Hem Closure Strip: Flexible, woven loop and hook fastener tape; ¾-inch (19-mm)width; black color. Provide products suitable for sewing onto curtain edge and adhesive attachment to adjacent wall surface a. Product: Velcro Industries; Velcro Brand Sticky Back Fasteners and Sew On Tape 2.5 DRAPERY FABRICATION A. Fabricate draperies in heading styles and fullnesses indicated. Fabricate headings to stand erect. If less than a full width of fabric is required to produce panel of specified fullness, use equal widths of not less than one-half width of fabric located at ends of panel. 1. Center-Opening Draperies: Add 10 inches (254 mm) to overall width for overlap. B. Seams: Sew vertical seams with twin-needle sewing machine with selvage trimmed and overlocked. Join widths so that patterns match and vertical seams lay flat and straight without puckering. Horizontal seams are not acceptable. C. Side Hems: Double-turned, 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) wide hems consisting of three layers of fabric, and blindstitched so that stitches are not visible on face of drapery. D. Bottom Hems: Double-turned, 4-inch- (102-mm-) wide hems consisting of three layers of fabric, and weighted and blindstitched so that weights and stitches are not visible on face of drapery. E. Linings: Equal to widths of drapery fabric and joined to drapery fabric at top by inside invisible seam, and hand stitched at side hems and shadowed with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) return of face fabric. 1. Bottom Hem: Blind stitch to drapery fabric. F. Valance: Provide valence fabricated from same materials as drapes, height and mounting as required to block light at head of drape, but no less than 12 inches (300 mm). Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 CURTAINS AND DRAPES 122213.13 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DRAPERY TRACK INSTALLATION A. Install track systems according to manufacturer's written instructions, level and plumb, and at height and location in relation to adjoining openings as indicated on Drawings. B. Isolate metal parts of tracks and brackets from concrete, masonry, and mortar to prevent galvanic action. Use tape or another method recommended in writing by track manufacturer. 3.2 DRAPERY INSTALLATION A. Where draperies abut overhead construction, hang draperies so that clearance between headings and overhead construction is 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). B. Where draperies extend to floor, install so that bottom hems clear finished floor by not more than 1 inch (25 mm) and not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm). C. Where draperies extend to windowsill, install so that bottom hems hang above sill line and clear sill line by not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm). D. After hanging draperies, test and adjust each track to produce unencumbered, smooth operation. E. Steam and dress down draperies as required to produce crease- and wrinkle-free installation. F. Remove and replace draperies that are stained or soiled. END OF SECTION 122213.13 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 123553 - LABORATORY CASEWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wood laboratory casework. 2. Filler and closure panels. 3. Flexible laboratory casework system. 4. Laboratory countertops. 5. Lab tables. 6. Shelves. 7. Laboratory sinks. 8. Laboratory accessories. 9. Water, laboratory gas, electrical, and telecommunication service fittings 10. Wall escutcheons for service fittings. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 055000 “Metal Fabrications” for slotted channel ceiling assembly 2. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring laboratory casework. 3. Section 064023 "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for architectural woodwork. 4. Section 092216 “Non-Structural Metal Framing” for reinforcements in metal-framed partitions for anchoring laboratory casework. 5. Section 096513 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient base applied to laboratory casework. 6. Section 115300 "Laboratory Equipment" for laboratory equipment. 7. Section 115313 "Laboratory Fume Hoods" for fume hoods, including metal base cabinets and countertops under fume hoods. 8. Divisions 22, 26, and 27 Sections for service fittings not specified in this Section, for connecting service utilities, and requirements for plumbing, electrical, and telecommunication services installed with laboratory casework system. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Laboratory casework includes wood and metal furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing casework items unless concealed within other construction before casework installation. B. MDF: Medium-density fiberboard. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Definitions of “Exposed”, Semi-exposed” and “Concealed” surfaces shall be as indicated by specified woodworking standard, except modified as follows: 1. Ends of fixed cabinets indicated to be installed directly against and completely concealed by walls or other cabinets are defined as "concealed." Ends of fixed cabinets that are not completely concealed and ends of mobile cabinets, suspended cabinets, flexible cabinets, or cabinets otherwise indicated to be re-locatable shall have ends defined as “exposed”. Backs and tops of mobile cabinets and other flexible cabinets with potential for backs and tops to be visible shall have backs and tops defined as “exposed”. 2. Both sides of cabinet doors including inside face shall be defined as “exposed”. D. Hardwood Plywood: A panel product composed of layers or plies of veneer, or of veneers in combination with lumber core, hardboard core, MDF core, veneer-core, combination-core, particleboard core, or another core, joined with adhesive and faced both front and back with hardwood veneers. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of framing, blocking, supports, and reinforcements for support of laboratory casework. B. Coordinate installation of laboratory casework with installation of fume hoods and other laboratory equipment. C. Coordinate veneer requirements for wood components required to match veneer of interior architectural woodwork. D. Electrical Coordination: Coordinate requirements for conduit stubs, conduit, wiring, boxes, devices, light fixtures, and other electrical items installed with laboratory casework. E. Plumbing Coordination: Coordinate requirements for piping, sinks, faucets, and other plumbing items installed with laboratory casework. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For laboratory casework. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Indicate locations of hardware and keying of locks. 2. Indicate locations and types of service fittings. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, laboratory gas valves, electrical devices, light fixtures and other items installed in casework. 3. Indicate locations of blocking and reinforcements required for installing laboratory casework. 4. Include details of utility spaces showing supports for conduits and piping. 5. Include details of support framing system overhead supports. 6. Include details of exposed conduits, if required, for service fittings. 7. Indicate locations of and clearances from adjacent walls, doors, storefront, other building components, and other laboratory equipment. 8. Include coordinated dimensions for laboratory equipment furnished by Owner. 9. Show grain direction of veneer leaves and other items with directional pattern. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 10. Show locations and sizes of countertop supports. 11. Indicate coordination with items installed in conjunction with, within, adjacent to, or on laboratory casework. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-applied finishes and other materials requiring color selection. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of cabinet finish and each type of countertop material indicated, in manufacturer's standard sizes. 1. Sample Size for Hardwood Plywood with Wood Veneer: 36 by 36 inches (914 by 914 mm) minimum. Submit as range sample sets to display variation in color, grain, and other characteristics. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Delegated-Design Submittal: For laboratory casework and support framing systems indicated to comply with structural performance requirements, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. B. Qualification Data: For qualified manufacturer, fabricator, and professional engineer. C. Product Test Reports for Casework: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance of laboratory casework with requirements of specified product standard and system structural performance specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. D. Product Test Reports for Countertop Surface Material: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance of laboratory countertop surface materials with requirements specified for chemical and physical resistance. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish complete touchup kit for each type and color of metal laboratory casework and component provided. Include fillers, primers, paints, and other materials necessary to perform permanent repairs to damaged metal finish. B. Furnish complete touchup kit for each type and color of wood laboratory casework provided. Include scratch fillers, stains, finishes, and other materials necessary to perform permanent repairs to damaged laboratory casework finish. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that produces casework of types indicated for this Project that has been tested for compliance with SEFA 8. Manufacturer is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program and is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate wood products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. At Contractor’s option, meet fabricator qualifications or provide wood door and drawer front and other wood component fabrication by a qualified fabricator. C. Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. D. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A licensed Professional Engineer registered in the State of project location and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. E. Product Designations: Drawings indicate sizes and configurations of laboratory casework. Other listed manufacturers' laboratory casework of similar sizes and similar configurations and complying with the Specifications may be considered. F. Casework Product Standard: Comply with SEFA 8, "Laboratory Furniture - Casework, Shelving and Tables - Recommended Practices." 1. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with such selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard. G. Woodwork Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of architectural wood components indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. Provide certificates from AWI certification program indicating that woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified. 2. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard. H. Welder Qualifications: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1.3. I. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 1. Flexible Laboratory Casework System UL Listing: System shall be UL listed. All components that have not been previously tested for UL listing shall be tested and UL listed by manufacturer for use on this project as a UL listed integrated unit. J. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Lab Benches: Provide in-place mockup of one typical island/peninsula lab bench and one typical wall lab bench. 2. Shelving: Provide one full size preconstruction mockup shelf of each material type for review. Install two sets of approved shelving with adjustable standards for review. 3. Cabinets: Provide one full size preconstruction mockup cabinet for each of the following for review: a. Fixed base cabinet. b. Mobile base cabinet with countertop and wheels. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 4. Tables: Provide one full size preconstruction mockup table for each of the following for review: a. Table with non-adjustable legs. b. Table with height adjustable legs. 5. Task Lights: Provide one full-size preconstruction mockup under-shelf task light fixture, typical length as indicated on Drawings, for review. 6. Do not proceed with fabrication until receiving mockup approval. 7. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. K. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying requirements. L. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect finished surfaces during handling and installation with protective covering of polyethylene film or other suitable material. B. Do not deliver wood items until painting and similar operations that could damage wood have been completed in installation areas. If wood items must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article. 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install laboratory casework until building is enclosed, utility roughing-in and wet work are complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where laboratory casework is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support laboratory casework by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. C. Existing Conditions: Verify and coordinate existing conditions with installation of laboratory casework. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Bedcolab Ltd/Diversified Casework-OC River. 2. CiF Lab Solutions LP. 3. Lab Crafters, Inc/Diversified Casework-OC River. 4. Mott Manufacturing Ltd. B. Basis of Design Product: drawings and specifications are based on the following product line. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following or equivalent product line from acceptable manufacturer: 1. Mott Manufacturing Ltd.; Optima C. Source Limitations: Obtain laboratory casework from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. System Structural Performance: Laboratory casework and support framing system shall withstand the effects of the following gravity loads and stresses without permanent deformation, excessive deflection, or binding of drawers and doors: 1. Support Framing System: 600 lb/ft. (900 kg/m). 2. Work Surfaces (Including Tops of Mobile Base Cabinets): 160 lb/ft. (240 kg/m). 3. Shelves: 60 lb/sq. ft. (300 kg/sq. m). B. Delegated Design: Design laboratory casework, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using seismic performance requirements and design criteria indicated. C. Seismic Performance: Laboratory casework and support framing system, including attachments to other work, shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7. 1. Component Importance Factor is 1.0 unless indicated otherwise. 2.3 CASEWORK MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Recycled Content of Ferrous Metal Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent. B. Certified Wood Materials: Provide casework with not less than 70 percent of wood products obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship." Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.4 STEEL SHEET MATERIALS A. Metal, Steel Sheet: Cold-rolled, commercial steel (CS) sheet, complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M; matte finish; suitable for exposed applications. B. Nominal Metal Thickness: Provide minimum thickness indicated but in no case less than thickness required to comply with specified performance requirements. 1. Sides, Ends, Fixed Backs, Bottoms, Cabinet Tops, Soffits, and Items Not Otherwise Indicated: 0.048 inch (1.21 mm). 2. Sides, Ends, and Fixed Backs for Tall Cabinets and Cabinets over 48 inches (1219 mm) in Height: 0.060 inch (1.52 mm). 3. Back Panels, Drawer Sub-fronts and Bodies, and Cabinet Shelves: 0.036 inch (0.91 mm) except 0.048 inch (1.21 mm) for unreinforced shelves more than 36 inches (900 mm) long. 4. Intermediate Horizontal Rails, Table Aprons and Cross Rails, Center Posts, and Top Gussets: 0.060 inch (1.52 mm). 5. Drawer Runners, Sink Supports, and Hinge Reinforcements: 0.075 inch (1.90 mm). 6. Support Frames and Uprights: 0.060 inch (1.52 mm). 7. Table Telescoping Legs and Caster Attachment Assembly: 0.105 inch (2.66 mm). 8. Leveling and Corner Gussets: 0.105 inch (2.66 mm). 9. Items Not Otherwise Indicated: 0.048 inch (1.21 mm). 2.5 ALUMINUM MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063 unless indicated otherwise. 1. Alloy 6105-T5 where indicated. B. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F. 2.6 WOOD MATERIALS A. General: 1. Adhesives: Adhesives shall not contain urea formaldehyde. 2. Maximum Moisture Content for Lumber: 7 percent for hardwood and 12 percent for softwood. 3. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1, either combination core, veneer core, MDF, or particleboard core, unless otherwise indicated, made without urea formaldehyde. 4. MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. 5. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. 6. Combination Core: 3-ply inner plywood core with MDF outer plies, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. 7. Hardboard: AHA A135.4, Class 1 Tempered. 8. Hardwood Trim: Solid wood of same species and cut as face veneer. 9. Edgebanding for Wood-Veneered Construction: Minimum 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick, solid wood of same species as face veneer. B. Exposed Materials: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. General: Provide materials that are selected and arranged for compatible grain and color. Do not use materials adjacent to one another that are noticeably dissimilar in color, grain, figure, or natural character markings. 2. Wood Species: American Walnut. 3. Plywood: Hardwood plywood with face veneer of species indicated, selected for compatible color and grain. Grade AA exposed faces at least 1/50 inch (0.5 mm) thick, and Grade J cross bands. Provide backs of same species and cut as faces. a. Face Veneer Cut: Quarter sliced. b. Veneer Basis-of-Design: As specified in Section 064023 "Interior Architectural Woodwork." 4. Solid Wood: Clear hardwood lumber trim of species and cut indicated and selected for grain and color compatible with exposed hardwood plywood. C. Semi-exposed Materials: 1. Solid Wood: Sound hardwood lumber, selected to eliminate appearance defects, of same species and cut as exposed solid wood. 2. Plywood: Hardwood plywood of same species and cut as exposed plywood or compatible species stained to match. Grade B faces and Grade J cross bands, unless otherwise indicated. Provide backs of same species and cut as faces. 3. Provide solid wood or hardwood plywood for semi-exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 2.7 COUNTERTOP, TABLE TOP, SHELF, AND SINK MATERIALS A. Epoxy: Factory-molded, modified epoxy-resin formulation with smooth, non-specular finish. 1. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Greenstone by The Durcon Company or comparable products from the following: a. Epoxyn Products. 2. Physical Properties: a. Flexural Strength: Not less than 10,000 psi (70 MPa). b. Modulus of Elasticity: Not less than 2,000,000 psi (1400 MPa). c. Hardness (Rockwell M): Not less than 100. d. Water Absorption (24 Hours): Not more than 0.02 percent. e. Heat Distortion Point: Not less than 260 deg F (127 deg C). 3. Chemical Resistance: Epoxy-resin material has the following ratings when tested with indicated reagents according to NEMA LD 3, Test Procedure 3.4.5: a. No Effect: Acetic acid (98 percent), acetone, ammonium hydroxide (28 percent), benzene, carbon tetrachloride, dimethyl formamide, ethyl acetate, ethyl alcohol, ethyl ether, methyl alcohol, nitric acid (70 percent), phenol, sulfuric acid (60 percent), and toluene. b. Slight Effect: Chromic acid (60 percent) and sodium hydroxide (50 percent). 4. Minimum Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 10 percent. 5. Basis-of-Design Color: Greenstone Gray. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Wood: As specified. 2.8 WOOD CABINETS AND TABLES A. Cabinet Construction: Wood, in the following configurations: 1. Fixed, floor-mounted. 2. Suspended from laboratory casework frame 3. Mobile, on casters with epoxy work surface top. B. Wood AWI Grade: Premium. C. Design: Flush overlay with square edges. D. Wood Species and Cut: Select white maple Quarter sliced/sawn. E. Wood Grain Direction: 1. Vertical on both doors and drawer fronts, with continuous vertical matching. 2. Horizontal on aprons and table frames. F. Wood Veneer Matching: 1. Matching of Adjacent Veneer Leaves: Slip match. 2. Veneer Matching within Panel Face: Balance match. 3. Veneer Matching within Room: Within each separate room or area, provide made-toorder components with veneers in each room or other space from a single flitch with doors, drawer fronts, and other surfaces matched in a sequenced set with continuous match where veneers are interrupted perpendicular to the grain. G. Construction: Provide wood laboratory casework of the following minimum construction: 1. General: Use same core material for both doors and drawer fronts. 2. Bottoms of Base Cabinets and Tall Cabinets: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick combinationcore hardwood plywood. 3. Bottoms of Mobile Cabinets: 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick combination-core hardwood plywood. 4. Tops and Bottoms of Wall Cabinets and Tops of Tall Cabinets: 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick combination-core hardwood plywood. 5. Ends of Cabinets: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick combination-core hardwood plywood. 6. Shelves: 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick combination-core or veneer-core hardwood plywood. 7. Base Cabinet Top Frames: 3/4-by-2-inch (19-by-50-mm) solid wood with mortise-andtenon or doweled connections, glued and pinned or screwed. 8. Base Cabinet Stretchers: 3/4-by-4-1/2-inch (19-by-114-mm) panel product strips or solid wood boards at front and back of cabinet, glued and pinned or screwed. May be provided as an option to base cabinet top frames. 9. Base Cabinet Sub-tops: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick panel product glued and pinned or screwed. May be provided as an option to base cabinet top frames. 10. Backs of Cabinets: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick, combination-core hardwood plywood where exposed, 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) thick hardboard or 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) thick, hardwood plywood dadoed into sides, bottoms, and tops where not exposed. 11. Drawer Fronts: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick hardwood plywood, with combination-core, particleboard or MDF cores and hardwood face veneers and cross-bands. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 12. Drawer Sides, Sub-Fronts, and Backs: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick, solid hardwood, combination-core or veneer-core hardwood plywood, or baltic-birch plywood, with glued dovetail or multiple-dowel joints. 13. Drawer Bottoms: 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) thick, combination-core or veneer-core hardwood plywood glued and dadoed into front, back, and sides of drawers. Use 1/2-inch- (12.7mm-) thick material for file drawers and drawers more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide or more than 8 inches (200 mm) high. 14. Doors: 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick hardwood plywood, with combination-core, particleboard or MDF cores and hardwood face veneers and cross-bands. a. Provide concealed solid hardwood rail at hinge-side edge of core, rail width as required for core to be concealed behind hardwood rail at hinge cut-outs. Hardwood rail may be omitted where core material is combination-core. b. Use same core material for both doors and drawer fronts. H. Mobile Wood Base Cabinets: Design requirements, performance requirements, materials, fabrication and hardware shall comply with requirements for fixed cabinets. 1. Cabinets with casters shall be constructed without toe spaces. The cabinet shall be constructed with a reinforced base capable of supporting 4 inch high caster assemblies in each corner. 2. Casters shall be rated for minimum 250 pounds load each. a. Casters shall be swivel locking type for two casters at front of cabinet. b. Casters shall be fixed for two casters at back of cabinet. 3. Caster Color: Gray. 4. Cabinets shall be completely finished on four sides and bottom edges. 5. Cabinet assembly shall be reinforced to permit mobility without twisting. 6. Mobile Base Cabinets with Integrally Attached Countertops: Cabinet height with integral countertop shall be as required for fit and clearance below indicated counter heights. a. Provide epoxy countertops. 7. Units with drawers shall be equipped with an anti-tipping mechanism that shall include a counterweight and drawer slide interlocks so that only one drawer in a vertical stack can be opened at one time. I. Toe Space: Fully enclosed, 4 inches (100 mm) high by 3 inches (75 mm) deep, with no open gaps or pockets. J. Utilities: Provide space, cutouts, and holes for pipes, conduits, and fittings to accommodate utility services and their support-strut assemblies. K. Filler and Closure Panels: Provide where indicated and as needed to close spaces between cabinets and walls, ceilings, and indicated equipment. Fabricate from same material and with same finish as adjacent exposed cabinet surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide utility-space closure panels at spaces between base cabinets where utility space would otherwise be exposed, including spaces below countertops. 2. Provide closure panels at ends of utility spaces where utility space would otherwise be exposed. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 11 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.9 METAL TABLES A. Table Construction: Metal with epoxy tops in the following configurations:. 1. Moveable, on heavy-duty glides, height-adjustable. B. Tables: Welded tubing legs, not less than 2 inches (50 mm) square with channel stretchers as needed to comply with product standard. Weld or bolt stretchers to legs and cross-stretchers, and bolt legs to table aprons. Provide leveling device welded to bottom of each leg. 1. Leg Shoes: None. 2. Leveling device adjustment capability shall be not less than plus/minus 1 inch (25 mm). 3. Table frames shall be suitable for mounting of indicated tops. 4. Table frame legs shall include telescoping, pin adjustable bottom leg frame inserts. 5. Table frame height shall be adjustable in 1 inch (25 mm) increments for finished table top minimum height range of 30 inches (762 mm) to 37 inches (940 mm) above floor. 2.10 FLEXIBLE LABORATORY CASEWORK SYSTEM A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following or comparable products by one of the other listed manufacturers. 1. Optima Series; Mott Manufacturing Ltd. a. Modifications to typical system as indicated on Drawings. B. Provide casework manufacturer's standard integrated system that includes support framing, modular cabinets, filler and closure panels, wall panels, under shelf task-lighting fixtures, countertops, services, and fittings needed to assemble system. System includes hardware and fasteners for securing support framing to permanent construction. 1. Cabinet Construction: As indicated. 2. Cabinets can be removed and reinstalled without use of special tools for relocation within system. 3. Base cabinets can be removed without providing temporary support for, or removing, countertops. Provide mobile base cabinets where indicated. 4. Sinks are supported independent of base cabinets. 5. Support framing has provision for fastening pipe supports at utility space in not more than 1-inch (25-mm) increments. 6. System includes filler and closure panels to close spaces between support framing, fixed cabinets, shelves, countertops, floors, and walls unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate metal panels from same material and with same finish as metal support frame and with hemmed or flanged edges. Fabricate wood panels from same material and with same finish as wood cabinets. 7. Bench modules can be removed and reinstalled with use of tools. Bench module removal shall not affect continued use of bench modules remaining in place. C. Support Framing: Casework manufacturer's standard system consisting of vertical supports and connecting braces and rails as follows: 1. Cabinets, shelves, and countertops are supported from vertical supports except where floor-supported or mobile base cabinets are indicated. Vertical positioning of supported cabinets, shelves, and countertops can be varied in 1-inch (25-mm) increments through full height of supports. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 12 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Vertical supports rest on adjustable leveling bases and are secured to floor with metal clips fastened to floor. Leveling device adjustment capability shall be not less than plus/minus 1 inch (25 mm). 3. Vertical supports are installed with braces and rails connecting them to each other and to permanent building walls to create a stable, rigid structure with framed utility spaces where indicated. 4. Vertical supports are braced at floor with cantilevered horizontal leg members where indicated. 5. Welded tubing, not less than 2 inches (50 mm) square profile. 6. Provide wire management trough attached to support framing below countertops. Provide rubber bumpers on front face of trough. D. Undershelf Task-Light Fixtures (US1, US2): UL listed LED task light fixtures. 1. Basis of Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide #LUCA481WH-Custom Finish-Custom Lengths by Lightolier or comparable products by one of the following: a. Focalpoint. b. Vode Lighting. 2. Description: Linear LED task light, approximately 1 1/2 inch (38 mm) x 1 1/2 inch (38 mm) in profile, mounted to upper shelving of casework system. Remote electronic driver to be located in spine of casework system. 3. Performance Criteria: a. Delivers a minimum average of 50 fc to work surface located 4’-8” below mounting position. b. Maximum wattage: 9.0 watts per linear foot. c. Minimum CRI: 80. d. Correlated Color temperature to be 3500K, color shift over life of fixture to be maximum +/-100K. e. Minimum estimated life to 70% of light output: 50,000 hours. f. Provides adequate cutoff to eliminate excessive glare. g. Includes high performance lens. h. Includes remote driver/power supply that can power multiple benches in one row. Integral driver/power supplies will be considered provided that an acceptable wiring scheme is developed. Individual driver/power supplies for each bench will be considered if this approach is shown to reduce cost and simplify installation. 4. Finish: Custom finish to match casework metal color. 5. Fixture Lengths: Custom lengths to match shelf lengths. 6. Switching (US1): Push-button, manual-on, auto-off by integral vacancy sensor. a. Switch Location: Remote, recess-mounted in table/bench leg or apron. 7. Switching (US2): Push-button, manual-on, auto-off by ceiling occupancy sensor. a. Switch Location: Remote, recess-mounted in table/bench leg or apron. 8. Operation (US1): Vacancy sensor mounted on shelf or light fixture and remote switches mounted at indicated accessible location. 9. Operation (US2): Ceiling-mounted occupancy sensor as specified under Division 26. 10. Connection: Provide cord with grounded plug. Coordinate cord lengths with available outlet locations. Provide cord in minimum lengths sufficient to reach outlets. 11. Labels: Include a “Lighting Facts” label. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 13 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 12. Wall Plate: Provide stainless steel wall cover plate for hard-wired connection to junction box at wall. 13. Minimum Warranty for System: 3 Years. E. Countertops: Provide in modular lengths indicated, without seams. 1. Countertop height shall be adjustable in 1 inch (25 mm) increments for finished countertop minimum height range of 30 inches (762 mm) to 42 inches (1067 mm) above floor. 2. Countertop heights shall be adjustable by moving up or down with use of simple tools. F. Plumbing Services: Provide laboratory gas piping within flexible casework system to accommodate indicated laboratory gas services. Comply with Division 22 Sections. G. Electrical Services: Provide electrical conduit, wiring, junction boxes, and other electrical items within flexible casework system to accommodate indicated electrical services. Comply with Division 26 Sections. H. Telecommunication Services: Provide telecommunications conduit, wiring, junction boxes, and other telecommunications items within flexible casework system to accommodate indicated telecommunications services. Comply with Division 27 Sections. I. Flexible Services: Provide services, devices, fittings, quick-connect fittings, and accessories necessary for connecting and disconnecting plumbing, electrical, and telecommunication services for each bench module of flexible casework system benches. J. UL Listing: As indicated under Article ‘Quality Assurance’. 2.11 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Apply indicates finishes to exposed and semi-exposed components of laboratory casework. 2.12 METAL FINISH, CASEWORK A. General: Prepare, treat, and finish welded assemblies after assembling. Prepare, treat, and finish components that are to be assembled with mechanical fasteners before assembling. Prepare, treat, and finish concealed surfaces same as exposed surfaces. B. Preparation: After assembly, clean surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, and other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over it. C. Chemical-Resistant Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pre-treating, apply laboratory casework manufacturer's standard two-coat, chemical-resistant, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm). 1. Chemical and Physical Resistance of Finish System: Finish complies with acceptance levels of cabinet surface finish tests in SEFA 8. Acceptance level for chemical spot test shall be no more than four Level 3 conditions. 2. Colors for Metal Laboratory Casework Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 14 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.13 WOOD FINISH A. Preparation: Sand lumber and plywood before assembling. Sand edges of doors, drawer fronts, and molded shapes with profile-edge sander. Sand after assembling for uniform smoothness at least equivalent to that produced by 220-grit sanding and without machine marks, cross sanding, or other surface blemishes. B. Chemical-Resistant Finish: Apply laboratory casework manufacturer's standard three-coat, chemical-resistant, transparent finish. Sand and wipe clean between coats. Apply finish to concealed and semi-concealed surfaces. Topcoat(s) may be omitted on concealed surfaces. 1. Chemical and Physical Resistance of Finish System: Finish complies with acceptance levels of cabinet surface finish tests in SEFA 8. Acceptance level for chemical spot test shall be no more than four Level 3 conditions. 2. Finish: Catalyzed vinyl. 2.14 HARDWARE A. General: Provide laboratory casework manufacturer's standard, commercial-quality, heavy-duty hardware complying with requirements indicated for each type. B. Hinges for Wood Cabinets: Frameless concealed hinges (European type) complying with BHMA A156.9, Type B01602, 135 degrees of opening, self-closing. C. Hinged Door and Drawer Pulls: Solid stainless steel, back-mounted pulls. Provide 2 pulls for drawers more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide. 1. Design: Wire pulls. D. Door Catches: Nylon-roller spring catches. Provide 2 catches on doors more than 48 inches (1200 mm) high. E. Drawer Slides: Side mounted, epoxy-coated steel, self-closing; designed to prevent rebound when drawers are closed; complying with BHMA A156.9, Type B05091. 1. Provide Grade 1; for trays or drawers not more than 4 inches (100 mm) high and 24 inches (600 mm) wide. 2. Provide Grade 1HD-100; for drawers not more than 6 inches (150 mm) high and 24 inches (600 mm) wide. 3. Provide Grade 1HD-200; for drawers more than 6 inches (150 mm) high or 24 inches (600 mm) wide, and for slide-out drawers for chemical storage side cabinets. 4. Provide drawer slides with interlocks at mobile cabinets. 5. Standard Duty (Grade 1): Full-extension type, with polymer rollers. 6. Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Full-overtravel-extension, ballbearing type. F. Locks for Wood Cabinets: Cam type with 5-pin tumbler, brass with chrome-plated finish; complying with BHMA A156.11, Type E07281. 1. Provide a minimum of two keys per lock and two master keys. 2. Provide locks for all cabinet doors and drawers. 3. Keying: Key locks differently for each cabinet door. 4. Master Key System: Key all locks to be operable by master key. 5. Verify keying requirements with Owner. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 15 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.15 COUNTERTOPS, TABLE TOPS, SHELVES AND SINKS A. Countertops, General: Provide units with smooth surfaces in uniform plane free of defects. Make exposed edges and corners straight and uniformly beveled. Provide front and end overhang of 1 inch (25 mm), with continuous drip groove on underside 1/2 inch (13 mm) from edge. B. Sinks, General: Provide sizes indicated or laboratory casework manufacturer's closest standard size of equal or greater volume, as approved by Architect. 1. Outlets: Provide with strainers and tailpieces, NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40), unless otherwise indicated. 2. Overflows: For each sink except cup sinks, provide overflow of standard beehive or open-top design with separate strainer. Height 2 inches (50 mm) less than sink depth. Provide in same material as strainer. C. Epoxy Countertops, Table Tops, Mobile Cabinet Tops, and Sinks: 1. Countertop Fabrication: Fabricate with factory cutouts for sinks, holes for service fittings and accessories, and with butt joints assembled with epoxy adhesive and concealed metal splines. a. Countertop Configuration: Flat, 1 inch (25 mm) thick, with beveled or rounded edge and corners, and with drip groove and integral coved or applied backsplash. b. Countertop Configuration at Sinks: Raised (marine) edge, 1-inch (25-mm) minimum thickness, with integral raised edge having beveled or rounded edge and corners, and with integral coved or applied backsplash. c. Countertop Construction: Uniform throughout full thickness. 2. Table-Top Fabrication: a. Table-Top Configuration: Flat, 1 inch (25 mm) thick, with beveled or rounded edge and corners, and with drip groove at perimeter. b. Table-Top Construction: Uniform throughout full thickness. 3. Mobile Cabinet Top Fabrication: a. Cabinet Top Configuration: Flat, 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick, with beveled or rounded edge and corners, and with drip groove at perimeter. b. Cabinet Top Construction: Uniform throughout full thickness. 4. Sink Fabrication: Molded in 1 piece with smooth surfaces, coved corners, and bottom sloped to outlet; 1/2-inch (13-mm) minimum thickness. a. Provide with epoxy sink outlet and polypropylene strainers, overflows, and accessories. b. Provide integral sinks in epoxy countertops, bonded to countertops with invisible joint line. 1) Unless indicated otherwise, provide integral under-mount sinks as selected by Architect. 2) Provide manufacturer's recommended adjustable support system where required for support of sinks. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 16 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. Wood Shelves: Veneer-core hardwood plywood with 1/8” hardwood edge banding, thickness as indicated on Drawings but not less than 1 inch (25 mm) thick. 2.16 ADJUSTABLE WALL SHELVING A. General. Adjustable shelves shall be constructed of the following as indicated on the Drawings: 1. Wood Shelves for Adjustable Wall Shelving: 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick combination-core or veneer-core hardwood plywood. B. Adjustable shelves shall be 12 inch deep, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. C. Adjustable shelves shall be mounted to standards or slotted studs. Adjustable shelves shall be supported by brackets fabricated in accordance with the Drawings. Shelves shall be fastened to brackets with two stainless steel screws per bracket. D. Adjustable Wall Shelf Supports: Surface-type heavy-duty steel standards and steel shelf brackets, with indicated finish, complying with BHMA A156.9, Types B04102 and B04112. 1. Wall Standard Length: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Shelf Bracket Length: As required for front of bracket to align with shelf front edge. 3. Shelf Bracket Profile: Rectangular with angled back leg, custom profile as indicated on Drawings. 4. Shelf Bracket Configuration: Inverted at top shelves, upturned at other shelves. 5. Finish for Standards and Brackets: Epoxy powder-coated finish. a. Color: Custom color to match metal cabinet and leg color. 2.17 LABORATORY ACCESSORIES A. Epoxy Pegboards: Epoxy pegboards with removable polypropylene pegs and stainless-steel drip troughs with drain outlet. 1. Epoxy Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range, as required to match epoxy countertop color. 2. Drip Trough Width: Match width of epoxy board. 2.18 WATER AND LABORATORY GAS SERVICE FITTINGS A. Fittings and accessories not specified under this Section are as specified in Divisions 22 Plumbing. B. Basis-of Design Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by WaterSaver Faucet Company or comparable products from one of the following: 1. Chicago Faucet Company (The); a Geberit company. C. Service Fittings: Provide units that comply with SEFA 7, "Laboratory and Hospital Fixtures - Recommended Practices." Provide fittings complete with washers, locknuts, nipples, and other installation accessories. Include wall and deck flanges, escutcheons, handle extension rods, and similar items. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 17 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. Materials: Fabricated from cast or forged red brass unless otherwise indicated. 1. Reagent-Grade Water Service Fittings: Polypropylene for parts in contact with water. E. Finish: Acid- and solvent-resistant plated-metal with clear epoxy coating complying with requirements in SEFA 7 for corrosion-resistant finishes. 1. Satin Chrome with Clear Epoxy. F. Water Valves and Faucets: Provide units complying with ASME A112.18.1, with renewable seats, designed for working pressure up to 80 psig (550 kPa). 1. Vacuum Breakers: Provide ASSE 1035 vacuum breakers on water fittings with serrated outlets. 2. Aerators: Provide aerators on water fittings that do not have serrated outlets. 3. Self-Closing Valves: Provide self-closing valves where indicated. G. Needle Valves: Provide units with renewable, self-centering, floating cones and renewable seats of stainless steel or Monel metal, with removable serrated outlets. 1. Provide units designed for working pressure up to 125 psig (860 kPa). H. Hand of Fittings: Furnish right-hand fittings unless fitting designation is followed by "L." I. Handles: Provide four-wing, molded plastic or powder-coated metal handles for valves unless otherwise indicated. J. Service-Outlet Identification: Provide color-coded plastic discs with embossed identification, secured to each service-fitting handle to be tamper resistant. Comply with SEFA 7 for colors and embossed identification. K. Wall Escutcheon Panels: Escutcheon plates for mounting service-fittings and for piping penetrations. 1. Construction: Stainless steel plates, 0.109-inch (2.77-mm) minimum thickness, with finished face and edges. a. In addition to plate, provide stainless steel or dull-chrome circular-ring escutcheons for piping penetrations. 2. Mounting Type: Wall mounted. 3. Shape: Rectangular. 4. Dimensions: As indicated on Drawings. 5. Holes: Coordinate hole sizes, locations, and spacing with indicated services. 6. Finish: Satin #4. 2.19 ELECTRICAL AND TELECOMMUNICATION SERVICE FITTINGS A. Fittings and accessories not specified under this Section are as specified in Divisions 26 Electrical and Divisions 27 Communications. B. Service Fittings, General: Provide units complete with metal housings, receptacles, terminals, switches, pilot lights, device plates, accessories, and gaskets required for mounting on laboratory casework. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 18 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Electrical and Telecommunication Raceway: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements provide AL4000 by Wiremold/Legrand or comparable product from the following: a. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. 2. Pre-wired, UL listed assembly. 3. Electrical Outlet Spacing: Duplex devices at 18 inches on center. 4. Telecommunication Outlet Spacing: Same quantity as electrical outlets, located next to electrical outlets. 5. Raceway Material and Assembly: a. Raceway shall be extruded aluminum type 6063-T5 alloy with snap on covers. b. Number of channel compartments: Two, with one cover. c. Capable of accommodating single, duplex, NEMA-Locking, GFCI, and modular voice and data jacks. Devices shall be mounted to the cover plates, which shall be securely held in place. Cover plates shall be removable by use of a standard screwdriver. d. Receptacles shall be minimum 20 amp, NEMA 5-20R. e. Devices shall be wired using inherent device terminal screws. Insulation displacement connectors and twist-on wire connectors are not acceptable. f. Raceway shall contain a full size equipment grounding conductor attached to each device and raceway. Wire type, color coding, and identification shall be in accordance with Division 26 sections. g. Finish: Clear anodized. D. Receptacles: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, and UL 498. Duplex type, Configuration 5 20R. 1. Receptacle Grade: Hospital grade unless otherwise indicated. 2. Colors of Receptacles: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range for standard receptacles. Colors of other receptacles as indicated in Division 26 or if not indicated as required by NFPA 70. 3. GFCI Receptacles: Straight blade, feed-through type. Comply with UL 943, Class A, Hospital grade, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped. E. Telephone/Data Receptacles: As specified in Division 27 Communications. F. Switches: Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20. Provide single-pole, double-pole, or 3-way switches as required; rated 120 to 277-V ac; and in amperage capacities to suit units served. 1. Task Light Switches: Push-button switch controlling outlet for task lights. 2. Color of Switches: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70. G. Pedestal-Type Fittings: Cast-aluminum housings with sloped single face or two faces, as indicated, with neoprene gasket under base and with concealed mounting holes in base for attaching to laboratory casework. Provide holes tapped for conduits. H. Line-Type Fittings: Provide with cast-metal boxes with threaded holes for mounting on rigid steel conduit. Provide cover plates same size as boxes. I. Recessed-Type Fittings: Provide with galvanized-steel boxes. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 19 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 J. Finishes for Service-Fitting Components: Provide housings or boxes for pedestal- and line-type fittings with manufacturer's standard baked-on, chemical-resistant enamel in color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. K. Cover Plates: Provide satin finish, Type 304, stainless-steel cover plates with formed, beveled edges. L. Cover-Plate Identification: Use 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) high letters unless otherwise indicated. For stainless steel or chrome-plated metal, stamp or etch plate and fill in letters with black enamel. 1. Provide on all cover plates. 2. Provide the following information: a. Voltage and phase for receptacles other than standard 125-V duplex, grounding type. b. Indicate fixture or equipment being controlled by switches and thermal-overload switches. c. Number of breaker in panelboard that controls device. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, location of reinforcements, and other conditions affecting performance of laboratory casework. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF CABINETS A. For wood door and drawer fronts, comply with AWI installation requirements in addition to requirements specified in this section. 1. AWI Grade: Premium. B. Comply with installation requirements in SEFA 2.3. Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. Where laboratory casework abuts other finished work, apply filler strips and scribe for accurate fit, with fasteners concealed where practical. Do not exceed the following tolerances: 1. Variation of Tops of Base Cabinets from Level: 1/16 inch in 10 feet (1.5 mm in 3 m). 2. Variation of Faces of Cabinets from a True Plane: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m). 3. Variation of Adjacent Surfaces from a True Plane (Lippage): 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). 4. Variation in Alignment of Adjacent Door and Drawer Edges: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). C. Utility-Space Framing: Secure to floor with two fasteners at each frame. Fasten to partition framing, wood blocking, or metal reinforcements in partitions and to base cabinets. D. Base Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to utility-space framing, partition framing, wood blocking, or reinforcements in partitions with fasteners spaced not more than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. Bolt adjacent cabinets together with joints flush, tight, and uniform. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 20 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Where base cabinets are installed away from walls, fasten to floor at toe space at not more than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. and at sides of cabinets with not less than 2 fasteners per side. E. Install hardware uniformly and precisely. Set hinges snug and flat in mortises. F. Adjust laboratory casework and hardware so doors and drawers align and operate smoothly without warp or bind and contact points meet accurately. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF COUNTERTOPS A. Comply with installation requirements in SEFA 2.3. Abut top and edge surfaces in one true plane with flush hairline joints and with internal supports placed to prevent deflection. Locate joints only where shown on Shop Drawings. B. Field Jointing: Where possible, make in same manner as shop-made joints using dowels, splines, fasteners, adhesives, and sealants recommended by manufacturer. Prepare edges in shop for field-made joints. 1. Use concealed clamping devices for field-made joints in plastic-laminate countertops. Locate clamping devices within 6 inches (150 mm) of front and back edges and at intervals not exceeding 24 inches (600 mm). Tighten according to manufacturer's written instructions to exert a uniform heavy pressure at joints. C. Fastening: 1. Secure epoxy countertops to cabinets with epoxy cement, applied at each corner and along perimeter edges at not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. 2. Where necessary to penetrate countertops with fasteners, countersink heads approximately 1/8 inch (3 mm) and plug hole flush with material equal to countertop in chemical resistance, hardness, and appearance. D. Provide required holes and cutouts for service fittings. E. Provide scribe moldings for closures at junctures of countertop, curb, and splash with walls as recommended by manufacturer for materials involved. Match materials and finish to adjacent laboratory casework. Use chemical-resistant, permanently elastic sealing compound where recommended by manufacturer. F. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF LABORATORY ACCESSORIES A. Install accessories according to Shop Drawings, installation requirements in SEFA 2.3, and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Securely fasten adjustable shelving supports and shelves to partition framing, wood blocking, or reinforcements in partitions. C. Install shelf standards plumb and at heights to align shelf brackets for level shelves. Install shelving level and straight, closely fitted to other work where indicated. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 21 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. Securely fasten pegboards to adjustable wall shelving standards, as indicated on Drawings. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF FRAMING SUPPORT SYSTEMS A. Install according to Shop Drawings and assemble according to manufacturers’ written instructions. B. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where supports are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors. 1. Anchor supports securely to building structure. C. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing supports. Set support systems accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. 1. Cut framing neatly and without jagged edges, projections, or other irregularities. D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. E. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following: 1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint. 2. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF SERVICE FITTINGS A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 for installing water and laboratory gas service fittings. B. Comply with requirements in Division 26 for installing electrical fittings. C. Comply with requirements in Division 27 for installing telecommunication fittings. D. Install fittings according to Shop Drawings, installation requirements in SEFA 2.3, and manufacturer's written instructions. Set bases and flanges of sink- and countertop-mounted fittings in sealant recommended by manufacturer of sink or countertop material. Securely anchor fittings to wall escutcheon panels, and laboratory casework unless otherwise indicated. 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Clean finished surfaces, touch up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or soiled areas to match original factory finish, as approved by Architect. B. Protect countertop surfaces during construction with 6-mil (0.15-mm) plastic or other suitable water-resistant covering. Tape to underside of countertop at a minimum of 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 22 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.8 SERVICE-FITTING SCHEDULE A. Water Mixing Faucet (LF-1): 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Watersaver Colortech CT424-10VB. 2. Fitting Type: Rigid/swing gooseneck. 3. Valve Type: Disc valve, replaceable stainless steel seat. 4. Mounting: Deck mounted. 5. Outlet: Vacuum breaker with aerator. 6. Activation: Wrist blade handles. B. Pure Water (RODI) Faucet (LF-2): 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Watersaver Colortech CT7833MSC. 2. Fitting Type: Rigid gooseneck. 3. Valve Type: Diaphragm. 4. Mounting: Deck mounted. 5. Outlet: Serrated. 6. Activation: Dual-purpose manual or self-closing handle. 7. All polypropylene internal construction. C. Emergency Eye and Face Wash Fitting (EW-1): 1. Basis of Design Product: Watersaver Colortech CTEW1022BP. 2. Valve Type: Squeeze valve. 3. Mounting: Deck mounted. 4. Outlet: Flip top dust cover. 5. Handle: Squeeze handle with locking clip. D. Cabinet Mounted Emergency Shower (SS-1): 1. Basis of Design Product: Watersaver ESBF672-MOD. 2. Valve Type: Stay-open ball valve. 3. Mounting: a. Handle: Recessed in laboratory casework base cabinet. b. Shower Head: Wall-mounted. 4. Outlet: Stainless steel shower head. 5. Handle: Heavy duty stainless steel panic bar with foam grip. E. Laboratory Gas Service Fitting, Panel Mount (LSF-1): 1. Basis of Design Product: Watersaver Colortech CT2880-232SWSA. 2. Type of Fitting: Turret. 3. Mounting: Panel mounted to enclosure at underside of upper shelving units. 4. Valve Type: Needle valve. 5. Outlets: Two. 6. Outlet Type: Straight, removable serrated hose end. 7. Handle: Color-coded hooded handle. F. Laboratory Gas Service Fitting, Wall Mount with Stainless Steel Escutcheon Plate (LSF-2): 1. Basis of Design Product: Watersaver Colortech CT4880FT-325. 2. Services: Vacuum, Air, or Nitrogen. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 23 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. Type of Fitting: Flange type. 4. Mounting: Wall mounted with stainless steel escutcheon plate. 5. Valve Type: Needle valve. 6. Outlets: One. 7. Outlet Type: Straight, removable serrated hose end. 8. Handle: Color-coded hooded handle. G. Pressure Regulator High Purity Gas Service Fitting, Wall Mount (LSF-4): 1. Basis of Design Product: Watersaver Colortech CT4200-364EL-179FT 2. Type of Fitting: Flange type pressure regulator with ball valve. 3. Services: Carbon-dioxide. 4. Mounting: Wall mounted. 5. Valve Type: Ball valve. 6. Outlets: Two. 7. Outlet Type: Straight, removable serrated hose end. 8. Handle: Pressure control dial handle and shut-off lever handle. H. Pressure Regulator High Purity Gas Service Fitting, Wall Mount (LSF-5): 1. Basis of Design Product: Watersaver Colortech CT4200-364EL-179FT 2. Type of Fitting: Flange type pressure regulator with ball valve. 3. Services: Nitrogen. 4. Mounting: Wall mounted. 5. Valve Type: Ball valve. 6. Outlets: Two. 7. Outlet Type: Straight, removable serrated hose end. 8. Handle: Pressure control dial handle and shut-off lever handle. I. Pressure Regulator High Purity Gas Service Fitting, Wall Mount (LSF-6): 1. Basis of Design Product: Watersaver Colortech CT4200-364EL-179FT 2. Type of Fitting: Flange type pressure regulator with ball valve. 3. Services: Oxygen. 4. Mounting: Wall mounted. 5. Valve Type: Ball valve. 6. Outlets: Two. 7. Outlet Type: Straight, removable serrated hose end. 8. Handle: Pressure control dial handle and shut-off lever handle. J. Overhead Gas Manifold: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Watersaver AM10E231-XXX-XX. 2. Description: Three-tier gas manifold assembly. K. Quick Connect Fittings at Gas Manifold Above Lab Benches, (LQC-1): 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Watersaver CT-QCD-B-3M-K_. 2. Services: Vacuum, Air, or Nitrogen. 3. Type of Vacuum Fitting: Flanged brass locking keyed quick connect body. L. Quick Connect Fittings at Top of Lab Bench Legs, (LQC-2): 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Watersaver CT-QCD-B-3F-K_-WSA. 2. Services: Vacuum, Air, or Nitrogen. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 24 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. Type of Vacuum Fitting: Flanged brass locking keyed quick connect body. M. Quick Connect Hoses from Manifold to Lab Bench, (LH-2): 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Watersaver QCD-B-3M-K_, HPV3-XXX-3M-X, QCBL-B-3M-K_. a. Colors: Match colors for each service. 2. Description: Braided stainless steel hose for connection between flexible laboratory bench system and quick connect fittings at point-of-use service panels. 3. Service: Vacuum, Air, or Nitrogen. 4. Pressure Rating: As required to accommodate vacuum, air, or nitrogen service. 5. Type of Hose Fitting at Manifold End: 3/8 inch (9.5-mm) female NPT. 6. Type of Hose Fitting at Lab Bench End: 3/8 inch (9.5-mm) male NPT. 7. Hose Lengths: Coordinate hose lengths with configurations as indicated on Drawings. END OF SECTION 123553 19_0123_Renovation of Olin Hall for CBE-Phase 1_ConformedProject Manual_Vol 2_IFC.pdf CORNELL UNIVERSITY Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PROJECT MANUAL Volume 2 CONFORMED SET 23 January 2019 Owner Cornell University (CU) Ithaca, NY 14850 Architect Payette Associates Architects, P.C. (PAI) 290 Congress Street, Fifth Floor,Boston, MA 02210-1005 MEP/FP Engineer R. G. Vanderweil Engineers, LLP (RGV) 274 Summer Street, Boston, MA 02210 Structural Engineer Simpson Gumpertz & Heger (SGH) 41 Seyon Street, Building #1, Suite 500, Waltham, MA 02453 Civil Engineer T. G. Miller, P.C. (TGM) 203 N. Aurora Street, Ithaca, NY 14850 Code Consultant Hastings Consulting Inc. (HCI) 142 Hanlon Road, Holliston, MA 01746 Lighting Consultant Available Light (AL) 10 Derby Square #3, Salem MA 01970 Abatement Specialist Delta 860 Hooper Road, Endwell, NY 13760 Cost Consultant Dharam 745 Atlantic Ave., Floor 8, Boston, MA 02111 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 DOCUMENT 000110 – TABLE OF CONTENTS Section number Section title Current issue date Author VOLUME 1 DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 000001 PROJECT TITLE PAGE 30NOV18 PAI 000110 TABLE OF CONTENTS 30NOV18 PAI 003126 EXISTING HAZARDOUS MATERIAL INFORMATION 19JUL18 Delta 007200 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT Issued separately DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 010000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 30NOV18 CU 013300A SAMPLE DIGITAL DATA LETTER AGREEMENT 30NOV18 PAI 014533A STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS 30NOV18 SGH 019113 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 30NOV18 HEA DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS 024119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 30NOV18 PAI 028213 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 30NOV18 Delta DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 30NOV18 SGH DIVISION 05 – METALS 051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 30NOV18 SGH 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS 30NOV18 PAI 055119 METAL GRATING STAIRS 30NOV18 PAI 055313 BAR GRATINGS 30NOV18 PAI Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Section number Section title Current issue date Author DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 061053 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 30NOV18 PAI 064023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 30NOV18 PAI DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 071326 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 30NOV18 PAI 072119 FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION 30NOV18 PAI 078100 APPLIED FIREPROOFING 30NOV18 PAI 078413 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 30NOV18 PAI 078443 JOINT FIRESTOPPING 30NOV18 PAI 079200 JOINT SEALANTS 30NOV18 PAI 079219 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS 30NOV18 PAI DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS 080671 DOOR HARDWARE SETS 30NOV18 AA 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 30NOV18 PAI 081216 ALUMINUM FRAMES 30NOV18 PAI 081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 30NOV18 PAI 083113 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 30NOV18 PAI 084229.23 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 30NOV18 PAI 084326 ALL-GLASS STOREFRONTS 30NOV18 PAI 087100 DOOR HARDWARE 30NOV18 AA 088000 GLAZING 30NOV18 PAI 088813 FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING 30NOV18 PAI 089119 FIXED LOUVERS 30NOV18 PAI DIVISION 09 – FINISHES 092116.23 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 30NOV18 PAI 092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 30NOV18 PAI 092900 GYPSUM BOARD 30NOV18 PAI 093013 CERAMIC TILING 30NOV18 PAI 095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 30NOV18 PAI 095427 WOOD GRILLE CEILINGS 30NOV18 PAI 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 30NOV18 PAI Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Section number Section title Current issue date Author 096519 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 30NOV18 PAI 096723 RESINOUS FLOORING 30NOV18 PAI 096813 TILE CARPETING 30NOV18 PAI 098433 SOUND-ABSORBING WALL UNITS 30NOV18 PAI 098436 SOUND-ABSORBING CEILING UNITS 30NOV18 PAI 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING 30NOV18 PAI 099600 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 30NOV18 PAI DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 101100 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 30NOV18 PAI 102600 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 30NOV18 PAI 102800 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 30NOV18 PAI 104413 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 30NOV18 PAI 104416 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 30NOV18 PAI DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT 115300 LABORATORY EQUIPMENT 30NOV18 PAI 115313 LABORATORY FUME HOODS 30NOV18 PAI DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS 122213.13 LIGHT-BLOCKING DRAPERIES 30NOV18 PAI 123553 LABORATORY CASEWORK 30NOV18 PAI VOLUME 2 DIVISION 20 – BUILDING SERVICES 200000 COMMON MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 30NOV18 RGV DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION 210500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 30NOV18 RGV 210553 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 30NOV18 RGV 210800 COMMISSIONING OF FIRE SUPPRESSION 30NOV18 RGV 211300 WATER-BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 30NOV18 RGV Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Section number Section title Current issue date Author 211300A HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS 30NOV18 RGV DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 220500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 30NOV18 RGV 220513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 30NOV18 RGV 220514 COMMON CONTROL PANEL REQUIREMENTS 30NOV18 RGV 220516 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 30NOV18 RGV 220517 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 30NOV18 RGV 220518 ESCUTCHEIONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 30NOV18 RGV 220519 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 30NOV18 RGV 220529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 30NOV18 RGV 220533 HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING 30NOV18 RGV 220548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING 30NOV18 RGV 220553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 30NOV18 RGV 220719 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 30NOV18 RGV 220800 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING 30NOV18 HEA 221110 COMMON PLUMBING PIPING 30NOV18 RGV 221119 WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 30NOV18 RGV 221123 WATER PUMPS 30NOV18 RGV 221319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 30NOV18 RGV 221329 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS 30NOV18 RGV 223300 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS 30NOV18 RGV 224200 COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES 30NOV18 RGV 224500 EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES 30NOV18 RGV 225000 GAS MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEM 30NOV18 RGV 226113 PIPING FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 30NOV18 RGV 226115 LABORATORY GAS MANIFOLDS 30NOV18 RGV 226119 COMPRESSED-AIR EQUPMENT FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 30NOV18 RGV 226219 VACUUM EQUIPMENT FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 30NOV18 RGV 226500 NITROGEN GENERATION SYSTEM 30NOV18 RGV 226701 PURIFIED WATER PIPING – THERMOPLASTICS 30NOV18 RGV 226722 ASTM TYPE II WATER SYSTEMS FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 30NOV18 RGV Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Section number Section title Current issue date Author DIVISION 23 – HVAC 230500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 30NOV18 RGV 230513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 30NOV18 RGV 230519 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAAC PIPING 30NOV18 RGV 230523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 30NOV18 RGV 230529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 30NOV18 RGV 230548 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC 30NOV18 RGV 230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING, DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT 30NOV18 RGV 230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 30NOV18 RGV 230700 HVAC INSULATION 30NOV18 RGV 230800 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 30NOV18 HEA 230900 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 30NOV18 RGV 232113 HYDRONIC PIPING 30NOV18 RGV 232116 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES 30NOV18 RGV 232123 HYDRONIC PUMPS 30NOV18 RGV 232213 STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING 30NOV18 RGV 232216 STEAM AND CONDENSATE SPECIALTIES 30NOV18 RGV 232500 HVAC WATER TREATMENT 30NOV18 RGV 233113 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM - METAL DUCTS 30NOV18 RGV 233416 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 30NOV18 RGV 233600 AIR TERMINAL UNITS 30NOV18 RGV 234100 PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION 30NOV18 RGV 235700 HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC 30NOV18 RGV 237314 CUSTOM CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 30NOV18 RGV 238216 AIR COILS 30NOV18 RGV 238219 FAN COIL UNITS 30NOV18 RGV DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 260500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 30NOV18 RGV 260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 30NOV18 RGV 260519.13 UNDERCARPET ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 30NOV18 RGV 260523 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 30NOV18 RGV 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 30NOV18 RGV Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Section number Section title Current issue date Author 260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 30NOV18 RGV 260533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 30NOV18 RGV 260548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 30NOV18 RGV 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 30NOV18 RGV 260573 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 30NOV18 RGV 260800 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL 30NOV18 HEA 260923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 30NOV18 RGV 260943 NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS 30NOV18 RGV 262200 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 30NOV18 RGV 262416 PANELBOARDS 30NOV18 RGV 262726 WIRING DEVICES 30NOV18 RGV 262813 FUSES 30NOV18 RGV 262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 30NOV18 RGV 262923 VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 30NOV18 RGV 265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING 30NOV18 RGV 265100A LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE 30NOV18 AL 265100B LIGHTING CONTROLS MATRIX 30NOV18 AL 265100C LIGHTING FIXTURE CUT SHEETS 30NOV18 AL DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS 271000 STRUCTURED CABLING 30NOV18 RGV DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 281000 ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEMS 30NOV18 RGV 281500 ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 30NOV18 AA 283105 FIRE ALARM CABLES AND PATHWAYS 30NOV18 RGV 283111 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYTEM 30NOV18 RGV DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK 310000 EARTHWORK 30NOV18 TGM DIVISION 32 – SITE IMPROVEMENTS 329100 PLANTING SOIL 30NOV18 TGM Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Section number Section title Current issue date Author DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES 334000 STORM SEWERAGE 30NOV18 TGM LEGEND Symbol Author Role CU Cornell University OWNER AA Assa Abloy HARDWARE CONSULTANT AL Available Light LIGHTING CONSULTANT Delta Delta HAZARDOUS MATERIALS CONSULTANT Dharam Dharam COST CONSULTANT HCI Hastings Consulting, Inc. CODE CONSULTANT HEA Horizon Engineering Associates, LLP OWNER’S MEP COMMISSIONING PROVIDER PAI Payette Associates Architects. P.C. ARCHITECT RGV R. G. Vanderweil MEP/FP ENGINEERING SGH Simpson, Gumpertz & Heger STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING TGM T. G. Miller, P. C. CIVIL ENGINEERING END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 200000 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 200000 - COMMON MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Some paragraphs in this Section mirror similar paragraphs in Division 01; but those in this section are specific to the mechanical and electrical trades. Contractor shall comply with Division 01 as well as those requirements of this Division that are additional to or more stringent than those in Division 01. C. This section shall apply to the following Divisions: 1. Division 21 - Fire Suppression 2. Division 22 - Plumbing 3. Division 23 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) 4. Division 26 - Electrical 5. Division 27 - Communications 6. Division 28 - Electronic Safety and Security 1.2 SUMMARY A. Give notices, file plans, obtain permits and licenses, pay fees and back charges, and obtain necessary approvals from authorities that have jurisdiction. B. Schedule the submittals of MEP and Fire Protection information required for the occupancy permit with enough time for resubmittal and approval. The required information is listed in Part 3, paragraph “MEP and Fire Protection Completion Requirements”. C. Completely coordinate work of this Division with work of others and provide a complete and fully functional installation. D. Drawings and Specifications form complimentary requirements. Provide work specified and not shown, work shown and not specified as though explicitly required by both. Although work is not specifically shown or specified, provide supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances, devices and materials for a sound, secure and complete installation E. This project is intended to be LEED-certified. Refer to Division 01 for specification of work to be performed by mechanical and electrical trade Contractors. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. As used in all Sections covered by Division 20, "provide" means "furnish and install." "Furnish" means "to purchase and deliver to the project site complete with every necessary appurtenance and support," and "Install" means "to unload at the delivery point at the site and perform every operation necessary to establish secure mounting and correct operation at the proper location in the project. "Architect" means the "Prime Design Consultant." If R.G. Vanderweil Engineers, LLP is not the Prime Design Consultant, the Architect may authorize R.G. Vanderweil Engineers, LLP to act on the Architect's behalf in matters concerning the systems Vanderweil has designed. B. The words “Architect” and “Engineer” may be used interchangeably in the mechanical and electrical Division specifications. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 200000 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. The terms “Contractor,” “General Contractor,” “Construction Manager,” and “Design-Builder,” may appear in the mechanical and electrical Divisions. Wherever such a term is used, it shall mean the entity that is directing all the construction. D. A “substitution” means a product proposed by the Contractor that is from a manufacturer not listed in the individual sections of the Division 20 specifications as an “Acceptable Manufacturer.” E. “AHJ” means “Authorities Having Jurisdiction.” 1.4 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The two dimensional drawings govern the construction. They show the design intent and are part of the Contract Documents. BIM models are not part of contract documents. They are developed for convenience only. B. Except where modified by a specific notation to the contrary, it shall be understood that the indication and/or description of an item in the drawings or specifications or both, carries with it the instruction to furnish and install the item, regardless of whether or not this instruction is explicitly stated as part of the indication or description. C. Items referred to in singular number in Contract Documents shall be provided in quantities necessary to complete work. D. Information and components shown on riser diagrams, but not shown on plans, and vice versa, shall apply or be provided as if expressly required on both. E. In spaces used by building occupants, but not in mechanical rooms, the architectural drawings shall govern the location of visible mechanical and electrical components. In order to obtain the intended aesthetics in such spaces, prior to installation of visible material and equipment (including access panels), review Architectural Drawings for desired locations and where not definitively indicated, request information from Architect. F. Maintain maximum headroom at all locations. All piping, duct, conduit, and associated components to be as tight to underside of structure as possible. G. Systems shall be run in a rectilinear fashion. H. Requirement for Complete Systems and Coordination Adjustments 1. The two dimensional drawings and the BIM model are diagrammatic, whether furnished electronically or in hard copy. They indicate general arrangements of mechanical systems and other work, and are intended to convey sufficient information for skilled contractors and tradesmen to furnish and install complete systems. They are not intended to be absolutely precise; they are not intended to specify or to show every offset, fitting, and component. The purpose of the drawings and BIM model is to indicate a systems concept, the main components of the systems, and the approximate geometrical relationships. Based on the systems concept, the main components, and the approximate geometrical relationships, provide all other components and materials to make the systems fully complete, coordinated with other systems and the structure and space available, and operational. 2. The drawings and BIM model are not designed to the level of detail of contractor’s or manufacturer’s fabrication drawings, shop drawings, sheet metal layout drawings, or coordination drawings. 3. Certain information is specified and is intentionally not included on the drawings and BIM model such as hangers and supports, insulation, and routing of branch circuits. Provide installation in accordance with the specifications. 4. Similarly, the drawings and BIM model do not show all offsets required for coordination nor do they show the exact routings and locations needed to coordinate with structure Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 200000 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 and other trades in order to avoid interferences and to meet ceiling heights and other Architectural requirements. Establish and provide offsets, changes in direction, and exact routings to coordinate all systems. 5. Where conflicts or potential conflicts exist and engineering guidance is desired, submit a “Request for Information” (RFI). 1.5 DISCREPANCIES IN DOCUMENTS A. Where Drawings or Specifications conflict or are unclear, submit clarification request in writing before Award of Contract. Otherwise, Architect's interpretation of Contract Documents shall be final, and no additional compensation shall be permitted due to discrepancies or un-clarities thus resolved. B. Where Drawings or Specifications do not coincide with manufacturers' recommendations or with applicable codes and standards, submit clarification request in form of an RFI before installation. Otherwise, make changes in installed work required for compliance with manufacturer instructions or codes and standards within Contract Price. C. If the required material, installation, or work can be interpreted differently from drawing to drawing, or between drawings and specs, provide material, installation or work that is of the higher standard. D. Provide systems and components that are fully complete and operational and fully suitable for the intended use. Where insufficient information exists in the documents to precisely describe a certain component or subsystem, or the routing of a component or its coordination with other building elements, where notification required by Paragraph (A) above has not been submitted, provide the specific component or subsystem with all parts necessary for the intended use, fully complete and operational, and installed in workmanlike manner either concealed or exposed in accordance with the design intent. E. In cases covered by Paragraph (D) above, where the contractor believes engineering guidance is needed, submit an RFI. F. Where discrepancies exist between the mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, and electrical drawings in regards to what trade owns disconnects or starters, the discrepancy shall be brought to the Architect’s attention in accordance with paragraph (A) above. If the scope is not resolved prior to the Award of Contract, Division 26 shall provide such items. 1.6 CLASH DETECTION A. Coordination drawings are specified in the paragraph titled Coordination Drawings. These are required whether engineering drawings have been produced from 2-D or 3-D models. In the latter case, the Contractor may use a BIM model to perform a clash detection study, and subsequently to work out the significant clashes and update the model, and use this as the basis for coordination drawings. The engineer will provide his BIM model for the contractor’s use for this purpose if the contractor so requests and signs the appropriate release. B. The great majority of clashes in a BIM model involve non-clashing adjacencies or interferences of small MEP components, like piping 2 inches or less in diameter (excluding insulation). Such clashes shall be worked out by the contractor as part of his coordination effort. If a clash consists of a major routing or other impasse, upon submittal of an RFI, the engineer will provide guidance. 1.7 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFI’S) A. Where an RFI is a request to resolve a conflict or an un-clarity, or a request for additional detail, contractor’s RFI shall include a sketch or equivalent description of contractor’s proposed solution. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 200000 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. To expedite the processing of RFIs, submit the attached form, or similar form including the same information to the Architect, with a copy to the Engineer. Include Contractor proposed solution, with sketches as required, in the indicated space on the form. C. The form and all RFI related documents shall be submitted as one PDF (non-binder) format file, without password protection. If it is impossible to convert some information to PDF, it may be submitted as a second file, not password protected. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 200000 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 RFI FORM RFI No. ________________ Date Submitted : Contractor: Date Required: Job Name: Person: Spec. Sec./Dwg. No.: Contr. Fax No.: Vanderweil Fax No.: (617) 423-7401 Arch. Fax No.: Contractor Field Question (Provide narrative and/or sketch): Contractor Proposed Solution (Provide narrative and/or sketch): Vanderweil Response: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 200000 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.8 COORDINATION DRAWINGS AND COORDINATION MODEL A. Coordination drawings are required for all Divisions covered by this Section. These drawings require information on all mechanical and electrical trades. The content and procedures described in Division 01 shall be followed, with the additional requirements specifically for the mechanical and electrical trades as described in this Section. If a BIM model is not used on this project, the below requirements shall be accomplished in CAD. B. The main paths of egress and for equipment removal from main mechanical and electrical rooms shall be clearly shown on the coordination drawings. C. The initiation of these drawings begins with the Sheet Metal Subcontractor’s BIM model and the resultant sheet metal shop drawings. D. The Sheet Metal Subcontractor’s BIM model shall incorporate the sheet metal as well as structure and other information for spatial coordination. Provide cross sections in congested areas. Access panels shall be shown, as well as all fire walls and smoke partitions, which shall be shown in a different color than the regular partitions and the sheet metal. E. Each of the mechanical, electrical and other specialty trades shall electronically add its work to the model in a separate color, with appropriate offsets, elevations and grid dimensions, and showing access panels. Mechanical, electrical, and specialty trade information is required for fan rooms and mechanical rooms, horizontal exits from duct shafts, crossovers, and for spaces in and above ceilings. Drawings shall indicate horizontal and vertical dimensions to avoid interference with structural framing, ceilings, partitions, and other services. F. The following shall be submitted to the Engineer for review: 1. The 3-D electronic model showing all trades and color coded by trade. 2. For HVAC review: a. An electronic set of 2-D PDFs of all floor plans and sections, made from the 3-D electronic model showing all trades color coordinated. b. An electronic set of 2-D PDFs of all floor plans, made from the 3-D electronic model, but showing only the HVAC superimposed on the architectural layout. 3. For electrical review: a. An electronic set of 2-D PDFs of all floor plans and sections, made from the 3-D electronic model showing all trades color coordinated. b. An electronic set of 2-D PDFs of all floor plans, made from the 3-D electronic model, but showing only the electrical superimposed on the architectural layout. 4. For plumbing review: a. An electronic set of 2-D PDFs of all floor plans and sections, made from the 3-D electronic model showing all trades color coordinated. b. An electronic set of 2-D PDFs of all floor plans, made from the 3-D electronic model, but showing only the plumbing superimposed on the architectural layout. 5. For fire protection review: a. An electronic set of 2-D PDFs of all floor plans and sections, made from the 3-D electronic model showing all trades color coordinated. b. An electronic set of 2-D PDFs of all floor plans, made from the 3-D electronic model, but showing only the fire protection superimposed on the architectural layout. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 200000 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 6. One complete set of 2-D coordination drawings, printed out full size with individual trades superimposed and color coded. G. The 2-D PDFs are considered the coordination drawings. The engineering review is based on these, not on the 3-D model, which the engineer may need to refer to for clarification in congested spaces. H. Fabrication shall not start until the coordinated model, PDF’s, and prints are received by the Engineer and have been reviewed. I. Review by Engineer of coordination drawings is limited to confirming that requirements for coordination and preparation of plans have been complied with by the Contractor and shall not diminish responsibility under this Contract for final coordination of installation and maintenance clearances of all systems and equipment with Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, Electrical and other related work. J. After Review: 1. The Engineer will provide comments. 2. All changes to reviewed coordination drawings shall be approved in writing by the Architect prior to start of work in affected area. K. Coordination Drawings shall include, but are not limited to: 1. Plumbing systems, piping and equipment. 2. HVAC piping, systems and equipment. 3. Control systems. 4. Electrical distribution, systems and equipment. 5. Lighting systems and fixtures. 6. Sheet metal work, components and accessories (e.g. coils, terminal boxes). 7. Fire protection and sprinkler system, piping and heads. 8. Structural. 9. Electrical Equipment Room layouts. 10. Environmental Rooms and associated refrigeration/heating systems. 11. Partition/room layout. 12. Ceiling tile and grid 13. Access panels. 14. Smoke and fire dampers. 15. Roof drain piping. 16. Major electrical conduit runs, panel boards, feeder conduit and racks of branch conduit. 17. Above ceiling miscellaneous metal. 18. Heat tracing of piping. 1.9 ENGINEER’S ELECTRONIC BIM FILES A. Electronic BIM files for Fire Protection, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, or Electronic Safety and Security drawings will be furnished by Engineer at contractor’s request. These files will be provided on Engineer’s FTP site in the software release used by the Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 200000 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Engineer. If other media or software version is requested, Engineer will require advance reimbursement of processing costs. B. Requests should be made by filling out the following form letter and providing an authorized signature. The requested information will not be released prior to receipt of this letter for the appropriate documents. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON MECHANICAL/ELECTRI CAL REQUIREMENTS 200000 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 [DATE] R.G. Vanderweil Engineers, LLP Attn: [NAME] [ADDRESS] Re: [JOB NAME] Dear [NAME]: We hereby request that you provide us with the following electronic files: [ELECTRONIC FILE Name, date of file, description] R.G. Vanderweil Engineers, LLP (“Vanderweil”) agrees to provide the above-referenced electronic files to [________] (the “Recipient.”). Recipient recognizes that data recorded on or transmitted as electronic files are subject to undetectable alteration, either intentional or unintentional, due to among other causes, transmission, conversion, media degradation, software error, or human alteration. Accordingly, the electronic files are provided to Recipient for informational purposes only and not as an end product or Contract Document. Vanderweil makes no warranties, either express or implied, regarding the fitness or suitability of the electronic files. The electronic files are instruments of professional service, and shall not be used, in whole or in part, for any project other than that for which they were created, without the express written consent of Vanderweil Engineers. Accordingly, Recipient agrees to waive any and all claims against Vanderweil resulting in any way from the use, unauthorized reuse or alteration, or misuse of the electronic files, and to defend, indemnify and hold Vanderweil harmless from any claims, losses, damages, or costs, including attorney’s fees, arising out of the use, reuse, alteration, or misuse of the electronic files. Further: 1. Recipient agrees that any electronic/model data provided in the Electronic Files is for reference only and does not relieve the contractor and subcontractors from the responsibility for material take offs and cost estimations, coordination of systems, sequencing, and means and methods. 2. Recipient agrees not to sell, assign or lease any rights in the designs, models, drawings, information and depicted works in any form to any person or entity. 3. Recipient agrees not to remove any copyright notices, labels or marks on the designs, drawings, information and depicted works. 4. Under no circumstances shall the transfer of ownership of electronic data, or hard copy thereof, be deemed to be a sale by Vanderweil of tangible goods, and Vanderweil makes no warranties, express or implied, of merchantability or of fitness for a particular purpose. 5. The Electronic Files issued are current as of the date of the last revisions as imbedded in the files. Vanderweil is not responsible or liable for providing any updates or modifications that may or may not have occurred since the revision dates shown in the files. The Electronic Files may also represent only a portion - not a complete set - of the construction documents or model data and, as such, they may be incomplete or inconsistent with the most recent design. Vanderweil makes no representation as to its completeness, currency or accuracy and Vanderweil shall not be responsible to advise the Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 200000 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Recipient of any changes which may hereafter be made to the Project plan or configuration or other information contained in the Electronic Files. 6. Recipient acknowledges that the designs, drawings, information and depicted works are protected by copyright laws, and that Vanderweil, or its Consultants, as appropriate, is the author and/or owner of same. 7. Vanderweil , or its Consultants, as appropriate, retains all copyrights to the designs, drawings, information and depicted works on the disk and grants to Recipient a limited license to reproduce such information in connection with Recipient or their contractors’ or subcontractors work on the Project, and no other. 8. If specifications are provided, recipient agrees not to modify same. 9. If BIM models are provided, the following shall apply: ▪ Contract Documents Govern the Project. Recipient agrees that, notwithstanding the use of BIM technology and the transfer of BIM Data, the specifications, and the 2-dimensional Contract Documents and subsequently issued Change Orders, Change Directives, Bulletins, RFI Responses and the like are the sole source of information regarding the requirements for construction of the Project. Recipient will notify Vanderweil if it becomes aware of discrepancy between the BIM Data and any drawing, specification or other document issued for construction of the Project. ▪ BIM (i.e. Revit/Navisworks) models and associated files will only contain elements and content that Vanderweil Engineers deems necessary and as required to produce the two dimensional drawings that govern the project. No specific Level of Detail (LOD) is implied or expected. The Recipient agrees that no Revit families or Revit content shall be removed from the model and/or used for any other purpose than supporting this specific project. ▪ The BIM model is for general informational and reference purposes only, and is not to be used by the contractor as an alternative to performing field measurements, preparing coordination drawings, or developing shop drawings. Access to the BIM model does not relieve the contractor of the contractual responsibility to implement the design intent through various means. These means include verifying existing conditions, producing coordination drawings (compiled from various sub-contractors), preparing shop drawings, and controlling means and methods of construction. 10. If an Energy Model is required, the following will apply: • Vanderweil has created a comparative energy model for the project to either: (1) inform design by comparing alternative designs, or (2) to determine compliance with codes or LEED requirements by comparing against a reference building, in both cases using reference weather data. The models use industry standard tools such as eQuest or Trane-Trace. • The models are for comparative purposes and are not intended to predict actual energy, since in the actual building, the operation, installed components, weather, control setpoints and many other parameters will be different than the inputs, defaults, and assumptions used in the comparative model. • This computerized energy model is being transmitted with the following understanding: (1) The recipient acknowledges the purpose and limitations of Vanderweil’s energy model, as described above. (2) The recipient can operate the model only for the building it was developed for. (3) Vanderweil is not expected to analyze or comment on modeling results obtained by the recipient, which are expected to be different than those obtained by Vanderweil. (4) Vanderweil is not Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 200000 - 11 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 expected to explain the assumptions, inputs and defaults used in the model, although if requested, Vanderweil will provide the occupancy, plug load, and lighting schedules used. (5) Vanderweil is not expected to conduct additional runs of the model with changes to the assumptions, inputs, and defaults that it used. Accepted and Agreed: Authorized signature: Print Name: Title: Company: Date: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 200000 - 12 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.10 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS A. The following work is not included and shall be performed under other Sections. Coordinate requirements with other Divisions. 1. Excavation and backfill. 2. Concrete work, including concrete housekeeping pads and other pads and blocks for vibrating and rotating equipment, and cast in place manholes and handholes. 3. Cutting and patching of masonry, concrete, tile and other parts of structure, with the exception of drilling for hangers and providing holes and openings in metal decks. 4. Flashing of wall and roof penetrations. 5. Installation of access panels in floors, walls, furred spaces or above ceilings. 6. Painting, except as specified herein. 7. Structural supports necessary to distribute loading from equipment to roof or floor except as specified herein. 8. Temporary light, power, water, heat, gas and sanitary facilities for use during construction and testing. 9. Outdoor air intake and exhaust louvers. 10. Wall and ceiling enclosures and shafts for supply, return and exhaust ductwork as shown on drawings. B. Installation of circuit breakers (furnished by ATC Contractor) and final electrical panel terminal connections for ATC control power wiring shall be provided by Division 26. C. Electric power wiring for all equipment shall be provided by Division 26. 1.11 SITE VISIT A. Before submitting bid, visit and carefully examine site to identify existing conditions and difficulties that will affect work of this Section. No extra payment will be allowed for additional work caused by unfamiliarity with site conditions that are visible or readily construed by an experienced observer. 1.12 EXISTING CONDITIONS AND PREPARATORY WORK A. Before starting work in a particular area of the project, visit the location and examine conditions under which work must be performed including preparatory work done under other Sections or other Contracts or by the Owner. Review geometrical constraints, such as ceiling heights, to ensure constructability and access for maintenance. Report conditions that might adversely affect work in writing to the Architect. Do not proceed with work until defects have been corrected and conditions are satisfactory. Commencement of work shall be construed as complete acceptance of existing conditions and preparatory work. B. Existing Concrete Slabs. Before coring or other penetration of existing slabs, scan the area where the work is to be performed in order to locate existing in-slab or below-slab utilities, and position the slab penetrations so as to avoid these. 1.13 CODES, STANDARDS, AUTHORITIES AND PERMITS A. Perform work in accordance with rules, regulations, standards, codes, ordinances, and laws of local, state, and Federal governments, and other authorities that have legal jurisdiction over the site. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 200000 - 13 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Secure and pay for all permits and inspections required by the Authorities having Jurisdiction. Secure trade permits prior to beginning work. C. Materials and equipment shall be manufactured, installed and tested as specified in latest editions of applicable publications, standards, rulings and determinations of: 1. Applicable local and state codes. 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 3. American Insurance Association (AIA) (formerly National Board of Fire Underwriters). 4. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA). 5. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 6. Factory Mutual Association (FM) 7. Owner’s Insurance Underwriter. D. Specific reference is made to the following NFPA standards which contain an exceptionally high quantity of mechanical, electrical, and fire protection requirements. These standards as referenced by the applicable building, fire, and mechanical codes shall apply. 1. No. 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems 2. No. 14 - Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems 3. No. 20 - Installation of Centrifugal Fire Pumps 4. No. 30 - Combustible Liquids 5. No. 37 - Installation of Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines 6. No. 45 - Fire Protection for Laboratories Using Chemicals 7. No. 70 - National Electric Code 8. No. 72 - National Fire Alarm Code 9. No. 101 - Life Safety Code E. Material and equipment shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories (UL). F. When requirements cited in the various parts of the Contract Documents conflict with each other, most stringent shall govern work. Architect may relax this requirement when relaxation does not violate ruling of AHJ. Approval for relaxation shall be obtained from AHJ in writing. G. Unless indicated otherwise, the most recent editions of applicable specifications and publications of the following organizations form part of these Contract Documents. Material and Equipment shall be approved by the relevant organizations for intended service. 1. American Gas Association (AGA). 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 4. National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 5. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 6. American Water Works Association (AWWA). 7. American Society for Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE). 8. Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA). 9. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA). Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 200000 - 14 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 10. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI). 11. Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association (TIMA). 12. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). 13. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA). 14. Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve & Fittings Industry (MSS) 1.14 WARRANTY AND 24 HOUR SERVICE A. This Paragraph shall not be interpreted to limit Owner's rights under applicable codes and laws and under this Contract. B. Part 2 paragraphs of all specification Sections may specify warranty requirements that exceed those of this Paragraph. C. Warranty the Work of this Section in writing for one year following the date of Substantial Completion. If the equipment is used for ventilation, temporary heat, or other use prior to initial beneficial occupancy by the Owner, the bid price shall include an extended period of warranty covering the one-year of beneficial occupancy by the Owner. The warranty shall be to repair or replace defective products, materials, equipment, workmanship and installation that develop within this period promptly and to Architect's satisfaction, and to correct damage caused in making necessary repairs and replacements under warranty within Contract Price. D. In addition to warranty requirements of Division 01 and of Paragraph C above, obtain written equipment and material warranties offered in manufacturer's published data, without exclusion or limitation, in Owner's name. E. Replace material and equipment that require excessive service during warranty period. Excessive service shall be defined as more than three service calls for the same material or equipment within a 12 month period. F. Provide 24-hour service beginning on the date of Substantial Completion and lasting until the termination of the warranty period. Service may be provided by a separate service organization subject to Owner approval. Submit name and a phone number that will be answered on a 24hour basis each day of the week, for the duration of the service. G. Submit copies of equipment and material warranties before final payment. H. Use of systems provided under this Section for temporary services and facilities shall NOT constitute Final Acceptance of work nor beneficial use by Owner, and shall not institute warranty period. I. Provide manufacturer's engineering and technical staff at site to analyze and rectify problems that develop during warranty period immediately. If problems cannot be rectified immediately to Owner's satisfaction, advise Architect in writing, describe efforts to rectify situation, and provide analysis of cause of problem. Architect will recommend course of action. 1.15 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: The Engineer’s design for each product is based on the single manufacturer listed in the schedule or shown on the drawings. In Part 2 of the individual Specification Sections certain Alternate Manufacturers may be listed as being acceptable. These are acceptable only if, as a minimum, they are in compliance with the following requirements: 1. Meet all performance criteria listed in the schedules and outlined in the specification. For example, to be acceptable, an air handling unit must deliver equal CFM against equal external static pressure using equal or less horsepower as the air handler listed in the schedules. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 200000 - 15 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Have identical operating characteristics to those called for in the specification. For example, a reciprocating compressor will not be acceptable if a rotary model is specified. 3. Fit within the available space it was designed for, including space for maintenance and component removal, with no modification to either the space or the product. Clearances to walls, ceilings and other equipment will be at least equal to those shown on the design drawings. The fact that a manufacturer’s name appears as acceptable shall not be taken to mean that the Architect has determined that the manufacturer’s products will fit within the available space - this determination is solely the responsibility of the contractor. 4. For rooftop mounted equipment and for equipment mounted in areas where structural matters are a consideration, the products must have a weight no greater than the product listed in the schedules or specifications. 5. Products must adhere to all architectural considerations including, but not limited to: being of the same color as the product scheduled or specified, fitting within architectural enclosures and details, and for diffusers and plumbing fixtures - being the same size and of the same physical appearance as scheduled for specified products. 1.16 DEVIATIONS A. Proposed deviations from Contract Documents shall be requested individually in wiring whether deviations result from field conditions, standard shop practice, or other cause. Submit letter with transmittal of Shop Drawings which flags the deviation to the attention of the Architect. B. Without letters flagging the deviation to the Architect, it is possible that the Architect may not notice such deviation or may not realize its ramifications. Therefore, if such letter are not submitted to the Architect, the Contractor shall hold the Architect and his consultants harmless for any and all adverse consequences resulting from deviations being implemented. This shall apply regardless of whether the Architect has reviewed or approved shop drawings containing the deviation, and will be strictly enforced. C. Approval of proposed deviations, if any, will be made at discretion of the Architect. 1.17 SUBMITTALS A. This Paragraph supplements Division 01. B. Besides shop drawings, which are submitted relatively early in the project, code-required information on life safety and other systems is required to be submitted prior to claiming construction completion and filing for an occupancy permit. Refer to Part 3 of these specifications. C. Definitions 1. Submittals include product data, shop drawings, coordination drawings, and sheet metal shop drawings. Product data and shop drawings are information prepared to illustrate, in more detail than shown on the contract documents, the fixtures, equipment and other components of the work as proposed by the contractor. These are action submittals. 2. Coordination Drawings are detailed, large-scale layout Shop Drawings showing HVAC, Electrical, Plumbing and Fire Protection work superimposed in order to identify conflicts, ensure inter-coordination of Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, Architectural, Structural and other work, and to conform the engineering layouts to best construction practices. Coordination drawings are information submittals. 3. Sheet Metal Shop Drawings are 3/8 inch scale detailed sheet metal layouts showing all offsets, fittings, and hangers and supports, and other appurtances. These are information submittals. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 200000 - 16 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 4. Electronic Copy means copy in a searchable PDF format, and excludes scanned material and faxed material. Scanned material and faxed material shall not be submitted. D. Submittal Cover Sheet 1. In addition to the information required for all submittals on the project as specified in Division 01, provide the below special cover sheet for submittals falling within Division 20, 21, 22, 23, 26, 27 and 28. Information on the special cover sheet shall be completely filled out. Submit a separate cover sheet with shop drawings for each section of the specifications. 2. Where the section specifies a class of products (for example, plumbing fixtures, wiring devices, insulation) the submission for that section shall either be complete, including all products within that class or it shall contain an index listing all products within that class and designating which ones are included with that submittal. Where the submission covers more than one product, the information required on the cover sheet shall be clearly differentiated by product if it does not apply in common for all included products. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 200000 - 17 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SUBMITTAL COVER SHEET PROJECT: DATE: DIVISION NO. SECTION NO. PARA. NO. DESCRIPTION: CONTRACTOR: CONTRACT DRAWING REFERENCE NO: EQUIPMENT TAG (From Dwg. Schedules): SUBMISSION (check one): First Second Third Fourth INFORMATION AND CHECKLIST 1. Direct contact information for product representative or supplier to which questions can be referred (name, address, phone number, and email address). Name: Address: Phone Number: Email: Comment 2. Are all specified or scheduled items included and exactly match scheduled/specified items? Yes No 3. Is this item a substitution or other deviation? If so, follow procedures In Section 012500. Yes No 4. Does equipment fit space shown on construction documents, coordination drawings, and actual field conditions? Yes No 5. Does this material/equipment add expense to other trades or project costs? Yes No 6. Is control interface coordinated? Yes No 7. List electrical characteristics (Voltage/Phase/Hz/Amps) Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 200000 - 18 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 E. Submittal Contents, Format, Procedures 1. For the submittals covered by Division 20, Contractor review of submittals is intended to ensure that the submittals include the foregoing cover sheet, are in the correct electronic or paper format as specified below, and that the specified item physically fits into the space available. Contractor shall verify that the submittal contains adequate information to verify specification requirements as well as the performance and dimensional requirements shown on the drawings. 2. HVAC controls shall be coordinated with any package controls provided with equipment to ensure that the HVAC controls submittal includes all required sequences. 3. Submittal Contents a. Submittals shall be comprehensive and fully self-contained. b. Submittals shall include page numbers to allow reviewer to identify specific location where comment applies. c. Electronic submittals shall be fully self-contained and shall not contain links to associated websites. The submittal coversheet, transmittal, and document shall be prepared as one searchable PDF (non-binder) format file, without password protection. If it is not possible to convert some material into PDF, it is acceptable to submit this as a second file. d. Submittals shall include all catalog data and physical and performance characteristics and plans and diagrams as necessary to confirm compliance with plans and specifications. e. Submittals shall contain only information relevant to the particular equipment or materials to be furnished. Clearly indicate the piece of equipment or material being provided. Do not submit generic catalog cuts which describe several different items in addition to those specific items being provided, unless all irrelevant information is marked out or relevant information is clearly differentiated. Those items and features that are not being proposed for this project shall be crossed out so as not to imply that they are included. f. Where applicable, equipment Product Data shall include wiring and interlock diagrams using the standard wiring diagrams with all terminals, which have been provided for use by the various Subcontractors clearly indicated. For example, remote start/stop wiring from BMS system to a motor control center shall be clearly identified. g. Provide shop drawing submittals showing details of piping connections to ALL equipment. If connection details are not submitted and connections are installed incorrectly in the field, reinstall within the original contract price. h. Division 23 shop drawings and installation layout drawings for heating, pumping, process piping, and refrigeration systems prepared by the Installer shall note name(s), license number(s), and license expiration dates of the installing firm. i. Submit the following for review, including a submittal cover sheet for each product: 1) Electronic copy (see above requirements for electronic copy) for each submittal. j. Submit electronic copy with cover sheet plus one paper copy in 11x17 format with cover sheet, by overnight mail for all controls submittals. F. Sheet Metal Shop Drawings Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 200000 - 19 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. The Sheet Metal Subcontractor shall prepare a complete electronic background model in a current version of AutoCAD, REVIT, or Navisworks. Request for use of an alternative software shall be submitted to the Architect for approval before preparation of shop drawings. This background shall be used to develop sheet metal shop drawings. Electronic copy of these shall be submitted, containing sufficient plans, elevations, sections, details and schematics to describe work clearly. Plans shall be 3/8 inch = 1 foot-0 inches scale and shall indicate work of other Sections where physical clearances are critical and where interferences are possible. Provide larger scale details to show complete installation. Sheet metal drawings shall show elements of Architect's reflected ceiling plan, exposed ductwork, walls, partitions, diffusers, registers, grilles, fire dampers, sleeves and other aspects of construction for coordination. Show horizontal and vertical offsets and changes of direction. Show all firewalls and smoke partitions. These are action submittals. 2. These shop drawings shall be submitted before the coordination drawings are prepared, and once the Architect’s comments are received back shall serve as the starting point for coordination drawings as specified above. G. Post-Submittal Actions 1. After review, Contractor to receive electronically transmitted response report for all reviewed submittals which includes the following information: a. Submittal status b. List of reviewer’s comments c. Copy of returned submittal. All submittals will be returned electronically, with the exception of coordination drawings, which will have one copy returned with comments through overnight mail. d. Re-submittals shall be complete and shall include a cover letter summarizing the corrections made in response to the review comments and the submittal page numbers which were revised. e. Submittal Status: Electronic and paper submittals will be returned notated as illustrated below: "APPROVED AS NOTED" "REJECTED; REVISE AND RESUBMIT" “Reviewed and found generally acceptable. Minor deviations may be noted. No further submittal required if notations are complied with." “Submittal contains deviations which shall be corrected and confirmed by a new submittal." "REJECTED" Submittal is incorrect to such an extent that material is unacceptable, or is incomplete to such an extent that a complete review cannot be made. Resubmit in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents." "NO ACTION" Submittal not reviewed. “REVIEWED FOR INFORMATION” This Submittal is for information only. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 200000 - 20 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Where initial submittal is rejected, revised submittal shall be labelled identically to previous submittal and shall include a memo identifying where each comment has been address in the new version. H. Responsibility 1. Intent of Architect’s submittal review is to check for capacity, rating, and certain construction features. Contractor shall ensure that work meets requirements of Contract Documents regarding information that pertains to fabrication processes or means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction; and for coordination of work of this and other Sections. Work shall comply with submittals marked “APPROVED AS NOTED” to extent that they agree with Contract Documents. Submittal review shall not diminish responsibility under this Contract for dimensional coordination, quantities, installation, wiring, supports and access for service, nor shop drawing errors or deviations from requirements of Contract Documents. Noting of some errors while overlooking others will not excuse proceeding in error. Contract Documents requirements are not limited, waived nor superseded by review. 2. Inform Subcontractors, Manufacturers and Suppliers of scope and limited nature of review process and enforce compliance with contract documents. I. Schedule: Incorporate shop drawing review period into construction schedule so that Work is not delayed. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for delays caused by not incorporating the following shop drawing review time requirements into his project schedule. Working days listed refer to the time in the Engineer's office. It does not include transmittal or review time of others. Unless longer review periods are specified in Division 01, allow at least 10 working days, exclusive of transmittal time, for review each time shop drawing is submitted or resubmitted for Divisions covered by this Section, with the exception that 20 working days, exclusive of transmittal time, are required for the following: 1. HVAC temperature control submittals. 2. HVAC balancing report. 3. Coordination Drawings. 4. Distribution equipment including Panelboards. 5. Short circuit and coordination study 6. Fire protection fabrication drawings. 7. If more than five shop drawings of a single trade are received in one calendar week. 1.18 RECORD DRAWINGS AND PHOTOS A. The photos called for in this paragraph are in addition to those required in Division 01 (the latter are general construction progress/status photos). The photos required here are specifically for the mechanical and electrical trades in concealed areas and shall be included in the base contract(s) for these trades. B. As work progresses and for duration of Contract, maintain complete and separate set of prints of Contract Drawings at job site at all times. Record work completed and all changes from original Contract Drawings. Such changes shall include, but not be limited to, those resulting from RFIs, field conditions, and modifications and additions. Include actual locations of MEP/FP systems and existing and new utilities. Record valve tags as they are installed. C. Photos. Take photographs of all concealed systems and equipment in inaccessible ceilings, shafts, underground (buried) piping routes and other concealed, not readily-accessible areas. At completion of work, make copies of photographs with written explanation on back, or, at Architect’s request, submit digitally. These are information submittals. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 200000 - 21 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. Underground and utility work shall be located by distances to landmarks, such as building foundations. Give actual dimensions of everything installed including elevations and elevations at each change in direction. E. Drawings shall show record condition of details, sections, riser diagrams, control changes and corrections to schedules. Schedules shall show actual manufacturer and make and model numbers of final equipment installation. F. “Record Drawings” are a complete set of drawings containing the information in (B), (D) and (E) above, and shall be accompanied by the photographs in (C) above. If BIM is used to create the record drawings, the model shall incorporate all the above information and be developed to AIA LOD 500. G. The installing Contractor shall certify Record Drawings for accuracy. The Architect/Engineer will not certify the accuracy of the record drawings - this is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. H. If required by the Authority having jurisdiction, each trade shall submit a set of record drawings for approval by the Authority. Format for submission shall be acceptable to the Authority. Drawing format and size changes, and supplemental information required for the submittal are the responsibility of the installing contractor. Provide copies of submittal to the Construction Manager, General Contractor, Owner, Architect, and Engineer. I. At completion of work, prepare a complete set of record drawings with all markups incorporated in electronic format. Deliver these to the Architect for approval. Vanderweil can provide 2-D CAD drawings of its BIM model to the contractor to serve as the basis for the electronic format drawings, upon signing of a release. J. After approval, final record drawing deliverable shall be as defined in Division 01. After approval, final record drawings submitted shall be as required by Division 01. 1.19 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS – ELECTRONIC FORMAT A. Section 017823 describes requirements for Operating and Maintenance Manuals, and Section 017900 describes requirements for training and operating instructions. This section includes additional requirements specifically for the mechanical and electrical trades. B. “Electronic Format” means searchable PDF format. It does not include scanned items, which are considered inappropriate. C. Obtain at time of purchase of equipment, electronically formatted versions of operation, lubrication, and maintenance manuals for all items. Assemble this literature along with other information in coordinated electronic manuals with additional information describing combined operation of field assembled units, including as-built wiring diagrams. Manual shall contain names and addresses of manufacturers and local representatives who stock or furnish repair parts for items or equipment. Divide manuals into three sections or books as follows: 1. Engineering flow diagrams and controls sequences from project mechanical drawings, approved automatic temperature controls submittal, equipment startup procedures and operational instructions. Startup and operational instructions shall list valves, switches, and other devices used to start, stop and control systems. Describe procedure to be followed in case of malfunctions. Include approved valve directory showing each valve number, location of each valve, and equipment or fixture controlled by valve. 2. Detailed maintenance and troubleshooting manuals containing data furnished by manufacturer for complete maintenance. Include copy of balancing report. 3. Lubrication instructions detailing type of lubricant, amount, and intervals recommended by manufacturer for each item of equipment. Include additional instructions necessary for implementation of first class lubrication program. Include approved summary of lubrication instructions in chart form, where appropriate. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 200000 - 22 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. Submit electronic format version of manual(s) for approval. After approval, submit electronic version and one hard copy for distribution to Owner. Deliver manuals no less than 30 days prior to acceptance of equipment to permit Owner's personnel to become familiar with equipment and operation prior to acceptance. 1.20 OPERATING INSTRUCTION A. Upon completion of installation, prior to Owner accepting portions of building and equipment for operational use, instruct Owner's operating personnel in operation of systems and equipment. Instruction shall be performed by equipment and controls vendors’ factory-trained personnel. Owner shall determine which systems require additional instruction. Duration of instructions for controls shall take equipment through complete cycle of operation (at least five working days). (Not to be confused with the two-week demonstration of automatic controls operation specified in Part 3.) Make necessary adjustments under operating conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS CERTIFICATION OF COMPLETION A. Definitions 1. Life Safety Systems - Mechanical and electrical systems including: a. Fire Suppression Systems b. Fire Notification (Alarm) and Detection Systems c. Egress Signage and Lighting Systems d. Emergency Power Systems 2. Complete - For a system to be complete the following shall be true: a. No further work is required to satisfy the requirements specified in the drawings, specifications and applicable codes and standards. b. Systems are fully operational with power to components, valves open, status indicators in "normal" condition and otherwise ready "as-is" to perform required functions. c. Required product data and shop drawing submittals have been submitted and returned with a "Reviewed" status. See Paragraph titled “Submittals” for submittal requirements. d. Test certificates have been submitted and returned with a ”Approved as Noted” status. See Paragraph titled “Submittals”. e. Project visit report observations and "punch list" items have been addressed and/or corrected. f. "O&M" documentation and "as-built" plans have been submitted and returned with a "Reviewed" status. B. Notification of Completion 1. Notify the Architect in writing that the life safety systems are complete at least five (5) working days prior to requesting final certification of completion ("affidavits") from the Architect. The notification shall be in the form of a single formal document endorsed by Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 200000 - 23 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 an individual charged with management responsibility for all trades associated with the life safety systems. 2. Schedule work so life safety systems are complete in advance of other systems. This requirement is to allow the Architect to conduct a final project visit and correction of issues found without affecting issuance of a Substantial Completion Certificate or a Certificate of Occupancy by the Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 3. Operate and maintain systems and equipment until final acceptance by the Owner and AHJ. 4. All guarantees and warranties shall not begin until final acceptance of the systems and equipment by the Owner and AHJ. Acceptance requires, at a minimum, completed systems testing and inspections. 3.2 SPECIAL RESPONSIBILITIES A. Cooperate and coordinate with work of other Sections in executing work of this Section. 1. Perform work so that progress of entire project including work of other Sections shall not be interfered with or delayed. 2. Provide information requested on items furnished under one Section which shall be installed under other Sections. 3. For equipment provided under any division or section which has connection made under the mechanical or electrical sections, obtain detailed installation and hookup information from the equipment manufacturers. 4. Obtain final roughing dimensions or other information needed for complete installation of items furnished under other Sections or by Owner. 5. Keep fully informed as to shape, size and position of openings required for material or equipment to be provided under all Sections. Give full information so that openings required by work of this Section may be coordinated with other work and other openings and may be provided for in advance. In case of failure to provide sufficient information in proper time, provide cutting and patching or have same done, at own expense and to full satisfaction of Architect. 6. Provide information requested as to sizes, number and locations of concrete housekeeping pads necessary for floor-mounted vibrating and rotating equipment provided under this Section. 7. Notify Architect of location and extent of existing piping, conduit, ductwork and equipment that interferes with new construction. In coordination with and with approval of Architect, relocate piping, ductwork and equipment to permit new work to be provided. Remove non-functioning and abandoned piping, ductwork and equipment. Dispose of or store items. B. Building Expansion Joints and Firewalls 1. Ductwork, conduit, cable tray, piping, and other horizontal distribution systems shall be provided with expansion provisions when passing by building expansion joints. Provide copper ground jumper across expansion joints for electrical components. Systems shall be run through rated walls, partitions, and floors via approved fireproofed sleeves. C. Installation Shall Provide Access to Systems 1. Installation shall allow clearances for easy access to systems for routine maintenance, for repairs, and for installing new cable in conduit and cable trays. 2. Access panels shall be installed in ceilings that are not composed of removable tiles. These shall be located where system components exist that have moving parts, motors, Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 200000 - 24 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 or other components requiring periodic maintenance, adjustment, or replacement. Access panels shall be shown on Coordination Drawings and shall be of the type and finish approved by the Architect. D. Protection of Work 1. Each contractor shall be responsible for work and equipment until finally inspected, tested, and accepted. Carefully store materials and equipment that is not immediately installed after delivery to site. Close open ends of work with temporary covers or plug during construction to prevent entry of obstructing material. Cover work subject to falling debris with temporary covers. 2. Provide all materials, equipment and labor to provide adequate protection of all equipment during the course of construction. This includes protection from moisture and foreign material. At completion, all work must be turned over to Owner clean and in new condition. 3. Protect the work and material of other trades that might be damaged by work or workmen and make good all damage thus caused. E. Installation Only Items 1. Where a Contractor is required to install items that it does not purchase, coordinate the delivery and be responsible for their unloading from delivery vehicles and for safe handling and field storage up to the time of installation. a. Provide field assembly and internal connections, as well as mounting in place of the items, including the purchase and installation of dunnage supporting members and fastenings to adapt them to architectural and structural conditions. b. Provide connection to building systems including the purchase and installation of terminating fittings necessary to adapt and connect them to the building systems. 2. Carefully examine items upon delivery. Claims that items have been received in a condition that their installation will require procedures beyond the scope of work of this contract will be considered only if presented in writing within one week of their date of delivery. Unless claims have been submitted, fully recondition or replace damaged items. F. Maintenance of equipment and systems: Maintain equipment and systems until Final Acceptance. Ensure adequate protection of equipment and material during delivery, storage, installation and shutdown and during delays pending final test of systems and equipment because of seasonal conditions. Protect work and equipment from damage and exposure to moisture and outdoor extreme temperature conditions until finally inspected, tested, and accepted. Carefully store materials and equipment that is not immediately installed after delivery to site. Close open ends of work including piping and ductwork with temporary covers or plugs during construction to prevent entry of obstructing material or debris. G. Use of premises shall be restricted as follows 1. Remove and dispose of dirt and debris, and keep premises clean. During progress of work, remove unused material and equipment. Maintain building and premises in neat and clean condition, clean and wash required to maintain appearance and operation of equipment. 2. Store materials in a manner that will maintain an orderly clean appearance. If stored on-site in open or unprotected areas, equipment and material shall be kept off the ground by means of pallets or racks, and covered with tarpaulins. 3. Do not interfere with function of existing sewers and water and gas mains, electrical, or mechanical systems and services. Extreme care shall be observed to prevent debris from entering pipe, ductwork and equipment. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 200000 - 25 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 H. Surveys and Measurements 1. Base measurements, both horizontal and vertical, on reference points established by Contractor and be responsible for correct lay out of work. 2. In event of discrepancy between actual measurements and those indicated, notify Architect in writing and do not proceed with work until written instructions have been issued. I. Fireproofing 1. Clips, hangers, clamps, supports and other attachments to surfaces to be fireproofed shall be installed, insofar as possible, prior to start of spray fiber work. 2. Ducts, piping and other items that would interfere with proper application of fireproofing shall be installed after completion of spray fiber work. 3. Patching and repairing of fireproofing due to cutting or damaging to fireproofing during course of work specified under this Section shall be performed by installer of fireproofing and paid for by trade responsible for damage and shall not constitute grounds for an extra to Owner. J. Temporary Utilities 1. Refer to Division 01 for project requirements. 2. Coordinate work under this Section with progress of construction so that permanent heating system will be ready to provide temporary heating if permitted by Owner and Architect as soon as building is closed in. 3. Provide and direct labor required for attendance, operation and final restoration of permanent heating system if used for temporary heating purposes. Continuous direct attendance shall be provided whenever permanent system is in operation prior to acceptance of permanent heating system by Owner. K. Air Bound Systems 1. If, after systems are operational, piping systems, coils or other apparatus are stratified or air bound (by vacuum or pressure), they shall be repiped with new fittings, air vents, or vacuum breakers at no extra cost. If connections are concealed in furring, floors, or ceilings, installing trade shall bear all expenses of tearing up and refinishing construction and finish, leaving same in as good condition as before it was disturbed. L. Site Logistics 1. Unload materials and equipment delivered to site. Pay costs for rigging, hoisting, lowering and moving equipment on and around site, in building or on roof. 3.3 CONTINUITY OF SERVICES A. Do not interrupt existing services without Owner's approval. B. Schedule interruptions in advance, according to Owner's instructions. Submit, in writing, with request for interruption, methods proposed to minimize length of interruption. C. Interruptions shall be scheduled at times of day and work so that they have minimal impact on Owner's operations. D. Coordinate shutdowns of existing systems as follows: 1. Give proper notice to Owner when making shutdowns; a minimum of fourteen full days are required. 2. Minimize shutdowns. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 200000 - 26 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. Provide temporary services where required and perform shutdowns and tie ins at a time convenient to Owner. 4. Complete and file the Owner's shutdown notice questionnaire. 5. Perform required survey and inspection work required by the notice for shutdown. E. Include premium time work associated with interruptions of services and/or shutdowns to avoid disruption to Owner's operations. 3.4 CLEANING A. Cleaning shall be performed prior to commissioning. Refer to individual Division 23 Sections for additional requirements. B. Ductwork 1. Ducts shall be thoroughly cleaned so that no dirt or dust shall be discharged from diffusers, registers or grilles, when system is operated. 2. Provide temporary connections required for cleaning. Provide cheesecloth for openings during cleaning. 3. Replace filters prior to final inspection and testing. C. Piping 1. Furnish pipe cleaning chemicals, chemical feed equipment, materials and labor necessary to clean piping. 2. Permanently install necessary chemical injection fittings complete with stop valves. 3. After piping systems have been pressure tested and approved for tightness, clean and flush piping as specified and in accordance with applicable codes. 4. Maintain continuous blowdown and make-up during flushing operation. D. Equipment 1. After completion of project, clean the exterior surface of equipment, including concrete residue, dirt and paint residue. 3.5 MEP AND FIRE PROTECTION COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS A. Project Punch List Procedure and Representations to Authorities 1. When the contract work is substantially complete, if requested by the Contractor, the Engineer will do an inspection of the relevant work to confirm completion status. Prior to the inspection, the Contractor shall submit a punch list of remaining items to be completed as well as the Testing, Adjustment, and Balance report. In the course of the inspection the Engineer will add to the Contractor’s punch list any observed remaining work that is not already on it, and provide the modified punch list, in a medium selected at the Engineer’s discretion, for the Contractor’s convenience in closing out the work. 2. Regardless of what the Engineer observes and does not observe in the inspection, the responsibility for successful completion of the contract in all of its details remains with the Contractor. 3. If, when the Engineer arrives at the site certain areas are not complete and ready for inspection at the substantial completion stage, the Engineer will not review these areas. 4. Confirmation of Punch List Remediation. Once the engineer has submitted the punch list so modified, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to confirm that all the listed Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 200000 - 27 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 items have been correctly remedied. Upon receipt of such confirmation, and at the request of the Contractor, the engineer will re-inspect the site to confirm completion. 5. Contractor shall provide certifications to authorities such as Building Departments if so required. Also, if authorities require from the Engineer certifications, affidavits, or other type of representations, the Contractor shall provide to the Engineer a certified punch list of remaining work for final completion of the project, suitable for the Engineer to attach to the requested representations. B. Occupancy Permit 1. Contractor shall prepare and submit the below life-safety related items as a prerequisite for construction completion and occupancy. These shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to filing for the occupancy permit so that the Engineer can provide the completion affidavit to the AHJ in a timely fashion. Provide a copy of all documents to Architect and to Owner. The required Contractor submittals include: a. Contractor’s certification that MEP systems have been installed in compliance with the Permit Documents b. Contractor’s statement of compliance of (a) the fire protection and fire alarm installation with the contract documents, and (b) testing of the fire alarm in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications. c. Contractor’s certification that acceptance tests of the fire protection and life safety systems have been successfully completed. d. Contractor’s Test and Material Certificates (per NFPA) for fire protection, fire alarm, smoke control and emergency power. e. As-builts of the fire protection system. f. As-builts of MEP systems (including those aspects of the fire protection system operated by the building controls such as smoke dampers and fan shut down). g. VAC Air and Water Balancing Reports. h. Submit preliminary mechanical commissioning report (covering functional testing of HVAC systems and controls and domestic water) to owner and obtain letter from owner acknowledging receipt of same. i. Report covering preliminary commissioning of emergency and standby power. j. Report covering preliminary commissioning of lighting controls. k. Certification of successful emergency egress lighting test. l. Domestic water systems testing, chlorination and water quality documentation. m. Certification of completion of code-related items on contractor’s punch list and supplemental architectural and engineering punch lists. n. List of remaining punch list items for 100 percent MEP completion. C. Startup, Pre-Commissioning, and Commissioning 1. Completion of startup, pre-commissioning, and commissioning shall be accomplished as a prerequisite for substantial completion. 2. Below are minimum requirements for startup and pre-commissioning. Additional requirements may be found in other specifications Sections such as “Commissioning” or “Testing, Adjustment and Balancing.” 3. Testing and balancing of HVAC shall occur after startup and pre-commissioning. 4. Operate and maintain systems and equipment until final acceptance by the Owner. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 200000 - 28 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 5. All warranties shall not begin until final acceptance of the systems and equipment by the Owner, which does not occur until systems have completed commissioning. 6. The Owner maintains the right to have access to the entire project site to develop his own operational procedures. 7. For each of the mechanical and electrical trades, prepare a room by room Startup and Pre-Commissioning Form which lists equipment with moving parts or with combustion or electric heating processes. Lighting controls shall be included in the list. Include equipment name, make and model number, date of Visual Inspection and names and signatures of attendees, date of Startup and names and signatures of attendees, date that the item has been placed into system-wide automatic operation. 8. Visual Inspection shall be attended by a qualified representative of the manufacturer. Confirm that equipment is installed, mounted and supported per manufacturer’s recommendations. Confirm proper direction of rotation. 9. Startup. Conform to startup and testing procedures outlined in the relevant specification Sections. Startup shall be attended by a qualified representative of the manufacturer. Start each piece of equipment and check its operation in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Confirm that equipment operates and cycles appropriately under automatic control. Confirm satisfactory operation in all operating modes (e.g. normal shutdown, normal auto position, normal manual position, unoccupied cycle, emergency power, and alarm conditions). 10. Leaks, damage and defects discovered or resulting from startup and pre-commissioning shall be repaired or replaced to like-new condition with acceptable materials. Tests shall be continued until system operates without adjustments or repairs. 11. When all equipment in a system has been started, place entire system in operation under automatic control and confirm system-wide operation. 12. Submit completed Startup Forms as an Information Submittal. D. Demonstration of Successful Operation 1. After components and systems have been commissioned (or, if there is no commissioning, after startup), provide a 2 week, 24 hour per day fully functional automatic operation period of systems simultaneously. This shall be successfully concluded before systems are accepted by Owner. E. Project Close-Out Procedure 1. General a. The requirements of this Section are in addition to and supplement the requirements outlined in Division 01. 2. Project Close-Out Checklist a. Review requirements of each Section of the specifications and submit for approval to Architect the sign-off forms that shall become the project close-out checklist. Do not group items; provide a separate line item for each required item. The checklist, at a minimum, shall include the information shown below in the Project Close-Out Checklist Example. The Architect and/or Owner may incorporate additional specific items to the following checklist which shall become part of the project requirements. b. Project Close-Out Checklist Example: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON MECHANICAL/ELECTRICA L REQUIREMENTS 200000 - 29 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PROJECT CLOSE-OUT PROJECT: DIVISION NO.: CONTRACTOR: ITEM1 DATES OWNER'S SIGN-OFF COMPLETED RECEIVED BY OWNER Permits City and County Inspection Manufacturer’s Warranties Contractor’s Warranties State Fire Rating Data Copy of Final Shop Drawings List and Possession of Spare Parts Pressure Tests Equipment Tests Required by Specs Startup and Pre-Commissioning Forms Testing Adjustment and Balancing Report Manufacturer/Vendor Training of Owner’s Personnel Required by Specs O & M Manuals Record Documents Coordination Drawings Sanitization Reports Commissioning Reports/Letters/Forms On Site Training Complete Protective Device Settings Valve Tags and Charts Final ATC Installation Drawings Insurance Underwriters Approvals Final Punch List (Initialed by contractor that items are complete) Building Certificate of Occupancy (CO) 24 Hour Phone No. for Service During Guarantee Period Smoke Control Special Inspection Report END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SP EC\2018_11-30_CD\200000_MECH_ELEC REQUIREMENTS.DOC 1 Provide separate line item for each specified item (do not group items) Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 210500 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 210500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 20000. 1. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. 2. For example, prior to requesting an occupancy permit, the documentation listed in Part 3 of Section 20000 must be submitted and approved so the Engineer can certify that the MEP systems and life safety provisions are completed. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes elements common to Division 21 Fire Suppression Sections: 1. Common Division 21 Product requirements: a. Pipe, tube, fittings, and joining materials. b. Pipe hangers and fasteners. c. Sleeves, stack-sleeve fittings, and sleeve-seal systems. d. Escutcheons. e. Grout. 2. Common Division 21 General and Execution requirements: 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels. B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms. C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases. E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters. F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials: 1. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 210500 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. All Division 21 submittals shall be in accordance with Division 20 for common mechanical and electrical requirements. B. Submit Division 21 for action submittals prior to applying for authority having jurisdiction installation permits (where required) and system installation. C. Submit Division 21 for informational submittals related to testing and inspections after successful system testing and prior to scheduling authority having jurisdiction final approval demonstration testing. D. Submit Division 21 for closeout submittals as part of project closeout procedure. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Not used. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Division 21 Drawings are diagrammatic. They are not intended to be absolutely precise; they are not intended to specify or to show every offset, fitting and component. The purpose of the drawings is to indicate a system concept, the main components of the system and the approximate geometrical relationships, provide all other components and materials necessary to make the systems fully complete and operational. B. Where conflicts between referenced standards, codes, Division 21 Drawings, and Division 21 Specifications exist the most stringent shall apply unless approved in writing by the Engineer. C. Division 21 Product Standards: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing and "Approval Guide," published by FM Global. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, indication of a UL product requirement within Division 21 shall be construed to require a UL listed and FM approved product. D. Division 21 Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 1. Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements. E. Division 21 Steel Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current. F. Division 21 Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 210500 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.9 COORDINATION A. Definition, “Coordinate”: Where Sections of the Work interact, the Contractor responsible for this Section of the Work initiates verbal and/ or written communication with one or more different Contractors responsible for other interacting Sections of the Work for the purposes of establishing a coordinated approach of product selections and installation sequencing that satisfies the individual requirements of the interacting Sections of the Work as well as the requirements of the Work as a whole. B. Coordinate construction operations with those of other Sections of the Work and other entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. 1. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for fire-suppression installations. 2. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. C. Coordinate operations and product selections of this Section with operations and product selections included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. D. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. E. Coordinate installation of different components with other Sections of the Work to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 1. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for fire-suppression items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08. F. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. G. Coordination Drawings: Contribute to preparation of Coordination Drawings in the sequence established under Division 01 and Division 20; indicate water-based fire suppression system Work coordinated with other Sections of the Work. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. C. Pipe and fittings shall be protected from moisture. Pipe and fittings shall not be stored directly on ground. Pipe and fittings exposed to moisture and showing significant rust shall be removed from site, and shall not be installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS A. Comply with individual Division 21 Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials. 2.2 PIPE JOINING MATERIALS A. Comply with individual Division 21 Sections for joining materials. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 210500 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.3 PIPE HANGERS AND FASTENERS A. Pipe Hangers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Tolco. b. Cooper B-Line. c. Anvil International. 2. Material: Steel, galvanized. 3. Type: Adjustable band type and clevis; comply with Part 3 “Piping Support Installation” for applications. 4. Band type hangers used on CPVC piping shall have flared or beveled edges. B. Hanger Rod: 1. Material: Carbon steel, galvanized. C. Attachments to Steel: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Tolco. b. Cooper B-Line. c. Anvil International. 2. Material: Carbon or malleable steel, galvanized. 3. Type: Beam clamp. D. Drop in Anchors: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Hilti Corp. b. ITW Red Head. c. Powers Fastners, Inc. 2. Standard: UL 203. 3. Material: Mild steel with zinc plating. E. Concrete Inserts (Cast-In): 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Tolco. b. Hilti Corp. c. Powers Fasteners, Inc. 2. Material: Carbon steel, galvanized. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 210500 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.4 SLEEVES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. Calpico, Inc. 3. GPT, an EnPro Industries Co. B. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, anticorrosion coated or galvanized, with plain ends and integral welded waterstop collar. C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. 2.5 STACK-SLEEVE FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. 2. Zurn Industries, LLC. B. Description: Manufactured, Dura-coated, Duco-coated, or galvanized cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange for use in waterproof floors and roofs. Include clamping ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing. 1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws. 2.6 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. Calpico, Inc. 3. Metraflex Co. B. Description: 1. Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space between piping and sleeve. 2. Designed to form a hydrostatic seal of 20 psig minimum. 3. Sealing Elements: Nitrile (Buna N) interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size. 4. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel, Type 316. Include two for each sealing element. 5. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel, Type 316, of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. 2.7 ESCUTCHEONS A. One-Piece, Steel Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener. B. One-Piece, Galvanized-Steel Type: With hot-dipped galvanized-steel wall plate and setscrew fastener. C. One-Piece, Stainless-Steel Type: With polished stainless-steel finish. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 210500 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish; concealed hinge; and spring-clip fasteners. 2.8 GROUT A. Description: Nonshrink, for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated walls or floors. B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout. C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 REMOVAL OF EXISTING FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS A. Comply with Division 01 and Division 02 for general demolition requirements and procedures. B. Prepare, in narrative and drawing format as directed by the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ), a formal impairment plan identifying at a minimum the following: 1. Status of building occupancy (or vacancy) during construction. 2. Duration and timing of fire suppression system shutdowns. 3. Necessary provisions for temporary water supplies and connections to existing fire suppression systems to remain in service. 4. Provisions for temporary fire protection systems such as linear heat detection. C. Coordinate impairment plan with the NPFA 241 Fire Safety Program prepared by the General Contractor’s Fire Safety Program Manager. D. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. 1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. 2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. 3. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. 4. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. 5. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. E. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality. 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install piping according to the following requirements and individual Division 21 Sections specifying piping systems. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 210500 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. 1. Deviations from approved Shop Drawings require written approval from authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from approved working plans. C. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated. D. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections for rough-in requirements. E. Field-verify final equipment locations of equipment for rough-in. F. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. G. Install provisions to accommodate building expansion joints. Provide for expansion at building expansion joints with assemblies listed for that purpose. Coordinate the maximum value of building deflection with the appropriate Structural Section of the Work. H. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. I. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. J. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. K. Install piping to permit valve servicing. L. Install piping at indicated slopes. M. Install piping free of sags and bends. N. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes. O. Install piping to allow application of insulation. P. At the end of each working day all pipe openings shall be covered or capped to minimize the likelihood of introduction of foreign materials into piping. All piping not covered or which has had covering damaged shall be visually inspected internally to confirm no obstructions have been introduced to the piping. 3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 210500 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. E. Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe joints. F. Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints. G. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8. H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9. I. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article. 1. Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. 2. Do not use welded joints for galvanized-steel pipe. J. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems. 3.4 PIPING SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Install hangers, fasteners, and structural attachments: 1. NPS 6 and larger: Use clevis type hangers only. 2. NPS 4 and smaller: Use clevis or adjustable band type hangers. 3. Install beam clamps with retaining straps regardless of seismic classification. 4. Powder-driven or pre-expanded inserts shall not be used. 5. Threaded connections shall not be used for attachments to concrete. B. Install seismic restraints and flexible couplings. Comply with Division 21 for seismic controls for fire suppression piping and equipment. 3.5 SLEEVE INSTALLATION A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls. 1. Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade: Use steel pipe sleeves. 2. Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade: Use steel pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal systems. 3. Concrete Slabs on Grade: Use steel pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal systems. 4. Concrete Slabs above Grade: Use steel pipe sleeves. 5. Interior Wall Partitions: Use galvanized-steel sheet sleeves. 6. Slabs with Waterproof Membrane: Comply with Part 3 “Stack-Sleeve Fitting Installation”. B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to accommodate annular clear space required for installation of sleeve-seal system. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 210500 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls are constructed. 1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. 2. Using grout, seal space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls. D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior wall partitions. 1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. 2. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. E. Fire-Resistance-Rated Penetrations, Horizontal Assembly Penetrations, and Smoke Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire or smoke rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire- and smoke-stop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping and fill materials specified in Division 07. 3.6 STACK-SLEEVE FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install stack-sleeve fittings in new slabs to be provided with membrane waterproofing as slabs are constructed. 1. Install fittings that are large enough to provide necessary annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. 2. Secure flashing between clamping flanges for pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Comply with requirements for flashing specified in Division 07. 3. Install section of cast-iron sleeve fittings to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. 4. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified. 5. Use silicone sealant to seal around the outside of stack-sleeve fittings. B. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestop materials and installations in Division 07. 3.7 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Install sleeve seals systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls at water-service piping entries into building. B. Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble sleeve seal components and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. 3.8 ESCUTCHEON INSTALLATION A. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. B. Escutcheons for New Piping: 1. Bare Piping at Exterior Wall Penetrations: One-piece galvanized-steel wall plate. 2. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece steel with chrome-plated finish. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 210500 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 a. Corrosive Environments: One-piece stainless steel with polished stainless steel finish. 3. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces and Equipment Rooms: No escutcheon. C. Escutcheons for Existing Piping: 1. Bare Piping at Exterior Wall Penetrations: Split-Plate Stamped Steel with polished chrome plate finish. 2. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-Plate Stamped Steel with polished chrome plate finish. 3. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces and Equipment Rooms: No escutcheon. 3.9 CONCRETE BASES A. Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project. B. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit. C. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base. D. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor. E. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. F. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. G. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. H. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement. Comply with Division 03. 3.10 PAINTING A. Comply with Division 09 for painting of fire-suppression systems, equipment, and components. B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish. 3.11 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Refer to Division 05 for structural steel. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor fire-suppression materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\210500_COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 210553 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 210553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20, Common Mechanical and Electrical Requirements. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Section. These requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Equipment labels. 2. Warning signs and labels. 3. Pipe labels. 4. Valve tags. 5. Warning tags. 6. Information signs. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device C. Information Sign Proofs: Proposed information signs completed with required data and installation details. D. Equipment-Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled and the proposed content for each label. E. Valve Schedules: Valve numbering scheme. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Identification products for fire suppression piping and equipment compliant with this Section except as modified and approved by the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS A. Metal Labels for Equipment: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 210553 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, with predrilled holes for attachment hardware. 2. Letter Color: White. 3. Background Color: Red. 4. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 21/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm). 5. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. 6. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets. 7. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. B. Plastic Labels for Equipment: 1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, with predrilled holes for attachment hardware. 2. Letter Color: White. 3. Background Color: Red. 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C). 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 21/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm). 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. 7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets. 8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. D. Equipment-Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules) and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. 2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, with predrilled holes for attachment hardware. B. Letter Color: White. C. Background Color: Red. D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C). E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm). Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 210553 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering twothirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets. H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification instructions. 2.3 PIPE LABELS A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service and showing flow direction. B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive. C. Pipe-Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings; pipe size; and an arrow indicating flow direction. 1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping-system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction. 2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) high. D. Pipe-Label Colors: 1. Background Color: Red. 2. Letter Color: White. 2.4 VALVE TAGS A. Description: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) letters for piping-system abbreviation and 1/2-inch (13 mm) numbers. 1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, with predrilled holes for attachment hardware. 2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link chain, beaded chain, or S-hook. 3. Valve-Tag Color: Natural Brass. 4. Letter Color: Black. B. Valve-Tag Size and Shape: 2 inches (50 mm), round. C. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. 1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. 2.5 WARNING TAGS A. Description: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing. 1. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches (75 by 133 mm) minimum. 2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 210553 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO NOT OPERATE." 4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering. 2.6 INFORMATION SIGNS A. Material and Thickness: Multi-layer, multi-color plastic, mechanically engraved, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick. B. Letter Color: White. C. Background Color: Red. D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C). E. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). F. Adhesive: Contact type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. G. Minimum Indications for NFPA 13 General Information Signs: 1. Name and location of facility protected. 2. Occupancy classification. 3. Commodity classification. 4. Presence of high-piled and/or rack storage. 5. Maximum height of storage planned. 6. Aisle width planned. 7. Encapsulation of pallet loads. 8. Presence of solid shelving. 9. Flow test data. 10. Presence of flammable/combustible liquids. 11. Pressure of hazardous materials. 12. Presence of other special storage. 13. Location of auxiliary drains and low point drains on dry pipe and preaction systems. 14. Original results of main drain flow test and date conducted. 15. Name of installing contractor and contact information. H. Minimum Indications for NFPA 13 Hydraulic Design Information Signs: 1. Location of design area. 2. Discharge density over the design area. 3. Required flow and residual pressure at the fire pump discharge, or if no pump is present at the connection to the water supply. 4. Occupancy classification, or commodity classification, maximum storage height, and configuration. 5. Hose stream allowance. 6. Installing Contractor’s name and contact information. I. Minimum Indications for NFPA 14 Hydraulic Design Information Signs: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 210553 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Location of the two hydraulically most remote hose connections. 2. Design flow rate for the hydraulically most remote hose connections. 3. Design residual inlet and outlet pressures for the hydraulically most remote hose connections. 4. Design static pressure and design system demand at the system control valve or fire pump discharge, and at each fire department connection. J. Minimum Indications for NFPA 14 Water Supply Pump Signs: 1. Minimum pressure and flow required at the pump discharge flange to meet the system demand. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Obtain authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) approval for identification materials, lettering, colors, indications, quantity, and locations. B. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants. 3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors. C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. 3.3 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment including pumps, controllers, releasing control units, packaged systems, air compressors, nitrogen generators, and similar. B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible. 3.4 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION A. Pipe-Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows: 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection excluding short takeoffs. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 210553 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet (7.6 m) in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels. 3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems. List tagged valves in a valvetag schedule. 3.6 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required. 3.7 INFORMATION SIGN INSTALLATION A. Permanently mount information signs in locations as required by NFPA and authority having jurisdiction (AHJ). B. Install NFPA 13 General Information Signs at each system control riser. C. Install NFPA 13 Hydraulic Design Information Signs at each system riser. 1. Provide separate hydraulic design information signs for each design performance criteria. D. Install NFPA 14 Hydraulic Design Information Signs at system control valves. E. Install NFPA 14 Water Supply Pump Signs in the immediate vicinity of fire pumps or connected controllers. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\210553_IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMISSIONING OF FIRE SUPPRESSION 210800 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 210800 - COMMISSIONING OF FIRE SUPPRESSION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20, Common Mechanical and Electrical Requirements. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Section. These requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This section includes commissioning process requirements for Fire Suppression systems, assemblies, and equipment. B. Related Sections 1. Division 01 for general commissioning process requirements. 1.3 DESCRIPTION A. Refer to Division 01 for the description of commissioning. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Division 01 for definitions. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 01 for CxA’s role. B. Refer to Division 01 for specific requirements. In addition, provide the following: 1. Certificates of readiness 2. Certificates of completion of installation, prestart, and startup activities. 3. Test reports 4. O&M manuals 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test Equipment Calibration Requirements: Contractors will comply with test manufacturer’s calibration procedures and intervals. Recalibrate test instruments immediately after instruments have been repaired resulting from being dropped or damaged. Affix calibration tags to test instruments. Furnish calibration records to CxA upon request. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Refer to Division 01 for requirements pertaining to coordination during the commissioning process. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMISSIONING OF FIRE SUPPRESSION 210800 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT A. All standard testing equipment required to perform startup, initial checkout and functional performance testing shall be provided by the contractor for the equipment being tested. For example, the fire protection contractor of Division 21 shall ultimately be responsible for all standard testing equipment for the plumbing system in Division 21. A sufficient quantity of twoway radios shall be provided by each subcontractor. B. Special equipment, tools and instruments (specific to a piece of equipment and only available from vendor) required for testing shall be included in the base bid price to the Owner and left on site, except for stand-alone data logging equipment that may be used by the CxA. C. Proprietary test equipment and software required by any equipment manufacturer for programming and/or start-up, whether specified or not, shall be provided by the manufacturer of the equipment. Manufacturer shall provide the test equipment, demonstrate its use, and assist in the commissioning process as needed. Proprietary test equipment (and software) shall become the property of the Owner upon completion of the commissioning process. D. Data logging equipment and software required to test equipment will be provided by the CxA, but shall not become the property of the Owner. E. All testing equipment shall be of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and/or measure system performance with the tolerances specified in the Specifications. If not otherwise noted, the following minimum requirements apply: Temperature sensors and digital thermometers shall have a certified calibration within the past year to an accuracy of 0.5F and a resolution of + or - 0.1F. Pressure sensors shall have an accuracy of + or - 2.0% of the value range being measured (not full range of meter) and have been calibrated within the last year. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS A. With assistance from the installing contractors, the CxA will prepare Pre-Functional Checklists for all commissioned components, equipment, and systems. B. Red-lined Drawings: 1. The contractor will verify all equipment, systems, instrumentation, wiring and components are shown correctly on red-lined drawings. 2. Preliminary red-lined drawings must be made available to the Commissioning Team for use prior to the start of Functional Performance Testing. 3. Changes, as a result of Functional Testing, must be incorporated into the final as-built drawings, which will be created from the red-lined drawings. 4. The contracted party, as defined in the Contract Documents will create the as-built drawings. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Contractor will provide a copy of O&M literature within 45 days of each submittal acceptance for use during the commissioning process for all commissioned equipment and systems. 2. The CxA will review the O&M literature once for conformance to project requirements. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMISSIONING OF FIRE SUPPRESSION 210800 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. The CxA will receive a copy of the final approved O&M literature once corrections have been made by the contractor. D. Demonstration and Training: 1. Contractor will provide demonstration and training as required by the specifications. 2. A complete training plan and schedule must be submitted by the contractor to the CxA four weeks (4) prior to any training. 3. A training agenda for each training session must be submitted to the CxA one (1) week prior the training session. 4. The CxA shall be notified at least 72 hours in advance of scheduled pump test so that testing may be observed by the CA and Owner's representative. A copy of the test record shall be provided to the CxA, Owner, and Architect. 5. Engage a Factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain specialty valves. 6. Engage a Factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain Fire Pump. 7. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping, trouble shooting, servicing, and maintaining units. 8. Review data in O&M Manuals. E. Systems manual requirements 1. The Systems Manual is intended to be a usable information resource containing all of the information related to the systems, assemblies, and Commissioning Process in one place with indexes and cross references. 2. The GC shall include final approved versions of the following information for the Systems Manual: a. As-Built System Schematics b. Verified Record Drawings c. Test Results (not otherwise included in Cx Record) d. Periodic Maintenance Information for computer maintenance management system e. Recommendations for recalibration frequency of sensors and actuators f. A list of contractors, subcontractors, suppliers, architects, and engineers involved in the project along with their contact information g. Training Records, Information on training provided, attendees list, and any ongoing training h. Copy of all related NFPA 20 and 70 documentation. 3. This information shall be organized and arranged by building system, such as fire alarm, chilled water, heating hot water, etc. 4. Information should be provided in an electronic version to the extent possible. Legible, scanned images are acceptable for non-electronic documentation to facilitate this deliverable. 3.2 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Fire Protection Contractor. The commissioning responsibilities applicable to the Fire Protection Contractor of Division 21 are as follows (all references apply to commissioned equipment only): Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMISSIONING OF FIRE SUPPRESSION 210800 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Perform commissioning tests at the direction of the CxA. C. Attend construction phase coordination meetings. D. Participate in Fire Suppression systems, assemblies, equipment, and component maintenance orientation and inspection as directed by the CxA. E. Provide information requested by the CxA for final commissioning documentation. F. Include requirements for submittal data, operation and maintenance data, and training in each purchase order or sub-contract written. G. Prepare preliminary schedule for Fire Suppression system orientations and inspections, operation and maintenance manual submissions, training sessions, flushing and cleaning, equipment start-up, and task completion for owner. Distribute preliminary schedule to commissioning team members. H. Update schedule as required throughout the construction period. I. During the startup and initial checkout process, execute the Fire Protection-related portions of the prefunctional checklists for all commissioned equipment. J. Assist the CxA in all verification and functional performance tests. K. Provide measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data, and provide data acquisition equipment to record data for the complete range of testing for the required test period. L. Gather operation and maintenance literature on all equipment, and assemble in binders as required by the specifications. Submit to CxA 45 days after submittal acceptance. M. Coordinate with the CxA to provide (48) hour advance notice so that the witnessing of equipment and system start-up and testing can begin. N. Participate in, and schedule vendors and contractors to participate in the training sessions. O. Provide written notification to the CM/GC and CxA that the following work has been completed in accordance with the contract documents, and that the equipment, systems, and sub-system are operating as required. 1. Fire Suppression equipment including pumps, piping, and all other equipment furnished under this Division. 2. Automatic sprinkler system. 3. Fire stopping in fire rated construction, including caulking, gasketing and sealing of smoke barriers. 4. Air compressor, P. The equipment supplier shall document the performance of his equipment. Q. Provide a complete set of red-lined drawings to the CxA prior to the start of Functional Performance Testing. R. Equipment Suppliers 1. Provide all requested submittal data, including detailed start-up procedures and specific responsibilities of the Owner, to keep warranties in force. 2. Assist in equipment testing per agreements with contractors. 3. Provide information requested by CxA regarding equipment sequence of operation and testing procedures. S. Provide training of the Owner’s operating staff using expert qualified personnel, as specified. T. Refer to Division 01 for additional contractor responsibilities. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMISSIONING OF FIRE SUPPRESSION 210800 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.3 OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Refer to Division 01 for Owner’s Responsibilities. 3.4 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Refer to Division 01 for Design Professional’s Responsibilities. 3.5 CXA'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Refer to Division 01 for CxA’s Responsibilities. 3.6 TESTING PREPARATION A. Certify in writing to the CxA that Fire Suppression systems, subsystems, and equipment have been installed, calibrated, and started and are operating according to the Contract Documents. B. Certify in writing to the CxA that Fire Suppression instrumentation and control systems have been completed and calibrated, that they are operating according to the Contract Documents, and that pretest set points have been recorded. C. Set systems, subsystems, and equipment into operating mode to be tested (e.g., normal shutdown, normal auto position, normal manual position, unoccupied cycle, emergency power, and alarm conditions). D. Inspect and verify the position of each device and interlock identified on checklists. E. Check safety cutouts, alarms, and interlocks with smoke control and life-safety systems during each mode of operation. F. Testing Instrumentation: Install measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data as directed by the CxA. 3.7 GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to perform commissioning test at the direction of the CxA. B. Scope of Fire Protection testing shall include entire Fire Suppression installation. Testing shall include measuring capacities and effectiveness of operational and control functions. C. Test all operating modes, interlocks, control responses, and responses to abnormal or emergency conditions. D. The CxA along with the Fire Suppression contractor shall prepare detailed testing plans, procedures, and checklists for Fire Suppression systems, subsystems, and equipment. E. Tests will be performed using design conditions whenever possible. F. Simulated conditions may need to be imposed using an artificial load when it is not practical to test under design conditions. Before simulating conditions, calibrate testing instruments. Provide equipment to simulate loads. Set simulated conditions as directed by the CxA and document simulated conditions and methods of simulation. After tests, return settings to normal operating conditions. G. The CxA may direct that set points be altered when simulating conditions is not practical. H. The CxA may direct that sensor values be altered with a signal generator when design or simulating conditions and altering set points are not practical. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMISSIONING OF FIRE SUPPRESSION 210800 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 I. If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the Fire Suppression system, document the deficiency and report it to the Owner. After deficiencies are resolved, reschedule tests. J. If the testing plan indicates specific seasonal testing, complete appropriate initial performance tests and documentation and schedule seasonal tests. 3.8 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS, SUBSYSTEMS, AND EQUIPMENT TESTING PROCEDURES A. Equipment Testing and Acceptance Procedures: Testing requirements are specified in individual Division 21 sections. Provide submittals, test data, inspector record, and certifications to the CxA. B. Fire Suppression Distribution System Testing: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test performance of sprinkler distribution systems. C. The work included in the commissioning process involves a complete and thorough evaluation of the operation and performance of all components, systems and sub-systems. The following equipment and systems shall be evaluated: 1. Compressed Air System 2. Fire Pump/Sprinkler System 3. Sprinkler System 3.9 DEFICIENCIES/NON-CONFORMANCE, COST OF RETESTING, FAILURE DUE TO MANUFACTURER DEFECT A. Refer to Division 01 for requirements pertaining to deficiencies/non-conformance, cost of retesting, or failure due to manufacturer defect. 3.10 APPROVAL A. Refer to Division 01 for approval procedures. 3.11 DEFERRED TESTING A. Refer to Division 01 for requirements pertaining to deferred testing. 3.12 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall conform to Contract Documents requirements as stated in Division 01. B. Refer to Division 01 for the AE and CxA roles in the Operation and Maintenance Manual contribution, review and approval process. 3.13 TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL A. Refer to Division 01 for requirements pertaining to training. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\210800_COMMISSIONING.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 WATER BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 211300 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 211300 - WATER BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20, Common Mechanical and Electrical Requirements. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Section. These requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipes, tube, fittings, and specialties. 2. Listed fire-protection valves. 3. Trim and drain valves. 4. Specialty fire-protection pipe fittings. 5. Alarm devices. 6. Pressure gages. 7. Sprinklers. 8. Fire hose valves. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Standard-Pressure System Piping: Water-based fire suppression system piping designed to operate at working pressure of 175 psig maximum. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS A. Sprinkler System Types: 1. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing water that is connected to an automatic water supply. Each sprinkler opens when heat from fire melts the sprinkler fusible link or destroys the sprinkler frangible bulb. Water discharges immediately from open sprinklers. B. Standpipe System Types: 1. Manual Wet-Type Standpipe System: A standpipe system normally filled with water and permanently connected to a water supply. Supplemental pumping by emergency response personnel is required to meet system pressure. C. Standpipe System Classes: 1. Class I Standpipe System: Includes NPS 2-1/2 hose for fire department use. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 WATER BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 211300 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Shop Drawings: For water-based fire suppression systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Include all information required by the applicable NFPA water-based fire suppression standard(s) for “Working Plans”. Comply with Part 3 “Technician Design and Layout”. 1. Hydraulic Calculations: Perform calculations in accordance with applicable NFPA waterbased fire suppression Design and Installation Standard(s) for “hydraulic calculations”. C. Delegated Design Submittals – RESERVED. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and Certified Engineering Technician. B. Water Supply Evaluation Report: Include water supply flow test report and Certified Engineering Technician evaluation report confirming adequacy of water supply and significant deviations from historical data or Contract Documents. C. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA water-based fire suppression system Design and Installation Standards. Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping" corresponding to each water-based fire suppression system. D. Field quality-control reports. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Complete Shop Drawing re-submittal updated to reflect actual final system installation. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For water-based fire suppression system specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Personnel licensed by the governing licensing authority for the installation of water-based fire suppression systems. Successfully installed, tested, obtained approvals for, and put into service no less than three (3) water-based fire suppression systems similar in type, size, and complexity to that of the Work of this Section. B. Certified Engineering Technician Qualifications: 1. Shop Drawings and Calculations prepared by personnel licensed as a Professional Fire Protection Engineer by the governing licensing authority or, where permitted by local authorities having jurisdiction, NICET certified as a Fire Protection, Water-Based Systems Layout Level III or IV Technician. C. Source Limitations: Obtain products for each product category from a single manufacturer. D. Product Standards: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing and "Approval Guide," published by FM Global. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, indication of a UL product requirement within Part 2 shall be construed to require a UL listed and FM approved product. E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 WATER BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 211300 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.9 COORDINATION A. Definition, “Coordinate”: Where Sections of the Work interact, the Contractor responsible for this Section of the Work initiates verbal and/ or written communication with one or more different Contractors responsible for other interacting Sections of the Work for the purposes of establishing a coordinated approach of product selections and installation sequencing that satisfies the individual requirements of the interacting Sections of the Work as well as the requirements of the Work as a whole. B. Coordinate construction operations with those of other Sections of the Work and other entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. C. Coordinate operations and product selections of this Section with operations and product selections included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. D. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. E. Coordinate installation of different components with other Sections of the Work to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. F. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. G. Coordination Drawings: Contribute to preparation of Coordination Drawings in the sequence established under Division 1 and Division 20; indicate water-based fire suppression system Work coordinated with other Sections of the Work. 1.10 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounted, steel cabinet with hinged cover, and with space for minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include number of sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and wrench for each type of sprinkler used on Project. 2. Custom-finish Sprinklers: Provide a minimum of six spare cover-plates or sprinklers for each custom finish in addition to spares required by NFPA 13. B. Furnish drain hose assembly for conducting sprinkler drain outlet discharge-to-grade away from building façade and adjacent hard-scape subject to staining; include: 1. Brass hex nipple fitting; furnish one fitting for each drain outlet fitting size used. 2. Brass swivel hose adapter fittings for connection to 2 1/2 in hose coupling; furnish one adapter fitting for each hex nipple outlet size used. 3. Industrial double-jacket EPDM rubber-lined interior / exterior fire hose with hose-coupling ends; 2 1/2 in , 75 ft . 4. Galvanized-steel, wall-mount, hose and coupling storage rack. Mount adjacent to main system riser. 1.11 UNIT-COST ALLOWANCES A. Definition: Unit-cost allowance is a quantity of work established in lieu of additional requirements, used to defer the installation of materials and equipment to a later date when direction may be provided to Contractor by the Architect or Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) to provide labor and materials pursuant to final field coordination or AHJ final inspections. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 WATER BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 211300 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Unit-cost allowance shall include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, applicable taxes, overhead, and profit. C. Include the following Unit-cost Allowances: 1. Sprinkler, concealed: Total quantity equal to twenty (20) installed. 2. Sprinkler, upright: Total quantity equal to twenty (20) installed. D. Unused Materials: After installation has been completed and accepted by authorities having jurisdiction return unused materials to manufacturer or supplier and credit Owner for materials and labor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design and Installation Standard(s): 1. Sprinkler Systems: Comply with NFPA 13. 2. Standpipe Systems: Comply with NFPA 14. 3. FM Global: Comply with FM Global Datasheets for the design, installation, and testing of water-based fire suppression systems. B. Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175 psig minimum working pressure. C. Seismic Performance: Piping systems shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to NFPA 13 and ASCE/SEI 7. 2.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Comply with Drawings, "Piping Schedule", for applications of pipe, tube, and fitting materials, and for joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. 2.3 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Schedule 40 Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, A795 or A135; Schedule 40. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method. B. Schedule 10 Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795. Schedule 10 in NPS 5 and smaller; and NFPA 13-specified wall thickness in NPS 6 to NPS 10, plain end. C. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733 steel pipe nipples; made of Schedule 40, ASTM A 53 seamless steel pipe with threaded ends. D. Steel Pipe Couplings: ASTM A 865 steel couplings; threaded. E. Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, gray-iron threaded fittings, Class 125 and Class 250. F. Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860. G. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125 and Class 250. H. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 150 and Class 300. I. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free. 1. Class 125, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 150, Bronze Flat-Face Flanges: Full-face gaskets. 2. Class 250, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 300, Steel Raised-Face Flanges: Ring-type gaskets. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 WATER BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 211300 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1 carbon steel unless otherwise indicated. J. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M and ASME B16.9. 1. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. K. Steel Welded Outlet Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Anvil International, Inc. b. Victaulic Company. 2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum. 3. Description: UL 213B; forged steel, Schedule 40 wall thickness, with threaded or grooved-end outlet. L. Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Anvil International, Inc. b. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. c. Victaulic Company. 2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum. 3. Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable-iron casting or ASTM A 536 ductile-iron casting; with dimensions matching steel pipe. 4. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213, rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts. M. Coatings for Steel Pipe and Fittings: Steel pipe, steel pipe nipples, steel pipe couplings, and threaded fittings uncoated or factory hot-dipped galvanized as indicated by Drawings, “Piping Schedule”. Grooved-joint steel pipe fittings and couplings factory epoxy painted or hot-dipped galvanized as indicated Drawings, “Piping Schedule”. 2.4 LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VALVES A. General Requirements: 1. Isolation valves shall be indicating type and shall include integral or external valve position tamper switches as indicated. 2. Valve -inlets and -outlets shall include plugged threaded taps for the installation of pressure gauges, alarm devices, drains, and similar trim. 3. Iron valves shall include factory applied interior and exterior epoxy coating in compliance with ANSI/AWWA C550 and NSF-61. B. Iron Butterfly Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Anvil International, Inc. b. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 WATER BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 211300 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 c. Victaulic Company. 2. Standard: UL 1091. 3. Minimum Pressure Rating: 250 psig. 4. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron. 5. Disc: Ductile iron, nickel plated. 6. Actuator: Worm gear or traveling nut with external indicator. 7. Supervisory Switch: Integral to valve actuator. 8. End Connections: Grooved. C. Iron OS&Y Gate Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. c. Mueller Co.; Water Products Division. d. NIBCO INC. e. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. f. Victaulic Company. 2. Standard: UL 262. 3. Minimum Pressure Rating: 250 psig. 4. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron. 5. End Connections: Flanged or grooved. 6. Valve shall be resilient wedge type. D. NRS Gate Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. b. Mueller Co.; Water Products Division. c. NIBCO INC. d. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. e. Victaulic Company. 2. Standard: UL 262. 3. Minimum Pressure Rating: 250 psig. 4. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron with indicator post flange. 5. Stem: Non-rising. 6. End Connections: Flanged or grooved. 7. Valve shall be resilient wedge type. E. Bronze Check Valves: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 WATER BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 211300 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. c. Mueller Co.; Water Products Division. d. NIBCO INC. e. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. f. Victaulic Company. 2. Standard: UL 312. 3. Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig. 4. Type: Swing check. 5. Body Material: Bronze. 6. End Connections: Threaded. F. Iron Check Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. c. Mueller Co.; Water Products Division. d. NIBCO INC. e. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. f. Victaulic Company. 2. Standard: UL 312. 3. Minimum Pressure Rating: 250 psig. 4. Type: Swing check. 5. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron. 6. End Connections: Flanged or grooved. G. Automatic (Ball Drip) Drain Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. AFAC Inc. b. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. c. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. 2. Standard: UL 1726. 3. Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig. 4. Type: Automatic draining, ball check. 5. Size: NPS 3/4. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 WATER BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 211300 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 6. End Connections: Threaded. 2.5 TRIM AND DRAIN VALVES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. 2. Fire-End & Croker Corp. 3. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc. 4. Milwaukee Valve Company. 5. NIBCO INC. 6. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. 7. United Brass Works, Inc. 8. Victaulic Company. 9. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. B. Standard: UL 258. C. Description: Brass or bronze body ball-, globe-, and angle-valves for fire protection trim and drain applications. D. Standard-Pressure Applications, Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig. E. High-Pressure Applications, Minimum Pressure Rating: 250 psig. 2.6 SPECIALTY FIRE-PROTECTION PIPE FITTINGS A. Flexible Sprinkler Connections: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. FlexHead Industries, Inc. b. Victaulic Company. 2. Standard: UL 1474. 3. Description: Flexible hose for connection to sprinkler, with bracket for connection to ceiling grid, partition framing, or masonry construction. Connection shall be minimum NPS 1 corrugated stainless steel tubing with braided stainless steel jacket. Assembly shall be UL-listed and FM approved. 4. Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig. B. Flow Detection and Test Assemblies: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. AGF Manufacturing Inc. b. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. c. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. d. Victaulic Company. 2. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory", Category VEOY. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 WATER BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 211300 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig. 4. Description: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with connected flow switch, pressure gauge, and combination test-and-drain valve fitting; include integral pressure relief valve with discharge connected to assembly drain. 5. End Connections: Threaded and grooved. C. Test-and-Drain Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. AGF Manufacturing Inc. b. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. c. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. d. Victaulic Company. 2. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory", Category VEHZ. 3. Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig. 4. Description: Brass body 3-position single-handle ball valve with sight glass, discharge test orifice, and integral pressure relief valve with discharge connected to outlet. 5. End Connections: Threaded and grooved. D. Inspector’s Test Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. AGF Manufacturing Inc. b. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. c. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. d. Victaulic Company. 2. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory", Category VEHZ. 3. Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig. 4. Description: Brass body single-handle ball valve with sight glass and discharge test orifice. 5. End Connections: Threaded. 2.7 ALARM DEVICES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Potter Electric Signal Co., LLC. 2. System Sensor; a Honeywell Company. B. General: NEMA enclosure suitable for application, metal cover, 250-psi rated, two sets of SPDT (form C) contacts. C. Flow Switches: UL 346, paddle type with field adjustable 0-90 second delay adjustment. D. Pressure Switches: UL 753, field adjustable for operation upon pressure increase or pressure decrease. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 WATER BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 211300 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 E. Tamper Switches: UL 753, mounting brackets suitable for valve type, with normally closed contacts for supervision of valve stem position. 2.8 PRESSURE GAUGES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AMETEK; U.S. Gauge Division. 2. Ashcroft, Inc. 3. Brecco Corporation. 4. WIKA Instrument Corporation. B. Standard: UL 393. C. Dial Size: 3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch diameter. D. Pressure Gage Range: 0 to 250 psig. E. Water System Piping Gauge: Include "WATER" or "AIR/WATER" label on dial face. F. Air System Piping Gauge: Include "AIR" or "AIR/WATER" label on dial face. 2.9 SPRINKLER APPLICATIONS A. Comply with Drawings, "Sprinkler Schedule", for applications of sprinklers for specific services and service locations. 2.10 SPRINKLERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. 2. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. 3. Victaulic Company. 4. Viking Corporation. B. General: Brass body automatic sprinklers for fire-protection service; when applicable, listed for use in NFPA 13 Light or Ordinary Hazard occupancies as required by application; minimum Kfactor of 5.6. 1. Corrosion Resistant Sprinklers: Stainless steel body, or ENT-plating, or polyester coating; listed as corrosion resistant. C. Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig. D. Minimum Pressure Rating for High-Pressure Applications: 250 psig. E. Temperature Ratings: 1. Ordinary: 135 deg F to 170 deg F . 2. Intermediate: 175 deg F to 225 deg F . 3. High: 250 deg F to 300 deg F . F. Standard Spray-Pattern Sprinklers: 1. Standard: UL 199. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 WATER BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 211300 - 11 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Frame Styles: Upright, pendent, horizontal-sidewall, vertical-sidewall, concealed pendent, and concealed horizontal-sidewall. 3. K-factors: 5.6, 8.0, 11.2, and 14.0. 4. Response Characteristics: Quick response (QR), unless standard response (SR) is indicated or otherwise required by application. 5. Concealed Sprinkler Cover-plates: Flat, non-perforated; for ceiling- and wall-mount. a. Finishes: Polished chrome-plated, painted, and special application. 6. Sprinkler Finishes: Brass, polished chrome-plated, and painted. 7. Escutcheons: Single-piece steel; flush and recessed for ceiling- and wall-mount. a. Finishes: Polished chrome-plated and painted. G. Intermediate Level Sprinklers: 1. Standard: UL 199; standard and extended coverage spray-pattern. 2. Frame Styles: Upright and pendent with integral factory-assembled water shield. 3. K-factors: 5.6 and 8.0. 4. Response Characteristics: Quick response (QR), unless standard response (SR) is indicated or otherwise required by application. 5. Sprinkler Finishes: Brass, polished chrome-plated, and painted. H. Sprinkler Guards: 1. Standard: Listed for use with attached sprinkler. 2. Type: Single-piece, wire cage with fastening device for attachment to sprinkler. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Schedule and conduct water supply flow tests promptly to establish available water supply flow and pressure characteristics. B. Schedule and sequence water supply flow tests and Shop Drawing preparation such that the flow test date is no more than twelve (12) months prior to the Shop Drawing submittal date. C. Tests shall be conducted during time of seasonal and daily peak demand based upon review with local water authority. 1. Where testing during time of peak demand is not permitted or feasible, obtain historical data regarding seasonal and daily system pressure variations from local water authority. 3.2 WATER SUPPLY HYDRANT FLOW TESTS A. Perform water supply evaluation testing in accordance with NFPA 291 “Recommended Practice for Fire Flow Testing and Marking of Hydrants” for hydrant flow tests. B. Comply with Division 21 for hydrant flow tests. 3.3 WATER SUPPLY (EXISTING) FIRE PUMP FLOW TESTS A. Perform water supply flow testing in accordance with NFPA 25 “Standard for the Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems” for annual flow testing of existing fire pumps. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 WATER BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 211300 - 12 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. For existing systems supplied by pressure regulating valves, perform additional testing in accordance with NFPA 25 “Standard for the Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of WaterBased Fire Protection Systems” for flow testing of existing pressure reducing valves. C. Schedule test(s) with the Owner. Schedule water supply flow tests and Shop Drawing preparation such that the flow test date is no more than twelve (12) months prior to the Shop Drawing submittal date. D. Subject to compliance with requirements, Owner’s documented testing records, if available, may be used without repeating tests. 3.4 TECHNICIAN DESIGN AND LAYOUT A. General: 1. Roles and responsibilities shall be as set forth in NSPE Position Statement No. 1749 “SFPE/NSPE/NICET Joint Position of the Engineer and the Engineering Technician Designing the Fire Protection System”, available at nspe.org. As applied to the Work, the Contract Documents have been prepared by the “Engineer” and Shop Drawings required by this Section of the Work are prepared by the “Certified Engineering Technician”. 2. As the Certified Engineering Technician, prepare Shop Drawings indicating system layout and sizing in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, including but not limited to: a. Evaluation of water supply adequacy. b. Detailed sizing and layout of piping and appurtenances including feed-mains, risers, cross mains, branch lines, valves, drainage provisions, hangers, restraints, supports, and similar. c. Detailed sprinkler layouts. d. Hydraulic calculations. e. Installation details for the specific equipment being furnished. B. Design and Installation Standard(s): Comply with Part 2 Article “Performance Requirements”. a. Comply with the performance requirements indicated by the Contract Documents where such requirements are more stringent than those of the Design and Installation Standard(s); otherwise, comply with the performance requirements of the Design and Installation Standard(s). C. Water Supply Evaluation: 1. Evaluate water supply flow test data obtained as part of the Work of this Section against historical data obtained from the water authority and, where included, water supply flow test data indicated by the Contract Documents. 2. Promptly report in writing significant deviations between water supply test results obtained as part of the Work of this Section and those indicated by the Contract Documents or historical data; and anticipated system design impacts. 3. Complete the evaluation of water supply flow test data prior to preparing Shop Drawings and associated hydraulic calculations. D. Design and layout fire suppression piping to satisfy performance requirements: 1. Rectilinear fire suppression piping arrangement with respect to building partitions and structural elements. 2. Concealed fire suppression piping installation throughout finished spaces and maximum headroom beneath exposed fire suppression piping in areas exposed to structure above. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 WATER BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 211300 - 13 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. No fire suppression piping within electrical, information technology, or similar spaces other than branch piping serving sprinklers protecting such electrical, information technology, or similar space spaces. 4. No fire suppression piping directly above electrical equipment, electrical panels, information technology equipment, or similar energized equipment. 5. No fire suppression piping within exit enclosures except standpipes supplying hose valves within the exit enclosure, sprinkler zone control assemblies and piping immediately downstream, branch piping supplying sprinklers within the exit enclosure, and associated drain connections and risers. 6. No fire suppression piping within or in proximity to hazardous materials storage or processing operations other than branch piping serving sprinklers protecting such hazardous materials storage or processing operations. 7. Fire suppression piping supported from primary building structural elements or approved supplemental supports capable of supporting the attached load. 8. Fire suppression piping crossing building expansion joints provided with expansion fittings appropriate to the joint design deflection value. 9. Fire suppression feed-main, standpipe, and system riser piping supplied by fire pumps rigidly restrained against movement resulting from pump-induced system pressure increases and water velocity induced forces. 10. Fire suppression piping protected against damage where subject to earthquakes. 11. Fire suppression piping protected against damage where subject to freezing without the use of heat-trace cables unless indicated otherwise. 12. Fire suppression piping arranged such that piping drains back to main drains and drain risers without the use of auxiliary drains. 13. Fire suppression drain risers, system riser main-drain piping and other equipment drains discharge at a safe location outside the building or at an approved, adequately sized interior drain receptacle if outside discharge is not feasible. E. Design and layout sprinklers to satisfy performance requirements: 1. Sprinklers located to provide automatic sprinkler protection throughout as required by the Contract Documents and the requirements of the Design and Installation Standards. a. Comply with graphic sprinkler layouts and narrative layout parameters indicated by the Contract Documents. Where sprinkler layouts or layout parameters are not indicated by the Contract Documents, comply with Design and Installation Standard(s). 2. Sprinklers located according to the per-sprinkler protection area limitations corresponding to the protected occupancy hazard and construction type. 3. Sprinklers within finished-spaces flush or recessed mount as indicated; located in the center of suspended ceiling tiles, along the center-line of ceiling features, and in-line with adjacent ceiling fixtures. 4. Sprinklers located with respect to structural members and construction type and beam pocket arrangement within spaces exposed to structure above. 5. Sprinklers located with respect to obstructions to sprinkler discharge; considering all obstructions such as ductwork, piping, lighting, cable trays, floating ornamental ceilings, and similar. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 WATER BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 211300 - 14 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 a. Sprinkler protection provided above and below such obstructions where protection cannot be provided in accordance with the Design and Installation Standards via sprinklers located solely above or below obstructions. 6. Sprinklers located within construction voids or enclosed spaces that do not meet the NFPA 13 definition of concealed spaces due to openings or similar features. 7. Sprinklers located within combustible concealed spaces including attics, ceiling voids, and similar. 8. Sprinkler locations at water curtains coordinated with corresponding draft stops or protected glazing assemblies. 9. Specific-application sprinklers located in accordance with corresponding sprinkler listing requirements and restrictions. F. Hydraulically design water-based fire suppression system piping using the Hazen-Williams or Darcy-Weisbach formulas in accordance with the Design and Installation Standard(s). 1. Sprinkler System Occupancy Hazard and Discharge Criteria: Comply with criteria indicated by Drawings as approved by authorities having jurisdiction. a. Calculation areas shall not be reduced for quick response sprinkler applications. 2. Standpipe System Flow and Pressure Criteria: Comply with criteria indicated by Drawings as approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Margin of Safety Between Available and Required Pressure at Design Flowrate: 10 psi minimum, including losses through water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers. 4. For fire pump applications, submit fire pump product data including manufacturer’s characteristic pump curve prior to preparing hydraulic calculations. a. Use flow and pressure data points from the submitted manufacturer's characteristic fire pump curve when preparing hydraulic calculations. 5. For direct-acting pressure regulating valve applications, include manufacturer's pressure loss chart and indicate the calculated flow through the valve and resulting pressure loss. 6. For applications with system pressures greater than 175 psig, prepare a calculation at maximum static pressure to identify building floor elevations requiring pressure regulating valves. a. Riser Diagram: Indicate maximum static pressure at each floor elevation, including inlet and outlet pressure at pressure regulating valves where provided. 7. Include pressure losses associated with specialty fittings and assemblies such as seismic separation assemblies and flexible sprinkler connections. G. Hydraulic Calculations for Feed Main Piping: 1. Feed mains upstream of zone control and riser valve assemblies shall be no smaller than as indicated by the Drawings. 2. Standpipe hydraulic calculations shall include a 10 psi pressure loss for NPS 2-1/2 angle-pattern fire hose valves. 3. Manual Standpipe Systems: include calculations demonstrating compliance with performance criteria using fire department pumper truck supply via most remote inlet connection. H. Hydraulic Calculations for Sprinkler Piping: 1. Sprinkler zone control and riser valve assemblies shall be no smaller than as indicated by the Drawings. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 WATER BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 211300 - 15 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 a. Hydraulically determine pipe sizes for sprinkler piping downstream of zone control assemblies. 2. Where sprinkler systems are supplied by two (2) risers, pipe sizing shall be based upon supply from the hydraulically most remote riser only. 3. Include additional hydraulic calculations as required when the hydraulically most remote area is not clear (not the geometrically most remote). 4. Include a minimum of three (3) calculation areas for gridded systems demonstrating that the hydraulically most demanding area is identified. 5. Do not utilize NFPA 13 area reduction for quick response sprinklers unless otherwise indicated. I. Flexible Sprinkler Connections: 1. Hydraulic Calculations: Include pressure losses through flexible sprinkler connections. Indicate installation parameters for maximum hose length, maximum bend radius, maximum quantity of bends, and fitting patterns associated with the calculated pressure loss. 2. Shop Drawings: Include locations of flexible sprinkler connections with limiting installation parameters as determined via hydraulic calculations clearly indicated. 3.5 ON-SITE AS-BUILT DRAWINGS A. As work progresses and for the duration of the construction operations, maintain complete and separate set of prints of Shop Drawings (Working Plans) at project site at all times. Record work completed and all deviations from reviewed Shop Drawings (Working Plans) clearly and accurately. Include actual locations of existing utilities if they differ from design documents. Record valve tag designations as installed. 3.6 EXAMINATION A. Examine sleeved penetrations through concrete and structural penetrations through steel and verify that they are suitable for intended piping installation. B. Examine walls and partitions and verify that they are suitable for installation of piping, cabinets, inlet connections and similar products. C. Examine areas to contain standpipe hose outlets including stairwells and vestibules and verify that door swings or other obstructions will not interfere with the installation or future operation of hose valves. D. Report conflicts with proposed solutions. Proceed with installation after conflicts have been resolved. 3.7 WATER-SUPPLY CONNECTIONS A. Connect sprinkler piping to building's interior water-distribution piping. Comply with requirements for interior piping in Division 22 for domestic water piping." B. Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated at connection to water-distribution piping. C. Install backflow preventers of type, size, and capacity indicated. Include valves and test cocks. Install according to requirements of plumbing and health department and authorities having jurisdiction. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 WATER BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 211300 - 16 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.8 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated. 1. Deviations from approved Shop Drawings require written approval from authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from approved working plans. B. Piping Standard: Comply with requirements for installation of piping in NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. C. Install hangers and supports: Comply with Division 21 for common work results for fire suppression. D. Install seismic restraints and flexible couplings. Comply with Division 21 for seismic controls for fire suppression piping and equipment. E. Install provisions to accommodate building expansion joints. Provide for expansion at building expansion joints with assemblies listed for that purpose. Coordinate the maximum value of building deflection with the appropriate Structural Section of the Work. F. Install sleeves, sleeve-seals, fire-stopping, and pipe escutcheons. Comply with Division 21 for common work results for fire suppression. G. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes. 1. Hole-Cut Fittings: Where used, use two-piece cast type fittings only; fittings utilizing straps, U-bolts, or similar are not permitted. H. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller. I. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections. J. Install water-based fire suppression piping with drains for complete system drainage. K. Install water-based fire suppression piping such that piping drains back to main drains and drain risers without the use of auxiliary drains. L. Pipe drain risers, system riser main drain piping and other equipment drains to discharge at a safe location outside the building or at an approved interior drain receptacle if outside discharge is not feasible. M. Use threaded-end galvanized-iron 45-degree elbow with galvanized-iron wall plate for exterior drain outlet terminations at building exterior. Threads shall match drain hose adapter and coupling required under Part 1 Article “Extra Materials”. N. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve, and sized and located according to NFPA 13. O. Install sprinkler control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to standpipes when sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes. P. Install alarm devices in piping systems. Q. Install automatic air release vents. R. Install pressure gages at locations indicated and as required by the Design and Installation Standards. Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 and with soft metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and install where they will not be subject to freezing. S. Pressurize and check dry-pipe and preaction system piping, air-pressure maintenance devices, air compressors, and nitrogen-purge generators. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 WATER BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 211300 - 17 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 T. With air release vents in service, fill water-based fire suppression system piping with water. 3.9 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Comply with Div 21 “Common Work Results for Fire Suppression”. 3.10 VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION A. Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and trim, controls, and specialties according to the Design and Installation Standards and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised open, located to control sources of water supply except from fire-department connections. Install permanent identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each valve. C. Install valves in locations that are readily accessible. Install system control valves in areas that allow for safe fire department access during emergency conditions. D. Install indicating valves such that indicator is clearly visible from the floor level below. E. Pipe pressure relief valve- and air release fitting-discharge to sprinkler drain risers. F. Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of check valves in potable-water-supply sources. G. Install alarm valves in vertical position unless otherwise indicated. H. Install alarm valve trim sets for drain, priming level, alarm connections, ball drip valves, pressure gages, priming chamber attachment, and fill-line attachment. 3.11 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of acoustical ceiling panels with no visible deviation. B. Do not install pendent or sidewall, wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing. Install drytype sprinklers with water supply from heated space. C. Piping used for sprinkler connection return-bends, drop-nipples, and riser-springs shall be no smaller than NPS 1. D. Supply pendent sprinklers using a return-bend piping arrangement with connection at the top of the branch pipe to prevent the accumulation of piping corrosion, scale, and sediment at the sprinkler. E. Install sprinklers such that cover plate or escutcheon is flush and uniform with respect to penetrated ceiling or wall finish and complies with manufacturer installation requirements. Correct sprinklers that are not flush by adjusting them in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and/or re-installing sprinklers. 1. Adjustable sprinkler drop nipples are not permitted. F. Install sprinklers in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 13 and FM Global regarding obstructions to sprinkler discharge. Consider all obstructions such as structural elements, ductwork, piping, lighting, cable trays, and floating ornamental ceilings. Adjust sprinkler locations and/or add sprinklers as a Unit-Cost Allowance where installations are not coordinated and obstructions cannot be relocated to accommodate sprinklers as installed. 1. Coordinate the installation of solid barriers beneath “non flat”, “non solid”, or “non continuous” obstructions required by FM Global with the Construction Manager. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 WATER BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 211300 - 18 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 G. Provide and install guards on sprinklers susceptible to mechanical damage. At a minimum provide guards for pendent and upright sprinklers located in the following locations: electrical rooms and closets, near adjacent to ceiling mounted equipment requiring maintenance, beneath obstructions such as ductwork or catwalks, walk-in freezers or cold rooms, and beneath stair landings. H. Where not provided under other Sections of the Work, provide and install non-combustible baffles between sprinklers less than 6 feet apart to prevent cold-soldering. 3.12 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE SPRINKLER CONNECTIONS A. Install flexible sprinkler connections in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Install each flexible sprinkler connection according to the criteria and limitations established by the submitted Product Data, Shop Drawings and Hydraulic Calculations with respect to quantity and type of fitting connections, maximum hose length, maximum quantity of bends, and minimum bend radius. C. Branch connections shall be made a minimum 45 degrees from horizontal. Where connections from the side or bottom of branch are required due to coordination, locations shall be clearly indicated or shop drawings and approved by the Engineer. 3.13 FIRE HOSE VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install fire hose valves in readily accessible locations and with sufficient operational clearances for connection of fire hose and operation of valve handwheel. 1. Do not locate fire hose valves such that require the operator to stand within a door-swing path or similar obstruction or hazard. 2. Install exposed fire hose valves orientated to minimize projection into adjacent walking surfaces. B. Install fire hose valves in cabinets where indicated. Include pipe escutcheons with finish matching valves and firestopping if required. C. Install NPS 2-1/2 fire hose valves with quick-disconnect NPS 2-1/2 by NPS 1-1/2 reducer adapter. 3.14 IDENTIFICATION A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to Division 21 for identification for fire suppression piping and equipment. 3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance" Chapter. B. Flush, test, and inspect standpipe hose valve systems according to NFPA 14, "Systems Acceptance" Chapter. C. Hydrostatically test system piping in accordance with the applicable NFPA water-based fire suppression system design and installation standards. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. D. Inspect system components in accordance with the applicable NFPA water-based fire suppression system Design and Installation Standards. Adjust settings or replace damaged or malfunctioning components and retest until proper operation is achieved. E. Inspect and adjust alarm and delay settings of alarm devices. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 WATER BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 211300 - 19 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 F. Inspect and adjust alarm valve trim settings. G. Inspect and adjust air / nitrogen supply and delivery system settings. H. Inspect and adjust pressure relief valves such that no water is discharged under normal system working conditions. 1. Adjust standpipe fire hose valves in accordance with the minimum and maximum pressure requirements indicated in NFPA 14. 2. Adjust sprinkler system regulating devices in accordance with the maximum pressure requirements of NFPA 13 and the minimum pressure requirements as indicated by hydraulic calculations. I. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire-department equipment. J. Functionally test water-based fire suppression systems, including required full-flow tests, in accordance with the applicable NFPA water-based fire suppression system Design and Installation Standards. Combine tests to conserve water. Correct deficiencies and retest satisfactory results are achieved. K. Conduct backflow preventer forward-flow tests. L. Conduct main-drain tests. M. Conduct standpipe flow tests; automatic and manual operation. N. Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required. O. Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required. P. Water-based fire suppression system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. Q. Prepare test and inspection reports. Use NFPA “Contractor’s Material and Test Certificate” format. 3.16 CLEANING A. Clean dirt and debris from system components including backflow preventers, listed fire protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty fittings, alarm devices, pressure gauges, air compressors, and nitrogen generators. B. Clean dirt and debris from hose valves and specialties. C. Clean dirt, debris from sprinklers. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish or similar. D. Clean dirt and debris from fire department inlet and outlet connections. 3.17 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner’s maintenance personal to adjust, operate, and maintain water-based fire suppression systems; including the following: 1. NFPA 25 inspection, testing, and maintenance activities and frequencies. 2. Location and function of system isolation valves. 3. Location and function of system drain valves and test valves. 4. Location of drain discharge outlets and procedure for connection of exterior drain hose. 5. Location and contents of spare sprinkler cabinet and procedure for emergency replacement of sprinkler. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 WATER BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 211300 - 20 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 6. Procedure for conducting backflow preventer forward-flow tests. 7. Procedure for conducting main-drain flow tests. 8. Procedure for conducting sprinkler waterflow alarm tests. 9. Procedure for conducting fire hose valve standpipe flow tests. 10. Procedure for conducting pressure-regulating valve flow tests. B. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the following: 1. Wet-pipe, dry-pipe, and deluge alarm valves. 2. Air compressors and nitrogen-purge generators. 3.18 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Comply with Drawings, “Piping Schedule”. 3.19 SPRINKLER SCHEDULE A. Comply with Drawings, “Sprinkler Schedule”. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\211300_WATER BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS.DOC Vanderweil 274 Summer Street Boston, MA, 02210 (617) 423-7423 Job Name : Cornell Olin Hall Building : Olin Hall Location : Ithaca‚ NY System : 1 Contract : 29313.00 Data File : 29313 - Cornell Olin Hall 3rd Floor.wxf Computer Programs by Hydratec Inc. Route 111 Windham N.H. USA 03087 DocuSign Envelope ID: 16D22766-FE84-4A18-A03C-41923ADE7BC0 11/30/2018 6:12:51 AM PST Vanderweil Page 1 Cornell Olin Hall Date 11/29/2018 Hydraulic Design Information Sheet Name - Cornell Olin Hall - Phase 1 Renovation Date - 11/2/2018 Location - Ithaca‚ NY Building - Olin Hall System No. - 1 Contractor - TBD Contract No. - 29313.00 Calculated By - DGS Drawing No. - FP2.30 Construction: ( ) Combustible (X) Non-Combustible Ceiling Height - VARIES Occupancy - BUSINESS S (X) NFPA 13 ( ) Lt. Haz. Ord.Haz.Gp. ( ) 1 (X) 2 ( ) 3 ( ) Ex.Haz. Y ( ) NFPA 231 ( ) NFPA 231C ( ) Figure Curve S Other T Specific Ruling Made By Date E M Area of Sprinkler Operation - 2500 System Type Sprinkler/Nozzle Density - 0.2 (X) Wet Make D Area Per Sprinkler - 130 ( ) Dry Model E Elevation at Highest Outlet - 48.5 ( ) Deluge Size S Hose Allowance - Inside - 100 ( ) Preaction K-Factor 8.0/5.6 I Rack Sprinkler Allowance - ( ) Other Temp.Rat. G Hose Allowance - Outside - N Note Calculation Flow Required - Press Required - Summary C-Factor Used: 120 Overhead Underground W Water Flow Test: Pump Data: Tank or Reservoir: A Date of Test - 11/06/18 Cap. - T Time of Test - Rated Cap.- 750 Elev.- E Static Press - 176 @ Press - 65 R Residual Press - 140 Elev. - Well Flow - 750 Proof Flow S Elevation - 0'-0" U P Location - P L Source of Information - Y C Commodity Class Location O Storage Ht. Area Aisle W. M Storage Method: Solid Piled % Palletized % Rack M ( ) Single Row ( ) Conven. Pallet ( ) Auto. Storage ( ) Encap. S R ( ) Double Row ( ) Slave Pallet ( ) Solid Shelf ( ) Non T A ( ) Mult. Row ( ) Open Shelf O C R K Flue Spacing Clearance:Storage to Ceiling A Longitudinal Transverse G E Horizontal Barriers Provided: Computer Programs by Hydratec Inc. Route 111 Windham N.H. USA 03087 DocuSign Envelope ID: 16D22766-FE84-4A18-A03C-41923ADE7BC0 VanderweilPage2 Cornell Olin HallDate11/29/2018 12 24 36 48 E60 R72 U84 S96 S108 E120 R132 P144 156 168 180 20040060080010001200140016001800 FLOW ( N ^ 1.85 ) City Water Supply:Demand: C1 C2 C1 - Static Pressure:177 C2 - Residual Pressure:103 C2 - Residual Flow:1125 D1 D2 D3 D1 - Elevation: 21.005 D2 - System Flow:832.86 D2 - System Pressure: 90.989 Hose ( Demand ):250 D3 - System Demand:1082.86 Safety Margin: 17.057 Water Supply Curve (C) Computer Programs by Hydratec Inc. Route 111 Windham N.H. USA 03087 DocuSign Envelope ID: 16D22766-FE84-4A18-A03C-41923ADE7BC 0 VanderweilPage3 Cornell Olin HallDate11/29/2018 Fitting Legend Abbrev.Name½¾11¼1½22½33½456810121416182024 BNFPA 13 Butterfly Valve00000671001291012192100000 ENFPA 13 90' Standard Elbow1223456781012141822273540455061 FspFlow Switch Potter VSRFitting generates a Fixed Loss Based on Flow GNFPA 13 Gate Valve00000111122345678101113 SNFPA 13 Swing Check0057911141619222732455565 TNFPA 13 90' Flow thru Tee3456810121517202530355060718191101121 Units Summary Diameter UnitsInches Length UnitsFeet Flow UnitsUS Gallons per Minute Pressure UnitsPounds per Square Inch Note: Fitting Legend provides equivalent pipe lengths for fittings types of various diameters. Equivalent lengths shown are standard for actual diameters of Sched 40 pipe and CFactors of 120 except as noted with *. The fittings marked with a * show equivalent lengths values supplied by manufacturers based on specific pipe diameters and CFactors and they require no adjustment. All values for fittings not marked with a * will be adjusted in the calculation for CFactors of other than 120 and diameters other than Sched 40 per NFPA. Fittings Used Summary Computer Programs by Hydratec Inc. Route 111 Windham N.H. USA 03087 DocuSign Envelope ID: 16D22766-FE84-4A18-A03C-41923ADE7BC0 Vanderweil Page 4 Cornell Olin Hall Date 11/29/2018 Node Elevation K-Fact Pt Pn Flow Density Area Press No. Actual Actual Req. S1 44.5 8 10.55 na 25.99 0.2 112 7.0 S2 47.25 8 10.6 na 26.05 0.2 32 7.0 S3 47.25 8 11.22 na 26.79 0.2 32 7.0 S4 47.25 8 12.54 na 28.32 0.2 32 7.0 S5 48.5 5.6 15.51 na 22.05 0.1 86 7.0 S6 44.5 8 11.28 na 26.87 0.2 112 7.0 S7 44.5 8 9.63 na 24.82 0.2 86 7.0 S8 44.5 8 10.06 na 25.38 0.2 74 7.0 S9 44.5 8 12.43 na 28.2 0.2 74 7.0 S10 48.5 5.6 15.85 na 22.3 0.1 75 7.0 S11 48.5 5.6 9.93 na 17.65 0.1 100 7.0 S12 48.5 5.6 10.78 na 18.39 0.1 113 7.0 S13 48.5 5.6 11.29 na 18.81 0.1 113 7.0 S14 48.5 5.6 10.54 na 18.18 0.1 100 7.0 S15 48.5 5.6 11.64 na 19.11 0.1 113 7.0 S16 48.5 5.6 12.19 na 19.55 0.1 113 7.0 S17 48.5 8 9.25 na 24.33 0.2 120 7.0 S18 48.5 8 9.0 na 24.0 0.2 120 7.0 S19 44.5 8 9.75 na 24.98 0.2 86 7.0 S20 44.5 8 11.34 na 26.94 0.2 86 7.0 S21 48.5 5.6 15.12 na 21.77 0.1 98 7.0 S22 48.5 5.6 16.29 na 22.6 0.1 44 7.0 S23 44.5 5.6 16.51 na 22.76 0.1 114 7.0 S24 48.5 5.6 17.4 na 23.36 0.1 24 7.0 S25 48.5 5.6 18.82 na 24.29 0.1 85 7.0 S26 48.5 5.6 18.49 na 24.08 0.1 85 7.0 S27 48.5 8 9.27 na 24.35 0.2 116 7.0 S28 48.5 8 10.37 na 25.76 0.2 116 7.0 S29 48.5 8 11.7 na 27.37 0.2 96 7.0 S30 48.5 8 8.99 na 23.99 0.2 116 7.0 S31 48.5 8 10.56 na 26.0 0.2 116 7.0 S32 48.5 8 11.89 na 27.58 0.2 96 7.0 S33 44.5 8 7.2 na 21.47 0.2 21 7.0 S34 44.5 8 7.45 na 21.84 0.2 29 7.0 S35 44.5 8 11.32 na 26.92 0.2 29 7.0 B1 48.17 12.27 na B2 48.17 12.52 na B3 48.17 13.26 na B4 48.17 14.84 na B5 48.0 17.32 na B6 48.0 12.22 na B8 45.0 11.94 na B7 48.0 12.59 na B9 48.0 14.7 na B10 48.0 17.43 na B11 47.67 11.87 na B12 47.67 12.4 na B14 47.67 12.66 na B15 47.67 13.23 na B13 47.67 13.27 na B25 47.67 14.16 na B16 48.0 10.4 na B17 48.0 10.68 na B18 48.0 11.25 na B19 48.0 14.14 na B20 48.0 16.55 na B21 48.0 18.11 na B22 48.0 18.4 na B23 48.0 19.55 na B24 48.0 19.76 na B30 47.67 10.09 na B31 47.67 11.87 na Pressure / Flow Summary - STANDARD Computer Programs by Hydratec Inc. Route 111 Windham N.H. USA 03087 DocuSign Envelope ID: 16D22766-FE84-4A18-A03C-41923ADE7BC0 Vanderweil Page 5 Cornell Olin Hall Date 11/29/2018 Node Elevation K-Fact Pt Pn Flow Density Area Press No. Actual Actual Req. B32 47.67 13.34 na B33 47.67 16.62 na B34 47.67 17.47 na B35 47.67 10.35 na B36 47.67 12.08 na B37 47.67 13.54 na B38 47.67 16.83 na B39 47.67 17.68 na B40 47.67 7.37 na B41 47.67 8.81 na B42 47.67 13.97 na B43 47.67 17.97 na M1 47.0 20.8 na M2 47.0 20.84 na M3 47.0 21.01 na M4 47.0 21.13 na M7 47.0 21.37 na M9 47.0 21.67 na M11 47.0 24.44 na M10 47.0 24.8 na TOR 46.0 42.02 na BOR 5.0 65.52 na FM1 5.0 85.32 na FPO 0.0 90.99 na 250.0 The maximum velocity is 18.75 and it occurs in the pipe between nodes M10 and TOR Flow Summary - Standard Computer Programs by Hydratec Inc. Route 111 Windham N.H. USA 03087 DocuSign Envelope ID: 16D22766-FE84-4A18-A03C-41923ADE7BC0 Vanderweil Page 6 Cornell Olin Hall Date 11/29/2018 Hyd. Qa Dia. Fitting Pipe Pt Pt Ref. "C" or Ftng's Pe Pv ******* Notes ****** Point Qt Pf/Ft Eqv. Ln. Total Pf Pn S1 25.99 1.049 5E 10.0 5.670 10.552 K Factor = 8.00 to 120.0 0.0 10.000 -1.589 B1 25.99 0.2112 0.0 15.670 3.310 Vel = 9.65 0.0 25.99 12.273 K Factor = 7.42 S2 26.05 1.049 1T 5.0 1.920 10.605 K Factor = 8.00 to 120.0 2E 4.0 9.000 -0.398 B2 26.05 0.2122 0.0 10.920 2.317 Vel = 9.67 0.0 26.05 12.524 K Factor = 7.36 S3 26.79 1.049 1T 5.0 1.920 11.216 K Factor = 8.00 to 120.0 2E 4.0 9.000 -0.398 B3 26.79 0.2234 0.0 10.920 2.440 Vel = 9.95 0.0 26.79 13.258 K Factor = 7.36 S4 28.32 1.049 1T 5.0 1.920 12.535 K Factor = 8.00 to 120.0 2E 4.0 9.000 -0.398 B4 28.32 0.2477 0.0 10.920 2.705 Vel = 10.51 0.0 28.32 14.842 K Factor = 7.35 S5 22.05 1.049 1T 5.0 3.250 15.506 K Factor = 5.60 to 120.0 1E 2.0 7.000 0.217 B5 22.05 0.1558 0.0 10.250 1.597 Vel = 8.19 0.0 22.05 17.320 K Factor = 5.30 S6 26.87 1.049 3E 6.0 4.920 11.283 K Factor = 8.00 to 120.0 0.0 6.000 -1.516 B6 26.87 0.2248 0.0 10.920 2.455 Vel = 9.97 0.0 26.87 12.222 K Factor = 7.69 S7 24.82 1.049 1T 5.0 4.000 9.629 K Factor = 8.00 to 120.0 2E 4.0 9.000 -0.217 B8 24.82 0.1941 0.0 13.000 2.523 Vel = 9.21 0.0 24.82 11.935 K Factor = 7.18 S8 25.38 1.049 1T 5.0 3.330 10.063 K Factor = 8.00 to 120.0 1E 2.0 7.000 -0.217 B8 25.38 0.2022 0.0 10.330 2.089 Vel = 9.42 0.0 25.38 11.935 K Factor = 7.35 S9 28.20 1.049 1T 5.0 6.420 12.427 K Factor = 8.00 to 120.0 2E 4.0 9.000 -1.516 B9 28.2 0.2457 0.0 15.420 3.789 Vel = 10.47 0.0 28.20 14.700 K Factor = 7.36 S10 22.30 1.049 1T 5.0 1.580 15.851 K Factor = 5.60 to 120.0 1E 2.0 7.000 0.217 B10 22.3 0.1590 0.0 8.580 1.364 Vel = 8.28 Final Calculations - Hazen-Williams Computer Programs by Hydratec Inc. Route 111 Windham N.H. USA 03087 DocuSign Envelope ID: 16D22766-FE84-4A18-A03C-41923ADE7BC0 Vanderweil Page 7 Cornell Olin Hall Date 11/29/2018 Hyd. Qa Dia. Fitting Pipe Pt Pt Ref. "C" or Ftng's Pe Pv ******* Notes ****** Point Qt Pf/Ft Eqv. Ln. Total Pf Pn 0.0 22.30 17.432 K Factor = 5.34 S11 17.65 1.049 2E 4.0 11.250 9.932 K Factor = 5.60 to 120.0 0.0 4.000 0.359 B11 17.65 0.1033 0.0 15.250 1.575 Vel = 6.55 0.0 17.65 11.866 K Factor = 5.12 S12 18.39 1.049 1T 5.0 1.500 10.782 K Factor = 5.60 to 120.0 0.0 5.000 0.359 B11 18.39 0.1115 0.0 6.500 0.725 Vel = 6.83 0.0 18.39 11.866 K Factor = 5.34 S13 18.81 1.049 1T 5.0 1.500 11.288 K Factor = 5.60 to 120.0 0.0 5.000 0.359 B12 18.81 0.1162 0.0 6.500 0.755 Vel = 6.98 0.0 18.81 12.402 K Factor = 5.34 S14 18.18 1.049 3E 6.0 10.170 10.537 K Factor = 5.60 to 120.0 0.0 6.000 0.359 B14 18.18 0.1091 0.0 16.170 1.764 Vel = 6.75 0.0 18.18 12.660 K Factor = 5.11 S15 19.11 1.049 1T 5.0 0.500 11.643 K Factor = 5.60 to 120.0 0.0 5.000 0.359 B14 19.11 0.1196 0.0 5.500 0.658 Vel = 7.09 0.0 19.11 12.660 K Factor = 5.37 S16 19.55 1.049 1T 5.0 0.500 12.186 K Factor = 5.60 to 120.0 0.0 5.000 0.359 B15 19.55 0.1247 0.0 5.500 0.686 Vel = 7.26 0.0 19.55 13.231 K Factor = 5.37 S17 24.33 1.049 2E 4.0 1.000 9.247 K Factor = 8.00 to 120.0 0.0 4.000 0.217 B16 24.33 0.1868 0.0 5.000 0.934 Vel = 9.03 0.0 24.33 10.398 K Factor = 7.55 S18 24.00 1.049 1T 5.0 1.000 9.000 K Factor = 8.00 to 120.0 1E 2.0 7.000 0.217 B17 24.0 0.1822 0.0 8.000 1.458 Vel = 8.91 0.0 24.00 10.675 K Factor = 7.35 S19 24.98 1.049 1T 5.0 6.330 9.752 K Factor = 8.00 to 120.0 2E 4.0 9.000 -1.516 B18 24.98 0.1964 0.0 15.330 3.011 Vel = 9.27 0.0 24.98 11.247 K Factor = 7.45 Final Calculations - Hazen-Williams Computer Programs by Hydratec Inc. Route 111 Windham N.H. USA 03087 DocuSign Envelope ID: 16D22766-FE84-4A18-A03C-41923ADE7BC0 Vanderweil Page 8 Cornell Olin Hall Date 11/29/2018 Hyd. Qa Dia. Fitting Pipe Pt Pt Ref. "C" or Ftng's Pe Pv ******* Notes ****** Point Qt Pf/Ft Eqv. Ln. Total Pf Pn S20 26.94 1.049 1T 5.0 6.080 11.342 K Factor = 8.00 to 120.0 4E 8.0 13.000 -1.516 B19 26.94 0.2259 0.0 19.080 4.310 Vel = 10.00 0.0 26.94 14.136 K Factor = 7.17 S21 21.77 1.049 1T 5.0 1.000 15.117 K Factor = 5.60 to 120.0 1E 2.0 7.000 0.217 B20 21.77 0.1522 0.0 8.000 1.218 Vel = 8.08 0.0 21.77 16.552 K Factor = 5.35 S22 22.60 1.049 1T 5.0 2.830 16.288 K Factor = 5.60 to 120.0 1E 2.0 7.000 0.217 B21 22.6 0.1632 0.0 9.830 1.604 Vel = 8.39 0.0 22.60 18.109 K Factor = 5.31 S23 22.76 1.049 1T 5.0 7.580 16.512 K Factor = 5.60 to 120.0 4E 8.0 13.000 -1.516 B22 22.76 0.1653 0.0 20.580 3.401 Vel = 8.45 0.0 22.76 18.397 K Factor = 5.31 S24 23.36 1.049 1E 2.0 0.830 17.401 K Factor = 5.60 to 120.0 0.0 2.000 0.217 B21 23.36 0.1735 0.0 2.830 0.491 Vel = 8.67 0.0 23.36 18.109 K Factor = 5.49 S25 24.29 1.049 1E 2.0 0.750 18.821 K Factor = 5.60 to 120.0 0.0 2.000 0.217 B23 24.29 0.1862 0.0 2.750 0.512 Vel = 9.02 0.0 24.29 19.550 K Factor = 5.49 S26 24.08 1.049 1T 5.0 0.750 18.487 K Factor = 5.60 to 120.0 0.0 5.000 0.217 B24 24.08 0.1835 0.0 5.750 1.055 Vel = 8.94 0.0 24.08 19.759 K Factor = 5.42 S27 24.35 1.049 1E 2.0 0.500 9.267 K Factor = 8.00 to 120.0 0.0 2.000 0.359 B30 24.35 0.1876 0.0 2.500 0.469 Vel = 9.04 0.0 24.35 10.095 K Factor = 7.66 S28 25.76 1.049 1T 5.0 0.500 10.372 K Factor = 8.00 to 120.0 0.0 5.000 0.359 B31 25.76 0.2078 0.0 5.500 1.143 Vel = 9.56 0.0 25.76 11.874 K Factor = 7.48 S29 27.37 1.049 1T 5.0 0.500 11.702 K Factor = 8.00 to 120.0 0.0 5.000 0.359 B32 27.37 0.2325 0.0 5.500 1.279 Vel = 10.16 Final Calculations - Hazen-Williams Computer Programs by Hydratec Inc. Route 111 Windham N.H. USA 03087 DocuSign Envelope ID: 16D22766-FE84-4A18-A03C-41923ADE7BC0 Vanderweil Page 9 Cornell Olin Hall Date 11/29/2018 Hyd. Qa Dia. Fitting Pipe Pt Pt Ref. "C" or Ftng's Pe Pv ******* Notes ****** Point Qt Pf/Ft Eqv. Ln. Total Pf Pn 0.0 27.37 13.340 K Factor = 7.49 S30 23.99 1.049 1T 5.0 0.500 8.992 K Factor = 8.00 to 120.0 0.0 5.000 0.359 B35 23.99 0.1822 0.0 5.500 1.002 Vel = 8.91 0.0 23.99 10.353 K Factor = 7.46 S31 26.00 1.049 1T 5.0 0.500 10.562 K Factor = 8.00 to 120.0 0.0 5.000 0.359 B36 26.0 0.2115 0.0 5.500 1.163 Vel = 9.65 0.0 26.00 12.084 K Factor = 7.48 S32 27.58 1.049 1T 5.0 0.500 11.887 K Factor = 8.00 to 120.0 0.0 5.000 0.359 B37 27.58 0.2358 0.0 5.500 1.297 Vel = 10.24 0.0 27.58 13.543 K Factor = 7.49 S33 21.47 1.049 3E 6.0 4.420 7.201 K Factor = 8.00 to 120.0 0.0 6.000 -1.373 B40 21.47 0.1484 0.0 10.420 1.546 Vel = 7.97 0.0 21.47 7.374 K Factor = 7.91 S34 21.84 1.049 1T 5.0 4.830 7.451 K Factor = 8.00 to 120.0 4E 8.0 13.000 -1.373 B41 21.84 0.1531 0.0 17.830 2.730 Vel = 8.11 0.0 21.84 8.808 K Factor = 7.36 S35 26.92 1.049 1T 5.0 4.830 11.323 K Factor = 8.00 to 120.0 4E 8.0 13.000 -1.373 B42 26.92 0.2255 0.0 17.830 4.020 Vel = 9.99 0.0 26.92 13.970 K Factor = 7.20 B1 25.99 1.61 0.0 9.580 12.273 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 B2 25.99 0.0262 0.0 9.580 0.251 Vel = 4.10 B2 26.05 1.61 0.0 7.750 12.524 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 B3 52.04 0.0947 0.0 7.750 0.734 Vel = 8.20 B3 26.79 1.61 0.0 7.750 13.258 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 B4 78.83 0.2044 0.0 7.750 1.584 Vel = 12.42 B4 28.33 1.61 0.0 6.670 14.842 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.074 B5 107.16 0.3604 0.0 6.670 2.404 Vel = 16.89 B5 22.05 2.067 1T 10.0 5.170 17.320 to 120.0 1E 5.0 15.000 0.433 M1 129.21 0.1510 0.0 20.170 3.045 Vel = 12.35 Final Calculations - Hazen-Williams Computer Programs by Hydratec Inc. Route 111 Windham N.H. USA 03087 DocuSign Envelope ID: 16D22766-FE84-4A18-A03C-41923ADE7BC0 Vanderweil Page 10 Cornell Olin Hall Date 11/29/2018 Hyd. Qa Dia. Fitting Pipe Pt Pt Ref. "C" or Ftng's Pe Pv ******* Notes ****** Point Qt Pf/Ft Eqv. Ln. Total Pf Pn 0.0 129.21 20.798 K Factor = 28.33 B6 26.87 1.61 0.0 13.330 12.222 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 B7 26.87 0.0279 0.0 13.330 0.372 Vel = 4.23 0.0 26.87 12.594 K Factor = 7.57 B8 50.20 1.61 1T 8.0 6.080 11.935 to 120.0 2E 8.0 16.000 -1.299 B7 50.2 0.0887 0.0 22.080 1.958 Vel = 7.91 B7 26.87 1.61 0.0 10.750 12.594 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 B9 77.07 0.1959 0.0 10.750 2.106 Vel = 12.15 B9 28.21 1.61 0.0 7.830 14.700 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 B10 105.28 0.3489 0.0 7.830 2.732 Vel = 16.59 B10 22.29 2.067 1T 10.0 5.170 17.432 to 120.0 1E 5.0 15.000 0.433 M2 127.57 0.1474 0.0 20.170 2.974 Vel = 12.20 0.0 127.57 20.839 K Factor = 27.95 B11 36.04 1.61 0.0 11.170 11.866 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 B12 36.04 0.0480 0.0 11.170 0.536 Vel = 5.68 B12 18.81 1.61 1T 8.0 0.330 12.402 to 120.0 0.0 8.000 0.0 B13 54.85 0.1044 0.0 8.330 0.870 Vel = 8.64 0.0 54.85 13.272 K Factor = 15.06 B14 37.29 1.61 0.0 11.170 12.660 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 B15 37.29 0.0511 0.0 11.170 0.571 Vel = 5.88 B15 19.54 1.61 1T 8.0 0.330 13.231 to 120.0 0.0 8.000 0.0 B25 56.83 0.1115 0.0 8.330 0.929 Vel = 8.96 0.0 56.83 14.160 K Factor = 15.10 B13 54.85 1.61 0.0 8.500 13.272 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 B25 54.85 0.1045 0.0 8.500 0.888 Vel = 8.64 B25 56.84 1.61 1T 8.0 5.170 14.160 to 120.0 1E 4.0 12.000 0.290 M4 111.69 0.3893 0.0 17.170 6.684 Vel = 17.60 0.0 111.69 21.134 K Factor = 24.30 B16 24.33 1.61 0.0 11.920 10.398 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 B17 24.33 0.0232 0.0 11.920 0.277 Vel = 3.83 Final Calculations - Hazen-Williams Computer Programs by Hydratec Inc. Route 111 Windham N.H. USA 03087 DocuSign Envelope ID: 16D22766-FE84-4A18-A03C-41923ADE7BC0 Vanderweil Page 11 Cornell Olin Hall Date 11/29/2018 Hyd. Qa Dia. Fitting Pipe Pt Pt Ref. "C" or Ftng's Pe Pv ******* Notes ****** Point Qt Pf/Ft Eqv. Ln. Total Pf Pn B17 24.00 1.61 0.0 6.920 10.675 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 B18 48.33 0.0827 0.0 6.920 0.572 Vel = 7.62 B18 24.98 1.61 2E 8.0 8.170 11.247 to 120.0 0.0 8.000 0.0 B19 73.31 0.1787 0.0 16.170 2.889 Vel = 11.55 B19 26.94 1.61 0.0 7.580 14.136 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 B20 100.25 0.3187 0.0 7.580 2.416 Vel = 15.80 B20 21.78 2.067 1T 10.0 4.670 16.552 to 120.0 3E 15.0 25.000 0.433 M3 122.03 0.1358 0.0 29.670 4.029 Vel = 11.67 0.0 122.03 21.014 K Factor = 26.62 B21 45.96 1.61 0.0 3.830 18.109 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 B22 45.96 0.0752 0.0 3.830 0.288 Vel = 7.24 B22 22.76 1.61 1T 8.0 4.000 18.397 to 120.0 1E 4.0 12.000 0.433 M7 68.72 0.1585 0.0 16.000 2.536 Vel = 10.83 0.0 68.72 21.366 K Factor = 14.87 B23 24.29 1.61 0.0 9.000 19.550 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 B24 24.29 0.0232 0.0 9.000 0.209 Vel = 3.83 B24 24.08 1.61 1T 8.0 5.830 19.759 to 120.0 1E 4.0 12.000 0.433 M9 48.37 0.0828 0.0 17.830 1.476 Vel = 7.62 0.0 48.37 21.668 K Factor = 10.39 B30 24.35 1.049 0.0 9.500 10.095 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 B31 24.35 0.1873 0.0 9.500 1.779 Vel = 9.04 B31 25.77 1.38 0.0 7.830 11.874 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 B32 50.12 0.1872 0.0 7.830 1.466 Vel = 10.75 B32 27.36 1.38 0.0 7.830 13.340 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 B33 77.48 0.4193 0.0 7.830 3.283 Vel = 16.62 B33 0.0 2.067 1T 10.0 4.500 16.623 to 120.0 0.0 10.000 0.0 B34 77.48 0.0586 0.0 14.500 0.850 Vel = 7.41 B34 0.0 2.635 0.0 11.750 17.473 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 B39 77.48 0.0180 0.0 11.750 0.211 Vel = 4.56 0.0 77.48 17.684 K Factor = 18.42 Final Calculations - Hazen-Williams Computer Programs by Hydratec Inc. Route 111 Windham N.H. USA 03087 DocuSign Envelope ID: 16D22766-FE84-4A18-A03C-41923ADE7BC0 Vanderweil Page 12 Cornell Olin Hall Date 11/29/2018 Hyd. Qa Dia. Fitting Pipe Pt Pt Ref. "C" or Ftng's Pe Pv ******* Notes ****** Point Qt Pf/Ft Eqv. Ln. Total Pf Pn B35 23.99 1.049 0.0 9.500 10.353 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 B36 23.99 0.1822 0.0 9.500 1.731 Vel = 8.91 B36 26.00 1.38 0.0 7.830 12.084 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 B37 49.99 0.1863 0.0 7.830 1.459 Vel = 10.72 B37 27.58 1.38 0.0 7.830 13.543 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 B38 77.57 0.4202 0.0 7.830 3.290 Vel = 16.64 B38 0.0 2.067 1T 10.0 4.500 16.833 to 120.0 0.0 10.000 0.0 B39 77.57 0.0587 0.0 14.500 0.851 Vel = 7.42 B39 77.48 2.635 0.0 4.420 17.684 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 B43 155.05 0.0649 0.0 4.420 0.287 Vel = 9.12 0.0 155.05 17.971 K Factor = 36.58 B40 21.47 1.049 0.0 9.670 7.374 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 B41 21.47 0.1483 0.0 9.670 1.434 Vel = 7.97 B41 21.84 1.049 0.0 9.500 8.808 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 B42 43.31 0.5434 0.0 9.500 5.162 Vel = 16.08 B42 26.92 1.61 1T 8.0 16.250 13.970 to 120.0 0.0 8.000 0.0 B43 70.23 0.1650 0.0 24.250 4.001 Vel = 11.07 B43 155.05 2.635 1T 16.474 23.000 17.971 to 120.0 1E 8.237 24.711 0.290 M11 225.28 0.1294 0.0 47.711 6.175 Vel = 13.25 0.0 225.28 24.436 K Factor = 45.57 M1 129.21 4.26 0.0 9.250 20.798 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 M2 129.21 0.0044 0.0 9.250 0.041 Vel = 2.91 M2 127.57 4.26 0.0 11.000 20.839 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 M3 256.78 0.0159 0.0 11.000 0.175 Vel = 5.78 M3 122.02 4.26 0.0 3.670 21.014 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 M4 378.8 0.0327 0.0 3.670 0.120 Vel = 8.53 M4 111.69 4.26 0.0 4.420 21.134 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 M7 490.49 0.0525 0.0 4.420 0.232 Vel = 11.04 M7 68.72 4.26 0.0 4.500 21.366 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 M9 559.21 0.0671 0.0 4.500 0.302 Vel = 12.59 M9 48.37 4.26 1T 26.334 13.670 21.668 to 120.0 0.0 26.334 0.0 M10 607.58 0.0782 0.0 40.004 3.127 Vel = 13.68 Final Calculations - Hazen-Williams Computer Programs by Hydratec Inc. Route 111 Windham N.H. USA 03087 DocuSign Envelope ID: 16D22766-FE84-4A18-A03C-41923ADE7BC0 Vanderweil Page 13 Cornell Olin Hall Date 11/29/2018 Hyd. Qa Dia. Fitting Pipe Pt Pt Ref. "C" or Ftng's Pe Pv ******* Notes ****** Point Qt Pf/Ft Eqv. Ln. Total Pf Pn 0.0 607.58 24.795 K Factor = 122.02 M11 225.28 4.26 1T 26.334 2.500 24.436 to 120.0 0.0 26.334 0.0 M10 225.28 0.0125 0.0 28.834 0.359 Vel = 5.07 M10 607.58 4.26 1T 26.334 27.330 24.795 to 120.0 1B 15.8 71.102 3.433 * Fixed loss = 3 TOR 832.86 0.1401 1Fsp 0.0 98.432 13.792 Vel = 18.75 1S 28.968 0.0 832.86 42.020 K Factor = 128.48 TOR 832.86 4.26 0.0 41.000 42.020 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 17.757 BOR 832.86 0.1401 0.0 41.000 5.745 Vel = 18.75 BOR 0.0 4.26 1T 26.334 86.000 65.522 to 120.0 2E 26.334 55.301 0.0 FM1 832.86 0.1401 1G 2.633 141.301 19.798 Vel = 18.75 FM1 0.0 6.357 6E 105.616 70.000 85.320 to 120.0 0.0 105.616 2.166 FPO 832.86 0.0199 0.0 175.616 3.503 Vel = 8.42 250.00 Qa = 250.00 1082.86 90.989 K Factor = 113.52 Final Calculations - Hazen-Williams Computer Programs by Hydratec Inc. Route 111 Windham N.H. USA 03087 DocuSign Envelope ID: 16D22766-FE84-4A18-A03C-41923ADE7BC0 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 220500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Section. These requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Transition fittings. 3. Dielectric fittings. 4. Mechanical sleeve seals. 5. Sleeves. 6. Escutcheons. 7. Plumbing demolition. 8. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 9. Painting and finishing. 10. Concrete bases. 11. Supports and anchorages. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels. B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms. C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases. E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Transition fittings. 2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Mechanical sleeve seals. 4. Escutcheons. B. Welding certificates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current. C. Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for plumbing installations. B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for plumbing items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods. B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings. 2.3 JOINING MATERIALS A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below. B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. 2. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. 3. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges. 4. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated. C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated. G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. 2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS A. AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Manufacturers: 2. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. 3. Dresser Industries, Inc.; DMD Div. 4. Ford Meter Box Company, Incorporated (The); Pipe Products Div. 5. JCM Industries. 6. Smith-Blair, Inc. 7. Viking Johnson. 8. Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling. 9. Underground Piping NPS 2 and Larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type coupling. 10. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting. B. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Non-pressure Drainage Piping: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant metal band on each end. 1. Manufacturers: 2. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. 3. Fernco, Inc. 4. Mission Rubber Company. 5. Plastic Oddities, Inc. 2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solderjoint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials. B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F. 1. Manufacturers: 2. Eclipse, Inc. 3. Epco Sales, Inc. 4. Hart Industries, International, Inc. 5. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. 6. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div. D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures. 1. Manufacturers: 2. Capitol Manufacturing Co. 3. Central Plastics Company. 4. Epco Sales, Inc. 5. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. E. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, fullface- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers. 1. Manufacturers: 2. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 3. Calpico, Inc. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 4. Central Plastics Company. 5. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 6. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures. F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F. 1. Manufacturers: 2. Calpico, Inc. 3. Lochinvar Corp. G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F. 1. Manufacturers: 2. Perfection Corp. 3. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. 4. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc. 5. Victaulic Co. of America. 2.6 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS A. Refer to Division 22. 2.7 SLEEVES A. Refer to Division 22. 2.8 ESCUTCHEONS A. Refer to Division 22. 2.9 GROUT A. Refer to Division 22. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PLUMBING DEMOLITION A. Refer to Division 01 and Division 02 for general demolition requirements and procedures. B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove plumbing systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. 1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. 3. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. 4. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. 5. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality. 3.2 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. F. Install piping to permit valve servicing. G. Install piping at indicated slopes. H. Install piping free of sags and bends. I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. J. Install piping to allow application of insulation. K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls. N. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in. O. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using leadfree solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32. E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8. F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article. H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. 3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated. B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations. D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope. 3.6 PAINTING A. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish. 3.7 CONCRETE BASES A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project. 1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit. 2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base. 3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor. 4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 03. 3.8 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Refer to Division 05 for structural steel. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor plumbing materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1. 3.9 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor plumbing materials and equipment. B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members. C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.10 GROUTING A. Refer to Division 22. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\22 0500_COMMON WORK RESULTS.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 220513 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 220513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. General motor requirements. 2. Motor characteristics. 3. Polyphase motors. 4. Motors served by variable frequency controllers. 5. Polyphase motors with additional requirements. 6. Single phase motors. 7. Motor starters. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following: 1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated. B. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors. 2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level. B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 220513 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor. B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1. C. Service Factor: 1.15. D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque. 1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding. 2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed. E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed. F. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage. G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating. I. Insulation: Class F for motors with variable speed controllers. Class B for ODP motors of nominal efficiency J. Code Letter Designation: 1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G. 2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic. K. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T. 2.4 MOTORS SERVED BY VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS A. Motors served by variable frequency controllers (VFC) (also known as variable frequency drives shall be "inverter-duty" or "drive duty" motors. Motors shall meet or exceed all requirements of NEMA MG–1 Parts 30 and 31 for AC induction motors powered from adjustable speed controls. Use of the motor with a VFD shall not adversely affect the operation, useful life, or warranty of the motor. B. Motors shall have Class H insulation. C. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse-width modulated inverters. Motor windings shall be spike resistant to withstand a minimum of 1,600 peak volts. D. Motors shall have shaft grounding system to protect bearings from induced voltage. Shaft grounding system shall have very low drag, less than 1/2 percent of motor HP, and shall operate for a minimum of three (3) years without periodic adjustments. All consumables of the shaft grounding system shall be replaceable without a shutdown of the motor or VFD. The shaft grounding system shall be as manufactured by AEGIS or equal. E. Motors used with VFD shall have a minimum three (3) year warranty 2.5 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 220513 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors. B. Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor. 2.6 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application: 1. Permanent-split capacitor. 2. Split phase. 3. Capacitor start, inductor run. 4. Capacitor start, capacitor run. B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type. C. Bearings: Pre-lubricated, anti-friction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type. E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range. 2.7 MOTOR STARTERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to: 1. Eaton Electrical (Cutler Hammer). 2. General Electric Company. 3. Rockwell Automation, Inc. 4. Siemens Energy and Automation. 5. Square D. B. Provide starters for motors without variable frequency drives. C. Provide magnetic starter with HAND-OFF-AUTO switch (fast-slow-off-auto for two speed motors) in cover for starters that require interlocks or remote control. Provide magnetic starters, with auxiliary contacts, buttons and switches. D. Each three phase, 60 Hz motor shall be provide with magnetic starter with hand -off-automatic switch. E. Other motors shall be provided with a manual starter with on-off switch. F. Control relay for each starter shall be for operation on 120V, 1 phase. Provide Transformer of sufficient capacity within starter case. G. Provide inverse time limit overload and under voltage protection in each leg and with pilot lights. Provide red and green on/off pilot lights H. Provide nameplates with engraved white lettering to designate area and equipment served. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 220513 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 I. Furnish for all single speed motors, 25 hp and above, 95 percent power factor correction capacitors. Capacitors shall be in NEMA enclosure of the same rating as the motor’s starter. PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE) END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\220513_ COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON CONTROL PANEL REQUIREMENTS 220514 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 220514 - COMMON CONTROL PANEL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. General control panel requirements. 2. Programmable Logic Controllers 3. General Control Panels (not PLC) 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. In: Nominal Discharge Current. B. MCOV: Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage. C. Mode(s), also Modes of Protection: The pair of electrical connections where the VPR applies. D. MOV: Metal Oxide Varistor; an electronic component with a significant non-ohmic currentvoltage characteristic. E. OCPD: Overcurrent Protective Device. F. SCCR: Short Circuit Current Rating. G. SPD: Surge Protective Device. H. VPR: Voltage Protection Rating. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Short-circuit current rating (SCCR) is the amount of available fault current that an electrical component or equipment can safely withstand, when properly applied. B. SCCRs are required to be marked on industrial control panels and other equipment in accordance with the product standards and the NEC. C. Comply with UL 508A to ensure the quality and construction of the control panels D. For proper protection and compliance with NEC 110.10, the short-circuit current rating for a component or equipment shall be equal to or greater than the available short-circuit current where the equipment is being installed in the system. E. Failure to provide equipment with adequate SCCR will not be accepted. Further, panels furnished with inadequate SCCR ratings shall be changed or upgraded by the contractor at no cost to the owner. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON CONTROL PANEL REQUIREMENTS 220514 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. For each control panel on the project, include the withstand rating of said control panel. B. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label. C. Panel numbering scheme. D. Panel Schedules: For each system to include in maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Coordinate features of all control panels, installed units, and accessory devices. Assure these to be compatible with the following: 1. Electrical Contractor final short circuit analysis regarding available fault current to each control panel furnished under this section. 2. Furnish control panels with adequate withstand rating based on item 1 above 3. Each control panel shall be labeled to identify the rated SCCR 4. All control panels shall comply with the latest edition of the National Electric Code 5. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 6. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location. B. At general bid phase of project, the, Peak Surge Current Rating: 1. All single phase control panels greater than 120 VAC for the project are to be a minimum of 65kA RMS rating 2. All single phase control panels less than or equal to 120 VAC for the project are to be a minimum of 65kA RMS rating 3. All three phase System Control Panels not included in the table below or identified on the drawings shall carry a minimum default rating of 65,000 amperes RMS. 4. For other ratings see Plumbing Drawings schedule sheet where SCCR ratings are specified per panel 5. Control Panel Schedule CP - # System Control Panel Voltage/ø/hz SCCR Rating kA RMS Hot Water Return system Control Panel Water Heater Mult-Skid Control Panel Pure Water System Control Panel First Floor Location Laboratory Vacuum Control Panel Laboratory Compressed Air Control Panel Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON CONTROL PANEL REQUIREMENTS 220514 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 CP - # System Control Panel Voltage/ø/hz SCCR Rating kA RMS Laboratory Compressed Air Dryer/Filter Skid Control Panel 2.2 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS (PLC) A. The following systems require associated control panels to be PLC 1. Pure Water Systems 2. Laboratory Compressed Air System 3. Laboratory Vacuum Systems 4. All PLC control panels shall have the ability to communicate common field-bus protocols, (BACnet, Modbus, Profibus, and LON), via optional communication expansion card installed inside controller. 5. All PLC’s shall communicate with the Building Management System 2.3 GENERAL CONTROL PANELS (NOT PLC) A. The following systems may use general control apparatus and are not required to be PLC style. PLC’s may be used at the contractors discretion 1. Hot water circulation pumps for general use PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE) END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\220514_COMMON CONTROL PANEL REQUIREMENTS.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220516 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 220516 - EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Performance requirements 2. Packless expansion joints 3. Grooved-joint expansion joints. 4. Alignment guides and anchors. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for thermal expansion of piping systems and for selecting and designing expansion joints, loops, and swing connections. 2. Anchor Details: Detail fabrication of each anchor indicated. Show dimensions and methods of assembly and attachment to building structure. 3. Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and attachment to building structure. 4. Schedule: Indicate type, manufacturer's number, size, material, pressure rating, end connections, and location for each expansion joint. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For expansion joints to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Pipe and Pressure-Vessel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220516 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Compatibility: Products shall be suitable for piping service fluids, materials, working pressures, and temperatures. B. Capability: Products to absorb 200 percent of maximum axial movement between anchors. 2.2 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS A. Rubber Union Connector Expansion Joints 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. b. Flexicraft Industries. c. General Rubber Corporation. d. Mason Industries, Inc. e. Proco Products, Inc. f. Unaflex. 2. Material: Twin reinforced-rubber spheres with external restraining cables. 3. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig at 170 deg F, unless otherwise indicated. 4. End Connections for NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded. B. Flexible-Hose Packless Expansion Joints 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Flex Pression Ltd. b. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. c. Flexicraft Industries. d. Mason Industries, Inc. e. Metraflex Company (The). f. Unisource Manufacturing, Inc. 2. Description: Manufactured assembly with inlet and outlet elbow fittings and two flexiblemetal-hose legs joined by long-radius, 180-degree return bend or center section of flexible hose. 3. Flexible Hose: Corrugated-metal inner hoses and braided outer sheaths. 4. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing NPS 2 and Smaller: Copper-alloy fittings with solder-joint end connections. a. Bronze hoses and double-braid bronze sheaths with 700 psig at 70 deg F and 500 psig at 450 deg F ratings. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220516 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 5. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Copper-alloy fittings with threaded flanged or mechanical end connections. a. Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 420 psig at 70 deg F and 315 psig at 450 deg F ratings. 6. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping NPS 2 and Smaller: Carbon-steel fittings with threaded end connections. a. Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 700 psig at 70 deg F and 515 psig at 600 deg F ratings. 7. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6: Carbon-steel fittings with flanged welded end connections. a. Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 275 psig at 70 deg F and 200 psig at 600 deg F ratings. 8. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping NPS 8 to NPS 12: Carbon-steel fittings with flanged welded end connections. a. Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 165 psig at 70 deg F and 120 psig at 600 deg F ratings. 9. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping NPS 14 and Larger: Carbon-steel fittings with flanged welded end connections. a. Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 165 psig at 70 deg F and 120 psig at 600 deg F ratings. C. Metal-Bellows Packless Expansion Joints 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. b. Flexicraft Industries. c. Flex-Weld, Inc. d. Mason Industries, Inc. e. Metraflex Company (The). f. Proco Products, Inc. 2. Standards: ASTM F 1120 and EJMAs "Standards of the Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc." 3. Type: Circular, corrugated bellows with external tie rods. 4. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Configuration: Single joint Single joint with base and double joint with base class (es), unless otherwise indicated. 6. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing: Single- or multi- ply phosphor-bronze bellows, copper pipe ends, and brass shrouds. a. End Connections for Copper Tubing NPS 2 and Smaller: Solder joint or threaded. b. End Connections for Copper Tubing NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Solder joint or threaded. c. End Connections for Copper Tubing NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220516 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 7. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping: Single- or multi- ply stainless-steel bellows, steel pipe ends, and carbon-steel shroud. a. End Connections for Steel Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded. b. End Connections for Steel Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Welded. D. Externally Pressurized Metal-Bellows Packless Expansion Joints 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. b. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. c. Mason Industries, Inc. d. Metraflex Company (The). e. U.S. Bellows, Inc. 2. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig 200 psig, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Description a. Totally enclosed, externally pressurized, multi-ply, stainless-steel bellows isolated from fluid flow by an internal pipe sleeve. b. Carbon-steel housing. c. Drain plugs and lifting lug for NPS 3 and larger. d. Bellows shall have operating clearance between the internal pipe sleeves and the external shrouds. e. Joints shall be supplied with a built-in scale to confirm the starting position and operating movement. f. Joint Axial Movement: 6 inches of compression and 1 inch of extension. 4. Permanent Locking Bolts: Set locking bolts to maintain joint lengths during installation. Temporary welding tabs that are removed after installation in lieu of locking bolts are not acceptable. 5. End Connection Configuration: Flanged; one raised, fixed and one floating flange. E. Rubber Packless Expansion Joints 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. b. Garlock Sealing Technologies. c. General Rubber Corporation. d. Mason Industries, Inc. e. Metraflex Company (The). f. Proco Products, Inc. 2. Standards: ASTM F 1123 and FSA's "Technical Handbook: Non-Metallic Expansion Joints and Flexible Pipe Connectors." Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220516 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. Material: Fabric-reinforced rubber complying with FSA-PSJ-703. 4. Arch Type: Single or multiple arches with external control rods. 5. Spherical Type: Single or multiple spheres with external control rods. 6. Minimum Pressure Rating for NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 150 psig at 220 deg F. 7. Minimum Pressure Rating for NPS 5 and NPS 6: 140 psig at 200 deg F. 8. Minimum Pressure Rating for NPS 8 to NPS 12: 140 psig at 180 deg F. 9. Material for Fluids Containing Acids, Alkalis, or Chemicals: Butyl rubber Chlorosulfonylpolyethylene rubber Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 10. Material for Fluids Containing Gas, Hydrocarbons, or Oil: Buna-N Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber. 11. Material for Water: Butyl rubber Buna-N Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber Chlorosulfonyl-polyethylene rubber Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber Natural rubber. 12. End Connections: Full-faced, integral steel flanges with steel retaining rings. 2.3 GROOVED-JOINT EXPANSION JOINTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Anvil International. 2. Shurjoint Piping Products. 3. Victaulic Company. B. Description: Factory-assembled expansion joint made of several grooved-end pipe nipples, couplings, and grooved joints. C. Standard: AWWA C606, for grooved joints. D. Nipples: Galvanized, ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, Type E or S, steel pipe with grooved ends. E. Couplings: Flexible type for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, Buna-N gasket suitable for diluted acid, alkaline fluids, and cold and hot water ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber gasket suitable for cold and hot water, and bolts and nuts. 2.4 ALIGNMENT GUIDES AND ANCHORS A. Alignment Guides 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. b. Flexicraft Industries. c. Mason Industries, Inc. d. Metraflex Company (The). e. U.S. Bellows, Inc. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220516 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Description: Steel, factory-fabricated alignment guide, with bolted two-section outer cylinder and base for attaching to structure; with two-section guiding slider for bolting to pipe. B. Anchor Materials: 1. Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel hex head. 3. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers. 4. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for use in hardened Portland cement concrete, with tension and shear capacities appropriate for application. a. Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel. b. Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel. c. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXPANSION JOINT INSTALLATION A. Install expansion joints of sizes matching sizes of piping in which they are installed. B. Install metal-bellows expansion joints according to EJMAs "Standards of the Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc." C. Install rubber packless expansion joints according to FSA-PSJ-703. D. Install grooved-joint expansion joints to grooved-end steel piping. 3.2 PIPE LOOP AND SWING CONNECTION INSTALLATION A. Install pipe loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to partly absorb tension or compression produced during anticipated change in temperature. B. Connect risers and branch connections to mains with at least four pipe fittings, including tee in main. C. Connect risers and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings, including tee in riser. D. Connect mains and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings, including tee in main. 3.3 ALIGNMENT-GUIDE AND ANCHOR INSTALLATION A. Install alignment guides to guide expansion and to avoid end-loading and torsional stress. B. Install one guide(s) on each side of pipe expansion fittings and loops. Install guides nearest to expansion joint not more than four pipe diameters from expansion joint. C. Attach guides to pipe, and secure guides to building structure. D. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment. E. Anchor Attachments: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220516 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Anchor Attachment to Steel Pipe: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 and ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 2. Anchor Attachment to Copper Tubing: Attach with pipe hangers. Use MSS SP-69, Type 24; U bolts bolted to anchor. F. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars. Comply with ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 1. Anchor Attachment to Steel Structural Members: Attach by welding. 2. Anchor Attachment to Concrete Structural Members: Attach by fasteners. Follow fastener manufacturer's written instructions. G. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for guides and anchors attached to concrete. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC \2018_11-30_CD\220516_EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220517 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 220517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Sleeves. 2. Stack-sleeve fittings. 3. Sleeve-seal systems. 4. Sleeve-seal fittings. 5. Grout. 6. Firestopping. 1.3 PENETRATION FIRE STOPPING ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 DESCRIPTION OF THE FIRE STOPPING WORK OF THIS SECTION A. Only tested fire stop systems shall be used in specific locations as follows: 1. Fire stop or fire seal plumbing penetrations for the passage of piping, and other equipment through fire-rated vertical barriers (walls and partitions), horizontal barriers (floor/ceiling assemblies), and vertical service shaft walls and partitions. 2. Repetitive plumbing penetrations in fire-rated floor assemblies. Penetrations exist for the installation of tubs, showers, aerators and other plumbing fixtures. 1.5 DEFINITIONS A. Firestopping: Material or combination of materials used to retain integrity of fire-rated construction by maintaining an effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke, and hot gases through penetrations in fire rated wall and floor assemblies. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220517 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.6 REFERENCES A. Test Requirements: ASTM E 814, "Standard Method of Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops". B. Test Requirements: UL 1479, “Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops”. C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) of Northbrook, IL publishes tested systems in their "FIRE RESISTANCE DIRECTORY" that is updated annually. 1. UL Fire Resistance Directory a. Fire Stop Devices (XHJI). b. Fire Resistance Ratings (BXRH). c. Through-Penetration Fire Stop Systems (XHEZ). d. Fill, Voids, or Cavity Material (XHHW). e. Forming Materials (XHKU). D. International Fire Stop Council Guidelines for Evaluating Fire Stop Systems Engineering Judgments E. Inspection Requirements: ASTM E 2174, “Standard Practice for On-site Inspection of Installed Fire Stops”. F. ASTM E 84, “Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials”. G. All major building codes: ICBO, SBCCI, BOCA, and IBC. H. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. A manufacturer's direct representative (not distributor or agent) to be on-site during initial installation of fire stop systems to train appropriate contractor personnel in proper selection and installation procedures. This will be done per manufacturer's written recommendations published in their literature and drawing details. B. Fire stop System installation must meet requirements of ASTM E814 or UL1479 tested assemblies that provide a fire rating equal to that of construction being penetrated. C. Proposed fire stop materials and methods shall conform to applicable governing codes having local jurisdiction. D. Fire stop Systems do not reestablish the structural integrity of load bearing partitions/assemblies, or support live loads and traffic. Installer shall consult the structural engineer prior to penetrating any load bearing assembly. E. For those fire stop applications that exist for which no UL tested system is available through a manufacturer, a manufacturer's engineering judgment derived from similar UL system designs or other tests will be submitted to local authorities having jurisdiction for their review and approval prior to installation. Engineering judgment drawings must follow requirements set forth by the International Fire Stop Council. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220517 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.8 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Product Data: Manufacturer’s specifications and technical data for each material including the composition and limitations, documentation of UL fire stop systems to be used and manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Manufacturer's engineering judgment identification number and drawing details when no UL system is available for an application. Engineering judgment must include both project name and contractor’s name who will install fire stop system as described in drawing. C. Submit material safety data sheets provided with product delivered to job-site. 1.9 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS A. Engage an experienced Installer who is certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by the fire stopping manufacturer as having been provided the necessary training to install manufacturer’s products per specified requirements. A manufacturer’s willingness to sell its fire stopping products to the Contractor or to an Installer engaged by the Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer. B. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through-penetration fire stop systems and fireresistive joint systems in Project to a single sole source fire stop specialty contractor. C. The work is to be installed by a contractor with at least one of the following qualifications: 1. FM 4991 Approved Contractor. 2. UL Approved Contractor. 3. Hilti 3rd, Fire Spec, or approved equal Accredited Fire Stop Specialty Contractor D. Firm with not less than three (3) years experience with fire stop installation. E. Successfully completed not less than three (3) comparable scale projects using similar systems. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials undamaged in manufacturer's clearly labeled, unopened containers, identified with brand, type, and UL label where applicable. B. Coordinate delivery of materials with scheduled installation date to allow minimum storage time at job-site. C. Store materials under cover and protect from weather and damage in compliance with manufacturer's requirements. D. Comply with recommended procedures, precautions or remedies described in material safety data sheets as applicable. E. Do not use damaged or expired materials. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220517 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.11 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not use materials that contain flammable solvents. B. Scheduling 1. Schedule installation of CAST IN PLACE fire stop devices after completion of floor formwork, metal form deck, or composite deck but before placement of concrete. 2. Schedule installation of other fire stopping materials after completion of penetrating item installation but prior to covering or concealing of openings. C. Verify existing conditions and substrates before starting work. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding. D. Weather conditions: Do not proceed with installation of fire stop materials when temperatures exceed the manufacturer's recommended limitations for installation printed on product label and product data sheet. E. During installation, provide masking and drop cloths to prevent fire stopping materials from contaminating any adjacent surfaces. 1.12 REFERENCES A. Test Requirements: ASTM E 814, "Standard Method of Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops" B. Test Requirements: UL 1479, “Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.” C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) of Northbrook, IL publishes tested systems in their "FIRE RESISTANCE DIRECTORY" that is updated annually. 1. UL Fire Resistance Directory a. Fire Stop Devices (XHJI). b. Fire Resistance Ratings (BXRH). c. Through-Penetration Fire stop Systems (XHEZ) d. Fill, Voids, or Cavity Material (XHHW) e. Forming Materials (XHKU) D. International Fire stop Council Guidelines for Evaluating Fire stop Systems Engineering Judgments E. Inspection Requirements: ASTM E 2174, “Standard Practice for On-site Inspection of Installed Fire Stops.” F. ASTM E 84, “Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.” G. All major building codes: ICBO, SBCCI, BOCA, and IBC. H. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220517 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SLEEVES A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral water stop unless otherwise indicated. B. Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and welded steel collar; zinc coated. C. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, with plain ends. D. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239 inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. 2.2 STACK-SLEEVE FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. 2. Zurn Industries, LLC. B. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing. 1. Under deck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews. 2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. CALPICO, Inc. 2. Link-Seal. 3. Metraflex Company (The). 4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 5. Proco Products, Inc. B. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space between piping and sleeve. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220517 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. 2. Pressure Plates: Polymer Plastic or Stainless steel. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon Steel with corrosion resistant coating or Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. 2.4 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. HOLDRITE. B. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, water stop assembly made for imbedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit has plastic or rubber water stop collar with center opening to match piping OD. 2.5 GROUT A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout. B. Characteristics: Non-shrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications. C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. 2.6 FIRESTOPPING A. Provide fire stopping composed of components that are compatible with each other, the substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the fire stopping under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the fire stopping manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Provide components for each fire stopping system that are needed to install fill material. Use only components specified by the fire stopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for the designated fire-resistance-rated systems. C. Penetrations in Fire Resistance Rated Walls: Provide fire stopping with ratings determined in accordance with UL 1479 or ASTM E 814. 1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of the wall construction being penetrated. D. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide fire stopping with ratings determined in accordance with UL 1479 or ASTM E 814. 1. F-Rating: Minimum of 1-hour rating, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of the floor construction being penetrated. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220517 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. T-Rating: When penetrant is located outside of a wall cavity, minimum of 1-hour rating, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of the floor construction being penetrated. 3. W-Rating: Class 1 rating in accordance with water leakage test per UL 1479. E. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide fire stopping with ratings determined in accordance with UL 1479 or ASTM E 814. 1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sf of penetration opening at both ambient and elevated temperatures. F. Mold Resistance: Provide penetration fire stopping with mold and mildew resistance rating of 0 as determined by ASTM G21. G. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Subject to compliance with through penetration fire stop systems (XHEZ) listed in Volume II of the UL Fire Resistance Directory, provide products of the following manufacturers as identified below, or as approved equal: a. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, Oklahoma, 800-879-8000, www.us.hilti.com. H. Materials 1. Use only fire stop products that have been UL 1479 or ASTM E 814 tested for specific fire-rated construction conditions conforming to construction assembly type, penetrating item type, annular space requirements, and fire-rating involved for each separate instance. 2. Pre-installed fire stop devices for use with noncombustible and combustible pipes (closed and open systems) penetrating concrete floors and/or gypsum walls, the following products are acceptable: a. Hilti Cast-In Place Fire Stop Device (CP 680-P). 1) Add Aerator Adaptor when used in conjunction with aerator system. b. Hilti Tub Box Kit (CP 681) for use with tub installations. c. Hilti Cast-In Place Fire Stop Device (CP 680-M) for use with noncombustible penetrants. d. Hilti Fire Stop Speed Sleeve (CP 653) for use with cable penetrations. e. Hilti Fire stop Drop-In Device (CFS-DID) for use with noncombustible and combustible penetrants. f. Hilti Fire stop Block (CFS-BL). 3. Sealants, caulking materials, or foams for use with non-combustible items including steel pipe, copper pipe, rigid steel conduit and electrical metallic tubing (EMT), the following products are acceptable: a. Hilti Intumescent Fire Stop Sealant (FS-ONE MAX). b. Hilti Fire Foam (CP 620). c. Hilti Flexible Fire Stop Sealant (CP 606). 4. Intumescent sealants, caulking materials for use with combustible items (penetrants consumed by high heat and flame) including insulated metal pipe, PVC jacketed, flexible cable or cable bundles and plastic pipe, the following products are acceptable: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220517 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 a. Hilti Intumescent Fire Stop Sealant (FS-ONE MAX). 5. Foams, intumescent sealants, or caulking materials for use with flexible cable or cable bundles, the following products are acceptable: a. Hilti Intumescent Fire Stop Sealant (FS-ONE MAX). b. Hilti Fire Foam (CP 620). c. Hilti Flexible Fire Stop Sealant (CP 606). 6. Non-curing, re-penetrable, intumescent putty or foam materials for use with flexible cable or cable bundles, the following products are acceptable: a. Hilti Fire Stop Putty Stick (CP 618). b. Hilti Fire Stop Plug (CFS-PL). 7. Fire stop collar or wrap devices attached to assembly around combustible plastic pipe (closed and open piping systems), the following products are acceptable: a. Hilti Fire Stop Collar (CP 643N). b. Hilti Fire Stop Collar (CP 644). c. Hilti Wrap Strips (CP 648E / 648S). 8. Materials used for large openings and complex penetrations made to accommodate cable trays and bundles, multiple steel and copper pipes, electrical busways in raceways, the following products are acceptable: a. Hilti Fire Stop Mortar (CP 637). b. Hilti Fire Stop Block (CFS-BL). c. Hilti Fire Foam (CP 620). d. Hilti Fire Stop Board (CP 675T). 9. Non curing, re-penetrable materials used for large openings and complex penetrations made to accommodate cable trays and bundles, multiple steel and copper pipes, electrical busways in raceways, the following products are acceptable: a. Hilti Fire Stop Block (CFS-BL). b. Hilti Fire Stop Board (CP 675T). 10. For blank openings made in fire-rated wall or floor assemblies, where future penetration of pipes, conduits, or cables is expected, the following products are acceptable: a. Hilti Fire Stop Block (CFS-BL). b. Hilti Fire Stop Plug (CFS-PL). 11. Provide a fire stop system with a "F" Rating as determined by UL 1479 or ASTM E 814 which is equal to the time rating of construction being penetrated. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220517 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls. B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to provide 1 inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls. 1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes. C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls are constructed. 1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level in the following areas: 1) Mechanical equipment areas 2) Mechanical Penthouses 3) All laboratory floors 4) Or other wet areas 2. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal system. D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions. 1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. 2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4 inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. 3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for sealants specified in Division 07. E. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire stop materials. Comply with requirements for fire stopping specified in Division 07. 3.2 STACK-SLEEVE-FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install stack-sleeve fittings in new slabs as slabs are constructed. 1. Install fittings that are large enough to provide 1/4 inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. 2. Secure flashing between clamping flanges for pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Comply with requirements for flashing specified in Division 07. 3. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. 4. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220517 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 5. Using grout, seal the space around outside of stack-sleeve fittings. B. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire stop materials. Comply with requirements for fire stopping specified in Division 07. 3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service piping entries into building. B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration, assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a watertight seal. 3.4 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed. B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position water stop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall. C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms. D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings. 3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications: 1. Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade: a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves. Sleeve-seal fittings. b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves. Insert material. 2. Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade: a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system sleeve-seal fittings 1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1 inch annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system. b. Piping NPS 6: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system 1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1 inch annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220517 - 11 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system 1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1 inch annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system. b. Piping NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system Retain first subparagraph below if using sleeve-seal systems. 1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1 inch annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system. 4. Concrete Slabs above Grade: a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 Insert pipe size: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves b. Piping NPS 6 Insert pipe size and Larger: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves Stacksleeve fittings 5. Interior Partitions: a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves. b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel-sheet sleeves. 3.6 FIRE STOPPING INSTALLATION A. Preparation 1. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion. a. Verify penetrations are properly sized and in suitable condition for application of materials. b. Surfaces to which fire stop materials will be applied shall be free of dirt, grease, oil, rust, laitance, release agents, water repellents, and any other substances that may affect proper adhesion. c. Provide masking and temporary covering to prevent soiling of adjacent surfaces by fire stopping materials. d. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and humidity conditions before, during and after installation of fire stopping. e. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Coordination 1. Coordinate location and proper selection of cast-in-place Fire Stop Devices with trade responsible for the work. Ensure device is installed before placement of concrete. 2. Responsible trade to provide adequate spacing of field runs pipes to allow for installation of cast-in-place fire stop devices without interferences. C. Installation Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220517 - 12 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Regulatory Requirements: Install fire stop materials in accordance with UL Fire Resistance Directory. 2. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of through-penetration joint materials. a. Seal all holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an air and water resistant seal. b. Consult with mechanical engineer, project manager, and damper manufacturer prior to installation of UL fire stop systems that might hamper the performance of fire dampers as it pertains to ductwork. c. Protect materials from damage on surfaces subjected to traffic. D. Field Quality Control 1. Examine sealed penetration areas to ensure proper installation before concealing or enclosing areas. 2. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities. 3. Inspection of through-penetration fire stopping shall be performed in accordance with ASTM E 2174, “Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire Stops” or other recognized standard. 4. Perform under this section patching and repairing of fire stopping caused by cutting or penetrating of existing fire stop systems already installed by other trades. E. Identification and Documentation 1. The fire stop contractor is to supply documentation for each single application addressed. This documentation is to identify each penetration location on the entire project. a. The Documentation Form for through penetrations is to include: 1) A Sequential Location Number 2) The Project Name 3) Date of Installation 4) Detailed description of the penetrations location 5) Tested System or Engineered Judgment Number 6) Type of assembly penetrated 7) A detailed description of the size and type of penetrating item 8) Size of opening 9) Number of sides of assemblies addressed 10) Hourly rating to be achieved 11) Installers Name 2. Copies of these documents are to be provided to the general contractor at the completion of the project. 3. Identify through-penetration fire stop systems with pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive, preprinted vinyl labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces of penetrated construction on both sides of each fire stop system installation where labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or fire stop systems. Include the following information on labels: a. The words: "Warning -Through Penetration Fire stop System-Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." b. Contractor's Name, address, and phone number. c. Through-Penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220517 - 13 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 d. Date of Installation. e. Through-Penetration fire stop system manufacturer's name. f. Installer's Name. F. Fire stop documentation manager software shall be used to document, track, and maintain the passive fire stop systems throughout the construction and maintenance phase of the facility. The software solution shall be used to track and document every fire stop system installed on the project and each subsequent addition, change, or removal of the fire stop system. The fire stop documentation shall be managed with cloud-based software which allows the installer to use a standard Smartphone or tablet device (either iOS, Android or Windows capable) to capture the relevant information for the installation. The following data shall be tracked for each penetration within the facility: product installed, system installed, date of installation, location of the penetration including a notation on the 2D plan image, F-rating, name of installer, photo (pre-installation and post-installation), and inspection status. The Owner and/ or Construction Manager may designate additional items to be tracked. The fire stop documentation manager software must perform the following basic functions: 1. Create multiple projects/ facilities, add/create/ remove users for each project, upload documents including UL systems, 2D floor plans, product data, engineering judgments, etc. 2. Define data to track using pre-defined input fields or creating custom input fields as desired. 3. Capture multiple photos for each penetration, including a pre-installation and postinstallation photo. 4. Scan QR Code on Hilti identification label to link the program data to a specific penetration location. 5. Annotate (mark) location of penetration on 2D floor plan. 6. Create reports by filtering data and utilizing report templates. 7. Online/ offline (for use in areas where data service is unavailable) synchronization of data between mobile device, online application and cloud-based system. 8. Ability to transfer ownership of projects from one customer to another from construction phase to facility maintenance. G. Permanently attach Hilti identification labels to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of fire stopping edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove or change penetrating items or fire stopping. Labels shall have a unique QR code for each penetration which can be scanned by the fire stop documentation software to quickly identify the penetration attributes. H. Acceptable Software: Hilti CFS-DM, from Hilti Inc., Tulsa, OK. Tel: (800) 879-8000 website: www.us.hilti.com 1. Substitutions: Upon submission. 2. Single Source: Obtain fire stop documentation manager software and fire stop systems for each type of penetration and construction condition indicated only from a single manufacturer. I. Adjusting and Cleaning 1. Remove equipment, materials and debris, leaving area in undamaged, clean condition. 2. Clean all surfaces adjacent to sealed holes and joints to be free of excess fire stop materials and soiling as work progresses. J. Labor Use to Install Fire Stop Systems Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220517 - 14 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. To ensure complete harmony on the project site, the installation of each scope of work is to be performed jurisdictionally correct per existing trade agreements. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220517 - 15 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.7 FIRESTOP SCHEDULE 3.8 TYPE OF PENETRANT F-RATING (HR) UL-CLASSIFIED SYSTEM TYPE OF PENETRANT F-RATING (HR) UL-CLASSIFIED SYSTEM 1 FA 0006,CAJ 0055,CAJ 0090 1 CAJ 0055, CAJ 0090 2 FA 0006,CAJ 0055,CAJ 0090 2 CAJ 0055, CAJ 0090 3 FA 0006, CAJ 0055, CAJ 0086, FA 0014 3 CAJ 0055, CAJ 0086 1 CAJ 1226, FA 1028 1 CAJ 1226, WJ 1067 2 CAJ 1155, CAJ 1291, CAJ 1226, FA 1016, FA 1028, FA 1106, FB1010 2 CAJ 1226, CAJ 1155, CAJ 1291, WJ 1067 3 CAJ 1155, CAJ 1226, FA 1017, FB 1009 3 CAJ 1226, CAJ 1155, WJ 1041, WJ 1068 4 CBJ 1037, CBJ 1034, FA 1091 4 CBJ 1034, CBJ 1037, WJ 1041, WJ 1042, WJ 1068 1 FA 2053, FA 2025, CAJ 2109, CAJ 2098, CAJ 2271, CAJ 2167, CBJ 2021, CAJ 2342 1 CAJ 2109, CAJ 2098, CAJ 2167, CAJ 2371, CAJ 2342 2 FA 2053, FA 2025, FA 2092, CAJ 2109, CAJ 2098, CAJ 2271, CAJ 2167, CAJ 2218, CAJ 2488, CAJ 2570, CBJ-2021, CAJ 2284, CAJ 2371, CAJ 2342 2 CAJ 2109, CAJ 2098, CAJ 2167, CAJ 2218, CAJ 2488, CAJ 2570, CAJ 2371, CAJ 2342 3 FA 2054, FA 2071, FA 2213, FB 2048, CAJ 2098, CAJ 2109, CAJ 2168, CAJ 2371, CAJ 2342, CAJ 2420 3 CAJ 2109, CAJ 2098, CAJ 2168, CAJ 2371, CAJ 2342 4 CBJ 2016, CAJ 2017 4 WJ 2057, WJ 2091 1 FA 3007,CAJ 3095,CAJ 3180 1 WJ 3036, CAJ 3095, CAJ 3180, WJ 3060 2 FA 3007,CAJ 3095,CAJ 3180 2 WJ 3036, CAJ 3095, CAJ 3180, CAJ 3281, WJ 3060 3 FA 3007,CAJ 3095,CAJ 3180 3 CAJ 3095, CAJ 3180, CAJ 3285 4 WJ 3050 1 FA 5015, FA 5017, CAJ 5090, CAJ 5091, CAJ 5098 1 CAJ 5090, CAJ 5091, CAJ 5061, WJ 5042 2 FA 5015, FA 5017, CAJ 5090, CAJ 5091, CAJ5090 2 CAJ 5090, CAJ 5091, CAJ 5061, WJ 5042 3 FA 5016, CAJ 5090, FA 5018 3 CAJ 5090, CAJ 5061 4 CBJ 5006 4 CBJ 5006, WJ 5028 1 CAJ 8099, CAJ 8056, CAJ 8143 1 CAJ 8099, CAJ 8056, WJ 8007, CAJ 8143 2 CAJ 8099, CAJ 8056, CAJ 8143 2 CAJ 8099, CAJ 8056, WJ 8007, CAJ 8143 3 CAJ 8099, CAJ 8056 3 CAJ 8041, CAJ 8056, WJ 8007, CAJ 8099 4 CAJ 8095 4 CAJ 8095, WJ 8007 TYPE OF PENETRANT F-RATING (HR) UL-CLASSIFIED SYSTEM TYPE OF PENETRANT F-RATING UL-CLASSIFIED SYSTEM 1 FC 1009, FC 1059 1 WL 1054, WL 1058, WL 1164 2 FC 1009, FC 1059 2 WL 1054, WL 1058, WL 1164 4 WL 1110, WL 1111, WL 1165 1 FC 2232, FC 2030, FC 2071, FC 2160, FC 2127, FC 2128, FC 2389 1 WL 2078, WL 2075, WL 2078, WL 2098, WL 2377, WL 2406, WL2341, WL 2128 2 FC 2029, FC 2030, FC2071, FC 2128, FC 2127, FC 2160 2 WL 2078, WL 2075, WL 2078, WL 2098, WL 2377, WL 2406, WL2341, WL 2128 4 WL 2184, WL 2245 1 FC 3012, FC 3044 1 WL 3065, WL 3111, WL 3112 2 FC 3012 2 WL 3065, WL 3111, WL 3112, WL 3334, WL 3335, WL 3384, WL 3395 4 WL 3139 1 FC 5004, FC 5037, FC 5036 1 WL 4011, WL 4019 2 FC 5004, FC 5037 2 WL 4011, WL 4019 4 WL 8014 MIXED PENETRANTS 1 FC 8009, FC 8014, FC 8026, FC8025 1 WL 5028, WL 5029, WL 5047, WL 5096 2 WL 5028, WL 5029, WL 5027, WL 5096, WL 5047 4 WL 5073 1 WL 1095, WL 8013 2 WL 1095, WL 8013 4 WL 8014 3. Where more than one applicable UL-Classified System is listed in the schedules, choose the UL System which is most economical for each.through-penetration firestop system. 4. Coordinate work with other trades to assure that penetration opening sizes are appropriate for penetrant locations, and vice versa. 5. For 3-hour rated gypsum walls, contact Hilti for a UL-classified system or engineer judgment drawing - 800-879-8000. **CONTACT HILTI FOR CURRENT UL-CLASSIFIED SYSTEM OR ENGINEER JUDGMENT DRAWING: 800-879-6000 NOTES: 1. Jobsite conditions of each through-penetration firestop system must meet ALL details of the UL-Classified System selected. 2. If jobsite conditions do not match any UL-classified systems in the schedules above, contact Hilti for alternative systems or Engineer Judgment Drawings - 800-879-8000 CONCRETE FLOORS CONCRETE OR BLOCK WALLS METAL PIPES OR CONDUIT NON-METALLIC PIPE OR CONDUIT SINGLE OR BUNDLED CABLES INSULATED PIPES GYPSUM WALL BOARD ASSEMBLIESWOOD FLOOR MIXED PENETRANTS CABLE TRAY NON-METALLIC PIPE OR CONDUIT SINGLE OR BUNDLED CABLES INSULATED PIPES MIXED PENETRANTS MIXED PENETRANTS SINGLE OR BUNDLED CABLES METAL PIPES OR CONDUIT SINGLE INSULATED PIPES CIRCULAR BLANK OPENINGS SINGLE METAL PIPES OR CONDUIT SINGLE NON-METALLIC PIPE OR CONDUIT (I.E. PVC, CPVC, ABS, FRP, ENT) SINGLE INSULATED PIPES CIRCULAR BLANK OPENINGS SINGLE METAL PIPES OR CONDUIT SINGLE NON-METALLIC PIPE OR CONDUIT (I.E. PVC, CPVC, ABS, FRP, ENT) SINGLE OR BUNDLED CABLES END OF SECTION Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220517 - 16 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018 _11-30_CD\220517_SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220518 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 220518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Escutcheons. 2. Floor plates. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ESCUTCHEONS A. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener. B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners. C. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners. D. Split-Casting Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and with concealed hinge and setscrew. E. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish, concealed and exposed-rivet hinge, and spring-clip fasteners. 2.2 FLOOR PLATES A. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners. B. Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220518 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors. B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and with OD that completely covers opening. 1. Escutcheons for New Piping: a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass or split-casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish. c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge or split-plate, stamped-steel type with exposed-rivet hinge. d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, castbrass or split-casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish. e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass or split-casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish. f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass or split-casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish. g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass or split-casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish. 2. Escutcheons for Existing Piping: a. Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish. b. Insulated Piping: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed or exposed-rivet hinge. c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish. d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish. e. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish. f. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed or exposed-rivet hinge. C. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors. D. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening. 1. New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type. 2. Existing Piping: Split-casting, floor-plate type. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220518 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\220518_ESCUTCHEONS.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 220519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Bimetallic-actuated thermometers. 2. Filled-system thermometers. 3. Liquid-in-glass thermometers. 4. Thermowells. 5. Pressure gages. 6. Gage attachments. 7. Test plugs. 8. Test-plug kits. 9. Sight flow indicators. 10. Water meters. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of meter and gage, from manufacturer. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in operation and maintenance manuals. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BIMETALLIC-ACTUATED THERMOMETERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Ashcroft Inc. 2. Marsh Bellofram. 3. Trerice, H. O. Co. 4. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company. 5. WIKA Instrument Corporation. B. Standard: ASME B40.3, Grade A. C. Case: 304 stainless steel; hermetically sealed per ASME B40.3; ingress protection IP65; external reset slotted hex head on back of case D. Dial: White aluminum, dished, with black markings. E. Connector Type(s): Plain, NPT, Union F. Connector Size: 1/2 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. G. Stem: 0.25 or 0.375 inch in diameter; stainless steel. H. Window: Flat Instrument Glass. I. Ring: Stainless steel. J. Element: Bimetal helix. K. Pointer: black aluminum. L. Accuracy: ±1.0 percent full scale value per ASME B40.3, Grade 1A M. Basis of Design: WIKA Instruments model T1.32 2.2 FILLED-SYSTEM THERMOMETERS A. Direct-Mounted, Stainless steel case, Vapor-Actuated Thermometers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 a. Ashcroft. b. Marsh Bellofram. c. Trerice, HO Co. d. WIKA Instrument Corporation. 2. Standard: ASME B40.200. 3. Case: Stainless steel, 4.5”. 4. Dial: White coated aluminum with black markings 5. Pointer: Adjustable, balance, aluminum with matte black finish. 6. Window: Glass or Lexan 7. Ring: Stainless steel. 8. Connector Type(s): Union, Thermowell, or plain bulb. At system plain or union bulb. Copper or 316 stainless steel 9. Thermal System: Liquid-filled bulb in copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass stem and of length to suit installation. a. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem. 10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range. 11. Basis of Design: WIKA Instruments T1.V45 B. Remote-Mounted, Stainless steel, Vapor-Actuated Thermometers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Ashcroft. b. Marsh Bellofram. c. WIKA Instrument Corporation. d. Trerice, HO Co. 2. Standard: ASME B40.200. 3. Case: Stainless steel, 4.5. 4. Dial: White coated aluminum with black markings. 5. Pointer: Adjustable, balance, aluminum with matte black finish 6. Window: Glass or Lexan 7. Ring: Stainless steel. 8. Connector Type(s): Plain, union, or thermowell. 9. Thermal System: Plain or Union. Copper or 316 stainless steel a. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem. 10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range. 11. Basis of Design: WIKA Instruments T1.V45 2.3 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS A. Stainless -Case, Compact-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 a. Ashcroft. b. Marsh Bellofram. c. WIKA Instrument Corporation. d. Trerice, HO Co. 2. Standard: ASME B40.200. 3. Case: Plastic; 6 inch nominal size. 4. Case Form: Back angle straight unless otherwise indicated. 5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and red organic liquid. 6. Tube Background: Non-reflective with permanently etched scale markings graduated in deg F and deg C. 7. Window: Glass or plastic. 8. Stem: brass: length to suit installation. a. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem. 9. Connector: 3/4 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 10. Accuracy: plus or minus 1.0 percent of span. 11. Basis of Design: WIKA Instruments T1.901 or T1.701 B. Stainless Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Marsh Bellofram. b. Watts. c. WIKA Instrument Corporation. d. Weiss. 2. Standard: ASME B40.200. 3. Case: Plastic: 7 inch or 9 inch nominal size unless otherwise indicated. 4. Case Form: Adjustable angle unless otherwise indicated. 5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid. 6. Tube Background: Non-reflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in deg F and deg C. 7. Window: Glass. 8. Stem: Brass. 3.5”, 6.0”, 9.0”, or 12.0” a. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem. 9. Connector: 1-1/4 inches, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 10. Accuracy: ±1.0 percent for scale range. 2.4 THERMOWELLS A. General 1. Standard: ASME B40.200. 2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR or CUNI. 4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES CSA. 5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated. 6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads. 7. Internal Threads: 1/2 inch, 3/4 inch, and 1 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 9. Insertion Length: Length required matching thermometer bulb or stemming. 10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing. 11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowells internal screw thread to size of thermometer connection. B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin. 2.5 PRESSURE GAGES A. Direct-Mounted, Stainless-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. AMETEK, Inc. b. Ashcroft Inc. c. Marsh Bellofram. d. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company. e. WIKA Instrument Corporation. f. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 2. Standard: ASME B40.100. 3. Case: Stainless steel, 4.5”. 4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated. 5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and bottomoutlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated. 6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 7. Dial: White aluminum with stop pin and black lettering. 8. Pointer: Black aluminum. 9. Window: Snap-in poly carbonate 10. Accuracy: plus or minus 1.0 percent of span (ASME B40.100, grade 1A) 11. Basis of Design: WIKA Instruments model 111.25CT B. Remote-Mounted, Stainless-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. AMETEK, Inc. b. Ashcroft Inc. c. Marsh Bellofram. d. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company. e. WIKA Instrument Corporation. f. Weiss Instruments, Inc. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Standard: ASME B40.100. 3. Case: Stainless steel, 4.5”. 4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated. 5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated. 6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 7. Dial: White aluminum with stop pin and black lettering. 8. Pointer: Black aluminum 9. Window: Snap-in polycarbonate 10. Accuracy: Grade B, plus or minus 2 percent of middle half of scale range. 2.6 GAGE ATTACHMENTS A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4 NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and piston porous-metal-type surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated piping. 1. Basis of Design: WIKA Instrument model 910.12.X00 B. Valves: Brass ball Brass or stainless-steel needle, with NPS 1/4 NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads. 1. Basis of Design: WIKA Instrument model 910.11.100 2.7 TEST PLUGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. National Meter, Inc. 2. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company. 3. WIKA Instrument Corporation. 4. Weiss Instruments, Inc. B. Description: Test-station fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting. C. Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap. Include extended stem on units to be installed in insulated piping. D. Thread Size: NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread. E. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F. F. Core Inserts: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic and EPDM self-sealing rubber. G. Basis of Design: WIKA Instrument model 910.14.100 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.8 TEST-PLUG KITS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. National Meter, Inc. 2. Trerice, H. O. Co. 3. WIKA Instrument Corporation. 4. Weiss Instruments, Inc. B. Furnish two test-plug kit(s) containing two thermometer(s), one pressure gage and adapter, and carrying case. Thermometer sensing elements, pressure gage, and adapter probes shall be of diameter to fit test plugs and of length to project into piping. C. Low-Range Thermometer: Small, bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2-inch- diameter dial and tapered-end sensing element. Dial range shall be at least 25 to 125 deg F. D. High-Range Thermometer: Small, bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2-inch-diameter dial and tapered-end sensing element. Dial range shall be at least 0 to 220 deg F. E. Pressure Gage: Small, Bourdon-tube insertion type with 2- to 3-inch-diameter dial and probe. Dial range shall be at least 0 to 200 psig. F. Carrying Case: Metal or plastic, with formed instrument padding. 2.9 SIGHT FLOW INDICATORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Dwyer Instruments, Inc. 2. Emerson Process Management; Rosemount Division. 3. Ernst Flow Industries. 4. KOBOLD Instruments, Inc. - USA. B. Description: Piping inline-installation device for visual verification of flow. C. Construction: Bronze or stainless-steel body, with sight glass and ball, flapper, or paddle wheel indicator, and threaded or flanged ends. D. Minimum Pressure Rating: 125 psig. E. Minimum Temperature Rating: 200 deg F. F. End Connections for NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded. G. End Connections for NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install thermowells with socket extending one-third of pipe diameter and in vertical position in piping tees. B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if required to match sizes. C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping. D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium. E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions. F. Install remote-mounted thermometer bulbs in thermowells and install cases on panels; connect cases with tubing and support tubing to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length. G. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the most readable position. H. Install remote-mounted pressure gages on panel. I. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids. J. Install test plugs in piping tees. K. Install thermometers in the following locations: 1. Inlet and outlet of each water heater. 2. Inlets and outlets of each water heat exchanger. 3. Inlet and outlet of each hot-water storage tank. 4. Inlet and outlet of each remote water chiller. 5. Inlet and outlet of mixing valves. 6. Inlet of hot water recirculation pumps. 7. At each hot water balancing station. L. Install pressure gages in the following locations: 1. Building water service entrance into building. 2. Inlet and outlet of each pressure-reducing valve. 3. Suction and discharge of each water pump. 4. Outlet of each hot water recirculation pump. 5. Top of each water riser. 6. Inlet and outlet of master mixing valves. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility. 3.4 THERMOMETER SCHEDULE A. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each water heaters and heat exchangers shall be one of the following: 1. Liquid-filled, sealed, bimetallic-actuated type. 2. Direct-mounted, plastic-case, vapor-actuated type. 3. Industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type. 4. Test plug with chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic EPDM self-sealing rubber inserts. B. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each hot-water storage tank shall be one of the following: 1. Liquid-filled, sealed, bimetallic-actuated type. 2. Direct-mounted, plastic-case, vapor-actuated type. 3. Compact Industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type. 4. Test plug with chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic EPDM self-sealing rubber inserts. C. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each remote water chiller shall be one of the following: 1. Liquid-filled, sealed, bimetallic-actuated type. 2. Direct Remote-mounted, plastic-case, vapor-actuated type. 3. Compact Industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type. 4. Test plug with chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic EPDM self-sealing rubber inserts. D. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each hot water recirculation pump shall be one of the following: 1. Liquid-filled, sealed, bimetallic-actuated type. 2. Direct remote-mounted, plastic-case, vapor-actuated type. 3. Compact Industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type. 4. Test plug with chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic EPDM self-sealing rubber inserts. E. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each hot water Master Mixing Station shall be one of the following: 1. Compact Industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type. 2. Test plug with chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic EPDM self-sealing rubber inserts. F. Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length. 3.5 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE A. Scale Range for Cold-Water Piping: 0 to 150 deg F 0 to 150 deg F and minus 20 to plus 70 deg C. B. Scale Range for Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 250 deg F 0 to 250 deg F and 0 to 150 deg C. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Scale Range for Cooled-Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F 0 to 100 deg F and minus 20 to plus 50 deg C. D. Scale Range for Solar-Water Piping: 0 to 250 deg F 0 to 250 deg F and 0 to 150 deg C. 3.6 PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE A. Pressure gages at discharge of each water service into building shall be the following: 1. Sealed, direct -mounted, plastic case. B. Pressure gages at inlet and outlet of each water pressure-reducing valve shall be the following: 1. Sealed, direct-mounted, plastic case. 2. Test plug with chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic EPDM self-sealing rubber inserts. C. Pressure gages at suction and discharge of each water pump shall be one of the following: 1. Liquid-filled, sealed open-front, pressure-relief solid-front, pressure-relief, direct-mounted, metal case. 2. Sealed, direct-mounted, plastic case. 3. Test plug with chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic EPDM self-sealing rubber inserts. 3.7 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE A. Scale Range for Water Service Piping: 0 to 160 psi and 0 to 1100 kPa. B. Scale Range for Water Piping: 0 to 100 psi and 0 to 600 kPa. C. Scale Range for Water Piping: 0 to 160 psi and 0 to 1100 kPa. D. Scale Range for Water Piping: 0 to 200 psi and 0 to 1400 kPa. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\220519_METERS AND GAUGES.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes 1. Metal pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Metal framing systems. 4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 5. Fastener systems. 6. Pipe stands. 7. Pipe positioning systems. 8. Equipment supports. 9. Miscellaneous materials. 10. Acoustical isolation hangers and supports B. Related Sections 1. Division 05 for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. 3. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following; include Product Data for components: 1. Trapeze pipe hangers. 2. Metal framing systems. 3. Pipe stands. 4. Equipment supports. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Detail fabrication and assembly of trapeze hangers. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for designing trapeze hangers. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports 1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pre-galvanized or hot dipped. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support bearing surface of piping. 5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel. B. Stainless-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports 1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support bearing surface of piping. 3. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of stainless steel. C. Copper Pipe Hangers 1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated components. 2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel or stainless steel. 2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and Ubolts. 2.3 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS A. MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems 1. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly for supporting multiple parallel pipes. 2. Standard: MFMA-4. 3. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips. 4. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel. 5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel. 6. Metallic Coating: Electroplated zinc hot-dipped galvanized mill galvanized in-line, hot galvanized mechanically-deposited zinc. B. Non-MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems 1. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels, accessories, fittings, and other components for supporting multiple parallel pipes. 2. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4. 3. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips. 4. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel. 5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel. 6. Coating: Zinc. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.4 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS A. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier. B. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength. C. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe. D. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe. E. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature. 2.5 FASTENER SYSTEMS A. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated or stainless- steel anchors, for use in hardened Portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. B. Internally Threaded Anchor for Installation into Metal Deck: Concrete anchor shall be carbon steel, cast-in type with single internal thread and a sinz/yellow chromate plating. Anchor shall have a protective sleeve, steel flange with pre-drilled additional fastening holes and placement spring for attachment to metal deck, anchor is to be secured by clamping the deck between the steel flange and the protective plastic sleeve. Anchor shall bear the diameter and the manufacturer name on hexagonal head. 2.6 PIPE STANDS A. General Requirements for Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated assemblies made of manufactured corrosion-resistant components to support roof-mounted piping. B. Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod roller, pipe clamps, or V-shaped cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration. C. Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic or stainless-steel base unit with plastic roller, for roof installation without membrane penetration. D. High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand 1. Description: Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe support, for roof installation without membrane penetration. 2. Base: Stainless steel. 3. Vertical Members: Two or more cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel, continuousthread rods. 4. Horizontal Member: Cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel rod with plastic or stainlesssteel, roller-type pipe support. E. High-Type, Multiple-Pipe Stand Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Description: Assembly of bases, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe supports, for roof installation without membrane penetration. 2. Bases: One or more; plastic. 3. Vertical Members: Two or more protective-coated-steel channels. 4. Horizontal Member: Protective-coated-steel channel. 5. Pipe Supports: Galvanized-steel, clevis-type pipe hangers. F. Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe supports made from structuralsteel shapes, continuous-thread rods, and rollers, for mounting on permanent stationary roof curb. 2.7 PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS A. Description: IAPMO PS 42, positioning system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for positioning piping in pipe spaces; for plumbing fixtures in commercial applications. 2.8 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbonsteel shapes. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, non-shrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications. 1. Properties: Non-staining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 2.10 ACOUSTICAL ISOLATION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. All devices, hangers, and supports shall be manufactured components and not field devised methods. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Holdrite, Silencer System 2. LSP Products Group, Acousto-Plumb C. Closure Clamp: Sound rated variable closure clamp compatible with copper, PEX, and CPVC pipe, for either side or top mounting. Nylon material with TPR pads with UL94V-2 fire rating. Equal to Holdrite #250, #255, #280 and #285. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. Shower Head/Tub Spout Attachment Clamp: Acoustical clamp for attachment to in-wall framing system that will accept a drop eared 90 degree elbow. Shell shall be polypropylene with UL94V-2 fire rating with santoprene isolator material. Equal to Holdrite #265. E. Through Stud Isolator/Suspension Clamp: sound rated suspension hanger or through-hole isolator in wood or metal framing for copper, PEX, and CPVC piping. Shell shall be polypropylene with with UL94V-2 fire rating with TPE isolator material. Equal to Holdrite #261, #262, #263, and #264. F. Acoustical Insulation Hanger Liner: TPE sound insulation lining to minimize occurrence of frictional noise caused by thermal expansion. Attaches to in-wall framing systems or around pipes to provide isolation from structure. Equal to Holdrite #270 and #271. G. Isolation Felt: Felt used for providing sound insulation between piping and hangers, made from polyester felt, with one side being pressure-sensitive adhesive. Equal to Holdrite #272-2 and 272-4. H. Vibration Isolation Pad: Engineered sound and neoprene vibration riser pad with 10 gage steel bearing plate for use with riser clamps and equipment isolation, minimum of 3/4 inch thick. Equal to Holdrite #275. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89 and local codes. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure. B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers. 1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers. 2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems. D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping. E. Pipe Stand Installation 1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounted Type: Assemble components and mount on smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane. 2. Curb-Mounted-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand and mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. See Division 07 for curbs. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 F. Pipe Positioning-System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste piping connections to each plumbing fixture. G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. H. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes. I. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. J. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying. K. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. L. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. M. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping. N. Insulated Piping 1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping. 2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weightdistribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weightdistribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick. 5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of length at least as long as protective shield. 6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation. 7. Support of pipe, tubing and equipment shall be accomplished by means of engineered products, specific to each application. Makeshift, field devised methods are not allowed. 8. Comply with CISPI Designation 310-04, CISPI Designation 301-09 and the CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Handbook, regarding auxiliary support for ho-hub cast iron pipe and fitting joints subjected to excessive thrust forces. Use manufactured assemblies with appropriate thrust pressure ratings, rather than field assembled miscellaneous materials. 9. No-hub pipe and fitting coupling joints that are exposed to thrust pressures greater than those recommended by the pipe and fitting manufacturer shall receive auxiliary support by means of appropriate bracing materials, as referred to in CISPI Designation 310-04, CIPSI Designation 301-09 and the CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook. Auxiliary restraint products used shall be manufactured assemblies with thrust pressure rating adequate for the specific installation and shall be installed onto horizontal joints NPS 4 diameter and larger in size. Field devised methods and materials shall not be used to accomplish this application solution. 3.2 ACOUSTICAL HANGERS AND SUPPORT ISOLATION INSTALLATION A. Install all items per the manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Use any and all of the specified components to provide for a complete vibration and acoustical isolated system installation on all water and sanitary piping systems. Use the appropriate isolator type at each location. C. Install acoustical hangers and support isolators to prevent all direct, rigid contact between piping and surrounding structures and hangers. No metal-to-metal contact is permissible. D. Provide isolation of all riser clamps. The neoprene pads shall not be more than 25 percent compressed when retaining bolts are tightened. Size supports as required. E. Pipes must not directly contact gypsum board, framing, conduit, or other structural elements. Use adequate clearance and approved felt pads to prevent direct contact between pipes and the structure. Holes and cutouts must be adequately oversized to allow clearance all around the piping. 3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor. B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth. C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports. B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches. 3.6 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09 for painting. C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. 3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment. B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish. D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports metal trapeze pipe hangers and metal framing systems and attachments for general service applications. F. Use stainless-steel pipe hangers and fiberglass pipe hangers and fiberglass strut systems and stainless-steel or corrosion-resistant attachments for hostile environment applications. G. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper or stainless-steel attachments for copper piping and tubing. H. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching. I. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing. J. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of non-insulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F, pipes NPS 4 to NPS 24, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation. 3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation. 4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 24 if little or no insulation is required. 5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow offcenter closure for hanger installation before pipe erection. 6. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8. 7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of non-insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of non-insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 9. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of non-insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 10. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of non-insulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 8. 11. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 3. 12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or contraction. 14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steelpipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate. 15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe. 16. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 if vertical adjustment is required, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 11 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 17. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. 18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 24, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. 19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary. 20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 24 if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary. 21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 30 if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to expansion and contraction. K. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24. 2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps. L. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings. 4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of building attachments. 5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. M. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling. 2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape. 3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles. 4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to flange edge. 8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams. 9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel Ibeams for heavy loads. 10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel Ibeams for heavy loads, with link extensions. 11. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural steel. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 12 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb. 13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. 15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited. N. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation. 3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe. O. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement. 2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 11/4 inches. 3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with springs. 4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal expansion in piping systems. 5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger. 6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from base support. 7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support. 8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types: a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally. b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically. c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member. P. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. Q. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 13 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 R. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction. S. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and waste piping for plumbing fixtures. 3.8 SPACING A. Refer to individual piping sections for spacing requirements. B. Where no requirement is specified elsewhere, pipe hangers and supports shall be per MSS SP90. C. Space pipe hangers and supports in accordance with following tables, with exceptions as indicated herein. D. The vertical spacing shall be at each floor level, with spacing not to exceed that shown in the table below. Provide mid story guides on PEX, PVC, PP, and CPVC piping per local code requirements. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 14 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Table 1 – Maximum Horizontal Pipe Hanger and Support Spacing 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 NOMINAL PIPE OR TUBE SIZE STD WT STEEL PIPE COPPER TUBE CSST DUCTILE IRON PIPE CAST IRON SOIL PEX PLASTIC PVC PLASTIC CPVC 1 inch AND SMALLER PLASTIC CPVC 11/4 inch AND LARGER PLASTIC PP 1 inch AND SMALLER PLASTIC PP 1-1/4 inch AND LARGER WATER SERVICE VAPOR SERVICE WATER SERVICE VAPOR SERVICE in. mm ft. m ft. m ft. mm ft. m 1/4 (6) 5 1.5 4 1.2 FOLLOW REQUIREMENTS OF THE PIPING MANUFACTURER. 10 FT. (3.0m) MAX SPACING. 5 FT. (3.0m) MAX SPACING EXCEPT MAY INCREASE TO 10 FT. WHERE 10 FOOT LENGTHS ARE INSTALLED. MIN OF ONE (1) HANGER PER PIPE SECTION CLOSE TO JOINT ON THE BARREL. ALSO AT CHANGE OF DIRECTION AND BRANCH CONNECTIONS. 32 IN. (813mm) MAX. SPACING. 4 FT. (1.22m) MAX SPACING. 3 FT. (.91m) MAX. SPACING. 4 FT. (1.22m) MAX. SPACING. 32 IN. (813mm) MAX. SPACING. 4 FT. (1.22m) MAXIMUM SPACING. 3/8 (10) 7 2.1 6 1.8 5 1.5 4 1.2 1/2 (15) 7 2.1 6 1.8 5 1.5 4 1.2 3/4 (20) 7 2.1 8 2.4 5 1.5 6 1.8 1 (25) 7 2.1 8 2.4 6 1.8 8 2.4 11/4 (32) 7 2.1 10 3.0 6 2.1 8 2.4 11/2 (40) 9 2.7 10 3.0 8 2.4 8 2.4 2 (50) 10 3.0 10 3.0 8 2.4 8 2.4 21/2 (65) 11 3.4 10 3.0 9 2.7 8 2.4 3 (80) 12 3.7 10 3.0 10 3.0 8 2.4 31/2 (90) 12 3.7 10 3.0 10 3.0 8 2.4 4 (100) 12 3.7 10 3.0 10 3.0 8 2.4 5 (125) 12 3.7 10 3.0 10 30 8 2.4 6 (150) 12 3.7 10 3.0 10 3.0 8 2.4 8 (200) 12 3.7 10 3.0 10 3.0 8 2.4 10 (250) 12 3.7 10 3.0 10 3.0 8 2.4 12 (300) 12 3.7 10 3.0 10 3.0 8 2.4 14 (350) 12 3.7 10 3.0 16 (400) 12 3.7 10 3.0 18 (450) 12 3.7 10 3.0 20 (500) 12 3.7 10 3.0 24 (600) 12 3.7 10 3.0 30 (750) 12 3.7 10 3.0 Vertical Spacing 15 4.5 15 4.5 10 3.0 10 3.0 Per manufacturer 15’ (4.5m) 15’ (4.5m) 10’ (3.0m) 10’ (3.0m) 10’ (3.0m) 10’ (3.0m) 10’ (3.0m) 10’ (3.0m) Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 15 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Table 1 – Maximum Horizontal Pipe Hanger and Support Spacing 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 NOMINAL PIPE OR TUBE SIZE STD WT STEEL PIPE COPPER TUBE CSST DUCTILE IRON PIPE CAST IRON SOIL PEX PLASTIC PVC PLASTIC CPVC 1 inch AND SMALLER PLASTIC CPVC 11/4 inch AND LARGER PLASTIC PP 1 inch AND SMALLER PLASTIC PP 1-1/4 inch AND LARGER WATER SERVICE VAPOR SERVICE WATER SERVICE VAPOR SERVICE in. mm ft. m ft. m ft. mm ft. m 1/4 (6) 5 1.5 5 1.5 FOLLOW REQUIREMENTS OF THE PIPING MANUFACTURER. 10 FT. (3.0m) MAX SPACING. WITH LEAD AND OAKUM 5 FT. MAX SPACING EXCEPT MAY INCREASE TO 10 FT. WHERE 10 FOOT LENGTHS ARE INSTALLED. WITH COMPRESSION GASKETS AND NO-HUB, SUPPORT AT EVERY OTHER JOINT UNLESS OVER 4 FEET THEN SUPPORT AT EVERY JOINT. MIN OF ONE (1) HANGER PER PIPE SECTION CLOSE TO JOINT ON THE BARREL. ALSO AT CHANGE OF DIRECTION AND BRANCH CONNECTIONS. 32 IN. (813mm) MAX. SPACING. 4 FT. (1.22m) MAX SPACING. 3 FT. (.91m) MAX. SPACING. 4 FT. (1.22m) MAX. SPACING. 32 IN. (813mm) MAX. SPACING. 4 FT. (1.22m) MAXIMUM SPACING. 3/8 (10) 7 2.1 6 1.8 5 1.5 6 1.8 1/2 (15) 7 2.1 6 1.8 5 1.5 6 1.8 3/4 (20) 7 2.1 8 2.4 5 1.5 6 2.1 1 (25) 7 2.1 8 2.4 6 1.8 6 2.4 11/4 (32) 7 2.1 10 3.0 6 2.1 6 2.7 11/2 (40) 9 2.7 10 3.0 6 2.1 6 3.0 2 (50) 10 3.0 10 3.0 8 2.4 10 3.4 21/2 (65) 11 3.4 10 3.0 9 2.7 10 4.0 3 (80) 12 3.7 10 3.0 10 3.0 10 4.3 31/2 (90) 12 3.7 10 3.0 10 3.0 10 4.6 4 (100) 12 3.7 10 3.0 10 3.0 10 4.9 5 (125) 12 3.7 10 3.0 10 30 10 4.9 6 (150) 12 3.7 10 3.0 10 3.0 10 4.9 8 (200) 12 3.7 10 3.0 10 3.0 10 4.9 10 (250) 12 3.7 10 3.0 10 3.0 10 4.9 12 (300) 12 3.7 10 3.0 10 3.0 10 4.9 14 (350) 12 3.7 10 3.0 16 (400) 12 3.7 10 3.0 18 (450) 12 3.7 10 3.0 20 (500) 12 3.7 10 3.0 24 (600) 12 3.7 10 3.0 30 (750) 12 3.7 10 3.0 Vertical Spacing 25 7.6 Per Code 10 3.0 Per Code Per Manufacturer 15’ (4.5m) 15’ (4.5m) Each floor Each floor Each floor Each floor Each floor Each floor Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 16 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 COLUMNS(3) 1, 2, 6, 7 COLUMNS(3) 3, 4, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13 NOMINAL PIPE OR TUBING SIZE NOMINAL ROD DIA. NOMINAL ROD DIA. in mm in mm in mm 1/4 (6) 3/8 M10 3/8 (10) 3/8 M10 3/8 M10 1/2 (15) 3/8 M10 3/8 M10 3/4 (20) 3/8 M10 3/8 M10 1 (25) 3/8 M10 3/8 M10 1-1/4 (32) 3/8 M10 3/8 M10 1-1/2 (40) 3/8 M10 3/8 M10 2 (50) 3/8 M10 3/8 M10 2-1/2 (65) 1/2 M12 1/2 M12 3 (80) 1/2 M12 1/2 M12 3-1/2 (90) 1/2 M12 1/2 M12 4 (100) 5/8 M16 1/2 M12 5 (125) 5/8 M16 1/2 M12 6 (150) 3/4 M20 5/8 M16 8 (200) 3/4 M20 3/4 M20 10 (250) 7/8 M20 3/4 M20 12 (300) 7/8 M20 3/4 M20 14 (350) 1 M24 16 (400) 1 M24 18 (450) 1 M24 20 (500) 1-1/4 M30 24 (600) 1-1/4 M30 30 (750) 1-1/4 M30 NOTE: (1) For calculated loads, rod diameters may be sized in accordance with MSS SP-58, Table 3 provided Table 1 and Section 7.3 of MSS SP-58 are satisfied. (2) Rods may be reduced one size for double rod hangers. Minimum rod diameter shall be 3/8 in. (M10). (3) Columns noted refer to Table 1, maximum horizontal pipe hanger and support spacing. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\220529_HANGERS AND SUPPORTS.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220533 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 220533 - HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Self-regulating, parallel resistance heating cables. 2. Controls. 3. Accessories. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. 2. Schedule heating capacity, length of cable, spacing, and electrical power requirement for each electric heating cable required. B. Shop Drawings: For electric heating cable. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality-control reports. B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For electric heating cables to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace electric heating cable that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220533 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTROLS A. Pipe-Mounted Thermostats for Freeze Protection 1. Remote bulb unit with adjustable temperature range from 30 to 50 deg F. 2. Snap action; open-on-rise, single-pole switch with minimum current rating adequate for connected cable. 3. Remote bulb on capillary, resistance temperature device, or thermistor for directly sensing pipe-wall temperature. 4. Corrosion-resistant, waterproof control enclosure. B. Programmable Timer for Domestic Hot-Water-Temperature Maintenance 1. Microprocessor based. 2. Minimum of four separate schedules. 3. Minimum 24-hour battery carryover. 4. On-off-auto switch. 5. 365-day calendar with 20 programmable holidays. 6. Relays with contacts to indicate operational status, on or off, and for interface with central HVAC control-system workstation. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Cable Installation Accessories: Fiberglass tape, heat-conductive putty, cable ties, silicone end seals and splice kits, and installation clips all furnished by manufacturer, or as recommended in writing by manufacturer. B. Warning Labels: Refer to Division 22. C. Warning Tape: Continuously printed "Electrical Tracing"; vinyl, at least 3 mils thick, and with pressure-sensitive, permanent, waterproof, self-adhesive back. 1. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, and Less Than 6 Inches: 3/4 inch minimum. 2. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches or Larger: 1-1/2 inches minimum. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and substrates to receive electric heating cables for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Ensure surfaces and pipes in contact with electric heating cables are free of burrs and sharp protrusions. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220533 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.2 APPLICATIONS A. Install the following types of electric heating cable for the applications described: Electric Heating-Cable Applications Application Cable Type Control Required Domestic Hot-Water-Temperature Maintenance Self-Regulating, Parallel Resistance Time Clock Note: 1. Temperature Maintenance for Domestic Hot Water: Self-regulating, parallel-resistance heating cable. 2. Series-Resistance Cable Includes Both Mineral- And Plastic-Insulated Types. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install electric heating cable across expansion, construction, and control joints according to manufacturer's written instructions; use cable-protection conduit and slack cable to allow movement without damage to cable. B. Electric Heating-Cable Installation for Freeze Protection for Piping 1. Install electric heating cables after piping has been tested and before insulation is installed. 2. Install electric heating cables according to IEEE 515.1. 3. Install insulation over piping with electric cables according to Division 22. 4. Install warning tape on piping insulation where piping is equipped with electric heating cables. C. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges. 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Ground equipment according to Division 26. B. Connect wiring according to Division 26. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. C. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative: 1. Perform tests after cable installation but before application of coverings such as insulation, wall or ceiling construction, or concrete. 2. Test cables for electrical continuity and insulation integrity before energizing. 3. Test cables to verify rating and power input. Energize and measure voltage and current simultaneously. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220533 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. Repeat tests for continuity, insulation resistance, and input power after applying thermal insulation on pipe-mounted cables. E. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed heating cables, including non-heating leads, from damage during construction. B. Remove and replace damaged heat-tracing cables. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\220533_HEAT TRACING.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING 220548 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 220548 - VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Section. These requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Elastomeric isolation pads. 2. Elastomeric isolation mounts. 3. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts. 4. Open-spring isolators. 5. Restrained-spring isolators. 6. Pipe-riser resilient supports. 7. Resilient pipe guides. 8. Elastomeric hangers. 9. Spring hangers. 10. Vibration isolation equipment bases. 11. Thrust restraints. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device. 2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of vibration isolation device type required. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Detail fabrication and assembly of equipment bases. Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting. 2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING 220548 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Delegated-Design Submittal: 1. For each vibration isolation device. a. Include design calculations and details for selecting vibration isolators and vibration isolation bases. b. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and required to select vibration isolators and for designing vibration isolation bases. 1) Coordinate design calculations with wind load calculations required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Sections for equipment mounted outdoors. c. Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on building structure and spring deflection changes. Include certification that riser system was examined for excessive stress and that none exists. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: 1. Show coordination of vibration isolation device installation for PLUMBING piping and equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and restraints, if any. B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency. C. Welding certificates. D. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7 and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION PADS A. Elastomeric Isolation Pads: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING 220548 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following : a. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. b. California Dynamics Corporation. c. Isolation Technology, Inc. d. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. e. Mason Industries, Inc. f. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. g. Vibration Isolation. h. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. 2. Fabrication: Single or multiple layers of sufficient durometer stiffness for uniform loading over pad area. 3. Size: Factory or field cut to match requirements of supported equipment. 4. Pad Material: Oil and water resistant with elastomeric properties. 5. Surface Pattern: Smooth, Ribbed or Waffle pattern. 6. Load-bearing metal plates adhered to pads. 7. Sandwich-Core Material: Resilient and elastomeric. a. Surface Pattern: Smooth, Ribbed or Waffle pattern. 2.2 ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION MOUNTS A. Double-Deflection, Elastomeric Isolation Mounts: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following : a. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. b. California Dynamics Corporation. c. Isolation Technology, Inc. d. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. e. Mason Industries, Inc. f. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. g. Vibration Isolation. h. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. 2. Mounting Plates: a. Top Plate: Encapsulated steel load transfer top plates, factory drilled and threaded with threaded studs or bolts. b. Baseplate: Encapsulated steel bottom plates with holes provided for anchoring to support structure. 3. Elastomeric Material: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric material. 2.3 RESTRAINED ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION MOUNTS A. Restrained Elastomeric Isolation Mounts: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING 220548 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following : a. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. b. California Dynamics Corporation. c. Isolation Technology, Inc. d. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. e. Mason Industries, Inc. f. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. g. Vibration Isolation. h. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. 2. Description: All-directional isolator with seismic restraints containing two separate and opposing elastomeric elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation. a. Housing: Cast-ductile iron or welded steel. b. Elastomeric Material: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric material. 2.4 OPEN-SPRING ISOLATORS A. Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following : a. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. b. California Dynamics Corporation. c. Isolation Technology, Inc. d. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. e. Mason Industries, Inc. f. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. g. Vibration Isolation. h. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. 2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 6. Baseplates: Factory-drilled steel plate for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad attached to the underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig. 7. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment. 2.5 RESTRAINED-SPRING ISOLATORS A. Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators with Vertical-Limit Stop Restraint: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING 220548 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following : a. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. b. California Dynamics Corporation. c. Isolation Technology, Inc. d. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. e. Mason Industries, Inc. f. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. g. Vibration Isolation. h. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. 2. Housing: Steel housing with vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight being removed. a. Base with holes for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad attached to the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig. b. Top plate with threaded mounting holes and elastomeric pad. c. Internal leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation. 3. Restraint: Limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 5. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 6. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 7. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 2.6 PIPE-RISER RESILIENT SUPPORT A. Description: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of two steel tubes separated by a minimum 1/2 inch- thick neoprene. 1. Vertical-Limit Stops: Steel and neoprene vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions. 2. Maximum Load Per Support: 500 psig on isolation material providing equal isolation in all directions. 2.7 RESILIENT PIPE GUIDES A. Description: Telescopic arrangement of two steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement separated by a minimum 1/2 inch- thick neoprene. 1. Factory-Set Height Guide with Shear Pin: Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location requirements. 2.8 ELASTOMERIC HANGERS A. Elastomeric Mount in a Steel Frame with Upper and Lower Steel Hanger Rods: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING 220548 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following : a. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. b. California Dynamics Corporation. c. Isolation Technology, Inc. d. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. e. Mason Industries, Inc. f. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. g. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. 2. Frame: Steel, fabricated with a connection for an upper threaded hanger rod and an opening on the underside to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular lower hangerrod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 3. Dampening Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric material with a projecting bushing for the underside opening preventing steel to steel contact. 2.9 SPRING HANGERS A. Combination Coil-Spring and Elastomeric-Insert Hanger with Spring and Insert in Compression: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. b. California Dynamics Corporation. c. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. d. Mason Industries, Inc. e. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. f. Vibration Isolation. g. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. 2. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 3. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 7. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame. 8. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower threaded rod. 9. Self-centering hanger-rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring coil. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING 220548 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.10 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. California Dynamics Corporation. 2. Kinetics Noise Control. 3. Mason Industries, Inc. 4. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 5. Vibration Isolation. 6. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. B. Steel Rails: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel rails. 1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1 inch clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide rails. 2. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support. C. Steel Bases: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails. 1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1 inch clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide bases or rails. 2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment. 3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support. D. Concrete Inertia Base: Factory-fabricated or field-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails ready for placement of cast-in-place concrete. 1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1 inch clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide bases or rails. a. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps. 2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment. 3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support. 4. Fabrication: Fabricate steel templates to hold equipment anchor-bolt sleeves and anchors in place during placement of concrete. Obtain anchor-bolt templates from supported equipment manufacturer. 2.11 THRUST RESTRAINTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING 220548 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. 2. California Dynamics Corporation. 3. Kinetics Noise Control. 4. Mason Industries, Inc. 5. Thybar Corporation. B. Description: Spring element combined with steel angles, backup plates, threaded rod, washers and nuts to produce a pair of devices capable of limiting movement of air handling equipment to 0.25 inch. C. Restraint shall be convertible in the field from compression type to tension type. D. Unit shall be pre-compressed. 2.12 SNUBBERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 2. Mason Industries, Inc. 3. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. B. Description: Factory fabricated using welded structural-steel shapes and plates, anchor bolts, and replaceable resilient isolation washers and bushings. 1. Anchor bolts for attaching to concrete shall be seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud-wedge or female-wedge type. 2. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene. 3. Maximum 1/4 inch air gap, and minimum 1/4 inch- thick resilient cushion. 2.13 RESTRAINT CHANNEL BRACINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hilti, Inc. 3. Mason Industries, Inc. 4. Unistrut. B. Description: MFMA-4, shop- or field-fabricated bracing assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating; rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces. 2.14 RESTRAINT CABLES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING 220548 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 2. Loos & Co., Inc. 3. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. B. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 492 stainless-steel cables. End connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement. 2.15 MECHANICAL ANCHOR BOLTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following : 1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hilti, Inc. 3. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 4. Mason Industries, Inc. B. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. 2.16 ADHESIVE ANCHOR BOLTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following : 1. Hilti, Inc. 2. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 3. Mason Industries, Inc. B. Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing PVC or urethane methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive. Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation- and wind-control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING 220548 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLICATIONS A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 3.3 VIBRATION CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION A. Coordinate the location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment attachment and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and formwork specified in Division 03. B. Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping, or ductwork resulting in stresses or misalignment. C. Comply with requirements in Division 07 for installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight. B. Adjust limit stops on restrained-spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation. 3.5 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES INSTALLATION A. Coordinate the location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment attachment and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and formwork specified in Division 03. 3.6 VIBRATION ISOLATION SCHEDULES A. Provide vibration isolators and equipment bases for all rotating, piston driven or vibrating equipment in accordance with the following schedules. Selection of equipment isolators shall be based on approved equipment shop drawings. B. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING 220548 - 11 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Base & Isolator Types Base Types Isolator Types A No base, isolators attached directly to equipment. 1 Elastomeric pad. B Structural steel rails or base. 2 Elastomeric floor mount or hanger. Use restrained elastomeric mount where seismic restraint is required. C Concrete inertia base. 3 Spring floor isolator or hanger. D Curb-mounted base. 4 Restrained spring isolator. 5 Thrust restraint. Vibration Isolation -RODI Skids and Vacuum Pumps r Type Horsepower and Other RPM Slab on Grade Up to 20 ft 20 to 30 ft 30 to 40 ft Table Notes Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) RODI Filter Skids All All A 2 0.25 A 4 0.75 A 4 1.5 A 4 2.5 1 RODI RO Skids All All A 1 0.25 A 4 0.75 A 4 1.5 A 4 1.5 1,2 RODI Storage Tanks All All A 1 0.25 A 4 0.75 A 4 1.5 A 4 1.5 1,2 Vacuum Pumps All All A 1 0.25 A 4 0.75 A 4 1.5 A 4 1.5 Notes: 1. Increase isolator deflection so isolator stiffness is less than one-tenth the stiffness of the supporting structure, as defined by the deflection due to load at the equipment support. 2. Where equipment manufacturer indicates component cannot be installed directly on individual isolators (type A), provide equipment manufacturer recommended supplemental support (base type). Vibration Isolation - Air Compressors Compressor Type Horsepower and Other RPM Slab on Grade Up to 20 ft 20 to 30 ft 30 to 40 ft Table Notes Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Tankmounted horizontal ≤10 All A 3 0.75 A 3 0.75 A 3 1.5 A 3 1.5 1 ≥15 All C 3 0.75 C 3 0.75 C 3 1.5 C 3 1.5 1 Tankmounted vertical All All C 3 0.75 C 3 0.75 C 3 1.5 C 3 1.5 1 BaseMounted All All C 3 0.75 C 3 0.75 C 3 1.5 C 3 1.5 1 Large Reciprocating All All C 3 0.75 C 3 0.75 C 3 1.5 C 3 1.5 1 Notes: 1. Compressors: Install base-mounted compressors through 5 hp and horizontal tank-type air compressors through 10 hp directly on spring isolators (type 3) with structural bases (type B), and compressors 15 to 100 hp on spring isolators (type 3) with inertia bases (type C) weighing 1 to 2 times the compressor weight. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING 220548 - 12 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Vibration Isolation - Pumps Pump Type Horsepower and Other RPM Slab on Grade Up to 20 ft 20 to 30 ft 30 to 40 ft Table Notes Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Close Coupled ≤7.5 All B 2 0.25 C 3 0.75 C 3 0.75 C 3 0.75 1 ≥10 All C 3 0.75 C 3 0.75 C 3 1.5 C 3 1.5 1 Large Inline 5 to 25 All A 3 0.75 A 3 1.5 A 3 1.5 A 2 1.5 ≥30 All A 3 1.5 A 3 1.5 A 3 1.5 A 3 2.5 End suction and split case ≤40 All C 3 0.75 C 3 0.75 C 3 1.5 C 3 1.5 1 50 to 125 All C 3 0.75 C 3 0.75 C 3 1.5 C 3 2.5 1 ≥150 All C 3 0.75 C 3 0.75 C 3 2.5 C 3 3.5 1 Notes: 1. Pumps: Type C bases strength and shape shall accommodate base elbow supports. Concrete bases (type C) shall be designed for a thickness of one-tenth the longest dimension with minimum thickness as follows: (1) for up to 30 hp, 6 in.; (2) for 40 to 75 hp, 8 in.; and (3) for 100 hp and up, 12 in. Pumps over 75 hp and multistage pumps shall be provided with supplemental restraining devices. Vibration Isolation - Water Heaters Generators Type Horsepower and Other RPM Slab on Grade Up to 20 ft 20 to 30 ft 30 to 40 ft Table Notes Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Gas Fired All All A 1 0.25 B 4 0.75 B 4 1.5 B 4 2.5 1 Electric All All A 1 0.25 B 4 0.75 B 4 1.5 B 4 2.5 1 Steam Fired All All A 1 0.25 B 4 0.75 B 4 1.5 B 4 2.5 1 Notes: 1. Where equipment manufacturer indicates component cannot be installed directly on individual isolators (type A) provide equipment manufacturer recommended supplemental support (base type). 3.7 SCHEDULE FOR VIBRATION ISOLATION WATER STORAGE TANKS UP TO 2000 GALLON A. Furnish and install vibration isolation and seismic restraint for all water storage tanks. Submit to the engineer a delegated design submission compliant with tank structure for seismic restraint. At a minimum submit the following: 1. Furnish and Install at minimum one piece molded bridge bearing neoprene washer/bushing. The bushing shall surround the anchor bolt and have a flat washer face to avoid metal to metal contact 2. Furnish female wedge anchors are preferred in floor locations so isolators or equipment can be slid into place after the anchors are installed. Anchors shall be manufactured from full diameter wire, and shall have a safety shoulder to fully support the wedge ring under load. Female wedge anchors shall have an evaluation report number from the ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. verifying to its allowable loads. 3. Furnish and install housekeeping pad anchors consisting of a ductile iron casting that is tapered and hexagonal, smaller at its base than at its top. The upper portion shall have holes for rebar to pass through. The anchor shall be continuously threaded from top to bottom for the attachment of soleplates. Housekeeping pad anchors hall be attached to the structural slab using a stud wedge anchor. 3.8 PIPING SYSTEM VIBRATION ISOLATION A. Vibration isolators for suspended piping: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING 220548 - 13 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Provide spring hangers for all piping in equipment rooms and up to 50 ft from vibrationisolated equipment and PRV stations. The first three hangers from the equipment shall be provided with the same deflection as the equipment isolators, with a maximum limitation of 2 in. deflection. Remaining hangers shall be spring or combination spring and elastomeric with 0.75 in. deflection. The first two hangers adjacent to the equipment shall be the positioning or pre-compressed type. Provide positioning hangers for all isolated piping 8 in. and larger. Piping over 2 inches in diameter suspended below or within 50 ft of conference rooms, classrooms and auditorium areas shall be hung with isolation hangers. B. Vibration isolators for floor-supported piping: 1. Provide vibration isolators for floor supports for piping in equipment rooms to isolate equipment. Isolators shall be selected according to the guidelines for hangers. The first two adjacent floor supports shall be the restrained spring type, with a restraint/blocking feature to prevent load transfer to equipment flanges as the piping is filled or drained. Provide a slide plate where pipe is subjected to large thermal movement (PTFE, graphite, or steel) and shall be installed on top of the isolator. Provide a thermal barrier when rubber products are installed directly beneath steam or hot-water lines. C. Vibration isolation for piping riser supports: 1. Provide resilient pipe riser support near to midpoint of riser and provide spring hangers at each floor or structural level to support riser and allow thermal expansion risers. 2. Provide spring hangers for first three hangers connected to branch piping at each level. 3.9 SCHEDULE FOR GAS PIPING AND MEDICAL GAS PIPING A. Furnish and install complete seismic restraining system for all natural gas piping and medical gas piping system installed in this contract. 1. Use seismic cable restraints (paragraph 2.3.L) if isolated. Seismic cable restraints or seismic solid braces restraints may be used on un-isolated piping. 2. Seismically restrain all piping as follows: a. Gas piping, medical gas piping, and medical compressed air and medical vacuum piping that is 1 inch ID or larger. 3. Transverse piping restraints shall be at 40 feet maximum spacing for all pipe sizes, except where lesser spacing is required to limit anchorage loads. 4. Longitudinal restraints shall be at 80 feet maximum spacing for all pipe sizes, except where lesser spacing is required to limit anchorage loads. 5. Where thermal expansion is a consideration, guides and anchors may be used as transverse and longitudinal restraints provided they have a capacity equal to or greater than the restraint loads in addition to the loads induced by expansion or contraction. 6. Transverse restraint for one pipe section may also act as a longitudinal restraint for a pipe section of the same size connected perpendicular to it if the restraint is installed within 24 inches of the elbow or tee or combined stresses are within allowable limits at longer distances. 7. Hold down clamps must be used to attach pipe to all trapeze members before applying restraints in a manner similar to clevis supports. 8. Branch lines may not be used to restrain main lines. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING 220548 - 14 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\220548_VIBRATION CONTROLS.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Equipment labels. 2. Warning signs and labels. 3. Pipe labels. 4. Valve tags. 5. Warning tags. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device. C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label. D. Valve numbering scheme. E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS A. Metal Labels for Equipment: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Brady Corporation. b. Marking Services, Inc. c. Seton Identification Products. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch stainless steel, 0.025-inch aluminum, 0.032inch or anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. 3. Letter Color: Black. 4. Background Color: White. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering. 7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. B. Plastic Labels for Equipment: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Brady Corporation. b. Marking Services, Inc. c. Seton Identification Products. 2. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. 3. Letter Color: Black. 4. Background Color: White. 5. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. 6. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 7. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering. 8. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 9. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number, and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules) and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Brady Corporation. 2. Marking Services Inc. 3. Seton Identification Products. B. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. C. Letter Color: White. D. Background Color: Red. E. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. F. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. G. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering. H. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. I. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. J. Label Content: Include caution and warning information plus emergency notification instructions. 2.3 PIPE LABELS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Brady Corporation. 2. Marking Services Inc. 3. Seton Identification Products. B. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction. C. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semi-rigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive. D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow direction. 1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping-system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction. 2. Lettering Size: Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping At least 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.4 VALVE TAGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Brady Corporation. 2. Marking Services Inc. 3. Seton Identification Products. B. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2inch numbers. 1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch or stainless steel, 0.025-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. 2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link chain or beaded chain or S-hook. C. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. 1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. 2.5 WARNING TAGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Brady Corporation. 2. Marking Services Inc. 3. Seton Identification Products. B. Description: Preprinted or partially preprinted accident-prevention tags of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing. 1. Size: Approximately 4 by 7 inches. 2. Fasteners: Reinforced grommet and wire or string. 3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO NOT OPERATE." 4. Color: Safety yellow background with black lettering. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPE IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE A. General 1. Provide color-coded pipe identification markers on piping installed under this Section. Pipe markers shall be snap-on laminated plastic protected by clear acrylic coating. Pipe markers shall be applied after Architectural painting where such is required. 2. Provide arrow marker with each pipe content marker to indicate direction of flow. If flow can be in either direction, use double-headed arrow marker. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. In general, 2 inch high legend shall be used for pipe lines 4 inch dia. and larger, and 3/4 inches high legend shall be used for pipe lines 3 inches dia. and smaller. 4. Color banding shall meet ASME, ANSI latest and OSHA requirements. 5. Markers are to be applied to all piping, regardless of under jacket colors per the tables that follow: 6. Apply labels to all piping routed throughout any areas including those above drop ceilings, under floor, and those exposed to view when access doors or access panels are opened 7. Apply labels to piping in concealed areas. Concealed areas, for purposes of this identification section, are those areas that cannot be seen except by demolition of the building elements. 8. In addition to pipe markers, arrow markers shall be used to indicate direction of flow. 9. Where the same service is distributed at different pressures, include in the marker the pressure of the service a. Example: Natural gas - Gas 2 psig, or Gas 10 inches WC b. Example: Compressed air - Lab Compressed Air 25 psig or Lab compressed air 110 psig 10. As a minimum, locate pipe markers as follows: a. Provide a pipe marker at each valve to indicate proper identification of pipe contents. Where several valves exist on one (1) header, it is necessary to mark only the header. b. Every 25 feet in exposed and concealed areas on all piping systems. Provide at least one (1) pipe marker in each room on all piping systems. c. At each branch or riser take off on piping systems, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. d. Provide a pipe marker and an arrow marker at every point of pipe entry or exit where the pipe penetrates a wall, floor, service column or enclosure. e. At access doors, manholes and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. f. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination B. The charts below indicate the following: 1. Marker/Legend: label text printed on the pipe label 2. Label Color: back round base color 3. Text Color: self-explanatory Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 CHART 1 Basic Plumbing Services SERVICE CODE MARKER LEGEND LABEL COLOR TEXT COLOR Domestic Cold Water CW Potable CW Green White Domestic Hot Water HW Potable HW Green White Domestic Hot Water Return HWR Potable HWR Green White Domestic Hot Water Return HWR-140 Potable HWR 140 deg F Green White Non-Potable Water NPW NPW Green Black Trap Primer TP Trap Primer Supply Green Black Gas (Natural) - low pressure G – x” W.C. Gas ____ inch WC Yellow Black Gas (Natural) - high pressure G – x psi Gas ____psig Yellow Black Gas Vent Gas V Gas Vent Yellow Black Indirect Waste IW Per Service White Black Rainwater RW Rainwater Drain Green Black Secondary Rainwater OD Rainwater Drain Overflow Green Black Sanitary Waste & Vent San San, Waste, Vent Orange Black Force Main (Sanitary) FM –San San Force Main Orange Black Force Main (Stormwater) FM - RW Storm Force Main Green Black Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 CHART 2 Basic Laboratory Plumbing Services SERVICE CODE MARKER LEGEND LABEL COLOR TEXT COLOR Lab Cold Water LCW LCW Green White Lab Hot Water LHW LHW Green White Lab Hot Water Return LHWR LHWR Green White Emergency Tempered Water TW Emergency Tempered Water Green White Emergency Tempered Water Return TWR Emergency Tempered Water Return Green White Compressed Air (low pressure) CA Compressed Air x psig Blue White Compressed Air (high pressure) CA – x psi Compressed Air x psig Blue White Compressed Air Intake CAI CAI Blue White Carbon Dioxide CO2 CO2 Grey White Nitrogen ____psi Label each pressure service N2 x psi Nitrogen x psig White Black Vacuum (Laboratory) VAC VAC White/black checkerboard Black Boxed Vacuum Exhaust VE VE White/black checkerboard Black Boxed Force Main (Lab Waste) FM - LW Lab Force Main Orange Black Lab Vent LV Lab Vent Orange Black Lab Waste LW Lab Waste Orange Black RO Pretreatment Water PTW Before RO equipment Green White RO Water (S&R) RO RO White Green Pure Water Supply – (by ASTM Type) PWS PWS – Type X, (i.e. USP or 1,or 2) White Green Pure Water Return – (by ASTM Type) PWR PWR – Type X, (i.e. USP or 1,or 2) White Green RO Reject Water Re RO Reject Water Purple White 3.2 CONTINUOUS PROTECTIVE PLASTIC JACKETS AND COLORS A. The Following Areas shall require all insulated piping to be protected along the entire pipe length with PVC Color Coded jacketed covers (Ceel-Co or Zeston plastic jacket): B. Color pattern and system identification legend shall be as in the above charts/schedules for pipe code. 1. Penthouse Mechanical Rooms 2. Plumbing Equipment Rooms 3. Mechanical Rooms 4. Main Pipe Corridor without ceilings 5. All Rainwater Leaders (horizontal) in areas without ceilings 6. Shipping Docks where piping is exposed or below ceilings 7. Vivarium MEP Walkways or Interstitial Spaces Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 8. This plastic jacket shall include fitting covers and piping covers. 9. Piping to be covered with this plastic jacket shall be insulated and finished as herein specified and then the plastic jacket shall be applied. 3.3 LABELING OF GAS PIPING A. Furnish and install one coat of primer and two coats of finish paint to all interior gas piping installed as part of this contract. 1. See Division 09 for paint types for interior piping. 2. Painting shall begin at plumbing side of contract downstream of the utility company gas meter - see exterior painting below for piping exposed to weather. 3. All gas piping shall be painted “Safety Yellow” per ANSI/ASME identification code 13.1. 4. Painting shall include all gas vents from vent origin to termination. 5. Include necessary paint finish touch-up where welding or jointing process has interfered with paint finish 6. Install labels after paint has cured for a minimum of 5 days. B. Gas Piping Exposed to Weather or on Roof 1. Furnish and install OSHA Safety Yellow to exterior and roof mounted gas piping commencing at a starting point one (1) foot below roof to gas pipe termination point on roof in the following manner: a. Primer: Epoxy primer/sealer applied at a spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer (2 coats) 1) Moore M36-00/M37 Polyamide Epoxy Clear Sealer Finish 2) PPG 97-14XX Series Pitt Guard DTR Polyamide Epoxy Clear Sealer Finish 3) S-W Heavy Duty Epoxy B67W300 Series b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy applied at a spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer of 3.0 to 8.0 mils 1) DuPont 25P High Solids Epoxy Mastic 2) S-W Heavy Duty Epoxy B67W300 Series 3) Tnemec Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline Polyamidoamine Epoxy c. Topcoat: Semi gloss aliphatic polyurethane enamel applied at a spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a dry film thickness of 2.0 - 4.0 mils. 1) Moore M73/M75 Aliphatic Acrylic Urethane Semi Gloss 2) PPG 97-8XXX Series Pitthane High Build Acrylic Aliphatic Urethane 3) S-W Corothane II Low VOC Satin Finish B65W200 Series 2. All finish gas piping shall be painted “Safety Yellow” per ANSI/ASME identification code 13.1. 3. Include necessary paint finish touch-up where welding or jointing process has interfered with paint finish Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 4. Install labels after paint has cured for a minimum of five (5) days. 5. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 3.4 PREPARATION A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants. 3.5 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors. C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. 3.6 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment. B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible. 3.7 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION A. Piping Color Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09. B. Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows: 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels. 8. Mains shall be labeled at points of entrance and exit from mechanical room, adjacent to each valve, on each riser, at each tee fitting, at points of entrance and exit from building, at least once in each room, and at intervals no longer than 20 feet. C. Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in pipes, including pipes where flow is allowed in both directions. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.8 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, shutoff valves, faucets, convenience and lawn-watering hose connections, and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule. B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs: 1. Tags, Valves, Equipment and Instruments a. Upon completion of work, attach engraved laminated plastic tags to all valves, and instrumentation. Equipment shall bear a stamped stainless tag. Tags shall have black characters on white face, consecutively numbered and prefixed with letter P for general valves. Tags shall bear the number used in the P&IDs for those items so marked. b. Embossed or engraved aluminum or brass tags may be substituted if desired. Tags shall be at least 1/8 inch thick. c. Tags shall be at least 1 inch diameter with numerals at least 3/8 inch high and attached by S hooks and chains. d. Nameplates, catalog numbers and rating identifications shall be securely attached to electrical and mechanical equipment with screws or rivets. Adhesives or cements will not be permitted. e. Non-potable water outlets shall be identified with permanently attached yellow color code or 4 inches high triangle tag reading, "water unsafe." f. Coordinate numbering system with existing piping tags as not to duplicate numbers. 2. Valve-Tag Size and Shape: All Plumbing and Piping Services that are part of this contract 1-1/2 inches round. 3. Valve-Tag Colors: Comply with the same colors as indicated for Pipe Labels 4. Letter Colors: White. 3.9 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30 _CD\220553_IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services: 1. Insulation materials 2. Accessory materials 3. Factory applied jackets 4. Tapes 5. Securements 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied, if any). B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, documentation including printed statement of VOC content and chemical components. 2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For adhesives and sealants, documentation indicating that product complies with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger. 2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation. 3. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. 4. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of insulation. 5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access panels. 6. Detail application of field-applied jackets. 7. Detail application at linkages of control devices. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed. C. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less. C. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components: 1. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 22. B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance. C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.8 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results. B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," and "Outdoor, Underground Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied. B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795. E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. F. Type A: Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "FactoryApplied Jackets" Article. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Certain-Teed. b. Johns Manville. c. Owens Corning. d. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation. 2. Molded Fibrous Glass Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 547, Type 1, Grade A, and ASTM C 585, for sizes required and of a type suitable for installation on piping systems as required. One of the following types shall be used: 3. For indoor systems operating at temperatures from 0°F (-18°C) to +850°F (454°C): a. Owens CorningTM FiberglasTM Insulation with SSL II® Positive Closure System. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 4. For systems operating below ambient (32°F (0°C) to +65°F (18°C)) temperature: a. Owens CorningTM VaporWick® Pipe Insulation. (see Plumbing Pipe Insulation – VaporWick® Pipe Insulation) 5. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I. 6. Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III. 7. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory-Applied ASJ-SSL: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 2. 8. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585. G. Type B: Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Aeroflex USA, Inc. b. Armacell LLC. c. K-Flex USA. H. Type C: Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. Knauf Insulation. c. Manson Insulation Inc. d. Owens Corning. 2. Perpendicular Oriented Mineral Fiber Insulation: ASTM C1393, Type IIIB, Category 2: a. For piping equal to or larger than 10 in (250 mm) diameter operating at temperatures up to +850°F (454°C): b. Owens CorningTM FiberglasTM FLEXWRAP® Insulation. 3. Perpendicular Oriented Mineral Fiber Insulation: ASTM C1393, Type II, Category 1: a. For piping equal to or larger than 10 in (250 mm) diameter operating at temperatures up to +650°F (343°C): b. Owens CorningTM FiberglasTM Pipe and Tank Insulation. 4. Type I, 850 Deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ-SSL. Factoryapplied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 I. Type G: Protective Shielding Pipe Covers,: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Engineered Brass Company. b. Insul-Tect Products Co. c. McGuire Manufacturing. d. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc. e. Truebro. f. Zurn Industries, LLC. 2. Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot-water supply hot- and cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements. 2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Accessories: Provide accessories per insulating system manufacturer’s recommendations, including the following: 1. Closure Materials: Butt strips, bands, wires, staples, mastics, adhesives, and pressuresensitive tapes. a. Mold resistant mastics are recommended for chilled water applications. 2. Field-Applied Jacketing Materials: Sheet metal, plastic, canvas, fiberglass cloth, insulating cement, PVC fitting covers. 3. Support Materials: Hanger straps, hanger rods, saddles, support rings, and high density inserts. B. Adhesives for Indoor Applications: VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2.3 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. ASJ: White, Kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with Kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Jacket Types TYPE STYLE MATERIALS Type 1: All Service Jacket Vapor Barrier Jackets: Kraft reinforced foil vapor barrier with self-sealing adhesive joints. Jacket shall be heavy duty fire retardant material with glass fiber reinforcing and self-sealing lap. Jacket will be factory applied to the insulation. Jacket shall have neat, white Kraft finish or white vinyl suitable for painting, with bead puncture resistance of 50 units minimum. Vapor barrier shall be .001 inch aluminum foil adhered to the inner surface of the jacket. Permeance shall not exceed 0.02 perms. Jacket shall be Owens-Corning Fiberglass "ASJ-SSL" or Manville flamesafe "AP-T". Type 2: PVC Jackets: Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket One piece, pre-molded type equal to Johns Manville Zeston 2000/300 Series PVC 20 or 30 mil jacketing and PVC fitting covers. All jackets shall follow manufacturers to comply with temperature of service piping. Jackets shall meet USDA compliance standard for all food handing Type 3: Color Coded PVC Jacket Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket Same as type 2 above but color coded generally in rooms without ceilings. Color Jacket to be applied to all pipe, fittings and valves in the specified area in the schedule table below. See section 220553 Identification for specific colors, these colors are to be contiguous on the piping system in the areas scheduled. Type 4: Aluminum Jacket: Aluminum roll stock ready for shop or field cutting. Comply with ASTM B 209/M 3003 alloy, H-14 temper. 0.016 inch thick smooth aluminum jacket with longitudinal ZEE style closures. Jacket shall be secured at both joints with 2 inch wide aluminum straps centered over butt joint of jacket. Provide 1/2 inch wide aluminum bands on 12 inch centers. Fitting covers shall be manufactured for purpose intended and shall be of same material. Acceptable for outdoor installation. Type 5: Stainless Steel Jackets: Weatherproof stainless steel jacketing, manufactured from T-304 smooth in .010 thickness. All jacketing shall have an internally bonded moisture retarder over the surface in contact with the insulation. Type 7 Protective Shielding Piping Enclosures for barrier free trap and water piping under fixture Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: Truebro. Zurn Industries, LLC. Description: Manufactured plastic enclosure for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with ADA requirements. Furnish protective shielding to all Emergency Eyewash units where water waste and trap are exposed and are exclusively selected for Barrier Free Use. 2.4 TAPES A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division. b. Compac Corporation. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company. d. Knauf Insulation. e. Venture Tape. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape. B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division. b. Compac Corporation. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company. d. Knauf Insulation. e. Venture Tape. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 6.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape. C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive; suitable for indoor and outdoor applications. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Compac Corporation. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 b. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company. c. Venture Tape. 2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 6 mils. 4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 500 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width. D. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division. b. Compac Corporation. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company. d. Knauf Insulation. e. Venture Tape. 2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 3.7 mils. 4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 5 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width. 2.5 SECUREMENTS A. Bands: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. ITW Insulation Systems; Illinois Tool Works, Inc. b. RPR Products, Inc. 2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal. B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel. C. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. C & F Wire. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. 1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows: 1. Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and an epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range between 140 and 300 deg F. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range. 2. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300 deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range. C. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that applies to insulation. D. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use de-mineralized water. 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties. B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield. K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches OC. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches OC. a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings. M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 11 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Cleanouts. 3.4 PENETRATIONS A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. 4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches. 4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant. D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. 1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers. F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 12 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 07. 3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles. B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions: 1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated. 2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. 3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive. 4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. 5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier. 6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. 7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour. 8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape. 9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match size and color of pipe labels. C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 13 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant. D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following: 1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation. 2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainlesssteel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket. 3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body. 4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish. 5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient services, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches OC. 4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient services, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 14 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3.7 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturers recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturers recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. 3.8 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 15 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches OC. 4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body. 3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3.9 INSTALLATION OF POLYOLEFIN INSULATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Seal split-tube longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturers recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of polyolefin sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 16 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturers recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install mitered sections of polyolefin pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install cut sections of polyolefin pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties, and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. 3.10 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory-applied jackets. 1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints. 2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- thick coats of lagging adhesive. 3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation. B. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows: 1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- wide joint strips at end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation with vapor-barrier mastic. C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Seal with manufacturers recommended adhesive. 1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge. D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches OC. and at end joints. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 17 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.11 FINISHES A. Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 09. 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof. a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size. B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating. C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work. D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Perform tests and inspections. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article. D. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements. 3.13 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: 1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 2. Underground piping. 3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 18 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.14 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE Piping System Insulation Type Thickness Inch Jacket Notes Water Service Cold, Up To Meter - Water Supply A C 1 1 Type 2 All Cold Water Supply A C 1/2 3/4” Type 1 Note 4 Note 5 All Hot Water Supply And Return less than 1-1/2 inches A C 1 1 Type 1 Note 4 Note 5 All Hot Water Supply And Return greater than 1-1/4 inches A C 1-1/2 1-1/2 Type 1 Note 4 Note 5 All Insulated Piping In Mechanical Rooms, Corridors Without Ceilings, Per This Table Per This Table Type 3 Note 5 Roof Drains And Horizontal Rainwater, Including Overflow Drainage System A C 1/2 1 Type 1 Note 3 Include Drain Bodies Note 5 Floor Drains, Traps, And Sanitary Drain Piping Within 10 Feet Of Drain Receiving Condensate And Equipment Drain Water Below 60 deg F A B C 1-1/2 3/4 1/2 Type 1 Note 3 Hot Service Drains And Vents A C 1-1/2 1 Type 1 Note 3 Note 5 Piping Exposed To Freezing (Water) A C 2 Type 5 Piping Exposed To Freezing (Sanitary) A C 2 Type 5 Exposed Sanitary Drains, Domestic Water, Domestic Hot Water, And Stops For Plumbing Fixtures For People With Disabilities G 1/2 Type 7 Package System Only Includes EW&S Where Designated For Barrier Free Use. Supplemental Notes Note 1: Two layers of 1 inch with staggered joints. Provide stainless steel 1/2 inch steel bands, 12 inches on center, apply 1 foot hexagonal mesh over insulation and 1/2 inch thick coat of insulating cement troweled smooth. Apply glass cloth jacket and size with one brush coat of lagging adhesive. Note 2: The contractor will furnish and install heat trace tape, prior to insulation installation. Raychem self-regulating Winter Guard Plus 8 watts per foot with failure alarm Note 3: Insulation shall include drain sump body and all horizontal piping to, and including the elbow down to vertical. Note 4: Unless noted otherwise this section pertains to ALL piping in a specified system, including inchase or in-shaft piping. Note 5: The Following Areas shall require all insulated piping to be protected along the entire pipe length with PVC jacketed covers (Ceel-Co or Zeston plastic jacket), this applies to exposed piping. If the piping is located above a ceiling, then use white PVC jackets and labels • Penthouses • Plumbing Equipment Rooms • Mechanical Rooms • Main Pipe Corridor without ceilings Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 19 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Piping System Insulation Type Thickness Inch Jacket Notes • All Rainwater Leaders (horizontal) in areas without ceilings • Other areas without hung ceilings • Color pattern and system identification legend shall be as in the above schedule for pipe code. • This plastic jacket shall include fitting covers and piping covers. • Piping to be covered with this plastic jacket shall be insulated and finished as herein specified and then the plastic jacket shall be applied. 3.15 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the fieldapplied jacket over the factory-applied jacket. B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. C. Piping, Concealed: 1. None. 2. PVC, Color-Coded by System: 30 mils thick. 3. Stainless Steel, Type 304 Smooth 2B Finish: 0.010 inch thick. D. Piping, Exposed: 1. PVC: 30 mils thick. 2. Stainless Steel, Type 304, Smooth 2B Finish with Z-Shaped Locking Seam: 0.020 inch thick. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\220719_PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING 220800 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 220800 - COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section. B. The OPR and BOD documentation are included by reference for information only. C. Division 01 section ‘LEED Requirements’ for additional LEED requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This section includes 1. Test equipment. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 for general commissioning process requirements. 1.3 DESCRIPTION A. Refer to Division 01 for the description of commissioning. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Division 01 Section “General Commissioning Requirements” for definitions. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 01 for CxA’s role. B. Refer to Division 01 for specific requirements. In addition, provide the following: 1. Certificates of readiness 2. Certificates of completion of installation, prestart, and startup activities. 3. O&M manuals 4. Test reports 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test Equipment Calibration Requirements: Contractors will comply with test manufacturer’s calibration procedures and intervals. Recalibrate test instruments immediately after instruments have been repaired resulting from being dropped or damaged. Affix calibration tags to test instruments. Furnish calibration records to CxA upon request. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Refer to Division 01 for requirements pertaining to coordination during the commissioning process. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING 220800 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT A. All standard testing equipment required to perform startup, initial checkout and functional performance testing shall be provided by the contractor for the equipment being tested. For example, the plumbing contractor of Division 22 shall ultimately be responsible for all standard testing equipment for the plumbing system in Division 22, except for equipment specific to and used by TAB in their commissioning responsibilities. A sufficient quantity of two-way radios shall be provided by each subcontractor. B. Special equipment, tools and instruments (specific to a piece of equipment and only available from vendor) required for testing shall be included in the base bid price to the Owner and left on site, except for stand-alone data logging equipment that may be used by the CxA. C. Proprietary test equipment and software required by any equipment manufacturer for programming and/or start-up, whether specified or not, shall be provided by the manufacturer of the equipment. Manufacturer shall provide the test equipment, demonstrate its use, and assist in the commissioning process as needed. Proprietary test equipment (and software) shall become the property of the Owner upon completion of the commissioning process. D. Data logging equipment and software required to test equipment will be provided by the CxA, but shall not become the property of the Owner. E. All testing equipment shall be of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and/or measure system performance with the tolerances specified in the Specifications. If not otherwise noted, the following minimum requirements apply: Temperature sensors and digital thermometers shall have a certified calibration within the past year to an accuracy of 0.5 deg F and a resolution of + or - 0.1 deg F. Pressure sensors shall have an accuracy of + or - 2.0 percent of the value range being measured (not full range of meter) and have been calibrated within the last year. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS A. With assistance from the installing contractors, the CxA will prepare Pre-Functional Checklists for all commissioned components, equipment, and systems B. Red-lined Drawings: 1. The contractor will verify all equipment, systems, instrumentation, wiring and components are shown correctly on red-lined drawings. 2. Preliminary red-lined drawings must be made available to the Commissioning Team for use prior to the start of Functional Performance Testing. 3. Changes, as a result of Functional Testing, must be incorporated into the final as-built drawings, which will be created from the red-lined drawings. 4. The contracted party, as defined in the Contract Documents will create the as-built drawings. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Contractor will provide a copy of O&M literature within 45 days of each submittal acceptance for use during the commissioning process for all commissioned equipment and systems. 2. The CxA will review the O&M literature once for conformance to project requirements. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING 220800 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. The CxA will receive a copy of the final approved O&M literature once corrections have been mad by the contractor. D. Demonstration and Training: 1. Contractor will provide demonstration and training as required by the specifications. 2. A complete training plan and schedule must be submitted by the contractor to the CxA four weeks (4) prior to any training. 3. A training agenda for each training session must be submitted to the CxA one (1) week prior the training session. 4. The CxA shall be notified at least 72 hours in advance of scheduled tests so that testing may be observed by the CxA and Owner's representative. A copy of the test record shall be provided to the CxA, Owner, and Architect. 5. Engage a Factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain specific equipment. 6. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping, trouble shooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment. 7. Review data in O&M Manuals. E. Systems manual requirements 1. The Systems Manual is intended to be a usable information resource containing all of the information related to the systems, assemblies, and Commissioning Process in one place with indexes and cross references. 2. The GC shall include final approved versions of the following information for the Systems Manual: a. As-Built System Schematics b. Verified Record Drawings c. Test Results (not otherwise included in Cx Record) d. Periodic Maintenance Information for computer maintenance management system e. Recommendations for recalibration frequency of sensors and actuators f. A list of contractors, subcontractors, suppliers, architects, and engineers involved in the project along with their contact information g. Training Records, Information on training provided, attendees list, and any ongoing training 3. This information shall be organized and arranged by building system, such as fire alarm, chilled water, heating hot water, etc. 4. Information should be provided in an electronic version to the extent possible. Legible, scanned images are acceptable for non-electronic documentation to facilitate this deliverable. 3.2 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Perform commissioning tests at the direction of the CxA. B. Attend construction phase controls coordination meetings. C. Attend domestic water balancing review and coordination meetings. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING 220800 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. Participate in Plumbing systems, assemblies, equipment, and component maintenance orientation and inspection as directed by the CxA. E. Provide information requested by the CxA for final commissioning documentation. F. Include requirements for submittal data, operation and maintenance data, and training in each purchase order or sub-contract written. G. Prepare preliminary schedule for Plumbing system orientations and inspections, operation and maintenance manual submissions, training sessions, pipe and duct system testing, flushing and cleaning, equipment start-up, testing and balancing and task completion for owner. Distribute preliminary schedule to commissioning team members. H. Update schedule as required throughout the construction period. I. During the startup and initial checkout process, execute the related portions of the prefunctional checklists for all commissioned equipment. J. Assist the CxA in all verification and functional performance tests. K. Provide measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data, and provide data acquisition equipment to record data for the complete range of testing for the required test period. L. Gather operation and maintenance literature on all equipment, and assemble in binders as required by the specifications. Submit to CxA (45) days after submittal acceptance. M. Coordinate with the CxA to provide (48) hour advance notice so that the witnessing of equipment and system start-up and testing can begin. N. Notify the CxA a minimum of two (2) weeks in advance of the time for start of the balancing work. Attend the initial balancing meeting for review of the balancing procedures. O. Participate in, and schedule vendors and contractors to participate in the training sessions. P. Provide written notification to the CM/GC and CxA that the following work has been completed in accordance with the contract documents, and that the equipment, systems, and sub-system are operating as required. 1. Plumbing equipment including domestic water heaters, pumps, plumbing fixtures, and all other equipment furnished under this Division. 2. Gas piping, sanitary waste and vent piping, storm drainage piping, sump pumps and automatic sprinkler system. 3. Fire stopping in fire rated construction, including caulking, gasketing and sealing of smoke barriers. 4. Air compressors 5. Fuel delivery systems Q. The equipment supplier shall document the performance of his equipment. R. Provide a complete set of red-lined drawings to the CxA prior to the start of Functional Performance Testing. S. Balance Contractor 1. Attend initial commissioning coordination meeting scheduled by the CxA. 2. Submit the site specific balancing plan to the CxA and Design Professional for review and acceptance. 3. Attend the balancing review meeting scheduled by the CxA. Be prepared to discuss the procedures that shall be followed in balancing the Plumbing system. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING 220800 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 4. At the completion of the balancing work, and the submittal of the final balancing report, notify the Plumbing contractor and the CM/GC. 5. At the completion of balancing work, and the submittal of the final balancing report, notify the Plumbing Contractor and the CM/GC. 6. Participate in verification of the balancing report, which will consist of repeating measurements contained in the balancing reports. Assist in diagnostic purposes when directed. T. Provide training of the Owner’s operating staff using expert qualified personnel, as specified. U. Equipment Suppliers 1. Provide all requested submittal data, including detailed start-up procedures and specific responsibilities of the Owner, to keep warranties in force. 2. Assist in equipment testing per agreements with contractors. 3. Provide information requested by CxA regarding equipment sequence of operation and testing procedures. V. Refer to Division 01 for additional contractor responsibilities. 3.3 OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Refer to Division 01 for Owner’s Responsibilities. 3.4 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Refer to Division 01 for Design Professional’s Responsibilities. 3.5 CXA'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Refer to Division 01 for CxA’s Responsibilities. 3.6 TESTING PREPARATION A. Certify in writing to the CxA that Plumbing systems, subsystems, and equipment have been installed, calibrated, and started and are operating according to the Contract Documents. B. Certify in writing to the CxA that Plumbing instrumentation and control systems have been completed and calibrated, that they are operating according to the Contract Documents, and that pretest set points have been recorded. C. Certify in writing that balancing procedures have been completed and that testing, adjusting, and balancing reports have been submitted, discrepancies corrected, and corrective work approved. D. Set systems, subsystems, and equipment into operating mode to be tested (e.g., normal shutdown, normal auto position, normal manual position, unoccupied cycle, emergency power, and alarm conditions). E. Inspect and verify the position of each device and interlock identified on checklists. F. Check safety cutouts, alarms, and interlocks with smoke control and life-safety systems during each mode of operation. G. Testing Instrumentation: Install measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data as directed by the CxA. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING 220800 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.7 DOMESTIC WATER BALANCING VERIFICATION A. Prior to performance of Domestic Water Balancing work, provide copies of reports, sample forms, checklists, and certificates to the CxA. B. Notify the CxA at least ten (10) days in advance of testing and balancing Work, and provide access for the CxA to witness balancing Work. C. Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to verify testing and balancing of Plumbing systems at the direction of the CxA. 1. The CxA will notify testing and balancing subcontractor ten (10) days in advance of the date of field verification. Notice will not include data points to be verified. 2. The balancing subcontractor shall use the same instruments (by model and serial number) that were used when original data were collected. 3. Failure of an item includes a deviation of more than 10 percent. Failure of more than 10 percent of selected items shall result in rejection of final balancing report. 4. Remedy the deficiency and notify the CxA so verification of failed portions can be performed. 3.8 GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to perform commissioning test at the direction of the CxA. B. Scope of Plumbing testing shall include entire Plumbing installation. Testing shall include measuring capacities and effectiveness of operational and control functions. C. Test all operating modes, interlocks, control responses, and responses to abnormal or emergency conditions, and verify proper response of building automation system controllers and sensors. D. The CxA along with the Plumbing contractor, balancing subcontractor shall prepare detailed testing plans, procedures, and checklists for Plumbing systems, subsystems, and equipment. E. Tests will be performed using design conditions whenever possible. F. Simulated conditions may need to be imposed using an artificial load when it is not practical to test under design conditions. Before simulating conditions, calibrate testing instruments. Provide equipment to simulate loads. Set simulated conditions as directed by the CxA and document simulated conditions and methods of simulation. After tests, return settings to normal operating conditions. G. The CxA may direct that set points be altered when simulating conditions is not practical. H. The CxA may direct that sensor values be altered with a signal generator when design or simulating conditions and altering set points are not practical. I. If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the Plumbing system, document the deficiency and report it to the Owner. After deficiencies are resolved, reschedule tests. J. If the testing plan indicates specific seasonal testing, complete appropriate initial performance tests and documentation and schedule seasonal tests. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING 220800 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.9 PLUMBING SYSTEMS, SUBSYSTEMS, AND EQUIPMENT TESTING PROCEDURES A. Equipment Testing and Acceptance Procedures: Testing requirements are specified in individual Division 22 sections. Provide submittals, test data, inspector record, and certifications to the CxA. B. Plumbing Instrumentation and Control System Testing: Field testing plans and testing requirements are specified in Division 23 for HVAC Controls." Assist the CxA with preparation of testing plans. C. Pipe system cleaning, flushing, hydrostatic tests and chemical treatment: Test requirements are specified in Division 22 piping sections. Plumbing Contractor shall prepare a pipe system cleaning, flushing, and hydrostatic testing plan. Provide cleaning, flushing, testing, and treating plan and final reports to the CxA. Plan shall include the following: 1. Sequence of testing and testing procedures for each section of pipe to be tested, identified by pipe zone or sector identification marker. Markers shall be keyed to Drawings for each pipe sector, showing the physical location of each designated pipe test section. Drawings keyed to pipe zones or sectors shall be formatted to allow each section of piping to be physically located and identified when referred to in pipe system cleaning, flushing, hydrostatic testing, and chemical treatment plan. 2. Description of equipment for flushing operations. 3. Minimum flushing water velocity. 4. Tracking checklist for managing and ensuring that all pipe sections have been cleaned, flushed, hydrostatically tested, and chemically treated. D. Plumbing Distribution System Testing: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test performance of air, fuel gas, sanitary waste and vent piping, storm drainage piping, sprinkler and domestic water distribution systems. E. Vibration and Sound Tests: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test performance of vibration isolation and seismic controls. F. The work included in the commissioning process involves a complete and thorough evaluation of the operation and performance of all components, systems and sub-systems. The following equipment and systems shall be evaluated: 1. All Water Systems including hot and cold water systems and their related components and heaters. 2. All Compressed Air Systems 3. All Water Heaters and Heat Exchangers 4. All Condensing Equipment 5. All Vacuum Systems 6. Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment 7. All Backflow Devices 8. Fuel Gas System 9. Gas System – Natural Gas 10. Hot Water Circulating Pumps 11. Hot Water Tempering Stations 12. Plumbing Fixtures 13. RODI Purified Water Systems Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING 220800 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 14. Sanitary Waste and Venting System 15. Chemical Waste Handling, Storage and Process Systems 16. Special Waste Systems 3.10 DEFICIENCIES/NON-CONFORMANCE, COST OF RETESTING, FAILURE DUE TO MANUFACTURER DEFECT A. Refer to Division 01 for requirements pertaining to deficiencies/non-conformance, cost of retesting, or failure due to manufacturer defect. 3.11 APPROVAL A. Refer to Division 01 for approval procedures. 3.12 DEFERRED TESTING A. Refer to Division 01 for requirements pertaining to deferred testing. 3.13 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall conform to Contract Documents requirements as stated in Division 01. B. Refer to Division 01 for the AE and CxA roles in the Operation and Maintenance Manual contribution, review and approval process. 3.14 TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL A. Refer to Division 01 for requirements pertaining to training. B. Plumbing Contractor. The mechanical contractor shall have the following training responsibilities: 1. Provide the CxA with a training plan two weeks before the planned training. 2. Provide designated Owner personnel with comprehensive orientation and training in the understanding of the systems and the operation and maintenance of each piece of Plumbing equipment. 3. During any demonstration, should the system fail to perform in accordance with the requirements of the O&M manual or sequence of operations, the system will be repaired or adjusted as necessary and the demonstration repeated. 4. The appropriate trade or manufacturer's representative shall provide the instructions on each major piece of equipment. This person may be the start-up technician for the piece of equipment, the installing contractor or manufacturer’s representative. Practical building operating expertise as well as in-depth knowledge of all modes of operation of the specific piece of equipment is required. More than one party may be required to execute the training. 5. The training sessions shall follow the outline in the Table of Contents of the operation and maintenance manual and illustrate whenever possible the use of the O&M manuals for reference. 6. Hands-on training shall include start-up, operation in all modes possible, including manual, shut-down and any emergency procedures and preventative maintenance for all pieces of equipment. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING 220800 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 7. The plumbing contractor shall fully explain and demonstrate the operation, function and overrides of any local packaged controls. 8. Training shall occur after functional testing is complete, unless approved otherwise by the Owner. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\220800_COMMISSIONING.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON PLUMBING PIPING 221110 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 221110 - COMMON PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Piping materials 2. Under-building-slab and aboveground pipes, tubes, and fittings inside buildings. 3. Stainless steel water piping 4. Encasement for piping. 5. Dielectric fittings 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For transition fittings and dielectric fittings. B. All Pipe, Fittings, Valves and Sundries contained in this specification section. All piping systems shall be submitted as a single piping submittal package with labels tagged consistent with the pipe index found in Part 2 of this spec. C. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For solvent cements and adhesive primers, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. 2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For solvent cements and adhesive primers, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. All Product shop drawings and submittal sheets for all pipe, fittings, valves, equipment, appurtenances, and systems included in this section B. System purging and disinfecting activities report. C. Field quality-control reports. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON PLUMBING PIPING 221110 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of water service. 2. Do not interrupt water service without Owner's written permission. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule Index and Pipe Tables." Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. B. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF 61 Annex G. Plastic piping components shall be marked with "NSF-pw." 2.2 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS INSIDE BUILDINGS Pipe Class: A10 Service: Water Material: Type L Copper Service Limits Primary ANSI Class: 150 Coefficient of linear expansion 0.94 x 10-5 inches per inch Corrosion Allowance 0.00 inch 1/2 inch to 2 inches 2-1/2 inches and larger PIPE AND FITTINGS Piping Seamless copper water tube, drawn temper, Type L. ASTM B-88. See Note 1. Seamless copper water tube, drawn temper, Type L. ASTM B-88. See Notes 2 and 5. Fittings Wrought copper, solder-joint. ASME B16.22 Ductile iron coupling with copper alkyd enamel paint coating, ASTM A-536. Grade “EHP” EPDM elastomer gasket rated -30F to 250F, ASTM D-2000. Equal to Victaulic Style 607 coupling. ASTM B-75 or ASTM B-152 copper alloy fittings or ASTM B-584 grooved end cast bronze fittings per UNS C89836 or C92200. Joints ASTM solder filler material shall be lead free to comply with the federal mandate of 2014. ASTM B-813 liquid or paste flux. Soldering procedures shall comply with ASTM B-828. Rolled groove prepared and assembled in accordance with manufacturer instructions. Mechanical Joints Cast copper alloy unions, hexagonal stock with ball-and-socket joint, solder joint ends. ASME B16.18. ANSI Class 150 flange adapter equal to Victaulic Style 641 for connections to flanged equipment. ANSI B16.1 dimensions. Branch Connections Victaulic Mechanical T Style 622 VALVES Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON PLUMBING PIPING 221110 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Pipe Class: A10 Service: Water Material: Type L Copper Service Limits Primary ANSI Class: 150 Coefficient of linear expansion 0.94 x 10-5 inches per inch Corrosion Allowance 0.00 inch 1/2 inch to 2 inches 2-1/2 inches and larger Available Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Apollo, Watts, Milwaukee, Nibco, Viega or Conbraco. Gate Valve Use ball valve. Outside stem and yoke resilient wedge flanged gate valve, lead free model, Watts Series 408-OSYRW. This valve intended for main shutoff in compliance with local water department regulations. Ball Valve All bronze lead free, 2-piece, full port, PTFE seats, solder end connections. 600 psig WOG. Apollo 77BLF-100, Watts Milwaukee, Watts LF-B6081. Class 125, cast iron body, FDA epoxy coated. Full port, flanged ends, stainless steel ball and stem. ANSI B16.1 flange dimensions. Watts G-4000-FDA series, Apollo IBV. Butterfly Valve For sizes greater than 2 inch only: Basis of Design - Victaulic Series 608 butterfly valves bubble-tight shut-off to 300 psi with the following features: • Lead free design • Join to the piping system with Style 607 couplings. • Double-seal disc design with a resilient elastomeric coating bonded to the ductile iron disc core. Grade CHP flouro-elastomer rated -30 deg F to 250 deg F. • Double-seal disc design with a resilient elastomeric coating bonded to the ductile iron disc core. • The disc actuated by a manual lever, gear. • Dead end service provided to full working pressure in both directions. Sealing and positive shut-off are accomplished by a double ring seal. Check Valve Lead Free Bronze body and clapper, solder ends, 200 WOG. Apollo 163 SLF Series, Watts LFWCV-CVS series, Milwaukee, Stockham. Iron body, bronze mounted, flanged ends, 200 WOG. Nibco lead fee Class 125/250 silent check or Apollo 910F Series, Milwaukee F-2974-M, Stockham G-931. Balancing Valve 2 inches and Smaller. 300 psi threaded, soldered or Permalynx push-to-connect ends, non-ferrous Ametal® brass copper alloy body, EPDM o-ring seals. 4-turn digital readout hand wheel for balancing, hidden memory feature with locking tamper-proof setting. Watts series LFCSM-61-S, or approved equal by Bell & Gossett or Armstrong. Mandatory – Provide separate downstream temperature gauge in conformance with Division 22 for meters and gauges. 2-1/2 inches or Larger. 250 psi Flanged or 350 psi Grooved ends, ASTM A536 ductile iron body, all other metal parts of Ametal® brass copper alloy, EPDM o-ring seals. 8, 12, or 16 turn digital readout hand wheel for balancing, hidden memory feature with locking tamper-proof setting. Apollo 58B, Watts, or approved equal by Bell & Gossett or Armstrong. SPECIALTY VALVES Available Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Apollo, Watts, NIBCO, R&W Caleffi. Balancing Valve with Flow Meter Use for return circuits, Inlet of all mainline Tempering Valves or Inlet of Building main Hot Water Re-circulating pumps. Integral automatic balancing circuit valve with integral flow meter display and temperature gauge. Sizes range from 1/2 inch to 2 inches selected per flow rate. Equal to Caleffi model 132 quick setter - low lead balancing valve, temperature gauge and with flow meter. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON PLUMBING PIPING 221110 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Pipe Class: A10 Service: Water Material: Type L Copper Service Limits Primary ANSI Class: 150 Coefficient of linear expansion 0.94 x 10-5 inches per inch Corrosion Allowance 0.00 inch 1/2 inch to 2 inches 2-1/2 inches and larger Automatic Dynamic Balancing Valve Use at all circuit returns to the hot water circulated return main. Integral automatic balancing circuit valve with integral adjustable flow rate. Sizes range from 1/2 inch to 2 inches selected per flow rate. Basis of Design: ThermOmegaTech Circuit Solver Provide separate downstream temperature gauge in conformance with spec section 220519 “Meters and Gauges Drain Valve All bronze, 2 piece, RPTFE seats, thread x solder end connections. 600 Psig WOG. Apollo 70LF-100-HC, Milwaukee, Watts. Hose thread adapter with cap and chain. 0BProvide hose end vacuum breaker to be lead free. Strainers 1BBronze body, threaded or solder ends to suit, stainless steel screen, 400 pound WOG. Apollo 59LF series, Watts LF777SI, or Watts 77F-DI-FDA-125 for large sizes. Pressure Reducing Valve Approved valve shall be listed to ASSE 1003 and IAPMO and certified to CSA B356. Valves are based on Watts Series LF25AUB-Z3. Control Valve, Apollo A127LF, Pilot Operated. Watts LF-M115, CLA-VAL series 90 or 690 . Valves to be lead free. Solenoid Valve 2-way solenoid valves are internally piloted with assisted lift valves featuring lead- free Brass, stainless steel construction and FKM seal material. Select and Coordinate voltage. Omega Series SV-6100, up to 1-1/2 inch Granzow Series W lead free up to 1-1/2 inch ASCO series 210 stainless steel solenoid valve, up to 2-1/2 inch Flow Meter Where water line connects to the following equipment, provide a flow meter with isolation valves and an inlet throttling globe valve: Tunnel Washers Glass Washers Autoclaves and Sterilizers Rack and Cage Washers Basis of Design: Kobold Co. RCM direct reading meter Use the flow meter and globe control valve to balance flow per the fixture manufacturers flow data. Include a safety factor of 10% over the design flow prescribed by the equipment manufacturer SPECIALTIES Venturi or Splitter Fittings for Potable And Non-Potable Hot Water Circuits For small fixture groups or where applications include seldom used fixtures, Venturi style fittings can be used to induce flow to and from such applications. Contractor shall submit calculations that indicate manipulated pressure in the circuit where the Venturi can alter the path of least resistance and reduce stagnation. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Viega ProPress Venturi Insert model 2911.5ZL Kemper Splitter Valve, certified for use in potable water systems (IAPMO certification file # N-10678 for NSF/ANSI 61). Loop Elbows Use double drop elbows such that water distribution systems minimize stagnation. Provide series piping to small water use fixtures such as lavatories and wash sinks. Use series drop elbows for all fixtures that use point of use mixing valves to deliver hot water to said fixture. Basis of Design: Viega ProPress® Double Drop Elbow Model 2928.72ZL NOTES: 1. All pipe, fittings, and valves used in this distribution system and installed after January 4, 2014 must comply with the new Federal Mandate known as the "Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water Act-2014". Therefore, after the enactment date of 1/4/14, all products installed must comply. Any product pipe, fittings or valve installed after the enactment date that does not comply, shall be removed and changed by this contractor at his/her own expense to comply with the Federal Law Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON PLUMBING PIPING 221110 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Pipe Class: A10 Service: Water Material: Type L Copper Service Limits Primary ANSI Class: 150 Coefficient of linear expansion 0.94 x 10-5 inches per inch Corrosion Allowance 0.00 inch 1/2 inch to 2 inches 2-1/2 inches and larger 2. Furnish extended stems for all valves used on insulated piping systems 3. Below grade water piping 3 inches and smaller shall be Type K copper with brazed joints, BcuP filler alloy. ANSI/AWS A5.8. Procedures shall be per ANSI/AWS B2.2. 4. Contact between dissimilar metals shall be made with di-electric couplings or di-electric flanges. Contact between ferrous and stud bolts and bronze flanges shall be electrically insulated with non-metallic washers. 5. Provide mechanical joint connections to all equipment such as water heaters, pumps, compressors, etc. 6. Above grade water piping 8 inches and larger may be Stainless Steel with roll grooved Victaulic or comparable joints in conjunction with local plumbing code approval 7. Valves used for throttling of flow shall be butterfly type with memory stop. Ball valves shall not be acceptable on hot water return piping 8. Valves shall be provided with Buna-N, TFE, or EPDM seats suitable for the service intended. 9. The pressure classifications for valves specified herein are working steam or water, oil, gas (WOG) pressure ratings. 10. Lever handles on all valves shall be color coded in conformance with ANSI Standard A-13.1 11. Shut-off valves on the incoming water service and on the discharge of the water meter shall be a gate valve or other full-way valve 12. Ball valves used to isolate emergency equipment shall be equipped with a “latch lock lever” #(-27) and be pad locked in the open position. 13. Balancing valves for the domestic hot water system shall be lead free bronze body or a metal copper-alloy construction, with differential read out ports, concealed memory stop with digital hand wheel, and drain port. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations. 14. Grooved joint couplings shall incorporate an angled-pattern bolt pad design to provide confirmation of joint integrity upon visual metal-to-metal bolt pad contact with slight offset and no torque requirement. Tongue and recess designs may only be used if a torque wrench is utilized (IAW published installation instructions) and each coupling is either tagged or marked with indelible ink to indicate the actual torque value attained. 15. A factory trained representative shall provide on-site training for contractor’s field personnel in the use of grooving tools, application of groove, and product installation. Contractor shall remove and replace any improperly installed products. Gaskets used on potable water systems shall be UL classified in accordance with ANSI/NSF61 for both hot (180 deg F) and cold (86 deg F). Pipe ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove for proper gasket sealing. The gasket style and elastomeric material (grade) shall be verified as suitable for the intended service as specified. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON PLUMBING PIPING 221110 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Pipe Class: A11 Service: Natural Gas Material: Steel Service Limits Primary ANSI Class: 150 Coefficient of linear expansion 6.5 x 10-6 in per in/oF Corrosion Allowance 0.05 inch 1/2 inch to 2 inches 2-1/2 inches and larger PIPE AND FITTINGS Piping Schedule 40 Carbon Steel ASTM A53 E Grade B, A106 Grade A, or ASTM A120. Schedule 40 Carbon Steel ASTM A53EGrade B, ASTM A106 Grade A, or ASTM A120. Fittings Contractor choice Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern Viega MegaPress G fittings 1/2 inch to 2 inch shall conform to ANSI LC4-2012/CSA 6.32-2102 standard. .Fittings for use on IPS Schedule 40 pipe shall have a nickel / zinc coating to reduce corrosion. Fittings shall have an HNBR sealing element, 420 stainless steel grip ring and Smart Connect (SC) feature that guarantees detection of an un-pressed fitting during testing. Installation must be in accordance to manufacturer’s instruction and all installers shall be trained by manufacturer on proper installation. Note, when pressures exceed 5 psig, then all piping must be welded Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket welding Note, when pressures exceed 5 psig, then all piping must be welded Unions Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and threaded ends Viega MegaPress G Unions 1/2 inch-2 inch meeting requirements above. Use Flanges. Flanges Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class 150, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings: Material Group: 1.1. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground. Gasket Materials: ASME B16.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum O-rings, and spiralwound metal gaskets. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel aboveground and stainless steel underground Viega MegaPress G Flanges meeting ASME B16.5 and ANSI LC4 / CSA 6.32. VALVES Available Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Watts Regulator, Apollo, Serd Audco, Resun, Nordstrom, AY McDonald Note: All valves used for gas shall be approved for use by the State Fuel Gas Code and/or the State Plumbing Board Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON PLUMBING PIPING 221110 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Pipe Class: A11 Service: Natural Gas Material: Steel Service Limits Primary ANSI Class: 150 Coefficient of linear expansion 6.5 x 10-6 in per in/oF Corrosion Allowance 0.05 inch 1/2 inch to 2 inches 2-1/2 inches and larger Plug/Gas Cock Valves Bronze body and plug manually operated low pressure (2 psig or less) natural or propane gas valve for use indoors at ambient temperatures of 32 to 125 degrees Fahrenheit Basis of Design: .A.Y. McDonald 10554 to 10558 Iron Body, Greasable and Lubricated Tapered Plug, rectangular port, regular opening, Flanged End, WOG, 125 psi SWP Valve shall be equal to R&M Energy Systems Inc. Resun Model #1431 200 psi. Ball Valve Bottom loaded pressure stem valve rated at 600 psi WOG. Basis of Design: Watts B-6000-ULMassApollo 70-100-07 series, Watts FBV3C Ball valves shall be of the floating-ball design providing bi-directional, tight shutoff in accordance with MSS SP-72. The valves shall be rated at 150# WSP/300# WOG. Bodies shall be ductile iron per ASTM A536, With ANSI Class 150 raised-face flanges. The interior and exterior of the body shall be UL certified polyester powder coated to meet NSF/ANSI 61 and NSF/ANSI 372. The ball shall be PFA infused stainless steel, with a stainless steel blowout-proof stem. The seats and body seals shall be PTFE. The stem seal shall be PTFE, externally adjustable chevron type. Valves shall be equipped with locking handles as standard. Valves shall be equipped with 2" manual gear operators. Basis of Design: American Valve, Inc Series 4000D Fire Safety Gas Automatic Shutoff Valve project only. (Massachusetts Projects Only) Basis of Design: Inner Tite Flange Fire Valve Check Valve All available sizes: 150# Class, bronze swing check valve. Aluminum disc, screwed cap, threaded or flanged ends, lifting lug for 3 – 8 inch valves. Basis of Design: Eclipse Inc. Series 1000. PRESSURE REGULATING DEVICES Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON PLUMBING PIPING 221110 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Pipe Class: A11 Service: Natural Gas Material: Steel Service Limits Primary ANSI Class: 150 Coefficient of linear expansion 6.5 x 10-6 in per in/oF Corrosion Allowance 0.05 inch 1/2 inch to 2 inches 2-1/2 inches and larger Available Manufacturers Main Gas Service Regulator Coordinate with the Utility for gas service regulators. The service regulator is to be furnished and installed by the gas utility Basis of Design: Piero Fiorentini Norval or Dival series regulator selection program link Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON PLUMBING PIPING 221110 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Pipe Class: A11 Service: Natural Gas Material: Steel Service Limits Primary ANSI Class: 150 Coefficient of linear expansion 6.5 x 10-6 in per in/oF Corrosion Allowance 0.05 inch 1/2 inch to 2 inches 2-1/2 inches and larger Line Pressure Regulator – (5 psig to low pressure) Comply with ANSI Z21.80. Body and Diaphragm Case: Ductile iron or die-cast aluminum. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the valve port. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed 150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not connected to vent piping. Over Pressure Device: 4 port dual model device Maximum Inlet Pressure: 5 psig, (34.5kPa) Basis of Design: Pietro Fiorentini Governor Overprotection Device (ODP) Operator/Monitor model Maximum inlet pressure 10 psig (69 kPa) Pietro Fiorentini Governor Overprotection Device (ODP) model two stage pressure cut model Line Pressure Regulator – (2 psig to low pressure) Comply with ANSI Z21.80. Body and Diaphragm Case: Ductile iron or die-cast aluminum. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the valve port. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed 150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not connected to vent piping. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 2 psig (13.8 kPa) ] Basis of Design: Pietro Fiorentini Governor model Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON PLUMBING PIPING 221110 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Pipe Class: A11 Service: Natural Gas Material: Steel Service Limits Primary ANSI Class: 150 Coefficient of linear expansion 6.5 x 10-6 in per in/oF Corrosion Allowance 0.05 inch 1/2 inch to 2 inches 2-1/2 inches and larger Rooftop Equipment Regulator Appliance Pressure Regulators Comply with ANSI Z21.18. Body and Diaphragm Case: Die-cast aluminum. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. Factory-Applied Finish: Minimum three-layer polyester and polyution, if approved by authorities having jurisdiction. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 1 psig (6.9 kPa) Basis of Design: Maxiflow RV series, Pietro Fiorentini Governor series Regulator Vents This applies to all regulators that require a vent line: Atmospheric Vent install a vent from the regulator to above the snow line and terminate with a 180 degree turn down and insect screen. if the service regulator has a stainless screen in the vent already and when the installer has to extend the vent above the snow line, remove and relocate the factory screen to the end of the vent extension, otherwise field-install, a 16 mesh stainless-steel screen in opening at the end of the vent line SPECIALTY ISOLATION AND CONTROL General Note: All valves used for gas shall be approved for use by the State Fuel Gas Code and/or the State Plumbing Board. Emergency Gas ShutOff with Access Box (Manual) Master gas valve box constructed of all heavy gauge stainless steel. Interior finish bead. Front flange without door. The interior finish to be polished to a satin finish. Logos strip “Master Gas Valve” which is black bakelite tag with 1/2 inch high white letters and self-adhesive logo sent loose for installation in field. Gas Shutoff Ball Valve, T Handle with Locks. Approved ball valve as specified above. Furnish permanent metal tag that readily identifies the piping system controlled by the valve. Emergency Gas ShutOff in Safety Station Safety Station Enclosure furnished by the Architect. Gas Shutoff Ball Valve. Furnish and install approved ball valve as specified above with T Handle with Locks. Furnish permanent metal tag that readily identifies the piping system controlled by the valve Take out Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON PLUMBING PIPING 221110 - 11 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Pipe Class: A11 Service: Natural Gas Material: Steel Service Limits Primary ANSI Class: 150 Coefficient of linear expansion 6.5 x 10-6 in per in/oF Corrosion Allowance 0.05 inch 1/2 inch to 2 inches 2-1/2 inches and larger Emergency Gas ShutOff in Safety Station (Teaching Lab) Natural Gas Service Panel: package panel to operate as a single output controller incorporating a solenoid valve assembly along with the digital switching mechanism within a single enclosure. An internal junction box to house the 120-vac line voltage along with transformer and circuit board. The following features are to be included: Door Lock - with a key door lock. Operation Key Switch - Momentary switch for "ON" cycle. Control Switch - Activates the output circuit with keying for "ON". Push Button Switch - Momentary contacts disengage the system requiring re-keying to active "ON". Panic Notification - "Panic" output circuit that can be utilized as a notification signal to an alarm system with two sets of dry-contact 24-volt dc output. Notification: Fire Alarm Supervisory LED Indicators - A Green "ON" or active LED illuminates with service "ON". A lower Red LED indicating that "Panic" has interrupted service and the notification circuit is active. Standard unit flush mounted with white powder coat door. Resets included on all solenoid outputs. Exterior T-Handle Shutoff - ISIMET LSP with tee handle that provides the means to operate the manual valve in the ON – OFF positions without the need to open the door panel. This unit complies with codes that specifically state and are interpreted to require a ‘manual valve’ at the exit to a science laboratory. Basis of Design for Equivalency – ISIMET,,ASCO,Series 108, AGS series Merlin 1000. NOTES: For Laboratory Gas Piping Systems, Supply an Emergency Gas Shut-Off Ball Valve to Each Lab. 1. Provide a branch ball valve and positive silent check valve on each pipe branch within each laboratory on the gas pipe floor sub-main downstream of the Lab module cabinet gas shutoff valve 2. Provide two wrenches for each gas cock size. 3. Provide two Kitchen solenoids, one interlocked with the hood fire suppression system and a second interlocked with the carbon monoxide detection system, see Vanderweil Engineers Inc. detail for wiring. Field-verify voltage solenoid valve requirements with kitchen supplier. 4. The Contractor, at his option, may weld piping down to 1-1/4 if permitted by local codes. 5. All welders for gas piping must be certified per the requirements of Division 22. 6. Where multiple gas regulators are installed, regulators shall be marked with a metal tag designating the building or areas being supplied. For all underground installation, Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches (750 mm) deep; colored yellow. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON PLUMBING PIPING 221110 - 12 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Pipe Class: A17 Service: Water or Air Material: Galvanized Steel Service Limits Primary ANSI Class: 150 Coefficient of linear expansion 7.2 x 10-6 inches per inch Corrosion Allowance 0.00 inch 1/2 inch to 2 inches 2-1/2 inches and larger PIPE AND FITTINGS Piping Schedule 40 Galvanized Steel. ASTM A53 Grade B, A106 Grade A. Schedule 40 Galvanized Steel. ASTM A53 Grade B, ASTM A106 Grade A Fittings Screwed malleable iron 125 PSI galvanized. Note: cold re-galvanization required for all cut threads Grooved ductile iron 150 PSI galvanized. Note: cut grooves not allowed, roll grooves accepted Unions Screwed 150# malleable iron A105 Grade II, galvanized. Coupling shall act as union. Flanges 150# raised face, screwed, A105 galvanized. Flange adapter Victaulic Style 741. Gaskets 1/16 inch red rubber, wire inserted. 150 raised face and 125 flat face gasket. Selected for intended service. VALVES Available Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Gate Valve Use Ball Valve Use Butterfly Valve Victaulic series 300 Ball Valve 2-piece all bronze, full port, PTFE seats thread end, 4 bolt 600 PSI CW working press. Milwaukee Ba-300, Apollo 77F, Watts B-6080. Victaulic series 721 150# class, carbon steel body, stainless steel ball and stem, Teflon seat and seal, flanged. Jamesbury 5150-31-22. Apollo CS Flanged Series. Or use Butterfly Valve for sizes 3” and greater Butterfly Valve Use ball valve 150# rated, full lug type wafer ductile iron body, alum/bronze disc, stainless steel stem, EDPM or NPR Seat. DeZurik series BOSUS, Victaulic Series 761 with ductile iron body, Crane Centerline series Check Valve For water - Horizontal swing, composition disc, all bronze, threaded ends, 200 PSI Wp. Basis of Design: Milwaukee 509, Jenkins 352c, Stockham B319. For compressed air – Apollo 61-700 series, Victaulic series 716H Flanged swing check, clss 125 for decelerated disc closure and Installation at no more than 45 degrees from horizontal, flanged end, 200 PSI WP. Basis of Design: Jenkins 477-L, Stockham G931-L&W., Victaulic series 716 Drain Valve 600 WOG bronze ball valve,NPT x 3/4 inch hose with gasketed cap and chain. Milwaukee BA-100-4, Apollo 77F with 3/4” hose connection and cap. Loop Elbows NOTES: 7. When steel comes in contact with dissimilar material, provide di-electric couplings or dielectric flanges. Contact between ferrous stud bolts and bronze flanges shall be electrically insulated with non-metallic washers. Provide union connections to all pneumatically operated equipment. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON PLUMBING PIPING 221110 - 13 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Pipe Class: A20 Service: Water Material: Type L Copper Service Limits Primary ANSI Class: 150 Coefficient of linear expansion 0.94 x 10-5 inches per inch Corrosion Allowance 0.00 inch 1/2 inch to 2 inches 2-1/2 inches and larger PIPE AND FITTINGS Piping Seamless copper water tube, drawn temper, Type L. ASTM B-88. See Note 1. Fittings Bronze or copper shall conform to the material requirements of ASME B16.18 or ASME B16.22, and the performance requirements of IAPMO PS117, ICC LC1002 and ASME B16.51. Apollo Xpress or Viega ProPress fittings 1/2 inch through 4 inches for use with ASTM B88 copper tube type K, L, or M and 1/2 inch up to include 1-1/4 inch annealed copper tube. Apollo Xpress or Viega ProPress fittings shall have an EPDM sealing element and Leak Before Press (LBP) or Smart Connect (SC) feature that guarantees detection of an unpressed fitting during a pressure test within pressures directed by manufacturer. Fittings 2-1/2 inch through 4 inches shall have a 420 stainless steel grip ring, PBT separator ring, EPDM sealing element and Leak Before Press (LBP) or Smart Connect (SC) feature. Sealing elements shall be verified for the intended use by manufacturer. All installers must be trained by manufacturer on proper installation procedure. Basis of Design: Viega ProPress fittings with EPDM sealing element shall conform to NSF 61-pw-G when installed in a potable water system. Joints Pipe ends shall be cut on a right angle (square) to the pipe. Pipe ends shall be reamed and chamfered, all grease, oil or dirt shall be removed from the pipe end with a clean rag. Visually examine the fitting sealing element to insure there is no damage, and it is properly seated into the fitting. Insert pipe fully into the fitting. Make a mark with a felt tip pen on the pipe at the face of the fitting. Always examine the tube to insure it is fully inserted into the fitting prior to pressing the joint. Press fittings 1/2 inch through 4 inches shall be joined using Ridgid ProPress Tools. 2-1/2 inches through 4 inches Press copper fittings shall utilize Ridgid ProPress XLC Ring set.,. Installers shall be trained and certified by manufacturer’s representative. Mechanical Joints Cast copper alloy unions, hexagonal stock with ball-and-socket joint, solder joint ends. ASME B16.18. ANSI Class 150 flange adapter equal to Victaulic Style 641 for connections to flanged equipment. ANSI B16.1 dimensions. Branch Connections Mechanical Apollo Xpress or Viega ProPress compliant Tee or lateral Interim Test After Apollo Xpress or Viega ProPress fittings have been installed a “step test” shall be followed. Utilizing air, water, or dry nitrogen, pressurize the system .5-40 psi for air and between 15 – 85 psi for water to identify any un-pressed fittings. Walk the system and check for leaks. If you do not locate any leaks proceed to pressurize the system to the recommended pressures, not to exceed 600 psi. Should you locate a leaking joint that has not been pressed, relieve the pressure from the system, ensure the tube is fully inserted into the fitting and press the fitting. Resume test procedure, after the necessary repairs have been made. VALVES Available Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include Viega . Gate Valve Use ball valve. Outside stem and yoke resilient wedge flanged gate valve, lead free model, Watts Series 408-OSYRW. This valve intended for main shutoff in compliance with local water department regulations. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON PLUMBING PIPING 221110 - 14 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Pipe Class: A20 Service: Water Material: Type L Copper Service Limits Primary ANSI Class: 150 Coefficient of linear expansion 0.94 x 10-5 inches per inch Corrosion Allowance 0.00 inch 1/2 inch to 2 inches 2-1/2 inches and larger Ball Valve Viega ProPress ball valve Smart Connect feature, Zero Lead For potable water applications. Bronze Valve only with stainless steel ball. Press connection, Full port Lockable metal handle, stainless steel ball and stem, EPDM sealing elements, , Viega Model 2971.3ZL or 2970.3ZL series with Viega ProPress stem extension Valves must be compliant to NSF 61-G / NSF 372 zero lead requirements. Class 125, cast iron body, FDA epoxy coated. Lead Free Full port, flanged ends, stainless steel ball and stem. ANSI B16.1 flange dimensions. Watts G-4000-FDA series, Apollo IBV. Butterfly Valve For sizes greater than 2 inch only: Basis of Design - Victaulic Series 608 butterfly valves bubble-tight shut-off to 300 psi with the following features: • Join to the piping system with Style 607 couplings. • Double-seal disc design with a resilient elastomeric coating bonded to the ductile iron disc core. Grade CHP flouroelastomer rated -30 deg F to 250 deg F. • Double-seal disc design with a resilient elastomeric coating bonded to the ductile iron disc core. • The disc actuated by a manual lever, gear. • Dead end service provided to full working pressure in both directions. Sealing and positive shut-off are accomplished by a double ring seal. Check Valve Apollo 163LFPR-LBP or Viega ProPress check valve, smart connect feature, zero lead for potable water applications. • Bronze • Press connection • Inline • EPDM sealing element Model 2974ZL Iron body, bronze mounted, flanged ends, 200 WOG. Apollo 910F Series, Milwaukee F-2974-M, Stockham G-931. Balancing Valve SPECIALTY VALVES Available Manufacturers Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Watts, NIBCO, R&W Caleffi. Balancing Valve With Flow Meter Use at the Inlet of all Tempering Valves or Inlet of Building How Water Re-circulating pumps. Integral automatic balancing circuit valve with integral flow meter display and temperature gauge. Sizes range from 1/2 inch to 2 inches selected per flow rate. Equal to Caleffi model 132 quick setter - low lead balancing valve, temperature gauge and flow meter. Automatic Dynamic Balancing Valve. Use at all circuit returns to the hot water circulated return main. Integral automatic balancing circuit valve with integral adjustable flow rate. Sizes range from 1/2 inch to 2 inches selected per flow rate. Basis of Design: ThermOmegaTech Circuit Solver Provide separate downstream temperature gauge in conformance with Division 22 for meters and gauges Drain Valve All bronze, 2 piece, RPTFE seats, thread x solder end connections. 600 Psig WOG. Apollo 70LF-100-HC, Milwaukee, Watts. Hose thread adapter with cap and chain. Provide hose end LF vacuum breaker. Strainers Bronze body, threaded or solder ends to suit, stainless steel screen, 400 pound WOG., Apollo LF-777/777S series. or Watts 77F-DI-FDA-125 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON PLUMBING PIPING 221110 - 15 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Pipe Class: A20 Service: Water Material: Type L Copper Service Limits Primary ANSI Class: 150 Coefficient of linear expansion 0.94 x 10-5 inches per inch Corrosion Allowance 0.00 inch 1/2 inch to 2 inches 2-1/2 inches and larger Pressure Reducing Valve Approved valve shall be listed to ASSE 1003 and IAPMO and certified to CSA B356. Valves are based on Watts Series LF25AUB-Z3. Control Valve, Apollo A127LF, Pilot Operated. Watts LF-M115, CLA-VAL. Valves to be lead free. Solenoid Valve Two-way solenoid valves are internally piloted with assisted lift valves featuring lead- free Brass, stainless steel construction and FKM seal material. Select and Coordinate voltage. Omega Series SV-6100, up to 1-1/2 inch Granzow Series W lead free up to 1-1/2 inch ASCO series 210 stainless steel solenoid valve, up to 2-1/2 inch Flow Meter Where water line connects to the following equipment, provide a flow meter with isolation valves and an inlet globe valve: • Tunnel Washers • Glass Washers • Autoclaves and Sterilizers • Rack and Cage Washers Basis of Design: Kobold Co. RCM direct reading meter Use the flow meter and globe control valve to balance flow per the fixture manufacturers flow data. Include a safety factor of 10% over the design flow prescribed by the equipment manufacturer SPECIALTIES Venturi or Splitter Fittings for Potable and Non Potable hot water circuits For small fixture groups or where applications include seldom used fixtures, Venturi style fittings can be used to induce flow to and from such applications. Contractor shall submit calculations that indicate manipulated pressure in the circuit where the Venturi can alter the path of least resistance and reduce stagnation. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Viega ProPress Venturi Insert model 2911.5ZL Kemper Splitter Valve, certified for use in potable water systems (IAPMO certification file # N-10678 for NSF/ANSI 61). Loop Elbows Use double drop elbows such that water distribution systems minimize stagnation. Provide series piping to small water use fixtures such as lavatories and wash sinks. Use series drop elbows for all fixtures that use point of use mixing valves to deliver hot water to said fixture. Basis of Design: Viega ProPress® Double Drop Elbow Model 2928.72ZL NOTES: 8. All pipe, fittings, and valves used in this distribution system and installed after January 4, 2014 must comply with the new Federal Mandate known as the "Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water Act-2014". Therefore, after the enactment date of 1/4/14, all products installed must comply. Any product pipe, fittings or valve installed after the enactment date that does not comply, shall be removed and changed by this contractor at his/her own expense to comply with the Federal Law. 9. Furnish extended stems for valves used on all insulated piping systems 10. Contact between dissimilar metals shall be made with di-electric couplings or di-electric flanges. Contact between ferrous and stud bolts and bronze flanges shall be electrically insulated with non-metallic washers. 11. Provide mechanical joint connections to all equipment such as water heaters, pumps, compressors, etc. 12. Above grade water piping 8 inches and larger may be Stainless Steel with roll grooved Victaulic or comparable joints in conjunction with local plumbing code approval. 13. Valves used for throttling of flow shall be butterfly type with memory stop. Ball valves shall not be acceptable on hot water return piping 14. Valves shall be provided with Buna-N, TFE or EPDM seats suitable for the service intended. 15. The pressure classifications for valves specified herein are working steam or water, oil, gas (WOG) pressure ratings. 16. Lever handles on all valves shall be color coded in conformance with ANSI Standard A-13.1 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON PLUMBING PIPING 221110 - 16 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Pipe Class: A20 Service: Water Material: Type L Copper Service Limits Primary ANSI Class: 150 Coefficient of linear expansion 0.94 x 10-5 inches per inch Corrosion Allowance 0.00 inch 1/2 inch to 2 inches 2-1/2 inches and larger 17. Shut-off valves on the incoming water service and on the discharge of the water meter shall be a gate valve or other full-way valve 18. Ball valves used to isolate emergency equipment shall be equipped with a "latch lock lever" #(-27) and be pad locked in the open position. 19. Grooved joint couplings shall incorporate an angled-pattern bolt pad design to provide confirmation of joint integrity upon visual metal-to-metal bolt pad contact with slight offset and no torque requirement. Tongue and recess designs may only be used if a torque wrench is utilized (IAW published installation instructions) and each coupling is either tagged or marked with indelible ink to indicate the actual torque value attained. 20. An Apollo Xpress, or ProPress and Victaulic factory trained representative shall provide on-site training for contractor’s field personnel in the use of fit and grooving tools, application of groove, and product installation. Contractor shall remove and replace any improperly installed products. Gaskets used on potable water systems shall be UL classified in accordance with ANSI/NSF-61 for both hot (180 deg F) and cold (86 deg F). Pipe ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove for proper gasket sealing. The gasket style and elastomeric material (grade) shall be verified as suitable for the intended service as specified. Pipe Class: D10 Service: Water Material: Cast Iron Service Limits Primary ANSI Class: 125 Coefficient of thermal expansion 5.9 x 10-6 inches per inch Corrosion Allowance 0.00 inch Above Grade Below Grade PIPE AND FITTINGS Piping 2 inches and Larger: Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe, Service Weight. ASTM-A-888, CISPI 301. Type L Copper Tubing. ASTM B8872. See Note 1. 2 inches And Larger: Hub And Spigot Cast Iron Soil Pipe, Extra Heavy. ASTM A-74 or Service Weight if Code Approved. Piping shall be Asphalt or Coal Tar Pitch Coated. Fittings 2 inches and larger Hubless Cast Iron Fittings, Service Weight. ASTM-A-888, CISPI 801. or Wrought Copper DWV Fittings. See Note 1 2 inches and Larger: Hub and Spigot Cast Iron Fittings, Extra Heavy or service weight ASTM A-74. Asphalt or Coal Tar Pitch Coated. DWV Pattern. Joints Hubless Cast Iron: Heavy Duty Stainless Steel Band Coupling with Neoprene Gasket. Bank Torque of 80 Foot-Pounds. 15 PSIG Pressure Rating. Husky SD 4000 or ClampAll Hi-Torq 80. See Note 2. Copper: 95/5 Solder. Neoprene Compression Gaskets Conforming to ASTM C-564. Cast Iron Sovent Fittings For sanitary waste systems only, Cast Iron Sovent system and fittings are acceptable. Cast Iron Sovent DWV system installed in accordance with approved construction plans and specifications in compliance with criteria set forth by “Cast Iron Sovent Design Manual #802” as published by Conine Manufacturing Co., Inc. The Cast Iron Sovent Aerator and De-aerator fittings shall be in compliance with ASME standard B16.45-1998. VALVES Available Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: ▪ Zurn ▪ JR Smith Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON PLUMBING PIPING 221110 - 17 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Pipe Class: D10 Service: Water Material: Cast Iron Service Limits Primary ANSI Class: 125 Coefficient of thermal expansion 5.9 x 10-6 inches per inch Corrosion Allowance 0.00 inch Above Grade Below Grade ▪ Watts BACKWATER VALVE – PIT Style Pit Style Backwater Valve: Duco Cast Iron Gravity with Bronze Backwater Valve and CI Secured Grate. Provide flashing clamp. Polished Bronze Face. J.R. Smith Co. 7000,, Zurn, Josam, Watts. Backwater Valve – In Line Cast Iron Gravity Flow Type, Bronze Mounted, Hub End. Exterior shall be Mastic Coated, Bolted or Extended Cover in Accordance with Installation Parameters. J.R. Smith Co. 7012 - 7022, Josam 67500, Zurn Industries Z-1095, Watts, BV-200. Backwater - Manual Shutoff Gate Duco Cast Iron Gravity Flow Type, Bronze Mounted with removable wheel handle. J.R. Smith Co. 7150, Josam, Zurn Industries, Watts. SPECIALTIES Base Riser Supports For all size Base of riser supports For above floor base of riser stack supports exiting through wall: Support all base or riser stacks from floor at the lowest point of the sanitary or storm riser. Use approved floor stanchion or base stand with approved saddle clamp. For underslabr base of riser stack supports: Place thrust block at base of long sweep or use pipe restraints to lock underground hubs at inlet and outlet of long sweep For horizontal to vertical base of riser supports at ceiling – base of riser stack: Support all base or riser stacks using mechanical strap supports across the long sweep or lateral fitting using restraints similar to Holdrite #117 series restraints Change of Direction Support For pipe sizes greater than 4 inch, provide restraints for all drain pipes at all changes in direction and at changes in diameter greater than two pipe sizes per coupling manufacturer reference NOTES: 21. CISPI 310 no-hub couplings will not be accepted as equal to manufacturers listed. 22. Copper tube and fittings shall not be used on urinal wastes. 23. Piping through electric rooms: sanitary, storm, and vent piping through electric rooms shall be sleeved through a sufficiently sized Schedule 10 galvanized sleeve piping with grooved style fittings and couplings. Extend dual wall piping to a distance of 1 foot beyond the exterior on each side of the electric room. Terminate with a closure method comprised of a caulked joint at each end with a closed 3/4 inch ball valve available to monitor the containment area of the piping system Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON PLUMBING PIPING 221110 - 18 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Pipe Class: D11 Service: Water Material: Galvanized Steel Service Limits Primary ANSI Class: 150 Coefficient of linear expansion 7.2 x 10-6 inches per inch Corrosion Allowance 0.00 inch 3 inches and Smaller 4 inches and larger PIPE AND FITTINGS Piping Schedule 40 Galvanized Steel. ASTM A53 Grade B, A106 Grade A or A120. Schedule 40 Galvanized Steel. ASTM A53 Grade B, A106 Grade A or A120. Fittings Screwed Cast Iron 125 PSI Galvanized. Grooved Malleable Iron 125 PSI Galvanized. Unions Screwed 150# Malleable Iron A105 Grade Ii, Galvanized. Use Flanges. Flanges 150# Raised Face, Screwed, A105 Galvanized. 150# Raised Face Galvanized Uniflange, ASTM A181, Grade I. 150# Flat Face for Cast Iron Valve. Gaskets 1/16 inch Red Rubber, Wire Inserted. 150 Raised Face And 125 Flat Face Gasket. VALVES Available Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Apollo, Watts, Stockham, Jenkins, DeZurik Gate Valve 2-1/2 inches and Smaller: 125# Class, All Bronze, Rising Stem, Solid Disc, Solder Ends Screwed Bonnet, Solid Disc, Screw Ends Milwaukee 148, Apollo 101T, Stockham B-114. 3 inches and Larger: 125# Class, Iron Body, Os&Y Bronze Mounted, Flanged Ends. Milwaukee F-2885-M, Apollo 611F, Stockham G-623, Watts 408 OSY-RW. Butterfly Valve Single-offset disc and shall be of the lugged or wafer body style. All valves shall be suitable for use with ASME class 125/150 flanges, or specify. Valves shall provide bi-directional bubble-tight shutoff at pressures to 250 psi (1720 kPa) with ductile iron or aluminum bronze discs or 200 psi (1380 kPa) with 316 stainless steel disc/shaft. Bodies shall be ductile iron. Lugged body valves shall provide bubble-tight shutoff up to the full valve rating on dead end service without the use of downstream flanges. Wafer valves shall have four flange bolt guides to center the body in the pipeline. Elastomer seats shall fully line and be permanently bonded to the valve body. Seats shall be NBR or EPDM. Seats shall have integral flange seals, so flange gaskets are not required. Lever operators for sizes 2-6” (50-150mm) shall provide automatic, positive latching in the open, closed and eight intermediate positions. Check Valve Horizontal Swing, Composition Disc, All Bronze, Threaded Ends, 200 PSI Wp. Milwaukee 509, Apollo 161T, Stockham B319. Outside Lever and Weight Swing Check, Ibbm for Installation at no more than 45 degrees from horizontal, Flanged End, 200 PSI Wp. Jenkins 477-L, Stockham G931-L&W, Apollo 910 FLW. SPECIALTY VALVES Sump Pump Ejector System Valve Set Alternative option for valve arrangement at the outlet of duplex sewage ejectors and/ or sump pump systems: Victaulic Series 318 Sump Ejector. System complete with Victaulic Series 317 AWWA check valve supplied with arm and spring configuration and Victaulic series 365 plug valve with lever handle. NOTES: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON PLUMBING PIPING 221110 - 19 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.3 ENCASEMENT FOR PIPING A. Standard: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A21.5. B. Form: Sheet or tube. C. Color: Black or natural. 2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined. B. Dielectric Unions: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. A. Y. McDonald Mfg. Co. b. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company. c. Wilkins. d. Zurn Industries, LLC. 2. Standard: ASSE 1079. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F for low pressure piping and 150 psig 250 psig for high systems where the operating pressure exceeds 150 psig. 4. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. C. Dielectric Flanges: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company. b. Wilkins. c. Zurn Industries, LLC. 2. Standard: ASSE 1079. 3. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly. 4. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F 150 psig 175 psig 300 psig match system working pressure. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON PLUMBING PIPING 221110 - 20 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 5. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. D. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Central Plastics Company. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 2. Non-conducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges. 3. Pressure Rating: 150 psig. 4. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. 5. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. 6. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers. E. Dielectric Nipples: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Elster Perfection Corporation. b. Grinnell Mechanical Products. c. Precision Plumbing Products. d. Victaulic Company. 2. Standard: IAPMO PS 66. 3. Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545. 4. Pressure Rating and Temperature: 300 psig at 225 deg F. 5. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved. 6. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPE SCHEDULE INDEX SERVICE CODE MAXIMUM SERVICE OPERATING LIMITS PIPE CLASS PIPE MATERIAL (psig) Temp (°F) Domestic Cold Water CW 100 250 A10 Type L Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON PLUMBING PIPING 221110 - 21 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SERVICE CODE MAXIMUM SERVICE OPERATING LIMITS PIPE CLASS PIPE MATERIAL (psig) Temp (°F) A20 Copper Domestic Hot Water HW 100 250 A10 A20 Type L Copper Domestic Hot Water Return HWR 100 250 A10 A20 Type L Copper Laboratory Cold Water LCW 100 250 A10 A20 Type L Copper Laboratory Hot Water LHW 100 250 A10 A20 Type L Copper Laboratory Hot Water Return LHWR 100 250 A10 A20 Type L Copper Gas (Natural) G 50 70 A11 C. Steel Indirect Waste (above ground) IW Gravity 80 A17 A10 G. Steel Copper Sanitary Force Main FM 50 70 D11 Galvanized Copper Sanitary Waste & Vent S, W or V Gravity 120 D10 Cast Iron Indirect Waste (below ground) IW Gravity 80 D10 Cast Iron GENERAL PIPE SPEC NOTES: 1. Each valve type shall be the product of a single manufacturer. Each system shall be provided with valves as required by code and shown on the drawings and shall be installed to facilitate operation, replacement and repair. 2. Provide access panels for concealed valves behind non-removable ceilings or walls. 3. Provide shut-off valves on supply piping to individual pieces of equipment. 4. Provide pipe dope, Teflon tape, wax rings, neoprene gaskets and other jointing compounds as required by best standard practice and only on service as recommended by manufacturer. 5. Apply putties and jointing compounds for plumbing fixtures and trim as recommended by manufacturers. 6. Valves on insulated piping systems shall be equipped with extended handles to accommodate insulation thickness. 7. All piping insulation and materials installed in return air plenums shall be plenum rated. Thermoplastic piping systems are hereby prohibited in return air plenums. 8. Piping routed through metal stud or wood stud partitions: provide centering such that piping does not come in contact with metal studs and also protection of piping systems routed horizontally through metal stud or wood stud partitions where the piping crosses a stud. Sleeve type protection shall be used to prevent damage to the lateral piping by the use of screws/nails/fasteners. Provide pre-manufactured products equal to puncture solution, or on site sleeves. 3.2 EARTHWORK A. Comply with requirements in Division 31 for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Piping Installation Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON PLUMBING PIPING 221110 - 22 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Install piping approximately as shown on the drawings and as directed during installation by the General Contractor or the Architect. 2. Piping shall be installed as straight and direct as possible forming right angles or parallel lines with building walls, other piping and neatly spaced. 3. The horizontal runs of piping, except where concealed in partitions, shall be installed as high as possible. B. Piping or other apparatus shall not be installed in such a manner so as to interfere with the full swing of the doors and access to other equipment. C. The arrangement, positions and connections of pipes, fixtures, drains, valves, and the like, indicated on the drawings shall be followed as closely as possible, but the right is reserved by the General Contractor or the Architect to change locations and elevations to accommodate the work, without additional compensation for such change. D. It shall be possible to drain the water from all sections of each cold, and hot water piping system. Pitch piping back to drain valves. E. Screwed piping of brass or chrome plated brass shall be made up with special care to avoid marring or damaging pipe and fitting exterior and interior surfaces. F. Screwed pipe and copper tubing shall be reamed smooth before installation. G. All exposed piping in connection with fixtures and where exposed on finished walls or to view, shall be chrome plated. Where chrome plated piping is installed, cut and thread pipe so that no unplated pipe threads are visible when the work is completed. H. Remove and replace with new materials, any copper or brass piping (chrome plated or unplated) and valves showing visible tool marks. I. Vertical risers shall be firmly supported by riser clamps, properly installed to relieve all weight from the fittings. J. The pipe and fittings shall be manufactured in the United States of America and in accordance with the Commercial Standards, American National Standards Institute and American Society of Testing Materials. 3.4 GRAVITY PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings. B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON PLUMBING PIPING 221110 - 23 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 E. Install piping free of sags and bends. F. Install piping to allow application of insulation. G. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed. H. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." I. Install steel piping according to applicable plumbing code. J. Install stainless-steel piping according to ASME A112.3.1 and applicable plumbing code. K. Install aboveground copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." L. Install aboveground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2665. M. Install Underground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321. N. Be responsible for checking each pipe for alignment, centerline elevation and invert grade for underground installations. O. At times when work is not in progress, open ends of pipe and fittings shall be securely closed so that no trench water, earth or other substance will enter the pipe or fittings. Pipe laid through rock excavation shall rest on a six-inch layer of well-compacted sand. P. The Sanitary (waste and vent), and storm drainage piping three inches and smaller in diameter shall pitch a minimum of 1/4 inch per foot, and piping four inches and larger in diameter shall pitch a minimum of 1/8 inch per foot. Q. The vent stacks shall be connected as shown and extended through the roof a minimum of 18 inches. Waste and vent pipes shall be concealed unless otherwise noted. R. Every fixture shall be separately trapped and the traps must be vented unless an approved battery or wet vented system is being installed. Floor drains shall be considered as a fixture. S. Vents shall be connected to the discharge of each trap in the sanitary system, thence carried individually to a point above the flood level of the fixture before connecting with any other vent pipes. Pitch the branch vents back to the fixtures. T. The vents passing through the roof shall be a minimum size of four inches in diameter. U. Cleanouts shall be provided in drainage piping at changes in directions, at foot of stacks or other required points so that all portions of the lines will be readily accessible for cleaning or rodding out. V. The maximum horizontal distance between cleanouts; in piping four inches in diameter and smaller shall not be more than 50 feet apart; in piping five inches in diameter and larger shall not be more than 100 feet apart. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON PLUMBING PIPING 221110 - 24 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 W. Traps on sanitary piping not integral with fixtures and in accessible locations shall be provided with a brass trap screw protected by the water seal, and will be regarded as a cleanout. X. Test tees with brass cleanout plugs shall be provided at the foot of all vertical waste and storm drainage stacks and at each floor. Wherever cleanouts on vertical lines occur concealed behind finished walls, they shall be extended to back of finished wall and a wall plate shall be provided. 3.5 SPECIALTY PIPING INSTALLATION A. Anchorage shall be provided to restrain drainage piping from axial movement. 1. For plastic pipe sizes greater than 6 inches, and other pipes sizes greater than 4 inches (102 mm), restraints shall be provided for drain pipes at all changes in direction and at all changes in diameter greater than two pipe sizes. Braces, blocks, rodding, backfill and other methods specified as suitable by the coupling manufacturer shall be utilized 2. Bases of stacks shall be supported by the building structure, virgin or compacted earth or other material suitable to support the weight of the piping. B. Expansion joint fittings in drainage pipe. 1. Expansion joint fittings shall be used only where necessary to provide for expansion and contraction of the pipes. The expansion joint fittings shall be of the typical material suitable for the use with the type of piping which such fittings are installed C. Install underground, ductile-iron, force-main piping according to AWWA C600. Install buried piping inside building between wall and floor penetrations and connection to sanitary sewer piping outside building with restrained joints. Anchor pipe to wall or floor. Install thrust-block supports at vertical and horizontal offsets. 1. In all areas with corrosive soil environments, install encasement on piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A 21.5. D. Install underground, copper, force-main tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." E. Plumbing Specialties: 1. Install backwater valves in sanitary waster gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for backwater valves specified in Division 22. 2. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary drainage force-main piping. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Division 22. 3. Install drains in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for drains specified in Division 22. F. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. G. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 22. H. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 22. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON PLUMBING PIPING 221110 - 25 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 I. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 22. 3.6 JOINT CONSTRUCTION (GRAVITY DRAIN STORM AND VENT SYSTEMS) A. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints. B. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with calked joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for lead-and-oakum calked joints. C. Join hubless, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-piping coupling joints. D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. E. Join stainless-steel pipe and fittings with gaskets according to ASME A112.3.1. F. Join copper tube and fittings with soldered joints according to ASTM B 828. Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux and ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder. G. Grooved Joints: Cut groove ends of pipe according to AWWA C606. Lubricate and install gasket over ends of pipes or pipe and fitting. Install coupling housing sections, over gasket, with keys seated in piping grooves. Install and tighten housing bolts. H. Flanged Joints: Align bolt holes. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Torque bolts in cross pattern. I. Plastic, Non-pressure-Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes. 3. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 Appendixes. 3.7 PRESSURE PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON PLUMBING PIPING 221110 - 26 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." C. Install ductile-iron piping under building slab with restrained joints according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41. D. Install underground copper tube and ductile iron pipe in PE encasement according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A21.5 when soil is of corrosive nature. E. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve inside the building at each domestic water-service entrance. Comply with requirements for pressure gages in Division 22 and with requirements for drain valves and strainers in this section for water piping specialties." F. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting. G. When water pressure exceeds 80 psig, install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. H. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's requirements. I. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. J. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. K. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space. L. Install piping to permit valve servicing. M. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated. N. Install piping free of sags and bends. O. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. P. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty. Q. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping for each plumbing pump and packaged booster pump. Comply with requirements for pressure gages in Division 22. R. Install thermostats in hot-water circulation piping. Comply with requirements for thermostats in Division 22. S. Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with requirements for thermometers in Division 22. T. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 22. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON PLUMBING PIPING 221110 - 27 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 U. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 22. V. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 22. 3.8 JOINT CONSTRUCTION (PRESSURE PIPING SYSTEMS) A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly. C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. D. Brazed Joints for Copper Tubing: Comply with CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" chapter. E. Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." F. Pressure-Sealed Joints for Copper Tubing: Join copper tube and pressure-seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer. G. Push-on Joints for Copper Tubing: Clean end of tube. Measure insertion depth with manufacturer's depth gage. Join copper tube and push-on-joint fittings by inserting tube to measured depth. H. Joint Construction for Grooved-End Copper Tubing: Make joints according to AWWA C606. Roll groove ends of tubes. Lubricate and install gasket over ends of tubes or tube and fitting. Install coupling housing sections over gasket with keys seated in tubing grooves. Install and tighten housing bolts. I. Joint Construction for Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Piping: Make joints according to AWWA C606. Cut round-bottom grooves in ends of pipe at gasket-seat dimension required for specified (flexible or rigid) joint. Lubricate and install gasket over ends of pipes or pipe and fitting. Install coupling housing sections over gasket with keys seated in piping grooves. Install and tighten housing bolts. J. Joint Construction for Grooved-End Steel Piping: Make joints according to AWWA C606. Roll groove ends of pipe as specified. Lubricate and install gasket over ends of pipes or pipe and fitting. Install coupling housing sections over gasket with keys seated in piping grooves. Install and tighten housing bolts. K. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON PLUMBING PIPING 221110 - 28 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 L. Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems. 3.9 NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS A. All piping shall be cut accurately to measurements obtained at the site and shall be installed without springing or forcing due to inaccurate measurements or improper hanger installation B. Piping shall be done by licensed gas fitter (as required by Code). C. Gas piping shall pitch to drain and shall have drip pockets at least 6 inches long with removable caps at low points. D. Gas Isolation Valves 1. Provide a gas cock valve at each branch run out from main or riser serving gas outlets. This shall include all branches from the gas main and further branches from gas submains. These requirements will be strictly enforced by the local plumbing inspector. This requirement shall take precedent over general arrangement drawings. Therefore the following is called for: 2. Provide a gas shutoff valve at each Tee on both outlets of the Tee in a run of piping 3. Provide a gas shutoff valve at each piece of equipment 4. Gas valves or cocks shall not be concealed and shall be readily accessible for inspection and repair 5. Every branch line from a main shall be furnished with a branch valve (no exceptions) and shall be taken off the top of main using such fittings as may be required by structural obstructions or other installation conditions. All service pipes, fittings, and valves shall be kept at sufficient distance from other work to permit not less than 1 inch between finished coverings on other service piping. E. Provide union connection between shut-off cock and equipment to permit disconnection of equipment F. Piping shall be securely fastened, separately hung and shall not support any other weight or piping. Piping dropping in concrete block walls shall be factory wrapped for corrosion protection. G. Welded piping shall conform to the latest requirements of the State of Connecticutt Fuel Gas Code. H. All piping shall be supported independently and securely fastened to the building structure with appropriate anchors and pipe hangers. In general, all lines shall be installed above ceilings in finished spaces. I. All piping shall be cut true and threaded or welded. Cap all open ends of piping to prevent the entrance of debris when work on this system is complete or the work day has ended. J. Provide individual vents from regulators, pressure switches and reliefs on factory packaged equipment gas trains at all equipment located on this system. It is this contractor's responsibility to extend all vents to atmosphere terminal at a safe location in conjunction with the fuel gas code. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON PLUMBING PIPING 221110 - 29 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 K. Gas piping and safety devices shall meet requirements of NFPA No. 54 and shall be subject to inspection and approval of State Gas Regulatory Board. L. Special Note: Provide aluminum check valves on all gas pipes that enter rooms where compressed air is installed or when both compressed air and gas piping connect to the same piece of equipment. This is required in all areas where gas and air are present. M. All pipes shall be run parallel and graded evenly to low points. A serviceable drip leg of at least six inches in length shall be provided at each low point, at every connection to a piece of equipment, and at the base of each riser. N. All exterior gas piping, valves and fittings shall be protected and covered with Tapecoat H35 Gray corrosion protection tape with integral primer and adhesive. All fittings and joints shall be wrapped with similar protective tape. O. For gas installations of over 5,000,000 (five million) BTU/HR, submit a plan of the proposed piping system and equipment for approval to the local Gas Inspector. A letter from the servicing gas supplier indicating that the fuel supply is available shall accompany the submission. Gas utilization equipment over 12,500,000 BTU/HR, water tube boilers having outputs of 10,000 pounds of steam per hour or more, gas booster installations, cogeneration systems, and kilns, shall be submitted to and approved by the Board of State Examiners of Plumbers and Gas Fitters. P. Provide valved pressure gauge assemblies at each main gas service entrance, at each water heater, boiler, emergency or standby generator, incinerators, HVAC rooftop units and all other major pieces of equipment utilizing gas. Each pressure gauge assembly shall be individually valved, include a snubber and shall have a dial range that would locate the system pressure as close to the approximate mid-point on the dial range as possible. Assembly shall be similar to TRERICE Model 760B, 2-1/2 inch diameter gauge, 735-2 valve and 872-1 snubber. Q. Piping system shall be purged with 100 psi compressed air to remove dirt and debris. R. Pressure test gas piping system with air, carbon dioxide or nitrogen pressure test at not less than 10 psi gage for a period of 24 hours with no decrease in pressure. For welded piping and for piping carrying gas at pressures exceeding 14-inches of water column pressure, the test pressure shall be at least 60 psig for a period of 24 hours with no decrease in pressure. If a decrease in pressure is detected, soap or bubble test joints for leaks, repair or replace as required, and retest. S. Gas piping connections to all equipment shall include a gas shutoff valve, drip leg, union fitting and pressure gauge as well as a swing joint consisting of at least two 90 degree elbows at all HVAC equipment 3.10 GAS SERVICE, METER, VENTS AND PIPING A. Gas meter and piping to meter from gas main will be provided by Gas Company. Pay charges associated with Gas Company installation. Gas piping provided under this Section (not by gas company), shall begin at building side of gas meter. B. Provide pressure reducing valve between meter and building piping, as required by Gas Company, piped and vented to outside of building. C. Provide full size isolation valve at the gas meter outlet. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON PLUMBING PIPING 221110 - 30 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. Provide an aluminum or plastic valve tag stating the gas pressure downstream of the gas meter. 3.11 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping. B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping: 1. Fittings for NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling. 2. Fittings for NPS 2 and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling. C. Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water Piping NPS 2 and Smaller: per manufacturers recommendations 3.12 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing. B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings couplings or nipples nipples unions. C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges flange kits nipples. D. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits. 3.13 EXAMINATION OF VALVES A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling. B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations. C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness. D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage. E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves. 3.14 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON PLUMBING PIPING 221110 - 31 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. E. Install chainwheels on operators for butterfly and gate valves NPS 4 and larger and more than 96 inches above floor. Extend chains to 60 inches above finished floor. F. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows: 1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level. 2. Center-Guided and Plate-Type Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between flanges. 3. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb. G. Install valve tags. Comply with requirements in Division 22 for valve tags and schedules. 3.15 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices in Division 22. B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger, support products, and installation in Division 22. 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: 3. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. 4. Longer than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. 5. Longer than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls. 6. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. 7. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch. E. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 6 and NPS 8: 60 inches with 3/4-inch rod. 5. NPS 10 and NPS 12: 60 inches with 7/8-inch rod. 6. Spacing for 10-foot lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited to 60 inches. F. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet. G. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON PLUMBING PIPING 221110 - 32 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 5. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod. 6. NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod. 7. NPS 8: 10 feet with 3/4-inch rod. H. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet. I. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: 84 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 1-1/2: 108 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 2: 10 feet with 3/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2: 11 feet with 1/2-inch rod. 5. NPS 3 and NPS 3-1/2: 12 feet with 1/2-inch rod. 6. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 12 feet with 5/8-inch rod. 7. NPS 6: 12 feet with 3/4-inch rod. 8. NPS 8 to NPS 12: 12 feet with 7/8-inch rod. J. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet. K. Install hangers for stainless-steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: 84 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 1-1/2: 108 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 2: 10 feet with 3/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2: 11 feet with 1/2-inch rod. 5. NPS 3 and NPS 3-1/2: 12 feet with 1/2-inch rod. 6. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 12 feet with 5/8-inch rod. 7. NPS 6: 12 feet with 3/4-inch rod. 8. NPS 8 to NPS 12: 12 feet with 7/8-inch rod. L. Install supports for vertical stainless-steel piping every 15 feet. M. Install vinyl-coated hangers for CPVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1 and Smaller: 36 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 4. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 48 inches with 5/8-inch rod. 5. NPS 6: 48 inches with 3/4-inch rod. 6. NPS 8: 48 inches with 7/8-inch rod. N. Install supports for vertical CPVC piping every 60 inches for NPS 1 and smaller, and every 72 inches for NPS 1-1/4 and larger. O. Install vinyl-coated hangers for PEX piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1 and Smaller: 32 inches with 3/8-inch rod. P. Install hangers for vertical PEX piping every 48 inches. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON PLUMBING PIPING 221110 - 33 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Q. Install vinyl-coated hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 2 and Smaller: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 48 inches with 5/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 6: 48 inches with 3/4-inch rod. 5. NPS 8: 48 inches with 7/8-inch rod. R. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches. S. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.16 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and maintenance. C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. D. Connect water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following: 1. Domestic Water Booster Pumps: Cold-water suction and discharge piping. 2. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections. 3. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than that required by plumbing code. 4. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3.17 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and installation in Division 22. B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure. 3.18 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Piping Inspections: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON PLUMBING PIPING 221110 - 34 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. b. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction: 1) Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures. 2) Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensure compliance with requirements. 2. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. 3. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Piping Tests: a. Fill water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water. b. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. c. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. d. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. e. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. f. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required. B. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.19 TESTING AND ADJUSTING - GENERAL A. Scope 1. Test and adjust plumbing systems as specified and as required by authorities that have jurisdiction. Perform tests recommended by manufacturers of materials and equipment. This requirement may be waived by Architect. 2. Testing, balancing, and adjusting shall in no way relieve guarantee requirements. 3. Furnish instruments, equipment, material, and labor necessary to conduct tests. 4. All systems shall be thoroughly adjusted for perfect intended operation. All mechanical equipment shall be adjusted for flow, temperature, etc. of fluid. The entire hot water circulation system shall be thoroughly balanced so hot water draw from fixtures shall be as quickly available as possible. Pumps, relief valves and pressure reducing valves shall be adjusted as required by the Engineer. Submit in writing to the Engineer upon completion of this work that it is completed and ready for use. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON PLUMBING PIPING 221110 - 35 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Before date of acceptance, furnish Architect with certificates of testing and inspection indicating approval of authorities having jurisdiction and conformance with requirements of Contract Documents. C. General 1. Submit proposed test procedures, recording forms, and test equipment for review before testing. 2. Notify Architect and authorities involved at least 48 hours before testing and inspection. 3. Do not paint, cover or conceal work before testing, inspecting and obtaining approval; this includes backfilling and application of insulation. 4. Costs of repairs and restoration of work of other trades and of existing building surfaces or material damaged during cleaning or testing shall be borne by trade performing cleaning or testing. D. No tests shall be started until systems have been cleaned as described under Cleaning paragraph. Provide temporary piping and connections for testing, flushing, or draining systems to be tested. 1. Repair or replace leaks, damage and defects that result from tests to like-new condition. Remove and replace defective materials with acceptable materials. 2. Piping and joints shall be made tight without caulking. Continue tests until systems operate without adjustments and repair to equipment or piping. 3. Provide testing instruments, force pumps, gauges, equipment and labor necessary to conduct tests. Instruments used for testing and balancing shall have been calibrated within six months before balancing. Instrument calibration shall be certified. 4. Submit six copies of complete testing and balancing report to Architect for review. E. Final test shall be made after vertical and horizontal pipes and roughing-in have been run and before sewer or fixture connection is made. 1. After soils, wastes, and storm lines, etc. have been installed, outlets shall be temporarily plugged up. 2. Test piping and check for leakage. 3. Retesting after leaks are repaired shall be at no additional cost. F. Pressurized Piping Systems 1. Leak tests shall be conducted in accordance with ANSI applicable codes and as specified herein. 2. Test piping of various systems before covered or furred in. 3. Tests shall be witnessed by Architect and pronounced satisfactory before pressure is removed or any water drained off. 4. Equipment shall be valved off or removed during test if equipment pressure rating is less than test pressure. 5. Retest systems after leaks are repaired within Contract Price. G. Potable Water System Test 1. Certification of the potable water system integrity shall be required where separate systems of potable and non-potable water are provided to supply plumbing fixtures. 2. Fill potable water system to capacity with clean clear water. Introduce water at top of piping system (hot and cold). During filling, introduce green food coloring dye into piping system. A floor-by-floor survey shall be conducted. Operate each outlet (hot and cold) connected to potable water system until coloring has been observed. A method of Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON PLUMBING PIPING 221110 - 36 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 maintaining the level of water and coloring shall be employed in order to make-up the drawn off amounts. A survey sheet shall indicate each floor and the room number sequentially. 3. This survey is required to be performed after all pressure testing and flushing of the piping system but before sterilization, further it is required that all fixtures connected to the potable water system be installed prior to the test. H. Examine Part 2 for supplemental testing requirements. 3.20 TESTING: PIPING SYSTEMS A. General 1. Piping systems shall be subjected to testing water or air as noted and shall hold tight at the pressure head stated for the time interval required without adding air or water. While any system is being tested, required head or pressure shall be maintained until joints are inspected. 2. Tests shall be witnessed by inspector having jurisdiction and the Architect with 48-hour notice given these authorities. 3. Equipment, material and labor required for testing of various systems or part thereof shall be provided by Plumbing Contractor. B. Sanitary, Other Waste, Vent and Roof Water Conductor Systems 1. Water test shall be applied to drainage systems either in their entirety or in sections as required, after rough piping has been installed. 2. If applied to entire system, openings in piping system shall be tightly closed, except the highest opening, and system filled with water to point of overflow. 3. If system is tested in sections, each opening shall be tightly closed except highest opening in the section under test, and each section shall be filled with water but no section shall be tested with less than a 10 foot head of water. 4. In testing successive sections, at least upper 10 feet of next preceding section shall be tested so that no joint of piping in building, except the uppermost 10 feet of the system shall be submitted to a test of less than a 10 foot head of water. 5. Water shall be kept in system for at least 30 minutes before inspection starts; the system shall then be made tight at all points. 6. Points of drainage systems tested with air instead of water shall be tested by attaching an air compressor testing apparatus to suitable opening and, after closing all other inlets or outlets, forcing air into systems until a uniform gauge pressure of 5 psi or sufficient pressure to balance a column of mercury 10 inches high. Pressure shall be held without introduction of additional air for a period of at least 15 minutes. C. Water Piping Systems 1. Upon completion of water supply systems or section thereof, as required, system shall be tested and proved tight under 1.5 times the operating system pressure and a minimum of 150 psi. Gauge shall be located on lowest new floor and pressure shall hold for a period of one hour without introducing additional water. Water used for testing shall be from a potable source of supply. 2. Filtered water piping system shall be tested with filtered or distilled water to a pressure of 100 psi for one hour. D. Natural Gas Piping Systems Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON PLUMBING PIPING 221110 - 37 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Upon completion of gas piping system or section thereof, as required, test by attaching an air compressor testing apparatus to any suitable opening and, after closing all other inlets or outlets, force air into the system until a uniform pressure of at least 10 inches mercury or 3 lb. gauge for a period of no less than 60 minutes for each 500 cubic feet of pipe volume without showing any drop in pressure. Pressure shall be measured with a mercury manometer, slope gauge, or an equivalent device calibrated to read in increments of no greater than 1/10 lbs. 2. Test all elevated pressure gas piping at 15 psi for 24 hours. Pressure shall be measured with a mercury manometer, slope gauge, or an equivalent device calibrated to read in increments of no greater than 1/10 lbs. E. Testing Summary System Test Medium Test Pressure Test Duration Drainage and Vent (All Systems) Water 10 feet 30 minutes Water (All Systems) Water 150 psig min or 1.5 operating pressure 1 hour Natural Gas (High Pressure) Air 15 psig min or 1.5 operating pressure 24 hours Natural Gas (Low Pressure) Air 10 inch mercury minimum for each 500 cubic feet of pipe volume 1 hour F. Defective Work: If inspection or tests show defects, such defective work or material shall be replaced and inspection and tests shall be repeated. Repairs to piping shall be made with new material. No caulking of screwed joints or holes shall be acceptable. G. Additional Tests 1. Provide additional tests such as smoke pressure tests as required by regulations or as directed by authorities making the inspection. 2. Provide for any repeated test as directed by the Architect, to make all systems tight as required. 3. Visual inspections of joints and valves shall be made as directed by the Architect. 3.21 ADJUSTING A. Perform the following adjustments before operation: 1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 3. Open throttling valves to proper setting. 4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow. 5. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide hot-water flow in each branch. 6. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated. 7. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during installation. 8. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs. 9. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for application where used and are clean and ready for use. 10. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON PLUMBING PIPING 221110 - 38 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.22 BALANCING OF HOT WATER SYSTEMS A. Building Distribution System 1. Al circuits and sub circuits shall be flow and temperature balanced such that hot water positive flow is achieved in each branch circuit of the building hot water systems 2. See drawing detail sheets and specification section pipe table A10 for flow and balancing valve spec options. The specified products indicate either integral flow or flow/temperature balancing devices, assure the installed devices meet these specifications 3. Indicate on a riser diagram the type of balancing device use, method of calibration and proposed flow in each branch circuit of the hot water piping network for each hot water system B. Building Main Hot Water Distribution Pumps 1. Balance flows to the main Thermostatic Hot Water Mixing Valves according to manufacturer’s instructions 2. Provide plastic tags on each circuit indicating the flow and balancing valve position to the Mixing valves and then to the water heaters C. Submissions 1. Submit a report indicating the actual flow and temperature in each circuit described in item C above. The report shall designate the following: 2. Time to achieve hot water at the remote hot water faucet in the circuit 3. Hot water temperature achieved 4. Setting on circuit setter 5. For the circuits at the outlets of hot water circulation pumps, indicate the following: 6. The actual flow and temperature into Temperature Mixing Valve 7. The actual flow and temperature back to the heaters and/or storage tanks 3.23 CLEANING A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows: 1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below: 3. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. 4. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following: a. Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours. b. Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours. 5. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time. 6. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. 7. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON PLUMBING PIPING 221110 - 39 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Clean non-potable domestic water piping as follows: 1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using. 2. Use purging procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or; if methods are not prescribed, follow procedures described below: 3. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. 4. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. C. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of watersample approvals from authorities having jurisdiction. D. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\221110_COMMON PLUMBING PIPING.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 221119 - WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Vacuum breakers. 2. Backflow preventers. 3. Water pressure-reducing valves. 4. Central digital thermostatic water mixing valves 5. Wall hydrants. 6. Drain valves. 7. Water-hammer arresters. 8. Air vents. 9. Trap-seal primer valves. 10. Trap-seal primer systems. 11. Flexible connectors. B. All pipe, fittings, and valves used in this distribution system and installed after January 4, 2014 must comply with the new Federal Mandate known as the “Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water Act-2014”. Any product pipe, fittings or valve installed after the enactment date that does not comply, shall be removed and changed by this contractor at Contractor expense to comply with the Federal Law 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For domestic water piping specialties. 1. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality-control reports. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SPECIALTIES A. All pipe, fittings, and valves used in this distribution system and installed after January 4, 2014 must comply with the new Federal Mandate known as the “Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water Act-2014”. Therefore, after the enactment date of 1/4/14, all products installed must comply. Any product pipe, fittings, valve, or specialty item installed after the enactment date that does not comply, shall be removed and changed by this contractor at his/her own expense to comply with the Federal Law B. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 61 Annex G and NSF 14. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Working Pressure for Water Piping Specialties: 150 psig unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 VACUUM BREAKERS A. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Ames Co. b. Cash Acme. c. Conbraco Industries, Inc. d. FEBCO. e. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company. f. Zurn Industries, LLC. 2. Standard: ASSE 1001. 3. Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3, as required to match connected piping. 4. Body: Bronze. 5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded. 6. Finish: Rough bronze. 7. Basis of Design for Cold Water: Watts LF288A, Cash Acme V101. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 8. Basis of Design for Hot Water: Cash Acme V101. B. Pressure Vacuum Breakers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Ames Co. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. FEBCO. d. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company. e. Zurn Industries, LLC. 2. Standard: ASSE 1020. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 4. Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum, through middle third of flow range. 5. Accessories: a. Valves: Ball type, on inlet 6. Basis of Design Cold Water: Watts series LF800M4QT 7. Basis of Design Hot Water: Cash Acme PVB 8. Basis of Design Freeze Proof Cold Water: Watts series 800M4FR C. Laboratory-Faucet Vacuum Breakers : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company. c. Woodford Manufacturing Company. d. Zurn Industries, LLC. 2. Standard: ASSE 1035. 3. Size: NPS 1/4 or NPS 3/8 matching faucet size. 4. Body: Bronze. 5. End Connections: Threaded. 6. Finish: Chrome plated. 7. Basis of Design: Zurn model 730 and 735, Watts LFNLF-9 D. Spill-Resistant Vacuum Breakers : Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company. c. Zurn Industries, LLC. 2. Standard: ASSE 1056. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 4. Accessories: a. Valves: Ball type, on inlet and outlet. 5. Basis of Design: Zurn Model 460, Watts LF008PCQT 2.4 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Ames Co. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. FEBCO. d. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company. e. Zurn Industries, LLC. 2. Standard: ASSE 1013. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 4. Pressure Loss: 8 PSIG maximum, through middle third of flow range. 5. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; steel with interior lining that complies with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved or stainless steel for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 6. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged or mechanical for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 7. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight-through flow. 8. Accessories: a. Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet. b. Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Outside-screw and yoke-gate type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet. c. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection. 9. Basis of Design: Watts 957, Watts 009-QT-S 10. Basis of Design: Special Flow Patterns: Febco 825YA, Febco 880V Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.5 HOSE BIBBS A. Hose Bibbs : 1. Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets. 2. Body Material: Bronze. 3. Seat: Bronze, replaceable. 4. Supply Connections: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 threaded or solder-joint inlet. 5. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7. 6. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 7. Vacuum Breaker: Integral non-removable, drainable, hose-connection vacuum breaker complying with ASSE 1011. 8. Finish for Mechanical Rooms: Bronze. a. Basis of Design: Watts HB-1 3/4 inch 9. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated. a. Basis of Design: Chicago 952-CP 10. Finish for Service Areas: Chrome or nickel plated. a. Basis of Design: Chicago 998-633RCF 11. Finish for Finished Rooms, including toilet rooms: Chrome or nickel plated. a. Basis of Design: Chicago 952-CP, handle to be turned over to owner 12. Operation for Finished Rooms: key handle, furnish a key for each device installed 13. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb. 14. Include integral wall flange with each chrome- or nickel-plated hose bibb. 2.6 DRAIN VALVES A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves: 1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves. 2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP. 3. Size: NPS 3/4. 4. Body: Copper alloy. 5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel. 8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint. 9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 and cap with brass chain. B. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: 1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for ball valves or MSS SP-80 for gate valves. 2. Pressure Rating: 200-psig minimum CWP or Class 125. 3. Size: NPS 3/4. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 4. Body: Copper alloy or ASTM B 62 bronze. 5. Drain: NPS 1/8 side outlet with cap. 2.7 WATER-HAMMER ARRESTERS A. Water-Hammer Arresters: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. AMTROL, Inc. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Precision Plumbing Products. d. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. e. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. f. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company. g. Zurn Industries, LLC. 2. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201. 3. Type: Metal bellows or Copper tube with piston. 4. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F, or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F. 2.8 AIR VENTS A. Bolted-Construction Automatic Air Vents: 1. Body: Bronze. 2. Pressure Rating and Temperature: 125-psig minimum pressure rating at 140 deg F. 3. Float: Replaceable, corrosion-resistant metal. 4. Mechanism and Seat: Stainless steel. 5. Inlet and Vent Outlet End Connections: Threaded. B. Welded-Construction Automatic Air Vents : 1. Body: Stainless steel. 2. Pressure Rating: 150-psig minimum pressure rating. 3. Float: Replaceable, corrosion-resistant metal. 4. Mechanism and Seat: Stainless steel. 5. Size: NPS 3/8 minimum inlet. 6. Inlet and Vent Outlet End Connections: Threaded. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Flexicraft Industries. 2. Metraflex Company (The). 3. Universal Metal Hose. B. Bronze-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wire-braid covering and ends brazed to inner tubing. 1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 250 psig. 2. End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded copper pipe or plain-end copper tube. 3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged copper alloy. C. Stainless-Steel-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-stainless-steel tubing with stainlesssteel wire-braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing. 1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 250 psig. 2. End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded steel-pipe nipple. 3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged steel nipple. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system. 2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe-to-floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are unacceptable for this application. 3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers. B. All connections to fixtures and outlets from the water supply system shall have vacuum breakers installed before the end connection. C. Install temperature-actuated, water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and with shutoff valve on outlet. 1. Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified. D. Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each control valve water pressure-reducing valve solenoid valve and pump. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 E. Install water-hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201. F. Install air vents at high points of water piping. Install drain piping and discharge onto floor drain. G. Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow. H. Install drainage-type, trap-seal primer valves as lavatory trap with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. I. Install trap-seal primer systems with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust system for proper flow. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements for ground equipment in Division 26. B. Fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking is specified in Division 26 for electrical connections. 3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each of the following: 1. Pressure vacuum breakers. 2. Intermediate atmospheric-vent backflow preventers. 3. Reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventers. 4. Primary, thermostatic, water mixing valves. 5. Supply-type, trap-seal primer valves. 6. Trap-seal primer systems. B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 22. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Test each pressure vacuum breaker reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer double-check, backflow-prevention assembly and double-check, detector-assembly backflow preventer Insert type according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference standard. B. Water piping specialties will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves. B. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves. C. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated, water mixing valves. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\221119_WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 WATER PUMPS 221123 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 221123 - WATER PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Packaged In-line, wet rotor centrifugal pumps. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include materials of construction, rated capacities, certified performance curves with operating points plotted on curves, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Prerequisite EA 2: Documentation indicating that units comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, without amendments, Section 7 - "Service Water Heating." 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For water pumps to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage. B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 WATER PUMPS 221123 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions for handling. 1.8 COORDINATION 1.9 WARRANTY A. General: periods are stipulated here for this specification section. Generally manufacturers standard warranty applies, however, longer warranty periods, if required, are stipulated in part 2 where each product is specified. The warranty periods stipulated in part 2 take priority over standard manufacturer’s warranty periods specified in part 1. B. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard warranty – submit a form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within manufacturers standard specified warranty period. Manufacturers standard warranty must include minimum durations below C. Minimum Durations and Special Warrantees: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Structural failures including shell. 2. Warranty period shall begin on the date of project substantial completion stipulated by the Architect and/or the Construction Manager PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PACKAGED IN-LINE, WET ROTOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Advanced Mechanical Technologies. 2. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. 3. Bell & Gossett; a Xylem brand. 4. Grundfos Pumps Corp. 5. TACO Incorporated. 6. WILO USA LLC - WILO Canada Inc. ITEM IN LINE VARIABLE SPEED WET ROTOR PUMP PACKAGE Tag # LHWR-CP-1 Description Variable speed circulator pumps installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and plans. Pump shall be of the in-line wet rotor design. The pump, motor, and variable speed drive shall be an integral product designed and built by the same manufacturer. Number of Pumps 1 Pumps The Pumps shall be acceptable for use with potable water and shall be certified and listed by a Nationally Recognized Test Laboratory (NRTL). For U.S. and Canada comply with UL778,UL 60730-1ACAN/CSA No. 108 All wetted parts - : NSF approved for use with potable water Operation and Sequence Minimum modes of operation: Flowlimit - It shall be possible for the user to select a maximum flow that the pump shall not exceed in order to eliminate the need for additional throttling valves. The pump shall operate per Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 WATER PUMPS 221123 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 ITEM IN LINE VARIABLE SPEED WET ROTOR PUMP PACKAGE selected control mode but will limit speed to not exceed the user specified flow limit Constant Temperature – the pump shall adjust speed to maintain a constant media temperature in the flow pipe in which the pump is installed. Alternating Operation – Two single head pumps or two heads of a dual head pump shall communicate to one another. In alternating operation, only one pump shall operate at a time. The operation shall alternate based on time or energy to ensure even run time of both pumps. If a pump stops due to fault the other pump shall take over automatically. Un-occupied Period Timer Off Function: The controller shall have the capability to shut down pump/s for a chosen period based on time of day. The pumps shall be capable to accept an input signal from the BMS for same. Motors/Drives Each motor shall be of the integrated Variable Speed Drive design consisting of a motor and a Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) built and tested as one unit by the same manufacturer. The motor shall be cooled by the pumped fluid The power electronics shall be cooled to the ambient air. The Motor shall be self-ventilating. Minimum insulation class for the motor shall be Class F. Controller Interface The pump/s shall have an integrated operator interface consisting of Minimum 2.4” (measured diagonally) color TFT display; push buttons for navigation of menu and isolated from the main supply by reinforced insulation according to UL60730; LEDs to signal pump status The pump/s shall have a sensor integrated directly into the pump housing with 4 lines consisting of Ground, Supply, and two signals for Differential Pressure and Media Temperature. The pump module shall have one analog input configurable for either 4-20mA or 0-10VDC input signal configurable for external Temperature or Pressure sensor, or Setpoint influence. Sensor input shall have three wires for Ground, Supply, and Signal. The Supply for external analog input shall be 24V DC +/-10% at 22mA reference to Ground. The supply must be able to withstand a permanent short circuit. Connection can be made to a screw terminal capable of wire sizes up to AWG16. The pump shall have 3 Digital Inputs: Start/Stop –Used to start or stop the pump. Minimum – used to force the pump to run at minimum load (curve). Maximum - used to force the pump to run at maximum load (curve). . The pump module shall have two Output Relays. Each relay shall be configurable for Alarm, Reading, or Operating indication. Each relay must have three screw terminals see above. Output relays contacts shall be rated for maximum 250VAC at 2A and minimum 5VDC at 20mA. Each must have galvanic isolation from the internal supply by reinforced insulation according to UL6073, .and shall be capable of accepting an optional add-on module for integration into Building Management Systems: LonWorks; Bacnet; Modbus; Profibus The pump module shall have connectivity for two pumps to communicate with one another. Factory Test The pumps shall be factory performance and hydrostatic tested as a complete unit prior to shipment. The testing shall be done in accordance with ISO 9906 Annex A. No test certificate is required Start-up & Warranty See Part 1 Mounting Arrangement Support pump package with B-Line support structure from wall or floor. Pump weights shall not bear on piping. The pump shaft shall be installed horizontally per manufacturer’s recommendations. The terminal box shall be located as per manufacturer’s recommendations. The system shall be vented out from a higher location form the pump. The required inlet pressure by the pump shall be available at the pump inlet. Capacity and Duty See Plumbing Schedule Sheet Electrical Supply 120 VAC, 1 phase , 60 Hz Basis of Design for Equivalency Grunfos Pump Series Magna 3 hot water recirculation pump system Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 WATER PUMPS 221123 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in of -water-piping system to verify actual locations of connections before pump installation. 3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION A. Comply with HI 1.4. B. Install in-line, seal-less centrifugal pumps with shaft horizontal unless otherwise indicated. C. Install horizontally mounted, in-line, separately coupled and close-coupled centrifugal pumps with shaft(s) horizontal. D. Install vertically mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps with shaft vertical. E. Pump Mounting: Install vertically mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps with castiron base mounted on concrete base using elastomeric mounts OR restrained spring isolators. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Division 03. 1. Minimum Deflection: 1/4 inch . 2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. 3. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor. 4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. F. Install continuous-thread hanger rods and spring hangers with vertical-limit stop of size required to support pump weight. 1. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Division 22. Fabricate brackets or supports as required. 2. Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Division 22. G. Install pressure switches in water supply piping. H. Install thermostats in hot-water return piping. I. Install timers. J. Install time-delay relays in piping between water heaters and hot-water storage tanks. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Piping Sections of this specification. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to pumps to allow service and maintenance. C. Connect water piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge piping equal to or greater than size of pump nozzles. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 WATER PUMPS 221123 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Install flexible connectors adjacent to pumps in suction and discharge piping of the following pumps: a. Horizontally mounted, in-line, separately coupled centrifugal pumps. b. Horizontally mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps. c. Vertically mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps. d. Comply with requirements for flexible connectors specified in Division 22. D. Install shutoff valve and strainer on suction side of each pump, and check, shutoff, and throttling valves on discharge side of each pump. Install valves same size as connected piping. Comply with requirements for valves specified in Division 22 and comply with requirements for strainers specified in Division 22. 1. Install pressure gage and snubber at suction of each pump and pressure gage and snubber at discharge of each pump. Install at integral pressure-gage tappings where provided or install pressure-gage connectors in suction and discharge piping around pumps. Comply with requirements for pressure gages and snubbers specified in Division 22. E. Connect pressure switches, thermostats, time-delay relays, and timers to pumps that they control. F. Interlock pump between water heater and hot-water storage tank with water heater burner and time-delay relay. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 22 for identification of pumps. 3.5 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Check piping connections for tightness. 3. Clean strainers on suction piping. 4. Set pressure switches, thermostats, timers, and time-delay relays for automatic starting and stopping operation of pumps. 5. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting: a. Verify bearing lubrication. b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected. c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction. 6. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for operation. 7. Start motor. 8. Open discharge valve slowly. 9. Adjust temperature settings on thermostats. 10. Adjust timer settings. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 WATER PUMPS 221123 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Adjust water pumps to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. B. Adjust initial temperature set points. C. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\221123_WATER PUMPS.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cleanouts. 2. Floor drains. 3. Through-penetration firestop assemblies. 4. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties. 5. Flashing materials. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 33 for storm draining piping and piping specialties outside the building. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic. B. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic. C. HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic. D. PE: Polyethylene plastic. E. PP: Polypropylene plastic. F. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CLEANOUTS A. Exposed Metal Cleanouts : 1. ASME A112.36.2M, Cast-Iron Cleanouts: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1) Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. 2) Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company. 3) Zurn Industries, LLC. 2. ASME A112.3.1, Stainless-Steel Cleanouts: a. Use Stainless Steel cleanouts for all stainless piping systems installed. b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1) Blucher Corp. 2) Josam Company. 3) JR Smith. 4) Zurn. 3. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron ASME A112.3.1 for stainless steel for cleanout test tee. 4. Size: Same as connected drainage piping 5. Body Material: as required to match connected piping. 6. Closure: Countersunk or raised-head, brass plug. 7. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. 8. Closure: Stainless-steel plug with seal. B. Metal Floor Cleanouts : 1. ASME A112.36.2M, Cast-Iron Cleanouts: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1) Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. 2) Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. 3) Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company. 4) Zurn Industries, LLC. 2. ASME A112.36.2M, Stainless-Steel Cleanouts: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1) Blucher Corp. 2) Josam Company. 3) Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. 4) Zurn Industries, LLC. 3. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for heavy-duty, adjustable housing cleanout Size: Same as connected branch. 4. Type: Threaded, adjustable housing. 5. Body or Ferrule: Stainless steel. 6. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket Brass plug with tapered threads. 7. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads set-screws or other device. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze, copper alloy for all finished areas Painted Caste Iron or Rough bronze for Utility areas and Stainless steel in areas subject to corrosion Frame and Cover Shape: Square . 8. Top Loading Classification: Extra Heavy Heavy Duty. 9. Riser: ASTM A 74, Extra-Heavy Service class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to clean out. 10. Standard: ASME A112.3.1. 11. Size: Same as connected branch. 12. Housing: Stainless steel. 13. Closure: Stainless steel with seal. 14. Riser: Stainless-steel drainage pipe fitting to clean out. C. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. MIFAB, Inc. b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. c. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company. d. Zurn Industries, LLC. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access. 3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping. 4. Body: as required to match connected piping. 5. Closure: Countersunk or raised-head, drilled-and-threaded brass plug. 6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. 7. Wall Access: Square, nickel-bronze wall-installation frame and cover. D. Plastic Floor Cleanouts : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. IPS Corporation. b. Plastic Oddities. c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. d. Zurn Industries, LLC. 2. Size: Same as connected branch. 3. Body: PVC. 4. Closure Plug: PVC. 5. Riser: Drainage pipe fitting and riser to clean out of same material as drainage piping. 2.2 FLOOR DRAINS A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains : SEE DRAWING SCHEDULE SHEET 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. MIFAB, Inc. b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. c. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company. d. Zurn Industries, LLC. B. Stainless-Steel Floor Drains : SEE DRAWING SCHEDULE SHEET 1. ASME A112.6.3, Stainless-Steel Floor Drains: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1) Josam Company. 2) Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3) Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company. 4) Zurn Industries, LLC. 2.3 ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES A. Roof Flashing Assemblies : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Acorn Engineering Company. b. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd. c. Zurn Industries, LLC. 2. Description: Manufactured assembly made of 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch- OR 6.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch- thick, lead flashing collar and skirt extending at least 10 inches from pipe, with galvanized-steel boot reinforcement and counter flashing fitting. a. Extended Vent Cap: With field-installed, vandal-proof vent cap. 2.4 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES A. Through-Penetration Firestop Assemblies : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. ProSet Systems Inc. b. Hilti c. 3M 2. Standard: UL 1479 assembly of sleeve and stack fitting with firestopping plug. 3. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent stack. 4. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral nailing flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs. 5. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray-iron, hubless-pattern, wye branch with neoprene O-ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release harness. Include PVC protective cap for plug. 6. Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Open Drains : Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Description: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot, castiron, soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section; and where required, increaser fitting joined with ASTM C 564, rubber gaskets. 2. Size: Same as connected waste piping with increaser fitting two sizes larger than connected pipe. B. Deep-Seal Traps : 1. Description: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping and cleanout trap-seal primer valve connection. 2. Size: Same as connected waste piping. a. NPS 2: 4-inch- minimum water seal. b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 5-inch- minimum water seal. C. Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings : 1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal primer valve connection. 2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 side inlet. D. Air-Gap Fittings : 1. Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap between installed inlet and outlet piping. 2. Body: Bronze or cast iron. 3. Inlet: Opening in top of body. 4. Outlet: Larger than inlet. 5. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated indirect waste piping. E. Sleeve Flashing Device : 1. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron fitting, with clamping device that forms sleeve for pipe floor penetrations of floor membrane. Include galvanized-steel pipe extension in top of fitting that will extend 2 inches above finished floor and galvanized-steel pipe extension in bottom of fitting that will extend through floor slab. 2. Size: As required for close fit to riser or stack piping. F. Stack Flashing Fittings : 1. Description: Counter flashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for terminating roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe. 2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack. G. Vent Caps : 1. Description: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design. Include vented hood and setscrews to secure to vent pipe. 2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack. H. Frost-Resistant Vent Terminals : Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Description: Manufactured or shop-fabricated assembly constructed of copper, or galvanized steel. 2. Design: To provide 1-inch enclosed air space between outside of pipe and inside of flashing collar extension, with counter flashing. I. Expansion Joints : 1. Standard: ASME A112.21.2M. 2. Body: Cast iron with bronze sleeve, packing, and gland. 3. End Connections: Matching connected piping. 4. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent piping. 2.6 FLASHING MATERIALS A. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/B 152M, of the following minimum weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated: 1. General Applications: 12 oz. /sq. ft.. 2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 8 oz. /sq. ft.. B. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04-inch minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 hot-dip galvanized, millphosphatized finish for painting if indicated. C. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil minimum thickness. D. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened. E. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed. F. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy. G. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated. 2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor. C. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall. D. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance. 2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii: a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4inch total depression. b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope. c. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 1inch total depression. 3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated. 4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise indicated. E. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof. F. Install through-penetration firestop assemblies in plastic conductors and stacks at floor penetrations. G. Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 2 inches above floor. H. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated. I. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer connection. 1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection. 2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet. J. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping discharge into sanitary drainage system. K. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof membrane. L. Install vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof. M. Install frost-resistant vent terminals on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-inch clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate. N. Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for easy access and maintenance. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 O. Install frost-proof vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-inch clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate. P. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting-type specialties. Q. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance. B. Ground equipment according to Division 26. C. Connect wiring according to Division 26. 3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required: 1. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets. B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane. 1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe. 2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve. 3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around specialty. C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement. D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device. E. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counter flashing or commercially made flashing fittings, according to Division 07. F. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes. 3.4 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each of the following: B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 22. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled FOG disposal systems and their installation, including piping and electrical connections, and to assist in testing. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work. B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain FOG disposal systems. Refer to Division 01. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\221319_SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS 221329 - 1 ADDENDUM 02 07 January 2019 SECTION 221329 - SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Basins 2. Packaged, submersible sewage-pump units 3. Motors 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. B. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps and controls, to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage. B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage. C. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions for handling. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS 221329 - 2 ADDENDUM 02 07 January 2019 1.8 WARRANTY A. General: periods are stipulated here for this specification section. Generally manufacturers standard warranty applies, however, longer warranty periods, if required, are stipulated in part 2 where each product is specified. The warranty periods stipulated in part 2 take priority over standard manufacturer’s warranty periods specified in part 1. B. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard warranty – submit a form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within manufacturers standard specified warranty period. Manufacturers standard warranty must include minimum durations below C. Minimum Durations and Special Warrantees: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Structural failures including shell. 2. Warranty period shall begin on the date of project substantial completion stipulated by the Architect and/or the Construction Manager 3. Faulty operation of sewage pumps, controls, or accessories. 4. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BASINS A. Field fabricated cast in place concrete, watertight, square or rectangular. Provide sleeves for basin sump with top flange and sidewall openings for pipe connections. B. Material: Concrete C. Reinforcement: Mounting plates for pumps, fittings, guide-rail supports if used, and accessories. 1. Anchor Flange: Same material as or compatible with basin sump, cast in or attached to sump, in location and of size required to anchor basin in concrete slab. D. Basin Covers: Covers are to be square to fit configuration of the concrete sump where to attach. 1. Fabricate metal cover with openings having gaskets, seals, and bushings; for access to pumps, pump shafts, control rods, discharge piping, vent connections, and power cables. 2. Reinforcement: Steel or cast iron, capable of supporting foot traffic for basins installed in foot-traffic areas. 2.2 PACKAGED, SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE-PUMP UNITS SAN-SP-1&21A/1B A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Flygt Pump. 2. Goulds Water Technology; a Xylem brand. 3. Liberty Pumps. 4. Weil Pump Company. 5. Zoeller Company. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS 221329 - 3 ADDENDUM 02 07 January 2019 B. Packaged Sewage Pump Station: INTERIOR PACKAGE PUMP STATION (SEWAGE) Equipment Tag SAN – SP-1&21A/1B TYPE Solids handling centrifugal 2 inch submersible SLICER PUMPS, Duplex (2 required) CONSTRUCTION: Pumps to have 300 series stainless steel shafts, cast iron impellers and STAINLESS STEEL SLICING BLADES MOTORS Motor(s) shall be housed in watertight cast iron shell with extended cooling fins. Oil filled motors will not be considered equal. Motor(s) shall have Class ‘F’ insulation and permanently lubricated double seal ball bearings. Motor(s) using sleeve type bearing will not be considered equal. Mating surfaces between the motor and bell, motor shell and seal housing shall be sealed by means of ‘O’ rings. The motor shaft shall be Series 300 stainless steel with keyway for positive positioning of the impeller. Carbon steel and 400 series stainless steel shafts are not considered equal. SEALS Dual mechanical mounted in tandem. Each seal shall have carbon rotary and ceramic stationary faces with Buna-n elastomeric and 316 SS spring. Equal to Crane type 21. IMPELLER Impeller: Statically and dynamically balanced, ASTM B 584, cast bronze, design for clear wastewater handling, and keyed and secured to shaft. Impeller shall be multi-vane, semi-open type and accurately machined to the proper diameter. All impellers are to be trimmed to suit job conditions and then dynamically balanced. LEVEL SWITCHES Float switches UL listed narrow-angle non-mercury sensor switch with normally open contact, which closes as the float tips slightly above the horizontal plane and high water alarm. Each float switches to be equipped with 75 feet of cable. Equal to WEIL Series 8234 float switches. VALVES Furnish check valves and shut-off Ball/Butterfly valves on pump outlet piping for each pump. Manifold piping at outlet. INLET Furnish and install all necessary sleeves and supporting watertight sleeve packing for pump station inlet and outlet piping during concrete placement. CONTROLS 1 – NEMA 4X 8194 NEMA 4X DF UL LISTED Duplex control panel: (panels using printed circuit boards will not be considered equal) 1 - PLC with color touch screen. 2- Magnetic starters with 3 coil OL protection. 1 - Two motor circuit protectors 1 - Automatic alternator 2 - HOA selector switches 2 - Pump running lights 1 - Control circuit transformer 1 - Alarm horn w/ silencer 1 - Set of isolated contacts for remote alarm 1 - Pressure transducer for float back up 1 - BMS communication via Modbus 1 - Sump level tank bar graph 1 - OPTIONAL, BACNET COMMUNICATION (THROUGH GATEWAY) BASIN A 4 foot x 4 foot x 5 foot deep concrete pit shall be constructed to accept the duplex sewage pumps, rails, vent, discharge and electrical piping. Rail stud mounts shall be installed to accommodate the Pump system or compatible with the pump station manufacturer. These must be 3/4 inch anchor bolts placed to match rails supplied by the plumbing contractor. Inlet and discharge fittings created per drawings. Refer to drawings for basin waterproofing details COVER 53 inch x 53 inch Square steel cover with all necessary openings and matching angle iron curb frame. ACCESS HATCH Access hatch placed in cover shall be provided to serve the specified pump discharge with no openings. A stainless steel float and cable bracket will be included so that floats may be serviced from outside the pit. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS 221329 - 4 ADDENDUM 02 07 January 2019 INTERIOR PACKAGE PUMP STATION (SEWAGE) Equipment Tag SAN – SP-1&21A/1B PUMP PULL/RAILS Each pump shall have Weil model 2613 rail removal system. For - Sliding Bracket – Select Iron or Bronze for use with Explosion Proof Motor Guide Rails: Vertical pipes or structural members, made of galvanized steel or other corrosionresistant metal, attached to baseplate and basin sidewall or cover. Baseplate: Corrosion-resistant metal plate, attached to basin floor, supporting guide rails and stationary elbow. Pump Yoke: Motor-mounted or casing-mounted yokes or other attachments for aligning pump during connection of flanges. Movable Elbow: Pump discharge-elbow fitting with flange, seal, and positioning device. Stationary Elbow: Fixed discharge-elbow fitting with flange that mates to movable-elbow flange and support attached to baseplate. Lifting Cable: Stainless steel; attached to pump and cover at manhole. Bolt Pump to the sliding bracket. Mount cast iron floor elbow to the Sub Base or the wet well floor. Mount Guide pipes on the floor elbow and an upper guide pipe bracket. ELECTRICAL SEE DRAWING SCHEDULE SHEET Each pump shall be supplied with 25' of multi-conductor power cord, compatible of continued exposure to the pumped liquid. Power cord shall be sized for the rated full load amp loading of the pump in accordance with the National Electric Code. If the pump station control panel is to be mounted further than the 25’ multi-conductor can reach, the power cable and float cables shall enter into a junction chamber through a compression type-sealing gland. Water sealing and strain relief is separated. Each individual conductor shall be sealed against wicking should the cable become damaged. The entire junction chamber shall be sealed off from the motor housing by through wall terminals to protect the motor from moisture. CAPACITY See drawing schedule. WARRANTY See Part 1 BASIS OF DESIGN Weil Pump Model 2533 submersible SLICER packaged sewage pump station 2.3 MOTORS A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 22. 1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load 77 will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. B. Motors for submersible pumps shall be hermetically sealed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EARTHWORK A. Excavation and filling are specified in Division 31. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in for plumbing piping to verify actual locations of sanitary drainage and vent piping connections before sewage pump installation. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS 221329 - 5 ADDENDUM 02 07 January 2019 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Pump Installation Standards: 1. Comply with HI 1.4 for installation of centrifugal pumps. 2. Comply with HI 3.1-3.5 for installation of progressing-cavity sewage pumps. B. Equipment Mounting: 1. Install progressing-cavity sewage pumps on cast-in-place concrete equipment base(s). Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Division 03. 2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic control devices specified in Division 22. 3. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Division 22. C. Wiring Method: Comply with requirements in Division 26. D. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools. 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 22. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. B. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection. 2. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Pumps and controls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.6 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform and perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS 221329 - 6 ADDENDUM 02 07 January 2019 2. Assure all control wiring and power service wiring is connected and functional. 3.7 ADJUSTING A. Adjust pumps to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. B. Adjust control set points. 3.8 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train. Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain controls and pumps. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2019_01-07_ADD 2\221329_A2_SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 ELECTRIC, WATER HEATERS 223300 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 223300 - ELECTRIC, WATER HEATERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Commercial electric instantaneous water heaters 2. Source quality control 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Commercial water heaters shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7 1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Prerequisite EA 2: Documentation indicating that units comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 7, "Service Water Heating." C. Shop Drawings: 1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For commercial water heaters, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 ELECTRIC, WATER HEATERS 223300 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Product Certificates: For each type of commercial residential and tankless, electric, water heater, from manufacturer. C. Water Heater Labeling: Certified and labeled by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Source quality-control reports. E. Field quality-control reports. F. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For electric, water heaters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. C. ASME Compliance: Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial, water heater storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. D. NSF Compliance: Fabricate and label equipment components that will be in contact with potable water to comply with NSF 61 Annex G, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects." 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. 1.9 WARRANTY A. General: periods are stipulated here for this specification section. Generally manufacturers standard warranty applies, however, longer warranty periods, if required, are stipulated in part 2 where each product is specified. The warranty periods stipulated in part 2 take priority over standard manufacturer’s warranty periods specified in part 1. B. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard warranty – submit a form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within manufacturers standard specified warranty period. Manufacturers standard warranty must include minimum durations below C. Minimum Durations and Special Warrantees: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Structural failures including shell. 2. Warranty period shall begin on the date of project substantial completion stipulated by the Architect and/or the Construction Manager Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 ELECTRIC, WATER HEATERS 223300 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COMMERCIAL, ELECTRIC, INSTANTANEOUS WATER HEATERS: EWH-1 A. Instantaneous Heater Manufacturer/series Eemax Series Refer to plumbing schedule EX100 277V 10KW 36A 40 deg F T rise at 1 GPM 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect water heaters specified to be ASME code construction, according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. B. Hydrostatically test commercial water heaters to minimum of one and one-half times pressure rating before shipment. C. Electric, water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. Comply with requirements in Division 01 for retesting and re-inspecting requirements and Division 01 for requirements for correcting the Work. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INDEX OF ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS- Type Application Tag # 1. Commercial Point Of Use Water Heaters Instantaneous point of use electric for re-heat EWH-1 3.2 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION A. Commercial, Electric, water Heater Mounting: Install commercial, electric, water heaters on concrete base. Comply with requirements for concrete bases specified in Division 03. 1. Exception: Omit concrete bases for commercial, electric, water heaters if installation on stand, bracket, suspended platform, or directly on floor is indicated. 2. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. 3. Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible. 4. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. 5. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor. 6. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 7. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 8. Anchor water heaters to substrate. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 ELECTRIC, WATER HEATERS 223300 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Install electric, water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible. 1. Install shutoff valves on water-supply piping to water heaters and on hot water outlet piping. Comply with requirements for shutoff valves specified in Division 22. C. Install commercial, electric, water heaters with seismic-restraint devices. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 22. D. Install combination temperature-and-pressure relief valves in water piping for electric, water heaters without storage. Extend commercial water-heater relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain. E. Install water-heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for electric, water heaters that do not have tank drains. Comply with requirements for hose-end drain valves specified in Division 22. F. Install thermometers on outlet piping of electric, water heaters. Comply with requirements for thermometers specified in Division 22. G. Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping of electric water heaters. Comply with requirements for thermometers specified in Division 22. H. Assemble and install inlet and outlet piping manifold kits for multiple electric, water heaters. Fabricate, modify, or arrange manifolds for balanced water flow through each electric, water heater. Include shutoff valve and thermometer in each water heater inlet and outlet, and throttling valve in each electric, water heater outlet. Comply with requirements for valves specified in Division 22 and comply with requirements for thermometers specified in Division 22. I. Install pressure-reducing valve with integral bypass relief valve in electric, water booster-heater inlet piping and water hammer arrester in booster-heater outlet piping. Set pressure-reducing valve for outlet pressure of 25 psig adjustable to 50 psig. Comply with requirements for pressure-reducing valves and water hammer arresters specified in Division 22. J. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of electric, water heater storage tanks without integral or fitting-type heat traps. K. Fill electric, water heaters with water. L. Charge water compression tanks with air. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in water piping sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Where installing piping adjacent to electric, water heaters, allow space for service and maintenance of water heaters. Arrange piping for easy removal of water heaters. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 22. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 ELECTRIC, WATER HEATERS 223300 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. 2. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. B. Electric, water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. Comply with requirements in Division 01 for retesting and re-inspecting requirements and Division 01 for requirements for correcting the Work. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train. Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain commercial, electric, water heaters. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\223300_ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES 224200 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 224200 - COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plumbing fixtures 2. Toilet seats 3. Supply fittings 4. Risers 5. Source quality control 6. Grout 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for water closets. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Prerequisite WE 1 and Credit WE 3: Documentation indicating flow and water consumption requirements. 2. Product Data for Prerequisite WE 1: Documentation indicating flow and water consumption requirements. 3. Product Data for Prerequisite WE 1: Documentation indicating flow and water consumption requirements. C. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For flushometer valves and electronic sensors to include in operation and maintenance manuals. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES 224200 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Flushometer-Valve Repair Kits: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed, but no less than one of each type. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLUMBING FIXTURES A. Plumbing Fixtures Are Scheduled On The Drawings. See Drawings For Exact Types. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. American Standard America. b. Kohler Co. c. TOTO USA, INC. d. Eljer Plumbing e. Bradley f. Guardian g. Haws h. Sloan Valve Company. i. Zurn Industries, LLC. 2. All plumbing fixture are to be high quality grade I fixtures. 3. All plumbing fixtures shall be furnished from the same manufacturer 4. All fixtures shall comply with the latest water conservation standards B. Plumbing Fixtures And Trim 1. Refer to Architectural and Plumbing Drawings for quantities, locations and mounting heights of fixtures provided under this Section. 2. Fixture trim, traps, faucets, escutcheons and waste pipes exposed to view in finished spaces shall be IPS brass with polished chromium plating (CP) over nickel finish. 3. Vitreous china fixtures shall be regular selection fused and vitrified to produce homogeneous material with close grain without pores. Surfaces that contact walls, floors and other fixtures shall be set true. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES 224200 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 4. Enameled surfaces on cast iron fixtures shall be of suitable thickness to provide the highest commercial grade. Exterior exposed surfaces not enameled shall be treated at factory with one coat of filler. 5. Affix manufacturer's guarantee label or trademark to fixture to indicate first quality. Acidresisting enameled fixture shall bear manufacturer's symbol signifying resistance to acid. 6. Set fixtures with wall outlet flanges at proper distance from floors and walls with closet setting compound or gasket. 7. Vitreous china and enameled cast-iron fixtures shall be white throughout unless specified otherwise. Closet seats shall match closet fixture color. 2.2 TOILET SEATS A. Toilet Seats : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. American Standard America. b. Bemis Manufacturing Company. c. Church Seats; Bemis Manufacturing Company. d. Kohler Co. e. Olsonite Seat Co. f. TOTO USA, INC. g. Zurn Industries, LLC. 2. Standard: IAPMO/ANSI Z124.5. 3. Material: Plastic. 4. Type: Commercial (Heavy duty). 5. Shape: Elongated rim, open front Elongated rim, closed front. 6. Hinge: Check. 7. Hinge Material: Non-corroding metal. 8. Seat Cover: Not required. 9. Color: White. 2.3 SUPPLY FITTINGS A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61 Annex G, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects," for supply-fitting materials that will be in contact with potable water. B. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1. C. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated brass pipe or chrome-plated copper tube matching water-supply piping size. Include chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel wall flange. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES 224200 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression valve with inlet connection matching supply piping. E. Operation: Loose key. 2.4 RISERS A. NPS 1/2 chrome-plated, soft-copper flexible tube or ASME A112.18.6, braided or corrugated stainless-steel, flexible hose waste fittings B. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2. C. Drain: Grid with NPS 1-1/2 DN 40 tailpiece. D. Trap: 1. Size: NPS 1-1/2. 2. Note: All trap trim is to match the finish selected by the Architect. See architectural requirements for finish material 3. Material: two-piece, cast-brass trap and swivel elbow with 0.032-inch- thick brass tube to wall; and finish -plated brass or steel wall flange. 4. Material: Stainless-steel, two-piece trap and swivel elbow with 0.012-inch- thick stainlesssteel tube to wall; and stainless-steel wall flange. a. Supply Connections: For hot and cold water. 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Certify performance of emergency plumbing fixtures by independent testing organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2.6 GROUT A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout. B. Characteristics: Non-shrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications. C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES 224200 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before plumbing fixture installation. B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where closet plumbing fixtures will be installed. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Water-Closet Installation: 1. Install level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. 2. Install floor-mounted water closets on bowl-to-drain connecting fitting attachments to piping or building substrate. Install accessible, wall-mounted water closets at mounting height for handicapped/elderly, according to ICC/ANSI A117.1. 3. Install toilet seats on water closets. B. Lavatory Installation 1. Install lavatories level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. 2. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted lavatories. C. Sink Installation 1. Install sinks level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. 2. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-hung sinks. 3. Install accessible wall-mounted sinks at handicapped/elderly mounting height according to ICC/ANSI A117.1. 4. Set floor-mounted sinks in leveling bed of cement grout. D. Seal joints between sinks and counters, floors, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildewresistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Division 07. E. Flushometer-Valve Installation: 1. Install flushometer-valve water-supply fitting on each supply to each urinal. 2. Attach supply piping to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. 3. Install lever-handle flushometer valves for accessible urinals with handle mounted on open side of compartment. 4. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms. F. Support Installation: 1. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-hung urinals. 2. Use off-floor carriers with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet urinals. 3. Use carriers without waste fitting for urinals with tubular waste piping. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES 224200 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 4. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible urinals. 5. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for floor-mounted, back-outlet water closets. 6. Use carrier supports with waste-fitting assembly and seal. 7. Install floor-mounted, back-outlet water closets attached to building floor substrate, onto waste-fitting seals; and attach to support. G. Install wall-mounted, back-outlet water-closet supports with waste-fitting assembly and wastefitting seals; and affix to building substrate. Water Cooler Installation 1. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. For fixtures indicated for children, install at height required by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Set freestanding pressure water coolers on floor. 3. Install off-the-floor carrier supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted fixtures. 4. Install mounting frames, affixed to building construction, and attach recessed, pressure water coolers to mounting frames. 5. Install water-supply piping with shutoff valve on supply to each fixture to be connected to domestic-water distribution piping. Use ball or gate valve. Install valves in locations where they can be easily reached for operation. 6. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitary drainage system. H. Flushometer-Valve Installation: 1. Install flushometer-valve, water-supply fitting on each supply to each water closet. 2. Attach supply piping to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. 3. Install lever-handle flushometer valves for accessible water closets with handle mounted on open side of water closet. 4. Install actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities to reach. 5. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms. I. Wall Flange and Escutcheon Installation: 1. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. 2. Install deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. 3. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Division 22. J. Joint Sealing: 1. Seal joints between water closets and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. 2. Match sealant color to water-closet color. 3. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Division 07. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Connect water closets with water supplies and soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match water closets. B. Where installing piping adjacent to water closets, allow space for service and maintenance. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES 224200 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Operate and adjust water closets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning water closets, fittings, and controls. B. Operate and adjust urinals and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning urinals, fittings, and controls. C. Adjust water pressure at flushometer valves to produce proper flow. D. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean all plumbing fixtures and fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials. B. Install protective covering for fixtures and fittings. C. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\224200_CO MMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES 224500 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 224500 - EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Eye/face wash equipment. 2. Supplemental equipment. 3. Water-tempering equipment. 4. Source quality control. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Accessible Fixture: Emergency plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people with disabilities. B. Plumbed Emergency Plumbing Fixture: Fixture with fixed, potable-water supply. C. Self-Contained Emergency Plumbing Fixture: Fixture with flushing-fluid-solution supply. D. Tepid: Moderately warm. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include flow rates and capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: Submit certificates of performance testing specified in "Source Quality Control" Article. B. Field quality-control test reports. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For emergency plumbing fixtures to include in operation and maintenance manuals. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES 224500 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Flushing-Fluid Solution: Separate lot and equal to at least 200 percent of amount of solution installed for each self-contained unit. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. ANSI Standard: Comply with ANSI Z358.1, "Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment." C. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61 Annex G, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water. D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC/ANSI A117.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; for plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EYE/FACE WASH EQUIPMENT A. Sink, Fixed-Position, Plumbed, Eye/Face Wash Unit, EW-1: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Acorn Safety. b. Guardian Equipment Co. c. Haws Corporation. d. WaterSaver Faucet Co. 2. Capacity: Not less than 3 gpm for at least 15 minutes. 3. Supply Piping: NPS 1/2 chrome-plated brass or stainless steel with flow regulator and stay-open control valve. 4. Control-Valve Actuator: 5. Spray-Head Assembly: Two or four spray heads positioned over sink. 6. Receptor: stainless-steel bowl. 7. Mounting: Attached to sink receptor. 8. Basis of Design a. Stainless Steel: Guardian G-1822 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES 224500 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.2 ALARMS A. Flow Alarms: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Guardian Equipment Co. b. Haws Corporation. c. Lawler Manufacturing Company, Inc. d. Leonard Valve Company. e. Powers. B. Combination Flashing Light and Alarm Horn for Safety Stations 1. Combination flashing light and alarm horn unit for safety stations. Flashing light activates and alarm horn sounds loudly when eyewash or shower is activated. Ideal for use in high traffic, industrial applications and areas with low ambient light. 2. For use with combination safety stations, 120 volt, 0.48 amp electrical supply is required. 3. Visual Signal: Weatherproof amber flashing light with shatter-resistant lens. 4. Audible Signal: Weatherproof horn delivers distinctive, urgent signal. 5. Flow Switch: 1-1/4 inch IPS double pole, double throw waterproof flow switch for installation in water supply line to emergency unit. Switch senses flow of water when either the eyewash or shower is activated. 6. Furnished complete with bracket for mounting on vertical pipe or wall, junction box and 5 foot flexible NEMA 4X cord and receptacle. 7. Furnish silencing switch for alarm horn. 8. Basis of Design: a. Guardian AP275-205 with double pole, double throw flow switch for connection to monitoring system. b. When emergency unit is actuated, light and horn activate and electrical signal is sent to the BMS as a remote monitoring location. 2.3 WATER-TEMPERING EQUIPMENT A. Hot- and Cold-Water, Water-Tempering Equipment, TMV-1, TMV-2: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Guardian Equipment Co. b. Haws Corporation. c. Lawler Manufacturing Company, Inc. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES 224500 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 d. Leonard Valve Company. e. Powers. 2. Description: Factory-fabricated equipment with thermostatic mixing valve. a. Thermostatic Mixing Valve: Designed to provide 85 deg F tepid, potable water at emergency plumbing fixtures, to maintain temperature at plus or minus 5 deg F throughout required 15-minute test period, and in case of unit failure to continue cold-water flow, with union connections, controls, metal piping, and corrosionresistant enclosure. b. Supply Connections: For hot and cold water. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Certify performance of emergency plumbing fixtures by independent testing organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in for water and waste piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before plumbed emergency plumbing fixture installation. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURE INSTALLATION A. Assemble emergency plumbing fixture piping, fittings, control valves, and other components. B. Install fixtures level and plumb. C. Fasten fixtures to substrate. D. Install shutoff valves in water-supply piping to fixtures. Use ball or gate valve if specific type valve is not indicated. Install valves chained or locked in open position if permitted. Install valves in locations where they can easily be reached for operation. Comply with requirements for valves specified in Division 22. 1. Exception: Omit shutoff valve on supply to group of plumbing fixtures that includes emergency equipment. 2. Exception: Omit shutoff valve on supply to emergency equipment if prohibited by authorities having jurisdiction. E. Install dielectric fitting in supply piping to emergency equipment if piping and equipment connections are made of different metals. Comply with requirements for dielectric fittings specified in Division 22. F. Install thermometers in supply and outlet piping connections to water-tempering equipment. Comply with requirements for thermometers specified in Division 22. G. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of emergency equipment receptors that are indicated to be directly connected to drainage system. Comply with requirements for waste piping specified in Division 22. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES 224500 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 H. Install indirect waste piping on drain outlet of emergency equipment receptors that are indicated to be indirectly connected to drainage system. Comply with requirements for waste piping specified in Division 22. I. Install escutcheons on piping wall and ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 22. J. Fill self-contained fixtures with flushing fluid. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Connect cold-water-supply piping to plumbed emergency plumbing fixtures not having watertempering equipment. Comply with requirements for cold-water piping specified in Division 22 for domestic water piping." B. Connect hot- and cold-water-supply piping to hot- and cold-water, water-tempering equipment. Connect output from water-tempering equipment to emergency plumbing fixtures. Comply with requirements for hot- and cold-water piping specified in Division 22 for domestic water piping. C. Connect steam and cold-water-supply and condensate return piping to steam and cold watertempering equipment. Connect output from water-tempering equipment to emergency plumbing fixtures. Comply with requirements for cold-water piping specified in Division 22 for domestic water piping and comply with requirements for steam and condensate piping specified in Division 23. D. Connect cold water and electrical power to electric heating water-tempering equipment. Comply with requirements for cold-water piping specified in Division 22 for domestic water piping." E. Directly connect emergency plumbing fixture receptors with trapped drain outlet to sanitary waste and vent piping. Comply with requirements for waste piping specified in Division 22. F. Indirectly connect emergency plumbing fixture receptors without trapped drain outlet to sanitary waste or storm drainage piping. G. Where installing piping adjacent to emergency plumbing fixtures, allow space for service and maintenance of fixtures. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Install equipment nameplates or equipment markers on emergency plumbing fixtures and equipment and equipment signs on water-tempering equipment. Comply with requirements for identification materials specified in Division 22. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Mechanical-Component Testing: After plumbing connections have been made, test for compliance with requirements. Verify ability to achieve indicated capacities. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection. 2. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES 224500 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. C. Emergency plumbing fixtures and water-tempering equipment will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Adjust or replace fixture flow regulators for proper flow. B. Adjust equipment temperature settings. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\2 24500_EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 GAS MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEM 225000 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 225000 - GAS MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Design, furnish, and install a hazardous gas monitoring and alarm system to monitor for low explosive limit within aerosol rooms. B. The system shall be microprocessor based and shall be of a modular design to allow future expansion. C. System shall include the following at a minimum: 1. Hazardous Gas Detection 2. Alarm Annunciations and Notification 3. System Status Indication 1.2 REFERENCES A. Division 23, General Mechanical Requirements and Division 23, Basic Mechanical Methods and Materials are included as an integral part of this section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submitted documentation shall be complete and consistent to provide a written record to provide that all components conform to the specifications and intent of design. B. First submittal shall include the following items for selecting final vendor of system: 1. Technical features of system and components 2. Delivery time including lead time for design, procurement, and installation. 3. Warranty terms. 4. Recommended spare part lists with costs. 5. Service contract options with costs. 6. User training options with costs. C. Second submittal shall include the following items for approval: 1. Detailed component specifications and shop drawings of system design with any deviations from the drawings and specifications noted. 2. Control and wiring diagrams. 3. Floor plans indicating sensor, visual alarm, manual activation station, etc. locations and elevations. 4. Detailed description of operation and control sequences. 5. Installation and start-up schedule. D. Closeout Submittals and O&M Manuals: 1. Final as-built drawings. 2. Installation, operation and maintenance manuals on all components. 3. Start-up, commissioning and calibration reports 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. UL certifications as available. B. SEMI S-22 conformance. C. SEMI S-15 Performance Characteristic Table for toxic and flammable gas detection system proposed. D. Minimum (3) three references from installing contractor where system has been installed and operational for at least (2) years. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 GAS MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEM 225000 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM VENDORS A. MSA Safety Equipment, Ron Bouley (339) 293-3396 B. Draeger Safety Inc., www.draeger.com, Mark Rehak (412) 709-2427 C. Owner approved equal. 2.2 SENSORS A. Monitors must be able to detect gases as follows: Monitors must include sensitivity to provide both low level (warning) and high level (emergency) alarms. 1. For flammable and explosive gases, at 10% of LEL (Lower Explosive Limit) for low level alarms. 2. For flammable and explosive gases, at 20% of LEL for high-level alarms. B. A room tool layout drawing is found in the project drawing set. Vendor shall recommend location of sensors and allow for minor repositioning (+/- 10 feet). C. The number of sensors provided must be able to monitor the entire area around the specific process tools for the specific gas. D. Each sensor must have the capability of being taken off line for repair, calibration or any other reason, without affecting the overall operability of the Hazardous Gas monitoring and control system. E. Monitoring sensors must have the capability of being calibrated to NIST traceable standards. F. The height location of the hazardous gas monitors must be consistent with the gas type that is being detected and room air currents present in the sampling location. 2.3 CONTROLLER A. A gas detection central control system shall be provided to control all input and output devices. B. System Configuration - The system design, consisting of monitor/readout units and sensors/transmitters, shall conform to manufacturer’s written instructions. Deviations are not acceptable.. C. General - The control system shall be expandable to measure and display gas concentration for up-to 8 inputs. The system shall provide audio visual alarms when preset limits are exceeded. Relay outputs for alarms and both an Ethernet interface configurable for Modbus TCP/IP protocol, and an RS485 interface configurable for Modbus RTU protocol shall be available. D. Monitor/Readout Unit - The monitor/readout unit must comply with manufacturer’s written instructions. 1. Monitor/Readout Description - The system shall consist of a monitor/readout unit and separate gas sensor/transmitter units. The sensor units shall be capable of being located remote from the monitor/readout unit by up to 4000 feet. Sensor/transmitter units shall receive power from and send signal corresponding to gas values to the monitor/readout unit. a. The monitor must be field-serviceable and upgradeable for additional points of gas detection measuring up to a maximum of eight (8) channels. 2. Monitor/Readout Configuration - The monitor/readout shall be an enclosed wall-mounted type. a. Number of Sensors per Enclosure - Each monitor/readout shall have the capability of monitoring up-to 8 inputs. b. Type of Enclosure - The enclosure shall be rated NEMA 4X, suitable for general purpose type areas, and be made of ABS housing material that is flame retardant rated VO UL. Access to the inside of the enclosure, monitor front panel and wiring connections shall be through a front panel. The panel shall have a shatterproof window of sufficient size to allow the viewing of the graphic display, gas readings, and alarm indicator lights. They shall not be mounted in hazardous locations as defined by the National Electric Code (NEC). c. Enclosure Size - The enclosure shall not be greater than 20 inches in any dimension. d. Mounting Provisions – The unit shall mount to a flat surface through mounting holes on the unit. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 GAS MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEM 225000 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 e. External Controls – An external sealed push button shall be provided to enable an alarm reset and audio alarm silencing without opening the enclosure. There must be a connection for wiring an external alarm reset and audio alarm-silencing switch. f. The monitor/readout unit must have cCSAus, EC-ATEX, or SIL2 approval or certification. Instrument manufacturer must be certified according to ISO 9001 provisions. 3. Monitor/Readout Requirements a. Readout Displays - A common liquid crystal display (LCD) with separate four-digit LCD readout shall be provided for displaying the gas value from the sensors. The value displayed shall be a direct reading of the gas concentration indicated on the sensor/transmitter. The readout must also be able to be configured to read any value between 0.1 through 8,000 ppm for ppm levels, or 0-100% for percentage levels. Flame detectors shall have a distinct indicator symbol on the display. b. Visual Alarm Indicators - The monitor shall have separate visual alarms for indicating two levels of alarm, power indicator and a fault indicator for each of the eight possible inputs. The lights shall be color-coded. Blue and white shall not be used. c. Alarm Set Point Levels – Two separate alarm set point levels shall be provided for each sensor. The set points shall be independently adjustable for any value in the readout range. The set points shall provide drive signals to user-interface relays. Both of the alarm set points shall be able to provide the user with a choice of latching or non-latching mode, alarm on upscale or downscale, and energized or de-energized mode through software-selectable options. TWA and STEL levels can be set based on the gas of interest and be part of the voting capability for alarms. d. Common Relay Outputs: Two common alarm relays, and two common horn relays with one common fault relay shall be standard. 1) The common alarm and horn relays shall be SPDT rated at 5 amps resistive at 30 VDC or 250 VAC. 2) The two common horn relays shall be silenced by means of the common Acknowledge push button on the front of the monitor. e. Optional Discrete Relay Outputs - The alarm set point drive signals shall activate user relays as specified below. 1) Number of Relays - As a minimum, one relay for each set point level shall be provided. 2) Contact Rating - All relays shall be Form C, single-pole, double-throw. Contacts shall be rated for 5 amps resistive at 30 VDC or 250 VAC. 3) Contact Selection - The contacts shall be capable of being selected normally open or normally closed, normally energized or normally de- energized, latching or nonlatching, and increasing or decreasing activation. Voting and grouping of relays shall be configurable through the keypad or software provided. f. Malfunctions Indication - System trouble indication shall be provided in accordance with Paragraph 1. 1) Trouble Relay - A common relay shall be provided to indicate trouble for all inputs when any of the following conditions exist: a) System power loss. b) Signal loss from any sensor. c) Signal greater than 5% of full scale or lower than 5% below zero. d) Control module malfunction or removal. g. Display Indication - The readout display described in Paragraph a. shall display a separate unique character when an over-range or under-range of greater than 5% exists. h. Audible Alarm - An 85 dB audible buzzer shall be provided when an alarm condition occurs. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 GAS MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEM 225000 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 i. Output Signals 1) Ethernet output configurable for Modbus TCP/IP. 2) RS-485 output configurable for Modbus RTU protocol. 3) USB configurable for ModBus RTU. j. Battery Back Up Option: 1) Battery back up shall supply up to twenty minutes of back up when configured with up to eight catalytic combustible sensors. (Maximum current draw) 2) Battery charger circuit shall be part of the standard main circuit board for the monitor. k. Operating Modes and Parameter Selection - The selections listed in this paragraph shall be accomplished by the use of software and/or push button type controls located on the front panel of the monitor. Access to the software shall be password protected. 1) Sensor range value. 2) Alarm levels for two of the alarm set points. 3) Alarm on upscale or downscale for two of the alarm set points. 4) Setting relay contacts energized or de-energized. 5) Latching or non-latching alarms for two of the alarm set points. 6) Time delay of up to 180 seconds, prior to alarm inhibit. 7) Setting audible alarm on or off. 8) Setting external wiring for external alarm reset switch or a flow failure fault indictor. 9) Time and date. 10) Settings for TWA and STEL for Common Alarm 2. 11) Password code change and reset. l. Front Panel Controls - The functions listed in this paragraph shall be accomplished using push button type controls readily accessible on the front panel: 1) Acknowledge button that silences audible alarms. 2) Acknowledge button that resets latching alarm conditions after alarm condition has cleared. 3) Test button that displays all software-selectable programming m. Sensor Input Signal - The sensor signal shall be a 4-20mA input signal. n. System Power Requirements - The system shall operate on 85 to 260 VAC, 43 to 63 Hz. Power shall not exceed 100 VA. 4. Maximum System Maintenance Requirements - The system shall require no periodic maintenance other than checking of sensor unit function. Periodic sensor checking, calibration, or actual adjustment of the sensor units shall be capable of being accomplished by one person at the sensor unit location. 5. Approvals - The monitor/readout unit must have cCSAus, EC-ATEX, or SIL2 approval or certification. 6. Manufacturer Capability Requirements - As a minimum, the Gas Monitoring Equipment manufacturer must meet the requirements outlined in paragraphs a through e a. Capable of supplying all equipment used to check or calibrate the sensor units. b. Capable of providing on site service with factory-trained personnel and include on- site warranty. c. Capable of providing on-site training for the owner/operator. d. Capable of supplying in-house service and assistance. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 GAS MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEM 225000 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 e. Instrument manufacture must be certified according to ISO 9001 provisions. 7. The Monitor/Readout Unit shall be a Mine Safety Appliances Company Gasgard XL Gas Monitor or equal. E. Sensors/Transmitters – The gas sensors/transmitters and/or flame detectors used in conjunction with the Gasgard XL monitor must have two-wire or three-wire 4-20mA output and must comply with location requirements for all areas of installation. The sensor/transmitter and/or flame detectors must meet all requirements of the Gasgard XL monitor. 2.4 MANUAL ALARM STATIONS A. Manual Pull Stations: 1. Housing shall be blue in color. 2. Install center line of housing 4 feet above finish floor. 3. Station shall be reset with a key. 4. Each housing shall be labeled with “HAZMAT”. 5. Pull stations located in public access corridors shall have a protective cover to protect against accidental alarm activations. 6. Basis of Design: Safety Technology International: a. Model SS2400 - All areas. b. Model SS2430 - Public access areas. c. Owner approved equal. 2.5 ALARM NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A. The gas monitoring control system shall include “HAZMAT” alarms to provide the following: 1. Sound an audible/visual alarm with a distinct sound and appearance from any other alarms within the facility, at designated locations in the laboratory and support areas, as well as immediately outside the laboratory. 2. Annunciate with the emergency sound/light combination in the event of a gas detection above the emergency limits (high level alarm). 3. Initiate a mutually agreed audible and visible alarm when the low-end (warning) limits are exceeded. B. Mount appliances 80 inches above the finished floor unless otherwise indicated on drawings. (Refer to drawing details.) C. Appropriate signs to indicate the alarm's meaning and required personnel action shall be provided in the same designated locations as the notification appliance. D. Visual and audible notification appliances shall be visible from any location in the room the appliance is located. E. Audible signaling devices shall sound a distinct continuous sound. There shall be a distinctly different sound for LOW level alarm, different from the HIGH level alarm sound. F. Audible/visual indicated appliances shall be designed to continue signaling until manually silenced by the proper authority. No automatic time-out circuitry shall be used to silence the indicated appliances. G. A signal alarm silence switch shall be provided so the alarm indicating appliances may be silenced without resetting the system. Systems shall be designed to accommodate subsequent alarms (alarms initiated after the alarm silence switch has been operated) by sounding and flashing the indicating appliances. H. The sound level provided in all areas by audible evacuation indicating appliances shall conform to the recommendations of NFPA 72. This requires at least 15 dBA above the ambient sound level or 5 dBA above the maximum sound level. This level of sound shall be provided in all areas, including those areas only occasionally occupied, such as mechanical rooms. All sound measurements shall be performed while the space is completely occupied by its assigned tenants and while normal activities are in progress. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 GAS MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEM 225000 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 I. The strobe on each appliance shall be a 110 candela ADA compliant visual strobe. J. Provide speakers with matching transformer and variable taps. K. Acceptable alarm notification devices include: 1. Wheelock part number MT-2475W-GW. 2. Gentex model number GEC24-110WW. 3. Edwards Signaling & Security Systems model 1081-RBA-G1. 4. Edwards Signaling & Security Systems 105 series. 5. Edwards Signaling & Security Systems model 114 series. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that standby power supply is available to power products installed. 3.2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND COORDINATION A. The contractor shall be responsible for the installation of the system. B. Assumptions for installation: 1. Provide signal wiring and conduit to Laboratory Control System (LCS) or Building Automation System (BAS). 2. Provide 120 VAC power wiring and conduit as needed. 3. Provide uninterruptible power supply (UPS) for gas monitoring and control system. C. Installation tasks to include: 1. Design drawings for review and approval. 2. Scheduling. 3. Procurement. 4. Installation of products. 5. Start-up services including programming and tie in to Owner furnished computers. D. The contractor shall be responsible for coordinating this system with Building Automation System (BAS) or Laboratory Control System (LCS): 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install software and implement all features of programs to specified requirements and as appropriate to sequence of operation. B. Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve operation specified. C. Verify location of products with Drawings and room details before installation. Install devices at mounting heights in accordance with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), or as otherwise directed by the Architect. D. Install labels and nameplates to identify products according to Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 3.4 WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION A. Electrical contractor shall provide electrical connection to gas detection controller. This Contractor shall provide power from controller to all other gas detection devices, including all transformers and wiring. B. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Division 26. Control transformers are to be provided by the supplier. C. Install building wire and cable according to Division 26. D. Install signal and communication cable according to Division 26. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 GAS MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEM 225000 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Install exposed cable in EMT raceway. 2. Install concealed cable in EMT raceway. 3. Bundle and harness multi-conductor instrument cable in place of single cables where several cables follow a common path. 4. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against abrasion. Tie and support conductors. 5. Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and service of control system, except local individual room control cables. 6. Install wire and cable with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration. E. Electrical wiring and connections required for products indicated by this Section shall be provided under this Section, unless shown otherwise on Drawings, and shall comply with applicable requirements of Division 16, Electrical. Necessary normal and emergency power wiring shall be provided under this section. Electrical circuits shall be dedicated only to the products indicated by this Section. Wiring from and including the dedicated circuit breakers to the point of use shall be a part of this work of this section. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing. B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest. 2. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating control set points are as required. 3. Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation. 4. Test software and hardware interlocks. C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide onsite assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to three visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain products. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training." 3.7 COMMISSIONING A. Comply with the requirements of the commissioning specification for the commissioning of this Section. B. Responsibilities include: 1. Completely install and thoroughly inspect, startup, test, adjust, calibrate and document systems and equipment. 2. Maintain database of control parameters subsequent to field adjustments and measurements. 3. Provide startup schedule and coordinate with CxPM so that CxA may witness the point-to-point “check-out” and document completion. Provide on-site technician skilled in software programming and hardware operation to demonstrate point-to-point “check-out” tests to CxA. 4. Provide on-site technician skilled in software programming and hardware operation to correct deficiencies identified during functional performance testing. 5. Provide, for use during commissioning, instrumentation, computer, software and communication resources necessary to demonstrate operation during point-to-point “checkout” and functional performance testing. 6. Attend commissioning kick-off meeting and other commissioning team meetings. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 GAS MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEM 225000 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 7. Attend Owner training kick-off meeting conducted by CxA. 8. Prepare training plans with CxPM and execute training. Attend Owner training kick-off meeting and other coordination meetings as required to complete training plans. 9. Maintain comprehensive calibration and checkout records. Submit records to CxA. 10. Set up trend logs as required by CxA to substantiate proper operation. 11. Participate in two warranty review meetings with the Owner and O&M staff to review product performance 3 months and 10 months into the warranty period. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\225000 GAS MONITORING.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PIPING FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226113 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 226113 - PIPING FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Performance requirements 2. Laboratory pipe, tubes and fittings 3. Laboratory waste pipe, tubes and fittings 4. Piping specialties 5. Jointing materials 6. Laboratory compressed gas cylinder gas racks 7. Laboratory compressed gas manifolds and outlets 8. Nitrogen. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Non-laboratory laboratory vacuum piping systems include laboratory low-vacuum and laboratory high-vacuum piping systems. B. Laboratory compressed-air piping systems include laboratory air, dental air, instrument air, and laboratory air. C. Non-laboratory compressed-air piping systems include laboratory air piping systems. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For laboratory compressed-air manifolds, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PIPING FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226113 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Material Certificates: Signed by Installer certifying that laboratory compressed air piping materials comply with requirements in NFPA 99 for positive-pressure laboratory gas systems. D. Brazing certificates. E. Field quality-control reports. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For compressed-air piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Laboratory all laboratory piping systems : a. Extra valves of each type (one of each) b. Extra full cylinders of each type of lab gas furnished (one of each) 2. Laboratory Quick-Coupler Service Connections: Furnish complete non-interchangeable laboratory vacuum suction inlets. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Laboratory Air Piping Systems for Healthcare Facilities: According to ASSE Standard #6010 for laboratory-gas-system installers. 2. Shape-Memory-Metal Coupling Joints: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, with the experience and capability to conduct compressed gases and vacuum piping testing indicated, that is a member of the Laboratory Gas Professional Healthcare Organization or is an NRTL, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Qualify testing personnel according to ASSE Standard #6020 for laboratory-gas-system inspectors and ASSE Standard #6030 for laboratory-gas-system verifiers. C. Brazing: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications"; or AWS B2.2, "Standard for Brazing Procedure and Performance Qualification." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Laboratory Lab bench air operating at 20 to 30 psig B. Laboratory central air system operating at 80 to 120 psig 550 to 690 kPa C. Laboratory Central Vacuum System operating at 22 inches Hg 560 torr at the remote bench outlet Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PIPING FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226113 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.2 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS – LABORATORY PIPING Pipe Class: A13 Service: Water Material: ACR Type L Copper Service Limits Primary ANSI Class: 150 Coefficient of linear expansion 0.94 x 10-5 inches per inch Corrosion Allowance 0.00 inch 1/2 inch to 2 inches 2-1/2 inches and larger PIPE AND FITTINGS Piping Seamless copper tube, drawn temper, ACR Type L. ASTM B-280. See Note 1. Seamless copper tube, drawn temper, ACR Type L. ASTM B-280. See Note 1. Fittings Wrought copper, solder-joint. ASME B16.22. See Note 1. Wrought copper, solder-joint. ASME B16.22. See Note 1. Joints ANSI/AWS A5.8 brazing filler material, BCuP series. No flux. See Note 2. ANSI/AWS A5.8 brazing filler material, BCuP series. No flux. See Note 2. Mechanical Joints Cast copper alloy unions, hexagonal stock with ball-and-socket joint, solder joint ends. ASME B16.18. See Note 1. ANSI Class 150 flange, ASME B16.24. ANSI B16.1 flange dimensions. See Note 1. VALVES Available Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Apollo Valve Co. Watts Water Technologies NIBCO Inc. Milwaukee Valves Kitz Valve Co. Beacon Madaes Pratt Company Common All main line, riser, service, and futures valves shall include plugged 1/8” NPTF ports on inlet and outlet All valves shall be factory cleaned for oxygen service, capped and sealed in a polyethylene bag for shipping and storage. Certificates of origin and of proper preparation shall be maintained on the job site attesting same. Ball Valve All bronze, 3-piece, full port, PTFE seats, chrome plated bronze ball, solder end connections. 600 psig WOG. Apollo 82-200-57, Ohmeda 6802, Watts B-6801. Use ball valves up to 3 inch. For 4 inch and larger service use rated butterfly valve. Butterfly Valve Use ball valve for where appropriate size dictates. For large sizes use Cleaned for Oxygen Service, Lugged Double Offset High Performance 316 SS Butterfly Valve. Install between Std. ANSI Class 150 or 300 flanges, Valve and flanges to match working pressure. Stainless Disc and stem; RTFE seats; Oxygen cleaning per CGA-G-4.1 Designed to meet MSS SP-68, table 1 MSS SP-25 (markings) Lever Handle to 4 inch, gear operated 6 inch and larger. Basis of Design: Pratt Industrial P/N: Check Valve Class 125, bronze body, bronze disc, solder end connections. See Note 2. Milwaukee 1509, Jenkins 4093, Stockham B-309. Class 125, cast iron body, bronze disc, flanged end connections. ANSI B16.1 flange dimensions. See Note 2. Milwaukee F-2974. SPECIALTY VALVES Available Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Concoa Parker Numatics/ASCO Watts Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PIPING FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226113 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Pipe Class: A13 Service: Water Material: ACR Type L Copper Service Limits Primary ANSI Class: 150 Coefficient of linear expansion 0.94 x 10-5 inches per inch Corrosion Allowance 0.00 inch 1/2 inch to 2 inches 2-1/2 inches and larger Pressure Regulator (PCV): Mains Cleaned for O2 service. Bronze body, bronze piston and cylinder. BUNA "N" seat elastomer disc and stack. Cash Acme B Series with wheel handle, Parker, Numatics, Watts. Regulator must be equipped and cleaned for oil free service. Furnish regulator filter, pressure gauge and mounting bracket Pressure Regulator (Pressure Control Valve): Point-Of-Use Cleaned for O2 service. Bronze body, stainless steel piston and cylinder. Concoa Series 400; Numatics/ASCO series 342 Furnish regulator filter, pressure gauge and mounting bracket SPECIALTIES Pressure Gauge Cleaned for O2 service. Without diaphragm seal: medical industry, biotechnology and pharmaceutical industries size 2½ inch, pressure 0 to 150 psig; 1/4 inch thread connection With diaphragm seal: A standard WIKA 212 series stainless steel case pressure gauge l Auto drain 316 L Stainless steel, maximum pressure 11 bar, 32 oF (0 oC) to 140 oF (60 oC), ASCO series SS FR. Point of Use Filter 316 Stainless Steel Body Construction • All Seals Made of Fluorocarbon (FKM) • 5 Micron Element Standard • Meets NACE Specifications Temperature Range ºF (ºC): 40°-180° (4° - 82°) Max. Operating Pressure PSIG (BAR): 300 (20) Weight, lbs. (kg.): 1.88 (.85) Element: Sintered Polypropylene NOTES: 1. Valves, fittings, components, and each length of tube shall be factory cleaned per the applicable pipe standard. They shall be permanently labeled and delivered plugged, capped, bagged, or otherwise sealed. Plug caps or other seals shall remain in place until final assembly. 2. Joints and piping shall be continuously purged with a positive flow of Grade M, CGA Pamphlet G-10.1 oil free, dry nitrogen per ANSI/AWS B2.2 procedures. 3. Valves shall be by a single manufacturer. 4. Provide mechanical joint connections to all equipment such as pumps, compressors, manifolds, etc. 5. Contact between dissimilar metals shall be made with di-electric couplings or di-electric flanges. Contact between ferrous and bolts and bronze or copper flanges shall be electrically insulated with non-metallic washers. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PIPING FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226113 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Pipe Class: A14 Service: Laboratory Compressed Gases Material: Type L Copper – O2 cleaned Service Limits Primary ANSI Class: 150 Coefficient of linear expansion 0.94 x 10-5 inches per inch F Corrosion Allowance 0.00 inch 1/2 inch to 3 inches PIPE AND FITTINGS Piping Material Seamless copper tube, laboratory gas, drawn temper, Type L. Standard ASTM B-819. . Quality Each length of tube shall be factory cleaned and suitable for laboratory oxygen service in accordance with CGA Pamphlet G-4.1. . Labeling Tube shall be permanently labeled and delivered plugged, capped, bagged or otherwise sealed Assembly All components for assembly Plug caps or other seals shall remain in place until final assembly. Fittings Material Wrought copper, designed for brazed -joint. .. Standard ASME B16.22 Quality Same as tube Joints Brazed Brazing alloy shall be BCuP-5 Brazing alloy or equivalent alloy with at least 1000 degree F melting point. Standard ANSI/AWS A5.8 brazing filler material, BcuP series. No flux. Purge Joints and piping shall be continuously purged with a positive flow of Grade M, CGA Pamphlet G-10.1 oil free, dry nitrogen per ANSI/AWS B2.2 and NFPA 99 procedures Assembly At the completion of any section, all open pipe ends shall be capped using an external cap. Certifications Brazers shall be qualified in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 99. Mechanical Joints Swage or Parker oxygen ready fittings VALVES Available Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Apollo Valve Co. Watts Water Technologies Kitz Valve Co. Beacon Madaes Pratt Valve Company Common All main line, riser, service, and futures valves as scheduled on the drawings shall include plugged 1/8” NPTF ports on inlet and outlet All valves shall be factory cleaned for oxygen service, capped and sealed in a polyethylene bag for shipping and storage. Certificates of origin and of proper preparation shall be maintained on the job site attesting same. Ball Valves All bronze, full port, PTFE seats, chrome plated bronze ball, solder end connections. 600 PSIg WOG. Apollo 82-200-series, Watts B-6801, Nibco or Milwaukee. Valves are three piece construction with swing out center. Ball valves shall actuate from full “ON” to full “OFF” by 90 degree turn of vinyl gripped valve handle. Furnish and install only valves with factory installed type K copper tubing extensions for brazing operations. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PIPING FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226113 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Pipe Class: A14 Service: Laboratory Compressed Gases Material: Type L Copper – O2 cleaned Service Limits Primary ANSI Class: 150 Coefficient of linear expansion 0.94 x 10-5 inches per inch F Corrosion Allowance 0.00 inch 1/2 inch to 3 inches Butterfly Use ball valve for where appropriate size dictates. For large sizes use Cleaned for Oxygen Service, Lugged Double Offset High Performance 316 SS Butterfly Valve. Install between Std. ANSI Class 150 or 300 flanges, Valve and flanges to match working pressure. Stainless Disc and stem; RTFE seats; Oxygen cleaning per CGA-G-4.1 Designed to meet MSS SP-68, table 1 MSS SP-25 (markings) Lever Handle to 4 inch, gear operated 6 inch and larger. Basis of Design: Pratt Industrial P/N: Check Valves Class 125, bronze body, bronze disc, solder end connections. See Note 2. Milwaukee 1509, Jenkins 4093, Stockham B-309. SPECIALTY VALVES Available Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Concoa Linde Numatics/Amsco Watts Parker Pressure Regulator (PCV): Mains Cleaned for O2 service. Bronze body, bronze piston and cylinder. BUNA "N" seat elastomer disc and stack. Cash Acme B Series with wheel handle, Parker, Numatics, Watts. Regulator must be equipped and cleaned for oil free service. Furnish regulator filter, pressure gauge and mounting bracket Pressure Regulator (Pressure Control Valve): Point-Of-Use Cleaned for O2 service. Bronze body, stainless steel piston and cylinder. Concoa Series 400; Numatics/ASCO series 342 Furnish regulator filter, pressure gauge and mounting bracket SPECIALTIES Pressure Gauge Cleaned for O2 service. Without diaphragm seal: medical industry, biotechnology and pharmaceutical industries size 2½ inch, pressure 0 to 150 psig; 1/4 inch thread connection With diaphragm seal: A standard WIKA 212 series stainless steel case pressure gauge l NOTES: 1. On site cleaning of the interior surfaces of tubes, valves, fittings, and other components is not allowed. 2. Valves shall be by a single manufacturer. 3. Provide mechanical joint connections to all equipment such as pumps, compressors, manifolds, etc. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PIPING FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226113 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Pipe Class: A15 Service: Laboratory Vacuum Material: Cleaned Type L Copper Service Limits Primary ANSI Class: 150 Coefficient of linear expansion 0.94 x 10-5 inches per inch Corrosion Allowance 0.00 inch 1/2 inch to 2 inches 2-1/2 inches and larger PIPE AND FITTINGS Piping Type ‘L’ cleaned copper tube, or ASTM B-280 ACR copper. Fittings Wrought copper, solder-joint, DWV and Y pattern. ASME B16.29. Joints ANSI/AWS A5.8 brazing filler material, BcuP series Mechanical Joints Cast copper alloy unions, hexagonal stock with ball-and-socket joint, solder joint ends. ASME B16.18. ANSI Class 150 flange, ASME B16.24. ANSI B16.1 flange dimensions. VALVES Available Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Apollo Valve Co. Watts Water Technologies Kitz Valve Co. Beacon Madaes Ball Valve All bronze, 3 piece, full port, PTFE seats, chrome plated bronze ball, solder end connections. 600 PSIg WOG. Apollo 82200-series, Watts B-6801, Nibco or Milwaukee. All bronze, 3 piece, full port, PTFE seats, chrome plated bronze ball, flange connections. Up to 2½ inch diameter For valves 3 inch and larger, use butterfly valve. Butterfly Valve Use ball valve Vacuum Service, Ductile Iron Body • Extended Neck • Geometric Style Drive • Molded-In Seat Liner Lug and Wafer Style Sizes through 12" Install between Std. ASME Class 125/150 flanges. EPDM molded-in seat liner Aluminum bronze disc Stainless steel stem with copper bushings Designed to meet MSS SP-67 MSS SP-25 (markings) Check Valve Class 125, bronze body, bronze disc, solder end connections. Class 125, cast iron body, bronze disc, flanged end connections. ANSI B16.1 flange dimensions. Drain Valve Use stub and double block and bleed with ball valves NOTES: 4. Valves shall be by a single manufacturer. 5. Provide mechanical joint connections to all equipment such as pumps, compressors, manifolds, etc. 6. Contact between dissimilar metals shall be made with di-electric couplings or di-electric flanges. Contact between ferrous stud bolts and bronze or copper flanges shall be electrically insulated with non-metallic washers. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PIPING FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226113 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Pipe Class: CD13 Service: Gravity Lab Waste and Vent Material: Polypropylene Service Limits Primary ANSI Class: 125 Coefficient of linear expansion 112 x 10-6 inches per inch R Corrosion Allowance 0.00 inch Above Grade Below Grade PIPE AND FITTINGS General PP Drainage Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 1412, pipe extruded and drainage-pattern fittings molded, with Schedule 40 dimensions, from PP resin with fire-retardant additive complying with ASTM D 4101; with fusion-joint ends. All components of the system shall conform to the following applicable ASTM Standards: D4101, D3311, D1599, D2122, F1290 and F1412. All pipe shall be marked with manufacturer’s name, pipe size, schedule, type, quality control mark and ASTM information. All fittings shall be legibly marked showing manufacturer’s trademark, fitting size, manufacturer’s part number, and symbol indicating the material. Piping Acid Waste Flame Retardant Polypropylene (FRPP) Schedule 40 Pipe complying with ASTM F1412 and the material requirements of ASTM D4101. Acid Waste Non-Flame Retardant Polypropylene (NFRPP) Schedule 80 Pipe complying with ASTM F1412 and the material requirements of ASTM D4101. Fittings Acid Waste Flame Retardant Polypropylene (FRPP) Drainage Fittings complying with ASTM F1412 and the material requirements of ASTM D4101. Fittings to have an integral heavy gauge, nickel/chrome electrical resistance wire molded in place in the fitting body. Acid Waste Polypropylene Drainage Fittings complying with ASTM F1412 and the material requirements of ASTM D4101. Fittings to have an integral heavy gauge, nickel/chrome electrical resistance wire molded in place in the fitting body. Joints Connections between polypropylene pipe and fittings to be made using electro fusion joints in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Joints made between PP pipe and dissimilar materials shall be joined with proper adapters and transition fittings according to manufacturer's recommendations. Connections between polypropylene pipe and fittings to be made using electro fusion joints in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Joints made between pp pipe and dissimilar materials shall be joined with proper adapters and transition fittings according to manufacturer's recommendations. Adhere to manufacturers recommendations for backfill and compaction. See note 6. waste pipe and fittings above slab (under benchwork) Flame-Retardant Polypropylene fittings shall be manufactured to Schedule 40 dimensions. Fittings shall be joined to the polypropylene pipe by means of mechanical joint connection. Fittings shall meet the same flammability requirements as described for pipe above. Mechanical joints are not permitted for drainage of hot water appliances (autoclaves, sterilizers, dishwashers, etc.) Available Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: George Fischer Sloane, Inc. - Fuseal IPEX/Enfield Enfusion, Zurn Orion - Orion Fittings Inc Labline – US Plastics NOTES: 7. Interior lab waste and vent branch piping under lab benches shall be made with FRPP pipe and mechanically joined DWV acid waste pipe fittings. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PIPING FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226113 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Pipe Class: CD13 Service: Gravity Lab Waste and Vent Material: Polypropylene Service Limits Primary ANSI Class: 125 Coefficient of linear expansion 112 x 10-6 inches per inch R Corrosion Allowance 0.00 inch Above Grade Below Grade 8. Underground installations (in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations) – the trench for the pipe installation to be free of loose stones, building materials or outcroppings and must provide minimum clearance around pipe of half the diameter on each side and one pipe diameter above and below the pipe. 9. The trench shall be backfilled over the unexcavated base to a depth of one pipe diameter with clean backfill. 10. Backfill material shall be free of stones and foreign matter and shall be capable of passing a #10 screen. 11. After testing, initial backfilling must be completed using #10 screen material until fill surrounds the pipe. When the selected backfill meets a depth of one diameter over the pipe, then backfilling can proceed with normal fill until complete. 12. Buried Piping - Fill shall be compacted using hand held compacting equipment when fill is midway up the pipe and again when the fill is over one diameter over the pipe. Heavy duty compacting equipment can be used after the initial backfill is complete. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PIPING FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226113 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Pipe Class: CD17 Service: Lab Waste in Plenums Material: Polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) Service Limits Primary ANSI Class: 150 Coefficient of linear expansion 72 x 10-6 inches per inch R Corrosion Allowance 0.00 inch 2 inches and larger PIPE AND FITTINGS General PVDF Drainage Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 1673, Schedule 40, pipe and drainage-pattern fittings. Include fittings with fusion joints throughout. Piping Schedule 40 Flame Retardant Polyvinylidene Fluoride Piping, (PVDF). Pipe shall be rated for use in return air plenums per UL and FM tests for smoke and flame spread. The PVDF material shall conform to ASTM D3222. The Piping shall be manufactured to meet Schedule 40 iron pipe size dimensional standards in accordance with ASTM D 2122, Section 4 and 7. The pipe shall be marked with UL Classification to indicate compliance with UL 723 (ASTM E84). Fittings DWV pattern flame retardant Schedule 40 Fittings based on laying length dimensions in ANSI B16-12. Wall thickness shall conform to ASTM F1673 and ASTM E84. Joints Heat Fusion equal to Orion socket fusion system to meet or exceed ASTM F1412 and conform to ASTM 2657. Fittings fabricated in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Joints made between PVDF pipe and dissimilar materials shall be joined with proper adapters and transition fittings according to manufacturer's recommendations. Mechanical Joints Use Mechanical joints within laboratory casework and under sinks and counters. SPECIALTIES Floor Drains and Cleanouts Floor Drain Equal to Orion Corporation model AWFDTD with socket fusion joint. Cleanouts equal to Model FCO-SQ, Nickel Bronze finish. Accepted Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: • Orion Corporation “Super Blue” PVDF • Enfield Industrial Corporation “IPEX” George Fisher Inc. NOTES: 13. Installation, including support spacing, compensation for expansion and contraction, and joining shall be in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. 14. Underground installation - bedding requirements - bedding is required when rocks (1-1/2 inch), hard pan boulders or other materials that might damage the pipe are encountered. Use a select fill material containing small percentages of silt and fines. Compact to 90 percent SPD, typically. 15. Final backfill is to be finished to grade with excavated or other soil must be unfrozen, free of voids, lumps of clay, stone and boulders over 8". Place in uniformly compacted layers to minimize settlement. 16. Pipe hanger spacing for RAP PVDF piping system is to be per manufacturer’s recommendation and specifications but is not to exceed 5 feet on center in any case. 17. Mechanical couplings are acceptable for use below benchwork. Mechanical couplings shall not be used in return air plenums. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PIPING FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226113 - 11 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Comply with ASME B31.1, "Power Piping," for piping systems operating at more than 150 psig 1035 kPa. B. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for piping systems operating at 150 psig 1035 kPa or less. C. Flexible Pipe Connectors: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. b. Flexicraft Industries. c. Metraflex Company (The). d. Universal Metal Hose. 2. Description: Corrugated stainless steel with stainless braid and cover and ends brazed to inner tubing. a. Working-Pressure Rating: 250 psig 1725 kPa minimum. b. End Connections: . match the piping material to which it is connected 2.3 PIPING SPECIALTIES – LABORATORY WASTE A. Plastic Dilution Traps: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Georg Fischer Inc. b. IPEX USA LLC. c. Orion Fittings; a Watts Water Technologies company. d. Town & Country Plastics, Inc. e. Zurn Industries, LLC. 2. Material: Corrosion-resistant PP, with removable base. 3. End Connections: Mechanical joint. 4. Dilution Tanks: 1-gal. capacity, with clear base unless colored base is indicated; with two NPS 1-1/2 top inlets and one NPS 1-1/2 side outlet. 5. Small Dilution Jars: 1-pint capacity, with clear base unless colored base is indicated; with NPS 1-1/2 top inlet and NPS 1-1/2 side outlet. 6. Large Dilution Jars: 1-quart capacity; with NPS 1-1/2 top inlet and NPS 1-1/2 DN 40 side outlet. B. Corrosion-Resistant Traps: 1. Type: P-trap or drum trap. 2. Size: NPS 1-1/2 or NPS 2, as required to match connected piping. 3. High-Silicon Iron: ASTM A 861, with horizontal outlet and hub-and-plain or plain ends to match connecting piping. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PIPING FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226113 - 12 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 4. PP: ASTM D 4101, with mechanical-joint pipe connections. 5. PVDF: ASTM D 3222, with mechanical-joint pipe connections. 6. Glass: ASTM C 1053, with coupling pipe connections. C. Stainless-Steel Cleanouts: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Blucher Co. Division of Watts Technology Group. b. Josam Company. c. Zurn Corporation d. Smith Company 2. Standard: ASME A112.3.1, ASTM A 666, Type 316L, stainless steel. 3. Aboveground Piping: Cleanout tee of size matching piping. 4. Underground and Underslab Piping: Floor access cleanout of size matching piping. D. Plastic Backwater Valves: 1. Description: Full-port NPS 3 check valve, PP or PVDF, matching or compatible with system piping and compatible with system liquid, with EPDM seals and flanged ends. E. PP Sink Outlets: 1. Description: NPS 1-1/2, with clamping device, stopper, and 7-inch- high overflow fitting. 2.4 JOINING MATERIALS A. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys. B. Threaded-Joint Tape: PTFE. C. Lead: the use of lead joints, lead solder, and/or caulking material is prohibited D. Note: specific jointing materials are listed in each pipe spec table 2.5 NITROGEN A. Comply with USP 32 - NF 27 for oil-free dry nitrogen. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS SCHEDULE SERVICE CODE MAXIMUM SERVICE OPERATING LIMITS PIPE CLASS PIPE MATERIAL (psig) Temp (°F) Laboratory Compressed Air CA 200 120 A13 Copper Laboratory Carbon Dioxide CO2 125 120 A14 Copper Laboratory Nitrogen N2 250 120 A14 Copper Laboratory Vacuum VAC 29 inches HG 120 A15 Copper Laboratory Hot and Cold A10/A20 See spec 221110 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PIPING FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226113 - 13 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SERVICE CODE MAXIMUM SERVICE OPERATING LIMITS PIPE CLASS PIPE MATERIAL (psig) Temp (°F) Water piping General Pipe Spec Notes: 1. Each valve type shall be the product of a single manufacturer. Each system shall be provided with valves as required by code and shown on the drawings. And shall be installed to facilitate operation, replacement and repair. 2. Provide access panels for concealed valves behind non-removable ceilings or walls. 3. Provide shut-off valves on supply piping to individual pieces of equipment. 4. Provide pipe dope, Teflon tape, wax rings, neoprene gaskets and other jointing compounds as required by best standard practice and only on service as recommended by manufacturer. 5. Apply putties and jointing compounds for plumbing fixtures and trim as recommended by manufacturers. 6. Valves on insulated piping systems shall be equipped with extended handles to accommodate insulation thickness. 7. Piping routed through metal stud or wood stud partitions: provide centering such that piping does not come in contact with metal studs and also protection of piping systems routed horizontally through metal stud or wood stud partitions where the piping crosses a stud. Sleeve type protection shall be used to prevent damage to the lateral piping by the use of screws/nails/fasteners. Provide pre-manufactured products equal to puncture solution, or on site sleeves. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PIPING FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226113 - 14 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.2 SCHEDULE OF PIPING – LABORATORY WASTEWATER SERVICE CODE MAXIMUM SERVICE OPERATING LIMITS PIPE CLASS Chemical Drain PIPE MATERIAL (psig) ( °F) Lab Vent (non plenum rated) LV Gravity 100 CD13 Polypropylene Lab Waste (non plenum rated) LW Gravity 120 CD13 Polypropylene Lab Vent in Return Air Plenum LV - RAP Gravity 285 CD-17 Polyvinylidene (PVDF) Lab Waste in Return Air Plenum LW - RAP Gravity 285 CD-17 Polyvinylidene (PVDF) General Pipe Spec Notes: 1. Adapters and Transition Fittings: Assemblies with combination of clamps, couplings, adapters, and gaskets; compatible with piping and system liquid; made for joining different piping materials. 2. Each Valve Type Shall Be The Product Of A Single Manufacturer. Each System Shall Be Provided with Valves as Required by Code and Shown On the drawings And Shall Be Installed to Facilitate Operation, Replacement and Repair. 3. Provide Access Panels For Concealed Valves Behind Non-Removable Ceilings Or Walls. 4. Provide Shut-Off Valves On Supply Piping To Individual Pieces Of Equipment. 5. Piping Routed through Metal Stud or Wood Stud Partitions: provide centering such that piping does not come in contact with metal studs and also protection of piping systems routed horizontally through metal stud or wood stud partitions where the piping crosses a stud. Sleeve type protection shall be used to prevent damage to the lateral piping by the use of screws/nails/fasteners. Provide pre-manufactured products equal to Puncture Solution, or on site sleeves. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Cleaning of Laboratory Gas Tubing: If manufacturer-cleaned and -capped fittings or tubing is not available or if pre-cleaned fittings or tubing must be re-cleaned because of exposure, have supplier or separate agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction perform the following procedures: 1. If the above criteria in paragraph A applies, see the cleaning specification in this section, table 3 for details. 3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION – LABORATORY SERVICE PIPING A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, air-compressor sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings. B. Comply with NFPA 99 for installation of compressed-air and compressed gas piping. C. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PIPING FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226113 - 15 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal and coordinate with other services occupying that space. F. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance. G. Install compressed-air piping with 1 percent slope downward in direction of flow. H. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings same as or higher than system pressure rating used in applications specified in "Piping Schedule" Article unless otherwise indicated. I. Install eccentric reducers, if available, where compressed-air piping is reduced in direction of flow, with bottoms of both pipes and reducer fitting flush. J. Install branch connections to compressed-air mains from top of main. Provide drain leg and drain trap at end of each main and branch and at low points. K. Install thermometer and pressure gage on discharge piping from each air compressor and on each receiver. Comply with requirements in Division 22. L. Install piping to permit valve servicing. M. Install piping free of sags and bends. N. Install fittings for changes in direction and for branch connections. O. Install laboratory air piping to laboratory air service connections specified in this Section, to laboratory air service connections in equipment specified in Division 22, and to equipment specified in other Sections requiring laboratory air service. P. Piping Restraint Installation: Install seismic restraints on compressed-air piping. Seismicrestraint devices are specified in Division 22. Q. Install compressed-air service connections recessed in walls. Attach roughing-in assembly to substrate; attach finishing assembly to roughing-in assembly. R. Connect compressed-air piping to air compressors and to compressed-air outlets and equipment requiring compressed-air service. S. Install unions in copper compressed-air tubing adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each machine, specialty, and piece of equipment. T. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 22. U. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 22. 3.5 PIPING INSTALLATION – LABORATORY WASTEWATER PIPING A. Chemical-Waste Sewerage Outside the Building: 1. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground chemical-waste sewerage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PIPING FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226113 - 16 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for using lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. 3. Install manholes for changes in direction, unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated. 4. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited. 5. Tunneling: Install pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed by tunneling, jacking, or combination of both. 6. Install drainage piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 1/8 inch per foot, unless otherwise indicated. 7. Install drainage piping with 60-inch 1524-mm minimum cover. 8. Install PVDF drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668. 9. Install fiberglass piping according to ASTM D 3839 and ASTM F 1668. 10. Install field-fabrication containment piping over new and existing carrier piping. Use containment piping manufacturer's fastening system. 11. Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping, and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and when work stops. B. Chemical-Waste Piping Inside the Building: 1. Install piping next to equipment, accessories, and specialties to allow service and maintenance. 2. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may be used unless otherwise indicated. 3. Flanges may be used only if all alternative fusion solutions are impossible, on aboveground piping unless otherwise indicated. 4. Install underground fiberglass piping according to ASTM D 3839. 5. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. 6. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. 7. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. 8. Install piping at indicated slopes. 9. Install piping free of sags and bends. 10. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. 11. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in. 12. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 22. 13. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 22. 14. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 22. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PIPING FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226113 - 17 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.6 PIPING SPECIALTY INSTALLATION - WASTEWATER A. Embed floor drains in 4-inch 100-mm minimum depth of concrete around bottom and sides. Comply with requirements in Division 03 for concrete. B. Fasten grates to drains if indicated. C. Set floor drains with tops flush with pavement surface. D. Install cleanouts and riser extension from sewer pipe to clean out at grade. Use fittings of same material as sewer pipe at branches for cleanouts and riser extensions to cleanouts. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in pipe. 1. Set cleanout bodies in earth in cast-in-place concrete block, 18 by 18 by 12 inches deep. Set with tops 1 inch above surrounding grade. Set cleanout plugs in concrete pavement with tops flush with pavement surface. Comply with requirements in Division 03 for formwork, reinforcement, and concrete requirements. E. Install backwater valves in horizontal position. Include riser to clean out at grade. 3.7 JOINT CONSTRUCTION - WASTEWATER A. Chemical-Waste Sewerage Outside the Building: 1. Plastic-Piping, Electro fusion Joints: Make polyolefin drainage-piping joints according to ASTM F 1290. 2. Join dissimilar pipe materials with adapters compatible with pipe materials being joined. 3. Join high-silicon-iron, hub-and-plain-end piping with calked joints using acid-resistant packing and lead. 4. PVC Non-pressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665. B. Chemical-Waste Piping Inside the Building: 1. Plastic-Piping Electro fusion Joints: Make polyolefin drainage-piping joints according to ASTM F 1290. 2. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with both system materials. 3. PVC Non-pressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665. 4. See individual pipe tables for specific jointing materials 3.8 VACUUM SYSTEM A. Vacuum system shall run as indicated to outlets and equipment. Provide necessary fittings, valves and adapters to vacuum fittings, outlets and laboratory equipment. B. Vacuum piping and component valves and fittings shall be capable of full vacuum. Threaded joints shall not be used. C. Support all piping from the building structure with hangers or trapeze hangers with other laboratory piping where piping is positioned on racks. In suspended ceiling areas, conceal all lines above ceilings D. Configure piping to run with building lines and in accordance with the drawings. do not cross building lines above ceilings in diagonal patterns, Keep piping neat and rectilinear with the building structure E. Provide branch valves on every branch from the air main in addition to valves shown on the drawings Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PIPING FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226113 - 18 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.9 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install shutoff valve at each connection to and from compressed-air equipment and specialties. B. Install check valves to maintain correct direction of compressed-air flow from compressed-air equipment. C. Install valve boxes recessed in wall and anchored to substrate. Single boxes may be used for multiple valves that serve same area or function. D. Install zone valves and gages in valve boxes. Rotate valves to angle that prevents closure of cover when valve is in closed position. E. Install pressure regulators on compressed-air piping where reduced pressure is required. F. Install flexible pipe connectors in discharge piping and in inlet air piping from remote air-inlet filter of each air compressor. 3.10 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from outside of cleaned tubing and fittings before assembly. B. Threaded Joints: Apply appropriate tape to external pipe threads. C. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" chapter. Continuously purge joint with oil-free dry nitrogen during brazing. D. Flanged Joints: Install flange on copper tubes. Use pipe-flange gasket between flanges. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9 for bolting procedure. E. Shape-Memory-Metal Coupling Joints: Join new copper tube to existing tube according to procedures developed by fitting manufacturer for installation of shape-memory-metal coupling joints. 3.11 CONNECTIONS - WASTEWATER A. Coordinate piping installations and specialty arrangements with schematics on Drawings and with requirements specified. If Drawings are explicit enough, these requirements may be reduced or omitted. B. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. C. Make connections to existing piping so finished Work complies as nearly as practical with requirements specified for new Work. D. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for sewerage piping branch connections. Remove section of existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire wye fitting plus 6-inch 150-mm overlap, with not less than 6 inches 150 mm of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi 20.7 MPa. E. Protect existing piping to prevent concrete or debris from entering while making connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that may accumulate. F. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance. 3.12 LABORATORY BENCHES, EQUIPMENT AND HOODS A. Provide roughing and final connections for protected hot and cold water, laboratory waste and vent, laboratory vacuum, laboratory compressed air, carbon dioxide, RODI systems, natural gas and special gases, and including traps, tailpiece and strainers, wheel handle stops, valves, cocks and appurtenances to hoods and laboratory equipment requiring same. Each hood and Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PIPING FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226113 - 19 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 piece of equipment, including work in, under or through benches, cabinets and equipment chases, shall be valved and trapped. B. Laboratory Natural or Propane gas piping system: 1. Install safety valves at each lab per the drawings 2. Install a gas shutoff valve in an accessible location for all appliances, this includes a gas valve for each gas bench turret. C. As laboratory equipment purchased may vary slightly from that indicated and therefore require some rearrangement of piping different from that indicated on Drawings, make connections to such rearranged equipment without additional cost to Owner. Unpack, assemble and install trim for benches, equipment and hoods, furnished under other Sections. D. Provide miscellaneous laboratory equipment connections and indirect drains from similar equipment. Unions shall be installed at laboratory equipment and at other such places as may be necessary to disconnect piping so as to make repairs. E. Roughing shall not be undertaken until Architect has approved laboratory equipment and hood shop drawings. Exact location of service connections shall be obtained prior to roughing. F. Hook-up between glass washers and distilled water branch shall be made with a 3 foot piece of stainless steel pipe and shall include installation of a shutoff valve and vacuum breaker. G. Shock absorbers shall be installed in conjunction with quick closing valves including glass washers and autoclaves. Shut-off valve shall be installed beneath each absorber. Absorber shall be sized in accordance with Plumbing and Drainage Institute Standard PDI-WH 201. H. Provide ball valves on all fixtures, hoods, and equipment supplies. I. Provide pressure vacuum breakers to glass washers, and cage washers where required to prevent back siphonage. J. Provide RPZ in line backflow preventers at all sterilizers. Provide a piped drain from BFP to a funnel floor drain. Install a funnel floor drain behind all sterilizers. K. Piping under lab benches shall include insulation per Section 2 of these specifications. Label all piping under benches per requirements in Section 3. 3.13 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION – GENERAL PIPING A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 for seismic-restraint devices. B. Comply with requirements in Division 22 for pipe hanger and support devices. C. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42 clamps. D. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: 1. 100 Feet 30 m and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel, clevis hangers. 2. Longer than 100 Feet 30 m: MSS Type 43, adjustable, roller hangers. E. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet 30 m or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. Comply with requirements in Division 22 for trapeze hangers. F. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. G. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches 300 mm of each fitting and coupling. H. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch- 10-mm- minimum rods. I. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PIPING FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226113 - 20 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. NPS 1/4 DN 8: 60 inches 1500 mm with 3/8-inch 10-mm rod. 2. NPS 3/8 and NPS 1/2 DN 10 and DN 15: 72 inches 1800 mm with 3/8-inch 10-mm rod. 3. NPS 3/4 DN 20: 84 inches 2100 mm with 3/8-inch 10-mm rod. 4. NPS 1 DN 25: 96 inches 2400 mm with 3/8-inch 10-mm rod. 5. NPS 1-1/4 DN 32: 108 inches 2700 mm with 3/8-inch 10-mm rod. 6. NPS 1-1/2 DN 40: 10 feet 3 m with 3/8-inch 10-mm rod. 7. NPS 2 DN 50: 11 feet 3.4 m with 3/8-inch 10-mm rod. 8. NPS 2-1/2 DN 65: 13 feet 4 m with 1/2-inch 13-mm rod. 9. NPS 3 DN 80: 14 feet 4.3 m with 1/2-inch 13-mm rod. 10. NPS 3-1/2 DN 90: 15 feet 4.6 m with 1/2-inch 13-mm rod. 11. NPS 4 DN 100: 16 feet 4.9 m with 1/2-inch 13-mm rod. 12. NPS 5 DN 125: 18 feet 5.5 m with 1/2-inch 13-mm rod. 13. NPS 6 DN 150: 20 feet 6 m with 5/8-inch 16-mm rod. 14. NPS 8 DN 200: 23 feet 7 m with 3/4-inch 19-mm rod. J. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet 3 m. 3.14 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION - WASTEWATER A. Pipe sizes in this article refer to aboveground, single-wall piping and carrier piping of containment piping. B. Comply with requirements in Division 22 for seismic-restraint devices. C. Comply with requirements in Division 22 for pipe hanger and support devices. Install the following: 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or MSS Type 42, riser clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer than 100 Feet, if indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls. 3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. 4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. D. Comply with requirements in Division 22 for installation of supports. E. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling. F. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. G. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, to minimum of 3/8 inch. H. Install vinyl-coated hangers for PP piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 2: 33 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3: 42 inches with 1/2-inch rod. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PIPING FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226113 - 21 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 48 inches with 5/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 6: 48 inches with 3/4-inch rod. 5. NPS 8: 48 inches with 7/8-inch rod. I. Install supports for vertical PP piping every 72 inches. J. Install vinyl-coated hangers for PVDF piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. All Sizes: Install continuous support for piping with liquid waste at temperatures above 140 deg F. 2. NPS 1/2 and Smaller: 30 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 3/4 to NPS 1-1/2: 36 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 2: 36 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 5. NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3: 42 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 6. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 48 inches with 5/8-inch rod. 7. NPS 6: 48 inches with 3/4-inch rod. K. Install supports for vertical PVDF piping NPS 1-1/2 every 48 inches and NPS 2 and larger every 72 inches. L. Install vinyl-coated hangers for fiberglass piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 2 and Smaller: 10 feet with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 6: 10 feet with 3/4-inch rod. 5. NPS 8 to NPS 12: 12 feet with 7/8-inch rod. M. Install supports for vertical fiberglass piping every 12 feet. N. Install hangers for stainless-steel drainage piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 2: 10 feet with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 2-1/2: 11 feet with 1/2-inch rod. 3. NPS 3: 12 feet with 1/2-inch rod. 4. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 12 feet with 5/8-inch rod. 5. NPS 6: 12 feet with 3/4-inch rod. O. Install supports for vertical stainless-steel drainage piping every 15 feet. P. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69. 3.15 IDENTIFICATION A. Identifying labels and devices for laboratory piping, valves, and specialties. Comply with requirements in Division 22. B. In addition, install identifying labels and devices for laboratory piping systems according to NFPA 99. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PIPING FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226113 - 22 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.16 PROTECTION A. Protect tubing from damage. B. Retain sealing plugs in tubing, fittings, and specialties until installation. C. Clean tubing not properly sealed, and where sealing is damaged, according to "Preparation" Article. 3.17 VALVE SCHEDULE A. Shutoff Valves: Ball valve with manufacturer-installed ASTM B 819, copper-tube extensions. B. Zone Valves: Ball valve with manufacturer-installed ASTM B 819, copper-tube extensions with pressure gage on one copper-tube extension. 3.18 BALANCING OF HOT WATER SYSTEMS A. Building Distribution System 1. Al circuits and sub circuits shall be flow and temperature balanced such that hot water positive flow is achieved in each branch circuit of the building hot water systems 2. See drawing detail sheets and specification section pipe table A10 for flow and balancing valve spec options. The specified products indicate either integral flow or flow/temperature balancing devices, assure the installed devices meet these specifications 3. Indicate on a riser diagram the type of balancing device use, method of calibration and proposed flow in each branch circuit of the hot water piping network for each hot water system B. Building Main Hot Water Distribution Pumps 1. Balance flows to the main Thermostatic Hot Water Mixing Valves according to manufacturer’s instructions 2. Provide plastic tags on each circuit indicating the flow and balancing valve position to the Mixing valves and then to the water heaters C. Submissions 1. Submit a report indicating the actual flow and temperature in each circuit described in item C above. The report shall designate the following: a. Time to achieve hot water at the remote hot water faucet in the circuit b. Hot water temperature achieved c. Setting on circuit setter 2. For the circuits at the outlets of hot water circulation pumps, indicate the following: a. The actual flow and temperature into Temperature Mixing Valve b. The actual flow and temperature back to the heaters and/or storage tanks 3.19 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: CLEANING AND TESTING TABLE Service Code Cleaning Group Testing Group Pipe Class Pipe Material All Water Piping excluding Water 1 1 A10/A20 Copper Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PIPING FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226113 - 23 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Service Code Cleaning Group Testing Group Pipe Class Pipe Material purified water. Laboratory Compressed Air CA 3 2 A13 Copper Laboratory Carbon Dioxide CO2 3 2 A14 Copper Laboratory Nitrogen N2 3 2 A14 Copper Vacuum (Laboratory) VAC 2 2 A15 Copper Compressed Air Intake CAI 2 2 or 3 A17 Galvanized Steel Vacuum Exhaust VEX 2 2 or 3 A17 Galvanized Steel Lab Waste and Vent System LW, LV -see hydrostatic testing section above, in addition, perform all tests required by local plumbing code 3.20 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: CLEANING OF LABORATORY PIPING Cleaning Group #1 All Water Piping, Including Flushing Water And Quench Water Piping Systems. Fluid Used Clean water shall be the media for flushing the piping system Cleaning Cleaning accomplished by a flushing process. The flushing rate shall be equal to the design flow rate for lines in the system. If a process pump is in the system, the flushing rate shall be the pumping rate of the pump. If more than one pump is in the system, the highest pumping rate shall be the flushing rate. Flushing Duration Strainers and/or baskets shall be inspected frequently during the flushing operation and cleaned. Flushing operation shall continue until extraneous material is no longer accumulating in the strainer or basket at the discharge point. After the completion of flushing, the system shall be drained completely and returned to the pre-cleaning condition. Disinfection • Water piping systems shall be thoroughly disinfected with a solution containing no less than 50 parts per million of available chlorine. Chlorinating materials shall be either liquid chlorine or sodium hypochlorite solution, shall be introduced into the system and drawn to all points in the system. Disinfection solution shall be allowed to remain in system for 24 hours, during this time, valves and faucets shall be opened and closed several times. After disinfection, solution shall be flushed from the system with clear water until residual chlorine content is no greater than 0.2 parts per million. • Bypass all building filters. • Perform chlorination prior to heating the domestic hot water system. Run circulation pumps on the domestic HW system shall be supervised by Owner and performed by approved chemical testing laboratory and results sent to the Architect or Architect's representative for verification. • Testing laboratory shall submit a summary of test procedure for approval prior to any work performed. Work shall be in accordance with Owner's requirements. Subcontractor shall provide valves required to disinfect water supply system in part as required by phasing of construction and to provide isolating valves and draw-off valves for proper containment, phasing and flushing. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PIPING FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226113 - 24 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Cleaning Group #2 Non-Critical Lab Service Piping Fluid Used Clean hot water at 140 deg F, then purge with clean , dry oil free air Cleaning Cleaning accomplished by a flushing process. The flushing rate shall be equal to a velocity of 4 fps in all portions of the piping system. Flushing Duration Strainers and/or baskets shall be inspected frequently during the flushing operation and cleaned. Flushing operation shall continue until extraneous material is no longer accumulating in the strainer or basket at the discharge point. After the completion of flushing, the system shall be drained completely and returned to the pre-cleaning condition. Purge • Before blowing out the system, all welds shall be hammered repeatedly to loosen internal scale prior to the blowing out operation. Purge with oil free air. • Insure that the discharge point is at a safe location. All non-essential personnel shall be kept clear, via erected barriers, barricade, signs, etc., around the discharge area during the operation. • Allow a minimum of 10 minutes to purge out the system, especially the low points and dirt legs. Cleaning Group #3 Laboratory Services - Air, Co2, N2, Cylinder Gas General All piping used in the installation of these systems is specified as cleaned and capped with all fittings and valves cleaned and bagged, with rated brazed joints. Certified for oxygen service. Therefore this cleaning spec reflects the this qualified piping at the installation phase Insure that the discharge points during flushing, purging and blow down are at a safe location. All non-essential personnel shall be kept clear, via erected barriers, barricade, signs, etc., around the discharge area during the operation. Fluid Used Clean dry compressed air for initial flush and Nitrogen for final flush and/or Flow Testing: CGA P-9, oil free and dry. Pre - Flushing Flush the system with compressed air. Before blowing out the system, all welds shall be hammered repeatedly to loosen internal scale prior to the blowing out operation. Allow a minimum of 5 minutes to flush out the system, especially the low points and dirt legs Pre - Flushing Duration Strainers and/or baskets shall be inspected frequently during the flushing operation and cleaned. Flushing operation shall continue until extraneous material is no longer accumulating in the strainer or basket at the discharge point. After the completion of flushing, the system shall be drained completely and returned to the pre-cleaning condition. Flushing Flush the system with final flush fluid for a duration of 20 minutes. Verify that all initial flushing fluid is removed from system Re-Cleaning Interior cleaning section applies only to piping systems that must be re-cleaned or are not installed cleaned and capped or cleaned and bagged specification, i.e. NFPA 99 requirements. Also this is to be done where brazing qualifications were not followed • Clean laboratory gas tube and fittings, valves, gages, and other components of oil, grease, and other readily oxidizable materials as required for oxygen service according to CGA G-4.1. • Wash laboratory gas tubing and components in hot, alkaline-cleaner-water solution of sodium carbonate or trisodium phosphate in proportion of 1 lb 0.453 kg. of chemical to 3 gal. 11.3 L of water. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PIPING FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226113 - 25 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Cleaning Group #3 Laboratory Services - Air, Co2, N2, Cylinder Gas • Scrub to ensure complete cleaning. • Rinse with clean, hot water to remove cleaning solution. • Clean the system after flushing by using an alkaline cleaning solution such as 0.2 percent by weight of ALCONOX • Once-through circulation with the heated (150 deg F) cleaning solution for two hours. After flushing, drain the system completely • Fill and flood the system with the heated (150 deg F) cleaning solution. Allow 15 minutes contact time. Drain the spent solution. Repeat at least twice with fresh batch of the cleaning solution. • Rinse the system after cleaning with hot (150 deg F) clean water for at least one hour. Do not re-circulate the rinse water. Make sure each use point is flushed thoroughly. Purge • Blow-dry the system with hot (120 deg F), 0.22 micron filtered and oil-free compressed air for at least half hour. • Purge the system with high purity (99.99 percent+ pure) nitrogen gas. Volume for the nitrogen purge shall be 5 times the volume of the piping system. • After the nitrogen purge, the piping system shall be filled with the source gas and isolated. 3.21 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: TESTING OF LABORATORY PIPING A. General 1. Submit proposed test procedures, recording forms, and test equipment for review before testing. 2. Notify Architect and authorities involved at least 48 hours before testing and inspection. 3. Test and adjust plumbing systems as specified and as required by authorities that have jurisdiction. Perform tests recommended by manufacturers of materials and equipment; this requirement may be waived by Architect. 4. The Piping systems shall be subjected to testing fluid as noted and shall hold tight at the pressure head stated for the time interval required without adding air or water. While any system is being tested, required head or pressure shall be maintained until joints are inspected. Tests shall be witnessed by inspector having jurisdiction and the Architect with 48-hour notice given these authorities. Equipment, material and labor required for testing of various systems or part thereof shall be provided by Plumbing Contractor. 5. Before date of acceptance, furnish Architect with certificates of testing and inspection indicating approval of authorities having jurisdiction and conformance with requirements of Contract Documents. 6. Supply all materials, labor and power required for testing. Make preliminary tests and prove work satisfactory. Repair defects disclosed by tests or, if required by the Architect, replace defective work with new work without additional cost to the Owner. Pipe insulation shall be installed only after satisfactory completion of the pressure test. 7. Note: All gases necessary for testing, cleaning and commissioning compressed gas piping systems shall be furnished to complete the tests outlined below in the testing and cleaning section of this specification 8. All tests shall be observed by a representative of the Owner. This Contractor shall be responsible for supplying the bottled gas, gauges, adapters, analyzer and all other Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PIPING FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226113 - 26 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 necessary equipment to conduct these tests. Final testing, outlet flow analysis, outlet concentrations, pressure verification and overall system operation shall be performed and certified by an independent approved gas testing laboratory. 9. This Contractor to submit test report and results to Architect/Engineer or his representative for verification. Also, this Contractor is to submit to the Architect for approval, the testing laboratory to be used for the gas certification. The submission is to include a complete listing and sequence of the proposed testing procedure to be used including which standards are to be followed, which order the outlets are to be tested, the parameters of the flow tests, and the equipment to be used to perform the tests. 10. The following include cleaning and service tests. The following does not preclude further testing required as part of the material specs such as radiographs, X-ray testing, et al. 11. Do not paint, cover or conceal work before testing, inspecting and obtaining approval; this includes backfilling and application of insulation. 12. Costs of repairs and restoration of work of other trades and of existing building surfaces or material damaged during cleaning or testing shall be borne by trade performing cleaning or testing. 13. No tests shall be started until systems have been cleaned as described under cleaning paragraph. Provide temporary piping and connections for testing, flushing, or draining systems to be tested. 14. Repair or replace leaks, damage and defects that result from tests to like new condition. Remove and replace defective materials with acceptable materials. 15. Piping and joints shall be made tight without caulking. Continue tests until systems operate without adjustments and repair to equipment or piping. 16. Provide testing instruments, force pumps, gauges, equipment and labor necessary to conduct tests. Instruments used for testing and balancing shall have been calibrated within six months before balancing. Instrument calibration shall be certified. 17. Each automatic on/off valve and control valve shall be enabled to the fully open position, unless a by-pass line around the valve is included in the piping system to allow application of pressure to both sides of the valve. 18. One or more calibrated pressure gauges shall be installed in the piping system for indication of the test pressure. 19. Minimum pipe metal temperature shall NOT be below 39 deg F (4 deg C) during the testing period for freeze protection. 20. Submit six (6) copies of complete testing and balancing report to Architect for review. B. Pressurized Piping Systems 1. Leak tests shall be conducted in accordance with ANSI applicable codes and as specified herein. 2. Before piping of various systems has been covered or furred in, piping systems shall be tested tight for 1 hour under hydrostatic pressure 1-1/2 times system working pressures but no greater than test pressure of 150 psig. 3. Equipment shall be valved off or removed during test if equipment pressure rating is less than test pressure. 4. Retest systems after leaks are repaired within Contract Price. C. Gravity Piping Systems: Test under water pressure at heads specified in Plumbing Codes. Fill pipe lines with water to top of 5 ft. vertical section of pipe, or to level of top of vent pipe; maintain head pressure for 30 minutes. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PIPING FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226113 - 27 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. Associated medical gas systems such as Vivarium Oxygen, CO2, Nitrogen, and medical vacuum, shall be tested as specified in this Section under the requirements of NFPA 99C. E. Equipment – all systems 1. Prove capacity and performance of each piece of equipment by field tests as specified herein in various paragraphs. Equipment and instruments required for tests, as well as additional thermowells or gauge connections shall be installed at no additional cost to Owner. 2. Qualified representative of equipment manufacturer shall be present. Architect may witness tests, if he so desires. 3. Pressure vessels factory-tested by manufacturer in accordance with all applicable industrial regulatory codes, regulations and standards shall be excluded from the pressure testing at the job site. 4. Pumps, compressors, safety valves, rupture discs, self-contained regulators and packaged equipment units factory-tested by manufacturer shall be excluded from pressure testing at the job site. 5. Equipment and items excluded for cleaning and pressure testing shall be by-passed, disconnected, and blind-flanged or removed from the piping system. 6. Inspection for leakage shall be performed when the piping system is under the testing pressure specified for the system. 7. Pumps shall be tested to check impeller trim and operating characteristics. Following data shall be recorded and submitted to Architect for review. a. Flow at operating conditions where flow Venturi or orifices are installed in system. b. Shutoff pressure required to check impeller trim. c. Discharge pressure at operating conditions. d. Suction pressure at operating conditions. e. Motor amperage on each phase at operating conditions. F. Hydrostatic Tests for Drainage Piping: 1. Allowable leakage is a maximum of 50 gal./inch of nominal pipe size per mile of pipe, during 24-hour period. 2. Close openings in system and fill with water. 3. Purge air and refill with water. 4. Disconnect water supply. 5. Test and inspect joints for leaks. 6. Air Tests for Drainage Piping: Comply with UNI-B-6. 7. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. 8. Submit separate reports for each test. 9. Replace leaking sewerage piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified. G. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect assembled neutralization systems and leak-detection systems and their installation, including piping and electrical connections, and to assist in testing. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PIPING FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226113 - 28 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 H. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. I. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. J. Chemical-waste piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. K. Prepare test and inspection reports. L. Testing Of Piping Systems : Testing Group #1 Hydrostatic Pre-testing • Flow restriction, such as flow nozzles and orifices, which may interfere with filling, venting, or draining of the line shall be removed from the line and replaced with temporary spool pieces. • Piping systems for vapor, air and gases shall be provided with additional, temporary supports to take the weight or the hydrostatic pressure imposed by the test liquid. • Spring hanger support for pipelines shall have travel stops inserted. • Expansion joints shall be provided with temporary restraint for the additional load on equipment. • The preferred location for the test pressure gauge is at the lowest point of the piping system for liquid service and at the highest point for steam or gas service. Fluid Used • Only clean water shall be used for pressure test. A suitable filter is required in the supply line to remove foreign matters, such as sand, rust, or other particles present in the test water. • De-ionized water system shall be used for piping classified for pure and RODI sanitary process application. It is contractor’s responsibility to furnish portable de-ionized water package (ion exchange bottles) to produced required water quality if central pure water is not available. Water temperature during the test shall not exceed 100ºF Test Pressure Pressurize the fluid in the closed system to 150 psig; or 1.5 times the design pressure for the system, whichever is the greater. Test • After identifying the limits of the system to be tested, open all high point vents and connections that can serve as vent during filling of the lines in the system. • Slowly fill the entire system with the testing fluid. • When fluid is discharged from a vent line, close the vent valve to stop the discharge. • After the entire system is filled, allow it to reach the temperature of the test fluid. • 100 percent absence of visual evidence of leakage from lines in the system shall be required for acceptance of the installation. Tighten leaky joints, if possible. • Tests shall be for a four-hour duration, during which time piping shall show no leaks and during which time no sealing of leaks will be permitted. Any equipment not capable of withstanding test pressures shall be suitably isolated from the test pressure. • If a leak is due to defective workmanship in the installation and cannot be stopped, location of the leak shall be marked and identified. Chemicals Necessary chemicals shall be introduced with the water during pressure test to Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PIPING FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226113 - 29 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Testing Group #1 Hydrostatic prevent any corrosion potential as a result of raw water contact with the internal pipe surface. Coordinate with the Water Treatment Sub-subcontractor for the proper chemicals to be used. Final product • At the end of the test period, fluid in the system shall be drained completely. Contractor shall return the piping system to its pre-test condition. • Contractor shall review with owner or its representative for any rework required to repair leaks detected in the test. Owner or its representative shall determine if retesting is required. Costs for the repair and retesting shall be borne by the contractor. Documentation The Test Form for the selected piping system shall be filled-out, signed and dated by the contractor and owner or its representative witnessing the test as the acceptance document for filing in owner’s documentation file for the project. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PIPING FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226113 - 30 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Testing Group #2 Pneumatic Pre-testing • Flow restriction, such as flow nozzles and orifices, which may interfere with filling, venting, or draining of the line shall be removed from the line and replaced with temporary spool pieces. • Piping systems for vapor, air and gases shall be provided with additional, temporary supports to take the weight or the hydrostatic pressure imposed by the test liquid. • Spring hanger support for pipelines shall have travel stops inserted. • Expansion joints shall be provided with temporary restraint for the additional load on equipment. • The preferred location for the test pressure gauge is at the lowest point of the piping system for liquid service and at the highest point for steam or gas service. Fluid Used Gas for the test shall be clean, dry, oil-free air or nitrogen or compressed air. If other test gas is used, it must be nonflammable, nontoxic and not be detrimental to the piping materials or the personnel involved in the test. Prior approval of the alternate test gas must be obtained from owner or its representative. Test Pressure Pressurize the fluid in the closed system to 50 psig; or 1.5 times the design pressure for the system, whichever is the greater. Natural Gas systems shall be subject to test procedures and pressures as outlined in 248 CMR Massachusetts Fuel Gas Code. Test • After identifying the limits of the system to be tested, close all vents to close or isolate the piping system • When the piping system is pressurized to the final pressure, squirt a soapy solution to each joint in the piping system. Appearance of bubbles around a joint shall indicate a leaky joint. Tighten the joint, if possible, to stop the leak. • 100 percent absence of visual evidence of leakage from lines in the system shall be required for acceptance of the installation. • If a leak is due to defective workmanship in the installation and cannot be stopped, location of the leak shall be marked and identified. • At the end of the test period, test gas in the system shall be relieved completely. Contractor shall return the piping system to its pre-test condition. Chemicals N/A Final product • At the end of the test period, fluid in the system shall be drained completely. Contractor shall return the piping system to its pre-test condition. • Contractor shall review with owner or its representative for any rework required to repair leaks detected in the test. Owner or its representative shall determine if retesting is required. Costs for the repair and retesting shall be borne by the contractor. Documentation The Test Form for the selected piping system shall be filled-out, signed and dated by the contractor and owner or its representative witnessing the test as the acceptance document for filing in owner’s documentation file for the project. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PIPING FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226113 - 31 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Testing Group #3 Hydrostatic Pre-testing • Flow restriction, such as flow nozzles and orifices, which may interfere with filling, venting, or draining of the line shall be removed from the line and replaced with temporary spool pieces. • Spring hanger support for pipelines shall have travel stops inserted. • Expansion joints shall be provided with temporary restraint for the additional load on equipment. • The preferred location for the test pressure gauge is at the lowest point of the piping system for liquid service and at the highest point for steam or gas service. Fluid Used Only clean water shall be used for pressure test. A suitable filter is required in the supply line to remove foreign matters, such as sand, rust, or other particles present in the test water. Test Pressure Pressurize the fluid in the closed system to 90 psig; or 1.5 times the design pressure for the system, whichever is the greater. Test • After identifying the limits of the system to be tested, open all high point vents and connections that can serve as vent during filling of the lines in the system. • Slowly fill the entire system with the testing fluid. • When fluid is discharged from a vent line, close the vent valve to stop the discharge. • After the entire system is filled, allow it to reach the temperature of the test fluid. • 100 percent absence of visual evidence of leakage from lines in the system shall be required for acceptance of the installation. Tighten leaky joints, if possible. • Tests shall be for a four-hour duration, during which time piping shall show no leaks and during which time no sealing of leaks will be permitted. Any equipment not capable of withstanding test pressures shall be suitably isolated from the test pressure. • If a leak is due to defective workmanship in the installation and cannot be stopped, location of the leak shall be marked and identified. Chemicals Necessary chemicals shall be introduced with the water during pressure test to prevent any corrosion potential as a result of raw water contact with the internal pipe surface. Coordinate with the Water Treatment Sub-subcontractor for the proper chemicals to be used. Final product • At the end of the test period, fluid in the system shall be drained and flushed completely with clean water. Contractor shall return the piping system to its pre-test condition. • Contractor shall review with owner or its representative for any rework required to repair leaks detected in the test. Owner or its representative shall determine if retesting is required. Costs for the repair and retesting shall be borne by the contractor. Documentation The Test Form for the selected piping system shall be filled-out, signed and dated by the contractor and owner or its representative witnessing the test as the acceptance document for filing in owner’s documentation file for the project. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PIPING FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226113 - 32 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Testing Group #4 Pneumatic Pre-testing • Flow restriction, such as flow nozzles and orifices, which may interfere with filling, venting, or draining of the line shall be removed from the line and replaced with temporary spool pieces. • Piping systems for vapor, air and gases shall be provided with additional, temporary supports to take the weight or the hydrostatic pressure imposed by the test liquid. • Spring hanger support for pipelines shall have travel stops inserted. • Expansion joints shall be provided with temporary restraint for the additional load on equipment. • The preferred location for the test pressure gauge is at the lowest point of the piping system for liquid service and at the highest point for steam or gas service. Fluid Used Gas for the test shall be clean, dry, nitrogen from cylinders. If other test gas is used, it must be nonflammable, nontoxic and not be detrimental to the piping materials or the personnel involved in the test. Prior approval of the alternate test gas must be obtained from owner or its representative. Test Pressure Pressurize the fluid in the closed system to 150 psig; or 1.5 times the design pressure for the system, whichever is the greater. Hold system pressure for 24 hours. Test • After identifying the limits of the system to be tested, close all vents to close or isolate the piping system • Supply test gauges at source and end point of system. There shall be no (zero) drop in pressure for 24 hours. • When the piping system is pressurized to the final pressure, squirt a soapy solution to each joint in the piping system. Appearance of bubbles around a joint shall indicate a leaky joint. Tighten the joint, if possible, to stop the leak. • 100 percent absence of visual evidence of leakage from lines in the system shall be required for acceptance of the installation. • If a leak is due to defective workmanship in the installation and cannot be stopped, location of the leak shall be marked and identified. • At the end of the test period, test gas in the system shall be relieved completely. Contractor shall return the piping system to its pre-test condition. Chemicals NA Final product • At the end of the test period, fluid in the system shall be drained completely. Contractor shall return the piping system to its pre-test condition. • Contractor shall review with owner or its representative for any rework required to repair leaks detected in the test. Owner or its representative shall determine if retesting is required. Costs for the repair and retesting shall be borne by the contractor. Documentation The Test Form for the selected piping system shall be filled-out, signed and dated by the contractor and owner or its representative witnessing the test as the acceptance document for filing in owner’s documentation file for the project. 3.22 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: THIRD PARTY TESTING FOR LABORATORY PIPING A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections of Laboratory Compressed-Air, CO2, N2 and other installed inert compressed gas piping in facilities and to prepare test and inspection reports. B. Tests and Inspections: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PIPING FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226113 - 33 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Laboratory compressed gas Testing Coordination: Perform tests, inspections, verifications, and certification of laboratory compressed-air and gas piping systems concurrently with tests, inspections, and certification of laboratory compressed air and gas piping] and laboratory vacuum piping systems. 2. Preparation: Perform the following Installer tests according to requirements in NFPA 99 and ASSE Standard #6010: a. Initial blow down. b. Initial pressure test. c. Cross-connection test. d. Piping purge test. e. Standing pressure test for positive-pressure laboratory compressed-air piping. f. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 3. System Verification: Perform the following tests and inspections according to NFPA 99, ASSE Standard #6020, and ASSE Standard #6030: a. Standing pressure test. b. Individual-pressurization or pressure-differential cross-connection test. c. Valve test. d. Master and area alarm tests. e. Piping purge test. f. Piping particulate test. g. Piping purity test. h. Final tie-in test. i. Operational pressure test. j. Laboratory air purity test. k. Verify correct labeling of equipment and components. 4. Testing Certification: Certify that specified tests, inspections, and procedures have been performed and certify report results. Include the following: a. Inspections performed. b. Procedures, materials, and gases used. c. Test methods used. d. Results of tests. C. Remove and replace components that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\226113_LABORATORY PIPING SYSTEMS.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 LABORATORY GAS MANIFOLDS 226115 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 226115 - LABORATORY GAS MANIFOLDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes 1. General assembly descriptions 2. Cylinders and Test Gases 3. Performance requirements 4. Cylinder vent piping 5. Dual Crossover Manifold – Nitrogen Gas 6. Dual Crossover Manifold – Carbon Dioxide Gas 7. Single Cylinder Regulator Assembly –Nitrogen Gas 8. Laboratory Closet Changeover Panel - Duplex 9. Laboratory Point Of Use Compact Regulator Panels 10. Incubator Panels – Double Stacked 11. Laboratory gas master annunciator 12. Laboratory compressed gas cylinder storage racks 13. Manifold room monitors 14. Nitrogen and CO2 HEPA Filter 15. Compressed Air HEPA – Triple Bank 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. VFC: Variable-frequency controller(s). B. UL: Underwriter Laboratories. C. FM: shall refer to Factory Mutual Engineering testing and acceptance requirements. D. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 LABORATORY GAS MANIFOLDS 226115 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manifold system. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Prerequisite EQ 1: Documentation indicating that units comply with ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment." 2. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. 3. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For solvent cements and adhesive primers, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. 4. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.2: For paints and coatings, documentation including printed statement of VOC content and chemical components. 5. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.4: For hardwood plywood particleboard MDF composite wood products used in documentation indicating that product contains no urea formaldehyde. 6. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4: For adhesives sealants composite wood products used inside the weatherproofing system, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." C. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting attachment details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Detail fabrication and assembly of racks, anchoring systems, and rack anchors 4. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. D. Product Schedule: For. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For package system. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer Applicator manufacturer fabricator testing agency factoryauthorized service representative or specialist. B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 LABORATORY GAS MANIFOLDS 226115 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. C. Product Test Reports: For each, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. D. Preconstruction Test Reports: factory tests results. (FAT) E. Source quality-control reports. F. Field quality-control reports. (SAT) G. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For gas systems to include in emergency, operation, operation and maintenance manuals. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: B. Fabricator Qualifications: C. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. D. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated and accredited by IAS or ILAC Mutual Recognition Arrangement as complying with ISO/IEC Standard 17025. E. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member Company of NETA or an NRTL. F. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code – Steel G. Submit Welders Certification: 1. Welder and welding procedure certificate of compliance with ASME Section IX, including welding procedure specifications 2. Procedure qualification records H. Submit Weld Procedure Specifications (WPS) and Data Sheets for each size of tube, each position, and each type of tube-to-fitting weld involved for production and tack welds. 1. Welding shall not begin until welding procedures have been reviewed and approved by the OWNER representative. I. Welding technique such as weld deposition sequence, welding program-settings, electrode positioning, etc., shall be indicated in the Weld Procedure Data Sheet. J. Submit welding schedules for each tube size, which includes the required setting for each and every control of the automatic welding equipment K. Submit NDT inspection procedures, boroscopic procedures and certification program. Reference applicable ASNT recommended practices. L. Submit welding samples 1. Provide acceptable, marginal and rejectable butt weld samples of tube-to-fitting end welds (two samples). 2. These samples will be used for comparison to accept or reject production welds. M. Close-out Submittals: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 LABORATORY GAS MANIFOLDS 226115 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Submit welding log for each weld. 2. Welding log shall give details of weld, including weld number, IS0 or orthographic drawing number, welder’s stamp or ID, machine number, date, time and the inspector’s signature. 3. Specific welding qualifications. N. Pipe and Pressure-Vessel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 1.8 CERTIFICATIONS A. All welders using WPS procedures shall be qualified in accordance with ASME Section IX. The Contractor shall maintain the Record of Welder Performance Qualification Tests (WPQ). B. All personnel engaged in the non-destructive inspection and testing of welds shall be certified in accordance with ANSI/ASNT CP-189. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products under provisions of Section 01600 - Material and Equipment. B. Tubing and pipe shall be lifted using nylon straps. Care shall be taken to keep the material free from grease and oil. C. Do not allow stainless steel materials or tools to contact carbon steel materials. D. All HPSS materials shall be shipped and stored in a flat horizontal position in their original factory sealed bags. Store tubing, fittings, and valves by type in a sheltered, humidity controlled location away from exposure to direct sunlight and protected from freezing. 1. For level 5 through level 6 gases, all cutting and cleaning operations shall be conducted in a Class 100 clean room environment. The contractor shall submit to the Owner’s Representative their written clean room protocol and records verifying training of all personnel working in the clean room. E. Fabrication of piping sections shall be carried out as much as possible in the clean room space to minimize the number of welds to be performed in the field. F. Open ends of all tubes, fittings, valves, etc., shall be kept bagged and sealed until final connections are made. Wood or cloth plugs or any type of tape on or in open ends are not acceptable, shall not be used, and will be cause for the Owner to call for potentially contaminated sections of piping removed and replaced in accordance with the Field Quality Control sections of Part 3. G. All material shall be handled and stored throughout the progress of the job so as to prevent contamination. H. All material that becomes contaminated in handling shall not be re-used, but shall be segregated from the new material under supervision of the Owner’s Representative. I. If the high purity gas system becomes contaminated due to fabrication techniques, the Contractor shall clean it to meet the requirements of delivering high purity gas according to the most recent standard, or replace the system at the Contractor’s expense. J. Inspect per approved HPSS material and component inspection procedures all HPSS material and components. Inspection records shall be submitted to the Owner’s Representative on a weekly basis. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 LABORATORY GAS MANIFOLDS 226115 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 K. Notify the Owner’s Representative upon component delivery to the job site for inspection. Installation of any component prior to the Owner’s Representative inspection is prohibited. L. If the inner bag of any component is found punctured or has otherwise lost its purge, or the end caps have become displaced, the component shall be rejected and replaced at the Contractors expense. M. All rejected components shall be marked accordingly as contaminated and immediately removed from the job site. N. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage. O. Protect bearings and couplings against damage. P. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions for handling. 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. 1.11 WARRANTY A. General: periods are stipulated here for this specification section. Generally manufacturers standard warranty applies, however, longer warranty periods, if required, are stipulated in part 2 where each product is specified. The warranty periods stipulated in part 2 take priority over standard manufacturer’s warranty periods specified in part 1. B. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard warranty – submit a form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within manufacturers standard specified warranty period. Manufacturers standard warranty must include minimum durations below C. Minimum Durations and Special Warrantees: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Structural failures including shell. 2. Warranty period shall begin on the date of project substantial completion stipulated by the Architect and/or the Construction Manager PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL ASSEMBLY A. Furnish and install Manifold Systems as shown on the plumbing drawings. B. Warranty for Crossover Manifold Assemblies 1. See Part 1 C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following 1. Concoa 2. Linde/Spectra 3. Airgas 4. Prax Air Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 LABORATORY GAS MANIFOLDS 226115 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 5. Beacon Madeas 6. Western Enterprises D. Work Included 1. All manifold piping, headers, switching controls to be furnished and installed as a complete package 2. Manifold racks shall be furnished and installed with support chains and/or brackets. Include support system racks and chains. 3. Control wiring from control panels, regulator valves, pigtails to duplex outlets, whips etc. are to be furnished with the manifold systems under this section such that all manifold systems function fully. 4. All regulators, header piping, relief piping, valves alarms and appurnatures necessary for full function of the system 5. Alarms and Warning Systems: install alarms and component control wiring to alarms such that alarm systems function locally. a. The controller shall have the ability to communicate common field-bus protocols Supply all instrument communication transition hardware to the Building Management System (BMS) installer such that all alarms are reported to the Building Management System E. Related Work in Other Sections: 1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Electrical power connections to fixed control cabinet or duplex receptacles F. Capacities, Numbers of Cylinders per side and Specific Manifold Components : 1. See Plumbing Drawing Schedule Sheet for further information 2.2 CYLINDERS AND TEST GASES A. Cylinders: The building Owner shall provide gas cylinders for connection to the manifold systems B. Gases: The Owner shall provide gas for contractor testing and fill of the systems 2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Gas systems shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. The term "withstand" means "the system will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit system will be fully operational after the seismic event." 2. Component Importance Factor is 1.5. B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 LABORATORY GAS MANIFOLDS 226115 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.4 CYLINDER VENT PIPING A. The tables below indicates the pipe and joint selection applicable for manifold system vents only. For compressed gas system piping see Division 22. PIPE CLASS S3 MILL FINISH STAINLESS Item PIPE Welded, drawn and annealed type 316 l stainless steel. Sch 10, EFW stainless steel mill finish ASTM a312 beveled ends. FITTINGS Type 316 stainless steel, sizes 1 inch and larger to be butt weld ends conforming to ANSI B31.1 and B31.2, sizes 3/4 inch and smaller may be Swage-Lock, Gyrolok, or Parker tube fittings. Fittings and pipe to be by one manufacturer to assure proper fit and system conformance. JOINT Field fabricated by TIG method with argon purge on back side weld, flanged connections to valves, equipment, and where indicated on the contract drawings. FLANGES Class 150, ff, galvanized backup flanges suitable for stub ends, forged CS, ASTM a-105. GASKETS 1/16 inch thick PTFE gasket suitable for class 150 and 300 flanges, Garlock G your style 3545. BOLTING Zinc plated heavy hex bolts, alloy steel, ASTM 193 gr. B7 with heavy hex nut ASTM A194 GR 2H. BUTTERFLY VALVE Sizes 2-1/2 inches or greater 150#, type 316 stainless steel stem, disc and split body. Resilient EDPM valve seats, stainless steel handle, provide flanges type end connections. Neles Jamesbury MODEL 815WH-11-36-00-TT. GATE VALVE Class 150 stainless steel gate, 316, OS&Y design, flanged ends, double disc ball and socket wedge, PTFE packing and gasket. Crane model 117 or equal. CHECK VALVE Class 150, stainless steel swing check valve, 316, flanged ends, PTFE gasket. Crane model 377 or equal. AIR BLOW CHECK VALVE 100# rated, type 316 stainless steel body, seat and spring mechanism, with filter and screen, flanged end connections, adapter for quick coupler. REMARKS INSTRUMENT CONNECTION Heat trace and insulate exterior piping. See insulation section. NOTES: 1. Temperature: TRI-FLO B1 - metallic dial thermometer. 2. All fittings, tube, valves, etc. Are to be supplied by one manufacturer to assure continuity and proper fit of system. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 LABORATORY GAS MANIFOLDS 226115 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Pipe Class: S7 Service: lab gas manifold vent Material: 304 stainless steel Service Limits Primary ANSI Class: 150 Coefficient of linear expansion 9.61 x 10-6 inches per inch R Corrosion Allowance 0.00 inch PIPE AND FITTINGS Piping 1/2 inch – 3/4 inch Schedule 40S 1 inch – 8 inches Schedule 10S ASME B36.19M Seamless, A-312, TP 304L Fittings Weld Fittings ASME B16.9 Butt weld, seamless, or welded, A-403, WP304 Type 304L stainless steel, sizes 1 inch and larger with butt weld ends conforming to ANSI B31.1 and B31.2, sizes 3/4 inch and smaller may be threaded and cleaned prior to service (see note 4D). Fittings and pipe to be by one manufacturer to assure proper fit and system conformance. Joints Fabrication Stainless steel welding shall be performed with the gas tungsten arc (GTAW) process. The weld joint shall be protected in the inside of the pipe with an inert gas purge maintained until the weld joint has been completed Weld Maintain proper gap while tack welding the pipe and connections in position, so that a proper gap is made for a full penetration weld. No strain shall be placed on the weld during welding. Small, sound tack welds which penetrate to the bottom of the welding groove may become a part of the finished weld. The deposited weld metal shall have essentially the same physical and chemical properties as the base material. All welds shall have complete penetration and fusion, including single welded butt joints without backing strips. Longitudinal joints shall be full penetration butt welds. All flux and slag shall be completely removed from the surface of all welds (before the next successive layer is applied), by grinding or brushing, using materials of a composition which will not contaminate the surface of the welds. Any defects shall be removed from each completed pass. The completed weld shall be cleaned of slag and spatter metal on the surface. The Contractor shall maintain separate tools to be used for stainless steel only. No tools used on any other metal may be used on any stainless steel pipe, pipe hangers or equipment. All filler metals shall be properly packaged and stored to prevent damage and deterioration of the materials prior to and during application in welding. Coated electrodes shall be stored in heated cabinets. Mechanical Joint Tri-clamp Flange Flange 150# roll on, 304 SS, fitting sized for OD tubing, for 1 inch - 8 inch flange sizes. Class 150, full face and galvanized backup flange rings suitable for stub ends, forged CS, ASTM a-105. Gasket 1/16 inch thick PTFE gasket suitable for class 150 and 300 flanges, Garlock G style 3545. Bolting Zinc plated heavy hex bolts, alloy steel, ASTM 193 gr. B7 with heavy hex nut ASTM A194 GR 2H. Instrument Connection Weld-o-let or pipe-o-let VALVES Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 LABORATORY GAS MANIFOLDS 226115 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Pipe Class: S7 Service: lab gas manifold vent Material: 304 stainless steel Service Limits Primary ANSI Class: 150 Coefficient of linear expansion 9.61 x 10-6 inches per inch R Corrosion Allowance 0.00 inch Ball Valve 2000 psig MA WP at 100 deg F, socket weld ends, stainless steel ball, body, and trim forged to ASTM A-182 or cast to ASTM A-351 or equal, floating valve, PTFE seat, graphite packing, fire safe design and trim, lever, regular and full bore. N1BCO KM 590-S6-R-66FS-LL or equal. Check Valve 1440 psig MAWP at 100 deg F, socket weld ends, 316 SS disk and stem. Stainless steel body and bonnet forged to ASTM A-182 or cast to ASTM A-351 or equal. NOTES: 1. All fittings, tube, valves, etc., are to be supplied by one manufacturer to assure continuity and proper fit of system 2. All pipe fittings and valves shipped to jobsite capped or bagged ready for clean installation 3. Hydrostatically test all pipe systems with air or water at 100 psig for one hour. Document all results 4. Testing and Cleaning: a. The system shall have passed the hydrostatic pressure test specified in the previous section. Water used to make the hydro test may be used in the cleaning procedure b. Isolate or remove all metal parts of the system that are not 300 series stainless steel. c. Valves that discharge to the atmosphere which cannot or will not be purged during cleaning must be cleaned separately. d. Flushing water should be run from low point drains through strainers to check for circulating particles. Continue to drain low points until no additional particles are found in the strainers. Add additional water to maintain sufficient water volume as needed. e. Flush the system with hot water. Flush all valves that discharge to the atmosphere once for two minutes at a moderate flow rate. Rinse to neutral pH system. f. Completely blow the piping system down with clean dry oil free air or nitrogen. Assure that all headers, branches and components are dry and water free. g. The documentation for the system, including all data sheets shall be placed in the "Cleaning Documentation Section" of the documentation file. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 LABORATORY GAS MANIFOLDS 226115 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.5 DUAL CROSSOVER MANIFOLD – DUAL CROSSOVER MANIFOLD - NITROGEN GAS A. Designed to furnish an uninterrupted flow of gas. Semi-automatic manifold system consisting of two high purity, diffusion resistant pressure regulators in a single body, primary changeover regulator design (complete with a single reset knob). The primary Changeover regulator shall be connected to an active and reserve cylinder. The delivery pressure of one regulator is set higher than the other, causing the first regulator to flow gas, while holding the second regulator closed. When the gas in the first bank is exhausted, the second bank regulator will begin to flow gas. Changeover regulator inlet pressure gauges indicate pressure in each bank. Pressure switches for each bank sense declining pressure in the cylinder, and activate an alarm when a predetermined pressure is reached. The primary bank of cylinder(s) are replaced and regulator delivery pressures are reversed, causing a reverse changeover when the second bank is exhausted. Cycle is repeated. A line regulator installed on the outlet of the primary changeover regulator compensates for the changeover pressure variances while providing constant setting outlet pressure without pressure fluctuation. B. Semi-Automatic Cylinder Manifold Systems 1. Cylinder regulator type 316L stainless steel bar-stock body and diffusion resistant 316L diaphragms that exceed the 10,000 cycle requirement of CGA E-4 and incorporate encapsulated seats that filter 10-micron or larger particulate, capsule with seats PCTFE for inlet regulators, metal to metal diaphragm seals, Filter 10 micron 316 mesh, high purity diffusion resistant type and stainless steel diaphragm, rated at 3,000 psig maximum inlet pressure. 2. Check valves are integral to the CGA connection with Viton "O" rings. 3. Gauges: Analog, 2-1/2 inch, stainless steel, Bourdon 4. Inlet: 0-4,000 psig 5. Outlet: 0 -200 psig 6. Relief Valve: (Inter stage): Seat type with adjustable setting, seals Viton, Body is stainless steel, Spring 302 stainless steel, poppet 304 stainless steel, outlet connection 1/4 inch FNPT, relief factory setting at 500 psig, Contractor, extend vent piping to atmosphere. 7. Isolation valves: Diaphragm type, 316L Stainless steel bar stock body, diffusion resistant pack-less, spring-less, type with multi turn handle, Cv 0.1, diaphragm Elgilloy, seats PCTFE, seals metal to metal. 8. Cylinder Leads: Armor cased, dual braid stainless steel, convoluted 316L stainless steel inner core, flexible type and 316L CGA 580 connection gland with integral check valve, 3,850 psig maximum working pressure. 36 inches in length. a. Note: Monel Inner Core specific for Oxygen service 9. Pressure Switches or Transducers: Pressure switch descending indicating gauge type for each cylinder bank. (Two required per changeover manifold). Provide required wire for system operation. Switch senses decreasing cylinder pressure to activate alarm, nonpowered dry contact, 10 watts dc, 12 VAC max power OR alternate Pressure Transducers: Compact, enclosure IP-67, wetted parts stainless steel, output 4- 20 mA, 0- 6,000 psi pressure range, external pressure port 1/4- NPT male, Electrical Connection 3 pin Packard, accuracy 0.5 percent FS for less than 1,000 psi, temperature range -40 to 257 Deg F, oxygen cleaned. Qty. 2 required. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 LABORATORY GAS MANIFOLDS 226115 - 11 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 10. L Line Pressure Regulator: Stainless steel 316L bar-stock body and diffusion resistant 316L diaphragms that exceed the 10,000 cycle requirement of CGA E-4 and incorporate encapsulated seats that filter 10-micron or larger particulate, capsule with seats PCTFE for inlet regulators, metal to metal diaphragm seals, Filter 10 micron 316 mesh, high purity diffusion resistant type and stainless steel diaphragm, rated at 3,000 psig maximum inlet pressure, 0-100 psig adjustable outlet pressure 11. Aluminum Back Mounting Plate: 22 inches W x 16 inches H; Thickness is 3/16 inch, clear anodized and functionally labeled, or Mounting Bracket: stainless steel x gauge, 7.24 inches W x 11 inches H, four 7/16 inch mounting slots 12. Entire assembly shall be Helium leak tested inboard 1x10-8 He cc/sec. with a mass spectrometer, dead end pressure tested for 24 hours. 13. Basis of Design: a. Concoa 527 Series b. Linde/Spectra Gas Model F791200200 c. Linde HIQ Redline A208-SS d. Beacon Medaes Model PDC3000-CGA580-SS-X-SSH-AB-PRV e. Number of cylinders per side = 2 2.6 DUAL CROSSOVER MANIFOLD - CARBON DIOXIDE GAS A. Description: Designed to furnish a continuous uninterrupted supply of high purity gas. Differential semi-automatic manifold system consisting of two high purity, diffusion resistant pressure regulator design (complete with a single reset knob). The primary changeover regulator shall be connected to an active and reserve cylinder. The delivery pressure of one regulator is set higher than the other causing the first regulator to flow gas, while holding the second regulator closed. When the gas in the first bank is exhausted, the second bank regulator will begin to flow gas. Changeover regulator inlet pressure gauges indicate pressure in each bank. Pressure transducers for each bank sense declining pressure in the cylinder and activate an alarm when a pre-determined pressure is reached. The primary bank of cylinder(s) are replaced and the regulator delivery pressures are reversed, causing a reverse changeover when the second bank is exhausted. Cycle is repeated. A line regulator installed on the outlet of the primary changeover regulators compensates for the changeover regulator variances while providing constant setting outlet pressure without pressure fluctuation. Integral heaters in the line regulator shall ensure a high flow of CO2 which can be prone to freezing due to flow or Joule Thompson effect. B. Semi-Automatic Cylinder Manifold Systems 1. Service: CO2 Specialty Gases – See Drawings for Service & Number of Cylinders 2. Primary Changeover Regulator: Model 400 series, brass bar-stock body and diffusion resistant 316L diaphragms that exceed the 10,000 cycle requirement of CGA E-4 and incorporate encapsulated seats that filter 10-micron or larger particulate, capsule with seats PCTFE for inlet regulators, internal seals PTFE, diaphragm seals, Filter 10 micron sintered bronze, high purity diffusion resistant type; rated at 3,000 psig maximum inlet pressure, 0-100 psig outlet pressure. Cv 0.1 3. Check valves: Integral to the CGA connection with. Body brass, Viton “O” rings ( see line h) 4. Gauges: Analog, compound dual scale, Brass case, 2 inch, stainless steel bourdon 5. Inlet: 30 inches-0-1,000 psig Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 LABORATORY GAS MANIFOLDS 226115 - 12 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 6. Outlet: 30 inches-0-200 Psig 7. Relief Valve (Inter stage): Seat type with adjustable setting, seals Viton, Body is brass, spring 302 stainless steel, poppet 304 stainless steel, outlet connection 1/4 inch OD compression fitting, relief factory setting at 500 psig, Contractor extend relief piping to atmosphere. 8. Isolation Valves inlet and outlet: Diaphragm type, brass bar stock body, diffusion resistant pack-less, spring-less, type with multi turn handle, Cv 0.1, diaphragm Elgilloy, seats PCTFE, seals metal to metal 9. Three 50 watt heaters to maintain gas flow up to 165 LPM. Shall include power cord 12 inch in length for 120 Volts 10. Cylinder Leads*: Armor cased, dual braid stainless steel, convoluted stainless steel inner core, flexible type and brass CGA connection gland with integral check valve, 3,850 psig maximum working pressure. 36 inches in length. 11. *Monel Inner Core specific for Oxygen service. 12. Pressure Transducers: Compact, enclosure IP-67, wetted parts stainless steel, output 4- 20 mA,0- 6,000 psi pressure range, external pressure port 1/4 inch NPT male, Electrical Connection 3 pin Packard, accuracy 0.5 percent FS for less than 1,000 psi, temperature range -40 to 257 Deg F, oxygen cleaned. Qty. 2 a. (Flammable Gases Require Intrinsic Safety) 13. Line Pressure Brass steel bar-stock body and diffusion resistant 316L diaphragms that exceed the 10,000 cycle requirement of CGA E-4 and incorporate encapsulated seats that filter 10-micron or larger particulate, capsule with seats PCTFE for inlet regulators, metal to metal diaphragm seals, Filter 10 micron bronze sintered metal, high purity diffusion resistant type and stainless steel diaphragm, rated at 3,000 psig maximum inlet pressure, 0-100 psig outlet pressure 14. Mounting Bracket: stainless steel x gauge, 7.24 inches W x 11 inches H, four 7/16 inch mounting slots. 15. Operating Temperature Range -40 Deg F to 140 Deg F. 16. Entire assembly shall be Helium leak tested inboard 1x10-8 He cc/sec. with a mass spectrometer 17. Manifold Header(s), for number of cylinders as indicated on drawings, brass, modular design, expandable, metal to metal field assembled joints, station valves: brass barstock, seat PCTFE, stems 303/304 stainless steel, diaphragms Elgiloy, Pigtails: flexible armor cased, dual braid stainless steel, convoluted, flexible type and 316L CGA connection gland with integral check valve, 3,850 psig maximum working pressure. 36 inches in length. 18. Basis of Design: a. Concoa Model 526CD b. Linde/Spectra Gas Model F2401 with heater c. Linde HIQ Redline A208 SS with heater d. Beacon Madaes PDC3000-CGA320-#-SS-AB-SSH-PRV-LDV with heater e. Number of cylinders per side = 2 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 LABORATORY GAS MANIFOLDS 226115 - 13 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.7 SINGLE CYLINDER REGULATOR ASSEMBLY – NITROGEN GAS A. Single Station regulator assembly is designed for applications that do not warrant multiple cylinder operation. The regulator assembly shall be complete with a regulator, multi-turn outlet valve, stainless steel armored cased flexible pigtail hose, with a CGA connection with integral check valve B. Regulator: Model 400 shall reduce source pressure to a lower working pressure in two stages while maintaining the purity of the gas. It shall be constructed of stainless steel bars stock steel material with metal to metal seals of the diaphragm. Inboard leak integrity shall be 1x10-9 He cc/sec. The regulator shall incorporate an encapsulated 0.1 Cv seat with a 10-micron stainless mesh filter. The diaphragm shall be convoluted and made of 316L. The regulator shall limit diaphragm stroke by incorporating a stop. high pressure diffusion resistant type, rated at 3,000 psig maximum inlet pressure, 0-100 psig outlet delivery pressure range. 1. Gauges: Gauges: Analog, compound dual scale, steel case, 2 inch, stainless steel bourdon a. Outlet: 30 inch-0-100 Psig 2. Isolation Valves: Diaphragm type, stainless steel bar stock body, diffusion resistant packless, spring-less, type with multi turn handle, Cv 0.1, diaphragm Elgilloy, seats PCTFE, seals metal to metal. With 1/4 inch OD tube compression fitting. 3. Relief Valve: Inter stage, Seat type with adjustable setting, seal Viton, Body is stainless steel, spring 302 stainless steel, poppet 304 stainless steel, outlet connection 1/4 inch OD compression fitting, relief factory setting at 500 psig, Contractor extend piping top atmosphere. 4. Pressure Switch / Transducer: Qty. 1 Switch Descending indicating contact gauge type, dual Scale 0-4,000 psig, dial size 2.5 inches, case 304 stainless steel, internals 316L , wetted parts 316 SS bourdon & socket, field settable, accuracy +/- 1 percent of full scale. maximum power 10 w / 10 VA, switching current 0.5 amp power or Pressure Transducers: Compact, enclosure IP-67, wetted parts stainless steel, output 4- 20 mA,0- 6,000 psi pressure range, external pressure port 1/4- NPT male, Electrical Connection 3 pin Packard, accuracy 0.5 percent FS for less than 1,000 psi, temperature range -40 to 257 Deg F, oxygen cleaned. Qty. 2 a. (Flammable Gases Require Intrinsic Safety) 5. Cylinder Leads: Armor cased, 316L stainless steel convoluted inner core, flexible type and 316L CGA 580 connection gland with integral check valve, 3,850 psig maximum working pressure. 36 inches in length. * 6. Stainless Steel mounting plate: 7. Entire assembly shall be leak checked to 10(-8) SCCS inboard with a Mass Spectrometer and dead end pressure checked 24 hours for creep. 8. Basis of Design: a. Concoa Model 529 b. Linde/Spectra Gas Model F3743101015 c. Linde Redline S-201-SS d. Beacon Madaes PSB-CGA580-1-SS-AB-SSH 2.8 LABORATORY CLOSET CHANGEOVER PANEL: DUPLEX A. Assembly Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 LABORATORY GAS MANIFOLDS 226115 - 14 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Point-of-use panel shall have adjustable control for point-of-use gases. 2. Number of Cylinders per side: One (1). 3. Total number of cylinders: Two (2) 4. Mount all components on a clear anodized aluminum or stainless steel panel. 5. Regulator bodies, tubing fittings and valves shall be mounted on clear anodized aluminum faceplate with multi-turn valve handles and regulator controls readily accessible on the panel front. 6. The panel shall include a 1/4 turn high purity diaphragm pack-less outlet valve, stainless steel high purity regulator, line pressure gauge for outlet pressure monitoring and 1/4 inch swage outlet. 7. Each gas shall be labeled on the panel face. 8. All panel tube components shall be 316 stainless steel rated for high purity use. Oxygen panel tubes shall be brass or copper pigtails 9. Inlet Connection: Manufacturer to furnish per the gas specified 10. Color: Manufacturer's standard designations. 11. Relief Valve: Pipe relief to atmosphere safe outlet B. Basis of Design: 1. Nitrogen, Carbon Dioxide, Argon” (Stainless Steel): Linde/Spectra Model 7910 Series Line Regulator 2. Oxygen: (Brass) Linde Spectra Model 7900 Series 3. Beacon Model MCS-CGAXXX-2-SS-AB-SSH Manual Changeover Regulator Panel 4. Concoa 2.9 LABORATORY POINT-OF-USE COMPACT REGULATOR PANELS A. Linde/Spectra gases Model 3700-006 point of use panel for stacked incubators. 1. Regulator: Model 7530 High Purity, Brass, with stainless steel diaphragms/Kel F Seats, 0-25 Psig 2. Number of panels: One (1). 3. Gauge: 5600-A Series Bourdon Tube, Brass, 2-1/2 inch Diameter 4. Valves: 4100 Series, Diaphragm, Brass, Ke1-F. 5. Inlet: Compression Fitting, Brass, 1/4 inch OD 6. Outlet: Compression Fitting, Brass, 1/4 inch OD 7. Mounting: Mounted on a clear anodized aluminum panel 12 inches x 10 inches 8. Testing: Helium Leak Checked and Dead End Pressure Tested B. Basis of Design: 1. Linde/Spectra F3751xxxx 2. Beacon Madaes PCP-CGA320-50 Regulator Panel 3. Concoa Model 55S1200-01-311 4. Number Connections – 1, 2, or 4 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 LABORATORY GAS MANIFOLDS 226115 - 15 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.10 INCUBATOR PANELS - DOUBLE STACKED A. CO2 Point of use panel for double stacked Incubator (One Outlet) 1. Application: a. Panel shall include 300 series, single stage, four-port, stainless steel barstock regulators with 316L stainless steel diaphragms; stainless steel barstock outlet diaphragm valves with Elgiloy diaphragms; maximum inlet pressure of 3000 PSIG (210 BAR) at each station; 2. Full functional test and spectrometric helium leak check as an assembly; compliance with CGA E-4 (including 10,000+ cycle life); 3. Cleanliness exceeding CGA G-4.1; proof pressure 1.5x maximum working pressure 4. Burst pressure at least 4X maximum working pressure (CRN-listed). 5. Gas station (Carbon dioxide; rear inlet; left outlet): 6. maximum delivery pressure of 15 PSIG (1 BAR); 7. Electrical: 30VAC-0-30 PSI/-100VAC-0-200 kPa 8. Dual-scale delivery pressure gauge 9. Two shut-off valves with 1/4-inch stainless steel hose barb outlets. 10. Basis of Design: a. Concoa Model 55S1100-01-311 o B. CO2 Point of use panel for double stacked Incubator (Two Outlets) 1. Panel shall include 300 series, single stage, four-port, stainless steel barstock regulators with 316L stainless steel diaphragms; stainless steel barstock outlet diaphragm valves with Elgiloy diaphragms; maximum inlet pressure of 3000 PSIG (210 BAR) at each station; 2. Full functional test and spectrometric helium leak check as an assembly; compliance with CGA E-4.1 (including 10,000+ cycle life); 3. Cleanliness exceeding CGA G-4.1; proof pressure 1.5x maximum working pressure 4. Burst pressure at least 4X maximum working pressure (CRN-listed). 5. Gas station : (Carbon dioxide; rear inlet; left outlets): 6. maximum delivery pressure of 15 PSIG (1 BAR); 7. Electrical: 30VAC-0-30 PSI/-100VAC-0-200 kPa 8. Dual-scale delivery pressure gauge 9. Delivery: Dual-scale delivery pressure gauge; and two shut-off valves with 1/4-inch stainless steel hose barb outlets two shut-off valves with 1/4-inch stainless steel hose barb outlets. 10. Basis of Design: Concoa Model 55S1200-01-311 o 2.11 LABORATORY GAS MASTER ANNUNCIATOR A. Provide central gas annunciator panels at the following locations: 1. Central Cylinder Room: Refer to drawings 2. Floor Cylinder Gas Closets: Refer to drawings Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 LABORATORY GAS MANIFOLDS 226115 - 16 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. The annunciator shall monitor cylinder contents in the manifolds. The manifolds will be changeover type and/or single cylinder set up. 4. Each manifold shall have 1 or 2 pressure switches which provide a dry contact. Pressure transducers may also be substituted in place of pressure switches. Pressure transducers shall provide a 4-20 M amp signal to the annunciator(s). 5. The annunciator channel shall depend upon the number of manifolds to alarm per given area. Each channel will be designated a gas. 6. The channel shall provide a visual light signal and associated audible horn. When the cylinder is getting low, the light will go on and the horn will sound. A silence button on the box to silence the horn shall be provided. 7. Large LCD pressure displays shall be provided for digital bank pressure readout; dry contact outputs; 93db audible alarm; and 90-264V universal voltage input with international blade kit, Polycarbonate resin (flame retardant UV stabilized. Dimensions: 4.72 inches x 8.7 inches x 2.5 inches B. Provide a gas annunciator panel in each area where cylinder gas manifolds are furnished 1. Each manifold shall be capable of report to the Building Management System C. Power Requirements: 120 VAC, 50-60 Hz, plug-in. D. Basis of Design: 1. Concoa Model 570025-01-000 Altos II or Advantium 16 multichannel 2. Linde/Spectra Gas Model F9900B8A 3. Beacon Model RAA Series (RAA-8 or RAA-4) 2.12 LABORATORY COMPRESSED-GAS-CYLINDER STORAGE RACKS A. Wall Storage Racks: Fabricate racks with chain restraints for upright cylinders as indicated or provide equivalent manufactured wall racks. Basis of Design: Beacon Madeas CWB wall brackets Freestanding Storage Racks: Fabricate racks as indicated or provide equivalent manufactured storage racks similar to USA Safety Cylinder Storage Stands. C. See drawings for details and schedule 2.13 MANIFOLD ROOM MONITORS A. Warranty for Room Monitors 1. See Part 1 B. Furnish each manifold room with an oxygen depletion monitor mounted in the manifold room at 1.3 meters (4 feet) AFF in a position where cylinders will not contact the sensor or meter. Monitors indicate oxygen low level at 19.5 percent and a second indication at 18 percent. Provide audible and visual indication inside the room. C. Provide audible and visual indicator outside door at 1.5 meters (5 feet) AFF to alert operator prior to entry. Label “Oxygen Low – Do Not Enter” D. Provide dry contacts from each alarm monitors for connection to the Building Management System (BMS). Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 LABORATORY GAS MANIFOLDS 226115 - 17 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION A. Each manifold package shall be pre-wired, pre-piped and factory tested prior to shipment. B. Manifold system gas vent piping: furnish and install relieving vents from gas manifold and cylinder banks per the schedule of piping below: 3.2 SAFETY RELIEF VENT PIPING AND DISCHARGE A. Schedule of Discharge Piping from manifolds SERVICE TAG PSIG TEMP PIPE SPEC NOTES Laboratory Inert Gas Manifold Vent IGV 200 250 A10 Type L Copper, Soldered Joints see pipe spec 221110 for table Laboratory Flammable Gas Manifold Vent FGV 200 240 S7 Mill Finish Stainless Steel standard TIG weld joint Pure N2 and CA vent piping N2/CA 200 240 A10 Type L Copper, Soldered Joints see pipe spec 221110 for table Laboratory Gas vents (Exposed To View) 250 300 S3 Stainless Steel, TIG weld with argon on back side 1. See the pipe tables referenced above in specification Division 22 for laboratory piping systems. B. Relief Discharge Piping 1. Discharge piping shall be simple and direct. a. All discharge piping should be run as direct as is practicable to the point of final release for disposal. b. The Valve must discharge to a safe disposal area. c. Pressure Safety Valve. The weight of the discharge piping shall be carried by separate support devices and be properly braced to withstand reactive thrust forces when the Valve relieves. The Valve shall also be supported to withstand any swaying or system vibrations. d. Fittings or pipe having a smaller inside diameter than the Valve outlet connections shall not be used. e. Do not plug open vents. When the fluid is flammable, toxic or corrosive, the Bonnet vent should be piped to a safe location. 2. Vent line termination points a. All cases: The discharge is required to be at least 15 feet above ground level, and at least 20 feet from any window, door, or ventilation port. b. Side Walls: The discharge should be terminated in a manner that prevents discharge from being directly sprayed at individuals nearby and prevents debris from entering and clogging the discharge port. Discharge end point shall be one pipe size larger than the discharge line, cut at a 45 degree angle and shall be fit with a bird and insect screen. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 LABORATORY GAS MANIFOLDS 226115 - 18 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 c. For relief lines that are greater than or equal to 2 inch, furnish a specially designed diffuser such as a Whisper-Flo Vent Diffuser. d. Above Roofs: The discharge outlet of the vent pipe should be piped to the closest location where free discharge of the safety device will not pose a safety hazard to personnel. For a roof line termination, the vent should be no less than seven (7) feet above roof line terminated at 90 Deg. The top of the vent line should be cut at a 45 degree angle to dissipate the discharge thrust of the gas, prevent capping of the pipe, and to visually signify that it is a safety valve vent line. Provide support steel and/or support guywire. These shall be configured to keep the above roof arm from moving due to discharge forces. e. Label each relief line terminated as “gas type - Pressure Safety Relief Discharge” with the type of gas 3. Common Discharge Headers A. Where multiple units tie to a common discharge header, the header shall be sized such that it is one pipe size larger than the cross sectional area of the combined pipes feeding into it. Check valves may be used to ensure unidirectional flow in the pipes between the unit and the header; however, take into account the pressure loss through a check valve when designing the discharge piping. 1. Sizes a. Sizes are noted on the drawings. b. Minimum size is 1 inch nominal. c. Where sizes are not indicated, the discharge piping for each pressure relief valve should generally be one pipe size larger than the nominal pipe size of the pressure relief valve outlet for inert gases and two pipe sizes larger for flammable gases, but in no case less than 1 inch. d. In all cases, pressure relief valve discharge piping should be sized so that any back pressure that may exist or develop will not reduce the capacity of the pressure relief valve below that required to protect the equipment, follow manufacturers recommendations for sizes 2. Label all vent piping in accordance with type and color code requirements for the gas in Division 22. 3.3 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in for piping to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation. B. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and for suitable conditions where system will be installed. C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.4 PREPARATION A. Install equipment on flat slab, attach support systems to wall 3.5 CYLINDER GAS SYSTEMS A. Cylinder gases shall be installed with minimum number of fittings. Changes in direction requiring turns of offsets with radii less than five times pipe or tubing outside diameter shall be Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 LABORATORY GAS MANIFOLDS 226115 - 19 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 made by bending tubing. Bends shall be free from appreciable flattening, buckling or thinning of tube wall. B. Tubing shall be cut accurately to system measurements obtained at site and installed without springing or forcing. Tubing shall be protected against mechanical injury in manner satisfactory to authorities that have jurisdiction. C. All tube, fittings and valves are to be factory cleaned and capped/bagged for shipment. Protect all parts on the jobsite during construction. Cap unfinished ends of the piping system at the end of each work day. 3.6 INSTALLATION A. Equipment Installation: Install equipment with compliant seismic-restraint device. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 22. B. Piping Restraint Installation: Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section Division 22. C. Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in Division 22. D. Comply with requirements for general-duty valves specified in Division 22 E. Install continuous-thread hanger rods and spring hangers with vertical-limit stop of size required to support associated piping weight. Pipe shall not bear on the equipment. 1. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Division 22. Fabricate brackets or supports as required. 2. Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Division 22. F. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. 3.7 SERVICE COMPONENT INSTALLATION A. Install compressed-air, nitrogen and CO2 pressure control panel in walls. Attach to substrate. B. Install laboratory manifolds on concrete base or anchored to wall anchored to substrate. C. Install all lab gas cylinders and connect to manifold piping. D. Install manifolds with seismic restraints. 3.8 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify equipment and associated piping per Division 22 requirements 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative: 1. Perform visual and mechanical inspection. 2. Leak Test: After installation, charge booster pump and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 LABORATORY GAS MANIFOLDS 226115 - 20 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start system to confirm proper operation. 4. Performance qualification - take adequate readings to assure the equipment meets the criteria outlined in the plumbing schedule sheet 5. Commission and start equipment 6. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. C. The system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: CLEANING, TESTING AND START-UP A. Factory Qualifications: All manifold systems shall be factory cleaned and factory tested B. Installation Qualifications: Clean installation practices shall be followed when connecting piping to manifold outlets C. Performance Qualifications 1. Contractor shall provide start-up service of the system by an authorized factory-trained manufacturer's representative for each manifold. Start-up service shall include inspection of overall installation, initial start-up and running of the system, confirmation of all automated and alarm functions and operational and maintenance instructions to facility personnel. D. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.11 ADJUSTING A. Adjust hardware moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. B. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 3.12 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\226115_LABORATORY GAS MANIFOLDS.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMPRESSED-AIR EQUIPMENT FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226119 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 226119 - COMPRESSED-AIR EQUIPMENT FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Performance requirements 2. General requirements for air compressors 3. Compressed air equipment index 4. Template package - science building lab air 5. Inlet air filters 6. Motors 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Actual Air: Air delivered at air-compressor outlet. Flow rate is compressed air delivered and measured in acfm. B. Laboratory Air Equipment: Compressed-air equipment and accessories for nonmedical laboratory facilities. C. Medical air equipment includes medical dental instrument and healthcare laboratory air compressors and accessories for healthcare facilities. D. Standard Air: Free air at 68 deg F and 1 atmosphere before compression or expansion and measured in scfm. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For air compressors, compressed-air dryers, and compressed-air purification systems. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting. 4. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMPRESSED-AIR EQUIPMENT FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226119 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency. B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For air compressors, accessories, and components from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculations. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. C. Field quality-control reports. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For compressed-air equipment to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Air-Compressor, Inlet-Air Filter Elements: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed, but no fewer than two (2) units. 2. Belts: Two for each belt-driven compressor. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Laboratory Air Equipment for Nonmedical Laboratory Facilities: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Laboratory Compressed Air 1. Oil free air stream 2. 35 scfm delivery 3. 100 psig pressure B. Compressed Air for Nitrogen Generators 1. Oil free air stream 2. 70 scfm delivery into generator 3. 130 psig Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMPRESSED-AIR EQUIPMENT FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226119 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.2 MANUFACTURERS REQUIREMENTS A. Compressor Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified 1. Atlas Copco 2. Ingersol Rand 3. Powrex B. Desiccant Dryer Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified 1. EMSE Corporation. 2. Ingersoll-Rand. 3. Parker Hannifin Corp. 4. Pioneer Air Systems, Inc. 5. Sahara Products 6. Wilkerson Corporation C. Filter Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified 1. Ingersoll-Rand. 2. Parker/Balston Inc, div of Parker 3. Parker Hannifin Corp. 4. Pioneer Air Systems, Inc. 5. Sahara Products 6. Wilkerson Corporation 7. Pneumatic Products Corporation DHA (Series), 2.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR AIR COMPRESSORS A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Description: Factory-assembled, -wired, -piped, and -tested; electric-motor-driven; air-cooled; continuous-duty air compressors and receivers that deliver air of quality equal to intake air. C. Control Panels: Automatic control station with load control and protection functions. Comply with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508. 1. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 12 control panel unless otherwise indicated. 2. Motor Controllers: Full-voltage, combination-magnetic type with under voltage release features and motor-circuit-protector-type disconnecting means and short-circuit protective device. 3. Control Voltage: 120-V ac or less, using integral control power transformer. 4. Motor Overload Protection: Overload relay in each phase. 5. Starting Devices: Hand-off-automatic selector switch in cover of control panel, plus pilot device for automatic control. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMPRESSED-AIR EQUIPMENT FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226119 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 6. Automatic control switches to alternate lead-lag air compressors for duplex and sequence lead-lag air compressors for multiplex air compressors. 7. Instrumentation: Include discharge-air and receiver pressure gages, air-filter maintenance indicator, hour meter, air-compressor discharge-air and coolant temperature gages, and control transformer. 8. Alarm Signal Device: For connection to alarm system to indicate when backup air compressor is operating. D. Receivers: Steel tank constructed according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. 1. Pressure Rating: At least as high as highest discharge pressure of connected air compressors and bearing appropriate code symbols. 2. Interior Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating. 3. Accessories: Include safety valve, pressure gage, automatic drain, and pressure regulator. E. Mounting Frame: Fabricate base and attachment to air compressor and components with reinforcement strong enough to resist movement during a seismic event when base is anchored to building structure. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMPRESSED-AIR EQUIPMENT FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226119 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.4 OIL FREE ROTARY SCREW AIR COMPRESSORS OIL FREE ROTARY SCREW AIR COMPRESSOR EQUIPMENT TAG CA-C-1 NUMBER REQUIRED Two Packaged units with sound-attenuation enclosures. DESCRIPTION Oil-free, rotary-screw type with non-lubricated helical screws and lubricated gearbox, and of construction that prohibits oil from entering compression chamber Positive displacement, rotary screw (or rotary lobe) air compressor capable of delivering 100 percent oil-free air. Inlet pre-filter and silencer, inter-coolers and aftercoolers, drive motor, control system. Packaged and mounted on structural frame and acoustic enclosure. Factory pre-assembled, pre-wired and tested for single point field connections. PERFORMANCE CONDITIONS Inlet: 14.5 psia, 80 deg F, 0 percent RH (Rated for 115 F ambient) Outlet: 150 psig, 100 deg F, saturated, oil-free air. OPERATING ARRANGEMENT Mounting: Freestanding. Two with pipe headers, controls and receiver for a duplex lead/lag operation. MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION Cast iron casing. Machined steel rotors and shaft. Asbestos free gasket materials. CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION Monitoring equipment shall be integral to each compressor unit and shall include: Intercooler, discharge and oil pressure indicators; first & second stage outlet temperature indicators; high air inlet vacuum indicator, low oil pressure alarm, high outlet air temperature alarms, hour meter, power on light, motor overload light, auto operation light. Automatic shut-off safety devices shall include: low oil pressure, high first stage temperature, high second stage temperature, motor overload. Emergency stop button. Proportional loading logics. CONTROL SEQUENCING Provide manufacturer-supplied sequencing control panel. Sequence control system shall start/stop; load/unload connected compressors according to field-adjustable receiver pressure settings. Compressor lead/lag sequence shall be shifted based on manual selection, day-based sequence, or hour-based sequence. Controller shall provide selectable manual and automatic control modes. Maintain receiver pressure by full load/unload or proportional loading. The controller shall have the ability to communicate common field-bus protocols, (BACnet, Modbus, Profibus, and LON). Provide a communication expansion card installed inside controller. Coordinate card type and data connection with division 23 controls vendor CONTROL OPTIONS Automatic power outage restart. Microprocessor control sequences. Remote trouble alarm contact. DRIVER High efficiency TEFC electric motor. Heavy duty Class F insulation. 1.25 SF. VALVES AND CONNECTORS Per valve spec A-13. Flexible braided stainless steel connectors. PREFILTER/SILENCER Internal to system package. 5-micron replaceable paper cartridge filter element. ENCLOSURE Steel sound insulating enclosure for maximum 85 dBA @ 3 feet. COOLING MEDIA LUBRICATION Drive gear, bearings and timing gear spray lubricated. Oil pump direct-driven by main drive shaft. Integral sump. Threaded screw oil seal between gear box and rotors. Factory fill of bearing lubricant. ELECTRICAL 460 VAC, 3, 60 Hz, single field connection. Control voltage transformer shall be provided by the manufacturer. Wye-Delta reduced voltage starter. Fused disconnect shall be provided under Division 16 (one per motor). RATED DUTY See Drawing Schedule Sheet OTHER Package with enclosure and single point electrical and piping connections. WARRANTY See Part 1 BASIS OF DESIGN MODEL NUMBERS FOR EQUALITY Atlas Copco Model ZT 22-10 Outlet pressure – 10 bar@96.6 cfm air flow, 30 HP Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMPRESSED-AIR EQUIPMENT FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226119 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.5 RECEIVER CA-R-1 A. Receivers: Steel tank constructed according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. 1. Pressure Rating: At least as high as highest discharge pressure of connected air compressors and bearing appropriate code symbols. 2. Interior Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating. 3. Accessories: Include safety valve, pressure gage, automatic drain, and pressure regulator. 4. Provide pressure relief valve - set point 170 psig 5. Provide auto drain Parker/Balston 20-613 with 120 VAC electrical input. Coordinate with division 26 for duplex power outlet at location Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMPRESSED-AIR EQUIPMENT FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226119 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.6 DESICCANT DRYERS AND FILTERS COMPRESSED AIR DESICCANT DRYER AND FILTER SYSTEM Equipment Tag CA-DD-1 Number Required two sets of twin towers Description Heatless regenerative desiccant air dryer with inlet pre-filters and outlet after-filters. Twin tower arrangement with all components and controls shall be factory pre-assembled and pre-wired for single-point connections in the field. Include dew point controlled purge, step-down transformers, disconnect switches, inlet and outlet pressure gages, thermometers, automatic controls, and filters. Performance Conditions Inlet: 150 psig, 100 deg F, saturated air. Outlet: -40 deg F pressure dewpoint. Regenerative Purge Flow Regenerative purge flow shall be counter-current to the on-line flow and shall not consume more than 17 percent of the inlet air. Materials of Construction Carbon steel with zinc chromate primer and epoxy paint finish. Controls and Instrumentation Fully automatic microprocessor based controller with 24 VDC power supply. NEMA 12 enclosure. Instrumentation shall include: local purge flow indicator, purge adjustment valve, 2-1/2 inch local pressure indicators, power on light, chamber drying indicator lights, moisture indicator, chamber temperature indicators, high humidity warning, depressurization, re-pressurization, solenoid valves. Controls and instrumentation shall be factory pre-wired and tested. Fail-safe mode: Any power interruption to the dryer shall not result in interruption of the air flow through the dryers. Heater Elements N/A Valves Pilot operated, full port poppet design. Elastomer seals. High-strength carbon steel, non-lubricated. Rated for 500,000 cycle operation without failure. Centrifugal Separator for each dryer – Parker/Balston WSOH8N with auto drain Prefilters CA-F-1 for each dryer – Parker/Balston Coalescing prefilter model 2278 NACE 1B1DX After filters CA-F-2 for each dryer – Parker/Balston .01 micron after filter model 2278 NACE 1B1DX Desiccant Media Factory fill of activated alumina powder. Desiccant Vessels ASME rated and stamped. 150 psi working pressure. Relief valve shall be provided for each tower. Desiccant fill and drain ports. Removable stainless steel perforated sheet inlet diffuser screen and desiccant bed support screen. Electrical 115 VAC, 1 phase , 60 Hz, single field connection. Control voltage transformer shall be provided by the manufacturer. Rated Duty Refer to drawing schedules Start-up & Warranty Equipment cost shall include start-up service by factory-authorized technician and twelve (12) month minimum warranty agreement for materials and workmanship. Other Provide dry contacts for customer alarm circuit. Provide dewpoint meter. Meter range: -100 deg F to +40 deg F 2.7 DEW POINT INSTRUMENT FOR COMPRESSED AIR FROM DESICCANT DRYERS Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMPRESSED-AIR EQUIPMENT FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226119 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 A. Symbol on P&ID DPI xxx AT xxx Field Wire BMS AHH ALL A. Air Quality – 1. Clean and Oil Free 2. Dry from Desiccant Machines - -80 to -40 deg F B. Dew point transmitter 1. Dew point scale : -100 deg F – 68 deg F (-80 deg C – 20 deg C) 2. Output: 4 – 20 mA 3. Pressure setting: 7 bar (absolute) 4. Minimum 9.8 foot shielded output cable 5. Installation accessory: 1/2 inch NPT adapter 6. User guide and calibration certificate 7. Basis of Design: Vaisala DMT 143 Miniature Transmitter C. Loop Powered External LCD Display 1. Four digit LED display 2. Manufacturers standard color 3. 4-20 mA loop powered 4. ABS plastic enclosure approximately 4 inch x 4 inch x 2 inch 5. Mount LCD display on piping within 6 feet of transmitter 6. Basis of Design: Noveval 302 4-digit bright red LED display D. Report to BMS 1. Data wiring to BMS by Division 23 2. Instrument to be capable of Modbus or LON protocol 3. Report alarm levels 2.8 MOTORS A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 22. B. Enclosure Materials: Cast iron C. Motor Bearings: D. Unusual Service Conditions: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMPRESSED-AIR EQUIPMENT FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226119 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 a. Ambient Temperature: b. Altitude: 0 above sea level. c. High humidity. d. Efficiency: Premium efficient. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean compressed-air equipment, accessories, and components that have not been cleaned for oxygen service and sealed or that are furnished unsuitable for laboratory air and medical air applications, according to CGA G-4.1, "Cleaning Equipment for Oxygen Service." 3.2 COMPRESSED-AIR EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. General Requirements for Compressed-Air Equipment Installation: B. Install compressed-air equipment to allow maximum headroom unless specific mounting heights are indicated. C. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces unless otherwise indicated. D. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations. E. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope. F. Install the following devices on compressed-air equipment: a. Thermometer, Pressure Gage, and Safety Valve: Install on each compressed-air receiver. b. Pressure Regulators: Install downstream from air compressors, dryers, purification units, and filter assemblies. c. Drain Valves: Install on after coolers, receivers, and dryers. Discharge condensate over nearest floor drain. G. Non-medical Laboratory Compressed-Air Equipment Installation: H. Install all compressed-air equipment, except wall-mounted equipment, on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Division 03. I. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic control devices specified in Division 22. J. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Division 22. a. Anchor air compressors to surface according to manufacturer's written instructions and seismic criteria applicable to Project. K. Medical Compressed-Air Equipment Installation: L. Install compressed-air equipment, except wall-mounted equipment, on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Division 03. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMPRESSED-AIR EQUIPMENT FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226119 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 M. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic control devices specified in Division 22. N. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Division 22. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements for water-supply piping specified in Division 22. B. Comply with requirements for drain piping specified in Division 22. C. Comply with requirements for compressed-air piping specified in Division 22. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance. E. Connect compressed-air piping to compressed-air equipment, accessories, and specialties with shutoff valve and union or flanged connection. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify nonmedical laboratory compressed-air equipment system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 22. B. Identify medical compressed-air equipment system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 22. C. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. E. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative. F. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. G. Testing Certification: Certify that specified tests, inspections, and procedures have been performed and certify report results. Include the following: a. Inspections performed. b. Procedures, materials, and gases used. c. Test methods used. d. Results of tests. H. Components will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. I. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. B. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Check for lubricating oil in lubricated-type equipment. D. Check belt drives for proper tension. E. Verify that air-compressor inlet filters and piping are clear. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMPRESSED-AIR EQUIPMENT FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226119 - 11 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 F. Check for equipment vibration-control supports and flexible pipe connectors and verify that equipment is properly attached to substrate. G. Check safety valves for correct settings. Ensure that settings are higher than air-compressor discharge pressure, but not higher than rating of system components. H. Check for proper seismic restraints. I. Drain receiver tank(s). J. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. K. Test and adjust controls and safeties. L. Prepare written report documenting testing procedures and results. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner’s maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air compressors, compressed-air dryers compressed-air purification units and compressed-air filter assemblies. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\226119_COMPRESSED AIR EQUIPMENT_LABORATORY FACILITIES.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VACUUM EQUIPMENT FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226219 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 226219 - VACUUM EQUIPMENT FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Performance requirements 2. Laboratory packaged rotary, dry claw vacuum pumps 3. Motors 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Actual Air: Air delivered at vacuum producer inlet. Flow rate is air measured in acfm. B. HVE: High-volume oral evacuation for dental applications in healthcare facilities. C. Laboratory Vacuum Equipment: Vacuum producers and accessories for nonmedical laboratory facilities. D. Standard Air: Free air at 68 deg F and 1 atmosphere before compression or expansion and measured in scfm. E. HVE: High Volume Oral Evacuation for surgical dental applications in healthcare facilities. F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), NEC National Electrical Code. G. American Society of Sanitary Engineers (ASSE) 6010 Professional Qualification Standards for Medical Gas System Installers. H. American Society of Sanitary Engineers (ASSE) 6030 Professional Qualification Standards for Medical Gas System Verifiers. I. ISO 1217 2009 Displacement Compressors - Acceptance Tests J. ISO 13485 Medical Devices - Quality management systems 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For vacuum producers. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VACUUM EQUIPMENT FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226219 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 4. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency. B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For vacuum producers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. C. Field quality-control reports. D. For Laboratory Vacuum plants include: 1. Package drawing indicating package style, dimensions when complete, method of disassembly and sizes of subsections for rigging and installation. 2. Compressor and package capacity expressed in inlet SCFM. 3. Lubrication method (if any). 4. Drive detail including adjustment method. 5. Motor including manufacturer, frame type, service factor, horsepower, current draw, and RPM. 6. Exhaust Air filters including type and replacement element. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For vacuum equipment to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Belts: Two for each belt-driven vacuum producer. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Laboratory Vacuum Equipment for Nonmedical Laboratory Facilities: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the vacuum equipment testing indicated, that is a member of the Medical Gas Professional Healthcare Organization or is an NRTL, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Qualify testing personnel according to ASSE 6020 for inspectors and ASSE 6030 for verifiers. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VACUUM EQUIPMENT FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226219 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Division 01 to design vacuum equipment mounting. B. All materials used shall be new and of the best grade and quality obtainable and workmanship shall be first class in every respect. Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with all Local, State or Federal codes. C. Provide all elements and accessories required for complete systems per NFPA 99 most recent edition. D. Contractor shall make all necessary connections to owner furnished equipment. E. Install all piping as shown on Drawings, as described herein and as described in Division 22, using methods of fabrication, grading, testing, repairing, cleaning and other procedures as described. F. Electrical power wiring for vacuum pump(s), shall be part of the electrical contract. Any equipment supplied by this contractor that requires additional electrical services shall be the responsibility of this contractor to supply these services. G. Vacuum Requirements: Note, pressures are expressed negative vacuum pressure in inches of Mercury (in HG) gauge and may be followed by metric conversion to mm HG/torr Application Delivered Vacuum Pressure to outlets Application Remarks General Laboratory 22 in HG (200 torr) Laboratory vacuum, Air Cooled 2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VACUUM PUMPS A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with UL 544, "Medical and Dental Equipment," for medical vacuum equipment. C. Description: Factory-assembled, -wired, -piped, and -tested; electric-motor-driven; air-cooled; continuous-duty vacuum pumps and receivers. D. Control Panels: Automatic control station with load control and protection functions. Comply with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508. 1. Control Voltage: 120-V ac or less, using integral control power transformer. E. Receivers: Steel tank constructed according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1; bearing appropriate code symbols. 1. Accessories: Include, vacuum gage, and drain, and for medical systems vacuum relief. F. Mounting Frames: Fabricate base and attachment to vacuum pump and components with reinforcement strong enough to resist movement during a seismic event when base is anchored to building structure. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VACUUM EQUIPMENT FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226219 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.3 LABORATORY PACKAGED ROTARY, DRY-CLAW VACUUM PUMPS A. Lab Vacuum Pumps Package System (VAC-VP-1): 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Global Vac LLC b. BeaconMedaes. c. Busch USA. d. EMSE Corporation. e. Allied Healthcare Products Inc. 2. System components - the system includes but is not limited to the following: a. Laboratory Vacuum system shall be furnished and installed for Vacuum System. The Laboratory system shall be comprised of the following equipment: 1) Laboratory Central Vacuum System with VFD control 2) Vertical Stack Mounted duplex Dry Running Rotary Claw 3) Galvanized Receiver (1) 4) Receiver monitors and controls 5) Controls: Control System. 6) Integral Exhaust silencers 7) Equipment skid 8) Space shall be allocated for future equipment as indicated on the drawings 3. Vacuum System a. Furnish one duplex laboratory central vacuum system consisting of two Busch Mink MM series, dry running rotary claw vacuum pumps mounted on skids in a vertical, stacked arrangement with control panel, variable frequency drives and a vertical ASME coded receiver. The complete vacuum system including electrical controls shall be designed, assembled, factory tested, and warranted by the vacuum pump manufacturer. The manufacturing facility must be ISO certified. 4. Vacuum Pumps a. Each vacuum pump shall be direct-driven through a shaft coupling by a 4 HP, NEMA C-face, premium-efficiency, TEFC electric motor wired for operation on a 460 volt, 60 hertz, 3 phase power supply. Belt drives shall not be permitted. The pumps shall be air-cooled and have absolutely no water requirements. Each vacuum pump shall include an integral vacuum relief valve set for 27 inch Hg (75 torr). The pumps shall be capable of operating continuously at up to 25 inch Hg over a frequency range of 20-60 Hz. b. Pumps shall be dry running, featuring two claw-type, non-contacting rotors and shall not require any sealing fluid, assuring virtually maintenance-free operation. The pumps shall require an oil change in the gearbox only, at approximately oneyear intervals. Each vacuum pump shall include a built-in silencer and a properly vented acoustic enclosure for maximum noise attenuation. The pumps shall include a built-in, anti-suck-back valve mounted at the pump inlet and be mounted on vibration isolators. 5. Vacuum Receiver and Piping Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VACUUM EQUIPMENT FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226219 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 a. All pumps shall be skid mounted in a vertical stacked arrangement that allows for future expansion to a quadruplex system. The pumps shall be connected to a common manifold and piped to a 120 gallon vertical receiver with a 2 inch NPT inlet on the side and a manual drain valve on the bottom. The receiver should be ASME code stamped and rated at 200 psig and full vacuum. A vacuum gauge and a vacuum transmitter shall be mounted on the receiver. The manifold shall be prepiped to accept a fourth vacuum pump. Each vacuum pump shall include an automatic ball-type isolation valve, an auto-purge assembly, a vacuum gauge, and a flexible connector between the pumps and manifold. Each pump shall be equipped with a 10 micron inlet filter for removal of particulates. b. Each pump shall be equipped with an automatic purge system to flush any gases from the pump to prevent condensation as the pump cools. The purge system shall include an air-actuated isolation valve, auto-purge assembly with purge air filters and solenoid bleed valve, and controls to operate a timed shutdown purge. 1) Furnish 80 psig compressed air for the valve actuators. 6. Control Panel a. The vacuum system shall be equipped with an expandable automatic alternating electrical control center consisting of: (2) IEC motor protectors with integral overload protection and pad-lockable disconnecting means; (1) low voltage control transformer with primary and secondary fuses; (2) hour meters; (2) ManualPurge/Stop-Auto switches with integral pump run lights; (1) emergency stop switch; (1) programmable controller; (1) door mounted, 6 inch color touch screen OIT for adjusting system set points and monitoring status; (1) set dry contacts for remote common alarm; (1) power distribution block for single-point power feed connection; (1) 24 VDC power supply for the tank-mounted pressure transmitter; all housed in a NEMA 4/12 enclosure. The assembly shall be UL 508 listed. The motor control center shall be configured for future expansion to a quadruplex system. The lead pump shall alternate on a timed basis to insure approximate equal run time for each pump. B. The controller shall have the ability to communicate common field-bus protocols, (BACnet, Modbus, Profibus, and LON), via optional communication expansion card installed inside controller. 1. The control panel shall report to the building BMS/BAC (Building Management or Building Automation) system 2.4 MOTORS A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 22. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE FOR VACUUM PUMPS Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VACUUM EQUIPMENT FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226219 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Equipment Tag No. Type Application Remarks Base Laboratory Dry Claw Vacuum Pump Package VAC-VP1 Skid Mounted duplex Central Laboratory vacuum Air Cooled Packaged Vacuum System 6 inch Housekeeping Pad on Concrete Floor 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean vacuum equipment, accessories, and components that have not been cleaned for oxygen service and sealed or that are furnished unsuitable for medical vacuum applications, according to CGA G4.1, "Cleaning Equipment for Oxygen Service." 3.3 VACUUM EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Equipment Mounting: 1. Install vacuum producers, except diaphragm vacuum pumps, Insert vacuum producer types on cast-in-place concrete equipment base(s). Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Division 03. 2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic control devices specified in Division 22. 3. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Division 22. B. Install vacuum equipment anchored to substrate. C. Orient equipment so controls and devices are accessible for servicing. D. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance. E. Install the following devices on vacuum equipment: 1. Thermometer, Vacuum Gage, and Pressure Relief Valve: Install on each vacuum pump receiver. 2. Drain Valves: Install on receivers and separators. Discharge receiver condensate over nearest floor drain. Discharge separator oral evacuation fluids by direct connection into sanitary waste piping system. 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements for water-supply piping specified in Division 22. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Comply with requirements for drain piping specified in Division 22. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. C. Comply with requirements for vacuum piping specified in Division 22. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance. E. Connect vacuum piping to vacuum equipment, accessories, and specialties with shutoff valve and union or flanged connection. F. Connect water supply to vacuum equipment that requires water. Include backflow preventer. Backflow preventers are specified in Division 22. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VACUUM EQUIPMENT FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES 226219 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.5 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify nonmedical laboratory vacuum equipment system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 22. B. Identify medical vacuum equipment system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 22. 3.6 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Check for lubricating oil in lubricated-type equipment. 3. Check belt drives for proper tension. 4. Verify that vacuum producer outlet piping is clear. 5. Check for equipment vibration-control supports and flexible pipe connectors and verify that equipment is properly attached to substrate. 6. Check safety valves for correct settings. 7. Check for proper seismic restraints. 8. Drain receiver and separator tank(s). 9. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 10. Test and adjust controls and safeties. B. Verify that vacuum equipment is installed and connected according to the Contract Documents. C. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and written installation requirements in electrical Sections. D. Prepare written report documenting testing procedures and results. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train. Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain vacuum producers. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\226219_VACUUM EQUIPMENT FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 NITROGEN GENERATION SYSTEM 226500 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 226500 - NITROGEN GENERATION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 specifications, apply to this section. B. Division 22 is included as an integral part of this section. C. Related sections include: 1. Division 26 for low voltage electrical power connectors and cables 2. Division 21 for fire protection 3. Division 03 for concrete work 4. Division 23 Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes 1. Pipe Tubes, Fittings and Valves 2. House Nitrogen Piping 3. Nitrogen Generation System 4. Nitrogen Flow Meter 5. Pressure Indicating Transmitters 6. Motors 7. Source Quality Control 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to specification Division 01 for submittal procedures for procedure requirements and also to the other related documents referenced in this section. B. Related Sections: Following description of work is included for reference only and shall not be presumed to be complete: 1. Division 01 for provision of waste management. 2. Division 01 for provision of general LEED requirements and forms. C. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturers and technical product data including rated capacities and efficiencies of selected model clearly indicated; operating weights; furnished specialties and accessories; and installation and start-up instructions. a. Air compressors b. Dryers and filters c. Tanks d. Nitrogen Generators e. Nitrogen filters Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 NITROGEN GENERATION SYSTEM 226500 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 f. Oxygen monitors g. Pressure reducing valves h. Flow meters i. Miscellaneous instrumentation, equipment and fittings D. Shop Drawings: All shop drawings shall be submitted with a shop drawing cover sheet. See Division 01. 1. Submittal package shall include for all equipment (where applicable): a. Cover letter. b. Owner name and plant location. c. Equipment name and identification number on the Drawings. d. Purchase order number and date. e. Manufacturer name and plant location. f. Equipment specification including utility requirements, connection sizes and types. g. Equipment drawings including plan and elevation, dimensions, and parts identification. h. Equipment model, serial number, shop order number and date of fabrication. i. Internal finish specifications. j. External finish specifications. k. Drawing title, number, revision number and date of issue. l. P&ID with parts list. m. Pre-start-up check procedures. n. Quality test procedures. o. Equipment weights. p. Electrical schematics with parts list. q. Exceptions list to specification (if applicable). r. Exceptions list to vendor specification (if applicable). E. Closeout Submittals 1. General a. Revise final drawings and documents to incorporate all mark-ups and notes in the shop drawings to reflect the specific installation. b. Submit Inspection and test reports specified in "Source Quality Control" Articles in Part 3 of this Section. F. Operation and Maintenance Data 1. Air Compressors, Data Package 4 2. Air Dryers, Data Package 4 3. Nitrogen Generator, Data Package 4 4. Nitrogen Generator System, Data Package 3 5. Filters Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 NITROGEN GENERATION SYSTEM 226500 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 6. Oxygen analyzers 7. Storage tanks 1.4 STANDARD PRODUCTS A. Specified materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products. Specified equipment shall essentially duplicate equipment that has performed satisfactorily at least two years prior to bid opening. Standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been for sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period. B. Alternative Qualifications 1. Products having less than a two-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6,000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturer's factory or laboratory tests, can be shown. C. Service Support 1. The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations. Submit a certified list of qualified permanent service organizations for support of the equipment which includes their addresses and qualifications. These service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract. D. Manufacturer's Nameplate 1. Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable. E. Modification of References 1. In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction", or words of similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. F. Definitions 1. For the International Code Council (ICC) Codes referenced in the contract documents, advisory provisions shall be considered mandatory, the word "should" shall be interpreted as "shall." Reference to the "code official" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contracting Officer." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle, store, and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before and during installation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and as approved by the Contracting Officer. Replace damaged or defective items. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Unless otherwise required herein, plumbing work shall be in accordance with the state plumbing code. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 NITROGEN GENERATION SYSTEM 226500 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. The Contractor shall become familiar with details of the work, verify dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing any work. 1.8 INSTRUCTION TO OWNER PERSONNEL A. When specified in other sections, furnish the services of competent instructors to give full instruction to the designated Owner personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements, of the specified equipment or system. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work. B. Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Owner for regular operation. The number of man-days (8 hours per day) of instruction furnished shall be as specified in the individual section. When more than 4 man-days of instruction are specified, use approximately half of the time for classroom instruction. Use other time for instruction with the equipment or system. C. When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are made under the terms of the contract, provide additional instruction to acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or modifications. 1.9 ACCESSIBILITY OF EQUIPMENT A. Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation, maintenance, and repair are readily accessible. Install concealed valves, expansion joints, controls, and equipment requiring access, in locations freely accessible through access doors. 1.10 START-UP A. Manufacturer’s Representative must be present for system start-up and commissioning for a period of 1 week - 5 business days (40 hours) on site. B. Manufacturer’s representative shall provide two days (16 hours) of training for owner’s maintenance staff after commissioning is complete. C. Interim Lab System: If system does not provide 25 cfm of 99 percent pure nitrogen at 100 psig continuously, the contractor shall correct the system until the performance criteria are met at no cost to the owner. D. Central System: If system does not provide prescribed cfm at noted purity percent pure nitrogen at 100 psig continuously, the contractor shall correct the system until the performance criteria are met at no cost to the owner. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Equipment price shall include manufacturer’s standard warrantee agreement. B. External installation shall not effect terms of warranty. 1.12 MAINTENANCE A. Supplying vendor shall provide an option quote for an annual comprehensive service contract. B. Maintenance agreements shall include all labor and materials to perform quarterly and annual service requirements as recommended by the manufacturer’s product service manuals. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 NITROGEN GENERATION SYSTEM 226500 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS – NITROGEN GENERATION SYSTEMS N2-GEN-1 2.2 GENERAL: 1. All system components in part 2 of this specification are to be verified by equipment vendors and or manufacturers such that the quality and quantity of downstream nitrogen system is within compliance with the specified purity levels of the nitrogen streams as shown on P&ID- 101 2. House nitrogen performance: a. Purity level: 99.5% b. Distribution pressure: 100 psig c. Capacity: see P&ID 2.3 COMPRESSED AIR, DRYERS AND FILTERS A. See spec section 226119 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 NITROGEN GENERATION SYSTEM 226500 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.4 HOUSE NITROGEN 99.5% PURITY PIPING Pipe Class: A14 Service: Laboratory Compressed Gases Material: Type L Copper – O2 cleaned Service Limits Primary ANSI Class: 150 Coefficient of linear expansion 0.94 x 10-5 inches per inch F Corrosion Allowance 0.00 inch 1/2 inch to 3 inches PIPE AND FITTINGS Piping Material Seamless copper tube, laboratory gas, drawn temper, Type L. Standard ASTM B-819. . Quality Each length of tube shall be factory cleaned and suitable for laboratory oxygen service in accordance with CGA Pamphlet G-4.1. . Labeling Tube shall be permanently labeled and delivered plugged, capped, bagged or otherwise sealed Assembly All components for assembly Plug caps or other seals shall remain in place until final assembly. Fittings Material Wrought copper, designed for brazed -joint. .. Standard ASME B16.22 Quality Same as tube Joints Brazed Brazing alloy shall be BCuP-5 Brazing alloy or equivalent alloy with at least 1000 degree F melting point. Standard ANSI/AWS A5.8 brazing filler material, BcuP series. No flux. Purge Joints and piping shall be continuously purged with a positive flow of Grade M, CGA Pamphlet G-10.1 oil free, dry nitrogen per ANSI/AWS B2.2 and NFPA 99 procedures Assembly At the completion of any section, all open pipe ends shall be capped using an external cap. Certifications Brazers shall be qualified in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 99. Mechanical Joints Swage or Parker oxygen ready fittings VALVES Available Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Apollo Valve Co. Watts Water Technologies Kitz Valve Co. Beacon Madaes Pratt Valve Company Common All main line, riser, service, and futures valves as scheduled on the drawings shall include plugged 1/8” NPTF ports on inlet and outlet All valves shall be factory cleaned for oxygen service, capped and sealed in a polyethylene bag for shipping and storage. Certificates of origin and of proper preparation shall be maintained on the job site attesting same. Ball Valves All bronze, full port, PTFE seats, chrome plated bronze ball, solder end connections. 600 PSIg WOG. Apollo 82-200-series, Watts B-6801, Nibco or Milwaukee. Valves are three piece construction with swing out center. Ball valves shall actuate from full “ON” to full “OFF” by 90 degree turn of vinyl gripped valve handle. Furnish and install only valves with factory installed type K copper tubing extensions for brazing operations. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 NITROGEN GENERATION SYSTEM 226500 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Pipe Class: A14 Service: Laboratory Compressed Gases Material: Type L Copper – O2 cleaned Service Limits Primary ANSI Class: 150 Coefficient of linear expansion 0.94 x 10-5 inches per inch F Corrosion Allowance 0.00 inch 1/2 inch to 3 inches Butterfly Use ball valve for where appropriate size dictates. For large sizes use Cleaned for Oxygen Service, Lugged Double Offset High Performance 316 SS Butterfly Valve. Install between Std. ANSI Class 150 or 300 flanges, Valve and flanges to match working pressure. Stainless Disc and stem; RTFE seats; Oxygen cleaning per CGA-G-4.1 Designed to meet MSS SP-68, table 1 MSS SP-25 (markings) Lever Handle to 4 inch, gear operated 6 inch and larger. Basis of Design: Pratt Industrial P/N: Check Valves Class 125, bronze body, bronze disc, solder end connections. See Note 2. Milwaukee 1509, Jenkins 4093, Stockham B-309. SPECIALTY VALVES Available Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Concoa Linde Numatics/Amsco Watts Parker Pressure Regulator (PCV): Mains Cleaned for O2 service. Bronze body, bronze piston and cylinder. BUNA "N" seat elastomer disc and stack. Cash Acme B Series with wheel handle, Parker, Numatics, Watts. Regulator must be equipped and cleaned for oil free service. Furnish regulator filter, pressure gauge and mounting bracket Pressure Regulator (Pressure Control Valve): Point-Of-Use Cleaned for O2 service. Bronze body, stainless steel piston and cylinder. Concoa Series 400; Numatics/ASCO series 342 Furnish regulator filter, pressure gauge and mounting bracket SPECIALTIES Pressure Gauge Cleaned for O2 service. Without diaphragm seal: medical industry, biotechnology and pharmaceutical industries size 2½ inch, pressure 0 to 150 psig; 1/4 inch thread connection With diaphragm seal: A standard WIKA 212 series stainless steel case pressure gauge l NOTES: 1. 2. . 3. On site cleaning of the interior surfaces of tubes, valves, fittings, and other components is not allowed. 4. Valves shall be by a single manufacturer. 5. Provide mechanical joint connections to all equipment such as pumps, compressors, manifolds, etc. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 NITROGEN GENERATION SYSTEM 226500 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.5 NITROGEN GENERATION SYSTEM – 99.5% PURITY (N2-GEN-1) A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. South Tek Industries 2. Parker Balston Inc 3. Pneumatech Inc B. Nitrogen Specifications: 1. Nitrogen Pressure 100 psig 2. Nitrogen Purity 99.5% N2 3. Nitrogen Flow Rate 16 scfm = 960 scfh. 4. Remote Monitoring with 4-20mA to BMS. C. PSA Module 1. SouthTek Industries or equivalent STS Model N2 Gen-180CS PSA Nitrogen Generator a. Capacity: see P&ID b. N2 Purity Range: 99.5 percent, ≤ 2 ppm Oxygen c. Operating Temperature: 20-32.2 deg C (68-90 deg F) d. Standard e. Supply Voltage: 100-220VAC f. Universal Power Supply: Internal 24VDC g. Phase 1, Hz 50/60 h. Amperage 8 amp fused, Watts 100W (maximum) i. Electrical Cabinet Standard NEMA TYPE 1 Style, NEMA 4X,, j. Skid Dimension: see P&ID k. Skid Material Carbon Steel l. Skid Thickness: 3/8 inch - 1/2 inch, Paint Primed and Rustoleum White Paint m. Sieve Bed Dimensions: per manufacturers standard for capacity required n. Sieve Bed Material: Carbon Steel o. Wall Thickness: 0.22 inches (min) p. Paint Primed and Rustoleum White Paint q. Rating / Certified ASME Section VIII Div 1, U-Stamped; include CRN Option Single province NL only. r. Furnish equipment pad and restraint/support system 2. Controller: Color touch screen with hour meter, N2 storage tank display, filter replacement reminder and visual valve sequencing display. 3. Final Engineering choice: Provide standard outputs: a. Power (on/off) Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 NITROGEN GENERATION SYSTEM 226500 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 b. Standby mode/operate c. Filter reminder: Dry contact d. Purity management system during standby cycle e. Connect all outputs to the BAS D. Oxygen Analyzers: (One Required) 1. SouthTek Model STS 7100 2. Provide as part of the generator modules E. House Nitrogen Storage Tank 1. Tag: R01-102 2. Capacity: See P&ID a. Furnish equipment pad and restraint/support system b. Provide relief valve, control valves and gauges c. Provide nozzles for drain and for purge/blowdown system d. ASME and CRN certified for NL and stamped 2.6 NITROGEN FLOW METER A. Compressed Gas Flow Meter (Non-Flammable Gases) Suitable for Clean Dry Oil Free Air, Nitrogen B. Measuring Principle: Thermal Mass C. Calibration certifications of individual sensors and the whole package shall be provided. D. Material of construction: AlSi10Mg, coated E. Sizes available: 1/2 inch - 2 inches, process connection to be flanged, weld, or I-clamp F. Output: 4 20 mA HART (active), Pulse/frequency/switch output (passive) G. Measuring Range: 27 scfm 1638 scfh depending on chosen option of ordering feature "Calibration flow") H. Power: DC 18 to 30 V. provide loop power from the main PLC on the nitrogen generator or alternatively from the Building Automation System I. Connect flow meter to the Building Automation System (BAS) J. Basis of Design: Endress and Hauser Proline T mass series A-150 for house Nitrogen K. Note: the flow monitors incorporated into the PLC logic of the nitrogen generator package are acceptable provided the data can be reported to the BMS 2.7 NITROGEN AND AIR PRESSURE INDICATING TRANSMITTERS A. Compressed Gas Pressure Indicating Transmitter (Non-Flammable Gases) Suitable for Clean Dry Oil Free Air, Nitrogen B. Process Parameters 1. Accuracy: ±0.25% Span (URL)0 ANALOG Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 NITROGEN GENERATION SYSTEM 226500 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Output: 4-20mA 3. Display Type: 4 digit, 10mm LCD with LED backlight 4. Standard Ranges (Compound): (Gauge): 0 to 500 psig 5. Environmental Rating: IP65 / NEMA 4X MEDIA: Fluids and gases compatible with 316SS and pH17-4 stainless steel, compatible with Nitrogen gas at 99.999% purity level 6. Provide loop power from the main PLC on the nitrogen generator or alternatively from the Building Automation System 7. Basis of Design Endress and Hauser PMP 51 for house Nitrogen 2.8 MOTORS A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 11, Division 21, Division 22, and Division 23 for common motor requirements. B. Enclosure Materials: Cast iron, Cast aluminum, Rolled steel. 1. Motor Bearings: manufacturer standard. 2. Efficiency: Premium efficient. 3. NEMA Design: . 2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect assembled equipment, by a qualified testing agency, according to ARI ASME IEEE NEMA standards organization. Affix standards organization's certification label. 1. All equipment and products or material will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 2. Prepare test and inspection reports. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 NITROGEN GENERATION SYSTEM 226500 - 11 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS SCHEDULE SERVICE CODE MAXIMUM SERVICE OPERATING LIMITS PIPE CLASS PIPE MATERIAL (psig) Temp (°F) Compressed Air CA 200 120 A13 Copper House Nitrogen 99.5% N2 200 120 A14 Copper Nitrogen vent piping V 200 120 A13 Copper General Pipe Spec Notes: 1. Each valve type shall be the product of a single manufacturer. Each system shall be provided with valves as required by code and shown on the drawings. And shall be installed to facilitate operation, replacement and repair. 2. Provide access panels for concealed valves behind non-removable ceilings or walls. 3. Provide shut-off valves on supply piping to individual pieces of equipment. 4. Piping routed through metal stud or wood stud partitions: provide centering such that piping does not come in contact with metal studs and also protection of piping systems routed horizontally through metal stud or wood stud partitions where the piping crosses a stud. Sleeve type protection shall be used to prevent damage to the lateral piping by the use of screws/nails/fasteners. Provide pre-manufactured products equal to puncture solution, or on site sleeves. 3.2 INSTRUMENT CONTROL LEGEND FUNCTION VARIABLE MEASURED OR 3.3 C O N T R O L L E D 3.4 V A R I A B L E ALARM HIGH AL ARM HI/LOW AL ARM LOW ELEM ENT INDIC ATOR IND. CO NTROLLER IND. RECO RDER IND. TRANSMITTER RECORDER CONTROLLER SWITCH HIGH SWITCH HI/LOW SWITCH LOW TRANSMITTER VALVE CONV/COMP DEVICE SWITCH SELF ACT VALVE LIGHT SWITCH CLOSED SWITCH OPEN ANALYSIS AA H AAHL AAL AE Al AIC AIR AIT AR AC ASH ASHL ASL AT AV AY VOLTAGE EA H EAHL EAL E El EiC EIR EIT ER EC ESH ESHL ESL ET EY FLOW FA H FAHL FAL FE Fl FIC FIR FIT FR FC FSH FSHL FSL FT F V FY MANUAL HIC HV HY HS CURRENT IA H IAHL IAL IE II llC llR llT I R IC ISH ISHL ISL I T I Y POWER JA H JAHL JAL J E JI JIC JIR JIT JR JC JSH JSHL JSL JT J Y TIME KA H KAHL KAL KE Kl KIC KIR KIT KR KC KSH KSHL KSL KT KV KY LEVEL LA H LAHL LAL LE LI UC UR LIT LR LC LSH LSHL LSL LT L V L Y LCV MOTOR MS ML PRESSURE PA H PAHL PAL PE Pl PIC PIR PIT PR PC PSH PSHL PSL PT PV PY PCV PRESSDIFF. PDA H PDAL PDE POI PDIC PDIR PDIT PDR PDC POSH PDSL PDT SPEEDFREQ. SA H SAHL SAL SE SI SIC SIR SIT SR SC SSH SSHL SSL ST SY Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 NITROGEN GENERATION SYSTEM 226500 - 12 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 TEMPERATU RE TA H TAHL TAL TE Tl TIC TIR TIT TR TC TSH TSHL TSL T T T V TY TCV MULTI-VAR. UA H UAHL UAL U I UIR UR UY VIBRATION VA H VAL VE VI VSH VSL VT VY WEIGHT WA H WAHL WAL WE W I WIC WIR WIT WR WC WSH WSHL WSL WT WV WY ON/OFF YN XY XS POSITION ZA H ZAL ZE ZIC ZSH ZSL ZT ZS ZL zsc zso 3.5 NITROGEN GENERATION SYSTEM A. Nitrogen generation nitrogen piping system shall be installed as a continuous generation type system from Nitrogen Generation equipment through the distribution network. Piping drops at each point of use shall be as indicated on drawings. Piping from point of use connection to Owner furnished equipment shall be piped as directed by Owner. B. The system piping shall be selected to match the purity of the contained gas that is transported. All pipe fittings and valves shall be cleaned and bagged rated for high purity nitrogen gas and oxygen at a minimum C. Pipe running horizontal whether above the ceiling or below shall be supported at intervals not to exceed 5 feet with shape hangers. All piping shall slope at 1/8 inch per ft. toward use points. Pipe hangers shall be shielded and shall not touch piping. D. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. E. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment. 3.6 RELIEF DISCHARGE PIPING A. General: all relief lines from pressure relief valves, purge lines, tank blowdown lines and PSA modules shall terminate to atmosphere. See drawing P-430 for locations. 1. Discharge piping shall be simple and direct. a. All discharge piping should be run as direct as is practicable to the point of final release for disposal. b. The Valve must discharge to a safe disposal area. c. Pressure Safety Valve. The weight of the discharge piping shall be carried by separate support devices and be properly braced to withstand reactive thrust forces when the Valve relieves. The Valve shall also be supported to withstand any swaying or system vibrations. d. Fittings or pipe having a smaller inside diameter than the Valve outlet connections shall not be used. e. Do not plug open vents. When the fluid is flammable, toxic or corrosive, the Bonnet vent should be piped to a safe location. 2. Vent line termination points a. All cases: The discharge is required to be at least 15 feet 4.54 m above ground level, and at least 20 feet 6.06 m from any window, door, or ventilation port. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 NITROGEN GENERATION SYSTEM 226500 - 13 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 b. Above Roofs: The discharge outlet of the vent pipe should be piped to the closest location where free discharge of the safety device will not pose a safety hazard to personnel. For a roof line termination, the vent should be no less than seven (7) feet above roof line terminated at 90 degrees. The top of the vent line should be cut at a 45 degree angle to dissipate the discharge thrust of the gas, prevent capping of the pipe, and to visually signify that it is a safety valve vent line. Provide support steel and/or support guywire. These shall be configured to keep the above roof arm from moving due to discharge forces. c. Label each relief line terminated as “gas type - Pressure Safety Relief Discharge” with the type of gas 3.7 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 22. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test new piping, and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for leaks and defects. 1. Schedule tests and their inspections by Authorities having Jurisdiction Owner, with at least 24 hour’s advance notice. 2. Do not cover piping or put into service before inspection and approval. 3. Test completed piping according to Authorities having Jurisdiction Owner. If Authorities having Jurisdiction do Owner does not have published procedures, perform tests as follows: a. Tests: Test piping at pressure not less than 1-1/2 times the maximum system operating pressure, but not less than 150 psig. 4. Replace leaking joints with new materials and retest until no leaks exist. 5. Submit separate reports for each test. 3.9 CLEANING OF HOUSE NITROGEN SYSTEM A. Use procedures prescribed by Authorities having Jurisdiction Ownerand Nitrogen Generation Equipment Manufacturer or, if not prescribed, use procedures described below: 1. Before using, purge new equipment piping and parts of existing equipment piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. Cleaning Group #3 Laboratory Services -N2, Gas General Insure that the discharge points during flushing, purging and blow down are at a safe location. All non-essential personnel shall be kept clear, via erected barriers, barricade, signs, etc., around the discharge area during the operation. Fluid Used Clean dry oil free air or inert gas. Pre - Flushing Flush the system with cylinder pure nitrogen. Before blowing out the system, all welds shall be hammered repeatedly to loosen internal scale prior to the blowing out operation. Allow a minimum of 5 minutes to flush out the system, especially the low points and dirt legs Pre - Flushing Duration Strainers and/or baskets shall be inspected frequently during the flushing operation and cleaned. Flushing operation shall continue until extraneous material is no longer accumulating in the strainer or basket at the discharge point. After the completion of flushing, the system shall be drained completely and returned to the pre-cleaning condition. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 NITROGEN GENERATION SYSTEM 226500 - 14 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Cleaning • System shall be installed clean. Purge • Blow-dry the system with hot (120 deg F), 0.22 micron filtered nitrogen air for at least half hour. • Purge the system with high purity (99.99 percent pure) nitrogen gas. Volume for the nitrogen purge shall be 5 times the volume of the piping system. • After the nitrogen purge, the piping system shall be isolated. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\226500_NITROGEN GENERATION SYSTEM.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PURIFIED WATER PIPING - THERMOPLASTICS 226701 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 226701 - PURIFIED WATER PIPING-THERMOPLASTICS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and General Provision of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 specifications, apply to this section. B. Where Paragraphs of this Section conflict with similar paragraphs of the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, requirements of this Section shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Specification section describes the technical specifications and general instructions for the furnishing, handling, delivery and installation of pipe, tube, fittings and valves to be used for purified water applications. B. Pipe materials and components specified in this Section include: 1. Pipe. 2. Fittings and couplings. 3. Valves. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Unless noted otherwise, the most current issue, revision, or affirmation of the references listed herein shall be used, including all addenda, errata, and referenced documents: B. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) C. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 1. 21 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 177.1520 “Olefin Polymers” D. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. B16.5 “Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings” 2. B46.1 “Surface Texture (Surface Roughness, Waviness, and Lay)” E. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. D3222 “Standard Specification for Unmodified Poly (Vinylidene Fluoride) (PVDF) Molding Extrusion and Coating Materials” 2. D638 “Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics” 3. D790 “Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials” 4. D1784 “Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds” 5. D2122 “Test Method for Determining Dimensions of Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings” 6. D2464 “Standard Specification for Threaded Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80” Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PURIFIED WATER PIPING - THERMOPLASTICS 226701 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 7. D2467 “Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80” 8. D2564 “Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems” 9. D2657 “Standard Practice for Heat Fusion Joining of Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings” 10. D2837 “Standard Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials” 11. D2855 “Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings” 12. D3915 “Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds for Plastic Pipe and Fittings Used in Pressure Applications” 13. D4101 “Standard Specification for Propylene Plastic Injection and Extrusion Materials” 14. E84 “Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials” 15. F402 “Standard Practice for Safe Handling of Solvent Cements, Primers, and Cleaners Used for Joining Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings” 16. F439 “Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80” 17. F656 “Standard Specification for Primers for Use in Solvent Cement Joints of Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings” 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Documentation Requirements 1. Submitted documentation shall be complete and consistent to provide a written record to prove that the pipe, tube and components conform to the specifications and intent of the design. B. Shop Drawings 1. Refer to Division 20 for procedural requirements and also to the other related documents referenced in paragraph 1.1 of this section. 2. Submittal package shall include for all equipment (where applicable): a. Cover letter, b. Pipe dimensions, wall thickness, pressure ratings at temperature. c. Heat fusion procedures for thermoplastic pipe, d. Thermoplastic heat fusion installer certifications by manufacturer, e. Internal finish specifications, f. Shop Drawings detailing pipe anchors, special pipe support assemblies, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops. g. Detailed isometric diagrams of all loop distribution systems. C. Installation check procedures, D. Pre-Start-up Check Procedures, Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PURIFIED WATER PIPING - THERMOPLASTICS 226701 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.5 CERTIFICATIONS A. Refer to Division 20 for procedural requirements and also to the other related documents referenced in paragraph 1.1 of this section. 1.6 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing/Shipping/Handling/U nloading 1. Ship tube and pipe with capped ends. B. Storage and Protection 1. Store pipe, tube, fittings and valves on site in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. 2. Place materials indoors and on elevated platforms in a dry location away from construction activity that may cause damage or contamination. 3. Maintain packaging, caps and seals on all materials until ready for immediate installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements stated herein and with the Drawings, provide materials from one of the following manufacturers: 1. Polypropylene and PVDF Pipe and Fittings a. ASAHI AMERICA b. GF Piping Systems c. Sani-Tech 2. Polypropylene and PVDF Valves and Actuators a. GF Piping Systems b. ASAHI AMERICA c. Sani-Tech d. Plast-O-Matic B. All pipe, fittings and components of a given pipe class shall originate from one source and be the product of a single manufacturer (e.g., All components of a Pipe Class - pipe, fittings, ball valves, diaphragm valves, check valves shall be as produced by one manufacturer). C. The following table summarizes the pipe classes specified in this Section. Refer to the respective Pipe Class data sheets for detailed requirements. 2.2 HIGH PURITY WATER PIPE FITTINGS AND VALVE MATERIALS Pipe Class: P24 Service: Pure Water Material: Pigmented Polypropylene Service Limits Primary ANSI Class: 150 Coefficient of linear expansion 50 x 10-6 inches per inch Corrosion Allowance 0.00 inch PIPE AND FITTINGS Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PURIFIED WATER PIPING - THERMOPLASTICS 226701 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Pipe Class: P24 Service: Pure Water Material: Pigmented Polypropylene Service Limits Primary ANSI Class: 150 Coefficient of linear expansion 50 x 10-6 inches per inch Corrosion Allowance 0.00 inch Piping Furnish a complete high purity pigmented PP piping system to include pipe, fittings, anchors, gaskets, specialty fittings and valves. System shall be Polypropylene – equal to GF Piping systems LLC Progef Standard. The system shall be made of uniform pipe, fitting and valve resin. System pressure ratings shall be based on continuous use of 50 years. PP Pipe Fittings and valves shall be based on a Standard Dimensional Ratio (SDR) of 11, 3/8 inch through 20 inches (16-500 mm). Pressure rating for pipe and fittings, unless otherwise noted, shall be 150 psi for all SDR11 material and 150 psi for all applied valves at 68 F. Pipe, valves and fittings shall be made from a Group 1 Class 2 Beta Polypropylene resin produced by one supplier. The resin shall meet or exceed the requirements outlined for a random copolymer resin according to DIN 16774 and ASTM D 4101-96a. Melt Flow Range of resin shall be 1.25 g/10 min per 230/5. Resin is approved for contact with foodstuff as per the FDA CFR, Title 21 (2001) 177.1520. All pipes shall have ends sealed with PE bags and then capped. Pipe shall be sleeved in a PE bag and heat-sealed on both sides. Fittings Production All standard fittings through 12 inches (315mm) shall be injected molded. All fittings are to be molded with equipment in a clean environment. Packaging All fittings are to be packaged in a class 100. Fittings are to be bagged in clean diffusion resistant PE (composite) bags. Bags are to be silicone free and antistatic. Fabricated Fittings or Specialty Fittings Fabricated Fittings/Specialty fittings shall be machined or molded of the same PP resin as the pipe and fittings. Machined components made from semi-finished PP block and rod used in fabrication or parts or sub-assemblies shall be inspected, cleaned, tested and packaged similar to fittings and valves. Final inspection is to be made prior to packaging by 100 percent visual inspection of every weld. Pressure test for welded assemblies as required. Joints Contact Butt Fusion Fusion weld joint shall be accomplished of a bench machine type butt fusion machine capable of joining pipe, fittings and valves. For sizes 3/4 inch (25 mm) through 4 inches (110 mm) installer shall use MC 110 Machine which shall come complete with a thermostatically controlled heater, two base clamping plates (wide), base clamping plate (left narrow), electrically operated planer and table clamp for a majority of the required joints of the system. A paddle type hand held heater plate may be used only for system joints for which the bench unit use would be impractical. Contractor shall be responsible for renting of or purchase of complete machine as described above from the manufacturer. Contact Butt Fusion Joining Equipment An onsite installation seminar shall be conducted by manufacturer's personnel who are certified to conduct said seminar. Seminar topics shall include all aspects of product installation (storage, set-up, support spacing, fusion process, machine care, testing procedures, etc.). At the conclusion of the seminar, all installers will be given a written certification test and will be required to prepare and complete one fusion joint of the type being implemented on the project. Upon successful completion of said test, the installer will be issued a certification card verifying that they have met the requirements of the manufacturer with regards to knowledge of proper product installation and testing. VALVES Available Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: GF, ASAHI, Sanitech, Tru-Union Diaphragm All valves shall have a PP body with PTFE/EPDM diaphragm and threaded PP bonnet. 150 PSI @ 68 deg C for sizes 1/2 inch (20 mm) through 2 inches (63 mm). Valves shall be equal to GF Piping Systems LLC Type 514 w/locking handle and fitting ends for socket fusion. Flanged Diaphragm All valves shall have a PP body with PTFE/EPDM diaphragm and threaded PP bonnet. 150 PSI @ 68 deg C for sizes 1/2 inch (20 mm) through 2 inches (63 mm). Valves shall be equal to GF Piping Systems LLC Type 517 w/locking handle and fitting ends for socket fusion. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PURIFIED WATER PIPING - THERMOPLASTICS 226701 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Pipe Class: P24 Service: Pure Water Material: Pigmented Polypropylene Service Limits Primary ANSI Class: 150 Coefficient of linear expansion 50 x 10-6 inches per inch Corrosion Allowance 0.00 inch Ball Valve All valves shall have a PP body with EPDM or FPM seats. 150 PSI @ 68°C for sizes 3/8 inch (16mm) through 4 inches (110mm). Valves shall be equal to GF Piping Systems LLC Type 546 w/lever handle and fitting ends for socket fusion. Check Valve All sizes class 150, ball type PP body with EPDM/FPM seats and seals. 150 PSI @ 68 deg C for sizes 3/8 inch (15 mm) through 4 inches (110 mm). Valves shall be equal to GF Piping systems LLC Type 561 (no spring) or Type 562 (with spring). Sample Valve (Sv) Shall be PP with threaded NPT connections, Angle or Globe body type. Valves shall be equal to GF Piping Systems LLC Type 522. QUALITY ASSURANCE QA Obtain components from a single source having responsibility and accountability to answer and resolve problems regarding proper installation, compatibility, performance, and acceptance. Delivery, Storage, Handling Any PP pipe that becomes damaged in transit handling and does not arrive at the site as shipped by the factory shall not be used. It must be rejected by the quality control representative. All material and equipment shall be handled and stored in an indoor location throughout the progress of the job in such a manner as to prevent damage and/or contamination. Room shall be maintained dry and dust free. Pipe, fittings, and valves shall be stored as originally packaged by the manufacturer. Lift, support and transport PP piping per manufacturer's recommendations. Additional Submittals Submit the following: • Product data for the system specified; relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes. • Product certificates signed by manufacturer of PP piping product, showing compliance to stated requirements. • Copy of Manufacturer's Training and Certification material showing the field training documentation and certification testing that all on-site installers will be required to complete prior to commencement of product installation. Qualification of firms supplying materials: Firms must have a minimum of five years experience in HP design, installation and operation of thermoplastic high-purity piping systems. Warranty Warranty period is one year after date of substantial completion NOTES: 1. Installation, including support spacing, compensation for expansion and contraction, and joining shall be in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. For metric systems, supply proper metric fusion spigots. 3. Jointing method to be outlined and submitted with pipe, fittings and valves shop drawings. 4. All pipe, valves, fittings, sensors and instrumentation shall be the product of one manufacturer. 5. All piping shall be stored with caps in a clean dry area. The pure integrity of pipe fittings and valves shall not be jeopardized. 6. All piping shall be supported with continuous support channel under all horizontal pipe runs. Pipe and channel will be supported from the piping suspension system. 7. Turn over to owner at end of construction necessary welding equipment as suggested by manufacturer for repair, additions and maintenance of the pp standard polypropylene piping system 8. Under this specification, the contractor shall be responsible for the purchase or rental of the proper machine required to meet the intent of the specification and be used for installation of the product on site. 9. Installer shall ensure that all pipe and fittings used for pp piping are components of the same system. No mixing of various manufacturers pipe and or fittings shall be allowed 10. Installation, including support spacing, compensation for expansion and contraction, and joining shall be in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations 11. Installers must be trained and certified in fusion system by the manufacturer Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PURIFIED WATER PIPING - THERMOPLASTICS 226701 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPE MATERIALS SCHEDULE Service Drawing Tag Maximum Service Operating Limits Class Pipe Material Pressure (psig) Temperature (°F) PRE-TREATMENT WATER PTW 100 120 P11 CPVC RODI (S) PWS 150 68 P24 Natural Polypropylene Butt Fusion RODI (R) PWR 150 68 P24 Natural Polypropylene Butt Fusion 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Refer to Division 22 for general requirements for pipe installation pipe supports and pipe identification markers. 2. Installation, including support spacing, compensation for expansion and contraction, and joining shall be in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Support all thermoplastic piping with continuous support channel under all horizontal pipe runs. Support pipe and channel from the piping suspension system. B. Solvent-Cemented, Thermoplastic Pipe and Fitting Joints: 1. Handle cleaners, primers, and solvent cements according to ASTM F 402. 2. Follow ASTM D2855 standard procedures for the joining of solvent-cemented joints. C. Heat Fused Olefin and Fluoropolymer Thermoplastic Pipe and Fitting Joints: 1. Follow ASTM D2757standard procedures for the joining of heat fusion joints. 2. Use heat fusion equipment supplied by the pipe and fitting manufacturer. Follow manufacturer’s instructions. D. Pipe Insulation and Identification Markers: 1. Refer to Division 22 for general requirements of pipe insulation and pipe and valve identification markers. 3.3 CLEANING OF THERMOPLASTICS A. If a system is to be sterilized in place, leak check and pressure test the system with air or water, prior to sterilization. B. Disconnect any UV lights and remove any sub-micron filter cartridges from their housings and install 5 micron filter cartridges. C. Close valves on inlet and outlet and open bypass on any DI bottles to prevent the sterilizing solution from entering DI bottles and contacting the resin, while still allowing the solution to circulate. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PURIFIED WATER PIPING - THERMOPLASTICS 226701 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. Fill storage tank to a depth of approximately 3 ft. with DI water. Calculate the total volume of water in the storage tank AND the piping loop. Add sufficient hydrogen peroxide (H2O2) to the water in the storage tank to result in a solution strength of 10% H2O2). E. When circulating the H2O2 solution, sample the water at each sink valve, as follows, to verify the presence of the H2O2 solution: 1. Utilize a Nach Co., Inc. pre-manufacturing test kit Model no. HYP-1 (Cat. No. 2291-00) or approved equal. This kit shall be used to test H202 presence by a drop count titration) thiosulfide method. 2. Adjust the pH of a quart of potassium permanganate (KMNO4) and pH 6.5 with sulfuric acid (H2SO4). A quart should be adequate for testing most systems. 3. Draw approximately one-half cup of water from each sink valve, individually, and add a small amount of the test solution (KMNO4) to the sample. 4. If H2O2 is present in the sample, it will turn clear or brown; if no H2O2 is present, it will remain purple. F. When testing verifies the H2O2 solution is present at all test locations, turn off the distribution pump and open inlet and outlet valve as required to retain the solution in the loop for a minimum of 12 hours, while isolating the tank from the loop. G. During the 12 hour retention period, the storage tank can be drained and cleaned. This is accomplished by first draining the tank to below the manhole. Enter the tank and using suitable spraying device and pressure, wash the tank walls and dome with the residual H2O2 in the tank. After spraying, drain the tank to a suitable drain and then thoroughly rinse the interior with DI water allowing it to go to drain also. Vacuum any residual DI water and then dry the tank, replace the manhole and close the tank drain. Fill the storage tank with DI water and revalve or install a bypass to allow the building loop return line to discharge to drain for the flushing and draining of the loop. 1. While performing the following tank cleaning procedure, full body protective gear including breathing apparatus is required. Also, a life line must be attached to the person entering the tank and an additional person should be stationed outside within sight and sound, in case of an emergency. H. After the 12 hour retention period, flush the H2O2 solution in the loop to drain, utilizing the distribution pump and the DI water in the storage tank. Flush until testing with KMNO4 indicates no residual H2O2 in the loop. I. Open inlet and outlet valves on DI bottles and reconnect loop return to the storage tank, and remove and discard the 5 micron cartridges from the sub-micron filter housing and install proper sub-micron filter cartridges and reconnect UV lights. This procedure should be repeated at least annually or more often if contamination occurs. 3.4 CLEANING OF THERMOPLASTICS FOR PURIFIED WATER USE A. Cleaning of High Purity Water Piping. Minimum Standard 1. General a. All cleaning and flushing work shall be coordinated with and supervised by the Water Treatment Sub-subcontractor for chemicals and procedures to be followed. See the Water Treatment Section of these Specifications. b. Following the successful testing of the piping systems, they shall be cleaned under the supervision of the Pure Water Treatment Sub-subcontractor. c. Before submitting piping systems for acceptance, all strainers shall be inspected and thoroughly cleaned. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PURIFIED WATER PIPING - THERMOPLASTICS 226701 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 d. Cleaning shall be started only after all piping has been hydrostatically tested and all systems have been completely connected up. e. Operate pumps and circulate water throughout system for period of one 8 hour day. At the end of each day of circulation, remove and clean all strainer baskets and blow off all low points. 2. Fluid Used: Water - ambient, RODI water, Peroxide sanitization 3. Cleaning a. Cleaning accomplished by a flushing process. The flushing rate shall be equal to a velocity of 4 fps in all portions of the piping system. b. If a system is to be sterilized in place, leak check and pressure test the system with air or water, prior to sterilization. c. Disconnect any UV lights and remove any sub-micron filter cartridges from their housings and install 5 micron filter cartridges. d. Verify that all sink valves are closed. e. Close valves on inlet and outlet and open bypass on DI bottles to prevent the sterilizing solution from entering the DI bottles and contacting the resin, while still allowing the solution to circulate from the storage tank, through the high purity water system loop using one distribution pump and back to the tank. f. Fill storage tank to a depth of approximately 3 ft. with DI water. Calculate the total volume of water in the storage tank and the piping loop. Add sufficient hydrogen peroxide (H2O2) to the water in the storage tank to result in a solution strength of 10% H2O2). g. When circulating the H2O2 solution, sample the water at each sink valve, as follows, to verify the presence of the H2O2 solution: 1) Utilize a Nach Co., Inc. pre-manufacturing test kit Model no. HYP-1 (Cat. No. 2291-00) or approved equal. This kit shall be used to test H202 presence by a drop count titration) thiosulfide method. 2) Adjust the pH of a quart of potassium permanganate (KMNO4) and pH 6.5 with sulfuric acid (H2SO4). A quart should be adequate for testing most systems. 3) Draw approximately one-half cup of water from each sink valve, individually, and add a small amount of the test solution (KMNO4) to the sample. 4) If H2O2 is present in the sample, it will turn clear or brown; if no H2O2 is present, it will remain purple. 5) When testing verifies the H2O2 solution is present at all test locations, turn off the distribution pump and open inlet and outlet valve as required to retain the solution in the loop for a minimum of 12 hours, while isolating the tank from the loop. h. During the 12 hour retention period, the storage tank can be drained and cleaned. This is accomplished by first draining the tank to below the manhole. Enter the tank and using suitable spraying device and pressure, wash the tank walls and dome with the residual H2O2 in the tank. After spraying, drain the tank to a suitable drain and then thoroughly rinse the interior with DI water allowing it to go to drain also. Vacuum any residual DI water and then dry the tank, replace the manhole and close the tank drain. Fill the storage tank with DI water and revalve or install a bypass to allow the building loop return line to discharge to drain for the flushing and draining of the loop. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PURIFIED WATER PIPING - THERMOPLASTICS 226701 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 i. While performing the following tank cleaning procedure, full body protective gear including breathing apparatus is required. Also, a life line must be attached to the person entering the tank and an additional person should be stationed outside within sight and sound, in case of an emergency. j. After the 12 hour retention period, flush the H2O2 solution in the loop to drain, utilizing the distribution pump and the DI water in the storage tank. Flush until testing with KMNO4 indicates no residual H2O2 in the loop. k. Open inlet and outlet valves on DI bottles and reconnect loop return to the storage tank, and remove and discard the 5 micron cartridges from the sub-micron filter housing and install proper sub-micron filter cartridges and reconnect UV lights. This procedure should be repeated at least annually or more often if contamination occurs 4. Flushing: After disinfection, flush the system with deionized water of the same resistivity as is generated by the system. 5. Flushing Duration: Strainers and/or baskets shall be inspected frequently during the flushing operation and cleaned. Flushing operation shall continue until extraneous material is no longer accumulating in the strainer or basket at the discharge point. After the completion of flushing, the system shall be drained completely and returned to the pre-cleaning condition. 6. Purge: Blow the system down for 2 hours with 5-PSI nitrogen. Assure that all outlets are open during blowdown. Do not pressurize the system. After N2 purge, fill and circulate system PURE RODI water through the system. 7. Final product: Test the return after 2 hours of circulation. The return conductivity shall equal the supply conductivity. If not, repeat the above B. IQ/OQ/PQ Qualifications Outlined By The Validation Team Are To Be Strictly Followed. C. Cleaning and sterilizing piping system for validated use shall be outlined by the validation protocol. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\226701_PURIFIED WATER PIPING_THERMOPLASTIC.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 ASTM TYPE II WATER SYSTEMS FOR LABORATORY 226722 - 1 ADDENDUM 02 07 January 2019 SECTION 226722 – ASTM TYPE II WATER SYSTEMS FOR LABORATORY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Specification section describes the technical specifications and general instructions for the furnishing, factory testing, handling, delivery and installation of water purification equipment for general laboratory or academic research facility reagent water. B. The Contractor is responsible for preparing the detailed engineering specifications, skid fabrication drawings and wiring diagrams necessary for fabrication, quality of materials, and quality of workmanship. This specification is intended to establish minimum acceptable standards consistent with industry practice. C. Section Includes: 1. Manufacturers 2. General Fabrication 3. General Description 4. Design and Performance 5. Documentation 6. Major Equipment for ASTM Type II water 7. Pretreatment System for ASTM Type II water 8. Primary System for ASTM Type II water 9. Storage Vessels for ASTM Type II water 10. Polishing System for ASTM Type II water 11. Additional Requirements for ASTM Type II water D. Related Sections: 1. 226701 – Purified Water Piping - Thermoplastics- 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. B. Field quality-control reports. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 ASTM TYPE II WATER SYSTEMS FOR LABORATORY 226722 - 2 ADDENDUM 02 07 January 2019 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and submittals to Section 1 B. Documentation Requirements 1. Submitted documentation shall be complete and consistent to provide a written record to prove that the utilities and equipment conform to the specifications and intent of the design. C. General 1. Submit technical specification for all equipment including pretreatment equipment, reverse osmosis and deionization equipment, tanks, pumps, starters, heat exchangers, instrumentation and controls. 2. Submit electrical, plant steam and cooling water requirements. 3. Submit electrical data and wiring diagrams. Differentiate between factory wiring and field wiring. 4. Submit control loop diagrams and ladder logic diagrams. 5. Materials of construction and finishes of all product contact (wet) and non-contact parts. D. Shop Drawings 1. Submit shop drawings two weeks after receipt of purchase order. 2. Submittal package shall include for all equipment (where applicable): a. Cover letter. b. Owner name and plant location. c. Equipment name and identification number on the Drawings. d. Purchase order number and date. e. Manufacturer name and plant location. f. Equipment specification including utility requirements, connection sizes and types. g. Equipment drawings including plan and elevation, dimensions, and parts identification. h. Equipment model, serial number, shop order number and date of fabrication. i. Internal finish specifications. j. External finish specifications. k. Drawing title, number, revision number and date of issue. l. P&ID with parts list. m. Installation check procedures. n. Pre-start-up check procedures. o. Water quality test procedures. p. Equipment weights. q. Electrical schematics with parts list. r. Exceptions list to specification (if applicable). s. Exceptions list to vendor specification (if applicable). 3. Cartridge Filter: Also include the following: a. Overall dimensions and tolerances including access clearances. b. Quantity and type of cartridge 4. Service Carbon (AGC) Assembly: Also include the following: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 ASTM TYPE II WATER SYSTEMS FOR LABORATORY 226722 - 3 ADDENDUM 02 07 January 2019 a. Overall dimensions and tolerances. b. Quantity and type of activated carbon media. c. Vessel ASME rating. d. Vessel interior coating. e. Valve specifications including solenoids, tubing and accessories. f. NSF Certifications. 5. Reverse Osmosis Unit: Also include the following: a. Membrane specifications and module assembly. b. Percent rejection of TDS rating. c. Rated permeate yield. d. Percent brine rejection to permeate yield. e. Percent rejection of TDS rating. f. Discharge resistivity. 6. Service Deionization Bottles: Also include the following: a. Overall dimensions and tolerances. b. Quantity and type of activated carbon media. c. Vessel ASME rating. d. Vessel interior coating. e. Valve specifications including solenoids, tubing and accessories. f. NSF Certifications. 7.6. Purified Water Tank submittals: Also include the following: a. Overall dimensions and tolerances for the tank and accessories. b. Design data including applicable codes and standards. c. Complete bills of materials for tank and accessories. d. Welding specifications (if applicable). e. Cleaning procedures (if applicable). f. Details of weld preparation (if applicable). g. Nozzle connection types, sizes and dimensioned physical locations. h. Customer nameplate. 8.7. Centrifugal Pumps: Also include the following: a. Complete performance curves showing pump rate vs. discharge pressure, impeller diameter, brake horsepower, motor horsepower, hydraulic efficiency and netpositive suction head required (NPSHR). b. Highlighted duty point of the pump on the performance curves. c. Detailed pump and seal drawings. d. Overall pump dimensions, including motor and frame. e. Size, type and location of suction and discharge connections. f. Operating weight (lbs.). g. Sterilization procedures. h. Design and operating conditions. i. Materials of construction. j. Details of seal materials and design. 9.8. UV and Final Filters: Also include the following: a. Dimensions and tolerances. b. Quantity and type Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 ASTM TYPE II WATER SYSTEMS FOR LABORATORY 226722 - 4 ADDENDUM 02 07 January 2019 10.9. Submit Instrument Datasheets. E. Closeout Submittals 1. General a. Revise final drawings and documents to incorporate all mark-ups and notes in the shop drawings to reflect the specific installation. b. Submit Inspection and test reports specified in "Source Quality Control" Articles in Part 2 of this Section. 2. Pre-Treatment, Primary Treatment: Provide equipment documentation as follows: a. User manual (3 sets): Include information to install, operate, configure, calibrate, troubleshoot and service the equipment. Include final as-built drawings, parts lists and component manufacturer literature as part of the User Manual. b. Manufacturing documentation (3 sets): Include safety and authorization certificates of vendor policies. Provide certificates of compliance for pressure vessel and piping materials, manufacturing, welding, surface treatment, inspection, testing and pressure vessel test report (Form U-1 for ASME) with a copy of the name plate. A certificate of compliance is defined as a description of design and manufacturing principles, practices, methods and equipment. Include boroscopic documentation. c. Control system validation documentation (3 sets): Include the PLC input/output listing, control valve table and a source code listing. Include change control documentation, version and media management documentation, and software development guidelines. d. Qualification documentation (3 sets): Include a general description of the factory acceptance test (FAT) procedures and compliance test report. General description of FAT procedures defines the objectives and describes the contents of each test and verification. e. Pressure vessel inspection procedure and reports. f. Document and software review procedures. g. Functional software and design specification. h. Hardware design specification. i. Hardware acceptance test specification. System acceptance test specification. 3. Storage Tank: Provide equipment documentation as follows: a. Materials of construction. b. Wall thicknesses. c. Details of weld preparation (if applicable). d. Location of all welded joints (if applicable). e. Hydrostatic test report (if applicable). f. Cleaning procedures and inspection report 4. Distribution skid with Centrifugal Pumps, UV, Final Filters, Backpressure Valve, and Provide equipment documentation as follows: a. Operating, Installation and maintenance manual. b. Recommended spare parts for 12 month operation Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 ASTM TYPE II WATER SYSTEMS FOR LABORATORY 226722 - 5 ADDENDUM 02 07 January 2019 5. Instrumentation: Provide equipment documentation as follows: a. Calibration certificates of all process instrumentation. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.3, "Process Piping," for piping conveying fluid at a pressure of 15 psig or greater. C. Pure water equipment vendor shall have a minimum of ten (10) years’ experience in manufacturing water purification equipment and provide references for ten (10) similar facilities. 1.7 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 1. ANSI/NSF 42 “Drinking Water Treatment Units – Aesthetic Effects”. 2. ANSI/NSF 53 “Drinking Water Treatment Units – Health Effects”. B. American Water Works Association (AWWA). C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). D. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), Section IX, “Welding and Brazing Qualifications.” E. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1, “Unfired Pressure Vessels.” F. ASME B31.3 “Process Piping” G. American Society for the Testing of Materials (ASTM) 1. A380 “Standard Practice for Cleaning, Descaling, and Passivation of Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment and Systems.” 2. A967 “Standard Specification for Chemical Passivation Treatments for Stainless Steel Parts.” 3. D 859 “Test Methods for Silica in Water,” 4. D 1067 “Test Methods for Acidity or Alkalinity of Water,” 5. D 1125 “Test Methods for Electrical Conductivity and Resistivity of Water,” 6. D 1068 “Test Method for Iron in Water,” 7. D 1126 “Test Methods for Hardness in Water,” 8. D 1129 “Terminology Relating to Water,” 9. D 1193 “Standard Specification for Reagent Water,” 10. D 1293 “Test Methods for pH of Water,” 11. D 1998 “Standard Specification for Polyethylene Upright Storage Tanks,” 12. D 3370 “Practices for Sampling Water,” 13. D 4453 “Practice for Handling of Ultra-Pure Water Samples,” 14. D 4517 “Test Method for Low-Level Total Silica in High-Purity Water by Flameless Atomic Absorption Spectroscopy,” Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 ASTM TYPE II WATER SYSTEMS FOR LABORATORY 226722 - 6 ADDENDUM 02 07 January 2019 15. D 4779 ”Test Method for Total, Organic, and Inorganic Carbon in High Purity Water by Ultraviolet (UV) or Persulfate Oxidation, or Both, and Infrared Detection,” 16. D 5391 “Test Method for Electrical Conductivity and Resistivity of a Flowing High Purity Water Sample,” 17. D 5542 “Test Method for Trace Anions in High Purity Water by Ion Chromatography,” 18. D 5997 “Test Method for On-Line Monitoring of Total Carbon, Inorganic Carbon in Water by Ultraviolet, Persulfate Oxidation and Membrane Conductivity Detection,” 19. D 6071 “Test Method for Low Level Sodium in High Purity Water by Graphite Furnace Atom Absorption Spectroscopy.” 20. D 6161 “Standard Terminology used for Crossflow Microfiltration, Ultrafiltration, Nanofiltration and Reverse Osmosis Membrane Process”. H. American Welding Society (AWS) I. College of American Pathologists (CAP) 1. “College of American Pathologists Commission on Laboratory Inspection and Accreditation: Reagent Water Specifications.” J. Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association (TEMA) K. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards (NCCLS) 1. Document C3-A3 “Preparation and Testing of Reagent Water in the Clinical Laboratory— Third Edition; Approved Guideline” L. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) M. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) N. Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL) 1.8 DEFINITIONS A. For definitions of terms used in this Section, refer to ASTM D1129, D6161 and NCCLS Document C3-A3. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing/Handling 1. Prior to shipment, all openings shall be adequately sealed to protect from damage. 2. Disassemble units only to the extent to prevent damage during shipping and to facilitate field handling. 3. Pack each unit individually and include in packaging all necessary appurtenances and parts required for field installation. 4. Equipment shall be match-marked or tagged to identify location. B. Shipping 1. Ship F.O.B. job site. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 ASTM TYPE II WATER SYSTEMS FOR LABORATORY 226722 - 7 ADDENDUM 02 07 January 2019 1.10 SYSTEM START UP A. Perform start-up services and training of operators by a factory-trained field service engineer. Provide travel and accommodation costs of factory personnel. B. Start-up service of the pure water system and storage tank shall include the following: 1. Installation checks including utility connections. 2. System operation for routine start-up and shut-down. 3. Programming of control set points. 4. “Off-spec” permeate dumping set-points and response. 5. Storage tank level control interfacing. 6. Alarm condition and response. 7. After system has been operating for 24 hours, collect RO/CEDI water samples at hourly intervals for 8 hours. Owner analysis of samples shall meet the requirements of this specification in all respects. 8. During sampling period, check RO and CEDI production rate. Production rate shall be in excess of 95% of the specified capacity. 9. After completion of start-up testing, obtain written sign-off of system from Owner. Correct design and fabrication deficiencies responsible for unsatisfactory test results at no cost to the Owner. 10. Conduct training of system operation and maintenance for Owner personnel. C. Start-up of the purified water distribution loop shall include the following: 1. System operation for routine start-up and shut-down. 2. Programming of control set points. 3. Verification of pump rotation, speed and discharge pressure. 4. Verification of UV light intensity. 5. Verification of polishing deionizationCDI skid outlet resistivity. 6. Collect pure water samples at use points at hourly intervals for 8 hours. Owner analysis of samples shall meet the requirements of this specification in all respects. 7. During sampling period, check flow rate and velocity through distribution loop. 8. After completion of start-up testing, obtain written sign-off of system from Owner. Correct design and fabrication deficiencies responsible for unsatisfactory test results at no cost to the Owner. 9. Conduct training of system operation and maintenance for Owner personnel. 1.11 MAINTENANCE A. Pure water equipment vendor shall have an established field service organization and guarantee less than 12-hour response time, 24 hours per day, 7 days per week. B. Provide as an option, the cost for a basic spare parts kit for an average 2 years operation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements and Drawings, provide products by one of the following: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 ASTM TYPE II WATER SYSTEMS FOR LABORATORY 226722 - 8 ADDENDUM 02 07 January 2019 B. Complete System 1. Evoqua Water Technologies LLC 2. Burt Process 3. Veolia Water Technologies, Inc. 4. Hydro Service and Supplies 5. GE Water and Process Technologies C. Subject to compliance with requirements and Drawings, and unless specified otherwise, instruments and controls provided with standard vendor-packaged units will be considered acceptable. 2.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. The central Reverse Osmosis Water System shall consist of three major sections: pretreatment equipment, primary treatment equipment, and post treatment equipment. B. Water Analysis: 1. Obtain a source water analysis and include all parameters as part of the final design to produce water in accordance with this specification. 2. Collect a representative sample. Use appropriate methods and quality-assurance measures to ensure that the field sites selected and the samples collected accurately represent the environment intended for study and can fulfill data-quality objectives. C. The central Reverse Osmosis Water System shall produce 1,460 gallons per 24 hour day with 77°F feed water and shall re-circulate 10-gpm of RO Quality Water. D. The RO Water System shall produce and discharge ASTM Type II water quality. E. The pretreatment equipment shall be designed to remove particulates that can affect the operation of the reverse osmosis unit. The pretreatment equipment shall include the following components: 1. Water Softener 2. Cartridge Carbon Filter 3. Five (5) Micron Pre-filter F. The primary treatment equipment shall be designed to remove an average of 99% of the total dissolved solids from the feed water source. In addition, the primary treatment system shall remove most remaining colloidal particles and shall remove macromolecules larger than 200 molecular weight. The primary treatment equipment shall consist of the following: 1. Reverse Osmosis Unit 1.2. CDI unit G. The post treatment equipment shall be designed to recirculate RO Water. The distribution pump shall be designed to continuously re-circulate 10-gpm of Purified Water through the post treatment equipment. The post treatment equipment shall include the following: 1. Storage Tank Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 ASTM TYPE II WATER SYSTEMS FOR LABORATORY 226722 - 9 ADDENDUM 02 07 January 2019 2. Distribution Pump 3.2. Mixed Bed Deionizers 4.3. Ultraviolet Sterilizer 5.4. 0.2 Micron Post Filter H. The central RO Water System shall be installed complete with interconnecting piping and interconnecting electrical work. I. The equipment supplier shall provide one operation and maintenance manual. J. The equipment supplier shall provide one complete set of project drawings including process and instrumentation drawing, equipment layout drawing, and wiring diagrams. All drawings should be done using AutoCAD 2016 or later versions. K. All plumbing shall be SDR-11 Beta Polypropylene, socket fusion, as manufactured by George Fischer. L. The system shall be controlled via a common PLC driven control panel with touch screen operator interface. System will require a single 460VAC, three phase power connection as well as a 120 VAC single phase power connection. 1. System components other than storage tanks to be factory mounted and plumbed on common epoxy coated carbon steel skids. 2. Electrical conduit shall be corrosion resistant PVC with PolyTuff flexible conduit as manufactured by Hubbell. 3. System manufacturer shall provide five days of site assistance to cover start-up and training. 4. System Maintenance: Manufacturer shall be capable of providing a maintenance agreement with the system owner should the owner wish to enter into such an agreement. 2.3 WATER SOFTENER A. The purpose of the water softener is to remove mineral hardness from water. Softening shall be accomplished by an ion exchange process utilizing a high capacity cation exchange resin in the sodium exchange mode. Automatic regeneration shall be accomplished using a salt (brine) solution. B. The high capacity synthetic cation exchange resin shall have a minimum exchange capacity of 20,000 grains per cubic foot when regenerated with 6 pounds of salt per cubic foot. The resin shall be solid with uniform particle size, clean and free of dirt and extraneous matter. C. The operating limits of the filter shall be 25 to 125 psi at 35° F to 110° F. D. The pressure vessel shall be made of fiberglass (99” diameter x 48” high) and shall have an ABS or polyethylene liner. E. The filtered water collector and backwash water distributor shall be a single point fine-slotted self-cleaning plastic manifold with slots no larger than 0.010-inch width. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 ASTM TYPE II WATER SYSTEMS FOR LABORATORY 226722 - 10 ADDENDUM 02 07 January 2019 F. The top mounted motorized control valve shall be of the mechanically-actua ted, hydraulically balanced, self-cleaning piston four-position type to accomplish the reconditioning steps of backwash, brine and slow rinse, rapid rinse and brine refill. The valve shall contain selfadjusting backwash flow control and it will be capable of being manually stepped through regeneration without electrical power. The valve shall be designed in such a way that most service can be performed without disconnecting the inlet and outlet plumbing connections. G. The softener shall contain a control valve operated by a 7-day mechanical time clock. The timer shall be capable of being set to skip one or more days between regenerations. H. A combination salt storage tank, with cover, and brine well shall be supplied as part of the system. The brine tank shall be large enough to hold salt for at least ten regenerations between refills. The brine tank shall be made of polyethylene. I. Provide interconnecting plumbing and instrumentation per system drawings. 2.4 ACTIVATED CARBON FILTER A. The purpose of the activated carbon filter is to remove chlorine, tastes and odors from the water. The media is a high capacity black granular carbon with rugged grain structure, high density and large surface area for efficient removal of chlorine/chloramine as well as other taste, odor and color-causing organics. It works well over a wide pH range. B. The filter housing shall be reinforced polypropylene construction. The housing shall consist of two parts, filter bowl and head. Fixed guides within the filter housing shall allow easy loading, unloading and proper alignment and seating of the filter cartridge. The filter housing shall be designed to accommodate nominally rated filter cartridges with a knife-edge seal. An O-ring shall be provided to seal the two-part housing. Filter housing shall be provided with a universal mounting bracket if indicated. Housings for 4 ½” diameter filters shall be designed for operation at 100 psi at 100° F. C. Provide one 10” long x 7 ¼“ diameter polypropylene filter housing to house one 10” long x 4 ½“ diameter high capacity filter cartridge. D. The carbon filter shall be integrated directly with the reverse osmosis unit. 2.5 FIVE (5) MICRON PRE-FILTER A. The cartridge filter system shall be designed to remove particles larger than 5 microns from the water. Nominal rated pre-filtration is required to protect the reverse osmosis membranes from particulate fouling. B. The filter housing shall be reinforced polypropylene construction. The housing shall consist of two parts, filter bowl and head. Fixed guides within the filter housing shall allow easy loading, unloading and proper alignment and seating of the filter cartridge. The filter housing shall be designed to accommodate nominally rated filter cartridges with a knife-edge seal. An O-ring shall be provided to seal the two-part housing. Filter housing shall be provided with a universal mounting bracket if indicated. Housings for 4 ½” diameter filters shall be designed for operation at 90 psi at 100° F. C. Provide one 20” long x 7 ¼“ diameter polypropylene filter housing to house one 20” long x 4 ½“ diameter x 5 micron high capacity filter cartridge. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 ASTM TYPE II WATER SYSTEMS FOR LABORATORY 226722 - 11 ADDENDUM 02 07 January 2019 D. The pre-filter shall be integrated directly with the reverse osmosis unit. 2.6 REVERSE OSMOSIS/ CDI UNIT A. Supply a reverse osmosis systems rated to produce 540 gallons per hour of product water when fed with 40oF cold water. Units shall be furnished with controls for manual or automatic operation. B. Number of Units: (1) IonRight RO/CDI C. Recovery: The reverse osmosis system shall be designed to have a minimum recovery of 75% (product flow divided by feed flow). D. Performance Conditions; 1. Production Capacity (Design) 5,000 GPD 2. Feed water requirements; a. Maximum Fouling Index (Silt Density Index) 5 b. Maximum Langelier Saturation Index: Negative by a factor for at least 1.00 3. Reject Scaling Index: a. Maximum free chlorine: 0.02ppm b. Operating Temperature Range: 38°-77°F c. Operating pH Range: 4-11 4. System Dimensions (Approximate): a. Height: 66” b. Width: 32” c. Depth: 48” E. Flow Meters: 1. The reverse osmosis system shall be equipped with rotameters that are panel mounted no higher than 48" from floor level. These flow meters shall be mounted on the instrumentation panel and constructed of acrylic plastic. The flow meters shall monitor the product, reject to drain and reject recirculation flows. F. Controls & Instrumentation: 1. The reverse osmosis controller shall be controlled by a means of solid state programmable controller housed in a NEMA 4 splash proof housing. The controller shall be capable of operating all solenoid valve motors and safety interlocks associated with the system as listed below: a. Inlet Solenoid Valve b. Flush Solenoid Valve c. High Pressure Pump Relay d. Pretreatment Interlock e. Low Feed Pressure f. High Feed Pressure g. Tank Level Switch 2. Standard input voltage shall be 120 volts AC single phase. Output voltage shall be 24 volts AC for safety. 3. The controller shall be supplied with a time and duration automatic flush cycle field adjustable timing of automatic flush cycle(s). The RO system reject and autoflush valves shall be compatible with peroxide based sanitants. Automated flush cycles shall occur when the RO system is in full tank shutdown mode and/or system standby modes to prevent stagnant water conditions. Flush flow rate shall be controlled to provide a flow rate during flush mode equivalent to that of normal system operation. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 ASTM TYPE II WATER SYSTEMS FOR LABORATORY 226722 - 12 ADDENDUM 02 07 January 2019 4. The controller shall be equipped with a conductivity monitor. A percent rejection reading shall be calculated by the controller and displayed on a digital light emitting diode display module. The controller shall have the capability of providing an alarm output for the following conditions: a. High Feed Temperature with Indicator Lamp b. Low Feed Pressure with Indicator Lamp Percent Rejection Below Setpoint with Indicator Lamp c. Pretreatment in Regeneration (Standby Status Light) 5. These conditions shall also initiate a visual alarm or indicator on the controller module. Also, the controller shall have a 12 VDC general RO alarm output terminal. 6. The PLC shall report status of the water system to the HVAC Central Building Monitoring System. Wiring to the head end of the BMS shall be installed by the HVAC controls vendor. Coordinate with the controls vendor hardware required. Furnish a bacNET card in the panel to transmit all information. G. Valves and Connectors: 1. Gauges - All gauges on the RO system shall be minimum 2-1/2". H. Source Quality Control: 1. Perform factory acceptance tests to guarantee that the manufacture, functionality, and performance of the system is in accordance with approved submittal documentation package. 2. Perform factory Fabrication QC and provide the following: a. Unit identification including unit type, drawing number, serial number, etc. b. Drawing and diagram verification with record of as-built drawing numbers of equipment drawings, Drawings and circuit diagrams. c. Equipment verification to certify the critical dimensions of the unit and recorded serial numbers of critical components, such as control valve, pumps safety valves, etc. d. Control system hardware acceptance tests verifying the correct hardware has been installed, system initialized correctly and inputs and outputs (I/O) of the system are functioning correctly. e. Process instrument calibration reports of temperature, pressure, control system, recorders, gauges and displays. f. Inspection reports of all internal pressure vessel and piping welds and primary welds. g. Hydrostatic test reports of pressure vessels. h. Test equipment calibration to certify the conductivity meter reference instrument and resistor systems. i. Adjust flow control valves, level sensors and pressure switches. I. Field Quality Control: 1. Field Services: a. System manufacturer shall provide a trained factory field service engineer or technician, as required, for installation supervision, media loading, system startup, loop balancing, loop sanitization, and operator training. 2. Perform Operational QC and provide the following: a. Verification of proper connection of test utilities and the tuning of valves Alarm testing report of all alarms on the unit. b. Test report of safety interlocks. 3. Perform Performance QC and provide the following: a. Test run reports indicating capacity and utility consumption rates. Utility connections shall be similar to those at the project site. 4. Provide test report of unit purification capability. Report percent rejection of TDS and permeate yield for RO and CEDI units. J. Electrical 1. Potential: 460VAC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 ASTM TYPE II WATER SYSTEMS FOR LABORATORY 226722 - 13 ADDENDUM 02 07 January 2019 2. Phase: 3 phase 3. Current (Full load): 6 amps 4. Provide separate 120VAC for control K. Basis of Design 2.61. IonRight Units by Evoqua Water Technologies A. Reverse osmosis is a membrane process in which feed water is maintained under high pressure against a semi-permeable membrane reversing natural osmotic pressure and allowing water molecules to permeate through the membrane. Dissolved solids, organics, and colloids are concentrated on the feed water side of the membrane. The process results in two products: 1. A concentrated brine solution which is discharged to drain. 2. A high quality permeate water. B. The reverse osmosis unit shall be designed to produce 1,460 GPD at 77° F feed water temperature and shall operate at a system recovery rate of at least 25%. C. The reverse osmosis system shall be a completely self-contained water treatment system, prewired and pre-plumbed. The system shall consist of a polyurethane coated heavy-duty steel frame, stainless steel pressure vessel with membrane element, high-pressure pump, piping, valves, and instrumentation and controls. D. Reverse osmosis membrane module shall be spiral wound thin-film composite type. E. The high-pressure pump shall be a rotary vane, positive displacement type. The pump shall be brass construction with internal graphite bearings and vanes. An external ball bearing shall be provided outside the liquid chamber and shall be pre-lubricated for the life of the pump. A mechanical seal shall be provided to seal the rotor shaft. The pump shall be close coupled to a fractional horsepower motor, 120 volts. F. The reverse osmosis unit shall be directly integrated with the 5 micron pre-filter, carbon filter, RO pump, the storage tank, and distribution pump. Standard features of the system shall include flow gauges on the permeate and concentrate lines, and pressure gauges on the feed, pump discharge, and membrane lines. In addition, a Thornton M300 resistivity monitor, dual channel, with two resistivity sensors for measuring the resistivity of the feed and permeate water shall be provided. The monitor shall have a digital display and shall be temperature compensated. Other features shall include a feed water solenoid valve for automatic operation and low pressure cut-out switch. The system shall operate automatically by an integrated storage tank level control switch. 2.7 STORAGE TANK A. The system shall include one FRP storage tank with 200 150 gallons capacity, dish bottom, and closed top. B. The storage tank shall be provided with two level position switches. One high level switch will operate the reverse osmosis unit, and one low level switch will operate the distribution pump. C. The tank shall include a 0.2 micron hydrophobic vent filter designed for maximum pump drawdown flow rate, 10” sealed fill well, drain connection, and a protected overflow designed to prevent contaminants from entering the tank. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 ASTM TYPE II WATER SYSTEMS FOR LABORATORY 226722 - 14 ADDENDUM 02 07 January 2019 D. The storage tank shall include necessary bulkhead fittings. E. The storage tank shall be integrated directly with the reverse osmosis unit. F. Temperature control of storage: 1. Temperature in the storage tank shall be controlled by a temperature dump valve connected downstream of the storage tank. A temperature element and transmitter shall be located in the storage tank to monitor temperature. 2. The temperature valve shall open on temperature excursion in the storage tank and discharge water to thus allow for makeup water to the storage tank until a set point is reached. 3. Set point dump: 80oF , valve off at 75oF. 4. The valve shall fail closed, send alarm to PLC and BMS to notify owner of valve failure. 5. Alarms: should the storage tank temperature reach 90oF, send a high temperature alarm to the PLC. Transmit the alarm status to the building BMS. 6. Discharge of the rejected high temperature water - route dumped water to nearest drain. 2.8 DISTRIBUTION PUMP A. Distribution pump shall be designed to re-circulate 10 gpm of purified water through the distribution loop. Pump discharge pressure shall be 50 psi at 10 gpm. B. Pump type shall be multi-stage centrifugal that is designed for heavy duty, continuous service. The pump shall operate on single phase, 120VAC power. C. The pump end shall be of the horizontal multi-stage design with motor mounted directly to the back of the pump. D. The pump suction/discharge chamber, impellers, pump shaft, diffuser chambers, outer discharge sleeve, and impeller seal ring retainers shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel. E. The cartridge type mechanical seal assembly shall be silicon carbide / silicon carbide. F. Pump connections shall be 1” NPT type. G. The pump shall be provided with a fused disconnect switch and motor control relay. H. The distribution pump shall be integrated directly with the reverse osmosis unit. 2.9 MIXED BED DEIONIZERS A. Deionization is an ion-exchange process for removing ionized constituents from water. The process is performed by passing water through the hydrogen form of a cation-exchange resin and through the hydroxide form of a strong-base anion-exchange resin. B. The deionization process shall be the mixed-bed type in which the cation and anion resins are thoroughly mixed together to provide maximum efficiency. The mixed-bed deionizer shall provide the following water quality specifications: 18 meg-ohm-cm specific resistance, less than 0.01 mg/L total dissolved solids, neutral pH. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 ASTM TYPE II WATER SYSTEMS FOR LABORATORY 226722 - 15 ADDENDUM 02 07 January 2019 C. Provide two (2) mixed bed deionizers, each containing 3.6 cubic feet of resin. Arrange the deionizers in a worker/polisher arrangement. Provide a 1 Megaohm cell light between the worker and polisher in the bank to alert service personnel of an expired tank. D. The resin regeneration process shall be a formulation of premium grade resins, premium chemicals, and recombination mixes that produce a known quality. All resins shall be regenerated in the same manner. The regeneration shall be a batch process. Low bacteria/low TOC RO water shall be used in every step of the regeneration. The regeneration chemicals shall be suitable for use in pharmaceutical, biotech and food grade applications. All chemicals lot numbers shall be recorded for each batch and records of COA reports shall be maintained. Instrumentation shall be used for QC of the regeneration process and includes readings of resistivity, flow rates, temperature, time, TOC, pH, and mix ratio. E. Full documentation shall be maintained of all resins regenerated and full traceability as required by the pharmaceutical and biotech industries shall be available for review. Resins shall not be exposed to any water source not considered potable or meeting the EPA Drinking Water Standard. Resins from other suppliers shall not be regenerated in the same plant as the supplier providing service and the resins shall not be used in applications where they are exposed to irremovable contaminants. The supplier shall not allow its resins to be used in-line with resins from other suppliers. The supplier must own (100% proprietor) and maintain its own resin regeneration plant and employ qualified trained personnel for operation and the regeneration operation shall have been in existence for at least five (5) years. F. Cation resin shall be premium grade, strong acid cation resin in the hydrogen exchange mode. The minimum total wet volume capacity shall be 1.8 meq/ml, and the water retention capacity shall be 50 to 55 percent. G. Anion resin shall be Type 1, strong base anion resin in the hydroxide exchange mode. The minimum total wet volume capacity shall be 1.0 meq/ml, and the maximum water retention capacity shall be 60 percent. H. The tanks shall be a filament-wound fiberglass pressure vessel with ABS or polyethylene liners. The tanks shall be designed for a maximum working pressure of at least 125 psi. The closure heads and manifolding in the tanks shall be UHMW polyethylene or virgin polypropylene construction. The manifolds shall consist of 200 mesh, 316 stainless steel screen thermally fused to the inlet and outlet manifold fittings. 2.102.9 ULTRAVIOLET STERILIZER A. The ultraviolet sterilizer shall be capable of destroying greater than 99 percent of the microorganisms in water with 254-nanometer ultraviolet radiation. The ultraviolet sterilizer shall be designed for 10-gpm flow rate. B. The ultraviolet sterilizer shall consist of an electropolished and passivated 316L stainless steel chamber with a clear fused quartz jacket, ultraviolet lamp, and electrical ballast with power cord set. C. The high intensity ultraviolet lamp shall provide greater than 30,000-microwatt seconds per square centimeter of 254 nm ultraviolet radiation. D. The ultraviolet unit shall be a horizontal design and be mounted integral to the Distribution Pump skid. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 ASTM TYPE II WATER SYSTEMS FOR LABORATORY 226722 - 16 ADDENDUM 02 07 January 2019 E. The ultraviolet unit shall be furnished with two stainless steel 90° elbows to act as light traps on the inlet and outlet. 2.112.10 MICRON POST FILTER A. The cartridge filter shall be designed to remove particles larger than 0.2 microns from the water. Final filtration is required to remove all viable and non-viable particulate matter from the process stream. B. The design of the sub-micron cartridge filter system shall be such that the flow through 10” of cartridge length shall not exceed 5 gallons per minute. This ensures that the filter will not exceed a reasonable pressure drop. C. The filter housing shall be constructed of 316L stainless steel, and holds one (1) 30” length cartridge. Filter housing shall include 1” NPT Type connections and be rated for 300 psi at 200° F. D. Provide one 316L stainless steel housing to accommodate one (1) 30” long x 2.7“ diameter x 0.2 micron high capacity filter cartridge. 2.122.11 INSTRUMENTATION A. Provide one resistivity monitor equal to Thornton Model M300. The monitor will display the feed water and permeate resistivity, along with temperature, and percent salt rejection. B. Provide a second resistivity monitor equal to Thornton Model M300 that will display the Distribution Loop Supply Water Quality entering the distribution piping. C. Pressure gauges shall be 316 SS with 0-100 psi range and liquid filled face. 2.132.12 INTERCONNECTING PLUMBING A. RO/DI Water System vendor shall provide and install all interconnecting piping and electrical that is required for complete system operation. B. All Interconnecting Plumbing through the pretreatment before the RO Unit shall be ¾” socket fusion beta polypropylene as manufactured by Georg Fischer. All plumbing connections at the exit side of the Storage Tank shall be 1 ¼” socket fusion beta polypropylene as manufactured by George Fischer. C. All isolation valves before and after major equipment shall be George Fischer Type 546 beta polypropylene Ball Valves with true union socket fusion connections. All gaskets shall be EPDM. D. All check valves shall be George Fischer Type 561 beta polypropylene Check Valves with true union socket fusion connections. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 ASTM TYPE II WATER SYSTEMS FOR LABORATORY 226722 - 17 ADDENDUM 02 07 January 2019 2.142.13 FIELD SUPPORT A. System installation or supervision shall be by the OEM of the RO system. Installation or supervising personnel shall be employed by the OEM and trained in the installation/supervision and service of all equipment specified. The equipment supplier must provide engineering and technical support during the installation. The installation of the system must be supervised by a field installation personnel with a minimum of 10 years of service with the equipment supplier. B. The equipment supplier must provide one day of start-up and commissioning service by a certified service technician employed by the supplier. A start-up report shall be issued to the owner and signed by the service technician. Any punch list items will be noted and addressed. 2.152.14 DISTRIBUTION PIPING TESTING A. The RO Water piping contractor shall provide pressure testing of distribution loop. Before pressure testing, examine the completed piping system for the following items: 1. System shall be complete per Drawings with all valve and supports in place. 2. Pipe and valves shall be supported per manufacturer’s recommendations or using continuous support. 3. Pipe shall be in good condition, with no visible cracks, gouges, deformations, or other evidence of abuse. 4. Pipe shall be weld aligned. 5. Fittings and flanged joints shall be free from visible cracks. B. Pipe System Pressure Test: 1. Test fluid shall be deionized water filtered to 0.2 micron for all piping. 2. Pressure test piping hydrostatically using a testing apparatus which is suitable for ultrapure services. Isolate all equipment and instrumentation that cannot be exposed to test pressure. 3. Fill the piping system with RO Water by opening all valves and ports to purge system of air. 4. Slowly pressurize system to hydrostatic pressure of 120 psig at 25oC. Examine for leaks, note leaks, if any, release pressure and remove DI water. 5. Take special care when repairing leaks. Remove fragments and particulate matter produced during joint preparation. Repair leaks, resume test and/or retest. 6. Re-pressurize piping system and maintain 120 psig test pressure for a period of 12 hours. 7. Tests shall be witnessed by the owner’s personnel or representative. 8. Test shall be documented and recorded with original report presented to the owner. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 ASTM TYPE II WATER SYSTEMS FOR LABORATORY 226722 - 18 ADDENDUM 02 07 January 2019 C. The RO Water System supplier shall provide a system sanitization which includes the distribution loop piping, point of use locations, storage tank, and all equipment associated with the loop. Sanitize using peracetic acid solution: Minncare or approved equal. 1. Follow manufacturer’s safety recommendations for handling chemicals. 2. Disconnect power to UV lights prior to sanitization. 3. Notify personnel that a system sanitization is in progress. 4. Isolate equipment or instrumentation that is not to be exposed to sanitant. 5. Prepare solution of 1% Minncare. Make up water shall be deionized. 6. Fill entire system with solution. Re-circulate at a flow rate that produces at least 3 ft per second velocity. 7. Draw samples at point of use locations and at key sample points to confirm presence and concentration of peracetic acid solution using test strips. 8. Confirm that there is solution throughout the system, and then continue to re-circulate for at least 3 hours. 9. After re-circulation with peracetic acid solution, flush system with deionized water for at least 45 minutes, rotating draw off from all point of use locations. 10. Test water with peracetic acid residual test strips at point of use locations to ensure less than 1 ppm is achieved. 11. Continue to flush piping loop for 30 minutes. Draw off water for at least 1 minute at each use point. 12. Return system to its original configuration. Verify that all modifications that were made to piping or controls were restored. 2.162.15 DOCUMENTATION A. The equipment supplier shall furnish the following with the system, in duplicate. All documents and prints described below will be contained in the system operating manuals. a. Detailed Piping and instrumentation diagram (P&ID). 1) Valves tag numbers 2) Instruments tag numbers 3) Alarms 4) Pipe sizing and material of construction 5) Skid limitations 6) Plan of component layout 7) Written sequence of operation b. Electrical ladder diagrams for control panel, in accordance with accepted practices. c. Complete bill of materials, including system sub components along with major components Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 ASTM TYPE II WATER SYSTEMS FOR LABORATORY 226722 - 19 ADDENDUM 02 07 January 2019 d. Cross-reference between each print and the bill of materials, providing references to system components. e. Operating and maintenance manuals containing descriptive information on the operation of the system, operating and troubleshooting information, spare parts, specification sheets and manufacturer’s cut sheets and service manuals. f. Complete ladder and logic diagram (program) loaded into PLC B. Mechanical Assemblies Of All Skids 1. Dimensions 2. Major components highlighted 3. Bill of materials C. Control Panel Layout 1. Lights, switches and instrument plaques 2. Back panel layout. 3. The operations shall be monitored by BMS. D. Manufacture Catalog Data Sheets 1. All Major components E. Testing 1. Hydrostatic of all equipment 2. Control panel checkout F. Insurance 1. Manufacturer shall include a Certificate of Insurance with their submittal approving that they are insured as a supplier and manufacturer of such systems. G. System Maintenance 1. Manufacturer shall be capable of providing a maintenance agreement with the system owner should the owner wish to enter into such an agreement. H. Equipment Warranty 1. System manufacturer shall warrant all equipment against defects in materials and workmanship, including part and labor, for a period of 12 months from date of startup or 18 months from delivery, whichever occurs first, for all equipment above. 2. Field Services - System manufacturer shall provide a trained factory field service engineer or technician, as required, for installation supervision, media loading, system startup, loop balancing, loop sanitization, and operator training. I. Electrical Work: 1. Electrical power only connections to all main control panels (by division 26). Note that electrical power from the control panel to equipment is included under this contract (220000 section) as part of the pure water system installation. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 ASTM TYPE II WATER SYSTEMS FOR LABORATORY 226722 - 20 ADDENDUM 02 07 January 2019 2.172.16 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR TYPE II WATER A. Warranty 1. System manufacturer shall warrant all equipment against defects in materials and workmanship, including part and labor, for a period of 12 months from date of startup or 18 months from delivery, whichever occurs first, for all equipment above. B. Field Services 1. System manufacturer shall provide a trained factory field service engineer or technician, as required, for installation supervision, media loading, system startup, loop balancing for each floor, equipment and all distribution loop piping cleaning and sanitization, and 1 day of operator training. Water samples shall be taken to assure water quality is met one week after system sanitization. C. Supplies and Services for Operation 1. System manufacturer shall provide and include in equipment pricing, sufficient supplies and services, including consumables (including, but not limited to cartridge filters, salt, and service deionization exchanges), for the first four months of operation, or until the system is accepted by owner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RO WATER SYSTEM A. RO water piping system shall be installed as a continuous recirculation type loop from pure water equipment through the distribution network back to the pure water storage tank. Piping drops at each point of use shall be as indicated on drawings. Piping from point of use connection to Owner furnished equipment shall be piped as directed by Owner. After final use points have been installed, clean and sanitize system as specified in specification section 226701 ‘Purified Water Piping - Thermoplastics”. B. Pipe running horizontal whether above the ceiling or below shall be supported and hung at intervals not to exceed 5'- 0". Piping shall be hung in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment. C. Connect ASTM type II purified-water piping to equipment and service outlets with compatible pure piping style unions or flanges. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 ASTM TYPE II WATER SYSTEMS FOR LABORATORY 226722 - 21 ADDENDUM 02 07 January 2019 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test new piping, and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for leaks and defects. 1. Schedule tests and their inspections by Owner, with at least 24 hours' advance notice. 2. Do not cover piping or put into service before inspection and approval. 3. Test completed piping according to Owner. If Owner does not have published procedures, perform tests as follows: a. Hydrostatic Tests: Test piping at pressure not less than 1-1/2 times the maximum system operating pressure, but not less than 100 psig. 1) Exception: Do not subject glass piping to pressure above manufacturer's pressure rating for size. 4. Replace leaking joints with new materials and retest until no leaks exist. 5. Submit separate reports for each test. 3.5 CLEANING A. Use procedures prescribed by Pure Water Equipment Manufacturer or, if not prescribed, use procedures described below: 1. Before using, purge new equipment piping and parts of existing equipment piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. 2. Clean pure water equipment piping by flushing with clean product water. 3. Clean and fully sanitize all pure water equipment components per manufacturers standard prior to charging the main piping system END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2019_01-07_ADD 2\226722_A2_ASTM TYPE II WATER EQUIPMENT.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 230500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 20000. 1. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. 2. For example, prior to requesting an occupancy permit, the documentation listed in Part 3 of Section 20000 must be submitted and approved so the Engineer can certify that the MEP systems and life safety provisions are completed. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Transition fittings. 3. Dielectric fittings. 4. Mechanical sleeve seals. 5. Sleeves. 6. Escutcheons. 7. Grout. 8. HVAC demolition. 9. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 10. Painting and finishing. 11. Concrete bases. 12. Supports and anchorages. 13. Rated fire penetration sealants. 14. Material and workmanship. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements, and errata) form part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designations only. 1. American Iron and Steel Institute (ASI) 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) a. NFPA 70 National Electric Code 3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 a. ASTM A36 Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel b. ASTM A53 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless c. ASTM A109 Standard Specification for Steel, Strip, Carbon (0.25 Maximum Percent), Cold-Rolled d. ASTM A123 Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products e. ASTM A240 Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications f. ASTM A500 Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes g. ASTM A501 Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing h. ASTM A633 Standard Specification for Normalized High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel Plates i. ASTM C920 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants j. ASTM C1193 Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants k. ASTM D2247 Standard Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100 per Relative Humidity l. ASTM D3451 Standard Guide for Testing Coating Powders and Powder Coatings m. ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials n. ASTM F1136 Standard Specification for Chromium/Zinc Corrosion Protective Coatings for Fasteners 4. American Welding Society (AWS) 5. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 6. Metal Framing Manufactures Association (MFMA) a. MFMA Metal Framing Standards Publication 7. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) a. UL 723 Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels. B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms. C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters. F. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials: 1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-dieneter polymer rubber. 2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Transition fittings. 2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Mechanical sleeve seals. 4. Escutcheons. 5. Rated fire penetration sealants. B. Welding certificates. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current. C. Align components. No strain shall be placed on weld during welding. No part of pipe shall be offset more than 20 percent of thickness. Set flanges and branches properly. D. Weld only by approved acetylene or electric welding processes. All welders shall hold certificate from approved insurance company. E. Conduct test to demonstrate suitability of procedures to be used in making welds that conform to specified requirements. F. Welder Qualification: 1. Test welders to demonstrate ability to make acceptable welds. Tests conducted for qualification of welder for work under one Division or Section shall not qualify welder for work under another Division or Section. 2. Tests shall be as prescribed for welder qualification in Section IX of the ASME code. 3. Records of tests shall be as follows: Each welder shall be assigned an identifying number, letter or symbol. Identifying mark shall be stamped adjacent to welds made by this welder. Identification shall be at top of horizontal piping and at front of vertical piping. 4. Maintain record of welders employed, showing dates and results of tests and identifying mark assigned to each welder. Certify records and make them accessible to Owner's project representative and/or project manager. Before completion of project, one copy of records Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 5. No qualification shall be older than three years when welder commences work on this project. If welder has not welded in required welding process for a period of six months, he shall be re-certified. G. Welding Tests 1. As designated by Architect, remove welds for destructive testing or for testing by non-destructive means. Tests shall be as determined by Architect. 2. If, in Architect's opinion, welds so tested do not meet requirements of Sections VIII and IX of ASME, then the contractor shall pay for the costs of the tests. Remove welds welded by that welder, at no cost to the Owner. Rewelding shall be performed by qualified welder other than welder whose welds did not pass test. Welders whose welds were defective shall not be employed on site for remainder of project. 3. Welding of stanchions, brackets, anchors and other welding not performed on pipe joints shall be in accordance with requirements of AWS specifications and requirements. H. Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. C. Protect and cover equipment (VAV boxes, coils, fans, pumps, control valves, etc) and ductwork components with plastic when stored on site to prevent entrance of dirt, debris and moisture. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for HVAC installations. B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for HVAC items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS A. Refer to individual Division 23 for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings. 2.3 TRANSITION FITTINGS A. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: CPVC and PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solventcement-joint end. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Eslon Thermoplastics. B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR 11 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Thompson Plastics, Inc. C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP-107, CPVC and PVC four-part union. Include brass end, solvent-cement-joint end, rubber O-ring, and union nut. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. NIBCO INC. b. NIBCO, Inc.; Chemtrol Div. 2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solderjoint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials. B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. C. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures. 1. Manufacturers: a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Epco Sales, Inc. d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. D. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, fullface- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers. 1. Manufacturers: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Central Plastics Company. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. e. Thunderline 2. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 E. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Calpico, Inc. b. Lochinvar Corp. F. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F. 1. Manufacturers: a. Perfection Corp. b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Victaulic Co. of America. 2.5 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Metraflex Co. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. e. Thunderline 2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. 3. Pressure Plates: Plastic. Include two for each sealing element. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating or Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element. 2.6 SLEEVES A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends. C. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing. 1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws. 2.7 ESCUTCHEONS A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish. C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw. 1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw. 1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated E. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw and chrome-plated finish. F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed hinge, set screw, and chrome-plated finish. G. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate. H. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw. 2.8 GROUT A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, non-shrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout. 1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, non-staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. 2.9 RATED FIRE PENETRATION SEALANTS A. Submit 3M, Hilti or Firespec sealants for approval prior to use. B. Sealants, caulking and devices shall be rated the same as the wall rating they are used in. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 HVAC DEMOLITION A. Refer to Division 01 and Division 02 for general demolition requirements and procedures. B. Refer to drawings for general description of areas requiring demolition. C. Refer to General Contractor’s/Construction Manager’s Instructions for existing equipment and materials that shall remain the property of the Owner. D. Where it is noted that items of value are not to be returned to the Owner, the items shall become the property of the Contractor. Storage or sale of items on the project site is prohibited. Items shall be removed from site and legally disposed of. E. Protection: Ensure the safe passage of persons in and around the building/site during demolition. Prevent injury to persons and damage to property. Provide adequate shoring and bracing to prevent collapse. Immediately repair damage to the condition before being damaged to the satisfaction of the architect and Owner. Take effective measures to prevent windblown dust. F. Utilities: Maintain utilities except those requiring removal or relocation. Keep utilities in service and protect from damage. Do not interrupt utilities serving in-use areas without first obtaining permission from the utility company and the Owner. Provide temporary services as required. G. Disconnect, demolish, and remove HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. 2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap piping with same or compatible piping material. 3. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and cap remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. 4. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. 5. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. 6. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. 7. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. H. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality. 3.2 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. F. Install piping to permit valve servicing. G. Install piping at indicated slopes as specified in other Division 23 sections. H. Install piping free of sags and bends. I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. J. Install piping to allow application of insulation. K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following: 1. New Piping: a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, castbrass type with polished chrome-plated finish. e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece or split-casting, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type. h. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate type. 2. Existing Piping: Use the following: a. Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish. b. Insulated Piping: Split-plate, stamped-steel type hinge c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting, castbrass type with chrome-plated finish. d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish. e. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass type. f. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, cast-brass type. g. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, floor-plate type. 3.3 PENETRATIONS AND SLEEVES A. General 1. Lay out penetration and sleeve openings in advance, to permit provision in work. Coordinate work carefully with architectural and structural work. Set sleeves and conduit in forms before concrete is poured. Provide remedial work where sleeves and conduits are omitted or improperly placed. Remedial work includes core drilling (see requirements below) for penetrations if walls are poured, or otherwise constructed, without required sleeves. Provide core drilling (see requirements below) of existing construction. Do not penetrate structural members without Structural Engineer’s/Architect's written approval. 2. Provide sleeves and packing materials at penetrations of foundations, walls, basement floors, slabs (except on-grade), partitions and floors. Sleeve installation shall meet NFPA-101 requirements, UL rated assemblies requirements, and materials requirements of these specifications. Submit a list of the UL listed details that the Contractor intends on using on this project in all rated assemblies. 3. Sleeves that penetrate outside walls, basement slabs, footings and beams shall be waterproof. Sleeves that penetrate floors shall be fireproof and waterproof. 4. Sleeves for insulated pipe and duct in non-fire rated construction shall accommodate continuous insulation without compression. Sleeves and/or penetrations in fire rated construction that do not require fire dampers shall be packed with fire rated material that shall maintain the fire rating of the wall. Seal ends of penetrations to provide continuous vapor barrier where insulation is interrupted. Where fire dampers are required, install sleeve and damper assembly in accordance with damper listing. 5. Where pipes passing through openings are exposed in finished rooms, finishes of filling materials shall match and be flush with adjoining floor, ceiling, and wall finishes. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 6. Identify unused sleeves and slots for future installation. Fill slots, sleeves and other openings in floors or walls if not used. Fill spaces in openings after installation of pipe, duct, conduit or cable. Fill for floor penetrations shall prevent passage of water, smoke, fire, and fumes. Fill shall be fire resistant in fire floors and walls, and shall prevent passage of air, smoke and fumes. 7. Do not support piping risers or conduit on sleeves. 8. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 7 for materials. 9. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in. 10. Installation Testing, Listings and Approvals a. Installation of sleeves, fill and packing shall meet material manufacturer's recommendations exactly, particularly as regards safety, ventilation, removal of foreign materials and other details of installation. Dam openings as recommended. Remove flammable materials used for damming and forming seals in fire-rated construction. b. Sleeve penetration methods shall be water- and gas-tight and shall meet requirements of ASTM E-119 Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. c. Fire-stop penetration seal methods and materials shall be FM-approved and UL-listed as applicable. They shall have the same rating as the structure penetrated. Submit manufacturer's detail sheet indicating assembly rating. 1) Inspect foamed sealants to ensure manufacturer's optimum cell structure and color ranges. B. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs. Sleeves are not required for slab-on-grade floors unless specified otherwise. Sleeves are required for core-drilled holes on any floor. 1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified. 2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. 3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4 inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials: a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6. b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board partitions. c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07 for flashing. 1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout. 4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07 for materials and installation. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - 11 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1 inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter. 2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter. 3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. D. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1 inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. E. Duct Sleeves and Prepared Openings 1. Provide galvanized-steel sheet duct sleeves for round ducts 15 inches and smaller. Provide prepared, framed openings for round ducts larger than 15 inches and for square, rectangular and flat oval ducts, except as specified otherwise. Sleeves shall meet SMACNA requirements. 2. Provide galvanized-steel sheet duct sleeves for ducts through 1-, 2- or 3-hour fire-rated construction and smoke partitions, regardless of size and shape of ducts. Sleeves shall maintain fire rating of construction penetrated. Sleeve and seal materials, construction and clearances shall meet requirements of SMACNA Fire Damper and Heat Stop Guide for Air Handling Systems. 3. Prepared openings shall be framed to provide 1 inch clearance between framing and duct or duct insulation. 4. Provide 4 inches wide 20 gauge galvanized sheet metal collars at sleeves and prepared openings, sized to cover entire duct penetration including sleeve and seal, and to accommodate duct and insulation as necessary. Edges shall have milled lips ground smooth. Paint to match finish of duct or as directed by Architect. 5. All duct penetrations through concrete floors in mechanical rooms shall be provided with 2 inches high water stopped curbs surrounding the openings. This applies to mechanical rooms located above the lowest floor level. F. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 for materials. G. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in. H. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements. 3.4 CORE DRILLING A. Core drilling shall be avoided in new construction. Set sleeves prior to installation of structure for passage of pipes, conduit and ducts. Where core drilling is unavoidable (e.g. when individual Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - 12 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 sleeves are not installed or incorrectly located) or required by renovation projects, locate required openings prior to coring and submit locations for review. B. Coordinate openings with other Divisions. C. Do not disturb existing systems. Protect areas from damage. D. Thoroughly investigate existing conditions in vicinity of required opening prior to coring. 3.5 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using leadfree solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32. E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8. F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article. H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. 3.6 PIPING CONNECTIONS A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 3. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 3.7 EXPANSION PROVISIONS A. Installation of piping must allow for expansion using offsets, loops, swing joints, expansion joints, etc. as necessary to prevent undue strain. Takeoffs from mains to runouts shall not have less than three-elbow swing. B. Mains and risers with loops or offsets shall be securely anchored to structure so as to impart expansion towards loops or offsets. Anchors shall be constructed of heavy forged wrought iron, secured to pipe and to structure. Provide vibration isolation as required. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - 13 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Provide pipe alignment guides as required to guide expanding pipe to move freely from anchor points toward expansion joints, offsets, etc. 3.8 ANCHORS AND INSERTS A. Inserts shall be iron or steel of type to receive machine bolt head or nut after installation. Inserts shall permit adjustment of bolt in one horizontal direction and shall develop strength of bolt when installed in properly cured concrete. B. Provide anchors for attachment of equipment supports and hangers. 3.9 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated. B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations. D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope. E. Avoid interference with structure and with work of other trades, preserving adequate headroom and clearing doors and passageways, to satisfaction of Architect and in accordance with code requirements. F. Distribute equipment loads on building structural members provided for equipment support. Roof-mounted equipment shall be installed and supported on structural steel. G. Provide suspended platforms, strap hangers, brackets, shelves, stands or legs for floor, wall or ceiling mounting of equipment. H. Provide steel supports and hardware for proper installation of hangers, anchors and guides. I. Provide cuts, weights, and other pertinent data required for proper coordination of equipment support provisions and installation. J. Structural steel and hardware shall conform to Standard Specifications of ASTM; use of steel and hardware shall conform to requirements of Section Five of Code of Practice of American Institute of Steel Construction. K. Verify site conditions and dimensions of equipment to ensure access for proper installation of equipment without disassembly that will void warrantee. Report in writing to Architect, prior to purchase or shipment of equipment involved, on conditions that may prevent proper installation. L. For all equipment installed external to the building; whether on roofs, supports, grade, etc., the installation shall comply with wind loading and impact requirements of the applicable codes for this project site. All equipment provided for this project shall be certified by the manufacturer that the equipment meets the applicable seismic, wind, earthquake, and hurricane impact requirements as set forth by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 3.10 PAINTING A. Painting of HVAC systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09. B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish. C. Equipment installed shall have shop coat of non-lead gray paint. Hangers and supports shall have one coat of non-lead red primer and one coat of non-lead finish paint. Machinery (e.g. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - 14 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 pumps, fans and air handling units) shall be stenciled with equipment name. Stencil shall be at least 6 inches high for large equipment, 2 inches high for small equipment. D. Note requirement for Architect's approval invoked under paragraph MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP regarding finish of material and equipment that is visible or subject to corrosive or atmospheric conditions. 3.11 CONCRETE BASES A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project. 1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit. 2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18 inch centers around the full perimeter of the base. 3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor. 4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Use 3000 psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 03. 3.12 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Refer to Division 05 for structural steel. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1. 3.13 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor HVAC materials and equipment. B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members. C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads. 3.14 GROUTING A. Mix and install grout for HVAC equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors. B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout. D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout. E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - 15 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment. G. Place grout around anchors. H. Cure placed grout. 3.15 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP A. Work shall be neat and rectilinear. Ductwork, piping and conduit shall run concealed except in mechanical rooms and areas where no hung ceiling exists. Install material and equipment in accordance with manufacturers written instructions. Installation shall operate safely and without leakage, undue wear, noise, vibration, corrosion or water hammer. Work shall be properly and effectively protected, and pipe and duct openings shall be temporarily closed to prevent obstruction and damage before completion. B. Except as specified otherwise, material and equipment shall be new. Provide supplies, appliances and connections necessary for complete and operational installation. Provide components required or recommended by OSHA and applicable NFPA documents. C. Owner will not be responsible for material and equipment before testing, commissioning, and acceptance. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\230500_COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following: 1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location. 5. Variable-speed drive controllers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Baldor 2. GE 3. Marathon B. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in HVAC equipment schedules or Sections. C. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated. D. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 E. Motors under 1/2 HP shall be designed for 120V, 60 Hz, single phase, unless otherwise specified. F. Motors 1/2 HP and over shall be voltages as indicated in schedules on drawings. G. Individual pumps serving variable flow systems and VAV fans with a motor horsepower of 5 hp or larger shall be provided with variable speed drives that will result in pump or fan motor demand of no more than 30 percent of design wattage at 50 percent of design flow. 2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level. B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor. 2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor. B. Efficiency: All motors shall be premium efficiency type as defined in NEMA MG 1 and shall have their efficiencies determined in accordance with IEEE Standard 112 Method B. The NEMA nominal efficiency shall be listed on the motor nameplate. C. Minimum nominal efficiencies shall be as follows: Premium Efficiency Motor Totally Enclosed Fan-Cooled (TEFC) Premium Efficiency Motor Open Drip-Proof (ODP) Size HP Speed (rpm) Size HP Speed (rpm) 1200 1800 3600 1200 1800 3600 NEMA Nominal Efficiency NEMA Nominal Efficiency 1 82.5 85.5 78.5 1 82.5 85.5 80.0 1.5 87.5 86.5 85.5 1.5 86.5 86.5 85.5 2 88.5 86.5 86.5 2 87.5 86.5 86.5 3 89.5 89.5 88.5 3 89.5 89.5 86.5 5 89.5 89.5 89.5 5 89.5 89.5 89.5 7.5 91.7 91.7 91.0 7.5 91.7 91.0 89.5 10 91.7 91.7 91.7 10 91.7 91.7 90.2 15 92.4 92.4 91.7 15 92.4 93.0 91.0 20 92.4 93.0 92.4 20 92.4 93.0 92.4 25 93.0 93.6 93.0 25 93.0 93.6 93.0 30 93.6 93.6 93.0 30 93.6 94.1 93.0 40 94.1 94.1 93.6 40 94.1 94.1 93.6 50 94.1 94.5 94.1 50 94.1 94.5 93.6 60 94.5 95.0 94.1 60 95.0 95.0 94.1 75 95.0 95.4 94.5 75 95.0 95.0 94.5 100 95.4 95.4 95.0 100 95.0 95.4 94.5 125 95.4 95.4 95.4 125 95.4 95.4 95.0 150 95.8 95.8 95.4 150 95.8 95.8 95.4 200+ 95.8 96.2 95.8 200+ 95.4 95.8 95.4 D. Service Factor: 1.15. E. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque. 1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed. F. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed. G. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage. H. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. I. Temperature Rise: One class below insulation rating. Example: Class B temperature rise for Class F insulation. J. Insulation: Class F or Class H as noted below. K. Code Letter Designation: 1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G. 2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic. L. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T. 2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Premium Efficiency Motors (non-VFD): Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation. B. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method. C. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer. Motors shall be premium efficiency "inverter-duty" or "drive duty" motors, compatible with the drive to which it is connected. Use of the motor with a VFD shall not adversely affect the operation, useful life or warranty of the motor. 1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse-width modulated inverters. 2. Premium-Efficient Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation. 3. Motor windings shall be spike resistant to withstand 1,600 peak volts. Motors shall have shaft grounding system to protect bearings from induced voltage. Shaft grounding system shall have very low drag, less than 1/2 percent of motor HP, and shall operate for a minimum of three (3) years without periodic adjustments. All consumables of the shaft grounding system shall be replaceable without a shutdown of the motor or VFD. System shall be as manufactured by AEGIS or approved equal. 4. Motors used with VFD shall have a minimum three (3) year manufacturer warranty. D. Thermal Protection (all polyphase motors): Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors. E. Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor. 2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS A. Except where specified as part of terminal equipment (i.e. ECM motors in fan coil units), motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application and shall be premium efficiency type: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Permanent-split capacitor. 2. Split phase. 3. Capacitor start, inductor run. 4. Capacitor start, capacitor run. B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type. C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type. E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range. F. Electronically Commutated Motors (ECM): Motors shall be an electronic commutation (EC) motor specifically designed for HVAC applications. AC induction type motors are not acceptable. Motors shall be permanently lubricated with heavy-duty ball bearings to match the load, and prewired to the specific voltage and phase. Internal motor circuitry shall convert AC power supplied to the equipment to DC power to operate the motor. Motor shall be speed controllable down to 20 percent of full speed (5:1 turndown). Speed shall be controlled by either a potentiometer dial mounted on the motor or by a 0-10 VDC control signal. Motor shall be a minimum of 85 percent efficient at all speeds. PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE) END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\23 0513_COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 230519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Liquid-in-glass thermometers. 2. Light-activated thermometers. 3. Thermowells. 4. Dial-type pressure gages. 5. Gage attachments. 6. Test plugs. 7. Impeller-turbine, thermal-energy meters. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of meter and gage, from manufacturer. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS A. Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Trerice, H. O. Co. b. Weiss Instruments, Inc. c. Weksler 2. Standard: ASME B40.200. 3. Case: Cast aluminum or non-metallic; 9-inch nominal size unless otherwise indicated. 4. Case Form: Adjustable angle unless otherwise indicated. 5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid. 6. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in deg F. 7. Window: Glass or plastic. 8. Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation. a. Design for Air-Duct Installation: With ventilated shroud. b. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem. 9. Connector: 1-1/4 inches, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of 1.5 percent of scale range. 11. Scale graduations: 2 deg F. 2.2 LIGHT-ACTIVATED THERMOMETERS A. Direct-Mounted, Light-Activated Thermometers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Trerice, H. O. Co. b. Weiss Instruments, Inc. c. Weksler 2. Case: Plastic or metal; 9-inch nominal size unless otherwise indicated. 3. Scale(s): Deg F. 4. Case Form: Adjustable angle. 5. Connector: 1-1/4 inches, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 6. Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation. a. Design for Air-Duct Installation: With ventilated shroud. b. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem. 7. Display: Digital. 8. Resolution: 0.1 deg F Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 9. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent. 2.3 DUCT-THERMOMETER MOUNTING BRACKETS A. Description: Flanged bracket with screw holes, for attachment to air duct and made to hold thermometer stem. 2.4 THERMOWELLS A. Thermowells: 1. Standard: ASME B40.200. 2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting. 3. Material for Use with steam service: stainless steel. 4. Material for Use with hydronic service: brass. 5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated. 6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads. 7. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem. Length shall be in accordance with ISA standards and shall include the appropriate extension to allow for pipe installation. 10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing. 11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of thermometer connection. B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin. 2.5 PRESSURE GAGES A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge. b. Ashcroft Inc. c. Ernst Flow Industries. d. Flo Fab Inc. e. Marsh Bellofram. f. Miljoco Corporation. g. Noshok. h. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group. i. REOTEMP Instrument Corporation. j. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 k. Trerice, H. O. Co. l. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. m. Weiss Instruments, Inc. n. WIKA Instrument Corporation - USA. o. Winters Instruments - U.S. 2. Standard: ASME B40.100. 3. Case: Silicone filled type(s); stainless steel case; 3-1/2 inch nominal diameter. 4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated. 5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated. 6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi. 8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal. 9. Window: Glass or plastic. 10. Ring: Stainless steel. 11. Accuracy: Grade C, plus or minus 3 percent of middle half of scale range. 12. Valves: Provide with Brass ball Brass or stainless-steel needle, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads. 13. Steam gauge only: provide pigtail cooling loop. 2.6 TEST PLUGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, a5vailable manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Flow Design, Inc. 2. Miljoco Corporation. 3. National Meter, Inc. 4. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc. 5. Sisco Manufacturing Company, Inc. 6. Trerice, H. O. Co. 7. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 8. Weiss Instruments, Inc. B. Description: Test-station fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting. C. Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap. Include extended stem on units to be installed in insulated piping. D. Thread Size: NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread. E. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F. F. Core Inserts: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic and EPDM self-sealing rubber. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 G. Seals on Hot water or glycol systems – Nordel Seat H. Seals on chilled water – Neoprene Seat 2.7 THERMAL-ENERGY METERS A. Impeller-Turbine, Thermal-Energy Meters: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Emco b. Vortek c. Yokogawa 2. Description: System with flow sensor, temperature sensors, transmitter, indicator, and connecting wiring. 3. Flow Sensor: Impeller turbine with corrosion-resistant-metal body and transmitter; for installing in piping. a. Design: Total thermal-energy measurement. b. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig. c. Minimum Temperature Range: 40 to 300 deg F. 4. Temperature Sensors: Insertion-type transducer. 5. Indicator: Solid-state, integrating-type meter; for wall mounting. a. Data Output: Six-digit electromechanical counter with readout in kilowatts per hour or British thermal units. 6. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent. 7. Display: Visually indicates total fluid volume in gallons and thermal-energy flow in kilowatts per hour or British thermal units. 8. Operating Instructions: Include complete instructions with each thermal-energy meter system. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install thermowells with socket extending to center of pipe and in vertical position in piping tees. B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if required to match sizes. C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping. D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium. E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 F. Install duct-thermometer mounting brackets in walls of ducts. Attach to duct with screws. G. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the most readable position. H. Install valve in piping for each pressure gage for fluids (except steam). I. Install valve and syphon fitting in piping for each pressure gage for steam. J. Install test plugs in piping tees. K. Assemble and install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow-measuring elements and flowmeters according to manufacturer's written instructions. L. Install connection fittings in accessible locations for attachment to portable indicators. M. Install thermometers in the following locations: 1. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units. 2. Two inlets and two outlets of each hydronic heat exchanger. 3. Outside-, return-, supply-, and mixed-air ducts. N. Install pressure gages in the following locations: 1. One per pump with valved connections to the downstream and upstream pressure taps. Include test port in addition to the pressure gauge. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment. B. Connect flowmeter-system elements to meters. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. After installation, calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility. 3.4 THERMOMETER SCHEDULE A. Thermometers shall be either liquid in glass or light activated type: 3.5 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE A. Scale Range for Chilled-Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F. B. Scale Range for Heating, Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 250 deg F. C. Scale Range for Steam and Steam-Condensate Piping: 0 to 300 deg F. D. Scale Range for Air Ducts: 0 to 100 deg F. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.6 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE A. Scale Range for Chilled-Water Piping: 0 to 100 psi. B. Scale Range for Heating, Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 100 psi. C. Scale Range for Steam Piping: 0 to 30 psi. 3.7 THERMAL-ENERGY METER SCHEDULE A. Thermal-Energy Meters for Steam-Condensate Piping: Impeller-turbine type. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\230519 FL - METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 230523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Bronze ball valves. 2. Iron, general service butterfly valves. 3. Carbon steel high-performance butterfly valves 4. Bronze silent check valves. 5. Iron globe silent check valves. 6. Bronze swing-check valves. 7. Iron swing-check valves. 8. Bronze globe valves. 9. Strainers. 10. Vacuum Breakers. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CWP: Cold working pressure. B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber. C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber. D. NRS: Nonrising stem. E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke. F. RS: Rising stem. G. SWP: Steam working pressure. H. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene I. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer. B. ASME Compliance: 1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves. 3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling. 4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 6. Block check valves in either closed or open position. B. Use the following precautions during storage: 1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures. C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES A. Refer to HVAC valve tables in Part 3 below for applications of valves. Valves of similar type shall be by single manufacturer. B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures. Valves shall have name of manufacturer and guaranteed working pressure cast or stamped on bodies. Gaskets and packings shall not contain asbestos. C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated. D. Valve Actuator Types: 1. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types. 2. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller except plug valves. E. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features: 1. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation. 2. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 F. Valve-End Connections: 1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves. 2. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18. 3. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1. G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45. H. All valves shall be fully bi-directional and suitable for dead end service. I. Valve packaging compression is to be independent of the stem, ball, or handle systems. All valve stems are to be blowout proof. Packing shall be accessible without disturbing the insulation. J. All valves used for vent or drain service on water systems shall have a brass hose connection with cap and chain. K. Valves must be fully factory assembled, set and tested. 2.2 BRONZE BALL VALVES A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following. Refer to current owner standards for approved model numbers: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves: 70-140, 70-240 b. NIBCO INC: T-580-70-66, S-580-70-66. c. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc: B6000-SS, B6001-SS 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. Stem: Stainless steel. c. Seat: reinforced Teflon (RTFE), 15% glass filled double seal. d. Ball: Stainless steel, vented. e. Refer to schedules in Part 3 for specific application requirements. 2.3 IRON GENERAL SERVICE BUTTERFLY VALVES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following. Refer to current owner standards for approved model numbers: 1. Keystone: series 60 2. NIBCO INC: LD-3022 3. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc: BF-03 B. Description: 1. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I 2. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel. 3. Trim: 316 or 17-4 pH Stainless Steel 4. Seat: EPDM Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 5. Disc: Stainless Steel. 6. Actuator for valves under 4” – locking lever handle. 7. Actuators for valves 4” and above – handwheel gear operator. 8. Refer to schedules in Part 3 for specific application requirements. 9. All lugged butterfly valves shall be fully bi-directional and bi-directionally dead-endable to the full pressure rating of the seat. This is defined to mean that the seat rating is not reduced when pressure is applied in either direction and the valve is capable of serving as a blank flange, when bolted to the end of a line from either side of the valve body and no mating flange is attached. The means of attaching the body to the pipe flange, and of attaching the seat ring to the body shall meet the ANSI class rating of the valve without mechanical failure. This requirement normally results in partially lugged butterfly valves not being acceptable. 10. Provide external disc position indicators. 2.4 CARBON STEEL HIGH-PERFORMANCE BUTTERFLY VALVES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following. Refer to current owner standards for approved model numbers: 1. Tri-Seal Contromatics QF-1151 2. Keystone K-LOK F362 3. Metso Jamesbury 815L B. Description: 1. Standard: MSS SP-68 2. Stem: Stainless steel; double offset from seat plane. 3. Disc: 316 stainless steel. 4. Seat: RPTFE fully bi-directional and dead-endable 5. Service: Bidirectional. 6. Actuator: handwheel gear operator. 7. Refer to schedules in Part 3 for specific application requirements. 8. All lugged butterfly valves shall be fully bi-directional and bi-directionally dead-endable to the full pressure rating of the seat. This is defined to mean that the seat rating is not reduced when pressure is applied in either direction and the valve is capable of serving as a blank flange, when bolted to the end of a line from either side of the valve body and no mating flange is attached. The means of attaching the body to the pipe flange, and of attaching the seat ring to the body shall meet the ANSI class rating of the valve without mechanical failure. This requirement normally results in partially lugged butterfly valves not being acceptable. 9. Provide external disc position indicators. 10. Gear operators on steam valves shall be spaced 4-inches above packing assembly 11. Install all steam valves with the stem at least 30 degreees off vertical to protect the bottom bearing from debris. 12. Handwheel gear operators shall be provided on all butterfly valves for steam and steam condensate service. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.5 BRONZE SILENT CHECK VALVES (PUMP DISCHARGE) A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following : 1. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. 2. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. 3. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. 4. Milwaukee Valve Company. 5. Mueller Steam Specialty; a division of SPX Corporation. B. Description: 1. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1. 2. Disc: BUNA/TFE. 3. Refer to schedules in Part 3 for specific application requirements. 2.6 IRON, GLOBE SILENT CHECK VALVES (PUMP DISCHARGE) A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. 2. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. 3. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. 4. Milwaukee Valve Company. 5. Mueller Steam Specialty; a division of SPX Corporation. B. Description: 1. Standard: MSS SP-125. 2. Disc: Bronze. 3. Refer to schedules in Part 3 for specific application requirements. 2.7 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES A. Bronze Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. d. Hammond Valve. e. Kitz Corporation. f. Milwaukee Valve Company. g. NIBCO INC. h. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 4. b. Body Design: Horizontal flow. c. Disc: PTFE unless indicated otherwise in table. d. Refer to schedules in Part 3 for specific application requirements. B. Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. d. Kitz Corporation. e. Milwaukee Valve Company. f. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3. b. Body Design: Horizontal flow. c. Refer to schedules in Part 3 for specific application requirements. 2.8 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. 2. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. 3. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. 4. Hammond Valve. 5. Kitz Corporation (Class 125). 6. Legend Valve (Class 125). 7. Milwaukee Valve Company. 8. NIBCO INC. 9. Powell Valves (Class 125). B. Description: 1. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I. 2. Body Design: Clear or full waterway. 3. Gasket: Asbestos free. 4. Refer to schedules in Part 3 for specific application requirements. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.9 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. 2. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division (Class 125). 3. Grinnell 4. Hammond Valve. 5. Milwaukee Valve Company. 6. NIBCO INC. 7. Walworth B. Description: 1. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1 (Class 125). 2. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 2 (Class 150) 3. Packing: Asbestos free. 4. Handwheel: Malleable iron or bronze. 5. Refer to schedules in Part 3 for specific application requirements. 2.10 STRAINERS: A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Sarco 2. Mueller 3. Watts 4. Armstrong B. Description: 1. For water service, strainers shall be full size of entering pipe size and have a maximum clean pressure drop of one psi. 2. For steam and steam condensate strainers shall be full size of entering pipe size and have a maximum clean pressure drop of 1/4 psi. 3. Pump start up strainer screens shall be used for cleaning and removed afterwards. 4. Provide blow-off valve on each strainer. a. Provide bronze strainers with end cap with threaded connection for blow off valve. b. Provide iron valves with bolted cover with threaded connection for blow off valve. 5. For clean steam and clean steam condensate, provide stainless steel. 6. Refer to schedules in Part 3 for specific application requirements. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.11 VACUUM BREAKERS: A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Stockham 2. Milwaukee 3. Watts B. Description: 1. Vacuum breaker shall be installed in the horizontal position, flow arrow pointed towards the coil and of same size as connected pipe. 2. Mount vacuum breaker above connected pipe and enter pipe tee via 90 degree ell-drop after vacuum breaker. Inlet to vacuum breaker shall be piped so that it does not allow discharge from a faulty vacuum breaker to spray on someone or electrical or wetsensitive equipment. Piping shall turn towards pieces of equipment served. 3. Refer to schedules in Part 3 for specific application requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling. B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations. C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness. D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage. E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves. 3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. E. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows: 1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level. 2. Silent Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between flanges. F. Install valves after welding adjacent to valve is completed to protect seat and disk. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs. 3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Valves on steam, steam condensate, condenser water, chilled water, hot water and glycol services shall be as shown in the following tables. B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted. C. Select valves with end connections as indicated in the tables. For applications not listed in the tables select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections: 1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends. 2. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends. 3. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends. 4. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 STEAM AND CONDENSATE SERVICE Maximum 90 psig Saturated Steam Specialty Application Type Size (inches) Body/Seat Body/Trim Connection Minimum Rating, 1, 2 Ball Valve Isolation (with locking handle) and Modulation Full Port 2 pc. 1/2 - 2 Bronze/Teflon Threaded 150 psig WOG 300 psig@250F seat working 300 psig@300F body working Globe Valve Automatic Control Union Bonnet 1/2 - 2 Bronze/Stainless Bronze/Bronze Threaded 125 psig SWP OS&Y 2-1/2 - 10 Iron/Bronze Flanged Class 125 Butterfly Valve Isolation High Performance 2-1/2 – 16 ASTM A216 WCB Carbon Steel/316 Stainless Steel Threaded lug Class 150 100psi @400F seat working Check Valve Steam and Condensate Horizontal Flow Non-Y-Type Swing Check Valve 1/2 - 2 Bronze/Teflon Threaded (Use Dielectrics for Condensate) 125 psig SWP Silent Globe 2-1/2 - 30 Iron/Iron Flanged 125 SWP Strainer Control Valves and Flow Meters and Steam Traps Y-Type 1/2 - 2 Bronze/Stainless (1/16 inch dia.) Threaded Class 125 2-1/2 - 10 Iron/Stainless (3/64 inch dia.) Flanged Class 125 12 - 24 Iron/Stainless (1/16 inch dia.) Flanged Class 125 Vacuum Breaker Steam Coils and HX and Condensate Trap Legs Non-Y-Type Swing Check Valve 1/2 - 2 Bronze/Teflon Threaded (Use Dielectrics for Condensate) Class 125 1. These are minimum ratings. For actual maximum allowable valve and strainer ratings, refer to "Pressure Temperature Ratings-Non Shock" tables. 2. SWP = Steam Working Pressure WOG = Water, Oil or Gas WSP = Working Steam Pressure Class = ANSI Standard Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 - 11 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 CHILLED AND GLYCOL WATER SERVICE Maximum 150°F and 150 psig (1/2 inch - 12 inches), 125 psig (14 inches - 24 inches) Specialty Application Type Size (inches) Body/Seat Body/Trim Connection Minimum Rating1,2 Ball Valve Isolation (with locking handle) and Modulation Full Port 2 pc. 1/2 - 2 Bronze/Teflon Threaded 400 psig WOG 300 psig@250F seat working 300 psig@300F body working Globe Valve ATC Modulation Control Valve 1/2 - 2 Bronze/Metal Threaded 400 psig WOG 2-1/2 - 6 Bronze/Metal Flanged 400 psig WOG Butterfly Valve Isolation and Modulation General Service 2-1/2 - 12 Ductile Iron/EPDM Threaded Lug 175 psig CWP 150 psig @250F bidirectional shutoff 150 psig dead end service ANSI 150 body working General Service 14 - 24 Ductile Iron/EPDM Threaded Lug 150 psig CWP 150 psig bidirectional shutoff 150 psig dead end service Check Valve Pumps Silent 1/2 - 2 Bronze/Bronze Threaded 200 psig WOG Silent Globe 2-1/2 - 24 Iron/Bronze Flanged Class 125 Piping Y-Pattern Swing 1/2 - 2 Bronze/Bronze Threaded 200 psig WOG 2-1/2 - 24 Iron/Bronze Flanged Class 125 Strainer Control Valves and Flow Meters Y-Type 1/2 -2 Bronze/Stainless (1/16 inch dia.) Threaded 200 psig WOG 2-1/2 - 4 Iron/Stainless (1/16 inch dia.) Flanged Class 125 5 - 24 Iron/Stainless (1/8 inch dia.) Flanged Class 125 Pump Suction In-Line Y-Type 1/2 - 2 Bronze/Stainless (1/16 inch dia.) Threaded 200 psig WOG 2-1/2 - 4 Iron/Stainless (3/16 inch dia.)3 Flanged Class 125 5 - 24 Iron/Stainless (1/4 inch dia.)3 Flanged Class 125 Angle Suction Diffuser End Suction Pumps 2 - 12 Iron/Stainless (3/16 inch dia.)3 Start Up Strainer = 16 Mesh Bronze Flanged Class 125 1. These are minimum ratings for ASTM A126, Class B and ASTM B-61 and 62. For higher pressures and temperatures, adjust these values to include static head plus 1.1 times pressure relief valve setting plus pump shutoff head pressure. For actual maximum allowable valve and strainer ratings, refer to "Pressure-Temperature Ratings - Non Shock" tables and "Adjusted Pressure Ratings" for copper tube, soldered end valves and strainers. 2. SWP=Steam Working Pressure CWP=Cold Water Working Pressure WSP=Working Steam Pressure WOG=Water, Oil or Gas Class=ANSI Standard 3. Use 1/8 inch dia for plate heat exchanger application. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 - 12 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 GLYCOL AND HOT WATER SERVICE Maximum 250F and 175 psig (½"-12")/125 psig (14"-24") Specialty Application Type Size (inches) Body/Seat, Body/Trim Connection Minimum Rating1,2 Ball Valve Isolation (with locking handle) and Modulation Full Port 2 pc. 1/2 - 2 Bronze/Teflon Threaded 400 psig WOG 300 psig@250F seat working 300 psig@300F body working Globe Valve ATC Modulation Control Valve 1/2 - 2 Bronze/Metal Threaded 400 psig WOG 2-1/2 - 6 Bronze/Metal Flanged 400 psig WOG Butterfly Valve Isolation and Modulation General Service 2-1/2 - 12 Ductile Iron/EPDM Threaded Lug 200 psig CWP 200 psig@250F bi-directional shutoff 200 psig dead end service ANSI 150 body working 14 - 24 Ductile Iron/EPDM Threaded Lug 150 psig CWP 150 psig bidirectional shutoff 150 psig dead end service Check Valve Pumps Silent 1/2 - 2 Bronze/Bronze Threaded 200 psig WOG Silent Globe 2-1/2 - 24 Iron/Bronze Flanged Class 125 Piping Y-Pattern Swing 1/2 - 2 Bronze/Bronze Threaded 200 psig WOG 2-1/2 - 24 Iron/Bronze Flanged Class 125 Strainer Control Valves and Flow Meters Y-Type 1/2 - 2 Bronze/Stainless (1/16" dia.) Threaded 200 psig WOG 2-1/2 - 4 Iron/Stainless (1/16" dia.) Flanged Class 125 5 - 24 Iron/Stainless (1/8" dia.) Flanged Class 125 Pump Suction In-Line Y-Type 1/2 - 2 Bronze/Stainless (1/16" dia.) Threaded 200 psig WOG 2-1/2 - 4 Iron/Stainless (3/16" dia.)3 Flanged Class 125 5 -24 Iron/Stainless (¼" dia.)3 Flanged Class 125 Angle Suction Diffuser End Suction Pumps 2 - 12 Iron/Stainless (3/16" dia.)3 Start Up Strainer = 16 Mesh Bronze Flanged Class 125 1. These are minimum ratings for ASTM A126, Class B and ASTM B-61 and 62. For higher pressures and temperatures, adjust these values to include static head plus 1.1 times pressure relief valve setting plus pump shutoff head pressure. For actual maximum allowable valve and strainer ratings, refer to "Pressure-Temperature Ratings - Non Shock" tables and "Adjusted Pressure Ratings" for copper tube, soldered end valves and strainers. 2. SWP=Steam Working Pressure CWP=Cold Water Working Pressure WSP=Working Steam Pressure WOG=Water, Oil or Gas Class=ANSI Standard 3. Use 1/8 inch dia for plate heat exchanger application. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 - 13 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\23 0523_GENERAL DUTY VALVES.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for HVAC system piping and equipment: 1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Metal framing systems. 4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 5. Fastener systems. 6. Pipe stands. 7. Equipment supports. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 05 for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. B. MSS SP-58-2018, “Pipe Hangers and Supports – Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. C. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 3. Components of trapeze pipe hangers and metal framing systems. 4. Pipe stands. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following: 1. Trapeze pipe hangers. 2. Metal framing systems. 3. Pipe stands. 4. Equipment supports. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers, metal framing systems and equipment supports provide analysis data verifying submitted supports meet performance requirements and design criteria, signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Design calculations for designing trapeze hangers, metal framing systems and equipment supports based on approved piping and equipment submittal data. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code-Steel." and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX. C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 2. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum." 3. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Division 01 "Quality Requirements," to design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports. B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. 2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. 3. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction. C. Structural Connection Design Criteria 1. Upper attachments to structure shall have an allowable gravity load of 25% of the failure load (proof test). 2. Maximum load from hangers attached to the underside of the slabs shall be 250 pounds. If higher loads are required due to space or coordination constraints, submit formal request for interpretation (RFI) to structural design professional of record for review before work commences. 3. Do not cut any notches or drill or cut any holes on structural members without the expressed approval of the structural design professional of record. 4. Core openings only in areas indicated on the documents and in additional areas only with the approval of the structural design professional. 5. Do not attach or suspend any MEP items from penthouse roof metal deck. 6. Survey location of concrete reinforcement before drilling anchors in reinforced concrete walls, beams, or slabs. Do not cut any reinforcing bars during drilling of anchors unless approved by the structural design professional. 7. Provide patching of fireproofing removed or accidentally damaged during the attachment of suspended items. Provide documentation that patch shall does not reduce performance of the fireproofing system. 8. For steel framing, maximum load from hangers attached to steel beams shall be 400 pounds. For the parts that will be fireproofed, if clamps or any other attachments are attached after the fireproofing is in place, enough fireproofing must be removed at the point of contact so that the attachment can be placed with the proper edge distance and develop the required “bite” on the steel. Patch fireproofing after attachment is in place. 2.3 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Description: MSS SP-58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types. B. Manufacturers: 1. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 3. Empire Industries, Inc. 4. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. 5. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc. 6. Grinnell Corp. 7. National Pipe Hanger Corporation. 8. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. 9. PHS Industries, Inc. 10. Piping Technology & Products, Inc. C. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel, stainless steel or copper-plated steel washers compatible with hangers and supports. D. Carbon Steel, Stainless Steel and Copper Pipe or Tube Hangers and Supports: 1. Select material to match piping being supported. 2. For carbon steel piping hangers provide one of the following: a. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pre-galvanized, hot dipped or electro-galvanized. b. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating or epoxy powder coated. E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of bearing surface of piping. 2.4 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS A. Description: MSS SP-58, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and hanger types specified. 2.5 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated, pipe-support assembly made of steel channels, accessories, fittings, and other components for supporting multiple parallel pipes including cross bracing to support piping weight and resist wind loads. Provide G90 galvanized coated supports for outdoor locations. B. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly. C. Channels: Continuous slotted carbon-steel, Type 304 stainless-steel or extruded-aluminum channel with in-turned lips. D. Channel Width: Selected for applicable load criteria. E. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel. F. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel or stainless steel matching hanger material. G. Manufacturers: 1. B-Line; an Eaton Business. 2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div. 3. Flex-Strut, Inc. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 4. G-Strut. 5. GS Metals Corp. 6. Haydon Corporation. 7. MIRO Industries. 8. Power-Strut Div.; Tyco International, Ltd. 9. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 10. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd. H. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated. I. Non-metallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 2.6 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS A. Description: 100-psig- minimum, compressive-strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal shield. Insert shall be capable of supporting weight of pipe, insulations and fluid without crushing. B. Manufacturers: 1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. 3. PHS Industries, Inc. 4. Pipe Shields, Inc. 5. Rilco Manufacturing Company, Inc. 6. Value Engineered Products, Inc. C. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with vapor barrier. D. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass. E. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe. F. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe. G. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature. 2.7 FASTENER SYSTEMS A. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc-coated or stainless steel, for use in hardened Portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities meeting supported loads and suitable for use with building materials. 1. Manufacturers: a. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. b. Empire Industries, Inc. c. Hilti, Inc. d. ITW Ramset/Red Head. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 e. MKT Fastening, LLC. f. Powers Fasteners. 2.8 PIPE STAND FABRICATION A. Pipe Stands, General: Shop or field-fabricated assemblies made of manufactured corrosionresistant components to support roof-mounted piping. B. Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod-roller, pipe clamps, or V-shaped cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. b. MIRO Industries. 2. Base: Single, vulcanized rubber, molded polypropylene, or polycarbonate. 3. Hardware: Galvanized steel or polycarbonate. 4. Accessories: Protection pads. C. Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece stainless-steel base unit with plastic roller, for roof installation without membrane penetration. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. MIRO Industries. 2. Base: Single, vulcanized rubber, molded polypropylene, or polycarbonate. 3. Vertical Members: Two stainless-steel, continuous-thread 1/2-inch (12-mm) rods. 4. Horizontal Member: Adjustable horizontal, stainless-steel pipe support channels. 5. Pipe Supports: Galvanized-steel, Roller or Clevis hanger. 6. Hardware: Stainless steel. 7. Accessories: Protection pads. 8. Height: 12 inches (300 mm) above roof unless indicated otherwise. D. High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe support, for roof installation without membrane penetration. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. b. MIRO Industries. c. Portable Pipe Hangers. 2. Base: Stainless steel. 3. Vertical Members: Two or more cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel, continuousthread rods. 4. Horizontal Member: Cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel rod with plastic or stainlesssteel, roller-type pipe support. 5. Pipe Supports: Galvanized-steel, roller or clevis hanger. 6. Hardware: Stainless steel. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 E. High-Type, Multiple-Pipe Stand: Assembly of bases, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe supports, for roof installation without membrane penetration. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Portable Pipe Hangers. 2. Bases: One or more vulcanized rubber or molded polypropylene. 3. Vertical Members: Two or more protective-coated-steel channels. 4. Horizontal Member: Protective-coated-steel channel. 5. Pipe Supports: Galvanized-steel, roller or clevis hanger. F. Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe support made from structuralsteel shape, continuous-thread rods, and rollers for mounting on permanent stationary roof curb. 2.9 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbonsteel shapes. 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Carbon Steel: ASTM A1011/A1011M. B. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M. D. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M. E. Threaded Rods: Continuously threaded. Zinc-plated or galvanized steel for indoor applications and stainless steel for outdoor applications. Mating nuts and washers of similar materials as rods. F. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, non-shrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications. 1. Properties: Non-staining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 for fire-stopping materials and installation for penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies. B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg). 3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems and equipment. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Comply with MSS SP-58 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish. D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports, metal trapeze pipe hangers and metal framing systems and attachments for general service applications. F. Use stainless-steel pipe hangers and stainless-steel corrosion-resistant attachments for hostile environment applications. G. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper or stainless-steel attachments for copper piping and tubing. H. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching. I. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing. J. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, provide and space hangers in accordance with the following table: Nom. Pipe Size (inches) Max. Span (feet) Min. Rod Size (inches) Hanger Type 0.75 and Smaller 5 0.375 Clevis Hanger 1 6 0.375 Clevis Hanger 1.25 7 0.375 Clevis Hanger 1.5 8 0.375 Clevis Hanger 2 8 0.375 Clevis Hanger 2.5 11 0.5 Clevis Hanger 3 12 0.5 Clevis Hanger 4 12 0.625 1 Rod Roller Type Hangers 5 12 0.625 1 Rod Roller Type Hangers 6 12 0.75 1 Rod Roller Type Hangers 8 – 12 12 0.75 (two) 2 Rod Roller Type Hangers 14 – 18 12 0.875 (two) 2 Rod Roller Type Hangers 20 12 1.25 (two) 2 Rod Roller Type Hangers 24 12 1.25 (two) 2 Rod Roller Type Hangers Vertical Piping 15 1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of non-insulated or insulated stationary pipes. 2. 3. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange. 4. Adjustable, Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36, if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange. 5. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from 2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. 6. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 20, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 7. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary. 8. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 24, if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary. 9. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 30, if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to expansion and contraction. K. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20. 2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps. L. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 3. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of building attachments. 4. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. M. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling. 2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape. 3. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 4. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large. 5. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 6. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to flange edge. 7. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams. 8. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel Ibeams for heavy loads. 9. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel Ibeams for heavy loads, with link extensions. 10. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural steel. 11. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb. 12. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 13. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. 14. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited. N. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation. 3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe. O. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement. 2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 11/4 inches. 3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with springs. 4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal expansion in piping systems. 5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger. 6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from base support. 7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support. 8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types: a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally. b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically. c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member. P. Comply with MSS SP-58 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. Q. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 11 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 R. Use mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction. 3.3 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with MSS SP-58. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments to properly support piping from building structure. B. Pipe hangers: 1. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure. 2. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers. a. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers. b. Field fabricate from ASTM A36/A36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 3. Metal Framing Pipe Hanger System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and support together on field-assembled strut systems. 4. Comply with MSS SP-58 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. 5. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.1 for power piping and ASME B31.9 for building services piping. C. Insulated piping installation: Install shield in pipe hanger for insulated piping. 1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. 2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weightdistribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weightdistribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 8 to DN 90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.048 inch (1.22 mm) thick. b. NPS 4 (DN 100): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 12 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 c. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): 18 inches (457 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14 (DN 200 to DN 350): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.075 inch (1.91 mm) thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24 (DN 400 to DN 600): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.105 inch (2.67 mm) thick. 5. Pipes NPS 8 (DN 200) and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of length at least as long as protective shield. 6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation. D. Fastener System Installation: Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Pipe Stand Installation: 1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounted Type: Assemble components and mount on smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane. 2. Curb-Mounted-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand and mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. See Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for curbs. F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. G. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes. H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. I. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying. J. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. Where attachments to structure eccentrically place weight on structural members, alternate hangers to minimize bending moment (e.g. support supply pipe from one side of bottom flange and return pipe on other side) or provide alternate clamps that symmetrically load beam. K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping. 3.4 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor. B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth. C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 13 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.5 METAL FABRICATIONS A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports. B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches (40 mm). 3.7 PAINTING A. Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Prime and finish paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm). B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A780/A780M. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\230529_HANGERS AND SUPPORTS.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC 230548 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 230548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Vibration Isolation Devices: a. Elastomeric isolation pads. b. Elastomeric isolation mounts. c. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts. d. Open-spring isolators. e. Restrained-spring isolators. f. Pipe-riser resilient supports. g. Resilient pipe guides. h. Elastomeric hangers. i. Spring hangers. j. Vibration isolation equipment bases. k. Restrained isolation roof-curb rails. 2. Seismic Restraint Devices: a. Snubbers. b. Restraint channel bracings. c. Restraint cables. d. Seismic-restraint accessories. e. Mechanical anchor bolts. f. Adhesive anchor bolts. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 21 for vibration isolation and seismic devices for fire-suppression equipment and systems. 2. Division 22 for vibration isolation and seismic devices for plumbing equipment and systems. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC 230548 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device. 2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of vibration isolation device type required. 3. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of and seismic-restraint component required. a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements. 4. Interlocking Snubbers: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Detail fabrication and assembly of equipment bases. Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting. 2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: 1. For each vibration isolation device. a. Include design calculations and details for selecting vibration isolators and vibration isolation bases. b. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and required to select vibration isolators and for designing vibration isolation bases. 1) Coordinate design calculations with wind load calculations required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Sections for equipment mounted outdoors. c. Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on building structure and spring deflection changes. Include certification that riser system was examined for excessive stress and that none exists. 2. For each seismic-restraint device. a. Include design calculations and details for selecting seismic restraints complying with performance requirements, design criteria, and analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. b. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight, operation, and seismic forces required to select vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC 230548 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1) Coordinate design calculations with wind load calculations required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Sections for equipment mounted outdoors. c. Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on building structure, spring deflection changes, and seismic loads. Include certification that riser system was examined for excessive stress and that none exists. 3. Wind-Restraint Details: a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of wind restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads. b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacing. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during design wind speed. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices. c. Comply with requirements in other Sections for equipment mounted outdoors. 4. Seismic-Restraint Details: a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic and restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads. b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacing. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices. c. Coordinate seismic-restraint and vibration isolation details with wind-restraint details required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Sections for equipment mounted outdoors. d. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations). 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: 1. Show coordination of vibration isolation device installation for HVAC piping and equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and restraints, if any. 2. Show coordination of seismic bracing for HVAC piping and equipment with vibration isolation, other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and restraints, if any. B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency. C. Welding certificates. D. Field quality-control reports. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC 230548 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7 and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the applicable building code unless requirements in this Section are more stringent. C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." D. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage preapproval by agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are unavailable, submittals based on independent testing are required. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic-Restraint Loading: 1. Site Class as Defined in the applicable building code: D. 2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the applicable building code: II. a. Component Importance Factor: 1) General HVAC Components: 1.0. 2) HVAC Life Safety Components (smoke control equipment, ductwork, dampers, emergency power fuel oil system equipment and piping): 1.5 b. Refer to table 13.6-1 in ASCE 7-10, Chapter 13 for HVAC component response modification and amplification factors. 3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.126 Second): . 4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 0.056-Second Period: . 5. Rated strengths, features, and applications shall be as defined in reports by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. a. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they are subjected. 2.2 ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION PADS A. Elastomeric Isolation Pads: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following : Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC 230548 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 a. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. b. California Dynamics Corporation. c. Isolation Technology, Inc. d. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. e. Mason Industries, Inc. f. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. g. Vibration Isolation. h. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. 2. Fabrication: Single or multiple layers of sufficient durometer stiffness for uniform loading over pad area. 3. Size: Factory or field cut to match requirements of supported equipment. 4. Pad Material: Oil and water resistant with elastomeric properties. 5. Surface Pattern: Smooth, Ribbed or Waffle pattern. 6. Load-bearing metal plates adhered to pads. 7. Sandwich-Core Material: Resilient and elastomeric . a. Surface Pattern: Smooth, Ribbed or Waffle pattern. 2.3 ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION MOUNTS A. Double-Deflection, Elastomeric Isolation Mounts: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following : a. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. b. California Dynamics Corporation. c. Isolation Technology, Inc. d. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. e. Mason Industries, Inc. f. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. g. Vibration Isolation. h. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. 2. Mounting Plates: a. Top Plate: Encapsulated steel load transfer top plates, factory drilled and threaded with threaded studs or bolts. b. Baseplate: Encapsulated steel bottom plates with holes provided for anchoring to support structure. 3. Elastomeric Material: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric material. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC 230548 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.4 RESTRAINED ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION MOUNTS A. Restrained Elastomeric Isolation Mounts: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following : a. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. b. California Dynamics Corporation. c. Isolation Technology, Inc. d. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. e. Mason Industries, Inc. f. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. g. Vibration Isolation. h. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. 2. Description: All-directional isolator with seismic restraints containing two separate and opposing elastomeric elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation. a. Housing: Cast-ductile iron or welded steel. b. Elastomeric Material: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric material. 2.5 OPEN-SPRING ISOLATORS A. Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following : a. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. b. California Dynamics Corporation. c. Isolation Technology, Inc. d. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. e. Mason Industries, Inc. f. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. g. Vibration Isolation. h. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. 2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC 230548 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 6. Baseplates: Factory-drilled steel plate for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad attached to the underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig. 7. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment. 2.6 RESTRAINED-SPRING ISOLATORS A. Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators with Vertical-Limit Stop Restraint: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following : a. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. b. California Dynamics Corporation. c. Isolation Technology, Inc. d. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. e. Mason Industries, Inc. f. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. g. Vibration Isolation. h. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. 2. Housing: Steel housing with vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight being removed. a. Base with holes for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad attached to the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig. b. Top plate with threaded mounting holes and elastomeric pad. c. Internal leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation. 3. Restraint: Limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 5. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 6. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 7. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 2.7 PIPE-RISER RESILIENT SUPPORT A. Description: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of two steel tubes separated by a minimum 1/2 inch- thick neoprene. 1. Vertical-Limit Stops: Steel and neoprene vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC 230548 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Maximum Load Per Support: 500 psig on isolation material providing equal isolation in all directions. 2.8 RESILIENT PIPE GUIDES A. Description: Telescopic arrangement of two steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement separated by a minimum 1/2 inch- thick neoprene. 1. Factory-Set Height Guide with Shear Pin: Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location requirements. 2.9 ELASTOMERIC HANGERS A. Elastomeric Mount in a Steel Frame with Upper and Lower Steel Hanger Rods: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following : a. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. b. California Dynamics Corporation. c. Isolation Technology, Inc. d. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. e. Mason Industries, Inc. f. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. g. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. 2. Frame: Steel, fabricated with a connection for an upper threaded hanger rod and an opening on the underside to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular lower hangerrod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 3. Dampening Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric material with a projecting bushing for the underside opening preventing steel to steel contact. 2.10 SPRING HANGERS A. Combination Coil-Spring and Elastomeric-Insert Hanger with Spring and Insert in Compression: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. b. California Dynamics Corporation. c. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. d. Mason Industries, Inc. e. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. f. Vibration Isolation. g. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC 230548 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 3. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 7. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame. 8. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower threaded rod. 9. Self-centering hanger-rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring coil. 2.11 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. California Dynamics Corporation. 2. Kinetics Noise Control. 3. Mason Industries, Inc. 4. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 5. Vibration Isolation. 6. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. B. Steel Rails: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel rails. 1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1 inch clearance above the floor or structural support. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide rails. a. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps. 2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. Rails shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment. 3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support. 4. For equipment mounted outdoor, structural steel rails and hardware shall be corrosion resistant hot dipped galvanized steel. C. Steel Bases: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails. 1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1 inch clearance above the floor or structural support. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide bases or rails. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC 230548 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 a. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps. 2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment. 3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support. 4. For equipment mounted outdoor, structural steel rails and hardware shall be corrosion resistant hot dipped galvanized steel. D. Concrete Inertia Base: Factory-fabricated or field-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails ready for placement of cast-in-place concrete. 1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1 inch clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide bases or rails. a. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps. 2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment. 3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support. 4. Fabrication: Fabricate steel templates to hold equipment anchor-bolt sleeves and anchors in place during placement of concrete. Obtain anchor-bolt templates from supported equipment manufacturer. 2.12 RESTRAINED ISOLATION ROOF-CURB RAILS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. 2. California Dynamics Corporation. 3. Kinetics Noise Control. 4. Mason Industries, Inc. 5. Thybar Corporation. B. Description: Factory-assembled, fully enclosed, insulated, air- and watertight curb rail designed to resiliently support equipment and to withstand seismic and wind forces. C. Upper Frame: The upper frame shall provide continuous support for equipment and shall be captive to resiliently resist seismic and wind forces. D. Lower Support Assembly: The lower support assembly shall be formed sheet metal section containing adjustable and removable steel springs that support the upper frame. The lower support assembly shall have a means for attaching to building structure and a wood nailer for attaching roof materials, and shall be insulated with a minimum of 2 inches of rigid, glass-fiber insulation on inside of assembly. Adjustable, restrained-spring isolators shall be mounted on elastomeric vibration isolation pads and shall have access ports, for level adjustment, with removable waterproof covers at all isolator locations. Isolators shall be located so they are accessible for adjustment at any time during the life of the installation without interfering with the integrity of the roof. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC 230548 - 11 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 E. Snubber Bushings: All-directional, elastomeric snubber bushings at least 1/4 inch thick. F. Water Seal: Galvanized sheet metal with EPDM seals at corners, attached to upper support frame, extending down past wood nailer of lower support assembly, and counter-flashed over roof materials. 2.13 THRUST RESTRAINTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. 2. California Dynamics Corporation. 3. Kinetics Noise Control. 4. Mason Industries, Inc. 5. Thybar Corporation. B. Description: Spring element combined with steel angles, backup plates, threaded rod, washers and nuts to produce a pair of devices capable of limiting movement of air handling equipment to 0.25 inch. C. Restraint shall be convertible in the field from compression type to tension type. D. Unit shall be pre-compressed. 2.14 SNUBBERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 2. Mason Industries, Inc. 3. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. B. Description: Factory fabricated using welded structural-steel shapes and plates, anchor bolts, and replaceable resilient isolation washers and bushings. 1. Anchor bolts for attaching to concrete shall be seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud-wedge or female-wedge type. 2. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene. 3. Maximum 1/4 inch air gap, and minimum 1/4 inch- thick resilient cushion. 2.15 RESTRAINT CHANNEL BRACINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hilti, Inc. 3. Mason Industries, Inc. 4. Unistrut. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC 230548 - 12 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Description: MFMA-4, shop- or field-fabricated bracing assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating; rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces. 2.16 RESTRAINT CABLES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 2. Loos & Co., Inc. 3. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. B. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 492 stainless-steel cables. End connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement. 2.17 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following : 1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 3. Mason Industries, Inc. 4. TOLCO. B. Hanger-Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections or Reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod. C. Hinged and Swivel Brace Attachments: Multifunctional steel connectors for attaching hangers to rigid channel bracings and restraint cables. D. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs. E. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of attachment devices used. F. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face. 2.18 MECHANICAL ANCHOR BOLTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following : 1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hilti, Inc. 3. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 4. Mason Industries, Inc. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC 230548 - 13 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. 2.19 ADHESIVE ANCHOR BOLTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following : 1. Hilti, Inc. 2. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 3. Mason Industries, Inc. B. Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing PVC or urethane methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive. Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation- and wind-control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. D. Examine areas and equipment to receive seismic restraint devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 3.2 APPLICATIONS A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Hanger-Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger-rod stiffeners to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces. C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Select sizes of components so strength is adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within loading limits. 3.3 VIBRATION CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION A. Coordinate the location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment attachment and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and formwork specified in Division 03. B. Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping, or ductwork resulting in stresses or misalignment. C. Comply with requirements in Division 07 for installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC 230548 - 14 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. Equipment Restraints: 1. Install seismic snubbers on HVAC equipment mounted on vibration isolators. Locate snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and supporting structure. 2. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch. 3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that provides required submittals for component. E. Piping Restraints: 1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127. 2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum of 80 feet o.c. 3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet. F. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure. G. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that provides required submittals for component. H. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base. I. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall. J. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members. K. Drilled-in Anchors: 1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid pre-stressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines. 2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength. 3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened. 4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive. 5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior applications. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC 230548 - 15 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION A. Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the connections terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting the connections as they approach equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 23 for piping flexible connections. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to restrained component (unless post connection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice. 3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary load-spreading members. 4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Architect. 5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device. 6. Measure isolator restraint clearance. 7. Measure isolator deflection. 8. Verify snubber minimum clearances. C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight. B. Adjust limit stops on restrained-spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation. 3.7 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES INSTALLATION A. Coordinate the location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment attachment and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and formwork specified in Division 03. 3.8 VIBRATION ISOLATION SCHEDULES A. Provide vibration isolators and equipment bases for all rotating, piston driven or vibrating equipment in accordance with the following schedules. Selection of equipment isolators shall be based on approved equipment shop drawings. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC 230548 - 16 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Base & Isolator Types Base Types Isolator Types A No base, isolators attached directly to equipment. 1 Elastomeric pad. B Structural steel rails or base. 2 Elastomeric floor mount or hanger. Use restrained elastomeric mount where seismic restraint is required. C Concrete inertia base. 3 Spring floor isolator or hanger. D Curb-mounted base. 4 Restrained spring isolator. 5 Thrust restraint. Vibration Isolation - Refrigeration Machines and Chillers Compressor Type Horsepower and Other RPM Floor Span Table Notes Slab on Grade Up to 20 ft 20 to 30 ft 30 to 40 ft Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Water Cooled Reciprocating All All A 2 0.25 A 4 0.75 A 4 1.5 A 4 2.5 1 Water Cooled Centrifugal, Scroll All All A 1 0.25 A 4 0.75 A 4 1.5 A 4 1.5 1,2,3 Water Cooled Centrifugal, Screw All All A 1 1.0 A 4 1.5 A 4 2.5 A 4 2.5 1,2 Absorption All All A 4 0.25 A 4 0.75 A 4 1.5 A 4 1.5 Air Cooled, Reciprocating, Scroll All All A 1 0.25 A 4 1.5 A 4 1.5 A 4 2.5 1,2,4 Air Cooled, Reciprocating, Screw All All A 4 1.0 A 4 1.5 B 4 2.5 B 4 2.5 1,2,3,4 Notes: 1. Increase isolator deflection so isolator stiffness is less than one-tenth the stiffness of the supporting structure, as defined by the deflection due to load at the equipment support. 2. Where equipment manufacturer indicates component cannot be installed directly on individual isolators (type A), provide equipment manufacturer recommended supplemental support (base type). 3. Select isolator deflection so that resonance frequency is 40 percent or less of the lowest normal operating speed of equipment. Add a 1 in. thick pad (type 1) to the base plate of spring isolators (type 3). 4. Provide restrained isolators, supplemental bracing and snubbers required to account for wind loading conditions. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC 230548 - 17 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Vibration Isolation - Air Compressors Compressor Type Horsepower and Other RPM Floor Span Table Notes Slab on Grade Up to 20 ft 20 to 30 ft 30 to 40 ft Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Tankmounted horizontal ≤10 All A 3 0.75 A 3 0.75 A 3 1.5 A 3 1.5 1 ≥15 All C 3 0.75 C 3 0.75 C 3 1.5 C 3 1.5 1 Tankmounted vertical All All C 3 0.75 C 3 0.75 C 3 1.5 C 3 1.5 1 BaseMounted All All C 3 0.75 C 3 0.75 C 3 1.5 C 3 1.5 1,2 Large Reciprocating All All C 3 0.75 C 3 0.75 C 3 1.5 C 3 1.5 1,2 Notes: 1. Compressors: Install base-mounted compressors through 5 hp and horizontal tank-type air compressors through 10 hp directly on spring isolators (type 3) with structural bases (type B), and compressors 15 to 100 hp on spring isolators (type 3) with inertia bases (type C) weighing 1 to 2 times the compressor weight. 2. When using Y, W, and multi-head and multi-cylinder compressors, obtain the magnitude of unbalanced forces from the equipment manufacturer for use in assessing need for an inertia base. Vibration Isolation - Pumps Pump Type Horsepower and Other RPM Floor Span Table Notes Slab on Grade Up to 20 ft 20 to 30 ft 30 to 40 ft Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Close Coupled ≤7.5 All B 2 0.25 C 3 0.75 C 3 0.75 C 3 0.75 1 ≥10 All C 3 0.75 C 3 0.75 C 3 1.5 C 3 1.5 1 Large Inline 5 to 25 All A 3 0.75 A 3 1.5 A 3 1.5 A 2 1.5 ≥30 All A 3 1.5 A 3 1.5 A 3 1.5 A 3 2.5 End suction and split case ≤40 All C 3 0.75 C 3 0.75 C 3 1.5 C 3 1.5 1 50 to 125 All C 3 0.75 C 3 0.75 C 3 1.5 C 3 2.5 1 ≥150 All C 3 0.75 C 3 0.75 C 3 2.5 C 3 3.5 1 Packaged Pump Systems All All A 3 0.75 A 3 0.75 A 3 1.5 C 3 2.5 Notes: 1. Pumps: Type C bases strength and shape shall accommodate base elbow supports. Concrete bases (type C) shall be designed for a thickness of one-tenth the longest dimension with minimum thickness as follows: (1) for up to 30 hp, 6 in.; (2) for 40 to 75 hp, 8 in.; and (3) for 100 hp and up, 12 in. Pumps over 75 hp and multistage pumps shall be provided with supplemental restraining devices. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC 230548 - 18 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Vibration Isolation - Cooling Towers Tower Type Horsepower and Other Min. RPM Floor Span Table Notes Slab on Grade Up to 20 ft 20 to 30 ft 30 to 40 ft Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) All All Up to 300 B 1 0.25 B 4 3.5 B 4 3.5 B 4 3.5 1,2,3 301 to 500 B 1 0.25 B 4 2.5 B 4 2.5 B 4 2.5 1,3 500 and up B 1 0.25 B 4 0.75 B 4 0.75 B 4 1.5 1.3 Notes: 1. Provide restrained spring isolators (type 4), supplemental bracing, snubbers, or limit stops to address wind loading. 2. Select isolator deflection so that resonance frequency is 40 percent or less of the lowest normal operating speed of equipment. Add a 1 in. thick pad (type 1) to the base plate of spring isolators (type 4). 3. Provide structural steel rails to support multiple cooling tower cells as a single unit. Size rails for equipment support and span between isolators. Isolate with restrained spring isolators mounted between continuous steel rail and building structural supports. Design of rail and isolator locations and attachment methods shall be provided by vibration isolation manufacturer. Vibration Isolation - Boilers and Steam Generators Boiler Type Horsepower and Other RPM Floor Span Table Notes Slab on Grade Up to 20 ft 20 to 30 ft 30 to 40 ft Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Firetube All All A 1 0.25 B 4 0.75 B 4 1.5 B 4 2.5 1 Watertube, copper Fin All All A 1 0.12 A 1 0.12 A 1 0.12 B 4 0.25 1 Notes: 1. Where equipment manufacturer indicates component cannot be installed directly on individual isolators (type A) provide equipment manufacturer recommended supplemental support (base type). Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC 230548 - 19 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Vibration Isolation - Axial Fans, Fan Heads, Cabinet Fans, Fan Sections Fan Size Fan Static Pressure RPM Floor Span Table Notes Slab on Grade Up to 20 ft 20 to 30 ft 30 to 40 ft Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Up to 22 in. diameter All All A 2 0.25 A 3 0.75 A 3 0.75 C 3 0.75 1,2,3 24 in. diameter & up ≤2 in. SP Up to 300 B 3 2.5 C 3 3.5 C 3 3.5 C 3 3.5 2,3 300 to 500 B 3 0.75 B 3 1.5 C 3 2.5 C 3 2.5 2,3 501 and up B 3 0.75 B 3 1.5 B 3 1.5 B 3 1.5 2,3 ≥2.1 in. SP Up to 300 C 3 2.5 C 3 3.5 C 3 3.5 C 3 3.5 2,3 300 to 500 C 3 1.5 C 3 1.5 C 3 2.5 C 3 2.5 2,3 501 and up C 3 0.75 C 3 1.5 C 3 1.5 C 3 2.5 2.3 Notes: 1. Where equipment manufacturer indicates component cannot be installed directly on individual isolators (type A) provide equipment manufacturer recommended supplemental support (base type). 2. Select isolator deflection so that resonance frequency is 40 percent or less of the lowest normal operating speed of equipment. Add a 1 in. thick pad (type 1) to the base plate of spring isolators (type 3). 3. To limit undesirable movement, thrust restraints (type 5) are required for all ceiling-suspended and floor-mounted units operating at 2 in. of water or more total static pressure. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC 230548 - 20 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Vibration Isolation - Centrifugal Fans Fan Size Fan Horsepower RPM Floor Span Table Notes Slab on Grade Up to 20 ft 20 to 30 ft 30 to 40 ft Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Up to 22 in. diameter All All B 2 0.25 B 3 0.75 B 3 0.75 B 3 1.5 3,4 24 in. diameter & up ≤40 Up to 300 B 3 2.5 B 3 3.5 B 3 3.5 B 3 3.5 2,4 300 to 500 B 3 1.5 B 3 1.5 B 3 2.5 B 3 2.5 2,4 501 and up B 3 0.75 B 3 0.75 B 3 0.75 B 3 1.5 2,4 ≥50 Up to 300 C 3 2.5 C 3 3.5 C 3 3.5 C 3 3.5 1,2,3,4 300 to 500 C 3 1.5 C 3 1.5 C 3 2.5 C 3 2.5 1,2,3,4 501 and up C 3 1.0 C 3 1.5 C 3 1.5 C 3 2.5 1,2,3,4, Notes: 1. Increase isolator deflection so isolator stiffness is less than one-tenth the stiffness of the supporting structure, as defined by the deflection due to load at the equipment support. 2. Select isolator deflection so that resonance frequency is 40 percent or less of the lowest normal operating speed of equipment. Add a 1 in. thick pad (type 1) to the base plate of spring isolators (type 3). 3. Provide thrust restraints (type 5) for all ceiling-suspended and floor-mounted units operating at 2 in. of water or more total static pressure. 4. Fans and Air-Handling Equipment: For fans operating under 300 rpm, select isolator deflection so the isolator natural frequency is 40 percent or less than the fan speed. Flexible duct connectors shall be installed at the intake and discharge of all fans and air-handling equipment to reduce vibration transmission to air duct structures. Provide inertia bases (type C) for all class 2 and 3 fans and air handling equipment. Provide thrust restraints (type 5) with same deflection as isolators for all fans and all base-mounted and suspended air-handling equipment operating at 2 in. or more total static pressure. Adjust restraint movement under normal operational static pressures. Vibration Isolation - Propeller Fans Fan Type Horsepower and Other RPM Floor Span Table Notes Slab on Grade Up to 20 ft 20 to 30 ft 30 to 40 ft Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Wallmounted All All A A 0.25 A 1 0.25 A 1 0.25 A 1 0.25 Roofmounted All All A A 0.25 A 1 0.25 B 4 1.5 D 4 1.5 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC 230548 - 21 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Vibration Isolation - Heat Pumps, Fan Coil Units and Computer Room Units Equipment Type Horsepower and Other RPM Floor Span Table Notes Slab on Grade Up to 20 ft 20 to 30 ft 30 to 40 ft Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Heat Pumps, Fan Coil Units and Computer Room Units All All A 3 0.75 A 3 0.75 A 3 0.75 A/D 3 1.5 Vibration Isolation - Condensing Units Equipment Type Horsepower and Other RPM Floor Span Table Notes Slab on Grade Up to 20 ft 20 to 30 ft 30 to 40 ft Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Condensing Units All All A 1 0.25 A 4 0.75 A 4 1.5 A/D 4 1.5 Vibration Isolation - Packaged Air Handling Unit, Air Conditioning Units, Heating & Ventilating Units Fan Size Fan HP, Static Pressure RPM Floor Span Table Notes Slab on Grade Up to 20 ft 20 to 30 ft 30 to 40 ft Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) All ≤10 All A 3 0.75 A 3 0.75 A 3 0.75 A 3 0.75 5,6 ≥15, ≤4 in. SP Up to 300 A 3 0.75 A 3 3.5 A 3 3.5 C 3 3.5 1,3,4,5,6 300 to 500 A 3 0.75 A 3 2.5 A 3 2.5 A 3 2.5 3,5,6 501 and up A 3 0.75 A 3 1.5 A 3 1.5 A 3 1.5 3,5,6 ≥15, ≥4 in. SP Up to 300 B 3 0.75 C 3 3.5 C 3 3.5 C 3 3.5 1,2,3,4,5 300 to 500 B 3 0.75 C 3 1.5 C 3 2.5 C 3 2.5 1,2,3,5 501 and up B 3 0.75 C 3 1.5 C 3 1.5 C 3 2.5 1,2,3,5 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC 230548 - 22 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Vibration Isolation - Packaged Rooftop Air Conditioning Equipment Fan Size Fan HP, Static Pressure RPM Floor Span Table Notes Slab on Grade Up to 20 ft 20 to 30 ft 30 to 40 ft Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) All All All A/D 1 0.25 D 3 0.75 DO NOT ALLOW 1,2,3 Vibration Isolation - Ducted Rotating Equipment Equipment Type Airflow (cfm) RPM Floor Span Table Notes Slab on Grade Up to 20 ft 20 to 30 ft 30 to 40 ft Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Small fans, fanpowered boxes, cabinet heaters, unit heaters ≤600 All A 3 0.5 A 3 0.5 A 3 0.5 A 3 0.5 ≥601 All A 3 0.75 A 3 0.75 A 3 0.75 A 3 0.75 Vibration Isolation - Engine-Driven Generators Generator Type Horsepower and Other RPM Floor Span Table Notes Slab on Grade Up to 20 ft 20 to 30 ft 30 to 40 ft Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) Base Type Isolator Type Min Defl., (in.) All All All A 3 0.75 C 3 1.5 C 3 2.5 C 3 3.5 1,2 Notes: 1. Increase isolator deflection so isolator stiffness is less than one-tenth the stiffness of the supporting structure, as defined by the deflection due to load at the equipment support. 2. Where equipment manufacturer indicates component cannot be installed directly on individual isolators (type A) provide equipment manufacturer recommended supplemental support (base type). 3.9 PIPING SYSTEM VIBRATION ISOLATION A. Vibration isolators for suspended piping: 1. Provide spring hangers for all piping in equipment rooms and up to 50 ft from vibrationisolated equipment and PRV stations. The first three hangers from the equipment shall be provided with the same deflection as the equipment isolators, with a maximum limitation of 2 in. deflection. Remaining hangers shall be spring or combination spring and elastomeric with 0.75 in. deflection. The first two hangers adjacent to the equipment shall be the positioning or pre-compressed type. Provide positioning hangers for all isolated piping 8 in. and larger. Piping over 2 inches in diameter suspended below or within 50 ft of conference rooms, classrooms and auditorium areas shall be hung with isolation hangers. B. Vibration isolators for floor-supported piping: 1. Provide vibration isolators for floor supports for piping in equipment rooms to isolate equipment. Isolators shall be selected according to the guidelines for hangers. The first two adjacent floor supports shall be the restrained spring type, with a restraint/blocking Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC 230548 - 23 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 feature to prevent load transfer to equipment flanges as the piping is filled or drained. Provide a slide plate where pipe is subjected to large thermal movement (PTFE, graphite, or steel) and shall be installed on top of the isolator. Provide a thermal barrier when rubber products are installed directly beneath steam or hot-water lines. C. Vibration isolation for piping riser supports: 1. Provide resilient pipe riser support near to midpoint of riser and provide spring hangers at each floor or structural level to support riser and allow thermal expansion risers. 2. Provide spring hangers for first three hangers connected to branch piping at each level. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\230548_VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Equipment labels. 2. Pipe labels. 3. Duct labels. 4. Stencils. 5. Valve tags. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device. C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label. D. Valve numbering scheme. E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors. C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS A. Metal Labels for Equipment: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch Stainless steel, 0.025-inch Aluminum, 0.032inch or anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. 2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. 4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. 2.2 PIPE LABELS A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, pipe size, and flow direction. B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive. C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing. D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction. 1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction. 2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 incheshigh. 2.3 DUCT LABELS A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. B. Letter Color: Coordinate with owner. C. Background Color: Coordinate with owner. D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. I. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, duct size, and an arrow indicating flow direction. 1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction. 2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 incheshigh. 2.4 STENCILS A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; minimum letter height of 1-1/4 inches for ducts; and minimum letter height of 3/4 inch for access panel and door labels, equipment labels, and similar operational instructions. 1. Stencil Material: Aluminum. 2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, alkyd enamel or acrylic enamel black unless otherwise indicated. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form. 3. Identification Paint: Exterior, alkyd enamel or acrylic enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1 unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 VALVE TAGS A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2inch numbers. 1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. 2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook. B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. Along with schedule, provide system schematic diagram to showing the location of all valves 1. Valve-tag schedule and system schematic diagram shall be included in operation and maintenance data. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants. 3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment. B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION A. Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09 "Interior Painting" B. Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels with painted, color-coded bands or rectangles, complying with ASME A13.1, on each piping system. 1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background. 2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking. C. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows: 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 25 feet along each run. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels. D. Pipe Label Color Schedule: 1. Chilled-Water Piping: a. Background Color: Green. b. Letter Color: White. 2. Heating Water Piping: a. Background Color: Yellow. b. Letter Color: Black. 3. Low-Pressure Steam Piping: a. Background Color: Yellow. b. Letter Color: Black. 4. Steam Condensate Piping: a. Background Color: Yellow. b. Letter Color: Black. 3.4 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION A. Install plastic-laminated or self-adhesive duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Blue: For supply ducts. 2. Green: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts. 3. ASME A13.1 Colors and Designs: For hazardous material exhaust. B. Stenciled Duct Label Option: Stenciled labels, showing service and flow direction, may be provided instead of plastic-laminated duct labels, at Installer's option, if lettering larger than 1 inch high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location of required identification. C. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system. 3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule. B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs: 1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape: a. Chilled Water: 1-1/2 inches, round. b. Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches, round. c. Low-Pressure Steam: 1-1/2 inches, round. d. High-Pressure Steam: 1-1/2 inches, round. e. Steam Condensate: 1-1/2 inches, round. 2. Valve-Tag Color: a. Chilled Water: Natural. b. Hot Water: Natural. c. Low-Pressure Steam: Natural. d. High-Pressure Steam: Natural. e. Steam Condensate: Natural. 3. Letter Color: a. Chilled Water: Black. b. Hot Water: Black. c. Low-Pressure Steam: Black. d. High-Pressure Steam: Black. e. Steam Condensate: Black. END OF SECTION Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\230553 FL - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Balancing Air Systems: a. Constant-volume air systems. b. Variable-air-volume systems. 2. Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems: a. Constant-flow hydronic systems. b. Variable-flow hydronic systems. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council. B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau. C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau. E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. LEED Submittals: 1. Air-Balance Report for Prerequisite IEQ 1: Documentation of work performed for ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing." 2. TAB Report for Prerequisite EA 2: Documentation of work performed for ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing." 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3. B. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Certified TAB reports. D. Sample report forms. E. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following: 1. Instrument type and make. 2. Serial number. 3. Application. 4. Dates of use. 5. Dates of calibration. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC, NEBB or TABB. 1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC NEBB or TABB. 2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by AABC NEBB or TABB as a TAB technician. B. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following: 1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports. 2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification. C. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5, "Instrumentation." D. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing." E. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing." 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations. B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times. B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment. B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are accessible. C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment. D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls. E. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to verify that they meet the leakage class of connected ducts as specified in Division 23, Metal Ducts and are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required. F. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. 1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. 2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions. G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed. H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections. I. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. J. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning. K. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with indicated perforations. L. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows. M. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins. N. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping. O. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment. P. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures. B. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following: 1. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete. 2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. 3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. 4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. 6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. 7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is provided. 8. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met. 3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and in this Section. 1. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing." B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures. 1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts. 2. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with requirements in Division 23, Air Duct Accessories. 3. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Division 23, Duct Insulation, Division 23, HVAC Equipment Insulation, and Division 23, HVAC Piping Insulation. C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings. D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units. 3.4 FUME HOOD TESTING AND CERTIFICATION A. Test and certify all fume hoods in full accordance with all sections of ASHRAE 110 except for the modifications listed below. 1. Perform tracer gas test on at least one hood of each type specified in the project. The contractor will need to procure qualified individuals to perform this test. 2. ASHRAE 110 static and sash movement leakage tests shall achieve less than 0.05ppm test rating. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.5 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts. C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity. D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements. E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaustair dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers. F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. I. Check for airflow blockages. J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning. K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components. L. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Division 23, Metal Ducts. 3.6 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer. 1. Measure total airflow. a. Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow. 2. Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure: a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct restrictions. d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan. 3. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment. a. Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured. 4. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heatrecovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 5. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments to accommodate actual conditions. 6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fanmotor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower. B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. 1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts. a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone. 2. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved. 3. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. C. Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments. 1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors. D. Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals. 1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents. 2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. 3.7 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS A. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the indicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a minimum set-point airflow with the remainder at maximum-airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the indicated airflow of the fan. Select the reduced-airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts. B. Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows: 1. Set outdoor-air dampers at minimum, and set return- and exhaust-air dampers at a position that simulates full-cooling load. 2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure. Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal-unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge system losses. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow. 4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed maximum airflow. Use terminal-unit manufacturer's written instructions to make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems. 5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow the same as described for constant-volume air systems. a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave outlets balanced for maximum airflow. 6. Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outdoor airflow. a. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for constant-volume air systems. 7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-pressure controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure that adequate static pressure is maintained at the most critical unit. 8. Record final fan-performance data. 3.8 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data, and number in sequence starting at pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against the approved pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts. C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the general preparation procedures specified above: 1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow. 2. Check liquid level in expansion tank. 3. Check makeup water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent. 4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation, and set at indicated flow. 5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unless several terminal valves are kept open. 6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers. 7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded. 8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated. 3.9 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures except for positive-displacement pumps: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size. 2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the pump and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until indicated water flow is achieved. a. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motors in overload conditions. 3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage. 4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 10 percent of design. B. Measure flow at all automatic flow control valves to verify that valves are functioning as designed. C. Measure flow at all pressure-independent characterized control valves, with valves in fully open position, to verify that valves are functioning as designed. D. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings. E. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance. 1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device. F. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5 percent greater than indicated flow. G. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows: 1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow. 2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated flow. 3. Record settings and mark balancing devices. H. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air temperature. I. Measure the differential-pressure-control-valve settings existing at the conclusion of balancing. J. Check settings and operation of each safety valve. Record settings. 3.10 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Balance systems with automatic two- and three-way control valves by setting systems at maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic systems. 3.11 PROCEDURES FOR STEAM SYSTEMS A. Measure and record upstream and downstream pressure of each piece of equipment. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Measure and record upstream and downstream steam pressure of pressure-reducing valves. C. Check settings and operation of automatic temperature-control valves, self-contained control valves, and pressure-reducing valves. Record final settings. D. Check settings and operation of each safety valve. Record settings. E. Verify the operation of each steam trap. 3.12 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT EXCHANGERS A. Measure water flow through all circuits. B. Adjust water flow to within specified tolerances. C. Measure inlet and outlet water temperatures. D. Measure inlet steam pressure. E. Check settings and operation of safety and relief valves. Record settings. 3.13 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data: 1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Efficiency rating. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating. B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number, serial number, and nameplate data. 3.14 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each water coil: 1. Entering- and leaving-water temperature. 2. Water flow rate. 3. Water pressure drop. 4. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 5. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils. 6. Airflow. 7. Air pressure drop. B. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each electric heating coil: 1. Nameplate data. 2. Airflow. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. Entering- and leaving-air temperature at full load. 4. Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load and at each incremental stage. 5. Calculated kilowatt at full load. 6. Fuse or circuit-breaker rating for overload protection. C. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each steam coil: 1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 2. Airflow. 3. Air pressure drop. 4. Inlet steam pressure. D. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each refrigerant coil: 1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 2. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 3. Airflow. 4. Air pressure drop. 5. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature. 3.15 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS A. Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused. 1. Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan. 2. Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate information. 3. Check the refrigerant charge. 4. Check the condition of filters. 5. Check the condition of coils. 6. Check the operation of the drain pan and condensate-drain trap. 7. Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication. 8. Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements taken. Report deficiencies. B. Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing equipment that is to remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and refurbished. Verify the following: 1. New filters are installed. 2. Coils are clean and fins combed. 3. Drain pans are clean. 4. Fans are clean. 5. Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated. 6. Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 11 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are affected by the renovation work. 1. Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows, and determine the new fan speed and the face velocity of filters and coils. 2. Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter and coil face velocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by equipment manufacturer. 3. If calculations increase or decrease the air flow rates and water flow rates by more than 5 percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated rates. If increase or decrease is 5 percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required. 4. Balance each air outlet. 3.16 TOLERANCES A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent. 3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent. 4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent. 3.17 REPORTING A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices. 3.18 FINAL REPORT A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems. 1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. 2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following: 1. Pump curves. 2. Fan curves. 3. Manufacturers' test data. 4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and product data. C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 12 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Title page. 2. Name and address of the TAB contractor. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following: a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. 12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following: a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems. g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance. D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following: 1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Water and steam flow rates. 3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. 5. Terminal units. 6. Balancing stations. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 13 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 7. Position of balancing devices. E. Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Unit arrangement and class. g. Discharge arrangement. h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. i. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches. j. Number, make, and size of belts. k. Number, type, and size of filters. 2. Motor Data: a. Motor make, and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches. 3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total air flow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg. f. Preheat-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. g. Cooling-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. h. Heating-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. i. Outdoor airflow in cfm. j. Return airflow in cfm. k. Outdoor-air damper position. l. Return-air damper position. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 14 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 m. Vortex damper position. F. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following: 1. Fan Data: a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Arrangement and class. g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches. 2. Motor Data: a. Motor make, and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches. g. Number, make, and size of belts. 3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Suction static pressure in inches wg. G. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following: 1. Report Data: a. System and air-handling-unit number. b. Location and zone. c. Traverse air temperature in deg F. d. Duct static pressure in inches wg. e. Duct size in inches. f. Duct area in sq. ft.. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 15 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 g. Indicated air flow rate in cfm. h. Indicated velocity in fpm. i. Actual air flow rate in cfm. j. Actual average velocity in fpm. k. Barometric pressure in psig. H. Air-Terminal-Device Reports: 1. Unit Data: a. System and air-handling unit identification. b. Location and zone. c. Apparatus used for test. d. Area served. e. Make. f. Number from system diagram. g. Type and model number. h. Size. i. Effective area in sq. ft.. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Air flow rate in cfm. b. Air velocity in fpm. c. Preliminary air flow rate as needed in cfm. d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm. e. Final air flow rate in cfm. f. Final velocity in fpm. g. Space temperature in deg F. I. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. System and air-handling-unit identification. b. Location and zone. c. Room or riser served. d. Coil make and size. e. Flowmeter type. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Air flow rate in cfm. b. Entering-water temperature in deg F. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 16 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 c. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. d. Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig. e. Entering-air temperature in deg F. f. Leaving-air temperature in deg F. J. Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves and include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Service. d. Make and size. e. Model number and serial number. f. Water flow rate in gpm. g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig. i. Pump rpm. j. Impeller diameter in inches. k. Motor make and frame size. l. Motor horsepower and rpm. m. Voltage at each connection. n. Amperage for each phase. o. Full-load amperage and service factor. p. Seal type. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Static head in feet of head or psig. b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig. c. Actual impeller size in inches. d. Full-open flow rate in gpm. e. Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig. f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig. g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig. h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig. i. Final water flow rate in gpm. j. Voltage at each connection. k. Amperage for each phase. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 17 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 K. Instrument Calibration Reports: 1. Report Data: a. Instrument type and make. b. Serial number. c. Application. d. Dates of use. e. Dates of calibration. 3.19 INSPECTIONS A. Initial Inspection: 1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance readings documented in the final report. 2. Check the following for each system: a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets. b. Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals. c. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the reading to the set point. d. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position. e. Note deviations from the Contract Documents in the final report. B. Final Inspection: 1. After initial inspection is complete and documentation by random checks verifies that testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request that a final inspection be made by Owner. 2. Architect shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day. 3. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED." 4. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected. C. TAB Work will be considered defective if it does not pass final inspections. If TAB Work fails, proceed as follows: 1. Recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final inspection. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 18 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB contractor to complete TAB Work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the original TAB contractor's final payment. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.20 ADDITIONAL TESTS A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions. B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\230593 FL - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 230700 - HVAC INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes insulating the following duct services: 1. Combined Heating and Cooling Ducts 2. Unconditioned Outside Air Intake Ducts/Plena and Exhaust Relief Duct and Plena Inside the Building Envelope 3. Unconditioned Exhaust/Relief Duct and Plena Outside the Building Envelope B. Section includes insulating the following HVAC equipment that is not factory insulated: 1. Cooling System Equipment 2. Heating Hot Water Equipment 3. Steam Equipment C. Section includes insulating the following HVAC piping systems 1. Steam/Steam Condensate Return: 0 psig to 15 psig/201 deg F to 250 deg F 2. Steam Pressure Relief: All Pressures/Temperatures 3. Heating Hot Water Systems: 141 deg F to 200 deg F 4. Cooling and Glycol Energy Recovery Systems 40 deg F to 85 deg F 5. Cooling Coil Condensate Piping D. Referenced Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM) 2. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE). 3. North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (NAIMA). 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance, thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied if any). B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Detail application of field-applied jackets. 2. Detail application at linkages of control devices. 3. Detail application of protective duct shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger. 4. Detail insulation application at duct elbows, fittings, dampers, specialties and flanges for each type of insulation. 5. Detail attachment and covering of equipment heat tracing inside insulation. 6. Detail removable insulation at equipment connections. 7. Detail field application for each equipment type. 8. Detail application of protective piping shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger. 9. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. 10. Detail insulation application at pipe elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of insulation. 11. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties. C. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket indicated. Identify each Sample, describing product and intended use. Sample sizes are as follows: 1. Sheet Form Insulation Materials: 12 inches square. 2. Sheet Jacket Materials: 12 inches square. 3. Manufacturer's Color Charts: For products where color is specified, show the full range of colors available for each type of finish material. 4. Preformed Pipe Insulation Materials: 12 inches long by NPS 2 Jacket Materials for Pipe: 12 inches long by NPS 2. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed. C. Coordination Documentation: Written documentation indicating specific sheet metal and hanger requirements from fire-rated duct insulation system UL Listing. D. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 23. B. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for duct insulation application. Before preparing ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance. C. Coordinate clearance requirements with equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Coordinate installation and testing of equipment heat tracing. D. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application. Coordinate installation and testing of piping heat tracing. 1.8 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after pressure and leak testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results. B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 articles for where insulating materials shall be applied. B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795. E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. F. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type II for sheet materials and Type I for tubular materials. For indoor applications insulation meet ASTM E84 Flame Spread and Smoke Developed ratings of 25/50 for thickness required. For duct applications, color shall be selected by the architect from manufacturer standard color options. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aerocel. b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex and Armaflex FS. c. RBX Corporation G. Mineral-Fiber (Fiberglass) Blanket Duct Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type I for insulation without jackets, Type II with factory-applied vinyl jacket, Type III with factory-applied FSK jacket or Type III with factory-applied FSP jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. CertainTeed Corp.; SoftTouch Duct Wrap. b. Johns Manville; Microlite. c. Knauf Insulation; Atmosphere Duct Wrap with ECOSE Technology. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap. e. Owens Corning; SOFTR All-Service Duct Wrap. H. Rigid Mineral-Fiber (Fiberglass) Board Duct Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. 1. For duct and plenum applications in mechanical rooms and concealed locations, provide insulation with factory-applied FSK jacket. 2. For duct and plenum applications exposed in occupied spaces, provide insulation with paintable factory-applied ASJ jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 3. Provide insulation with factory-applied ASJ for equipment. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 4. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board. b. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas. c. Knauf Insulation; Earthwool Insulation Board with ECOSE Technology d. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Board. e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series. I. Mineral-Fiber (Fiberglass), Preformed Pipe Insulation 1. Type I, 850 deg F (454 deg C) Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory and field installed jackets identified in pipe insulation schedules. 2. Type II, 1200 deg F (649 deg C) Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type II, Grade A, with factory and field installed jackets identified in pipe insulation schedules. 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. Knauf Insulation. c. Manson Insulation Inc. d. Owens Corning. J. Semi-Rigid Mineral-Fiber (Fiberglass) Insulation 1. Duct Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Semi-rigid board material with factory-applied ASJ complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Minimum nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft.. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or less. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 2. Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Semi-rigid board material with factory-applied ASJ complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Minimum nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft.. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or less. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. CertainTeed Corp.; CrimpWrap. b. Johns Manville; MicroFlex. c. Knauf Insulation; Earthwool Pipe & Tank Insulation with ECOSE Technology. d. Knauf Insulation: Kwik-Flex Pipe & Tank Insulation. e. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Flex. f. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe and Tank Insulation. 2.2 ADHESIVES A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." The building concentration of formaldehyde shall not exceed half of the indoor recommended exposure limit, 9 mcg/cu. m or 7 ppb, whichever is less, and that of acetaldehyde shall not exceed 9 mcg/cu. m. B. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aeroseal Low VOC. b. Armacell LLC; Armaflex 520BLV Adhesive. c. K-Flex USA; 720-LVOC Contact Adhesive. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 d. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75. C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-127. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225. c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 85-60/85-70. D. ASJ,and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-82. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225. c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 85-50. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25. E. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 739, Dow Silicone. b. Johns Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive. c. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive. d. Speedline Corporation; Polyco VP Adhesive. 2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 3. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." F. Calcium Silicate Adhesive: Fibrous, sodium-silicate-based adhesive with a service temperature range of 50 to 800 deg FAvailable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-97. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 290. c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 81-27. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-30. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 e. Vimasco Corporation; 760. G. Cellular-Glass Adhesive: Two-component, thermosetting urethane adhesive containing no flammable solvents, with a service temperature range of minus 100 to plus 200 deg F. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 81-84. 2.3 MASTICS A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 1. VOC Content: 300 g/L or less. 2. Low-Emitting Materials: Mastic coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers.” The building concentration of formaldehyde shall not exceed half of the indoor recommended exposure limit, 9 mcg/cu. m or 7 ppb, whichever is less, and that of acetaldehyde shall not exceed 9 mcg/cu. m. B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 30-80/30-90. b. Vimasco Corporation; 749. 2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight. 5. Color: White. C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below ambient services. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; Encacel. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 570. c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 60-95/60-96. 2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 30-mil dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 220 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 33 percent by volume and 46 percent by weight. 5. Color: White. D. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-10. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 550. c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 46-50. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-50. e. Vimasco Corporation; WC-1/WC-5. 2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight. 5. Color: White. 2.4 LAGGING ADHESIVES A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-50 AHV2. b. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 30-36. c. Vimasco Corporation; 713 and 714. 2. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. 3. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." The building concentration of formaldehyde shall not exceed half of the indoor recommended exposure limit, 9 mcg/cu. m or 7 ppb, whichever is less, and that of acetaldehyde shall not exceed 9 mcg/cu. m. 4. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fireresistant lagging cloths over duct insulation. 5. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F. 6. Color: White. 2.5 SEALANTS A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-76. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 405. c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 95-44. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05. 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: Aluminum. 6. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less. 7. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." The building concentration of formaldehyde shall not exceed half of the indoor recommended exposure limit, 9 mcg/cu. m or 7 ppb, whichever is less, and that of acetaldehyde shall not exceed 9 mcg/cu. m. B. ASJ Flashing Sealants and PVC Flashing Sealants: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-76. 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: White. C. Joint Sealants: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-76. b. Marathon Industries; 405. c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 30-45. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05. e. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444. 2.6 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. Permeance of jacket shall not exceed 0.02 perm. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. Permeance of jacket shall not exceed 0.02 perm. 3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforce d scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. Permeance of jacket shall not exceed 0.02 perm. 2.7 FIELD-APPLIED CLOTHS A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I, plain weave, and presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd.. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Alpha Associates, Inc.; Alpha-Maritex 84215 and 84217/9485RW, Luben 59. 2.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated. B. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory-applied jackets. 1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints. 2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- thick coats of lagging adhesive. 3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation. C. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows: 1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- wide joint strips at end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation with vapor-barrier mastic. D. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications. Seal with manufacturer recommended adhesive. 1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge. E. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches OC and at end joints. F. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing. G. PVC Jacket: 30 Mil, High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 11 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 a. Johns Manville; Zeston. b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series. c. Proto Corporation; LoSmoke. d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe. 2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. 3. Color: White. 4. Factory-fabricated tank heads and tank side panels. H. Metal Jacket: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; Metal Jacketing Systems. b. ITW Insulation Systems; Aluminum and Stainless Steel Jacketing. c. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate. 2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005, Temper H-14. a. Factory cut and rolled to size. b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. c. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. d. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers: 1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket. 2) Preformed two-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows. 3) Tee covers. 4) Flange and union covers. 5) End caps. 6) Beveled collars. 7) Valve covers. 8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not available. I. Underground Direct-Buried Piping Jacket: 125-mil- (3.2-mm-) thick vapor barrier and waterproofing membrane consisting of a rubberized bituminous resin reinforced with a wovenglass fiber or polyester scrim and laminated aluminum foil. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittwrap. b. Polyguard Products, Inc.; Insulrap No Torch 125. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 12 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 J. Self-Adhesive Outdoor Jacket: Minimum 12 mil thick, vapor barrier and waterproofing membrane for installation over insulation located aboveground outdoors; UV resistant, zero permeability with white aluminum-foil facing, impact and tear resistant. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Polyguard Products, Inc.; Alumaguard 60. b. Venture Tape Corporation; VentureClad Plus. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements for thickness, UV resistance, tear resistance and permeability, flexible elastomeric insulation manufacturer cladding may be used for outdoor insulation in lieu of field installed jacketing. 2.9 TAPES A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 428 AWF ASJ. b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0836. c. Compac Corporation; 104 and 105. d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ. e. Knauf Insulation; EXPERT Tapes: ASJ+ Tape OR ASJ Tape. 2. Width: minimum 3 inches. 3. Thickness: minimum 11.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape. B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 491 AWF FSK. b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827. c. Compac Corporation; 110 and 111. d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW NT, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ. e. Knauf Insulation; EXPERT Tapes: FSK Tape. 2. Width: minimum 3 inches. 3. Thickness: minimum 6.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 13 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape. C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive; suitable for indoor and outdoor applications. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 370 White PVC tape. b. Compac Corporation; 130. c. Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS. 2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 6 mils. 4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 500 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width. D. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 488 AWF. b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800. c. Compac Corporation; 120. d. Venture Tape; 3520 CW. e. Knauf Insulation; EXPERT Tapes: 2 MIL Foil Tape. 2. Width: minimum 2 inches. 3. Thickness: minimum 3.7 mils. 4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 5 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width. 2.10 SECUREMENTS A. Bands: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ITW Insulation Systems; Gerrard Strapping and Seals. b. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate Strapping, Seals, and Springs. c. Wing seals are primarily used for fastening bands together. Closed seals are occasionally used for large, 84-inch- diameter applications and where fastening bands are used with springs. Wing seals are reusable; closed seals are not. 2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304; 1/2 inch wide with wing seal. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 14 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal. 4. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application. B. Insulation Pins and Hangers: 1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- or 0.135-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1. 2) GEMCO; CD. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; CD. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; TPA, TPC, and TPS. 2. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- or 0.135-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer. a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CHP-1. 2) GEMCO; Cupped Head Weld Pin. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Cupped Head. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; CHP. 3. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, and securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Perforated Base Insul-Hangers. 2) GEMCO; Perforated Base. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle. b. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. c. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low-carbon steel, or Aluminum, or Stainless steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 15 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates. 4. Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate fastened to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, and securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) GEMCO; Nylon Hangers. 2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Nylon Insulation Hangers. b. Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches in diameter. c. Spindle: Nylon, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated, up to 2-1/2 inches. d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates. 5. Self-Sticking-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, and securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Self-Adhering Insul-Hangers. 2) GEMCO; Peel and Press. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Self Stick. b. Baseplate: Galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. c. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low-carbon steel, or Aluminum, or Stainless steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. d. Adhesive-backed base with a peel-off protective cover. 6. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick, galvanized-steel, or aluminum, or stainless-steel sheet matching hanger materials, with beveled edge sized to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; RC-150. 2) GEMCO; R-150. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 16 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations. 7. Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) GEMCO. 2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc. C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel. D. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. C and F Wire. 2.11 CORNER ANGLES A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, PVC according to ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface. B. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according to ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14. C. Stainless-Steel Corner Angles: 0.024 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, stainless steel according to ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. 1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Duct Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application including dirt, scale, oil, rust and other foreign matter. B. Equipment Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. C. Piping Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 17 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation. E. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water. 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Protect insulation from exposure to moisture prior to and after installation. All insulation other than flexible elastomeric that becomes wet shall be replaced at no cost to the project. B. Install insulation after systems have been tested, proved tight. Remove dirt, scale, oil, rust and other foreign matter prior to installation of insulation. C. Install insulation, mastics, adhesives, coatings, covers, weather-protection and other work in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. Leakage in vapor barrier or voids in insulation will not be accepted. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield. J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. K. Install insulation with factory-applied non-self-sealing jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches OC 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at manufacturer recommended spacing but space no further than 4 inches OC a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 18 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal. L. Install insulation with self-sealing factory-applied jackets as follows: 1. Locate all longitudinal pipe insulation jacketing laps in least visible location. 2. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 3. For proper sealing, seal lap joints with reasonable pressure being applied with a plastic squeegee or sealing tool. 4. Vapor seal all circumferential joints with factory furnished matching pressure sensitive butt strips installed with reasonable pressure being applied with a plastic squeegee or sealing tool. M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. P. Insulate flex connections to same thickness as material as adjoining system Q. Duct Insulation Requirements: 1. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings. 2. Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules. 3. Insulate standing seams with same material and thickness as duct. 4. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings. 5. Insulate flex connections to same thickness as material as adjoining ductwork. R. Equipment Insulation Requirements: 1. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment. 2. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment as specified in insulation system schedules. 3. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: a. Vibration-control devices. b. Testing agency labels and stamps. c. Nameplates and data plates. d. Manholes. e. Handholes. f. Cleanouts. 4. Insulate air separators, strainers (including the whole body and blowdown valve), heat exchangers including heads and bodies, pumps, and expansion tanks. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 19 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 S. Piping Insulation Requirements: 1. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties. 2. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules. 3. For piping systems operating below 60 deg F, seal ends of pipe insulation onto the jacket and seal insulation onto the pipe with approved fire retardant vapor barrier mastic, at flanges, valves and fittings and at intervals of no more than every fourth section of preformed insulation or 20 feet on continuous runs of piping whichever is less. 4. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. 5. Insulate flex connections to same thickness as material as adjoining piping. 6. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: a. Vibration-control devices. b. Testing agency labels and stamps. c. Nameplates and data plates. d. Manholes. e. Handholes. f. Cleanouts. 7. Insulate steam traps 3.4 PENETRATIONS A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. 4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 20 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches. 4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant. D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire-Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. E. Ductwork Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches. 1. Comply with requirements in Division 07for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers. F. Duct Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. Duct: For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches. 2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 07. G. Piping Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. 1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers. H. Piping Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 07. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 21 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. E. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area recommended by the insulation manufacturer but no less than for 50 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches OC b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches OC each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not over compress insulation during installation. Maximum allowable compressions shall be as recommended by the insulation manufacturer. e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch OC Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vaporbarrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vaporbarrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 20-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches. 5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches OC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 22 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches OC B. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area recommended by the insulation manufacturer but no less than for 50 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches OC. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches OC each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not over-compress insulation during installation. e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch OC Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vaporbarrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vaporbarrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches. 5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches OC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 23 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure using the self-seal system per manufacturer’s recommendations or for non-self-seal systems, secure laps with outward-clinched staples at 6 inches OC 4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, secure using the self-seal systems per manufacturer’s recommendations, or for non-self-seal systems, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant. D. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant. E. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. F. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body. 3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory-applied jackets. 1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints. 2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- thick coats of lagging adhesive. 3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation. B. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 24 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- wide joint strips at end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation with vapor-barrier mastic. C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch (25-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications. Seal with manufacturer recommended adhesive. 1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge. D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches OC and at end joints. 3.8 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION A. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Secure insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area recommended by the insulation manufacturer but no less than for 50 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces. 2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to equipment, including contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joints. Stagger end joints. 3. Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles. 4. Install adhesively attached or self-sticking insulation hangers and speed washers on sides of tanks and vessels as follows: a. Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure vessels. b. Select insulation hangers and adhesive that are compatible with service temperature and with substrate. c. On tanks and vessels, maximum anchor-pin spacing is 3 inches from insulation end joints, and 16 inches OC in both directions. d. Do not over-compress insulation during installation. e. Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and domed heads of tanks and vessels. f. Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers. g. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 5. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation materials. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 25 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 6. Where insulation hangers on equipment and vessels are not permitted or practical and where insulation support rings are not provided, install a girdle network for securing insulation. Stretch pre-stressed aircraft cable around the diameter of vessel and make taut with clamps, turnbuckles, or breather springs. Place one circumferential girdle around equipment approximately 6 inches from each end. Install wire or cable between two circumferential girdles 12 inches OC Install a wire ring around each end and around outer periphery of center openings, and stretch pre-stressed aircraft cable radially from the wire ring to nearest circumferential girdle. Install additional circumferential girdles along the body of equipment or tank at a minimum spacing of 48 inches OC Use this network for securing insulation with tie wire or bands. 7. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches. 8. Install insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors, manholes, handholes, and other elements that require frequent removal for service and inspection. 9. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and nameplates. 10. For equipment with surface temperatures below ambient, apply mastic to open ends, joints, seams, breaks, and punctures in insulation. B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Install insulation over entire surface of tanks and vessels. 1. Apply manufacturer recommended coverage of adhesive but no less than 50% to surface with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints. C. Insulation Installation on Pumps: 1. Fabricate metal boxes lined with insulation. Fit boxes around pumps and coincide box joints with splits in pump casings. Fabricate joints with outward bolted flanges. Bolt flanges on 6-inch centers, starting at corners. Install 3/8-inch- diameter fasteners with wing nuts. Alternatively, secure the box sections together using a latching mechanism. 2. Fabricate boxes from galvanized steel for indoor pumps and aluminum or stainless steel, at least 0.050 inch thick. 3. For below ambient services, install a vapor barrier at seams, joints, and penetrations. Seal between flanges with replaceable gasket material to form a vapor barrier. 4. 3.9 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles. B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions: 1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated. 2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. 3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 26 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive. 4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. 5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier. 6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. 7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour. 8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape. 9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match size and color of pipe labels. C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant. D. Install removable insulation covers. Installation shall conform to the following: 1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation. 2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainlesssteel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket. 3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body. 4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 27 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket. 3.10 INSTALLATION OF CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient services, secure laps with outward-clinched staples at 6 inches OC 4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient services, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3.11 FINISHES A. Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 09 for exterior and interior painting. 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof. a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size. B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating. Coating for outdoor insulation shall be UV resistant and waterproof. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 28 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work. D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Perform tests and inspections. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to two location(s) for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule, General" Article. 2. Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by removing fieldapplied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to two location(s) for each type of equipment defined in the Part 3. For large equipment, remove only a portion adequate to determine compliance. 3. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article. D. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements. 3.13 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE GENERAL A. Items Not Insulated: 1. Fibrous-glass ducts. 2. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and ASHRAE/IESNA scheduled values below. 3. Factory-insulated flexible ducts. 4. Factory-insulated plenums and casings. 5. Vibration-control devices. 6. Factory-insulated access panels and doors. 3.14 DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Provide insulation materials and thicknesses identified below. If more than one material is listed for a duct location, selection from materials listed is Division 23 option. B. Duct Insulation Schedules: 1. Where application of rigid versus blanket insulation on components such as coils and supply fans is to be based on the height of a component, height shall be determined based on the bottom of the component listed. Extend applicable insulation over the entire Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 29 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 component before transitioning to alternate material. For ductwork, transition from blanket to rigid insulation shall occur no lower than height listed. 2. Exposed ductwork between air volume terminal or local heating or cooling unit mounted within the space served and associated diffusers or registers does not require external insulation. Where air volume terminal or local heating or cooling unit are mounted outside the space served, insulate ductwork between the air volume terminal or local heating or cooling unit and the wall of the space served. Combined Heating and Cooling Supply, Return and Heat/Energy Recovery System Exhaust Ducts Duct Location Minimum AsInstalled R-Value Insulation Type Minimum Thickness (inches) Minimum Density (lb/cu.ft) Factory Applied Jacket Field Applied Jacket All ductwork, plena, duct mounted coils and supply fans exterior to building envelope. For rectangular and flat oval ductwork taper top insulation to prevent water accumulation by increasing thickness 1/8” per foot up from minimum listed to high point for drainage. R-12.0 Rigid MineralFiber Board 3.0 6.0 FSK SelfAdhesive Outdoor Jacket All concealed ductwork, plena, duct mounted coils in unconditioned spaces including shafts, non-plenum return ceiling cavities and crawlspaces (ventilated and non- ventilated). R-6.0 Mineral-Fiber Blanket 2.0 1.0 FSK N/A All exposed ductwork, plena, duct mounted coils and supply fans in mechanical rooms. R-6.0 Rigid MineralFiber Board 1.5 6.0 FSK N/A Backs of air outlets and outlet plenums with face area larger than 5 square feet that are exposed to unconditioned and indirectly conditioned spaces. R-2.0 Mineral-Fiber Blanket 1.5 0.75 FSK N/A Flexible Elastomeric 0.5 N/A N/A N/A All exposed supply ductwork passing through occupied spaces from heating and cooling unit or shaft to the supply air terminal box inlet or wall of space served and ductwork between the terminal box and the wall of space served. Exposed supply ductwork exclusively located in the space that it is serving does not need to be insulated. R-1.9 Rigid MineralFiber Board 1.5 3.0 ASJ N/A Semi-Rigid Mineral-Fiber Board 1.5 1.5 ASJ N/A Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 30 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Unconditioned Outside Air Intake Ducts/Plena and Exhaust/Relief Duct/Plena Inside Building Envelope Duct Location Minimum AsInstalled R-Value Insulation Type Minimum Thickness (inches) Minimum Density (lb/cu.ft) Factory Applied Jacket Field Applied Jacket For outside air intakes, all ductwork and plena between the building envelope and the first system heating coil, cooling coil or air handling unit connection. R-12.0 Rigid Mineral-Fiber Board 3.0 6.0 FSK N/A Semi-Rigid Mineral-Fiber Board 3.0 1.5 FSK For exhaust/relief ducts and plena, all ductwork and plena between the building envelope and first system isolation damper. R-12.0 Rigid Mineral-Fiber Board 3.0 6.0 FSK N/A Semi-Rigid Mineral-Fiber Board 3.0 1.5 FSK 3.15 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for a type of equipment, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. Refer to duct insulation tables for supply fan and duct mounted coils requirements. B. Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment that is not factory insulated. Heating Hot Water Equipment Insulation Schedule Equipment Type Insulation Type Indoor - Minimum Thickness (inch) Outdoor Minimum Thickness (inch) Factory Applied Jacket Field Applied Jacket – Outdoor Only Heating-hot-water pumps Heating-hot-water air-separator Piping system filter-housing Rigid Mineral-Fiber Board: Minimum Density = 6 lb/cu.ft 1 2 FSK Self-Adhesive Outdoor Jacket Semi -Rigid MineralFiber Board: Minimum Density = 1.5 lb/cu.ft Heat-exchanger (water-to-water for heating service) Heating-hot-water system tanks, heat recovery tanks and thermal storage tanks Rigid Mineral-Fiber Board: Minimum Density = 6 lb/cu.ft 2 4 FSK Self-Adhesive Outdoor Jacket Semi -Rigid MineralFiber Board: Minimum Density = 1.5 lb/cu.ft Radiant Heating Panel. Adjacent building envelope insulation counts towards the specified minimum RValue. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: Minimum Density = 0.75 lb/cu.ft, Minumum R-Value = 3.5. 1.5 N/A N/A N/A Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 31 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Steam Equipment Insulation Schedule Equipment Type Insulation Type Indoor - Minimum Thickness (inch) Outdoor Minimum Thickness (inch) Factory Applied Jacket Field Applied Jacket – Outdoor Only Steam-to-hot-water converter Rigid Mineral-Fiber Board: Minimum Density = 6 lb/cu.ft 1 2 FSK Self-Adhesive Outdoor Jacket Semi -Rigid MineralFiber Board: Minimum Density = 1.5 lb/cu.ft Steam condensate pump and boiler feedwater pump Steam flash-tank, flash-separator, moisture-separator, and blow-offtank Rigid Mineral-Fiber Board: Minimum Density = 6 lb/cu.ft 2 4 FSK Self-Adhesive Outdoor Jacket Semi -Rigid MineralFiber Board: Minimum Density = 1.5 lb/cu.ft 3.16 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: 1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 2. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury. 3.17 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Provide insulation materials and thicknesses scheduled for each system type and pressure/temperature range. If more than one material is listed for a system, selection from materials listed is Division 23 option. B. For dual temperature systems (heating and cooling), provide thickness equal to greater of heating or cooling scheduled value. Dual temperature piping shall also meet all vapor barrier requirements for cooling insulation (perm rating). C. Insulation for pre-insulated piping shall meet all specified requirements. D. Insulate piping operating at temperatures below 40 deg F and systems operating between 40 deg F to 65 deg F in accordance with NAIMA Guide to Insulating Chilled Water Piping Systems with Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation. Comply with all recommendations including but not limited to the requirement for vapor dams every fourth section of insulation. E. Pipe Insulation Schedules: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 32 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Steam/Steam Condensate Return (including all hot piping associated with a steam boiler system): 16 psig to 115 psig/251 deg F to 350 deg F Insulation Conductivity Btu-in/hr-deg FSF at Mean Temp (deg F) Insulation Type Pipe Size (inch) Indoor - Minimum Thickness (inch) Outdoor Minimum Thickness (inch) Factory Applied Jacket Field Applied Jacket 0.29 to 0.32 at 200 Mineral Fiber (Fiberglass) Preformed Pipe, Type I or Type II or Pipe and Tank Insulation for 14” and Larger Pipe Size Less than 1 3.0 4.0 ASJ or ASJ-SSL Indoor: PVC for exposed piping in mechanical rooms when mounted 10 feet or lower above finished floor Outdoor: Aluminum with Moisture Barrier 1 to Less than 1.5 4.0 4.0 1.5 to Less than 4 4.5 4.5 4 to Less than 8 4.5 4.5 8 and Larger 4.5 4.5 Steam/Steam Condensate Return (including all hot piping associated with a steam boiler system): 0 psig to 15 psig/201 deg F to 250 deg F Insulation Conductivity Btu-in/hr-deg FSF at Mean Temp (deg F) Insulation Type Pipe Size (inch) Indoor - Minimum Thickness (inch) Outdoor Minimum Thickness (inch) Factory Applied Jacket Field Applied Jacket 0.27 to 0.30 at 150 Mineral Fiber (Fiberglass) Preformed Pipe, Type I or Type II or Pipe and Tank Insulation for 14” and Larger Pipe Size Less than 1 2.5 4.0 ASJ or ASJ-SSL Indoor: PVC for exposed piping in mechanical rooms when mounted 10 feet or lower above finished floor Outdoor: Aluminum with Moisture Barrier 1 to Less than 1.5 2.5 4.0 1.5 to Less than 4 2.5 4.0 4 to Less than 8 3.0 4.0 8 and Larger 3.0 4.0 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 33 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Steam Pressure Relief: All Pressures/Temperatures Insulation Conductivity Btu-in/hr-deg FSF at Mean Temp (deg F) Insulation Type Pipe Size (inch) Indoor - Minimum Thickness (inch) Outdoor Minimum Thickness (inch) Factory Applied Jacket Field Applied Jacket 0.27 to 0.30 at 150 Applies to piping 24” NPS or smaller, fiberglass insulation with ASJ and pressures up to 200 psig Mineral Fiber (Fiberglass) Preformed Pipe, Type I or Type II or Pipe and Tank Insulation for 14” and Larger Pipe Size Insulation for 14” and Larger Pipe Size Less than 1 0.75 N/A ASJ or ASJ-SSL Indoor: PVC for exposed piping in mechanical rooms when mounted 10 feet or lower above finished floor Outdoor: Aluminum with Moisture Barrier 1 to Less than 1.5 0.75 N/A 1.5 to Less than 4" 0.75 N/A 4 to Less than 8 0.75 N/A 8 and Larger 0.75 N/A Heating Hot Water Systems: 141 deg F to 200 deg F Insulation Conductivity Btu-in/hr-deg FSF at Mean Temp (deg F) Insulation Type Pipe Size (inch) Indoor - Minimum Thickness (inch) Outdoor Minimum Thickness (inch) Factory Applied Jacket Field Applied Jacket 0.25 to 0.29 at 125 Mineral Fiber (Fiberglass) Preformed Pipe, Type I or Pipe and Tank Insulation for 14” and Larger Pipe Size Less than 1 1.5 3.0 ASJ or ASJ-SSL Indoor: PVC for exposed piping in mechanical rooms when mounted 10 feet or lower above finished floor Outdoor: Aluminum with Moisture Barrier 1 to Less than 1.5 1.5 3.0 1.5 to Less than 4 2.0 4.0 4 to Less than 8 2.0 4.0 8 and Larger 2.0 4.0 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 34 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Cooling and Glycol Energy Recovery Systems: 40 deg F to 65 deg F Applies to the Following Systems: Chilled Water, Refrigerant, Brine, Glycol Energy Recovery Systems (winter mode), Cooling Tower Piping When Used for Winter Free Cooling and All Outdoor Heat Traced Piping Insulation Conductivity Btu-in/hr-deg FSF at Mean Temp (deg F) Insulation Type Pipe Size (inch) Indoor - Minimum Thickness (inch) Outdoor Minimum Thickness (inch) Factory Applied Jacket Field Applied Jacket 0.21 to 0.27 at 75 Mineral Fiber (Fiberglass) Preformed Pipe, Type I or Pipe and Tank Insulation for 14” and Larger Pipe Size Less than 1 1 3.0 ASJ or ASJ-SSL Indoor: PVC for exposed piping in mechanical rooms when mounted 10 feet or lower above finished floor Outdoor: Aluminum with Moisture Barrier 1 to Less than 1.5 1 3.0 1.5 to Less than 4 1.5 3.0 4 to Less than 8 1.5 3.0 8 and Larger 1.5 3.0 Cooling Coil Condensate Pipingl Insulation Conductivity Btu-in/hr-deg FSF at Mean Temp (deg F) Insulation Type Pipe Size (inch) Indoor - Minimum Thickness (inch) Outdoor Minimum Thickness (inch) Factory Applied Jacket Field Applied Jacket Mineral Fiber with Conductivity = 0.20 to 0.26 at 50 Flexible Elastomeric with Conductivity = 0.26 at 0 (2013 ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook) Mineral Fiber (Fiberglass) Preformed Pipe, Type I or Flexible Elastomeric Less than 1 0.75 2.0 ASJ or ASJ-SSL for Mineral Fiber N/A for Flexible Elastomeric Indoor Mineral Fiber: PVC for exposed piping in mechanical rooms when mounted 10 feet or lower above finished floor. Indoor Flexible Elastomeric: N/A Outdoor Mineral Fiber: Aluminum with Moisture Barrier Outdoor Flexible Elastomeric: GlassFiber Cloth 1 to Less than 1.5 0.75 2.0 1.5 to Less than 4 0.75 2.0 4 to Less than 8 0.75 2.0 8 and Larger 0.75 2.0 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 35 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.18 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the fieldapplied jacket over the factory-applied jacket. B. Refer to Duct, Plenum, Equipment and Pipe insulation schedules for outdoor field applied jacketing requirements. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. C. For underground direct-buried piping applications, install underground direct-buried jacket over insulation material. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\230700_HVAC INSULATION.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 23 08 00-1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 230800 - COMMISSIONING OF HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section. B. The OPR and BOD documentation are included by reference for information only. C. Division 01 section ‘LEED Requirements’ for additional LEED requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This section includes commissioning process requirements for HVAC&R systems, assemblies, and equipment. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for general commissioning process requirements. 1.3 DESCRIPTION A. Refer to Division 01 Section “General Commissioning Requirements” for the description of commissioning. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Division 01 Section “General Commissioning Requirements” for definitions. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 01 Section “General Commissioning Requirements” for CxA’s role. B. Refer to Division 01 Section “Submittals” for specific requirements. In addition, provide the following: C. Certificates of readiness D. Certificates of completion of installation, prestart, and startup activities. E. O&M manuals F. Test reports Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 23 08 00-2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test Equipment Calibration Requirements: Contractors will comply with test manufacturer’s calibration procedures and intervals. Recalibrate test instruments immediately after instruments have been repaired resulting from being dropped or damaged. Affix calibration tags to test instruments. Furnish calibration records to CxA upon request. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Refer to Division 01 Section “General Commissioning Requirements” for requirements pertaining to coordination during the commissioning process. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT A. All standard testing equipment required to perform startup, initial checkout and functional performance testing shall be provided by the Contractor for the equipment being tested. For example, the mechanical contractor of Division 23 shall ultimately be responsible for all standard testing equipment for the HVAC&R system and controls system in Division 23, except for equipment specific to and used by TAB in their commissioning responsibilities. A sufficient quantity of two-way radios shall be provided by each subcontractor. B. Special equipment, tools and instruments (specific to a piece of equipment and only available from vendor) required for testing shall be included in the base bid price to the Owner and left on site, except for stand-alone data logging equipment that may be used by the CxA. C. Proprietary test equipment and software required by any equipment manufacturer for programming and/or start-up, whether specified or not, shall be provided by the manufacturer of the equipment. Manufacturer shall provide the test equipment, demonstrate its use, and assist in the commissioning process as needed. Proprietary test equipment (and software) shall become the property of the Owner upon completion of the commissioning process. D. Data logging equipment and software required to test equipment will be provided by the CxA, but shall not become the property of the Owner. E. All testing equipment shall be of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and/or measure system performance with the tolerances specified in the Specifications. If not otherwise noted, the following minimum requirements apply: Temperature sensors and digital thermometers shall have a certified calibration within the past year to an accuracy of 0.5°F and a resolution of + or - 0.1°F. Pressure sensors shall have an accuracy of + or - 2.0% of the value range being measured (not full range of meter) and have been calibrated within the last year. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS A. With assistance from the installing contractors, the CxA will prepare Pre-Functional Checklists for all commissioned components, equipment, and systems Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 23 08 00-3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Contractor will provide a copy of O&M literature within 45 days of each submittal acceptance for use during the commissioning process for all commissioned equipment and systems. The CxA will review the O&M literature once for conformance to project requirements. The CxA will receive a copy of the final approved O&M literature once corrections have been mad by the Contractor. C. Demonstration and Training: Contractor will provide demonstration and training as required by the specifications. A complete training plan and schedule must be submitted by the contractor to the CxA four weeks (4) prior to any training. A training agenda for each training session must be submitted to the CxA one (1) week prior the training session 3.2 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Perform commissioning tests at the direction of the CxA. B. Attend construction phase controls coordination meetings. C. Attend testing, adjusting, and balancing review and coordination meetings. D. Participate in HVAC&R systems, assemblies, equipment, and component maintenance orientation and inspection as directed by the CxA. E. Provide information requested by the CxA for final commissioning documentation. F. Include requirements for submittal data, operation and maintenance data, and training in each purchase order or sub-contract written. G. Prepare preliminary schedule for Mechanical system orientations and inspections, operation and maintenance manual submissions, training sessions, pipe and duct system testing, flushing and cleaning, equipment start-up, testing and balancing and task completion for owner. Distribute preliminary schedule to commissioning team members. H. Update schedule as required throughout the construction period. I. Assist the CxA in all verification and functional performance tests. J. Provide measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data, and provide data acquisition equipment to record data for the complete range of testing for the required test period. K. Gather operation and maintenance literature on all equipment, and assemble in binders as required by the specifications. Submit to CxA 45 days after submittal acceptance. L. Coordinate with the CxA to provide 48-hour advance notice so that the witnessing of equipment and system start-up and testing can begin. M. Notify the CxA a minimum of two weeks in advance of the time for start of the testing and balancing work. Attend the initial testing and balancing meeting for review of the official testing and balancing procedures. N. Participate in, and schedule vendors and contractors to participate in the training sessions. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 23 08 00-4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 O. Provide written notification to the CM/GC and CxA Authority that the following work has been completed in accordance with the contract documents, and that the equipment, systems, and sub-system are operating as required. 1. HVAC&R equipment including all fans, air handling units, ductwork, dampers, terminals, and all other equipment furnished under this Division. 2. Fire stopping in the fire rated construction, including fire and smoke damper installation, caulking, gasketing and sealing of smoke barriers. 3. Fire detection and smoke detection devices furnished under other divisions of the specification. P. The equipment supplier shall document the performance of his equipment. Q. Provide a complete set of red-lined drawings to the CxA prior to the start of Functional Performance Testing. R. Test, Adjust and Balance Contractor 1. Attend initial commissioning coordination meeting scheduled by the Commissioning Authority. 2. Submit the site specific testing and balancing plan to the CxA and AE for review and acceptance. 3. Attend the testing and balancing review meeting scheduled by the CxA. Be prepared to discuss the procedures that shall be followed in testing, adjusting, and balancing the HVAC&R system. 4. At the completion of the testing and balancing work, and the submittal of the final testing and balancing report, notify the HVAC&R contractor and the CM/GC. 5. At the completion of testing and balancing work, and the submittal of the final testing and balancing report, notify the HVAC&R Contractor and the CM/GC. 6. Participate in verification of the testing and balancing report, which will consist of repeating measurements contained in the testing and balancing reports. Assist in diagnostic purposes when directed. S. Equipment Suppliers 1. Provide all requested submittal data, including detailed start-up procedures and specific responsibilities of the Owner, to keep warranties in force. 2. Assist in equipment testing per agreements with contractors. 3. Provide information requested by CxA regarding equipment sequence of operation and testing procedures. T. Refer to Division 01 Section “General Commissioning Requirements” for additional contractor responsibilities. 3.3 OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Refer to Division 01 Section “General Commissioning Requirements” for Owner’s Responsibilities. 3.4 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Refer to Division 01 Section “General Commissioning Requirements” for Design Professional’s Responsibilities. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 23 08 00-5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.5 CxA'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Refer to Division 01 Section “General Commissioning Requirements” for CxA’s Responsibilities. 3.6 TESTING PREPARATION A. Certify in writing to the CxA that HVAC&R systems, subsystems, and equipment have been installed, calibrated, and started and are operating according to the Contract Documents. B. Certify in writing to the CxA that HVAC&R instrumentation and control systems have been completed and calibrated, that they are operating according to the Contract Documents, and that pretest set points have been recorded. C. Certify in writing that testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures have been completed and that testing, adjusting, and balancing reports have been submitted, discrepancies corrected, and corrective work approved. D. Place systems, subsystems, and equipment into operating mode to be tested (e.g., normal shutdown, normal auto position, normal manual position, unoccupied cycle, emergency power, and alarm conditions). E. Inspect and verify the position of each device and interlock identified on checklists. F. Check safety cutouts, alarms, and interlocks with smoke control and life-safety systems during each mode of operation. G. Testing Instrumentation: Install measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data as directed by the CxA. 3.7 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING VERIFICATION A. Prior to performance of Testing, Adjusting and Balancing work, provide copies of reports, sample forms, checklists, and certificates to the CxA. B. Notify the CxA at least ten (10) days in advance of testing and balancing Work, and provide access for the CxA to witness testing and balancing Work. C. Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to verify testing and balancing of HVAC&R systems at the direction of the CxA. 1. The CxA will notify testing and balancing subcontractor ten (10) days in advance of the date of field verification. Notice will not include data points to be verified. 2. The testing and balancing subcontractor shall use the same instruments (by model and serial number) that were used when original data were collected. 3. Failure of an item includes, other than sound, a deviation of more than 10 percent. Failure of more than 10 percent of selected items shall result in rejection of final testing, adjusting, and balancing report. For sound pressure readings, a deviation of 3 dB shall result in rejection of final testing. Variations in background noise must be considered. 4. Remedy the deficiency and notify the CxA so verification of failed portions can be performed. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 23 08 00-6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.8 GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to perform commissioning test at the direction of the CxA. B. Scope of HVAC&R testing shall include entire HVAC&R installation, from central equipment for heat generation and refrigeration through distribution systems to each conditioned space. Testing shall include measuring capacities and effectiveness of operational and control functions. C. Test all operating modes, interlocks, control responses, and responses to abnormal or emergency conditions, and verify proper response of building automation system controllers and sensors. D. The CxA along with the HVAC&R contractor, testing and balancing Subcontractor, and HVAC&R Instrumentation and Control Subcontractor shall prepare detailed testing plans, procedures, and checklists for HVAC&R systems, subsystems, and equipment. E. Tests will be performed using design conditions whenever possible. F. Simulated conditions may need to be imposed using an artificial load when it is not practical to test under design conditions. Before simulating conditions, calibrate testing instruments. Provide equipment to simulate loads. Set simulated conditions as directed by the CxA and document simulated conditions and methods of simulation. After tests, return settings to normal operating conditions. G. The CxA may direct that set points be altered when simulating conditions is not practical. H. The CxA may direct that sensor values be altered with a signal generator when design or simulating conditions and altering set points are not practical. I. If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the HVAC&R system, document the deficiency and report it to the Owner. After deficiencies are resolved, reschedule tests. J. If the testing plan indicates specific seasonal testing, complete appropriate initial performance tests and documentation and schedule seasonal tests. 3.9 HVAC&R SYSTEMS, SUBSYSTEMS, AND EQUIPMENT TESTING PROCEDURES A. Equipment Testing and Acceptance Procedures: Testing requirements are specified in individual Division 23 sections. Provide submittals, test data, inspector record, and certifications to the CxA. B. HVAC&R Instrumentation and Control System Testing: Field testing plans and testing requirements are specified in Division 23 Sections "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls." Assist the CxA with preparation of testing plans. C. Pipe system cleaning, flushing, hydrostatic tests, and chemical treatment: Test requirements are specified in Division 23 piping Sections. HVAC&R Contractor shall prepare a pipe system cleaning, flushing, and hydrostatic testing plan. Provide cleaning, flushing, testing, and treating plan and final reports to the CxA. Plan shall include the following: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 23 08 00-7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Sequence of testing and testing procedures for each section of pipe to be tested, identified by pipe zone or sector identification marker. Markers shall be keyed to Drawings for each pipe sector, showing the physical location of each designated pipe test section. Drawings keyed to pipe zones or sectors shall be formatted to allow each section of piping to be physically located and identified when referred to in pipe system cleaning, flushing, hydrostatic testing, and chemical treatment plan. 2. Description of equipment for flushing operations. 3. Minimum flushing water velocity. 4. Tracking checklist for managing and ensuring that all pipe sections have been cleaned, flushed, hydrostatically tested, and chemically treated. D. Refrigeration System Testing: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test performance of chillers, cooling towers, refrigerant compressors and condensers, heat pumps, and other refrigeration systems. The CxA shall determine the sequence of testing and testing procedures for each equipment item and pipe section to be tested. E. HVAC&R Distribution System Testing: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test performance of air, steam, and hydronic distribution systems; special exhaust; and other distribution systems, including HVAC&R terminal equipment and unitary equipment. F. Vibration and Sound Tests: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test performance of vibration isolation and seismic controls. G. The work included in the commissioning process involves a complete and thorough evaluation of the operation and performance of all components, systems and sub-systems. The following equipment and systems shall be evaluated: 1. Air Handling Unit 2. Building Automation System 3. Chilled Water System 4. Ductwork 5. Energy Recovery Unit 6. Exhaust Fan 7. Fan Coil Unit 8. Fire and Smoke Damper 9. Fume Hood 10. Gycol Make-up System 11. Heat Exchanger – Plate & Frame 12. Heat Exchanger – Shell & Tube 13. Hot Water System 14. Lab Exhaust & Pressurization System 15. Laboratory Process Piping 16. Piping 17. Pump 18. Radiant Ceiling Panel 19. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 20. VAV Terminal Unit/Box 21. VFD 22. Water Treatment Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 23 08 00-8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.10 DEFICIENCIES/NON-CONFORMANCE, COST OF RETESTING, FAILURE DUE TO MANUFACTURER DEFECT A. Refer to Division 01 Section “General Commissioning Requirements” for requirements pertaining to deficiencies/non-conformance, cost of retesting, or failure due to manufacturer defect. 3.11 APPROVAL A. Refer to Division 01 Section “General Commissioning Requirements” for approval procedures. 3.12 DEFERRED TESTING A. Refer to Division 01 Section “General Commissioning Requirements” for requirements pertaining to deferred testing. 3.13 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall conform to Contract Documents requirements as stated in Division 01. B. Refer to Division 01 Section “General Commissioning Requirements” for the AE and CxA roles in the Operation and Maintenance Manual contribution, review and approval process. 3.14 TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL A. Refer to Division 01 Section “General Commissioning Requirements” for requirements pertaining to training. END OF SECTION 230800 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 230900 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired controls. B. This Section includes provision of control sequences for HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment indicated on the drawings and other Division 23 specification sections. C. Where other Division 23 Sections include a requirement for manufacturer equipment controllers (e.g. chillers, boilers, packaged units that are specified with packaged controls), this Section shall be responsible for provision of control components and software required to perform sequences of operation outlined that are in addition to the capabilities of the controllers provided with the manufacturer equipment. Coordinate and integrate all equipment controllers. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. DDC: Direct digital control. B. I/O: Input/output. C. LonWorks: A control network technology platform for designing and implementing interoperable control devices and networks. D. MS/TP: Master slave/token passing. E. PC: Personal computer. F. PID: Proportional plus integral plus derivative. G. RTD: Resistance temperature detector. 1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. Comply with the following performance requirements: 1. Graphic Display: Display graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current data within 10 seconds. 2. Graphic Refresh: Update graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current data within 8 seconds. 3. Object Command: Reaction time of less than two seconds between operator command of a binary object and device reaction. 4. Object Scan: Transmit change of state and change of analog values to control units or workstation within six seconds. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 5. Alarm Response Time: Annunciate alarm at workstation within 45 seconds. Multiple workstations must receive alarms within five seconds of each other. 6. Program Execution Frequency: Run capability of applications as often as five seconds, but selected consistent with mechanical process under control. 7. Performance: Programmable controllers shall execute DDC PID control loops, and scan and update process values and outputs at least once per second. 8. Reporting Accuracy and Stability of Control: Report values and maintain measured variables within tolerances as follows: a. Water Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F. b. Water Flow: Plus or minus 5 percent of full scale. c. Water Pressure: Plus or minus 2 percent of full scale. d. Space Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F. e. Ducted Air Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F. f. Outside Air Temperature: Plus or minus 2 deg F. g. Dew Point Temperature: Plus or minus 3 deg F. h. Temperature Differential: Plus or minus 0.25 deg F. i. Relative Humidity: Plus or minus 5 percent. j. Airflow (Pressurized Spaces): Plus or minus 3 percent of full scale. k. Airflow (Measuring Stations): Plus or minus 5 percent of full scale. l. Airflow (Terminal): Plus or minus 5 percent of full scale. m. Air Pressure (Space): Plus or minus 0.01-inch wg. n. Air Pressure (Ducts): Plus or minus 0.1-inch wg. o. Carbon Monoxide: Plus or minus 5 percent of reading. p. Carbon Dioxide: Plus or minus 50 ppm. q. Electrical: Plus or minus 5 percent of reading. 1.5 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION A. Provide control components and software required to perform sequences of operation indicated on the drawings and other Division 23 specification sections. Coordinate and integrate equipment manufacturer controllers. Provide control components in addition to equipment controllers to perform sequences outlined. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device. Indicate dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes for materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of product indicated. 1. DDC System Hardware: Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and model number. Include technical data for operator workstation equipment, interface equipment, control units, transducers/transmitters, sensors, actuators, valves, relays/switches, control panels, and operator interface equipment. 2. Control System Software: Include technical data for operating system software, operator interface, color graphics, and other third-party applications. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. Controlled Systems: Instrumentation list with element name, type of device, manufacturer, model number, and product data. Include written description of sequence of operation including schematic diagram. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and model number. 2. Schematic flow diagrams showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and control devices. 3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 4. Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and labeling. 5. Written description of sequence of operation. 6. Schedule of dampers including size, leakage, and flow characteristics. 7. Schedule of valves including flow characteristics. 8. DDC System Hardware: a. Wiring diagrams for control units with termination numbers. b. Schematic diagrams and floor plans for field sensors and control hardware. c. Schematic diagrams for control, communication, and power wiring, showing trunk data conductors and wiring between operator workstation and control unit locations. 9. Control System Software: List of color graphics indicating monitored systems, data (connected and calculated) point addresses, output schedule, and operator notations. 10. Controlled Systems: a. Schematic diagrams of each controlled system with control points labeled and control elements graphically shown, with wiring. b. Scaled drawings showing mounting, routing, and wiring of elements including bases and special construction. c. Written description of sequence of operation including schematic diagram. d. Points list. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each color required, of each type of thermostat cover with factory-applied color finishes. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Data Communications Protocol Certificates: Certify that each proposed DDC system component complies with ASHRAE 135. B. Data Communications Protocol Certificates: Certify that each proposed DDC system component complies with LonWorks. C. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer. D. Software Upgrade Kit: For Owner to use in modifying software to suit future systems revisions or monitoring and control revisions. E. Field quality-control test reports. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For HVAC instrumentation and control system to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01, Operation and Maintenance Data, include the following: 1. Maintenance instructions and lists of spare parts for each type of control device and compressed-air station. 2. Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered system components and devices. 3. Keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator function. 4. Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration tolerances. 5. Calibration records and list of set points. B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: Include the following: 1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with data files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens. 5. Software license required by and installed for DDC workstations and control systems. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Automatic control system manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of system components required for this Project. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with ASHRAE 135 for DDC system components. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are indicated to be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping of control devices to equipment manufacturer. B. System Software: Update to latest version of software at Project completion. 1.11 COORDINATION A. Coordinate location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with plans and room details before installation. B. Coordinate equipment with Division 28, Intrusion Detection to achieve compatibility with equipment that interfaces with that system and with building master clock. C. Coordinate equipment with Division 28, Access Control to achieve compatibility with equipment that interfaces with that system. D. Coordinate equipment with Division 27, Clock Systems to achieve compatibility with equipment that interfaces with that system. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 E. Coordinate equipment with Division 28, PLC Electronic Detention Monitoring and Control Systems to achieve compatibility with equipment that interfaces with that system. F. Coordinate equipment with Division 26, Addressable-Fixture Lighting Controls and Division 26, Relay-Based Lighting Controls to achieve compatibility with equipment that interfaces with that system. G. Coordinate equipment with Division 28, Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System and Division 28, Zoned (DC Loop) Fire-Alarm System to achieve compatibility with equipment that interfaces with that system. H. Coordinate supply of conditioned electrical branch circuits for control units and operator workstation. I. Coordinate equipment with Division 26, Electrical Power Monitoring and Control to achieve compatibility of communication interfaces. J. Coordinate equipment with Division 26, Panelboards to achieve compatibility with starter coils and annunciation devices. K. Coordinate equipment with Division 26, Motor-Control Centers to achieve compatibility with motor starters and annunciation devices. L. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03, Cast-in-Place Concrete. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 CONTROL SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Alerton Inc. 2. Automated Logic Corporation. B. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, and accessories to control mechanical systems. C. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllers operating in multiuser, multitasking environment on token-passing network and programmed to control mechanical systems. An operator workstation permits interface with the network via dynamic color graphics with each mechanical system, building floor plan, and control device depicted by point-and-click graphics. D. Control system shall include the following: 1. Building intrusion detection system specified in Division 28, Intrusion Detection. 2. Building clock control system specified in Division 27, Clock Systems. 3. Building lighting control system specified in Division 26 Addressable-Fixture Lighting Controls and Division 26, Relay-Based Lighting Controls. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 4. Fire alarm system specified in Division 28, Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System and Division 28, Zoned (DC Loop) Fire-Alarm System. 2.3 DDC EQUIPMENT A. Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with programmable, nonvolatile, randomaccess memory; local operator access and display panel; integral interface equipment; and backup power source. 1. Units monitor or control each I/O point; process information; execute commands from other control units, devices, and operator stations; and download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit. 2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions include the following: a. Global communications. b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O. c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points. d. Software applications, scheduling, and alarm processing. e. Testing and developing control algorithms without disrupting field hardware and controlled environment. 3. Standard Application Programs: a. Electric Control Programs: Demand limiting, duty cycling, automatic time scheduling, start/stop time optimization, night setback/setup, on-off control with differential sequencing, staggered start, antishort cycling, PID control, DDC with fine tuning, and trend logging. b. HVAC Control Programs: Optimal run time, supply-air reset, and enthalpy switchover. c. Chiller Control Programs: Control function of condenser-water reset, chilled-water reset, and equipment sequencing. d. Programming Application Features: Include trend point; alarm processing and messaging; weekly, monthly, and annual scheduling; energy calculations; run-time totalization; and security access. e. Remote communications. f. Maintenance management. g. Units of Measure: Inch-pound and SI (metric). 4. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit. 5. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Control units shall use ASHRAE 135 protocol and communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) datalink/physical layer protocol. 6. LonWorks Compliance: Control units shall use LonTalk protocol and communicate using EIA/CEA 709.1 datalink/physical layer protocol. B. Local Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with electronically programmable, nonvolatile, read-only memory; and backup power source. 1. Units monitor or control each I/O point, process information, and download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions include the following: a. Global communications. b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O. c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points. 3. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit. 4. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Control units shall use ASHRAE 135 protocol and communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) datalink/physical layer protocol. 5. LonWorks Compliance: Control units shall use LonTalk protocol and communicate using EIA/CEA 709.1 datalink/physical layer protocol. C. Power Supplies: Transformers with Class 2 current-limiting type or overcurrent protection; limit connected loads to 80 percent of rated capacity. DC power supply shall match output current and voltage requirements and be full-wave rectifier type with the following: 1. Output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak to peak. 2. Combined 1 percent line and load regulation with 100-mic.sec. response time for 50 percent load changes. 3. Built-in overvoltage and overcurrent protection and be able to withstand 150 percent overload for at least 3 seconds without failure. D. Power Line Filtering: Internal or external transient voltage and surge suppression for workstations or controllers with the following: 1. Minimum dielectric strength of 1000 V. 2. Maximum response time of 10 nanoseconds. 3. Minimum transverse-mode noise attenuation of 65 dB. 4. Minimum common-mode noise attenuation of 150 dB at 40 to 100 Hz. 2.4 UNITARY CONTROLLERS A. Unitized, capable of stand-alone operation with sufficient memory to support its operating system, database, and programming requirements, and with sufficient I/O capacity for the application. 1. Configuration: Local keypad and display; diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor; wiring termination to terminal strip or card connected with ribbon cable; memory with bios; and 72-hour battery backup. 2. Operating System: Manage I/O communication to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and allow central monitoring and alarms.Perform automatic system diagnostics; monitor system and report failures. 3. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Communicate using read (execute and initiate) and write (execute and initiate) property services defined in ASHRAE 135. Reside on network using MS/TP datalink/physical layer protocol and have service communication port for connection to diagnostic terminal unit. 4. LonWorks Compliance: Communicate using EIA/CEA 709.1 datalink/physical layer protocol using LonTalk protocol. 5. Enclosure: Dustproof rated for operation at 32 to 120 deg F. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 6. Enclosure: Waterproof rated for operation at 40 to 150 deg F. 2.5 ALARM PANELS A. Unitized cabinet with suitable brackets for wall or floor mounting. Fabricate of 0.06-inch- thick, furniture-quality steel or extruded-aluminum alloy, totally enclosed, with hinged doors and keyed lock and with manufacturer's standard shop-painted finish. B. Indicating light for each alarm point, single horn, acknowledge switch, and test switch, mounted on hinged cover. 1. Alarm Condition: Indicating light flashes and horn sounds. 2. Acknowledge Switch: Horn is silent and indicating light is steady. 3. Second Alarm: Horn sounds and indicating light is steady. 4. Alarm Condition Cleared: System is reset and indicating light is extinguished. 5. Contacts in alarm panel allow remote monitoring by independent alarm company. 2.6 ANALOG CONTROLLERS A. Step Controllers: 6- or 10-stage type, with heavy-duty switching rated to handle loads and operated by electric motor. B. Electric, Outdoor-Reset Controllers: Remote-bulb or bimetal rod-and-tube type, proportioning action with adjustable throttling range, adjustable set point, scale range minus 10 to plus 70 deg F, and single- or double-pole contacts. C. Electronic Controllers: Wheatstone-bridge-amplifier type, in steel enclosure with provision for remote-resistance readjustment. Identify adjustments on controllers, including proportional band and authority. 1. Single controllers can be integral with control motor if provided with accessible control readjustment potentiometer. D. Fan-Speed Controllers: Solid-state model providing field-adjustable proportional control of motor speed from maximum to minimum of 55 percent and on-off action below minimum fan speed. Controller shall briefly apply full voltage, when motor is started, to rapidly bring motor up to minimum speed. Equip with filtered circuit to eliminate radio interference. E. Receiver Controllers: Single- or multiple-input models with control-point adjustment, direct or reverse acting with mechanical set-point adjustment with locking device, proportional band adjustment, authority adjustment, and proportional control mode. 1. Remote-control-point adjustment shall be plus or minus 20 percent of sensor span, input signal of 3 to 13 psig. 2. Proportional band shall extend from 2 to 20 percent for 5 psig. 3. Authority shall be 20 to 200 percent. 4. Air-supply pressure of 18 psig, input signal of 3 to 15 psig, and output signal of zero to supply pressure. 2.7 ELECTRONIC SENSORS A. Description: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting as required. B. Thermistor Temperature Sensors and Transmitters: 1. Manufacturers: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 a. BEC Controls Corporation. b. Ebtron, Inc. c. Heat-Timer Corporation. d. I.T.M. Instruments Inc. e. MAMAC Systems, Inc. f. RDF Corporation. 2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.36 deg F at calibration point. 3. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable. 4. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches long; use where not affected by temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft.. 5. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 36 inches long, flexible; use where prone to temperature stratification or where ducts are larger than 10 sq. ft.. 6. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass or stainless-steel socket with minimum insertion length of 2-1/2 inches. 7. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight. C. RTDs and Transmitters: 1. Manufacturers: a. BEC Controls Corporation. b. MAMAC Systems, Inc. c. RDF Corporation. 2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.4 deg F. For combination temperature/humidity/CO2, plus or minus 0.5 deg F is acceptable. 3. Resolution: 0.4 deg F 4. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable. 5. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 18 inches long; use where not affected by temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft.. 6. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 24 inches long, rigid; use where prone to temperature stratification or where ducts are larger than 9 sq. ft.; length as required. 7. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass socket with minimum insertion length of 2-1/2 inches. 8. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight. D. Humidity Sensors: Two wire transmitters utilizing bulk polymer sensor change or thin film capacitance change. 1. Manufacturers: a. Veris Industries b. MAMAC Systems, Inc. c. Vaisala. 2. General: Units shall produce linear continuous output of 4-20 mA for %RH Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. Accuracy: plus or minus 3% between 20-90% RH at 77 deg F including hysteresis, linearity, and repeatability. 4. Longterm stability: less than 1% drift per year. 5. Room Sensor Range: 20 to 80 percent relative humidity. Use in combination with temperature and CO2. 6. Duct Sensor: 20 to 80 percent relative humidity range with element guard and mounting plate. 7. Outside-Air Sensor: 20 to 80 percent relative humidity range with mounting enclosure, suitable for operation at outdoor temperatures of minus 40 to plus 170 deg F. 8. Duct and Sensors: With element guard and mounting plate, range of 0 to 100 percent relative humidity. E. Pressure Transmitters/Transducers: 1. General and static pressure sensor Manufacturers: a. Setra b. MAMAC Systems, Inc. c. Veris Industries 2. Filter DP Manufacturers: a. Dwyer 3. Static-Pressure Transmitter: Nondirectional sensor with suitable range for expected input, and temperature compensated. a. Accuracy: 1 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.5 percent. b. Output: 4 to 20 mA. c. Building Static-Pressure Range: 0- to 0.25-inch wg. d. Duct Static-Pressure Range: 0- to 5-inch wg. 4. Laboratory valve and fan piezometer transducer a. Accuracy: +- 0.25% b. Stability +- 0.5% of full scale per year or less c. Auto-zero capability by venting ports to atmosphere d. Acceptable manufacturers: Air Monitor, paragon. 5. Water Pressure Transducers: Stainless-steel diaphragm construction, suitable for service; minimum 150-psig operating pressure; linear output 4 to 20 mA. a. Accuracy: 1 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.5 percent. 6. Water Differential-Pressure Transducers: Stainless-steel diaphragm construction, suitable for service; minimum 150-psig operating pressure and tested to 300-psig; linear output 4 to 20 mA. 7. Differential-Pressure Switch (Air or Water): Snap acting, with pilot-duty rating and with suitable scale range and differential. 8. Pressure Transmitters: Direct acting for gas, liquid, or steam service; range suitable for system; linear output 4 to 20 mA. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 11 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.8 STATUS SENSORS A. Power Monitor: 3-phase type with disconnect/shorting switch assembly, listed voltage and current transformers, with pulse kilowatt hour output and 4- to 20-mA kW output, with maximum 2 percent error at 1.0 power factor and 2.5 percent error at 0.5 power factor. B. Current Switches: Self-powered, solid-state with adjustable trip current, selected to match current and system output requirements. Sensor can be omitted if VFD or EC motor interface provides status information to BAS. C. Water-Flow Switches: Bellows-actuated mercury or snap-acting type with pilot-duty rating, stainless-steel or bronze paddle, with appropriate range and differential adjustment, in NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure. 1. Manufacturers: a. BEC Controls Corporation. b. I.T.M. Instruments Inc. D. Condensate sensors 1. Install on chilled beams 2. Acceptable manufacturers and model numbers: a. Siemens QXA 2000 b. Sauter EGH 102 c. Honeywell H7018A1003 2.9 GAS DETECTION EQUIPMENT A. Manufacturers: 1. B. W. Technologies. 2. CEA Instruments, Inc. 3. Ebtron, Inc. 4. Gems Sensors Inc. 5. Greystone Energy Systems Inc. 6. Honeywell International Inc.; Home & Building Control. 7. INTEC Controls, Inc. 8. I.T.M. Instruments Inc. 9. MSA Canada Inc. 10. QEL/Quatrosense Environmental Limited. 11. Sauter Controls Corporation. 12. Sensidyne, Inc. 13. TSI Incorporated. 14. Vaisala. 15. Vulcain Inc. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 12 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Carbon Monoxide Detectors: Single or multichannel, dual-level detectors using solid-state plugin sensors with a 3-year minimum life; suitable over a temperature range of 32 to 104 deg F; with 2 factory-calibrated alarm levels at 50 and 100 ppm. C. Carbon Dioxide Sensor and Transmitter: Single detectors using solid-state infrared sensors; suitable over a temperature range of 23 to 130 deg F and calibrated for 0 to 2 percent, with continuous or averaged reading, 4- to 20-mA output;, for wall mounting. D. Oxygen Sensor and Transmitter: Single detectors using solid-state zircon cell sensing; suitable over a temperature range of minus 32 to plus 1100 deg F and calibrated for 0 to 5 percent, with continuous or averaged reading, 4- to 20-mA output; for wall mounting. E. Occupancy Sensor: Passive infrared, with time delay, daylight sensor lockout, sensitivity control, and 180-degree field of view with vertical sensing adjustment; for flush mounting. 2.10 THERMOSTATS A. Manufacturers: 1. Erie Controls. 2. Danfoss Inc.; Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Div. 3. Heat-Timer Corporation. 4. Sauter Controls Corporation. 5. tekmar Control Systems, Inc. 6. Theben AG - Lumilite Control Technology, Inc. B. Electric, solid-state, microcomputer-based room thermostat with remote sensor. 1. Automatic switching from heating to cooling. 2. Preferential rate control to minimize overshoot and deviation from set point. 3. Set up for four separate temperatures per day. 4. Instant override of set point for continuous or timed period from 1 hour to 31 days. 5. Short-cycle protection. 6. Selection features include degree F or degree C display, 12- or 24-hour clock, keyboard disable, remote sensor, and fan on-auto. 7. Battery replacement without program loss. 8. Thermostat display features include the following: a. Time of day. b. Actual room temperature. c. Programmed temperature. d. Programmed time. e. Duration of timed override. f. Day of week. g. System mode indications include "heating," "off," "fan auto," and "fan on." 2.11 ACTUATORS A. Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two-position action. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 13 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Comply with requirements in Division 23, Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment. 2. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer. 3. Nonspring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2: Size for running torque of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf. 4. Spring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2: Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf. 5. Nonspring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running torque of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf. 6. Spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf. B. Electronic Actuators: Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke cycles at rated torque. 1. Manufacturers: a. Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc. 2. Valves: Size for torque required for valve close off at maximum pump differential pressure. 3. Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows: a. Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper. b. Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper. c. Parallel-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch-lb/sq. ft of damper. d. Opposed-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper. e. Dampers with 2- to 3-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 to 2500 fpm: Increase running torque by 1.5. f. Dampers with 3- to 4-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 2500 to 3000 fpm: Increase running torque by 2.0. 4. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle. 5. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry. 6. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism. Provide external, manual gear release on nonspring-return actuators. 7. Power Requirements (Two-Position Spring Return): 24-V ac. 8. Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24-V ac or 8 W at 24-V dc. 9. Proportional Signal: 2- to 10-V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10-V dc position feedback signal. 10. Temperature Rating: Minus 22 to plus 122 deg F. 11. Temperature Rating (Smoke Dampers): Minus 22 to plus 250 deg F. 12. Run Time: 30 seconds. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 14 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.12 CONTROL VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Belimo 2. Valve solutions B. Control Valves: Factory fabricated, of type, body material, and pressure class based on maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping system, unless otherwise indicated. C. Hydronic system globe valves shall have the following characteristics: 1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Class 125 flanged carbon steel body, 316 stainless trim, rising stem, renewable composition disc, and screwed ends with backseating capacity repackable under pressure. 2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Class 125 flanged carbon steel body, 316 stainless trim, rising stem, plug-type disc, flanged ends, and renewable seat and disc. 3. Internal Construction: Replaceable plugs and stainless-steel or brass seats. a. Single-Seated Valves: Cage trim provides seating and guiding surfaces for plug on top and bottom. b. Double-Seated Valves: Balanced plug; cage trim provides seating and guiding surfaces for plugs on top and bottom. 4. Sizing: 5-psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate or the following: a. Two Position: Line size. b. Two-Way Modulating: Either the value specified above or twice the load pressure drop, whichever is more. c. Three-Way Modulating: Twice the load pressure drop, but not more than value specified above. 5. Flow Characteristics: Two-way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics; 1/4 turn 6. Close-Off (Differential) Pressure Rating: Combination of actuator and trim shall provide minimum close-off pressure rating of 150 percent of total system (pump) head for twoway valves and 100 percent of pressure differential across valve or 100 percent of total system (pump) head. Minimum close-off pressure shall be 40 psi. 7. Type: Two-way v-port ball valve with characterizing disk, 1/4 turn 8. Packing: EPDM O-rings, lubricated 9. Ball & Stem: stainless steel 10. Seat: Fiberglass reinforced teflon 11. Leakage class: ANSI Class IV minimum 12. Actuator: Electric, one motor only; valves 4 inches and larger shall have a single operator D. Steam system high performance segmented V-ball valves shall have the following characteristics: 1. Manufacturers: a. Fisher b. Neles Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 15 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 c. Valve solutions inc. 2. Leakage class: ANSI Class IV 3. Flow characteristic: equal percentage 4. Range: 300:1 turndown 5. Sizing: For pressure drop based on the following services: a. Two Position: 20 percent of inlet pressure. b. Modulating 15-psig Steam: 80 percent of inlet steam pressure. 6. Close-Off (Differential) Pressure Rating: Combination of actuator and trim shall provide minimum close-off pressure rating of 150 percent of operating (inlet) pressure. E. Terminal Unit Control Valves: Bronze body, bronze trim, two or three ports as indicated, replaceable plugs and seats, and union and threaded ends. 1. Rating: Class 125 for service at 125 psig and 250 deg F operating conditions. 2. Sizing: 3-psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate, to close against pump shutoff head. 3. Flow Characteristics: Two-way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics; threeway valves shall have linear characteristics. 2.13 DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Air Balance Inc. 2. Don Park Inc.; Autodamp Div. 3. TAMCO (T. A. Morrison & Co. Inc.). 4. United Enertech Corp. 5. Vent Products Company, Inc. B. Dampers: AMCA-rated, opposed-blade design; 0.108-inch- minimum thick, galvanized-steel or 0.125-inch- minimum thick, extruded-aluminum frames with holes for duct mounting; damper blades shall not be less than 0.064-inch- thick galvanized steel with maximum blade width of 8 inches and length of 48 inches. 1. Secure blades to 1/2-inch- diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated hardware, with nylon blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-ste el blade bearings, and thrust bearings at each end of every blade. 2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. 3. Edge Seals, Standard Pressure Applications: Closed-cell neoprene. 4. Edge Seals, Low-Leakage Applications: Use inflatable blade edging or replaceable rubber blade seals and spring-loaded stainless-steel side seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm per sq. ft. of damper area, at differential pressure of 4-inch wg when damper is held by torque of 50 in. x lbf; when tested according to AMCA 500D. 2.14 CONTROL CABLE A. Electronic and fiber-optic cables for control wiring are specified in Division 27, Communications Horizontal Cabling. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 16 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that conditioned power supply is available to control units and operator workstation. B. Verify that pneumatic piping and duct-, pipe-, and equipment-mounted devices are installed before proceeding with installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install software in control units and operator workstation(s). Implement all features of programs to specified requirements and as appropriate to sequence of operation. B. Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation specified. C. Verify location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation. Install devices 48 inches above the floor. 1. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern. D. Install guards on thermostats in the following locations: 1. Entrances. 2. Public areas. 3. Where indicated. E. Install automatic dampers according to Division 23 for Air Duct Accessories. F. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor temperatures. G. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 23, Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment. H. Install hydronic instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 23, Hydronic Piping. I. Install steam and condensate instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 23, Steam and Condensate Heating Piping. J. Install refrigerant instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 23, Refrigerant Piping. K. Install duct volume-control dampers according to Division 23, Metal Ducts and Division 23, Nonmetal Ducts. L. Install electronic and fiber-optic cables according to Division 27, Communications Horizontal Cabling. 3.3 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION A. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Division 26, Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems. B. Install building wire and cable according to Division 26, Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. C. Install signal and communication cable according to Division 27, Communications Horizontal Cabling. 1. Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are exposed. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 17 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Install exposed cable in raceway. 3. Install concealed cable in raceway. 4. Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables where several cables follow a common path. 5. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against abrasion. Tie and support conductors. 6. Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and service of control system, except local individual room control cables. 7. Install wire and cable with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment. D. Connect manual-reset limit controls independent of manual-control switch positions. Automatic duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers. E. Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is in hand position. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections. Report results in writing. B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. 3. Test calibration of electronic controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating operation with compatible signal generator. 4. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating control set points are as required. 5. Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with sequence of operation. Adjust PID actions. 6. Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation. 7. Test software and hardware interlocks. C. DDC Verification: 1. Verify that instruments are installed before calibration, testing, and loop or leak checks. 2. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility. 3. Check instrument installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion depth, and other applicable considerations. 4. Check instrument tubing for proper fittings, slope, material, and support. 5. Check installation of air supply for each instrument. 6. Check flow instruments. Inspect tag number and line and bore size, and verify that inlet side is identified and that meters are installed correctly. 7. Check pressure instruments, piping slope, installation of valve manifold, and selfcontained pressure regulators. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 18 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 8. Check temperature instruments and material and length of sensing elements. 9. Check control valves. Verify that they are in correct direction. 10. Check air-operated dampers. Verify that pressure gages are provided and that proper blade alignment, either parallel or opposed, has been provided. 11. Check DDC system as follows: a. Verify that DDC controller power supply is from emergency power supply, if applicable. b. Verify that wires at control panels are tagged with their service designation and approved tagging system. c. Verify that spare I/O capacity has been provided. d. Verify that DDC controllers are protected from power supply surges. D. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing procedures. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Calibrating and Adjusting: 1. Calibrate instruments. 2. Make three-point calibration test for both linearity and accuracy for each analog instrument. 3. Calibrate equipment and procedures using manufacturer's written recommendations and instruction manuals. Use test equipment with accuracy at least double that of instrument being calibrated. 4. Control System Inputs and Outputs: a. Check analog inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span. b. Check analog outputs using milliampere meter at 0, 50, and 100 percent output. c. Check digital inputs using jumper wire. d. Check digital outputs using ohmmeter to test for contact making or breaking. e. Check resistance temperature inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span using a precision-resistant source. 5. Flow: a. Set differential pressure flow transmitters for 0 and 100 percent values with 3-point calibration accomplished at 50, 90, and 100 percent of span. b. Manually operate flow switches to verify that they make or break contact. 6. Pressure: a. Calibrate pressure transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span. b. Calibrate pressure switches to make or break contacts, with adjustable differential set at minimum. 7. Temperature: a. Calibrate resistance temperature transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span using a precision-resistance source. b. Calibrate temperature switches to make or break contacts. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 19 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 8. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers without positioners, following the manufacturer's recommended procedure, so that valve or damper is 100 percent open and closed. 9. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers with positioners, following manufacturer's recommended procedure, so that valve and damper is 0, 50, and 100 percent closed. 10. Provide diagnostic and test instruments for calibration and adjustment of system. 11. Provide written description of procedures and equipment for calibrating each type of instrument. Submit procedures review and approval before initiating startup procedures. B. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points. C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to three visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC instrumentation and controls. Refer to Division 01, Demonstration and Training. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\230900_INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS FOR HVAC.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 232113 - HYDRONIC PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes pipe and fitting materials and joining methods for the following: 1. Hot-water heating piping. 2. Chilled-water piping. 3. Makeup-water piping. 4. Condensate-drain piping. 5. Blowdown-drain piping. 6. Air-vent piping. 7. Safety-valve-inlet and -outlet piping. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the following: 1. Pressure-seal fittings. 2. Chemical treatment. B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For solvent cements and adhesive primers, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. 2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4.1: For solvent cements and adhesive primers, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's (formerly, the California Health Services') "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." C. Delegated-Design Submittal: 1. Design calculations and detailed fabrication and assembly of pipe anchors and alignment guides, hangers and supports for multiple pipes, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to the building structure. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Locations of pipe anchors and alignment guides and expansion joints and loops. 3. Locations of and details for penetrations, including sleeves and sleeve seals for exterior walls, floors, basement, and foundation walls. 4. Locations of and details for penetration and firestopping for fire- and smoke-rated wall and floor and ceiling assemblies. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Piping layout, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Suspended ceiling components. 2. Other building services. 3. Structural members. B. Qualification Data: For Installer. C. Welding certificates. D. Field quality-control reports. E. Water Analysis: Submit a copy of the water analysis to illustrate water quality available at Project site. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Installers of Pressure-Sealed Joints: Installers shall be certified by pressure-seal joint manufacturer as having been trained and qualified to join piping with pressure-seal pipe couplings and fittings. 2. Fiberglass Pipe and Fitting Installers: Installers of RTRF and RTRP shall be certified by manufacturer of pipes and fittings as having been trained and qualified to join fiberglass piping with manufacturer-recommended adhesive. B. Steel Support Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." C. Pipe Welding: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. 1. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure and temperature unless otherwise indicated: 1. Hot-Water Heating Piping: 150 PSI at 200 deg F. 2. Chilled-Water Piping: 150 PSI at 200 deg F. 3. Makeup-Water Piping: 80 psig at 150 deg F. 4. Condensate-Drain Piping: 150 deg F. 5. Air-Vent Piping: 200 deg F. 6. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping: Equal to the pressure of the piping system to which it is attached. 2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L ASTM B 88, Type M. B. Copper or Bronze Pressure-Seal Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Viega. 2. Housing: Copper. 3. O-Rings and Pipe Stops: EPDM. 4. Tools: Manufacturer's special tools. 5. Minimum 200-psig working-pressure rating at 250 deg F. C. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22. 2.3 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; welded and seamless, Grade B, and wall thickness as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article. B. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Class 125 as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article. C. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASME B16.9, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe. D. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of same materials and wall thicknesses as pipe in which they are installed. 2.4 JOINING MATERIALS A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless otherwise indicated. a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges. B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for joining copper with copper; or BAg-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel. E. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. F. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer. 1. Fiberglass adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less. 2. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's (formerly, the California Health Services') "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." G. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working temperatures and pressures. 2.5 BYPASS CHEMICAL FEEDER A. Description: Welded steel construction; 125-psig working pressure; 5-gal. capacity; with fill funnel and inlet, outlet, and drain valves. 1. Chemicals: Specially formulated, based on analysis of makeup water, to prevent accumulation of scale and corrosion in piping and connected equipment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and smaller, shall be the following: 1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered or pressureseal joints. B. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 3 and larger, shall be the following: 1. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-steel flanges and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints. C. Chilled-water and glycol energy recovery piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and smaller, shall be the following: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints. D. Chilled-water piping and glycol energy recovery, aboveground, NPS 3 and larger, shall be the following: 1. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-steel flanges and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints. 2. Use schedule 80 galvanized steel nipple between steel piping and first isolation valve on all connections to steel pipe below 3 inches. E. Makeup-water piping installed aboveground shall be the following: 1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints. F. Condensate-Drain Piping: Type M, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints. G. Blowdown-Drain Piping: Same materials and joining methods as for piping specified for the service in which blowdown drain is installed. H. Air-Vent Piping: 1. Inlet: Same as service where installed with metal-to-plastic transition fittings for plastic piping systems according to piping manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Outlet: Type K, annealed-temper copper tubing with soldered or flared joints. I. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping for Hot-Water Piping: Same materials and joining methods as for piping specified for the service in which safety valve is installed with metal-to-plastic transition fittings for plastic piping systems according to piping manufacturer's written instructions. 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATIONS A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. E. Install piping to permit valve servicing. F. Install piping at indicated slopes. G. Install piping free of sags and bends. H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 I. Install piping to allow application of insulation. J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves. L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage. M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow. N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up. O. Install branch connections to mains usingtee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe. P. Install valves according to Section 230523 "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping." Q. Install unions in piping, NPS 2-1/2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. R. Install flanges in piping, NPS 3 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere as indicated. 3.3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Comply with requirements in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for hanger, support, and anchor devices. Comply with the following requirements for maximum spacing of supports. B. Comply with requirements in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC" for seismic restraints. C. Install the following pipe attachments: 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long. 2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or longer. 3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer, supported on a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. 5. Provide copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper pipe. D. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet. 3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet. 5. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet. 6. NPS 3 and Larger: Maximum span, 12 feet. E. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/4Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 7. NPS 3 and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. F. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot intervals between floors. 3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. C. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using leadfree solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32. D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. E. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article. F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. G. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tool and procedure. Leave insertion marks on pipe after assembly. 3.5 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment connections. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment. C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are installed, only one bypass is required. D. Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections. Comply with requirements in Section 230519 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping." 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows: 1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. 2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing. 3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace strainer screens. 4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment. 5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test. B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping: 1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used. 2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid. 3. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water. 4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times the "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping." 5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. 6. Prepare written report of testing. C. Perform the following before operating the system: 1. Open manual valves fully. 2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation. 3. Set makeup pressure-reducing valves for required system pressure. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 4. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type). 5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. 6. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chillers, cooling towers, to specified values. 7. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\232113 FL - HYDRONIC PIPING.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES 232116 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 232116 - HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this nipplDivision, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes special-duty valves and specialties to service HVAC piping systems as follows: 1. Hydronic Specialty Valves. 2. Air Control Devices. 3. Hydronic Piping Specialties 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the following: 1. Hydronic specialty valves: Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for calibrated-orifice balancing valves. 2. Air-control devices. 3. Hydronic specialties. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-control devices, hydronic specialties, and special-duty valves to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Differential Pressure Meter: For each type of balancing valve include flow meter, probes, hoses, flow charts, and carrying case. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Pipe Welding: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. 1. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES 232116 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the minimum working pressure and temperature indicated in hydronic piping section. 2.2 HYDRONIC SPECIALTY VALVES A. Automatic Temperature-Control Valves, Actuators, and Sensors: Comply with requirements specified in Division 23. B. Brass or Bronze, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump. c. Flow Design Inc. d. Gerand Engineering Co. e. Griswold Controls. f. Macon g. NuTech Hydronic Specialty Products h. Nexus Valve, Inc. i. Taco. j. Tour & Andersson; available through Victaulic Company. 2. Body: Brass or bronze, ball or plug type with calibrated orifice or venturi. 3. Ball: Brass or stainless steel. 4. Plug: Resin. 5. Seat: PTFE. 6. End Connections: Threaded or socket. 7. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter. 8. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position. 9. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig. 10. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. C. Cast-Iron or Steel, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES 232116 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump. c. Flow Design Inc. d. Gerand Engineering Co. e. Griswold Controls. f. Macon g. NuTech Hydronic Specialty Products h. Nexus Valve, Inc. i. Taco. j. Tour & Andersson. 2. Body: Cast-iron or steel body, ball, plug, or globe pattern with calibrated orifice or venturi. 3. Ball: Brass or stainless steel. 4. Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings. 5. Disc: Manufacturer standard construction. 6. Seat: PTFE. 7. End Connections: Flanged. 8. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter. 9. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position. 10. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig. 11. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. 2.3 AIR-CONTROL DEVICES A. Manual Air Vents: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. AMTROL, Inc. b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. c. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump. d. Nexus Valve, Inc. e. NuTech Hydronic Specialty Products f. Taco, Inc. 2. Body: Bronze. 3. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. 4. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew. 5. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2. 6. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES 232116 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 7. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 8. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F. B. Automatic Air Vents: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. AMTROL, Inc. b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. c. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump. d. Nexus Valve, Inc. e. Taco, Inc. 2. Body: Bronze or cast iron. 3. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. 4. Operator: Noncorrosive metal float. 5. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2. 6. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/4. 7. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 8. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F. C. Bladder-Type Expansion Tanks: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. AMTROL, Inc. b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. c. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump. d. Taco, Inc. 2. Tank: Welded steel, rated for 125-psig working pressure and 240 deg F maximum operating temperature. Factory test after taps are fabricated and supports installed and are labeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. 3. Bladder: Securely sealed into tank to separate air charge from system water to maintain required expansion capacity. 4. Air-Charge Fittings: Schrader valve, stainless steel with EPDM seats. D. Tangential-Type Air Separators: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES 232116 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 a. AMTROL, Inc. b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. c. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump. d. Taco, Inc. 2. Tank: Welded steel; ASME constructed and labeled for 125-psig minimum working pressure and 375 deg F maximum operating temperature. 3. Air Collector Tube: Perforated stainless steel, constructed to direct released air into expansion tank. 4. Tangential Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged connections for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 5. Blowdown Connection: Threaded. 6. Size: Match system flow capacity. 2.4 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Stainless-Steel Bellow, Flexible Connectors: 1. Body: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective jacket. 2. End Connections: Threaded or flanged to match equipment connected. 3. Performance: Capable of 3/4-inch misalignment. 4. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. B. Spherical, Rubber, Flexible Connectors: 1. Body: Fiber-reinforced rubber body. 2. End Connections: Steel flanges drilled to align with Classes 150 and 300 steel flanges. 3. Performance: Capable of misalignment. 4. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. C. Expansion Fittings: Comply with requirements in Division 23. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Install shut off-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains and at supply connection to each piece of equipment. B. Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves at each branch connection to return main. C. Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves in the return pipe of each heating or cooling terminal. D. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction. E. Install pressure-reducing valves at makeup-water connection to regulate system fill pressure. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES 232116 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.2 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting. B. Install in-line air separators in pump suction. Install drain valve on air separators NPS 2 and larger. C. Install tangential air separator in pump suction. Install blow down piping with gate or full-port ball valve; extend full size to nearest floor drain. D. Install expansion tanks. Install tank fitting in tank bottom and charge tank. Use manual vent for initial fill to establish proper water level in tank. 1. Install tank fittings that are shipped loose. 2. Support tank from floor or structure above with sufficient strength to carry weight of tank, piping connections, fittings, plus tank full of water. Do not overload building components and structural members. E. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and ensure that tank is properly charged with air to suit system Project requirements. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\232116_HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HYDRONIC PUMPS 232123 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 232123 - HYDRONIC PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Close-coupled, in-line centrifugal pumps. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Buna-N: Nitrile rubber. B. EPT: Ethylene propylene terpolymer. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of pump. Include certified performance curves and rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, final impeller dimensions, and accessories for each type of product indicated. Indicate pump's operating point on curves. B. Shop Drawings: For each pump. 1. Show pump layout and connections. 2. Include setting drawings with templates for installing foundation and anchor bolts and other anchorages. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Mechanical Seals: One mechanical seal(s) for each pump. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CLOSE-COUPLED, IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HYDRONIC PUMPS 232123 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Armstrong Pumps Inc. 2. Aurora Pump; Division of Pentair Pump Group. 3. Crane Pumps & Systems. 4. Flowserve Corporation. 5. Grundfos Pumps Corporation. 6. ITT Corporation; Bell & Gossett. 7. Mepco, LLC. 8. PACO Pumps. 9. Patterson Pump Co.; a subsidiary of the Gorman-Rupp Co. 10. Peerless Pump Company. 11. TACO Incorporated. 12. Thrush Company Inc. B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, close-coupled, inline pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for installation with pump and motor shafts mounted horizontally or vertically. C. Pump Construction: 1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet, replaceable bronze wear rings, and threaded companion-flange or union-end connections. 2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft, and secured with a locking cap screw. For constant-speed pumps, trim impeller to match specified performance. 3. Pump Shaft: Stainless steel. 4. Seal: Mechanical seal consisting of carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a stainless-steel spring, and Buna-N or EPT bellows and gasket. Include water slinger on shaft between motor and seal. 5. Pump Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball bearings. D. Motor: Single speed and rigidly mounted to pump casing. 1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23, Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment. a. Enclosure: Open, dripproof. b. Motor Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball bearings. c. Efficiency: Premium efficient. 2.2 PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS A. Suction Diffuser: 1. Angle pattern. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HYDRONIC PUMPS 232123 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. 175-psig pressure rating, cast-iron body and end cap, pump-inlet fitting. 3. Bronze startup and bronze or stainless-steel permanent strainers. 4. Bronze or stainless-steel straightening vanes. 5. Drain plug. 6. Factory-fabricated support. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine equipment foundations and anchor-bolt locations for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before pump installation. C. Examine foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions where pumps are to be installed. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION A. Comply with HI 1.4 and HI 2.4. B. Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance including removing motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories. C. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and weight of pumps is not supported by piping. D. Equipment Mounting: Install base-mounted pumps using restrained spring isolators. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Division 23, Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment. 1. Minimum Deflection: 1 inch <Insert dimension>. E. Equipment Mounting: Install in-line pumps with continuous-thread hanger rods and elastomeric hangers of size required to support weight of in-line pumps. 1. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 23, Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment. 2. Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Division 23, Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment. 3.3 ALIGNMENT A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform alignment service. B. Comply with requirements in Hydronics Institute standards for alignment of pump and motor shaft. Add shims to the motor feet and bolt motor to base frame. Do not use grout between motor feet and base frame. C. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions. D. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely fill baseplate with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are in place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HYDRONIC PUMPS 232123 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 23, Steam and Condensate Heating Piping. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Where installing piping adjacent to pump, allow space for service and maintenance. C. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps. D. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles. E. Install Y-type strainer and shutoff valve on suction side of pumps. F. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base-mounted pumps between pump casing and valves. G. Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge or at integral pressure-gage tapping, or install single gage with multiple-input selector valve. H. Install check valve and gate or ball valve on each condensate pump unit discharge. I. Ground equipment according to Division 26, Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. J. Connect wiring according to Division 26, Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. 3.5 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Check piping connections for tightness. 3. Clean strainers on suction piping. 4. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting: a. Verify bearing lubrication. b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected. c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction. 5. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for operation. 6. Start motor. 7. Open discharge valve slowly. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain hydronic pumps. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\232123 FL - HYDRONIC PUMPS.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING 232213 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 232213 - STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following for LP steam and condensate piping: 1. Pipe and fittings. 2. Strainers. 3. Safety valves. 4. Steam traps. 5. Thermostatic air vents and vacuum breakers. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. LP Systems: Low-pressure piping operating at 15 psig or less as required by ASME B31.9. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressures and temperatures: 1. LP Steam Piping: 125 PSI. 2. Condensate Piping: 125 PSI at 250 deg F. 3. Air-Vent and Vacuum-Breaker Piping: Equal to pressure of the piping system to which it is attached. 4. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping: Equal to pressure of the piping system to which it is attached. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the following: 1. Pressure-reducing and safety valve. 2. Steam trap. 3. Air vent and vacuum breaker. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING 232213 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Welding certificates. C. Field quality-control test reports. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For valves, safety valves, pressure-reducing valves, steam traps, air vents, vacuum breakers, and meters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Fiberglass Pipe and Fitting Installers: Installers of RTRF and RTRP shall be certified by the manufacturer of pipes and fittings as having been trained and qualified to join fiberglass piping with manufacturer-recommended adhesive. B. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." C. Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to the following: 1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current. D. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.1, "Power Piping" and ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping" for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp flash tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, plain ends, Type, Grade, and Schedule as indicated in Part 3 piping applications articles. B. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125, 150, and 300 as indicated in Part 3 piping applications articles. C. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASME B16.9, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe. D. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel of same Type, Grade, and Schedule as pipe in which installed. 2.2 JOINING MATERIALS A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges. B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING 232213 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. D. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. E. Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C, of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and for chemical analysis of pipe being welded. 2.3 VALVES A. Gate, Globe, Check, Ball, and Butterfly Valves: Comply with requirements specified in Division 23, General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping. 2.4 STRAINERS A. Y-Pattern Strainers: 1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B cast iron, with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for strainers NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for strainers NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3. Strainer Screen: Stainless-steel, 20 mesh strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50 percent free area. 4. Tapped blowoff plug. 5. CWP Rating: 250-psig working steam pressure. B. Basket Strainers: 1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B cast iron, with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for strainers NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for strainers NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3. Strainer Screen: Stainless-steel, 20 mesh strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50 percent free area. 4. CWP Rating: 250-psig working steam pressure. 2.5 SAFETY VALVES A. Bronze or Brass Safety Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Armstrong International, Inc. b. Kunkle Valve; a Tyco International Ltd. Company. c. Spirax Sarco, Inc. d. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 3. Disc Material: Forged copper alloy. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING 232213 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 4. End Connections: Threaded inlet and outlet. 5. Spring: Fully enclosed steel spring with adjustable pressure range and positive shutoff, factory set and sealed. 6. Pressure Class: 250. 7. Drip-Pan Elbow: Cast iron and having threaded inlet and outlet with threads complying with ASME B1.20.1. 8. Size and Capacity: As required for equipment according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 2.6 STEAM TRAPS A. Float and Thermostatic Traps: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Armstrong International, Inc. b. Barnes & Jones, Inc. c. Dunham-Bush, Inc. d. Hoffman Specialty; Division of ITT Industries. e. Spirax Sarco, Inc. f. Sterling. 2. Body and Bolted Cap: ASTM A 126, cast iron. 3. End Connections: Threaded. 4. Float Mechanism: Replaceable, stainless steel. 5. Head and Seat: Hardened stainless steel. 6. Trap Type: Balanced pressure. 7. Thermostatic Bellows: Stainless steel or monel. 8. Thermostatic air vent capable of withstanding 45 deg F of superheat and resisting water hammer without sustaining damage. 9. Vacuum Breaker: Thermostatic with phosphor bronze bellows, and stainless steel cage, valve, and seat. 10. Maximum Operating Pressure: 125 psig. 2.7 THERMOSTATIC AIR VENTS AND VACUUM BREAKERS A. Thermostatic Air Vents: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Armstrong International, Inc. b. Barnes & Jones, Inc. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING 232213 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 c. Dunham-Bush, Inc. d. Hoffman Specialty; Division of ITT Industries. e. Spirax Sarco, Inc. f. Sterling. 2. Body: Cast iron, bronze or stainless steel. 3. End Connections: Threaded. 4. Float, Valve, and Seat: Stainless steel. 5. Thermostatic Element: Phosphor bronze bellows in a stainless-steel cage. 6. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 7. Maximum Temperature Rating: 350 deg F. B. Vacuum Breakers: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Armstrong International, Inc. b. Dunham-Bush, Inc. c. Hoffman Specialty; Division of ITT Industries. d. Johnson Corporation (The). e. Spirax Sarco, Inc. 2. Body: Cast iron, bronze, or stainless steel. 3. End Connections: Threaded. 4. Sealing Ball, Retainer, Spring, and Screen: Stainless steel. 5. O-ring Seal: EPR. 6. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 7. Maximum Temperature Rating: 350 deg F. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LP STEAM PIPING APPLICATIONS A. LP Steam Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Schedule 40, Type S, Grade B, steel pipe; Class 125 cast-iron fittings; and threaded joints. B. LP Steam Piping, NPS 2-1/2 through NPS 12: Schedule 40, Type E, Grade B, steel pipe; Class 150 wrought-steel fittings, flanges, and flange fittings; and welded and flanged joints. C. Condensate piping above grade, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following: 1. Schedule 80, Type S, Grade B, steel pipe; Class 125 cast-iron fittings; and threaded joints. D. Condensate piping above grade, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be the following: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING 232213 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Schedule 80, Type E, Grade B, steel pipe; Class 150 wrought-steel fittings, flanges, and flange fittings; and welded and flanged joints. 3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Install shutoff duty valves at branch connections to steam supply mains, at steam supply connections to equipment, and at the outlet of steam traps. B. Install safety valves on pressure-reducing stations and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Install safety-valve discharge piping, without valves, to nearest floor drain or as indicated on Drawings. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements. 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Use indicated piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. B. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. E. Install piping to permit valve servicing. F. Install piping free of sags and bends. G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. H. Install piping to allow application of insulation. I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. J. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves. K. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 full port-ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage. L. Install steam supply piping at a minimum uniform grade of 0.2 percent downward in direction of steam flow. M. Install condensate return piping at a minimum uniform grade of 0.4 percent downward in direction of condensate flow. N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side down. O. Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to top of main pipe. P. Install valves according to Division 23, General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping. Q. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING 232213 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 R. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere as indicated. S. Install strainers on supply side of control valves, pressure-reducing valves, traps, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and full port ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2. T. Install expansion loops, expansion joints, anchors, and pipe alignment guides as specified in Division 23, Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping. U. Identify piping as specified in Division 23, Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment. V. Install drip legs at low points and natural drainage points such as ends of mains, bottoms of risers, and ahead of pressure regulators, and control valves. 1. On straight runs with no natural drainage points, install drip legs at intervals not exceeding 300 feet. 2. Size drip legs same size as main. In steam mains NPS 6 and larger, drip leg size can be reduced, but to no less than NPS 4. W. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 23, Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping. X. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 23, Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping. 3.4 STEAM-TRAP INSTALLATION A. Install steam traps in accessible locations as close as possible to connected equipment. B. Install full-port ball valve, strainer, and union upstream from trap; install union, check valve, and full-port ball valve downstream from trap unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 SAFETY VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install safety valves according to ASME B31.1, "Power Piping" and ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping." B. Pipe safety-valve discharge without valves to atmosphere outside the building. C. Install drip-pan elbow fitting adjacent to safety valve and pipe drain connection to nearest floor drain. D. Install exhaust head with drain to waste, on vents equal to or larger than NPS 2-1/2. 3.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Install hangers and supports according to Division 23, Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment. Comply with requirements below for maximum spacing. B. Seismic restraints are specified in Division 23, Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment. C. Install the following pipe attachments: 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long. 2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or longer. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING 232213 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer, supported on a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. D. Install hangers with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 13 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 14 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 3: Maximum span, 15 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 7. NPS 4: Maximum span, 17 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 8. NPS 6: Maximum span, 21 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 9. NPS 8: Maximum span, 24 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch. 10. NPS 10: Maximum span, 26 feet; minimum rod size, 3/4 inch. 11. NPS 12: Maximum span, 30 feet; minimum rod size, 7/8 inch. 12. NPS 14: Maximum span, 32 feet; minimum rod size, 1 inch. 13. NPS 16: Maximum span, 35 feet; minimum rod size, 1 inch. 14. NPS 18: Maximum span, 37 feet; minimum rod size, 1-1/4 inches. 15. NPS 20: Maximum span, 39 feet; minimum rod size, 1-1/4 inches. E. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 4 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 4. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 7. NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. F. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot intervals between floors. G. Fiberglass Piping Hanger Spacing: Space hangers according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions for service conditions. Avoid point loading. Space and install hangers with the fewest practical rigid anchor points. 3.7 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING 232213 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube ends. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32. D. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8. E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. F. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article. G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. H. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions. 3.8 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Size for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment connections. B. Install traps and control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment. C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are installed, only one bypass is required. D. Install vacuum breakers downstream from control valve, close to coil inlet connection. E. Install a drip leg at coil outlet. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prepare steam and condensate piping according to ASME B31.1, "Power Piping" and as follows: 1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. 2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing. 3. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers. 4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment. B. Perform the following tests on steam and condensate piping: 1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING 232213 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength. 3. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. C. Prepare written report of testing. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\232213 FL - STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING SPECIALTIES 232216 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 232216 - STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following piping specialties for LP steam and condensate piping: 1. Flash tanks. 2. Safety valves. 3. Pressure-reducing valves. 4. Steam traps. 5. Thermostatic air vents and vacuum breakers. 6. Steam and condensate meters. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the following: 1. Pressure-reducing and safety valve. 2. Steam trap. 3. Air vent and vacuum breaker. 4. Flash tank. 5. Meter. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For valves, safety valves, pressure-reducing valves, steam traps, air vents, vacuum breakers, and meters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Pipe Welding: Qualify procedures and operators according to the following: 1. ASME Compliance: Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp flash tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING SPECIALTIES 232216 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to steam and condensate heating specification for minimum pressure and temperature ratings of components: 2.2 VALVES A. Gate, Globe, Check, Ball, and Butterfly Valves: Comply with requirements specified in Division 23. 2.3 SAFETY VALVES A. Bronze or Brass Safety Valves: ASME labeled. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Armstrong International, Inc. b. Kunkle Valve. c. Spirax Sarco, Inc. d. Watts Regulator Co. 2. Disc Material: Forged copper alloy. 3. End Connections: Threaded inlet and outlet. 4. Spring: Fully enclosed steel spring with adjustable pressure range and positive shutoff, factory set and sealed. 5. Pressure Class: 250. 6. Drip-Pan Elbow: Cast iron and having threaded inlet and outlet with threads complying with ASME B1.20.1. 7. Size and Capacity: As required for equipment according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 2.4 STEAM TRAPS A. Float and Thermostatic Traps: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Armstrong International, Inc. b. Barnes & Jones, Inc. c. Dunham-Bush, Inc. d. Hoffman Specialty. e. Spirax Sarco, Inc. f. Sterling. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING SPECIALTIES 232216 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Body and Bolted Cap: ASTM A 126, cast iron. 3. End Connections: Threaded. 4. Float Mechanism: Replaceable, stainless steel. 5. Head and Seat: Hardened stainless steel. 6. Trap Type: Balanced pressure. 7. Thermostatic Bellows: Stainless steel or monel. 8. Thermostatic air vent capable of withstanding 45 deg F of superheat and resisting water hammer without sustaining damage. 9. Vacuum Breaker: Thermostatic with phosphor bronze bellows, and stainless-steel cage, valve, and seat. 10. Maximum Operating Pressure: 125 psig. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Install shutoff duty valves at branch connections to steam supply mains, at steam supply connections to equipment, and at the outlet of steam traps. B. Install safety valves on pressure-reducing stations and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Install safety-valve discharge piping, without valves, to nearest floor drain or as indicated on Drawings. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements. 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install piping to permit valve servicing. B. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 full port-ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage. C. Install valves according to Division 23. D. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. E. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere as indicated. F. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting. G. Install strainers on supply side of control valves, pressure-reducing valves, traps, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and full port ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2. 3.3 STEAM-TRAP INSTALLATION A. Install steam traps in accessible locations as close as possible to connected equipment. B. Install full-port ball valve, strainer, and union upstream from trap; install union, check valve, and full-port ball valve downstream from trap unless otherwise indicated. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING SPECIALTIES 232216 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.4 SAFETY VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install safety valves according to ASME B31.1, "Power Piping." B. Pipe safety-valve discharge without valves to atmosphere outside the building. C. Install drip-pan elbow fitting adjacent to safety valve and pipe drain connection to nearest floor drain. D. Install exhaust head with drain to waste, on vents equal to or larger than NPS 2-1/2. 3.5 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Install traps and control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment. B. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are installed, only one bypass is required. C. Install vacuum breakers downstream from control valve, close to coil inlet connection. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\232216_STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING SPECIALTIES.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HVAC WATER TREATMENT 232500 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 232500 - HVAC WATER TREATMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following HVAC water-treatment systems: 1. Bypass chemical-feed equipment and controls. 2. Chemical treatment test equipment. 3. HVAC water-treatment chemicals. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EEPROM: Electrically erasable, programmable read-only memory. B. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits. C. RO: Reverse osmosis. D. TDS: Total dissolved solids. E. UV: Ultraviolet. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate modifications to existing piping loops with current chemical control scheme to ensure final product meets owner’s standards. B. Water quality for HVAC systems shall minimize corrosion, scale buildup, and biological growth for optimum efficiency of HVAC equipment without creating a hazard to operating personnel or the environment. C. Base HVAC water treatment on quality of water available at Project site, HVAC system equipment material characteristics and functional performance characteristics, operating personnel capabilities, and requirements and guidelines of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Glycol energy recovery closed hydronic systems, shall have the following water qualities: 1. Propylene glocol: 40% (400,000ppm) 2. Nitrate: 1,500 ppm 3. Tolytriazole: 20ppm 4. Water: balance 5. Color: olive green Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HVAC WATER TREATMENT 232500 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 6. Metro PG#36 or owner approved alternate. E. Chilled water systems: 1. Chemicals shall not be used to treat chilled water systems connected to the campus chilled water loop. Fill system with potable water. Notify the Central energy plant for permission to begin circulating water into campus chilled water loop. F. Treatment chemicals for non-glycol non-potable systems. 1. After cleaning and inspection, immediately add a molybdate based corrosion inhibitor. Acceptable corrosion inhibitors shall include a combination of sodium molybdate, sodium hydroxide, toltriazole and organic polymers. Test for residual concentrations as follows: a. Molybdate: 150 ppm (hot water systems) b. pH: 8.3-9 c. Tolytriazole: 5 ppm. 2. Arrange for inspection by a representative from the facilities management water treatment lab prior to final acceptance. G. Cleaning procedures for newly installed systems: 1. Adjust all control valves and balancing valves to full open position during the cleaning and treatment process; 2. Fill system and add a general dispersant for iron, mud, silt, and microbiological matter at a concentration recommended by the chemical manufacturer. Pay particular attention to the type of material being cleaned (steel, copper, aluminum, etc.) Test for concentration. Circulate solution for a minimum of eight hours. Flush system until system water pH and iron levels are consistent with the feed domestic water levels. Clean strainers and dead end piping legs. Provide test results to the Facilities Management Water Treatment Lab. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories for the following products: 1. Bypass feeders. 2. Chemical test equipment. 3. Chemical material safety data sheets. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality-control test reports. B. Other Informational Submittals: 1. Methods of analysis for determining product residuals. Specify qualitative and quantitative procedures of evaluating actual product levels. Include recommended parameters for all products, expressed in either terms of parts per million or milligrams per liter. 2. Proposed provision of removal for any unused chemicals. 3. Expected performance levels of products including expected corrosion rates expressed in mils per year 4. Water-Treatment Program: Written sequence of operation on an annual basis for the application equipment required to achieve water quality defined in the "Performance Requirements" Article above. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HVAC WATER TREATMENT 232500 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 5. Water Analysis: Illustrate water quality available at Project site. 6. Passivation Confirmation Report: Verify passivation of galvanized-steel surfaces, and confirm this observation in a letter to Architect. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. HVAC Water-Treatment Service Provider Qualifications: An experienced HVAC watertreatment service provider capable of analyzing water qualities, installing water-treatment equipment, and applying water treatment as specified in this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Ampion Corp. 2. Anderson Chemical Co, Inc. 3. Aqua-Chem, Inc.; Cleaver-Brooks Div. 4. Barclay Chemical Co.; Water Management, Inc. 5. Boland Trane Services 6. GE Betz. 7. GE Osmonics. 8. H-O-H Chemicals, Inc. 9. Metro Group. Inc. (The); Metropolitan Refining Div. 10. ONDEO Nalco Company. 11. Watcon, Inc. 2.2 MANUAL CHEMICAL-FEED EQUIPMENT A. Bypass Feeders: Steel, with corrosion-resistant exterior coating, minimum 3-1/2-inch fill opening in the top, and NPS 3/4 bottom inlet and top side outlet. Quarter turn or threaded fill cap with gasket seal and diaphragm to lock the top on the feeder when exposed to system pressure in the vessel. 1. Capacity: 5 gal.. 2. Minimum Working Pressure: 125 psig. 2.3 CHEMICAL TREATMENT TEST EQUIPMENT A. Test Kit: Manufacturer-recommended equipment and chemicals in a wall-mounting cabinet for testing pH, TDS, inhibitor, chloride, alkalinity, and hardness; sulfite and testable polymer tests for high-pressure boilers, and oxidizing biocide test for open cooling systems. B. Corrosion Test-Coupon Assembly: Constructed of corrosive-resistant material, complete with piping, valves, and mild steel and copper coupons. Locate copper coupon downstream from mild steel coupon in the test-coupon assembly. 1. Two-station rack for closed-loop systems. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HVAC WATER TREATMENT 232500 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.4 CHEMICALS A. Chemicals shall be as recommended by water-treatment system manufacturer that are compatible with piping system components and connected equipment, and that can attain water quality specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. B. Water Softener Chemicals: 1. Mineral: High-capacity, sulfonated-polystyrene ion-exchange resin that is stable over entire pH range with good resistance to bead fracture from attrition or shock. Resin exchange capacity minimum 30,000 grains/cu. ft. of calcium carbonate of resin when regenerated with 15 lb of salt. 2. Salt for Brine Tanks: High-purity sodium chloride, free of dirt and foreign material. Rock and granulated forms are not acceptable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WATER ANALYSIS A. Perform an analysis of supply water to determine quality of water available at Project site. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install chemical application equipment on concrete bases, level and plumb. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible. Anchor chemical tanks and floor-mounting accessories to substrate. B. Install seismic restraints for equipment and floor-mounting accessories and anchor to building structure. Refer to Division 23, Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment for seismic restraints. C. Install water testing equipment on wall near water chemical application equipment. D. Install interconnecting control wiring for chemical treatment controls and sensors. E. Mount sensors and injectors in piping circuits. F. Bypass Feeders: Install in closed hydronic systems, including glycol energy recovery, and equipped with the following: 1. Install bypass feeder in a bypass circuit around circulating pumps, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2. Install water meter in makeup water supply. 3. Install test-coupon assembly in bypass circuit around circulating pumps, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 4. Install a gate or full-port ball isolation valves on inlet, outlet, and drain below feeder inlet. 5. Install a swing check on inlet after the isolation valve. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance. C. Make piping connections between HVAC water-treatment equipment and dissimilar-metal piping with dielectric fittings. Dielectric fittings are specified in Division 23, Hydronic Piping. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HVAC WATER TREATMENT 232500 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. Install shutoff valves on HVAC water-treatment equipment inlet and outlet. Metal general-duty valves are specified in Division 23, General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping. E. Refer to Division 22, Domestic Water Piping Specialties for backflow preventers required in makeup water connections to potable-water systems. F. Confirm applicable electrical requirements in electrical Sections for connecting electrical equipment. G. Ground equipment according to Division 26, Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. H. Connect wiring according to Division 26, Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing. B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical connections. 2. Inspect piping and equipment to determine that systems and equipment have been cleaned, flushed, and filled with water, and are fully operational before introducing chemicals for water-treatment system. 3. Place HVAC water-treatment system into operation and calibrate controls during the preliminary phase of HVAC systems' startup procedures. 4. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is tested and satisfactory test results are achieved. 5. Test for leaks and defects. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 6. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, and replaced water piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved. 7. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow test pressure to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects. 8. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping until no leaks exist. D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. E. At six-week intervals following Substantial Completion, perform separate water analyses on hydronic systems to show that automatic chemical-feed systems are maintaining water quality within performance requirements specified in this Section. Submit written reports of water analysis advising Owner of changes necessary to adhere to Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. F. Comply with ASTM D 3370 and with the following standards: 1. Silica: ASTM D 859. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HVAC WATER TREATMENT 232500 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Steam System: ASTM D 1066. 3. Acidity and Alkalinity: ASTM D 1067. 4. Iron: ASTM D 1068. 5. Water Hardness: ASTM D 1126. G. Cleaning procedures for extensions to existing building systems: 1. Follow the procedures for newly installed systems. Provide temporary piping, valving, and pumping system isolated from the existing building system as needed to perform cleaning procedures prior to final connection to the existing building system. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC water-treatment systems and equipment. Refer to Division 01, Demonstration and Training. B. Training: Provide a "how-to-use" self-contained breathing apparatus video that details exact operating procedures of equipment. 3.6 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION A. Provide a three ring binder for each hydronic system treated with chemicals that includes the following information: SDS, product data sheets, chemical type, test points, control limits and system volume; and direction to drain system to sanitary. System volume shall be stenciled on the system expansion tank in a visible location. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\232500 FL - HVAC WATER TREATMENT.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS-METAL DUCTS 233113 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 233113 - AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS-METAL DUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sheet metal materials. 2. Rectangular ducts and fittings. 3. Round and flat-oval ducts and fittings. 4. Double wall plenums and connections to louvers. 5. Sealant and gaskets. 6. Hangers and supports. 7. Manual volume dampers. 8. Manual slide gate (blast gate) dampers 9. Fire dampers. 10. Smoke dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, corridor ceiling dampers. 11. Duct silencers. 12. Short radius elbow splitter vanes. 13. Remote damper operators. 14. Duct-mounted access doors. 15. Flexible connectors. 16. Flexible ducts. 17. Duct accessory hardware. 18. Diffusers, registers and grilles. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 08 for fixed and adjustable louvers and wall vents whether or not they are connected to ducts. 2. Division 28 for duct-mounted fire and smoke detectors not provided as integral option with smoke and fire-smoke dampers. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS-METAL DUCTS 233113 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Duct Construction Design: Unless noted otherwise duct construction including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with 2005 SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" Third Edition, performance and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article. 1. In addition to the above basic requirements, the following supplemental requirements apply to this project: a. Minimum sheet metal thickness for welded sections of ductwork shall meet the requirements identified in Part 2 of this Section. b. Minimum sheet metal thickness, joint construction and supports for firewrap insulated ductwork shall comply with fire-wrap UL listing requirements. Coordinate requirements with fire-wrap insulation provided. B. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in 2016 ASHRAE Standard 62.1 “Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality”. C. Structural Support of Air Distribution Systems 1. Install ducts with support systems indicated in Tables 5-1 through 5-3 and Figures 5-1 through 5-10 of SMACNA Duct Construction Manual. a. Select hangers and supports to withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in Tables 5-1 through 5-3 and Figures 5-1 through 5-10. b. Horizontal duct shall have a support within 2 feet of each elbow and within 4 feet of each branch connection. c. Upper attachments to structure shall have an allowable gravity load of 25 percent of the failure load (proof test). 2. Maximum load from hangers attached to the underside of slabs shall be 250 pounds. If this criteria cannot be met due to field identified space or coordination constraints, submit formal request for interpretation (RFI) to structural design professional of record for review and approval before proceeding with the installation. 3. Duct supports for commercial kitchen grease exhaust ductwork shall be designed to carry gravity weight of the duct and seismic loads. Duct supports for horizontal grease ducts larger than 24 inches in any one dimension rated for the weight of the ductwork plus 800 pounds at any one point in the system. 4. Do not drill or cut notches or holes in any structural member without the express written approval of the structural design professional of record. 5. Provide core openings. Submit a formal request for interpretation, identifying location of desired cores to the structural design professional of record for guidance and approval. 6. Do not attach or suspend MEP components from metal decking. 7. Survey location of concrete reinforcement before drilling for anchors in reinforced concrete walls, beams or slabs. Do not cut reinforcing bars during the drilling of anchors without the express written approval of the structural design professional of record. 8. Provide patching of fireproofing removed or damaged during the attachment of suspended MEP components. Provide documentation that the patching maintains the performance of the fire proofing system. 9. For steel frames, maximum load from hangers attached to steel beams shall be 400 pounds. If clamps or other attachments are made to fireproofed beams, remove ample Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS-METAL DUCTS 233113 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 fireproofing at the point of contact to ensure the attachment device is placed with proper edge distance to develop the required pressure (“bite”) on the steel. Patch fireproofing after attachment device is in place. Arrange clamps to equally load each side of flange. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the following products: 1. Sealants and gaskets. 2. Adhesives. 3. Diffusers, registers and grilles. 4. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings. 5. Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished. 6. Duct silencers, provide pressure drop, dynamic insertion loss data and breakout noise characteristics. B. Sustainable Design Submittals: 1. Product data showing compliance with 2016 ASHRAE Standard 62.1 “Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality” sections identified below. a. Documentation indicating that duct systems comply with Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment." b. Duct-Cleaning Test Report: Documentation of work performed for compliance with Section 7.2.4 - "Ventilation System Start-up." 2. Product Data: Documentation indicating that duct systems comply with 2016 ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1 “Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings”, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation." 3. Leakage Test Report: Documentation of work performed for compliance with 2016 ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1 “Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings”, Section 6.4.4.2 - "Duct and Plenum Leakage." Leak test reports shall be submitted as a single comprehensive report for a complete system (e.g. supply, return, exhaust) and not as individual section by section reports. 4. Product Data: For adhesives and sealants, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. C. Shop Drawings: For air distribution systems - metal ducts: 1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work. 2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings. 3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static-pressure classes. 4. Elevation of top of ducts. 5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines. 6. Fittings. 7. Reinforcement and spacing. 8. Seam and joint construction. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS-METAL DUCTS 233113 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions. 10. Equipment installation based on approved equipment submittals. 11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, full length splitter vanes, access doors and panels. 12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration isolation. 13. Detail metal duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction. Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following: a. Special fittings. b. Manual volume damper installations. c. Control-damper installations. d. Fire-damper, smoke-damper, combination fire- and smoke-damper, ceiling, and corridor damper installations, including sleeves; and duct-mounted access doors and remote damper operators. e. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring for smoke and firesmoke dampers. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: 1. Sheet metal thicknesses. 2. Joint and seam construction and sealing. 3. Reinforcement details and spacing. 4. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports. 5. Design Calculations: a. For each system provide calculation of duct leakage class required to meet specified system leakage in accordance with ASHRAE recommendations. b. Calculations for selecting hangers and supports. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Air Distribution System Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Duct installation, indicating coordination with general construction, building components, and other building services. Indicate proposed changes to duct layout. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Structural members to which duct will be attached. 4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 5. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated construction. 6. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following: a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets (diffusers, registers and grilles). Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS-METAL DUCTS 233113 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Ceiling and duct access panels. f. Perimeter moldings. g. Ceiling suspension assembly members h. Methods of attaching hangers to building structure i. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. j. Duct accessories requiring ceiling-mounted access panels and access doors with input from Installers of the items involved. 7. Refer to Division 20 for additional coordination drawing requirements. B. Welding certificates. C. Duct leakage factors and duct leakage fraction calculations based on installed duct sizes and final routing. D. Field quality-control reports. E. Source quality-control reports. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals. B. Final duct leakage test reports 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following performance standards and agencies as referenced in this section: 1. 2005 SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" Third Edition (SMACNA Duct Construction Manual). Comply with requirements only as the chapters, subchapters, sections, appendices, figures and/or tables of the standard are specifically referenced in Articles in this Section. a. Nothing in this Section shall be interpreted to mean SMACNA Duct Construction Manual is adopted in its entirety. 2. 2012 SMACNA “HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual” (SMACNA Leak Test Manual). Comply with requirements only as the chapters, subchapters, sections, appendices, figures and/or tables of the manual are explicitly referenced in the Articles in this Section. a. Nothing in this Section shall be interpreted to mean SMACNA Leak Test Manual is adopted in its entirety. 3. 2008 SMACNA “Seismic Restraint Manual – Guidelines for Mechanical Systems” (SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual). Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS-METAL DUCTS 233113 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 4. 2002 SMACNA “Fire, Smoke and Radiation Damper Installation Guide for HVAC Systems – 5th Edition”. 5. 2008 SMACNA “Accepted Industry Practice for Industrial Duct Construction – 2nd Edition”. 6. 2015 NFPA 90A “Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems” (NFPA 90A). 7. 2016 ASHRAE “HVAC Systems and Equipment Handbook” (ASHRAE Systems Handbook). 8. 2015 ASHRAE “HVAC Applications Handbook” (ASHRAE Applications Handbook). 9. 2016 ASHRAE Standard 62.1 “Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality” (ASHRAE 62.1). a. Comply with Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up". 10. 2016 ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1 “Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings” (ASHRAE/IES 90.1). a. Comply with requirements in Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation. 11. 2006 (RA2011) ASHRAE Standard 70 “Method of Testing the Performance of Air Outlets and Air Inlets” (ASHRAE 70). 12. 2013 ASHRAE Standard 113 “Method of Testing for Room Air Diffusion” (ASHRAE 113). 13. 2002 North American Insulation Manufacturers Association, “Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard AH124” Third Edition (NAIMA). 14. 2013 National Air Duct Cleaning Association, “Assessment, Cleaning, Restoration of HVAC Systems” (NADCA). B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. 2. AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding. C. AMCA Standard 510-D “Laboratory Methods of Testing Dampers for Rating.” D. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) standards referenced in other Articles of this Section. E. Underwriters Laboratory (UL) standards referenced in other Articles of this Section. F. Nationally Recognized Testing Labs (NRTL). G. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NFPA 90A. B. Only as referenced in this Section, comply with SMACNA Duct Construction Manual requirements for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, duct sealing methods, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated in the Articles of this Section or on the Drawings. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS-METAL DUCTS 233113 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. All metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. 2.2 SHEETMETAL MATERIALS A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A653/A653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90. 2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized. B. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A480/A480M, Type 304L or 316L, as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article. C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A36/A36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. 1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials. D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. 2.3 RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Material Thickness Requirements for Rectangular Duct: Unless otherwise indicated in the Articles of this Section or on the drawings, comply with SMACNA Duct Construction Manual, Tables 2-1 through 2-33 inclusive of the associated details and notes as they relate to acceptable material thicknesses based on duct dimension, static pressure class, reinforcement code and reinforcement spacing 1. Materials shall be as indicated in the Article “Duct Schedule” in Part 3 of this Section. 2. The thicknesses indicated in Tables 2-1 through 2-33 in the SMACNA Duct Construction Manual shall be acceptable for galvanized steel, carbon steel, stainless steel, and PVC coated galvanized steel. 3. If aluminum duct is specified, the thickness of the material shall be adjusted according to Tables 2-50 through 2-52 of the SMACNA Duct Construction Manual. 4. In addition to the basic requirements of SMACNA Duct Construction Manual, minimum sheet metal thickness for welded section of ductwork shall be 16 gage and minimum metal thickness for welded elbows shall be 14 gage. All welded duct construction shall be air and liquid tight. Provide SMACNA thickness where duct pressure class requires heavier gage. B. General Fabrication Requirements: Except as otherwise noted, comply with Sub-Chapter 2.1 “Introduction to the Rectangular Duct Construction Schedules” of the SMACNA Duct Construction Manual. 1. Coordinate duct wall thickness, seams, joints, joint spacing, support intervals, sealing requirements, reinforcement code, and reinforcement spacing based on the static pressure class, duct material, and duct dimensions indicated in the design documents. 2. Joints and seams shall be formed and assembled with dimensions and proportions for a tight and secure assembly. C. Transverse Joints (Non-Welded): Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS-METAL DUCTS 233113 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. For pressure class less than 3 inches of water column, select and fabricate joint types according to Figure 2.1, Tables 2-31 through 2-33 and Sub-Chapter 2.4 (except reference to Chapter 11) of the SMACNA Duct Construction Manual. 2. For pressure classes 3 inches of water column and greater, mechanical joints shall be pre-manufactured joint systems. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2) Ward Industries. 3) Dyn Air - Nexus Flange System. D. Longitudinal Seams (Non-Welded): 1. For duct pressure class of 2 inches water column or less, select seam type and fabricate according to Figure 2.2 and Sub-Chapter 2.3 of the SMACNA Duct Construction Manual. 2. For duct pressure classes 3 inches water column or greater provide Type L-1 Pittsburg Lock seams fabricated according to Figure 2.2 of the SMACNA Duct Construction Manual. E. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Unless otherwise indicated, select types and fabricate according to Figures 4.2 through 4.9 and Chart 4.1 of the SMACNA Duct Construction Manual. 1. Provide only the SMACNA fittings described in Part 3 of this specification, without substitution, as these fittings are the basis of design used to calculated system static pressure losses and motor horsepower requirements. Substitutions from indicated fittings will not be accepted. 2. The following fittings, shown in Figures 4.2 through 4.9 and Chart 4.1 of the SMACNA Duct Construction Manual noted above, shall NOT be used. a. Figure 4-2 1) Type RE-2, RE-4, RE-7, RE-9 and R-10 elbows shall not be used. b. Figure 4-3 1) Turning vanes are not acceptable. c. Figure 4-4 1) Turning vanes are not acceptable. d. Figure 4-5 1) Type 2 is not acceptable. 2) Optional square throat with turning vanes shown for Type 4A and 4B branch connections are not acceptable. e. Figure 4-6 1) Straight tap, butt flange or cinch-lick branch connections are not acceptable. 2) Flanged or spin-in round connections without a bell-mouth or conical form are not acceptable. f. Figure 4-8 1) Figure D is not acceptable. Figure B is preferable, however, if an offset of this type (I.E. four 90 degree elbows) is needed, use type RE-3 or RE-8 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS-METAL DUCTS 233113 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 elbows and short radius elbows with full length splitter vanes in accordance with Chart 4-1 and Figure 4-9. F. Special Considerations for Double Wall Rectangular Ducts and Fittings 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. McGill AirFlow LLC. b. MKT Metal Manufacturing. c. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc. 2. In addition to the requirements set forth in other Articles of this Section and except as otherwise noted, comply with the requirements of Chapter 8 of the SMACNA Duct Construction Manual. 3. The dimensions shown on the drawings are the inner duct dimensions. Fabricate ducts with the inner duct having the dimensions shown on the drawings. 4. Inner Duct: Minimum 0.028-inch solid sheet steel. 5. Interstitial Insulation: Flexible elastomeric duct liner complying with ASTM C534, Type II for sheet materials, and with NFPA 90A. a. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.245 Btu x in./h / sf / deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature. 2.4 ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Linx Industries (formerly Lindab). 3. McGill AirFlow LLC. 4. SEMCO LLC. B. General Material Thickness Requirements for Round and Flat Oval Duct: Unless otherwise indicated in the Articles of this Section or the drawings, comply with SMACNA Duct Construction Manual, Tables 3-4 through 3-13 for round and table 3-15 for flat oval duct inclusive of the associated details and notes as they relate to acceptable material thickness based on duct dimension, static pressure class, reinforcement class and stiffener spacing. 1. Materials shall be as indicated in the Article “Duct Schedule” in Part 3 of this Section. 2. The thicknesses indicated in Tables 3-4 through 3-13 for round and Table 3-15 for flat oval duct in the SMACNA Duct Construction Manual shall be acceptable for galvanized steel, carbon steel, stainless steel, and PVC coated galvanized steel. 3. If aluminum duct is specified, the thickness of the material shall be adjusted according to Table3-14 of the SMACNA Duct Construction Manual. C. General Fabrication Requirements: Except as otherwise noted in the Articles of this Section or the Drawings, round duct fabrication shall comply with Sub-Chapter 3.1 (excluding sections S3.0, S3.3, S3.4, S3.5, S3.9 and S3.10) and flat oval duct shall comply with Sub-Chapter 3.3 (the reference to Chapter 11 in section S3.17 applies only as referenced and for the purposes of Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS-METAL DUCTS 233113 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 the requirements of section S3.17 in Sub-Chapter 3.3) of the SMACNA Duct Construction Manual. 1. Duct wall thickness, seams, joints, joint spacing, stiffener spacing, support intervals, sealing requirements and reinforcement class shall be coordinated by the Contractor, based on the static pressure class, duct material, and duct dimensions indicated in the design documents, to ensure a proper assembly. 2. Joints and seams shall be formed and assembled with proper dimensions and proportions for a tight and secure assembly. D. Flat-Oval Ducts: Indicated dimensions are the duct width (major dimension) and diameter of the round sides connecting the flat portions of the duct (minor dimension). E. Transverse Joints: Select and fabricate according to Figure 3.1 of the SMACNA Duct Construction Manual with the exception that draw-band joints and crimp type joints (RT-3 and RT-5 respectively) are not permitted. 1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged. F. Longitudinal Seams: Select and fabricate seam types shown Figure 3-2 of the SMACNA Duct Construction Manual. 1. Fabricate round ducts larger than 90 inches in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal seams. 2. Fabricate flat-oval ducts larger than 72 inches in width (major dimension) with buttwelded longitudinal seams. G. Tees and Laterals: Unless otherwise noted, select types and fabricate according to Figures 3-5 and 3-6 for round duct and Figure 3-7 for flat oval duct of the SMACNA Duct Construction Manual. 1. The following Tees and Laterals shown in Figures 3.5 through 3.7 shall not be used a. Figure 3-5 1) 90 degree tee fitting, 1) 90 degree tap fitting 2) 90 degree saddle tap b. Figure 3-6 1) Conical tee. H. Special Considerations for Double-Wall Round and Flat-Oval Ducts and Fittings 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Linx Industries (formerly Lindab). b. McGill AirFlow LLC. c. SEMCO LLC. d. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc. 2. In addition to the requirements set forth in other Articles of this Section of the Specification and except as otherwise noted, outer ducts shall comply with the requirements of Chapter 8 of the SMACNA Duct Construction Manual based on static pressure class. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS-METAL DUCTS 233113 - 11 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 a. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA Duct Construction Manual, Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA Duct Construction Manual. b. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA Duct Construction Manual, Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA Duct Construction Manual. 1) Fabricate round ducts larger than 90 inches (2286 mm) in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal seams. 2) Fabricate flat-oval ducts larger than 72 inches (1830 mm) in width (major dimension) with butt-welded longitudinal seams. c. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA Duct Construction Manual, Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Manual. 3. Round ducts: Dimensions indicated on the drawings are the duct diameter the inner duct. 4. Flat-Oval Ducts: Indicated dimensions are the duct width (major dimension) and diameter of the round sides connecting the flat portions of the duct (minor dimension) of the inner duct. 5. Inner Duct: Minimum 0.028-inch solid sheet steel. 6. Interstitial Insulation: Fibrous-glass liner complying with ASTM C1071, NFPA 90A; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard." a. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 Btu x in./h / sf/ deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature. b. Install spacers that position the inner duct at uniform distance from outer duct without compressing insulation. c. Coat insulation with antimicrobial coating. d. Cover insulation with polyester film complying with UL 181, Class 1. 2.5 DOUBLE WALL PLENUMS AND CONNECTIONS TO LOUVERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. SEMCO 2. DuraSystems Barrier, Inc. 3. Industrial Noise Control, Inc. B. Performance Requirements: Manufactured plenums shall be constructed as an insulated rigid board double wall casing in accordance with SMACNA Duct Construction Manual, Chapter 9, Equipment and Casings. C. Minimum Inner Wall skin: 18 gauge galvanized, solid sheet. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS-METAL DUCTS 233113 - 12 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. Minimum Outer Wall Skin: 22 gauge galvanized, solid sheet E. Wall panels and insulation shall be thickness required to meet specified thermal performance, minimum 4” thick. Provide with 18 gauge galvanized longitudinal stiffeners spaced a maximum of 16” apart for the full the depth of the wall. F. Insulation thickness shall be the full wall depth with a minimum density of 3 lb/cu.ft. rigid mineral-fiber insulation. Panel shall have a minimum insulation value specified in Division 23 HVAC insulation Section and shall have a flame spread index of no greater than 25 and smoke developed index no greater than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 or UL 723. G. Panel openings for ductwork shall be provided by the panel manufacturer. All piping and conduit penetrations shall be field located, cut and sealed per wall manufacturer requirements. H. For plenums 36 inches deep and 80 inches high or larger, provide 30” wide x 72” high access doors, pre-hung type, constructed of minimum 18 gauge, galvanized, all welded door frame and minimum 18 gauge, galvanized solid exterior and interior skins enclosing insulation as specified for wall panels. Seals suitable to provide airtight seal shall be provided between door and frame. Provide continuous piano hinge. Latches shall be operable from both sides of door. For smaller plenums, provide double wall access door with dimensions 6 inches smaller than the plenum depth and height. Doors shall open against system pressure. I. Corner seams and where applicable bottom seams shall be soldered watertight at least 12” up from bottom. J. Plenums shall have neoprene gaskets or other corrosion resistant material to make connections to louvers or to base curbs watertight. K. For elevated plena, pitch floor down in direction of louver. Provide 2” half-coupling drain connection at floor of plenum unless noted otherwise. Pipe connection to nearest floor drain. 2.6 SEALANT AND GASKETS A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL. B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System: 1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal. 2. Tape Width: 4 inches. 3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 7. Service: Indoor and outdoor. 8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum. 10. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant For Duct Air Temperatures Above 0 deg F: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS-METAL DUCTS 233113 - 13 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Service Temperature: 0 to plus 200 deg F. 10. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets. 11. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 12. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 13. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive or negative. 14. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 15. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets. D. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant For Duct Air Temperatures Below 0 deg F (e.g. outside air ductwork): 1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Base: Synthetic rubber resin. 3. Solvent: Toluene and heptane. 4. Solids Content: Minimum 60 percent. 5. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 60. 6. Water resistant. 7. Mold and mildew resistant. 8. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less. 9. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." The building concentration of formaldehyde shall not exceed half of the indoor recommended exposure limit, or 33 mcg/cu. m, and that of acetaldehyde shall not exceed 9 mcg/cu. m. 10. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive or negative. 11. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 12. Service Temperature: Minus 20 to plus 200 deg F. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS-METAL DUCTS 233113 - 14 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 13. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets. E. Fume Hood Connection Sealant: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Dow Corning - 732 Multi-Purpose Sealant. b. IGS Industries - Duct Tight High Performance Sealant. c. Thermodyn Corporation- Florodyn Caulk with Viton. 2. Sealant compatible with fume hood connector and ductwork materials. 3. Sealant shall not degrade under long term exposure to chemicals (chemically stable). F. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920. 1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class: 25. 5. Use: O. 6. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 7. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." G. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer. H. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals: 1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sf at 1-inch wg and shall be rated for 10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative. 2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot. 2.7 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation. B. Hanger Rods for Non-corrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts. C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA Duct Construction Manual, Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct." D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603. E. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492. F. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS-METAL DUCTS 233113 - 15 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 G. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. H. Trapeze and Riser Supports: 1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates. 2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates. 3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc chromate. 2.8 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers: Dampers shall be shop or factory fabricated. 1. Shop Fabricated Volume Dampers: a. Dampers shall meet the requirements of SMACNA Duct Construction Manual Section 7.1. 2. Factory Fabricated Volume Dampers: a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1) American Warming and Ventilating; a Mestek Architectural Group company. 2) Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 3) Greenheck Fan Corporation. 4) McGill AirFlow LLC. 5) Nailor Industries Inc. 6) Ruskin Company. 7) Trox USA Inc. 8) Vent Products Co., Inc. 3. Provide dampers that meet the following requirements: a. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream. b. Minimum differential pressure rating: 1 inch water column. c. Minimum velocity rating: 2000 fpm. d. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. e. Frames: 1) Frame: Manufacturer standard shape, minimum 0.0396-inch thick, galvanized sheet steel or stainless steel. Material shall match connecting duct materials. 2) Corners shall be mitered, welded or shall be provided with gusset reinforcements. 3) Flanges for attaching to walls or flanged ductwork. For other application provide flangeless frames for installing in ducts. f. Blades: 1) Multiple or single blade. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS-METAL DUCTS 233113 - 16 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2) Opposed-blade design for multiple blade dampers. 3) Stiffen damper blades for stability. 4) Galvanized or stainless-steel, minimum 0.0635-inch thick. Material shall match connecting duct materials g. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel, plated steel or stainless steel. h. Bearings: 1) Oil-impregnated bronze or oil-impregnated stainless-steel sleeve. i. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch w.g. or less shall have axle length that matches full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. j. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. k. Provide with locking quadrant arm and standoff bracket. For ductwork requiring Seal Class A, provide sealed end bearing and regulator arms assembly to prevent leakage through the shaft core. B. Standard, Aluminum, Manual Volume Dampers: 1. Dampers shall meet the requirements of SMACNA Duct Construction Manual Section 7.1 and shall meet the following requirements. a. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream. b. Minimum differential pressure rating: 1 inch water column. c. Minimum velocity rating: 2000 fpm. d. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. e. Frames: Hat-shaped, minimum 0.10-inch thick, aluminum sheet channels; frames with flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts. f. Blades: 1) Multiple or single blade. 2) Parallel- or opposed-blade design. 3) Stiffen damper blades for stability. 4) Roll-formed aluminum blades: minimum 0.10-inch thick sheet or extrudedaluminum blades: minimum 0.050-inch thick sheet. g. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel or stainless steel. h. Bearings: Oil-impregnated bronze or stainless-steel sleeve. i. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axle length that matches full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. j. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum. k. Provide with locking quadrant arm and standoff bracket. For ductwork requiring Seal Class A, provide sealed end bearing and regulator arm assembly to prevent leakage through the shaft core. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS-METAL DUCTS 233113 - 17 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.9 MANUAL SLIDE GATE (BLAST GATE) DAMPER A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Nordfab. 2. The Blast Gate Company 3. Donaldson Torit B. Provide dampers that meet the following requirements: 1. Material: Stainless Steel. 2. Galvanized steel connector collar. a. Size 3 inch to 24 inch – rolled edge ends, b. Size 26 and higher – flanged ends. 2.10 FIRE DAMPERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 2. Ruskin Company. B. Type: Dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL. Tested in accordance to FM specifications. C. Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class (differential pressure) and minimum 2000-fpm velocity. D. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 hour rated damper for walls rated for less than 3 hours and 3 hour rated damper for walls with higher fire rating. Refer to architectural drawings for wall fire ratings. E. Frame: For duct mounted dampers provide curtain type with blades outside air stream or multiple opposed blade type with blades in air stream. For dampers located behind grilles curtain type dampers, blades inside airstream are acceptable. Fabricate with hat channel of galvanized steel or stainless steel to match duct material with thickness (gage) required by the damper U.L. listing. 1. Curtain type fire dampers shall be Case 2 or 3 with blades out of airstream Type “B or C” as defined in SMACNA “Fire, Smoke and Radiation Damper Installation Guide for HVAC Systems – 5th Edition” pages 5.8, 5.11, and 7.2. 2. Where duct dimensions require multiple damper sections, provide curtain type identified above with dampers arranged out of airstream (limited to two stacked dampers with blades on perimeter) or provide multiple opposed blade type dampers. F. Mounting Sleeve: Factory installed, galvanized sheet steel. 1. Minimum Thickness: Thickness (gage) required by the damper U.L. listing. 2. Sleeve seams shall be continuously welded or sealed, and the transverse joint should be a sealed UL-approved flanged duct sleeve connection. G. Provide breakaway connections at all fire dampers. Seal all breakaway connections with manufacturer UL approved sealant to prevent air leakage. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS-METAL DUCTS 233113 - 18 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 H. Mounting Orientation: Vertical and horizontal - refer to plans for orientation. Confirm orientation based on approved coordination drawings. I. Blades: Roll-formed, galvanized or stainless steel sheet steel to match duct construction in thickness required by damper U.L. listing. Blades shall be one of the following: 1. Interlocking blade, or 2. Constructed with full-length blade connectors matching blade material. J. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring where required by manufacturer UL listing. K. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated, fusible links. 2.11 SMOKE DAMPERS, COMBINATION FIRE-SMOKE DAMPERS, CORRIDOR (CEILING) DAMPERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 2. Ruskin Company. B. General Requirements: 1. Combination Fire-Smoke Damper Type: Dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555 and UL 555S by an NRTL. C. Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and minimum 2000-fpm velocity. D. Fire-Smoke Damper Fire Rating: 1-1/2 hour rated damper for walls rated for less than 3 hours and 3 hour rated damper for walls with higher fire rating. Refer to architectural drawings for wall fire ratings. E. Heat-Responsive Device: Resettable, 165 deg F rated, fire-closure device or electric fuse link. 1. Smoke Detector: provided by Division 28. a. Smoke detector shall be photo-electric, addressable, sampling type. b. Provide with remote LED annunciator and remote test/reset of the smoke detector. F. Frame: Fabricate with hat channel of galvanized steel or stainless steel to match duct material with thickness (gage) required by the damper U.L. listing. Frame shall have welded, interlocking gusseted or reinforced mechanically attached corners and mounting flange. G. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, galvanized sheet steel in thickness required by the damper U.L. listing; length to suit wall or floor application with factory-furnished silicone calking. Jackshaft penetrations shall be provided with a factory shaft seal. Sleeve seams shall be continuously welded or sealed and the transverse joint should be a sealed UL-approved flanged duct sleeve connection. H. Blades: Roll-formed galvanized sheet steel or extruded aluminum in thickness (gage) required by the damper U.L. listing. I. Leakage: Class I. J. Master control panel for use in dynamic smoke-management systems. K. Damper Actuators: Provide two-position action unless modulating type action is indicated otherwise on the drawings. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS-METAL DUCTS 233113 - 19 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Actuators shall be provided by and factory mounted by the damper manufacturer in accordance with the damper U.L Listing. 2. Actuators shall be electric unless noted otherwise. 3. Electrical Connection: 115 V, single phase, 60 Hz. L. Accessories: 1. Auxiliary switches for position indication. Provide additional switches for signaling and fan control where indicated on drawings. 2. Test and reset switches with red (closed) and green (open) LED indicator lights, remote mounted. 3. Remote annunciation indicator 2.12 SOUND ATTENUATORS (SILENCERS) FOR AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Price Industries 2. Vibro-Acoustics. 3. VAW Systems, LTD B. General: 1. Factory fabricated. 2. Media-filled silencers a. Fire-Performance Characteristics: Adhesives, sealants, packing materials, and accessory materials shall have flame-spread index not exceeding 25 and smoke-developed index not exceeding 50 when tested according to ASTM E84. b. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1 Section 5.4 “Airstream Surfaces.” 3. Packless silencers a. Airstream surfaces: No sound absorptive materials of any kind shall be used in the silencers. The silencers shall attenuate air/gas transmitted noise solely by virtue of controlled impedance membranes and broadly tuned resonators. C. Shapes indicated on the drawings (e.g. linear, elbow, round). D. Outer Casing Material Shall Match Attached Ductwork: 1. ASTM A653/A653M, G90, galvanized sheet steel, 2. 304L stainless steel. E. Inner Casing and Baffle Material Shall Match Outer Casing Material: 1. ASTM A653/A653M, G90 galvanized sheet metal, thickness and perforations as determined by the manufacturer to meet the specified performance. 2. 304L stainless steel, thickness and perforations as determined by the manufacturer to meet the specified performance. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS-METAL DUCTS 233113 - 20 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 F. Special Construction: 1. Suitable for outdoor use where indicated on drawings. G. Connection Sizes: Match connecting ductwork unless otherwise indicated. H. Principal Sound-Absorbing Mechanism: 1. Packless Silencers a. Controlled impedance membranes and broadly tuned resonators without absorptive media. 2. Media-filled Silencers a. Film-lined type with fill material. 1) Fill Material: Inert and vermin-proof fibrous material. 2) Erosion Barrier: Polymer bag enclosing fill, and heat sealed before assembly. 3) Lining: Mylar, Tedlar or Foil Lined meeting flame and smoke spread fire performance requirements. I. Fabricate silencers to form rigid units that will not pulsate, vibrate, rattle, or otherwise react to system pressure variations. Do not use mechanical fasteners for unit assemblies. 1. Joints: Lock formed and sealed, continuously welded or flanged connections to match connected ductwork. 2. Suspended Units: Factory-installed suspension hooks or lugs attached to frame in quantities and spaced to prevent deflection or distortion. 3. Reinforcement: Cross or trapeze angles for rigid suspension. J. Accessories: 1. Factory-installed end caps to prevent contamination during shipping. K. Source Quality Control: Performance shall be verified according to ASTM E477-13 verified in an NVLAP accredited laboratory. 1. Selections shall be made based on publish acoustic ratings, including dynamic insertion loss and self-generated-nois e power levels with minimum airflow face velocity matching schedule. Performance data shall be provided with airflow in same direction as attenuation for supply ducts and in opposite direction of airflow for return or exhaust systems. Attenuation shall not be less than the scheduled performance in each octave band. 2. Leak Test: Test units for airtightness at 200 percent of associated fan static pressure or 6-inch wg static pressure, whichever is greater. 2.13 SHORT RADIUS ELBOW SPLITTER VANES (FULL LENGTH SPLITTER VANES) A. Provide short radius (full length splitter) vanes for elbows with a centerline radius less than 1.5 times the duct width in the plane of the elbow. 1. Comply with SMACNA Duct Construction Manual; Chart 4-1 and Figure 4-2 (Type RE-3) elbows for spacing of vanes and figure 4-9 for construction of short radius full length splitter vanes. Refer to detail on drawings for quantity of full length splitter vanes required based on ratio of centerline to duct width dimensions. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS-METAL DUCTS 233113 - 21 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.14 REMOTE DAMPER OPERATORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Pottorff. 2. Ventfabrics, Inc. 3. Young Regulator Company. B. Description: Cable system designed for remote manual damper adjustment. C. Cable: Sheathed stainless steel. D. Wall-Box Mounting: Recessed unless noted otherwise. E. Wall-Box Cover-Plate Material: Stainless steel. 2.15 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS A. Duct Mounted Sandwich (Clamp) Type Access Doors – Ductwork and Plena Greater Than 2 inch Pressure Class. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Aire Technologies. b. Ductmate Industries, Inc. c. Nailor Industries Inc. d. Ward Industries; a brand of Hart & Cooley, Inc. 2. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Factory fabricated, leak free insulated sandwich (clamp) type access door with minimum pressure rating equal to or greater than the attached ductwork. Material shall match connecting ductwork. 3. Provide with manufacturer standard gasket, bolts and springs between inner and outer door. 4. Provide wing nuts or molded knobs for low temperature applications and wing nuts for high temperature applications. B. SMACNA Access Doors – Ductwork and Plena 2” and Lower Pressure Class. 1. Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA Duct Construction Manual, Figures 7-2, "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct." a. Door: 1) Double wall, rectangular. 2) Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness for duct pressure class. 3) Vision panel. 4) Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inchbutt or piano hinge and cam latches. 5) Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class. b. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS-METAL DUCTS 233113 - 22 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 c. Number of Hinges and Locks: 1) Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks. 2) Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Continuous hinge and two sash locks. 3) Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Continuous hinge and two compression latches with outside and inside handles. 4) Access Doors Larger than 24 by 48 Inches: Continuous hinge and two compression latches with outside and inside handles. 2.16 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Laboratory exhaust fan discharge and biological safety cabinet discharge collar connections: a. Proco Style 501 b. Mercer c. Pathway d. Dynex 2. For other non-grease exhaust systems and applications: a. CL WARD & Family Inc. b. Ductmate Industries, Inc. c. Duro Dyne Inc. d. Elgen Manufacturing. e. Hardcast, Inc. f. JP Lamborn Co. g. Ventfabrics, Inc. h. Ward Industries; a brand of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics. C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1. D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip with the following minimum dimensions: 3-1/2 inches wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4 inch wide, 0.028 inch thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts. E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: 1. Unless noted otherwise fan discharge connections shall be glass fabric double coated with neoprene. a. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.. b. Minimum Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS-METAL DUCTS 233113 - 23 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 c. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 degrees F. 2. Discharge flexible connections on fans serving systems that connect to fume hoods, ventilated chemical storage cabinets and biological safety cabinets shall be round chlorobutyl elastomeric duct expansion joint type with 304L stainless steel flanges, back up bars, nuts and bolts. a. Flexible element shall be minimum 2 ply with minimum length of 6 inches between flanges b. Joints shall have an absolute air-tight seal with up to a minimum of 10 inch w.g., minimum 1.5 inches compression, minimum 0.5 inches extension and minimum 0.75 inches lateral offset. c. Aligning and pre-compress connectors 0.5 inches. d. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F F. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone. 1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd.. 2. Minimum Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch in the warp and 440 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F. 2.17 FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Buckley Associates, Inc. 2. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 3. JP Lamborn Co. 4. McGill AirFlow LLC. 5. Thermaflex; a Flex-Tek Group company. 6. Ward Industries; a brand of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B. Non-Insulated Flexible Duct 1. Performance: a. UL 181, Class 1. b. Pressure Rating: Minimum 4-inch wg positive and 0.5-inch wg negative. c. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. d. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 175 deg F. C. Flexible Duct Connectors: 1. Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-gear action in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size. 2.18 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot-tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS-METAL DUCTS 233113 - 24 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease. 2.19 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS & GRILLES A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Anemostat Products; a Mestek Company. 2. Carnes Company. 3. Hart & Cooley Inc. 4. Kreuger. 5. Metalaire, Inc. 6. Nailor Industries Inc. 7. Price Industries. 8. Titus. 9. Tuttle & Bailey. B. Provide diffusers, registers, and grilles for supply, return and exhaust outlets of size, type and, material of construction matching the basis of design devices scheduled on the drawings. C. Equipment shall be tested and rated according to ASHRAE Standard 70-2006 (RA 2011), “Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets”. D. Room air velocities shall be determined in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 113-2013. E. Equipment shall handle air quantities at operating velocities: 1. With maximum diffusion within space supplied or exhausted. 2. Without objectionable air movement as determined by Architect. 3. With rated sound level not to exceed NC30. F. Supply, return and exhaust outlets shall have opposed blade volume dampers operable from front. G. Supply registers shall have two sets of directional control blades. H. Diffusers within same room or area shall be of same type and style to provide uniformity of appearance. I. Surface mount diffusers, registers and grilles shall be furnished with gaskets and installed with faces set level and plumb, tightly against mounting surface. J. Coordinate diffusers, registers and grilles with ceiling and wall construction. Refer to Architectural Drawings for exact lengths and for framing and mitering arrangements that may differ from those shown on Division 23 Drawings. K. General Construction and Performance Requirements 1. Supply diffusers shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows. 2. Material: Steel, aluminum or stainless steel consistent with basis of design scheduled diffuser, register or grille. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS-METAL DUCTS 233113 - 25 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. Finish: Steel and aluminum diffusers, registers and grilles shall have a baked enamel finish with color selected by Architect. Stainless steel diffusers and grilles shall have a brushed finish. 4. Mounting: Coordinate selections with ceiling grid indicated on the architectural drawings. 5. Pattern: Provide fully adjustable or fixed pattern consistent with scheduled basis of design diffuser, register or grille. 6. Dampers: Opposed blade or butterfly. 7. Accessories: a. Equalizing grid where run out branch to the device is less than 18 inches long. b. Plaster ring for devices mounted in dry wall construction. c. Safety chain for devices with a face area equal to or larger than 3 square feet. L. Specialized Diffusers, Registers and Grilles. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings. B. Install ducts and specified fittings in accordance with procedures outlined in SMACNA Duct Construction Manual unless otherwise indicated. C. Ductwork Fittings: 1. Use only the following fittings, shown in Figures 4.2 through 4.9 and Chart 4.1 of the SMACNA Duct Construction Manual. a. Rectangular Elbows - Figure 4.2 1) Type RE-1 2) Type RE-3. See also Chart 4-1 and Figure 4-9 3) Type RE-5 4) Type RE-6 5) Type RE-8 b. Divided Flow Branches - Figure 4-5 1) Type 1 2) Type 3 3) Type 4A (optional mitered elbow not acceptable) 4) Type 4B (optional mitered elbow not acceptable) c. Branch Connections - Figure 4-6 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS-METAL DUCTS 233113 - 26 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1) 45 Degree Entry 2) 45 Degree Lead In 3) Conical 4) Bellmouth d. Offsets & Transitions - Figure 4-7 1) Any type shown. e. Obstructions f. Figure A, B, C and E. 1) Figure D only if mitered elbows with vanes are replaced with short radius elbows with full length splitter vanes. D. Install double wall ductwork in accordance with manufacturer instructions. E. Install ducts in maximum practical lengths to minimize quantity of joints in the system. F. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections. G. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines. H. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. I. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch plus allowance for insulation thickness. J. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures. K. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches. L. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Division 23 for fire and smoke dampers. M. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. Comply with SMACNA "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines." 3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged. B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system. C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 2B, 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding. D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets. E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS-METAL DUCTS 233113 - 27 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.3 SUPPLEMENTAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EXHAUST SYSTEMS SERVING FUME HOODS, CHEMICAL STORAGE CABINETS AND BIOLOGICAL SAFETY CABINETS., A. Ducts shall be supported at intervals not exceeding 10 feet (3048 mm). Supports shall be constructed of non-combustible material matching duct construction. B. Duct Joints. Ducts shall be made tight with lap joints having a minimum lap of 1 inch (25 mm). C. Clearance to combustibles. Ducts shall have a minimum clearance to combustibles of 6 inches. 3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Provide hangers and supports in compliance with SMACNA Duct Construction Manual, Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports." B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA Duct Construction Manual, Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection. D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports. E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet. F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF METAL DUCT ACCESSORIES A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA Duct Construction Manual for metal ducts. B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel ductwork, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts. C. Install backdraft and control dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated. Refer drawings for applicable damper types. D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel. 1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts. 2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts. E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing. F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated. G. Install fire and smoke dampers according to UL listing. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS-METAL DUCTS 233113 - 28 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 H. Installation of sound attenuators (silencers): 1. Rigidly connect ducts to sound attenuators. 2. Sound attenuator manufacturer basic installation instructions shall not be compromised to ensure pressure drops and self-generated sound power levels do exceed scheduled values. Install sound attenuators with baffles oriented in plane of turn when distance to nearest change in direction is less than attenuator manufacturer optimal distance. 3. Duct sound attenuator supplier or qualified representative shall provide supervision to ensure correct installation of duct sound attenuators. 4. Resiliently isolate sound attenuators from building construction at points of penetration of building structure with 0.75 inch minimum of 3 pound per cubic foot density fibrous glass. Seal penetration ends airtight with non-hardening caulk. 5. Multiple attenuators grouped together in parallel within duct system shall be sealed airtight with the same sealant used on the attached ductwork. I. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations: 1. On both sides of duct coils. 2. At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums. 3. At drain pans and seals. 4. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers, and equipment. 5. Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links. Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure relief access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers. 6. At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot spacing. 7. Upstream from splitter vanes. 8. Upstream or downstream from sound attenuators (silencers). 9. Control devices requiring inspection. 10. Elsewhere as indicated. 11. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure. 12. Minimum Access Door Sizes: a. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 inches by 5 inches. b. Two-Hand Access: 12 inches by 6 inches. c. Head and Hand Access: 18 inches by 10 inches. d. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 inches by 14 inches. e. Body Access: 25 inches by 14 inches. f. Body Plus Ladder Access: 25 inches by 17 inches. g. Access doors for fire dampers shall be located so that the spring catch and fusible links are accessible when the damper is closed. Fire damper access doors shall be no smaller than 12 inches by 12 inches. Where duct size does not permit the minimum size access door, provide a minimum 12 inch long Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS-METAL DUCTS 233113 - 29 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 removable duct section to allow access for reset of fusible link. As duct size increases beyond 16 inches in any one direction, access door shall be no less than 2 inches smaller than the larger duct dimension by a minimum of 12” long. As the shorter dimension increases above 16 inches the length of the damper shall be no less than 2 inches smaller that the duct in each dimension but shall not exceed 18 inches x 16 inches. For dampers that are too large for an ordinary person's arms to reach from outside the duct to reset the damper and replace the fusible link, the minimum size for the access door shall be increased to 24 inches x 16 inches to allow the entrance of an individual. J. Label access doors according to Division 23 to indicate the purpose of access door. K. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment. L. For fans developing static pressures of 5 inches water column and more, cover flexible connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps. M. Connect terminal units with fans to supply and return ducts with flexible connectors. Do not use flexible connectors to change directions. N. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to ducts directly or with maximum 36-inch lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place. O. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with ty-wrap tool or reusable stainless steel draw bands. P. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes. Q. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment. Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch movement during start and stop of fans. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES A. Prior to installation, examine areas where diffusers, registers and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Install diffusers, registers and grilles level and plumb. C. Outlets and Inlets Locations: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location. D. Install diffusers, registers and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. 3.7 CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT A. Comply with SMACNA Duct Construction Manual for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections. B. Make connection to motorized equipment with flexible connectors. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS-METAL DUCTS 233113 - 30 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.8 PAINTING A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through diffusers, registers and grilles and that do not have duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized-steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 09. 3.9 DOUBLE WALL PLENUMS A. Install double wall plenums and casings according to the manufacturer’s requirements. B. Apply sealant to joints, connections, and mountings. C. Field-cut openings for pipe and conduit penetrations; insulate and seal according to SMACNA Duct Construction Manual. D. Support casings on floor or foundation system. Secure and seal to base. E. Support components rigidly with ties, braces, brackets and anchors of types that will maintain housing shape and prevent buckling. F. Align wall accurately at connections, with 1/8-inch misalignment tolerance and with smooth interior surfaces. G. Prepare and submit test and inspection reports. 3.10 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM CLEANLINESS A. Maintain ductwork in accordance with SMACNA “Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines.” Maintain Advanced Cleanliness Level as defined in the guideline. B. Air Distribution System Cleanliness Verification and Testing: 1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present. 2. Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Architect, for cleanliness according to "Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR 2013, "Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC Systems." a. Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter media shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm. 3. Air distribution system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. C. Unless noted otherwise (e.g. existing ductwork), clean duct systems and components that do not pass visual inspection or random testing as follows: 1. Use service openings for entry and inspection. a. Create new openings and install access panels or doors appropriate for static-pressure class if required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. b. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. c. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process. 2. Particulate Collection and Odor Control: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS-METAL DUCTS 233113 - 31 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 a. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles. b. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building. 3. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits: a. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers). b. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies. c. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains. d. Coils and related components. e. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and splitter vanes except in ceiling plenums and mechanical equipment rooms. f. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and splitter vanes. g. Dedicated exhaust, ventilation and makeup air system components. h. Plenums. 4. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology: a. Clean metal duct air distribution systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building. b. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure. c. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories. d. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth. e. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA ACR 2013. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins. f. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures. g. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents if fungus is present. Apply antimicrobial agents according to manufacturer's written instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS-METAL DUCTS 233113 - 32 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.11 START UP AND ADJUSTING A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in other Sections of Division 23. B. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers and grilles to air patterns indicated or as directed, before the start of air balancing. 3.12 DUCT SEALING A. Duct Sealant and Leakage Fraction: Seal ducts to the following seal and leak classes. For purposes of this specification seal class identified shall be used only to define specific seams and joints to be sealed and applies to all duct pressure classes. 1. Seal Class A as defined by ASHRAE 90.1: A ductwork sealing category that requires sealing all transverse joints, longitudinal seams, and duct wall penetrations. Duct wall penetrations are openings made by pipes, holes, conduit, tie rods, or wires. Longitudinal seams are joints oriented in the direction of airflow. Transverse joints are connections of two duct sections oriented perpendicular to airflow. 2. Leakage factors specified are as recommended in the ASHRAE Systems and Equipment Handbook. Duct Construction Class Pressure SMACNA Seal Class Maximum Allowable Leakage Fraction*** 10 inches water column (2500 Pa) Pos. or Neg. A 2 percent * 5 percent** 6 inches water column (1500 Pa) Pos. or Neg. A 2 percent * 5 percent** 4 inches water column (1000 Pa) Pos. or Neg. A 2 percent * 5 percent** 3 inches water column (750 Pa) Pos. or Neg. A 2 percent * 5 percent** 2 inches water column (500 Pa) Pos. or Neg. A 2 percent * 5 percent** *2 percent of system air flow rate for return and supply ducts outdoors and exhaust ducts indoors. **5 percent of system air flow rate for all other duct. ***See “FIELD QUALITY CONTROL” Article, Sub-Articles “Duct System Leakage Tests” and “Leakage Factor/Leakage Fraction” in this Section. 3.13 DUCT SCHEDULE A. Duct Construction: Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel except as otherwise indicated. Duct pressure classification criteria: Duct system pressure classification shall be determined based on the following criteria: General Duct Service Duct Construction Minimum Pressure Classification Criteria Fan Discharge = Positive Return Inlet = Negative Exhaust Inlet = Negative Duct Material of Construction Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS-METAL DUCTS 233113 - 33 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 General Duct Service Duct Construction Minimum Pressure Classification Criteria Fan Discharge = Positive Return Inlet = Negative Exhaust Inlet = Negative Duct Material of Construction VAV air handling unit supply ductwork from AHU to terminal box inlet 125 percent of unit external static pressure shown in the equipment schedules – minimum 4 inches water column G90 galvanized Ductwork downstream of supply air terminal boxes and air valves and upstream of return and nonlaboratory exhaust terminal boxes and air valves. 2 inches water column G90 galvanized (except where noted otherwise) All ducts connected to local terminal units including fan coil units, furnaces and heat pumps. 2 inches water column G90 galvanized Ductwork containing unconditioned air from outside intake location to equipment being served 100 percent of air handling unit or fan external static pressure, minimum 2 inches water column G90 galvanized Supply, return and exhaust ducts connected to equipment not listed or otherwise identified in this Section 4 inches water column G90 galvanized All outdoor non-insulated ductwork. 125 percent of fan or unit external static pressure shown in the equipment schedules – minimum of 4 inches water column, air and water tight. Welded 304L stainless steel with No. 3 Finish **Construct at the next higher SMACNA pressure class when calculation results in a fractional condition. (e.g. where fan external static is 4 inches water column and test pressure is defined as 110 percent of the fans external static pressure, 1.1 x 4 = 4.4; duct shall be constructed at 6 inches water column pressure class). All ductwork exposed in occupied spaces shall be considered finished material and shall be cleaned of all contractor markings. Provide Number 4 finish for all exposed stainless steel ductwork. Concealed stainless steel ductwork shall be 2B finish. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS-METAL DUCTS 233113 - 34 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Laboratory Specific Duct Service Duct Construction Minimum Pressure Classification Criteria Fan Discharge = Positive Exhaust Inlet = Negative Duct Material of Construction Laboratory VAV exhaust ductwork from terminal box or air valve outlet to exhaust fan inlet 125 percent of exhaust fan external static pressure shown in the equipment schedules – minimum of 4 inches water column, air and water tight. G90 Galvanized Laboratory exhaust ductwork on exhaust fan discharge 125 percent of exhaust fan external static pressure shown in the equipment schedules – minimum of 4 inches water column, air and water tight. Welded 304L stainless steel Laboratory exhaust upstream of terminal boxes and air valves NOT serving fume hoods, biological safety cabinets and point exhaust (e.g. storage cabinet and snorkel exhausts) 2 inches water column G90 galvanized (except where noted otherwise) Laboratory branch ducts from fume hoods, class II type A2 and type B1 biological safety cabinets and point exhaust (e.g. chemical storage cabinet and snorkel exhaust) through exhaust terminal box and air valve to the duct main. 2 inches water column from room to exhaust valve, VAV exhaust duct pressure class between exhaust valve and duct main, air and water tight. Welded 304L stainless steel (except where noted otherwise) **Construct at the next higher SMACNA pressure class when calculation results in a fractional condition. (e.g. where fan external static is 4 inches water column and test pressure is defined as 110 percent of the fans external static pressure, 1.1 x 4 = 4.4; duct shall be constructed at 6 inches water column pressure class). All ductwork exposed in occupied spaces shall be considered finished material and shall be cleaned of all contractor markings. Provide Number 4 finish for all exposed stainless steel ductwork. Concealed stainless steel ductwork shall be 2B finish. B. Intermediate Reinforcement: 1. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel. 2. Stainless-Steel Ducts: a. Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material. b. Not Exposed to Airstream: Galvanized. 3. Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum. C. Double-Wall Duct Interstitial Insulation: 1. For supply return and exhaust ducts comply with Division 23 requirements for duct insulation thicknesses identified by climate zone. D. Elbow Configuration: 1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA Duct Construction Manual, Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows." a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS-METAL DUCTS 233113 - 35 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio. 1) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. 2. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA Duct Construction Manual, Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows." a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA Duct Construction Manual, Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments. 1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three segments for 90-degree elbow. 2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments for 90-degree elbow. 3) Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segments for 90-degree elbow. 4) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5. b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated. c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam for nonwelded ductwork. Provide welded elbows where welded ductwork is provided. E. Branch Configuration: 1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA Duct Construction Manual, Figure 4-6, "Branch Connections," except straight taps shall not be used. a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry. b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: conical or bell-mouth only 2. Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA Duct Construction Manual, Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted only in connections to existing duct. a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm : Conical tap. c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral. 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. 2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be performed. 3. Operate fire, smoke, and combination fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that proper heat-response device is installed. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS-METAL DUCTS 233113 - 36 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 4. Inspect splitter vanes for proper and secure installation. 5. Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of operator and damper. B. Duct System Leakage Tests: 1. Unless otherwise noted in this section, leakage test procedures shall comply with SubChapter 4.1 of the 2012 SMACNA Leak Test Manual, except Sections 2, 3, 7 (Section 7.a, 7.b, and 7.c are applicable only as referenced in the Article “Leakage Factor/Leakage Fraction” in this section) and 10.m (smoke tests shall not be conducted without written consent of the Architect) 2. Leakage test apparatus shall comply with Chapter 6 of the SMACNA Leak Test Manual. Flow measuring equipment shall have a calibrated accuracy of plus or minus 3 percent of the maximum allowable air flow leakage rate of the duct section being tested. Calibration certificates, showing acceptable instrument accuracy and dated within 90 days of leakage tests, of all instrumentation (flow, temperature, pressure) shall be submitted with test reports 3. Unless otherwise noted, allowable system leakage shall be expressed as a fraction (percentage) of the total system flow as recommended in Chapter 19 of the ASHRAE Systems Handbook, article “Leakage Testing” beginning on page 19.3. a. All outdoor supply and return ductwork shall have a leakage fraction less than or equal to 2 percent of the system air flow. b. All indoor exhaust ductwork shall have a leakage fraction less than or equal to 2 percent of the system air flow. c. All other ductwork shall have a leakage fraction less than or equal to 5 percent of the system air flow. 4. Leakage tests shall be conducted at the pressure classification of the ductwork being tested. Do not exceed the installed duct pressure class rating. 5. Submit a test report for each test. Reports shall comply with SMACNA Leak Test Manual, Sub-Chapters 7.1, 7.2 (excepting the reference to Table 5-1; Leakage Class and Seal Class shall be as indicated in the Articles of this Section), 7.3 (except Figure 5-1 or Appendix E shall not be used to determine leakage factor; leakage factor shall be calculated by the Contractor. Calculations shall be submitted to the Architect for review prior to conducting tests). 6. See Article “Leakage Factor/Leakage Fraction” in this Section for calculation methodology. 7. Duct leakage testing shall be performed with takeoffs, dampers (fire, smoke, control, combination fire/smoke manual volume control, etc.) duct mounted coils, and access doors installed. 8. Duct leakage tests shall not include the leakage of air handlers or terminal equipment (e.g. VAV boxes, air valves, fan coil units, heat pumps). Provide necessary arrangements so these devices are isolated from the duct sections under test. 9. Air handlers, and terminal equipment shall be tested separately, their leakage shall be included in the overall system leakage. The total system (e.g. duct, AHU, dampers, access doors, duct coils) leakage shall not exceed 5 percent of the total airflow of the system generated at the fan (e.g. AHU). 10. Division 23 for testing, adjusting, and balancing for HVAC for additional requirements. 11. Leak test the following systems: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS-METAL DUCTS 233113 - 37 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 a. 100 percent of exterior ductwork regardless of pressure class. b. 100 percent of interior ductwork with a pressure class 3 inches water column or higher. c. All other ductwork: Test representative duct sections, selected by Architect from sections installed, totaling no less than 25 percent of total installed duct area. If any original section fails, another 25% shall be chosen to be tested. If any section of the second 25% fails, the entire duct system shall be leak tested 12. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements. 13. Test for leaks before applying external insulation. 14. Give seven day advance notice for testing to the Architect. a. Notification regarding testing of Smoke Management systems shall be directed to the Owner, Architect and Special Inspector for Smoke Control systems. C. Leakage Factor/Leakage Fraction 1. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure class of the system or section being tested. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design pressure class. 2. For each fan system (fan system includes air handling unit fans) with ductwork required to be leak tested, the contractor shall determine the normalized air flow rate per square foot of duct surface area (Qfn) based on the ductwork shop drawings and the approved fan (AHU, etc) shop drawings. 3. Contractor shall determine the duct surface area for each main, branch main branch and sub branch of duct connected to each fan system with ductwork required to be leak tested for each change in designed air flow carried in the duct. 4. Leakage class (Cl) can be determined in accordance with ASHRAE/IES 90.1 by using the leakage fraction (Qlf), translated into a decimal, specified duct pressure class (Cp) and system air flow rate normalized per square foot of system duct surface area (Qfn)as follows: a. Cl = (Qlf * Qfn) / (Cp ^ 0.65) b. To comply with ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Article 6.4.4.2.2, leakage class (Cl) shall be no greater than 4. When calculating leakage class, contractor shall reduce the leakage fraction, Qlf, as necessary to ensure leakage class does not exceed 4. See calculation example in the Article below. 5. For those systems wherein leakage testing will be conducted in sub-sections of the overall duct system, comply with the recommended procedures for calculating the allowable leakage fraction in a test sub-section described in Chapter 19 of the ASHRAE Systems Handbook Article “Calculating Test Section Allowable Leakage” beginning on page 19.4 6. Should testing reveal greater than the allowable leakage, inspect, re-seal and re-test as necessary and as described in Sections 7.a, 7.b, and 7.c of Sub-Paragraph 4.1 of the SMACNA Leak Test Manual (excepting that smoke tests shall not be conducted without express written consent of the Architect) to attain a measured air flow leakage from the test section equal to or less than the allowable air flow leakage from the test section. 7. For an example of the preceding paragraphs, refer to the Article “Leakage Test Example Calculations” in this Section. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS-METAL DUCTS 233113 - 38 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.15 ASHRAE SYSTEMS HANDBOOK COMPLIANT DUCT LEAKAGE ALLOWANCE SAMPLE CALCULATION A. Example System Description and Diagram 1. The supply side of a penthouse air handling unit designed to produce 100,000 CFM with an external static pressure of 4.5 inches water column is connected to a 6 inches water column pressure class duct riser system, serving five stories of office space. Each story will be supplied 20,000 CFM through a 4 inches water column pressure class branch main duct routed on the office floor and connected to 25 VAV terminal units. Downstream of the VAV terminal will be 2 inches water column pressure class duct routed to ceiling diffusers. The penetrations through the shaft on each floor will be protected by a combination smoke/fire damper with associated access doors, the branch connections will have manual volume dampers for balancing; VAV boxes will have duct mounted reheat coils. a. Section 1: The surface area of the supply duct work in the penthouse is measured to be 750 square feet between the AHU discharge and the riser shaft and carries 100,000 CFM b. Section 2 The surface area of the supply riser between the shaft entrance and the first take-off connection is 270 square feet and carries 100,000 CFM. c. Section 3 – 6: The surface area between each subsequent take-off on the next four floors is 360 square feet between levels 5 and 4 (80,000 CFM); 325 square feet between level 4 and 3 (60,000 CFM); 265 square feet between levels 3 and 2 (40,000 CFM) and 200 square feet between levels 2 and 1 (20,000 CFM). d. Section 7 – 8: The surface area of the branch main duct, including access doors, fire/smoke dampers and manual volume dampers, on each floor is 3,500 square feet, each VAV terminal has a 40 square foot surface area inlet connection (800 CFM). e. Section 9: Downstream of each VAV box there is 150 square feet of surface area, including manual volume dampers, access doors and reheat coils, of distribution duct to 4 diffusers. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS-METAL DUCTS 233113 - 39 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 AHU Outdoor or Penthouse/ Mechanical Room Ductwork Level 5 Level 4 Level 3 Level 2 Level 1 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 9 9 9 9 Duct Leakage Test Example Diagram B. Calculations for 6 inches water column pressure class in the example. Contractor to perform calculations for all pressure classes and duct sections to be tested. 1. The total surface area of the duct is: a. 750 (duct in penthouse) + 270 (duct between penthouse and level 5) + 360 (duct between L5 and L4) + 325 (duct between L4 and L3) + 265 (duct between L3 and L2) + 200 (duct between L2 and L1) + 3500 * 5 (total branch main duct on all floors) + 25*5*40 (total VAV inlet branch connections) + 25*5*150 (total duct downstream of VAV) = 43,420 square feet. 2. Determine the normalized air flow of each section of duct (example continues for the 6 inches water column pressure class duct only, contractor to continue for all duct and pressures classes required to be leakage tested). a. Penthouse duct; Qfn = 100,000 / 750 = 133.33 CFM/SF b. Riser between PH and Level 5: Qfn = 100,000 / 270 = 370.37 CFM/SF c. Riser between L5 and L4 : Qfn = 80,000 / 360 = 222.22 CFM/SF d. Riser between L4 and L3; Qfn = 60,000 / 325 = 184.61 CFM/SF Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS-METAL DUCTS 233113 - 40 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 e. Riser between L3 and L2: Qfn = 40,000 / 265 = 150.94 CFM/SF f. Riser between L2 and L1: Qfn = 20,000 / 200 = 100 CFM/SF 3. Determine the leakage class each section of duct (example continues for the 6 inches water column pressure class duct only, contractor to continue for all duct and pressure classes required to be leakage tested). Cl = Qfl * Qfn / (Cp ^ 0.65). Qfl shall be set to allowable leakage fraction (0.02 for outdoor/mechanical room ductwork. 0.02 for all exhaust ductwork and 0.05 for all other ductwork). If calculations result in a leakage class greater than 4, reduce the allowable leakage fraction Qfl for that section to attain Cl = 4 or less. The adjusted value of Qfl for that section shall be used in subsequent calculations to determine allowable leakage from the affected duct section. a. Penthouse duct: Cl = .02 * 133.33 / (6 ^ 0.65) = .83 b. Riser between PH and Level 5: Cl = .05 * 370.37 / (6 ^ .065) = 5.77 c. Riser between L5 and L4 : Cl = .05 * 222.22 / (6 ^ .065) = 3.46 d. Riser between L4 and L3: Cl = .05 * 184.61 / (6 ^ .065) = 2.88 e. Riser between L3 and L2: Cl = .05 * 150.94 / (6 ^ .065) = 2.35 f. Riser between L2 and L1: Cl = .05 * 100 / (6 ^ .065) = 1.56 4. Determine the duct section area to total duct area ratio for each section of duct (example continues for the 6 inches water column pressure class duct only, contractor to continue for all duct and pressure classes required to be leakage tested). a. Penthouse duct: Section Area / Total Area = 750 / 43,420 = 0.017 b. Riser between PH and Level 5: 270 / 43,420 = 0.006 c. Riser between L5 and L4 : 360 / 43,420 = 0.0083 d. Riser between L4 and L3: 325 / 43,420 = 0.0075 e. Riser between L3 and L2: 265/ 43,420 = 0.0061 f. Riser between L2 and L1: 200 / 43,420 = 0.0046 5. Determine the allowable leakage per section of duct (example continues for the 6 inches water column pressure class duct only, contractor to continue for all duct and pressure classes required to be leakage tested). Allowable leakage = (Section to total area ratio) * (Section air flow rate) * (Section Leakage Fraction, Qlf, adjusted if necessary as described above) a. Penthouse duct: Allowable leakage = 0.017 * 100,000 * .02 = 34 CFM b. Riser between PH and Level 5: 0.006 * 100,000 * .05 = 30 CFM c. Riser between L5 and L4 : 0.0083 * 80,000 * .05 = 33.2 CFM d. Riser between L4 and L3: 0.0075 * 60,000 * .05 = 22.5 CFM e. Riser between L3 and L2: 0.0061 * 40,000 * .05 = 12.2 CFM f. Riser between L2 and L1: 0.0046 * 20,000 * .05 = 4.6 CFM 6. The total allowable leakage in the duct system is the sum of the allowable leakage from each section of duct. For this example, the allowable leakage in the 6 inches water column pressure class duct sections is 136.5 CFM. Contractor shall continue these calculations for all pressure-classes to be tested to get a resulting total leakage allowed from the duct system. C. Total System Leakage Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS-METAL DUCTS 233113 - 41 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. The calculations above are for duct and accessories testing only and do not include leakage from air handlers or terminal equipment (see the Article “Duct System Leakage Tests” in the “Field Quality Control” Article) which are tested separately or leakage is published by the manufacturer and are considered “fixed” leakages. 2. The total system leakage, including “fixed” leakage, shall not exceed 5 percent of the total air flow for the fan (AHU, etc.) system being tested. If calculations of allowable duct leakage indicate a total system leakage, including “fixed” leakage values, exceeds 5 percent of the total fan (AHU, etc.) system flow; the leakage fraction (Qlf) of some or all of ductwork shall be reduced and the calculations repeated until total calculated leakage is less than or equal to 5 percent of the fan (AHU, etc.) system, total flow rate. 3. “Fixed” leakages may be determined by the manufacturer or field tested at the design pressure class. If the manufacturers’ data are to be utilized, the leakage rate published by the manufacturers shall be adjusted to the design pressure class and calculated leakage class of the ductwork in which the item is installed. a. For example, the AHU described above has been determined by the manufacturer to leak 1 percent of the total air flow at 4 inches water column. As the AHU is installed in 6 inches water column pressure class duct, the “fixed” leakage rate for the AHU shall be calculated as follows: 1) AHU “fixed” leakage = Manufacturers stated leakage rate * AHU design flow rate * (design pressure class / manufacturer’s test pressure class) ^ .65 = 0.01 * 100,000 * (6/4)^.65 = 1301.55 CFM 2) In this example, 1.3 percent of the total system allowable leakage is allotted to the AHU; meaning either the duct construction (plus other “fixed” leakages) must result in no more than 3.7 percent of the total system flow rate in leaks or the manufacturer must be consulted to reduce the AHU leakage. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\233113_AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS-METAL DUCT.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 233416 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 233416 - CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: For each product. 1. Exhaust fans 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each fan. 2. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 3. Certified fan sound-power ratings. 4. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. 5. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts. 6. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 4. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases. 5. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, and base weights. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Show fan room layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate and certify field measurements. B. Field quality-control reports. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 233416 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For centrifugal fans to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. AMCA Compliance: 1. Comply with AMCA performance requirements and bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. 2. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.2 ROOFTOP EXHAUST FANS WITH INTEGRAL ENERGY RECOVERY PLENUM A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Greenheck 2. MK Plastics 3. Strobic B. Description: 1. Factory-fabricated, -assembled, -tested, and -finished, fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor, drive assembly, and support structure. 2. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations. C. Housings: 1. Formed panels to make curved-scroll housings with shaped cutoff. 2. Panel Bracing: Steel angle- or channel-iron member supports for mounting and supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories. 3. Horizontally split, bolted-flange housing. 4. Spun inlet cone with flange. 5. Outlet flange. D. Shafts: 1. Statically and dynamically balanced and selected for continuous operation at maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower, with adjustable alignment and belt tensioning. 2. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with protective coating of lubricating oil. 3. Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of fan's speed range. E. Prelubricated and Sealed Shaft Bearings: 1. Self-aligning, pillow-block-type bearings. 2. Roller-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 11, Ll0 at 120,000 hours. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 233416 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 F. Belt Drives: 1. Factory mounted, with adjustable alignment and belt tensioning. 2. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.3. 3. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at factory. 4. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp; fixed pitch for use with larger motors. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions. 5. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives. 6. Belt Guards: Fabricate to comply with OSHA and SMACNA requirements of diamondmesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime coated. Secure to fan or fan supports without short circuiting vibration isolation. Include provisions for adjustment of belt tension, lubrication, and use of tachometer with guard in place. 7. Motor Mount: Adjustable for belt tensioning. G. Accessories: 1. Access for Inspection, Cleaning, and Maintenance: Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. 2. Scroll Drain Connection: NPS 1 steel pipe coupling welded to low point of fan scroll. 3. Companion Flanges: Rolled flanges for duct connections of same material as housing. 4. Variable Inlet Vanes: With blades supported at both ends with two permanently lubricated bearings of same material as housing. Variable mechanism terminating in single control lever with control shaft for double-width fans. 5. Discharge Dampers: Assembly with opposed blades constructed of two plates formed around and to shaft, channel frame, and sealed ball bearings; with blades linked outside of airstream to single control lever of same material as housing. Damper shall include a seal to provide a tight closure. Damper shall not leak in excess of 4 CFM per square foot of damper area when closed against 1.0 in. w.c. when tested in accordance with AMCA standard 500. 6. Inlet Screens: Grid screen of same material as housing. 7. Shaft Cooler: Metal disk between bearings and fan wheel, designed to dissipate heat from shaft. 8. Spark-Resistant Construction: AMCA type B. 9. Shaft Seals: Airtight seals installed around shaft on drive side of single-width fans. 10. Weather Cover: Enameled-steel sheet with ventilation slots, bolted to housing. 11. Corrosion resistant coating: refer to schedule. 2.3 MOTORS A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23, Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 233416 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210/ASHRAE 51, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance Rating." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install fans level and plumb. B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to the final location, according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 23, Air Duct Accessories. B. Install ducts adjacent to fans to allow service and maintenance. C. Install piping from scroll drain connection, with trap with seal equal to 1.5 times specified static pressure, to nearest floor drain with pipe sizes matching the drain connection. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. C. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative: 1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. 3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards. 5. Adjust belt tension. 6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. 7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. 9. See Division 23, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing For HVAC for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. 10. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Controls and equipment will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 233416 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 E. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain centrifugal fans. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\233416 FL - HVAC FANS.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR TERMINAL UNITS 233600 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 233600 - AIR TERMINAL UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Office shutoff, single-duct air terminal units. 2. Laboratory venture type single-duct air terminal units. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the following products, including rated capacities, furnished specialties, sound-power ratings, and accessories. 1. Air terminal units. 2. Liners and adhesives. 3. Sealants and gaskets. 4. Seismic-restraint devices. B. Shop Drawings: For air terminal units. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 3. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration isolation. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved: 1. Ceiling suspension assembly members. 2. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustic tile. 3. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings. B. Field quality-control reports. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR TERMINAL UNITS 233600 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air terminal units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01, Operation and Maintenance Data, include the following: 1. Instructions for resetting minimum and maximum air volumes. 2. Instructions for adjusting software set points. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-Up." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible". 2.2 OWNER STANDARD DELEGATION OF PROVISION A. Office type single duct air terminal units should be provided by the sheetmetal contractor. Laboratory type air valves shall be provided by BACS contractor. 2.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.4 OFFICE SHUTOFF, SINGLE-DUCT AIR TERMINAL UNITS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Anemostat Products; a Mestek Company. 2. Carnes. 3. Environmental Technologies, Inc. 4. Krueger. 5. METALAIRE, Inc. 6. Nailor Industries Inc. 7. Phoenix Controls Corporation. 8. Price Industries. 9. Titus. 10. Trane; a business of American Standard Companies. 11. Trox USA Inc.; a subsidiary of the TROX GROUP. 12. Tuttle & Bailey. 13. Warren Technology. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR TERMINAL UNITS 233600 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Configuration: Volume-damper assembly inside unit casing with control components inside a protective metal shroud. C. Casing: 0.034-inch steel, single wall. 1. Air Inlet: Round stub connection or S-slip and drive connections for duct attachment. 2. Air Outlet: S-slip and drive connections, size matching inlet size. 3. Access: Removable panels for access to parts requiring service, adjustment, or maintenance; with airtight gasket. 4. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. D. Regulator Assembly: System-air-powered bellows section incorporating polypropylene bellows for volume regulation and thermostatic control. Bellows shall operate at temperatures from 0 to 140 deg F, shall be impervious to moisture and fungus, shall be suitable for 10-inch wg static pressure, and shall be factory tested for leaks. E. Volume Damper: Galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-lubricating bearings. 1. Maximum Damper Leakage: ARI 880 rated, 2 percent of nominal airflow at 3-inch wg inlet static pressure. 2. Damper Position: Normally open. F. Direct Digital Controls: Single-package unitary controller and actuator specified in Division 23, Instrumentation and Control for HVAC. 2.5 LABORATORY VENTURI TYPE SHUTOFF, SINGLE-DUCT AIR TERMINAL UNITS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Phoenix Controls Corporation low pressure Accel. 2. Accutrol AVC5000 vortex shedding type air valves. B. Configuration: Volume-damper assembly inside unit casing with control components inside a protective metal shroud. C. Regulator Assembly: System-air-powered bellows section incorporating polypropylene bellows for volume regulation and thermostatic control. Bellows shall operate at temperatures from 0 to 140 deg F, shall be impervious to moisture and fungus, shall be suitable for 10-inch wg static pressure, and shall be factory tested for leaks. D. Volume Damper: Galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-lubricating bearings. 1. Maximum Damper Leakage: ARI 880 rated, 2 percent of nominal airflow at 3-inch wg inlet static pressure. 2. Damper Position: Normally open. 3. Fail positions: a. Fume hood exhaust –open b. Supply air – closed c. General exhaust - closed E. Direct Digital Controls: Single-package unitary controller and actuator specified in Division 23, Instrumentation and Control for HVAC. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR TERMINAL UNITS 233600 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 F. Air valves shall have pressure independent operation over a 0.3” to 3.0” drop across the valve; shall respond and maintain a specific airflow within three seconds of a change in duct static pressure. 2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts. B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation. C. Steel Cables: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603. D. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device. E. Air Terminal Unit Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. F. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes and plates for units with steel casings; aluminum for units with aluminum casings. 2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Tests: Test assembled air terminal units according to ARI 880. 1. Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, maximum and minimum factory-set airflows, and ARI certification seal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install air terminal units according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." B. Install air terminal units level and plumb. Maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance. C. Install wall-mounted thermostats. 3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports." B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes and for slabs more than 4 inches thick. 4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes and for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints. C. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR TERMINAL UNITS 233600 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Connect ducts to air terminal units according to Division 23, Metal Ducts. B. Make connections to air terminal units with flexible connectors complying with requirements in Division 23, Air Duct Accessories. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, and maximum and minimum factory-set airflows. Comply with requirements in Division 23, Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment for equipment labels and warning signs and labels. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. C. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. D. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing air terminal units and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Leak Test: After installation, fill water coils and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. E. Air terminal unit will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.6 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Verify that inlet duct connections are as recommended by air terminal unit manufacturer to achieve proper performance. 3. Verify that controls and control enclosure are accessible. 4. Verify that control connections are complete. 5. Verify that nameplate and identification tag are visible. 6. Verify that controls respond to inputs as specified. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR TERMINAL UNITS 233600 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air terminal units. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\233600 FL - AIR TERMINAL UNITS.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION 234100 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 234100 - PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pleated panel filters. 2. V-bank cell filters. 3. Filter gages. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include dimensions; operating characteristics; required clearances and access; rated flow capacity, including initial and final pressure drop at rated airflow; efficiency and test method; fire classification; furnished specialties; and accessories for each model indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For air filters. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Show filter rack assembly, dimensions, materials, and methods of assembly of components. 2. Include setting drawings, templates, and requirements for installing anchor bolts and anchorages. 3. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of filter and rack to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Provide one complete set(s) of filters for each filter bank. If system includes prefilters, provide only prefilters. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION 234100 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. ASHRAE Compliance: 1. Comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 4 - "Outdoor Air Quality"; Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment"; and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup." 2. Comply with ASHRAE 52.1 for arrestance and ASHRAE 52.2 for MERV for methods of testing and rating air-filter units. C. Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLEATED PANEL FILTERS A. Description: Factory-fabricated, self-supported, extended-surface, pleated, panel-type, disposable air filters with holding frames. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Camfil Farr. b. Filtration Group. c. Freundenberg Filter Division brand Viledon d. Tri-Dim Filter Corporation. B. Filter Unit Class: UL 900. C. Media: Interlaced glass or synthetic fibers coated with nonflammable adhesive. 1. Adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 3. Media shall be coated with an antimicrobial agent. 4. Separators shall be bonded to the media to maintain pleat configuration. 5. Welded wire grid shall be on downstream side to maintain pleat. 6. Media shall be bonded to frame to prevent air bypass. 7. Support members on upstream and downstream sides to maintain pleat spacing. D. Filter-Media Frame: Cardboard frame with perforated metal retainer sealed or bonded to the media. E. Mounting Frames: Provided by AHU and exhaust fan system manufacturers. Welded galvanized steel, with gaskets and fasteners; suitable for bolting together into built-up filter banks. 2.2 V-BANK CELL FILTERS A. Description: Factory-fabricated, disposable, packaged air filters with media angled to airflow, and with holding frames. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION 234100 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. AAF International. b. Airguard. c. Camfil Farr. d. Columbus Industries, Inc. e. CRS Industries, Inc.; CosaTron Division. f. D-Mark. g. Filtration Group. h. Flanders-Precisionaire. i. Koch Filter Corporation. j. Purafil, Inc. k. Research Products Corp. l. Tri-Dim Filter Corporation. B. Filter Unit Class: UL 900. C. Media: Fibrous material constructed so individual pleats are maintained in tapered form under rated-airflow conditions by flexible internal supports. 1. Adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 3. Media shall be coated with an antimicrobial agent. D. Filter-Media Frames: Galvanized steel or Hard polyurethane foam. E. Mounting Frames: Welded galvanized steel, with gaskets and fasteners; suitable for bolting together into built-up filter banks. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Position each filter unit with clearance for normal service and maintenance. Anchor filter holding frames to substrate. B. Install filters in position to prevent passage of unfiltered air. C. Install filter gage for each filter bank. D. Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place. Replace temporary filters used during construction and testing with new, clean filters. E. Install filter-gage, static-pressure taps upstream and downstream from filters. Install filter gages on filter banks with separate static-pressure taps upstream and downstream from filters. Mount filter gages on outside of filter housing or filter plenum in an accessible position. Adjust and level inclined gages. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION 234100 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 F. Coordinate filter installations with duct and air-handling-unit installations. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. B. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Operate automatic roll filters to demonstrate compliance with requirements. 2. Test for leakage of unfiltered air while system is operating. D. Air filter will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.3 CLEANING A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing of air-handling and airdistribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filter media. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\234100 FL - PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC 235700 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 235700 - HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes shell-and-tube heat exchangers. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints and for designing bases. 2. Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. C. Coordination Drawings: Equipment room, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved: 1. Tube-removal space. 2. Structural members to which heat exchangers will be attached. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For heat exchangers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, performance, and dimensional requirements of heat exchangers and are based on the specific equipment indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements." B. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label heat exchangers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1. C. Registration: Fabricate and label shell-and-tube heat exchangers to comply with the Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association's standards. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC 235700 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS 2.2 SHELL-AND-TUBE HEAT EXCHANGERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Amtrol 2. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. 3. ITT Industries; Bell & Gossett. 4. Patterson Kelly 5. Taco, Inc. B. Configuration: U-tube or straight tube as scheduled on drawings with removable bundle. C. Shell Materials: Steel. Shell design pressure shall be 150 psig. Shell test pressure shall be 300 psig. D. Head: 1. Materials: Cast iron. 2. Flanged and bolted to shell. E. Tube: 1. Seamless copper tubes. 2. Tube diameter is determined by manufacturer based on service. 3. Tube design pressure shall be 150 psig at 375 degrees F. Tube test pressure shall be 250 psig. F. Tubesheet Materials: Steel tubesheets. G. Baffles: Stainless steel. H. Piping Connections: 1. Shell: Inlet and outlet fluid connections (flanged or threaded) shall match piping specification requirements for the pipe connection sizes provided. , Threaded drain, and vent connections. 2. Head: Inlet and outlet fluid connections (flanged or threaded) shall match piping specification requirements for the pipe connection sizes provided. . I. Support Saddles: 1. Fabricated of material similar to shell. 2. Foot mount with provision for anchoring to support. 3. Fabricate attachment of saddle supports to pressure vessel with reinforcement strong enough to resist heat-exchanger movement during a seismic event when heat-exchanger saddles are anchored to building structure. J. Capacity and Characteristics: Refer to equipment schedules on drawings. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC 235700 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and for structural rigidity, strength, anchors, and other conditions affecting performance of heat exchangers. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 HEAT-EXCHANGER INSTALLATION A. Install shell-and-tube heat exchangers on saddle supports. B. Install shell-and-tube heat exchangers on concrete base. Concrete base is specified in Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for HVAC," and concrete materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 03. C. Concrete Bases: Anchor heat exchanger to concrete base. 1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around full perimeter of base. 2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor. 3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 5. Cast-in-place concrete materials and placement requirements are specified in Division 03. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance. Install piping connections to allow service and maintenance of heat exchangers. C. Install shutoff valves at heat-exchanger inlet and outlet connections. D. Install relief valves on heat-exchanger heated-fluid connection and install pipe relief valves, full size of valve connection, to floor drain or to outdoors as indicated on equipment details. E. Install vacuum breaker at heat-exchanger steam inlet connection. F. Install hose end valve to drain shell. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3.5 CLEANING A. After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC 235700 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain heat exchangers. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training." END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\235700_HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 CUSTOM CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237314 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 237314 - CUSTOM CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes Custom: 1. Constant-air-volume and variable air volume air-handling units. 2. Roof mounted air-handling unit supplemental requirements. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design vibration isolation including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Structural Performance: Casing panels shall be self-supporting and capable of withstanding 150 percent of internal static pressures indicated, without panel joints exceeding a deflection of L/200 where "L" is the unsupported span length within completed casings. C. Air Leakage Performance: Leakage rate of the casing shall not exceed 1 percent of the unit air flow at 8 inches of water column. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each air-handling unit indicated. 1. Unit dimensions and weight. 2. Shipping sections with dimensions and weights if units are not shipped in one piece. 3. Cabinet material, metal thickness, finishes, insulation, and accessories. 4. Fans: a. Certified fan-performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. b. Certified fan-sound power ratings. c. Fan construction and accessories. d. Motor ratings, electrical characteristics, and motor accessories. 5. Certified coil-performance ratings with system operating conditions indicated. 6. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. 7. Filters with performance characteristics. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 CUSTOM CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237314 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 8. Documentation indicating that unit construction including drain pans complies with ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment." 9. Roof curb for outdoor roof mounted units. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Mechanical-room layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. 2. Support location, type, and weight. 3. Field measurements. 4. Structural members to which RTUs will be attached. 5. Roof openings 6. Roof curbs and flashing. B. Source quality-control reports. C. Fan vibration analysis report in accordance with ANSI/AMCA Standard 204-05. D. Field quality-control reports. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-handling units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Filters: One set(s) for each air-handling unit. 2. Gaskets: One set(s) for each access door. 3. Fan Belts: One set(s) for each air-handling unit fan. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A-2018 for design, fabrication, and installation of airhandling units and components. C. ARI Certification: Air-handling units and their components shall be factory tested according to ARI 430, "Central-Station Air-Handling Units," and shall be listed and labeled by ARI. D. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2016, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup." E. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2016, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning." Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 CUSTOM CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237314 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 F. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of applicable concrete housekeeping and inertia bases, structural-steel support members and roof curbs with actual equipment provided. 1.10 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. All equipment shall be delivered to the job site suitably packaged and protected for overland trucking using heavy-duty protective shrink-wrap plastic. Where multiple units are required, provide a schedule of priority and coordinate manufacturing and delivery sequence. In general, units shall be delivered in one piece unless indicated otherwise. Where building constraints, unit size or trucking limitations require that units ship in more than one piece, manufacturer shall indicate all split points on the shop drawings. All items shipped loose such as filters, caulking, etc. shall be itemized on the packing slip and be suitably secured in the unit or on a separate pallet. Receive, store and protect units from weather and damage. Units shall not be placed directly on ground. Provide wood blocks spaced along the entire perimeter of shipping modules with equipment span no greater than final unit supports. Damage to equipment or painted surfaces shall be fully repaired or replaced in accordance with manufacturer specifications. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Ventrol 2. Buffalo Custom Air Handling 3. Haakon Industries 4. TMI Climate Solutions 5. Trane Custom Air Handling Units 2.2 BUILT UP AIR HANDLER A. General 1. Provide manufacturer complete design of units, all components, complete shop and field erection of units and all components, operation and performance of units under unit manufacturer's nameplate. Coordinate the delivery and erection of all units in compliance with construction schedule; provision of all necessary external piping, ductwork and miscellaneous connections required to complete the installation of the units in cooperation with and as directed by the manufacturer. 2. The unit manufacturer shall be responsible for provision of fans, dampers and all other unit and plenum components and performance characteristics as shown in schedules and on drawings. 3. Unit shall be modular, factory-fabricated for shipping and field assembly by experienced manufacturer of large custom air handling units that maintains engineering and production staff. Maximum weight of final assembled unit (shipping weight) shall not exceed 90 lbs/SF of floor area. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 CUSTOM CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237314 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 a. Provide proof of credentials of manufacturer's staff by Owner and Design Professional. b. Provide evidence satisfactory to Owner and Design Professional that manufacturer has built and installed ten heating and cooling air handlers larger than 50,000 cfm within last three years. 4. Provide services of experienced field engineer employed by manufacturer to supervise field assembly, testing and troubleshooting of units. 5. Certify conformance with performance requirements specified and shown on Drawings. 6. Provide appurtenances to perform as specified, whether or not expressly required by Contract Documents mentioned herein in conformance with good trade practice, as determined by Design Professional. 7. Seal casing penetrations made in field for piping, conduit, tubing and equipment installed under Division 23 and 26. Advise manufacturer in advance of required field penetrations of casing. Make and seal penetrations under supervision of manufacturer's field engineer. B. Testing 1. Test at factory to ensure structural integrity, design suitability under simulated operating conditions, system operation and minimum vibration levels as specified. Certify that unit complies with design intent and Contract Documents. 2. The following factory tests shall be performed: a. Pressure test water coils if coil manufacturer has not already performed pressure test and piping. b. Air-pressure-test with fans operating at shut off pressures to ensure tight housing construction and integrity. c. Unit operation and vibration analysis. Operate fans at design rpm, set fan drive and conduct complete vibration spectrum as specified. Fan, motor, drive and base assembly vibration shall be brought to within specified levels. Check motor and drive vibration with fan as assembly. d. Energize electrical devices to ensure operational integrity prior to shipment. Replace non-functioning items. e. Air Leakage Performance: Leakage rate of the casing shall not exceed 1 percent of the unit design airflow at 150 percent of the fan rated total static pressure including dirty filters. Test shall be conducted under normal operating pressure of section (negative on inlet of fan, positive pressure on outlet of fan). Where isolation of positive and negative sections is not possible, perform testing using both positive and negative pressure. 1) Test shall be conducted in accordance with procedures outlined in the latest edition of SMACNA Duct Leakage Manual with the exception that test shall be performed under both positive and negative pressures. A calibrated orifice shall be used to measure leakage airflow. 2) In the event of failure to meet performance requirements, manufacturer shall make corrections and perform additional tests. Manufacturer shall be responsible for all costs associated with re-testing. C. Submit housing panel acoustical, structural and physical properties performance test data before shipment from independent recognized test laboratory. D. Factory Built Modular Units Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 CUSTOM CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237314 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Base: Base shall consist of 304L stainless steel or aluminum beams or channel for direct bearing support for components in casing. Base shall have lifting lugs sized for the weight of the module, minimum ½" thick welded to corners of each module. 2. Floor a. Floor shall be a minimum of 3/16" thick 304L stainless steel or aluminum safety (diamond) plate welded to sub-base. Pan shall be braced to support internal equipment components without sagging or pulsating. Provide sloped drains meeting ASHRAE 62.1 requirements with Type L copper piping extending through sides of unit or base rail. b. Underside shall be insulated continuously with 3 in, thick spray foam insulation that includes vapor barrier performance. Bottom of base shall be covered with minimum 16 gauge aluminum sheetmetal and sealed weather-tight at all joints and penetrations. 3. Drain Pan a. Main drain pan for cooling coil shall extend across entire cooling coil section and shall be 18 gauge 316 stainless steel. Sides shall be at least 4" high with threaded, capped 2” half coupling welded to one side for drainage. Coordinate connection location with layout on plans. b. Drain pan shall be insulated on underside with minimum 1" thick fiberglass board or 2” closed cell foam or with spray foam insulation. Secure board or foam insulation in place. Where fiberglass board insulation is used provide insulation with foil vapor barrier. c. The bottom of the drain pan discharge pipe leaving the unit shall be a minimum of 1.5 inches above the bottom of the base rail to allow installation of drain trap. d. Drain pan shall be double-pitched. E. Housing 1. Fan section shall be provided with perforated inner walls for acoustical reasons. Fan section shall also be provided with rigging beam for motor removal and maintenance purposes. 2. Base frame assembly shall be fabricated from a minimum of 8 ga. Galvanized steel. The floor shall employ a 16 ga. Galvanized steel outer panel, and a 3/16-inch thick aluminum or 10 ga. Stainless steel inner panel. 3. Housing walls and roof shall be separate frame and panel or integral frame and panel, aluminum or painted galvanized steel. Panel shall be constructed with no-through-metal or shall include an engineered thermal break design. a. Fasteners in steel housings shall be stainless steel screws with stainless steel washers and neoprene grommets. b. Fasteners in aluminum construction shall be closed end aluminum rivets. c. If unit is aluminum construction, inner and outer panels should be constructed with minimum 0.04 inch thick aluminum. Interior finish shall be smooth mill. 4. Panel skin thickness, stiffener and frame spacing and thickness, and core density shall be designed to eliminate panel pulsation and to limit maximum deflection to 1/200 of any span at design positive or negative pressures. Design pressure shall be equal to 1.5 times fan total static pressure including dirty filters. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 CUSTOM CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237314 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 5. Panels shall be double wall with inner solid liner and solid exterior sheet. Panels shall be minimum of 2-1/2” double wall construction with injected foam insulation or minimum 4” wall with closed cell polyisocyanurate foam insulation. a. Galvanized steel exterior surfaces shall be specially treated for painting and shall be epoxy-painted. Color selected by Design Professional. b. Inner liner shall have a minimum of R-12 insulation and shall meet or exceed a 3.0 pounds per cubic foot density material rating. 6. Panels shall be unitized in such a manner as not to disturb the insulation if panels are removed. 7. Unit construction shall incorporate thermal breaks between the inner and outer wall panels, as well as between the walls and the structure. 8. Panel deflection shall not exceed a maximum of 1/200 of any span at 1.5 times the design positive or negative pressure. 9. Panels including insulation shall meet NFPA-90A fire hazard rating requirements. 10. Panels shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E90-70, E413-73 and C423-66 for sound transmission loss and sound absorption coefficients. Panels shall meet the following minimum requirements for octave band noise transmission. Where alternate analysis is typically provided (e.g. 1/3 octave band assessment) provide adjusted data to match octave band analysis in product shop drawing for confirmation of compliance: 11. Acoustical Performance for Both Airborne Noise Transmission and Radiated Noise Transmission Wall & Roof Panels Octave Band Frequency (Hz) 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 Transmission Loss (DB) 20 21 25 34 44 51 53 60 12. Submit published acoustic test data documented by independent laboratory, to establish that panels meet minimum acoustical requirements. 13. Access doors shall be double wall with insulation as specified for panels. Doors shall close against gasket and shall be air tight. a. Provide ¼" tempered or wired glass viewing windows. Windows downstream of cooling coils shall be double glass (thermal pane), with air tight rubber seals. Provide desiccant in air space. Viewports shall be provided at each door. b. Doors shall be at least 72" or section height high x 24" wide and shall have three tapered latches to force door against gasket. c. Doors on suction side of fan shall swing out and doors on discharge side shall swing inward. Latches shall operate from both sides of door. d. Doors shall be included between each air handler component. e. Doors shall be a minimum of 2” thick, double walled with an interior liner not less than 18 ga. f. Each access door shall have aminimum of two securing latches which are also operable from inside the unit. Positively pressurized sections shall have inwardly swinging doors, while negatively pressurized doors shall swing outward. 14. Provide removable access panels or doors, for removal of coils, fan and motor. Panels shall be bolted in place. Provide supports for field mounting of unit heaters. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 CUSTOM CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237314 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 15. Panels shall be factory-sealed, air tight at corners and seams without visible caulking on casing exterior. Modules shall be assembled with caulking and gasketing in field and shall be air tight without exterior visible caulking. 16. Provide safing panels to seal coils, filter banks and attenuator banks to casing and casing to building structure shall be aluminum or stainless steel for cooling coils and aluminum, stainless or galvanized steel otherwise. a. Joints between safing and equipment and casing shall be lapped or flanged. b. Joints between steel safing and equipment and casing shall be fastened with stainless steel screws, stainless steel washers, and neoprene grommets. c. Joints between aluminum safing and equipment and casing shall be fastened with aluminum screws or closed end rivets. F. Electrical 1. Provide vapor and water tight marine 100 watt equivalent LED lighting fixtures with wire guards in each AHU compartment. A single externally wall-mounted switch shall be provided to control all interior lights. Switch shall have pilot light in handle. a. Fixture shall have cast alloy box with threaded hubs, and guard over screw-in gasketed glass diffuser. Provide 100W equivalent 120V LED lamp. b. Wiring shall be #12 copper type THWN in heavy wall galvanized rigid steel conduit. Wire to cast watertight switch boxes with switch and trim plate on exterior of casing at each access door. Each switch shall energize lights in adjoining section of casing. Provide single point connection for 120V branch circuits. c. Provide two empty rigid conduit sleeves at each compartment for use for instrumentation and controls. d. Provide local fused disconnect switch for fan motors located outside the fan enclosure. 2. Provide power wiring from fans through galvanized rigid steel conduit from each fan motor through wall of casing terminating at screw type terminal block mounted in NEMA rated enclosure. Connection to fan motor shall be liquid-tight steel conduit. Rigid conduit shall be fixed to casing and shall not interfere with operation or access. Electric work shall be in accordance with National Electrical Code and requirements of Division 26. G. DIRECT DRIVE PLENUM FAN ARRAY 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Greenheck b. Cook c. Twin Cities d. Huntair 2. Provide complete assembled multiple housed plenum fan array in configurations indicated on the Drawings. 3. Performance ratings: Conform to AMCA standard 211 and 311. Fans must be tested in accordance with ANSI/AMCA Standard 210-07 and AMCA Standard 300-08 in an AMCA accredited laboratory. Fans shall be certified to bear the AMCA seal for air and sound performance. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 CUSTOM CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237314 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 4. Manufacturer to select fans for no greater than 90 percent of Fan Class maximum RPM. When recommended selection requires greater than 90 percent of maximum fan Class RPM, provide next higher fan class. 5. Each fan shall be given an electronic vibration analysis in accordance with ANSI/AMCA Standard 204-05, while operating at the specified fan RPM. Direct drive fans vibration signatures shall be taken on the motor mounting plate in the horizontal, vertical and axial direction. The maximum allowable fan vibration shall be 0.10 in/sec peak velocity for direct drive fans, filter-in as measured at the fan RPM. 6. Fans selected shall be capable of accommodating static pressure and flow variations of +/-15 percent of scheduled values. 7. Each direct drive fan shall be in AMCA arrangement 4 according to drawings. 8. Fans are to be equipped with lifting points. 9. Individual Fan Housings a. Plenum fans shall be of the direct drive centrifugal type. Fan housing shall be structurally designed to allow stacking into configuration shown on the drawings. b. Fan plate shall be aerodynamically designed with high-efficiency inlet, engineered to reduce incoming air turbulence. c. Panels and framework shall be constructed of heavy gauge, precision laser cut and die formed galvanized steel to provide a rigid structure to support the shaft and bearings and reduce low frequency vibration. d. Fan shall be provided with minimum 2" insulated enclosure with perforated lining. e. The entire drive assembly including the inlet cone, wheel and motor assembly shall be isolated from the insulated enclosure with integral neoprene isolators. f. Provide each fan with array manufacturer standard aluminum blade inlet backdraft damper. 10. Fan Wheel a. The fan wheel shall be non-overloading airfoil centrifugal type. Wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced to grade G6.3 per ANSI S2.19. b. The fan wheel shall be manufactured with a minimum of 12 continuously welded aluminum airfoil blades to move the blade pass frequency into the mid-octave bands. c. The entire wheel shall be constructed of aluminum to reduce the rotational weight of the wheel and vibration. The wheel shall use 6063-T5 extruded aluminum blades to ensure precision blade tolerances, improve efficiency and reduce vibration. d. Wheel hubs shall be cast of 319 aluminum alloy. e. Aluminum fan wheels shall not require finish coating. f. The wheel and fan inlet shall be carefully matched and shall have precise running tolerances for maximum performance and operating efficiency. 11. Fan Motor Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 CUSTOM CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237314 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 a. Motors shall meet or exceed EPACT (Energy Policy ACT) efficiencies. Motors shall be NEMA T-frame, Open Drip Proof (ODP) or Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled (TEFC) with a 1.15 service factor. b. Motors shall be as specified in Division 23 Section “Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment” and shall be mounted on a heavy duty base, suitable for use with variable frequency drives. Motor voltage shall be as indicated in equipment schedules on drawings. c. Motor nameplates shall be stainless steel, shall be firmly attached to the frame, and shall show the data listed in NEMA MG1-10-10.39, plus motor model number, serial number, bearing numbers and enclosure type. d. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in electrical Sections. H. Water Coils 1. Coil performance shall be as scheduled on the drawings. Select coils with de-saturation circuiting. 2. All coils shall meet or exceed all capacities specified on the mechanical schedule for the project. All coil performance shall be certified by the manufacturer in accordance with AHRI Standard 410. 3. Water coils shall have 5/8" O.D., 0.035" thick copper tubes with plate type aluminum fins. a. Coil casing shall be 16 gauge 304 stainless steel. b. Headers shall be steel barrels with vents, drains and serpentine continuous tube design. Chilled water coils shall be suitable for 200 psi working pressure. Hot water and dual temperature coils shall be rated for 250 psi working pressure. c. Provide 1/2” minimum connections for ball valve air vents and drains at top and bottom of each header. d. Headers shall be non-ferrous. 4. Max fin spacing: 10FPI 5. Coils shall be housed in factory-fabricated frame independent of unit casing. Chilled water coil frames shall be 304 stainless steel. 6. Coil frames shall support coil sections independently allowing coil to be removed through unit casing, normal to direction of air flow, without disturbing other coil sections. 7. Coil casing shall have removable panel on each side. 8. After coils are piped through casing, seal pipe penetrations. 9. Each chilled water coil tier shall have condensate drain pan extending at least 1/2 coil height in direction of air flow individually piped to main unit drain pan. Provide safing to limit air bypass around coil fins. 10. Coil sections shall be eparated by a minimum of 18”. Each coil section shall have a full size access door. 11. Removable panels shall be located on both sides of the air handler unit, not just on the coil removal side. I. Air Filters 1. Frame a. Filter bank framing shall be 16 gauge galvanized steel or extruded aluminum rack system by Farr, Flanders, Cambridge or AAF. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 CUSTOM CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237314 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 b. Aluminum framing members shall be at least 0.09" thick. Frames shall be suitable for upstream or downstream filter servicing, cut to size and pre-punched for easy assembly into modules of size and capacity noted on Drawings and in Specifications. c. Framing shall be permanently gasketed to prevent bypass of unfiltered air. If required, provide suitable aluminum vertical support members to prevent deflection. Vertical supports shall not interfere with installation or operation. d. Framing system shall incorporate factory-installed positive sealing device for each row of filters, to facilitate installation and removal of cartridges while preserving seal between gasketed filter elements while bank is in operation. e. Provide hardware necessary for factory assembly. 2. Provide filters as scheduled on the drawings and as specified in Division 23. 3. The unit manufacturer shall provide front access filter frames that are factory fabricated and assembled. They shall incorporate, extruded aluminum tracks and individual universal holding frames designed to accommodate the filters specified hereinbefore. Provide for front access to filters with clips to hold filters in place. 4. Provide filter gauges for each filter as follows: a. Dwyer Phtohelic dry air filter gauge, with scale of 0 to 2" across filter, with appropriate static pressure tips, vent valves, BMS connection, and tubing with flag suitably marked to indicate need to change filter. J. Variable Frequency Controllers: 1. Comply with Division 26. K. Dampers: 1. Damper shall include a seal to provide a tight closure. Damper shall not leak in excess of 4 CFM per square foot of damper area when closed against 1.0 in. w.c. when tested in accordance with AMCA standard 500. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Fan Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Fans shall bear AMCA-certified sound ratings seal. B. Fan Performance Rating: Factory test fan performance for airflow, pressure, power, air density, rotation speed, and efficiency. Rate performance according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating." C. Water Coils: Factory tested to 300 psig according to AHRI 410 and ASHRAE 33. D. Steam Coils: Factory tested to 300 psig and to 200 psig under water according to AHRI 410 and ASHRAE 33. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 CUSTOM CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237314 - 11 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Examine casing insulation materials and filter media before air-handling unit installation. Reject insulation materials and filter media that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Examine roughing-in for hydronic, and condensate drainage piping systems and electrical services to verify actual locations of connections before installation. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Equipment Mounting: 1. Floor Mounted Units: Install air-handling units on concrete bases. Shim each section of unit prior to making final connections to other sections to ensure level and plumb installation of the completed unit and so that sections tightly bolt together around entire perimeter. Secure units to anchor bolts installed in concrete bases. Comply with requirements for concrete bases specified in Division 03. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Division 23. a. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. b. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor. c. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. d. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air-handling units for service and maintenance. C. Do not operate fan system until design MERV rated filters (temporary or permanent) are in place. Replace temporary filters used during construction and testing, with new, clean filters. D. Install filter-gage, static-pressure taps upstream and downstream of filters. Mount filter gages on outside of filter housing or filter plenum in accessible position. Provide filter gages on filter banks, installed with separate static-pressure taps upstream and downstream of filters. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to air-handling unit to allow service and maintenance. C. Connect piping to air-handling units mounted on vibration isolators with flexible connectors. D. Connect condensate drain pans using piping equal to or greater than drain pan outlet unless noted otherwise, ASTM B 88, Type M copper tubing. Extend to nearest equipment or floor drain. Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan and install cleanouts at changes in direction. E. Hot- and Chilled-Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23. Install shutoff valve and union or flange at each coil supply connection. Install balancing valve and union or flange at each coil return connection. F. Connect duct to air-handling units with flexible connections. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 CUSTOM CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237314 - 12 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.4 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Connect wiring and ground equipment according to Division 26. B. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer, but not factory mounted, according to NFPA 70 and NECA 1. C. Install nameplate for each electrical connection, indicating electrical equipment designation and circuit number feeding connection. 1. Nameplate shall be laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs according to Division 26. 3.5 CONTROL CONNECTIONS A. Install control and electrical power wiring to field-mounted control devices. B. Connect control wiring according to Division 23. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. B. Seal casing penetrations made in field for piping, conduit, tubing and equipment. Advise manufacturer in advance of required field penetrations of casing. Make and seal penetrations under supervision of manufacturer’s field engineer. C. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. D. Tests and Inspections: 1. Leak Test: After installation, fill water coils with water, and test coils and connections for leaks. 2. Fan Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 4. AHU manufacturer shall perform air leak test of the AHU at 150 percent of fan design static pressure after unit is at the site and fully assembled with all controls installed. Test shall be conducted under normal operating pressure of section (negative on inlet of fan, positive pressure on outlet of fan). Where isolation of positive and negative sections is not possible, perform testing using both positive and negative pressure. a. The test shall be performed using procedures outlined in the latest edition of SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual but shall be performed under both positive and negative pressures. All duct connections shall be capped and the individual modules (if so constructed) shall be temporarily sealed. Total acceptable leakage for the unit shall be 0.5 percent of design airflow. E. Air-handling unit or components will be considered defective if unit or components do not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 CUSTOM CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237314 - 13 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.7 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 3. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connection to piping, ducts, and electrical systems are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, controllers, and switches. 4. Verify proper motor rotation direction, free fan wheel rotation, and smooth bearing operations. Reconnect fan drive system, align belts, and install belt guards. 5. Verify that bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts are lubricated with factoryrecommended lubricants. 6. Verify that isolation dampers and face & bypass dampers open and close fully. 7. Verify that outdoor- and return-air dampers open and close, and maintain minimum outdoor-air setting. 8. Comb coil fins for parallel orientation. 9. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed for electric coils. 10. Install new, clean filters. 11. Verify that manual and automatic volume control dampers in connected duct systems are in fully open position. B. Starting procedures for air-handling units include the following: 1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust fan to indicated rpm. Replace fan and motor pulleys to achieve design conditions. 2. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage. 3. Manually operate dampers from fully closed to fully open position and record fan performance. 3.8 ADJUSTING A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. B. Comply with requirements in Division 23 for air-handling system testing, adjusting, and balancing. 3.9 CLEANING A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing air-handling unit and air-distribution systems and after completing startup service, clean air-handling units internally to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Clean fan wheels, cabinets, dampers, coils, and filter housings, and install new clean filters. 3.10 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to provide 4 hours training for Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air-handling units. Refer to Division 01 for additional demonstration and training requirements. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 CUSTOM CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237314 - 14 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\237314_CUSTOM CENTRAL STATION AHU.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR COILS 238216 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 238216 - AIR COILS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of air coils that are not an integral part of air-handling units: 1. Hot-water. 2. Energy Recovery. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each air coil. Include rated capacity and pressure drop for each air coil. B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which coil location and ceiling-mounted access panels are shown and coordinated with each other. B. Field quality-control test reports. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air coils to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. ASHRAE Compliance: 1. Comply with ASHRAE 15 for refrigeration system safety. 2. Comply with ASHRAE 33 for methods of testing cooling and heating coils. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup." Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR COILS 238216 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WATER COILS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Aerofin Corporation. 2. Carrier Corporation. 3. McQuay 4. Temtrol 5. Trane 6. Heatcraft Refrigeration Products LLC; Heat Transfer Division. B. Performance Ratings: Tested and rated according to ARI 410 and ASHRAE 33. C. Minimum Working-Pressure/Temperature Ratings: 200 psig, 325 deg F. D. Source Quality Control: Factory tested to 300 psig. E. Tubes: ASTM B 743 copper, minimum 5/8 inch thick at least 0.035” thick. F. Casing: 304 stainless steel. G. Headers: non-ferrous construction H. Fins: Aluminum, minimum 0.006 inch thick. I. Frames: Galvanized-steel channel frame, minimum 0.064 inch thick for slip in mounting. J. Connections shall not be grooved. K. Air-water shall have counter-flow arrangement. L. Provide 1/2” minimum connections for ball valve air vents and drains at the top and bottom of each header. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine ducts, plenums, and casings to receive air coils for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting coil performance. B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before coil installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install coils level and plumb. B. Install coils in metal ducts and casings constructed according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible." C. Install stainless-steel drain pan under each cooling coil. 1. Construct drain pans with connection for drain; insulated and complying with ASHRAE 62.1. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 AIR COILS 238216 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Construct drain pans to extend beyond coil length and width and to connect to condensate trap and drainage. 3. Extend drain pan upstream and downstream from coil face. 4. Extend drain pan under coil headers and exposed supply piping. D. Install moisture eliminators for cooling coils. Extend drain pan under moisture eliminator. E. Straighten bent fins on air coils. F. Clean coils using materials and methods recommended in writing by manufacturers, and clean inside of casings and enclosures to remove dust and debris. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to coils to allow service and maintenance. C. Connect water piping with unions and shutoff valves to allow coils to be disconnected without draining piping. Control valves are specified in Division 23, Instrumentation and Control for HVAC, and other piping specialties are specified in Division 23, Hydronic Piping. D. Connect steam piping with gate valve and union and steam condensate piping with union, strainer, trap, and gate valve to allow coils to be disconnected without draining piping. Control valves are specified in Division 23, Instrumentation and Control for HVAC, and other piping specialties are specified in Division 23, Steam and Condensate Heating Piping. E. Connect refrigerant piping according to Division 23, Refrigerant Piping. F. Ground equipment according to Division 26, Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. G. Connect wiring according to Division 26, "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, operate electric coils to confirm proper unit operation. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\238216 FL - AIR COILS.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 FAN COIL UNITS 238219 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 238219 - FAN COIL UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fan-coil units and accessories. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BAS: Building automation system. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved: 1. Ceiling suspension components. 2. Structural members to which fan-coil units will be attached. 3. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. 4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 5. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following: a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels. 6. Perimeter moldings for exposed or partially exposed cabinets. D. Field quality-control test reports. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fan-coil units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01, Operation and Maintenance Data, include the following: 1. Maintenance schedules and repair part lists for motors, coils, integral controls, and filters. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 FAN COIL UNITS 238219 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup." C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.12004, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning." 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of fan-coil units and suspension system components with other construction that penetrates or is supported by ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies. B. Coordinate size and location of wall sleeves for fan coil units provided with outdoor-air intake. C. Coordinate duct collar size and configuration to conform to the ductwork distribution shown on the plans and mixing box as scheduled. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of condensing units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five for compressor from date of Substantial Completion. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fan-Coil-Unit Filters: Furnish one (1) spare filter for each unit installed. 2. Fan Belts: Furnish one (1) spare fan belts for each belt drive unit installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FAN COIL UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Airtherm 2. Environmental Technologies 3. York International 4. International Environmental Corporation 5. McQuay International 6. Trane 7. Carrier Corporation 8. Williams B. Description: Factory-packaged and -tested units rated according to ARI 440, ASHRAE 33, and UL 1995. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 FAN COIL UNITS 238219 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Unit Construction: All unit chassis shall be fabricated of heavy gauge galvanized steel panels able to meet 125 hour salt spray test per ASTM B-117 D. Cabinet: Steel with baked-enamel finish in manufacturer's standard paint color as selected by Architect. 1. Vertical Unit Front Panels: Removable, steel, with steel discharge grille and channelformed edges, cam fasteners, and insulation on back of panel. 2. Horizontal Unit Bottom Panels: Fastened to unit with cam fasteners and hinge and attached with safety chain; with cast-aluminum discharge grilles. 3. Steel recessing flanges for recessing fan-coil units into ceiling or wall. E. Casing Insulation: 1/2-inchthick, foil-covered, closed-cell foam complying with ASTM C 1071 and attached with adhesive complying with ASTM C 916. Maximum thermal conductivity shall be .24 (BTU • in) / (hr • ft2 • °F) 1. Fire-Hazard Classification: Insulation and adhesive shall have a combined maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84, UL 723 and NFPA 90A. F. Main Drain Pans: Insulated galvanized steel with plastic liner. Fabricate pans and drain connections to comply with ASHRAE 62.1-2004 G. Secondary Drain Pan: Provide a secondary drain pan for condensate overflow from the primary drain pan with a condensate leak detector senor. Drain pan shall be plastic or insulated, galvanized steel with plastic liner. The switch shall be factory wired back to the unit terminal strip to shut down the fan upon leak detection and contacts to alarm DDC system. H. Chassis: Galvanized steel where exposed to moisture. Floor-mounting units shall have leveling screws. I. Filters: Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2. 1. Glass Fiber Treated with Adhesive: 80 percent arrestance and 5 MERV. 2. Pleated Cotton-Polyester Media: 90 percent arrestance and 7 MERV. J. Hydronic Coils: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than 0.1 inch, rated for a minimum working pressure of 300 psig and a maximum entering-water temperature of 220 deg F. Include manual air vent and drain valve. All coils shall be ARI 410 certified and tagged with an ARI 410 label. 1. Cooling and heating coils shall be in separate coil casings and have a minimum 2 inch gap between them and 1-1/2 inch of clearance on the entering and leaving air sides to allow access from bottom of unit for cleaning when the drain pan is removed. Common tube sheets and coil casing are not acceptable. Water coils on concealed models shall be field reversible for right, left or opposite side connections. K. Sound: Units shall have published sound power level data tested in accordance with ARI Standard 350-2000 (non-ducted equipment), ARI Standard 260-2001 (ducted equipment) and as scheduled on drawings. L. Fan Assembly: 1. Unit fan shall be a dynamically balanced, forwardly curved, DWDI centrifugal type constructed of 18 gauge zinc coated galvanized steel for corrosion resistance. Motors shall be high efficiency, permanently lubricated sleeve bearing, permanent split-capacitor type with UL and CSA listed automatic reset thermal overload protection and three separate horsepower taps or ECM motors as scheduled on drawings. Single speed motors are not acceptable. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 FAN COIL UNITS 238219 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. The fan assembly shall be easily removable for servicing the motor and blower at, or away from the unit. The entire fan assembly shall be able to come out of the unit by removing two screws and unplugging the motor. Plenum unit fan assemblies shall be easily serviced through an access panel provided. 3. Motor: Permanently lubricated, multispeed; resiliently mounted on motor board. Comply with requirements in Division 23, Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment. 4. Wiring Termination: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection. 5. ECM Motors - Motors to be DC and brush-less equal to GE ICM2+. All motors to be complete with and operated by a single phase integrated controller/inverter that operates the wound stator and senses rotor position to electrically commutate the stator. All motors to be designed for synchronous rotation. Motor to be permanent magnet type with near zero rotor losses. Motor to be built in soft start and soft speed change ramps. Motor to be direct coupled lubricated with ball bearings. Sleeve bearings are not acceptable. Motor to be direct coupled to the blower. Motor to maintain minimum efficiency of 70% over its entire operating range. The manufacture of the fan powered boxes to set the fan CFM at the factory. Fan CFM to be constant within 5% regardless of the change in static whether upstream or down stream of the terminal unit after it is installed. Fan CFM is to be set with a potentiometer. Provide a variable speed switch to allow field adjustments. Fan CFM to be remotely set at the building DDC system through the dynamic speed control at the ECM motor. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive fan-coil units for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations before fancoil-unit installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install fan-coil units level and plumb. B. Install fan-coil units to comply with NFPA 90A. C. Suspend fan-coil units from structure with specified vibration isolation. Vibration isolators are specified in Division 23, Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment. D. Install new filters in each fan-coil unit within two weeks after Substantial Completion. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Specific connection requirements are as follows: 1. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. 2. Connect condensate drain to indirect waste. a. Install condensate trap of adequate depth to seal against the pressure of fan. Install cleanouts in piping at changes of direction. 3. Secondary Drain Pain – Install secondary drain pan and liquid detector wired back to fan coil unit terminal strip to shut down unit and alarm BAS upon detection. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 FAN COIL UNITS 238219 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Connect supply and return ducts to fan-coil units with flexible duct connectors specified in Division 23, Air Duct Accessories. Comply with safety requirements in UL 1995 for duct connections. C. Ground equipment according to Division 26, Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. D. Connect wiring according to Division 26, Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing. B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and electrical connections. 3. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points. B. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fan-coil units. Refer to Division 01, Demonstration and Training. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\238219_FAN COIL UNITS.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 260500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 20000. 1. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. 2. For example, prior to requesting an occupancy permit, the documentation listed in Part 3 of Section 20000 must be submitted and approved so the Engineer can certify that the MEP systems and life safety provisions are completed. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation. 2. Sleeves for raceways and cables. 3. Sleeve seals. 4. Grout. 5. Common electrical installation requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Emergency Systems: Loads defined by NFPA 70, Article 700 “Emergency Systems”. Those systems intended to supply egress lighting. B. Legally Required Standby Systems: Loads defined by NFPA 70, Article 701 “Legally Required Standby Systems”. Those systems classified as legally required intended to supply loads such as smoke exhaust systems. C. Optional Standby Systems: Loads defined by NFPA 70, Article 702 “Optional Standby Systems”. Those systems intended to supply loads such as laboratory equipment. D. Feeder: All circuit conductors between the service equipment, the source of a separately derived system, or other power supply source and the final branch-circuit overcurrent. Feeders may be identified in the “Legend of Feeder Sizes” identified on the drawings. All feeders are required to be in conduit. MC cable is not permitted unless specifically approved by the Engineer via an RFI or substitution request form. Submittal reviews of product does not permit use of MC cable for feeders. E. Branch Circuit: The circuit conductors between the final overcurrent device protecting the circuit and the outlet(s) device. Branch circuits may be identified in the “Branch Circuit Schedule” on the drawings. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 F. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For sleeve seals. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment: 1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated. 2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations. 3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope. 4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment. B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed. C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 08. D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07. 1.6 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP A. Work shall be neat and rectilinear. Install material and equipment in accordance with manufacturers written instructions. Installation shall operate safely and without noise, vibration or corrosion. Work shall be properly and effectively protected, and raceway openings shall be temporarily closed to prevent obstruction and damage before completion. B. Except as specified otherwise, material and equipment shall be new, factory tested and delivered ready for field installation. Provide supplies, accessories and connections necessary for complete and operational installation. Provide components required or recommended by OSHA and applicable NFPA documents. Equipment damaged during installation shall be repaired to new condition or replaced with new material. The contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with testing, replacing to repair, including but not limited to, all replacement or repair costs, preparations prior to testing, all testing costs, extended warranties, recommissioning of the equipment, etc. with no additional cost to the contract. C. The contractor shall take steps necessary to ensure that all materials and equipment can be delivered and installed in sections sufficiently small to fit within openings in the building and that the weight and size of all equipment pieces so not exceed the capacity of the hoisting and/or elevator system. D. Owner will not be responsible for material and equipment before testing, commissioning, and acceptance. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.7 EQUIPMENT LOCATION A. Location of all wall outlets shall be verified with the Architect prior to roughing in. Refer to details and elevations on the architectural drawings. Mounting heights indicated on the architectural drawings shall take precedence over information indicated on the electrical drawings. B. If discrepancies regarding the locations of outlet boxes exist between the electrical drawings and any other drawings associated with the project, notify the Architect. Any reasonable change in location of outlets shall not involve additional expense to Owner. The term “reasonable” shall be interpreted as moving outlet 10’-0” in any direction from the location indicated on the Electrical drawings. Refer to specifications 230000 for additional information. 1.8 EMERGENCY SYSTEMS A. To comply with the Building Code, “Emergency Systems” shall be separated from other loads in a dedicated room within a 2-hour fire rated enclosure. Generally emergency power will be distributed from the emergency system transfer switch to distribution equipment located in 2hour fire rated emergency electrical rooms/closets located at strategic points in the building. B. The electrical contractor shall identify the 2-hour fire rated rooms/closets with the General Contractor for coordination purposes. All equipment, conduit, piping, ductwork etc, alien to the emergency system shall not be located within these rooms, closets or shafts. C. All feeders located outside the 2 hour fire rated rooms/closets shall be installed in a 2-hour fire rated enclosure or the feeder shall be 2-hour mineral insulated (MI) cable. 1.9 CABLE TERMINATION TEMPERATURE RATINGS A. All equipment terminations connecting to wire and cable, rated 600V or less shall be rated for 75 deg. C for conductors 1 AWG and smaller and/or where conductor ampacities are 100 A or less. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends. B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel. 1. Minimum Metal Thickness: a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side more than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch. b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.2 SLEEVE SEALS A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or comparable product by one of the following: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Metraflex Co. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 3. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable. 4. Pressure Plates: Plastic. Include two for each sealing element. 5. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element. 2.3 GROUT A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. 2.4 CORDS AND CAPS A. Attachment Plug Configuration: Match receptacle configuration at outlet with plug provided for equipment. B. Cord Construction: Oil-resistant thermoset insulated Type SO multiconductor flexible cord with identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for extra hard usage in damp locations. C. Cord Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment and rating of branch circuit overcurrent protection. 2.5 ACCESS AND ACCESS PANELS A. This Section supplements requirements of Division 08. B. Description: Interior construction access panels, C. Available Manufacturers: 1. Milcor. 2. Knapp. 3. Nystorm. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 4. Inland Steel. D. Coordinate selection with other Sections supplying similar access panels. E. Access panels shall have same fire rating classification as surface penetrated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Avoid interference with structure and with work of other trades, preserving adequate headroom and clearing doors and passageways, to satisfaction of Architect and in accordance with code requirements. Installation shall permit clearance for access to equipment for repair, servicing and replacement. C. Install equipment so as to properly distribute equipment loads on building structural members provided for equipment support under other Sections. Roof-mounted equipment shall be installed and supported on structural steel provided under other Sections. D. Provide suspended platforms, strap hangers, brackets, shelves, stands or legs as necessary for floor, wall or ceiling mounting of equipment as required. E. Provide steel supports and hardware for proper installation of hangers, anchors, guides, etc. F. Provide cuts, weights, and other pertinent data required for proper coordination of equipment support provisions and installation. G. Structural steel and hardware shall conform to Standard Specifications of ASTM; use of steel and hardware shall conform to requirements of Section Five of Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. H. Verify site conditions and dimensions of equipment to ensure access for proper installation of equipment without disassembly which may void warrantee. Report in writing to Architect, prior to purchase or shipment of equipment involved, on conditions which may prevent proper installation. I. The Electrical Contractor shall not allow any equipment, ductwork, or piping foreign to the electrical installation to be installed or pass through any room in which electrical systems or equipment is located, such as electrical room, electric closets telephone or data closets. The Electrical Contractor shall notify the Construction Manager of such violations and request removal of such equipment, ductwork, or piping. J. Coordinate location of motor control centers, panelboards, and transformers installed in mechanical rooms with the HVAC, Plumbing and Fire Protection subcontractors. No piping, ductwork or other mechanical equipment shall be allowed to pass through the area of the electrical equipment equal to the width and depth of the electrical equipment extending from floor to structural ceiling above. A hung or gypsum board ceiling is not considered structure. K. Give right of way to piping systems installed at a required slope and/or specific mounting height or elevation. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 L. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items. M. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements. N. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity. O. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope. 3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls. C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall. E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable, unless indicated otherwise. H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry 1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing. I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07. J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07. K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work. L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using galvanized steel or cast-iron pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 M. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations. B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. 3.4 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07. 3.5 HVAC, PLUMBING AND FIRE PROTECTION CONNECTIONS A. General 1. Provide all power wiring including all circuitry carrying electrical energy from panelboard or other source through starters and disconnects to motors or to packaged control panels. Packaged control panels may include disconnects and starters and overcurrent protection. Provide all wiring between packaged control panels and motors. 2. HVAC, Plumbing and Fire Protection equipment is defined as products provided under other divisions that require power 120 volts and higher. 3. Unless otherwise specified, all electrical control devices such as aquastats, float and pressure switches, electro pneumatic switches, solenoid valves and damper motors requiring mechanical connections shall be furnished and installed and wired by the Contractor supplying the devices. 4. Provide conduit and power wiring for connection to alarm panels, remote alarms, etc. Refer to HVAC, Plumbing and Fire Protection drawings for location and quantity of panels/alarms to be connected. Provide connections from local 120-volt panel via 20 ampere circuit breaker. 5. All control wiring shall be provided by others, unless noted otherwise in the specification or drawings. B. Coordination 1. Review equipment submittals prior to installation and electrical rough-in. Verify location, size, and type of connections. Coordinate details of equipment connections with supplier and installer. C. Examination 1. Examine the areas and conditions under which the equipment is to be installed. 2. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization. D. Installation Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Use wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered in heat-producing equipment. 2. Make conduit connections to vibrating equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquid tight flexible conduit in damp or wet locations. 3. Install pre-finished cord set where connection with attachment plug is indicated or specified, or use attachment plug with suitable strain-relief clamps. 4. Provide suitable strain-relief clamps for cord connections to outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes for vibrating equipment. 5. Make wiring connections in control panel or in wiring compartment of pre-wired equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide interconnecting wiring where indicated. 6. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices such as limit switches and temperature switches as indicated. Connect with conduit and wiring as indicated. 7. Each motor terminal box shall be connected with a minimum 12 inches, maximum 24 inches piece of flexible conduit to a fixed junction box. A green wire run through the flexible conduit shall interconnect the motor frame and the branch circuit ground wire. Use liquid tight flexible metal conduit for connection. Conduit must be installed perpendicular to direction of equipment vibration to allow conduit to freely flex. 8. Check for proper rotation of each motor. E. Building Management Panels 1. Provide conduit and power wiring (120 volt) to all Building Management System Panels, Direct Digital Control panels, Utility Monitoring System (UMS) panels, etc. Provide connection from local 120 volt panel via 20 ampere circuit breaker. Provide one branch circuit for every panel, unless directed otherwise. 3.6 ACCESS PANELS A. Provide access panels in accordance with this Section and requirements of Division 08. B. Access panels are generally not shown on the drawings, but shall be provided to allow access to system components. C. Provide proper access to materials and equipment that require inspection, replacement, repair or service, and coordinate their delivery with the installing Trade. If proper access cannot be provided, confer with Architect as to best method of approach for minimizing effect of reduced access which may result. D. Coordinate and prepare a location, size, and function schedule of access panels required to fully service equipment and deliver to a representative of the installing Trade. Furnish and install distinctively colored buttons (color as selected by Architect) in finished ceiling to identify all access panels. E. Provide access panels to all items requiring maintenance including at fire dampers, volume dampers, controls, shut-off valves, control valves, check valves, or other items that require access and are concealed in floor, wall, furred space or above ceiling. F. Ceilings consisting of lay-in or removable splined tiles do not require access panels and dampers, splitters, or test hole openings above ceiling shall have location marked with thumb tack on finished ceiling panel. Location shall be noted on record drawings. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 G. Access panels shall have same fire rating classification as surface penetrated. H. Panels within 8” of the surface being penetrated shall be the sized for the greater of 12”x12” or size required to allow removal of the component being maintained; panels further than 8” from the surface being penetrated and access at all equipment requiring service (including disconnects) shall be a minimum of 24”x24”. Access doors to fire dampers shall be a minimum of 18”x16” if fire damper is within ordinary person’s arms reach of the access panel or 24”x24” if beyond arms reach as required by NFPA 90A-2002. 3.7 CONNECTIONS TO OWNER AND ARCHITECT EQUIPMENT A. General 1. Provide all power wiring including all circuitry carrying electrical energy from panelboard or other source to owner and architectural equipment for complete and operational equipment. 2. Owner and Architectural equipment is defined as products provided under other divisions that operate at voltages 110 and above. Equipment may include but not be limited to the following: a. Coffee machines b. Microwaves c. Refrigerators d. Copy machines e. Projector screens f. Motorized window shades g. Motorized doors h. Electric hand dryers 3. All control wiring shall be provided by others, unless noted otherwise in the specification or drawings. B. Coordination 1. Coordinate location of equipment with Architect and Owner. 2. Review equipment submittals prior to installation and electrical rough-in. Verify location, size, and type of connections. Coordinate details of equipment connections with supplier and installer. 3. Obtain wiring diagrams and installation methods from equipment manufacturers. C. Examination 1. Examine the areas and conditions under which the equipment is to be installed. 2. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization. D. Installation 1. Make conduit connections to vibrating equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquid tight flexible conduit in damp or wet locations. 2. Install pre-finished cord set where connection with attachment plug is indicated or specified, or use attachment plug with suitable strain-relief clamps. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. Provide suitable strain-relief clamps for cord connections to outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes for vibrating equipment or for cord drops from ceilings. 4. Make wiring connections in control panel or in wiring compartment of pre-wired equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide interconnecting wiring where indicated. 5. Install disconnect switches, controllers, and control stations, as indicated. Connect with conduit and wiring as indicated. 6. Each motor terminal box shall be connected with a minimum 12", maximum 24" piece of flexible conduit to a fixed junction box. A green wire run through the flexible conduit shall interconnect the motor frame and the branch circuit ground wire. Use liquid tight flexible metal conduit for connection. Conduit must be installed perpendicular to direction of equipment vibration to allow conduit to freely flex. 7. Check for proper rotation of each motor. 3.8 LABORATORY EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. General 1. Provide all power wiring including all circuitry carrying electrical energy from panelboard or other source to laboratory equipment for complete and operational equipment. 2. Laboratory equipment is defined as products provided under other divisions that require power 110 volts and higher. 3. All control wiring shall be provided by others, unless noted otherwise in the specification or drawings. B. Coordination 1. Review equipment submittals prior to installation and electrical rough-in. Verify location, size, and type of connections. Coordinate details of equipment connections with supplier and installer. 2. Obtain wiring diagrams and installation methods from equipment manufacturers. C. Examination 1. Examine the areas and conditions under which the equipment is to be installed. 2. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization. D. Installation 1. Make conduit connections to vibrating equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquid tight flexible conduit in damp or wet locations. 2. Install pre-finished cord set where connection with attachment plug is indicated or specified, or use attachment plug with suitable strain-relief clamps. 3. Provide suitable strain-relief clamps for cord connections to outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes for vibrating equipment or for cord drops from ceilings. 4. Make wiring connections in control panel or in wiring compartment of pre-wired equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide interconnecting wiring where indicated. 5. Install disconnect switches, controllers, and control stations, as indicated. Connect with conduit and wiring as indicated. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500 - 11 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 6. Each motor terminal box shall be connected with a minimum 12", maximum 24" piece of flexible conduit to a fixed junction box. A green wire run through the flexible conduit shall interconnect the motor frame and the branch circuit ground wire. Use liquid tight flexible metal conduit for connection. Conduit must be installed perpendicular to direction of equipment vibration to allow conduit to freely flex. 7. Check for proper rotation of each motor. 3.9 CLEANING A. Cleaning shall be performed on a day-to-day basis and a final cleaning prior to commissioning. B. Equipment 1. All electrical equipment shall be cleaned inside and out prior to initial energizing. 2. Cleaning shall consist of vacuuming busses, windings, enclosures (inside and out), etc. After vacuuming is complete, the equipment shall be wiped down. 3. If equipment is wet or contains moisture, it shall be thoroughly dried out and inspected by the manufacturer’s representative before energizing. C. Raceways 1. All raceways shall be blown out and dried prior to installation of conductors. 2. Raceways installed in or below the slab shall have a mandrel pulled through to clear any dirt and debris. D. Pull, Junction, Work and Floor Boxes 1. All boxes shall be cleaned of debris such as plaster and concrete residue prior to installation of conductors. 2. Vacuum all dirt and debris from floor boxes prior to installing inserts. E. Electrical Rooms 1. Upon completion of cleaning equipment, raceways and boxes, but before energizing equipment, the entire room shall be swept clean with all garbage removed from the area. 2. When the room is clean and equipment energized, the area shall remain clean and the doors to the room shall remain closed until completion of project. 3. If the room or equipment is subjected to dust or moisture after energizing the equipment shall be de-energized and re-cleaned as outlined above. F. Final Cleaning 1. All light fixtures, devices, device plates, etc., shall be cleaned and left in new condition to the satisfaction of the Architect, prior to final occupancy. 2. All rubbish, discarded materials and unused materials shall be removed from site. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\260500_COMMON WORK RESULTS.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Conductors 2. Variable frequency drive cable 3. Multi-conductor cable 4. Connectors and splices 5. Cable supports B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 27 for cabling used for voice and data circuits. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber. C. Feeder: All circuit conductors between the service equipment, the source of a separately derived system, or other power supply source and the final branch-circuit overcurrent device. D. Branch Circuit: The circuit conductors between the final overcurrent device protecting the circuit and the outlet(s). 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Qualification Data: For testing agency. C. Field quality-control test reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the International Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the International Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division a. Aluminum conductors shall only be permitted where used for extension of existing feeder circuits with Owner approval. 2. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company. 3. General Cable Corporation. 4. Senator Wire & Cable Company. 5. Southwire Company. B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70 and ASTM B-496. Copper conductors shall be soft drawn annealed copper, having a conductivity of not less than 98 percent of that of pure copper. 1. Conductor Insulation: a. Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN b. All copper conductor insulation shall be Type “THHN” or “THHN/THWN”, except as specified hereinafter in subparagraph c, below. c. All conductors within lighting fixtures shall be temperature rated as required by National Electrical Code, latest edition. Branch circuit conductors within 3 inches of fluorescent ballast shall be Type “THHW” or “XHHW”. C. Aluminum Conductors: 1. Aluminum conductors shall only be permitted where used for extension of existing feeder circuits with Owner approval: a. All electrical conductors shall be copper, except electrical feeder/equipment conductors No. 1/0 AWG and larger may be aluminum if they can be terminated as specified hereinafter and fit within the available space. b. Aluminum Conductors: Aluminum conductors shall be series AA-8030 alloy aluminum having a minimum of 61 percent conductivity in sizes No. 1/0 AWG and larger, where terminated as specified hereinafter. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 c. Adjust conduit size as necessary for the cable size selected to satisfy the National Electrical Code percentage fill requirements. Cable size shall be sufficient to limit voltage drop to that of the copper wire it is replacing. d. All aluminum conductors shall be terminated with compression fittings (no exception). e. All aluminum conductor insulation shall be Type “THW”, “THHN” or “XHHW” black cross linked polyethylene Type “USE”. f. Provide copper conductors of the size indicated on the Drawings, instead of aluminum conductors, for all electrical equipment that will not properly accept compression fittings and for all grounding electrode and equipment grounding conductors. 2.2 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE CABLE A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Belden, Inc. or comparable product by one of the following: 1. AmerCable Inc. 2. Belden 3. Draka 4. General Cable Corporation 5. LAPP USA 6. Southwire B. General 1. The cable shall be 600V/1000V rated, with stranded tinned copper conductors, shielded, suitable for use with Variable Frequency Drives. 2. The insulation shall be rated for 90 deg C wet/dry operating temperature. 3. Accessories (terminations) shall have ratings that are at least equal to those of the cable. 4. Cable shall be free from material and workmanship defects. 5. All cables shall be round. 6. Cable shall be suitable for use in wet/dry locations, indoors and outdoors, in cable trays, in conduits, trenches, and in underground ducts and direct burial. C. Material/Construction 1. Conductors shall be annealed stranded copper per ASTM B3, B8, and B33. Cable shall include three symmetrical placed ground wires. 2. UL Listed Type TC-ER cable. 3. Insulation a. The insulation thickness shall have a minimum average wall thickness of 30 mils. The insulation material must be XLPE with a XHHW-2 listing per UL 44. Each insulated conductor shall be identified in accordance with ICEA Method 4 color coding. b. The insulated conductors are to be cabled together with three symmetrical bare copper ground wires. The ground wires are to have a minimum circular mil area Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 equivalent to one circuit conductor. Fillers shall be included as necessary to make the cable round. 4. Shielding a. The cabled assembly shall be shielded using one of two methods: 1) Applying helically two 2-mil copper tapes. The shield shall provide 100 percent coverage over the assembly. Shield shall be in contact with the ground wires. 2) Applying an 80 percent minimum coverage tinned copper braid shield used in conjunction with an aluminum foil shield tape. Shield shall be in contact with the ground wires. 5. Jacket a. All cables shall have a continuous overall outer sheath of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC), suitable for 90 deg C use. b. The jacket shall be resistant to abrasion, rated for direct burial, oil resistant, sunlight resistant and flame resistant in accordance with UL 1277. 6. Identification a. The following permanent legend shall be clearly embossed or printed at approximately 2 foot intervals on the outer jacket for the entire length of the cable: 1) Manufacturer's name and or Trade Mark 2) Number of conductors and size (-- AWG) 3) Type of insulation (XLPE) or NEC Listed Conductor Type (XHHW-2) 4) Voltage rating 5) TC-ER rating 6) 1000V Flexible Motor Supply Cable rating 7) Sequential footage marking at 2 ft intervals 2.3 MULTI-CONDUCTOR CABLE A. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for metal-clad cable, Type MC with ground wire. B. Multiconductor cables run in parallel shall include full size grounding conductor in accordance with NFPA 70 Article 250.122 C. MC Cable 1. Available Manufacturers: The design is based on AFC Cable Systems, Inc. to establish standards of quality for materials and performance. The naming of a specific manufacturer or catalog number does not waive any requirements or performance of individual components described in the specifications. 2. Acceptable alternate manufacturers are a. Southwire Company b. Allflex c. Alliance d. Or approved equal. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. General a. Cable shall be multi-conductor Metal Clad (UL-Type MC) Power cable that meets or exceeds the requirements of UL Standard 83, UL Standard 1063, UL Standard 1569 for Type MC, Federal Specification A-A59544, IEEE 1202 (70,000 Btu/hr) Vertical Cable Tray Flame Test, and the National Electrical Code. b. Cable assemblies shall be prefabricated at the factory and shipped to the job site on cable reels. 4. Material a. Conductors shall be minimum No. 12 AWG, soft drawn copper with 90°C, THHN, 600 V rated insulation. Where the length of MC cable exceeds 65 feet for 120 volt circuits and 145 feet for 277 volt circuits provide No. 10 AWG conductor with same properties as listed above. For branch circuits longer than 100 feet for 120 volt and 230 feet for 277 volt refer to the Branch Circuit Schedule on the drawings for the conductor size. b. Each length of MC cable shall have a dedicated neutral conductor for each phase conductor. Each length shall include a full size equipment grounding conductor. Where isolated ground receptacles are indicated on plans provide an isolated ground conductor (green with yellow strip) with each length of cable. c. Cable shall be UL Classified 1, 2, and 3 hour Through Penetration Firestop Systems: W-J-3037, W-L-3110, W-L-3113, W-L-3117, W-L-3120, W-L-3121, W-L3160, C-AJ-3115, C-AJ-3140, C-AJ-3142, C-AJ-3145, C-AJ-3173, C-AJ-3202, CAJ-4065, C-AJ-4066, F-C-3038. d. Sheath shall be continuous welded, corrugated steel sheath. 2.4 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 4. 3M; Electrical Products Division. 5. Tyco Electronics Corp. B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated. C. Copper: All No. 6 AWG and larger copper conductors shall be connected with bolt-on compression connectors by Thomas & Betts (or approved equal) sized as required by codes and specifically intended to connect copper wire and cable to panelboards, substations, disconnect switches, and other equipment. Install with hydraulic crimping tool as required by manufacturer’s recommendations, to ensure permanent high conductivity connection. 1. Terminations: Thomas & Betts Series 54200 (or approved equal) two hole connectors shall be used. Exceptions are as follows: a. Where equipment or device cannot be provided by the manufacturer to accept two hole connectors, T&B Series 54100 (or approved equal) single hole connectors with anti-rotation lug or restraint shall be used. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 b. Where equipment or devices cannot be provided by the manufacturer to accept either two-hole or single hole compression connectors, set screw type connectors may be submitted. For a set screw connector to be considered by the Engineer, the manufacturer shall provide certification with his/her equipment submittals that his/her equipment will not accommodate the required compression connectors. See Section 260100 for certification requirements. 2. Copper to Copper Splices, if allowed, shall be with T&B Series 54500 (or approved equal) compression connectors. 3. Tapping of Copper Conductors shall be with T&B Series 54700 (or approved equal) compression taps. 4. All No. 8 AWG and smaller solid conductors shall be spliced with pre-insulated spring connectors. Connectors shall be Skotch-lok, Buchanan B-Cap or approved equal. 5. For NEC Class 1, 2 or 3 wiring, No. 10 AWG and smaller stranded conductors and terminated with AMP, Inc. “PIDG”, UL listed premium grade insulated compression fork connectors or approved equal and shall be spliced in a junction box with AMP, Inc. “Plastic-Grip” UL listed, standard grade insulated butt splices or approved equal. All motor branch circuit conductors terminating at the motor termination box shall be spliced with compression type connectors. D. Aluminum: Aluminum conductors shall only be permitted where used for extension of existing feeder circuits with Owner approval 1. All No. 1/0 AWG and larger aluminum conductors shall be terminated with bolt-on compression connectors by Thomas & Betts (or approved equal) sized as required by codes and specifically intended to connect aluminum wire and cable. Install with hydraulic crimping tool as required by manufacturer’s recommendations, to ensure permanent high-conductivity connection. Provide approved connections and method of preventing electrolytic action when aluminum is connected to copper. Coat conductors with oxidation inhibitor before installing connectors. 2. Provide adequate space to accommodate compression fitting terminations when purchasing electrical equipment. If space cannot or is not provided, the conductors shall be changed to copper (no exceptions). The use of cable adapters (aluminum to copper) is not acceptable. 3. “Bellville” Type compression washers shall be used with all aluminum terminations. T&B Series 60800 (or approved equal). 4. All aluminum connection surfaces shall be wire brushed prior to termination. 5. Aluminum to Aluminum Splices, if allowed, shall be with T&B Series 60500 (or approved equal) compression connectors. 6. Tapping of Aluminum Conductors shall be with T&B Series 63100 (or approved equal) compression taps. 7. Provide cable reducing adapters for cable terminations as required. Cable reducers shall be manufactured by Greaves or equal. 2.5 CABLE SUPPORTS A. Available Manufacturers: 1. The design is based on O.Z./Gedney to establish standards of quality for materials and performance. The naming of a specific manufacturer or catalog number does not waive any requirements or performance of individual components described in the specification. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Acceptable alternate manufacturers are Cross Hinds, Kellem or the Engineer’s approved equal. B. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug for non-armored electrical cables in riser conduits. Provide plugs with number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Construct body of malleable-iron casting with hot-dip galvanized finish. C. Provide split wedge cable supports with clamps for cable without metallic sheath. Provide basket weave or approved equal cable supports approved by cable manufacturer for cable with metallic sheath. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS A. Feeders: Stranded Copper. B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Stranded for No. 12 AWG and larger; solid for No. 14 and smaller. C. VFD to motor Wiring 1. Ampacity of input wiring to VFDs shall be at least 125 percent of the VFD input rating. 2. Wiring from variable frequency drive output to the motor terminals, shall be in grounded metallic conduit, or a specialty multi conductor cable specifically designed for VFD applications. 3. VFD rated cable shall be used for 15 Hp, three phase, 480V AC or 208V AC motors and above, when used in conjunction with a VFD. 3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTI-CONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS A. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. B. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. C. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHNTHWN, single conductors in raceway. D. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. E. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway or Metal-clad cable, Type MC. F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway G. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainlesssteel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application. H. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway. I. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway or power-limited cable, concealed in building finishes. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips that will not damage cables or raceway. D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible. E. Support cables according to Division 26. F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26. G. Provide cable supports and boxes for vertical feeders as required by NEC. H. Wire from point of service connection to receptacles, lighting fixtures, devices, equipment, outlets for future extension, and other electrical apparatus as shown on Drawings. Provide slack wire for connections. Tape ends of wires and provide blank covers for outlet boxes designated for future use. Mark future conductors as such with panel and circuit designation. I. Conductors No. 10 and smaller in branch circuit panelboards, signal cabinets, signal control boards, switchboards and motor control centers shall be bundled. Conductors larger than No. 10 in switchboards, motor control centers and pull boxes shall be cabled in individual circuits. J. Two or more conduits installed instead of single conduit shall contain duplicate conductors, including neutrals and ground conductors where required; total capacity of duplicate conductors shall be at least equal to capacity of conductors replaced. K. Follow homerun circuit numbers shown on Drawings to connect circuits to panelboards. Where homerun circuit numbers are not shown on Drawings, divide similar types of connected loads among phase buses so that currents are approximately equal in normal usage. Connect each branch circuit homerun with two or more circuits to circuit breaker or switch in three-wire or four-wire branch circuit panelboard so that no two circuits are fed from same bus. Where panelboard cabinets are recessed, provide conduits with sufficient capacity for future conductors for spare branch circuit protective devices and spaces in panelboard; stub up concealed to junction box. Provide extensions above ceiling. L. Where conductors have been oversized for voltage drop provide reducers on feeders and branch circuits to accommodate wire size at terminations. M. Conductors entering panels, junction boxes, equipment cabinets, etc. shall be neatly formed, laced and supported around the equipment or devices. Adhesive glues or tapes shall not be used to support conductors. 3.4 MULTI-CONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS: A. Uses Permitted 1. Branch circuit conductors in EMT shall be provided to first devices. MC cable shall be permitted from first device to subsequent devices in the circuit where run concealed within a wall or partition 2. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Metal-clad cable, Type MC. B. Uses not permitted 1. Branch circuit from panelboard to first device. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Feeders. 3. In open spaces such as finished areas. 4. Underground or embedded within concrete. 5. Where subject to physical damage. 6. Where exposed at “floating” or hung ceilings. C. MC Cable Management: 1. Electric Rooms and Electric Closets: a. MC cable not permitted for exposed applications. 2. Other than Electric Rooms and Electric Closets: a. At a minimum provide independent Unistrut support for MC cables 1) Supports shall be installed such that MC cable length is free of sags. b. Where more than eight MC cables are bundled together, provide field fabricated metal channel support racks for MC cable management. c. Contractor shall develop cable management plans for review with Owner, Architect, and Engineer indicating: 1) Locations of rigid raceway 2) Locations of MC cable racks. d. Metal clad cable shall be secured using mechanical fasteners. Tie wraps shall not be used to secure cables. 3.5 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. 1. Aluminum conductors, if permitted by the Owner, shall use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors. C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack. D. No modifications to any connector or fitting shall be permitted. E. The approved connector manufacturer's recommended installation tool and procedures shall be used. F. Water chilling unit motor terminations shall be made with compression connectors, which accommodate the conductor size indicated on the Drawings and have a hole size to fit the water chilling unit motor connection stud. Subcontractor shall coordinate the compression connector with the water chilling unit manufacturer’s termination requirements. Field modification to the compression lug or the motor stud will not be permitted. G. All bolt and screw connections shall be torqued in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Subcontractor shall include a copy of the manufacturer's recommendations with all applicable submittals. H. Where conductors are oversized for voltage drop, provide cable reducing adapters for cable terminations. Cable reducers shall be manufactured by Greaves or equal. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 I. All exterior wiring connections, and those made at or below grade shall be waterproof with UL listed waterproof connectors. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test feeder conductors for compliance with requirements. 2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 3. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in cables and conductors No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner. a. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each splice 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. b. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. c. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements. D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\260519_LOW VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLES.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 UNDERCARPET ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 260519.13 - 1 ADDENDUM 02 07 January 2019 SECTION 260519.13 - UNDERCARPET ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES DELETE THIS SECTION IN ITS ENTIRETY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Undercarpet cable and service fittings for branch circuits. 2. Undercarpet cable and service fittings for communication and data transmission. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: From manufacturer, detailing fabrication and installation of undercarpet cable including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work. 1. Indicate cable types, accessories, and transition boxes. 2. Indicate proposed layering of cables, cable dimensions, and installation requirements. C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and sections, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved: 1. Dimensioned undercarpet cable layout. 2. Connections to raceways, transition boxes, service fittings, and other wiring. 3. Relation of components to adjacent structural elements. D. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit one Sample for each of the following: E. Samples for Verification: Submit one Sample for each of the following: 1. Undercarpet cable for branch circuits. 2. Undercarpet cable for communication and data transmission. 3. Service pedestal (one of each type used). 4. Power cable transition box. 5. Communication and data cable transition box. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 UNDERCARPET ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 260519.13 - 2 ADDENDUM 02 07 January 2019 F. Qualification Data: For testing agency. G. Field quality-control test reports. H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For undercarpet cable systems to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01, include manufacturer's written instructions for cable repairs, repositioning, and extensions. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3. B. Source Limitations: Obtain all undercarpet cable system components through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. D. Comply with NEMA UC 2, "Undercarpet Power Distribution Systems" and with NFPA 70. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of undercarpet cables with locations of furnishings, partitions, and building finishes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 POWER DISTRIBUTION CABLE A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Tyco Electronics Corp. D. Cable: Factory laminated and complying with NEMA UC 2; three-piece assembly including bottom shield, conductor assembly, and top shield. 1. Bottom Shield: Abrasion resistant, nonmetallic. 2. Conductor Assembly: Two-wire branch circuit. 3. Top Shield: Copper or copper alloy. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 UNDERCARPET ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 260519.13 - 3 ADDENDUM 02 07 January 2019 E. Current Rating: 20 A. 2.2 PEDESTALS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Tyco Electronics Corp. D. Description: Manufacturer's standard low-profile type, single gang with duplex receptacles. 1. Pedestal Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 POWER CABLE TRANSITION UNIT A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Tyco Electronics Corp. D. Description: Interface transition unit, with junction box, for connecting three-, four-, or fiveconductor, flat-conductor cable to building wiring system. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine floors to receive undercarpet cables for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of undercarpet cables. B. Verify that holes in concrete slabs are filled and projections are removed, that floor has been vacuumed and all debris removed, and that concrete slabs have been sealed to prevent dusting. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Do not begin installation until heavy construction is completed and wheeled traffic is no longer a threat. B. Do not stack cables in circulation routes. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 UNDERCARPET ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 260519.13 - 4 ADDENDUM 02 07 January 2019 C. Limit total installed height to 0.09 inch. D. Install cables in proper order with power-transmission cable first, followed by telephone cable and then data cable. Cross cables at 90-degree angles. E. Install undercarpet cables and accessories using special tools as recommended by undercarpet cable manufacturer. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Ground equipment according to Division 26. B. Connect undercarpet cable and components to branch circuits and to ground as indicated and instructed by manufacturer. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Branch-Circuit Cables: After cables have been installed and energized, perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Communication and Data Cables: After cables have been installed and connected between telecommunications outlet and system cross-connect panel, test each cable according to TIA/EIA TSB67. Certify compliance with test parameters. C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2019_01-07_ADD 2\260519_13_A2_UNDERCARPET ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 260523 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 260523 - CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. UTP cabling. 2. Low-voltage control cabling. 3. Control-circuit conductors. 4. Identification products. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. B. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control and signaling power-limited circuits. C. Open Cabling: Passing cabling through open space (e.g., between the studs of a wall cavity). D. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Cable and equipment interconnections. C. Qualification Data: For qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector. D. Source quality-control reports. E. Field quality-control reports. F. Maintenance Data: For wire and cable to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing. B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 260523 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site. 1. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install UTP and optical fiber cables and connecting materials until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PATHWAYS A. Support of Open Cabling: NRTL labeled for support of Category 5e cabling, designed to prevent degradation of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable. 1. Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets. 2. Lacing bars, spools, J-hooks, and D-rings. 3. Straps and other devices. B. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Division 26. 1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches wide, 3 inches high, and 2-1/2 inches deep. 2.2 UTP CABLE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Belden CDT Inc.; Electronics Division. 2. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company. 3. CommScope, Inc. 4. Draka USA. 5. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc. 6. KRONE Incorporated. 7. Mohawk; a division of Belden CDT. 8. Nordex/CDT; a subsidiary of Cable Design Technologies. 9. Superior Essex Inc. 10. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope, Inc. brand. 11. 3M. 12. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 260523 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Description: 100-ohm, four-pair UTP. 1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties. 2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 for performance specifications. 3. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 5e. 4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types: a. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP or Type MPP, complying with NFPA 262. b. Communications, Riser Rated: Type CMR; or Type MPP, Type CMP, or Type MPR; complying with UL 1666. c. Communications, Limited Purpose: Type CMX; or Type MPP, Type CMP, Type MPR, Type CMR, Type MP, Type MPG, Type CM, or Type CMG. d. Multipurpose: Type MP or Type MPG; or Type MPP or Type MPR. e. Multipurpose, Plenum Rated: Type MPP, complying with NFPA 262. f. Multipurpose, Riser Rated: Type MPR or Type MPP, complying with UL 1666. 2.3 LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL CABLE A. Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG. 1. One pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) tinned-copper conductors. 2. PVC insulation. 3. Unshielded. 4. PVC jacket. 5. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581. B. Plenum-Rated, Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP. 1. One pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) tinned-copper conductors. 2. PVC insulation. 3. Unshielded. 4. PVC jacket. 5. Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262. C. Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG. 1. One pair, twisted, No. 18 AWG, stranded (19x30) tinned-copper conductors. 2. PVC insulation. 3. Unshielded. 4. PVC jacket. 5. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581. D. Plenum-Rated, Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP. 1. One pair, twisted, No. 18 AWG, stranded (19x30) tinned-copper conductors. 2. Fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 260523 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. Unshielded. 4. Plastic jacket. 5. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262, Flame Test. 2.4 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS A. Class 1 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, in raceway, complying with UL 83. B. Class 2 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, in raceway or power-limited cable, concealed in building finishes, complying with UL 83. C. Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits: Stranded copper, Type TW or Type TF, complying with UL 83. 2.5 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Brady Corporation. 2. HellermannTyton. 3. Kroy LLC. 4. Panduit Corp. B. Comply with UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers. C. Comply with requirements in Division 26. 2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables. B. Factory test UTP and optical fiber cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1. C. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-B.2. D. Factory test multimode optical fiber cables according to TIA/EIA-526-14-A and TIA/EIA-568-B.3. E. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS A. Cable Trays: Comply with NEMA VE 2 and TIA/EIA-569-A-7. B. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends between pull points. C. Comply with requirements in Division 26 for installation of conduits and wireways. D. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows if possible. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Comply with NECA 1. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 260523 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. General Requirements for Cabling: 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. 2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices." 3. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect and patch panels. 4. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. 5. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. 6. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable. 7. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating. 8. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions. C. UTP Cable Installation: 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2. 2. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated. 3. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry. D. Installation of Control-Circuit Conductors: 1. Install wiring in raceways. Comply with requirements specified in Division 26. E. Open-Cable Installation: 1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment. 2. Suspend copper cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches above ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inches apart. 3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items. F. Separation from EMI Sources: 1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA/EIA-569-A recommendations for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment. 2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 260523 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. 4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. 5. Separation between Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches. 6. Separation between Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches. 3.3 REMOVAL OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Remove abandoned conductors and cables. 3.4 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS A. Minimum Conductor Sizes: 1. Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits, No 14 AWG. 2. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control, and signal circuits, No. 16 AWG. 3. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm, and signal circuits, No 12 AWG. 3.5 FIRESTOPPING A. Comply with requirements in Division 07. B. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A, Annex A, "Firestopping." C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article. 3.6 GROUNDING A. For data communication wiring, comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A and with BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter. B. For low-voltage wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Division 26. 3.7 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling according to TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 260523 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Visually inspect UTP cable jacket materials for UL or third-party certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations to confirm color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. 2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components. 3. Test UTP cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not after cross connection. a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration. C. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\260523 FL - CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment. 1. Conductors 2. Connectors 3. Grounding electrodes B. Equipment grounding system shall be designed so metallic structures, enclosures, raceways, cable tray, junction boxes, outlet boxes, cabinets, machine frames, portable equipment and other conductive items in close proximity with electrical circuits operate continuously and ground potential and provide low impedance path for possible ground fault currents. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata) form part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designations only. 1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code 2. UL 467 Grounding and Bonding Equipment 3. UL 486A Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors 4. IEEE/ANSI 142 Latest Edition Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems 5. IEEE 837 Standard for Qualifying Permanent Connections Used in Substation Grounding 6. ASTM B3 Solid Conductors 7. ASTM B8 Assembly of Stranded Conductors 8. ASTM B33 Tinned Conductors 9. NEMA GR1 Ground Rods and Ground Rod Couplings 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor. C. Field quality-control test reports that include the following. 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with the requirements. 3. If applicable, results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with the requirements. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include the following in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals: 1. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at grounding connections for separately derived systems based on NETA MTS. a. Tests shall be to determine if ground resistance or impedance values remain within specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective action if they do not. b. Include recommended testing intervals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the International Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the International Electrical Testing Association to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS A. Insulated Feeder and Branch Circuit Equipment Ground Conductors: Copper stranded conforming to ASTM B8 and B33wire or cable insulated for 600 V sized as shown on drawings, specifications or as required by NFPA 70, whichever is larger. Insulation class other than 600V shall only be provided where otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Bare Copper Grounding Electrode Conductors: Bare, stranded cable of size shown on drawings, specifications or as required by NFPA 70, whichever is larger. 1. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 2. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2.2 CONNECTORS A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Mechanical Connectors: Provide mechanical connectors of the two bolt type, listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. 1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe. 2. Materials: The mechanical connector bodies shall be manufactured from high strength, high conductivity cast copper alloy material. Bolts, nuts, washers and lockwashers shall be made of Silicon Bronze and supplied as a part of the connector body and shall be of the two bolted pressure type. Split bolt connector types shall NOT be accepted. 3. The connectors shall meet or exceed UL 467 and be clearly marked with the catalog number, conductor size and manufacturer. C. Compression Connectors: Provide compression connectors that meet or exceed the performance requirements of IEEE 837, latest revision. Compression connectors shall be listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. 1. Materials: The compression connectors shall be manufactured from pure wrought copper. The conductivity of this material shall be no less than 99% by IACS standards. a. The installation of the connectors shall be made with a compression tool and die system as recommended by the manufacturer of the connectors. b. The connectors shall be clearly marked with the manufacturer, catalog number, conductor size and the required compressions tool settings. c. Each connector shall be factory filled with an oxide-inhibiting compound. D. Welded Connectors: Provide exothermic connections for copper to copper and copper to steel connections to ground rods, ground buses, ground wires, steel beams, rebar, etc. 1. The supplier of the equipment shall provide with no additional charge and information or supervision required for the proper installation of the equipment and training of operating personnel 2. Materials: Conductors spliced with an exothermic welded connection shall be considered as a continuous conductor, as stated in the notes accompanying NEC articles 250.50, 250.64 and IEEE Standard 80 (latest edition). a. Procedures outlined in the Manufacturer’s installation instruction shall be followed. Molds shall not be modified during installation in field applications. b. Weld metal shall be a mixture of copper oxide and aluminum. Only one weld metal mixture shall be required for each grounding connection. c. Grounding connections shall be tested and certified in accordance with IEEE 837, UL 486A and UL 467. 3. All exothermic Connections shall: a. Prove to carry more current than the conductor. b. Not deteriorate during the life of the connection. c. Will not loosen or corrode during the life of the connection. d. Resist repeated fault currents without failure. e. Be of high visually discerned quality. f. Eliminate electrolytic penetration of conductors (strands). Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES A. Ground Rods: Ground Rods shall be Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by10 feet in diameter unless otherwise specified with a tensile strength not less than 75,000 psi. Copper shall be applied electrolically forming a metallurgical bond between the steel core and the copper 1. Provide ground rods where shown or required to obtain the ground resistance specified in Part 3. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Mechanical connections shall be accessible for inspection and checking. No insulation shall be installed over mechanical ground connections. C. Ground connection surfaces shall be cleaned prior to connections. D. Attach grounds permanently before building service is energized. E. Provide bonding to meet Regulatory Requirements. F. Examine raceway, equipment or area to receive grounding to provide adequate sizes, placement and materials for a complete installation. G. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to manufacturer’s published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer’s torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A. H. Determine numbers and sizes of screw terminals for equipment grounding bars in panelboards and other electrical equipment. Provide screw terminals for active circuits, spares and spaces. I. Provide equipment ground conductor in same raceway with associated phase conductors. 3.2 APPLICATIONS A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated. B. Provide green insulated grounding conductor in nonmetallic conduits or ducts unless specified otherwise. C. Transformers: Step down transformers secondaries shall be grounded to the building steel, if available, or the main building service ground, or ground riser where available. D. Feeders: Bond all conduits carrying individual grounding or grounding electrode conductors with grounding bushing to ground bus in panel with a copper grounding conductor sized per NEC 250.102 (D). Where a panel such as a distribution panel has multiple feeders, a common ground conductor is permitted to be run from ground bushing to ground bushing and then to ground bus in panel. E. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Exothermic connectors. 3. Connections to Ground Rods: Exothermic) connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Exothermic connectors. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, enclosure or bushing, per NEC. Provide a ground wire from each device to the respective enclosure. B. Install equipment ground conductor in common conduit with related phase or neutral conductors, or both. Parallel feeders installed in more than one raceway shall have individual full size green insulated equipment ground conductors. C. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70: 1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs. 7. Metal-clad cable runs. D. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping. E. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. B. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. 2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp. C. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes, using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. 3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve. D. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet apart. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: B. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Visual inspection of all systems, raceway and equipment grounds shall be made to determine the adequacy and integrity of the grounding. All ground testing results shall be properly recorded, witnessed, and reported to the Contractor. 2. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected. a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. C. Grounding system resistance shall be 10 ohms or less. D. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values: 1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms. 2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. 3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms. E. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\260526_GROUNDING AND BONDING.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents. C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Steel slotted support systems. 2. Nonmetallic slotted support systems. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following: 1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. Nonmetallic slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 4. Equipment supports. C. Welding certificates. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03. B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 07. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. g. Wesanco, Inc. 3. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4. 4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA4. 5. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron. E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Only where approved by the Structural Engineer, threadedsteel stud, for use in hardened Portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials may be used. a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Hilti Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit. 2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened Portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC. 3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. 4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element. 5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment. B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 for steel shapes and plates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter. B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter. C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slottedsupport system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps, single-bolt conduit clamps or single-bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in support channel. D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 11/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. 3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article. B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70. C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb. D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater only with approval by the Structural Engineer. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements. E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 for site-fabricated metal supports. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 3.4 CONCRETE BASES A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base. B. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Division 03. C. Anchor equipment to concrete base. 1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal. C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\260529 FL - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 260533 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: 1. Metal conduit and tubing 2. Metal wireways 3. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. B. RGS: Rigid Steel Conduit. C. RAC: Rigid Aluminum Conduit D. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. E. FMC: Flexible metal conduit. F. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. G. LFMC: Liquid tight flexible metal conduit. H. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets. B. Shop Drawings: For the following raceway components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Custom enclosures and cabinets. C. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved: 1. Structural members in the paths of conduit groups with common supports. 2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in the paths of conduit groups with common supports. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that enclosures and cabinets and their mounting provisions, including those for internal components, will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26. Include the following: 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. a. The term "withstand" means "the cabinet or enclosure will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will retain its enclosure characteristics, including its interior accessibility, after the seismic event." 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. E. Source quality-control test reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 2. Wheatland Tube Company. 3. O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal. 4. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 5. Greenfield. 6. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 7. Electri-Flex Co. 8. Permacote. 9. Robroy. B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1; zinc-coated steel. C. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: ANSI C80.5, heavy-wall. D. IMC: ANSI C80.6: zinc-coated steel. E. EMT: ANSI C80.3; zinc-coated steel. F. FMC: Spiral wrapped zinc-coated steel with insulated throats. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 G. LFMC: Highly flexible, hot-dipped galvanized steel conduit with PVC jacket with insulated throats. H. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquid tight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed. 1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886. 2. RSC: Threaded steel insulated bushings and throats. Locknuts shall be steel/zinc plated. 3. IMC: Threaded steel insulated bushings and throats. Locknuts shall be steel/zinc plated. 4. EMT: Steel or die-cast, set-screw or compression type with insulated bushings and throats. 5. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness, 0.040 inch, with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints. I. Combination Expansion/Deflection Fittings 1. Fittings shall be threaded, hot dipped galvanized malleable iron or steel with internal bonding jumper. 2. Fittings shall include bonding jumper, insulated bushing and short nipple. J. Sealing Fittings 1. Threaded sealing fittings for rigid steel conduits shall be zinc- or cadmium- coated, cast or malleable iron; sealing fittings for aluminum conduit shall be threaded cast aluminum. Fittings that prevent passage of water vapor shall be continuous drain. 2. Sealing fittings shall be filled with a UL listed sealing compound. K. Cable Terminators 1. Provide cable terminator assemblies by O-Z/Gedney or equal. 2. Assemblies shall have bakelite discs, neoprene rings and sealing compound within a fitting for attachment to raceway. L. Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit or IMC: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and enhance their conductivity. 2.2 METAL WIREWAYS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman. 3. Square D; Schneider Electric. B. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1 for interior dry locations or Type 3R for exterior wet locations, unless otherwise indicated. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, holddown straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. D. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type for interior locations and Flanged-and-gasketed type for exterior locations. E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. EGS/Appleton Electric. 3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 4. Hoffman. 5. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division. 6. O-Z/Gedney; a unit of General Signal. 7. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 8. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division. 9. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet Division. 10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 11. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 12. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). 13. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary. C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1. D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy or aluminum, Type FD FS, with gasketed cover. E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. F. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum or galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover. G. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit or IMC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: Rigid steel conduit or IMC. 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 4. Device boxes, Aboveground: Cast metal. 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R. B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage within Mechanical, Electrical and unfinished areas defined by architect: EMT. 2. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid steel conduit with cast metal device boxes. Includes raceways in the following locations: a. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units. b. Mechanical and Electrical rooms, below 10’-0” AFF. 3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 5. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit or IMC with cast metal device boxes. 6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 3R, in damp or wet locations. C. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated. 3.2 RACEWAY INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter. B. General 1. Check raceway sizes to determine that green equipment ground conductor fits in same raceway with phase and neutral conductors to meet NEC percentage of fill requirements. Increase duct, conduit, tubing and raceway sizes shown or specified as required to accommodate conductors. 2. Install raceway systems complete before drawing in conductors. Blow through and swab after plaster is finished and dry, and before conductors are installed. Wire shall not be pulled into raceway until building roof and walls are weather-tight. 3. Install connectors and couplings as recommended by manufacturers. Compression fittings shall not be used with rigid steel conduit. Set screw fittings shall not be used with rigid conduit. Set-screw connectors for EMT shall be tightened to embed screws in conduit. 4. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200 lb. Tensile strength. Provide at least 12” of slack at each end of pull wire with labels. 5. Galvanized rigid steel conduit and intermediate metal conduit installed in corrosive environments shall have all field cut threads coated with an approved, electrically Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 conductive, corrosion resistant compound so that the current carrying ability of the conduit is not compromised. 6. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab. 7. Penetrate waterproof walls of structural slabs and foundation walls only where approved by Construction Manager. Submit proposed penetration points, size openings and penetration methods to Construction Manager for approval. 8. All conduit penetrations through exterior foundation walls shall be sealed. Provide sealing assemblies between conduit and sleeve. Provide cable terminators in conduit for cable seal. Provide appropriate sleeve through wall for conduit required. Assembly shall be tightened to seal out water. 9. Raceways shall be installed in such a way as to not block exit and equipment service space. Raceway on or adjacent to equipment shall be located to allow free access to all removable panels and equipment service. 10. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size. 11. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. 12. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. C. Support raceways as specified in Division 26. D. Raceways Installed Underground Below Slab on Grade 1. Raceways shall be located on undisturbed earth. Where the earth has been disturbed or is of poor quality excavate a trench to proper subgrade elevation. Place bedding material and compact trench bottom. 2. Stagger conduit couplings so that couplings on adjacent conduits do not lie in same transverse plane. Provide conduit spacers every five feet. 3. Elbows transitioning from underground to exposed shall be galvanized RSC. Provide appropriate transition fittings. 4. Connections between conduits of different types shall be made in approved manner, using adapters and other materials and methods recommended by conduit manufacturers. 5. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab. E. Install no more than the equivalent offour 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for communications conduits, for which two 90-degree bends are allowed. F. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. G. Raceways Installed Within Slabs 1. If approved by the Project Structural Engineer, feeders, branch circuits and low voltage system conduits may be installed within concrete slabs. Penetrations from concrete slabs and elbows shall be made with galvanized RSC and RSC fittings only. 2. Raceways shall not be installed within the floor slabs unless specifically allowed by the Project Structural Engineer. Refer to Division 3 for additional information. 3. When raceways are allowed in slabs the following shall apply: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 a. Installation shall conform to ACI (American Concrete Institute) 318, Paragraph 6.3, “Conduits and Pipes Embedded in Concrete”. b. Raceways with outside diameters larger than 1/3 slab thickness shall be run concealed in hung ceilings in finished areas, exposed in unfinished Mechanical/Electrical and storage areas, or below slabs on grade. c. Maximum outside diameters of raceways in concrete shall be 1/3 slab thickness. No more than two ¾" raceways shall cross in floor slab at a single point. Submit raceway crossing locations for approval before pouring slabs and relocate at no expense to Owner as directed by Construction Manager. Lateral spacing of parallel raceways shall be at least 6" on centers. Do not run raceway in slab less than 3" thick without express approval and direction of Construction Manager. Raceway in reinforced slabs shall be located above bottom steel reinforcing, below top reinforcing and inside beam stirrup, wall reinforcement and column ties. d. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. e. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. f. Stagger conduit couplings so that couplings on adjacent conduits do not lie in same transverse plane. g. All raceways penetrating the slab shall be galvanized steel. h. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab. i. Connections between conduits of different types shall be made in approved manner, using adapters and other materials and methods recommended by conduit manufacturers. H. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions. I. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. J. Terminations 1. Raceway shall enter and be secured to cabinet, junction box, pull box or outlet box with locknut outside and bushing inside, or with liquid-tight, threaded, self-locking, cold-weld wedge adapter. 2. Provide additional locknut for rigid conduit and wrench- tighten locknut for EMT or flexible conduit where circuit voltage exceeds 250 V. Locknuts and bushings or self-locking adapters will not be required where conduits are screwed into tapped connections. 3. Vertical conduit runs that terminate in bottoms of wall boxes or cabinets shall be protected from entrance of foreign material before installation of conductors. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 4. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. 5. Provide insulated bushings on raceways entering all panels, switchboards, motor controllers, VFDs, etc. and all boxes 12” x 12” and larger to protect conductors. K. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as interior to exterior spaces. 2. In areas in which flammable gases or vapors may be present to prevent transmission of gases or vapors through conduits. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. L. Expansion/Deflection Fittings 1. Raceway buried or secured rigidly on opposite sides of building expansion joints and long runs of exposed raceway subject to stress due to thermal expansion shall have expansion/deflection fittings. Fittings shall safely deflect and expand to twice distance of structural movement. 2. Provide separate external copper bonding jumper secured with grounding straps on each end of fitting, when integral ground is not provided. 3. Raceways buried in concrete shall cross building expansion joints at right angles; provide expansion fittings as required by manufacturer's instructions. Provide insulated bushings at ends of raceways. 4. Coordinate location of expansion/deflection fittings with the structural and architectural drawings. M. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit, or Type MC cable for recessed and semi-recessed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage. N. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. O. Box installation: 1. Determine from the drawings and by actual field conditions, the exact location of each outlet. The outlet locations shall be modified from those shown to accommodate changes in door swings or to clear other interferences that may arise from job construction details, as well as modifications to center them within the room spaces. These modifications shall be made with no change in contract price and shall be a matter of job coordination that gets reflected on the as-built drawings. 2. Check these conditions throughout the entire job and notify the Architect/Engineer or discrepancies, as they may occur, to verify the modifications, if any, before proceeding with the installation. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. Install boxes where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, guidelines and the applicable requirements of the NEC, local codes, the National Electrical Contractors Association’s “Standard of Installation” and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve the intended function. 4. Coordinate location of boxes with millwork, counters, benches and back-splashes denoted on the Architectural and Electrical Drawings. 5. Coordinate box installation with electrical raceway and cable work, as necessary for proper interface. 6. Coordinate cutting of masonry walls and drywalls to achieve neat openings for boxes. 7. Provide all necessary hardware to secure boxes in place. 8. Sheet metal pull boxes shall be supported adequately to maintain shape. Larger boxes shall have structural steel bracing welded into rigid assembly formed adequately to maintain alignment in shipment and installation. Secure covers with corrosion-resistant screws or bolts. 9. Provide clamps, grids and other appurtenances to secure cables within pull boxes. No cable shall be unsupported for more than 30 inches. 10. Provide cable troughs of special shapes, design and construction required to install, support and enclose feeder cable throughout indicated routing. Troughs shall be as specified above for junction and pull boxes, with reinforcing, insulating supports and clamping for cable installation. Cables shall be continuous throughout troughs, and shall be racked in distributed phase groupings arranged with phase cables surrounding neutral conductors. 11. Location a. Do not install boxes back to back in same wall. b. For boxes mounted in exterior walls install insulation behind the box to prevent condensation in box. c. Mount boxes flush with wall in all areas unless noted otherwise on the drawings. Boxes in mechanical rooms may be surface mounted where flush mounting is not possible due to construction. d. Where boxes are positioned back to back on opposite sides of walls or partitions, and are less than 24 inches apart in wall cavities of fire rated partitions, provide firestop products suitable for the installation. Boxes shall not be installed on opposite side of walls or partitions of staggered stud construction unless a Wall Opening Protective Material is installed with the box in accordance with classification requirements for the protective materials. e. Junction and pull box covers shall be readily accessible. Do not install junction or pull boxes above suspended ceilings except where ceiling is removable or where access panel is provided. f. No pull box shall be within 2 feet of another. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 g. Pull boxes connected to concealed conduits shall be mounted with covers flush with finished wall or ceiling. No aluminum pull box shall be embedded in concrete. h. Location of boxes shall be verified with Architect prior to rough-in. Refer to architectural details and elevations. 12. Application a. Provide weatherproof outlets for interior and exterior locations exposed to weather or moisture. b. Junction or pull boxes exposed to rain or in wet locations shall be weatherproof. c. Junction or pull boxes used with aluminum conduit shall be metal compatible with aluminum. 13. Painting a. Exposed conduit, junction boxes and equipment back boxes shall be painted to be as inconspicuous as possible. The Design Professional shall approve the paint color selected. The Electrical Contractor shall prepare color samples for inspection by the Design Professional prior to painting. 3.3 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\260533_RACEWAY AND BOXES.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 260548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Isolation pads. 2. Spring isolators. 3. Restrained spring isolators. 4. Channel support systems. 5. Restraint cables. 6. Hanger rod stiffeners. 7. Anchorage bushings and washers. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. The IBC: International Building Code. B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service. C. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development for the State of California. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic-Restraint Loading: 1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: D. 2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: II. a. Component Importance Factor: As determined by Structural Engineer. b. Component Response Modification Factor: As determined by Structural Engineer. c. Component Amplification Factor: As determined by Structural Engineer. 3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): SS = 0.126. 4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1.0-Second Period: S1 = 0.056. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device. 2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of seismic-restraint component used. a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements. 3. Restrained-Isolation Devices: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads. B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic-restraint details indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and operation, seismic forces required to select vibration isolators and seismic restraints. a. Coordinate design calculations with wind-load calculations required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Division 26 Sections for equipment mounted outdoors. 2. Indicate materials and dimensions and identify hardware, including attachment and anchorage devices. 3. Field-fabricated supports. 4. Seismic-Restraint Details: a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads. b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices. c. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations). C. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for electrical components with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic restraints. D. Welding certificates. E. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. F. Field quality-control test reports. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." D. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC-ES, or preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. E. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following: 1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. 2. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 3. California Dynamics Corporation. 4. Isolation Technology, Inc. 5. Kinetics Noise Control. 6. Mason Industries. 7. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 8. Vibration Isolation. 9. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. D. Pads: Arrange in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment. 1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene. E. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators. 1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch- thick, rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment. F. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic or limit-stop restraint. 1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight being removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- thick, neoprene or rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation. 2. Restraint: Seismic or limit-stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 2.2 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following: 1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. California Dynamics Corporation. 3. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 4. Hilti Inc. 5. Loos & Co.; Seismic Earthquake Division. 6. Mason Industries. 7. TOLCO Incorporated; a brand of NIBCO INC. 8. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. D. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and application requirements shall be as defined in reports by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected. E. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 F. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized-steel cables with end connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivels, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement. G. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections to hanger rod. Do not weld stiffeners to rods. H. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchors and studs. I. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of attachment devices. J. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face. K. Mechanical Anchor: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchors with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of eight times diameter. L. Adhesive Anchor: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or urethane methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive. Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. 2.3 FACTORY FINISHES A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting. B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment before shipping. 1. Powder coating on springs and housings. 2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for exterior use. 3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use. 4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic-control devices to indicate capacity range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLICATIONS A. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces. C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits. 3.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION A. Equipment and Hanger Restraints: 1. Install restrained isolators on electrical equipment. 2. Install resilient, bolt-isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch. 3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component. B. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall. C. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members. D. Drilled-in Anchors: 1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines. 2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength. 3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened. 4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive. 5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior applications. 3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION A. Install flexible connections in runs of raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where they terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting them as they approach equipment. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice. 3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary load-spreading members. 4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Architect. 5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device. 6. Measure isolator restraint clearance. 7. Measure isolator deflection. 8. Verify snubber minimum clearances. 9. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory results are achieved. C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Adjust isolators after isolated equipment is at operating weight. B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation. C. Adjust active height of spring isolators. D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Power raceway identification materials 2. Power and control cable identification materials 3. Conductor identification materials 4. Floor marking tape 5. Warning labels and signs 6. Instruction signs 7. Equipment identification labels 8. Cable ties 9. Miscellaneous identification products 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated. B. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products. C. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ANSI A13.1. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145. D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels. E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size. B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. C. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.015 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable. 1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer. 2.2 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide. B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. C. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.015 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable. 1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer. 2.3 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated. C. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." D. Arc Flash Warning Label Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Provide arc flash and electrocution hazard warning labels for switchgear, transformers, panelboards, motor starters, motor control centers, disconnect switches, and other locations as required by the NEC. 2. Warning labels shall comply with ANSI Z535.4 and the NEC. Labels shall be printed on self-adhesive polyester with pressure sensitive adhesive back and covered with a clear polyester film. Outdoor labels shall be suitable for high UV environment. 2.4 INSTRUCTION SIGNS A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes. 1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment. 2.5 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. B. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. 2.6 CABLE TIES A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 4. Color: Black except where used for color-coding. B. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 4. Color: Black. C. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self locking. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi. 3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0. 4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F. 5. Color: Black. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate. F. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below: 1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon. 2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE A. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows: 1. Normal Power. 2. Emergency Power. 3. Legally Required Standby Power. 4. Optional Standby Power. B. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase. 1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service feeder and branch-circuit conductors. a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied color coding conductor tape for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG. b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: 1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue. c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits: 1) Phase A: Brown. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2) Phase B: Orange. 3) Phase C: Yellow. d. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings. C. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive-film-type labels. D. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags or marker tape to conductors and list source. E. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections. 1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. 2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections. 3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. F. Panelboard Circuit Identification: 1. For each panel provide typewritten directory of circuits that identifies the circuiting as well as breaker size. The directory shall be a full 8.5 inches x 11 inches sheet behind a plastic pocket that is secured to the panelboard. 2. Panel directories shall identify the panel name, their source of power and voltage. 3. Each circuit directory shall include load name and load location. 4. In addition to the hard copy panel directory, the electrical contractor shall provide the electronic version in its native (word or excel) format as well as PDF format as part of the as-built documentation. G. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 1. Labeling Instructions: a. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2-inch- high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure. 2. Equipment to Be Labeled: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d. Panelboards. e. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary. f. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. g. Enclosed switches. h. Enclosed circuit breakers. i. Enclosed controllers. j. Variable-speed controllers. k. Push-button stations. l. Power transfer equipment. m. Contactors. n. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\260553_IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 260573 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 260573 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. C. Drawings, product data, power systems studies, and other data that may be available from the Owner shall be requested prior to submission of bid. Where such information is not available, the work shall include all necessary field investigation and documentation of existing conditions as is required to perform the work included herein. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: 1. Computer software developers 2. Computer software program requirements B. Computer-based, fault-current overcurrent protective device coordination and arc flash hazard studies. Protective devices shall be set based on results of the protective device coordination and arc flash hazard study. C. The studies shall be submitted to the Design Engineer prior to receiving final approval of the distribution equipment shop drawings and/or prior to release of equipment for manufacture. If formal completion of the studies may cause delay in equipment manufacture, approval from the Engineer may be obtained for a preliminary submittal of sufficient study data to ensure that the selection of device ratings and characteristics will be satisfactory. D. The studies shall include all portions of the electrical distribution system (i.e., panels, motors 10 HP and larger, VFDs, disconnects 100A and larger, etc.) from the power source or sources down to and including the smallest adjustable trip circuit breaker in the distribution system. Normal system operating connections and those which result in maximum fault conditions, such as paralleled service, shall be adequately covered in the study. E. Overcurrent protective devices in distribution equipment associated with Article 700, 701, and 702 of NFPA 70 are required to be selectively coordinated. The coordination study must include confirmation that equipment provided serving those systems are selectively coordinated in accordance with NFPA 70. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies. B. Product Certificates: For coordination-study and fault-current-study computer software programs, certifying compliance with IEEE 399. C. Qualification Data: For coordination-study specialist. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 260573 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. Other Action Submittals: The following submittals shall be made after the approval process for system protective devices has been completed. Submittals shall be in digital form. 1. Coordination-study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets. 2. Study and Equipment Evaluation Reports. 3. Coordination-Study Report. 4. Short Circuit Report. 5. Arc Flash Analysis Report E. Studies shall include the following outline: 1. Table of Contents 2. Executive Summary 3. Calculation methods and tabulations. 4. System input Data 5. One-line diagrams and impedance diagrams. 6. Results of the study. 7. Conclusions and recommendations. 8. Arc flash hazard 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section. Manual calculations are not acceptable. B. Coordination-Study Specialist Qualifications: An entity experienced in the application of computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude on electrical distribution systems using similar devices. 1. Professional engineer, licensed in the state where Project is located, shall be responsible for the study. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of engineer. C. Comply with IEEE 242 for short-circuit currents and coordination time intervals. D. Comply with IEEE 399 for general study procedures. E. As recommended in ANSI/NFPA 70B, Recommended Practice for Electrical Equipment Maintenance, short circuit studies and overcurrent protective device coordination studies should be performed when the facility electrical system is designed and these studies should be updated whenever a major modification or renovation takes place. F. In addition, the protection of electrical systems against damage due to short circuit faults is required in NFPA 70, National Electric Code Sections 110.9 “Interrupting Rating” and 110.10 “Circuit Impedance and Other Characteristics.” Proper coordination of protective devices improves system reliability and prevents major blackouts by isolating short circuit faults with the protective device immediately on the source side of the fault. NFPA 70 and various IEEE standards contain requirements and suggested practices to coordinate electrical systems. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 260573 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, utlize software from SKM Systems Analysis, Inc. or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. CGI CYME. 2. EDSA Micro Corporation. 3. ESA Inc. 4. Operation Technology, Inc. 5. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc. 2.2 COMPUTER SOFTWARE PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with IEEE 399. B. Analytical features of fault-current-study computer software program shall include "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399. C. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-currentcharacteristic curves as part of its output. Computer software program shall report device settings and ratings of all overcurrent protective devices and shall demonstrate selective coordination by computer-generated, time-current coordination plots. 1. Optional Features: a. Calculating arcing fault is a requirement. b. Simultaneous faults. c. Explicit negative sequence. d. Mutual coupling in zero sequence. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals for compliance with electrical distribution system coordination requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Devices to be coordinated are indicated on Drawings. 1. Proceed with coordination study only after relevant equipment submittals have been assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submitted and approved prior to coordination study may not be used in study. 3.2 POWER SYSTEM DATA A. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study: 1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Division 26 Sections and involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 260573 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Drawings, product data, power systems studies, and other data that may be available from the Owner shall be requested prior to submission of bid. Where such information is not available, the work shall include all necessary field investigation and documentation of existing conditions as is required to perform the work included herein. 3. The power system study analysis shall include equipment and system information for the system branch affected by the scope of work. 4. Impedance of utility service entrance. 5. Electrical Distribution System Diagram: In hard-copy and electronic-copy formats, showing the following: a. Circuit-breaker and fuse-current ratings and types. b. Relays and associated power and current transformer ratings and ratios. c. Transformer kilovolt amperes, primary and secondary voltages, connection type, impedance, and X/R ratios. d. Generator kilovolt amperes, size, voltage, and source impedance. e. Cables: Indicate conduit material, sizes of conductors, conductor material, insulation, and length. f. Busway ampacity and impedance. g. Motor horsepower and code letter designation according to NEMA MG 1. 1) Individually model motors 10 hp and greater. 2) Where model motors less than 10 hp are fed from common distribution equipment, the motor horsepowers shall be combined into a single load. 6. Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram, cross-referenced with tag numbers on diagram, showing the following: a. Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and frequent starting and stopping. b. Transformer characteristics, including primary protective device, magnetic inrush current, and overload capability. c. Motor full-load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting time, type of start, and thermal-damage curve. d. Generator thermal-damage curve. e. Ratings, types, and settings of utility company's overcurrent protective devices. f. Special overcurrent protective device settings or types stipulated by utility company. g. Time-current-characteristic curves of devices indicated to be coordinated. h. Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical, ampere or current sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short-time adjustment range, and instantaneous adjustment range for circuit breakers. i. Manufacturer and type, ampere-tap adjustment range, time-delay adjustment range, instantaneous attachment adjustment range, and current transformer ratio for overcurrent relays. j. Panelboards, switchboards, motor-control center ampacity, and interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 260573 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.3 FAULT-CURRENT STUDY A. Calculate the maximum available short-circuit current in amperes rms symmetrical at circuitbreaker positions of the electrical power distribution system. The calculation shall be for a current immediately after initiation and for a three-phase bolted short circuit at each of the following: 1. Switchboards. 2. Distribution panelboards. 3. Branch circuit panelboards. B. There are two levels of fault current to be studied as follows: 1. Level 1: Maximum fault current based on infinite bus and limited by the transformer impedance a. In the case of maximum fault current, the study shall be run using the nominal transformer impedance of 5.75%. Another study shall be run when the actual impedance is known upon delivery of the building transformer. 2. Level 2: Minimum fault current based on the actual available fault current. C. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout electrical distribution system for Project. Include studies of system-switching configurations and alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions. D. Calculate momentary and interrupting duties on the basis of maximum available fault current. E. Include fault contribution of all motors 10 hp and above in the study. Variable frequency drives shall be included in the study. F. Calculations to verify interrupting ratings of overcurrent protective devices shall comply with IEEE 241 and IEEE 242. 1. Transformers: a. ANSI C57.12.10. b. ANSI C57.12.22. c. ANSI C57.12.40. d. IEEE C57.12.00. e. IEEE C57.96. 2. Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE 1015 and IEEE C37.20.1. 3. Low-Voltage Fuses: IEEE C37.46. G. Study Report: 1. Show calculated X/R ratios and equipment interrupting rating (1/2-cycle) fault currents on electrical distribution system diagram. H. Equipment Evaluation Report: 1. For 600-V overcurrent protective devices, ensure that interrupting ratings are equal to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current. 2. For devices and equipment rated for asymmetrical fault current, apply multiplication factors listed in the standards to 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current. 3. Verify adequacy of phase conductors at maximum three-phase bolted fault currents; verify adequacy of equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 260573 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 at maximum ground-fault currents. Ensure that short-circuit withstand ratings are equal to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current. I. Note that Contract Documents indicate general requirements for equipment, etc., but additional specific characteristics of equipment furnished shall be determined in accordance with results of short circuit study. 1. Equipment design discrepancies and proposed corrective modifications, if required, shall be submitted with short circuit study with variations clearly noted on subsequent shop drawings. 3.4 COORDINATION STUDY A. Perform coordination study using approved computer software program. Prepare a written report using results of fault-current study. Comply with IEEE 399. 1. Calculate the maximum and minimum 1/2-cycle short-circuit currents. 2. Calculate the maximum and minimum ground-fault currents. B. Comply with IEEE 241 and IEEE 242 recommendations for fault currents and time intervals. C. Provide a ground fault current study for the system, including the associated zero sequence impedance data. Include all adjustable settings for ground fault protective devices. Include manufacturing tolerance and damage bands in plotted fuse characteristics. For 480Y/277V volt systems a TCC curve shall be produced showing the coordination of a 20A single phase load with the ground fault settings of upstream breakers. D. The studies shall include all portions of the electrical distribution system from the power source or sources down to and including the smallest adjustable trip circuit breaker in the distribution system. TCC curves shall be provided for each section of the distribution system that contains an adjustable setting. E. Transformer Primary Overcurrent Protective Devices: 1. Device shall not operate in response to the following: a. Inrush current when first energized. b. Self-cooled, full-load current or forced-air-cooled, full-load current, whichever is specified for that transformer. c. Permissible transformer overloads according to IEEE C57.96 if required by unusual loading or emergency conditions. 2. Device settings shall protect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.00, for fault currents. F. Conductor Protection: Protect cables against damage from fault currents according to ICEA P32-382, ICEA P-45-482, and conductor melting curves in IEEE 242. Demonstrate that equipment withstands the maximum short-circuit current for a time equivalent to the tripping time of the primary relay protection or total clearing time of the fuse. To determine temperatures that damage insulation, use curves from cable manufacturers or from listed standards indicating conductor size and short-circuit current. G. Coordination-Study Report: Prepare a written report indicating the following results of coordination study: 1. Tabular Format of Settings Selected for Overcurrent Protective Devices: a. Device tag. b. Relay-current transformer ratios; and tap, time-dial, and instantaneous-pickup values. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 260573 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 c. Circuit-breaker sensor rating; and long-time, short-time, and instantaneous settings. d. Fuse-current rating and type. e. Ground-fault relay-pickup and time-delay settings. 2. Coordination Curves: Prepared to determine settings of overcurrent protective devices to achieve selective coordination. Graphically illustrate that adequate time separation exists between devices installed in series, including power utility company's upstream devices. Prepare separate sets of curves for the switching schemes and for emergency periods where the power source is local generation. Show the following information: a. Device tag. b. Voltage and current ratio for curves. c. Three-phase and single-phase damage points for each transformer. d. No damage, melting, and clearing curves for fuses. e. Cable damage curves. f. Transformer inrush points. g. Maximum fault-current cutoff point. h. Motor starting curves. H. Completed data sheets for setting of overcurrent protective devices. 3.5 ACH FLASH STUDY A. Provide an electrical arc flash hazard analysis on the Facility to determine incident energy, arc flash protection boundaries, and required personal protection equipment (PPE) for all electrical equipment in the facility. The calculations shall comply with NFPA-70E 2004, and IEEE-15842002. Labels shall be provided for equipment modified as a result of the scope of work for this project. 1. Equipment shall include but not be limited to individually mounted disconnects, individually mounted circuit breakers, panelboards, HVAC equipment control panels operating at 240V or above, variable frequency drives, switchboards, switchgear, UPS units, automatic transfer switches, power distribution units, etc. 2. Equipment with multiple vertical sections such as switchboards, multi-tab panels, etc. shall be provided with an arc flash label for each vertical section. 3. For equipment having multiple access points (front, rear, side) a label shall be provided at each side of access. B. The purpose of this study is to provide a comprehensive software model of the Facility electrical distribution system, which will document facility compliance with NFPA 70E mandates as described below. This model will serve as an integral part of an ongoing safety program by providing integral work permits and arc flash calculations in compliance with NFPA-70E Article 130.1(A)(2) for each electrical equipment in the facility. The goal of this study shall be limit to arc flash incident energy to 8 calories per square centimeter or less at all locations. The study may require multiple iterations to achieve this goal by modifying settings and/or by suggesting different protective equipment. If required, the study report shall summarize and compare different scenarios where the arch flash goal maybe achieved. Consider the loss of coordination (only if not life safety) and equipment with different ratings or settings as possible ways to mitigate higher levels of incident energy. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 260573 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. The analysis and procedures shall comply with the following standards and recommended practices for power system studies. 1. NFPA-70E, 2012 Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace 2. IEEE-1584-2002 3. IEEE-242 “Buff Book” Protection and Coordination of Industrial Power Systems 4. IEEE-399 “Brown Book” Power System Analysis 5. IEEE-141 “Red Book” Electric Power Distribution for Industrial Plants D. Method 1. A detailed arc flash study shall be performed to determine potential arc flash incident energies, arc flash boundaries, shock hazard boundaries and proper personal protective equipment (PPE) for all energized electrical system equipment tasks for the electrical system studied. The calculations shall comply with NFPA-70E 2004, and IEEE-1584. Bolted short circuit calculations used in the above standards shall comply with ANSI C37.010, C37.13, C37.5, IEEE-141, and IEEE-399. The purpose of this study is to determine arc flash hazards in conformance with NFPA-70E, and to provide a comprehensive software model of the electrical distribution system, which provides integral work permits and arc flash calculations in compliance with NFPA 70E Article 130.1(A)(2) for all equipment in the facility. The software program used in this study shall comply with the above standards. No substitutions in calculation methods will be allowed. 2. The arc flash study shall determine the following results. The results shall be provided in spreadsheet format for each mode and electrical system location to provide easy viewing and comparison. Worst-case arc flash energy levels shall be flagged and the spreadsheet comparison table shall be capable of providing its output directly to high quality vinyl label printers. The calculations shall, as a minimum, include a comparison of both 100% and 85% arcing currents for low voltage equipment for each electrical system configuration or operating mode, indicating worst-case arc flash hazards. The spreadsheet results shall include: a. Equipment name and voltage. b. Upstream equipment device name and ANSI function, i.e. 51/50, etc. c. Equipment type, i.e. switchgear, MCC, Panel, VFD, etc. d. Equipment arc gap. e. Bolted and estimated arcing fault current at the fault point (equipment) in symmetrical amperes. The estimated arcing current should be based on the arcing current equations used. f. Trip time, opening time, and total clearing time (total Arc time) of the protective device. g. Worst-case arc flash boundary for each bus/equipment in the model. h. Worst-case arc flash hazard incident energy in cal/cm2 for each bus/equipment in the model. i. Worst-case personal protective equipment (PPE) for each bus/equipment in the model. j. Working distances for up to five different distances showing items worst-case arc flash boundary, worst-case arc flash hazard incident energy, and worst-case personal protective equipment (PPE) for each distance. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 260573 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 k. Indicate “Danger/Hazardous” areas where incident energy is greater than 40 cal/cm2 and provide recommendations to reduced arc flash energy levels for these areas. 3. Flag results where 85% arcing current provided worst-case results. 4. Each mode of operation shall include a detailed write-up indicating areas where incident energy calculations and PPE requirements are higher than calculated in the normal operating mode. 5. The overcurrent protection trip delay time used in the arc flash evaluation study shall be the clearing time of the circuit breaker or 2 seconds, whichever is greater as recommended by IEEE 1584 (section B1). E. Provide a detailed arc flash analysis report including as a minimum: 1. Introduction. 2. Methodology. 3. Information Sources. 4. Key Assumptions. 5. Arc Flash Energy and other consideration for various System Modes of Operation (maintenance mode, bus-tie, co-gen on/off, etc.). 6. Arc Energy at 100% and reduced currents. 7. IEEE 1584-2002 Considerations. 8. Overcurrent Protective Device Changes, Replacements or Setting Changes implemented in study to reduce arc flash hazard exposure. 9. Explanation of Data in Arc Flash Hazard Report Tables. 10. NFPA 70E Information. 11. Shock Hazards with covers removed. 12. Shock Hazard Approach Boundaries. 13. Limited Approach Boundary. 14. Restricted Approach Boundary. 15. Prohibited Approach Boundary. 16. Arc Flash Hazard Boundaries. 17. Results of Arc flash Hazard Analysis for high voltage, medium voltage and low voltage systems, including: a. Working distances. b. Energy Levels. c. PPE Requirements. d. Recommendations to reduce arc flash hazard energy and exposure. For equipment listed in category 3, category 4 and dangerous, verify if the breaker instantaneous setting can be reduced without compromising coordination. If after adjusting instantaneous settings, for equipment in the category 3, category 4 and dangerous provide a brief narrative explaining why the category is so high e. Arc Flash Hazard Report. f. Electronic Copy in Adobe Acrobat format (6.0 or later) Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 260573 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 F. Provide and install print labels for all equipment in the system from the project study file. Assume three labels per equipment/bus using 4 inch x 6 inch labels or one 6 inch x 8 inch label per equipment bus. The labels shall be UV resistant vinyl labels (white with orange warning strip and black letters) conforming to ANSI-Z535. The labels shall be printable directly from the power system software utilized for the study. Labels shall include available fault current. 1. Transfer switches shall be provided with a label for each source. 2. Distribution equipment served from a generator shall be provided with a label for each source. 3. All controllers (i.e., starters, variable frequency drives, etc.) shall be provided with a label. a. Self-adhesive arc flash labels containing study result information. One label shall be provided for each piece of electrical distribution equipment including switchgear, switchboards, distribution panelboards, branch circuit panelboards, and disconnects. Label information shall include the following, at a minimum. b. Name of Equipment c. “Warning” or “Danger” reference as appropriate d. Equipment Voltage Rating (Volts) e. Limited Approach Boundary Distance (Inches) f. Restricted Approach Boundary Distance (Inches) g. Prohibited Approach Boundary Distance (Inches) h. Flash Hazard Boundary (inches) i. Arc Flash Hazard Category j. Incident Energy (cal/cm^2) k. Description of PPE for head, eye, body, hand/arm, and foot protection l. Date of study 4. Refer to sample label below: 5. For equipment with arc reduction provide a second blue label that notes the arc reduction levels when using the arc flash reduction feature Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 260573 - 11 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.6 ADJUSTMENTS, SETTINGS AND MODIFICATIONS A. Provide necessary field settings, adjustments, minor modifications, for conformance with the study, without any additional cost to owner. Examples of minor modifications would be trip sizes within the same frame, the time curve characteristics of inductions relays, CT ranges, etc. B. Proposed corrective modifications will be taken under advisement and the Construction Manager will be given further instructions. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\260573_OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL 260800 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 260800 - COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This section includes commissioning process requirements for Electrical systems, assemblies, and equipment. B. Related Sections 1. Division 01 for general commissioning process requirements. 1.3 DESCRIPTION A. Refer to Division 01 for the description of commissioning. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Division 01 for definitions. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 01 for CxA’s role. B. Refer to Division 01 for specific requirements. C. In addition, provide the following: 1. Certificates of readiness. 2. Certificates of completion of installation, prestart, and startup activities. 3. O&M manuals. 4. Test reports. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test Equipment Calibration Requirements: Contractors will comply with test manufacturer’s calibration procedures and intervals. Recalibrate test instruments immediately after instruments have been repaired resulting from being dropped or damaged. Affix calibration tags to test instruments. Furnish calibration records to CxA upon request. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Refer to Division 01 for requirements pertaining to coordination during the commissioning process. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL 260800 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT A. All standard testing equipment required to perform startup, initial checkout and functional performance testing shall be provided by the Contractor for the equipment being tested. For example, the electrical contractor of Division 26 shall ultimately be responsible for all standard testing equipment for the electrical systems and controls systems in Division 26. A sufficient quantity of two-way radios shall be provided by each contractor. B. Special equipment, tools and instruments (specific to a piece of equipment and only available from vendor) required for testing shall be included in the base bid price to the Owner and left on site, except for stand-alone data logging equipment that may be used by the CxA. C. Proprietary test equipment and software required by any equipment manufacturer for programming and/or start-up, whether specified or not, shall be provided by the manufacturer of the equipment. Manufacturer shall provide the test equipment, demonstrate its use, and assist in the commissioning process as needed. Proprietary test equipment (and software) shall become the property of the Owner upon completion of the commissioning process. D. Data logging equipment and software required to test equipment will be provided by the CxA, but shall not become the property of the Owner. E. All testing equipment shall be of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and/or measure system performance with the tolerances specified in the Specifications. If not otherwise noted, the following minimum requirements apply: Temperature sensors and digital thermometers shall have a certified calibration within the past year to an accuracy of 0.5 deg. F and a resolution of +0.1 deg. F. Pressure sensors shall have an accuracy of +2.0 percent of the value range being measured (not full range of meter) and have been calibrated within the last year. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS A. With assistance from the installing contractors, the CxA will prepare Pre-Functional Checklists for all commissioned components, equipment, and systems B. Red-lined Drawings: 1. The contractor will verify all equipment, systems, instrumentation, wiring and components are shown correctly on red-lined drawings. 2. Preliminary red-lined drawings must be made available to the Commissioning Team for use prior to the start of Functional Performance Testing. 3. Changes, as a result of Functional Testing, must be incorporated into the final as-built drawings, which will be created from the red-lined drawings. 4. The contracted party, as defined in the Contract Documents will create the as-built drawings. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Contractor will provide a copy of O&M literature within 45 days of each submittal acceptance for use during the commissioning process for all commissioned equipment and systems. 2. The CxA will review the O&M literature once for conformance to project requirements. 3. The CxA will receive a copy of the final approved O&M literature once corrections have been made by the Contractor. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL 260800 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. Demonstration and Training: 1. Contractor will provide demonstration and training as required by the specifications. 2. A complete training plan and schedule must be submitted by the Contractor to the CxA four weeks (4) prior to any training. 3. A training agenda for each training session must be submitted to the CxA one (1) week prior the training session. 4. The CA shall be notified at least 72 hours in advance of scheduled tests so that testing may be observed by the CA and Owner's representative. A copy of the test record shall be provided to the CA, Owner, and Architect. 5. Engage a Factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain specific equipment. 6. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping, trouble shooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment. 7. Review data in O&M Manuals. E. Systems manual requirements 1. The Systems Manual is intended to be a usable information resource containing all of the information related to the systems, assemblies, and Commissioning Process in one place with indexes and cross references. 2. The GC shall include final approved versions of the following information for the Systems Manual: a. As-Built System Schematics. b. Verified Record Drawings. c. Test Results (not otherwise included in Cx Record). d. Periodic Maintenance Information for computer maintenance management system. e. Recommendations for recalibration frequency of sensors and actuators. f. A list of contractors, subcontractors, suppliers, architects, and engineers involved in the project along with their contact information. g. Training Records, Information on training provided, attendees list, and any ongoing training. 3. This information shall be organized and arranged by building system, such as fire alarm, chilled water, heating hot water, etc. 4. Information should be provided in an electronic version to the extent possible. Legible, scanned images are acceptable for non-electronic documentation to facilitate this deliverable. 3.2 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Perform commissioning tests at the direction of the CxA. B. Attend construction phase controls coordination meetings. C. Participate in Electrical systems, assemblies, equipment, and component maintenance orientation and inspection as directed by the CxA. D. Provide information requested by the CxA for final commissioning documentation. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL 260800 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 E. Include requirements for submittal data, operation and maintenance data, and training in each purchase order or sub-contract written. F. Prepare preliminary schedule for Electrical system orientations and inspections, operation and maintenance manual submissions, training sessions, equipment start-up and task completion for owner. Distribute preliminary schedule to commissioning team members. G. Update schedule as required throughout the construction period. H. During the startup and initial checkout process, execute the related portions of the prefunctional checklists for all commissioned equipment. I. Assist the CxA in all verification and functional performance tests. J. Provide measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data, and provide data acquisition equipment to record data for the complete range of testing for the required test period. K. Gather operation and maintenance literature on all equipment, and assemble in binders as required by the specifications. Submit to CxA 45 days after submittal acceptance. L. Coordinate with the CxA to provide 48-hour advance notice so that the witnessing of equipment and system start-up and testing can begin. M. Notify the CxA a minimum of two weeks in advance of the time for start of the testing and balancing work. Attend the initial testing and balancing meeting for review of the official testing and balancing procedures. N. Participate in, and schedule vendors and contractors to participate in the training sessions. O. Provide written notification to the CM/GC and CxA that the following work has been completed in accordance with the contract documents, and that the equipment, systems, and sub-system are operating as required. 1. Electrical equipment including switchboards, panelboards, lighting, receptacles, controls and all other equipment furnished under this Division 26. P. The equipment supplier shall document the performance of his equipment. Q. Provide a complete set of red-lined drawings to the CxA prior to the start of Functional Performance Testing. R. Provide training of the Owner’s operating staff using expert qualified personnel, as specified. S. Equipment Suppliers 1. Provide all requested submittal data, including detailed start-up procedures and specific responsibilities of the Owner, to keep warranties in force. 2. Assist in equipment testing per agreements with contractors. 3. Provide information requested by CxA regarding equipment sequence of operation and testing procedures. T. Refer to Division 01, General Commissioning Requirements for additional Contractor responsibilities. 3.3 OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Refer to Division 01, General Commissioning Requirements for Owner’s Responsibilities. 3.4 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Refer to Division 01, General Commissioning Requirements for Design Professional’s Responsibilities. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL 260800 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.5 CXA'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Refer to Division 01, General Commissioning Requirements for CxA’s Responsibilities. 3.6 TESTING PREPARATION A. Certify in writing to the CxA that Electrical systems, subsystems, and equipment have been installed, calibrated, and started and are operating according to the Contract Documents. B. Certify in writing to the CxA that Electrical instrumentation and control systems have been completed and calibrated, that they are operating according to the Contract Documents, and that pretest set points have been recorded. C. Certify in writing that testing procedures have been completed and that testing reports have been submitted, discrepancies corrected, and corrective work approved. D. Place systems, subsystems, and equipment into operating mode to be tested (e.g., normal shutdown, normal auto position, normal manual position, unoccupied cycle, emergency power, and alarm conditions). E. Inspect and verify the position of each device and interlock identified on checklists. F. Check safety cutouts, alarms, and interlocks with smoke control and life-safety systems during each mode of operation. G. Testing Instrumentation: Install measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data as directed by the CxA. 3.7 GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to perform commissioning test at the direction of the CxA. B. Scope of Electrical testing shall include the entire Electrical installation, from the incoming power equipment throughout the distribution system. Testing shall include measuring, but not limited to resistance, voltage, and amperage of system(s) and devices. C. Test all operating modes, interlocks, control responses, and responses to abnormal or emergency conditions, and verify proper response of building automation system controllers and sensors. D. The CxA along with the Electrical contractor and other contracted subcontractors, including the fire alarm Subcontractor shall prepare detailed testing plans, procedures, and checklists for Electrical systems, subsystems, and equipment. E. Tests will be performed using design conditions whenever possible. F. Simulated conditions may need to be imposed using an artificial load when it is not practical to test under design conditions. Before simulating conditions, calibrate testing instruments. Provide equipment to simulate loads. Set simulated conditions as directed by the CxA and document simulated conditions and methods of simulation. After tests, return settings to normal operating conditions. G. The CxA may direct that set points be altered when simulating conditions is not practical. H. The CxA may direct that sensor values be altered with a signal generator when design or simulating conditions and altering set points are not practical. I. If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the Electrical system, document the deficiency and report it to the Owner. After deficiencies are resolved, reschedule tests. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL 260800 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 J. If the testing plan indicates specific seasonal testing, complete appropriate initial performance tests and documentation and schedule seasonal tests. 3.8 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS, SUBSYSTEMS, AND EQUIPMENT TESTING PROCEDURES A. Equipment Testing and Acceptance Procedures: Testing requirements are specified in individual Division 26 sections. Provide submittals, test data, inspector record, infrared camera and certifications to the CA. B. Electrical Instrumentation and Control System Testing: Field testing plans and testing requirements are specified in Division 26 Sections "Instrumentation and Control" and "Sequence of Operations" Assist the CxA with preparation of testing plans. C. Emergency Generator Testing and Acceptance Procedures: Provide technicians, load banks, infrared cameras, instrumentation, tools and equipment to test performance of designated systems and devices at the direction of the CxA. The CxA shall determine the sequence of testing and testing procedures for each equipment item and pipe section to be tested. D. Fire Detection and Alarm System Testing: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools and equipment to test performance of designated systems and devices at the direction of the CxA. The CxA shall determine the sequence of testing and testing procedures for each equipment item and pipe section to be tested. E. Electrical Distribution System Testing: Provide technicians, load banks, infrared cameras, instrumentation, tools and equipment to test performance of designated systems and devices at the direction of the CxA. The CxA shall determine the sequence of testing and testing procedures for each equipment item and pipe section to be tested F. Vibration and Sound Tests: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test performance of vibration isolation and seismic controls. G. The work included in the commissioning process involves a complete and thorough evaluation of the operation and performance of all components, systems and sub-systems. The following equipment and systems shall be evaluated: 1. Automatic temperature controls integrated with the electrical systems 2. Coordination and functionality with the Building Automation System/Building Management Controls System. 3. Access Control. 4. Normal Power System 5. Emergency Power System 6. Optional Standby System. 7. Grounding System. 8. Lighting Controls. 9. Switchboards. 10. Panelboards. 11. Transformers. 3.9 DEFICIENCIES/NON-CONFORMANCE, COST OF RETESTING, FAILURE DUE TO MANUFACTURER DEFECT A. Refer to Division 01, General Commissioning Requirements for requirements pertaining to deficiencies/non-conformance, cost of retesting, or failure due to manufacturer defect. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL 260800 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.10 APPROVAL A. Refer to Division 01, General Commissioning Requirements for approval procedures. 3.11 DEFERRED TESTING A. Refer to Division 01, General Commissioning Requirements for requirements pertaining to deferred testing. 3.12 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall conform to Contract Documents requirements as stated in Division 01. B. Refer to Division 01, General Commissioning Requirements for the AE and CxA roles in the Operation and Maintenance Manual contribution, review and approval process. 3.13 TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL A. Refer to Division 01, General Commissioning Requirements for requirements pertaining to training. B. Electrical Contractor. The electrical contractor shall have the following training responsibilities: 1. Provide the CA with a training plan two weeks before the planned training. 2. Provide designated Owner personnel with comprehensive training in the understanding of the systems and the operation and maintenance of each major piece of commissioned electrical equipment or system. 3. Training shall start with classroom sessions, if necessary, followed by hands on training on each piece of equipment, which shall illustrate the various modes of operation, including startup, shutdown, fire/smoke alarm, power failure, etc. 4. During any demonstration, should the system fail to perform in accordance with the requirements of the O&M manual or sequence of operations, the system will be repaired or adjusted as necessary and the demonstration repeated. 5. The appropriate trade or manufacturer's representative shall provide the instructions on each major piece of equipment. This person may be the start-up technician for the piece of equipment, the installing contractor or manufacturer’s representative. Practical building operating expertise as well as in-depth knowledge of all modes of operation of the specific piece of equipment are required. More than one party may be required to execute the training. 6. The training sessions shall follow the outline in the Table of Contents of the operation and maintenance manual and illustrate whenever possible the use of the O&M manuals for reference. 7. Training shall include: a. Use the printed installation, operation and maintenance instruction material included in the O&M manuals. b. Include a review of the written O&M instructions emphasizing safe and proper operating requirements, preventative maintenance, special tools needed and spare parts inventory suggestions. The training shall include start-up, operation in all modes possible, shut-down, seasonal changeover and any emergency procedures. c. Discuss relevant health and safety issues and concerns. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL 260800 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 d. Discuss warranties and guarantees. e. Cover common troubleshooting problems and solutions. f. Explain information included in the O&M manuals and the location of all plans and manuals in the facility. g. Discuss any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation. 8. Hands-on training shall include start-up, operation in all modes possible, including manual, shut-down and any emergency procedures and preventative maintenance of all pieces of equipment. 9. The electrical contractor shall fully explain and demonstrate the operation, function and overrides of any local packaged controls, not controlled by the central control system. 10. Training shall occur after functional testing is complete, unless approved otherwise by the Owner's. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\260800_COMMISSIONING.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following lighting control devices: 1. Indoor photoelectric switches. 2. Indoor occupancy/vacancy sensors. 3. Indoor daylight sensors. 4. Emergency shunt relays. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. LED: Light-emitting diode. B. PIR: Passive infrared. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details for occupancy and light-level sensors. 1. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring. C. Field quality-control test reports. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INDOOR DAYLIGHT SENSORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 2. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc. 3. Watt Stopper (The). B. Ceiling-Mounted Daylight Sensor: Solid-state, light-level sensor unit, ceiling mounted, to detect changes in lighting levels that are perceived by the eye. 1. Sensor Output: Control voltage output to lighting control units with contacts rated to operate the associated relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit. 2. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 100 to 1000 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levels within that range. 3. Time Delay: Adjustable from 5 to 300 seconds to prevent cycling, with deadband adjustment. 4. Indicator: Two LEDs to indicate the beginning of on-off cycles. 2.2 INDOOR OCCUPANCY / VACANCY SENSORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 2. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc. 3. Watt Stopper (The). B. General Description: Wall- or ceiling-mounting, solid-state units with a separate relay unit. 1. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when covered area is occupied and off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes. 2. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit. 3. Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Power supply to sensor shall be 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source as defined by NFPA 70. 4. Mounting: a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical enclosure. c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged door. 5. Indicator: LED, to show when motion is being detected during testing and normal operation of the sensor. 6. Bypass Switch: Override the on function in case of sensor failure. 7. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc; keep lighting off when selected lighting level is present. 8. BAS Interface: Provide all sensors with an auxiliary contact to enable the BAS to monitor the occupancy sensor status within each room. Interface shall be in a separate junction box with the wires labeled. C. PIR Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by sensing a combination of heat and movement in area of coverage. 1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in.. 2. Detection Coverage (Room): Detect occupancy anywhere in a circular area of 1000 sf when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling. 3. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy within 90 feet when mounted on a 10foot- high ceiling. D. Ultrasonic Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by sensing a change in pattern of reflected ultrasonic energy in area of coverage. 1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s. 2. Detection Coverage (Small Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 600 sf when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling. 3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sf when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling. 4. Detection Coverage (Large Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 2000 sf when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling. 5. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy anywhere within 90 feet when mounted on a 10-foot- high ceiling in a corridor not wider than 14 feet. E. Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by using a combination of PIR and ultrasonic detection methods in area of coverage. Particular technology or combination of technologies that controls on-off functions shall be selectable in the field by operating controls on unit. 1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology. 2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in., and detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s. 3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sf when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.3 EMERGENCY SHUNT RELAY A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Lighting Control and Design, Inc. D. Description: Normally closed, electrically held relay, arranged for wiring in parallel with manual or automatic switching contacts; complying with UL 924. 1. Coil Rating: 120 or 277 V as required by the circuit controlled. 2.4 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26, Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26, Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26, Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION A. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions. 3.2 CONTACTOR INSTALLATION A. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads, to eliminate structureborne vibration, unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory-installed vibration isolators. 3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION A. Wiring Method: Comply with Division 26, Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2 inch. B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions. C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26, Identification for Electrical Systems. 1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors. 2. Identify circuits or luminaries controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each sensor. B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, adjust and test for compliance with requirements. 2. Operational Test: Verify operation of each lighting control device, and adjust time delays. B. Lighting control devices that fail tests and inspections are defective work. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Coordinate demonstration of products specified in this Section with demonstration requirements for low-voltage, programmable lighting control system specified in Division 26. B. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices. Refer to Division 01. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\260923_LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS 260943 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 260943 - NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes manually operated, automatic reacting, digital lighting controls with external signal source and control modules. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BACnet: A networking communication protocol that complies with ASHRAE 135. B. BAS: Building automation system. C. LonWorks: A control network technology platform for designing and implementing interoperable control devices and networks. D. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling and power-limited circuits. E. Monitoring: Acquisition, processing, communication, and display of equipment status data, metered electrical parameter values, power quality evaluation data, event and alarm signals, tabulated reports, and event logs. F. RS-485: A serial network protocol, similar to RS-232, complying with TIA/EIA-485-A. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For control modules, power distribution components, manual switches and plates, and conductors and cables. B. Shop Drawings: Detail assemblies of standard components, custom assembled for specific application on this Project. 1. Outline Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, arrangement of components, and clearance and access requirements. 2. Block Diagram: Show interconnections between components specified in this Section and devices furnished with power distribution system components. Indicate data communication paths and identify networks, data buses, data gateways, concentrators, and other devices to be used. Describe characteristics of network and other data communication lines. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS 260943 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Coordinate nomenclature and presentation with a block diagram. C. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: 1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with data files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens. D. Field quality-control test reports. E. Software licenses and upgrades required by and installed for operation and programming of digital and analog devices. F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting controls to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain lighting control module and power distribution components through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with 47 CFR, Subparts A and B, for Class A digital devices. D. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate lighting control components to form an integrated interconnection of compatible components. 1. Match components and interconnections for optimum performance of lighting control functions. 2. Coordinate lighting controls with BAS HVAC controls for building areas controlled; include the status of lighting controls in each area. B. Coordinate lighting control components specified in this Section with components specified in Division 26. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS 260943 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.8 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT A. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for two years. B. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgrade shall include new or revise licenses for use of the software. 1. Provide 30-day notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system and to allow Owner to upgrade computer equipment, if necessary. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 2. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc. 3. Watt Stopper (The). 2.2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. Expandability: System shall be capable of increasing the number of control functions in the future by 25 percent of current capacity; to include equipment ratings, housing capacities, spare relays, terminals, number of conductors in control cables, and control software. B. Performance Requirements: Manual switch operation sends a signal to programmable-system control module that processes the signal according to its programming and routes an open or close command to one or more relays in the power-supply circuits to groups of lighting fixtures or other loads. C. BAS Interface: Provide hardware and software to enable the BAS to monitor, control, display, and record data for use in processing reports. 1. Hardwired Points: a. Monitoring: On-off status. b. Control: On-off operation. 2. ASHRAE 135 (BACnet) communication interface with the BAS shall enable the BAS operator to remotely control and monitor lighting from a BAS operator workstation. Control features and monitoring points displayed locally at lighting panel shall be available through the BAS. 2.3 CONTROL UNITS A. Control Unit Description: Comply with UL 916 (CSA C22.2, No. 205); microprocessor-based, solid-state, 365-day timing and control unit with circuit boards and associated with relays within a NEMA rated enclosure. Control units shall be programmable and capable of receiving inputs from indicated sensors, provide power switching and control output to connected loads. Control Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS 260943 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 units shall operate standalone or be networkable. Control unit programming of standalone units shall be via hand-held programmer and for networked units via web based network protocol. Control modules shall have the following features: 1. Inputs: Occupancy/vacancy sensors, photo responsive daylight sensors, and manual switching or variable dimming control switches. 2. Outputs: Pilot-duty relays compatible with power switching devices and digital or analog, low-voltage control-circuit outputs. 2.4 MANUAL SWITCHES AND PLATES A. Push-Button Switches: Modular, momentary-contact, low-voltage type. 1. Match color specified in Division 26. 2. Integral green LED pilot light to indicate when circuit is on. 3. Internal white LED locator light to illuminate when circuit is off. B. Manual, Maintained Contact, Full- or Low-Voltage Switch: Comply with Division 26. C. Wall-Box Dimmers: Comply with Division 26. D. Wall Plates: Single and multigang plates as specified in Division 26. E. Legend: Engraved or permanently silk-screened on wall plate where indicated. Use designations indicated on Drawings. 2.5 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Class 2 Power Source: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG, complying with Division 26. B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cables: Multiconductor cable with copper conductors not smaller than No. 18 AWG, complying with Division 26. C. Class 1 Control Cables: Multiconductor cable with copper conductors not smaller than No. 14 AWG, complying with Division 26. D. Digital and Multiplexed Signal Cables: Unshielded, twisted-pair cable with copper conductors, complying with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 5e for horizontal copper cable and with Division 27. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WIRING INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceways except where installed in accessible ceilings. Comply with Division 26. Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2 inch. C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points. Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS 260943 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. Install field-mounting transient voltage suppressors for lighting control devices in Category A locations that do not have integral line-voltage surge protection. E. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated. F. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in terminal cabinets, equipment enclosures, and in junction, pull, and outlet boxes. G. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and assist in field testing. Report results in writing. B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Test for circuit continuity. 2. Verify that the control module features are operational. 3. Check operation of local override controls. 4. Test system diagnostics by simulating improper operation of several components selected by Architect. 3.3 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION A. Install and program software with initial settings of adjustable values. Make backup copies of software and user-supplied values. Provide current licenses for software. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors and to assist Owner's personnel in making program changes to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting controls. Refer to Division 01. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018 _11-30_CD\260943 FL - NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 262200 - LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with capacities up to 1000 kVA: 1. Distribution transformers. 2. Buck-boost transformers. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of transformer indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that transformers, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26. Include the following: 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. D. Qualification Data: For testing agency. E. Source quality-control test reports. F. Field quality-control test reports. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7. C. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. E. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91, "Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast anchorbolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03. B. Coordinate installation of wall-mounting and structure-hanging supports with actual transformer provided. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Products. 2. General Electric Company. 3. Square D; Schneider Electric. 2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service. B. Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps. 1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type. 2. Coil Material: Copper. 2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS A. Comply with NEMA ST 20, and list and label as complying with UL 1561. B. Provide transformers that are constructed to withstand seismic forces specified in Division 26. C. Cores: One leg per phase. D. Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2. 1. Core and coil assembly shall be impregnated with non-hydroscopic, thermosetting varnish and cured to reduce hot spots and seal out moisture. E. Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250. 1. Finish Color: Gray. F. Taps for Transformers Smaller Than 3 kVA: One 5 percent tap above normal full capacity. G. Taps for Transformers 7.5 to 24 kVA: One 5 percent tap above and one 5 percent tap below normal full capacity. H. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and four 2.5 percent taps below normal full capacity. I. Insulation Class: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of 150 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature. J. Energy Efficiency for Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger: 1. Complying with NEMA TP 1, Class 1 efficiency levels. 2. Tested according to NEMA TP 2. K. Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets. L. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for coil and core. M. Low-Sound-Level Requirements: Minimum of 3 dBA less than NEMA ST 20 standard sound levels when factory tested according to IEEE C57.12.91. 2.4 BUCK-BOOST TRANSFORMERS A. Description: Self-cooled, two-winding dry type, rated for continuous duty and with wiring terminals suitable for connection as autotransformer. Transformers shall comply with NEMA ST 1 and shall be listed and labeled as complying with UL 506 or UL 1561. B. Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2. 1. Finish Color: Gray. 2.5 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each distribution transformer, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Division 26. 2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.91. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Factory Sound-Level Tests: Conduct sound-level tests on equipment for this Project. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for each transformer. B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions. C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where transformers will be installed. D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Division 26 have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at location of transformer. E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install wall-mounting transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by transformer manufacturer. 1. Brace wall-mounting transformers as specified in Division 26. B. Construct concrete bases and anchor floor-mounting transformers according to manufacturer's written instructions and requirements in Division 26. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Ground equipment according to Division 26. B. Connect wiring according to Division 26. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. C. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above. D. Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed "Satisfactory Test" label to tested component. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals. Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 10 percent and not being lower than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap settings as test results. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Connect buck-boost transformers to provide nameplate voltage of equipment being served, plus or minus 5 percent, at secondary terminals. C. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings. 3.6 CLEANING A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\262200_LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PANELBOARDS 262416 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to the Building Code and SEI/ASCE 7. Refer to Division 26 for additional information. 1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." 1.3 SUMMARY A. Provide all labor, materials and equipment to furnish and install all of the items specified herein, indicated on the drawings and as necessary for the proper and complete performance of work. B. Panelboards shall be fully rated for available fault currents. Series ratings shall not be accepted. C. Emergency (NFPA 70 Article 700), legally required (NFPA 70 Article 701), panelboards shall be equipped with devices such that selective coordination is maintained. The design intent in this specification and on the contract drawings has generally accounted for selective coordination. Illustrate the selectivity of proposed devices via the coordination study specified in Division 26. D. Section Includes: 1. Distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. 1.4 REFERENCES A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements, and errata) form part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designations only. 1. National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA). a. PB-1 Panelboard b. PB1.1 General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less 3. Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL) a. UL 50 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PANELBOARDS 262416 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 b. UL 67 Panelboards c. UL 508 Standard for Safety Industrial Control Equipment 4. American National Standard Institute (ANSI) 1.5 DEFINITIONS A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Panelboards shall be submitted subsequent to the fault current and coordination studies required in 260573. Equipment submittals prior to the required study shall not be reviewed by the Design Engineer and will be returned “rejected.” B. Panelboards shall be submitted in a logical fashion and follow the order scheduled on the drawings. Disorganized submittals shall not be reviewed by the Design Engineer and will be returned “rejected.” C. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. D. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. 1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. 2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus material, configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices confirming fully rated equipment (series rating of circuit breakers is not acceptable). 5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. 6. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 7. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in panelboards. Submit selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. E. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. F. Field Quality-Control Reports: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements. G. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01, include the following: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PANELBOARDS 262416 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. B. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer. C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. E. Comply with NEMA PB 1. F. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products in conformance with manufacturer's recommended practices as outlined in applicable Installation and Maintenance Manuals. B. Inspect and report concealed damage to carrier within their required time period. C. Protect equipment throughout construction from damage, weather, excessive temperature, and construction operations. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: 1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 deg F to plus 104 deg F. b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet. B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect Construction Manager Owner no fewer than five days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Architect's Construction Manager's Owner's written permission. 3. Comply with NFPA 70E. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PANELBOARDS 262416 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other trades and construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to dedicated equipment space and workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS A. Manufacturers 1. The design is based on Square D to establish standards of quality for materials and performance. The naming of a specific manufacturer or catalog number does not waive any requirements or performance of individual components described in the specification. Provide Square D Series NQOB and NF for 225A and below for receptacle and lighting panels and I-Line for distribution and panels above 225A. 2. Eaton Cutler-Hammer panelboards shall be Type PRL-1 for 225A and below for receptacle and lighting panels, Cutler-Hammer PRL-3 for distribution to 225A and CutlerHammer PRL-4 for distribution to 1200A. 3. GE panelboards shall be Series A for 225A and below for receptacle and lighting panels, GE Spectra Series for panelboards and distribution panels above 225A. B. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26. C. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets as indicated in the contract documents. 1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. c. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. 2. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover (door in door type). Opening inner door shall expose circuit breaker operator handles and panelboard directory. Opening outer door shall expose terminals and circuit breakers in a single operation. 3. Where two section panels are required, bolt boxes together to form one unit. Trim shall be two-piece construction with doors of equal size over each section. 4. Power and lighting panels shall have heavy duty, continuous, section vertical-hinging to box section for access to wiring gutters in addition to trim door 5. All flush mounted panelboards mounted in common corridors shall have the same size enclosure regardless of pole space. 6. Finishes: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PANELBOARDS 262416 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 a. Panels and Trim: Steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel. 7. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with transparent protective cover. Directories shall be typed showing use of each circuit and the panelboard designation. 8. Panelboard designations shall be labeled on the front of the panel with a screw-on nameplate. D. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom. E. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: 1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding conductors; bonded to box. F. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes. 1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. 3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type. G. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices. H. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals. 2.2 PANELBOARDS A. Panelboards shall meet or exceed requirements of NEMA Standard Publication PB-1 and UL-50 and 67. Provide cabinets with flush hinges and combination catch and lock. Provide wiring gutters to accommodate large multiplier feeder cables and lugs. Except as shown otherwise on drawings, wiring gutters shall be at least 4” for lighting and 208V panels and 6” for 480V panels. B. Panelboards shall have short circuit current rating equal to or greater than circuit breaker AIC ratings schedule on drawings. Panelboards rated 240 volts shall have the following minimum ratings: 1. 10k AIC where shown fed via a 150 kVA transformer and less. 2. 22k AIC where shown fed via a 225 kVA and 300 kVA transformer. 3. 35k AIC where shown fed via a 500 kVA transformer. C. Panelboards served from transformers shall have a main breaker, unless an enclosed circuit breaker or fused switch is shown. D. Main bus bars shall be copper, sized as required by UL standards to limit temperature rise on current carrying parts to 50°C above ambient 40°C maximum. Main bus bars shall be sized at least to full rating of feeders overcurrent device that feeds the panelboard. E. Provide molded case, bolt-on, thermal-magnetic trip, single, two or three pole branch circuit breakers as shown on drawings. Multiple pole breakers shall be single handle, common-trip. Circuit breakers shall be listed and labeled for 75°C conductor ampacities. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PANELBOARDS 262416 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 F. Provide bus connections for future overcurrent device with suitable insulation and bracing to maintain proper short circuit rating and voltage clearances, where required on drawings. Provide for ready insertion of future breaker. G. Provide separate equipment ground bus for each panelboard. H. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes. 1. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. 2. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type. 3. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device. 4. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. 5. Gutter-Tap Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. I. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or load centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. J. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices. 2.3 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. 1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. 2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with frontmounted, field-adjustable trip setting. 3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with RMS sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or fieldreplicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings: a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. c. Long- and short-time time adjustments. d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response. 4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5. 5. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip). 6. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip). 7. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories: a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PANELBOARDS 262416 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits. d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator. e. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on position. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1. B. Examine panelboards at delivery before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation. C. Examine the areas and conditions under which panelboards are to be installed and notify engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, guidelines and the applicable requirements of the NEC, local codes, the National Electrical Contractors Association’s “Standard of Installation” and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve the intended function. B. Install all flush mounted panelboards with one spare 1½ -inch and two ¾” conduits from panel to above accessible ceiling. C. Location: 1. Maintain the minimum NEC clearances about the equipment. 2. Locate top of enclosures approximately 6’-6” above floor, at a masonry joint if applicable. Panelboard shall never be mounted such that the handle of the highest circuit breaker exceeds 6’-6” AFF. 3. Provide 1/2” spacers for panelboards mounted at exterior walls below grade to establish an air space behind panel. D. Anchoring: 1. Provide all necessary hardware to secure panelboard in place. Anchor enclosure firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they are permanently and mechanically secure. 2. Mount free standing distribution panels on 6-inch high concrete pads with 1-inch chamfered edges. 3. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26. E. Branch circuit wiring shall be peeled out of the wiring gutters at 90 degrees to circuit breakers and terminal lugs for a neat installation. F. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed. G. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges. H. Install filler plates in unused spaces. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PANELBOARDS 262416 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 I. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties. 3.3 BALANCING LOADS A. After Substantial Completion, but not more than two months after Final Acceptance, conduct load balancing measurements and circuit changes as follows: 1. Perform measurements during period of normal working load as advised by the Owner. 2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside the normal occupancy/working schedule of the facility. Make special arrangements with the owner to avoid disrupting critical 24hour services such as FAX machines, and on line data processing, computing, transmitting and receiving equipment. 3. Recheck loads after circuit changes during normal load period. Record all load readings before and after changes and submit test record. 4. Tolerance: Difference between phase loads exceeding 20 percent at any one panelboard is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as required to meet this minimum requirement. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Division 26. B. Directories: 1. Fill out the enclosure circuit directory card upon completion of work and install in panelboard. 2. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable. 3. Incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26. D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. B. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 PANELBOARDS 262416 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 C. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes. 1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading. 2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment. 3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings before and after changes and submit test records. 4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\262416_PANELBOARDS.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Straight blade receptacles 2. GFCI receptacles 3. Twist-locking receptacles 4. Pendant cord connector devices 5. Cord and plug sets 6. Snap switches 7. Wall plates 8. Poke-through assemblies 9. Multi-outlet assemblies 10. Service Poles 11. Finishes B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for workstation outlets. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor. D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference. E. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for pre-marking wall plates. C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified. D. Field quality-control test reports. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations. 1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements. B. Coordinate the locations of outlet boxes between the electrical drawings and any other drawings associated with the project. Discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Architect by formal RFI procedure. Any reasonable change in location of outlets shall not involve additional expense to Owner. The term “reasonable” shall be interpreted as moving outlet 10’-0” in any direction from the location indicated on the Electrical drawings. Refer to specifications 20 00 00 for additional information regarding discrepancies in documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour). 2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex). b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex). Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex). d. Pass & Seymour; 5361 (single), CRB5362 (duplex). 2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES A. General Description: Straight blade, non-feed-through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, Federal Specification W-C-596 and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped. The device must have Self-test feature (conducts an automatic test, ensuring ground fault protection). If ground fault protection is compromised, power to the receptacle must be discontinued. B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; GF20. b. Hubbell; c. Leviton; d. Pass & Seymour; 2097. 2.4 TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES A. Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration L5-20R, and UL 498. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; L520R. b. Hubbell; HBL2310. c. Leviton; 2310. d. Pass & Seymour; L520-R. 2.5 PENDANT CORD-CONNECTOR DEVICES A. Description: Matching, locking-type plug and receptacle body connector; NEMA WD 6 configurations L5-20P and L5-20R, heavy-duty grade. 1. Body: Nylon with screw-open cable-gripping jaws and provision for attaching external cable grip. 2. External Cable Grip: Woven wire-mesh type made of high-strength galvanized-steel wire strand, matched to cable diameter, and with attachment provision designed for corresponding connector. 2.6 CORD AND PLUG SETS A. Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being connected. 1. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with green-insulated grounding conductor and equipment-rating ampacity plus a minimum of 30 percent. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection. 2.7 SNAP SWITCHES A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20. B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way), 2224 (four way). b. Hubbell; HBL1221 (single pole), HBL1222 (two pole), HBL1223 (three way), HBL1224 (four way). c. Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four way). d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1 (single pole), PS20AC2 (two pole), PS20AC3 (three way), PS20AC4 (four way). e. C. Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary Contact, Center-Off Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; 1995. b. Hubbell; HBL1557. c. Leviton; 1257. d. Pass & Seymour; 1251. e. 2.8 WALL PLATES A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices. 1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inch- thick, satin-finished stainless steel. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in "wet locations." B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weatherresistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover. 2.9 MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLIES A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Mono Systems 3. Wiremold Company (The). C. Components of Assemblies: Products from a single manufacturer designed for use as a complete, matching assembly of raceways and receptacles. D. Raceway Material: Extruded aluminum with manufacturer's standard finish. E. Wire: No. 12 AWG minimum. No. 10 AWG and larger conductors shall be provided to match branch circuit overcurrent device rating as shown in Branch Circuits Schedule on drawings. 2.10 SERVICE POLES A. Description: Factory-assembled and -wired units to extend power and voice and data communication from distribution wiring concealed in ceiling to devices or outlets in pole near floor. 1. Poles: Nominal 2.5-inch- square cross section, with height adequate to extend from floor to at least 6 inches above ceiling, and with separate channels for power wiring and voice and data communication cabling. 2. Mounting: Ceiling trim flange with concealed bracing arranged for positive connection to ceiling supports; with pole foot and carpet pad attachment. 3. Finishes: Satin-anodized aluminum. 4. Wiring: Sized for minimum of five No. 12 AWG power and ground conductors and a minimum of four, 4-pair, Category 3 or 5 voice and data communication cables. 5. Power Receptacles: Two duplex, 20-A, heavy-duty, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R units. 6. Voice and Data Communication Outlets: Blank coverplate for jacks provided by Division 27 Communications. 2.11 FINISHES A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color. 1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect, unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing. 2. Wiring Devices Connected to Optional Standby Power System: Red. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted. B. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. C. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. 4. Existing Conductors: a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough. D. Device Installation: 1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact. E. Receptacle Orientation: 1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the left. 2. Install hospital-grade receptacles in patient-care areas with the ground pin or neutral blade at the top. F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 H. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot, stamped or engraved machine printing with black white red-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. In healthcare facilities, prepare reports that comply with recommendations in NFPA 99. 2. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 3. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement. B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: 1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\262726_WIRING DEVICES.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 FUSES 262813 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 262813 - FUSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in control circuits enclosed switches enclosed controllers. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements, and errata) form part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designations only. 1. National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL) a. UL 508 Standard for Safety Industrial Control Equipment b. UL 977 Fused Power Circuit Devices 3. American National Standard Institute (ANSI) 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and rating of product indicated. Include construction details, material, dimensions, and descriptions of individual components. Include the following for each fuse type indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information: If ratings of fuses have been adjusted to accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of fuses with adjusted ratings. a. For each fuse having adjusted ratings, include location of fuse, original fuse rating, local ambient temperature, and adjusted fuse rating. b. Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperature adjustment calculations are based. 2. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, and ratings. 3. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics. 4. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves (instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 FUSES 262813 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 5. Coordination charts and tables and related data. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuses to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01, include the following: 1. Ambient temperature adjustment information. 2. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics. 3. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves (instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse. 4. Coordination charts and tables and related data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single source from single manufacturer. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses. D. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F or more than 100 deg F, apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size and with system short-circuit current levels. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following : 1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc. 2. Edison Fuse, Inc. 3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc. 4. Littelfuse, Inc. 2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 FUSES 262813 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically damaged. B. Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features. C. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment. D. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to fuse ratings. E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS A. Cartridge Fuses: 1. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay. 2. Other Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay. 3. Control Circuits: Class CC, time delay. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 and indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\262813_FUSES.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches. 3. Receptacle switches. 4. Shunt trip switches. 5. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs). 6. Molded-case switches. 7. Enclosures. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. NC: Normally closed. B. NO: Normally open. C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes. 1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Current and voltage ratings. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate). 4. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components. 6. Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. C. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. D. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. E. Field quality-control reports. 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements. F. Manufacturer's field service report. G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01, include the following: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers. 2. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer. C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. E. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F. 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet. B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect Construction Manager Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. 2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Architect's Construction Manager's Owner's written permission. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240 or 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses, Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. C. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 4. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified. 5. Auxiliary Contact Kit: One NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open. 6. Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle. 7. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240 or 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. C. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 4. Auxiliary Contact Kit: One NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open. 5. Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle. 6. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 2.3 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents. C. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. D. Adjustable, Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting. E. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field-replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with the following field-adjustable settings: 1. Instantaneous trip. 2. Long- and short-time pickup levels. 3. Long- and short-time time adjustments. 4. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response. F. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller, and let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5. G. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip element with integral limiter-style fuse listed for use with circuit breaker and trip activation on fuse opening or on opening of fuse compartment door. H. Ground-Fault, Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip). I. Ground-Fault, Equipment-Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: With Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip). J. Features and Accessories: 1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. 3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting circuits. 4. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; integrally mounted, self-powered type with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zerosequence current transformer/sensor. 5. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.4 ENCLOSURES A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. 1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 3. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. 4. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated. B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26. C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. D. Install fuses in fusible devices. E. Comply with NECA 1. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with requirements in Division 26. 1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. 2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. C. Tests and Inspections: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 3. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\262816 FL - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 262923 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 262923 - VARIABLE-FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes solid-state, PWM, VFCs for speed control of three-phase, squirrel-cage induction motors. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BMS: Building management system. B. IGBT: Integrated gate bipolar transistor. C. LAN: Local area network. D. PID: Control action, proportional plus integral plus derivative. E. PWM: Pulse-width modulated. F. VFC: Variable frequency controller. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Compliance to IEEE 519 – harmonic analysis for particular jobsite including total harmonic voltage distortion and total harmonic current distortion (TDD). 1. The VFC manufacturer shall provide calculations; specific to this installation, showing total harmonic voltage distortion is less than 5%. Input line filters shall be sized and provided as required by the VFC manufacturer to ensure compliance with IEEE standard 519. All VFCs shall include a minimum of 5% impedance reactors, no exceptions. a. The calculations shall be performed using the harmonics analysis software SKM Power Tools for Windows Hi-Wave module or similar type analysis software. The intent is to include the entire electrical distribution system impedance in the harmonics analysis. b. The Point of Common Coupling shall be the main switchboard or switchgear for the building. B. Product Data: For each type of VFC. Include dimensions, mounting arrangements, location for conduit entries, shipping and operating weights, and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical ratings, characteristics, and finishes. C. Shop Drawings: For each VFC. 1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following: a. Each installed unit's type and details. b. Nameplate legends. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 262923 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 c. Short-circuit current rating of integrated unit. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring for VFCs. Provide schematic wiring diagram for each type of VFC. D. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, showing dimensioned layout, required working clearances, and required area above and around VFCs where pipe and ducts are prohibited. Show VFC layout and relationships between electrical components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate field measurements. E. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that VFCs, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26. Include the following: 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. F. Qualification Data 1. VFCs and options shall be UL listed as a complete assembly. VFCs that require the customer to supply external fuses for the VFC to be UL listed are not acceptable. The base VFC shall be UL listed for 100 KAIC without the need for input fuses. 2. CE Mark – The VFC shall conform to the European Union Electromagnetic Compatibility directive, a requirement for CE marking. The VFC shall meet product standard EN 61800-3 for the First Environment restricted level. 3. The VFC manufacturer shall have available a comprehensive, HVAC Drive Computer Based Training (CBT) product. The CBT product shall include detailed, interactive sections covering VFC unpacking, proper mechanical and electrical installation, and programming. The CBT product shall allow the user to provide just-in-time training to new personnel or refresher training for maintenance and repair personnel on the user’s site. The CBT product shall be repeatable, precise and shall include record keeping capability. The CBT product shall record answers to simulations and tests by student ID. The CBT product must be professionally produced and have interactive sections, student tests, and include video clips of proper wiring and installation. G. Field quality-control test reports. H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For VFCs, all installed devices, and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01, include the following: 1. Routine maintenance requirements for VFCs and all installed components. 2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices. I. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full-load currents. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 262923 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 J. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have been installed and arrange to demonstrate that dip switch settings for motor running overload protection suit actual motor to be protected. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain, within 100 miles of Project site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance and repairs. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the International Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the International Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3. C. Source Limitations: Obtain VFCs of a single type through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. E. Comply with NFPA 70. F. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for VFCs, minimum clearances between VFCs, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions and clearances. G. Referenced Standards: 1. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) a. Standard 519-1992, IEEE Guide for Harmonic Content and Control. 2. Underwriters laboratories a. UL508C 3. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA) a. ICS 7.0, AC Adjustable Speed Drives 4. IEC 16800 Parts 1 and 2 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver VFCs in shipping splits of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path as indicated. B. Store VFCs indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect VFCs from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage. C. If stored in areas subject to weather, cover VFCs to protect them from weather, dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside controllers; install electric heating of sufficient wattage to prevent condensation. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation, capable of driving full load without de-rating, under the following conditions, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature: 0 to 40 deg C. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 262923 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Humidity: Less than 90 percent (non-condensing). 3. Altitude: Not exceeding 3300 feet. B. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner, Architect, and Construction Manager no less than one week in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service. 2. Indicate method of providing temporary electrical service. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without written permission. C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for VFCs, including clearances between VFCs, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of VFCs with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03. C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 07. D. Coordinate features of VFCs, installed units, and accessory devices with pilot devices and control circuits to which they connect. E. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each VFC and each installed unit with ratings and characteristics of supply circuit, motor, required control sequence, and duty cycle of motor and load. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Spare Fuses: Furnish one spare for every five installed, but no less than one set of three of each type and rating. 2. Indicating Lights: Two of each type installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. ABB, Inc. 2. Yaskawa 3. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products. 2.2 VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS A. Description: NEMA ICS 2, IGBT, PWM, VFC; listed and labeled as a complete unit and arranged to provide variable speed of an NEMA MG 1, Design B, 3-phase induction motor by adjusting output voltage and frequency. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 262923 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Provide unit suitable for operation of premium-efficiency motor as defined by NEMA MG 1. 2. VFCs shall be 6 pulse design with 5 percent input impedance. All components shall be integrally mounted and wired in a single enclosure. B. Design and Rating: Match load type such as fans, blowers, and pumps; and type of connection used between motor and load such as direct or through a power-transmission connection. C. The VFC package as specified herein shall be enclosed in a UL Listed Type 12 enclosure, completely assembled and tested by the manufacturer in an ISO9001 facility. The VFC tolerated voltage window shall allow the VFC to operate from a line of +30 percent nominal, and -35 percent nominal voltage as a minimum. D. Output Rating: 3-phase; 6 to 60 Hz, with voltage proportional to frequency throughout voltage range. E. Unit Operating Requirements: 1. Input ac voltage tolerance of 208 V, plus or minus 5, 380 to 500 V, plus or minus 10. 2. Input frequency tolerance of 50/60 Hz, plus or minus 6 percent. 3. Minimum Efficiency: 96 percent at 60 Hz, full load. 4. Minimum Displacement Primary-Side Power Factor: 96 percent. 5. Overload Capability: 1.1 times the base load current for 60 seconds; 2.0 times the base load current for 3 seconds. 6. Starting Torque: 100 percent of rated torque or as indicated. 7. Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 1 percent. F. Isolated control interface to allow controller to follow control signal over an 11:1 speed range. 1. Electrical Signal: 4 to 20 mA at 24 V. G. Internal Adjustability Capabilities: 1. Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum rpm. 2. Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum rpm. 3. Acceleration: 2 to a minimum of 22 seconds. 4. Deceleration: 2 to a minimum of 22 seconds. 5. Current Limit: 50 to a minimum of 110 percent of maximum rating. H. Self-Protection and Reliability Features: 1. Input transient protection. a. The VFC shall include a coordinated AC transient protection system consisting of 4-120 joule rated MOVs (phase to phase and phase to ground), a capacitor clamp, and 5% impedance reactors. 2. Under- and overvoltage trips; inverter over temperature, overload, and overcurrent trips. 3. Motor Overload Relay: Adjustable and capable of NEMA ICS 2, Class 10 performance. 4. Notch filter to prevent operation of the controller-motor-load combination at a natural frequency of the combination. 5. Three (3) programmable critical frequency lockout ranges to prevent the VFC from operating the load continuously at an unstable speed. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 262923 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 6. Instantaneous line-to-line and line-to-ground overcurrent trips. 7. Loss-of-phase protection. 8. Reverse-phase protection. 9. Short-circuit protection. 10. Motor over temperature fault. I. Multiple-Motor Capability: Controller suitable for service to multiple motors and having a separate overload relay and protection for each controlled motor. Overload relay shall shut off controller and motors served by it when overload relay is tripped. J. Automatic Reset/Restart: Attempts three restarts after controller fault or on return of power after an interruption and before shutting down for manual reset or fault correction. Bidirectional autopsied search shall be capable of starting into rotating loads spinning in either direction and returning motor to set speed in proper direction, without damage to controller, motor, or load. K. Power-Interruption Protection: To prevent motor from re-energizing after a power interruption until motor has stopped. L. Torque Boost: Automatically varies starting and continuous torque to at least 1.5 times the minimum torque to ensure high-starting torque and increased torque at slow speeds. M. Motor Temperature Compensation at Slow Speeds: Adjustable current fall-back based on output frequency for temperature protection of self-cooled, fan-ventilated motors at slow speeds. N. Input Line Conditioning 1. The VFC shall have an integral 5 percent impedance line reactors to reduce the harmonics to the power line and to add protection from AC line transients. The 5 percent impedance may be from dual (positive and negative DC bus) reactors, or 5 percent AC line reactors. VFCs with only one DC reactor shall add AC line reactors. O. VFC Output Filtering: The VFC shall be constructed to limit output voltage spikes. Include an output DV/DT filter to limit voltage spikes at the motor. The filter shall be housed integral to the VFC or in an enclosure adjacent to the VFC. P. Status Lights: Door-mounted LED indicators shall indicate the following conditions: 1. Power on. 2. Run. 3. Overvoltage. 4. Line fault. 5. Overcurrent. 6. External fault. Q. Panel-Mounted Operator Station (Keypad): Start-stop and auto-manual selector switches with manual speed control potentiometer and elapsed time meter. R. Indicating Devices: Meters or digital readout devices and selector switch, mounted flush in controller door and connected to indicate the following controller parameters: 1. Output frequency (Hz). 2. Motor speed (rpm). 3. Motor status (running, stop, fault). 4. Motor current (amperes). Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 262923 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 5. Motor torque (percent). 6. Fault or alarming status (code). 7. PID feedback signal (percent). 8. DC-link voltage (VDC). 9. Set-point frequency (Hz). 10. Motor output voltage (V). S. Control Signal Interface: 1. Electric Input Signal Interface: A minimum of 2 analog inputs (0 to 10 V or 0/4-20 mA) and 6 programmable digital inputs. 2. Remote Signal Inputs: Capability to accept any of the following speed-setting input signals from the BMS or other control systems: a. 0 to 10-V dc. b. 0-20 or 4-20 mA. c. Potentiometer using up/down digital inputs. d. Fixed frequencies using digital inputs. e. RS485. f. Keypad display for local hand operation. 3. Output Signal Interface: a. A minimum of 1 analog output signal (0/4-20 mA), which can be programmed to any of the following: 1) Output frequency (Hz). 2) Output current (load). 3) DC-link voltage (VDC). 4) Motor torque (percent). 5) Motor speed (rpm). 6) Set-point frequency (Hz). 4. Remote Indication Interface: A minimum of 2 dry circuit relay outputs (120-V ac, 1 A) for remote indication of the following: a. Motor running. b. Set-point speed reached. c. Fault and warning indication (over temperature or overcurrent). d. PID high- or low-speed limits reached. T. Communications 1. The VFC shall have an RS-485 port as standard. The standard protocols shall be Modbus, Johnson Controls N2 bus, and Siemens Building Technologies FLN. Optional protocols for LonWorks, BACnet, Profibus, Ethernet, and DeviceNet shall be available. Each individual drive shall have the protocol in the base VFC. The use of third party gateways and multiplexers is not acceptable. All protocols shall be “certified” by the governing authority. Use of non-certified protocols is not allowed. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 262923 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. The BACnet connection shall be an RS485, MSTP interface operating at 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, or 76.8 Kbps. The connection shall be tested by the BACnet Testing Labs (BTL) and be BTL Listed. The BACnet interface shall conform to the BACnet standard device type of an Applications Specific Controller (B-ASC). The interface shall support all BIBBs defined by the BACnet standard profile for a B-ASC including, but not limited to: a. Data Sharing – Read Property – B. b. Data Sharing – Write Property – B. c. Device Management – Dynamic Device Binding (Who-Is; I-AM). d. Device Management – Dynamic Object Binding (Who-Has; I-Have). e. Device Management – Communication Control – B. f. If additional hardware is required to obtain the BACnet interface, the VFC manufacturer shall supply one BACnet gateway per drive. Multiple VFCs sharing one gateway shall not be acceptable. 3. Serial communication capabilities shall include, but not be limited to; run-stop control, speed set adjustment, proportional/integral/derivative PID control adjustments, current limit, accel/decel time adjustments, and lock and unlock the keypad. The drive shall have the capability of allowing the DDC to monitor feedback such as process variable feedback, output speed / frequency, current (in amps), percent torque, power (kW), kilowatt hours (resettable), operating hours (resettable), and drive temperature. The DDC shall also be capable of monitoring the VFC relay output status, digital input status, and all analog input and analog output values. All diagnostic warning and fault information shall be transmitted over the serial communications bus. Remote VFC fault reset shall be possible. The following additional status indications and settings shall be transmitted over the serial communications bus – keypad “Hand” or “Auto” selected, bypass selected, the ability to change the PID setpoint, and the ability to force the unit to bypass (if bypass is specified). The DDC system shall also be able to monitor if the motor is running in the VFC mode or bypass mode (if bypass is specified) over serial communications. A minimum of 15 field parameters shall be capable of being monitored. 4. The VFC shall allow the DDC to control the drive’s digital and analog outputs via the serial interface. This control shall be independent of any VFC function. For example, the analog outputs may be used for modulating chilled water valves or cooling tower bypass valves. The drive’s digital (relay) outputs may be used to actuate a damper, open a valve or control any other device that requires a maintained contact for operation. In addition, all of the drive’s digital and analog inputs shall be capable of being monitored by the DDC system. 5. The VFC shall include an independent PID loop for customer use. The independent PID loop may be used for cooling tower bypass value control, chilled water value control, etc. Both the VFC control PID loop and the independent PID loop shall continue functioning even if the serial communications connection is lost. The VFC shall keep the last good set-point command and last good DO and AO commands in memory in the event the serial communications connection is lost. U. Manual Bypass and Control Features 1. All features to be furnished and mounted by the drive manufacturer. All features shall be UL Listed by the drive manufacturer as a complete assembly and carry a UL508 label. 2. A complete factory wired and tested bypass system consisting of an output contactor and bypass contactor. Overload protection and shall be provided in both drive and bypass modes. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 262923 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3. Door interlocked, padlockable circuit breaker that will disconnect all input power from the drive and all internally mounted options. 4. Fused VFC only disconnect (service switch). Fast acting fuses exclusive to the VFC – fast acting fuses allow the VFC to disconnect from the line prior to clearing upstream branch circuit protection, maintaining bypass capability. Bypass designs, which have no such fuses, or that incorporate fuses common to both the VFC and the bypass will not be accepted. Three contactor bypass schemes are not acceptable. 5. The drive / bypass shall provide single-phase motor protection in both the VFC and bypass modes. 6. The following operators shall be provided: a. Bypass Hand-Off-Auto. b. Drive mode selector. c. Bypass mode selector. d. Bypass fault reset. 7. The following indicating lights (LED type) shall be provided. A test mode or push to test feature shall be provided. a. Power-on (Ready). b. Run enable (safeties) open. c. Drive mode select damper opening. d. Bypass mode selected. e. Drive running. f. Bypass running. g. Drive fault. h. Bypass fault. i. Bypass H-O-A mode. j. Automatic transfer to bypass selected. k. Safety open. l. Damper opening. m. Damper end-switch made. 8. The following relay (form C) outputs from the bypass shall be provided: a. System started. b. System running. c. Bypass override enabled. d. Drive fault. e. Bypass fault (motor overload or underload (broken belt)). f. Bypass H-O-A position. 9. The digital inputs for the system shall accept 24V or 115VAC (selectable). The bypass shall incorporate internally sourced power supply and not require an external control power source. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 262923 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 10. Customer Interlock Terminal Strip: Provide a separate terminal strip for connection of freeze, fire, smoke contacts, and external start command. All external safety interlocks shall remain fully functional whether the system is in Hand, Auto, or Bypass modes (not functional in Fireman’s Override 2). The remote start/stop contact shall operate in VFC and bypass modes. 11. Dedicated digital input that will transfer motor from VFC mode to bypass mode upon dry contact closure for fireman’s override. Two modes of operation are required. a. One mode forces the motor to bypass operation and overrides both the VFC and bypass H-O-A switches and forces the motor to operate across the line (test mode). The system will only respond to the digital inputs and motor protections. b. The second fireman’s override mode remains as above, but will also defeat the overload and single-phase protection for bypass and ignore all keypad and digital inputs to the system (run until destruction). 12. The VFC shall include a “run permissive circuit” that will provide a normally open contact whenever a run command is provided (local or remote start command in VFC or bypass mode). The VFC system (VFC or bypass) shall not operate the motor until it receives a dry contact closure from a damper or valve end-switch. When the VFC system safety interlock (fire detector, freezestat, high static pressure switch, etc.) opens, the motor shall coast to a stop and the run permissive contact shall open, closing the damper or valve. 13. Class 20 or 30 (selectable) electronic motor overload protection shall be included. 14. There shall be an internal switch to select manual or automatic bypass. 15. There shall be an adjustable current sensing circuit for the bypass to provide loss of load indication (broken belt) when in the bypass mode. 2.3 ENCLOSURES A. The VFC package as specified herein shall be enclosed in a UL listed Type 12 enclosure, completely assembled and tested by the manufacturer in an ISO9001 facility. The VFC tolerated voltage window shall allow the VFC to operate from a line of +30 percent nominal voltage as a minimum. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Devices shall be factory installed in controller enclosure, unless otherwise indicated. B. Push-Button Stations, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: NEMA ICS 2, heavy-duty type. C. Stop and Lockout Push-Button Station: Momentary-break, push-button station with a factoryapplied clasp arranged so padlock can be used to lock push button in depressed position with control circuit open. D. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable time-delay relays. E. Standard Displays: 1. Output frequency (Hz). 2. Set-point frequency (Hz). 3. Motor current (amperes). 4. DC-link voltage (VDC). 5. Motor torque (percent). 6. Motor speed (rpm). 7. Motor output voltage (V). Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 262923 - 11 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 F. Historical Logging Information and Displays: 1. Real-time clock with current time and date. 2. Running log of total power versus time. 3. Total run time. 4. Fault log, maintaining last four faults with time and date stamp for each. G. Current-Sensing, Phase-Failure Relays for Bypass Controller: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output contacts for hard-wired connection; arranged to operate on phase failure, phase reversal, current unbalance of from 30 to 40 percent, or loss of supply voltage; with adjustable response delay. 2.5 FACTORY FINISHES A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested VFCs before shipping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, surfaces, and substrates to receive VFCs for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing-in for conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit connections before VFC installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLICATIONS A. Select features of each VFC to coordinate with ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and motor; required control sequence; and duty cycle of motor, controller, and load. B. Select horsepower rating of controllers to suit motor controlled. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Anchor each VFC assembly to steel-channel sills arranged and sized according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach by bolting. Level and grout sills flush with mounting surface. B. Install VFCs on concrete bases. C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26. D. Controller Fuses: Install fuses in each fusible switch. Comply with requirements in Division 26. 3.4 CONCRETE BASES A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Verify structural requirements with structural engineer. B. Concrete base is specified in Division 26 and concrete materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 03. 3.5 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify VFCs, components, and control wiring according to Division 26. B. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for VFCs, including control sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished metal, and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of VFC units. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 262923 - 12 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.6 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION A. Install wiring between VFCs and remote devices according to Division 26. B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures. C. Connect hand-off-automatic switch and other automatic-control devices where applicable. 1. Connect selector switches to bypass only manual- and automatic-control devices that have no safety functions when switch is in hand position. 2. Connect selector switches with control circuit in both hand and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors. 3.7 CONNECTIONS A. Conduit installation requirements are specified in other Division 26 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of conduit, fittings, and specialties. B. Ground equipment according to Division 26. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows: 1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller element, bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Certified factory start-up shall be provided for each drive by a factory authorized service center. A certified start-up form shall be filled out for each drive with a copy provided to the owner, and a copy kept on file at the manufacturer. 1. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and adjust controllers, components, and equipment. 2. Assist in field testing of equipment including pretesting and adjusting of solid-state controllers. 3. Report results in writing. C. Warranty 1. Warranty shall be 24 months from the date of certified start-up, not to exceed 30 months from the date of shipment. The warranty shall include all parts, labor, travel time and expenses. There shall be 365/24 support available via a toll free phone number. D. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: E. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection, except optional tests, stated in NETA ATS. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 3.9 ADJUSTING A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 262923 - 13 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.10 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain variable frequency controllers. Refer to Division 01. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\262923 _VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior lighting fixtures and components. 2. Exit signs. 3. Lighting fixture supports. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CCT: Correlated color temperature. B. CRI: Color-rendering index. C. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating. D. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both. E. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: 1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. 2. Energy-efficiency data. 3. Sound Performance Data: For air-handling lighting fixtures. Indicate sound power level and sound transmission class in test reports certified according to standards specified in Division 23. 4. Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data for lamps. 5. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project. a. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated fixtures, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining fixtures shall be certified by manufacturer. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 b. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. C. Installation instructions. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Lighting fixtures. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Partitions and millwork that penetrate the ceiling or extends to within 12 inches of the plane of the luminaires. 4. Ceiling-mounted projectors. 5. Structural members to which suspension systems for lighting fixtures will be attached. 6. Other items in finished ceiling including the following: a. Air outlets and inlets. b. Speakers. c. Sprinklers. d. Smoke and fire detectors. e. Occupancy/vacancy/photo sensors. f. Access panels. g. Perimeter moldings. B. Qualification Data: For qualified agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures. C. Product Certificates: For each type of fixture, from manufacturer. D. Field quality-control reports. E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910, complying with the IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. D. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, firesuppression system, and partition assemblies. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated on Drawings. 2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures. B. Metal Parts: All sheet metal work shall be free of burrs, sharp corners and edges, tool marks and dents, and shall have accurate angles bent as sharp as compatible with the gauges of the required metal. All intersections and joints shall be formed true of adequate strength and structural rigidity to prevent any distortion after assembly. C. Sheet Metal Components: a minimum of #20 gauge (0.0359 inch) thick cold rolled sheet Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. D. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally when secured in operating position. E. All fixtures shall be completely wired at the factory. F. Mounting Frames and Rings: If ceiling system requires, each recessed and semi-recessed fixture shall be furnished with a mounting frame or ring compatible with the ceiling in which they are to be installed. The frames and rings shall be one piece or constructed with electrically-welded butt joints, and of sufficient size and strength to sustain the weight of the fixture. G. Light leaks: 1. Between ceiling trims of recessed lighting equipment and the ceilings will not be accepted. 2. Between lighting components with in the fixtures (louvers, trims, etc) will not be accepted 3. Yokes, brackets and supplementary supporting members needed to mount lighting fixtures to carrier channels or other suitable ceiling members shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor. 4. Adjustable Angle Fixtures: Each lighting fixture which has a beam angle adjustment shall have reliable angle locking devices. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 H. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place. 2.3 EXIT SIGNS A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Internally Lighted Signs: 1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 2.4 LED LIGHTING A. The LED system shall be capable of at least 8-bit control of red, green and blue LEDs to produce 16.7 million colors or more and shall be digitally driven using high-speed pulse width modulation (PWM). The LED fixture shall be operated at constant and carefully regulated current levels. LEDs shall not be overdriven beyond their specified nominal voltage and current. B. The LED system shall use 14-bit or greater nonlinear scaling techniques for high-resolution output. Manufacturer of LED systems shall utilize an advanced production LED binning process to maintain color consistency. C. The LED fixture shall be operated at constant and carefully regulated current levels. LEDs shall not be overdriven beyond their specified nominal voltage and current. D. High power LED fixture shall be thermally protected using one or more of the following thermal management techniques: metal core board, gap pad, and/or internal monitoring firmware. E. LED fixture housing shall be designed to transfer heat from the LED board to the outside environment. F. LED fixture manufacturer must provide fixture wattage information and not LED data. G. For wet and damp use, LED-based fixture itself shall be sealed, rated, and tested for appropriate environmental conditions, not accomplished by using an additional housing or enclosure. H. All hardwired connections to LED fixtures shall be reverse polarity protected and provide high voltage protection in the event connections are reversed or shorted during the installation process. I. The LED system shall be scalable, with every LED fixture/address in the system capable of being controlled by a single, centralized controller. J. LED fixture shall be UL listed or UL classified, CE certified. And PSA marked. LED fixture and systems shall meet RoHS (Removal of Hazardous Substances) directives. Manufacturer shall be able to provide supporting documentation of the product meeting third party regulatory compliance as well as environmental testing results. K. All LED fixtures (100 percent of each lot) shall undergo a minimum eight-hour burn-in test during manufacturing. L. Manufacturer shall provide optical performance, polar diagrams, and relevant luminance and illuminance photometric data based on test results from an independent testing lab M. All LED fixtures and power/data supplies shall be provided by a single manufacturer to ensure compatibility. Manufacturer shall have at least eight years of experience designing, selling and supporting intelligent LED systems. N. Rated Life: LED Fixtures shall be rated for 50,000 hour minimum performance on all LED diode components. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 O. Warranty: LED Manufacturers shall provide a minimum 5 year warranty on LED components. Along with the standard warranty, if extreme color shift occurs (+1,000 Kelvin) or extreme color inconsistency develops (+/- 500 Kelvin) within the warrantee period, this shall be considered a failure and the Manufacturer shall be responsible for replacing all affected fixtures free of charge. P. ANSI Standards: LED fixtures shall meet ANSI Standards C78.377-2008, Specifications for the Chromaticity of Solid State Lighting Products, and C82.37-2011, Harmonic Emission Limits – Related Power Quality Requirements for Lighting. Q. IES LM-79 and LM-80: LED Fixtures shall be LM-79-08, Electrical and Photometric Testing of Solid-State Lighting Devices, and LM-80-08, Measuring Lumen Depreciation of LED Light Sources, tested and approved. R. NEMA: LED Diodes and Electronic Drivers shall comply with NEMA guideline SSL-3-2010, High-Power White LED Binning for General Illumination, and SSL-1-2010, Electronic Drivers for LED Devices, Arrays, or Systems. 2.5 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS A. Comply with Division 26 for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture. C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture. D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage. E. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod. F. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Lighting fixtures: 1. Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. B. Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by Architect, to use permanent luminaires for temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum number of luminaires necessary. When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly, and reinstall. C. Lay-in Ceiling Lighting Fixtures Supports: Use grid as a support element. 1. Install ceiling support system rods or wires, independent of the ceiling suspension devices, for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches from lighting fixture corners. 2. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application. 3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 4. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor of 3. D. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support: 1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. 3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end. 4. Do not use grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to building structure. 5. Linear pendants: For continuous rows longer that 60 inches, where fixture is broken in sections to allow specified row length, all suspension points for that fixture shall be perfectly aligned to avoid visible bending and misalignment along the continuous row. E. Connect wiring according to Division 26. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards. 3.4 AIMING AND ADJUSTING A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 3 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting aimable luminaires to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. Some of this work may be required after dark. 1. All adjustable lighting units shall be aimed, focused, locked, etc., by the Subcontractor under the supervision of the Lighting Consultant. The Lighting Consultant shall indicate the number of crews (foreman and apprentice) required. All aiming and adjusting shall be carried out after the entire installation is complete. All ladders, scaffolds, etc. required shall be furnished by the Contractor at the direction of the Lighting Consultant. As aiming and adjusting is completed, locking set-screws and bolts and nuts shall be tightened securely. 2. Adjust aimable luminaires in the presence of Architect or and/or end user shall provide written instruction for aiming intent for all the adjustable fixture 3. Adjust aimable luminaires in the presence of Architect. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30 _CD\265100_INTERIOR LIGHTING.DOC Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 100% Construction Document Fixture Schedule Type Scope/Notes/Location Manufacturer Description Lamp/Details DWA Location: Write Up, Break Out Areas Notes: 1, 2, 4, 7, 9Vode 107-WG-01-Varies-WA-12-00-AE-XXXZ-SO-35-WB-0-TBD Or equal per performance criteria in description, & lamp/details sections. 1.1” wide by 2.1” tall wallmounted linear LED fixture on 12” arm mount with remote 0-10v dimming driver, zero canopy mounting, white baffle with softening lens. 6.1 W per foot Volts: Per EE Color Temp: 3500K CRI: 80 Beam Spread: Wall-Wash Lumens: 583 per foot Dim: 0-10V to 1% Mount: Wall Mount Finish: Per Architect DWB Location: Bathrooms Notes: 1, 2, 7Eureka Lighting 3540-23-LED-35-XXX-DV-TBD Or equal per performance criteria in description, & lamp/details sections. 4.5 H x 23” long x 3.8” deep LED wall-mounted decorative scone fixture with extruded PMMA lens, square shape and diffuser lens. 10 W per fixture Volts: Per EE Color Temp: 3500K CRI: 80 Lumens: 449 per foot Dim: 0-10V Mount: Wall Mount Finish: Per Architect LPA Location: Labs Notes: 1, 2, 6, 7Finelite HP-2-ID-Varies-B-H-835-F-F-96LGXXX-DC-FA-TBD Or equal per performance criteria in description, & lamp/details sections. 2” Wide by 4” tall pendantmounted LED direct/indirect fixture with Boosted output indirect LEDs, High output direct LEDs, flush lens on top and bottom, low gloss reflector system, dual circuit control and fully adjustable mounting. Fixture to have 44% uplight and 56% downlight. 11.7 W per foot Volts: Per EE Color Temp: 3500K CRI: 80 Lumens: 1108 per foot Dim: 0-10V Mount: Pendant Finish: Standard Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 Payette 28 Nov 2018 Page: 1 of 7 Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 100% Construction Document Fixture Schedule Type Scope/Notes/Locatio n Manufacturer Description Lamp/Details LPB Location: Break Out Areas Notes: 1, 2, 6, 7Fluxwerx PS1-B-D-B-35-TBD-S3-S-E1-XXXVaries Or equal per performance criteria in description, & lamp/details sections. 3 1/4” Wide by 3” tall three spoke pendant-mounted direct/indirect fixture with bevel edge end cap, 85% down light and 15% up light. 34.7 W per fixture Volts: Per EE Color Temp: 3500K CRI: 80 Lumens: 3950 per fixture Dim: 0-10V to 1% Mount: Pendant Finish: Per Architect PA Location: Labs, Write Up Notes: 1, 2, 6, 7Gotham Lighting ICO-CYL-35/10-2AR-LSS-45D -XXXUGZ-PMSG-DWHG Or equal per performance criteria in description, & lamp/details sections. 2” Aperture pendantmounted LED downlight fixture with pendant mounting and surface mount gear box. 13 W per fixture Volts: Per EE Color Temp: 3500K CRI: 80 Beam Spread: 45° Lumens: 1000 per fixture Dim: 0-10V Mount: Pendant Finish: White RA Location: Kitchenette, Bathroom Notes: 1, 7Gotham Lighting ICO-35/10-2AR-LSS-45D-XXX-UGZTRW Or equal per performance criteria in description, & lamp/details sections. 2” Diameter recessed LED downlight fixture with clear trim color and semi specular reflector finish. 13 W per fixture Volts: Per EE Color Temp: 3500K CRI: 80 Beam Spread: 45° Lumens: 1000 per fixture Dim: 0-10V Mount: Recessed Finish: White Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 Payette 28 Nov 2018 Page: 2 of 7 Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 100% Construction Document Fixture Schedule Type Scope/Notes/Location Manufacturer Description Lamp/Details RLA Location: Support Notes: 1, 7Finelite HP-2R-Varies-H-835-F-XXX-SC-TZ4 Or equal per performance criteria in description, & lamp/details sections. 2-1/4” Wide recessed LED downlight fixture with high output LEDs, flush lens, single circuit control and tech zone 4” ceiling mounting type. 7.1 W per foot Volts: Per EE Color Temp: 3500K CRI: 80 Lumens: 639 per foot Dim: 0-10V Mount: Recessed Finish: Standard RLB No Longer Used RLC Location: Write Up Notes: 1, 2, 6, 7Finelite HP-4-ID-Varies-S-H-835-WSO-F-XXXFA-DC-TBD Or equal per performance criteria in description, & lamp/details sections. 4” Wide pendant-mounted LED direct/indirect fixture with standard output LED uplight with wide spread optic, high output LEDs downlight, flush lens, fully adjustable mounting and dual circuit control. Fixture to have 37% uplight and 63% downlight. 10.7 W per foot Volts: Per EE Color Temp: 3500K CRI: 80 Lumens: 1148 per foot Dim: 0-10V Mount: Per Architect Finish: Per Architect RLD Location: Circulation Notes: 1, 7Finelite HP-2R-Varies-S-835-F -XXX-SC-TZ4 Or equal per performance criteria in description, & lamp/details sections. 2-1/4” Wide recessed LED downlight fixture with standard output LEDs, flush lens, single circuit control and tech zone 4” ceiling mounting type. 3.6 W per foot Volts: Per EE Color Temp: 3500K CRI: 80 Lumens: 336 per foot Dim: 0-10V Mount: Recessed Finish: Standard Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 Payette 28 Nov 2018 Page: 3 of 7 Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 100% Construction Document Fixture Schedule General Notes Contractor shall supply and install a complete, fully functioning lighting system, including but not limited to: mounting hardware and accessories; appropriately sized transformers; power supplies; drivers; lamps; optical accessories; and electrical appurtenances.A Contractor shall be responsible for final fixture counts of all lighting fixtures and accessories, as well as linear fixture run lengths, as shown on Architect's drawings.B Contractor shall be responsible for verifying mounting conditions with mounting locations to ensure compatibility. Contractor shall notify Owner and Architect of any conflicts with all trades prior to the ordering of the equipment. For fixtures where more than one manufacturer is specified, mounting requirements may vary. C Contractor shall verify compliance of all lighting equipment specified in its intended application on this project with all applicable national and local codes, ordinances, regulations and jurisdictions prior to ordering any equipment.D Contractor shall supply "contractor net" unit pricing for each lighting product specified. Unit price shall be for equipment only and shall not include installation or other costs. The unit price supplied shall be guaranteed for the project and valid for additions and deletions of product throughout the duration of the project. E All drawings represent visual concepts and suggestions only. Available Light is not qualified to determine structural or electrical suitability and will not assume liability for improper engineering, construction or handling of design concepts.F The accompanying drawings and all the ideas, arrangements, designs, and plans indicated thereon or represented thereby are owned by and remain the property of Available Light and have been created and developed for use on and in connection with the specified project. Neither this drawing, nor any such ideas, arrangements, designs, or plans shall be appropriated by or disclosed to any person, firm, or corporation for any use or purpose whatsoever, except by the specific and written permission of Available Light. G Written dimensions on drawings shall have authority over scaled measurements. Contractor shall field verify all dimensions on the job and inform the Architect/Exhibit Designer of any proposed variations from drawings prior to performing the work.H Do not scale electrical drawings for exact location of the lighting fixtures. Refer to architectural reflected ceiling plans and other lighting layouts for proper locations of lighting fixtures.I Contractor shall not substitute products unless approved in writing by Available Light and/or Architect. Lighting fixture, ballast, driver, power supply, lamp, and/or accessory substitutions shall be formally presented to Available Light no later than fourteen (14) working days prior to bid due date. All proposed substitute fixtures must: 1) Be proven to meet or exceed the standards of quality, design, appearance, and performance as established by the lighting fixture specified by Available Light. See next note for list of items to be submitted for all substitutions. 2) Afford to the owner a significant economic benefit. Contractor shall coordinate changes due to use of approved substitutes with all trades. J Page: 4 of 7 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 Payette Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 100% Construction Document Fixture Schedule For a fixture type where a manufacturer is named as equal, the equal shall meet aesthetic criteria of the specified fixture, including but not limited to: dimensional criteria, finishes, including custom finishes; mounting details; and specified modifications. Additionally, for a fixture type where a manufacturer is named as equal, the equal shall meet the minimum performance requirements as defined by specified product, including but not limited to: regulatory listings; output as measured in delivered lumens; center beam candle power (CBCP); baseline efficacies as measured in lumens delivered per watt; cut-off angle as measured from nadir; LED binning; color rendering (CRI); color temperature (CCT); Duv per Manufacturers supporting documentation; dimming and method; five (5) year minimum warranty including LED engine and driver; L70 lumen maintenance tested according to IES LM79; and specified modifications. K Contractor shall provide the following items to the Architect and Available Light for evaluation of proposed substitutions: 1) A current manufacturer's data sheet with luminaire catalog numbers. 2) A complete and working sample wired with cord and plug for 120V operation furnished upon request. 3) A complete photometric report for the proposed substitute fixture using the same lamp type, wattage, and distribution as per the specification. The photometric report should include TM-30 or CRI documentation with R 1-14 values, tabulated candlepower values, a coefficient of utilization table, and an ISO foot-candle diagram from an independent testing laboratory. The photometric report must reflect the fixture specified without modification to the file. 4) The specified product defines minimum performance requirements as defined by specified product including but not limited to: regulatory listings; output as measured in delivered lumens; center beam candle power (CBCP); baseline efficacies as measured in lumens delivered per watt; cut-off angle as measured from nadir; LED binning; color rendering (CRI); color temperature (CCT); Duv per Manufacturers supporting documentation; dimming and method; five (5) year minimum warranty including LED engine and driver; and L70 lumen maintenance tested according to IES LM79. 5) The Contractor shall submit a signed document stating that if the proposed substitution is accepted the project schedule will not be negatively affected. L Contractor shall provide the following items to the Architect and Available Light for evaluation of specified fixtures: 1) Manufacturer’s product data sheets for each luminaire indicating luminaire type, dimensions, driver/ballast/power supply/transformer quantity and type, lamp quantity and type, photometric data (including lumnen output, CRI & TM-30 data), materials, finishes, accessories, voltage, input wattage, CFM data, and photographic image of luminaire. 2) Manufacturer’s data sheet for each driver/ballast/power supply/transformer including driver/ballast/power supply/transformer type, power factor, input voltage, input watts, and ballast factor. 3) Scaled and dimensioned detail plan and elevation drawings of custom and continuous row type luminaires including joints, mounting points and type, power connection locations(s), and emergency or separate switching configurations. 4) For custom luminaires, manufacturer shall perform and submit all engineering calculations as required to ensure the safe and proper installation and operation of the luminaire. 5) Dimming Power Supply Compatibility Certificates: Signed by driver/ballast/power supply manufacturer certifying that driver/ballast/power supply is compatible with dimming systems and equipment with which they are used. 6) For all submittals contractor shall submit within 2 weeks of award of bid. All submittals shall have project name and luminaire type clearly shown. M Page: 5 of 7 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 Payette Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 100% Construction Document Fixture Schedule Electronic devices that generate radio frequency energy must not interfere with other electronic devices and must not be susceptible to interference from other devices. Equipment shall not be an Electromagnetic (EM) polluter or be effected by EM pollution. All relevant equipment shall comply with current EMC standards. N Unless otherwise specified all downlights (recessed, wallwasher, and adjustable) shall be supplied by the same manufacturer, and all linear fixtures (recessed, pendant, and surface mounted) shall be supplied by the same manufacturer.O Unless otherwise specified, all retrofit LED lamps shall be manufactured by LEDvance (Osram-Sylvania), Philips, GE, Soraa, or Green Creative. All lamps of a given type shall be supplied by the same manufacturer.P Unless otherwise specified, all LED drivers shall be manufactured by one of the following: Advance (Philips), LEDvance (Osram Sylavnia), Hatch, EldoLED, or Lutron.Q All fixtures shall be supplied with specified lamp(s). Contractor shall provide an additional 10% replacement lamps (minimum two of each lamp type specified). For fixtures that use replaceable LED modules and drivers rather than lamps, contractor shall provide an additional 5% (minimum one) of each driver and module type. R Fixture construction and installation shall ensure no light leaks between ceiling trims of recessed lighting equipment and the ceiling plane. For applications in perforated or partially transparent ceilings, fixture construction shall also ensure no light leaks above the ceiling line.S Reflectors, reflector cones, and visible trim of all lighting fixtures shall not be installed until completion of plastering, ceiling tile work, painting, and general cleanup. Reflectors, reflector cones, and visible trim shall be carefully handled to avoid scratching or fingerprinting.T At the time of acceptance by the Owner, all lighting fixtures shall have been thoroughly cleaned with materials and methods recommended by the manufacturers, all broken parts shall have been replaced, and all lamps and/or LED modules shall be operative.U The Owner shall perform regular maintenance on all luminaires in order to ensure expected performance. Fixtures may produce light past their rated life, however, lamps/ballasts/drivers/components must be replaced at or before rated end-of-life for the luminaire to meet minimum photometric performance standards. Neither the Architect nor Available Light shall be held responsible or liable for improper service and maintenance of lighting systems. V Budget pricing is the cost the Owner should be prepared to pay for a specific luminaire or system. Price includes lamp(s) but does not include freight, tax, or installation costs. Owner level fixture prices were received directly from the manufacturer's agent, or derived by adding a 15% distributor markup and a 15% contractor markup to a Distributor Net price received from the manufacturer's agent, unless otherwise noted. Details regarding the source of individual fixture budget prices are available upon request. W Contractor shall supply all low-voltage control data lines and wiring in order to properly network and dim fixtures together per control intent documentation and manufacturer’s documentation. Data runs must be properly terminated.X Project Specific Notes Final finish of fixture shall be approved in writing by Architect.1 Mounting height shall be coordinated with Architect's elevations.2 Not used3 Page: 6 of 7 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 Payette Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 100% Construction Document Fixture Schedule Fixture shall be aimed and focused by Contractor under the direction of Available Light.4 Not used5 Junction boxes and/or conduit that is used to wire fixtures and that is open to view shall be painted to match adjacent structure.6 Fixture or track shall be mounted to structure in a manner recommended by the manufacturer without compromising the integrity of the structure. Contractor shall be responsible for all materials required to insure a safe and proper pendant installation. Contractor to coordinate changes in size of fixtures or track due to use of approved substitutes with all trades. Tracks shall be mounted to prevent twisting when fixtures are aimed and focused causing an asymmetrical load. 7 Not used8 Remote transformers, power supplies, or drivers shall be located in nearby accessible, concealed-from-view location with manufacturer recommended ventilation available. As per manufacturer's recommendations, contractor shall not exceed the maximum allowable distance between any luminaire and its associated remote control devices. Contractor shall supply manufacturer's transformer, power supply or driver of proper capacity. 9 Not used10 Not used11 Not used12 Not used13 Not used14 Due to rapid advances in LED technology, Available Light reserves the right to change lamp or LED module specifications at the time of submittal to another lamp or LED module of equal or lesser cost.15 Page: 7 of 7 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 Payette Issue Date: 28 November 2018 Olin Hall Phase 1 Lighting Controls Matrix 100% CD Architect: Payette Lighting Design By Available Light Page 1 of 1 Area Description Name Lighting Control Zones Description2 ON1,5 ADJUST1, 3 OFF4 Sensors, Interfaces Research Labs 1. Pendant Down 2. Pendant Down (Daylight Dim) 3. Pendant Up 4. Pendant Up (Daylight Dim) 5. Cylinders • Manual-on to 100%. • Alternate Auto-On to 50%. Manual override to 100%. • Manual on all task lights via on-board control. • 6 Button stations located at entry(s) to room. • Each button station provides simple switch or push-&-hold-to-dim manual Dimming Control. • Manual control of zones 1-2 and 3-4 are combined into single button for each pair. • All other zones get single button per zone. • Automatic daylight dimming with minimum 30fc available from daylight. • Auto-off 10 minutes after no occupancy is sensed. • Dual-Tech Occupancy Sensors. • Photocell Sensor for Rooms with windows. • Shelf-mounted task lighting to have it's own Vacancy (Manual-On/Auto-off) sensor Support 1. Linear Down • Manual-on to 100%. • Alternate Auto-On to 50%. Manual override to 100%. • Manual on all task lights via on-board control. • 1 Button stations located at entry(s) to room. • All zones get single button per zone. • Auto-off 10 minutes after no occupancy is sensed. • Dual-Tech Occupancy Sensors. • Shelf-mounted task lighting to have it's own Vacancy (Manual-On/Auto-off) sensor Write Up 1. Pendant Down 2. Pendant Down (Daylight Dim) 3. Pendant Up 4. Pendant Up (Daylight Dim) 5. Cylinders 6. White Board • Manual-on to 100%. • Alternate Auto-On to 50%. Manual override to 100%. • 2 Button stations located at entry(s) to room. • Each button station provides simple switch or push-&-hold-to-dim manual Dimming Control. • Manual control of zones 1-2 and 3-4 are combined into single button for each pair. • All other zones get single button station per zone • Automatic daylight dimming with minimum 30fc available from daylight. • Auto-off 10 minutes after no occupancy is sensed. • Dual-Tech Occupancy Sensors. • Photocell Sensor for Rooms with windows Break Out Area 1. Pendant Up/Down 2. White Board 3. Downlights • Auto-on via timeclock during regularly occupied hours • Each zone to have its own wall box dimmer. • Auto-On via timeclock after regularly occupied hours. Restrooms Provide 1 Zone for each Fixture Type. Occupancy on to 100% output (as set by wallbox dimmers. Each zone to have its own manual Set-andforget wallbox dimmer. Manual off via local wall control. Auto-off after no occupancy sensed for 30 minutes. Dual-Tech Occupancy Sensors sensor. Notes: 1. Choice of wired or wireless sensors & keypads is TBD by Electrical Engineer based on factors including Owner preference, cost and ease of installation and maintenance. 2. Dimming is assumed to be via 0-10V unless otherwise noted. 3. Occupancy sensors should also communicate room status to other building controls such as HVAC. Engineer to specify exact method for this. 4. Occupied, unocccupied and late-night hours to be determined by Owner. 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 28 Nov 2018 Payette Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 Lighting Fixture Cut Sheets Type DWA Cut sheet 1 of 8 Page: 2 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette Type DWA Cut sheet 2 of 8 Page: 3 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette Type DWA Cut sheet 3 of 8 Page: 4 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette Type DWA Cut sheet 4 of 8 Page: 5 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette Type DWA Cut sheet 5 of 8 Page: 6 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette Type DWA Cut sheet 6 of 8 Page: 7 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette Type DWA Cut sheet 7 of 8 Page: 8 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette WingRail® | Ceiling-Wall Arm | 107 Spec Guide WingRail® | Ceiling-Wall Arm | 107 • 8 Copyright © Vode Lighting LLC | 21684 8th Street East, Suite 700, Sonoma, CA 95476 | 707.996.9898 © 2018 Vode Lighting LLC. All rights reserved. The Vode logo and Vode, WingRail, Zero Block, Zero Canopy, EdgeSoft, Zipper Board, and Button Board names are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Vode Lighting LLC in the United States and/or other countries. All other brand or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners. Due to ongoing innovation, specifications may change without notice. 36º Medium (36) Standard Output (SO) Efficacy - Lumens per Watt Lumens per foot (305mm) Watts per foot (305mm) High Output (HO) Efficacy - Lumens per Watt Lumens per foot (305mm) Watts per foot (305mm) 2700K 3000K 3500K 4000K 64 67 70 73 476 496 516 537 7.3 7.3 7.3 7.3 57 60 63 65 724 754 786 817 12.6 12.6 12.6 12.6 19º x 48º Oval (19) Standard Output (SO) Efficacy - Lumens per Watt Lumens per foot (305mm) Watts per foot (305mm) High Output (HO) Efficacy - Lumens per Watt Lumens per foot (305mm) Watts per foot (305mm) 2700K 3000K 3500K 4000K 57 59 62 64 420 438 456 474 7.3 7.3 7.3 7.3 50 52 55 57 636 662 690 717 12.6 12.6 12.6 12.6 L80 >70,000 hours L80 >70,000 hours 80 CRI (80min., 84 avg.) 80 CRI (80min., 84 avg.) Performance | Button LED Button Board™ has 6 diodes per foot (305mm). Testing based on a 4’ rail section. Lumen measurement complies with IES-LM-79-08 testing procedures. Type DWA Cut sheet 8 of 8 Page: 9 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette Type DWB Cut sheet 1 of 9 Page: 10 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette LED 354X-23 ANATOMY MOONRISE, MOONSET PLUS 23 V4.0-201710ww w.eurekalighting.comEu reka Lighting©2017 SPECIFICATIONS LIGHT SOURCE MODULE LUMENS (DELIVERED) ROHS WARRANTY 24 x NICHIA LEDS UL recognized - made in USA 899 lm CCT / CRI 80 CRI (typical) Compliant HOUSING Die-stamped 18 Ga steel (0.048’’ nominal thickness) available in Chrome or Satin chrome w/ galvanized steel internal parts DIFFUSER Custom blended and extruded PMMA (Acrylic composite) with high diffusion and transmission MOUNTING Formed Cold Rolled Steel (0.060” nominal thickness) w/ Chrome or Satin chrome plated Finish THERMAL MANAGEMENT LIGHT DISTRIBUTION VOLTAGE DRIVER / BALLAST DIMMING LM-79 / L70 Light Engine w/ on-board Thermal Management Direct - 120° Beam Angle 120 ou 277V 12V (120V), 12V (277V) 0-10V Dimming On request / Estimated 50 000 hrs 5 years ENDCAPS CNC machined steel w/ Chrome or Satin chrome plated Finish ENDCAPS Machined steel endcaps mechanically attached to structure with one-way security screw LED LIGHT ENGINE ANSI binned white LED Nichia w/ on-board thermal management EASY MOUNTING Die-formed steel structure provides an easy access to component wiring HIGH PERFORMANCE LENS Custom blended and extruded PMMA (Acrylic composite) lens perfectly diffused with led lights source, available in round and square shape FLUORESCENT 1 x 14w T5 / 1 x 24w T5HO Advance Mark 7 (T5), Mark 10 (T5HO) or Lutron 120V-277V, 347V Advance Centium or equivalent Direct 1 year 3540-23 MOONRISE 3541-23 MOONSET 3.82" 97mm 23.41" 595mm J-BOX 11.71" 298mm 2.25" 57mm 225 de Liège Ouest, Suite #200 Montréal (QC), Canada H2P 1H4 Tel : 514.385.3515 Fax : 514.385.4169 www.eurekalighting.com LUMENS PER FOOT 449 lm SYSTEM WATTAGE 10 3540-23 REG 3540-23 HO 3541-23 REG 3541-23 HO 1292 lm 646 lm 14.5 889 lm 444 lm 10 1278 lm 639 lm 14.5 Type DWB Cut sheet 2 of 9 Page: 11 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette 354X-35 ANATOMY MOONRISE, MOONSET PLUS 35 www.eurekalighting.comEu reka Lighting©2017 ENDCAPS Machined steel endcaps mechanically attached to structure with one-way security screw LED LIGHT ENGINE ANSI binned white LED Nichia w/ on-board thermal management EASY MOUNTING Die-formed steel structure provides an easy access to component wiring HIGH PERFORMANCE LENS Custom blended and extruded PMMA (Acrylic composite) lens perfectly diffused with led lights source, available in round and square shape 3540-35 MOONRISE 3541-35 MOONSET 3.82" 97mm 35.22" 895mm J-BOX 17.61" 448mm 2.25" 57mm 225 de Liège Ouest, Suite #200 Montréal (QC), Canada H2P 1H4 Tel : 514.385.3515 Fax : 514.385.4169 www.eurekalighting.com LED V4.0-201710 SPECIFICATIONS LIGHT SOURCE MODULE LUMENS (DELIVERED) ROHS WARRANTY 36 x NICHIA LEDS UL recognized - made in USA 1358 lm CCT / CRI 80 CRI (typical) Compliant HOUSING Die-stamped 18 Ga steel (0.048’’ nominal thickness) available in Chrome or Satin chrome w/ galvanized steel internal parts DIFFUSER Custom blended and extruded PMMA (Acrylic composite) with high diffusion and transmission MOUNTING Formed Cold Rolled Steel (0.060” nominal thickness) w/ Chrome or Satin chrome plated Finish THERMAL MANAGEMENT LIGHT DISTRIBUTION VOLTAGE DRIVER / BALLAST DIMMING LM-79 / L70 Light Engine w/ on-board Thermal Management Direct diffused - 120° Beam Angle 120 ou 277V 12V (120V), 12V (277V) 0-10V Dimming On request / Estimated 50 000 hrs 5 years ENDCAPS CNC machined steel w/ Chrome or Satin chrome plated Finish FLUORESCENT 1 x 14w T5 / 1 x 24w T5HO Advance Mark 7 (T5), Mark 10 (T5HO) or Lutron 120V-277V, 347V Advance Centium or equivalent Direct 1 year LUMENS PER FOOT 452 lm SYSTEM WATTAGE 13.8 3540-35 REG 3540-35 HO 3541-35 REG 3541-35 HO 1952 lm 650 lm 20.9 1336 lm 445 lm 13.8 1920 lm 640 lm 20.4 Type DWB Cut sheet 3 of 9 Page: 12 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette 354X-47 ANATOMY MOONRISE, MOONSET PLUS 47 www.eurekalighting.comEu reka Lighting©2017 ENDCAPS Machined steel endcaps, mechanically attached to structure with one-way security screw LED LIGHT ENGINE ANSI binned white LED (Nichia) w/ on-board thermal management EASY MOUNTING Die-formed steel structure provides an easy access to component wiring HIGH PERFORMANCE LENS Custom blended and extruded PMMA (Acrylic composite) lens perfectly diffused with led light sources, available in round and square shape 3540-47 MOONRISE 3541-47 MOONSET 46.96" 1195mm J-BOX 23.48" 598mm 3.82" 97mm 2.25" 57mm 225 de Liège Ouest, Suite #200 Montréal (QC), Canada H2P 1H4 Tel : 514.385.3515 Fax : 514.385.4169 www.eurekalighting.com LED V4.0-201710 SPECIFICATIONS LIGHT SOURCE MODULE LUMENS (DELIVERED) ROHS WARRANTY 45 x NICHIA LEDS UL recognized - made in USA 1706 lm CCT / CRI 80 CRI (typical) Compliant HOUSING Die-stamped 18 Ga steel (0.048’’ nominal thickness) available in Chrome or Satin chrome w/ galvanized steel internal parts DIFFUSER Custom blended and extruded PMMA (Acrylic composite) with high diffusion and transmission MOUNTING Formed Cold Rolled Steel (0.060” nominal thickness) w/ Chrome or Satin chrome plated Finish THERMAL MANAGEMENT LIGHT DISTRIBUTION VOLTAGE DRIVER / BALLAST DIMMING LM-79 / L70 Light Engine w/ on-board Thermal Management Direct diffused - 120° Beam Angle 120 ou 277V 12V (120V), 12V (277V) 0-10V Dimming On request / Estimated 50 000 hrs 5 years ENDCAPS CNC machined steel w/ Chrome or Satin chrome plated Finish FLUORESCENT 1 x 14w T5 / 1 x 24w T5HO Advance Mark 7 (T5), Mark 10 (T5HO) or Lutron 120V-277V, 347V Advance Centium or equivalent Direct 1 year LUMENS PER FOOT 426.5 lm SYSTEM WATTAGE 17.2 3540-47 REG 3540-47 HO 3541-47 REG 3541-47 HO 2452 lm 613 lm 26.1 1677 lm 419.2 lm 17.2 2410 lm 602.5 lm 26.1 Type DWB Cut sheet 4 of 9 Page: 13 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette 354X-93 ANATOMY MOONRISE, MOONSET PLUS 93 www.eurekalighting.comEu reka Lighting©2017 3540-93 MOONRISE 3541-93 MOONSET 3.82'' 97mm 93.23'' 2368mm J-BOX 46.62'' 1184mm 4.50'' 114mm Ø2.25'' Ø57mm 3.95'' 100mm HIGH PERFORMANCE LENS Custom blended and extruded PMMA (Acrylic composite) lens perfectly diffused with led light sources, available in round and square shape LED LIGHT ENGINE ANSI binned white LED (Nichia 757D) w/ on-board thermal management EASY MOUNTING Die-formed steel structure provides an easy access to component wiring ENDCAPS Machined steel endcaps, mechanically attached to structure with one-way security screw 225 de Liège Ouest, Suite #200 Montréal (QC), Canada H2P 1H4 Tel : 514.385.3515 Fax : 514.385.4169 www.eurekalighting.com LED V4.0-201710 SPECIFICATIONS LIGHT SOURCE MODULE LUMENS (DELIVERED) ROHS WARRANTY 96 x NICHIA LEDS UL recognized - made in USA 3641 lm CCT / CRI 80 CRI (typical) Compliant HOUSING Die-stamped 18 Ga steel (0.048’’ nominal thickness) available in Chrome or Satin chrome w/ galvanized steel internal parts DIFFUSER Custom blended and extruded PMMA (Acrylic composite) with high diffusion and transmission MOUNTING Formed Cold Rolled Steel (0.060” nominal thickness) w/ Chrome or Satin chrome plated Finish THERMAL MANAGEMENT LIGHT DISTRIBUTION VOLTAGE DRIVER / BALLAST DIMMING LM-79 / L70 Light Engine w/ on-board Thermal Management Direct diffused - 120° Beam Angle 120 ou 277V 12V (120V), 12V (277V) 0-10V Dimming On request / Estimated 50 000 hrs 5 years ENDCAPS CNC machined steel w/ Chrome or Satin chrome plated Finish FLUORESCENT 1 x 14w T5 / 1 x 24w T5HO Advance Mark 7 (T5), Mark 10 (T5HO) or Lutron 120V-277V, 347V Advance Centium or equivalent Direct 1 year LUMENS PER FOOT 455 lm SYSTEM WATTAGE 34.1 3540-93 REG 3540-93 HO 3541-93 REG 3541-93 HO 5233 lm 654.1 lm 52.8 3576 lm 447 lm 34.1 5141 lm 642.6 lm 52.8 Type DWB Cut sheet 5 of 9 Page: 14 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette 354X-23 ANATOMIE MOONRISE, MOONSET PLUS 23 www.eurekalighting.comEu reka Lighting©2017 SPÉCIFICATIONS SOURCE LUMINEUES MODULE LUMENS (LIVRÉS) CCT / CRI ROHS GARANTIE Reconnu UL - Fabriqué aux États-Unis 80 CRI (typique) Conforme BOÎTIER Acier découpé et plié (0.048’’ épaisseur nominale), disponible en Chrome ou en Satin chrome DIFFUSEUR Fabriqué en acrylique PMMA blanc extrudé sur mesure à haute transmission lumineuse MONTAGE MURAL Acier estampé (0.060” épaisseur nominale) / adapté à la boîte de jonction Octagone 4’’ ou à la mini boîte de jonction GESTION THERMIQUE DISTRIBUTION LUMINEUSE VOLTAGE PILOTE / BALLAST GRADATION LM-79 / L70 Sources lumineuses avec autocontrôle de température Directe - Diffusée à 120° 120 ou 277V 12V (120V), 12V (277V) 0-10V Gradation Sur demande / 50 000 hrs estimées 5 ans EMBOUTS Fabriqués en acier usiné, disponibles en Chrome ou en Satin chrome EMBOUTS Usinés en acier attachés mécaniquement à la structure à l’aide d’une vis de sécurité SOURCE LUMINEUSE À LED Bandes de LED Nichia blanche à alimentation 12V offertes avec dissipateur thermique intégré INSTALLATION SIMPLE Système de montage facilitant l’accès aux compostantes électriques DIFFUSEUR À HAUTE PERFORMANCE PProfil acrylique de l’extrusion PMMA blanc disponible en forme ronde ou en forme carrée, parfaitement illuminé avec les sources d’éclairage à base de LED 3540-23 MOONRISE 3541-23 MOONSET FLUORESCENTE 1 x 14w T5 / 1 x 24w T5HO Advance Mark 7 (T5), Mark 10 (T5HO) ou Lutron 120V-277V, 347V Advance Centium ou équivalent Directe 1 an 225 de Liège Ouest, Suite #200 Montréal (QC), Canada H2P 1H4 Tel : 514.385.3515 Fax : 514.385.4169 www.eurekalighting.com 3.82" 97mm 23.41" 595mm J-BOX 11.71" 298mm 2.25" 57mm LED 3540-23 REG 3540-23 HO 3541-23 REG 3541-23 HO 24 x NICHIA LEDS 899 lm 449 lm 10 1292 lm 646 lm 14.5 889 lm 444 lm 10 1278 lm 639 lm 14.5WATTAGE DU SYSTEM LUMENS PAR PIED V4.0-201710 Type DWB Cut sheet 6 of 9 Page: 15 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette 354X-35 ANATOMIE MOONRISE, MOONSET PLUS 35 www.eurekalighting.comEu reka Lighting©2017 3540-35 MOONRISE 3541-35 MOONSET EMBOUTS Usinés en acier, attachés mécaniquement à la structure à l’aide d’une vis de sécurité SOURCE LUMINEUSE À LED Bandes de LED Nichia blanche à alimentation 12V offertes avec dissipateur thermique intégré INSTALLATION SIMPLE Système de montage facilitant l’accès aux composantes électriques DIFFUSEUR À HAUTE PERFORMANCE Profil acrylique de l’extrusion PMMA blanc disponible en forme ronde ou en forme carrée, parfaitement illuminé avec les sources d’éclairage à base de LED 3.82" 97mm 35.22" 895mm J-BOX 17.61" 448mm 2.25" 57mm 225 de Liège Ouest, Suite #200 Montréal (QC), Canada H2P 1H4 Tel : 514.385.3515 Fax : 514.385.4169 www.eurekalighting.com SPÉCIFICATIONS SOURCE LUMINEUES MODULE LUMENS (LIVRÉS) CCT / CRI ROHS GARANTIE Reconnu UL - Fabriqué aux États-Unis 80 CRI (typique) Conforme BOÎTIER Acier découpé et plié (0.048’’ épaisseur nominale), disponible en Chrome ou en Satin chrome DIFFUSEUR Fabriqué en acrylique PMMA blanc extrudé sur mesure à haute transmission lumineuse MONTAGE MURAL Acier estampé (0.060” épaisseur nominale) / adapté à la boîte de jonction Octagone 4” ou à la mini boîte de jonction GESTION THERMIQUE DISTRIBUTION LUMINEUSE VOLTAGE PILOTE / BALLAST GRADATION LM-79 / L70 Sources lumineuses avec autocontrôle de température Directe - Diffusée à 120° 120 ou 277V 12V (120V), 12V (277V) 0-10V Gradation Sur demande / 50 000 hrs estimées 5 ans EMBOUTS Fabriqués en acier usiné, disponibles en Chrome ou en Satin chrome FLUORESCENTE 1 x 14w T5 / 1 x 24w T5HO Advance Mark 7 (T5), Mark 10 (T5HO) ou Lutron 120V-277V, 347V Advance Centium ou équivalent Directe 1 an LED 3540-35 REG 3540-35 HO 3541-35 REG 3541-35 HO 36 x NICHIA LEDS WATTAGE DU SYSTEM LUMENS PAR PIED V4.0-201710 1358 lm 452 lm 13.8 1952 lm 650 lm 20.9 1336 lm 445 lm 13.8 1920 lm 640 lm 20.4 Type DWB Cut sheet 7 of 9 Page: 16 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette 354X-47 ANATOMIE MOONRISE, MOONSET PLUS 47 www.eurekalighting.comEu reka Lighting©2017 EMBOUTS Usinés en acier, attachés mécaniquement à la structure à l’aide d’une vis de sécurité SOURCE LUMINEUSE À LED Bandes de LED Nichia blanche à alimentation 12V offertes avec dissipateur thermique intégré INSTALLATION SIMPLE Système de montage facilitant l’accès aux composantes électriques DIFFUSEUR À HAUTE PERFORMANCE Profil acrylique de l’extrusion PMMA blanc disponible en forme ronde ou en forme carrée, parfaitement illuminé avec les sources d’éclairage à base de LED 3540-47 MOONRISE 3541-47 MOONSET 46.96" 1195mm J-BOX 23.48" 598mm 3.82" 97mm 2.25" 57mm 225 de Liège Ouest, Suite #200 Montréal (QC), Canada H2P 1H4 Tel : 514.385.3515 Fax : 514.385.4169 www.eurekalighting.com SPÉCIFICATIONS SOURCE LUMINEUES MODULE LUMENS (LIVRÉS) CCT / CRI ROHS GARANTIE Reconnu UL - Fabriqué aux États-Unis 80 CRI (typique) Conforme BOÎTIER Acier découpé et plié (0.048’’ épaisseur nominale), disponible en Chrome ou en Satin chrome DIFFUSEUR Fabriqué en acrylique PMMA blanc extrudé sur mesure à haute transmission lumineuse MONTAGE MURAL Acier estampé (0.060” épaisseur nominale) / adapté à la boîte de jonction Octagone 4” ou à la mini boîte de jonction GESTION THERMIQUE DISTRIBUTION LUMINEUSE VOLTAGE PILOTE / BALLAST GRADATION LM-79 / L70 Sources lumineuses avec autocontrôle de température Directe - Diffusée à 120° 120 ou 277V 12V (120V), 12V (277V) 0-10V Gradation Sur demande / 50 000 hrs estimées 5 ans EMBOUTS Fabriqués en acier usiné, disponibles en Chrome ou en Satin chrome FLUORESCENTE 1 x 14w T5 / 1 x 24w T5HO Advance Mark 7 (T5), Mark 10 (T5HO) ou Lutron 120V-277V, 347V Advance Centium ou équivalent Directe 1 an LED 3540-47 REG 3540-47 HO 3541-47 REG 3541-47 HO 45 x NICHIA LEDS WATTAGE DU SYSTEM LUMENS PAR PIED V4.0-201710 1706 lm 426.5 lm 17.2 2452 lm 613 lm 26.1 1677 lm 419.2 lm 17.2 2410 lm 602.5 lm 26.1 Type DWB Cut sheet 8 of 9 Page: 17 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette 354X-93 ANATOMIE MOONRISE, MOONSET PLUS 93 www.eurekalighting.comEu reka Lighting©2017 3540-93 MOONRISE 3541-93 MOONSET 3.82'' 97mm 93.23'' 2368mm J-BOX 46.62'' 1184mm 4.50'' 114mm Ø2.25'' Ø57mm 3.95'' 100mm DIFFUSEUR À HAUTE PERFORMANCE Profil acrylique de l’extrusion PMMA blanc disponible en forme ronde ou en forme carrée, parfaitement illuminé avec les sources d’éclairage à base de LED INSTALLATION SIMPLE Système de montage facilitant l’accès aux composantes électriques EMBOUTS Usinés en acier, attachés mécaniquement à la structure à l’aide d’une vis de sécurité SOURCE LUMINEUSE À LED Bandes de LED Nichia blanche à alimentation 12V offertes avec dissipateur thermique intégré 225 de Liège Ouest, Suite #200 Montréal (QC), Canada H2P 1H4 Tel : 514.385.3515 Fax : 514.385.4169 www.eurekalighting.com SPÉCIFICATIONS SOURCE LUMINEUES MODULE LUMENS (LIVRÉS) CCT / CRI ROHS GARANTIE Reconnu UL - Fabriqué aux États-Unis 80 CRI (typique) Conforme BOÎTIER Acier découpé et plié (0.048’’ épaisseur nominale), disponible en Chrome ou en Satin chrome DIFFUSEUR Fabriqué en acrylique PMMA blanc extrudé sur mesure à haute transmission lumineuse MONTAGE MURAL Acier estampé (0.060” épaisseur nominale) / adapté à la boîte de jonction Octagone 4” ou à la mini boîte de jonction GESTION THERMIQUE DISTRIBUTION LUMINEUSE VOLTAGE PILOTE / BALLAST GRADATION LM-79 / L70 Sources lumineuses avec autocontrôle de température Directe - Diffusée à 120° 120 ou 277V 12V (120V), 12V (277V) 0-10V Gradation Sur demande / 50 000 hrs estimées 5 ans EMBOUTS Fabriqués en acier usiné, disponibles en Chrome ou en Satin chrome FLUORESCENTE 1 x 14w T5 / 1 x 24w T5HO Advance Mark 7 (T5), Mark 10 (T5HO) ou Lutron 120V-277V, 347V Advance Centium ou équivalent Directe 1 an LED 3540-93 REG 3540-93 HO 3541-93 REG 3541-93 HO WATTAGE DU SYSTEM LUMENS PAR PIED V4.0-201710 96 x NICHIA LEDS 3641 lm 455 lm 34.1 5233 lm 654.1 lm 52.8 3576 lm 447 lm 34.1 5141 lm 642.6 lm 52.8 Type DWB Cut sheet 9 of 9 Page: 18 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette Finelite HP-2 ID (See pg 2 for cross sections) HP-2 ID RG (See pg 2 for cross sections) Length (Minimum 2', increments accurate to 1/16th" (± 1/32"), standard) Uplight Output (S - Standard, B - Boosted Standard, H - High, V - Very High) Downlight Output (S - Standard, B - Boosted Standard, H - High, V - Very High) LED CRI/CCT (830 - 80 CRI min, 3000K 930 - 90 CRI min, 3000K 835 - 80 CRI min, 3500K 935 - 90 CRI min, 3500K 840 - 80 CRI min, 4000K 940 - 90 CRI min, 4000K) Uplight Option (TG - Top Glow (standard), F - Flush, WSO - Widespread Optic, WSOTG - Widespread Optic with Top Glow, ASY-L - Asymmetric Left Optic, ASY-R - Asymmetric Right Optic, ASYTG-L - Asymmetric Left Optic with Top Glow, ASYTG-R - Asymmetric Right Optic with Top Glow) Downlight Option (F - Flush (standard), BG - Bottom Glow, RG-D1 - Flat Diffuser with 1" Regressed) Reflector System (96LG - Low Gloss) Voltage (120V, 277V, 347V) Circuiting (SC - Single Circuit, DC2 - Dual Circuit)3 Mounting (FA - Fully Adjustable) Endcap (FE - Flat Endcap) Ceiling Type (C1 - 1" T-Bar, C2 - 9/16" T-Bar, C3 - screw slot, C4 - hard ceiling) Integrated Sensor (OBO - Occupancy Sensor, OBD - Daylight) High Performance 2" Aperture (HP-2) - Indirect/DirectF INELITE Finelite, Inc. • 30500 Whipple Road • Union City, CA 94587-1530 • 510 / 441-1100 • Fax: 510 / 441-1510 • www.finelite.com Due to continuing product improvements, Finelite reserves the right to change specifications without notice. Please visit www.finelite.com for most current data. BUY AMERICAN ACT OF 2009 COMPLIANT Protected by one or more US Patents: 8915613; D702,391; D702,390; D700,732; D727,554 S; D727,550 S, D727,551 S © 2018 FINELITE, INC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. Form CTK0115. V9 06/18 Page 1 Date Project Type Comments DESCRIPTION High Performance 2" aperture Indirect/Direct (HP-2 ID) is a patented, linear LED luminaire that offers many aesthetic options including Top Glow™ or Flush for uplight and Bottom Glow™, Flush, or Regressed diffuser for downlight. HP-2 ID delivers excellent performance using an advanced optical design and mid-power LEDs to achieve 90% of initial light output at 100,000+ hours. ORDERING GUIDE: Sample Number: HP-2 ID - 32' - S - H - 835 - TG - F - 96LG - 120V - SC - FA - FE - C1 - OBO Standard White is standard finish I n d u s t r y B e s t LED Warranty 1 10 10 Year 1 10 10 10 10 Year 1 Available for HP-2 Indirect/Direct Regressed only (HP-2 ID RG) 2 DC only available for fixtures 3' or longer. 3 Contact factory for switching options. Top Glow and Bottom Glow Diffuser (Shown) Regressed Diffuser (Shown) Type LPA Cut sheet 1 of 7 Page: 19 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette High Performance 2" Aperture (HP-2) - Indirect/DirectF INELITE Finelite, Inc. • 30500 Whipple Road • Union City, CA 94587-1530 • 510 / 441-1100 • Fax: 510 / 441-1510 • www.finelite.com Due to continuing product improvements, Finelite reserves the right to change specifications without notice. Please visit www.finelite.com for most current data. BUY AMERICAN ACT OF 2009 COMPLIANT Protected by one or more US Patents: 8915613; D702,391; D702,390; D700,732; D727,554 S; D727,550 S, D727,551 S © 2018 FINELITE, INC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. Form CTK0115. V9 06/18 Page 2 ASYMMETRIC Use this tool to understand how to specify Asymmetric for your project. The diagrams below show a linear run from power feed to ender. Specifiy, ASY-L distributes light to the left or ASY-R distributed light to the right. Starter Ender ID #1 ID #2 Asymmetric Left Optic (ASY-L) Starter Ender ID #1 ID #2 Asymmetric Right Optic (ASY-R) 3/16" 3/16" 4-3/4" 2-1/4" Flush Downlight Diffuser (Standard) Bottom Glow Diffuser Top Glow Diffuser (Standard) Flush Uplight Diffuser 4-3/4" 2-1/4" 4-3/4" 2-1/4" Edge Diffuser 3/16" Widespread Optic with Top Glow Widespread Optic 4-3/4" 2-1/4" Edge Diffuser 3/16" Asymmetric Optic with Top Glow (ASYTG-L Shown) Asymmetric Optic (ASY-L Shown) 4-3/4" 2-1/4" 4-3/4" 2-1/4" OPTICAL SOLUTIONS AND AESTHETIC CHOICES - Offering multiple uplight optical solutions with WSO and ASY for maximized design effectiveness and diffusers available in Top Glow, Bottom Glow, Flush, and Regressed for a desired aesthetic. HP-2 ID HP-2 ID RG 2-1/4" 5-3/4" 1" 3/16" Flat Diffuser with 1" Regressed (Standard) Top Glow Diffuser (Standard) Flush Uplight Diffuser 2-1/4" 5-3/4" 1" Edge Diffuser 2-1/4" 5-3/4" 1" 3/16" Widespread Optic with Top Glow Widespread Optic Edge Diffuser 2-1/4" 5-3/4" 1" 3/16" Asymmetric Optic with Top Glow (ASYTG-L Shown) Asymmetric Optic (ASY-L Shown) 2-1/4" 5-3/4" 1" 2-1/4" 5-3/4" 1" Type LPA Cut sheet 2 of 7 Page: 20 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette High Performance 2" Aperture (HP-2) - Indirect/DirectF INELITE Finelite, Inc. • 30500 Whipple Road • Union City, CA 94587-1530 • 510 / 441-1100 • Fax: 510 / 441-1510 • www.finelite.com Due to continuing product improvements, Finelite reserves the right to change specifications without notice. Please visit www.finelite.com for most current data. BUY AMERICAN ACT OF 2009 COMPLIANT Protected by one or more US Patents: 8915613; D702,391; D702,390; D700,732; D727,554 S; D727,550 S, D727,551 S © 2018 FINELITE, INC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. Form CTK0115. V9 06/18 Page 3 PHOTOMETRY - FLUSH DIFFUSER UPLIGHT & DOWNLIGHT SAMPLE LUMEN ADJUSTMENT CALCULATION CANDELA DISTRIBUTION 0.0 22.5 45 67.5 90 Flux 0 1314 1314 1314 1314 1314 5 1306 1307 1305 1304 1304 124 15 1241 1233 1231 1225 1220 346 25 1114 1098 1089 1076 1064 501 35 942 925 910 887 877 568 45 749 734 718 693 683 552 55 553 542 526 506 499 470 65 368 360 349 337 332 346 75 203 198 192 187 184 204 85 60 59 58 57 55 64 90 0 0 0 0 0 95 71 68 68 69 70 77 105 244 241 236 235 234 252 115 442 439 437 427 425 431 125 661 649 653 643 638 581 135 884 871 875 866 866 673 145 1099 1084 1088 1084 1077 679 155 1283 1268 1275 1269 1263 585 165 1415 1405 1408 1406 1403 396 175 1482 1482 1482 1482 1481 141 180 1492 1492 1492 1492 1492 HP-2-ID-V-V-835-F Very High Output / Very High Output - 4' Luminaire Distribution: 55% Up (V) / 45% Down (V) Efficacy: 94 lumens per watt Uplight: 3813 lumens (953 lumens/foot) Downlight: 3175 lumens (794 lumens/foot) Total luminaire output: 6988 lumens (1747 lumens/foot) 73.8 watts (18.5 watts/foot) CRI: 80 CCT: 3500K ITL LM79 Report 85132 Total Light Output, 3500K, 80 CRI (Lumens) - 4' Luminaire !S* !B* !H* !V** "S* 2861 [!55% I 45%"] 3262 [!60% I 40%"] 4265 [!70% I 30%"] 5113 [!75% I 25%"] "B* 3195 [!49% I 51%"] 3596 [!55% I 45%"] 4600 [!65% I 35%"] 5447 [!70% I 30%"] "H* 4030 [!39% I 61%"] 4432 [!44% I 56%"] 5435 [!55% I 45%"] 6282 [!61% I 39%"] "V* 4736 [!33% I 67%"] 5137 [!38% I 62%"] 6141 [!48% I 52%"] 6988 [!55% I 45%"] Light Output, 3500K, 80 CRI (Lumens Per Foot) !S* !B* !H* !V** "S* 715 815 1066 1278 "B* 799 899 1150 1362 "H* 1008 1108 1359 1571 "V* 1184 1284 1535 1747 Power, 3500K, 80 CRI (Watts Per Foot) !S* !B* !H* !V** "S* 7.2 8.2 10.7 12.8 "B* 8.2 9.2 11.7 13.8 "H* 10.7 11.7 14.2 16.3 "V* 12.8 13.8 16.3 18.5 Efficacy, 3500K, 80 CRI (Lumens Per Watt) !S* !B* !H* !V** "S* 99 99 100 100 "B* 97 98 99 99 "H* 94 95 96 96 "V* 92 93 94 95 Apply a lumen adjustment factor to calculate lumens for the desired CCT and CRI. High Output (H) / Standard Output (S), 4000K, 90CRI Lumen Adjustment Factor = 0.789 Total Light Output = 4265 lm x 0.789 = 3365 lm Total Light Output per Foot = 1066 lm/ft x 0.789 = 841 lm/ft watts/foot = 10.7 W/ft Efficacy = = 78.6 lm/W 841 lm ft Lumen Adjustment Factors - 80 CRI 3000K 0.985 3500K 1.000 4000K 1.032 Lumen Adjustment Factors - 90 CRI 3000K 0.746 3500K 0.760 4000K 0.789 S - Standard Output, B - Boosted Standard Output, H - High Output, V - Very High Output * Family Correlation based on 4' luminaire 3500K Very High Output (V) test - 120V. ** Correlation based on ITL report: 85132 10.7 W ft ! Indirect " Direct 1119 1492 746 373 Type LPA Cut sheet 3 of 7 Page: 21 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette High Performance 2" Aperture (HP-2) - Indirect/DirectF INELITE Finelite, Inc. • 30500 Whipple Road • Union City, CA 94587-1530 • 510 / 441-1100 • Fax: 510 / 441-1510 • www.finelite.com Due to continuing product improvements, Finelite reserves the right to change specifications without notice. Please visit www.finelite.com for most current data. BUY AMERICAN ACT OF 2009 COMPLIANT Protected by one or more US Patents: 8915613; D702,391; D702,390; D700,732; D727,554 S; D727,550 S, D727,551 S © 2018 FINELITE, INC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. Form CTK0115. V9 06/18 Page 4 PHOTOMETRY - FLUSH DIFFUSER UPLIGHT & REGRESSED DIFFUSER DOWNLIGHT SAMPLE LUMEN ADJUSTMENT CALCULATION HP-2-ID-RG-V-V-835-F Very High Output / Very High Output - 4' Luminaire Distribution: 59% Up (V) / 41% Down (V) Efficacy: 99 lumens per watt Uplight: 4304 lumens (1076 lumens/foot) Downlight: 2928 lumens (732 lumens/foot) Total luminaire output: 7232 lumens (1808 lumens/foot) 73.2 watts (18.3 watts/foot) CRI: 80 CCT: 3500K ITL LM79 Report 90352 Total Light Output, 3500K, 80 CRI (Lumens) - 4' Luminaire !S* !B* !H* !V** "S* 2960 [!60% I 40%"] 3414 [!65% I 35%"] 4546 [!74% I 26%"] 4690 [!37% I 63%"] "B* 3269 [!54% I 46%"] 3722 [!60% I 40%"] 4854 [!69% I 31%"] 5143 [!43% I 57%"] "H* 4039 [!44% I 56%"] 4492 [!49% I 51%"] 5625 [!60% I 40%"] 6276 [!53% I 47%"] "V* 4690 [!38% I 62%"] 5143 [!43% I 57%"] 6276 [!53% I 47%"] 7232 [!59% I 41%"] Light Output, 3500K, 80 CRI (Lumens Per Foot) !S* !B* !H* !V** "S* 740 853 1137 1278 "B* 817 930 1214 1286 "H* 1010 1123 1406 1569 "V* 1172 1286 1569 1808 Power, 3500K, 80 CRI (Watts Per Foot) !S* !B* !H* !V** "S* 7.2 8.1 10.6 12.8 "B* 8.1 9.1 11.6 13.7 "H* 10.6 11.6 14.0 16.2 "V* 12.7 13.7 16.2 18.3 Efficacy, 3500K, 80 CRI (Lumens Per Watt) !S* !B* !H* !V** "S* 103 105 107 100 "B* 100 102 105 94 "H* 95 97 100 97 "V* 92 94 97 99 Apply a lumen adjustment factor to calculate lumens for the desired CCT and CRI. High Output (H) / Standard Output (S), 4000K, 90CRI Lumen Adjustment Factor = 0.789 Total Light Output = 4546 lm x 0.789 = 3587 lm Total Light Output per Foot = 1137 lm/ft x 0.789 = 897 lm/ft watts/foot = 10.6 W/ft Efficacy = = 85 lm/W 897 lm ft Lumen Adjustment Factors - 80 CRI 3000K 0.985 3500K 1.000 4000K 1.032 Lumen Adjustment Factors - 90 CRI 3000K 0.746 3500K 0.760 4000K 0.789 S - Standard Output, B - Boosted Standard Output, H - High Output, V - Very High Output * Family Correlation based on 4' luminaire 3500K Very High Output (V) test - 120V. ** Correlation based on ITL report: 90352 10.6 W ft ! Indirect " Direct 1292 1722 861 431 CANDELA DISTRIBUTION 0.0 22.5 45.0 67.5 90.0 FLUX 0 1585 1585 1585 1585 1585 5 1573 1571 1564 1558 1556 147 15 1492 1459 1411 1364 1342 396 25 1334 1260 1157 1068 1034 536 35 1118 1013 875 770 730 560 45 872 758 613 516 483 495 55 631 517 391 324 303 381 65 403 307 218 178 173 248 75 206 138 103 96 94 130 85 48 30 26 25 24 34 90 0 0 0 0 0 95 69 69 69 66 64 76 105 251 250 250 249 247 265 115 478 474 476 471 470 470 125 734 726 728 723 721 650 135 1000 990 994 990 982 765 145 1265 1245 1253 1248 1238 781 155 1482 1463 1476 1467 1460 676 165 1635 1623 1630 1626 1621 458 175 1712 1711 1711 1710 1709 162 180 1722 1722 1722 1722 1722 Type LPA Cut sheet 4 of 7 Page: 22 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette High Performance 2" Aperture (HP-2) - Indirect/DirectF INELITE Finelite, Inc. • 30500 Whipple Road • Union City, CA 94587-1530 • 510 / 441-1100 • Fax: 510 / 441-1510 • www.finelite.com Due to continuing product improvements, Finelite reserves the right to change specifications without notice. Please visit www.finelite.com for most current data. BUY AMERICAN ACT OF 2009 COMPLIANT Protected by one or more US Patents: 8915613; D702,391; D702,390; D700,732; D727,554 S; D727,550 S, D727,551 S © 2018 FINELITE, INC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. Form CTK0115. V9 06/18 Page 5 PHOTOMETRY - WIDESPREAD OPTIC (WSO) UPLIGHT / FLUSH DIFFUSERTR DOWNLIGHT SAMPLE LUMEN ADJUSTMENT CALCULATION CANDELA DISTRIBUTION 0.0 22.5 45 67.5 90 Flux 0 1461 1461 1461 1461 1461 5 1451 1450 1448 1447 1447 137 15 1376 1362 1359 1348 1342 381 25 1224 1204 1187 1165 1153 545 35 1023 998 973 942 929 608 45 794 773 749 717 705 576 55 568 557 535 509 499 478 65 364 356 344 328 322 341 75 187 186 180 174 170 191 85 49 49 48 46 45 54 90 0 0 0 0 0 95 47 83 83 69 68 92 105 183 258 532 556 458 434 115 324 409 720 993 1048 694 125 460 542 887 1257 1299 793 135 558 634 907 1299 1457 741 145 633 693 885 1127 1236 572 155 694 728 843 963 1012 393 165 736 749 793 837 853 226 175 756 758 763 768 770 73 180 759 759 759 759 759 HP-2-ID-V-V-835-WSO Very High Output / Very High Output - 4' Luminaire Distribution: 55% Up (V) / 45% Down (V) Efficacy: 101 lumens per watt Uplight: 4018 lumens (1005 lumens/foot) Downlight: 3312 lumens (828 lumens/foot) Total luminaire output: 7330 lumens (1833 lumens/foot) 72.5 watts (18.1 watts/foot) Peak Candela (Uplight): 1457 @ 135º CRI: 80 CCT: 3500K ITL LM79 Report 89456 Total Light Output, 3500K, 80 CRI (Lumens) - 4' Luminaire !S* !B* !H* !V** "S* 3001 [!55% I 45%"] 3424 [!60% I 40%"] 4481 [!70% I 30%"] 5374 [!75% I 25%"] "B* 3349 [!49% I 51%"] 3772 [!55% I 45%"] 4830 [!65% I 35%"] 5722 [!70% I 30%"] "H* 4221 [!39% I 61%"] 4644 [!44% I 56%"] 5701 [!55% I 45%"] 6594 [!61% I 39%"] "V* 4957 [!33% I 67%"] 5380 [!38% I 62%"] 6437 [!48% I 52%"] 7330 [!55% I 45%"] Light Output, 3500K, 80 CRI (Lumens Per Foot) !S* !B* !H* !V** "S* 750 856 1120 1343 "B* 837 943 1207 1431 "H* 1055 1161 1425 1649 "V* 1239 1345 1609 1833 Power, 3500K, 80 CRI (Watts Per Foot) !S* !B* !H* !V** "S* 7.1 8.1 10.5 12.6 "B* 8.1 9.0 11.5 13.6 "H* 10.5 11.5 13.9 16.0 "V* 12.6 13.6 16.0 18.1 Efficacy, 3500K, 80 CRI (Lumens Per Watt) !S* !B* !H* !V** "S* 106 106 107 107 "B* 104 105 105 105 "H* 100 101 102 103 "V* 98 99 100 101 Apply a lumen adjustment factor to calculate lumens for the desired CCT and CRI. High Output (H) / Standard Output (S), 4000K, 90CRI Lumen Adjustment Factor = 0.789 Total Light Output = 4481 lm x 0.789 = 3536 lm Total Light Output per Foot = 1120 lm/ft x 0.789 = 884 lm/ft watts/foot = 10.5 W/ft Efficacy = = 84 lm/W 884 lm ft Lumen Adjustment Factors - 80 CRI 3000K 0.985 3500K 1.000 4000K 1.032 Lumen Adjustment Factors - 90 CRI 3000K 0.746 3500K 0.760 4000K 0.789 S - Standard Output, B - Boosted Standard Output, H - High Output, V - Very High Output * Family Correlation based on 4' luminaire 3500K Very High Output (V) test - 120V. ** Correlation based on ITL report: 89456 10.5 W ft ! Indirect " Direct 1109 1478 739 370 Type LPA Cut sheet 5 of 7 Page: 23 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette High Performance 2" Aperture (HP-2) - Indirect/DirectF INELITE Finelite, Inc. • 30500 Whipple Road • Union City, CA 94587-1530 • 510 / 441-1100 • Fax: 510 / 441-1510 • www.finelite.com Due to continuing product improvements, Finelite reserves the right to change specifications without notice. Please visit www.finelite.com for most current data. BUY AMERICAN ACT OF 2009 COMPLIANT Protected by one or more US Patents: 8915613; D702,391; D702,390; D700,732; D727,554 S; D727,550 S, D727,551 S © 2018 FINELITE, INC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. Form CTK0115. V9 06/18 Page 6 PHOTOMETRY - ASYMMETRIC OPTIC (ASY) UPLIGHT / FLUSH DOWNLIGHT SAMPLE LUMEN ADJUSTMENT CALCULATION CANDELA DISTRIBUTION 0.0 45.0 90.0 135.0 180.0 Flux 0 1247 1247 1247 1247 1247 5 1238 1239 1239 1239 1238 117 15 1165 1173 1187 1177 1167 331 25 1034 1048 1067 1053 1036 484 35 873 894 914 897 873 559 45 701 720 738 720 697 554 55 526 541 557 539 524 483 65 359 368 379 366 355 363 75 210 207 209 203 199 218 85 72 68 61 63 63 75 90 36 23 0 20 27 95 156 143 59 82 79 121 105 513 615 209 253 262 397 115 1389 1126 367 406 439 684 125 1821 1266 532 519 597 785 135 1760 1310 699 591 689 738 145 1654 1364 868 650 691 636 155 1583 1408 1027 735 702 498 165 1493 1379 1149 925 836 326 175 1318 1285 1214 1143 1108 115 180 1222 1222 1222 1222 1222 HP-2-ID-V-V-835-ASY-R Very High Output / Very High Output - 4' Luminaire Distribution: 57% Up (V) / 43% Down (V) Efficacy: 102 lumens per watt Uplight: 4301 lumens (1075 lumens/foot) Downlight: 3184 lumens (796 lumens/foot) Total Luminaire Output: 7485 lumens (1871 lumens/foot) 73.5 watts (18.4 watts/foot) CRI: 80 CCT: 3500K ITL LM79 Report 89599 Total Light Output, 3500K, 80 CRI (Lumens) - 4' Luminaire !S* !B* !H* !V** "S* 3064 [!58% I 42%"] 3517 [!63% I 37%"] 4649 [!72% I 28%"] 5604 [!77% I 23%"] "B* 3399 [!52% I 48%"] 3852 [!58% I 42%"] 4984 [!67% I 33%"] 5940 [!72% I 28%"] "H* 4237 [!42% I 58%"] 4690 [!47% I 53%"] 5822 [!58% I 42%"] 6777 [!64% I 36%"] "V* 4945 [!36% I 64%"] 5397 [!41% I 59%"] 6529 [!51% I 49%"] 7485 [!57% I 43%"] Light Output, 3500K, 80 CRI (Lumens Per Foot) !S* !B* !H* !V** "S* 766 879 1162 1401 "B* 850 963 1246 1485 "H* 1059 1172 1455 1694 "V* 1236 1349 1632 1871 Power, 3500K, 80 CRI (Watts Per Foot) !S* !B* !H* !V** "S* 7.2 8.2 10.6 12.8 "B* 8.2 9.1 11.6 13.8 "H* 10.6 11.6 14.1 16.2 "V* 12.8 13.8 16.2 18.4 Efficacy, 3500K, 80 CRI (Lumens Per Watt) !S* !B* !H* !V** "S* 106 108 109 110 "B* 104 105 107 108 "H* 100 101 103 104 "V* 97 98 101 102 Apply a lumen adjustment factor to calculate lumens for the desired CCT and CRI. High Output (H) / High Output (H), 3500K, 80CRI Lumen Adjustment Factor = 0.789 Total Light Output = 5822 lm x 0.789 = 4594 lm Total Light Output per Foot = 1455 lm/ft x 0.789 = 1148 lm/ft watts/foot = 14.1 W/ft Efficacy = = 81 lm/W 1148 lm ft Lumen Adjustment Factors - 80 CRI 3000K 0.985 3500K 1.000 4000K 1.032 Lumen Adjustment Factors - 90 CRI 3000K 0.746 3500K 0.760 4000K 0.789 S - Standard Output, B - Boosted Standard Output, H - High Output, V - Very High Output * Family Correlation based on 4' luminaire 3500K Very High Output (V) test - 120V. ** Correlation based on ITL report: 89599 14.1 W ft ! Indirect " Direct 1372 1829 915 457 Type LPA Cut sheet 6 of 7 Page: 24 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette High Performance 2" Aperture (HP-2) - Indirect/DirectF INELITE Finelite, Inc. • 30500 Whipple Road • Union City, CA 94587-1530 • 510 / 441-1100 • Fax: 510 / 441-1510 • www.finelite.com Due to continuing product improvements, Finelite reserves the right to change specifications without notice. Please visit www.finelite.com for most current data. BUY AMERICAN ACT OF 2009 COMPLIANT Protected by one or more US Patents: 8915613; D702,391; D702,390; D700,732; D727,554 S; D727,550 S, D727,551 S © 2018 FINELITE, INC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. Form CTK0115. V9 06/18 Page 7 CONSTRUCTION: Precision-cut 6061-T6 extruded aluminum body. Internal joiner system, plug-together wiring, standard. ENDCAPS: Flat diecast aluminum endcaps add 1/4" to each end of luminaire. MITERED CORNER:Illuminated 90° corners in a single plane, with Top Glow™ or Flush uplight diffuser, and/or Flush downlight diffuser, standard. Custom angles are available (90° minimum on inside corners), contact factory. REFLECTORS: Die-formed 24-gauge cold-rolled steel reflectors are finished in 96 LG high reflectance matte white powder coat paint. UPLIGHT OPTION: Patented Top Glow frost white diffuser standard. 12 ft. maximum diffuser length. 73% transmissive, 99% diffusion. Internal secondary diffusers at corners ensure visually seamless, uniform, continuous illumination. Optional: Flush frost white snap-in diffuser, 73% transmissive, 99% diffusion; Widespread Optic (WSO) and Widespread Optic with Top Glow (WSOTG); WSO enables increased luminaire spacing with improved ceiling uniformity. Asymmetric optic directs light in a specific direction. ASY-L distributes light to the left, ASY-R distributed light to the right of the luminaire. See page 2. DOWNLIGHT OPTION: 12' maximum diffuser length. Flush frost white snap-in diffuser standard, 73% transmissive, 99% diffusion. Internal secondary diffusers at corners ensure visually seamless, uniform, continuous illumination. Available with Flush, Bottom Glow, and Regressed downlight diffusers. LIGHT OUTPUT: Four lumen packages available, Standard (S), Boosted Standard (B), High (H), and Very High (V). For lengths 3 feet and greater, the uplight and downlight can be specified with different lumen packages and dual controls. A separate chart summarizes lumen distribution and wattage. Light engines are replaceable. LUMEN MAINTENANCE: 90% of initial light output (L90) at 100,000+ hours; 70% of initial light output (L70) at 200,000+ hours. DRIVER: Replaceable 120V/277V and 347V Constant Current Reduction dimming driver standard. Can be wired dimming or non-dimming. 0-10V dimming controls with a range of 10%- 100%. Dimming to 1% available; consult factory. For lengths 3 feet and greater, separate dimming for uplight and downlight available. Driver is fully accessible from below the ceiling. Power Factor: ≥0.9. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) <20%. Expected driver lifetime: 100,000 hours. LUTRON DRIVER OPTIONS: Lut3W-3-wire, LutESEcoSystem, Lut2W-2-wire. ELECTRICAL: Optional emergency to generator/inverter wiring, internal generator transfer switch, nightlight wiring, step-dimming driver, backup battery. Factorychoice low-profile backup battery available. 12' minimum luminaire length for low profile battery pack. Backup batteries deliver 1000 lumens. Half of a 4' section will be illuminated in emergency mode. INTEGRATED SENSORS: Integrated PIR (Passive Infrared) occupancy and/or daylight sensors available with Flush, Bottom Glow, and Regressed downlight diffusers. Refer to Occupancy Sensor and Daylight Sensor tech sheets for more info. MOUNTING: 50" Fully Adjustable (FA) plated steel aircraft cable with safety stop hardware standard. Contact factory for additional lengths up to 150". FINISHES:Finelite Signal White powder coat standard. Optional Adders: 185 RAL colors. FEED: Standard with one 18-gauge/5-conductor single-circuit feed controlling uplight and downlight together (power and dimming). Specify dual feeds for independent control of uplight and downlight. 14gauge feed used when luminaire current exceeds 5 amps. LENGTHS: Any length, 2-foot minimum, in increments down to 1/16" (± 1/32"). 12-foot maximum section length. LABELS: Luminaire and electrical components are ETL-listed conforming to UL 1598 in the U.S.A. and CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 250.0 in Canada. In accordance with NEC Code 410.73 (G), this luminaire contains an internal driver disconnect. Damp Location. Finelite products use electronic components that are RoHS compliant, and the mechanical components of the luminaire have been verified to not knowingly contain any restricted substances listed per RoHS Directive 2002/95/EC. WEIGHT: 2.9 lb/ft. WARRANTY: 10-year performance-based warranty on all standard components. Optional accessories such as emergency battery packs are covered by their individual manufacturer warranties. SPECIFICATIONS Occupancy Sensor Daylight Sensor O Type LPA Cut sheet 7 of 7 Page: 25 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette T F W 604.549.9379 604.549.9555 fluxwerx.com ® All rights reserved. © Fluxwerx Illumination Inc 2017 Due to continuous product improvements, specifications and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Certain options have limited compatibility with some other product selections. Consult www.fluxwerx.com for most current technical information. PS1-D 2017-12 PAGE 1 of 7 Specification DataPROFILE - SPOKE PS1-D specification 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 OPTIONS Summary values are nominal and based on 4000K CCT DPS1 Profile Spoke 3 (S3) Profile Spoke 4 (S4) Performance Summary 15 Up I 85 Down A B C D Version 3S 4S 3S 4S 3S 4S 3S 4S Light (lm) 3200 4300 3950 5300 4800 6400 6100 8100 Energy (W) 28 38 34 46 44 58 57 76 Efficacy (lm/W) 116 114 112 109 Color Rendering (CRI) 80+ 80+ 80+ 80+ Color Accuracy (SDCM) < 2 < 2 < 2 < 2 L70 Estimate (h) 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 Lumen Maintenance per TM21 (@ 60,000 h) L90 L90 L90 L90 Luminaire PROFILE-SPOKE 15 UP | 85 DN LED (PS1-D) Type Project Product Notes 7. VERSION 8. CEILING INTEGRATION 9. DRIVER 10. VOLTAGE 11. SUSPENSION 5 OPTIONS S3 3 Spoke S4 4 Spoke D Drywall G Grid S Structure R Remote E1 eldoLED ECO 0-10V Dim 1% E2 eldoLED SOLO 0-10V Dim 0.1% E3 eldoLED ECO DALI 1% E4 eldoLED SOLO DALI Dim 0.1% F1 Factory Non- Dim F2 Factory 0-10V Dim 3% F3 Factory 0-10V Dim 3% (Class 2 control wiring)3 L1 Lutron Hi-Lume 1%-H EcoSystem M 120 - 277 V 3 347 V4 03 ≤ 3 ft 06 ≤ 6 ft 12 ≤ 12 ft 25 ≤ 25 ft B Battery Pack 6 C Chicago Plenum 1. FAMILY 2. ENDCAP 3. OPTICAL DISTRIBUTION 4. ENERGY 1 5. CCT 6. FINISH 2 PS1 Spoke Area A Angle B Bevel F Flat P Capsule R Radius S Square W Wing General Area Lighting D 15 Up | 85 Dn A 40 Up | 60 Dn B 100 Dn E 50 Up | 50 Dn F 60 Up | 40 Dn G 80 Up | 20 Dn 3S A 28 W B 34 W C 44 W D 57 W 4S A 38 W B 46 W C 58 W D 76 W 30 3000 K 35 3500 K 40 4000 K A Clear Anodized B Black Powdercoat W White Powdercoat S Metallic Silver Powdercoat C Custom Colour (RAL) Integrated driver with mounting, power feed, suspension + canopy NOTES 1 Nominal values at 120 - 277 V. For 347 V with E1-4/L1 add 4 W to above 2 Fixture and Canopy finish (Silver Canopy for Clear Anodized fixture). 3 In 347V only 4 347V Driver for F1/F3 347 V Transformer + Driver E1-4/L1 5 See page 2 for detail on tapered + vertical suspension wires 6 Available in 120 - 277V Type LPB Cut sheet 1 of 7 Page: 26 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette PROFILE SPOKE (PS1-D)® All rights reserved. © Fluxwerx Illumination Inc 2017 Due to continuous product improvements, specifications and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Certain options have limited compatibility with some other product selections. Consult www.fluxwerx.com for most current technical information. PS1-D 2017-12 PAGE 2 of 7 SPOKE 3 Straight cables up to 3ft SPOKE 4 Straight cables up to 3ft SPOKE 3 Tapered cables over 3ft SPOKE 4 Tapered cables over 3ft (G) Grid (D) Drywall (S) Structure (R) Remote 12.5" (318) 0.45" (11) 12.5" (318) 2.3" (59) SUSPENSION CANOPIES Powered by low voltage stainless steel conductive aircraft cables. Canopy finish will match fixture finish unless otherwise specified. Anodized canopies are not available. inches (mm) Type LPB Cut sheet 2 of 7 Page: 27 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette PROFILE SPOKE (PS1-D)® All rights reserved. © Fluxwerx Illumination Inc 2017 Due to continuous product improvements, specifications and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Certain options have limited compatibility with some other product selections. Consult www.fluxwerx.com for most current technical information. PS1-D 2017-12 PAGE 3 of 7 FIXTURE DIMENSIONS inches (mm) Dimensions shown with (P) Capsule endcap option. Dimensions shown with (F) Flat endcap option. 26.2" (666) 26,2" (666) 40.7" (1035) 47" (1194) Rounded corner hub detail • Bevel (B) • Flat (F) • Angle (A) • Square (S) • Wing (W) Sharp corner Hub detail for the following Endcaps: Sharp corner hub detail 26.2" (666) Sharp corner hub detail • Capsule (P) • Radius (R) Rounded corner Hub detail for the following Endcaps: 39.4" (1000) Rounded corner hub detail 26.2" (666) Type LPB Cut sheet 3 of 7 Page: 28 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette PROFILE SPOKE (PS1-D)® All rights reserved. © Fluxwerx Illumination Inc 2017 Due to continuous product improvements, specifications and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Certain options have limited compatibility with some other product selections. Consult www.fluxwerx.com for most current technical information. PS1-D 2017-12 PAGE 4 of 7 ENDCAP DIMENSIONS inches (mm) (A) ANGLE (S) SQUARE 3.25" (83) 3.10" (79) (P) CAPSULE 3.25" (83) 3.10" (79) 2.35" (60) 3.25" (83) 3.1" (79) 2.35" (60) 3.10" (79) 3.25" (83) 0.47" (12) (B) BEVEL 2.35" (60) 3.25" (83) 0.84" (21) 3.10" (79) (W) WING 2.35" (60) 3.25" (83) 2.13" (54) 3.10" (79) 3.04" (77) 52.5° Front view Bottom view 1.61" (41) Front view Bottom view Front view (R) RADIUS 3.25" (83) 3.10" (79) Front view Front view Side view Front view Side view Bottom view Bottom view Front view Side view 0.60" (15) 0.60" (15) (F) FLAT Type LPB Cut sheet 4 of 7 Page: 29 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette PROFILE SPOKE (PS1-D)® All rights reserved. © Fluxwerx Illumination Inc 2017 Due to continuous product improvements, specifications and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Certain options have limited compatibility with some other product selections. Consult www.fluxwerx.com for most current technical information. PS1-D 2017-12 PAGE 5 of 7 (S) STRUCTURE Exposed Ceilings • Integrated Driver + Powered Suspension Cable Mounts • For exposed surface conduit or recessed junction box 0-10V Dim 120-277V Lutron 347V eldoLED Battery Pack 0-10V Dim 120-277V Lutron 347V eldoLED Battery Pack • Driver Enclosure must be in accessable location (D) DRYWALL New or Retrofit • Integrated Driver + Powered Suspension Cable Mounts • Requires Structural members on 2 sides • Default mount tab for 5/8" GWB Battery Pack + 347V Option Recessed 120-277V / Mounting Battery Pack + 347V Option Recessed 120-277V / Mounting Battery Pack + 347V Option Surface 120-277V, Mounting + Canopy Battery Pack + 347V Option Surface 120-277V, Mounting + Canopy + Driver (R) REMOTE • External remote mounted driver • Powered suspension cable mounts for exposed or recessed junction box 0-10V Dim 120-277V Lutron 347V eldoLED Battery Pack (G) GRID Off Grid Only • Integrated Driver + Powered Suspension Cable Mounts • Integrated Hanger bars for 12, 20 or 24" grid spacing 0-10V Dim 120-277V Lutron 347V eldoLED Battery Pack✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 30ft. | 18 ga. 50ft. | 14 ga. 80ft. | 12 ga. Recommended Wire Gauge for Minimal Losses (AWG) Electrical • No electrical connections are required at fixture level for installation; shipped with LV conductive aircraft cables factory preinstalled • Agnostic driver design for simple integration with any sensor, lighting control or building energy management system • High efficiency multivolt drivers for 120–277V or 347V; 50 - 60 Hz integrated with suspension and mounting canopy components • Power Factor > 0.90 • Total Harmonic Distortion < 20% • F2:0 – 10 V Dim Range: 3% • Optional Battery Pack • Optional Lutron: Hi-lume H-Series EcoSystem LED drivers for 100 - 1% (PWM) dim range Weight (Fixture Only) • 3 Spoke: ~ 23.0 lb (10.4 kg) • 4 Spoke: ~ 28.0 lb (12.7 kg) Warranty • 5 year limited warranty on all components and workmanship Environmental • Designed for use in damp or dry indoor environments with room side operating temperatures of 0 - 30° C (32 - 86° F) Independent Testing • IESNA LM79 • IESNA LM80 (LED@ 10,000 h) Approvals • UL Listed (USA + Canada) • CCEA Chicago Plenum Construction • Anodized, extruded + machined architectural grade aluminum • Precision machined aluminum joints and endcaps are factory preinstalled for seamless fit • Stainless steel fasteners • 0.06” (1.6 mm) low voltage stainless steel conductive aircraft cable suspensions • Clear anodized surface finish or powdercoated in white, metallic silver or black (canopies match fixture color as standard - silver for clear anodized). Optical • Anidolic optical structures with linear light extraction elements • Precision extruded high transmittance clear acrylic lenses • Long life mid-flux LED system designed for typical TM21 lumen maintenance ≥ L90 @ 60,000 h • Available in 3000 K, 3500 K or 4000K with CRI ≥ 80 and R9 ≥ 0, all with color accurate binning ≤ 2 SDCM INTEGRATED DRIVER, MOUNTING, POWER FEEDS + SUSPENSION Refer to separate product specification datasheets for detailed dimensions of mounting hardware components, driver enclosures, canopies + wiring Type LPB Cut sheet 5 of 7 Page: 30 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette PROFILE SPOKE (PS1-D)® All rights reserved. © Fluxwerx Illumination Inc 2017 Due to continuous product improvements, specifications and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Certain options have limited compatibility with some other product selections. Consult www.fluxwerx.com for most current technical information. PS1-D 2017-12 PAGE 6 of 7 Product Profile Spoke Description Version PS1-DA40-S3 15 Up | 85 Dn A lumens Report Based on 11692617.15 Performance Summary Light Energy Efficacy Color Accuracy (lm) (W) (lm/W) (CRI) (R9) (SDCM) CCT Color Temperature 4000 K 3216 27.7 116 83 4.6 < 2 3500 K 3175 27.7 114 83 4.6 < 2 3000 K 3136 27.7 113 83 4.6 < 2 18.5% Up | 81.5% Dn Product Profile Spoke Description Version PS1-DD40-S3 15 Up | 85 Dn D lumens Report Based on 11692617.15 Performance Summary Light Energy Efficacy Color Accuracy (lm) (W) (lm/W) (CRI) (R9) (SDCM) CCT Color Temperature 4000 K 6102 55.9 109 83 4.6 < 2 3500 K 6026 55.9 108 83 4.6 < 2 3000 K 5950 55.9 106 83 4.6 < 2 18.5% Up | 81.5% Dn Photometric data scaled as 6 feet of linear 4 foot Profile photometry. Distribution plot for each leg of Spoke per Profile linear 4 foot photometry. Product Profile Spoke Description Version PS1-DC40-S3 15 Up | 85 Dn C lumens Report Based on 11692617.15 Performance Summary Light Energy Efficacy Color Accuracy (lm) (W) (lm/W) (CRI) (R9) (SDCM) CCT Color Temperature 4000 K 4809 43.1 112 83 4.6 < 2 3500 K 4749 43.1 110 83 4.6 < 2 3000 K 4689 43.1 109 83 4.6 < 2 18.5% Up | 81.5% Dn Product Profile Spoke Description Version PS1-DB40-S3 15 Up | 85 Dn B lumens Report Based on 11692617.15 Performance Summary Light Energy Efficacy Color Accuracy (lm) (W) (lm/W) (CRI) (R9) (SDCM) CCT Color Temperature 4000 K 3953 34.7 114 83 4.6 < 2 3500 K 3904 34.7 113 83 4.6 < 2 3000 K 3855 34.7 111 83 4.6 < 2 18.5% Up | 81.5% Dn PROFILE SPOKE 3 Type LPB Cut sheet 6 of 7 Page: 31 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette PROFILE SPOKE (PS1-D)® All rights reserved. © Fluxwerx Illumination Inc 2017 Due to continuous product improvements, specifications and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Certain options have limited compatibility with some other product selections. Consult www.fluxwerx.com for most current technical information. PS1-D 2017-12 PAGE 7 of 7 PROFILE SPOKE 4 Product Profile Spoke Description Version PS1-DA40-S4 15 Up | 85 Dn A lumens Report Based on 11692617.15 Performance Summary Light Energy Efficacy Color Accuracy (lm) (W) (lm/W) (CRI) (R9) (SDCM) CCT Color Temperature 4000 K 4288 37 116 83 4.6 < 2 3500 K 4235 37 114 83 4.6 < 2 3000 K 4181 37 113 83 4.6 < 2 18.5% Up | 81.5% Dn Product Profile Spoke Description Version PS1-DD40-S4 15 Up | 85 Dn D lumens Report Based on 11692617.15 Performance Summary Light Energy Efficacy Color Accuracy (lm) (W) (lm/W) (CRI) (R9) (SDCM) CCT Color Temperature 4000 K 8136 74.6 109 83 4.6 < 2 3500 K 8035 74.6 108 83 4.6 < 2 3000 K 7934 74.6 106 83 4.6 < 2 18.5% Up | 81.5% Dn Photometric data scaled as 8 feet of linear 4 foot Profile photometry. Distribution plot for each leg of Spoke per Profile linear 4 foot photometry. Product Profile Spoke Description Version PS1-DC40-S4 15 Up | 85 Dn C lumens Report Based on 11692617.15 Performance Summary Light Energy Efficacy Color Accuracy (lm) (W) (lm/W) (CRI) (R9) (SDCM) CCT Color Temperature 4000 K 6412 57.5 112 83 4.6 < 2 3500 K 6332 57.5 110 83 4.6 < 2 3000 K 6253 57.5 109 83 4.6 < 2 18.5% Up | 81.5% Dn Product Profile Spoke Description Version PS1-DB40-S4 15 Up | 85 Dn B lumens Report Based on 11692617.15 Performance Summary Light Energy Efficacy Color Accuracy (lm) (W) (lm/W) (CRI) (R9) (SDCM) CCT Color Temperature 4000 K 5271 46.2 114 83 4.6 < 2 3500 K 5205 46.2 113 83 4.6 < 2 3000 K 5139 46.2 111 83 4.6 < 2 18.5% Up | 81.5% Dn Type LPB Cut sheet 7 of 7 Page: 32 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette Luminaire Type: Catalog Number (autopopulated): GOTHAM ARCHITECTURAL DOWNLIGHTING | 1400 Lester Road Conyers GA 30012 | P 800.315.4982 | gothamlighting.com © 2012-2017 Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Rev. 03/01/17. Specifications subject to change without notice.PAGE 1 OF 4 ICO-CYL-2-OPEN Gotham Architectural Downlighting LED Downlights 2" Incito Cylinder Solid-State Lighting (US and International Patents Pending) FEATURES ORDERING INFORMATION OPTICAL SYSTEM • Superior 100% virgin silicone refractive optic enables maximum dimensional stability and optical transmission with no discoloration over life. • Primary control of distribution occurs in optic allowing for aesthetic versatility with trim color and finish. • 2.5-step MacAdam Ellipse. • Thirteen preset distribution patterns allow designers to achieve tailored effects. • Self-flanged semi-specular or matte-diffuse lower trim. • Field-interchangeable optics. • 35° shielding angle to refractive optic. HOUSING • Precision die-cast housing with decorative finial cap and no visible hardware. • Textured polyester powder paint finish. MOUNTING1 • Pendant Mount Recessed Gear Box • Pendant Mount Surface Gear Box • Wall Mount Surface Gear Box. Mounting enabled in up or down position. • Wall Mount Recessed Gear Box. Mounting enabled in up or down position. • Ceiling Mount Recessed Gear Box • Flush Ceiling Mount Surface Gear Box • Cord Mount Recessed Gear Box • Cord Mount Surface Gear Box ELECTRICAL SYSTEM • Solid-state LED light engine available in 2700 K, 3000 K, 3500 K or 4000 K color temperatures. Standard CRI: 80 typical. High CRI option available. • Rated system life of >60,000 hours at 70% output. • 120V TRIAC or ELV dimming and 0-10V dimming standard. • Luminaire accepts parallel and branch circuit control wiring. LISTINGS • Fixtures are UL listed to meet US and Canadian standards. Pendant Mount, Surface Mount, and Flush Ceiling Mount are suitable for wet location; Covered Ceiling and Wall Mount versions are wet location listed in the down orientation. • Various product configurations are Energy Star listed. Refer to the DOE website for qualified products: https://www.energystar.gov/productfinder/product/ certified-light-fixtures/results. WARRANTY • 5-year limited warranty. Complete warranty terms located at: www.acuitybrands.com/CustomerResources/Terms_and_conditions.aspx Note: Actual performance may differ as a result of end user environment and application. All values are design or typical values, measured under laboratory conditions at 25 °C. EXAMPLE: ICO CYL 35/10 2AR LSS 20D MVOLT UGZ FCM DWHG Series Color temperature Nominal lumen values Aperture/ Trim color Finish Beam ICO CYL 27/ 2700 K 30/ 3000 K 35/ 3500 K 40/ 4000 K 05 500 lumens 07 750 lumens 10 1000 lumens 15 1500 lumens 2AR Clear 2PR Pewter 2WTR Wheat 2GR Gold 2WR2 White 2BR2 Black LSS Semi-specular LD Matte diffuse 15D 15° beam angle 20D 20° beam angle 25D 25° beam angle 30D 30° beam angle 35D 35° beam angle 40D 40° beam angle 45D 45° beam angle 50D 50° beam angle 55D 55° beam angle 3515D Elliptical 35° x 15° beam angle 5020D Elliptical 50° x 20° beam angle 5060D Elliptical 50° x 60° beam angle 6070D Elliptical 60° x 70° beam angle Voltage Driver Mounting Options MVOLT3 120 277 UGZ4 Universal dimming to 1% (0-10V, 120V TRIAC or ELV) FCM Flush ceiling mount recessed gear box FCMS Flush ceiling mount surface gear box CBMG5 Cord mount recessed gear box CMS5 Cord mount surface gear box WM Wall mount recessed gear box WMS Wall mount surface gear box PMR6 Pendant mount recessed gear box PMSG6 Pendant mount surface gear box CRI90 High CRI (90+) NPP16D7,8 nLight® network power/relay pack with 0-10V dimming. NPP16DER7,8 nLight® network power/relay pack with 0-10V dimming. ER control fixtures on emergency circuit. Architectural Colors - Powder Paint DWHG Matte white DDB Dark bronze DBL Black DWH Gloss white DMB Medium bronze DNA Natural aluminum DSS Sandstone DGC Charcoal grey DTG Tennis green DBR Bright red DSB Steel blue ACCESSORIES order as separate catalog numbers (shipped separately) CYK59 1/4" (O.D.) stem and canopy with 5° “hang straight” swivel CYK459 1/4" (O.D.) stem and canopy with 45° swivel OPTC210 Additional optics available for field installation OPTC2 KIT Kit including a field interchangeable optic for each of the 13 preset beam distribution patterns A+ Capable options indicated by this color background. Type PA Cut sheet 1 of 4 Page: 33 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette GOTHAM ARCHITECTURAL DOWNLIGHTING | 1400 Lester Road Conyers GA 30012 | P 800.315.4982 | gothamlighting.com © 2012-2017 Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Rev. 03/01/17. Specifications subject to change without notice. PAGE 2 OF 4 ICO-CYL-2-OPEN 2" INCITO CYLINDER Open Cylinder Solid-State Lighting ORDERING NOTES 1. See dimension section for graphics. 2. Not available with finishes. 3. Multi-volt 120-277V. 4. Refer to TECH SHEET 240 for full list of recommended compatible dimmers. Control system electrical load, and protocol may limit minimum dim level. 5. CMS & CBMG are damp location listed; Canopy shipped as standard. DWHG, DWH, & DNA colors ship with gray cord; all others black cord. Usable cord length is 10 feet. 6. Must specify stem and canopy. See Accessories. 7. Device must be remote mounted. Will not be factory installed. Access required to location of remote mounted device. 8. Must specify 120V or 277V. 9. Color and length of stem must be specified (from 2 feet to 12 feet in 2 foot increments). Ex: CYK5 DWHG 4FT Stem section adjacent to cylinder can be cut in field to achieve non-uniform lengths. Order next highest even length for provisions (i.e. for a field cut 3’ length, order 4’ stem. 10. Must specify desired optical distribution from available options in "Beam" column. i.e. OPTC2 15D or OPTC2 3515D DIMENSIONAL DATA NOTES DIMENSIONAL DATA ELECTRICAL CEILING MOUNT CONSTRUCTION [FCM] CORD-MOUNT SURFACE GEAR BOX CONSTRUCTION [CMS] FLUSH-CEILING MOUNT SURFACE GEAR BOX CONSTRUCTION [FCMS] CORD-MOUNT CONSTRUCTION [CBMG] All dimensions are inches (centimeters) unless otherwise noted. APERTURE DIAMETER: 2-1/4 (5.7) HOUSING DIAMETER: 3 1/8 (7.9) 5 7/16 [13.9] 3 1/8 [7.9] 2 9/16 [6.5] 4 11/16 [11.9] 4 11/16 [11.9] 7 15/16 [20.2] 4 1/2 [11.4] 3 1/8 [7.9] APERTURE DIAMETER: 2-1/4 (5.7) HOUSING DIAMETER: 4 1/2 (11.4) 3 1/8 [7.9] 5 7/16 [13.9] 3 1/4 [8.2] 4 1/2 [11.4] 3 1/8 [7.9] 5 7/16 [13.9] 3/4 [1.9] 3 [7.6] 4 11/16 [11.9] Type PA Cut sheet 2 of 4 Page: 34 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette GOTHAM ARCHITECTURAL DOWNLIGHTING | 1400 Lester Road Conyers GA 30012 | P 800.315.4982 | gothamlighting.com © 2012-2017 Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Rev. 03/01/17. Specifications subject to change without notice.PAGE 3 OF 4 ICO-CYL-2-OPEN 2" INCITO CYLINDER Open Cylinder Solid-State Lighting DIMENSIONAL DATA ELECTRICAL WATTAGE CONSUMPTION MATRIX LUMENS WATTAGE 500 7 750 10 1000 13 1500 22 WALL MOUNT CONSTRUCTION [WM] WALL-MOUNT SURFACE GEAR BOX CONSTRUCTION [WMS] PENDANT MOUNT RECESSED GEAR BOX CONSTRUCTION [PMR] PENDANT MOUNT SURFACE GEAR BOX CONSTRUCTION [PMSG] All dimensions are inches (centimeters) unless otherwise noted. A F B C E D 5 [12.7] 3 1/8 [7.9] APERTURE DIAMETER: 2-1/4 (5.7) HOUSING DIAMETER: 3 1/8 (7.9) WALL MOUNT DIMENSIONS A: 2 1/2 (6.4) B: 3 (7.7) C: 1 (2.5) D: 4 1/16 (10.4) E: 2 9/16 (6.5) F: 4 11/16 (11.9 ) A B C D 3 1/8 [7.9] 5 [12.7] APERTURE DIAMETER: 2-1/4 (5.7) HOUSING DIAMETER: 3 1/8 (7.9) WALL MOUNT DIMENSIONS A: 2 1/2 (6.4) B: 4 7/16 (11.3) C: 2 (5.0) D: 5 1/16 (12.9) 3 1/8 [7.9] 5 [12.8] 1/4 [.6] 3 [7.6] 1/4 [.6] 4 11/16 [11.9] 3 1/8 [7.9] 5 [12.8] 2 11/16 [6.8] 4 1/2 [11.4] 1/4 [.6] Type PA Cut sheet 3 of 4 Page: 35 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette GOTHAM ARCHITECTURAL DOWNLIGHTING | 1400 Lester Road Conyers GA 30012 | P 800.315.4982 | gothamlighting.com © 2012-2017 Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Rev. 03/01/17. Specifications subject to change without notice. PAGE 4 OF 4 ICO-CYL-2-OPEN 2" INCITO CYLINDER Open Cylinder Solid-State Lighting PHOTOMETRY CRI CCT Multiplier 80 2700K 0.902 3000K 0.951 3500K 1 4000K 1.073 90 2700K 0.78 3000K 0.829 3500K 0.85 4000K 0.878 CONTROLS nLight® Control Accessories: Order as separate catalog number. Visit www.sensorswitch.com/ nLight for complete listing of nLight controls. WallPod stations Model number Occupancy sensors Model number On/Off nPODM [color] Small motion 360°, ceiling (PIR / dual tech) nCM 9 / nCM PDT 9 On/Off & Raise/Lower nPODM DX [color] Large motion 360°, ceiling (PIR / dual tech) nCM 10 / nCM PDT 10 Graphic Touchscreen nPOD GFX [color] Wide view (PIR / dual tech) nWV 16 / nWV PDT 16 Photocell controls Model number Wall Switch w/ Raise/Lower (PIR / dual tech) nWSX LV DX / nWSX PDT LV DX Dimming nCM ADCX Cat-5 cables (plenum rated) Model number 10', CAT5 10FT CAT5 10FT J1 15', CAT5 15FT CAT5 15FT J1 CONSULT GOTHAMLIGHTING.COM FOR PHOTOMETRY. A A B B A nPS 80 EZ nCM ADCX nCM PDT 9 nPS 80 EZ nPODM 2P DX B C C A OPTIONAL WIRING KEY BA C CAT-5e Cable Line Power Low Voltage Dimming Wires Type PA Cut sheet 4 of 4 Page: 36 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette Luminaire Type: Catalog Number (autopopulated): GOTHAM ARCHITECTURAL DOWNLIGHTING | 1400 Lester Road Conyers GA 30012 | P 800.315.4982 | gothamlighting.com © 2012-2018 Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Rev. 05/17/18. Specifications subject to change without notice.PAGE 1 OF 5 ICO-2-OPEN Gotham Architectural Downlighting LED Downlights 2" Incito® Downlight Solid-State Lighting (US and International Patents Pending) OPTICAL SYSTEM • Superior 100% virgin silicone refractive optic enables maximum dimensional stability and optical transmission with no discoloration over life. • Primary control of distribution occurs in refractive optic allowing for aesthetic versatility with trim color and finish. • 2.5-step MacAdam Ellipse. • Thirteen preset distribution patterns allow designers to achieve tailored effects. • Self-flanged semi-specular or matte-diffuse lower trim. • Field interchangeable optics. • 35° shielding angle to refractive optics. MECHANICAL SYSTEM • Install from below architecture standard. • Several additional mounting options available including a structural reinforcement pan, Chicago plenum, and Type IC. • Standard ambient operating temperature: 25 °C. High ambient option available. • Accommodates a wide range of applications including multiple plenum cross sections and ceiling thicknesses. Consult page 2. • Light engine and driver are accessible from above or below ceiling. • Flangeless trim option includes proprietary Gotham mud ring enabling seamless integration into drywall applications. Mud ring ships separately. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM • Solid-state LED light engine available in 2700 K, 3000 K, 3500 K or 4000 K color temperatures. Standard CRI: 80 typical. High CRI option available. • Rated system life of >60,000 hours at 70% output. • 120V TRIAC or ELV dimming and 0-10V dimming standard. • Luminaire accepts parallel and branch circuit control wiring. LISTINGS • Fixtures are UL listed to meet US and Canadian standards; wet location, covered ceiling. • ENERGY STAR® certified product. WARRANTY • 5-year limited warranty. Complete warranty terms located at: www.acuitybrands.com/CustomerResou rces/Terms_and_conditions.aspx Note: Actual performance may differ as a result of end user environment and application. All values are design or typical values, measured under laboratory conditions at 25 °C. EXAMPLE: ICO 35/10 2AR LSS 20D MVOLT UGZ Series Color temperature Nominal lumen values Aperture/Trim color Trim Style Finish Beam ICO 27/ 2700 K 30/ 3000 K 35/ 3500 K 40/ 4000 K 05 500 lumens 07 750 lumens 10 1000 lumens 151 1500 lumens 2AR Clear 2PR Pewter 2WTR Wheat 2GR Gold 2WR2 White 2BR2 Black (blank) Selfflanged FL Flangeless LSS Semispecular LD Matte diffuse 15D 15° beam angle 20D 20° beam angle 25D 25° beam angle 30D 30° beam angle 35D 35° beam angle 40D 40° beam angle 45D 45° beam angle 50D 50° beam angle 55D 55° beam angle 3515D Elliptical 35° x 15° beam angle 5020D Elliptical 50° x 20° beam angle 5060D Elliptical 50° x 60° beam angle 6070D Elliptical 60° x 70° beam angle Voltage Driver Options MVOLT3 120 277 3474 UGZ5 Universal dimming to 1% (0-10V, 120V TRIAC or ELV) SF5,6 Single fuse TRW7,8 White painted flange TRBL8,9 Black painted flange CP1 Chicago plenum NPP16D5,6,10 nLight® network power/relay pack with 0-10V dimming. NPP16DER5,6,10 nLight® network power/relay pack with 0-10V dimming. ER control fixtures on emergency circuit. CRI90 High CRI (90+) HAO1 High ambient (40°C) ICAT1 IC/Airtight housing construction NCH Structural reinforcement pan ACCESSORIES order as separate catalog numbers (shipped separately) OPTC211 Additional optics available for field installation OPTC2 KIT Kit including a field interchangeable optic for each of the 13 preset beam distribution patterns HS258 2-5/8" Hole saw HS234FL 2-3/4" Hole saw for flangeless trim option FEATURES ORDERING INFORMATION A+ Capable options indicated by this color background Design2Ship Quick Ship Program: Options in green text qualify for Design2Ship — 5 business days from order entry to ship. Refer to Design2Ship Brochure for complete program details. Maximum Order Quantity: 50 units. Type RA Cut sheet 1 of 5 Page: 37 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette GOTHAM ARCHITECTURAL DOWNLIGHTING | 1400 Lester Road Conyers GA 30012 | P 800.315.4982 | gothamlighting.com © 2012-2018 Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Rev. 05/17/18. Specifications subject to change without notice. PAGE 2 OF 5 ICO-2-OPEN ORDERING NOTES 1. 1500lm not available with CP, ICAT, or HAO. 2. Not available with finishes. 3. Multi-volt 120-277V. 4. Device must be remote mounted. Will not be factory installed. Access required to location of remote mounted device. 5. Refer to TECH SHEET 240 for full list of recommended compatible dimmers. Control system electrical load, and protocol may limit minimum dim level. 6. Must specify 120, 277, or 347V. 7. Not specifiable with WR reflector. 8. Not available with flangeless (FL) trim style. 9. Not specifiable with BR reflector. 10. Access to nPod necessary for servicing. 11. Must specify desired optical distribution from available options in "Beam" column. i.e. OPTC2 15D or OPTC2 3515D. Includes addtional capture rings. DIMENSIONAL DATA NOTES 1500 LUMEN OR AMBIENT OPTION INSTALL-FROM-BELOW CONSTRUCTION 500, 750, AND 1000 LUMEN INSTALL-FROM-BELOW CONSTRUCTION A AA B 7 1/4 [18.4] MIN PLENUM HEIGHT ALLOW 12" OF BRANCH CIRCUIT ON THE ROOM SIDE CEILING THICKNESS 3/8 [1.0] TO 1 1/4 [3.2] 1000L & BELOW 2" [5.1] DIMS 1500L A 9" [22.9] 11 5/8" [29.6]B 18" [45.7] APERTURE: 2-1/4 (5.7) CEILING OPENING: 2-5/8 (6.7) OVERLAP TRIM: 3 (7.6) 3 13/16 [9.6] 2 7/16 [6.3] 6 3/8 [16.2] 2 7/16 [6.2] 2 7/16 [6.2] 5 3/16 [13.2] APERTURE: 2-1/4 (5.7) CEILING OPENING: 2-5/8 (6.7) OVERLAP TRIM: 3 (7.6) 2 7/16 [6.2] 6 3/8 [16.2] 2 1/2 [6.3] 3 13/16 [9.6] 6 3/16 [15.8] 2 7/16 [6.2] RECESSED APPLICATION — MINIMUM CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS All dimensions are inches (centimeters) unless otherwise noted. 2" INCITO Downlight Solid-State Lighting DIMENSIONAL DATA Type RA Cut sheet 2 of 5 Page: 38 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette GOTHAM ARCHITECTURAL DOWNLIGHTING | 1400 Lester Road Conyers GA 30012 | P 800.315.4982 | gothamlighting.com © 2012-2018 Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Rev. 05/17/18. Specifications subject to change without notice.PAGE 3 OF 5 ICO-2-OPEN 2" INCITO Downlight Solid-State Lighting 1500 LUMEN OR HIGH AMBIENT OPTION STRUCTURAL REINFORCEMENT PAN 500, 750, AND 1000 LUMEN STRUCTURAL REINFORCEMENT PAN APERTURE: 2-1/4 (5.7) CEILING OPENING: 2-5/8 (6.7) OVERLAP TRIM: 3 (7.6) 13 9/16 [34.5] 17 1/16 [43.3] 5 [12.7] 8 5/8 [21.9] 4 13/16 [12.2] 5 3/16 [13.2] APERTURE: 2-1/4 (5.7) CEILING OPENING: 2-5/8 (6.7) OVERLAP TRIM: 3 (7.6) 5 [12.7] 8 5/8 [21.9] 13 9/16 [34.5] 17 1/16 [43.3] 6 3/16 [15.8] 5 13/16 [14.8] All dimensions are inches (centimeters) unless otherwise noted. IC / AIRTIGHT HOUSING CONSTRUCTION 13 7/8 [35.2] 8 3/4 [22.3] 5 5/16 [13.4] 17 1/16 [43.3] 7 5/16 [18.5] 7 11/16 [19.5] APERTURE: 2-1/4 (5.7) CEILING OPENING: 2-5/8 (6.7) OVERLAP TRIM: 3 (7.6) DIMENSIONAL DATA Type RA Cut sheet 3 of 5 Page: 39 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette GOTHAM ARCHITECTURAL DOWNLIGHTING | 1400 Lester Road Conyers GA 30012 | P 800.315.4982 | gothamlighting.com © 2012-2018 Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Rev. 05/17/18. Specifications subject to change without notice. PAGE 4 OF 5 ICO-2-OPEN 2" INCITO Downlight Solid-State Lighting PHOTOMETRY CRI CCT Multiplier 80 2700K 0.902 3000K 0.951 3500K 1 4000K 1.073 90 2700K 0.78 3000K 0.829 3500K 0.85 4000K 0.878 CONSULT GOTHAMLIGHTING.COM FOR PHOTOMETRY. ELECTRICAL WATTAGE CONSUMPTION MATRIX LUMENS WATTAGE 500 7 750 10 1000 13 1500 22 CHICAGO PLENUM CONSTRUCTION DIMENSIONAL DATA 71 8" [181.0] 711 16 " [194.8] 1'-4 9 16 " [420.2] 1'-0 3 4" [324.3] 1'-5 3 4" [451.3] ICO 2" ADJ CP ICO 2" ADJ RD ICO 2" ADJ SQ CONTROLS Type RA Cut sheet 4 of 5 Page: 40 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette GOTHAM ARCHITECTURAL DOWNLIGHTING | 1400 Lester Road Conyers GA 30012 | P 800.315.4982 | gothamlighting.com © 2012-2018 Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Rev. 05/17/18. Specifications subject to change without notice.PAGE 5 OF 5 ICO-2-OPEN 2" INCITO Downlight Solid-State Lighting CONTROLS nLight® Control Accessories: Order as separate catalog number. Visit www.sensorswitch.com/nLight for complete listing of nLight controls. WallPod stations Model number Occupancy sensors Model number On/Off nPODM [color] Small motion 360°, ceiling (PIR / dual tech) nCM 9 / nCM PDT 9 On/Off & Raise/Lower nPODM DX [color] Large motion 360°, ceiling (PIR / dual tech) nCM 10 / nCM PDT 10 Graphic Touchscreen nPOD GFX [color] Wide view (PIR / dual tech) nWV 16 / nWV PDT 16 Photocell controls Model number Wall Switch w/ Raise/Lower (PIR / dual tech) nWSX LV DX / nWSX PDT LV DX Dimming nCM ADCX Cat-5 cables (plenum rated) Model number 10', CAT5 10FT CAT5 10FT J1 15', CAT5 15FT CAT5 15FT J1 A A B B A nPP16D nCM ADCX nCM PDT 9 nPP16D nPODM 2P DX B C C A OPTIONAL WIRING KEY BA C CAT-5e Cable Line Power Low Voltage Dimming Wires 100 units; 50 for Chicago Plenum Type RA Cut sheet 5 of 5 Page: 41 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette Type RLA Cut sheet 1 of 5 Page: 42 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette Type RLA Cut sheet 2 of 5 Page: 43 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette Type RLA Cut sheet 3 of 5 Page: 44 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette Type RLA Cut sheet 4 of 5 Page: 45 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette Type RLA Cut sheet 5 of 5 Page: 46 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette 2 0 I 2 I n d u s t r y B e s t LED Warranty 1 10 10 Year 1 101 0 10 10 Year Finelite HP-4 ID Length (Minimum 2', increments accurate to 1/16" (± 1/32"), standard) Uplight Output (S - Standard, B - Boosted Standard, H - High, V - Very High) Downlight Output (S - Standard, B - Boosted Standard, H - High, V - Very High) LED CRI/CCT (830 - 80 CRI min, 3000K 930 - 90 CRI min, 3000K 835 - 80 CRI min, 3500K 935 - 90 CRI min, 3500K 840 - 80 CRI min, 4000K 940 - 90 CRI min, 4000K) Uplight Option (TG - Top Glow (standard), F - Flush, WSO - Widespread Optic, WSOTG - Widespread Optic with Top Glow, ASY-L - Asymmetric Left Optic, ASY-R - Asymmetric Right Optic, ASYTG-L - Asymmetric Left Optic with Top Glow, ASYTG-R - Asymmetric Right Optic with Top Glow) Downlight Option (F - Flush (standard), BG - Bottom Glow) Voltage (120V, 277V, 347V) Mounting (FA - Fully Adjustable) Circuiting (SC - Single Circuit, DC - Dual Circuit)1 Ceiling Type (C1 - 1" T-Bar, C2 - 9/16" T-Bar, C3 - s crew slot, C4 - hard ceiling) Integrated Sensor (OBO - Occupancy Sensor, OBD - Daylight) High Performance 4" Aperture (HP-4) - Indirect/DirectFINELITE Date Project Type Comments DESCRIPTION High Performance 4" aperture Indirect/Direct (HP-4 ID) is a patented, linear LED luminaire with Flush, Top Glow™ and Bottom Glow™ options for uplight and downlight. The micro shape delivers excellent performance using an advanced optical design and mid-power LEDs to achieve 90% of initial light output at 100,000+ hours. ORDERING GUIDE: Sample Number: HP-4 ID - 32' - S - H - 835 - TG - F - 120V - FA - SC - C1 - OBO © 2018 FINELITE, INC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. Form CTK0073 V7. 02/18 HP-4 ID Finelite, Inc. • 30500 Whipple Road • Union City, CA 94587-1530 • (510) 441-1100 • Fax: (510) 441-1510 • www.finelite.com Due to continuing product improvements, Finelite reserves the right to change specifications without notice. Please visit www.finelite.com for most current data. Protected by one or more US Patents: 8915613; D702,391; D702,390; D700,732 BUY AMERICAN ACT OF 2009 COMPLIANT Bottom Glow Diffuser (shown) Page 1 1 Contact factory for switching options Refer to spec page for details 4" 4-3/4" 3/16" 3/16" 4" 4-3/4" DIMENSIONS & DIFFUSER A glare-free experience is attained using a precise diffuser to eliminate pixilation. Flush Downlight Diffuser (standard) Top Glow Diffuser (standard) Bottom Glow Diffuser 1166 1554 777 389 1413 1884 942 471 4" 4-3/4" 4" 4-3/4" 3/16"Edge Diffuser Widespread Optic with Top Glow Widespread Optic 4" 4-3/4" 4" 4-3/4" 3/16"Edge Diffuser Asymmetric Optic with Top Glow (ASYTG-L Shown) Asymmetric Optic (ASY-L Shown) Flush Uplight Diffuser Type RLC Cut sheet 1 of 6 Page: 47 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette FINELITE Finelite, Inc. • 30500 Whipple Road • Union City, CA 94587-1530 • (510) 441-1100 • Fax: (510) 441-1510 • www.finelite.com Due to continuing product improvements, Finelite reserves the right to change specifications without notice. Please visit www.finelite.com for most current data. High Performance 4" Aperture (HP-4) - Indirect/Direct BUY AMERICAN ACT OF 2009 COMPLIANT Protected by one or more US Patents: 8915613; D702,391; D702,390; D700,732 Page 2 © 2018 FINELITE, INC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. Form CTK0073 V7. 02/18 ASYMMETRIC Use this tool to understand how to specify Asymmetric for your project. The diagrams below show a linear run from power feed to ender. Specifiy, ASY-L distributes light to the left or ASY-R distributed light to the right. Starter Ender ID #1 ID #2 Asymmetric Left Optic (ASY-L) Starter Ender ID #1 ID #2 Asymmetric Right Optic (ASY-R) Type RLC Cut sheet 2 of 6 Page: 48 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette FINELITE Finelite, Inc. • 30500 Whipple Road • Union City, CA 94587-1530 • (510) 441-1100 • Fax: (510) 441-1510 • www.finelite.com Due to continuing product improvements, Finelite reserves the right to change specifications without notice. Please visit www.finelite.com for most current data. High Performance 4" Aperture (HP-4) - Indirect/Direct BUY AMERICAN ACT OF 2009 COMPLIANT Protected by one or more US Patents: 8915613; D702,391; D702,390; D700,732 SAMPLE LUMEN ADJUSTMENT CALCULATION Total Light Output, 3500K, 80 CRI (Lumens) - 4' Luminaire S* B* H* V** S* 3228 [53% I 47%] 3668 [59% I 41%] 4768 [68% I 32%] 5697 [73% I 27%] B* 3618 [47% I 53%] 4058 [53% I 47%] 5158 [63% I 37%] 6087 [69% I 31%] H* 4594 [37% I 63%] 5034 [43% I 57%] 6134 [53% I 47%] 7062 [59% I 41%] V* 5417 [32% I 68%] 5857 [37% I 63%] 6957 [47% I 53%] 7886 [53% I 47%] Light Output, 3500K, 80 CRI (Lumens Per Foot) S* B* H* V** S* 807 917 1192 1424 B* 905 1015 1290 1522 H* 1148 1258 1533 1766 V* 1354 1464 1739 1972 Power, 3500K, 80 CRI (Watts Per Foot) S* B* H* V** S* 7.3 8.2 10.7 12.9 B* 8.2 9.2 11.7 13.9 H* 10.7 11.7 14.2 16.4 V* 12.9 13.9 16.4 18.5 Efficacy, 3500K, 80 CRI (Lumens Per Watt) S* B* H* V** S* 111 111 111 111 B* 110 110 110 110 H* 107 107 108 108 V* 105 106 106 106 Apply a lumen adjustment factor to calculate lumens for the desired CCT and CRI. High Output (H) / Standard Output (S), 4000K, 90 CRI Lumen Adjustment Factor = 0.789 Total Light Output = 4768 lm x 0.789 = 3762 lm Total Light Output per Foot = 1192 lm/ft x 0.789 = 940 lm/ft watts/foot = 10.7 W/ft Efficacy = = 88 lm/W 940 lm ft Lumen Adjustment Factors - 80 CRI 3000K 0.985 3500K 1.000 4000K 1.032 Lumen Adjustment Factors - 90 CRI 3000K 0.746 3500K 0.760 4000K 0.789 10.7W ft Indirect Direct PHOTOMETRY CANDELA DISTRIBUTION 0.0 22.5 45 67.5 90 Flux 0 1443 1443 1443 1443 1443 5 1433 1434 1434 1433 1434 136 15 1368 1360 1365 1363 1356 384 25 1239 1225 1228 1224 1216 564 35 1062 1050 1049 1040 1034 654 45 859 850 847 838 832 652 55 647 640 637 628 624 568 65 435 430 429 424 422 424 75 233 234 233 234 232 248 85 65 67 68 69 70 76 90 0 0 0 0 0 95 71 72 76 81 82 86 105 257 261 266 270 269 281 115 485 483 485 490 486 482 125 723 726 726 720 717 646 135 963 958 961 958 951 739 145 1189 1177 1185 1179 1172 738 155 1377 1367 1374 1368 1363 631 165 1517 1510 1514 1511 1510 426 175 1590 1590 1590 1589 1590 151 180 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 Very High Output / Very High Output - 4' Luminaire Distribution: 53% Up (V) / 47% Down (V) Efficacy: 106 lumens per watt Uplight: 4180 lumens (1045 lumens/foot) Downlight: 3706 lumens (927 lumens/foot) Total luminaire output: 7886 lumens (1972 lumens/foot) 74.1 watts (18.5 watts/foot) CRI: 80 CCT: 3500K ITL LM79 Report 85125 1200 1600 800 400 S - Standard Output, B - Boosted Standard Output, H - High Output, V - Very High Output * Family Correlation based on 4' luminaire 3500K Very High Output (V) test - 120V ** Correlation based on ITL report: 85125 Page 3 © 2018 FINELITE, INC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. Form CTK0073 V7. 02/18 Type RLC Cut sheet 3 of 6 Page: 49 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette FINELITE Finelite, Inc. • 30500 Whipple Road • Union City, CA 94587-1530 • (510) 441-1100 • Fax: (510) 441-1510 • www.finelite.com Due to continuing product improvements, Finelite reserves the right to change specifications without notice. Please visit www.finelite.com for most current data. High Performance 4" Aperture (HP-4) - Indirect/Direct BUY AMERICAN ACT OF 2009 COMPLIANT Protected by one or more US Patents: 8915613; D702,391; D702,390; D700,732 SAMPLE LUMEN ADJUSTMENT CALCULATION Total Light Output, 3500K, 80 CRI (Lumens) - 4' Luminaire S* B* H* V** S* 3266 [54% I 46%] 3719 [60% I 40%] 4851 [69% I 31%] 5807 [74% I 26%] B* 3653 [48% I 52%] 4106 [54% I 46%] 5238 [64% I 36%] 6194 [70% I 30%] H* 4620 [38% I 62%] 5073 [44% I 56%] 6205 [54% I 46%] 7161 [60% I 40%] V* 5437 [32% I 68%] 5890 [38% I 62%] 7022 [48% I 52%] 7978 [54% I 46%] Light Output, 3500K, 80 CRI (Lumens Per Foot) S* B* H* V** S* 816 930 1213 1452 B* 913 1026 1309 1548 H* 1155 1268 1551 1790 V* 1359 1472 1756 1995 Power, 3500K, 80 CRI (Watts Per Foot) S* B* H* V** S* 7.2 8.1 10.6 12.7 B* 8.1 9.1 11.6 13.7 H* 10.6 11.6 14.1 16.2 V* 12.7 13.7 16.2 18.3 Efficacy, 3500K, 80 CRI (Lumens Per Watt) S* B* H* V** S* 114 114 114 114 B* 112 113 113 113 H* 109 109 110 111 V* 107 107 108 109 Apply a lumen adjustment factor to calculate lumens for the desired CCT and CRI. High Output (H) / Standard Output (S), 4000K, 90 CRI Lumen Adjustment Factor = 0.789 Total Light Output = 4851 lm x 0.789 = 3827 lm Total Light Output per Foot = 1213 lm/ft x 0.789 = 957 lm/ft watts/foot = 10.6 W/ft Efficacy = = 90 lm/W 957 lm ft Lumen Adjustment Factors - 80 CRI 3000K 0.985 3500K 1.000 4000K 1.032 Lumen Adjustment Factors - 90 CRI 3000K 0.746 3500K 0.760 4000K 0.789 10.6W ft Indirect Direct PHOTOMETRY - WIDESPREAD OPTIC (WSO) CANDELA DISTRIBUTION 0.0 22.5 45 67.5 90 Flux 0 1378 1378 1378 1378 1378 5 1370 1370 1369 1370 1370 130 15 1314 1304 1309 1310 1305 369 25 1197 1184 1190 1187 1184 548 35 1038 1027 1030 1025 1020 643 45 851 841 843 837 833 648 55 652 643 642 636 635 573 65 446 437 438 435 433 433 75 245 240 242 241 240 256 85 70 68 67 67 69 77 90 0 0 0 0 0 95 45 80 82 64 64 97 105 211 271 614 589 472 485 115 385 434 783 1212 1323 804 125 503 565 885 1386 1514 852 135 588 656 915 1294 1462 752 145 668 723 912 1137 1234 585 155 737 771 882 992 1037 409 165 790 802 845 884 899 240 175 816 817 821 825 828 79 180 819 819 819 819 819 Very High Output / Very High Output - 4' Luminaire Distribution: 54% Up (V) / 46% Down (V) Efficacy: 109 lumens per watt Uplight: 4302 lumens (1076 lumens/foot) Downlight: 3676 lumens (919 lumens/foot) Total luminaire output: 7978 lumens (1995 lumens/foot) 73.3 watts (18.3 watts/foot) CRI: 80 CCT: 3500K ITL LM79 Report 89033 S - Standard Output, B - Boosted Standard Output, H - High Output, V - Very High Output * Family Correlation based on 4' luminaire 3500K Very High Output (V) test - 120V ** Correlation based on ITL report: 89033 Page 4 1166 1554 777 389 WIDESPREAD OPTIC © 2018 FINELITE, INC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. Form CTK0073 V7. 02/18 Type RLC Cut sheet 4 of 6 Page: 50 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette FINELITE Finelite, Inc. • 30500 Whipple Road • Union City, CA 94587-1530 • (510) 441-1100 • Fax: (510) 441-1510 • www.finelite.com Due to continuing product improvements, Finelite reserves the right to change specifications without notice. Please visit www.finelite.com for most current data. High Performance 4" Aperture (HP-4) - Indirect/Direct BUY AMERICAN ACT OF 2009 COMPLIANT Protected by one or more US Patents: 8915613; D702,391; D702,390; D700,732 Page 5 © 2018 FINELITE, INC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. Form CTK0073 V7. 02/18 PHOTOMETRY - ASYMMETRIC OPTIC (ASY) SAMPLE LUMEN ADJUSTMENT CALCULATION CANDELA DISTRIBUTION 0.0 45.0 90.0 135.0 180.0 Flux 0 1434 1434 1434 1434 1434 5 1427 1427 1426 1425 1426 135 15 1361 1363 1363 1360 1358 383 25 1230 1235 1235 1234 1227 567 35 1054 1063 1063 1060 1050 662 45 860 866 867 864 856 665 55 648 654 657 654 647 584 65 439 444 444 442 437 438 75 245 244 243 240 238 255 85 68 67 67 66 66 75 90 0 0 0 0 0 95 142 146 57 141 175 147 105 582 647 207 294 355 431 115 1335 1134 369 414 493 692 125 1861 1288 545 504 620 797 135 1803 1318 724 574 667 745 145 1657 1367 909 644 668 642 155 1581 1432 1084 783 706 513 165 1537 1446 1220 1009 910 345 175 1401 1366 1293 1225 1196 123 180 1302 1302 1302 1302 1302 HP-4-ID-V-V-835-ASY-R Very High Output / Very High Output - 4' Luminaire Distribution: 54% Up (V) / 46% Down (V) Efficacy: 111 lumens per watt Uplight: 4436 lumens (1109 lumens/foot) Downlight: 3766 lumens (942 lumens/foot) Total Luminaire Output: 8202 lumens (2051 lumens/foot) 73.8 watts (18.5 watts/foot) CRI: 80 CCT: 3500K ITL LM79 Report 89988 Total Light Output, 3500K, 80 CRI (Lumens) - 4' Luminaire S* B* H* V** S* 3358 [54% I 46%] 3824 [60% I 40%] 4992 [69% I 31%] 5978 [74% I 26%] B* 3754 [48% I 52%] 4221 [54% I 46%] 5388 [64% I 36%] 6374 [70% I 30%] H* 4745 [38% I 62%] 5212 [44% I 56%] 6379 [54% I 46%] 7365 [60% I 40%] V* 5582 [33% I 67%] 6049 [38% I 62%] 7216 [48% I 52%] 8202 [54% I 46%] Light Output, 3500K, 80 CRI (Lumens Per Foot) S* B* H* V** S* 839 956 1248 1494 B* 938 1055 1347 1594 H* 1186 1303 1595 1841 V* 1395 1512 1804 2051 Power, 3500K, 80 CRI (Watts Per Foot) S* B* H* V** S* 7.2 8.2 10.7 12.8 B* 8.2 9.2 11.7 13.8 H* 10.7 11.7 14.2 16.3 V* 12.8 13.8 16.3 18.5 Efficacy, 3500K, 80 CRI (Lumens Per Watt) S* B* H* V** S* 116 117 117 116 B* 114 115 115 115 H* 111 112 113 113 V* 109 109 111 111 Apply a lumen adjustment factor to calculate lumens for the desired CCT and CRI. High Output (H) / Standard Output (S), 3500K, 80CRI Lumen Adjustment Factor = 0.789 Total Light Output = 4992 lm x 0.789 = 3939 lm Total Light Output per Foot = 1248 lm/ft x 0.789 = 985 lm/ft watts/foot = 10.7 W/ft Efficacy = = 92 lm/W 985 lm ft Lumen Adjustment Factors - 80 CRI 3000K 0.985 3500K 1.000 4000K 1.032 Lumen Adjustment Factors - 90 CRI 3000K 0.746 3500K 0.760 4000K 0.789 S - Standard Output, B - Boosted Standard Output, H - High Output, V - Very High Output * Family Correlation based on 4' luminaire 3500K Very High Output (V) test - 120V. ** Correlation based on ITL report: 89988 10.7 W ft Indirect Direct 1413 1884 942 471 ASYMMETRIC OPTIC Type RLC Cut sheet 5 of 6 Page: 51 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette FINELITE Finelite, Inc. • 30500 Whipple Road • Union City, CA 94587-1530 • (510) 441-1100 • Fax: (510) 441-1510 • www.finelite.com Due to continuing product improvements, Finelite reserves the right to change specifications without notice. Please visit www.finelite.com for most current data. High Performance 4" Aperture (HP-4) - Indirect/Direct CONSTRUCTION: Precision-cut 6061-T6 extruded aluminum body. Internal joiner system, plug-together wiring, standard. ENDCAPS: Flat diecast aluminum endcaps add 1/4" to each end of luminaire. MITERED CORNERS: Illuminated 90° corners in a single plane, with Top Glow™or Flush uplight diffuser, and/or Flush downlight diffuser, standard. Custom angles are available (90° minimum on inside corners), contact factory. REFLECTORS: Die-formed 20-gauge cold-rolled steel reflectors finished in 96LG High Reflectance white power coat paint. UPLIGHT OPTION: Patented Top Glow frost white diffuser standard. 12 ft. maximum diffuser length. 73% transmissive, 99% diffusion. Internal secondary diffusers at corners ensure visually seamless, uniform, continuous illumination. Optional: Flush frost white snap-in diffuser, 73% transmissive, 99% diffusion; Widespread Optic (WSO) and Widespread Optic with Top Glow (WSOTG); WSO enables increased luminaire spacing with improved ceiling uniformity. Asymmetric optic directs light in a specific direction. ASY-L distributes light to the left, ASY-Rdistributed light to the right of the luminaire. See page 2. DOWNLIGHT OPTION: 12' maximum diffuser length. Flush frost white snap-in diffuser standard, 73% transmissive, 99% diffusion. Internal secondary diffusers at corners ensure visually seamless, uniform, continuous illumination. Bottom Glow™ frost white snap-in diffuser option, 73% transmissive, 99% diffusion. LIGHT OUTPUT: Four lumen packages available; Standard (S), Boosted Standard (B), High (H), and Very High (V). A separate chart summarizes lumen distribution and wattage. Light engines are replaceable. LUMEN MAINTENANCE: 90% of initial light output (L90) at 100,000+ hours; 70% of initial light output (L70) at 200,000+ hours. DRIVER: Replaceable 120V/277V and 347V Constant Current Reduction dimming driver standard. Can be wired dimming or non-dimming. 0-10V dimming controls with a range of 10%- 100%. Dimming to 1% available; consult factory. Separate dimming for uplight and downlight available. Driver is fully accessible from below the ceiling. Power Factor: ≥0.9. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): <20%. Expected driver lifetime: 100,000 hours. LUTRON DRIVER OPTIONS: Lut3W-3-wire, LutES EcoSystem, Lut2W-2-wire. ELECTRICAL: Optional emergency to generator/inverter wiring, internal generator transfer switch, nightlight wiring, step-dimming driver, backup battery. Factorychoice low-profile backup battery available. 8' minimum luminaire length for low profile battery pack. Bodine BSL722 battery pack also available; 4' minimum luminaire length. Backup batteries deliver 1300 lumens. Half of a 4' section (downlight only) will be illuminated in emergency mode. INTEGRATED SENSORS: Integrated PIR (Passive Infrared) occupancy or daylight sensors available with Flush and Bottom Glow downlight diffusers. Refer to Occupancy Sensor and Daylight Sensor tech sheets for more info. MOUNTING: 50" Fully Adjustable (FA) plated steel aircraft cable with safety stop hardware standard. Contact factory for additional lengths up to 150". FINISHES: Finelite Signal White powder coat standard. Optional Adders: 185 RAL colors. FEED: Standard with one 18-gauge/5-conductor single-circuit feed controlling uplight and downlight together (power and dimming). Specify dual feeds for independent control of uplight and downlight. 14gauge feed used when luminaire current exceeds 5 amps. LENGTHS: Any length, 2-foot minimum, in increments down to 1/16th-inch (±1/32"). 12-foot maximum section length. LABELS: Luminaire and electrical components are ETL-listed conforming to UL 1598 in the U.S.A. and CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 250.0 in Canada. In accordance with NEC Code 410.73 (G), this luminaire contains an internal driver disconnect. Damp Location. Finelite products use electronic components that are RoHS compliant, and the mechanical components of the luminaire have been verified to not knowingly contain any restricted substances listed per RoHS Directive 2002/95/EC. WEIGHT: 3.4 lb/ft. DLC QUALIFIED: Configurations of this product are listed on the DLC Qualified Products List (QPL). www.designlights.org/search WARRANTY: 10-year performance-based warranty on all standard components. Optional accessories such as emergency battery packs are covered by their individual manufacturer warranties. SPECIFICATIONS Protected by one or more US Patents: 8915613; D702,391; D702,390; D700,732 Occupancy Sensor Daylight Sensor BUY AMERICAN ACT OF 2009 COMPLIANT Page 6 © 2018 FINELITE, INC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. Form CTK0073 V7. 02/18 Type RLC Cut sheet 6 of 6 Page: 52 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette Type RLD Cut sheet 1 of 5 Page: 53 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette Type RLD Cut sheet 2 of 5 Page: 54 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette Type RLD Cut sheet 3 of 5 Page: 55 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette Type RLD Cut sheet 4 of 5 Page: 56 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette Type RLD Cut sheet 5 of 5 Page: 57 of 57 28 Nov 2018Available Light • 212.977.2611 1650 Broadway #405 • New York NY 10019 100% Construction Document Cornell Olin Hall Renovation Phase 1 Payette Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 STRUCTURED CABLING 271000 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 271000 - STRUCTURED CABLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Description: This section includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. A complete and operational plenum rated structured cabling system consisting of Category 6 station cabling, Category 6A AP location cabling, single mode 12 strand backbone cabling, associated termination hardware, racks, and accessories. This structured cabling system is to support voice, data, wireless, security, AV, BMS, and other network connectivity requirements throughout the project. 2. Cabling to write up desks will be terminated at the wall in a faceplate. Patch cords are to be routed from the wall-mounted faceplate to locations through the furniture pathways. 3. Cabling to lab benches will terminate in the overhead service panels and pre-terminated patch cords will be routed through pathways in the lab tasks to horizontal wire mold for final connection. 4. The structured cabling for floor 1 locations will originate in existing IDF rooms and be routed to work area outlets through cable tray and/or j-hooks, as identified. 5. The existing IDF room on the third floor will be demolished during the project. A new IDF room on the second floor will be constructed. The new IDF room will serve the project areas on the second and third floors as well as supporting new cabling to replace existing outlets on the second and third floor that are currently cabled from the existing third floor IDF room. The construction of the IDF room on the second floor and the phasing of the replacement cabling for non-renovation areas of the second and third floor are to be coordinated with CIT, the contractor, and the project team. 6. The cable termination scheme is T568 A. 7. A new single mode fiber-optic backbone cable is required from the new IDF room to the building entrance facility room. 8. Provide materials in quantities sufficient for complete installations as indicated in drawings and in this specification, whether or not all such components are contained in the drawings and specifications. 9. Prior to work, notify Cornell IT, (“CIT”), and reviewed the scope of work. Coordinate with CIT so that they may remove existing access points and coordinate active network electronics as required. Coordinate phasing work and new cabling with CIT to ensure continuity of service and active network equipment configuration and installation. B. Section Includes: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 STRUCTURED CABLING 271000 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Pathways. 2. UTP cable 3. UTP cable hardware. 4. Optical fiber cable 5. Optical fiber cable hardware. 6. Coaxial cable 7. Coaxial cable hardware. 8. Equipment racks, cabinets and accessories. 9. Grounding. 10. Labeling. 11. Accessories. 1.3 STANDARDS A. ANSI/TIA-568-C.0: Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises. B. ANSI/TIA-568-C.1: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard C. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling and Components Standards. D. ANSI/TIA-568-C.3: Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard. E. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-B: Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces. F. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A: Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings G. ANSI/J-STD-607-A: Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications. H. ANSI/TIA-1152, Requirements for Field Test Instruments and Measurements for Balance Twisted-Pair Cabling. I. TIA-492AAAC, Detail Specification for 850 nm Laser Optimized, 50-Micron Cladding Diameter Class Ia Graded-Index Multimode Optical Fibers J. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM) K. Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI) L. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) M. FCC Part 15 and Part 68 N. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA) O. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, (IEEE) P. National Electrical Code (NEC) Q. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) R. Underwrites Lab (UL) S. Governing Building Codes Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 STRUCTURED CABLING 271000 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. As used in all Sections, "provide" means "furnish and install." "Furnish" means "to purchase and deliver to the project site complete with every necessary appurtenance and support," and "Install" means "to unload at the delivery point at the site and perform every operation necessary to establish secure mounting and correct operation at the proper location in the project. B. Insofar as submittals, reviews, and approvals are concerned, the words “Architect” and “Engineer” may be used interchangeably in this division. C. Electronic Copy means copy in a searchable PDF format and excludes scanned material and faxed material. Scanned material and faxed material shall not be submitted. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Complete Submittals: provide a complete submittal, except for the close out submittal requirements. Partial submittals will be returned for completion and resubmission. B. Product Data: 1. Provide a summary spreadsheet showing each item and associated information identified below: a. Specification item paragraph number b. Item name c. Manufacturer description d. Manufacturer part number e. Quantity required for the project f. Accessories and/or related items g. “As specified” yes/no h. If not as specified, provide “or equal” data to completely describe the proposed substitutes i. Page number in submittal package where item product information starts (Provide spreadsheet entries and submittal product information in the same order as the items appear in the specification. For equipment and/or items not individually identified in the specification, include these items at the end.) 2. For each item, provide detailed manufacturer data sheets clearly marked, with colored arrows, to identify the specific item and configuration being submitted. Organize this information in the order identified in item “Product Data” above. Submittals that are not provided with the above information, and in the specified format, will be rejected. 3. Provide color selections for items that require color decisions. Provide physical material submissions of the items in the available colors, three copies or samples of each color selection set of options. 4. Submit documentation regarding the manufacturer’s 20 year or greater extended warranty. The documentation is to include a sample of the warranty that will be provided to the customer when the installation is complete and documentation of the support procedure for warranty issues. Provide an application assurance manual documenting the vendor supported applications and application guidelines. In addition, furnish manufacturer’s documentation stating the contractor is certified to perform warranty work. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 STRUCTURED CABLING 271000 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Shop Drawings: Provide one-line diagrams showing the devices, connections, cabling, routing, and related information. Identify each device, opening, pathway, conduit, tray, and/or system. D. Samples: For workstation outlets, jacks, jack assemblies, and faceplates. For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, provide two samples. Provide a complete color chart of available colors and finishes for each item. E. Contractor Qualifications: 1. Provide reference information including, project name and description, contact name, email and telephone number, and project location for five projects of similar system, size and scope completed within the past two years. 2. Provide a technical resume for the Project Manager and on-site installation Supervisor assigned to this project. Include copies of certifications and evidence of training from manufacturers, industry organizations and field related training. 3. Identify subcontractors to be used on this project. The subcontractor(s) are required to possess the same credentials as documented above. The subcontractor’s documentation must be included in the contractor documentation. The contractor will furnish the manufacturer’s certification statement individually for both the contractor and subcontractor. 4. Provide evidence that the contractor is authorized by the manufacturer to furnish warranty services, components, and systems. F. Closeout Submittals, due upon substantial completion of the project: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide operation, and maintenance manuals for each item/system. 2. As-built drawings, AutoCAD format, and PDF, which show the actual construction conditions and configurations. Make all modifications to these drawings by removing all superseded data and show the completed “As-Built” installation. The “As-Built” must be made available in the form of reproducible prints and an AutoCAD drawing file format for input to other systems. Maintain the as-built drawings throughout the project, and provide two hard copies, and electronic copies of the final conditions as-built drawings. 3. Deliver the completed Record Drawings, identified above, properly titled and dated to the Owner labeled “As-Built” drawings. These drawings are to be completed and delivered two (2) weeks prior to the cutover and become the property of the Owner. 4. Electronic copies of complete Owner and operating manuals and user guide for each system and record drawings. Instructions must include part numbers and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of parts source. After approval, provide electronic copies of the owner’s and operating manuals and one hard copy of each, to the Owner. 5. Test reports, as specified, on CDs using excel or other similar software. If the software used to document test results is proprietary, then include the necessary software and licenses to read and store the test results. 6. Provide the completed documentation for the warranty for all parts, components, labor, testing, and materials against defects, faulty workmanship, and/or failure for one full year following system(s) acceptance. Provide an additional Manufacturer’s 20 year or longer extended warranty for materials, labor and application performance to the system industry specifications in place at the time of this award. The extended warranty is to be issued and backed by the Manufacturer of the structured cabling system. The warranty period is to be a minimum or 20 years from the date of Owner acceptance. G. Submittals Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 STRUCTURED CABLING 271000 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 The following is a summary table of the required submittals. It is provided as a reference and is not a complete list of the required submittals but provides guidance. Additional submittals may be required for the project. Refer to project documents for additional requirements. Submittals that require modification, replacement, additional information, and other changes are in addition to the submittals below and are required as appropriate and/or required. Submittal Product Summary Spreadsheet Product Data Sheets Shop Drawings Device Samples Contractor Qualifications O&M Manuals and Data, (electronic and hard copy) As-built Drawings Cable Test Results Warranty Documentation 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Schedule, arrange, and coordinate with involved parties/trades for shipments, arrivals, loading dock, elevators (as applicable), acceptance, storage, and security f equipment and materials. Assure that these activities do not interfere with other trades or the progress of the project. B. Store and protect materials according to manufacturer’s specifications and recommended practices. . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PATHWAYS A. General Requirements: Comply with ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-B. B. Cable Support: Cable supports shall be sized to allow a fill ratio that meets the standards specified herein and identified to support the Category of cabling being installed, designed to prevent degradation of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable. Where not in conduit, EMT, or tray, provide J-hooks at a maximum of four-foot intervals to support the cables. C. Cable Trays: 1. Manufacturers: Chatsworth, Cooper-B-Line or Middle Atlantic 2. Cable Tray Material: Metal, suitable for indoors, and protected against corrosion by electroplated zinc galvanizing. a. Basket Cable Tray Dimensions: 12 inches wide and 4 inches deep. b. Provide mounts, supports, brackets, anchors, suspension materials, and accessories to ensure a complete and operational system. D. Conduit and boxes: comply with the requirements of other sections, relating to “raceway and boxes for electrical systems.” Comply with these sections. Flexible metal conduit is not acceptable and shall not be used. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 STRUCTURED CABLING 271000 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.2 BACKBOARDS A. Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated 3/4” by 48” by 96”. Backboards are to start at 6” AFF and be vertically oriented. Comply with requirements for plywood backing panels specified in “Rough Carpentry” 2.3 UTP CABLE A. Provide Category 6 cable for work area outlets and Category 6A cable for AP locations. B. Manufacturers of station, patch, and copper backbone cable: CommScope Systimax 1071E and 1091B, Berk Tek Lanmark 1000 and XTP, Panduit GenSPEED 6000 Category 6. C. Provide the following colors: 1. Data, blue. 2. Voice only locations, white. 3. Wireless access point locations, green. D. Patch and Work Area Cords Description: Factory-made, four-pair cables in various colors and lengths; terminated with 8-position 8-contact modular plug at each end; colors to match station cable. Patch cords are to be of the same category and by the same manufacturer as the station cabling. 1. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots. Provide one Patch Cord per cable terminated on patch panel in the lengths identified by the designated representative from CIT. 2. Work Area cords shall have bend-relief-compliant anti-snag boots and color-coded icons. Provide one Work Area Cord per telecommunications outlet connector terminated in the lengths identified by the designated representative from CIT. 3. Meet with the designated representative of the Owner prior to ordering patch and work area cords. Confirm the actual required cord lengths and colors. Do not order cords without designated representative of the Owner approval. Provide the patch cords to the designated representative of the Owner. Provide the labor for patching and labeling the cords in the closet for switch and equipment connections and cord connection and the work area between the outlets and Owner provided devices, or other devices. 4. Provide an initial delivery of 10 patch cords of each length and color. He installed the initial delivery of patch cords in the closet and in the write up tasks and at the lab desks, under the supervision of CIT. Reviewed the cable routing and cable length and adjust the overall patch cable and work area outlet cord length as directed by the representative of CIT. 2.4 UTP CABLE HARDWARE A. Manufacturers: Panduit, no exceptions. B. Connecting Blocks: 110-style IDC. Provide blocks for the number of cables terminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare. Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated. C. Patch Panel, outlets, face plates, adapters are to be by Panduit. No substitutions are allowed. Provide the mini-com executive series single gang electric ivory bezel, angled bezels, and 45 degree caps up/down or left/right as required for shallow box/raceway applications. 1. Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four-pair UTP cable indicated, plus 25 percent spare per system. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 STRUCTURED CABLING 271000 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2. Provide separate patch panels in the IDF for the wireless access point cables. D. Horizontal cable management: provide horizontal cable management as indicated. E. Telecommunications Outlet Connectors: 100-ohm, Modular, color-coded, 8-position 8-contact, twisted-pair connector. 1. Panduit CJ688TG and CJ6X88TG. No substitutions are allowed. 2. Color: Match cable color. 3. Icon: Indicate service provided. F. Workstation Faceplate: Multi-port-connector assemblies mounted in single gang faceplate. 1. Plastic Faceplate: High-impact plastic. 2. For use with snap-in jacks. a. Flush mounting jacks, positioning the cord at a 45-degree angle. 3. Legend: Machine printed, in the field, using adhesive-tape label. 2.5 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE A. Manufacturers: Corning single mode MIC ClearCurve. B. Backbone Cabling Description: 1. As indicated. 2. Provide in strand counts indicated. 3. Provide DX armored fiber cable in a 1” orange plenum rated innerduct. C. Patch Cords Description: Factory-made, dual-fiber cables; Type LC-to-LC connecter. 1. Provide four Patch Cords per telecommunications room, IDF, MDF, or similar room, where fiber will be terminated in the following colors and lengths: a. Length: 10 feet or as directed by the designated representative of the Owner b. Color: to correspond with the fiber type. 2.6 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE HARDWARE A. Manufacturers: to be the same as fiber optic cable. B. Patch Panels: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered, duplex cable connectors, in a rack mount enclosure. Type LC connectors throughout. 2.7 EQUIPMENT RACKS AND CABINETS A. Manufacturers: open racks in MDF or IDFs, by the following, CommScope, Panduit, Middle Atlantic, Hubbell, Leviton, Cooper B-Line, Chatsworth, or equal. B. Racks: 2-post, 19” wide, 7 feet high with 45 rack units. C. Wall Mount Racks: Steel, 19 inches wide, 38 inches high, 25 inches deep with 19 rack units. Swing open to left or right. Rated for 150 pounds. D. Vertical Cable Managers: 6 inch vertical cable managers with front and rear channels, with covers. E. Horizontal Cable Managers: 2 rack unit horizontal cable managers, or as indicated. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 STRUCTURED CABLING 271000 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 F. Power Distribution Units, zero rack unit, vertical configuration, APC or equal by Commscope, or Leviton: 1. APC AP 8832, 120V, for each L5-30R 2. APC AP 8841, 208V, for each L6-30R 3. APC AP 8870, 120/208V, for each L14-30P 2.8 GROUNDING A. Comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" for grounding conductors and connectors. B. Comply with ANSI/J-STD-607-A. C. Provide a telecommunications grounding bus bar in compliance with standards. Locate the bus bar on the plywood wall. All metallic pathways, racks, cabinets, patch panels, fiber housing units, and other associated devices located within the TR must be bonded to the ground bus bar. Provide number six AWG insulated stranded copper cabling as the minimum bonding conductor within the TR. Connect the grounding bus bar to the building telecommunications grounding system with the appropriate sized conductor. Install ES T strips at active equipment racks. 2.9 UPS: provide a Powerware 9125 2000 VA UPS and a 48 EBM extended battery module. Any substitutions must be SNMP capable and approved by CIT network engineering. 2.10 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Comply with ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A for labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WIRING METHODS A. Install cables in pathways and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters and except in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum board partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be used unless otherwise noted. Conceal pathways and cables unless otherwise noted. B. Coordinate telecommunications outlet/connector locations with Architectural drawings and associated electrical outlets. Provide the necessary hardware, accessories, and miscellaneous parts for a complete installation. C. Wall-mounted access point locations are to be at 90 inches above the floor and 9 to 12 inches below the ceiling. Provide two category 6A cables. Terminate the cables at the box with 8 inch tails. Do not provide a faceplate. D. Accessible ceiling mounted access points. Provide a 4” x 2.125” back-box inside the ceiling cavity, within 15 feet of the intended access point location. Terminate the cable at the box normally including faceplate. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF CABLES A. Four pair UTP cabling wiring scheme, 568B. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 STRUCTURED CABLING 271000 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. General Requirements for Cabling: 1. Comply with ANSI/TIA-568-C.1. 2. Comply with NECA 1. 3. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Cable Termination Practices. 4. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated. 5. Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain un-terminated elements unless otherwise noted. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels. 6. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 4 feet. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer. 7. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, install lacing bars and distribution spools. 8. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of enclosure. 9. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable. 10. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to manufacturer recommended temperature before installing. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating. 11. Route cables, in bundles of no more than fifty. Bundle cables using Hook and Loop wire management straps, tie wraps are not acceptable. 12. In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot-long cable service loop. 13. In the ceiling above the work area outlet, install a 5-foot-long cable service loop, secured on a J-hook that is suspended from the building structure, or mounted to sheet rock or a stud above the entry to the raceway to the outlet box. 14. Comply with manufacturer and industry pulling tension limits. C. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields. D. Fiber backbone cabling: divide DX armored fiber-optic cable and install the cable in 1 inch orange Plenum rated inner duct. Provide metal pull boxes where the length of the pathway is over 100 feet, the quantity of 90° bends is more than two, or where there is a reverse band in the cable run. 3.3 FIRESTOPPING A. Comply with requirements in Division 076. B. Comply with ANSI/TIA-569-B, Annex A, "Firestopping." C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article. D. Provide firestopping as indicated, and ensure compliance with codes, regulations, and requirements of other sections, and the AHJ; 3.4 GROUNDING A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Bonding and Grounding (Earthing)" Chapter. B. Comply with ANSI/J-STD-607-A. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 STRUCTURED CABLING 271000 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.5 IDENTIFICATION A. Label system components, wiring, cabling termination hardware, jacks, faceplates, complying with ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A and CIT labeling standards. Confirm outlet labeling scheme with CIT prior to labeling. 1. Administration Class: 2. 2. Color-code cross-connect fields. Apply colors to voice and data service backboards, connections, covers, and labels. B. Comply with requirements in Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For fire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label. C. Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in communications each equipment room. List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for Project. D. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration-point labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets, hardware, horizontal cables, work areas, grounding buses and pathways, and equipment grounding conductors. Follow convention of ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A or as indicated or directed in writing by the designated representative of the Owner. Furnish electronic record of all drawings, in software and format selected by Owner. E. Cable Identification: 1. Label each horizontal and backbone cable within 4 inches of each termination, where it is accessible in a rack, cabinet, junction box or outlet box. 2. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Prior to labeling, coordinate with owner for labeling scheme. Label each connector, faceplate, 110-block or other connecting hardware. F. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color that contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A. 1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester labels that flex as cables are bent. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Visually inspect cable jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding for pin assignments and inspect cabling connections for compliance with standards. 2. Visually confirm correct marking of outlets, cover plates, outlet/connectors, and patch panels. 3. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment, patch cords and work area cords, and labeling of all components. 4. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in standards specified herein. 5. Horizontal UTP Performance Tests: Test for Category 6 and 6A compliance, according to ANSI/TIA-568-C-2, latest version and addenda. 6. Backbone UTP Performance Tests: Test each pair for continuity, length and pair polarity. 7. Optical Fiber Cable Performance Tests: Test at both wavelengths from each end. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 STRUCTURED CABLING 271000 - 11 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 8. Provide the test results on a Windows formatted CD in, delimited file format. 9. Horizontal cabling: test the permanent link with a level IIIE tester for full category six compliance. Test category 6A cables for category 6A compliance. 10. The maximum acceptable dB loss for a horizontal segment is to dB. 11. Field testing instruments for single mode fiber-optic cabling shall meet the requirements of ANSI/TIA 568 latest revision. The light source shall meet the launch requirements of ANSI/TIA 560 8B latest revision. B. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean equipment any work areas prior to presentation for acceptance by client. This work will include wiping of work areas, removal of streaks, dust, stains, etc., and assurances that systems and components as represented are new and undamaged. 3.8 TRAINING AND DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel in cable-plant management operations, including changing signal pathways for different workstations, rerouting signals in failed cables, and keeping records of cabling assignments and revisions when extending wiring to establish new workstation outlets. B. Provide twelve hours of training and familiarization with the system. Schedule the training at the convenience of the Owner, in sessions of not more than four hours, unless previously agreed to with the designated representative of the Owner. 3.9 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE A. Obtain written acceptance from the Owner or the Owner’s representative at the completion of system installation, testing, documentation and training. Failure of the contractor to obtain sign off will result in the contractor remaining responsible for extending, at no charge to the owner, conditions of the warranty and guarantees until such time that sign off had occurred. Time included in the above condition will be presented to the owner in addition to the standard warranties. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\271000_TECHNOLOGY INFRASTRUCTURE AND SYSTEMS.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEMS 281000 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 281000 - ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 RELATED SECTION A. Division 8 Door Hardware: Electrified door lock types shown on the security drawings are not to be used for specifying or procuring door locks, or any other door or door frame hardware. The electrified door locks are to be specified by Division 8 Door Hardware. The door lock types shown on the security drawings are shown only for the purpose of coordinating field conditions. Locations, 1.3 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide Schlage PIM400-1501 units at locations indicated. Connect to Category 6 cable and coordinate installation and configuration with Cornell IT, (“CIT”), and Cornell Police Department. 1.4 OBTAINING INFORMATION A. Obtain the manufacturer’s recommended installation practices, guidelines, and requirements. B. Obtain Cornell security standards and practices. 1.5 COORDINATION WITH PROJECT TEAM A. Provide a Project Manager who will act as a single point of contact for activities regarding this project. The Project Manager must be a management employee and will not be involved in performing installation work. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Complete Submittals: provide one complete submittal package, except for close out submittal information. Partial submittals will not be accepted and will be returned for completion and resubmission. B. Product Data: 1. Provide a summary spreadsheet showing each item and associated information identified below: a. Item name b. Manufacturer description c. Manufacturer part number d. Quantity required for the project e. Accessories and/or related items Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEMS 281000 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 f. “As specified” yes/no g. If not as specified, provide “or equal” data h. Page number in submittal package where item product information starts 2. For each item, provide manufacturer data sheets clearly marked to identify the specific item and configuration being submitted. Organize this information in the order identified in item 1.6.A.1 above. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Provide one-line diagrams showing the devices, connections, cabling, and related information. Identify each device, opening, and system. D. Contractor Qualifications: 1. The Security Contractor shall be manufacturer certified and authorized, and manufacturer trained to distribute and install the submitted system equipment and components from the relevant manufacturer(s). Submit evidence of the following: a. Manufacturer’s authorization to supply product from the submitted system manufacturer with the bid response; b. Manufacturer’s certification of the Security Contractor’s technicians assigned to this project; c. Proper state licensing for each Security Technician assigned to this job with the bid response; d. Manufacturer’s authorization to officially represent the manufacturer product warranty for the entire warranty period; e. Three (3) references of work similar in type to that proposed herein. The references must be recent and accompanied by name of account, address, and contact name and telephone number. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide operation, and maintenance manuals for each item/system. B. As-built drawings: 1. Provide AutoCAD and PDF format, which show the actual construction conditions and configurations. Make modifications to these drawings by removing all superseded data and show the completed “As-Built” installation; 2. The “As-Built” drawings must be made available in the form of reproducible prints and an AutoCAD drawing file format for input to other systems. Maintain the as-built drawings throughout the project, and provide two hard copies, and electronic copies of the final conditions as-built drawings; 3. Deliver the completed Record Drawings, identified above, properly titled and dated to the Owner labeled “As-Built” drawings. These drawings shall be completed and delivered two (2) weeks prior to the cutover and become the property of the Owner. C. Provide software including configuration information, worksheets, files, codes, and passwords. 1.8 FEES AND PERMITS A. Obtain the necessary permits and pay applicable fees. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEMS 281000 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Verify actual conditions. Review the specifications and drawings, and advise in writing of any conditions, which may adversely affect the work, prior to the bid date. If no exceptions are presented, the Security Contractor shall become responsible for any changes to the work required as a consequence of such preexisting conditions B. Material Provided: 1. The Security Contractor shall furnish and install new manufacturer-certifi ed components 1.10 WARRANTY A. Provide a one (1) year warranty of the installed system against defects in material and workmanship. The warranty shall include response to the site to initiate a repair within 24 hours of a reported problem. The warranty offered shall be certified and honored by the system manufacturer(s). Labor and materials shall be provided at no expense to the Owner during normal working hours. The warranty period shall begin on the date of system acceptance by the Owner and/or Engineer. The warranty period will start upon the acceptance of the operational system(s) by the Owner, and the completion of training. B. Provide an optional service contract offering continuing factory authorized service for two (2) years after the initial warranty period. C. Maintain a supply of necessary spare parts in the proper proportion as recommended by the manufacturer to maintain and service the equipment being installed during the warranty period. 1.11 SUBMITTAL SUMMARY A. The following is a summary table of the required submittals. It is provided as a reference and is not a complete list of the required submittals, but provides guidance. Additional submittals may be required for the project. Refer to project documents for additional requirements. Submittals that require modification, replacement, additional information, and other changes are in addition to the submittals below and are required as appropriate and/or required. Submittal Product Summary Spreadsheet Product Data Sheets Shop Drawings Contractor Qualifications O&M Manuals As-built Drawings Software, licensing, Configuration Files etc. Test Results Warranty Optional service contract proposal PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. The Security Contractor shall furnish work referred to in this specification in compliance with National, State and Local codes. Material shall be furnished and installed in strict compliance with requirements of these codes. Labor, materials, and systems supplied under this contract will be in full compliance with the NFPA 70 National Electrical Code, latest version. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEMS 281000 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.2 CABLE, HARDWARE, COMPONENTS, AND SYSTEMS A. Provide PIMs as indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Meet with project manager, and other designated parties for a coordination meeting prior to commencement of work. B. Delivery, storage, and handling: 1. Maintain and protect materials in compliance with manufacturer’s requirements and/or recommendations. 2. Open each container; verify contents against packing list; and file copy of packing list, complete with container identification, for inclusion in operation and maintenance data. 3. Mark packing list with the same designations assigned to materials and equipment for recording in the system labeling schedules that are generated by software specified in "Cable and Asset Management Software" Article. 4. Save original manufacturer's containers and packing materials and deliver as directed under provisions covering extra materials. C. Identification and documentation: 1. Equipment cables and termination points will be clearly and permanently marked in accordance with standard audio/visual nomenclature and as presented in the working drawings. 2. Labels are to be typed or printed on thermal transfer labeling system, dot matrix or laser printer using adhesive labels or other permanent marking strips. Hand printed labels are unacceptable. D. Examine drawings, details, and other sections of the specifications for requirements, which affect work under this section. E. Employ standard installation trade practices, including the following: 1. Devices shall be securely mounted; 2. There shall not be any exposed electrical connections on any devices or sensors; 3. Exposed cabling is not acceptable; 4. Cabling placed on this project shall be UL rated CMP, CL3P, or CL2P. Furnish and install systems including cable and hardware that complies with the requirements as outlined in the National Electric Code (NEC) Articles 725, 760, 770, and 800 and the appropriate local codes. All copper cabling shall bear CMP UL designation; 5. Wires and cables shall be clearly, logically and permanently identified with heat-shrink wire markers with machine-printed characters; F. Provide the following miscellaneous items necessary to make a complete, functional, and satisfactory installation, including but not limited to hookup wire, patch cables, switches, connectors, terminals, adapters, plugs, jacks, mounting brackets, hardware fasteners, bezels, escutcheons, strain relief, bushings, adhesives, paints, gaskets, sealants, electrical tapes, rosincore soldered connections, cable ties, shrinkable insulation, corrugated flexible tubing, labeling, and secondary electrochemical batteries. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEMS 281000 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 G. Schedule, arrange, and coordinate with involved parties/trades for shipment (as applicable), arrivals, loading dock, elevators, acceptance, storage, and security of equipment and materials. Assure that these activities do not interfere with other trades or the progress of this project. H. Protect materials according to manufacturer’s specifications. I. Provide hardware of one manufacturer, where practical, for each defined system and/or classification of material. J. Furnish and install new and unused materials and equipment including those parts/components that might be replaced during the warranty period. K. Provide plenum rated cables in strict compliance with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, Article 725 and 800 requirements for individual conductor and overall jacket insulation material type(s). L. Provide the following miscellaneous items necessary to make a complete, functional, and satisfactory installation, including but not limited to patch cables, wire, connectors, terminals, adaptors, plugs, jacks, splitters, taps, mounting brackets, transformers, hardware fasteners, bezels, strain relief, bushings, adhesives, paints, gaskets, sealants, electrical tapes, fish paper and other insulation, rosin-core soldered connections, cable ties, shrinkable insulation, corrugated flexible tubing, engraved instructional plates and labeling. M. Training: 1. Provide four hours of demonstration and orientation by a senior technician, or other qualified approved personnel, for each of the installed systems. Coordinate with the designated representative of the owner, and complete training the week prior to occupancy, or as scheduled with the owner. a. Demonstrate and explain: 1) The physical configuration and interrelationship of the components of each system. 2) Labeling and interconnection techniques used in each installation. 3) Applications or unique connections or interfaces currently in use on this site. 4) A review of warranty documents for each system. N. Provide technician coverage during installation of door locks, related systems and hardware. Assist in required installation, testing and certification. Coverage requirements will be determined and scheduled by the owner, or owner’s representative, in conjunction with provider of related hardware. 3.2 CODE COMPLIANCE A. No penetrations to fire-rated structures are allowed without prior approval of the General Contractor. B. Fire stopping shall be done in an approved method where necessary to ensure the integrity of fire-rated walls, ceilings, and floor penetrations effected by this installation. C. Cores and penetrations must be fire stopped in an approved method. Fire stop material must be qualified UL & ASTM-rated, meeting adequate FT requirements. D. Seal openings between floors, through rated fire and smoke walls, existing or created by the Security Contractor for cable pass. Sealing material and application of this material shall be accomplished in such a manner that is complies with the manufacturer specification, National, State and Local codes. E. Furnish the necessary material and labor to create the necessary cores and other openings that are required for cable pathways. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEMS 281000 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 F. Furnish the necessary material and labor to seal pathways created and/or utilized for the cable installation. G. The codes referred to in this specification are National, State and Local Electric Codes latest edition; work shall be furnished and installed in strict compliance with the requirements of these codes. H. In the case of conflict between the Contract Documents and the Governing Code Ordinance, the more stringent standard shall apply. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Test the functional parameters of stand-alone devices and integrated interdependent equipment features. Test the systems and control systems. Provide written notice to the Engineer of intent to test systems at least one week prior to test. 2. Conduct the operations of each system, sub-system, and component. Confirm that the sequence of operations and normal system functionality are observed. Modify the programming and installation to provide the required and specified operation. C. Devices and circuits will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports for submittal as described in Section 1.8 Closeout Submittals. 3.4 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to supervise and assist with startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to approved procedures that were developed in "Preparation" Article and with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Enroll and prepare badges and access cards for Owner's operators, management, and security personnel. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean all equipment and work areas of this scope. This work will include wiping of work areas, removal of streaks, stains, and assurances that all systems and components as represented are new and undamaged. 3.6 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE A. Sign -off for acceptance of the system shall occur only after submission of final documentation of system including: 1. Test results indicates 100 percent functionality, and; 2. System operation manuals and documentation are transferred to the system owner, and; 3. Training has been accomplished to the owner’s satisfaction END OF SECTION Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEMS 281000 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\281000_ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEMS.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 281500 – ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following: 1. Swinging doors. 2. Sliding Doors 3. Other doors to the extent indicated. B. Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Mechanical door hardware. 2. Electromechanical door hardware. 3. Stand alone electronic access control door hardware. 4. Digital electronic cylinders. 5. Integrated Wiegand access control door hardware. 6. Wireless access control door hardware. 7. IP-enabled integrated access control door hardware. 8. Power transfer devices and wiring harnesses. 9. Monitoring and signaling equipment. 10. Access control cards and credentials. 11. Stand alone access control application software. 12. Electrified and access control door hardware power supplies, back-ups and surge protection. C. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section "Sustainable Design Requirements" for additional LEED documentation and requirements. 2. Division 08 Section “Door Hardware Schedule”. 3. Division 08 Section “Flush Wood Doors”. 4. Division 08 Section “Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts”. 5. Division 08 Section “Door Hardware”. 6. Division 26 Sections for connections to electrical power system and for low-voltage wiring work. 7. Division 28 Sections "Access Control" for access control devices installed at door openings and provided as part of a security access system. 8. Division 28 Section "Intrusion Detection" for detection devices installed at door openings and provided as part of an intrusion detection system. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 9. Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm" for connections to building fire alarm system. D. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. ICC/IBC - International Building Code. 3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 4. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. 5. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. 6. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. 7. State Building Codes, Local Amendments. E. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards: 1. ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards – A156 Series. 2. UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. F. Products installed, but not provided under this Section include the following. Coordination to remain a requirement of this Section. 1. Security or High Security keyed cylinders, including provisions for temporary construction keying, provided for mechanical override at access control locking hardware to be furnished under Division 08 Section "Door Hardware". Permanent cores and keys to be installed by Owner. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and finishes. B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." 2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission. 3. Content: Include the following information: a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. b. Manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. System Operational Descriptions: Complete system operational narratives for access controlled openings defining the owner's prescribed requirements for the opening functionality. Narratives include, but are not limited to, the following situations: normal secured/unsecured state of door; authorized access; authorized egress; unauthorized access; unauthorized egress; fire alarm and loss of power conditions, and interfaces with other building control systems. 4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule. C. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified access control hardware indicating the following: 1. Wiring Diagrams: Upon receipt of approved schedules, submit detailed system wiring diagrams for power, signaling, monitoring, communication, and control of the access control system electrified hardware. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Include the following: a. Elevation diagram of each unique access controlled opening showing location and interconnection of major system components with respect to their placement in the respective door openings. b. Complete (risers, point-to-point) access control system block wiring diagrams. 2. Electrical Coordination: Coordinate with related Division 26 Electrical Sections the voltages and wiring details required at electrically controlled and operated hardware openings. 3. Proof of Certification: Provide copy of manufacturer(s) official certification or accreditation document indicating proof of status as a qualified and authorized provider of the primary integrated access control components. D. Keying Schedule: Reference Division 08 Section "Door Hardware". E. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance with cycle testing requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency. F. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals for each item comprising the complete standard door and access control hardware installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Submittals. The manual to include the name, address, and telephone number of the supplier/integrator providing the installation and the nearest service representatives for each item of equipment included in the system. The final copies delivered after completion of the installation test to include "as built" modifications made during installation, checkout, and acceptance. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. As-Built Drawings: During system installation, the Contractor to maintain a separate hard copy set of drawings, elevation diagrams, and wiring diagrams of the access control system to be used for record drawings. This set to be kept up to date by the Contractor with all changes and additions to the access control system accurately recorded. G. Warranties and Maintenance: Special warranties and maintenance agreements specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum[5] years of documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance. B. Integrator Qualifications (Access Control Door Hardware): Systems Integrators, verifiably factory trained and certified by the primary product manufacturers, with a minimum[3] years documented experience installing complete access control systems hardware similar in material, design, and scope to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a proven record of successful in-service performance. Qualifications include, but are not necessarily limited, to the following: 1. References: Provide a list of references for similar projects including contact name, phone number, name and type of project. 2. Professional Staffing: Firms to have a dedicated access control systems integration department with full time, experienced professionals on staff experienced in providing on site consulting services for both electrified door hardware and integrated access control systems installations. 3. Factory Training: Installation and service technicians are to be competent factory trained and certified personnel capable of maintaining the system. 4. Service Center: Firms to have a service center capable of providing training, in-stock parts, and emergency maintenance and repairs at the Project site with 24-hour/7-days a week maximum response time. C. Supplier Qualifications: Supplier, verifiably authorized and in good standing with the primary product manufacturers, with a minimum[3] years experience supplying integrated access control systems similar in material, design, and scope to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a proven record of successful in-service performance. D. Integrated Wiegand Output, Wireless, and IP-Enabled access control products are required to be supplied and installed only through designated ASSA ABLOY "Authorized Channel Partner" (ACP) and “Certified Integrator” (CI) accounts. E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of Door Hardware specified in this Section from a single source, qualified supplier unless otherwise indicated. 1. Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's product line by a secondary or third party source will not be accepted. 2. Provide integrated access control door hardware from the same manufacturer as standard mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 F. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with NFPA 70, NFPA 80, NFPA 101 and ANSI A117.1 requirements and guidelines as directed in the model building code including, but not limited to, the following: 1. NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code", including electrical components, devices, and accessories listed and labeled as defined in Article 100 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 2. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)," ANSI A117.1 as follows: a. Handles, Pulls, Latches, Locks, and other Operating Devices: Shape that is easy to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or twisting of the wrist. b. Door Closers: Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements indicated: 1) Interior Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door. 2) Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. NFPA 101: Comply with the following for means of egress doors: a. Latches, Locks, and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks shall not require the use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. 4. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door hardware for assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252 (neutral pressure at 40" above sill) or UL-10C. a. Test Pressure: Positive pressure labeling. 5. The installed access control system shall conform to all local jurisdiction requirements. G. Keying Conference: Reference Section 087100 “Door Hardware.” H. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s), Installer(s), Systems Integrator(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and procedures for receiving, handling, and installing door and access control hardware to manufacturer's recommendations and according to specifications. 1. Prior to installation of door hardware, arrange for manufacturers' representatives to hold a project specific training meeting to instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of their respective products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware (including electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Training will include the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as required. 2. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections, and other preparatory work performed by other trades. 3. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials. 5. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures. I. At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedules. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or accessories at Project site without prior authorization. 1. Access control firmware and software: Where approved and directed, inventory upon receipt and store electronic access control equipment in a secure, temperature and humidity controlled environment in original manufacturer's sealed containers. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference". 1.6 COORDINATION A. Integrated Access Control Door Hardware and Electrical Coordination: Coordinate the layout and installation of scheduled integrated access control door hardware, and related access control equipment, with required connections to source power junction boxes, power supplies, detection and monitoring hardware and fire alarm system. 1. Access Control System Interface: The integrated access control hardware to interface and be connected to the access control system described under Division 28 "Access Control Systems". Coordinate the installation and configuration of the electrified door hardware and access control systems firmware and software with the hardware specified in this Section. B. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements. C. Door and Frame Preparation: Related Division 08 Sections (Steel, Aluminum and Wood) doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring, signaling and access control system hardware without additional in-field modifications. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of the hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation. C. Standard Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated. D. Special Warranty Periods: 1. Two years for electromechanical and integrated access control door hardware. 2. Five years for motorized electric latch retraction exit devices. 3. Ten years for mortise locks and latches. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of standard and access control door hardware. B. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, and running concurrent with the specified warranty period, provide continuous (6) months full maintenance including repair and replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper door opening operation. Provide parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original products. 1.9 SCOPE OF WORK A. Access Control Site Management System: Furnish and install at the indicated locations the specified integrated access control door hardware for a completely operational access control and security site management system. System includes, but is not necessarily limited, to the following: 1. Electrified integrated access control locks and exit hardware, special tools, operating manuals, and required cabling and accessories as detailed below and listed in the Access Control Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. a. Provide manufacturer approved integrated access control locks and exit hardware that are functionally compatible with the specified access control equipment interfaces. 2. Owner to provide the following: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 a. Owner will be responsible for ensuring that each computer hardware component includes the required interfaces, expansion boards, and peripherals that will be necessary to allow the system to operate as described within this specification and as indicated on the drawings. b. Power Sourcing, Network Switches and Wireless Access Points: Quantity as required to accommodate installed access control (and video surveillance) devices. c. Network Control Processor Connections: 1) LAN/Ethernet communication ports (jacks) and network interface cards as needed, CAT5e (CAT6) cabling from network router/switch to network control processor, outlet and cover plates and/or patch cables required for network connection within each designated IT/Telecom room. 2) Required static IP addresses. 3. Power Supplies, including battery, uninterrupted backup power supply (UPS) and separately fused surge protection, required for the integrated access control door hardware. 4. Installation, final configuration and commissioning of integrated access control door hardware, power supplies and related accessories. 5. Provide manufacturer required power controllers, interface boards, and programming that may be required for approved electric latch retraction exit devices supplied under Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." 6. Electrical contractor, Division 26, to provide the following: a. Source power wiring (120VAC) as required for the integrated access control door hardware and power supplies. This includes quad outlets as required on a dedicated circuit in the designated IT/Telecom room(s) and the related conduit, stub-in, junction boxes and connectors required for the source power delivery and connections. b. Provide required conduit, stub-in, junction and back boxes for the integrated access control door hardware at each access controlled opening per plan drawings and specs. Supply and install conduit between the aforementioned devices and between the electrical junction boxes, power supplies and access control equipment located on or above the door opening. 1) At electrified hardware power transfers provide conduit on the secured side of the opening from the power transfer, thru-wire hinge, or serviceable panel location on the frame jamb to the related power supplies and access control equipment. c. Electrical Contractor to provide all 120VAC cabling connections and terminations from the electrical junction boxes to these electrical devices. 7. Access Control System Integrator to provide the following: a. Low voltage wiring (12/24VDC) and communication required for electrified and integrated access control door hardware, remote card readers, keypads, or display terminals, monitoring and signaling switches, and power supplies. Work includes related connectors, final terminations, and hook-ups required for a complete and Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 functional access controlled opening in accordance with applicable codes and specified system operational narratives. 8. Final connections to fire alarm system, if required, by electrical and fire alarm system contractors. 9. Provide permits, submittals and approvals required by the authority having jurisdiction, prior to commencing with work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide integrated access control door hardware and accessories for each designated opening to comply with requirements in this Section and with the Access Control Hardware Sets listed at the end of Part 3. 1. Access Control Hardware Sets: Requirements for quantity, item, model, design, grade, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of integrated door and access control hardware are indicated in the Access Control Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. B. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and other distinctive qualities of each type of mechanical and electrified door hardware are indicated in the Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: a. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule. C. System Design: The electrified door hardware specified to include standardized components regularly manufactured and utilized within the source manufacturer’s product lines. 1. Electronic integrated locking hardware to be non-proprietary in design and implementations, providing for an open protocol platform across multiple access control systems manufacturers and software applications. The installed integrated product is to be part of a single, cohesive access control system. D. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and electrified access control door hardware, in compliance with specifications, must be submitted in writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01 "Substitution Procedures". Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and their designated consultants. E. The electrified access control door hardware contained in this Section represents a complete engineered system. If alternate products are submitted, it is the responsibility of the Supplier to provide an acceptable complete and working system layout, including re-engineering of elevation and wiring diagrams, as applicable. Complete systems to include at a minimum the required power supplies, power transfers, and electrified and integrated locking hardware and accessories. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 2.2 INTEGRATED WIEGAND OUTPUT LOCKING DEVICES – MULTI-CLASS READER A. Integrated Wiegand Output Multi-Class Mortise Locks: Wiegand output ANSI A156.13, Grade 1, mortise lockset with integrated card reader, request-to-exit signaling, door position status switch, and latchbolt monitoring in one complete unit. Hard wired, solenoid driven locking/unlocking control of the lever handle trim, 3/4" deadlocking anti-friction latch, and 1" case-hardened steel deadbolt. Lock is U.L listed and labeled for use on up to 3 hour fire rated openings. Available with or without keyed high security cylinder override. 1. Open architecture, hard wired platform supports centralized control of locking units with new or existing Wiegand compatible access control systems. Latchbolt monitoring and door position switch act in conjunction to report door-in-frame (DPS) and door latched (door closed and latched) conditions. 2. Integrated reader supports the following credentials: a. 125kHz proximity credentials: HID, AWID, Indala, and EM4102. b. 13.56 MHz proximity credentials: HID iClass, HID iClass SE, SE for MIFARE Classic, DESFire EV1. 3. 12VDC external power supply required for reader and lock, with optional 24VDC lock solenoid. Fail safe or fail secure options. 4. Energy Efficient Design: Provide lock bodies which have a holding current draw of 15mA maximum, and can operate on either 12 or 24 volts. Locks are to be field configurable for fail safe or fail secure operation. 5. Installation requires only one cable run from the lock to the access control panel without requirements for additional proprietary lock panel interface boards or modules. 6. Installation to include manufacturer's access control panel interface board or module where required for Wiegand output protocol. 7. Manufacturers: a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – M1 8200 Series. 2.1 ELECTROMECHANICAL CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES A. Electrified Conventional Push Rail Devices (Heavy Duty): Subject to same compliance standards and requirements as mechanical exit devices, electrified devices to be of type and design as specified below. 1. Manufacturers: a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 80 Series. b. No Substitution – Facility Standard. B. Electrified Options: As indicated in hardware sets, provide electrified exit device options including: electric latch retraction (must be motorized type that fully retracts the touchpad/push bar), electric dogging, outside door trim control, exit alarm, delayed egress, latchbolt monitoring, lock/unlock status monitoring, touchbar monitoring and request-to-exit signaling. Unless otherwise indicated, provide electrified exit devices standard as fail secure. 2.2 INTEGRATED WIEGAND OUTPUT EXIT DEVICES – MULTI-CLASS READER A. Integrated Wiegand Output Multi-Class Exit Hardware: Wiegand output ANSI 156.3 Grade 1 rim, mortise, and vertical rod exit device hardware with integrated proximity card reader, latchbolt and touchbar monitoring, and request-to-exit signaling, in one complete unit. Hard wired, solenoid driven locking/unlocking control of the lever handle exit trim with 3/4" throw latch Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - 11 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 bolt. U.L listed and labeled for either panic or "fire exit hardware" for use on up to 3 hour fire rated openings. Available with or without keyed high security cylinder override. 1. Open architecture, hard wired platform supports centralized control of locking units with new or existing Wiegand compatible access control systems. Inside push bar (request-toexit) signaling and door position (open/closed status) monitoring (via separately connected DPS). 2. Integrated reader supports the following credentials: a. 125kHz proximity credentials: HID, AWID, Indala, and EM4102. b. 13.56 MHz proximity credentials: HID iClass, HID iClass SE, SE for MIFARE Classic, DESFire EV1. 3. 12VDC external power supply required for reader. 24VDC required for solenoid operated exit trim. Fail safe or fail secure options. 4. Installation requires only one cable run from the exit hardware to the access control panel without requirements for additional proprietary lock panel interface boards or modules. 5. Competitor Alternates Allowed Option>Installation to include manufacturer's access control panel interface board or module where required for Wiegand output protocol. 6. Manufacturers: a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – M1 80 Series. 2.3 ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES A. Networked Contactless Smart Card Readers: Contactless smart cards reader to securely read access control data from 13.56 MHz contactless smart cards. The contactless smart card reader is designed for use in access control applications by providing: 1. Secure access control data exchange between the smart card and the reader utilizing key diversification and mutual authentication routines. 2. Contactless smart card reader to be designed for low current operation to enable migration from most legacy proximity applications without the need to replace existing access control panels and/or power supplies. Operating voltage: 5-16 VDC. Current requirements: 55 mA Avg, 116 mA Peak at 12 VDC. 3. Universal compatibility with most access control systems and backwards compatibility with legacy 125 KHz proximity access control formats. 4. Product construction suitable for both indoor and outdoor applications. 5. Customizable behavior for indicator lights and audible tones. 6. Manufacturers (13.56 MHz iClass): a. HID Global (HG) - R10/R40 Series. B. Door Position Switches: Door position magnetic reed contact switches specifically designed for use in commercial door applications. On recessed models the contact and magnetic housing snap-lock into a 1" diameter hole. Surface mounted models include wide gap distance design complete with armored flex cabling. Provide SPDT, N/O switches with optional Rare Earth Magnet installation on steel doors with flush top channels. 1. Manufacturers: a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) 3287. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - 12 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 b. Securitron (SU) - DPS Series. C. Switching Power Supplies: Provide UL listed or recognized filtered and regulated power supplies. Provide single, dual, or multi-voltage units as shown in the hardware sets. Units must be expandable up to eight Class 2 power limited outputs. Units must include the capability to incorporate a battery backup option with integral battery charging capability in addition to operating the DC load in event of line voltage failure. Provide the least number of units, at the appropriate amperage level, sufficient to exceed the required total draw for the specified electrified hardware and access control equipment. 1. Manufacturers: a. Securitron (SU) - AQ Series. 2.4 CABLES AND WIRING A. Comply with Division 27 Section "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security." B. Data Line Supervision: System to include alarm initiation capability in response to opening, closing, shorting, or grounding of data transmission lines. C. Install appropriate number of conductor pairs, in the wire gage (AWG) recommended by manufacturer, corresponding to the electronic locking functions specified, amperage drawn and distances covered between the power supplies, power transfer devices, electrified hardware and access control equipment. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended. 2.6 ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE FINISHES A. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes indicated by certain manufacturers for their products. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Where specified, finishes on locksets, latchsets, exit devices and push/pull trim to incorporate an FDA recognized antimicrobial coating (MicroShield™) listed for use on equipment as a suppressant to the growth and spread of a broad range of bacteria, algae, fungus, mold and mildew. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - 13 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing-in for electrical source power to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified and integrated access control door hardware installation. C. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Doors and frames at scheduled access controlled openings to be properly prepared to receive specified electrified and access control hardware and connections without additional in-field modifications. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications. 1. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation and adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices; locking devices; closing devices; and seals. B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations: 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." 3. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1 "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." 4. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware is located. C. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - 14 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation. E. Boxed Power Supplies: Verify locations with Architect. 1. Configuration: Provide the least number of power supplies required to adequately serve doors with access control equipment. F. Final connect the system control switches (integrated reader locking hardware, remote readers, keypads, etc.), and monitoring and signaling equipment to the related Controller devices at each opening to properly operate the electrified door and access control hardware according to system operational narratives. G. Stand Alone System Application Software: Install, and test stand alone system application software for the complete and proper operation of systems involved. H. Networked System Application Software: Reference Division 28 Section "Access Control Systems". 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Inspection: Perform a final inspection of the installed door hardware and access control system and state in report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether each component representing the opening assembly is properly installed, adjusted, operating and performing to system operational narratives. B. Commissioning and Testing Schedule: Reference Division 28 Section "Access Control System." 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the latest possible time frame. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. and provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of owner occupancy. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering - Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - 15 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and electromechanical door hardware. 3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper application and functionality. B. Refer to Section 080671, Door Hardware Schedule, for hardware sets. END OF SECTION 281500 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 FIRE ALARM CABLES AND PATHWAYS 283105 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 283105 - FIRE ALARM CABLES AND PATHWAYS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Certain requirements common to all the mechanical and electrical trades (Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Tele/Data) are specified in Division 20. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated in each relevant Division of the Specifications. However, these requirements are applicable to the work of this Division, and are hereby incorporated by reference. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fire alarm cables. 2. Fire alarm terminal cabinets. 3. Fire alarm raceway and boxes. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Dedicated Continuous Metal Raceway: Enclosed metal pathway dedicated to power-limited fire alarm cable; comprised of and limited to: EMT, IMC, RGS, FMC, and / or LFMC as specified. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each fire alarm cable application, including cable type, wire size, shielding, and electrical characteristics. 1. Include statement endorsed by the manufacturer’s authorized representative that the electrical characteristics of the submitted fire alarm cables are within all operating parameters of the fire alarm system as designed and represented by the detailed fire alarm system Shop Drawings. B. Product Data: For fire alarm terminal cabinets, including furnished options and accessories. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Record of Inspection and Testing: For field wiring inspection and testing; for each circuit indicate measured values and corresponding acceptance criteria for circuit continuity, resistance, stray voltage, ground-faults, short-circuit-faults, and any other manufacturer recommended conductor field testing parameters. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 FIRE ALARM CABLES AND PATHWAYS 283105 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE ALARM CABLES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Anixter Inc. 2. Belden Inc. 3. Southwire Co. 4. West Penn Wire. B. Fire Alarm Cable: UL 1424, Type FPL, power-limited fire alarm cable; red-jacketed, twisted-pair and parallel-pair insulated solid copper conductors; unshielded and shielded. C. Fire Alarm Metal-clad Cable: UL 1424, Type MC-FPLP, power-limited fire alarm cable; jacketed, twisted-pair solid copper conductors with red aluminum interlocking outer armor jacket; unshielded and shielded. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Red Alert MC-FPLP cable, manufactured by Southwire Co. D. Minimum Fire Alarm Cable Conductor Size: 1. Auxiliary (24 Vdc) Power: 14 AWG / 2C. 2. Data Communications Network: 16 AWG / 2C. 3. Digital Voice Riser: 16 AWG / 2C. 4. Notification Appliance Circuits: 14 AWG / 2C. 5. Relay Circuits: 14 AWG / 2C. 6. RS Serial Data Communications: 18 AWG / 2C. 7. Signaling Line Circuits: 16 AWG / 2C. 8. Speaker Circuits: 16 AWG / 2C. 9. Supervision Circuits: 16 AWG / 2C. E. Data and Voice Circuits: 1. Fire alarm cable for Data Communications Network, Digital Voice Riser, Signaling Line Circuits, Speaker Circuits, RS Serial Data Communications, and other manufacturerspecific data and voice circuits shall be shielded, twisted-pair unless fire alarm manufacturer’s installation guidelines recommend or require unshielded twisted-pair cable. 2. Fire alarm cable electrical characteristics for Data Communications Network, Signaling Line Circuits, RS Serial Data Communications, and other manufacturer-specific data circuits shall comply with the fire alarm manufacturer limitations for linear-unit and totalcircuit capacitance and resistance. 2.2 FIRE ALARM TERMINAL CABINETS A. Enclosure: 16 gauge steel; factory applied red enamel finish; removable hinged door with keyed locking latch; with embedded 1/2 inch, 3/4 inch, 1 inch, 1-1/2 inch and 2 inch knockout clusters. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 FIRE ALARM CABLES AND PATHWAYS 283105 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Terminals: Each terminal pole with quick-connect wire termination points and integral test port; sized to accept 20 - 12 AWG and rated for 20 amp at 250V (Class B/UL) 300V (CSA). C. Identification: Marked “FIRE ALARM TERMINAL CABINET” in 2 inch white factory applied indelible screened lettering; field identification labels on the inside cover corresponding to the terminal strip’s labeling inside the back box. D. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide IF-Series fire alarm terminal cabinets, manufactured by Space Age Electronics Inc. 2.3 FIRE ALARM RACEWAY AND BOXES A. Comply with Division 26. 1. Finish: Factory applied red finish for cover plates and connectors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Comply with NFPA 70 and NFPA 72. B. Unless more restrictive requirements are noted in Division 28, comply with applicable Division 26 sections for the installation of low voltage electrical systems. C. Comply with Division for NFPA 72 pathway Class and Survivability Level requirements. D. Install fire alarm system pathways and cables in accordance with the reviewed fire alarm system Shop Drawings. Where field modifications of layout are necessary, obtain prior approval from the fire alarm system vendor’s qualified fire alarm system designer. 3.2 FIRE ALARM PATHWAY INSTALLATION A. Pathways for Fire Alarm: The pathway system for fire alarm shall be dedicated continuous metal raceway throughout. 1. Comply with Division 26 for application and installation of EMT, IMC, RGS, FMC, and LFMC with respect to environmental conditions and resistance to physical damage. 2. MC fire alarm cable shall be permitted in place of Continuous Metal Raceway for the following applications: a. MC fire alarm cable shall only be installed in concealed spaces. MC fire alarm cable shall not be permitted to be installed exposed. 1) Comply with Division 26 and University design standards for the application and installation of MC fire alarm cable. B. Pathways beneath Slab, Within Slab, and Buried: Comply with Division 26 for applicable RNC installation requirements. C. Class A and X Pathways: Unless greater distances are indicated on the Drawings or Specifications, install Class A and X pathways in compliance with NFPA 72 recommendations for minimum horizontal and vertical separation between supply and return pathways. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 FIRE ALARM CABLES AND PATHWAYS 283105 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.3 FIRE ALARM CABLE INSTALLATION A. Install fire alarm cables within dedicated continuous metal raceway throughout. Wiring shall be continuous between equipment, device, and appliance terminals without splices. B. T-tapping: Not permitted for any fire alarm circuit. C. Do not install fire alarm system wiring within conduits, junction boxes, or outlet boxes containing conductors of lighting or power systems. D. Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors within enclosures as recommended by the manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess. E. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring diagrams. F. Not more than two conductors shall be installed under any device screw terminal. The wires under the screw terminal shall be straight when placed under the terminal then clamped in place under the screw terminal. The wires shall be broken and not twisted around the terminal. 3.4 GROUNDING A. Comply with Division 26. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspections and testing shall be performed by fire alarm system manufacturer’s factoryauthorized service technicians. B. End-to-end cabling shall be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. C. Perform visual wiring inspections in accordance with fire alarm system manufacturer recommendations. Correct deficiencies. D. Test wiring in accordance with fire alarm system manufacturer requirements and NFPA 72 for Initial Acceptance Testing of conductors. Correct deficiencies. E. Document inspections and tests via formal inspection test and report(s). END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\283105_FIRE ALARM CABLES AND PATHWAYS.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 283111 - DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Emergency voice messaging components. 2. Power supplies. 3. System detectors. 4. Notification appliances. 5. Addressable interface modules. 6. Fault isolation modules. 7. Non-fire emergency signaling. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ADS: Acoustically Distinguishable Space. B. AHJ. Authority Having Jurisdiction. C. BMS: Building Management System. D. EVACS: Emergency Voice Alarm Communication System. E. FACU: Fire Alarm Control Unit. F. FATC: Fire Alarm Terminal Cabinet. G. IDC: Initiating Device Circuit. H. NAC: Notification Appliance Circuit. I. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies. J. PSTN: Publically Switched Telephone Network. K. SLC: Signaling Line Circuit. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Division 20 for common mechanical/electrical requirements. B. Comply with Division 28 specifications and drawings; state/local regulations; and NFPA 72 - Chapter “Documentation”. For purposes of applying NFPA 72, all identified documentation requirements are a mandatory part of the Work, including those that “apply only where required by other governing laws, codes, or standards, by other parts of the Code; or by project specifications or drawings”. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Submit Action Submittals prior to applying for authority having jurisdiction installation permits (where required) and system installation. D. Submit Informational Submittals after successful initial system testing and prior to scheduling authority having jurisdiction final approval demonstration testing. E. Submit Closeout Submittals as part of project closeout procedure. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including furnished options and accessories. 1. Include approvals and listings, construction details, material descriptions, dimensions, profiles, and finishes. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and electrical characteristics. 3. Include statement from manufacturer that all equipment and components have been tested as a system and meet all requirements of this Specification and of NFPA 72. B. Shop Drawings: For fire alarm system and fire safety control interfaces. 1. Floor Plans. Include floor plans to indicate final equipment, cabinet, device and appliance locations. Indicate address of each addressable device. Show all interface modules. Show candela setting for each strobe appliance. Show complete point-to-point routing of all circuits and pathways; indicate Class and Survivability Level. Show size and type of all conduits, cable, wire, and conductors. Indicate panel circuit designation for each normal power supply branch circuit. 2. Riser Diagram. Include complete device/appliance accurate riser diagram. Indicate address of each addressable device. Show all interface modules. Show candela setting of each strobe appliance. Show each circuit and pathway; indicate Class and Survivability Level. Show size and type of all conduits, cable, wire, and conductors. Indicate panel circuit designation for each normal power supply branch circuit. 3. Equipment Wiring Diagrams. Include wiring diagrams for each system component/node including control unit cabinets, remote power supply cabinets, terminal cabinets, remote annunciators, supervising station transmitters, and PC workstations. 4. Component Wiring Diagrams. Include typical wiring diagrams for fire detector bases, pull stations, conventional devices, interface modules including wiring connections to supervised/controlled equipment, notification appliances, and component modules and cards. 5. Ductwork Smoke Detector Plans. Include installation details for each ductwork detector condition. Show plan and section view for each condition. Show requirements for ductwork attachments, penetrations, and access panels. 6. Calculations - Voltage Drop. Include voltage drop calculations inclusive of safety/spare capacity factor(s) for notification-appliance circuits. Calculations shall assume alarm operation using the minimum standby power available at the conclusion of quiescent and alarm phases of operation. 7. Calculations - Power Supply and Battery Capacity. Include power capacity calculations inclusive of safety/spare capacity factor(s) for each system power supply and connected battery set. 8. Calculations - Conduit Fill. Include conduit fill calculations prepared in accordance with the National Electric Code. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 9. Sequence of Operation. Include complete and detailed input/output sequence of operation matrix. Supplement matrix with narrative descriptions for complex specialty sequences. 10. Radiant Energy-Sensing Flame Detectors; additionally: a. Protected Hazard Plans. Indicate detector locations in plan and elevation; show field of view boundaries with respect to protected hazard. Indicate design criteria basis for selected detector characteristics including, but not limited to, fuel type, combustion characteristics, and sensitivity requirements. b. Equipment Wiring Diagrams and Component Wiring Diagrams. For detectors, controllers, and interfaces. 11. Emergency Voice/Alarm Communication Systems; additionally: a. Floor Plans. Indicate amplifier equipment cabinets, primary and remote paging locations, and associated circuits and pathways. Show wattage tap and corresponding ADS for each speaker. Indicate circuit pathway Class and Survivability Level. b. Equipment Wiring Diagrams and Component Wiring Diagrams. For amplifier racks, remote microphone stations, and speaker appliances. c. Amplifier Loading. For each speaker circuit, identify quantity of speakers at each wattage tap setting and total connected wattage per circuit and per amplifier. Demonstrate calculated loading inclusive of safety/spare capacity factor(s) is accommodated by amplifier nominal power (watts) capacity. d. Audio dB Loss Calculations. For each speaker circuit. e. Power Supply Battery Capacity Calculations. For each amplifier array power supply and connected battery set, inclusive of safety/spare capacity factor(s). C. Delegated-Design Submittals – RESERVED. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and Certified Engineering Technician. A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For fire alarm control unit, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. B. Record of Inspection and Testing. Detailed documentation of completed 100 percent fire alarm and signaling system initial acceptance testing. Use NFPA 72 “System Record of Inspection and Testing” forms. C. Statement of Completion: Written statement that system has been installed in accordance with approved plans and tested in accordance with the manufacturer’s published instructions and appropriate NFPA 72 requirements. D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record of Completion. Provide detailed description of installed, tested, and approved fire alarm and signaling system; including description of protected premises, fire alarm system and component sub-systems, fire safety function interfaces, monitoring service, and all other information required by NFPA 72. Use NFPA 72 “System Record of Completion” forms. B. Record Drawings. Provide complete Shop Drawing re-submittal updated to reflect actual final system installation and sequence of operation of all components. C. Device address list. Provide complete device address list organized by SLC loop and system node. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. Provide manufacturer's Owner’s Operation and Maintenance Manuals with required related system warranty requirements. 2. Provide NFPA 72 “Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance” tables indicating required component inspection and testing activities and frequencies. 3. Provide "Inspection and Testing Form" according to the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72, and include the following: E. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: 1. Provide software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Site-specific Software Backup: Provide on compact solid state USB storage device or compact disk; complete with data files. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel licensed by the governing licensing authority for the installation of fire alarm systems. Successfully installed, tested, obtained approvals for, and put into service no less than three (3) fire alarm systems similar in type, size, and complexity to that of the Work of this Section. B. Certified Engineering Technician Qualifications: Personnel trained and certified by the fire alarm system manufacturer as an approved technician. 1. Shop Drawings and Calculations prepared by personnel certified by NICET as fire alarm Level III or IV technician, or licensed as a Professional Fire Protection Engineer by the governing licensing authority. C. Source Limitations for Fire Alarm System and Components: Single vendor source to provide fire alarm system components and connected non-system components as a single listed addressable fire alarm and signaling system. 1. Modifications to Existing Systems: Components compatible with, and operate as an extension of, existing system. D. Product Standards: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing and "Approval Guide," published by FM Global. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, indication of a UL product requirement within Part 2 shall be construed to require a UL listed and FM approved product. E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Explosion-Proof: Listed and labeled for use in “Hazardous (Classified) Locations”; Class and Division listing appropriate to intended location and application. F. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by an NRTL (nationally recognized testing laboratory). 1.9 COORDINATION A. Definition, “Coordinate”: Where Sections of the Work interact, the Contractor responsible for this Section of the Work initiates verbal and/ or written communication with one or more different Contractors responsible for other interacting Sections of the Work for the purposes of establishing a coordinated approach of product selections and installation sequencing that satisfies the individual requirements of the interacting Sections of the Work as well as the requirements of the Work as a whole. B. Coordinate construction operations with those of other Sections of the Work and other entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. C. Coordinate operations and product selections of this Section with operations and product selections included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. D. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. E. Coordinate installation of different components with other Sections of the Work to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. F. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. G. Coordination Drawings: Contribute to preparation of Coordination Drawings in the sequence established under Division 1 and Division 20; indicate water-based fire suppression system Work coordinated with other Sections of the Work. 1.10 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Smoke Detectors and Heat Detectors: Five (5) of each type installed. 2. Detector Bases: Five (5) of each type installed. 3. Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: Five (5) of each type installed. 4. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked or tamper-proof components. 5. Fuses: Two (2) of each type installed in the system. Provide in a box or cabinet with compartments marked with fuse types and sizes. 1.11 UNIT-COST ALLOWANCES A. Definition: Unit-cost allowance is a quantity of work established in lieu of additional requirements, used to defer the installation of materials and equipment to a later date when direction may be provided to Contractor by the Architect or Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) to provide labor and materials pursuant to final field coordination or AHJ final inspections. B. Unit-cost allowance shall include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, applicable taxes, overhead, and profit. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Include the following Unit-cost Allowances: 1. System spot-type smoke detector: Total quantity equal to five (5) installed. 2. System spot-type heat detector: Total quantity equal to five (5) installed. 3. System sampling tube duct smoke detector: Total quantity equal to five (5) installed. 4. Monitor interface module: Total quantity equal to ten (10) installed. 5. Relay / control interface module: Total quantity equal to ten (10) installed. 6. Audible / intelligible notification appliance: Total quantity equal to five (5) installed. 7. Visible notification appliance: Total quantity equal to five (5) installed. 8. Combination audible / intelligible and visible notification appliance: Total quantity equal to five (5) installed. D. Unused Materials: After installation has been completed and accepted by authorities having jurisdiction return unused materials to manufacturer or supplier and credit Owner for materials and labor. 1.12 PROJECT CONDITIONS (RESERVED) 1.13 SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING (RESERVED) 1.14 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire alarm system equipment and components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Extent: All equipment and components not covered in the Maintenance Service Agreement. 2. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products compatible with the existing to remain fire alarm system (Gamewell, FCI). 2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. UL 864; non-coded, microprocessor-based addressable protected premises fire alarm and signaling system, with multiplexed signal transmission and audible/visual evacuation signaling. All components provided listed for use and compatible with fire alarm system head-end FACU. B. Protected premises backbone architecture comprised of multiple fire alarm control units and system components networked via peer-to-peer communications node network. C. Control units, system components, and power supplies inclusive of boards, drivers, and expansion modules necessary to support the specified system performance criteria, minimum quantity of circuits, and NFPA 72 circuit pathway class designations. D. System circuiting and component power loading to provide minimum specified spare capacities, safety factors, and redundancies. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 E. Special Alarm Signal Processing – RESERVED. F. NFPA 72 Pathway Class (Performance During Fault) and Survivability Level (Fire Resistance): 1. Addressable signaling loops. a. Circuit Type: SLC. b. Pathway Class: A. c. Class A Short-circuit Fault Isolation Modules or Bases Located as Follows: 1) At each SLC exit/entry point of from/to a control unit or terminal cabinet. 2) No more than twenty (20) addressable devices between isolation modules at any point on SLC. d. Pathway Survivability Level: 0. 2. Audible and intelligible public mode signaling (occupant evacuation). a. Circuit Type: NAC. b. Pathway Class: A. c. Pathway Survivability Level: 0. 3. Visible public mode signaling (occupant evacuation). a. Circuit Type: NAC. b. Pathway Class: A. c. Pathway Survivability Level: 0. 4. Supervision of conventional devices. a. Circuit Type: IDC. b. Pathway Class: A. c. Pathway Survivability Level: 0. G. All addressable circuits designed and installed without T-taps. H. Maximum 100 addressable alarm-initiating devices on each SLC. I. No fewer than two (2) visible and two (2) audible NAC’s serving each protected premises fire area or evacuation zone. Unless noted otherwise, notification appliances circuited such that no two adjacent appliances are connected to the same NAC. J. Component Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from premises AC power supply. 1. Capacity: Alarm current draw of components connected to each power-supply module no greater than 80 percent of the power-supply module rating. K. Component Standby Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and automatic transfer switch. 1. Base Capacity: System operation for twenty-four (24) hours under quiescent load plus fifteen (15) minutes operating all alarm notification appliances. 2. Spare Capacity: 20 percent. L. Remote power supplies used as distributed power sources only and not as in-line circuit power “boosters”. M. Fire alarm system listed for protected premises in-building Emergency Voice Alarm Communications System (EVACS) service utilizing digital multi-channel technology: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Fire Emergency Voice Alarm Communications Systems (EVACS); comply with UL 864, 1480, and 1711. 2. Mass Notification System (MNS); comply with UL 2572. 3. Amplifier loading no greater than 80 percent of rated power capacity (Watts). 4. Complete functional integration (common audio circuits and speakers) of protected premises fire alarm in-building EVACS and premises Public Address System (PAS). N. Fire alarm system interfaces with other premises building systems including Fire Suppression, HVAC, Vertical Transportation, Audio/Visual, Public Address, Access Control, Fire Protection Opening Protectives, Emergency Power, and similar for all code-required and project-specified fire safety supervision and functional control. 2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Operational Performance: Fire alarm system shall process alarm, supervisory, and trouble status signals and perform associated output functions in compliance with NFPA 72, Division 28 and Drawings “Input/Output Matrix”. B. Circuit Integrity and Fault Performance: Fire alarm system circuit integrity and functional performance capability under fault conditions shall comply with the NFPA 72 circuit Class designations as indicated within the “System Description” Article and as indicated on the Drawings. C. Survivability Performance: Fire alarm system fire resistive performance capability shall comply with the NFPA 72 circuit Level designations as indicated within the “System Description” Article and as indicated on the Drawings. 2.4 EMERGENCY VOICE ALARM COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS A. General: NFPA 72 compliant, digital, multi-channel, one-way emergency voice alarm communication system for automatic and manual voice broadcast of fire or other emergency instructions and signals; distributed system architecture with central master audio controller and distributed amplifier arrays connected via digital voice audio riser. B. Master Audio Controller: Solid-state digital multi-channel audio controller with digitized alarm tones and digitally recorded voice messages stored in on-board memory. C. Tones and Messages: Selectable evacuation tones (Temporal-3, Slow/Fast Whoop, GSA), standard digitally pre-recorded voice messages and digitally recorded custom voice messages. Module on-board memory capacity sufficient for minimum of 32 minutes total message duration at standard resolution. D. Amplifiers: UL 1711, digital, multi-channel, power-limited 25 or 70 VRMS, with on-board test switches and indicators. 1. Self-Backup Mode: Automatically re-route NAC’s connected to a disabled amplifier channel to remaining active amplifier channel(s). 2. Degrade Mode: On-board temporal pattern horn tone for default backup signaling over connected NAC’s. E. Amplifier Supervision: Digital communication between amplifiers and controller for supervision and indication of amplifier status and operating power and voltage values. F. Microphone Module: Push-to-talk integral corded microphone for manual voice messaging; with local speaker, volume controls, and LED status indicators. G. Controls and Status Indicators: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Indicators: LED indicators for indication of system status and operation of user selected functions. 2. Function-keys: Membrane switch buttons with corresponding LED indicators for selective user initiation of voice messaging and evacuation functions on a premises-wide or per- zone basis. H. Auxiliary Audio Inputs: Audio controller capable of accepting line-level auxiliary audio source input for re-broadcast over emergency voice speaker circuits. I. Auxiliary Audio Outputs: Audio controller capable of transmitting line-level auxiliary audio source output for re-broadcast over another system’s emergency or non-emergency voice speaker circuits. J. Cabinet Enclosures: Comply with Article “Fire Alarm Control Units” for cabinet enclosures. Modules and amplifiers mounted within cabinet enclosures common to FACU and within dedicated solid-door remote amplifier array cabinet enclosures. 2.5 POWER SUPPLIES A. General: Switched-mode supervised power supply base and expansion modules supplying regulated and filtered 24-V dc power to system components, notification appliances, and auxiliary power loads. B. FACU Applications: Power supply modules and batteries mounted within Fire Alarm Control Unit (FACU) equipment cabinets to provide integral system power to chassis-mounted components, connected notification appliance circuits, and connected auxiliary power circuits; batteries located within stand-alone battery cabinet for high-capacity applications. C. RPS Applications: Power supply modules and batteries mounted within distributed Remote Power Supply (RPS) equipment cabinets to provide supplemental power to connected notification appliance circuits and connected auxiliary power circuits. D. Primary Power Supply: 120-V ac. E. Secondary Power Supply: 24-V dc supply system including sealed lead acid batteries, automatic float-charge battery charger, and automatic transfer switch. F. Outputs: Programmable for operation as Notification Appliance or Auxiliary Power circuits; NAC outputs capable of operation as sync-generator or sync-follower; capable of supporting Class A or Class B circuit configuration. G. Supervision: Loss of primary power, low battery power, battery charger failure, and output circuit fault conditions supervised by fire alarm system via serial communication or system SLC supervision of trouble contacts. H. Cabinet Enclosures: Comply with Article “Fire Alarm Control Units” for cabinet enclosures. 2.6 SYSTEM FIRE DETECTORS A. General: Analog addressable system smoke, system heat, or other system detectors for sensing products of combustion; listed as compatible with fire alarm system control unit and with integral addressable module capable of two-way analog communication with fire alarm control unit permitting remote sensitivity control, identification of device address, alarm status, trouble status, and trending of maintenance data. B. Detector Housing: Low profile, white-polycarbonate thermoplastic, impact resistant, and flame retardant detector housing for mounting into twist-lock base; with LED indicator for indication of detector status-poling (flashing) or in operation (constant). Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 10 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Detector Bases: Ceiling- and wall-mount, low profile, white-polycarbonate thermoplastic, impact resistant, and flame retardant plastic twist-lock fixed base; with terminals for SLC conductor terminations. 1. Auxiliary Detector Bases: Optional bases furnished to perform supplemental detectorlocal functions. a. Sounder bases to provide local audible alarm at detector; 24-V dc. b. Relay bases for output control of associated equipment. c. Isolation bases to isolate short circuit faults on SLC. d. UL 2075 carbon monoxide sensor and associated distinct audible alarm and visual indicator. D. Remote Alarm Indicators (RAI): LED visual indicator in flush-mount plate, connected to corresponding detector base terminals for remote indication of detector alarm. E. Remote Test Station (RTS): RAI with key operated test switch for remote detector testing. F. Operating Voltage: 24-V dc nominal for detectors and auxiliary bases; 120-V ac rated contacts for relay bases as per application. G. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation. 2.7 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS A. Comply with “System Fire Detectors” Article. B. UL 268, photoelectric spot-type with insect-screen protected sensing chamber; for installation in twist-lock system bases. C. Operating Temperature Range: 32 – 100 deg F (0 – 38deg C). D. Operating Humidity Range: 10 - 95 percent RH. E. Sensitivity Range: 0.2 - 3.7 percent obs/ft. F. Air Velocity Rating: 0 - 4,000 fpm (0 - 1220 mpm). 2.8 SYSTEM IN-DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS A. Comply with “System Fire Detectors” Article. B. UL 268A, photoelectric spot-type system smoke detector listed for installation directly within air distribution ductwork; with and without integral output relays. C. Mounting: For square and round ducts via factory furnished mounting kit or standard electrical raceway and boxes as per detector manufacturer requirements. D. Air Velocity Range: 0 - 4,000 fpm (0 - 1,220 mpm). 2.9 SYSTEM SAMPLING TUBE DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS A. Comply with “System Fire Detectors” Article. B. UL 268A, photoelectric spot-type system smoke detector listed for installation within detector housing mounted to exterior surface of air distribution ductwork, with connected sampling tubes transporting ductwork air to the external detector sensing chamber; with and without integral output relays. C. Mounting: For square and round ducts via factory furnished mounting kit. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 11 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. Air Velocity Range: 300 - 4,000 fpm (91 - 1,220 mpm). 2.10 SYSTEM HEAT DETECTORS A. Comply with “System Fire Detectors” Article. B. UL 521, spot type heat detector actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg F or a rate of rise that exceeds 15 deg F per minute unless other temperature rating(s) are indicated on Drawings. 2.11 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Same manufacturer as the selected manufacturer of the fire alarm and signaling system technology platform. 2. Edwards Signaling. 3. System Sensor. 4. Wheelock, Cooper Industries. B. General Performance Requirements for Notification Appliances: Signaling appliances connected to notification appliance circuits for NFPA 72 public operating mode signaling to building occupants protected by the fire alarm system; and private operating signaling to those persons directly concerned with implementation and direction of emergency action and procedures. Appliance assemblies include audible, visible, and combination type as indicated on Drawings. C. Mounting: Wall or ceiling mount as indicated on Drawings. D. Housing: Thermoplastic, impact resistant, and flame retardant. E. Finish: Red housing with White contrasting engraved lettering. F. Identification: Engraved lettering on housing indicating ”FIRE”. G. Weather proof applications: Listed for indoor and outdoor installation. 2.12 AUDIBLE/INTELLIGIBLE NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A. Comply with “Notification Appliances” Article. B. Speakers: UL 1480, 25 or 70 nominal VRMS speaker within dedicated housing, listed sound pressure level of 90 dBA measured at 10 feet. 1. Frequency Range: 400 to 4000 Hz. 2. Wattage Taps: Field selectable 0.25 W, 0.50 W, 1.0 W, 2.0W. C. High-power Speakers – RESERVED. D. High-fidelity Speakers – RESERVED. 2.13 VISIBLE NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A. Comply with “Notification Appliances” Article. B. Strobes: UL 1971, xenon strobe with clear polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate and field selectable candela output setting within dedicated housing, 24-V dc; with candela setting indicator visible through viewing window. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 12 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Strobe flashing in temporal pattern, synchronized throughout each evacuation zone and synchronized between evacuation zones where strobes from multiple evacuation zones can be observed by a single viewer. 2. Comply with Drawings for appliance candela output. C. Flashing Beacons: UL 1638; 6 inch diameter, red lens beacon, 24-V dc; listed for indoor and outdoor applications. 2.14 COMBINATION AUDIBLE/INTELLIGIBLE AND VISIBLE NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A. Combination audible/intelligible and visible notification appliance with audible and visible signaling elements assembled within a common housing. 1. Audible/intelligible speakers - comply with “Audible/Intelligible Notification Appliances” Article. 2. Visible strobe - comply with “Visible Notification Appliances” Article. 2.15 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE MODULES A. General: Microelectronic interface module for supervision and control of premises fire safety functions with integral address-setting means, internal code for FACU identification by module type, and output contact ratings to match controlled/supervised equipment. B. Monitor Module: Provides a system address for alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts. C. Relay Module: Capable of providing a direct output signal to controlled equipment or device. 1. Allows the FACU to switch the relay contacts on command. 2. Minimum of two normally open and two normally closed contacts available for field wiring. D. Control Module: Capable of providing a supervised direct output signal to controlled notification appliance, equipment or device. 1. Allows the FACU to switch the relay contacts on command. 2. Minimum of two normally open and two normally closed contacts available for field wiring. 2.16 FAULT ISOLATION MODULES A. Module capable of sensing and automatically isolating SLC short circuit fault. 2.17 NON-FIRE EMERGENCY SIGNALING A. Manual Non-Fire Emergency Alarm Boxes: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Cooper MDC. b. Potter Signal Co. c. Signal Communications Corp. 2. Description: Double-action, key- or wrench-operated reset, die-cast metal housing, color options and custom molded raised-letter indications, with output contacts for interface module supervision; listed for indoor and outdoor installation. 3. Finish and Indication Applications: Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 13 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 a. Emergency (Hazmat) Alarms: Yellow housing finish with “HAZMAT EMERGENCY” lettering indication. B. Non-Fire Emergency Notification Appliances: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Edwards Signaling. b. Gentex Corp. c. Wheelock, Cooper Industries. 2. Description: Combination audible horn and visible strobe, thermoplastic, impact resistant, flame retardant housing, field selectable candela strobe, housing and lens color options; listed for indoor and outdoor installation. 3. Finish and Indication Applications: a. Emergency (Hazmat) Alarms: White housing finish with yellow / amber lens; no lettering indications. b. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prepare and submit “Action Submittals” prior to equipment procurement. 3.2 TECHNICIAN DESIGN AND LAYOUT A. Roles and responsibilities shall be as set forth in NSPE Position Statement No. 1749 “SFPE/NSPE/NICET Joint Position of the Engineer and the Engineering Technician Designing the Fire Protection System”, available at nspe.org. As applied to the Work, the Contract Documents have been prepared by the “Engineer” and Shop Drawings required by this Section of the Work are prepared by the “Certified Engineering Technician”. B. As the Certified Engineering Technician, prepare Shop Drawings including drawings, calculations, certifications, and statements indicating system layout, circuiting, and capacities in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. C. Design and Installation Standard(s): NFPA 70 and NFPA 72. D. Comply with the performance requirements indicated by the Contract Documents where such requirements are more stringent than those of the Design and Installation Standard(s); otherwise, comply with the performance requirements of the Design and Installation Standard(s). 3.3 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for ventilation, temperature, humidity, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that manufacturer's written instructions for environmental conditions have been permanently established in spaces where equipment and wiring are installed, before installation begins. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 14 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Confirm fire resistance rating of building construction required to perform as fire alarm system Survivability protection before installation. C. Examine depth of stud walls to verify clearance for flush-mount equipment before installation. D. Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations of connections before installation. E. Examine proposed mounting locations of equipment cabinets with user displays and/or controls with the local fire official to verify satisfactory access and ease of identification before installation. F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.4 EXISTING SYSTEM REMOVAL AND IMPAIRMENTS - RESERVED 3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Comply with the most restrictive requirements of this Section and applicable Division 26 sections for the installation of low voltage electrical systems. B. Comply with NFPA 72, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for installation and testing of fire alarm equipment. Install all electrical wiring to comply with requirements in NFPA 70 including, but not limited to, Article 760, "Fire Alarm Systems." C. Install fire alarm system in accordance with the reviewed fire alarm system Shop Drawings. Where field modifications of layout are necessary, obtain prior approval from the fire alarm system vendor’s qualified fire alarm system designer. D. Arrange equipment cabinets, wire-ways, and conduits with adequate clearances to facilitate access for inspection, maintenance, and component replacement. E. Install equipment cabinets with top and bottom of cabinets not more than 72 inches above finished floor and not less than 12 inches above finished floor, respectively. F. Install battery cabinets with top and bottom of cabinets not more than 48 inches above finished floor and not less than 12 inches above finished floor, respectively. G. Install fire alarm system modules and auxiliary components in accessible locations with bottom of modules and components not less than 12 inches H. Install equipment cabinets with user displays and/or controls including fire alarm control unit nodes and remote annunciators with displays and/or controls at natural user height. I. Flush-mount equipment cabinets/back-boxes not located in designated equipment rooms. J. Flush-mount wall- and ceiling-mounted initiating devices, modules, indicators, and notification appliances unless otherwise indicated. K. Surface-mount equipment cabinets/back-boxes located in designated equipment rooms. L. Surface-mount initiating devices, modules, indicators, and notification appliances installed on concrete or masonry unit walls. M. Surface-mount initiating devices installed to the underside of building structure. N. Surface-mount or pendant-mount notification appliances installed to the underside of structure. O. Install ceiling mounted devices, modules, indicators and notification appliances in alignment with adjacent ceiling fixtures and centered within ceiling tiles. P. Install wall mounted devices, modules, indicators and notification appliances in alignment with adjacent switches and wall fixtures. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 15 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Q. Do not install addressable devices in areas subject to temperature extremes. Use conventional initiating devices supervised by addressable monitor modules remotely located within an adjacent conditioned space. R. Weather-proof – RESERVED. S. Storefront/Curtainwall Installation – RESERVED. T. Pedestal Installation – RESERVED. 3.6 CABLE AND PATHWAY INSTALLATION A. Comply with Division 28. 3.7 INSTALLATION FOR SURVIVABILITY A. Where NFPA 72 Survivability Level 2 or 3 pathways are indicated or required, install fire alarm system cables and pathways within 2-hr fire resistance rated enclosures or comply with Division 28 for “Fire Resistive Pathway Installation”. B. Install control units, amplifiers, power supplies, junction boxes, terminal cabinets, or similar components within dedicated 2-hr fire resistance rated fire alarm system equipment rooms where the components originate or comprise a portion of a NFPA 72 Survivability Level 2 or 3 pathway. 3.8 SYSTEM SPOT-TYPE FIRE DETECTOR INSTALLATION A. Locate spot-type fire detectors in a manner that readily permits access – without the need of a lift - from the floor below for detector inspection, testing, and maintenance. B. Install fire detectors only after all dust and debris producing work is completed. C. Maintain factory provided detector covers on fire detectors until fire alarm system is approved for closeout and turnover. D. Install Remote Alarm Indicators in a visible location for each group of fire detector located within a normally locked room or area. E. Spot-type Smoke- and Heat-Detector Locations and Spacing: 1. Comply with Drawings, and; 2. Comply with NFPA 72 "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors". 3. Comply with NFPA 72 "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors". 3.9 INSTALLATION OF AIR DISTRIBUTION DUCTWORK DETECTORS A. Comply with NFPA 72, International Mechanical Code, and NFPA 90A. B. Install duct smoke detectors in accordance with manufacturer’s installation guidelines. C. Locate duct detectors in a manner that readily permits access for detector inspection, testing, and maintenance. D. Plan and coordinate duct detector locations and mounting requirements with Division 23 prior to ductwork fabrication and installation; show coordinated duct detector layout on Coordination Drawings and Shop Drawings. E. Furnish duct detector housings and ductwork attachments for installation under Division 23. Coordinate requirements for ductwork penetrations, attachments, sealant, and access panels with Division 23. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 16 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 F. Do not install duct detectors, housings, or sampling tubes in ductwork until all dust and debris producing work is complete and air distribution system cleaning and startup is complete. Duct detector housings may be attached to ductwork and connected to SLC/IDC prior to air distribution system startup provided they are protected from dust and debris using factory covers. G. Air Distribution Equipment Shutdown Applications: Use sampling-tube type system duct smoke detectors. 1. Supply Air Systems: Locate duct smoke detectors downstream of fans and filters. 2. Return Air Systems: Locate duct smoke detectors upstream of filters, exhaust air connections, outdoor air connections or decontamination equipment. H. Fire/Smoke Damper Control Applications: Use sampling-tube type system duct smoke detectors. 1. Locate duct smoke detectors within 5 ft of the associated damper. 2. Locate and support duct smoke detectors in accordance with manufacturer’s installation guidelines. 3.10 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE INSTALLATION A. Comply with Drawings and NFPA 72 “Notification Appliances”. B. Wall-mounted Audible Notification Appliances: Install with top of appliance not less than 6 inches below the finished ceiling and not less than 90 inches below the finished floor. C. Wall-mounted Visible and -Combination Audible/Visible Notification Appliances: Install with top of appliance not less than 6 inches below the finished ceiling and the entire appliance strobe lens not less than 80 inches and not more than 96 inches above the finished floor. D. Install all wall-mounted notification appliances with top of appliance at a common elevation with respect to finished floor. E. Install exterior flashing beacons such that they are clearly visible from the primary fire department vehicle access route; and as indicated on Drawings. Use a dedicated NAC for each beacon. F. Install exterior alarm bells adjacent to each sprinkler fire department inlet connection; and as indicated on Drawings. Use a dedicated NAC for each bell. 3.11 CONNECTIONS AND INTERFACES A. Make connections to premises building systems and components via addressable interface modules. Include necessary interface modules, relays, wiring, resistors, and components as required to achieve the input/output sequence of operations performance criteria indicated by the Drawings. B. Coordinate voltage and current ratings of connected components such that connections and interfaces operate within listed limitations. Use interposing relays where connected loads exceed rating of addressable interface modules. C. Arrange connections and interfaces such that circuits are monitored for integrity as required by NFPA 72. D. Interface to premises systems and components requiring fire alarm supervision of status with addressable interface monitor modules. E. Interface to premises Preaction Sprinkler solenoids and/or Fire Extinguishing System actuators with addressable interface control modules listed for releasing service. Install a key operated Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 17 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 maintenance disconnect switch in the releasing circuit to permit fire alarm system component testing without solenoid/actuator release. Operation of the maintenance disconnect switch be monitored by the fire alarm system as a supervisory condition. F. Interface to premises systems and components requiring Emergency Control Function Interface with addressable interface relay modules installed within 36 inches of the interface wiring termination point. G. Each addressable interface relay module used for Emergency Control Function Interface shall include one (1) set of spare contacts for monitoring connection to the premises Building Management System, Security System, or similar secondary premises system. H. For each HVAC air distribution unit, coordinate with Division 23 for exact interface requirements, quantity of fan drives, and detailed sequencing for proper shutdown of the associated air distribution equipment. I. Supervising Station – RESERVED. 3.12 NON-FIRE EMERGENCY SIGNALING INSTALLATION A. Install non-fire emergency alarm initiating devices and notification appliances as indicated by the Drawings for indication of the following non-fire emergency signaling applications: 1. Emergency (Hazmat) Alarms. B. Set notification appliance audible signals to slow whoop setting or other AHJ approved signal that is distinct from fire alarm temporal 3 evacuation signal. C. Install signage at each manual non-fire emergency alarm pull station and non-fire emergency notification appliance indicating nature of associated hazard along with Owner and AHJ approved instructions for emergency procedures. 3.13 NEC CLASSIFIED HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS A. Comply with NFPA 70 and Division 26. 3.14 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with Division 26. B. Label addressable initiating devices and bases and notification appliances. Comply with Drawings. C. Install framed instructions adjacent to the fire alarm control unit. Installed instructions shall be typewritten computer printout instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions. 3.15 GROUNDING A. Comply with Division 26. B. Comply with fire alarm system manufacturer installation guidelines for grounding. C. Ground fire alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to fire alarm control unit Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 18 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Devices installed but not yet placed in service shall be protected from construction dust, debris, dirt, moisture, and damage according to manufacturer's written storage instructions. B. Devices placed in service before all other trades have completed cleanup shall be replaced. C. Field inspections and testing shall be performed by fire alarm system manufacturer’s factoryauthorized service technicians. D. Smoke Control Systems: In addition to Div. 28 fire alarm system inspection and testing requirements, perform additional inspections and integrated functional testing as required to support smoke control system Special Inspections commissioning. E. Prepare a typewritten computer-output Test Plan that clearly establishes the scope of fire alarm and signaling system testing. Include at a minimum testing methods, personnel, duration, planned impairments, and required coordination for integrated testing of emergency control function interfaces. F. Functional field tests shall be witnessed by the Construction Manager (CM) and their designees; provide notifications a minimum of two (2) weeks in advance. G. Acceptance field testing shall be witnessed by the CM, their designees, and authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ); provide notifications a minimum of two (2) weeks in advance. H. Perform visual inspections in accordance with fire alarm system manufacturer recommendations and NFPA 72 for Initial Acceptance Inspections. Correct deficiencies. I. Document inspections by completing applicable sections of the NFPA 72 “System Record of Inspection and Testing” report. J. Provide written notifications for functional field tests; include Test Plan. K. Perform functional testing in accordance with accordance with fire alarm system manufacturer recommendations and NFPA 72 for “Initial Acceptance Testing”. Correct deficiencies. Repeat functional testing including retesting of unaffected components in accordance with NFPA 72 for “Reacceptance Testing”. L. Document 100 percent satisfactory functional tests by completing remaining sections of the NFPA 72 “System Record of Inspection and Testing” report. M. Submit NFPA 72 “Statement of Completion” and completed NFPA 72 “System Record of Inspection and Testing” report. N. Provide written notifications for acceptance field tests; include Test Plan, NFPA 72 “Statement of Completion”, NFPA 72 “System Record of Inspection and Testing” report, and NFPA 72 “System Record of Completion”. O. Perform acceptance field testing. Demonstrate system operation to the satisfaction of the AHJ. Correct AHJ noted deficiencies. Repeat functional testing including retesting of unaffected components in accordance with NFPA 72 for “Reacceptance Testing”. Amend NFPA 72 “System Record of Inspection and Testing” report, and NFPA 72 “System Record of Completion”. P. Place system into normal operating service without system faults or outstanding work. 3.17 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include twelve (12) months' full maintenance by skilled employees of manufacturer's designated service organization. Include preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering-Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00/29313.00 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 19 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. 1. Perform visual inspections at intervals required by NFPA 72 Chapter “Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance”. 2. Perform tests at intervals required by NFPA 72 Chapter “Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance”. 3.18 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT A. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for two years. B. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgrade shall include new or revised licenses for use of software. 1. Provide 30 days' notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system and to allow Owner to upgrade computer equipment if necessary. 3.19 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire alarm system. END OF SECTION H:\29313.00\DOC\SPEC\2018_11-30_CD\283111_DIGITA L ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM.DOC Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 EARTHWORK 31 0000 -1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 31 00 00 – EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. The Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the earthwork as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Lay out and stake all lines and levels. 2. Protection and safeguards. 3. Earth open excavation for pavement subgrades. 4. Trench earth excavation for utilities. 5. Backfilling utility trenches. 6. Embankment for pavement subgrade. 7. Aggregate base course for asphalt and concrete pavement. 8. Disposal of unsuitable and excess excavated materials. 9. Preparation of sub-grade for walks, pavements and landscape areas to receive topsoil, seeding, and planting. 10. Dewatering. 11. Shoring and bracing. 12. Protection of adjacent existing structures, utilities and other facilities against damage from the Work. 13. Explosives to assist rock removal. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 03, Division 31, Division 32 and Division 33 Sections. B. Storm Sewerage – Section 33 40 00. 1.4 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that survey benchmark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. 1.5 REFERENCES A. ASTM D6938-17 - Standard Test Methods for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and SoilAggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). B. 16 NYCRR Part 753 – Protection of Underground Facilities. C. New York State Department of Transportation - Standard Specifications, Construction and Materials 2018 edition. 1.6 DEFINITIONS A. Trench Rock Excavation: Removal of solid mineral material or obstruction that cannot be excavated with a modern track-mounted power shovel equivalent to Caterpillar Model No. 318C L Hydraulic Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 EARTHWORK 31 0000 -2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 Excavator, and rated at not less than 125 HP net flywheel power and 45,500 pound draw-bar pull and equipped with a short stick and 42 inch wide short tip radius rock bucket rated at 0.92 cubic yard capacity. Trenches in excess of 10 feet width are defined as unclassified excavation. B. Unclassified Excavation: Removal of obstructions visible on the surface, topsoil, earth, and all other subsoil materials encountered that are not defined as trench rock. C. Subgrade Surface: The undisturbed earth or the compacted soil layer immediately below granular subbase, base of structure, or topsoil materials. D. Structure: Buildings, foundations, slabs, tanks, manholes, or other constructed or manufactured stationary features occurring above or below ground surface. E. Utility: Any buried pipe or conduit. F. Pavement: Any compacted granular, asphalt concrete or portland cement concrete section, either existing or proposed, constructed above the subgrade surface for the purpose of supporting pedestrian or vehicular traffic. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Submit to Owner a signed fill agreement or property owner release for deposit of any unsuitable and excess excavation materials disposed of off site. B. Comply with 29 CFR Part 1926, OSHA, Subpart P, Excavations for work of this section. C. Conform to State and local codes for explosive disintegration of rock and to NFPA 495 for handling explosive materials. 1.8 SUBMITTALS A. Materials Source: Submit name and address of imported aggregate materials suppliers. Provide materials from same source throughout the Work. Change of source requires Engineer approval. B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with the following with requirements indicated: 1. Classification according to ASTM D2487 of each on-site or borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. 2. Laboratory compaction curve test results according to ASTM D698 (Standard Proctor) for Structural Fill and Base Course materials. 3. Laboratory sieve analysis test results according to ASTM C136 for all imported granular materials. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Locate, identify, and protect utilities that remain, from damage. Be assured as to the location and position of gas, water, sewer, electric, telephone services and mains, culverts and other conduits that may be affected by the construction and notify the respective authorities in charge of same of the work in the vicinity. CALL Dig Safely New York (former Underground Facilities Protective Organization) 811 BEFORE STARTING EXCAVATION OPERATIONS. The Contractor will be held strictly responsible for the cost of repairs or replacement of all utilities and other conduits damaged directly by his forces or indirectly by failure to provide proper protection or support of the same. The Contractor will also be held responsible for damages to others caused by utility lines damaged either directly or indirectly by his operations. Comply with all rules and regulations cited in 16 NYCRR Part 753 – Protection of Underground Facilities. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 EARTHWORK 31 0000 -3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. If uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities are encountered during excavation, consult utility authority and Owner immediately for direction. Cooperate with Owner and utility authority to keep their respective services and facilities in operation. C. Dust Control 1. Use all means necessary to control dust on or near the work. 2. Thoroughly moisten all surfaces as required to prevent dust being a nuisance to the public, neighbors, and performance of other work on the site. D. Protection 1. Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with warning lights. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide the necessary safeguards to prevent accidents, to avoid all unnecessary hazards and protect the public, the work and the property at all times, including Saturdays, Sundays and holidays. 3. Be responsible for any and all damages which may arise or occur to any party whatsoever by reason of the neglect in providing proper lights, guards, barriers, or any other safeguards to prevent damage to property, life and limb. 4. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout and other hazards created by earthwork operations. E. Use of explosives is not permitted. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 AGGREGATE MATERIALS A. Structural Fill: Bank-run sand and gravel conforming to the following limits of gradation: Percent Passing by Weight Sieve Size 100 4 inch 30 to 95 1/4-inch 10 to 70 No. 40 0 to10 No. 200 B. Bedding Stone: Clean, sound, durable, sharp-angles fragments of crushed stone of uniform quality and conforming to NYSDOT Specification 703-0201, Size Designation No. 1 or 1A. C. Drainage Stone: Clean, washed, sound, durable, sharp-angled fragments of crushed stone of uniform quality and conforming to NYSDOT Specification 703-0201, Size Designation No. 2. D. Cushion Sand: Clean, hard, durable, uncoated particles, free from lumps of clay and all deleterious substances conforming to NYSDOT Specification 703-06 and the following limits of gradation when dry: Percent Passing by Weight Sieve Size 100 1/4 inch 0 to 35 No. 50 0 to 10 No. 100 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 EARTHWORK 31 0000 -4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 E. Select Fill: Imported or excavated on-site sand, loam, or clay material free from organic material and debris. Unfrozen and containing only small amounts of rock not exceeding four inches in the largest dimension. 2.2 GEOTEXTILE MATERIALS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Propex Geosolutions 2. Carthage Mills 3. TenCate Geosynthetics America B. Drainage Fabric: Nonwoven geotextile, specifically manufactured as a drainage geotextile; similar to Mirafi 140N; made from polyolefins, polyesters, or polyamides; and with the following certifiable property values: Property Minimum Value Test Method CBR Puncture Strength 310 lbs. ASTM D6241 Trapezoid Tear Strength 50 lbs. ASTM D4533 Grab Tensile Strength 120 lbs. ASTM D4632 Apparent Opening Size (AOS) Flow Rate 70 US Sieve 135 gal/min/ft2 ASTM D4751 ASTM D4491 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying, underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility. Provide tape colors to utilities as follows: 1. Red: Electric 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam and dangerous materials 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications 4. Blue: Water systems 5. Green: Sewer systems PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum. Layout the Work in accordance with baseline data shown on Drawings. B. Protect vegetation, lawns, and other features remaining as a portion of final landscaping. C. Protect all temporary benchmarks, control points, property monuments, existing structures and fences, from excavation equipment and vehicular traffic. D. Saw-cut existing pavements in straight lines in advance of excavation. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 EARTHWORK 31 0000 -5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Verify that grades and elevations of pavement subgrade are correct prior to requesting proof rolling observation. B. Provide minimum of 48 hour notice to Engineer for proof rolling the pavement subgrade. Verify that Engineer has observed proof rolling and that testing agency has completed compaction tests prior to placing aggregate courses. C. Conduct survey and document conditions of buildings near locations of rock removal prior to blasting. Photograph existing conditions identifying existing irregularities. 3.3 SITE CLEARING A. Clear area within existing right-of-way and proposed easements of brush and undergrowth. Cut flush to grade. B. Cut trees indicated on Drawings to be removed. Remove and dispose of stumps, main root ball, butt logs and limbs. C. Professionally prune damaged limbs of trees, shrubs, and bushes designated to remain. D. Tree protection: All trees adjacent to construction shall be protected from branch, trunk and root damage by providing the maximum offsets possible between the waterline and the tree. Additionally, branches shall be moved and tied out of the construction zone for the duration of construction activities. Any branches or roots cut, broken, severed or damaged shall be clearly pruned to the next major branch, trunk or large root. Every effort to minimize compaction by reducing or eliminating the movement of heavy equipment near trees shall be made. 3.4 AGGREGATE STOCKPILING A. Stockpile materials on site adjacent to areas of work. B. Stockpile in sufficient quantities to meet project schedule and requirements. C. Separate differing materials with dividers or stockpile apart to prevent mixing. D. Direct surface water away from stockpile site so as to prevent erosion or deterioration of materials. 3.5 EXCAVATION A. Excavation is unclassified and includes excavation to subgrade elevations indicated, regardless of character of materials and obstructions encountered. B. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimension without specific direction of Geotechnical Engineer. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Geotechnical Engineer, shall be at Contractor's expense. 1. Under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls, fill unauthorized excavation by extending indicated bottom elevation of footing or base to excavation bottom, without altering required top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used to bring elevations to proper position, when acceptable to Geotechnical Engineer. 2. Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations of same classifications, unless otherwise directed by Geotechnical Engineer. C. Additional Excavation: When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, notify Geotechnical Engineer who will make an inspection of conditions. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 EARTHWORK 31 0000 -6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. If unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at required subgrade elevations, carry excavations deeper and replace excavated material as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer. Excavation of unsuitable material must extend laterally beyond the edge of the footing or slab for a distance equal to or greater than the required depth of the excavation. 2. Removal of unsuitable material and its replacement as directed will be paid on basis of contract conditions relative to changes in work. D. Perform excavation with drip line of large trees to remain by hand, and protect the root system from damage or dryout to the greatest extent possible. Maintain moist condition for root system and cover exposed roots with burlap. Paint root cuts of one (1) diameter and larger with emulsified asphalt tree paint. E. Rock Excavation: 1. Excavate and remove rock by mechanical method. Utilize hydraulic ramming equipment to fracture rock. 2. Provide uniform surface for placement of structure or utility bedding material. 3. Excavate to 6 inches below pipe barrel invert and a minimum 6 inches beneath outside diameter of bell and spigot pipe joints. 4. Correct areas of utility trench over-excavated with compacted bedding material. 5. Provide bedding material of the type and depth specified for the utility and in accordance with the Drawings. 6. Remove all excavated rock material from the site. Dispose of excavated rock material within the Town of Dryden at a site designated by the Owner. F. Stability of Excavations: Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and ordinances having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of backfilling. G. Shoring and Bracing: Provide materials for shoring and bracing, such as sheet piling, uprights, stringers, and cross braces, in good serviceable condition. 1. Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply with local codes and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period excavations will be open. Carry down shoring and bracing as excavation progresses. H. Dewatering: Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area. 1. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations. Maintain water levels below base of excavation to control hydrostatic pressure on subgrade soils. 2. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversion outside excavation limits to convey rain water and water removed from excavations to collecting or run-off areas. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches. Provide temporary erosion and sediment control. 3. Do not discharge sediment laden water into the adjoining storm or sanitary sewer system or open swales. Pump sediment laden water from excavations into a portable sediment tank or a high Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 EARTHWORK 31 0000 -7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 strength, non-woven geotextile fabric bag. Size portable sediment tanks in accordance with the New York Guidelines for Urban Erosion and Sediment Control. I. Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where directed until required for backfill or fill. Place, grade and shape stockpiles for proper drainage. 1. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of trees indicated to remain. 2. Dispose of excess soil material and waste materials not re-used. 3.6 OPEN EXCAVATION A. Excavate topsoil from areas to be further excavated or re-graded. B. Stockpile topsoil in area designated on-site to be reused. C. Excavate subsoil required to accommodate site and roadway grades. D. Machine slope banks to angle of repose or less, until shored. E. Grade top perimeter of excavation to prevent surface water from draining into excavation. F. Notify Geotechnical Engineer of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected Work in area until notified to resume work. G. Correct areas over-excavated with structural fill. H. Pile excavated material in manner that will not endanger the Work and that will avoid obstructing drives, temporary ditches or natural water courses, or create erosion or landslide hazards. I. Remove all excess excavated materials from the site. 3.7 TRENCH EXCAVATION A. Excavate topsoil from trench area to be further excavated. B. Stockpile topsoil to be reused in a designated area on-site. C. Excavate subsoil to full depth and grade to accommodate the laying of utilities and setting structures. D. Cut trenches sufficiently wide to enable installation of trench box, shoring, forms, utilities, and to allow inspection. Provide ample trench width to permit placing of fittings and thrust blocking. Maximum and minimum trench width for utilities in accordance with Drawings. E. Provide uniform surface of solid and undisturbed subgrade for placement of utility or bedding material. Hand trim excavation for bell and spigot pipe joints. Remove loose matter. F. Excavate to depth required below pipe invert. G. Remove ledge rock, boulders, and large stones greater than 6 inch diameter, to provide clearance of 6 inches below and 8 inches on each side of all utility pipes and fittings. H. Correct areas of utility trench over-excavated with compacted structural fill. I. Provide bedding material of the type and depth specified for the utility and in accordance with the Drawings. J. Remove all excess excavated materials from the site. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 EARTHWORK 31 0000 -8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.8 BACKFILLING TRENCHES AND STRUCTURES A. Backfill excavated areas under existing and proposed pavements, including driveways to subgrade elevations with structural fill. Place backfill from top of bedding material to pavement subgrade in maximum 8 inch lifts, each lift compacted at or above 95 percent maximum density. B. Backfill excavated areas adjoining structures up to subgrade elevation with structural fill unless shown otherwise on Drawings. Place backfill in maximum 6 inch lifts, each lift compacted at or above 95 percent maximum density. C. Backfill excavated areas under lawns or improved areas to topsoil subgrade with select fill. Place backfill from top of bedding material to topsoil subgrade in maximum 12 inch lifts, each lift compacted at or above 90 percent maximum density. D. Employ placement and compaction methods that do not disturb or damage adjacent work. E. Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill material to attain required compaction density. F. Do not backfill with frozen material or where the material already in the excavation is frozen. G. Remove surplus backfill materials from site. 3.9 PREPARATION OF SUBGRADE FOR LANDSCAPED AREAS A. Limit preparation to areas that will be planted in immediate future. B. Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 4 inches. Remove stones larger than 1-1/2 inches in any dimension and sticks, roots, and rubbish. C. Provide subgrade with an even, smooth surface ready to receive topsoil. 3.10 COMPACTION A. General: Control soil compaction during construction providing minimum percentage of density specified for each area classification indicated below. B. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry density as determined in accordance with ASTM D698. 1. Landscape areas: Compact top twelve (12) inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material to ninety-two (90) percent maximum dry density. C. Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade or layer or soil material, to prevent free water appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction operations. 1. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit compaction to specified density. a. Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compaction may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry. Assist drying by discing, harrowing or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to within + 2% of its optimum moisture content. 3.11 DISPOSAL OF UNSUITABLE AND EXCESS EXCAVATED MATERIAL A. Load, remove, and dispose of all unsuitable and excess excavated material. Cover all loads leaving the site and using public highways. B. Construction debris, trash, and any other objectionable solid waste regulated by 6 NYCRR Part 360, will not be permitted to be buried on the project site. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 EARTHWORK 31 0000 -9 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 3.12 TOLERANCES A. Excavation for Utility Structures and Trenches: Within plus or minus 2 inches. B. Top Surface of Backfilling: Within plus or minus 1 inch. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Compaction testing of embankment fill, aggregate base course and backfill materials will be performed by Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer in accordance with ASTM D698-12e2, Standard Proctor. B. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace, compact, and retest. C. Seal compacted fill surfaces at the end of each construction day. Slope grade such that surface water will not pond adjacent to original excavation. 3.14 PROTECTION A. Protect excavations by methods required to prevent cave-in or loose soil from falling into excavation. B. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath structures, from freezing. C. Protect, support and maintain all underground and surface structures to remain and other obstructions encountered. Restore structures which may have been disturbed. D. Encase all existing underground gas, electric, telephone, and cable utilities exposed during construction in cushion sand during backfilling of excavated areas. E. Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, reshape and compact to required density prior to further construction. F. Where settling is measurable or observable at excavated areas during warranty period, remove surface, add backfill material, compact and replace surface treatment. END OF SECTION 31 00 00 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 PLANTING SOIL 32 9100 -1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 329100 – PLANTING SOIL PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The scope of work includes all labor, materials, tools, supplies, equipment, facilities, transportation, and services necessary for and incidental to performing all operations in connection with the furnishing, delivery, and installation of Planting Soil and/or the modification of existing site soil for use as Planting Soil, as shown on the drawings and as specified herein. B. The scope of work in this section includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Locate, purchase, deliver and install Imported Planting Soil and soil amendments. 2. Harvest and stockpile existing site soils suitable for Planting Soil. 3. Modify existing stockpiled site soil. a. Modify existing site soil in place for use as Planting Soil. b. Install existing or modified existing soil for use as Planting Soil. 4. Fine grading Planting Soil. 5. Testing to be done at Cornell Soil Health Lab or approved equivalent. 1.2 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Shall consist of specifications, general conditions, and the drawings. The intent of these documents is to include all labor, materials, and services necessary for the proper execution of the work. The documents are to be considered as one. Whatever is called for by any parts shall be as binding as if called for in all parts. 1.3 RELATED DOCUMENTS AND REFERENCES A. Related Documents: 1. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including general and supplementary conditions and Division I specifications, apply to work of this section. 2. Related Specification Section a. Section 310000 Earthwork 1.4 CORRECTION OF WORK A. The Contractor shall re-execute any work that fails to conform to the requirements of the contract and shall remedy defects due to faulty materials or workmanship upon written notice from the Owner’s Representative, at the soonest possible time that can be coordinated with other work and seasonal weather demands. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. See the contract General Conditions for policy and procedures related to submittals. B. Product data and certificates: For each type of manufactured product, submit data and certificates that the product meets the specification requirements, signed by the product manufacturer, and complying with the following: 1. Product Data: Submit manufacturers or supplier’s product data and literature or certified analysis for standard products and bulk materials, complying with testing requirements and referenced standards. 2. Products: Products include Imported Topsoil; Compost; Coarse Sand; Fertilizer, Biological, and Other Amendments; Existing Soil; and Modified Existing Soil. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 PLANTING SOIL 32 9100 -2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Soil testing for Imported Topsoil, Existing Topsoil, and existing site soil to be modified for Planting Soil and Planting Soil Mixes. 1. Topsoil, existing site soil and Planting Soil Mix testing: Submit soil test analysis report for each sample of Topsoil, existing site soil and Planting Soil from an approved soil-testing laboratory to show physical, biological and chemical soil conditions( Cornell Soil Health Test or equivalent) and where indicated in Part 2 of the specification as follows: a. Submit Topsoil, Planting Soil, Compost, and Coarse Sand for testing at least 8 weeks before scheduled installation of Planting Soil Mixes. Submit Planting Soil Mix test no more than 2 weeks after the approval of the Topsoil, Compost and Sand. Do not submit Planting Soil Mixes to the testing laboratory for testing until all Topsoil, Compost and Sand have been approved. b. If tests fail to meet the specifications, obtain other sources of material, retest and resubmit until accepted by the Owner’s Representative. c. All soil testing will be at the expense of the Contractor. 2. Provide a particle size analysis (percentage dry weight) and USDA soil texture analysis. Soil testing of Planting Soil Mixes shall also include USDA gradation (percentage) of gravel, sand, and silt and clay. 3. Provide the following other soil properties: a. pH. b. Percent organic content by oven dried weight. 1.6 OBSERVATION OF THE WORK A. The Owner’s Representative may observe the work at any time. They may remove samples of materials for conformity to specifications. Rejected materials shall be immediately removed from the site and replaced at the Contractor's expense. The Contractor shall pay the cost of testing materials not meeting specifications. 1. The Owner’s Representative may utilize the Contractor’s penetrometer and moisture meter at any time to check soil compaction and moisture. B. The Owner’s Representative shall be informed of the progress of the work so the work may be observed at the following key times in the construction process. The Owner’s Representative shall be afforded sufficient time to schedule visit to the site. Failure of the Owner’s Representative to make field observations shall not relieve the Contractor from meeting all the requirements of this specification. 1. EXISTING SOIL CONDITIONS REVIEW: Prior to the start of any soil modification that will utilize or modify the existing soil. 2. EXCAVATION REVIEW: Observe each area of excavation prior to the installation of any Planting Soil. 3. DRAIN LINE INSTALLATION REVIEW: Upon completion of the installation of drain lines and prior to the installation of any Planting Soil 4. COMPLETION of SOIL MODIFICATIONS REVIEW: Upon completion of all soil modification and installation of planting soil. 5. COMPLETION OF FINE GRADING AND SURFACE SOIL MODIFICATIONS REVIEW: Upon completion of all surface soil modifications and fine grading but prior to the installation of shrubs, ground covers, or lawns. 1.7 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. Schedule a pre-construction meeting with the Owner’s Representative at least seven (7) days before beginning work to review any questions the Contractor may have regarding the work, administrative procedures during construction and project work schedule. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Soil testing laboratory qualifications: Cornell Soil Health Testing Laboratory or an approved equal independent Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 PLANTING SOIL 32 9100 -3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 laboratory, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in USDA agricultural soil testing, Planting Soil Mixes, and the types of tests to be performed. Geotechnical engineering testing labs shall not be used. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 TOPSOIL A. Topsoil definition: Fertile, friable soil containing less than 5% total volume of the combination of subsoil, refuse, roots larger than 1 inch diameter, heavy, sticky or stiff clay, stones larger than 2 inches in diameter, noxious weed seeds, sticks, brush, litter, or any substances deleterious to plant growth. The percent (%) of the above objects shall be controlled by source selection not by screening the soil. Topsoil shall be suitable for the germination of seeds and the support of vegetative growth. Imported Topsoil shall not contain weed seeds in quantities that cause noticeable weed infestations in the final planting beds. Imported Topsoil shall meet the following physical and chemical criteria: 1. Soil texture: USDA loam, sandy clay loam or sandy loam with clay content between 15 and 25%. and a combined clay/silt content of no more than 55%. 2. pH value shall be between 5.5 and 8.0. 3. Percent organic matter (OM): 3.0-5.0%, by dry weight. 2.2 COMPOST A. Compost for amending planting media shall be a stable, humus-like material produced from the aerobic decomposition and curing of organic biosolids residues. The compost shall be a dark brown to black color and be capable of supporting plant growth with appropriate management practices in conjunction with addition of fertilizer and other amendments as applicable, with no visible free water or dust, with no unpleasant odor, and meeting the following criteria as reported by laboratory tests. 2.3 DRY SCREENED SAND A. Dry Screened Sand: ASTM C33 sand with effective size between 0.25mm and 1.0mm. All sand to pass ¼inch sieve. 2.4 FERTILIZER, LIME, AND OTHER AMENDMENTS A. As recommended by Cornell Soil Health Test. B. Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural limestone containing a minimum 80 percent calcium carbonate equivalent and as follows: 1. Class: Class T, with a minimum 99 percent passing through No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve and a minimum 75 percent passing through No. 60 (0.25-mm) sieve. C. Provide manufacturer’s literature and material certification that the product meets the requirements. 2.5 TOPSOIL MIX A. Cornell standard planting soil mix is approximately a1:1:1 ratio by volume of loam soil, sand and organic matter. B. Uniformly mix ingredients by windrowing/tilling on an approved hard surface area. Organic matter shall be maintained moist, not wet, during mixing. Amendments shall not be added unless approved to extent and quantity by the Owners Representative and additional tests have been conducted to verify type and quantity of amendment is acceptable. Percentages of components, unless otherwise noted, will be established upon completion of individual test results for components of the various mixes. C. After the Soil Scientist determines component percentages, each planting soil mix shall be tested for physical and chemical analysis. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 PLANTING SOIL 32 9100 -4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 D. Topsoil shall be created from combinations of Subsoil mixed with varying amounts of organic amendment. All organic matter contents shall be determined on a dry weight basis. 1. Sand: 60 -75% by weight. 2. Organic Matter: 4 -8% by weight. 3. Silt and Clay: 20 - 40% by weight. Silt content must be less than 3 times the clay content 2.8.8 ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS A. The Owner’s Representative will inspect the work upon the request of the installing contractor. Request for inspection shall be received by the Owner’s Representative at least 5 days before the anticipated date of inspection. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 SITE EXAMINATION A. Prior to installation of Planting Soil, examine site to confirm that existing conditions are satisfactory for the work of this section to proceed. 1. Confirm that the subgrade is at the proper elevation and compacted as required. Subgrade elevations shall slope toward the under drain lines as shown on the drawings. 2. Confirm that surface all areas to be filled with Planting Soil are free of construction debris, refuse, compressible or biodegradable materials, stones greater than 2 inches diameter, soil crusting films of silt or clay that reduces or stops drainage from the Planting Soil into the subsoil; and/or standing water. Remove unsuitable material from the site. 3. Confirm that no adverse drainage conditions are present. 4. Confirm that no conditions are present which are detrimental to plant growth. 5. Confirm that utility work, if any, has been completed per the drawings. 6. Confirm that irrigation work, if any, which is shown to be installed below prepared soil levels, has been completed. B. If unsatisfactory conditions are encountered, notify the Owner’s Representative immediately to determine corrective action before proceeding. 3.2 SITE PREPARATION A. Excavate to the proposed subgrade. Maintain all required angles of repose of the adjacent materials as shown on the drawings or as required by this specification. Do not over excavate compacted subgrades of adjacent pavement or structures. Maintain a supporting 1:1 side slope of compacted subgrade material along the edges of all paving and structures where the bottom of the paving or structure is above the bottom elevation of the excavated planting area. B. Remove all construction debris and material including any construction materials from the subgrade. C. Confirm that the subgrade is at the proper elevation and compacted as required. Subgrade elevations shall slope approximately parallel to the finished grade and/or toward the subsurface drain lines as shown on the drawings. 3.3 TOPSOIL AND TOPSOIL MIX INSTALLATION A. Prior to installing any Topsoil or Topsoil Mix, the Owner’s Representative shall approve the condition of the subgrade. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 PLANTING SOIL 32 9100 -5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. In areas of soil installation above existing subsoil, scarify the subgrade material prior to installing Planting Soil. 1. Scarify the subsoil of the subgrade with the teeth of the backhoe or loader bucket, tiller or other suitable device. 2. Immediately install the Planting Soil. Protect the loosened area from traffic. DO NOT allow the loosened subgrade to become compacted. 3. In the event that the loosened area becomes overly compacted, loosen the area again prior to installing the Planting Soil. C. Installed Planting Soil Mix and the re-spread existing soil shall have a soil density through the required depth of the installed layers of soil. 3.4 OVER-COMPACTION REDUCTION A. Any soil that becomes compacted to a density greater than the specified density shall be dug up and reinstalled. This requirement includes compaction caused by other sub-contractors after the Planting Soil is installed and approved. B. Surface roto tilling shall not be considered adequate to reduce over compaction at levels 6 inches or greater below finished grade. 3.5 FINE GRADING A. The Owner’s Representative shall approve all rough and fine grading. B. Grade the finish surface of all planted areas to meet the grades shown on the drawings, allowing for settling. C. Utilize hand equipment, small garden tractors with rakes, or small garden tractors with buckets with teeth for fine grading to keep surface rough without further compaction. Do not use the flat bottom of a loader bucket to fine grade, as it will cause the finished grade to become overly smooth and or slightly compressed. D. Provide for positive drainage from all areas toward the existing inlets, drainage structures and or the edges of planting beds. Adjust grades as directed to reflect actual constructed field conditions of paving, wall and inlet elevations. Notify the Owner’s Representative in the event that conditions make it impossible to achieve positive drainage. E. Provide smooth, rounded transitions between slopes of different gradients and direction. Modify the grade so that the finish grade -- before adding mulch and after the soil has settled -- is one or two inches below all paving surfaces or as directed by the drawings. F. Fill all dips and remove any bumps in the overall plane of the slope. The tolerance for dips and bumps in shrub and ground cover planting areas shall be a 2 inch deviation from the plane in 10 feet. The tolerance for dips and bumps in lawn areas shall be a 1 inch deviation from the plane in 10 feet. 3.6 CLEAN-UP A. During installation, keep the site free of trash, pavements reasonably clean and work area in an orderly condition at the end of each day. Remove trash and debris in containers from the site no less than once a week. No debris is to be buried on-site. 1. Immediately clean up any spilled or tracked soil, fuel, oil, trash or debris deposited by the Contractor from all surfaces within the project or on public right of ways and neighboring property. 2. Equipment and vehicles shall not be washed on-site. B. Once installation is complete, wash all soil from pavements and other structures. Ensure that mulch is confined to planting beds and that all tags and flagging tape are removed from the site. The Owner’s Representative seals are to remain on the trees and removed at the end of the warranty period. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 PLANTING SOIL 32 9100 -6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 1. Make all repairs to grades, ruts, and damage to the work or other work at the site. Other work to include compaction relief. 2. Remove and dispose of all excess Planting Soil, subsoil, mulch, plants, packaging, and other material brought to the site by the Contractor. END OF SECTION 32 29100 Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 STORM SEWERAGE 334000 - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 SECTION 334000 - STORM SEWERAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Storm sewer piping, fittings, and accessories. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 1 Sections. B. Common Plumbing Piping – Section 221110 C. Earthwork – Section 310000. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM D3034 - Type PSM Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC), SDR 35, Solid and Perforated Sewer Pipe. 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Accurately record actual locations of pipe runs, fittings, connections, drainage inlets, and invert elevations. B. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work with location of building drains, site drain inlets and alignment of curbing. B. Coordinate work with location and alignment of existing drainage structures. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Product data for storm sewer pipe and fittings. B. Record Drawings: Showing structures and other structures, pipe sizes, locations, and elevations. Include details of underground structures and connections. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 50 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.2 STORM SEWER PIPE AND ACCESSORIES A. Cast Iron Pipe and Fittings: In accordance with Section 221110 – Common Plumbing Piping. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 STORM SEWERAGE 334000 - 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 B. Backwater Valve: Galvanized cast iron backwater valve, Jay R. Smith Figure No. 7070 or approved equal. C. Plastic Pipe and Fittings: ANSI/ASTM D3034, Type PSM, Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) material, SDR 35; nominal diameter as shown on the drawings; and bell and spigot style rubber ring sealed gasket joint. D. Underdrain Pipe and Fittings: ANSI/ASTM D3034, Type PSM, Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) material, solid and perforated pipe; SDR 35; nominal diameter as shown on the drawings; and bell and spigot style rubber ring sealed gasket joint. 2.3 BEDDING MATERIALS A. Storm Sewer Pipe: All storm sewer pipe bedded and encased in bedding stone as specified in Division 31 Section “Earthwork”. B. Underdrain Pipe: All underdrain pipe bedded and encased in drainage stone, as specified in Division 31 Section “Earthwork”. 2.4 COUPLINGS AND SLEEVES A. Coupling: Rubber or elastomeric sleeve and stainless steel band assembly fabricated to match outside diameters of pipes to be joined. B. Sleeves: ASTM C425, rubber for vitrified clay pipe; ASTM C443, rubber for concrete pipe; ASTM C564, rubber for cast-iron soil pipe; and ASTM F477, elastomeric seal for plastic pipe. Sleeves for dissimilar or other pipe materials shall be compatible with pipe materials to be joined. C. Bands and Clamp Housing: 301 stainless steel, one at each pipe insert. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Verify that inside dimensions of drainage inlets, pipe slopes and invert elevations are as shown on Drawings. B. Verify that existing underdrain systems are correctly reconnected to the storm sewer system. 3.3 EXCAVATION A. Excavate for trenches and structures in accordance with Division 31 Section “Earthwork”. 3.4 BEDDING A. For storm sewer pipe, place bedding material at trench bottom across entire width of trench in such thickness that a minimum of 6 inches will be under the bottom of the pipe. B. For underdrain pipe, place a minimum of 4 inches of bedding material beneath the invert. Place balance of aggregate encasement to depth and width shown on the Drawings. 3.5 PIPE A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Lift or roll pipe in position. Do not drop or drag pipe over prepared bedding. Lay pipe at downstream end and progress upstream. Begin work at existing catch basin. Cornell University: Renovation of Olin Hall for Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering – Phase 1 PAI Project No. 20758.00 STORM SEWERAGE 334000 - 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 30 November 2018 C. Shore pipe to required position; retain in place until after compaction of adjacent fills. Ensure pipe remains in correct position and to required slope. D. Lay pipe to invert elevations shown on Drawings. E. Refer to Division 31 Section “Earthwork” for backfill requirements. Do not displace or damage pipe when compacting. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect interior of pipe to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Make inspection after pipe has been installed and backfill is in place, and again at completion of work. B. If inspection indicates poor alignment, displaced or collapsed pipe, or other defect, correct such defect and re-inspect. END OF SECTION 334000